Google

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project

to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the

publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at|http: //books .google .com/I

3,q,z.-3bvGoogle

n

M

+

-^

M

f

f

+

+

*'<S

I*

«»2

Voj

I;.C00<;|C

•^^

M

n

•?>>

+

+

M

+

+

-♦-

-1-

1

n

+

+

M

+

+

-1"

+

M

l\

M

H

3,q,z.-3bvGoogle

3,q,-Z.-dbvGOOglC

3,q,z.-3bvGoogle

A GREEK GRAMMAR

FOR COLLEGES

HERBERT WEIR SMYTH

Ph.D., Uin*KBaiTT or OMrnotii

AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY

HEW TORK CINCINNATI CHICAOO

BOSTON ATLAJTTA

.oog[c

'V ^ ■ '

HIKBBST WKIB HlfTTB

3,q,-Z.-dbvGOOglC

^^^^'-^ PREFACE

Thb pTOBent book, apart from ite greater extent and certain differ-
ences of statement and arrangement, has, in general, the same plan
as the author's Ortek Orammar ftyr Schools and Colleges. It is a
descriptive, not an historical, nor a oomparatiTe, grammar. Though
it has adopted many of the asaored results of Comparative Liiiguis-
tics, especially in the field of Analogy, it has excluded much of the
more complicated matter that belongs to a purely scientilic treat-
ment of the problems of Morpholep. It has been my purpose to set
forth the essential forms of Attic speech, and of the other dialects,
as &ur as they appear in literature ; to devote greater attention to
the Formation of Words and to the Particles than is usually given to
these subjects except in much more extensive works ; and to supple-
ment the statement of the principles of Syntax with information
that will prove of service to the student as his knowledge widens
and deepens.

As to the extent of all amplification of the bare facts of Mor-
phology and Syntax, probably no two makers of a book of this char-
acter, necessarily restricted by considerations of space, will be of the
same mind. I can only hope that I have attained such a measure of
success as will commend itself to the judgment of those who are
engi^ed in teaching Greek in our colleges and univeraities. I trust,
however, that the extent of the enlarged work may lead no one to
the opinion that I advocate the study of formal grammar as an end
in itself ; though I would have every student come to know, and the
sooner the better, that without an exact knowledge of the language
there can be no thorough appreciation of the literature of Ancient
Greece, or of any other land ancient or modem.

In addition to the authorities mentioned on page 5, 1 have con-
sulted with profit DelbrUck's SyrUaktisiAe Firsckungen, Gilder-
sleeve's numeroas and illuminating papers in the American Journal
of Philology and in the Transactions of the American Philological
Association, Schanz's Beitra^ zitr kiatoriacJien Syntax der griechiachen
Sprache, Biddell's Digest of Platonic Idioms, La Eoche's Oramtaa-
tMGft« Stitdien in the Zeitschrift ftlr oeaterreichische Gymnasien
for 1904, Forman's Sdectiont from I^to, Schulze's Quaestioties

vi PREFACE

Epicae, Hale'e Extended and Remote Deliberatives tn Greek in the
TransactioiiB of the American Philologies Association for 1893,
Harry's two articles, The Omission of lAe Artide with Subitantives
t^ter oStik, ofie, Jkcivos m Prose in the Transactions for 1898, and The
Perfm Subjunctive, Optative, and Imperative in Oreek in the Classi-
cal Beview for 1905, Headlam'a Qreek Prohibitioas in the Classical
Beview for 1906, Marchant's papers on I%e Agent in the Attic Orators
in the same journal for 1889, Miss Meissoer's dissertation on yap
(UniTersity of Chicago), Stahl's Kritisch'iii^orisdie Syntax des
griechischen Verbuma, and Wright's Comparative Orammar of the
Oreek Language. 1 have eiamined many school grammars of Greek
in English, German, and French, among which I would particularize
those of Hadley-Allen, Goodwin, Babbitt, Goodell, Sonnenschein,
Kaegi, Koch, Croiset et Fetitjean. I am much indebted also to
Thompson's Oreek Syntax.

I would finally express my thanks for helpful criticiam from Pro-
fessor Allen B. Bennei of AndoTer Academy, Professor Haven D.
Brackett of Clark College, Professor Hermann Collitz of the Johns
Hopkins UnxTersity, Professor Archibald L. Hodges of the Wadleigh
High School, New York, Dr. Maurice W. Mather, formerly Instructor
in Harvard University, Professor Hanns Oertel of Yale University,
and Professor Frank E. Woodruff of Bowdoin College. Dr. J. W.
H. Walden, formerly Instructor in Harvard, haa lent me invaluable
aid by placing at my service his knowledge and skill in the prepa-
ration of the Indices.

HERBERT WEIR SMYTH.

Cambwdor,

Aug. 1, 191&

3,q,z.-3bvGoOgle

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

Tie Greek LangiUKe and iu DIkleeU

Advanced Works on GnunmKr knd Dialects

AbbreTialions

PART I: LETTERS, S0UKD8, SYLLABLES, ACCENT

The Alpluibet

Vowela and DiphdioDga

BraatblngB

CouaoDanta and (beir Divldraui

Towel Cbaoge
Eaphony of Vowels

CoDtncUon .

Crasia aa

EtMon 28

Aphaereeis 34

EophoDj of Conaonaiits 24-38

Final Consonants 88

Movable Consonants 81

^llables, Mid (beir Quantity Sl-86

Accent : General Prlnciplea 87

Accent as aSected bf Contraction, Crasts, Elision .... 40
Change of Accent in Deoiension, Inflection, and Composition . . 41

PiocUUca and EnditJca 41, 43

Haika of Fnnctnatlon 43

PART II: INFLECTION
hrls of Speech, Stems, Roola 44

Number, Gender, Cases 46, 4S

Roles for Accent of Nonns, Case Eodings of Nonna ... 47, 48

DBCI.imiOH OP SOBSTAWTiTES 48-73

First Declenrion (Stems in a) 48-63

Second Declension (Stems in n) 6M0

iv,Goog[c

Third Dedeiuloii (ConMmuiI Stems) fi6-Il

FoinwUon of Cmm and Stomi, Omdw 58-60

LabUl Sterna 00

Dental SCama 01

Liquid Sterna 03

'Stama in Sigma 04

Stami In m, w(f) 06

Stama In i and v ST

Sterna In ■■, au, av 09

Stems In M TO

Caaea In -♦.(») Tl

Imgulat Declenalon 71

Pbclkhkioh or AnjacTrraa 78-80

Pint and Second Declenalona T8

Tbtnl Declenaloii TT

ConaoTuuit and VQwel Declenalon Combined TS

Inegnlar Declension 86

Comparison ol AdjeotlTsa 80

Dad^HHioH OF FaoHOUva OO-M

Penonal Pronouna 90

iDtensiTS Pronoon ah-if 03

Beflexlve PronounE, PoaaeaalTe Pronoona 93

Redprocal Pronoun, Definite Article, Deuonitntlve Prononna . . 94

Inlern^aUre and Indefinite Prononna 96

IXKn, ttlra, etc., RelaUre Prononna 90

ComlatiTe Prononna 98

Ai>TB>B« : Origin, Comparison, CorrelatiTe Adveiita .... 99-102

NoatKALa 102-100

Vaasa 100-224

Voices, Mooda, Verbal Nouns, Tenses 107

Ifumber, Peraon, Tense^tems 108

Principal Parts, Vertvatems 109

flinflection, HI Inflection, Thematic Towel 110

Paradlgma 112-143

Vowel Verbs : Synopds and ConjugaUon of XAw . . .113

Vowel Verba Contracted ; rlpiti, rtUu, t^Mu, etc. . . . 120

Conaonant Verba 128

fu- Verba : rl%u, Irnifu, JUHfu, Mirniw 134

Accent of Verba 143

Augment 145

Rednpllcallon 147

Tenae-anfflxea, Tbematio Vowel 160

Mood-aufflsea 161

Personal Endings 163

Fonnatlon of Tense-ajratems ... .... 167-183

Changes In the Vcrb-atem 167

iv,Goog[c

and Imperfect US^ITO

nnt CliH (Simple Clan) 108

Beoond Clas (TUi Class) 1«

lUid Class (Iota Class) les

Fourth Claa (Nn Class) Ifl7

Fifth Class (n Class) IflS

Sixth Class (Mixed Class) leo

Fatnre, Actire and Middle 170

Flnt Aorist, AotlTe and Middle ITS

Seooud AoilBt, Active and Middle 174

Flnt Ferlect and Plaperfect, AciItb 17S

Second Perfect and Plaperfect, Active 177

Fnieot, Flnperfeot, Fatnie Perfect, Middle 178

First Pasrive (First Aorist and Fltet Fature) 180

Saorad PaasiTe (Second Aorist and Second Future) .181

Parlpbrastic Forms ite

FIrA Conjngation or Veriw In O 183-208

Towel Verbs 184

Uqaid Verbm, Stop Verb) 186, 186

Inflection of O-Vertx 188-2(a

Present and Imperfect, AcUve and Middle 188

Contract Verbs 190

Fntnre Active and Middle, Fature Perfect .103

Future Pa^ve 194

First Aorist, Active and Middle 191

Flnt and Second Aorist Passive 196

Second Aorist, Active and Middle 196

First and Second Perfect and Pluperfect, Active .... 198

Perfect and Pluperfect, Middle 201

Second Conjo^tlon or Verba in HI 302-218

Present Sjalem ; Flnt or Simple Class 208

Fourth Class 204

InSectJon of Ml-Verbs 206-210

l*r«eent and Imperfect 206

FutDTes, First Aorlat, Second Aorist 308

Flnt and Second Perfect and Pluperfect, AcUve, Perfect Middle . 210

Irifsulai Hl-Verbe 210-218

(V, (I^ liffu, #^^ 210^16

jfioi, icittiitM, nifw 210

i,Ml,XP*,M% 217

Fecnliaritiea in tlie Use of Voice-forms 218-2^

Future Middle with Active Meaning 219

Middle Deponents, Passive Deponents 220

Deponents with Passive Meaning 231

Active Verbs wtth Aorist Pusive in a Middle Sense . . . .223
Hidoro ol Transitive and Intnuuitive Senses 2tt

D^bvGooglt'

PART nr: FORMATION OF WORDS

Prinuuy and Secondarr Stem* 236

Primitive and Denominative Woida 226

SnfflieB 226

Changes in Stems 22S

Formation of Sabalantives 229

Formation of Adjectivw 286

List of Noun Suffixes 28B-244

Denominative Verbs 246

Pint Part of a CompooDd 247-360

Last Part of a Componud 260-251

Accent of Compounds, Meaning of Compounds 262

PART IV: STKTAX
Sentences, Subject, Predicate 26G

SYNTAX OP THE SIUPI^ 8BHTBHCB

Subject a Substantive or an Equivalent 266

Predicate Nouns, Attributive Adjective 266

Apposltive, Copula, Object 257

Expansion of Subject and Predicate 268

The Concords 258

The Subject 260-261

Its Omission 269

Impersonal Verbs, Subject of the InliniUTe 200

Case of the Subject ; the Nominative 261

The Predicate 261-266

OmLsalon of tbe Verb 261

Concoid of Subject and Predicate 262

With One Subject 268

With Tno or Mora Subjects 264

Concord of Predicate Substantives 266

Apposition 266

Peculiarities in the Use of Number, Gender, Person .... 2B9-272

Adjectives 272-288

Attributive Adjectives : their Agreement 272

Predicate Adjectives : ihelr Agreement 276

Attraction of Predicate Nouns 278

Comparison of Adjectives (and Adverbs) 278

Adverbs 283

Hie Article 284-208

i, ii, ri In Homer 284

A, 4, tA as a Relative and Demonstntive 285

6, 4, rt aa the Article 286

PosltiOD of the Article 21)S

Pronouns SOfr-Sll

I;,C.00J^[C

Penoiul Pronoaiia 208

FomowiTe Pronoana 209

Tbe Froaoun a^ it 302

ReflexlTe Pronouns S04

BemoDstTfttlTe ProDonna 307

InterrogatiTe Prononns SDO

Indefinite Pronoona 810

«XXot, frifM, dXX^Xmi 811

tbs cases

tooativb 818

Gmititb 813-387

Oenitire Proper with Nonu ^ ... 818

GenitiTB of PoHseBsion 814

GenttiTo of the Divided Whole (FartJtlTe) 316

Genitive of Quality 817

Genitive of Explanation 317

Genitive of Material, Meaanre 818

GeniUve, SnbjeoUve and Ubjectlre 818

GeniUve of Value 819

QeDittve Proper with Verba 830

PartiUve Genlllre 830

Genitive of Price and Value 82S

Genitiva of Crime and Accountability 826

Genitive of Connection 336

Genitive with Compound Verba 327

GenitlTe Proper; Free Usee 328

AOaUval QoniUre with Verba 328

Genitive of Se|Miation 828

' Geni^ve of Dialjnction, Comparison 330

Genitive of CauM 830

^enlUve of Source 881

GeulUve widi Adjeotivea 333

GeniUve with Adverba 336

Genitive o( Hme and Place 836

D4TIT» 837-363

Dative Proper 838

Dative Dependent on a Sln^e Word 338

Direct Complement 388

Indirect Complement 840

Direct or Indirect Complement 840

Dative aa a Modifier of the Sentence 341

DaUve of lotereat 341

Dative of IteiaUon 844

Dative with Adjectives, Adveibe, SubatanUvea 346

Instmmeutal Dative 848

I;,C.00J^[C

InstrumenUl D&dve Proper 848

ComiUUve Dative S48

Witb AdjectlTes, Adverbs, Subsiantlvw S51

Locative Dative ' . . 861

Dative witb Compound Verbs 363

ActiTBAiivB 353-365

Accusative of Internal Ubjecl (Object Effected) 366

Cognate Accusative 356

Accusative of Result 357

Accusative of Kxteiit 357

'I'erminal Accusative 358

Accusative of External Object (Object Affected) 356

Free Uses of tbe Accusative 300

Accusative of Respect 360

Adverbial Accusative 3S1

Two AccusMives with One Verb 802

Two Verba witb a Common Object 30*

THE PRKPOSlTlOSa

Origin and Development 305

Variation 800

Repetition and Omission 309

Ordinary Uses 870

List of Prepositions 371-388

Improper Prepcwtions 388

THB TBRB

Tbe Voicks 38»-3g8

Active Voice 389

Middle Voice 890

Passive Voice 394

The Moodb 398-112

The Particle 4» .898

Tbe Moods in Simple Seiitencea 400

Indicative without Af 400

Indicative witli 2r 402

Snbjunciive without Ar 403

Subjunctive witb 2r 400

Optative without li 400

Optative witli ir 407

Imperative 400

Infliiitive and Participle witb dr 411

Ttm Tenhes 4I2-4!)7

Kind nf Time, Sta^e of Action 413

Tennes outwide of the Indicative 415

Tenses of the Indicative 481

i,vGooglc

Pnaent 421

Imperfect 123

Future 42T

Aorfat 429

Perfect 484

Pluperfect 486

Future Perfect 43S

feriphnutic Tenaea . . . 4S0

Thb iHriHiTiTK 487-454

Subject and Predicate Noun with Inflnldve 438

Pereonal and Impersonal CooatruclioD 440

Infinittve wltboat the ArUcle 441

As Subject, Predicate, and Appo^ve 441

Not In Indirect Discourse 44-J

After Verbs of will or detire 443

After Other Verbs 446

After Adjectives, Adverba, and SubstanllTes 446

InfinltlTe of Purpose and Result 44tl

Absolute InanitWe 447

laSuitiTs in Commands, Wishes, and Ezclainatlona . . . 448

In Indirect Discourse 449

Infinitive nilh the Article 460

The Pabticiplk 464-470

Attribaiive Participle 466

ClrcumBianttal ParUciple 466

Genitive Absolute 469

AccnaatiTe Absolute 461

Adverbs used in Connection with Circumstantial Participles . 462

Supple men tarj Participle 466

Not in Indirect Discoune 466

In Indb«ct Diacourse 470

Ominion of &r 472

it with a Participle in Indirect Dlsconrae 47S

Verba taking either the Participle or the Inflnitive 474

R«marlu on Some Usee of Participles 477

Vbbbii. AtuBCTivBs IN -T^i 479-460

Personal and Impersonal ConstnicUons 480

SlIllIf&KT or THE FOKNB OF SlMPLI SbMTKNCGS 481

SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SBNTENCB

Asyndeton 484

CoOitiiuatloninPlaceof Subordination— Parataxis 486

SYNTAX OP THB COMPLEX SENTENCE

Genersl View 487

Anticipation (or Prolepsis) 488

i,,Coog[c

AssiiDlktioD of Hoodi 489

Thiee Haln CIbmm of BnbonUnato ClaniM 192

FoapoM CLxrsBi (Fikai. Clidub) 49&-496

EquivaleDU ol a Final Clause 496

OancT CuTwas 490-603

Conaeotlon of Final with Object Clauses 497

Object ClauMB with Verbs of ESort 497

Object ClauBoa with Verbs of Caution 500

Object Clauses with Verba of Fearlug GOO

CkciJLL Claubbs 60&-606

tl instead of Sri after Verbs of Emotion 606

Rbbdlt Clauskh (CoKiKCDTiVK Cladsks) 606-611

AiTTE wlOk the InfinltivB 607

fiBT. with a Finite Verb 510

Pnovtso Cladbeb with if' i}, ip' i}t€ 612

CONDITIOHAL Clavrkr 612-637

CbuBlflcaUon 613

Table of Conditional Fotma 610

Fresent and Past Condlllona 610

Simple Present and Past Condltiona 610

Present and Fast Unreal Conditions 618

Unreal Conditions — Apodo^ without if 620

Fntnie Conditions 622

Uore Vivid Fatnie Conditions 623

Emotional Fatore Conditions 626

Lees Vivid FDtme Conditions 620

Oenenl Conditions 627

Present General Conditions 628

Past General CondlUons 626

Indicative Form of General Conditions 629

Different Forms of Conditional Sentences in the Same Sentence . 629

Variationsfrom the Ordinary Fonnsaud Meanings of Conditional Sentences 630

Modifications of the I>rotaBlB 630

Modifications of the Apodosls 631

Frota^ and Apodosis Combined 632

Leas Usual CombinaUons of Complete Protasis and Apodosis . 534

tC with the Optative, Apodosis a Primary Tense of the IndicatiTe, etc 636

Two or More Frotaaes or Apodoses in One Sentence 636

CoNCBSsiTS Clal'sbs 687-639

TaMPOHAL Cladseb 63ft-66&

Indicative Temporal Clauses referring to Present or Fast Time . . 641

Temporal Clauses referring to the Future 643

Temporal Clauses In Generic Sentences 646

TWnpoial Clauses denoting Fuipoae 647

i,vGooglc

Snniiiuiy ot the Coiutmcdoiis of Imi io long at and tints .... H8

GeDBial Rnle for wflt b^ore, until 649

rplr with the Indicative 661

rplr with the BubjnnctlTe 662

wplr with the Optative 663

wpir with the iDflnlthe 663

wptrtpor 4i v^f" 4, wplr If, ripB* 666

CoMfAKATiTc Cladhc* 666-660

Siioilea and CompulBonB &6&

RSI^TITI CLADBBi 660-680

ReUtiie ProDouiw 661

Concord ot Relative Pronoons 608

The Antecedent of Relative Claueea 603

Definite and Indefinite Anteciident 663

Omltfion ot the Antecedent 664

Relative not Repeated 600

Attraction ol Relative Pronouns 607

Caae of Uie Relative with Umitted Antecedent 668

Inverse Attiaction of Relative Pronouns 600

Incorporation ot the Antecedent 670

Other Fecnliaritie* of Relative CIbuks 671

Use of the MoodB In Relative Clauaea 673

Cla«M« of Relative ClauseH 673

Ordinary Relative Clauaea 678

Relative Clatiaes ot Purpose 674

Relative Clauses of Caiue 674

Relative Clauaea ot Reanlt 676

Conditional Relative Clauses 670

Lees Usual Fonns 680

DarBiTDCHT SnBSTARTiTB Cladsbs 680-690

Dependent Statements with fr> or i^ 681

Indirect Discoorge 684

General Principles 686

Simple Sentences in Indirect Dlsoontae 687

Complex Sentences in Indirect Discourse 687

Implied Indirect Discourse 689

ReiDarlis on the Conatmctions ot Indirect Discourse .... 690

INTBRROOATIVB SENTBNCKB

Direct Qaeations 687

Indirect Questions OOL

EXCLAMATORY 8BNTBNCBS

Direct Exclamatory Sentences 006

Indirect Exclamatory Sentences 90?

I z::lv,G00g[c

NBOATIVE BBNTBNCBS

Dlfierence between ti luid M 608

FoaiUoD of ot and >i4 009

oi Adhereocent 010

ot after il (Mr) 01 1

oi and /i^ with IndlutiTe and Optative 012

>t4 witb Subjunctive and Impentive 614

HegatWea of Indirect DiscooTHe 015

Qi and ;iii with the Infinitive B16-618

Not in Indirect Diaconiw 615

In Indirect DlBCOuise 617

ai and ni with the Participle 018

»i and fi4 with SubatBiiUvea and Adjectives lued Substantively . . 619

•Melt, lafith 020

Apparent Exchange of od and fii) 020

^4 and idi oi with the InflnlUve depending on Verba of Negative Meaning . 622

fi4 oi with the Infinitive depending on Negatived Verbs .... 024

fi4 dd with the Participle depending on Negatived Verba .... 626

Ii4 and /i4 ti with tbe Subjunctive nnd Indicative 626

Bednndant ai with rXift, etc 620

«*(»[ 626

Negative* with Orrc and the InflnltiTe 027

AccomulatioD of N^aUve* 628

Some Negative PbntBes ^9

PARTtCl.B8

General View 031

Lin ol Particles 632-071

FIOURBS

Ust of GrommaUcol and fihetorlool Figures . ... 071-083

Appendix : Ll« ot Verbs 084-722

EngllBh Index 728-756

Greek Index 767-784

3,q,z.-3bvGoOgle

INTRODUCTION

THE GREEK LANQUAQE AND ITS DIALECTS

A. Greek, the language of the inhabitants of Greece, has beep
coDstantlf spoken from the time of Homer to the present day. Th»
inhabitants of ancient Greece and other Greeks dwelling in the
islands ajid on the coasts of the Mediterranean called themselTes (as
do the modern Greeks) by the name HeUenei CGAAnrat), their country
Heilaa CEAAos), and their language the Hellmic (^ ^^XAijvuc^ yAwm).
We call them Greeks from the Latin Graed, the name given tnem by
the Bomans, who applied to the entire people a name pi-operly re-
stricted to the Tpiuat, the first Hellenes of whom the Bomans had
knowledge.

N, I. — Oraeei (older GraUt) contaioa a lAtin mSx -tciu; and the natM
Tpaiai, which occura flnt in Aristotle, is Iwrrowed from Latin. The Itoman
deaignaUoa is derived either from the rpoui, a Boeotian tribe that took port In
the colonization ol Cyme In Italy, or from Uie Tpaw, a larger tribe ol the some
node that Iked in Epinu.

N. 2. — No collective name lor < oil Greece ' appeara in Homer, to whom the
Hellenes ore the inhabitants of Hellao, a district forming part of the kingdom of
Peleos (B 083) and situated in the 8.E. of the countr; later called Thessaly.
'BXXdf for > all Greece ' occura first in Hedod. The Greeks In general are colled
b; Homer 'Ax<uol, 'ipytai, Aamof,

B. Greek is related to the languages of the Indians (Sanskrit), Fei>
sians(Zend), Armenians, Albanians, Slavonians, Lithuanians, Bomans,
Celts, and Germans. These various languages are all of the same
stock, and together constitute the Indo-European family of langu^es.
An important relation of Greek to English, which is a branch of the
Germanic tongue, is illustrated by Grimm's law of the ' permutatioD
of consonanta ' :

T=/ I T = tt I « = * I p=p I a = t lT=<!(*)| * = 6 I e=d\ x = 9

fathtr I three \ Ktart I thorp \ two 1 acre I hear \ door \ gooM

The above English words are said to be cognate with the Greek
words. Derived words, such as geography, theatre, are borrowed,
directly or indirectly, from the Greek (ytuypa^a, Starpor).

.oogic

8 INTKODUCTIOK

C. At the earliest known period of its history the Greek language
vraa divided into dialects. Goiregponding to tbe chief divisions of
the Greeks into Aeolians, Dorians, and lonians (a division unknown
to Homer), three groups of dialects are commonly distinguished :
Aeollc, Doric, and Ionic, of which Attic is a sister dialect. Aeolic and
Doric are more nearly related to each other than is either to Ionic.

Aeolic: spoken in Aeolis, Lesbos, and kindred with the dialect
of Tbessaly (except Phthiotis) and of Boeotia (though Boeotian has
many Doric ingredients). In this book 'Aeolio' means Lesbian
Aeolic.

N. 1. — Aeolic letaios primitive 5 (30) ; changes r before i to r (116) ; has
receaaive aoceut (162 D.). and many oUier pecnliaritiea

Doric : spoken in Peloponnesus (except Arcadia and Elis), in seTeral
of the islands of the Aegean (Crete, Melos, Thera, Bhodes, etc.), in
parts of Sicily and in Southern Italy.

N. 8. — Doric retains prituIUve it (30), keeps r before < (115 D.). Almost all
Doric dialects bave -^t for -^ef (4fl2 D.), the InfiolUve In •»!*' for-roi (469 D.),
the future in -{u from verbs in -{u (GIO D.), the fumre in -<rS, -aeOiiai (540 a).

N. 3. — Tbe sub-dialects of Laconia, Cret«, and Southern Italy, and of their
Mvetal colonies, are often called Severer (or Old) Doric ; the others are called
Milder (or New) Doric. Severer Dorio has q and u where HUder Dodo has n
and cv (69 D. 4, S ; 230 D). There are alao ditterencea in verbal forma (664).

Itmic : spoken in Ionia, in most of the islands of the Aegean, in a
few towns of Sicily, etc.

N. 4. — lonio changes primitive i to ij (30) ; changes r before i to r (116) j
has lost digamma, which is still found in Aeolic and Doric ; often refnses to con-
tract vowels ; keeps a mute smooth before tbe rough breathing (124 D.) ; baa «
for T in pronominal fonna (132 D.).

N. G. — The following dialects do not tali nnderlbe above divisions : Aicadlaa
(and the kindred Cyprian, which are often classed with Aeolic), Blean, and the
dialects of if.W. Greece (Locris, Fbocis, Aetoila, Aoarnania, Eplras, etc).
N.W. Qreek resembles Doric.

N. 6. — The dialects that retain a (M) are called A dialects (Aeolto, Dorio,
etc.); Ionic and Attio are the only B dialects. The Eastern dialects (Aeolic,
Ionic) change n to at (115).

N. 7. — Tbe local dlaiects, witb the exception of Tiaoonlan (a Laoonian
Idiom), died out gradually and ceased to eilst by 800 A.n.

D. The chief dialects that occur in literature are as follows (almost
all poetry is composed in a mixture of dialects) :

Aeolic : In the Lesbian lyric poets Alcaeua and Sappho (900 B.C.). NnIne^
ons AeollamH appear bi epic poetiy, and some In tragedy. Theocritna' idylls
28-30 are in Aeolic.

Doric: in many lyric poets, notably In Pindar (bom 622 a.c.) ; In the Iracollo
(pastoral) poetjy of Tbeocrittu (about SlO^bont 245 a.c). Botli of tlieae poets

INTBODUCTION 3

■dopt aome epic and Aeolio lonna. The choral parts of Attlo tragedy also admit
nine Doric lorma. There \a no Doric, as there is no Aeollc, literary proM.

loalc: (1) Old Ionic or Bpie, the chief ingradiaut ol the dialect of Homer
aod of Heslod (before 700 B.C.), Almoat all subeeqneDt poetry admita epio
m»da and fonns. (2) Nete lonte (GOO-400), the dialect of Berodotus (484-425)
tad of the medical writer Hippocrates (born 460). In the period between Old
ind New Ionic : Archilochus, the lyric poet (about 700-060 B.C. ).

Attic : (kindred to Tonic) was used by the great wriLera of Athene in the fltlb
■ad fourth centorias a.c, the period of her political and literary supremac]'. In
it are composed the works of the tragic poeta Aeschylus (&26-460), Sophocles
(49S-40a), Eoripldn (about 480-400), the comic poet Aristopbaneo (about 4&0-
38S), the historians Thucydides (died before 396) and Xenophon (about 434-
aboat856), Uie oraUirs Lyslas (born about 460), Isocratea (430-338), AescbioM
(3ra-S14), Demostbenes (383-322), and the philosopher PUto (437-34T).

E. The Attic dialect was diatingiiislied by its refinement, precision,
and beauty; it occupied an intermediate position between the soft
Ionic and tbe tough Doric, and avoided the prouounced extremes of
other dialects. By reason of its cultivation at the hands of the
greatest writers from 500 b.o. to 300 b.c, it became the standard
literary dialect; though Old Ionic was still occasionally employed
in lat«r epic, and Doric in pastoral poetry.

N. ]. — The dialect of the tragic poets and Thucydides is often called Old AtOe
Id eornnst to New Jttte, that used by most other Attic writen. Plato stands
on the borderline. The dialect of tragedy contains some Homeric, Doric, and
Aeolio forms ; theae are more frequent In the choral than in the dialogue parts.
The choral parts take over forms used in the Aeolic-Dorio lyric ; the dialogue
parts show the influence of the Iambic poetry of the lonians. But the tendency
of Attic speech In literature was to free ilseU from the influence of the dialect
used by the tribe originating any literary type ; and by tbe fourth century pure
Attic was generally used throughout. The normal language of the people
("Standard Attic") la best seen in Aristophanes and the orators. The native
Auic qieech as it appears in iDscriptiona shows no local differences ; the speech
of AtUca was practically uniform. Only the lowest classes, among which were
many foreigners, used forms that do not follow the ordinary phonetic laws. Tbe
language of tbe religious cults is sometimes archaic in character.

N. 2. — Old Attic wrilers use *#■ for tt (78), p^ for pp (79), fiSi. for irit viilh,
htaitlt faio, 0 for n (X^for Xtfn, thou looieU), -^i in the plural of substantives
in -a^ (^ao-iX^T, 277), and oocasionally -artu and -are in the third plural of the
perfect and pluperfect (466 f).

With the Macedonian conquest Athens c«ased to produce great
writers, but Attio culture and the Attic dialect were diffused far and
wide. With this extension of its range, Attic lost its purity ; which
had indeed begun to decline in Aristotle (384^22 b.c).

F. Kolni or Common dialect (^ xotv^ 8u£XcKTof). The Koind took its
rise in the Alexandrian period, bo called from the preeminence of

4 INTRODUCTION

Alexandria in Egypt as a centre of learning until the Roman con-
qneet of the East ; and lasted to the end of ibe ancient world (sixth
century a.d.). It was the language used by persons speaking Greek
from Gaul to Syria, and was marked by numerous varieties. In its
apoken form the Koin& consisted of the spoken form of Attic inter-
naingled with a considerable number of Ionic words ^nd some loans
from other dialects, but with Attic orth(^raphy. The literary form,
a compromise between Attic literary usage and the spoken lai^uage,
was an artificial and almost stationary idiom from which the living
speech drew farther and farther apart.

In the Kolnb are oomposed tLe writings ot the historiuu Polybins (about
906-about 120 b.c), Dlodonu (under Auguatus), Ptuttu«h (about 46-abont
120A.D.), Arrlu (about 96-176 a.d.], CsmIus Dio (about 150-about 236 i.D.),
the rhetoricians IMonjaius of HallcarDBSHoa (under Augustus), Lucian (about
13&-about ISO A.D.), and the geographer Strabo (about 64 b.c.-IO a.v.). Jose-
phns, the Jewish historian (37 A.D.-about 100), also uaed the Kolab.

N. 1.— Tbe name Atticiat is given to tbose reactlomuy writeni in the Eoin6
dialect («.cr. Lucian) who aimed at reproducing the purity of tbe earlier Attic.
Tbe Atticists flourished chiefly in the second centur; a.u.

N. 2. — Some writers distinguish, as a form of tbe Koini, the Bellenistic, a
name restricted by tbem to the language of tlie New Testament and of tbe
Septuagint (the parti; literal, partly tolerably free, Greek translation of the Old
Testament made by Grecized Jews at Alexandria and begun under Ptolemy
Philadelphus 2S6-24T ac.)- The word Hellenittie is derived from 'EXXiiKim}!
(from JUi)rl{w iptak Oreek), a term applied to persons not of Greek biriii
(especially Jews), who bad learned Greek. Tbe New Testament is composed in
the popular langosge of tbe time, which In that work is more or less influenced
by olassical models. No acenrate distinction cau be drawn between the Koin^
and Hellenlatic

G. Modem Oredc appears in literature certainly as early as the
eleventh century, when the literary language, which was still em-
ployed by scholars and churchmen, was no longer understood by the
common people. During the middle ages and until about tbe time of
the Greek Revolution (1821-1S31), the language was called Romaic
CPieiuuK^, from the fact that ttie people claimed the name of
Bomans (IPu^uuk), since the eapital of the Roman Empire had been
transferred to Constantinople. Tbe natural language of the modem
Greeks is the outcome of a continual development of the Koin4 in its
spoken form. At the present day the dialect of a Greek peasant is
still organically the same as that of tbe age of Demosthenes ; while
the written language, and to a less extent the spoken language of
oultiTated Athenians and of those who have been influenced by the
University at Athens, have been largely assimilated to the ancient
idiom. Modem Greek, while retaining in general the orthography
of the classical period, is very different in respect of pronunciation.

INTBODUCTION 6

ADVANCSD WORKS ON ORAMMAR AND DIALECTS

AxKBVB : De Graec&e llngnae diolectis (L Aeollo 1889, II. Doric 1S4S). GStt'

ingen. Still serrioeable for Uoric.
Blah : ProaanciiUion of Ancient Greek. Truulued from the third QemiAii

edition by Puiton. Cunbridge, Eng., 1690.
Boit404 : Les Dialectee doriens. Pul»-Lidge, ISei.
BsuOMAint : Griecliiicbe Qrammatlk. Ate Aofl. Httnchan, 1918. Porel; com-

pantiTe.
C1UHD1.KK; Greek AcceDtnatioii. Sd ed. Oxford, 1881.
GiLDBSSLBEva AHD UiLLBB I STikt&x of Clualckl Greek Irom Homer to Demoft>

tbenei. Put i. New York, 1900. Part il, 1911.
Goodwin : SyoUx of the Hoods Mid Tenaes of the Greek Verb. Rewritten and

enlarged. Boston, 1S90.
HcKST : Prfcis de Granunkire compute da Greo et du Latin. 5th ed. Faria,

1894. Translation (from the 2d ed.) by Elliott: A Short CoinparatlTe

Onunmar of Greek and Latin. London, 1890.
Hiar : Handbaoh der Griechlaohen Laul- and Formenlehre. Heidelberg, 190S.

Compaiatlva.
HorFMAHH : IMe griaeliiachen Dlalekte. Tol. L Der Bfid-achUaohe Dlalekt (Ar-
cadian, CTprlan), Odttiogen, 1B9I. Vol. 11. Der nord-achUsche Dialekt

(Thewalian, Aeotic, Boeotian), 1898. VoL ill. Der loniache Dialekt (QQellen

und Lautlehre), 1898.
EkOobr : Griechische Sprachlebre. Part 1, 6te AofL, 1876. Fart il, 4te AnO.,

1862. Leipzig. Valuable for example! of syntax.
EDhtibb : ADsfUbrlicbe Gramniatik der griechiaohen Sprache. 8te Anfl, Parti

b7 Biass. Part ii (Syntax) by Oertb. Hannover, 1890-1904. The only

modem complete Greek Gramoiar. The part by Blase contains good colleo-

Uons, but Is IneoiBcient on the side of compara^Te grammar.
HimcK : Die grlechischen Dlalekte. Vol. i. Asiatisch-kollsoh, Btiotisch, Tbe»>

saliscb, G&ttlngen, 1882. VoL il. Elelsch, Arkadlsch, Kyprlscb, 1889.
MBWTBKflAHS ; Giammatik der attiecben Insohrlften. 3te AnfL Berlin, 1900.
Mbibk: Griechische Grammatik. 3te Aufl. Leipzig, 1890. Comparative, with

due attention to inscrlptlonal forms. Deals only with sounds and forma.
MoNso : A Grammar of the Homeric Dialect. 2d ed. Oxford, 1891. Valuable,

eepecialiy for its beatment of syntax.
RiEMAKK AND OoBLZBB : Grammaire compaJ^ da Grec et da Latin. ToL 1.

Phon6tiqoe et 6tude des Formes, Paris, 1901. Vol. U, 6ynt«xe, 1897.
Shttb: The Sounds and Inflections of the Greek Dialecta. Ionic. Oxford, 1894.
VinLBBawBH: Enchiridinm diet Ionia epicae. Lugd. Bat, 1892-94. Contatna

a fall diacnsBlOD of forma, and aims at reconatmcting the primitive text of

Homer.
VsncK : Oreek Verbs lingular and Defective. Kew ed. Oxfoid, l&BT.

3,q,-Z.-dbvGOOglC

INTRODUCTION

ABBREVIATIONS

A.

= Aeach jlns.

Ag.

Pm.

-I'treu.

Pr.

Sept.

_B.pt™.

aopp.

Aes.

= Aescbinea.

And.

= ADdocidea.

Ant.

= AnUphon.

ADtiph

= AnUpbane

Ar.

pint - Plata*.
Bu, -Riua.
TliMiD. > Thano ophorlHOMa.

C.I.A. = Corpus In-
Kdptlouum
AtUoarum.

Com. Fr.= Comic Frag-

D. = I>emostbeiie8.
Dic^. = Dioganes

Laert, Laertius.

E. = EnripldeB.

Alo. • AIhmUi.

Aad. - Andromicb*.

Bl«cb. ' Duehia,

Ojol. ■■ Cyelope.

El. • Electn,

Hoc. ' IImdIw.

Hel. - llclani.

H. r. - Hgrenlai (Unu.

Hipp. - IHtipolytuL

I. A. - l|>hlgenb AnU-

L T. — IptalgnlB Taork*.

Hdt = Berodotns.
Horn. = Homer.

The book! at tiit Hind *ra
ieOfOMiti bj Qnek otpl-

of tlM OdyMej bj Greek
uniU latun (>. S. y, eto.).

I. = Isocrat^B.

I.G.A. = InMiiiptloDBB
Graecaean-
tiqulsaimu.

la. = Isaena

Lye. = LycnrguB.

L. z= LyaUs.

Men. = Menuider.

BenU •• BenlenlbH.

FUlem. = Pbilemon.
Find. = Pindar.
P, = Plato.

aIb. - AlotblHlee.

Chum. — Chirmldee.

Cr. -Crilo.

Crmt, - CrmtrlDt.

Ealh. — EDtbypbro.

Hipp. M. - Hipplu Utior.
Lwh. xLiclMS.
L. -Lefee.

Uen. -Meno.

Hanei.-MeiM»nii(.

Pit. m PumuldM.

Pta. - PbHdo.

Plue. -PkMdnu

Phn. - PhUtbu.

PoL -Polltlmi.

B. - ReepabHotk

Ttm. — TlmMii*.

-Aju.

-Eleeti*.
. -Oedlpui
. — Oedlpnl T^minu

-PbUootMM.

Stob. = Stobfteiu.

Flor. -nortl(«1dm.

T. = Thucydldee.
X. = Xenophon.

A. > AnebwiK.

Ap. • ApokislL

AgM. -Atredlu*.

C. - CjTopMdta.

The dramatlatfl are cited by Dindorfs lines. Bnl Tragic tragmenU (Fr. or
Frag.) are cited by Nauck'a nambera, Comic fra|[ment« (eicapt Menmnder's
Sententlae) by Kock'a Tolnmea and pagea. The Orators are died by tbe trnmben
of the speeches and the sections in the Teabner editions.

Other abb re viatlons : — jt.t.X. = ubI ri Xoi»i (e( cetera); »ctl. = tetHeet ; i'.B. =
id e»t; (6. = (Mde™; e.g. = exempii gratia; I.E. = Indo-European ; )( = «
etmtratted aith.

Uiqi-ZD^UvGOOglt'

PART I

LETTERS. SOUNDS, SYLLABLES, ACCENT

THE ALPHABET
1. The Greek alphabet has twenty-four letters.

a 3X^ alpha a d: aha; A: father

fi p^ beta b beg

y yofH"^ gamma g go

8 ScXm ddia d dig

c 4 ' (' ipiXav) ip^on , 6 «aaet

{ (Tra i&a X daze

If ^ eta S Ft. fete

0, » ^n thSta A thin

( loTu idfa i' ^: meteor; {: police

K Koanrn itof^MI C, ft kin

X Aofo^ lam&da Z let

It Mv mu m met

fo-<e)

on'

X

lax

.J,3(!«A)

omlcron

6

obey

~-('i)

pi

P

pet

^

rAo

r

run

«Vp»

»Hfma
ftru

t

such

tar

t(Hi*")

SpsOon

(u)y H

Fr. tu; u: Fr. s*

*J(«

phi

ph

graphic

x<:(x!)

ehi

eh

GeriQ. machen

*■! («

psi

P8

gypsum

J(.!^i,.)

Omega

0

note

(not capital) at the end of a woitl is

imtten

elsenbere r. Tbu

riirfifa eartKqttate.

b. The UKines In ptventfasBes, froni wblch are derived those in current tue,
were giveii »t ft late period, aoine m lal« as the Middle Ages. Thus, epsilon
nmn* ' timple e,' uptllon 'ilmpl« n,' to diatloKaiiib these letteis from ai, oi,
which were •oatided like t and ir.

iv,Goog[c

8 LETTERS, VOWELS, AND DIPHTHONGS [a

c. Labda is a bettor attested ancient name than lambda.

2. The Oreelt alphabet aa given above originated In Ionia, and waa adopted
at Athens In 103 b.c. The letters from A to T are derived from Phoenician and
have Semitic names. The signs T to fl irere invented by the Greeks. From the
Greek alphabet are derived the alphabets of most European countries. The
anolonla used onlj the large letters, called tiu^uteult* (capitals as E, uncials as
€}i Uie small letters (minutculei'), which were used as a literary hand In the
ninth century, are cursive lorms of Uie uncials.

a. Before 403 b.o. in the official Attic alphabet E stood for <, i), spurious «
(6), O for B, u, spurious ov (6), H for the tough bi«athlng, X£ for S, #£ tot f .
A was written tor ■/, and V for X. Thus :

EA0X4ENTEIB0VEIKAIT0IAEM0I ffioio- rj ^So^Xp* ™i t^ Ht-v-

XSYAAPA^ESXSYNEAPA^SAN $vyypa<f,^ ^iypa>Pay.

EPITEAEIONENAIAPOTOAPAYPIO iinT^i^ C^AiriToii,rfvpCov.

3. In tbe older period there were two other letters: (1) F: paS, oau, oalled
dlgamma (i.f. double-gamma) from its shape. It stood after ■ and was pro-
nounced like u. f was written in Boeotian as late as 200 b.c. (2) 9: ttwira,
k^ppa, which stood after t. Another s, called tan, is fonnd in tbe ^gn -j^
called tamp^, i.e. *an + pi. On these signs as numerals, see 318.

VOWELS AND DIPHTHONQS

4. There are seven vowels : a, *, nf, i, o, v, ut. Of these c and o are
always short, and take about half the time to pronounce as ij and u,
which are always long; <hi,v are short in some syllables, long in
others. In this Grammar, when a, t, v are not marked as long (a, l,
v) they are understood to be short. All vowels with the circumflex
(149) are long. On length by position, see 144.

a. Vowels ore said to be open at dote aoooiding as tbe mooth Is more open

8 ]>. Vau was In uae as a genuine sound at tbe time tbe Homeric poems were
composed, though It is found in no Mrs. o( Homer. Many apparent Irregularities
of epic verse (such as hiatui, 4T D.) can be explained only by supposing that f
was actually sounded. Examples of words containing f are : Ivrti tovm, Amf
lord, kriAm pUOM, cf(u give way (cp. weak), cTicmi twtTUy (cp. vtglntfj, Iko-
rroi each, ixtir willing, fXirofui hope (cp. voIuptEu), foura ant like. It, at, I him, ({

gfx, Ixot word, «Iiro» tatd, tpyar, tpSa work, tnniiu clothe. It. fta-m/u (cp. vettU),

ip4u will »ay (cp. wrtttnt), tawtpot evening (cp. vetper), lor violet (cp. viola),
(tqi v«ar (cp, vetui), iflii tweet (cp. suavii), IStit (Ma) know (cp. vtdere, wit),
fi etrtngth (cp. vit), Iria willow (cp, vitit, withy), altoi house (cp. efeus), aim
wine (cp, vlnma), Ik hit (123), Ixat carriage (cp, vrho, wain). Vau was lost
fitat before o-sounds (ipiu tee, op, be-ware). f occurred also In the middle of
words: i:\ffot glory, alftlalwayt, Sftt iheep (cp. ovit), xXiiflt key (Dor. iXafi, cp.
ciavitj, tirfft ftranger, Aifi to Zeat, icaXfit beaMtfftO. Cp. 3(^ 31, 8T D, 122, 128.

DIPHTHONGS, BREATHINGS

3. A diphthong (8i<^A»yyot having two Bounds) combines two vowele
in one Hylla,ble. The second rowel is i or v. The diphthong are :
at, (t, M, ^, 0, ({I ; au, tv, ou, 1JV, and «. The i of the so-called improper
diphthongs, ^, g, i|i, is written below the line and is called iota S)(&-
aeript. But with capital letters, i is written on the line (adscript),
as THI OIAHI =: r^ ifig or 'lliS^ to the song. All diphthongs are long.

a. In f, p. If the i cewied to be wiittea about 100 b.c. The cnstom ol
writing t under the line is bh l&ta as about the eleventh century.

6. et, ou are either genuine or tpurtout (apparent) diphthongs (25). Genttlne
H, su are a combination of c -i- i, o + v, as In \ilru I leave (cp. XAwra I have left,
3&a), yint to a race (49), diiXovdot follmeer (cp. cAevAii way). Spurious u,
OH arise from contraction (60) or compenaatory lengthening (87). liius, /^Xci
Ae lovtd, from /^fX«, Btlt placing from Strr-t ; i^O^vf they loved from /^JXcoc,
wXeSt voj/age from rUot, Jwit giving from Jerr-i.

7. The figure ot a
triangle repreeenU the
relations of the vowels
and spurious diph-
thongs to one another.

From a to ( and
from s to ail the eleva-
tion of the tongae grad-
ually Increases, v, e,
ov, ir are accompanied
bj romiding of the lips.

a. DiaeresiB. — A double dot, the mark of diaeresis (Suu/xms sepa-
miion), may be written over t or u when these do not form a diph-
thotig with the preceding vowel: wpottrnfiu I set before, v^ttoa ship.

BREATHINQS

9. Every initial vowel or diphthong has either the rough (') or

the smooth (') breathing. The rough breathing (apiritus asper) is

pronounced as h, which is sounded before the vowel ; the smooth

ID. A diphthong tnoccuia in New Ionic ((Livrii the lame trout iaiT6t 68 T>.,
/nvvrou of myself = ifuiirrte 329 D., eavna = BaViia wonder). Ionic baa ijv for
Attic w In some words (Horn. njOt ship).

■ D. In poetry and' in certain dialeeta voweln are often written apart which
later formed dlphthonga: wiu (or riXt) bog or girl, FliiXftlitf ton of Peleus, H
(or Hi) well, 'AlSifi (or 'AIS^) Hadet, yirti to a racr.

9D. The Ionic of Asia Minor lost the rough breatliingat an early data. So also
betonp (13). Its occurrence in compounds ( 124 D.) IB a relic ot the period when

10 BREATHINGS, CONSONANTS [lo

breathing (aptn'tiM lenU) is not sovinded. Thus, Spot h6ros bounda}y,
Spoi tSros mountain.

10. Initiftl V (E sod v) ftlways has the rough breathing.

11. DiphthongHtakethebreathing, Bathe accent (1G2), over the second Towel;
alpiu hair6o / $eize, alpu alru / lift. But f , n, ^ take botli the breathing and
the accent on the flrat vowel, even when t is written In the line ifi): fSw ='i.iSu
I ling, iSip ='Aiii;i Badea, but KlnlAt Aenea». The writing ili-riKatCMSit>J>i)
dtitroj/tng Bhowa tjiat ai does not here form a diphthong; and hence la Bome-
times written w (8).

13. In compound words (as in TpoopSr tofortue, from 'jij + A^r) the rough
breathing is not written, though It must often have been pronounced ; cp. iitipa
a hall vith KOtt, Lat. txhedra, exedra, roXvfffrwp serj/ l«am<d, laL. polyhlUor.
On AtUo iQBcHptloQS la the old alphabet (2 a) we find ETHOPEON tM^n>v
faitt\fvl to one'* oath.

13. Every initial p has the rough breathing; ^f/rotp orator (Lat
rhetor). Medial pp is written Pp in some texts : IIii^^ Pyrrkiu.

14. The sign tor the rough breathing is derived from H, which in the Old
Attic alfibabet (2 a) was used to denote A. Thus, HO i the. After H vras used
to denote q, one half ()-) was used for h (about 300 B.C.), and, later, the other
half (H) for the smooth breathing. From I- and -I cone tie forms ' and '.

CONSONANTS

15. The seventeen consonants are divided into stops (or mutes),
spirants, liquids, nasals, and double coDsonaats. They may lie
arranged according to the degree of tension or slackness of the vocal
chords ia sounding them, as follows :

a. Voiced (sonant, i.e. sounding) consonants are produced when the vocal
chorda vibrate. The sounds are represented by the tetters p, I, y (stops), X, p
(liquids), It, r, 'V-Qual (19 a) (nssals), and f. (Alt the vowels are voiced.)
p with the rough breathing is voiceless.

b. Voiceless (surd, I.e. hushed) consonants require no exertion of the vocal
chords. These are r, r, c, ^, 6, x (stops), r (spirant or sibilant), and f and {.

C Arranged according to tlie increasing degree of noise, nearest to the vowels
are the naaals, in sounding which the air escapes without friction through Ibe
nose i next come the oemivowela u and i^ (^0 a), the liquida, and the spirants, in

It was sUtl sounded in the simple word. Horn, sometimes has the smooth where
Attic has the rough breathing in forms tiial are not Attic : 'AfSiji ('AiJiri), the god
Hadei, oXto tprang (SkXo/i'u), iiuiSit togtther (cp. iiia), f/iXm mm (flXwi), liiit
dawn (Jim), fpi7f hawk {lipa^), oiptt bonndary {Spot). But also in d^a leagon
(Attic ftfiofa). In Laconian medial a became ' (A) : iAiiai = irixifat ht con-
quered.

10 D. In Aeolic, u, like all the other vowels (and the dlphthonga), alvrays has
the smooth breathing. The epic forms tmut you, Bii^u, tfifut (32S D.) are Aeolic

»i] CONSONANTS 11

snanding nhich the air eatxpeB with frlcUoD thiongh the oaritj of the month ;
next come the stops, which are produced by a remo?al of an ohstruotioii ; and
Snail; the double consonanU.

16. Stops (or mutes). Stopped consonants are bo called because
in sounding them the breath passage is for a moment completely
closed. The stops are dirided into three dasae* (according to the
part of the moutn chiefly actire in sounding them) and into three
orders (according to the degree of foroe in the ezpiratorjr effort).

Labial (Itp eonndi) ■■ ^ ^ I Smooth r r ■

Dental (teeth soonds) r S t \ Middle ply

Palatal (palate Bounds) '7x1 Bongb ^ 9 x

a. The dentals are Bometimea called linffualt. The rough stops are also

called aipimUt (lit. breathed sounds) becanae the; were sonnded with a strong

emisBion of breath (2S). The smooth stops are thus distiagulahed from the

rough stops by the absence of breathing. ' (A) Is also an aspirate. The middle

stops owe their name to their poeitfon In the above grouping, which Is that of

tlie QreelE grammarians.

17. Spirants. — There is one spirant: a (also called a sibilant).

a. A spirant is heard when the breath passage of the oral oavlt; is ao nar-
rowed that a rubbing noise is produced b; an expiration.

1ft Idqnlds. — There are two liquids : X and p. Initial p always
has the rough breathing (13).

Id. Ifasala. — There are three nasals: p. (labial), v (dental), and
y-nasal (palatal).

a. Gsmma before ■, Ti X< f is called 7-nasal. It had the sound of n In think,
and was represented by n in Latin. Thus, iyinipa (LaL ancora) anohor, dTYiXai
(lAt aapeliu) mfsitiiger, aplyi iphtttx.

b. The name liquids is often need to include both liquids and oaaala.

20. Semivowels. — i,v, the liquids, nasals, and the spirant cr are
often called temivowels. (1 becoming {, and f are also called spirants.)

a. When 1 and u correspond to y and w (cp. minion, persaaie) they are said
tn be nnsyllsblc ; and, witb a following Towel, make one syllable out of two.
St'miTocalic 1 and v are written i and i;. Initial 1 passed into ' (A), as In frai*
llTtT. Lat. jecur,- and into j- in (vyjr yoke, Lat. jugvtn (here It is often called
the spinnt nn^. Initial 11 was written f (3). Medial 1, y before vowels wer»
often lost, as in ^^-(i^V Ihonovr, ^(u)-6% gen. of poU-t ox. cow (48).

b. The form of many words is due to the fact that the llquida, nasals, and r
may fulfil the office of a vowel to form ayllables (cp. bri^e, even, pMi). This is
iiijiiUBWl by X, u, f, f , jr, to be read 'syllabic X,' etc., or ■ sonant \' (seeSSb, c).

ZL Doable Consonants. — These are I, i, and ij/. C >B a combination
<tf vJt (or Jk) or & (26). i is written for kit, yir, yo- ; ^ for nr, /So-, ^.

PRONUNCIATION

TASLB OP CONSONANT SOUNDS

DtTUlO.W

Pbjilologlal DlffenEcu

Libtil

DtaUl

PdlUl

NuMlfl

Voiced

M

r

7-naa»l (IB a)

Voiced

«Cf)

i(v)

Liquid*

Voiced

X p»

gpiraiits {

Voiced
Voiceless

crt

Btopi

Voiced
Voiceleaa
Voiceless Aspirate

,S (middle)
r (smootli)
♦ (rough)

a (middle)
r (Bmooth)
# (rou^)

, (middle)

. (KCOOth)

X (rough)

Double 1

Voiced
Voiceleaa

*

f

C

ANCIENT QREEK PRONUNCIATION

23. The proQunciation of Ancient Greek varied much according
to time and place, and differed in many important respects from
that of the modern lang^a^. While in general Greek of tlie classical
period was a phonetic language, i.e. its letters represented the sounds,
and no heard sound was unexpressed in writing (but see 108), in course
of time many words were retained in their old form though their pro-
nunciation had changed. The tendency of the language was thus to
become more and more unphonetic. Our current pronunciation of
Ancient Greek is only in part even approximately correct for the
period from the death of Pericles (429 b.c.) to that of Demosthenes
(322) ; and in the case of several sounds, e.g. C, ^, ^i 6, it is certainly
erroneous for that period. But ignorance of the exat^t pronunciation,
as well as long-eatabiished usage, must render any reform pedantical,
if not impossible. In addition to, and in further qualification of, the
list of sound equivalents in 1 we may note the following;

24. Towels. — Short a, i, v differed in eoand from the correaponding long
vowels only in being less prolon^d ; i and a probably differed from q and w also
in being leas open, a diSerence that is imposaibie to panllel in KngllBh aa oar
short vowels are more cpen Uian the long vowela. 2 : as a in Germ. hat. Theie
is no true S in accented syllables in Engllati ; the a of idea, aha ia a neutral
voweL I : as j in bonti ; somewhat similar is a in bakery. i| : as ! in flte, or

i6] PRONUNCIATION 13

nearly u e in where. I s neatly as the fliM e in meteor, eternal. • : as o In Fr.
mol, iomenhat like unaccented d in obeg or phonetic (as often soonded). w : as
0 in Pr. encore. Eng. 3 la prevailingly diphtliongal ((>■). s wu originally
(onnded as u in prune, but by the flfttk century Lad become Like that of Fr. tu,
Germ, thiir. It never had in Attic the sound of u in mnte. After v had becomo
like Germ, il, the only means to represent the sound of the old u (oo in moon}
was ui (25). Oboerre, however, that, In diphthongs, final u retained the old u

29. DiphtliongB. — The diphtbongB vrere sounded nearly as follows:
(u as in Cairo av as ou in out tpi as eh'-oo

a as in ti«fit cv as e (met)+ oo (moon) orv asdA'-oo

01 as in toU ov as in ourang n as in Fr. huit

In f^ U, V ^^ '°>>S oP'i^ vowela had completely overpowered the i by 100 B.C.,
to that I ceased to be written (6 a). The t Is now generally neglected in pro-
nmiclstloa though it may have still been sounded to some extent in the fourth
century B.C. — The genuine diphthongs « and o» (6) were originally distinct
doable aonnds («A'-i, oh'-oo), and as sach wet« written EI, OT in the Old Attic
alphabet (2a): EPEIAE /rt.ait, TOYTON T«}r«,r. The spurious diphthongs
a and o« (6) are digraphs representing the long sounds of simple i (French e)
and oiiginal u. By 400 b.c. genuine « and ou had become simple single sounds
pronounced as ef in vein and uu in ourang; and spuriouH » and du, which had
been written E and 0 (2 a), were now ofl«n written EI and OT. AfterSOOB.c.
« gradually acquired the sound of ei in eeixe. tu was sounded like eA'-oo, t|u
and « lilie eh'-oo, Oh'-oo, pronounced npidly but smoothly, w is now com-
monly sounded as uf in guff. It occurred only before vowels, and the loss of
the I in Ui ton (43) shows that the diphthongal sound was disliked.

26- Coiuonants. — Most of the consonants were sounded as in English (1).
Before i, k, y, r, a- never had a xA (or eh) sound heard in I^da (Auicia), Atia
('Avis), r was usually like our sharp ■ ; but before voiced consonants (15 a)
it probably was soft, like s; thus we And both thiiuit and K6aiiat on inscriptions.
— \ was probably = zd, whether it arose from an original cS (as in 'A#4"{>i
from *AAira(r)i-9c Athen»-uiar<U'), or from dz, developed from dy (as in Co-li",
from (d)yuyiw, cp. jugum). The i in nf gradually extinguished the if, until in
the Hellenistic period (p. 4) f sank to z (as in zeal), which is the sound in
Modem Greek. — The aspirat(« ^, S, x ^Bre voiceless stops (15 b, 10 a) followed
by a strong expiration : ■-'>, r'>, ('■ as in vpheaval, hothouse, backhand (though
here A Is in a different syllable from the stop). Thus, ifiriyai was r'tiya, SAw
was t'Am, (x" "^ '-''"■ Cp. /*' i} tor iw(t) 'f, etc Probably only one A was
heard when two aspirates came together, as in ix^pit (inr'pit). After 800 a.d.
(probably) ^, 8, and x became spirants, p being sounded as / (aa in ^fXmoi
natp), e tM Ih in theatre, x as cA in German I'cA or loch. The stage between
aspbatesand spirants is sometimes ifpresented by the writing r^ (=fi/), r9, kxi

tt D. Aeolio has at for { in ti^floi ({{m branch). In late Laconian 9 passed
into r (ffiipfoF = 9i)pfBr viild beott). In Laconian and some other dialects p
became a spirant and was written for f. i became a s[diant in Attic after Christ,

14

VOWEL CHANGE

(w

which MO affriomU. —The negteot of the ft In Latin repreientstions of 4,, e, %
pouibly ahoWB that these sounds coDaUted of a stop + K. Thus, Patpua ^
Vkirraj, Etu = Mot, Aetlet = 'AxiXXf^i. Modem Greek has the spirantic soimdB,
KOd these, thoogh at variuice with classical praaonciatiou, are now luuall;
adopted. Bee also lOS.

VOWEL CHANGE
27. Qtunttt«tiT« Vowel OnidAtioii. — In the formation aad inflec-
tion of words a, short rowel often interchanges with its correspond-
ing long Towel. Thus

lflO>T a

1

I

a

LOiro T|(Kafter>, <,;>, 81)

1

t

1

rt/id-« M-u

«iX/-u

l^>«

J,Xi^

/ honour /permit

How

I tome

/sAour

r<pi}-ff« «-»«

*.X,).«»

I<fi»>

8,\<i^«

future fulure

future

iiuperf.

future

ffrovith

28. DiSerenoe in quantity between Attic and Epic words is due chiefly either
to (1) metrical leugtheniug, or to (2) different phonetic treatment, as iia\f&t,
Tirpit become Epic laXit/afr, rfru Ipoj/ (87 D. 1), Attic dXAi, rttti.

29. The initial short vonel of a word forming the second part of a compound
U often leogthenad : ffr^Tiryii gtneral (orporii army + i7«i» to lead 887 d).

30. Attic i|, B. — Attic has n for original £ of the earlier period,
as 0wq report (Lat. Jama). Ionic also has i; for original a. Doric
and Aeolic retain original d (^ofui).

SID. Metrical lengthen! Dg. — Many wotds, which would otherwise not fit
Into the veiM, abow in the Epic n for t, ou (rarely n) for a, and a, i, ii for
a, t, II, Thna, (frdXiet in the sea for JvdXwi, tlapirtt Bernoi for iapirit, irtlpoxot
MMnsnt for i>r^>:<"i fMi\iiv8a have eovie fur JXiiXouAi, i>i\iian» destructive,
OecurMed for iXi/urot, eipta mounlairu from Spot, OiMitroui of Olj/mpu* from
*OXu/ir«. 0 before a vowel appean as ot in mi^ breath. Similarly, ^iStet
verg holg for dyd^cstj but 4n*>^'t tpi/id]/ (from irtiui) has the i) of ir^n/iot
utider the aind (29), and TiS^iitm placing (for ritf/fum) borrows >i from rlflttfu.

A short syllable under the rhythmic accent (' ictus ') is lenglheiied metrically :
(1) in words having three or more short syllables: the tirat of three shorts
(o^XAwot), the second of four shorts (ilnifioxoi), the third of five shorts (dxt-
ptlna houndlesa); (2) in words In which the short ictus syllable is followed by
two longs and a short (OAMnwavi). A short syllable not under the rhythmic
accent la lengthened when it is preceded and followed by a long ; thus, any vowel
preceded by f {wnlu tirealhe = wrtfu). i or u before a vowel (u-potfu^Jno-i teal).

MD. 1. Doric and ApoHc retain original a, as in ;iaXoi< apple (cp. Lat. malum,
Att. /i^Xsv). 'Bfiuf herald (Att. t^pui). ifut Doric and AeOlio have original q
when 1) interchanges with t, as In rihiiu T place, rltt/ur we place, /linip iiirfpa
mother, roi^niv rw^n thepherd.

2. lonk has q after «, t, and p. Hiub, y«>«4, vui, ^iiiln.

I;. Google

J43 VOWEL CHANGE 16

«. Thia ia tra« also of the « which la tlie ntalt of eulf competuMive lengtti-
cniDg, by which -ata-, -urX-, •vo'/i-, and -oo-v- cboDged to •ia-, -aX-, -<vi-, and
■ir-. (See 37 b.) But in a. few cases like rdt for rin, and in riva for rdnra
(113) wbere the conibinatioa an arose at a later period, a was not changed to q.
t^tM tar ^9f« to weave follows rrrpam to pierce.

b. Original a became q after u, aa #v4 growth. In some woids, however, wa
findi.

3L In Attic aione this ij was changed back to a:
1. When preceded bj a p ; aa ii/iipa day, x'^P' country. Thia appears to hxve
taken place even thoogh an a interTened: aa iKpii/ta a muttcal piee»,
iBpia collected.

EicEPTioKB : (a) Bnt ffii waa changed to pq : as ttpii for Kopfii maidtK.
(b) Likewise /nj, when the result of contraction of pta, Tenialned : as Bpni
from Spra mountaiia. (c) And paii was changed to ppi : as icipp^ for tipni
(79) one of the Irmples.
J. When preceded by t or i : aa ymi generation, rtiA thadow.

This cbange takes place even when the it is the result of the contraction
of •■: as iyti healthy, intti lacking, for ^i^ from i>yi((ir)a, Mtf) from
MH(a')ii ; also, if originally a f intervened, as ria for rtfi j/oung (LaL

EiCBFTioRS; Some exceptions are doe to analogy: liyi^ healUiS, tt^i^
thtgitly (292 d) follow ira^ clear.

32. In the choruses of tragedy Doric a is often used for if. Thus,
^rqp mother, <l^x^ ^°^> 7^ earth, hitrravat wrecked, i^av tomi.

33. The dialects frequently show vowel sounds that do not occuz
in the corresponding Attic worda.

M. Transfer of Qnantlty. — rjo, 17a often exchange quantities, be-
coming (w, <a. Thus, Aijof (Epic \a(K folk) becomes Xiius, as toXijoc
becomes a-oXcoif of a city; rtSv-qorov Ttft'tArw dead; ptunX^ paaiXn,
king.

MD. afore ltt/>4i »acr«d,'A/iTafiit(for 'A/n-tjui), Tpdrw turn Dor,; (fora:
Uprn courage Aeol., Ipa-^r male, ipiu eee, riaatptt four (— rimipn') Ion. ; •
toro: SiuarliH (for liac^iM) 200 Dor., frd under Aeol. ; ofora: tT/tirat (arpt-
t4i) arwttf, Br {iri) Itp Aeol., r/ropft (rirrapes) four Dor. ; • for i] : (ffcrwr (((/'eri'or
(ttthh) Ion.; « for 0 : 'ArAXur Dor. (also 'Air6XXu>); ■ for iii fi^fur jrreat«r
Ion. ; i tor I : iciprir mix ( — nipHlrai for Hparriirat) Aeol. ; i for t : irrtii hearth
Ion., UtU Dor. (for J^rtt), xp*"" (xf""") ?oI<fan Aeol,, Siii pod Boeot,
"*)ilw aiTan|r« Dor. ; ■ for a : rlruptt four (Ttrraptt) Horn. ; » for • ; tmitm
•MM Dor., AeoL, txi from Aeol. ; <• for on: ir aeeordingly Ion., Dor.

HD. OfUn In Ionic : 'Arp^Seu from earlier 'ArpetSio ton of Atreus, Ik/tm*
Irom WrSs ti^ipliiint. This ew generally makes a single syllable in poetry (00).
The K lotoimediate between ip and w is tately found.

I z:-:l,vG00glc

le VOWEL CHANGE C35

35. QoaliUtlTe Vowel Gndition. — In the same root or suffix w^
find an interchange among diCerent vowels (and diphthongs) aimi-
lar to the inteTohange in sing, sartg, sung.

a. This Tarlatlon Appears in Mtrong grades and In a weak grade (includiiig
actu&l expulsion ot a vonel — In diphthongs, of the flist vowel) . ThuB, ^p-u
I carry, 4>ip-o-i IribuU, ^lip thief, tpap-i-rpi quivtr, Si-^p-a-t chariot (iwo-
carrter), Xilr-u I leave, ^i-Xmr-d I have Itjt, Xix-ci» to leave. The interobange
U qaaotitadve in ifiifo-t tpibp (cp. 27).

b. When, by the expulsion of a vowel in the weak grade, an anpnxioance-
able combination of consonants resulted, a vowel sound was developed to render
pronunciation possible. Thos, pa or ap was developed from p between conso-
nants, as in n-rpdrtfi from rarp-a-t (262) ; and a from r, as in aAri-/ia-ro-r for
aira-iir^aw automaton (acting ojiU ovin will'), cp. lUr-o-t rage, iii-iior-ti tgearn.
So in 6nitialru name for iroitr-tu ; cp. Bniia.

C. A vowel may also take the place of an origiuai liquid or nasal after a con-
■onaut 1 as lAiwa foi JXiw^ This p,\ it, r in b and c Is called lonant liquid
ot sonant na«al.

36. TABLE OP THE CHIEF VOWEL ORADE8

Stitmt QnlM Vtak Oiade

Wstk grade

f. w 0

f i^n-t-ittiii I decams : yi-yar-a I ant born yl-y r-o-itat t become
Xrpiwtt /turn : Tfi>v-ii rovt i-rpiw-^ir I wan put to flight

b. w*l$-a Ipenvade : w4-w»i$-^ /(rui((668) wi8-arii pfrtuatlrt

c lh»H$')9-o-iiaiI»haHgo: ik^\oiif-a I have gone JjXufro-* laent (Kpic)
d. ^lil (Dor., 30) Ifaf : #«-n[ $peeeh ^a-iiit we sptak

f rl-iit-iu 1 place ; ft*-/ii-i heap fc-ri-t placed, adiipted

XfifT'tv-ia Ibreak : t-pptiy-a Ihavebroken t-ppdy-jj it woe broken

t. tl-iit-iu I give SlSa-iitr we give

N. 1. — Relatively few words show examples of all the above eeriea of grades.
Some have five grades, as ■■o-nlp, ra-rip-a, tA-wd-rup, ti-wi-rop-a, wti-r p-6t.
N. 2. — « and 1 vary in ■■cT-d»*5;u »Irni>u tpreadont.

COMPENSATORY LENGTHENING

37. Compensatory lengthening is the lengthening of a short rowel
to make up for the omission of a consonanL

17 D. 1. Ionic agrees with Attic except where the omitted consonant was f,
which in Attic disappeared after a consonant without causing lengthening.
Thus, irirot for ifm Mtranger, tlrtm on aeeoaal of (also in Dem.) for Irtxa,
^pm boundary tot Spoi, mOpat bof for xipat, itaOvot aiOHt for piivt. These
forms are also used generally in poetry.

i,vGooglc

VOW£L CHANGE

The ahort towsIb

•

I

•

are lengthened to

K

»

t

•«

tbtiB the forma

Tdn

iK\uHn

Tin

Tdl

(^tx.

U\ln

Toit

tht

Ileaned

the

thotetnff

A. Thus are formed n-ifpu I kill for rr>r-i.u, ^Stlpu I destroy for ^Stp-y*,
Urcipqi giver for Jorcft-ja, iXlru / I«aJi for iXtr-ju, d\o^d^ / lanWTif tor dXa^p-jw.

b. a becomes q in the ir-aorist of verbe whose stems end in X, p, or r, nhen
not preceded bf i or p. Thug, i^r-aa. becomee (-^tih / fAotcrd, but irtpat-va
becomes iwipAn. I finished. So atkijwii moon for at\aa-ni (afkaj gltam).

C. The dlpbthongB « and au due to this lengthening are gpnriov* (6).

38. • artiee from oi upon the loes of Its t (43) In itl aliaayt (from altC),
itrit eagle {aUrit), icU« vieepa (cXofcOi '^^ oI(v«-(ree (^Xafd, cp. Lat. olim).

a. This change took place only when tu was followed by f (_atfil, alfrrit from
ifirroi, iXiu/-<i from >iU/-ut, 111, 128} or t (firipilt the Thebald from Big^aiiO;
and only when f or t was not followed by >.

8HOBTENINO, ADDITION, AND OTHER VOWEL CHANGES

39. Slurtaning. — A long vowel may be shortened before another long
vowel : iSoviXAt* from (^oviXifaiv of kitigt, ttQr from njfif of thipe, ri^th from
rrtrtitit dead.

40. A long Towel before i, v, a nasal, or a liqnid + a following consonant
was regularly shortened : rECi from original rant »hip, iidytr from i-iu-rt-rr
irere mixed. The long vowel was often introduced again, as Ion. njCf ship.

41. Addition, — a, t, o are sometimes prefixed before 'K, fi, p, f {prothettc
rotoeU). Thus, d-Xtl^ anoint with oil, Xfrot fat; i-pvSpit red (cp, Lat. ruber},
/-cimri from t-^f')tliaMi ; t-iiipyniu vitpe ,' i-x^^i i^d x^' llM'"'<^''l'i '-"'■> weatfl
{•mSiii leeasel'ilcin helmet) are doubtful cases.

42. Development — A medial vowel la sometimes developed from X or r
between two coosouanta ; tbus nX, Xs; ap, pa.; a* (36 b). Also (rarely} In
forms like Ion. fidpayx" — Att, ppdyxoi koarseneu.

2. Boric generally lenglhenn < and a to q snd u : f^vai, Apoi, Jtapot, ^lot.
So iiura fnuie from /lonra for >«>rTja, riii for rin lAe, i/d am for ^iTfu, x^Uw
1000 for x«rXu^ Ionic x«CXui. (In some Doric dialects f drops as In AtUc ((trot,
ipm); and art, art may become it, oi ; frvrirjlt lords, rit the.)

3. AeoiiohSBaii,m(af«nutn«dipbth,),aiifrom art,(n,ori. Thw, raiaa att
(Cietan rirfa, AtL rio-sj, XAmo-i lAejf looM from XAom. Elsewhere Aeol. prefers
animllated tonns (tiurra, ficXirra, {^rvDi, frrtta, Sppos, lufu, xAXin}. Bntsingle i^

p are also found, as in xSpi, /liroi. Aeolic lias ^Bippti, icXlrrw, dXofktppw; cp. 37 a.
n D. In the Ionic genitive of A stema (214 D. 8) -tur is from ijuront of -iiur.
So In Ionic partKia. from ^luriX^a king. So even before a short vowel in Horn,
fruM, 4^1 hero (cp, H8 D, 3).

i,vGooglc

18 EUPHONY OF VOWELS [4)

43. DUappMnncs. — The i and v of dlphthonga often dis^ipekr btton »
tollowing ?oweL Thus, Ut from ulji ion, p«-it gaaltive of ^sD-i oz, ecta. t sni
« here became semlvoiveta (j^ |^, whioh are not written. Cp. 148 D. 3.

44. a. The disappeaianoa of (before a vowel is often called AvpA<i«>v>u(fr^al-
/xrit omUtion). Thua lonlo na»6t ehitk for rtoaabt, ipr^ for iapr^ ffitit>al ; Ucut
fiatieuly for ift/ut. Het« < was sounded nearly lilce y and nan not written.

b. The dUaj^peatance ot a short vowel between consonants is called ayneope
(avymri cutting up). Thus rlirrw /all for ri-rfr-u, varpjt father for rar^pai,
SjDcopaled forma ahow the weak grade of vowel gradation (86, 3tt).

49. Assimilation. — A vowel may be asdmtlated to the vowel standing ta
the following syllable : ^t^ov book from p»(Ddot (fiipXet papgnu).

«. On aaaLmllaUon in distracted verbs (ipiu see, etc.), see 043 fl., 063.

EUPHONY OF VOWELS
CONTACT OP VOWELS AND HIATD8

46. Attic more than any other dialect disliked the immediate

succeBsion of two vowel sounds in adjoining Bjllablea. To avoid
such succession, which often arose In the formation and inflection of
words, various means were employed : conti-action (48 ff.), when the
vowels collided in the middle of a word ; or, when the succession
occurred betweeu two words (hiattit), by crasia (62 ff.), eltafon (70 ff.),
apluKTMis (76), or by affixing a movable consonant at the ead of
the ft)rmeT word (134).

47. HIatna la usually avoided In prose writ«rB by elision (TO ff.) ; bnt In
oases wbare elirion is not possible, hiatus la allowed to remain by different
writers In different degrees, commonly after short words, sach as u, ti, 4> 'aii
Iti, and the forms of the article.

4S D. So In tldL t4tT»l for Itlrrai lies, ffiBia for paSiia deep.

44 a. 0. Cp. Horn, fcol A IB (one syllable), t becomes i In Horn. xitMt (two
■yllablee) 4 607. i rarely dlsappeais : tfj;ar for e-i/uar belottging to (As peopl*
H213.

47 D. Hiatus la allowed la certain casea.

1. In epie pottry ; a, Afleriandv: i^n iii^li, iri ivat.

b. After a lung final Byllabie having the rbythmio accent : ^i tUKivttL

U^w^^).

c. When a long final syllable is shortened before an Initial vowel (aeak, or
(mproper, hiatus) : drrS /#' i^iiXj (_^. -^ \j ^ -J).

d. When the concurrent vowels are separated by the caeaura ; often affr
the fourth foot : dX\' Ay /fid* ixfiiir iwipiitn, | S^pa tliiai ; Very often between
the short ayllablea of the third foot (the feminine caesura) : as, dXV iKtmm
Kihivt, I JMV i' iriweieto /Mv ; rarely after the ficM foot : ^irip i l-yr^ A S8S.

e. Where f haa been lost.

2. In Attic poetry hiatus la allowable, as In 1 c, and after rl vhat f if teell,
Intarjeotiona, wtei concerning, and In eMi (>tqtl) rft (for sMrit, /f^th ho on«).

CONTRACTION

COHTBACTION

Wl Gontraotion unites in a single long vowel or diphthong tro
Towels or a. Towel and a diphthong standing next each other in
snccessire syllables in the same word.

a. Ocoaalan for oontraction la made especially bj the ooncarrence of Towel
•ounda ffhloh wenonoe separated hj <r, g (^), and j,(lT, 20 a).

The following ate the chief rules governing contraction :

49. (I) Two vowels which can form a diphthong (5) unite to
form that diphthong : yivti = yhu, aiSoi = cu&k, Kk^lSpov = xX^dpov.

50. (II) Like Vowels. — Like vowels, whether short or long, unite
in the common long ; a, oa become u, ov (6) : yipaa ^ y*pit <ptXi^€
=: ^cA^rc ; iifiiKu ^ l^nXti, 5>f Aoofuv = 8>j\oi]ficf.

a. I ia nrely contracted with i (j^ + tSu' — iiptliar tmall makt) or v with v
(it ton in InscripUoDS, from A(t)^ = Mt, 43).

51. (Ill) Unlike Vowels. — Unlike vowels are assimilated, either
the second to the first (progresnoe assimilation) or the first to the
second (regretaive assimilation).

a. Ano soond always prevalla over an a or e sound: • or w before or after*,
and before n, forma ■. m and m form au (a spurioua diphthong, 0). Thai,
Tiiii»itir =: ri/iAiur, aiSia = alSii, ^pv = 4^i tI/iJm = tIhQ, tqXAirre = ttfX^c ;
bat ^Maiuf = ^XoCfuv, Siitiirror = 8q\aDrii*.

b. When a and t or i| come together the vowel sound that preced J prevails,
and we have I or i| : Spat = Spi, rtfultrrc = ri/ulrt, Bpia = Spij.

e. « rarely eontiacta : « + 1 = u la (x^ttor from IxMSmt tmall fith ; ■ + *
•tiictly never becomes t> (2TS).

ax. (IV) Vowels and Diphthongs. — A vowel disappears before a
diphthong beginning* with the same sound: /tvwu = fivu^ ^iXtusa
^An, SfXoM = SijAoi.

53, A vowel before a diphthong not beginning with the same
sonnd generally contracts with the first vowel of the diphthong ; the
last vowel, if i, is subscript (5): rviousrifif, ri/ioot^Mr = r^if ^mt,

a. Bnt ■ + ot becomes m: ^iU« = ^iXa<i • + «i, a + i] become m: Ai|Mfis

I = i occurs chiefly in the Ionic, Doric, and Aeolic dative Angular
:i (MS D.}, OS In *iXu = t6)u ; also In the optaUve, as in ^A<i-ra s

t,Coog[c

20

EUPHONY OF VOWELS

[5S

55. (V) Three Vowels. — When three vowels come together, the
last two unite first, and the resulting diphthong may be contraeted
with the first vowel : thus, rZ/if is from ri/ia-g out of rt^-c(o')a( ; but
Ilc^tKXeDVf from TltpiKXatK.

56. Irragulaiitles. — A short vowel preceding a or any long tow«I or dipb-
tbong, In contracts of the first and second declensions, is apparently abeorbed
(236, 290) : xpt"*^ = Xfwo (not xpi"^), ir\Aa = ir\i (not ixXfi), by analogy
to tbe a which marks tlie neuter plural, xpiff'"" = xp"""'' (So ti/Uat — fittai
to show the -ai of ttie accua. pi.) Only in the singular of the Srst declension
does ttt become ij (or 5 after a Towel or p) ; xpuffWi — XP"^^% ipyupi^ = ipyvpf.
In the third declension tia becomes w (20&) ; us or ita becomes la (ui) or it) (vq).
See 292 d.

Various special cases will be considered nnder their appropriate sectioDS.

57. The contraction of a long vowel with a short vowel sometimes does not
occur by reason of analogy. Thus, n^ (two syllables) follows rt^ii, the older
form of Hiit (276). Sometimes the long vowel was shortened (39) or transfer
of quantity took place (34).

58. Vowels that were once separated by «' or | (20) are often not con-
tracted In dissyllabic forms, but contracted In polysyllabic forma. Thna, tft(v)it
god, but BtunvSiliii Thncydiiiei (Bt6t + euJdi gloiy).

59. TABLE OP VOWKI, CONTRACTIONS

« + a

5 + a

a + a

[An«r <• or on, Qen. mtta
yipaa, = yipi

■(

tipai = ^ip«

i

^fr,po< =^4r,po,

TiM^^w =Ti^*«»

V

rlfuioiM' =r^iu

MM.C»)o(66),_

rIMw = r:*u3

1

Ttlxia = Tilxv

a

ifT4a =*ffTo(5e)

1

4tX« = drXfl

whence

= 01 xp'"^* =
(66)

( = (1 (If.) ^OJert =

ri (in.) = ti trn.) ^\iri =

(I (ip.) = ^ (ip.) ipiXittw =

If = 1J ^iXhfTt =

D =11 #iX^ =

« = « ^iMoire =

«;(•»■> =iiv ^XAiKTi =

= <v it

M = W #lX/u =

V =V X^'V =

m =11 X*D(ir)iM =

^tXoiT*

0iXsCr(

U D. In Horn, teibt □/ fear from «/((ir)-Dt the jIrK two vowels unite.

^r^irrt

= *.»9t.

Wp

= rt

«X,^

= .xi,

XUot

= xa>i

<UMa

= <uso

iwXU

sAtU

(66)

»4Xm

sMitlwu

IqXte

= <,\o<-

J<rXif»

= ai|XoEf

i„\6rr.

= a,xoT.

CONTRACTION, 8YNIZESI8 21

TABI.B OF VOWEL CONTRACTIONS — Concluded

1 + H =1 ^>t})it« = ^i^Tf 0 + n =01 <i)jXip = JifXul

= If Unt = J^t

1 + 1 =v /"/"Voil'l' = 0 + » = " ■tx^ = itX''

= Ou(ip->rXAof = vXoCf
= « ii)Ucu/icr = Jti)\iHfi«r

ip-l = ou [■».) jqXioiKTi = (tfXoBff-1
= u Bii\6u = SqXut

= B IxSvlSier = IxSiSar

= B Wi((oru!4t)=i;i

= H Ipwa = 4pw

= (,> 4pui = 4f>^

= v t<&u(Hom.}= 3A

— The forma of ^7lci> fAfver contract from the atem ^Yt^ (yielding w or v).

Ga In poetry two vowels, or a vowel and a diphthong, belonging
to Buccessive syllables may unite to focm a single syllable in pronun-
ciation, but not in writing. Thus, fiiXta miaailea, toXi^k city, llTJkffior
&« ton of Peleua, xp"<^<V golden. This is oalled Synvtisii (owi^i^ic
tSttiitg together). ^

fiL Synizesis may occur between two words when the first ends
in a long vowel or diphthong. This is eapeoially the case with 8^

MD. Attic contractB more, Ionic lees, than the other dialects. The laws of
eoatnction often diHer in the different dialects.

1. louic (Old and New) Is distinguished by its absence of contraction. Thus,
rXJM for a-XoSt voyage, fix'^ for rtlx'i walla, iaria for Js-Ta boiut, deiji) for
•fH tong, iMpr/6t for ipyit idle. The Mbs. of Hdt. geuerally leave «, ni nncon-
tncled ; but this 1b probably erroneous in most cases. Itnilc rafely contracta
where Attle doee not : iySiiiorra for tyiviitna, tighty.

S. to, tu, tov generally remain open In all dialects except Attic. In Ionic m
Is anally monoay liable. Ionic (and less often Doric) nuy contract <ii, mv to tut
tti from oio o/ thet, ^iXnVt from ^iXfovrt they lovt.

S. OB, SO, a«, OH contract to d in Doric and Aeolic. Thus, 'Arptlti from
'ixfitii*. Dor. Y'XSm they laugh from ytXiom, x"P^' from x'f^'" ofeomttritt.
Id Aeolic od = « In piBUrri (Ion. ^6tm) ^ Att. ffoifioCm aiding (dative).

4. Dorie contracts w to q ; a<r to ii ; a«, an to ir- "Hiua, rlci) from ritat co*-
tuerl ipi from ipiti and ip.ig ; but u — S (JXwi from iOun, Hom. i)Aiai sun).

fi. The Severer (and earlier) Doric contacte n to ?i, and «, oo to w. Thus,
M^M bom ^tirtt, RitXwrt from Stfliiirt, trra from Iwwo-a (2% D.){ t^e Milder
(and later) Doric and N. W. Qreek contnut to «, and gv. Aeolic agrees with tbe
"TWftr Doric.

uogic

22 CUASIS i—

turn, ^or,^ (interrog.), fi^ not, hnl since, tyi T, £ok ; aa ^oi 0 18.
a. The Urm synlzeais la often restricted to cases nbere the first vowel la long.
Where the firat vowel is sbort, t, < were sounded nearly like y ; u nearly like w.
Cp. 44 a. The single syllable produced by synlzeais Is aliooet always long.

42. Crasis {xpatrK mingling) is the contraction of a vowel or
diphthong at the end of a word with a vowel or diphthong begins
ning the following word. Over the syllable reaultiug from contrac-
tion is placed a ' called cormia (Kopaivit hook), as riXXa from ra jAAa
the other things, the rest.

a. The coronls U not written when the rough breathing ataoda on the flisi
word : 6 irepam = irSpuwoi.

b. Crasis does not occur when the first vowel may be elided. (Some editors
write TiWa, etc)

63. Crasis occurs In general only between words that belong togetlker; and
the flrst of the two words uiut«d by oraaia is usually the leas important ; as the
article, relative pronoun (Jl, I), irp6, coi, ii), i. Crasts oocnrs chiefly in poetry.

a. It Is rare In Horn., common In the dialogue parts of the drama (especially
In comedy), and frequent in the orautts.

64. r, T, K become ^, 0, x when the next word begins with the rough breath-
ing (124) 1 TO 1iiiip^== ^Mv t^ <^Vi "ol <■' and the ~ x«' (S8 c).

65. Iota subscript (5) appears in the ayUabte resulting from crasis only when
the first syllable of the second word contains an i : tyii alja = 'yv'' / know
(tmt r^ ipyirif = rdipyirif the irutmmtltt, S8 a).

66. The mlee for cnsis are in general the same as those for oontraction
(48 fl.). Thus, Ti iniia = To6roiia the name, i it - air, & irtp :^ inp oh man,
T^ lx<*' = rpotxur excelling, ri l^riov — iel/iATiot the eloalc(M), i ty<i = ifi.

But the following exceptions are to be noted (OT~09) ;

67. A diphthong may lose its flnal vowel : nl tiul = aliial, rot irrl = ffobrt,
^v UtI = laiCTl. Cp. 43, eS.

68. The flnal vowel or diphthong of the article, and of rol, is dropped, and an
initial a of the next word is lengthened unleaa It Is the first vowel of a diph-
thong. The same rule applies in part to ml.

a. Altlde. — iMp^<tr4p, ol irtptt = Itiptt, nJ iyi^nt = i-yi^al, i) i,\-^$na =
i\tl9tM, roG iripit =^ rirSpIn, rip drlpl = rii^pf, b aiTit = a-irrit the MtM, rsC
tirall = raAroi of tht. tame.

b. roC. — To^ Stpa =1 ripii, pJrrai dp = /urriif.

C HoL — (I) at is dropped : col a^in = ica^JT, ital oi = »A, col 4 = x4, ^
•I = x>'i ■>' l«Tc4«rc = xtnrrfcTi and ye heeeech (64). (2) bi Is contracted
ohleflf before * and » : Kei h= nir, nil iyii = tiyii, not it = xii, ml drp =
RfTs (not« however mt «1 = «1, ml tit = mii); also before a In mI Art = x^^^
«U ftrtn = x6"n (04).

i,,Coog[c

N. — The ezoeptloiu fn 68 tt-o to the lawe of oontractioa are dtie to the dedn
to lei the Towel of the more Important word prevail : inip, not iinip, because of

S9. Hon crams forma olfrtjMf oCAer are derived from irtpat, the earlierform :
thnt, i Htpot = Iripdi, el trtpat = irtpoi ; but roB Mpav = Sotrfpou (04).

70. Elision is the expulsion of a short vowel at the end of a vord
before a word beginning with a vowel. An apostrophe (') marks the
place where Uie vowel ia elided.

iXX"(4) 47*. HW(a) hria, H>' i = iwl) UvraO (64), lx<»*t'(0 *'. t'-w'W 4^

a. ElisioQ is often not expreBsed to the eye except in poetry. Both Inacrip-

tiona and the M««. of prose writera are very Inconsistent, but even wlieie the

elision to not expressed, it eeems to have occurred In speaking ; i.e. SU «lr< and

V flr« were spoken ajiiie. The Mm. are of tittle value In sncb cases.

71. Elision affects only anlmportant nords or syllables, snch as particles,
adverbs, prepodtions, and conjunctions of tno syllables (except rtpl, Ixf,
fixfiL, Sri 73 b, c), and the final syllables of nouns, pronoans, and verbs.

a. The final vowel ol an emphatic personal pronoun is rarely elided.

72. ElislDD does not occnr in

a. HoDosyllablea, except auch as end in e (ri, H, yf).

b. llie conjunction Ari that (St la ht when).

C. Tba preposiUons xpi before, ixp^ H^^TCP' unlf, and wtpl eoneernftv (except

d. The dallve singular ending i of the third declension, and in ri, the ending '
of ibe dative plural.

e. Words with final u.

73. Except tori U, forms admitting movable r (ISl a) do not enSer elision
In prose. (But some cases of t In the perfect occur in Demoatlienes.)

74. at in the personal endings and the Infinitive Is elided In Aristophanes;
Harcdy ever, If at all, in tragedy ; its ellsiOD in proes li doubtful, m is elided
hi tngedy in ttinot alai.

n D. Horn, has Uptrrtt = i ipi^rei, wirit =: i a^rlt. Hdt, has oirrtpoi = i
fn^, iir^p = i (Ir4p, wvrof = ot airol, rAvrt = ri ai>ri, tAvtqu = roS airoi, luvroB
= h ntroQ, tmipn = ol Aftpii. Doric has k4vI — ml irl.

Tl D. Absence of elision in Homer often proves the loss of /- (8), as in
nri irrv X 1 . Epic admits elision in ri thy, ^, in the dat. sing, of the third
dscl, in -ai aJid -oi In the penonal endings, and in -ni, -irffat of the Infinitive,
Mi (rarely) In iiol, vtl, rof. dra oh king, and in = indrriiBi rite vp, elide only
ooee, lit and never. Hdt elides less often than Attic prose ; but the Mas. are
not a sore gnlde. rtpl sometimea appears as rfp in Doric and Aeollo before
words begfnntng with other vowels than t. idt 6Sirai A 272. Cp. 148 D. I.

niX In poetry a vowel capable of taking movable r to often cut oft.

,ooglc

S4 , EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS [75

75. Interior elision takes place in forming oompoaod vords. Here
the apoBtropbe is uot used. Thus, oiiui no one from o^ tU, KaSopda
look down upon from Kara ipdia, fiJOtijm let go from /uri ftifu (134).

a. at, Toml this are derired from tbe demonatratire pronoutia Ut, towto

-)- the deictic ending i (333 g).

b. Inlerior elision does not atwaya occur In the formation of componnda.
^UB, mnfirrai'xiiT iceptrt-beaTing from ri(i)WTO + ox>t (i.«. raxo*). Cp. S76.

C. Un Uie accent lii elUion, see 174.

APHAEBBSIS (ISVEB8E ELISION)

76. Aphaeresla (i^ptau taking meat/') ts the elision of t at the heglniiiDg
of a word after a word ending in a long vowel or diphthong. This occnra only
in poetry, and chiefly after |») not, 4 or. Thus, fiii 'rrutSa, ll'iU, Tapi(w'iiairr6r,
atrj) '{4\fc>>. In some texts editors prefer to adopt crasis (62) or synizeeU (60).
« is nicely elided thos.

EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS

77. AulmiUtion. — A consonant is sometimes assimilated to an-
other consonant in the same word. This assimilation may be either
partial, as in i-irt/i^-tfni' / was seiU for t-TCfi.ir-&ipr (82), or compile, as
in i/xfiivia I abide by for iv-fitvi^ (^)-

a. A preceding consomuit Is generally aaaimllated to a following consonant.
Aaalmllatlon to a preceding consonant, as in AXXv/u / destroy for i'K-rv-iu, la rare.

DOUBLING OF CONBOKANTS

78. Attic has tt for air of Ionic and most other dialects : irparrit
do for Tp^otru, $a\aTTa 8ea for ^oAaova, Kptirriov liTOnger for Kpturirwy.

a. Tragedy and Thucydidee adopt XT as an lonlam. On xap(tff<ra see 114 a.

b. rr Is used for that vv which is regularly formed by it or x and i (112),
■ometlmes by r, e, and 1 (114), On tt in 'Attijc4i see 83 a.

70 D. Apocope (^irrneri cutting off) occurs when a final short vowel is cut
oil bef(«e an Initial consonant. In literature apocope Is confined to poetty, bul
In the prose Inacriptious of the dialects it is frequent Thus, in Horn., aa gepa-
cate words Mid in tKimponnds, Ar, tir, rdp (dr, bw rarely) for drd, tari, rapi
(dri, !nr6). Final t is assimilated to a following consonant (but Kareanlw to tite,
not toBBatlr, cp. 83 a) ; HO final r hy 91-96. Thus, dXMfat to pick up, kn i-inr
into the ttrifs; iiippa\t threvs dovm, tiWirt left behijid, naaitorrt lit. lying
doien, iauii(cut break in pltcft, for va^^dfaii = car-^dfaii, lAS H, jcaJUCuai enter-
tng inlo, (Air rtSlaw through the plain, xiy y6r» on the knee (tag not kang"), sip
fitr in the tcream ; ififfdWtir inlfrrupt, irwiin^ti wilt tend aviaj/. When tiiree
consonants collide, the final consonant of the apocopate word is usually lost, aa
■drrsK tlew, from «fittTaft out of raT{^)tTnw^. Apocope occurs rarely In Attic
po«try. vir for wbtI (= rpii in meaning) is frequent in Doric and Boeotian.

N. — The shorter forma may bave originated from eltrion.

H] EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS 26

79; Later Attic has pp for ptr of oldei Attic : Bippoq courage •«
Mpmc, ipprpr inale = SpaTjv.

a. Bat pr does not become pp in the dative plural (fifrap-vi otntort) utd In
wordi Mmtsining the mfflx -ru for -rit (ip^rit railing).

b. Ionic and most other dialecta have ptf-. pv ia Attic tragedy and Thucydides
ii protMbl J an lonism. Xenopboa has pr and pp.

sa An initial p is doubled when a simple vowel is placed before it
in inflection or composition. Thus, after the ayllabic augment (429)^
tfpa toaa flowing from iiat ; and in KoXi-ppooi fair flowing. After a
diphthong p is not doubled : cv-pooc fair flowing.

«. This pp, doe to assimilation of ap (t-ppti, Kakl-ppiiiii), or fp {ippiiii) wi»
ipoJten), ia Btrictl; retained In the interior of n word ; but simplified to oiugle p
wlien standing at the beginning, le. ^iu Ib Iot ppiu. In coropoaltlon (riL^iMf)
angle p ia due to the inflnenoe of the Amplified Initial sound.

b. A dlfterent pp arises Itom assimilation of pc (79) , pt (sounded like py, U,
117), and FP (96).

81. fi, y, S are not doabled In Attic (cp. 75 D.). In yv the flnt y is nasal
(19 a). ^ x> 0 Me not doubled in Attic ; Inatesd, we have t^, kxi t4 SS in
Zar^ SoppAo, BdcxM BoetAui, 'ArHt {AtUiia) AtUe. Cp. 88 &.

CONSONANTS WITH CONSONANTS
STOPS BEFORE STOPS

82. A labial or a palatal stop (16) before a dental stop (r, 8, 0)
most be of the saine order (16).

a. pT, 4t become ■wt : (rrrpi^u) rtrpiwrtu hat been rubhed from rplfi m
"■'i (TO'po*-''"*) ytyparT^^ Hat been written from ypi^-u write, yr, x*
become rr: (XArt-rai') \f\iKrai ha* been laid from \iy-u sag; (fitpptx-rai)
fUPfiam* ha* been motttened from ppix-<* noiUen.

n D. In Hom. and even in prose p may remain single after a Towel ; (-p«{<
ad from ^fM, nXX(-pwi. So lab-ppvrn and la^pitwn (by analogy to ^oi)
tq-tailf balaneed. ix x«P^' pf)M ^ier M 159 representa jS/Xra p/i^v. Ci>. 146 D.

n O. 1. Hom. bas many caaes of doubled liquids and nasals ; tKXafit took,
lVXi|n'« uneeating, imiopm uiithovt lot in, ti\opp£iB'if fond oftmilet, dTdrri^t
Ofry Moiey, ipytwuSt white, Uvrrt relate. These forms are due to the aasimilft-
tlon of r and \, p, or r. Thus, Ayi-rn^t la from iym-arvpot, cp. *n in mou.

2. Doabled rtopi : Srn (Ant (a-faS-ri), ^irirc ai ((r^oS-rirTc), tittifft feared
(«/■"»«)■

3. ffv in Vffn nlMle (tor ^uAot m«dfiu, 114), 6wlaait hatJaBard, In the
datlTea of r-slenw, bb twtaiit (2(iO D.'2), and in verbe with slema In r {rpisn').

4. One of these doubled consonants may be dropped without lengthening the
ptece^ng vowel : 'OSwtit from 'Ofiwo-t^, fiArot, Arirw. So in 'Ax<^*^ from
'AX'Mi't' On )l, AS, see 76 D. Aeollo has many doubled consonants doe to

n (87 D. 8).

iv,Goog[c

36 EDPHONT OF CONSONANTS [^

b. «8, 4S become pt: ((Xtr-Sirr) tXtps^r bf MeoItA from xMr-r-it ttttU;
(ypa^tir) ypipitir terapitig from ypiiMt wrtU (origliully wmteA, aavpt).
k8 becomes yt : (rXiK-Siir) rUYSifr entieintd from w^Jk-u plaU.

C «4, pi become ^; (^(^ir-Ai*) tr^n^fiir I wo* Mnt from r^/uT'W Mud;
(tr/Sp-e^) trpt^ai, a wu mbbed (.Tftfi-u rub). ■!, -^ become x*: (^rlwr-^)
IrX^xAt a uxu plaiMd (rMjrHki plait) ; ('>^-#q) Mx^ it vxu mM (Uy-w My).

N. 1. — Cp. iwri tewn, fpSofut MdenlA, J^t^fupoi lotting teven daft.

N. 2. — But i* out of remalDS aochuiged : htlluiu surrender, iiMu ran out
(IW).

33. A dental stop before anotber dental stop becomes cr.
4mirT6j prarticable for dnir-rot from Ariru complete, trrt gou jtnoto for tf-rt,

ttrBa (hou knowMt for ottSa, rtrttcTai hat been perraaded for rn-ntf-ru,

fniirh]* / tool permaded for ^«0-4irr.

A. rr, t8 remain uncbani^ m 'Arriiit, 'AtBU Attic, and In unrhMir dft
(T5D., 81). So TT for iro- (78).

84. Anjr atop st&nding before a Etop other than t, JI, «, or in other combina-
tion tliaii «#, KXi T#(8I) is dropped, u in icfKiiu(^S)-M I have broughL •/ before
■> Yi oc X is gMnma-nasal (16 a), not » stop.

STOPS BEFORE H

85. Before fi, the labial stops (r, ^, ^) become ^l ; the palatal stops
K, X become y ; y before ;i remains imchaQged.

<WU eye for dr-fia (Cp. (rwra), XAn/v"' / ^<IW ^n 'V^ for XiXn^-fiat from
Ur-w leat«, rirpi/iiiai for Trrpiff-iiai from Tfitfi-oi rtib, yiy/nititat for 7(7/™^
fioi from 7i>d^-w UTite, r^Vy^uu for s-n-Xtc-^tat from ■'XVi-u platt, r^nry^uu
for rerivx-^uu from ti6x-" build,

a. ■ and x may remain uncbanged before ;i in a noun-suffix : dc-fi^ edge,
Ipax-ni drachma, k/i remains when brought togettier by phonetic change
(128a), as in ff-K/fit-ta am teearied (idii-tw).

b. yyii and /vv become y/i and m^- Thos, ^X4Xrr>uu for AirXfYT-fui from
AiiXo'X''''" C'^^X"^ cofiDi'cf), rtwuiun for Trw'«M'*>'<>' from rrri^r-fuu (r^^r-w

Ktlll).

86. A dental atop (r, &, ff) before /i often appears to become <r.
Thus, t^vixTfuu for ^WT-^ioi (SyoT-to complete), riiftpairiial for m^paS-^uu
{i^pd^io declare), wmujiuu. for mrciS-fiat (irciO-u persuade).

87. On the other hand, since these stops are actually retained in many words,
such as lptTii6r oar, r/rriai f<Ue. ipiSjiM numbrr, s must be explained as due

to analogy. Thns, rinaiiai, r^parfiot, lirtisiuu bare taken on the ending -vfuu
by analogy to -rrm where a is in place (r^^parrai for ri^pai-rsi). 80 taiur toe
kno\e (Hom. Itiitr) follows tart you know (for tB.^t). taiiij odor stands for 6S-»iui.

U a. D. So In Hom. hfurei favoring (lidna), ixaxi^m sharpened.

n] KUPHONY OF CONSONANTS 27

CONSONANTS BEFORE N

BOl j9 regularly and ^ usually become /t before v. Thus, m/wos
revered for at^-vot (aip-ot>ai), otu/iw Jirm for oru^vo,- ((rru0« conli-act).

89- 7(7»/iai become, 'ii.yr\iaKu knme become ^Ito^iai, Yiriio-jru in Attic fttur
SOD m.c., in Mew Ionic, late Doric, etc.

90. Xv becomes AA in dAAu^ destroy for ^-i^^

Xr Is kept In rlXra^cu ig>proaeh. Un sigma bafore r gee 106.

N BBPORE CONSONANTS

9L V before -r, /3, ^, (fr becomes ;*: tfiviima fall into for iv-rlwrm,
tfuff^XXM throw in for (V/SoAAm, ^^i^W eaAibit for Jt^^.u»<iD, j/ifOxK
afttie for n-^;(ot.

93. V before k, y, xi ( becomes v-nasal (19 a) : tyieakea bring a
dmrge for jy-KoXtai, lyypa^ inscribe for iir^paiJHa, ervy^"" yw 'off^'Aw"
for CTw-;(«ci(, wvyfwu ^rind up for (tvv-^lw.

93. ■> before t, i, d remaiiiB unchangod. Here r may repreaeDt /i: ppot^i
tkuHder (fipiiirtt roar).

94. V before fi becomes /i : l/i-ittTpot moderate for Jv/icrpof , ififiono
abide by for j>^.^uv(tl.

a. Verb* in -n* may form the perfect middle in -vfui (4S9 h) ; la in r/^or-
>uu (from ^VH «Aow) for wi<par-iiai (cp. r^^aT-cs, r^i^ai).

b. Here r dots not become c ; but the ending -v/ioi la borrowed from verbs
witli sterna in a dental (as r4^fiaciiai, on which Bee 87).

95. r before A, p is assimilated (AA, pp) : avKKayiK concourse for
wf-Xoyot, mppioi fioin together for mjy-ptio.

96. r before tr is dropped and the preceding vowel is lengthened
(c to ei, o to cFv, 37) : fuXat black for pxXaif-t, «Is OM for iy-t, ri$tK plac-
ing for TiBtv(T)-t, TOW for rm^s-

a. But in the dative plural r before -vi appears to be dropped without com*
peniator; lengtheulng : fi/Xaffi for /uXar-iri, ialiiori for jaifut^i divfnitte*, ^pfi
for tpttfi mind. But see 200 N.

CONSONANTS BEFOKE X

97. With ff a labial stop forms ^, a palatal atop forms (.
Xii^H sAiiU Jeave for Xnr-w (^puf AeroM for ttifvt-t

fpi^u thall write " YpoX" ^4f couyA " 0itx-t

90 D. Aeolio /UXXs eotiiuil, Attic ^vXi) and Doric paSA (wiili compensatory
lengthening), probably for pt\ti.

<.:C.Oi_y^k

28 EUPHONV OF CONSONANTS [gS

■, Hw only atop thU can sUnd before rlMroix, hence fi, # be«>tne w, aad
Y, X bBOOme j[. Thiu, yptup-gu, iy-fu become ypar-ffu, dx-rM.

Sft A dental stop before cr is assimilated (inr) and one c is
dropped.
mt/uM-t bodie* for suiiavgi out of rw>iaT-ri, voffl /e«( for roo-o'l out of wat-vi,

tfrift bird* for ifnvei out of dpriP-fu So riax" *vffer for i-atfo'x'' im^ o(

rod^Mw (cp. TaS-<(V and 126).

a. I and S become r before «- : r»t-^i, ipriS-vi become war-ai, iprir-^i.

99. ■ U dropped before » in 8i)a(c)-«'i:u teach (SiSan-rit taught).
r is dropped before ir^ in p\a(r)a-ttiidSi evil-^^eakinff.

100. vr, v8, v0 before a- form vito- (98), then w, finally y is dropped
and the preceding vowel is lengthened (37).

rfiri oil for wanr-ai out of rarr-tf-i, rifci'ri placing for rifcrr-o'i out Of TiStrr-ri.
3o ylYai |r<anj lor 7i7arr-t, Uouirt loojinjf (or Xvorr-o-i, artlau thali tnaJte
Ifftatton for nirS-vn, trcEffOfut sAail s^/Ter for wtuS-aaiuu (tirdtt grief).

101. A. hr in, rbr toiiA in compoaitlon are treated aa foilowa :

ir iMfore p, #, or f Iceepa lla »: Ir-fvfiiat tu rhythm, 4r-«iitiiitit pr^art, tr-

ftOyn/u yoke in.
ail before a aod a vowel becomes aw- : awr-vi^fu kelp to tave,

Iwfore ff and a consonant or f, becomes tv- : ru-amd^ pack up, rO-i^iyti

yoktd together.

b. irkv, vAXlv before a either keep ■• or aaslmilate * to a- : rdr-a-a^i otI-wUc,
Tsr-irAqtat or Taaaf^iiTot the fall moon, TtXlu-vKiot Mck-thaded, wiM«-wTot
nuhing back.

102. On ptf see 79 a. "Ka \m ret^ned in iXaoi preetnet. pa, Xff may become
p, X with lengthening of the preceding vowel : Ifytipa I collected, 4tt*iX> / an-
nouneed for iry'p^^, ihT*-''"-

£ BSFORB CONSONANTS

103. Si^a between consonants is dropped : ^Yyf\(<r)$( you have
announced, ytypa<f>(<i)$ai to have written, cK(cr)^ij>«f of six morUhs (j£
•KB, n^ month).

«. But in compoands r is rebuned when the second part b^lns witb r :
fr^^roclM Included in a truce. Compounds In Siw- ill omit a before ft word
beginning with r : Hvxiara hard to cleaee tor iua-vx*'^" ('X'i^)-

MD. Horn. often retaEns vv : ri>rirl,Biircair9mil0TtaT-a€ic9iu(_SaTiei/icud{t{de),
in D. Horn, has Spat Incited, tipa* cut, UKtan to copp vp, ■cAo'cu to put to

Ill] EUPHONV OF CONSONANTS 29

i<t^p- eamt out, indiu aacrifiee, ixaiftu pntent from dagger (not 4<^{w),
hiimw6int learn thoroughly. Cp. B2 h. i, 136.

105. <r before ji or » usually dksappeais with compensiitoty tengtbening (37)
H in tliii for to-/u. But aii stays if /i belongs to a auffiz and in compoonda d
Jvr- ill ; IiW'^H)* hosWe.

«. Assimilation tabes place in niXordrnio-at for IIAorei rtirm itland of
ftlajM, f vivfu eIo(A« for ts-nitu. (Ionic (fru^), rfy« toaajloufn? for^po, SOa.

106. ai becomes f in some adverbs denoting mo^n Uiv^rAt. Thns, 'kHf
Hlt!or'A»4Hit-i< .a(A«n*-toards (26, S42a).

107. Two signias brought together hy mfleotioa become a: pS>Mn
for pikar-m missiles, hrttn for Imtr-ut words (98), rcXtmu for rAia-tnu
(from T(Acu accmn^MA, stem rtXar-).

a. ov when = tt (78) never becomes ?.

108. Many of the rules for the enphony of consonants were not established
in the classical period. Inscriptions show a much freer practice, either marking
the etymology, as air/iaxot for rim^X'^ "^IV (M)i i'xa\ilr for tyaaXttr to lirlng
a charge (^2), or showing ths actnsl pronunciation (phonetic spelling), as riy
( = T*.) *<u6r (92), tJ»( (= t),,) PouXi(» (91), t4X (= T-ii-) W^or, l-rSova for fx>v
rii ntmndtriTig (104), 4x4>ipi; ixBtu for iK^ipa, inBiu (104).

CONSONANTS WITH VOWEl^
CONSONANTS BBPORB I AND B

109. NnmeroDS changes occur before the semivowel i (=p, 80) before m
iQirel. Thia y Is often indicated by the sign i. In 110-117 (escapt In 116)

UO. Xi becomeB XX : SXXik for iXityi Lat. alius, aXXo/uu for iX^o-
im laL salio, t^vXXov for •^uXmf Lat. folium.

111. After ay, ov, op, op, I is shifted to the preceding syllable, form'
ing Qiv, otc, aip, oip. This is called Epenthesis (iTrivOfirK insertion).
fslw s&ow for ^>>^, iiAiunt black for u«X(ir.|ii, mlf>u jjosp for awap^, luSpa

fate for ^op-jft. (So (Xalw ue«p for «Xaf-j,u 38 a.) On t after tr, ep, ir, ip, »«,

lU. Kt, x> become rr (=<nr 78); (^uXarrw ^uard for ^vAoK-Mt
(cp. ^uXoK^ guard), rapama disturb for ropax-tu) (cp. TOpaxij dj'aordej^.

IN D. r la asslinilat«d in Aeol. and Horn, f/i^roi to be for ir-iuni ((fni),
inirrii uA((« for iprytt-m, iptptrubt dart (^/x^r-ni, cp. 'Spifiat), Ami* we,
(H«in yoN (dr/u, fa-^Ht). Cp. SI D.

108 D. Aeolio has at for medial f in Oa-Bot branch (dibi), /uXbdw mate
Meto^r (/uXXl)*).

lor D. Homer often retains aa i fiiiurai, Irtvn, rtXtvaa*.

i,vGooglc

i

80 EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS

113. (I) rt, ^ after long rovels, diphthongs, and (
become a ; after short yowela ti, ^ become ao (not — tt 78), which
Ib simplified to tr.

alffn fate from QiT-ta,, rS^a all from warr-jft, itiftt mlddlt (Horn. lUvcat)
from luB-ipi (cp. Lat, mcd-du), ri^ot «o great (Horn, ri^ffoi) from T»r-ipf (cp.
L&L Iati-d«i»).

«. In the above cases tj, pused inio rv. Tbni rarr-ta, rarrvo, wareta, rirfa
(Cntan, TheMallan), rSaa (37 D. 3).

114. (II) Tja 01 become tt (= <r<r 78); /ttXtrra bee from ^icXtr^
(cp. niXh-iTot honey), Kopvma equip from Kopv&nu (cp. icopvc, -uA>t helmet).

C xopt*"" gfacc/ul and other feminine adjectives in -tirira are poetical, nod
tikerefore do not assutne the native Attic prose form In rr. But see 299 0.

b. rr from rj, Oj^ is due to analogy, chiefly of tt from ti.

21S. r before final i often becomes <t. Thus, riJ^ifcrt ptaces for
TiVijn; also in rAowriot riiA for itA«vt-k« (cp. irXoSrot weoAA).

a. rrbeforefliial t becomesH-, wbichdropsr: tx'>^^t^^<'vetoTtx»"l(3^)■

116. {^ between vowels and y^ after a vowel form {: thus, IXritn
hope for iXri&-i/a, wtfds on /oof for ir<S-(ot (cp. vcji-ia-r fimjund), ipraCn
teize for Jprny^u (cp. ipvai rajxtcioua). After a consonant yn forms
8: <Fp&u foorA; from Ipy-ioi.

117. ri, becomes tt, as in x'^^rw oppress from xoXn-^iu. pc becomes ^ in
BvpBi from Bofitf T £or<af. Here > was sounded nearly like g (14, 01 a).

DISAPPBABAKCE OF Z AND F

lia The spirant a- with a vowel before or after it is often lost
Its former presence is known by earlier Greek forma or from the

119. Initial <r before a vowel becomes the rough breathing.

iwri MMn, Lat. teplem ; inuavt half, Lat. stmi- ; Iirrtrtu pM for tfi-mr-fu, Lat.

Ml-tt-o; tlri/air I foUoietd from i-fftw-«-iiiir, Lai. aegvor.

a. When retained, this r ie due to phonetic change (aa rdr for iir, sly^ ttUtVx
for ffui-pr Qenn, tehweigen), or to analogy. On tbe loss of ' see 126 e.

120. Between vowels o- is dropped.

firwit of a race from ytrt(<!)-iit, Lftt. genrr-tt, Xfai thou looteU from Mb 'or
XB«-(tf)(u, A^ from Aii«-(ff)a (Aou dida loeiu for thj/Klf, riSeto for tiMw-o,
<fi)r from <ff-(ir-r Old Lat. tfem, dx4^w (ruf A from dK^ff-w.

It from (Dot.) r/ (cp.

i,vGooglc

MS] EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS 81

1. Tat 9 appMra in some -fu formB (jlStaai, trraaa), and in 9farit = Aipa-^
128. a between voireU Is due to phonetic change (u a for ea 107, rXodrui (or
Tk«*riM 116) or to»Dalo([y (ta IXin for JXua, modelled on tt*ut~t-*y, cp. S6c

Ul. f iKUiUlj dimppean In the aorist of liquid verbs (activfl and middle^
with tengtiiBiiing of the preceding vonel (87): ftfrnXs / $ent for <#r<\-«v, f^Mt
IilUtued for ifa^ita, J^htb for ^«aHraTO. Cp. 102.

122. Digamma (3) has disappeared in Attic.
The following tpedal cases are to be noted :

t. In Donns of the tbtrd declension with a stem in ov, n>, or ov (48). HiiUi
mCi Aip, gsn. rtiit from r^f-it, paaiXiit king, gen. jSoo-iX^uf from jSwiXQf-of (M).

b. In the augment and reduplication of verbs beginning with f : tlfyatinfiw
/wortet from t-fipyntbiair, louca am like from ftfaaa. Cp. 431, 448.

c In Torbe in tw for i^h : ^ I flow, f nL /Kt-taiai.

123. Some words have lost initial af iiiii nwt (Lat. nia(d)rfo), ot, it,
t ktn, h Us (Lat. iitui), tSn etutom, liBn character (Lat. con-*ue(iM).

ASPIRATION

IM. A Hmooth stop (v, T, ■), brought before the rough breathing
by elision, crasis, or in forming compounds, is made rough, becom-
ing an aspirate (^, 6, x). Cp. 16 a.

4^' •* for 4r(A) at, rOxff <Xitr for r6icr(_a) 3Xi|r (82) ; $irtf»r tht Other (69),
••Wtw for ri Wrur the Cloak (66) ; firflirf" M SO for ;uT(Jt) Iq^, sMUirt m^-
ufltMl from oArit ulf and UcTr pUaae.

a. A medial roogh breatbing, passing over f, ronghena a preceding nnootfa
stop : tfoupit imtcAnwin from rpo-i^t, fpgSioi g^ont from rfi and iNi, rUptwrvw
fow-kane cAariot (rtrp + fTToi).

US. Two rough stops beginning successiye syllables of the same
word are avoided in Greek. A rough stop is changed into a smooth
stop when the following syllable coatains a rough stop.

<. In redi^lcation (441) initial #, e, x &re changed to r, r, t. Thus, r^^cvr*
for ^ ^tv-ya perfect of ^tfyttjlte, T(-Sif-(up(ae«forSi-#if->u, i<-xi|-"for x'-X'V'**
pert of x'"" gape.

h. In the fltet aorist paaalve imperative -ti becomes -rt after -A^, as in Xf-Ar-rt
for Xnfffft ; elsewhere -A is retained (yrati).

c. In ttie aorist passive, $t- and tv are changed to rt- and to- in i-ri-tifr tmu
plated (rl#wu) and i^6^r wot laerifieed (Mw).

d. From the .same objection to a sacoMsion of rough stops are due iiirtxm
i^lwxt clothe for d^f-, iKt-xnfiA truce tor <x'-X<'P«t (from f;i;ij and x<'p)-

Ul D. Hmn. ^luit pleated stands for if fait from ivfott.

IM S. Mew lonio generally leaves w, r, k before the rough breathing : ir •>,
■trlwu, refc-^er. Bnt In oomponnds (9 D.) ^, tf, x "Uf ^Fpear : /UMvt Btethod
C«i*r4 qfter + iUt way).

i,vGooglc

83 EUPHONY OP CONSONANTS [irf

e. The rough breatbing, as an aspirate (IS a), oltta duappesred when either
of the two following ayllablea contains ^, S, or %■ 'x" havt BtandB for Ixv
= rtx" (il0i cp- l'-'XB')i t^c rough changing to the imooth breathing before a
rough stop. The rough breathing reappeara in the future r{u. Cp. tvx" restrain
for Irx" ttom ri-rx-w, MfffXar /ouiidation, but Hot mat, Lat. ledM.

f. In epl( hair, gen. sing, rpix-it for ^pix^t, dat. pi. epiii ; ts^^ not/1,
comparative raxlwr (rare) or Mrrur (dirvwr) from Saxlur (112).

{. In Ta4r- (rd^oi tomb}, pre«. 0ciir-r-« bury, fut. Bd^u, perf. rWafi->iat (86);
r^^^ nourish fut. Sptf/u, perL Ti-dpa/i^iiai ; Tpixu run, fat. ffp^fofwi ; rpu^
(t^i^ delicacy), pres. Bpirrui enfeeble, fut. Spf^u j tI)^ tniojte, perf. rf^O^i-fHu.

N. —The two rough stops remain unchanged in the aorlst paBsive idpi^tiir
utu nourisheH, iSpi^Biir tnu enfeeMed, i^yBtir teat thoten forth, iipS6$iir wo*
nt upright, ieiXxB^* VKU charmed, iKoBipB^r wa* purified; in the perfect inf.
rt^iAit, KtnaBipBai, TtM^i ; in the imperatives ypAfiiti be urilten, srpi^ifit
(urn abouf, ^f( say.

U6. Transfer of Aaplntion. — Aspiration may be transferted to
a following syllabte : rda^io for ra$-<niM (cp. 98).

137. Some rooti show variation I»tween a final smootli and ft rongh stop ;
itxapai receive, SupoSim bribetaker; dXcf^w anoint, \itoi fat; tUkw teeave,
•'Xax'^ braid of hair ; and in the pOTfect, as jj^o from Iyh lead.

VARIOUS CONSONANT CHANGES

12a HeUtheiis {tranrpoiUion). -^ A vowel and a cooBonant often ex.
change places : Ilnlf the Fn^x, gen. IlucrJi, rfrru bear for ti-tk-w (cp. rnr-eir).

a. Transposition proper doee not occur where wb have to do with op, pa =/>
(20, 36 b) as In SApsm and Bpiaoi courage ; or with syncope (44 b) due to early
shifting of accent, as In tir-oiiaifly, rTi-p6r miag ; or where a long vowel follows
the syncopated root, as In r/^na ri-rnii-iia I have cut.

In p4p\-^ica I hate throten (jSdXXu Ihrovi), ^Xq is fotmed from /JcXc found in
fif\£-imt mittile.

129. Dissimilation. — a. X sometimes becomes p when \ appears in the
same word : ipfiAfei painful for dX7aX«» (SXysi pain).

b. A consonant (usually p) sometimes disappears when it occurs also in
the adjoining syllable: Spiipainet ratting for Spv-^paKrai (Uu fenced hy wood).

c. Syllabic dissimilation or syncope occurs when the same or two siinilar
syllables containing the same consonant succeed each other: d/i^p*h a jar for
ifi^i-^ptvt, Bdprvret bold for Bapvo-rviot. This is often called haplology.

d. See also under 00, 126 b, h.

Itt D. Hdt. has Maiha there (irraOea), MtOrir thence (Jn-fO^er), tiBAr
tanic (x"-JO-

19T D. Hom. and Hdt. have sffrii again (aWii), oM not (o^xO- All the
dialects except Attic have Sin/ui.

US D. Horn, jcpajli), jcofiafi) Atari, nipTtaToi beH ((pdrtrrst), fiiptiarn alow
tat (fipaSii), tpurii and •iaprat from Sipu fiay, t-ipoMtr tarn from UpKoiMt see.

I;.ClK>^Ic

133] FINAL CONSONANTS S8

130. DeralOpDMiit — 9 la dereloped between r and p, m In i.r»fU of a man
(or irpoi from dntp (cp, eiadtr with Lat, einerii) ; p U developed between n and
f (or X) , 08 in lunuiffpla midday, aoulk from pMati/ipia for fiw-ig/Kfiia from m^o-m
Mfddte and 4fi^^ day (cp, chamber with LaL ramtra).

131. Labials and dentals often cormpojid : rmri and rlaa relHbution;
#tm murder, Bttru arike. r and t: alriXst fioat-AenI, ^viJXot ox-herd, rr
for r iafoond in rrikiiiat tear, tt6\ii etty for ri^itn, rAXii. Cp. JVepfitofeinHt
and Ptolemg. So x' &nd x In x^i^' trround, ^afia/ on the ground.

FINAL CONSONANTS

133. No conaonant except v, p, or tr (iDcluding £ and if) can stand
at the end of a Greek word. All other consonants are dropped.

a. ExceptionB are the proclitics (17B) it out of, derived from ii (op, 104,
136), and ait not, at which of is another form (137).

b. Ezamptes of dropped final consonants ; o-wpa body for vuimt (gen. aiiiiar-
m); rot oh boy for xaJ (gen. raii-di); 7ilX« n»(ft for yaXaicr (gen. i^Xairr-af ) ;
fifitr bearing for ptporr (gen. ^porr-ei); icQ^ heart tor jnrpj, op. lo^iS-li; AXX*
for dX^S (110), cp. Lat. oJlud,- r0(pc-(T) wa« carrying, I^po-*(t) imr« carrv>
liijr(4a4c,e).

c. An original final m preceded by a vowel becomei v, cp. trm with LaL
cjuum. So If one from j/i (340 a), Lat, lem-el, i^ prm.

in D- So in Horn. /J-iifiXit-tai haee gone from |iXu from fuX- In t-tut'-o-r

(128a). At the beginning of words this fi la dropped; thus, p\-ifficu go,

^perit tn€>rtal for iiffpt-nt (root upo; tup~, as in mor-luia). Id composition /i

remaina, as In i-ii^pcrn Immortal ; but i-pparej immortal is formed from pprrii,

ISS D. T for «' : Doric t6, rof, r/, <)ujiiaTlDi (AwilrMi), ^au (tCnMri), Uom-

Mr (n<»»i<ir).

r *■ T : Doric aipMpar to-day (rii>upo> Attic, v^wfw Ionic).

R " r : Ionic (not Horn.) tbrt when, xirtptt which of luo t &cMt,

« " r: Doric ■■i«o (T*r(),ai[a (*tO-

Y " 0 : Doric y'Ki^afiar eyelid, tUx"' (Iob- yMxi"} pennyroyal.

S " p: Doric JS«Xii (j/SoXit) a ^iL

« " T : Horn, rfov^n, Aeol. wivvufi four (rirTafn) ; Aeol, r^Xvi

far off (cp. TifXi^i), T^JiH Jloe (w-^rr-t).

• " T : see 120 D.

4 " ' : Horn, ^lip cemlaur mp beatt).

f " r : (fhotaelim) : UM Laoonian, Elean rip ^eho, TbesaaL B>ipt»-

^ •• e : late Laconian riii tot t*ti go4 (20 D.).
» " X ; Doric irttU come.

i,vGooglc

UOVABLE CONSONANTS

MOVABLE CONSONANTS

IM. Httrabls N may be added at the end of a word when the next
word begins with a vowel. Movable v may be annexed to words
ending in -tri ; to the third person singular in -c ; and to ivri it.

Thna, rSaiw fXrycr iftina he taid that to ever^fbodfi (bat rStfi \iym)»i ravra),
Xf)«urtv iiiol they ^tak to me (but \iyawl /lot), lanr AXXoi there U another
(IBT b), 'A^rtfo'ii' ^rav lA«v were at Jtheiu,

a. Ezc^C irrl, words that add v do not elide their final vowel (73).

b. Verba In -«« never (in Attic) add -r to the 8 aing. of the ctintracted form :
■e twalti airSr ht treated Um tMlI. Bnt ffi XKttt and plaperfecta (as iSti kneno)
may add ».

N. — Movable r is called r ^Xnnwruiii {dragging after).

139. Movable r 1b usoall; wrltMnat the end of claiuee, and at the end of a
vnw In pootty. To make a syllable long by position (144) the poeta add r
before wotda beginning with a consonant Prose Inscriptions (reqnently oM
w before a consonant.

136. Uorable Z appears in ovrwt thus, l( out of, before vowela, oSrm,
(■'before consonants. Thus, ovtok Jrout he acted thve but ovru wwu
luactt thus; i( Ayopas but jk r^ (t7'i;f>as otU of the market-place.

a. Mil means itraiffhtaas, ti9i ttratght toteardt.

137. ttx not Is used before the smooth breathing, tix (cp< 124) before
the rough brBathliig: stbc 6\lyoi, aix 4'^- Before all consonants bA Is written i
o6 raXXof, od ^)iai. Standing alone or at the end of its clause ai is written a4
(rarely oflit)i " »■"*» 7*P "* : M *oio not f Cp. 180 a.

a. A longer form la oixt (Ion. ainl) used before vowels and consonaota.

b. itii**" no longer derives Ita c from the anali^y of ottiri no fonder.

SYLLABLES

138. There are as many syllables in a Greek word as there are
separate vowels or diphthongs: thus, d-Aif^-a truth.

139. The last syllable is called the ultima; the next to the last
i^llable is called the penuU (paen-ultiina atinost last) ; the one before
the penult is called the antepenult (ante-paen-ultima).

IHD. Bom. baa iyiiir) I, iuiu(r) to ns, Cufu^r) to you. vpt(r) to them. The
snlBxM -^ and -4* vary with -pn and -8tr: eci^i(v), wf6vBt(r). Also *i(r)
= Attic <*, ri(t) nou. The Mm. of RdL avoid movable i, but it occara in Ionic
InseriptlODH. Hdt. often has -tft for -»tr {jp^Bt before, fwirSi behind).

1S6 D. Several adverbs often omit > without much regard to llie following
word: i^ about, d/i^li (poet.), ;i/x^, Sxp* «nitl (rarely f^x^j, Ax^)i *t^^»
and irpi^ guitay, raXXictt o^Isn (nXXin Uom., Hdt.).

t4S] SYLLABLES 86

140. In prononncing Greelt woids and In writing (ttt the end of Ui« line)
the nilM commoDi; obeerved are these :

a. A single cunionant standing between two vowels in one word belongs with
the second vowel : i-y<*, aa-^-iu.

b, Any group of oonsonanta tbat can begin a word, and a groDp termed by
ft Mop witb II or w, and by ur, belongs with the second vowel : rd-rru, S^toat,
l-TTfr, f-x"" I 'fiSi-^lui, (-A«i, XJ-fin).

C. A group of consonants that cannot begin a word is divided between two
(Tilables; A>^4si, A-rl>, tp-y/ia. Doubled oonaonente are divided : MXarTo.

i. Coniponnds divide at the point of union : tlir-^ipm, rpov-^pm ; di-^vw, tW-
<>■, rvr-^H. (But the aDoients often wrote ^nAyu, tl-riyu, rpo-vtKBtZr, i-ii-t^

•. a, when followed by one or more consonants, is either atttcbed to the
preceding vowel (d-pto'-roT), or, with the consonant, begins the following syllahle
(l-^i-rTot). (Tbe ancients were not consletent, and there ia evidence for the
prooODCiation tf-piff-<rroi.)

t The ancients divided it tsi^tou as i-K Toi-rvu. This pracUce Is now
abandoned.

1«L A syllable ending in a vowel is said to be open; one ending
ia a consonant is closed. Thus, in fi^-n/p mother the first syllable is
open, tbe second closed.

QUANTITr OP 8YLLABLBS

142. A syllable is sbort when it contains a short vowel followed
by a vowel or a single consonant : 6t-6i god, i-v6-far<Ta I thought.

14a A syllable is long by nature when it contains a long vowel
or a diphthong : x^P°- ^"■'"^i So^Aot dave.

144. A syllable is long by position when its vowel precedes two
consonants or a double consonant : iinm horse, H out of.

a. One or both of the two consonanle lengthening a final eyllalile by position
Diay belong to the next word : IXXoi riMrr)t, dXXa iT^fu.

b. Length by position does not aSect the natural quantity of a vowel. Tbna,
both U-{w / »haU say and X^-fw I shall ceaie have the first syUabU long b7
posiUcn ; but tbe fliat ooimI is short In X^fu, long in Xff"-

145. A stop with a liquid after a short vowel need not make
the preceding syllable long by position. A syllable containing a
short vowel before a stop and a liquid is amimon (either short
er long). When short, such syllables are said to have weak position.

Thus, in Bdtpv, Tatpit, SirXDr, rAcnr, rl Spi the fltst syllable Is either long or
■hon as the verse requires. In Homer the syllable before a stop with a liquid
is usually long ) in Attic it is usually short.

144D. F may beoneof the twocvnsonanUi r^t (/ )al«» ( \j).

■ oogle

86 SYLLABLES [146

a. The atop and the liquid making weak potltlon moat stand in the same
word or in the same pail of a compound. Thku, in Ik-\6w I reltiue the first
■yllable ia always loDg, but in (-■>vc he heard it 1b common.

b. P, 7, B before it, or r, and uauaJI; before X, make tlie preceding pliable
long by positjon. ThuH, iyr6t (_ w) P««, pip\iar (i^ ^ >j) book.

N. — ' Coininon ' quantity hai been explained as due to a difference in sytlabio
division. Thus, in rrnur, the first syllable is closed (T/ic-t«r); while in t^kkiv
tbe firat syllable U open (t/-ic»f). Cp. 141.

146. The quantity of most gyliablea is uauall; apparent. Thus, syllables
a. with q, w, or a diphthong, are lon^

bi with (, B, before a vowel or a single consonant, are short.
c with I, «, before two eonsonants, or a double consonant, are long.
d. with a, I, v, before two (»iiBonants, or a double consonant, are long.
N. — Bnt syllables with ; 0, or s, 1, u before a stop and a liqntd may be
diort (14g). Cp. also 147 c.

147. llie quantity of syllables containing a, t, v before a vowel or a single
oonsonant must be learned by observation, especially in poetry. Note, however,
that a, I, V are always long

a. when they have the circumflex accent ; rSi, biiiv.

b. when they arise from contraction (50) or crasis (62): yipa from yipaa,
ipyit idle from i-tpyot (but ipyh bright), xiyii from nl iyii.

c ( and V are generally short before { (except as initial Hounda in augmented
forms, 436) and a, 1, v before f. Thus, it^paf, itipOia, x>^, iprifu, f\rtiii.
d. BI, II, and m are long when rorrr has dropped out before t (90, 100).
a. The accent often ahowa the qoantity (ISS, 104, ITO).

148. A Towel standing before another vowel in a Greek word is not neces-
■arily short (aa it usually la in classical Latin).

146 D. In Hom. an fnlUal liquid, nsaal, and digamma (3) was probably
doubled in pronnnciatiOD when it followed a short syllable carrying the
rhythmic accent. Here a flnal short vowel appears In a long syllable ; iwt
ptyipoiffi (w _:. u u .^ u), cp. 28 D. The lengthening is sometimes dae to the

former presence ot ir or ^before the liquid or nasal ; Srt \^(titr ^j^ ^^ (cp.

SWiirrm vneeating tor i-vXitern), rt ^iitiT ^ :. (cp. SppiiicTot unbroken tor

irfp^trot). (Cp. 80 a, 80 D„ 81 D.)

147 D. a, I, V In Horn. Hometimes show a different quantity than In Attic.
Thns, AtL Kl.\it, Ttm, ^ira, Xtu, tti/u, Hoiii. nXAi, rttu, ^Mni (28), and Xuu
and 'tiitu usually.

148 J>. 1. In Horn., and sometimes in the lyric parts of the drama, a syllable
ending in a longvowel or diphthong ia shortened before an initial vowel: ifu i\iit

(.i.\J w^, rfx""" ''"" (j.^.- w-j ). itXiiflf pa ipyvpirei' (_:.w \j.:.\j\j.^\

Here 1 and v have become semivowels (20, 4.^) ; thus, tSxtra \ j/tln*, cp. 67.'
■•t -Vi -v "ere shortened like a, q, u. Thus, iarirtf Spfipif (_^ u i^_: ),

2. This shortening does not occur when the rhythmic accent falls upon the
floal syllable: iTitt^'OSi^i (^^>j ^J^^^ ^j^^),4ln(^yj^).

ACCENT

149. There are three accents in Greek. No Greek accent can
■tand farther back than the antepenult.

1. Acnt«('): over short or long vowels and diphthongs. It may
stand on ultima, penult, or antepenult : xoXot, Sot^um', 3.v6pmrK.

2. Qrcnmflez (~) : over vowels long by nature and dipfathangs. It
m^ stand on ultima or penult : y^, Ban, SStpov, rmro.

3. OraYe('); over short or long vowels and diphthongs. It stands
on the ultima only i riy StSpa, rifv tv)(i)v, oi &t6i t^s 'EAAoSof.

isa The acute marks syllables pronounced in a raised tone.
The grave is a low-pitched tone as contraated with the acute. The
circumflex combines acute and grave.

151. Accented sjllables in Ancient Greek had a higher pUeh (rint) than
nokccented aylUbles, and it was the rising and faiUiiig of the pitch that made
Ancient Greek a musical language. The Greek word for accent is TpovySIS
(IM. aeeenCvt: from ad-eano), i.e. 'Boug accompanying words.' Musical
accent (elevation and depression of tone) la to be dUtingoished from quantity
(duration of tone), and from rhythmic accent (streaa of voice at fixed intervals
when there ia a regular aeqaence of long and short ayllables).

N. — The accent heard in Modern Greek and English is a Hreu-atxent.
Stress is produced by strong and weak expiration, and takes account of accented
Billables to the neglect of the quantity of unaccented syllables. Thus, shortly
alter Christ, SrSptnot was often pronounced like a dactyl, ^IXat like a trochee ;
and Tpdrvrer, Irrin, were even written wp^emr, hrfyi.

152. The marks of accent are placed over Clie vowel of the accented syllable.
A diphthong has the accent over Its second vowel (jovro), except in the case of
capital 9, g, v (as 'Aiiiti, 5), where the accent stands before the first vowel

153. A breathing is written before the acuta and gt&ve (or, Jf), but under
the circumflex (w, ovtot). Accents and breathings ate placed before capitals;
'Qit^pat, 'Ofitu. The accent stands over a mark of diaeresis (8); icXqfji.

IM. The grave is written in place of a final acute on a word that
U followed immediately by another word in the sentence. Thus,
fUTa T^ I'^Xf i/^ '^ baXtle (for fixra rqv ftajcp')' It is also some-
times placed on ris, tI (334), to distinguish these indefinite pronouns
from tne interrt^atives rt's, tL

a. An oxytone (167) changes its acute to the gt&vewhen followed by another
word, except: (1) whentheoxytoueisfollowedby an enclitic(I83a); (2) in rft,
rl Eolarrogative, as rlt •jItdi ; who's thlt f (3) when an elided ayllable follows

3. The shortening rarely occurs in the interior of a word. Thus, Horn. 4pwot
(_wvj), Mr {.yj^\ In the Attic drama airift <_w_), to«B™» (u_v),
rwd (u _), often written nS in inscriptions (cp. 43).

S8 ACCENT [155

th« accented syllable: rix^ tKi,r (124), not t^x^' IX^r (lT4a); (4) wlien a
colon or period followa. (Usage varies before a ooioma.)

155. Tbe ancienU reganlfd the grave originally as belongiog to every ajrlla-
ble not accented wlilt tbe acute or circumflex ; and soma Mbs. abow thia in
practice, e.g. Tkyicpitiit. LaUr it was restricted lo iu use as a substitute for a
final acut«.

156. The clTCumflex is formed froiu the uninn of the acute and the grave
^r\ _ ~)^ never from ^'. Thus, raU = rilt, eB = li. Similar!;, since every long
Towel may be reBoIved into two short units (morae), rQr may be regarded as
= T-Mr. The clrcumfiex was thus spoken with a rising tone followed by one of
lower pitch. fuOsa, iijiiai are Ihus =: liiian, Sii/iot ; iMianit, S^iav are ^ fiii^o-igt,
SU/iau. In SiSaSca (f.e. SitHiaa) compared with SiSaSt the accent hu receded
(169) one mora.

a, "Rie whole vowel recBtves the acuie when the second short unit of a Towd
long by nature is accented : M = Alf.

157. Words are named according to their accent as follows ;
Oxytone (acute on the ultima) : Ojp, xakoi, XcXvkws.
Paroxytone (acute on tlie penult) : Afu, AuVui, XtXvHorot.
Proparoxytone (acute on the antepenult) : ivSpanm, n
PenspomenoQ (circumSex on the ultimii) : y^, 6tmi.
ProperiBpomenon (circumflex on the penult) ; upo^K, iiaaaa.
Barytone (when the ultima ia unaccented, 158) : lunxm, iLJfnfp, toXc^uk.

196. A word is called haiytone (^opf-ront dtfp-toned, low-lonrd) when it
haa no accent on the nltiiua. All paraiytonea, proparoiy tones, and properi-
i^mena are also barytones.

159. An accent is called rectMive when it moves back as far from the end
of the word as the quantity of the ultima permiis (106). The quantity of the
penult Ea here disregarded (r/i^u/Mr). Cp. 1TB.

160. OxyUiJie {iiit, akarp + T6m) means ' sharp-toned,' ptrl^omenoa (rtpir
mifunt) ' tiinied-around ' (_circutnflectuM, 156). Parozj/Ione and pTi^roxytune
are derived from t(6Tarat with the prepositions wapi and rpi respectively. Acute
corresponds to Lat. ocuttu (Jfcia, $cil. Tpa^vtli).

161. The invention of tbe marks of accent ia attributed to Aristophanes of
Byzantiam, librarian at Alexandria about 200 b. c. The use of signs served to
fix the correct accentuation, which waa becoming uncertain in the third century
B.C.; marked the variation of dialect usage; and rendered the acquisition of
Oreek easier for foreigners. The signs for the accents (and the breathings)
were not regularly employed [a Mss. till after 600 a.d.

163. The position of the accent has to be learned by oheervation. But the
Und of accent is determined by the following rules.

m D. 1. Aeolic has recessive (159) accent In all words except prepoaltions
and conjunctions. Tlnin, vi^t, ZtOt, i.t. Ziit, aSr«t, \lxtir (s Xirerr), UrvrrM
(= XtrJrrof), i^itt (= flutU^.

itg] ACCENT 89

163. The antepenult, if acoented, can have the aonte only {Mp^
mt, fiaaiXMia qtieen, olKo^itXawK of a houM^aard). If the ultima is
long, either h; natuce or b; position (144), tlie antepenult cannot
tabe an accent: heuce dt^pwrm (176a), ffatriXcia kingdmn, ouco^uXof.

a. Some nouns in -tun and -tvr admit the scaU on tlie antepenulL Thoi,
the genitivB of nouna in -it and -vt {xiXtat, rdXiuv, itrrtut), the forma of the
Mie declension, as IXtun (280'). Bo the lonlo ganlUve in -*u (roMrm) ; also
lomfl compound adjectiTea in -an, as Sirtpan vnhappv in loot, it/ilKtput loft)
aMtrtd. On Jmrot see 186.

IH. The penult, if accented and lon^, takes the circumflex when
the ultima is short by nature (v^trot, Tuura). In all other cases it has
the acute (^u^Sot, XtXvKortK, ravTov).

a. Apparent excepUons are fi^n, oCrit, ^St (proper!? ^St). See 186.

b. A flnal Billable containing a vowel short hy nature followed by { or ^ does
not pennit tbe acute to eland on tho antepenult (olca^tfXat) ; but the circumflex
ma; stand on the penult (n^puf).

169. The ultima, if accented and short, has the acute {^rom^) ;
if accented and long, has either the acute (AtXiwiof ), or the oircnaflez
(DfpucAT*).

166. When the ultima is long, the acute cannot stand on the
antepenult, nor the circumflex on the penult Thus, ivdpvrmi and
bpoti are impossible.

IE7. When the ultima is short, a word, if accented

a. on the ultima, has the acute : iro^m.

b. on a short penult, has the acute : vo/uk-

C on a long penult, has the circumflex : Swpor.
d. on the antepenult, haa the acute : SvBfMwot.
16B. When the ultima is long, a Tord, if accented

a. on the ultima, has the acute or the circumflex : iyii, tro^wc-

b. on the penult, has the acute : Xiav, Soifuuv.

169. Final -ai and 41 are regarded as short: /naOtat, ^Xs/ui, rpiraXst,
ip^fwai. But in the optative -oi and -« are long (Xtroi, ^uXcAh), bs fn con-
tractad syllables. So also in the locative afm at hotne (but olm hou$M).

a. The difference In tbe qaantitaUve treatment of '04 and -w dependa on an
original difference of accentuation that may have vanished in Greek, -ai and

2. Doric regarded Snal-ai(I69}aslong(di'#)iiir«), and probabi; ^at in nouna
(Xiipu); made paroijtonee the E pi. act. of the past teusea (^i^pur, AArsr) and
uch words aa vaiin, yvnlKn, rriirai ; made perinpomena the gen. masc. pi. of
proooons (javrl^t, iXt-at) and the gen. fern. pi. of adj. In -ot (dufore^r). Tbe
MbMitation, in the accus. pi., of -4i and -at tot -dt and -out, caused no change
in tb« aooMit (rdrb, AfirAM).

-w, wheD short, were prODonnced with a clipped, or limple, tone; when long,
irith a dnwl«d, or compound, lone.

170. The qo&ntlty of a, t, u (IIT) may ofl«u be learned from the accent.
Thus, In MXarrs, i}>uvt>i, r^xvii J^ra^ut, ftQni, the Tovel of the last syllable
maM be abort; In ^IXm the t mnel be short (otherwise ^iXm). Cp. 163.

ACCENT AS AFFECTED BY CONTBACTIOK, CBASIS, AUD ELI810X

171. Contraction. — If either of the syllables to be contracted had
an acceat, the coutracted syllable has an accent. Thus :

a. A contracted antepenult has the acute : fi\*iiutet = ^Xoii/ufDi.

b. A contracted penult has the circumflex when the nltima is ihoit ; the
acal^ when the ultinia Is long : ^tXfauri = ^iXtSci, ^Xi6fTur = ^^airrttr.

c. A contracted nltima lias the acute when the nncontracted form was
oxytone : farsiit = irriit ; otherwise, the circnmfiex : ^\4u = ^XA.

N. 1. — A contracted syllable has the circumflex only when, la the nncon-
tracted form, an acut« was followed by the (unwritten) grave (156, 156).
Thus, IIfp»X^t = n(ptiX$i, Tliiiia = rliui. In all other cases we have the acute :
^Mirruw = ^Xotfrrwv, ptfii-it = fitfiiii.

N. 2. — Exceptions to 171 are often due to the analogy of other forms (236 a,
2M e, 279 a, 290 c, 309 a).

172. If neither of the syllables to be contracted had an accent,
the contracted syllable has no accent : ^'Xm = iftiXxt, ytvti = ytva,
v^hVAooc = -mpiirXoav. For exceptions, see 236 b.

173. Craals. — In crasis, the first Tord (as less important) loses
its accent : riyadi for ra ii)>aAi, rav for ri. tv, K&ya for ko! jyw.

a. If the second word la a dissyllabic paroiytone with short ultima, It is uncer-
tain whether, in craHis, the parozylone remajns or changes to properispomenon.
In this book ratprfOT, rdWa are written for rh (pYor, rd AXXa ; but many scholars
write TaBp-ror, raXXa.

174. Eliiion. — In elision, ozytone prepositions and conjnactions
lose their accent: irap'(fori™pi)ffwi),(UX'(f*'''^*^)'Y"- In other oxy-
tones the accent is thrown back to the penult : iroAA' (for iroAAa) hroBw.

a. Obaerre that In riXX' fwaSot the acute is not changed to the grave (154 a,
S). A circumflex does not result from the recession of the accent. Thus, #4^'
(not ^li) iyii for ^/d tyii. riri and rori, after a word which cannot reorave
their accent (183 d), drop their accent : ovrw wrr ijr.

anastkAphe

175. Anastrophe (Ayatrrpin^ turning-back) occurs in the case of
oxytone prepositions of two syllables, which throw the accent back
on the first syllable.

L;,.„-z:-:l,vG00glc

iM] ACCENT, PROCLITICS 41

a. Whea the prepoomon followa Ita cam : rtAriat rip* (for rtfX ntrur)
abma tht*e thing*. No other preposition tliaii -wtpl follovre ita case in proae.

N. 1. — In poetry anaatropbe oocura with the other diasjIUbic prepositions
(except irrl, iit^, lii). In Homer a preposition foUoning Its verb siid sepa-
nled from it by tmesis (1660) also admits an aatrophe (XmiffB Iro for IroXadvg).

S. 2. — When the flnal vowel of the preposition is elided, the accent is dropped
if so mark of pnnctnaCioD intervenes : x'ft' ^' ii/ttripjiaii B 374.

b. When a prepoaliion staods for a compound fonnod of the prepoelUon snd
^rl. Thus, rifia for ird^rrt U it permilUd, In for Intri it U pottlble
{M u a poetic form of ir).

If. — In poetiy, rdpa may stand for rip€ivt or ripti/u ; and im aritt ! apt
h used for Artarifiu Horn, lias tn = (ntai.

CHAKGB OF ACCENT IN DBOLEysrON, INFLECTION, AND
COMPOSITION

17& When a short ultima of the ooniinative is lengthened in an
oblique case
a. a proparoxf tone becomes paroxytone : fioAarm OtOidmii, ivSpanrot

b. a properiepomenonbecoines paroxytone: ^unicra^ii(ri;i,SupovS(0pov.
C an oxytone becomes perispomenon in the genitive and dative of
the sectmd declenaion : Otot $toi 0t^ fieSiv Btott.

177. When, for a long ultima, a short ultima is substituted in
inflection

a a dissyllabic paroxytone (with penult long by nature) becomes
properiapomenon : kim Xut.

b. a polysyllabic paroxytone (vith penult either long or short) be-
comes proparoxytone : mahtvio muSrut, rktKw vXittOfuv.

178. In composition the accent is usually recessive (159) in the
case of substantives and adjectives, regularly in the case of verbs ;

a. Proper names having the form of a substantive, adjective, or participle,
Dfoally change the accent ; 'EXrii (Arif), rXaCirai (^XavjcJt), TAwr (vcXSr).

b. Special cases will be considered under Declension and Inflection.

PROCLITICS

179. Ten monosyllabic words have no accent and are closely con-
nected with the following word. They are called proditica (from
rpoaAfrw lean fonaard). They are :

The forms of the article beginning with a vowel (6, ft o^i >0 i th«
prepositioDa tr, tit (It), i( (ix) ; the conjunction d if; Sk cu, that
(also a preposition to) ; the n^ative adverb ov (ovk, ov^i 137).

I _ I; C00g[c

48 ACCENT, ENCLITICS [tSo

UBQ. A proclitic sometimes takes an accent, thus :

c oAat the end of aaeuteDce: ^ifi, jof; do fou mijf to or not f r^ tV
fi; for why Rol f Alao bB wt etaodiog alone.

b. /;. if, &nd lit receive an acule In poetry when the; follow the word to
whlob they belong and stand at the end of the Tene : laiOr f{ out of evtU 3 472.

e. iit at becomes &t In poetry when It followa lie noim : Mi St a»a god. fa
ntaniling for avr«t is written fit even in proae CoM* At not eoen tAut).

d. When the proclitic pteoedea an enclitla (188 e): tr run.

N. —i naed as « relative (for Bt, 1106) is written J. On I demonatrative
■ea 11 li.

ENCLITICS

ISL Enclitics (from iyK>Jvio lean on, upon) are woids attaching
themselres closely to the preceding word, after which they are pro-
nounced rapidly. Enclitics usually lose their accent. They are :

a. The penonal pronouns fioS, /lol, /J; mu, rol, rf; oC, tt, f, and (in
poetry) r^lri.

b. The indeflnlte pronoun rti, t1 in all cases (including ro6, tv tor nrit,
rti<l, but excluding Im = nrd); the Indsfinile adverbs wai (or raA), riF, mi,
roMc, ror/, ri, Tiii. When nsed as inteiTogatives theee words are uot anclitlo
(tIi, t(, tdB (or iMi), rS, '•J. 'Wi*, irir*, xfi, wii).

C. All distyllablo forms of the present iadicatiTe of ilid am and #wiJ My
(f.e. all except rf and ^i).

d. The lortteles yi, ri, raS, rfy ; the Inseparable -it In Stt, Toairlt, etc

K. — Enclitics, when they retain tbeir accent, are called orthotone. See 187.

162. The accent of an enclitic, when it is thrown back upon the
preceding word, always appeals as an acute : AJp re (not 0^ re) from

183. The word preceding an enclitic is treated as follows:

a. An oxytone keeps Its accent, and does not change an acute to a grave
(IM a): JUi fiM, niXJt ^lrT^.

b. A perispomecon keeps Its accent; ^i\li rt, rl/AQr rifuw,

C. A proparozytone or proper! spoinen on receives, as an additional accent,
the aCDtS on the nlUma: itSpurSt rii, irSpurol tint, ^louifd rtiur; ir^Ar fti,
raltit Tint.

d. A paroiytone receives no additional accent ; a inonoayllablc enclitla losee
it* accent (x'^P^ ''"> ^''^' /">"), & dissyllabio encliUc rett^ns its accent (x>^<
rifii, ^(Xm TiWi) except when its final vowel in elided (171 a).

ISl D. Also encIIUc are the dialectic and poetical forms >i«0, ato, rtO, rot, ri,
and t6 (accus. = ci), U, tl, IBto, idr, f{>, r^, <r^Ir, ai^, «^, r^wfr, aiiur,
r^si, v^tt and <r^t, si/iia ; also the particles riotwtw (not •<■•), 1^ «l («<*),
ftf'i ^<( ; Mid Epio ircl. Ion. elt, (Aou mt

t, Google

i«] ACCENT, PUNCTUATION 48

S. — Like puozTtonee are treated propertapomeiui ending in f or ^ when
followed b; a dlBsyllablc enclitic : c^puf iarl ■ and ao probabl; i^pii( m.

«, A procliUc (1711) takes an acute : I* nn, tt rtm.

184. Since aa eocUtic, on losing lis accent, fonoa a part of tbe preceding
word, the writing itSpvrn rtt would violate the rule (141)3 I^^ °° word can tie
■ccented on a syllable before the antepenult A paroiytone recalres no addi-
tional accent in order that two successive syUablea may not hare the acute (not

IBS. Wlien several enclitics occur in succesion, each receives an accent
from Ibe following, only the last having no accent : «f woi rd rin tSat Ix^pi' if
tvtr any one mito an enems anj/where T. i. 47.

186. Sometimes an enclitic unites with a preceding word to form a compound
(cp. Lat. -que, -«e), wbicb is accented ss If the enclitic were sUll a separate word.
Thna,oiT<(nato9Te), AvTf, (IVt, Kalrei.otrtrot, t^rtii, Jmwair; usually rt^(&rx(p)l
and ttae inseparable St in Mt, reirei, ttKott; and -9t and -x' in ttBt (poetic offc),
nlxt. (^'t ^TiH, etc., are not real exceptions to the rules of accent (163, 164).

a. oUt re able is sometimes written tl6irrt. oik »B> is usually written sweii*
mot tKerefore, and not ther^ore f in distinction from eimir therefore. iyA y*
and iitat i* may become tytayt, tinaiyi.

1S7. An enclitic retains lie accent (Is ortbotone, op. 181 N.): ■

a. When it Is emphatic, as in conb^wts : $ rsl ^ tv rarpl rm either to j/ou
or to fovr father {iimS^-iiial, iiii are emphatic : tbii koI lyol t«ll me too), and
at the beginning of a sentence or clause : ^fil yip I tay in fact.

b. hrl is written tan at the beginning of a sentence ; when it expresaea
existence or pontbility ; when it follows otx, ni, tl, in, ami, iXXd (or d\X'),
T«¥To (or tiwt'}; and in tmr el some, IvTirfrf aometimee. llms, tt lirriv tur^tt
ff a it to, TavTo S trri that vihicii eziata.

C. In the phrases nrt /lir . . . rirri H, rirJt /lir . . . ririt tL

d. After a word suffering elision : rsXXol f ttah (for U tlvit), raOr' #>t1L

e. When a disqillablo enclitic follows a paroxytone (188 d).

N. 1. — When they are used as indirect reflexives In Attic prose (1228), the
pronouns of the third person oil and vifiUi are orthotone, ol is generally enclitic,
while t is generally orthotone.

N. 2. — After oxytone prepoelUons and fi«*a enclitic pronouns (except rlt)
Dsually keep their accent (^I ral, not twl aoi ; tuta reS, not Irtti m ; fHmt tov,
not ttvm roe), iiu^, iiui, t/ti are used after prepositions (except wp^ iim ; and
in the dntma i^ im).

MARKS OF PUNCTUATION

188. Greek has four marks of punctuation. The cnmma and period have
the same forms as in GnKlish. For the colon and semicolon Greek has only one
sign, a point above the line ( ' ): al St ^Sfiat frtiSarra- triertuar yip a^^ and
U«y gladly obeyed; for thry trustfd him %. A. 1. 2. 2. The mark of interroga-
tion (i) is the same ss our semicolon : ir& tA^bC; for why notf

uogic

PART II

INFLECTION

109. Putt of Speaeh. — Greek ha^ the foUowiag parts of speech:
substantives, adjectives, pi'oaouns, verbs, adverbs, prepositions, con^
iaiictloiis, and particles. lu this Crrainmar noun is oaed to include
both the substantive and the adjective.

190: Inflection is the change in the form of nouns, pronouns, and
verbs which indicates their relation to other words in the sentence.
Zkdeneion is the inflection of substantives, adjectives (including par-
ticiples), and pronouns; conjugation is the innectioa (^ verbs.

191. Stems, —Inflection I« Bhowa by the addition of endingg to the »tem,
which is that part of sword which sets forth the Mm,' the endings 6t the word
to stand In various relations to oUier words In the sentence. The «iidings
originally had distinct meaningB, which are now seldom qtpuenL In Tsrba they
represent the force of the personal pronouns in English ; in nonns they often
oonespond to the Ideas expressed by of, to, for, eta. Thus, die stem \07a-
becomes Xfryo-i tDord, the stem Xryo- becomes ifya-iur tM (oy. Whether a stem
le nsed ss a noua or a verb depends solely on ila signification ; many stems are
used botb tor nouns and for verbs, as rifid- in ri>i4 honour, rlpa- in ri/i^-u
/ Aonottr; Arif- in i\vl(^S)-t hopr, Arl^n Ihope (ArtS-jM). The pure stem,
that is, the stem without any ending, may serve as a word ; as x<^ land, X^
■peoifc / XAy* oh word I

192. The stem often changes in form, but not in meaning, in nouns and
Tertie. Thus, the stem of XAyo-' word la Xirvii- or Xdyi-, of rari)^ father is rartp-
(strong stem) or warp- (weak stem) ; of \tlrt-iur tee Uav is X(in-, of f.XI«o-
lur we Uft is Xiro-. The verbal stem Is also modified to Indicate change in time :
Tlii.lt<9-iur tee thail honour.

193. Eoota. — The fundamental part of a word, which remains after the
word has been analyzed inio alt its component parts, is called a not. When
a stam agrees in form with a root (as in raS-it, gen. of wtii foot) It is oalled a
root-»tem. A root contains the mere Idea of a word in the vaguest and moet
abstract form possible. Thus, the root Xo*. and in another form iay, contains
the idea of mginif simply. By the addition of a formative element a we arrive
at the stems Xttd- and Xbyo- in tJyo-/ui ve Mjr, )Jn»-* word ((.<. what la aald).

189-197] DECLENSION 46

Words are bnllt hj adding to tiie root certain formatiTe sofflxea by vhleb the
■tern and then the woid, ready for use, is constructed. Thus, from the root Xu
■re formed X^4i-i lootitig, y^-rpa-t ran»on, Xu-n-ii-i able to looie, Xu-^m to
have looted. The formation of the stem by the addition of suffixes to the root
is treated in Pan HI. llie root itself may asBume various forms irithoat chati^
of meaoing, as \ty in \iy-B-iur we saj/, Xoy in Xir-o-i word.

N. ^Since Greek is connected with the other Indo-European languages, the
roolA whioh we establish In Greek by analysis of a word into its simplest form .
often reappear in the connected languages (p. 1, A). Thus, the root i>tp dl ^pu
f bear is seen in Sanskrit bhirami, LaL fero, Oerm. ffe^baren. The assomption
of roots is merely a grammatical convenience in the analysis of word-forme, and
their determination is part of comparative grammar. Koots and suffixes as soch
□ever existed as independent words in Greek, or Indeed in any known period of
the p«rent language from which Greek and the other Indo-European tongues
are derived. The theory that all roots am monoHyUables Is ill supported. As
far back as we can follow the history ol the Indo-European languages we find
only compleU words; hence their analysis Into component morphological ele-
ments is merely a soienliflc device for purposes of arrangement and clasuficaUon.

DECLENSION
IM. Declension deals with variations of number, gender, and case.

195. HimibeT. — There are three numbers: singular, dual, and
pluraL The dual speaks of ttoo or a pair, as rta o^6kiA^a) the two
"pea; but it is not often used, and the plural (which denotes more
than one) is frequently substituted for it (m 6^6iiXfUji the eyes).

196. Qoider. — There ate three genders : masculine, feminine, and

a. Q«nder strictly marks sex-distinction. Bat in Greek, as in German and
French, many Inanimate objects are regarded as masculine or feminine. Such
nordfl are said to have > grammatical ' gender, which is determined only by their
form. Words denoting objects without natural gender usually show their gram-
matical gender by the form of the adjective, as itaxpii fJiyat a long tpeeeh,
^oxfA rfrvt a long island, iiatpAi Tcixef a long mall.

b. ^te gender of Greek words is usually Indicated by means of the article ;
t tor maacnUne, 4 for feminine, ri for uenter.

197. Rule of Natural Gender. — Nouns denoting male persons are
masculine, nouns denoting female persons are feminine. Thus,
o vavrtp sattaan, 6 trTpaTttinp soldier, ^ yw^ woman, ^ xoptj maiden.

a. A whole class is designated by the masculine : ol iiSpuroi men, i.e. men
and teamen.

b. EXCBPTIOHS TO THB RuLE OF N*TURtL QeKUBB. ~~ DimlnUtlveS In -lOt

■re neater (109d), as ri drSpiiruif tnantkin (_i ArBptrwat man), ri raiJloi' little
child (male or female, i or 4 rait ekild), ri yiratar little woman (4 yi^ aoman).
Also the words riMmr, riian child (stricdy > thing bom '), ArSpimter ec^'ae.

K.)0^^lc

46 DECLENSION [igS

. 196. Cominon Qender. — Haujr nouiu denoting persons are either meaoallne
or feminine. Tb\iB, i nii bov, ii rait girt, 6 e4bi god, ii Srii (4 Ml poet.) ^oddeu.
So with names o( anlaials : 6 p«vt ox, 4 ^ui cow, i rrrai horte, 4 t-rwot mare.

.a. Some namee of dnim&ls liave only one grsmmatical gender wltboat regard
to sex, aa i \ayiii he-hare or the-han, 4 iXi^^ he-fox or she-fox.

199. Gender of Sezlesa Objwta. — The gender of most nouns denot-
. ing sexless objects lias to be learned by the endings (211, 228, 255)

and by observation. The following general rules should be noted.

a. Maaciillne are the names of windi, months, and most tivert. Tbns, 6 Bep^it
the NorUi Wind, i 'Enra^i^KJv Heeatombaeon, i Ki7«urri( CrphUgvt.

N. — Tbe gender of these proper names la made (o correspond to j dn/wt wind,
6 /i^f numth, i waTaiiM river. In the case of winds and rivers tlie gender may
be due in part to peiHoniflcatioii.

b. Feminine are the names of almost all countries, aia-nda, cHiet, treea,
and plaiOa. Tlius, 4 'Arnicf AUiea, i) A^Xot Dtlos, 17 KApiiAit Corinth, 4 ittrn
pine, ii tiMtXot vine. The gender here follows that of ^ 75 or i^ x^P^ land,
eountr]/, i it)aot island, i> riXii cUv, 4 SpSs, originally tree in general, hnt later
oak (t6 iiripar Is the ordinary word for tree').

c. Feminine are most abstract iivords, that is, words denoting aguali'iyoracoii-
dUUin. Thus, 4 itp^li tirtue, * tSraia good-ieill, ^ raxirtii tvHflneM, ^ ftrrd hope,

A. Neuter are diminutives (197 b), words and expressions quoted, letters of
tbe alphabet, infinitives, and indeclinable nouns. Thiu, ri biitU the word 'yoti,'
t4 yrQSt fffouri* the eaying ' learn to know thyself,' ri SXifia alpha, ri roiltte*
to educitte, rh xp"^' neeettUy.

N. — But some names of women end in -mip (IBTb): i TXvKipier Glyeerium.

200. KematicB. — a. Moat of the exceptions to IW a-b are due to
tbe endings j e.g. ^| Aiiftj Letlte, i) Zritf Styx (rivers of the Lower World), r4
'Apyot Argos, 6 KaXoiiir Calydon, ri 'IXior ilium, dI AfX^I Delphi, 6 Xvr&i lotus.

b. Change in gender ia often associated with change in forni ; i Xiirot lie-wolf,
4 Ucura ihe-molf, t roiip-^t poet, ij ni-firpm poetest, i ffivrot and ^ pmrii life,
4 Tpirot manner, 4 ^P^irii TOM.

c. Tlie gender of one word may influence that of another word of like mean-
ing. Thus 4 i^ot island and 4 ^lAit stoiut are feminine probably because of
4 V4 ^'^ ^"<1 4 rirfi rock.

201. CaHS. — There are five cases ■ nominative, genitive, dative,
accusative, and vocative. The genitive denotes from aa well as of,
the dative denotes to or for and also by, with, on, in, at, etc. The
other cases are used as in Latin.

a. The genitive, dative, and accusative are called oblique cases to distin-
guiah them from the nominative and vocative.

202. The vocative is often like the nominative in the singular ; in
the plural it is always the same. Nominative, vocative, and accussr
tive have the same form in neuter words, and always have « ia the

•dg] DECLENSION 47

plaial. In the dual there are two forms, one for nomioatiTe, accusor
tive, and Tocative, the other for genitive and dative.

203. Lott Caaea. — Greek has generally lost the formt of tbe inatnuneDtat
and locaUve cases (nbicb have become fused with tbe dative) and of tbe ablative.
The Greek dative is used to express by, as in pUf, Lat. vl; with, as in Ufcii vUh
itontt; and in, on, ae in yg on the earth. From may be exprrased by the geni-
tive : rtfpu ZwipTVf far fivm Sparta. Wlien the genitive snd dative do duty
for tti« ablative, prepositions are often used. InstanoeB of the forms of tbe
lost cases are given in 341.

3(M. Dedeniioaa. — There are three declensions, which are named
from the stems to which the case endings are attached.

1. Blest or A-declensioD, with stems in S 1 v„„„i tw.1ot.o;™

2. Second or Odeclension, with stems in o f ^°^°' i«cien8ion.

3. Third or Consonant declension, with stems in a consonant or in i

and V.
The nominative and accusative are alike in the singular and plural
of all neuter nouns. The nominative and vocative are alike m the
pllu«^

OENEBAL RIJLBS FOR THE ACCENT OF NOUNB

ate. SubstantiveB and adjectives accent, in the oblique cases, the
same sjUable as is accented in the nominative, provided the ultima
permits (163) ^ otherwise the following syllable receives the accent

1 decL MXarra, SaUrriTt, taXdTrn, M\aTTar, MXaTru (16Q), eaXirraa,

S decL did^Hrsj, ir8piirou, irSpiiwif, irepurar, lr9pvrBi (109), iti9p<irur,

irip^Mt, irBpiliwIiai.
3 decl. \iuw, Xhrrot, Uorrt, Xtorra, \tortn, Xcirrur.
Adj. : Utoi (287), dflo, &{ur, dffou, dfCSi, dffv, dfl;, dfbr, AfliM*.
X^>1<" (299), x<Vl«T0'i XopfcTi, X'^rra, xapi*"""'-

206. The character of the accent depends on tbe general Uws (167, IAS,
170). Thus, itmi, nm (169) ; ISpaw, Siipoii, lOpa i eupA, aiiiiarm, rw/tAritr,

207. Oxytones of tbe first and second declemdons are perispomena In
the genitive and dativa of all numbers : rtii, aaat, cti^, aa&r, aaali ; feit,
(tav, 0(y, SiSr, 0niT ; ^nptt, patpoB, ^Kinpip, ^np&r, fhiMpMt,

200. The genitive plnral of all sulwtantlves of the first declension bos the

elrCQIDflex on the « of -ur. TliUS, rfc^ niur; MXarra SaAarrlSr; roUmt raU-
TWF ; ftiMt nanQr.

209. The fern. gen. ptnnl of adjectives and particlpies In -«i has the same
accent and form as the niBSCullue and neuter. Thus, >l«u«i, gan. ^ lunlw
(in all gei^ers) ; Xvi^inDi, gem. pL \umfiiruw (In all genden).

i,vGooglc

FIRST DECLENSION (OrSTEMS)

CASE ENDINGS OF NOCM8

TOWBL Dbclbhsioh

CONMHAHT DlCLEHBlOIl

Nom.

Q«D.

Dat.
Acq.

none or Uke Nom.

Qen.
Dat.
Ace

*(-•

«. The stem ma; undergo a change npon Ibi anion with the cue ending, aa
tn the genitive plural of the Qrat declenaioD (SIS). Cp. 258, 204, 20B, etc.

b. In the Towel declenalon, -i of the nominative plural ia borrowed from iLe
D ol pTononnB (tmtro-i).

SUBSTANTIVES
PIRST DECLENSION (STEMS IN 5)

211. Stems in d are masculine or feminine. The feminine noroi-
natire singular ends in -a, -a, or -ij; the masculine nominative eingu-
lar adds t to the stem, and thus ends in -de or ■^.

e any) with the

Nom. « or£ i| I

Gen. a-« or n^ t[-^

Dat. a-i or i|.<, tf^ I

Ace S-v or 4<* i|-v I

Voc S or& r, I

Masc. Fbh. Pl.

a-it or a-i«-i(»)
it (tot t^)

Habc.Fik.Ddal

Obaerre the shortening of the stem in vocative Angular and plnral, in nomi-
native and dative plural, and genitive and dative daaL

i,vGooglc

sts] FIRST D£CLBMSION (a-STEH8) 49

213. Acoeat — For ipecial mle of accent in the gaoltlve plural, see 20S.
The genitive plonl ii always perispomenon since -Sr is contracted from -4-uf de-
rived from original (and Horn.) -4l-ui> (&1). Final -w la treated aa abort (16S).

c The form of the gen. pi. is taken from the pronominal adjective, Le.
(Horn.) Mur ;odd«s*M follows the analogy of (Horn.) ri»r (832 D.) for r£-
(«-)«>, c& 1*L iitd-rum deo-rtim.

314. The dialects stiow various forms.

215. D&tive Plural. — The ending -auriM occurs in Attic poetry
(SutOMn from Si'mj rigM, Semroraun from &cnronjs lord).

a. Attio inacripUons to 420 b.c. have --gai (written -vri), -^i, and (after f,
I, f) -fri (written -imri) and -d*-i. Thus, tpaxjii'i and SpaxM^n drachma*,
ra/if^i and ratiiaat fUwordt. -tro-t and -jw-i aro properly endings of the locative
caae (341).

214 D. 1. For i|, Doric and Aeollc have orij^al S ; ihna, itxi, rfcdt, ritg,
rfso* 1 ToUrdt, Kpirdt, 'ArpclSat.

2. Ionic has I) for the B of Attic even after t, t, and /> ; thus, yn4, aUlit, dY«Mt
I'^lfi^, fw(ni (nom. ^ipA), f*qrfi)i. Tbua, iy«p^, -4ii -S> -4>> '<<r''<r>i -"i -Vi -<l>'-
But Horn, has M goddea, 'Epiulii Sermet.

8. The dialecU admit -i In the nom. sing, lees often than doea Attie. Thus,
Ionic rpt/trti (tern, urtfii (ovour (Att. rpi^-wtt, cnffa). Dor. riX^ daring. Ionic
has q for i In Ihe abstracts In -il^, -alii (iX^fit^1^ truth, ttrol^ good-vitU). Hom.
has rtit^ oh foaidtn from rCf^.

4. Horn. sing. masc. — Horn, has -ra for Tir> in Ivrira AorKman, frrtr)^'^
driver of hortet, rt^^intpira eloud-eolleOor, nianxatra donb-Aofrisd ; and, with
receaaiTe accent, furrfrra counMlIor. So in the adj. lifiowa far-toviiding. Cp.
IaC poeta, KTlba.

5. Gen. slug. masc. — (a) -Bo, the original form from Sr{i)e, Is used by Hom.
(ArpMia), It contracta In Aeolie and Doric to -a CArptfid).

(b) -M, from ipa (= io) hy 34, la also used by Eom., who makes it a single
ayllable by synizeais (60), as in 'ArpiiStff. Hdt. has -tm, as ToMrtv (1S3 a).

(c) -• in Hom. after a vowel, hapiu (nom. Bep^i).

S. Accoa. sing, masc — In proper names HdL often haa -« borrowed from
> stoma (264), as MtXrxUn lor MJ^riiiir-r.

7. Dual. — Bom. ttaa the nom. dual of masculines only. In the gen. and dat.
Hom. has -ai' and also -our.

8. Oen. plnr. — (a) -An*, the original form, occnrs in Rom. i/ieuaiuw, i.ya-
fittr). In Aeollc and Doric -dwr contracts lo (b) -&v (iytpSr). The Doric -£r
is found also in the choral songs of tbe drama (irer/iS* rocki). (c) -Jav, the
Ionic form, appears In Homer, wbonsoally makes it a single syllable by synlzesls
(60) as in ^vA^, from povX't plan, -^u* la from i^r, Ionic for -iar. (d) -Av
in Horn, generally aft«r vowels (nXu-iftr, from jrXvhf hut).

D. Dat. plnr. : -)i?i(i-), -jrt, generally before vowela, and (rarely) -oit in Hom.
Ionic baa -gri, AeoHc -<uffi(»), -aa, Doric -a«.

10. Accna. plv. : tn, -4i, di in wiooa Doric dialects, -it In Aeollo.

iog[c

FIRST DECLENSION (tt-STEM8)

:. FEHININBB

land

4*1

4+»rt

f|i-V»

tOUfflM

<ilUnn

Norn.
God.

AOO.
Voo.

X'»

X^l*-

X^l*

,X»r™

•oXdnu

MX«TT«

N.A.V.
O.D.

X*f

*u>

••XAna

N.T. x'P<^ ***^ ^inrat |utpu yXAttu MXa-rfu

Oen. X<*l>'^ (IkAv ^vy»v piLfidii Ykan-rAv faXaiTTAv

DU. X'ip*^ vtKaLt ^infolf |io(^ait 'yUrraH •aX&i-ntw

Ace. X^fA vtic&t +VY^ fuilpSi Y^ArrKt BaUrra*

fipa (eiMon, itfi/^ day, irctd shadoa, ittx'V battle, rlx") art, yniitn judgment, ri>i^
Aonor, iprrii virlue, /laSfa mtise, wp&pa prow, Sfiafa wagon, tifa opSnlim.

317. Rdlss. — a. If the nominatlTe aln^ttr ends in alplui preceded by a
Towel (f-icid fhddow) or p (_)ielpa.), alpha U kept tbrongboat Uke singular.

b. it the nommative singular ends In alpha preceded by a coiuonant not p,
oIpAa is changed to ir in the genitive and dative singular.

c U the nominative singular ends in q, q is kept in lUI the cases of tbe singater.

d. When the genitive singular has -1^, final a of the nominative singular ia
tUteaga short - when the genitive singular has -at, the final a is ffeiterallif long,

Feminines fall into two classes :

zia (I) Feminines with s or i) in all the ca^es of the singular.

After (, t, nr p, K appears in all the oases of the singular, aa In 7c>imI roM,
tlxli houtf; x<^l" land. Otherwise, if throughout the Bingutar, as >4inr viUorj/.

a. After B, we find both I and i|, as aroi porch, 0bi) thoM, d(o4 hearing,
^ current, ^pomegranate. Aft«rp we have it in ic6pti girl, tipti neek (31).

219. (II) Feminines with a in the nominative, accnsatiTe, and
yocative singular. The quantity of the vowel ia generally showti
by the accent (163, 164).

In this class are included:
I. Substantives having r (E, f, rr, or tt), I, iX, or air before the final a show
i In noin., accus., and voo. sing., and q In gen. and dat. alng, Thtia.

U3] FIBST DECLENSION (S-STEMS) 51

pa9ra mwM, luiritt, ua^Vt 'Wfo vmffon, Tpd*t[)i table, yXSrra tottgiu,
^t^ root, ifiMxi context, XibiH ttonea. Uthera ara riV daring, Starra
mode of lift, iiaiAt thorn, itviajtg.
t. SubsUntives in i in nom., accns., and toc ^ng., and 3 In g«u. and dsL slug,

a. Subotantives In -ria and -rpta denotiug temalea, as paaC\tut qveen (but

^otfiXili kingdom), fiXr^ia female harper; so the fom. of adj. Id -m,
aa 7Xiijni», ^Xuiiria Moee*.

b. Abstracts in -tia and -oia from adjectives in -qt and -wt, as dXiffeia truth

(fmni i\ifi^ true), cCrata (food wl<2 (from ttnvt, eCMot jtfnd, 200).
C Most HubaLantives In -pa aft«r a diphthong or u, as^ipa/ote, 7^^vpa 6H(^

230. Exceptions to 219, 1 ; ttpirri tenif>Je (later tip^), tpai) dew; to 2 b; in
Attic poetry, dXT#((S, linla, iyroUi tgiionxnee, which owe Ihelr d to the inflnenoe
of the genitive and dative iXifitiat, iXifiii^, etc.

221. Moot, if not all, of the aubatantivea In K are formed by the addition of
IbesofBx j/xQt ta (20); thus, yXflrTafrom y\ux-iP- (cp.7XM>:rKi joints), y/^pa
from yt^vp-iM, Sbrtipa^ giver from Strrtp-tn (and so ^fpmiaa, bearing from ftparr-
(•), >w^ from imp-^ tliiivrp-M.

222.

II. HABCULINH

AMBvlKt

(«s«a-)

irottnn man

(««ra.)

(.P.T5-)

judge

(•ArptLaS-)
gon of Atretts

Horn.
Geo.
Did.
Aco.
Voc,

MtvOt-V

wAvtK

woXfni-i
mXtrott

WdXiTTl-Y

-nXtra

'Atp.18,,^
'ArpiCSo*
■Arp.[H'
■ATpf(Si|.»
'ATp.»n

S. A. V.
G.D.

Nivfauv

«oU-Ruv

•ATprito

'ArptttM*

H.V.

QOL

Dat.
Aw.

nKtfai

loXlTOl

w«XlrA*
MXfraM

K|.»t,

•ATprtSo.
'A»p.J«-
■ArptBow
'Atp,[8«.

rafilil iteward, Alttlii Aentat, ~ ra&ri^ lailoT, rofinn hoirtman, aTpartilrrrfl SOl

dter, Jw»*ni« rvler, — >ioftrr)Ji pupit, ratip-^t poet — ll^/wirt Pertiari.
223. AGC«at — The vocative of iwrir^i tori Is i^inrora.

I z:-:l,vG00glc

62 FIRST DECLENSION (S-STEMS) [104

394. K and % — In the flud syUaUe of th« stognlAr a appean after t, t, and p ;
otherwlae we find ir- Cp. 218.

a. ExcepUoQB are compounds in -utrfip: itv-^frp meamm- of land.

229. 6«nitiTB alngtllar. — llie form in -«u la borrowed from the genitive
nngulai of Ihe eecond declenHion. A few words in 41, generally nHmes of persons
not Greeks, liare -i, tbe Doric geuitlTO (iHD. 6) : 'Arripit Htmnib^, gen. 'Arriffi.

226. Vocative aintrtilar. — Masculines In -£t Iiare the Tocatlve In-a (>«arfd) ;
those In-rqt bave -i (reXtra), all others in -ift have -i) ('Arpelliri Epo«l)<l son 0/
JTranos) except names of nations and compounds: Uipvi Pertian, XxOSi
Sej/thian, ym-iiH-pi (noro. yttt'iiiTptis nteaturtr 0/ land), rotJo-r^IjScE gsmnattte

COHTRACT8 (PBHINtNBS AND MASCULINBS)

227. Contracts in a or n from ta or aa have the circumflex in all
fihe cases : nominative feminine -a, -fj, masculine -at, -^.

S lamina

(B<wa-for

{■Ewi^ for

Norn.
Gen.
Dkt
Aco.

1"*

Iff,.,

N. A.V.
Q.D.

rtKatv
PLDRAL

M.Y.
Oun.

f-

!'*■

•VMt

The dual and plural of 'Ep/i^i mean atatae* of HenuM.
Other examples : 4 'A^ra jKAeno (from 'AArH(0°-)< t4 earth (7*3- or ■ya^-')
with no plural in Attic, 4 7aX$ unuel <7aX«-), 4 dStX^iS^ nfeM (lUfX^tM-),
d 'AT<\X^t Apellt* ('AircXXia.)'

SST D. HdL has itrtat, urt&r, /u^ai, tQ and ytUr, "Zfii^i, Bsp^i. Horn, has
A^*aJi|, y4 (aDdY<uk>i irGcAi, 'I^vvH* 214 D. 2, BiipA)i.

«I]

SECOND DECLENSION (o-STEMS)

58

SECOND DBCLBNHION (STEHS IN o)
2281 O stems in the nomiDatiye add -t to the atem in maaoulines
and femininea ; -r in nentera. The feminises, of which there an
few, are declined like the mitsculines. In the neuters, nominatire,
vocative, and accusative singular have the same form (in -o-r) ; in
the plural these oases end in -a.

229. TABLE OP 1

Uus. ud Win. Snt

Nom. »-« fr

Gen. •» (tor».(t)e)
Dtt. ♦(foro-t)

Voo. < o-«

N. A. V. m
a. D. OHV

Dftt •-•« or •*«{.)

Ago. «vt (for v-n) 1

VOC BH 1

K. FlDkl ~M Is treated u short (160).

b. The dftt. dDg. in -y repreaenta the onion of the Btem vawet -o uid al,
the original caae eDdlng in tbe I. E. l*ngw>gaa. Fofidb in -«, &b Sinai at howe,
m»j be locsativea (-« + (, the locAtlve ending). — The stem vowel o vuies witli t,
which appears In the vocative Blng., and in Ta>4li)/wl (locative) in fall forte. —
N. A. y. dual -H is for I. E. Su. — The genitive pi. -utr ia due to the union of
-< + wr, which contracted to -wr in the earliest period of the language. — The
neuter plural is probably the lello of a feminine oollective ending in -4^ which
wsa ibortened to -i.

33a The dialects shov various forma.

331.

■ihOTM

(«<k)

Toe

m

■HD. 1. Gen. aing. — mo, the original form, appeara In Horn. rotJ/iati.
By low of 1 (43) ocmea -oo, which Is aometimes read In Horn. (AUXm for Al6\mi
1 30). By eonttacdon of w comei -vt found In Bom., Ionic, UUdei Dorlo.
H yields m In Aeollc and Severer Doric (twru).

Z DnaL— -«FlnHom. (firrour).

3. Dct pi. Ha'i(r) Horn., Aeollc, Ionic.

4. Acc pL —-on Is from -or-i (found in Cretan), that Ii, the accns. ahig. + 1.
From -an comes -wt Severer Doric, -mi Aeoltc, -at Cretan and in Hat. postlj.
4VT ii Horn., Ionic, and Hlldsr Doric.

SECOND DECLENSION (O^TEHS)

i fr««t Aorw i &v0pirrBt man H iSAt wag

Masculine : \i7c1 teord, Sijiioi people, jDuXoi «Iae«, ilrJutvf <Janifcr, r jXt^iot loar ;
d7^ Jlei'^ rorofidi rin«r, ipiS/iit number. Feminine: r^roi Caland, Ifwtipei
mainland ; i(ii) rpo^i nurte. Neuier : l^rror tsoril:, TTipirutn^, IffrKftUNner.

332. FemisiiieB. — a. See 197 for tvii dautrUer-ln-Iau; see 199 for r^aot
Mand (cp. £00 c), A9^t (the Island of) Delot, Kiptftot Corinth, ^rri* (acorn-
bearing) oak, d/ivfXoi Vint.

b. Some are properly adjectives used substantively : SiAXtrrot (_Kil, tXOttb
qiefcA) dialect, liitirrpot (_scil, Ypo*'*'^ 'i"') dfamefer, aCXiwt (Mfl, Mpa door)
ftotue-door, r^iXirroj (scif. ^uX^ counctl) ie; idatvvt bod]/, ipium and lirttpet
(icil. x<!'fiA country) desert and mainland.

c. Words (or toajr ; 6Sii and icAci/Ak isay ,' and iiia(iT6i caiTiagt-road, irpawit
foot-path, which may be adjectival (b) with AJAi omitted.

d. Various otbar words ; pieam totich-itnne, pip^oi book, yipKio* crane,
yuASct jau), 'yi>^iH cAalifc, Sik™ writing-tablet, Si>t6t beam, Spiaet dets, cd/uHt
oven, tipSorai kneading-lrovgh, ci^vrii cheMt, nirpQi dvng, Xqvit tein^prtMM,
\tBot Mtone ('200 c), r6aet diaeiue, rMrftt brick, ^dpSoi rod, vapAi e^fffln, ffrnlAi
ash<j, rd^pot fr«ncA, x^Xif coffer, ^d^ifief sand, y^^ftet pebMc.

333. Vocative. — The nomiuative 6t6^ is used instead of the Toctk-
tive. iSei^ brother retracts the accent (aStXifx).

234. Dative Plural. — The eoding •oun(v) often appears in poetry,
ruely in Attic prose (Plato).

ju In Old KMo inscriptlone -oit displaces -eiei^r) about 444 b.o.

CONTRACTED fiUBSTANTlVEB

235. Stems in co and 00 are contracted according to 60, 61. « in
the neuter becomes a (56).

SU D. Homeric and Ionic generally bave tbe open forms, ttt^x^ wfne-
poHr«r does not contract In Attic since it stands for tlrax^fi-

•3"]

SECOND DECLENSION (0-STEMS)

i vD(f mtttd i mp(«Xaiit laCUng around ri bmtr boH4

iptrXoo-)
(ir(ptir\iai>) «4p[*)kov
(rtph-Xoo-r) 'KiptwXov-v

(•*-)
C**^)

(in- Aw)

(>dlHf) TOif

(n^rXoM)
(Tf^rXiut) inplvXav

i w^oOt (T\ioi) voyage, i ^Pt (piet) Mream, 1

(iffTia) irni

will, 6ffTii, not

236. ACGMiL— a. Tbeuominadveilaalialn'^uiarlr ox;U>ne:
fA, <rTi3 Bccordtog to ITl, N, 3.

b. nfvSv (idfHF) ba*litt receives Ita accent (not riraur) from tliat of the genl-
lire and dative uiwEI, ica>v. Cp. 290 c.

c. ComponndB retain the accent on the syllable that has It in the Doailnative
•ingolar : f nrrXavt bom fn-Xaoi ; tKwXtv (not fn-Xoi) from ticrXiiHi ; fm-Xwr (not
/nXdr) from Jn-XlwK.

ATTIC DECLENSION

237. Some eubstantiTes ending in -tiof are placed under the Second
Declension because thejr are derived fi'om earlier o stems preceded
by a long Towel (-tmt from -ijot, 34). A few othera have a coasonant
before -mc. The vocative has no special form.

N, — This deelanaion ta called "Attic" because the words In questioQ geaei>-
ally show -*n In Atdo and -ot in the KoluA dialect (p. 3, F).

238. i viAt temple

Horn. *«4^ (lonlo n|t-i) N. A. vA (Ionic rq J) Xom. My' (lonio ni*0

Gen. M* ( " nfoO) O. D. m^*( " nfoii) Gen. raiv ( " rr^r)
Bat .eV ( " 'W) Dat. m^ ( " Fii«-f)

Ace. vi4r C " "»*-»•) Ace. vMlt ( " n|o^)

56 THIRD DECLENSION [930

A. So i X«ih people, i H»An#i Menelavt, ( Myiit Jutre. Obaerre that » It
foDDd In ever; farm, uid that It takes 1 tubicript io tha datlrB of all nomben
where an ordinary e stem baa 1.

b. There are do neuter subetantlves belon^ng to the Attic declendon in
Btandard classical literature ; but neuter adjectives (289) end in -ur.

G. Kiii and moat vroids of this declension ovre their forma to tranater of
quantity (34) or to sbort«nlr% (89). Thus, ttiit is from mfit ( = Doric >a6t>,
ffiit from n)Ar ; reif is from niv- Xa7(Ai Is Contracted from Xafwit.

d. Id the accusative siogular aome words end in -u or -at, as \ayii or \ny6r
hare. So i 'Jtffun, 4 K/ui, 4 T/u>, 4 K"i< A Htnn. 4 f<>n dauiii always haa fu.

339. AcMDt —a. The accent of the nominative is kept Id all caaea, Ktrt-
)Uht (163 a) retains the accent of the earlier HciAaai.

b. The geoilive and dative are ozytone when the final syllable is acoented.

N. — The acoentuaUon of the words of this declension is doubtful. Some ot
the ancients accented Xayth, XaYiifi otiiers 'ka-fHt, ^ySr, etc

THIRD DECLENSION

240. This declension includes stems ending in a consonant, in ■, «,
or a diphthong, and some in w and o, representing mp and ot.

N. — To determine whether a nonn belongs to the third declension tt is neces-
•ary In most cases to know the ststn, which is usually found by dropping -ai of
the genitive singalar. Stems in i and u are classed ander the consonant declen-
sion becaose neither of these vowels admits contraction with the com endings
beginoing with a vowel, herein being like a consonanL

FORMATION OP CASES: NOMINATITB BINQULAB

241. Masculine and feminine stems not en^ng in y, p, ^ and orr,
adds.

a. A Ubial (r, A «) + f becomes f (97).

b. A dental <r, »,i) + t becomes <r<r (98), which la raduoed to 1 (107).
C. A palatal (jc, y, x) or rr + t becomes f (97).

(The aome ebangea occur in the dative plural.)

yt^ valtttre tmt-^ 'A/w^ Arab 'Apap-ot ; kojAtip batentt* xuirfT^i, fkwit
hop* tKrlS-«t, Sfitii bird SptiB-ot ; ^6\ai guard ^Xai^t, /liorij teourge iidariy-at,
#dXrtT( trvmptt ff-dXrivY-ot, Srvi nail Snix-ot, m}£ ni^At ivtr-it ; S\-i tatt i\^,
IX^ JItIt Ix^^-^l tkiipil eiephant ftJiparr-ot.

342. Maaonline and feminine stems ending in v, p, and t reject t
and lengthen a preceding vowel if short (< to i;, a to w).

ialiuar dfolnfly ialiiaw-ot, x*^!'^' wirtttr x*'^''^! Xt^4> harhowr "Kiitir-iH,
*BXXi|> Oredt 'EXXi)r-«t ; ^ipup orator ^ip-ap-n, d4p air Up-»t, ^lip tliief ^up-h.

1= Coo^^lc

■49] THIRD DECLENSION 57

rptiflv trireme (Htem rfx^er-. SOS b), o/Sii) ahame (atem alSot-, 286), On >i4f
we 860 end. For alema In n, aominativs -oi, see 203 c

M3. Masculine stems in ovr drop r (133) and lengthea o to <*:
yipanr oid ffiOn yiporr-^, Xi'oif lion Xiavr-ot.

244, Neuters show the pure stem, from which final t and other con-
sonaDts not standing at the end of a word (133) are dropped : iLpii^
cliariol SppjiT-iK, wpayya thing irpiyiMT-os, yaXa tniik yaXoKT-oi (133 b).

245. Snnmuiy. — t is added to stems ending In a Ubtal, dental, palatal,
and in srr, trr, vrr ; to some stems In t (as tU one ir-i% «iAaf black /iAa*-«i);
to stems in «i, uu, ou ; and to maac. and fern, stems In i and u. i is not added to
most iteniB ending in r, nor to thoae in on-, p, n, «, ot, v (neat.), w(^), <i(i).

ACCnSATIVE SINGULAR

a4€L Masculines and feminines usually add a to stems ending io a
consonant ; v to sterna ending in t or v.

"yOr-a, Srvx-a, Miptirr-a, \iiilr-a, p'^o^^ Xfc(T-« ; TJXi-r, 'x'l^''t fi^f from
rMi-t aty, 'x^^ JI*A, ^a-i oz, eow. Stems In m take a (275).

247. Barytone stems of two syllables ending in tr, (8, \6 usually
drop the dental and add y.

xift grace (stem x<V"-) X^'t fp'* ttrfft (fptt-) tpa>. Sprit btrd (ipinS-) SpKr,
So (OfXirtf lu^fiil (dtfXrij.) ibXTir (202). Ozy tosee end in ■ : Ai-U-a, >r*piymi
(tr^piytt seal).

a. cXni iey (cX«S-)> Old Att *\<tt, bas jcX*:* (late cXcaa), soo. pi. >X(ik (lat«

lX«t)M).

VOCATIVE aiNGULAB

ata The Tocative of masculines and feminines is usually tiie pure
stem.

wtlu (tUu-) eitf), PtB (^ff-i ox, CDU), ZiiKfwm (ZuxfidTqi). Stems In it and
FT cannot retain final S and r (133), bence 'A^(m< fnim 'Afrtiut {'Afr^uS-), ru
froin roll boy, girl (ruj-), hSh from rrSni mcitden (rfSnS-) ; T'/"" from yipu*
old man (tv9w-), yl-i^r from 7(7i( (riant (7i7«'>"-)>

249. The vocative is the same as the nominative :
a. In stems ending in a stop (16) consonant (except those in it, ii,X9\ rr in
noDiM): i> ^dXof vsatchman. (Afii Ajax (A/arr-) ts nom. and voc.)

MS D. Hdt has Uiiw tooth iiirr-ot. Attio Mo£t bas the tnflecUon of a par-
ticiple in .«w (307).

M7 D. The aoc. In a (xilfHTo. 'fJlo, SprFffa) occurs in Horn., HdL, and In Attlo
poetry. Bo icipvAa and riput (icbpm helmef) in Horn.

HB D. Hom. has An oh ktng as wel) as dmf (inur-)] Afar from Alorr-.
OwXvJdfia, AdoSdfui (from stems In arr) are later forms dne to analogr-

I;,C.00J^[C

68 THIRD DECLENSION [sS*

b. In ozjtone stemi ending fn a liquid and not taking t to fonn tlieir nomi-
native (242): u TdiM* ^lepherd (rot>M*-); bnt ii^p man, rarihi /other ban
ittp, rirtp (202). Barytones use the Btem M the vocative i Jo^io^ Pfn^
fiom Sal/iur divinUg, p-^rap orator.

c In all parlicipiea.

DATIVE DUAL AND PLURAL
390. The dative plural adds -at to the stem.

'Apivf C^f^'^ '^f^f^ iiiiaTt( (/uurrir-] /idari^i, ^Xa{ (^uXojc-) fWXafi, irfifia
(eutia,T-) B^iuuTi (9B), ^Xirif (AriJ-> iXirliri (98), j^rit (dpr»-) J^fiiri (V8), /U^ju
(/X(^rr-) ft;*5iri, *ii,> (*»-) %wL

a. Stems in rr drop rr and Jengtben tbe preceding vowel (100) i Uwr (Xwit>)
Udhti, 7(701 (7i7aiT-) ylyivi.

b. Stems in t drop • withonC lengthening the preceding vowel (If iluM)!

loJ/wT (Saiitar-) laffuxri, toi/i^v (roifut-) iiai/itei, 4ip^r mind (#p«i-) ^ptrL

N. — StricUy > Ih not dropped, but since the stem of the dat. pi. is weak In
form (263 a) the v stood originally between two conBOnania and should become
a (36 b). Tlius, #piwf in Findor is for ^pgti. Attic ^ptal borrovra ite « from
•ppirti, ^fitrur, etc. So wm/Uri, for roqtavi from waiigji, because of woiiUm, etc.

c. ^ is not changed to pp (79 a).

ACCUSATIVE PLURAL

251. a. The ending -at is prodaced by adding rt to the stem (t becoming a
between two consonants by 35 b). Thns ^t\tu-at Is from ^Xac-{;i. This •«
may be added even to t and v stems : Horn. viXi-oi, lx96~a.i, Hdu r^x'-^- Hom.
»iW» is from fiXi-rt (Cretan),

b. Tbe nominatiTe pi. masc. or fem. is sometimes used Instead of tbe acoiua>
tive pL : rpiiipia 2d4, rdXcn and v4x"> ^&

ACCENT, STEM FORMATION, QUANTITY, GENDBR

292. Accent. — Stems of one syllable accent the case ending in the
eenitive and dative of all numbers ; and -uv and -01* take the circum-
flex accent. Thus, <^At^ vein, <f>A(jS-(is, <t>XtP-Siv ; $^p wUd beaat, $^p-6t,
Oiffroiv, 6i)f^v; 9pli hair, rpix-6i, rpixiov.

a. Exceptions. Tbe ending of tbe gen. dual and pi. Is not accented la the
case of i, 4 rait boy, gtrl, i S/uis tlauf, i Biit jackal, i Tpiit TYojaa, i) S^> torch,

SBO D. I. Horn. hHR only -our in the gen. and dat. dnal.

2. In tbe dat. pi. Hom. has 171 (p/\te-at, i&rvr-gi'), and in a few oases -wi,
reduced from -taat (itditT-mi) ; -iriri occurs after vowels (yitv-<rai ; for yirivi ?).
•iirai was added both to atcms not ending In «■ (rii-tvin, pi-tm, drSp-tcvi, it-tim,
274 D.), and even to Bl^ms in o- i,rt-,?-(ff(r.)- Horn, has also mvcl, wtrl; Find.
XiplTiirai, Biiiurau Tragedy has this -ttrii i_impi6-wri), and SO AeoUc, and the
Doric of Corinth.

i;,C.OOJ^[c

*S5] THIRD DECLENSION 69

ri ^Ht tight, ri oBi ear. Thus, ralSv* (but v<uri). Tpiiwr, Arwr, eto. Bo fi*
brin^r. >"•*• (306).

b. A trisyllabic form, if contracted, does not sbow tbe accent on the case
endiug : 4p-«i for lap-at, ijp-i for lap-i, from ri tap tpring.

253. TuiKtion of Stem Foinutlon. — Maaj words of the third declension
■tiow tt«ceB of an original variation of stem that is due to the influence of a
shifting accent whlob IB aeen in some of the cognate languages. Id Greek this
varlatioD has often been obaoured by the analogy of other forms. Thos warfpur,
in conpariBon with Horn, rarp^r, Lat patrum, gets its < from raripii.

a. Variation of stem is seen in ar, er {269} ; i)p, cp, pa (262) ; qi, «r- (204) ;
in stems in •., « (2T0) ; u, n> (2T0) ; rv, i,ii (278) ; ot, u (279), etc. Words in uw,
^r show a middle form or, er, and a weak form in v (260 N.).

b. Several words ending in p show a parallel stem in r ; tbns, iisp wattr
(lar-M, ^TBp livtr frar-ot, ^p^ap (amt ippiiT-ot (but poet. M/iop le^^s Jd>u^-oi).
The reason for this change is nnceitain, but ar is derived from vt after a con-
sonant (36 b) : Afrroj, ^i-rot, cp. Lat. jecitiorU, nom. jtcur. fjrap fs prohably
derived from itrofrr (138).

c -arn was transferred from sacb genitives as driparat, Ifrarot to other nonter
words : yirarot from yin knee, instead ot yntf-ni, whence Horn. 'iovw6%. pQt
Ugkt, for 4An (stem ^aw-}, has token on the t inflection (0vr-jt, etc.).

d. Neuter stems in -<t show -at in tbe nominative. Cp. (rot gear (stem trta-')
with LMt. vtttu, veter-it (for cete*-f>).

394. Tariation of Qnantitr. —a- In poetry the qoantttf of i in words In
•a may differ from tJiat of prose ; as in tragedy Sptli bird, iMt dust, 9fii terpenf
(in proae 6pr!i, eirfj, K^It) ; so in Find. /xBEt (prose (xS*>) fi«h.

\>. ic^V herald, *oif!i Phoenician, pdrrli whip have long u and i in the
oblique cases except the dat. pi. (fipimi, ^ItiKi, iidtTiya, etc.). iXdr^^ fox has
( in tbe gen. dXiirinH, etc., by analogy to such words as iriiiui|i>, woii/Jrot (dXif-
ritut occurs in Ionic). wOp fire has rfipji, wSpl, etc. (28S, 26).

259. Oender. — The gender of substantives of the third declension
is frequently known by the last letters of the stem.

1. Masculine are stems ending in

•- rr : iteii tooth (6iarT-), ipitvr serpent (Jpamn-.).

b. V"! •"■= »/"?» day-lahower (jtrtfT-), yiXut laughter (-/tXarr-).

EzMptions. Stems in -rirr (2, b) ; 4 irSit dre»i (hSvr-), ri ^Qt light (^tn-).
C v: yMfuit meadote (Xn^r-).

Exceptions. Fem. : sl«ms In 70*, aor (2, a), and fpp^r mind (#fM»-), Ii
ttreji0h (tr-), fiU note (fiir~), ixrU raff (iicrir-), ^Xiux'i arroK-point (y\v-
Xir-), iiStt birth-pang (Mip-), tliiir image (tJiet-), fiJit ghore (#<»^)i x^'^'
etirtft(x«i^), x"i' 'now (x""-)i iXtiii* halcgon (iXimoi^), etc., i, i> xi'
goose (x^w).
L p: e^p wild beoMt (fiip-), «<ip thief (#wp-)-

EscepUons. Pern. : x^p hand (x<p-)i lelipfaU (itijp-), ywT'ip bellg (yavrt^y ;
nent.: stems In ofi (3, a), rSp fire (i-u/b), and the indeclinable a-Aup mon-
ster, Titprnp (Horn.) taken, etc.
k «•: ytrtit parent, ^rt6t murderer.

3,q,-Z.-dbvGOOglC

THIRD DECLENSION: LABIAL STEMS

[asO

2. Fsminine are stems ending in

a. K»», Bwi cTToyii* drop («Ta7ei^), x*U<<ir nMlIoic (x'MAn^).

b. »^, 8, •: Kiutinf baseiuu (outonr-), 'p*> »<iV« Cp"*-)! '^''i Aop< (<X«-i*-).
Bxceptioiu. Hue : rai^ foot (rot-), i, 4 fprii &inl (^n^).

C (, « with nom. fa -if, -m : riXt-t eitjf, Ifx^ tlrtngth.

Exoeptlona. Maao. : l^t-i terpent, Ixf (nper, Vx<-* teittele; fiirput dutter
0/ j^(Q)M, ix**-* .to^i fi'J-' "Wiwe, •*««-• corpie, frixif-i ear of earn,
»fKaai-t axe, "-flxi^ fore-arm ; and i, 4 ffO-t or 6-f metne.

4. M : t)x^ scAo, rti0ii jMrruofvon.

3. yeuter are stems ending in

a. mr,Mf: rp8^iMthbig{rfiiiiMT-),ftKTafneiiar(,MKTafi-). Bm t fip starling.
]>••■,•§ (with nom. In -m) : itfi^i jImA (_*ptat-), y4rot race (ftrw).
C >i V wIUi nom. in -ii-v : vlrtn mustard, Arrv ettv.
N.— No 8t«m ending In r, js, ^ or «, 7t x is neuter.

aS6. STEMS IN A LABIAL (t, j8, ^) OB IN A PALATAL (<e, 7, x>

tAUW

**»J+

'♦JM

<l+«>Tt

<ii«<e

<i<rlE

(i»»x-)

(♦*'H

(♦.W)

(WA-Tr-)

WtJ (

T^x-.i26n

ftAioptan

pfcalaM

ffoat

hafr

ALIto+

+"+

♦&.(

+ix.»f

•It

Wt

AUlM-of

♦X.M

♦a-.^

♦^Tf^

.lY*

1"X-0

A(e(o«-i

♦k-M

+&«.->

+tt.T»H

.1^1

fx-i

AU1»«4

^Uf^

+a««.

♦«»TT»

•I,-.

l^x-

A1II.+

♦"+

+«.(

4A>Ye

•"!

•Pll

N.A.r. AU[«r-< 4Up^ fAaK-« ^>YY-< o^Y-* vplX"*

O. D. AM(i«^«t* 4}up-«ti> ^dXAn-oi* 4aX&YY-aiv alT-oCo rpix-ot*

N. V. ACI(o«-ti fU^ ^Am-m ^AXaYT^i atr« Tfilx-*>

Dat. Al«o+iW ♦X.+l(.) ♦A.tM +4Xa,K') *lt'(0 •P'tt(»)
Aoc. AM(e«>«« ^UP-M ^Am-w ^dXayy-w aXy-ma rptx-W

UMOuline: xXd^ «*£«/ («Xi*r-), 7*f otiKum (-)*»-), 'Ap»* Arab CA^h^-).
#iipi{ breiutplato (A^c-), Sni nail (irvx-). FeniiniDe: (\i^ ladder (lU-
fiat-), /uUtQ h&^ (iia^riy-, 2U b), vihrryf frunvet (v-oXrrvY-), ur^Xi^
t4)p«r <toni (itoTT(Xif-).

■S>] THIBD DECLENSION: DENTAL STEMS

BTEHS IN A DENTAL (t, &, ff)
257. A. MASCULtHBS AND FBHININn

A*4i 4A«<i 4ix<f4 i^Vt* tyliU

(Ihr-)

(a,.i.)

(Xf-)

*■»■)

(7iT«rr-)

«r/

»«,»

ffroM

bird

;la«

•*

a*it

Xi«»

IpA

Tl-I"

•nr-^

AvCS^

x4(-~.

Vit"

v<

At[8.i

X*f*TH

l,«l.

IfJlIM^-'

•«»■•

&.lk>

Xif-

Vo

7lY»VT-«

•4.

iX«C

xV

v<

ll-Cr

l<^-«t* IXv(S-MV X*f^-

N.V. tHr^ O-'wd-n X**^"** *pt*«i if'ir*"'-*" Tf^p""-*!

Gen. I«|r-AT DItCS-iiv xf'''''** ifM-mo fiY^rr-sv y'P'*^-***

D»L fc^C,) &,(«(,) xApw^C") Vl^CO Tf*»«"('') T^P^-^C')

Ace. HtT-M fiUrK-M x^'^'M <p*tt-ot flyvfr-iti ylfitrt-t

UiKuline: tAwi lau^Ater (ytXur-), fiJ^t elephant (/Xe^rr-), X/ut lion
(X«vr-), JJ««t (OOCA (Usrr-), VOC Uo^. Femlulne : /irAti ctotMnir (Arff^-),

a. In roit/oot, Doric rih (aUiii »S-) m U ItregoUr.

23a B. NEUTBRS WITH 8TEH8 IN T AND IH Kr VARYIKO WITH at

rBfa hod^ frof liver T<pa« portent k4pm Aotm

(rofiar-) (i^mT-) (t«p«t-) (mpir-, i^mo^)

1I.A.T. «4|ia ^..(1 T^NM K^W

Gen. «4f(aT-«i ii««r-ot - t4pvf^«l idpSr-M (^lo-oi) R^pM

l>U. v£|iaT-i Jlv<vr4 tipvr-i k^t-i (c^p»4) K^pu

SSI D. xp^ 'l^i" (xpv-) lid BOme otbet wordfl often ihow a stem with do
r. ThoB, Horn, xpf^i X'"' (also Hdt.), xp^i ^i"! ^o, bat rarely, xp^^^t

XPwra. Horn, hu Itpv, fAy, fpy for AtL lipwri (llpi&t nOMt)! 7'XwTi (tAmi
lavglUer), (pwrt ((pwt lom). Horn, baa bIbo mc, lipfl, y^w (or vAwr), f^F
(from IpM). Some Nenu in -iS ara generally i stems In Ionic, Doric, and Aeolioi
»T». e^iM (but etritet 8 870), ndp<i, ndfwi.

W D. Tbe other dialects raraly shov the r [onus. Horn, has ripu, ripa*
(rilff.), Tifi^r, TtpA*rrt, xtpai, xipaat, xipai, xtfo,, upiur, Kipurt and «ydBm>

1= Cookie

52 THIRD DECLENSION: DENTAL STEMS [959

B. NBUTBR3 WITH STSU3 tH t AND IN Kt VARYtNO WITH M —

«%« body ^Mf liter TipM poHetU K^pM Aorn

(ifUHOT-) {««"T-) (T«paT-) (MpiT-. «P«»-)

N. A. V. <r4^T-« ^kT-t Tip*T-< KipBT-« (i/po-c) K^pB

O. D. nap^T-oiv ^rdr-OLv Ttpdr-SL* KifAr-^iv (iKf>ii-mi>) Kip^p

N. V. ir^Var-a tpitir-a. rtpa/r-a. K^r-« (''/»-<>) «4«

Geo. trmyAr-mv ffwir-ttv rnpin-mv K<pir-w (ttpi-vt) MpAr

Dat. a-A|iaa-i(*) 1l«ua-i(») Hpar i(r) i[^>Sn(()

Ace <r<i|UkT-a l(«aT-a rtpor-a KipSr-« (c^pa-s) K^pS

Jlto>ia nant« (jmiut-), ffr6>ia ntout/t (v-to^t ), ^i honeg (iu\ir-), -yiiM mOk

(raXoxT-, 133 b), «ut llglu (»uit-), cqp Aearf (for ajpS-, 133 b).

a. Stems ib « (264) dnip r before the endings and contract as, w u> ■,

b. i^pai, mennlng toiup of an ami/, '^ declined from the stem lapar- (trl
t/pm in single file) ; in the memiing horn, from the stem Ktpir-.

C For the inflectinn I/rap, ffrar-oi, Bee 2f>3 b. Of Uhe iDllectlon an iXa^af
fat: ppdp rialern, S4\tap bait, nlid poetic ^fup da;r> liiap food, rtlpap «<td.

d. T^/wii lipai fnrm tlielr iioiiiicative from a stem in 1. 80, tOO, wipat end
W/nr-oi, ^wt light (contiacied from ^doi) ^ur-dt (253 c).

2S9. STEMS IN A LIQUID (\, /)) OB A NASAL (v).

164,

'H™,

(iSa

IfPlU.

i.^

™,^

(»»^)

tf»^.ri

01!O

(to.^-)

(ir-O

<™>-^)

K^WftMIt

oriMor

noM

I/odn-

conleil

.><:igi<rd

Noin.

•*

fV-P

»<•

4Y-i>fc

dyi.

™»V

Gen.

<v-ii

H"l>^

(I.-ii

♦rw'""

&-(£*^

Dat.

fc,M

MTf-i

fi-I

•Wl-i.-.

i,4„

«ai4Ui>4

Ace.

•v

ft—

frci->~

£,«,..

Voo.

•V

Mn»

^

fiw*-

M-

™rt'

Hdt. lias t for a before a TOWel (cp. 2ft4 D. 8) in r/pnj, r/pca (also r/paroi, ripara),
K4pt9t, Kipti, Klpta, Ktpiur. Hom. haa wtipai rilpariK for ripai ir^jm-at. From
^> (04wt), whence ^Ot, he haa dat. ^1, pi. «<lca, #iist is used in tragedy.

169 D. Lat« Gree)( shows St\4,lr, ^tr, Mv shore (Hom. «>)■ f^^n loorm In
Hippocrates has Its r from ttie oblique cases. Hom. Iiaa i}^pi, Vpa from ditp air;
from Kpttiitr Hom. has KporTuMi and Kfwrbmt. fidnofit is Doric for i^dmp Aoppy.
rind, has ^paal (2S0 K.). Ionic >uli, Doric p-^t are Irom lun for «ii)n (10, 87 D.
I, 3). Aeolic gen. itijnat is from /uttv-^i.

t, Google

■6«] THIRD DECLENSION: LIQUID STEMS 63

STIiaiB IN A LIQUID (X, p) OE A NASAL {p) — Ooiuluded

wtl(f6eiut orator noie leado' contett thephtrd

S. A. V. titp^ ^4ro|M ^1^ ^Ii4^ iyOt-t ««>|U^

G. D. tiip^rt* ^ir^» fiiv-Mr J|Y<|td*-M* Ay^v-oi* «m|U>^*'

Gen, tv-Ac k^f^P^' i^r^r ^yqtdv-sy &Y'i>^* woi|i<im»»

Dmt. ►n^HTiC.) Mt<»P^(») *Kr(CO ^rWAr^C") Ay*<"('') ■«K|'i«aC»)

Ace Htp-M W™p-«^ fI»-M 4|Y<|i4i-at l^v-ot vbliUi^-M

i aMtf "fper air (alOcp-), i jc^r^p mixing btnel ^Kpirtip-), i ^lip thief (pup-}, ri
vfcro^ nectar (kcti^i-}, j aiX^fi dofpAfn (j(X0t>^), 1 'EXXi^v Orrrit ('EXXi|r-) ,
i Saiiiitr divinity (faMiof), Toc. ttdiu; 249 b. The only X hUui Is 4 AXi call
(pi. yndiM of tall) ; 4 A'^' (poelJc) means tea. i n^w month was origlDolIy a,
rigma stem (mqw-, cp. tnenrii).

260. AccnutlTe Slug. — 'AcAXXu and ttoanSa are foand as well aa 'AriX-
Xtrio, DM-nJuio. The shorter forma are regular In InBcriptiona, and occur eipe-
ciall; in ezpreadons of eweariog after ri) rir, >id rir (1696 b).

261. Vocaiin. — rurtfi prttfrcer, 'AirjXXur, Tlaotiiur (from IIo<r«>/wf, -iwr,
■ifitr') have toc rArt^, 'AxaXXor, nimJer wltb receBsive accent. ReceMlTe
acceot alao occdti Incompoand proper names in -ur; as'A7afi^fL»wr, 'A7d^/i»r;

>, Ai>rj>u3(ii> ; 4iXijfiwp, fcXq^wr ; but not In thow in -^ptti (EMt^ptr).

STEMS IN €p VARYING "WITH p

363. Several words In -rqp show three forms of stem gradation : -rw strong,
-Tcp middle, -rp weak, p between consoniuiU becomes pa (36 b). The Tocatlve
has receasive accent dnSp man~BaB-Uieweak form In p even before vowels;
between » and p, J is inseiled by 130. ^"^--^^

S0D D. mittit potion usuall; baa naCt for niHwra,

tt> D. Poetry often has rt-Tipat, raTipt, ixtiripot, ^'T'P'i ^^- I'oettoal an
twrpAr; 9<rfwripi, 9&y<tTpa. BOyarpti, SayaTpdii, Buyariptrai, Biyarpat, ytBrtpot,
elc ; and iripat, i»ip>, i'^ptt, irtpti, iripur, iwipai all with long a. Horn, baa
l*lpM#i and irfpdri (with -a«i only in this word), ^^larrpot and &^M^tpot.

.oog[c

THIRD DECLENSION: LIQUID STEMS

wtoAer Amgkttr amio

N.V.

M^>«l

FT*>«

fcY"<|«,

a«i].

«•*>-.

,,Hi^,

h^nVin.

Dat.

i^Vi^M

|.TT*W-)

•.,«|A«(,)

Aoo.

~ril«.

i"r*>«

h,.rf|M»

4. The Moent In the wmk (onni of fuKwi A^tw In tlifl geo. and dat.

■Ing. foUoTC that ol i-arpAt, var^,

b. 'Y<wT^ b«JIy, hu -/arTph, etc. &i|^)^i|p la inflected AitfifrfiM, A4l>f ^

C. <Ut4p *t(tr baa gen. dar/pot, dat. iaript, dat, pL irrpiai.

BTBHB IN SIOHA (r, 09, 09)

asa. StamB in sigma are oontracted where a falla out between the
Towel of the stem aod the vo-wel of the ending (120). Thna, ycros
race, geo. rn<i(ir)-<K ro'ovc, dat. ytyt{<T)-i. ywa, cp. Lat genua gener-ia (for
9«»M>f>), gener4.

A. The lUMculine and famtolae accimtlTe plaml, when it la eontracted, bor-
row! tbe form of the contracted nominatlTe plural, -ih is not derived from -ni.
In the datlTB plorat tbe union of a- of the stem and t of the ending produces irv,
which is reduced to a withont lengthening tbe ptsoeding towbI (107).

b. Uaacnline atenu in n with tbe nomioative In -^t are proper names; the
feminine rpufn* trireme Is an adjective used snbstanUveljr (properi;, trfp^
pud; 4 TpfiiPnt (niSi) 'ship with three banks of oan').

c. Neuters with stems in n have -ot in the nomlnativa, aooaaatlre, and
vocative singular ; ueut«n with stems In at bave -at in tbeae caiH.

d. Some stems in at bave alao a stem In sr or ir (9C8).

.oogic

•S4] THIRD DECLENSION: SIGMA STEMS

36«. iZMif4n)( Boerattt

Gen. (Zwvir»«t) SmcpArow (AitM<rMM-«f) A^pmW>mi

Aea. Is-Kpirt-m) SmcpAn) (AirfMrMn-a) Ai||M*««i|

(Tp«tp«r-) (tow-) (TV*

MrmM roec jirl*

H.A.V. Ct(w(p«-»> iFV» (l''^^) Tf*« C7^(-M> lrfp«

G. D. (r/»w*^0 Trt<tro» (irt.*«F) t***!.- (w<l-~0 wt*

N,T. C'M>«) »P«Vw <-^''«') yH Ct'p**) -rt*

Gen. (rpB»rf-«r) rpUJfMn' (r,irt^r) ytrir (ypd^t) Ttpftr

DU. C»p*).#^i) rfH4p«n(>) (Thw-f.) T'v-nC'') Ct^P"-") ■»**<"(»)

Ace. Tpt^fW (t'**) ■l('»n (7'f«-") 1*»

Awv'nft IHogene*, 'Irroi^r^ ^P}M«ra(M. Neaten : frof T^ar, itpei wfdIA,
{I^M neord, rnxoi tMlI, y^pm old age, uptat fiUh (for t^fai horn see 268).

t. Pt«iMr names In hk faftve leoMiive accent in tbe TocUive.

b. Pnqter names in -yinit, -npinn, iiiw^, -^r^, etc., m&jr bKve an aeons,
in -^ deriTed from the fint deolendan. Thua, Zwupdrirv, 'Apu-ro^r^r, like
'ArftU^ (822, 283 N.). But names In -t\^t (866) have only -tfi.

c Proper nainea in -ip often show -cm, •«! In Uie lytic parts ot tngedy.

d. Neatcov in -oi often show open forms (especially -«»•) In Attic poetry.
■«wr ta frequent In Xenophon.

e. rpciptir and rptip^w hare irregular accent by analogy to Die other forms.

f. A preceding f does not prevent the contraction of *a to i), M Vi from
Ti Ifmt mownlotn (cp. SI. 1).

g. The dat. sing, of at stems la properly -It ; but -« la oflen wrilUn <m
the aatliority of the ancient grammarians. This f may poaeltily be doe to the
■naJogy of f in i stems.

IM D. 1. Horn, nses the open or the closed forms according to coDTenlenoe.
•<*i oecnis in the gen. ol a tew words in -«i (^Atvi) } -cwc i* often a monosyk

OKKIK OKAU. — 6

66 THIRD DECLENSION: STEMS IN OZ, Q(F) [aSs

269. Wlitti -«r- of the Mem Is preceded by «, the toimi ue inflected u fot
Imn i fi Um faar (tnv-}, n<pwX9t from IliptKtj^ Parieit* (HqiuXnv-) :

Nob.

Ux

Cn.i-.w.p)

II^K«X<h

Geo.

(a*^) Nm

DM.

(W.^) Sbi

(Dvi'XrfM)

n^utM

Aeo.

S<n

(nv«M«)

mpucXii

Voo.

U»t

So 'H/)a«X9t J7«nKte«, Z>^X4t SopkoOet.

A. After (, n oontnctfl to d (H). On the contraction of -mm, see SB.
b. lift !■ nncontnoled beoanae the form was originally Iim (68). -

STEMS TS 09

966. 4 aI8(k Aame U the only oc stem in Attic. It is inflected
in the singular only. ISom. •tbh, Qen. >(Ss«i {oMik), D&t «tM (a{$»4),
Aoc. «IU (oI&Mi), Voo. ftlSAa.

STEMS IN «(f)

267. Stems in m^ hare lost iwru and appear as w stems. This m
oontraota with the case endings in the dative and accusative singu-
lar and in the nominative and accusative pluraL Stems in mf are
masculine.

■able (60), aa la the sgoiib. aing. and pL -m from nom. -^ot-iH. Bdt hM cqten
•m, -m, -**«(?), -<a. Id the dat. pL Horn, baa fiiKtavi, po^t, and fiOJtm
(2e0 D. 9) from pA« mlttM«.

2. Sterna In ai are generalljr nncontracted In Hom. {yipaat, yiipal), hut we
find -at in the dat alng., KptQr and Kpn&i' in the goo. pL In the nom. and ace
pi. B la abort (yipt), and tliia la aometimee the oaae even In Attle poetir {Kptfj.
The explanation Is obaoan (y4p)l does not stand for yip*'). Hom. haa ltnr*i
and J«vd<m (tirat cup).

S. Id Hom. and HdL several words In -^t show.i for ■ before a vowel (op.
iftu In HdL for ipdv). Hom. : oUoi ground, alttat, otM and nfSn ; (Oaf Jleeee,
nSca, Kiitet ; Hdt. : Y^pst, yipti, bnt tpiai, tpiut, tpt&f. In AtUc poetry : ppirmt
(moire, pptrit, fipim, etc. Cp. 26B D.

985 D. Rom. has iXfc (for (XAt' ?), and from iX^t ; ~^, -^ ; Hdt. : -in (tot
-itn) , -A', -ti. For -^, -Qs the open -^t, -^« may be read. Attic poetxy often
has the open tonna -^ (alao in prose Inacrlp,), -ia, -hi.

MS D. Hom. and Ion. 4 i)(it <IaiDm (fotf-) is inflected liite aUdt. For aUoSi,
4fi we may r«ad afliot, i)fa and aome other open forma in Hom. The Altlo form
lift U declined according to S3S ; bnt the accua. is (w (238 d). Hom. haa UfU
fiom ISpiit natat (usually a r stem). Cp. 267 D.

MT D. Bom. huipui (for ^py read 4^>)> ^P^ (oi* 4p^)> 4p*Mt 4^mi, MbM
and Mlw. Hdt has Uie gen. Utm and KtMMt, the aco. rirpu; ^pur, bnt mtrmr*.

wUl THIRD DECLENSION: STEMS IN I AND Y

Horn. %M hero N. A. V. %m»-< N. V. 4p»4i (mrelr 4|pm)

Oen. 4p»«c Q. D. V'^' Q«d- V^>

DkL V»^(wull7Vv) Pat- %M>«i(*)

Aoe. V » (aanally fym) Acq. V»-«i(™«l7Vw}

I^ Trcffan (268 »), vdrptit foAer't btvther, it^pm mo(Acr'« &rolA«r, lit*i
rime (poetto, op. 263 a).

STBHS IN I AND V

aea Moet stems in t and some stems in v shov the pure stem vowel
only in the nominative, accusative, and vocative singular. In the
other oases they show an c in place of t and v, and -^ut instead of -o«
in Uie genitive singular. Contraction takes place when this < stands
before c, t, or a of the case ending.

^vtXxei^r I'w^tK't forearm Tftbrvtotm *[r^$aa Htfitfiih

(T.X^) C*TO'-) C<i^O C"-) CxA^)

Hon. viXi-t «4l»4 trr* w^ lxli«

Om. vA*^ «4x*-«t Um-m r»^ lx*<-H

D«*. (tM*«) -a* ('*(•-') w<ix«* (fcru) *»ni «4 IX««-(

Aoc. «Ai-v «^*-' Brrv rt-v txM-v

Toe «A» -wifKt ttrr* r« Ixtf

a. D. ««Xi-«(* *i|Xi«u' ini«ii> c»«tr IfJU-tvt

rLcKAi,
K.r. (rAMt) *tfX«f (r4x>-n)w1)X(i (<«T«-a)&rn| v^-n IxM^i

OaiL «4KtHti> v^x*-" igw-«»p r»^ txH^t*

D*L «A»«^v) -r^xiMnCv) brcmCv) <rv^(v) lxW-n(v}

Am. *tfX«t ^X<>* (A'Tt->)lrn| rti txHl

M D. 1. » Stoma, a. Doric, Aeolic uid New Ionic ratafn the i stem with-
ovt nriaUoD In all cans : rUuf , tjXim, riU (from roXt-t} and rarelT tIXm Id
Hdt., w»M, tMi, tAu«, roXIwr, r4W(, viUi bom *-iXwi (CrMan), and riXiai,

68 THIRD DECLENSION: STEMS IN I AND Y [aSg

2ra. Stoma 1b i«Bd vu*of tmt kinda; —
1. m. Stems In i, with geoitlTe in —n, aa (maac.) iiArra M«r, Ix" ^^^i (fam.)
rUif eily, ralifiu vottrg, tira^ut potMT, rriffu faction, vffpa outrage.
Neuter DomlnatiTes In -i an not uaed in claaaical proae.
b. Stems In i, wttb genitive in -<o>, aa A di loeeeil, gen. li-it, dat. jii^ ; And
BO in proper names In -ii, bb A^io^t Lj/gdamit, gen. Airvlii/uaf.
S. a. Stems In ■, with genitive in -vof ; ss (maac.) iiSt moute, pir/m clutter
<lfgTapt*, lx9*t Jlah ; (tem.) S^f ooi, 6<pptt eyebroa, 1^%*^ /one.
b. Stems in v, with genitiTe In -mt: (niasc.) r^x"' /°''^"^ rAiivt axe;

(neat) Itv town.
N. 1. — In the nom., MM., and too. sing. baiTtone etema in v have short u ;
ozjione anbatajittTea (uanallr) and monosyUables Imto u ; and monoejUablea
oinninflex the ii (rvt, cSr, tO),

N. 2. — 4 fyx'^'^ m' follows ixMt in the alngular (iyxOiV-ot, eto.), bnt r4x>^
in tlie ploral (^xAn>i ete.}. But thia does not hold for Aristotle.

270. Stems in land v vuy with atrooger stems, of which* in ttie cases other
than nom., ace, and toc. sing, ia a surrival. Thus :

a, 1, u, aa in r JXi-i, t4x<^-

b. «, til, which I>efore vowels lost their i and v (48), as In rsX<(£)-t, r>X((i)-CT,

rinL'(x)-tt ; which oontrsrct te rtKa, iti\iu, Tix'"-
C lliere ia aJao a stem In ir, aa hi Horn, ri^i^-at (368 D. 1, c), whence riXt-wt.

K. 1. — TiA«-nlD Attic poetry for the sake of the metre is due to the analogy
<tf II stems with gen. in -t-n (^lilt-n, 297> Hom. t^x*-« 'b the regular form (from
"DC'dt)"")- Attic rix*-^ follows r^Xfwt. riXt^i and wTixf-" ^'>'' 'i^'-v' and
a^Xi*^' MB dfs to ^B '^"f^'ofy of 'o""B from stems in n, (u (TiXf-w, T^X*-"', Bte- )■

N. 2. —The dual T^Xn occais In some Hsa.

371. Accent — Final -m ot the genitive singular does not prevent the
Mate from staadlDg on the antepennlt (163 a). Thus tAXi-ui, rifxt-m, iart-ut.
r A«-«t retains the aocent of the earlier riXir-oi, which, by transference of quantity
(U), became riXc-wt. Tha accent of the gen. pi, foliowa that of the gen. sing.

b. Bom. has rtXa, xUuw, wM, wSXtt or -u (lor which some read viU, aa Kin ;
wit€ is oorrect) and rrJXfT, riUr, vt\t ; pL T6\ut, reXiwr, wiXtri (Bome read
hMtMd riXurO or TDXkcrcri (250 D. 2) ^<iXf«r», vMit Or itIXmi (r jXi» ^tpears
in some texts).

C. Hom. haa also forms with q ; ri\rio%, rlXqi, r jXi^ct, riXifat.

S. « stems. «. Ionic, Doric, and Aeolic have the open forma rixtn, l<rr«i,
1«TM ; In the gen. sing, -ot, never -ui (ir4x*x> 1«t«i). In the dat. sing, of words
of more than one ayltable Hom. haa -vi' or -w, as rian (rtm corpn), but Hdt.
doss not show -w.

b. Ttie gen. pi. has the regular acoent (rqx'^'i ^t^wt). Od Uie dat. rt\i-
nv-rt, Wmvn, wlriirfi (some would read Wittei, rlrvti), •nrfcrrt, see 2fiO D. 2.
Horn, has accus. txlOt and Cx^^') Hdt. haa IxMai verj rarely.

•73] THIRD DECLENSION: STEMS IN BY, AY, OY 69

273. ContncUon. — IxM (once) for l^Mf uid l^Mt for Ixfia ooonr in
coDMdj. IxtS U not a legiUmEM contnction, m u cannot oontnot with t
(61 c). IxKt (for IxBin) is tbe accug. form uied m the nom. (261 b).

274. oh tkeqp ii declined u [oUowa : sti , o^6t, aU, a7-r, ol ; doftl, af-<, ot-ob ;
pL a^fi, otA>, aJ-ffl, oti. Here the stem la ol, Tepraaenting ifi, wUob to
ftofvtlf ut ( Mem : ifM, Lat. oei-t.

Uoir old teomoo

Horn.

Aoc.

Voo.

N. A. T.
G. D.

P-^<l TPiU

»*^

K.V.

Gen.
Dtt.
Aoe.

•*•

Uke flariktit are declined the nuacnllne ozytones A l;r*'(^ \onemaity i Upitt
pririt, i tottit parent, i ipowiit murderer; like paOt la declined i x'"' t&ne-
qtiart Meoaitre (but *cc. xlii and x^bO-

S74 D. Horn, haa fit, Jfoi and Mt, Kr, Sn, 4fuv and at&r, dttan (oewri a 380)
Hid SwffI, ftt(I).

STI D. 1. Horn, haa ^ariX^t, -Qi, -4a, -<{l, -^, -flwi (and -4t##i)i -9»-
Also -/m, -a, -ts, from the item if = ijj. -«0f and -<t for ■*» and .A' an not
common. 'krptOi, ToitH have -^/:)-«i etc. regularly (Tvif from TiHa). Hdt.
hai -^, -« or -<>, -M, -tS, -*n, -4«», -tOn, -^it.

S. Horn, haa y^ifit or ^^w, yptft, ypifO and t^v ; the unattic fiitvn (and
>»rOi P^' (ud /SoOi), ^S> ace alng. H238. The Doric nom. ^. la /lOi,
accpL/SO..

3. Itie declension of mSi In Doric, Homer, and Herodottu U a* foUowi:

OOglf

TO THIRD DECLENSION: STEMS IN 01 [976

2T6. SabaUntivw In -tit piMeded bj a Towel mir ooDtnd in Uw gen. sitd
aoe. ling, aod pL Thua, IXuOt JUurman bu gen. i,\Um or AXiOt, ace AXiM
or i\tS, gen. pL dXt^ui or iKiHr, ace. pi. iXiAt or AXiSf. AU othei foiTiia m
ngultr. Th« eoutracted forma were In use In die flflb centurr, but Id the
fourth (Mpeolally ftfter 860 b.c.) the open forma are oommon. 80 are deoUned
Stp»rtt Suboean from Sifi»u6t, IIiupiu*^ PeiraeMi, nXaraiflti IHatatan,

277. Other Fonna. — a. In the drama from vorda Id -c^ we find mely
-M In aoe. aing., -i3,i In ace pi. -An and -fot, -^, -^i are occaaioD^lr found.

b. The Dom, pi. In older Attic ended In -fi (^aa-iX^i), derlred either from
-4n by coDtractlon or from -An (once od an inacription) by 84. -^ occurs on
InBcripUoDa till about 350 b.o., and la the form to be adopted In the texle of
antbora of the fltth century and In Plato, -ftt oocura rarely, but ia mapBCtad.
^HtfiX«n (regular on Inscrlptlona after 320 b.o. ) la from analogy to ^tU,

C. ^e Bcc. pL fiariiah wsa not oaed till the end of the fourth oentory. -fi
(tba Dom. form) ia uaed for the aoe. to a few paaaagea (261 b).

STB. Stem Variation. — Sterna ending in tv, an, ev loae u before case «id-
iDga beginning with a vowel, k paaaing into f (43). Sterna in « ahow the pure
form only In the vocUire ; other forma are derived from ttie stronger stem i|v.
i)v and air before a oonaooant become tv, iv (40) as in paviKitt, ^AAct, Md,
nuvf from pa^iyifin, rim, eU>. From ^ar(X^(f)-m, -4(/')-t, -#(f)-«, -9(f)-"»
oome, by transfer of quanUty (34), the Attic forms. So niit is derived from
n(f )-^. In parAtur, rcfir, ■ Is ahortened from the ^ of ^aviX4<"i i^^' by SO.
^»-6i, etc. are from the stem pvo- fitf, cp. Lat. boeia.

STEMS IN 01
279. Stems in ot, with nominative in -«, tnrn > into unwritten j^ (j/)
(|43) before the endings beginning with a rowel. ^ wa$i penwuion
is thus declined :

V. m>W. G. «i««»i (ni«^«f). D. «Jet (wtMi). A. ««M (r«<«^).
V. wtiM. Doal and plormi are wanting.

Dorle Homv Hdt. DocIb Hobw

Nom. vmi-9 nfi-t *i)S-i vt-ai HHi,

Geo. vt-6t v^^, y*-*t — ■<> ir^Avi

M.^ (and n|-«t r) *(-Av

Dat. vt-t n|4 vi^ v»^(*), vi|«>v((v)

i4^»rt(y) H^ i«rOTi(F), *

Hom. haa mivl in mwrurXvrif.

04] CASE IK -itC*), IBRGGULAR DECLENSION 71

Bo 4x^ «&o, ritrrti weH-beinff, ^iBii paring, Zar^d, Afrd, 'KaXu^ii. oi (rtetu
■ra ehtefly used for women's luunes.

a. A Aonger form of the stem la w, seen In the eulier fonn of the noml-
natiTe (Zcr^, A^^l). The secasatlre haa the Moent of the nominfttlTe.

b. When dn«l Knd ploral oocnr, they are of the second declension : nom.
lUxiJ (1*^) from \rx,A woman In Mld-btd, aoo. yofriatt from Tvfryd gorgon.

C. 4 *b<iv fniape, 4 d^iiv KlghUngaU, properly from Sterna In ar, tuTS certain
tMms from this declenaion (cfnSt, tZcii, too. d^M).

CASES nf -^(v)

280. Cms* In -^(v) — -^(0 ^ o^*^ added to noun stems In Horn, to
eipnai the reluiona of the lost InatrumentAl, locative, and ablative, both
■Dgiilu' and (more commonty} plnnl ; nroly to express tbe relations of the
geDmTe and dadve cases. From S sterna are made slngalars, from a stems
sngDlais or plurals, from conaonant stems almost always plurals. Except In
hb-ttraith the po<{«-^i(r) is not added to a etem denoting a person. (a)Instm-
meatal: ptif^ hy might, tri^tt^ vUK tht other (hand), laxpU^ir vtth ttart;
(6) Looatlve: Bifii-^ at the door, Sptr-t/n on the mountain*; (e) AUstive:
aiaki-^/rvm oS tAe heai; eepeciall; witb ptepodliom, u U wrri^wfrom
nithe aso, lib toSI-^ from the «A^

IRREGULAR DECLENSION
2U- Tlie gender in the singular and In the plnnl may not be the same :
i 'iTM grain, rA «(ra ; i ittfiU chain, rd iuiiA lAaitif {A Ita/ul cose* of im-
pritonmrnt') i ri ttiSiar Mods, Tace-CoitT»e, pL r& ariXia, and si ariSiai.

282. Csnally tbe Imgalarity consists in a word having two different stems.

a. Bolb Sterne have a common nomlnaUve dngolar : wthrm darkneu, rtirtv

rtirif, tM, (lite fmir Inry) or viirovt rcirn (like -yAuM yiim). So rtr 'A$w,
and Tir 'AAir from 'A0m (338 d) , rir Zwt^rq and rl* Zwi^r^r (304 b). Theae
an called heteroelUe* (trt^Xcra d^ercRtlr deetiited).

N. Ifauy oomponnd proper names in -v (eepeolally names of foreigners)
liave forms of the 1 and 8 decL, as Tvro^pr^, -iwi, -wg and -m. Bo Swcfifn)
(vac.) in Demosth., AikHShii and hntrOta in Hdc

b. Certain eases are formed from another stem than that of the notn. eln-
fnlar: t Snipo-t dream, gen. dnfpar-st (aa If from rA Srttfiop), or (less freq.)
*tlf«; sorAr 'AriXXtHsand tA* 'AiriXXw (a80),rsOulto andTsOvteO (286,27).
Then m called metaptoMtfe forms (/wrarXurfiit diange of formation).

283. Oefecttree are sabstantlvee having, by reason of their meaning or nae,
cnly <me number or only certi^n oases. Thus, sing, only : 6 i^p ettr, t attiip
Vperatr; plnr. only : rA Autfou, tA 'OXd/iria the Dionyiiae (Oljfmpie) fettivaf,
d frfrlat annual winde; In some cases only : S ihO'Ji my good tir or madam;
l—f Avon,- t^lMi use only In nom. ; Xi^ Xlfia from 'Xlf ttream, Ubatton.

384. ladecUnables are sabatantlves having one form for all cases : ri xftir,
tW tfAf, etc fatalltg, rb £X^ aljAa, ri >Jya to apeak, moat cardinal num-
ban (rt Mn ttn), Mvenl foreign words, aa 'laxiip Jacob, i*pit Davtd.

IRREGULAR SUBSTANTIVES

285. LIST OP THE PRINCIPAL IBBBOVLAR SUBSTANTIVES
1. 'Apip (4) Are», itama 'ipf-, 'Aptv ttom'Apttf-. O. 'A^km (poet. 'A^tot),

D. 'Apfi, A, 'Afiii (poet 'Apta), 'ApTir. Epic O. 'Api)*f, 'Aptot, D. 'kptfi,
'Ap£, A. 'A^nfo, 'Apijr. Hdt. 'Afitot,'Afiii,'Afita. Aeolic 'Apcn, 'Ajmwi, etc
8. Ap<Ji> (i, V)) lomi, aAeep, Btems d^Mi-, l^r-, IpM-. Thus, dp>-it, ipr-l, Iprti,
ipr~tt, ifiit-iiii, ifini-vi (Horn. Ajir-M-ri), tfif-at (declined like a anbat. in
-w). Nom. ip^r oocniB OD liHcript.trat iiait (S decl.) Is oommonly used.

8. ydAn (t4) ni<U: (133), yi\iucT-»t, yiXatrt, eta.

1. fAi^ (i) laughter, 7Atn-Bf, etc. Attio poeta A. yiXuTt or -yAHr. Horn,
has D. yf\jf, A. yi\u, ytXut or yA(i>(7) from Aeol. yi\at. Cp. 267 D.

6. ^ni (t6) itnee, 74107-01, etc. Ionic and poeUc yetnr-et, yotmr-i, eto. Epic

ftUo 7aur.l1, Tsuf-J, 7aCF4, pi. 7i>i>r-wr, yoi^ffi (260 D. 2). Tike fornis in
«i aie from Totf- (37 D. 1, 263 c) ; cf. Lftt. genu.
S. TfW^ C^) woman, 7u««-4», 7h»bui-I, 7H>«i«-a, ySnu (133) ; dlUl yuraiic-r,
yvrauc^tr ; pi. yiirain-a, yarotK-St, yvraifl, yvfait-at. The gen. and dat. of
all DDmbers accent the lut ifll^le (cp. 'dnjp). Comlo po«t8 have A.
yur^r, yvrit, N. pi. yvrai,

7. Uicpvo* (rl) tear, farpAiir, Bto., lu proae and poetr]r. Idnpv (tA) U nnudly

poetic, D. pi. Sitpiiti.
S. tMpo* (ri) (rM, JMpoi', Bto. Also D. alng. SMpn, pL SMp^, iMptai. Hdt.
haa SMpor, SirSpnr and tMpat.

9. Un (ri) /«ar (feerO. ''"n. S'n- Horn, adott, 55 D. Cp. 20G.

10. Slpv (rt) apear, lipaT-»t, lipur-i, pi. iipar-a, etc Poetic aip-it, Sap-I (also in
proae) and Op-ti (Uke Avrn). Ionic and poetic Jlotf/Br-«, etc., Epic also
Baup-ii Isup-I, doal 9gup-(, pt. InSp-a, Soitp-ur, SaOpiavt (250 D. 2), The forms

with Bv are from Sapf- (87 D. 1).
IL ^M (4) love, IpuTit, eto. Poetical (>bi, tpif, Ipor, Cp. 267 D.
12. Zi4t (4) Zeiu, At-4i, Ai-1, A/-B, ZfO, Znti is from Amii, Ai-4(, etc., from Aif-,

Ionic and poetic Z^rit, Zi/rl, Z^h.

18. M|u«(4)JiM(fceandthBgi)dde«rA«nifo(fcfu<-).^r^-«'t''f'U^'^'. Horn.

haa Mfurr-ei, etc. Pind. Uptr-m, 84iu-r, M/ur-ct. Hdt. Miu-of. In the
phrase Stius alnu /w earn (indio. M/ut fori), M/ui is indeclinable.
14. KipK (t4) head (poetic) nsed in Attic only in N. A. V. sing., but dat ndpf.
Other cases are fioro the stem rpAr-, 0. tpir-ii, D. icpo-rf ; also t4 c^r-c
N. A. aing., xpir-at A. pi.

Epic abowB the sterna xfiar-, nfiir-, Kopniar', mpv^-. N. tipii, O. tpiartt,
Kpirit, tapitTM, cdjngrM, D. Kpiari, iq>iTl, ra^^o'ti ■ii^*IT'> A. tip. N. pt.
«rf^, Kpdaro, iR^>i}ara, and inl(>vm, G. Kfidrar, jn^mv, D. *pivl, A. updra.

16. Kfciv (J, 4) doiTt nii^i KV^ inlr4, >A>r ; xip-t, inri>-«rr ; rir-<i, Ki/r-Qr, nvl,

19. X&w (i) atona, poetic alao Xfit, O. Xoai (01 Uoif), D. XAT, A. XBar, X£a;

dual X£t ; pi. \i-a, U-w», U-drri, U-wi.

17. pApTvt (i, 1^) urftneaf, ittpTvp-et, etc., but D.pl. ^utpTw-vi. Hom.haaN. pipru-

pat, pi. MpriyM.

18. OtSlwMi (4) On^pua, O. OtStrolot, OMfrw, OUiriH (Dor,), D. OUlralt,

A. OUlrMV, OianriaSr, V. Oiffr«vt, OUIrtv.

i,,Coog[c

>S7J DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES 73

19. iMtfoi (i) uid Srtipar (ri, lonio and poatio) Awm, 6rtifcv, etc., but kIso

AidpaT-at, etc. ri flrop only in N. A.
». <pMi (i, 4) bfnl (267). A. fr>i«> ud Jlpnr (S4T). Foetlc tpift, A. tprlwi

pi. N. Bfutti, O. Sfntv^, A. j^mf or tprit. Dor. G. <^rix-at, etc.
SI. Ira diul, (iDo eyM, pL G. Svvttr, D. Jrvott (-om-i).

22. vh (ri) «ar, liT-Af, lir-l, pi. Or-a, ^-m* (262 a), d^^I; from the Btam Ar-

contncted from ad(r)ar', whence j(u)<>t-> oh !■ from dot, whence «lso
the Doric noin. St. Mom. O. oEaT-n, pL afoT-o, oIWi and lio-l.

23. IIn£ (4) PnpxCiaSj.nurr^t, nuici^ HiiKi-a, and Alio n^VK-^ nnrj(-.f, nr«K-a.

24. wpM-^tvHIt (i) encov bu In Uie pi. usaolly the forma of the poetic rp4vfim

oU man, properly an adj., old. Thua, N. sing, tpirpirriit, 0. wptfpmtO,
eb^, N. pi. rpiepta, Q. npiepttir, D. npiaptat, A. rpirptu (rarely r/w-
o-^nral, etc.). npia^at meaning old man is poetic in the aing. (A. *pia^r,
v. rptapu) and pi. {r^iapta) ; meaning eneoy rpirpvi ia poetic and rare
in the sing, (dual rptap^ from rp€irptii). rpnpirvi old man ia used
in prose and poelry In alt nambere.
26. w«|i (ri) fire (rCp-, 264 b), rvp-6i, irvp-f, pi. ri rvpi wiUh-Jlrea, 2nd dccl.

25. {Snp (ri) unter, Msr-Of, v«ar-i, pi. Har-a, iiir-uw, etc Cp. 268 b.

iT. «Uf (i) (nn baa three atema : 1. ulo-, whence uIoG, etc., according to the 2nd

decL 2. ulv, whence ulM, ulff, dual ultl, ulfau, pi. iJcfi, vl^wr, ulAri, ul«&.

The stems via- and via-, naoally lose their > (43): iaO, Mii, etc. 3. vl- in

Horn. O. ubf, D. uli, A. ufa, dual vtt, pi. ubt, uUbi, utai.
^ X'lp (^) AoBd, X"l>^' X'V'. X'V-*; dual x«ii«. z«p-«'»i P'- X'^i^'i X'V-O',

xtf^h X*'P-^'' Poetic alao x'f-^i X*P-^ ^^i dual, x'V-o''- Att. inacr.

have x'f"' X'f^- Hom. agrees witb Att. prose and HdL except that

he has also zip-f, x'tp-"" X'^P-*"-
29. xP^(^)*''^''>>u>'"'^iX^'^~' (^t x^ In the phrase 'rxfiv)iXP>''^ Poetic

XP^. xpo-t. XP^ U^« o'l'ii. 260.

ADJECTIVES
ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRBT AND SECOND DECLENSIONS

286. AdjecUm of Three Endings. — Most adjectives of the vowel
declension have three endings : -ot, ij (or -d), iiv. The masculine
and neuter are declined accoiding to the second declension, the
feminine according to the first.

a. When «, i, or p (SO, 218) precedes -ot the feminine ends in -<i, not in -i(.
But adjecUTCS In -osf (not preceded by p) have n). Tbna, tylaot, iySti), Ir/Stmi
etgUA, igpiot, iipid, i»p6or orowdtd. See 290 e.

287. AydSot good, Siutt worthy, fuutpot long are thus declined :

Mi D. 27. Hom. baa alao ulii, vtoO, Mr, vU, utSir, aUiai; vtht, ulfi, vHa, uUtt
and iit<(f, uUau III somettmea makea a abort syllable In ulit, Mr, vU (148 D. S).

NT D. In the fem. nom. sing. Ionic baa -i;, never -d ; in the fern. gen. pL
Horn, has -dwr (leae often •4itt) ; Hdt. has -A»r in oxytone adJectlTea and pMtt-
dplia, and ao probably In barytones.

.oogle

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES

Nom. i.yallit tyt^ dYoM* &(ioi &{(d AfMv fmuptt KOKpA iiaxpAv

G«n. dYolofl i.yaMtfi lYotoi &£(ab A{(a« &{loii fioiipoO p«itpat (lANpaft

Dst. &Y«*v Ay<^ difoS^ &((f &((f dt(f |ukp4 |u>p4 fOitPV

Ace. &YaBd* Lyat^r A^nWr &t°* &{<«> ^* fotpir frntpAr luutpdv

Voc. 4t»N &iaht Ay«*^ ^ ^i^ &fMv fMtpi fiMpi tuucp6>

N.A.V.4Ya<ii AyoX tia$A &{(■ &{(d &£(« pwcpA fiwipd (MxpA
Q. D. ^Yakty iYoeaS* ATokt* iiUnr Affau* dfloiF |WU(pot* luutfwl* |uucp«tv

N. V. Ayatol lyotal lYoti &{uh Kfuu &(» (uucpol |UutfwE )uu(p&
Gen. irftJt&y dYOtA* dYolA* Atlav dfCav &(f«* (lOKpAr |iaKpAii |UUcpAv
Dat. d'Y«>aCt dToSKtt dTatoIt AfloM dEfait dfloit pAnpeti |i4UipcUt |uu(p»t«
Ace. iy«Moit dYatdt d^BU dEIovt dfl&t &fia fiwipoih (MUipit |iAKpd

^0t)Uf good, mmii bad, o-o^ii toiie, «v^i, nxi^ii, nj>^> EilfAt, t^Xn clear;
iiilp€iiH, irSptla, inlptuir cotirageotu, SJioui Just, Jl^wt !£!;«, o^xf^) ^^^XP^,

atexpir bate, iXiieipai free; all participles in -at and all Huperlatlves.

«. The accent in tlie feminine nomlnatlTe and genitive plnral follows that
of the mascnllne : Ifiai, ^luf, not iflat, iiiHt, as would be expected according
to the rule for subBtantirea (205), e.g. as In ntrH cau*e, otTlaL, alTiCir.

b. All adjectlvea and participles maj use the masculine Instead of the
feminine dual forma : tA iyaBA iHr^pt the tao good mothert.

288. AdjectiTM of Two Endli^. — Adjectives ueing the maaou-
line for the feminine are called adjectives of two endings. Most
such adjectives are compounds.

289. ti&Kot «nju»t (i- withoitt, ^Kt/ jvMxix), ^>p6vifUK pnident, and
lAuK propitioaa are declined thua :

M»c. ind F<

^m. N«ul.

Mwt. >ikd Pom.

R™t

UtK.tDdF«

n. N«t

Nom.

d&um

dSuco*

4l>«nf»r

Dm.

tXMr

0«n.

dSlMi.

dSlKM

tx«.

IXm

Dat.

dSkf

dS[<v

♦(-••l^

Ouv

a..

Aec.

Uura*

&6uco*

+p*«H"

^>V|U>.

OUMV

Om-

Voo.

4Sut<

Uu«»

♦p*«h

Du.n

OuM.

U9 D. Hom. has TXoot or Mhf; rXiiof, ■-Xcii), rXtiai (Bdt. vXM, rX^,
rX/sr) ; ffu>f (ont; In this form), and vtot, viv, cUr. Hom. baa N. |)K A. (ir
ttvingt and fwit, fu4> {^' living.

i,vGooglc

DECLEHSION OF ADJECTIVES

NnL

Uuo. ud Fam.

Naal.

U*M.*BdF«

o. NanL

4SU.
ASteMV

Uwa

a.,

fXMf

tXtM

N.T. UucM

Ace UCks^

A. Like Alinii are declined the compouuded d-Xo-fof frrotfonal, i-rliat dt$-
hojioured, i-xpttot uwlew, fiimipai erperifnced, trl-^Sont envtout, td-ftnt
hoMpitable. vr-^nst obedfenf. Like ^pdn/iot are declined Ihe uncooipouDded
^dp^o/HH barbarian, Ijavxot quUt, li/upai taiae, XdXoi talkative.

b. Like n«uf are declined other adjectives of the Attic declenBlon (237), aa
ittput viithoM horat, Hi^ptttt ttrvleeable. For the accent, see 103 a. Adjeo-
livf* In -vt, -vt have ^ in the neut. pi., but fn-Atw occurs in Xenopbon.

C. vXJat full has three endings : r\iiin, w\fi, rXivr, pi. it\iif, irXAu, rX/a,
bat most compound*, such as f>irX«in guCU full, have the fem. like the maac.
rdt tafe ha* nsually sing. N. rwi masc, fem. (ntrely vS), t-iSr neut., A. o-flr;
plur. M. ry masc., fem., ci neut.,' A. c&t maac, fem., ^a neat. Other cases
are auppUed by *^, 9i!A, aOar. vHor also occurs In the accusative.

d. Id poetry, and sometimes in proae, adjectives commonly of two endings
have a feminine fonn, as wirptat patcrnoi, plaiet violent; and those commonly
of three endings have no feminine, as irayiauai neceuary, ^l.\iot friendly.

aao. Contracted AdjectlTH. — Most adjectives in -cot and -ok are
contracted. Examples : j(piaaK golden, ipyvptm of ^ver, AwXoot simple
(feminine <lirX«a).

SIHODLAK

S.V. (»Af"t) Xl*««i {XPB'«) Xf*iHt (XP*""') XP9«™»»

Aeo. (xptfr) xpBaut¥ (xpSff'ii-) XP^M" (XP*""') XP""™**

N. A.V. CxpftrAt) XJ«»* Cxp5»«l WO^ Cx/riia''-) X(««*

G. D. (»»*•*«>■) XPB"1» (xpw^O x^fi* (xfJVff/o.i') xpB<reW

S. V. (xpfatw) XJ*r>t (XP*'«") XPW™I (XP*'"") XpOT*

Gen. (x/>S»'"') XP0»*» (xi>«'t<"'T Xf^rAr CxP"'"') XP'>»*»

Dat. (xpw'fe'i) XP«<rots (xpSffAuO Xl«»**» (xpwr'e'O XP""*

Aoc. (xpi*'"") XP"**** (xpw^"') XP**"* Cxp*'") XP***

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES [*««

N. V. (ifyifuni ApYupoti (dpyvpA) &py*^ i^fy^p*"') tf-fUf^iw

Gen. (ipyvfiiav) ^fr<fvfOi {ifnvpin) Apyvpat (dpTVp/eu) dpY>^9

AOC (,ipyip€Qp) dfryupoS* (ifyvpH)') dpYwpa* ^ipyipa,,) i^y<,fo9r

(d^rvp^ou') Vnpvt* (V)*^") 4pTn*»i>' ('•wp^") *pTiip»t»

{iP7*p™') ifY-pot (ipriptoi) ApYvpat (a^n*™) *pr»*

(i^upAB^ 4pt»P*>' (i(>vvpA(r) ip'yvp'i' (ifiyvpiitr) VrvpAv

(ipTupAm) Apyupott (dpTfupAni) 4p7«pcrft (dpl-u^i) &ftyi^t«

(dp7iipAiuiJ Vrvp*W (_inupai) Afryvpa* (dp7«pca) ApYvpa.

N. V. (AtXIm) &*Xa«i (a*'Xa) 4>X1| (dirX&») A*Xa««

Oen. (4tX&)v) «*X«S (drXfif) AtX^i (irXitiv) d*XeS

Dat. (drUv) 4«X# (AtU?) AwXt (irXiy) &wXf

Aec idTX^n) 4«lia«i' (iTUdr) &*X<|* (dTUor) AvXoSv

N. A. V. (drXiu) A«Xi C&rUa) 4>U (dirXiu) &*X4

0. D. (AtWmO AvXoIv (&r\^») AvXotv (drXiotO AwXoW

N.V. <&rU«) AvXot (irX^) ivXal (ArXia) &^£

Oen. (dirXiuf) AwXAf (A«XA<r) iwXAv (ArXi«>) JwXftv

DM. (irXiott) IwXoIt (ArXAui) &vXa4 (iirXioii) imhttt

Aoo. (A'X6<>n) AtXoOi (AtUSO iirXoi (ArXia) &iril&

a. 80 xaXmCf, -41, -vGt brazen, ifmtiiaOt, -^, -oDi eHnuon, Tap^upaOt, -&, 'tBtdark
red, atSiipelH, -i, -oCt of iron, 9trX«0t, -^, -sCr tteo/old, ftnd otlier multipli-
oativee Id -rXiDi (354 b). Compounds of two endings (28S) : cPivui, -ovr
((Snot) well iliipoied, ftrXouf, -ov* (IvXooi) not Tumlffablt, ttpmit, -ovr
(tfpoot) fair-fiowing. Theee hare open oa In the neater plural.

b. The vocative and dual of contracted ad;fectWe8 are yerj raie.

C. Adjectives wboHe uncontracted form In tlie nom. sing, has the accent on
the antepenult (jipiem, ro/n/iipeot) take In the contracted form a clTouniflex
on thetr last syllable (xP^roCf, ri/npvpaSt) by analogy to the gen. and dat. sing.
The accent of the nom. dual masculine and neater is also irt«gul&T
(xpftrJ, not »*»»)■

■gi] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES 77

i. For peonliarlties of contnctioa ses 66. irX^ !■ from irX/i, not from ArUf ,
». Some Bdjeotivea are not eoiitracted : ipyaXioi diffleuU, npSaMit eraflf,
riat foung, dY'ooi eighth, i9p6at crowded (lunally). (Here <• and m wen prob-
ably Mparatad oiigitially b; f, 8.)

ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION

29L Such adjectives as belong only to the ooDSonaDt declension
have tvo endings. Most such aajeotives hare stems in « (nomi*
native ijt and -«) and m (nominative -oiv and -ov). Under ov stems
fall comparative adjectives, as ^rtmr, piXriov better.

a. There are some compoondB with other Btems : H. F. irirvp, N. A*-ar^
/atherlegt, G. dvdrapat; ItdXii iraXi mithotU a country, dvAXtSoi; airatpdrtip
ttrtupirofi independent, a^QufiropiH ; ippv (older S-pvtit') ippir male, tpptrof ;
ttxafia tCx'tp* affreeable, tixipirot ; tCiKra ifcXi-i hopeful, iMArilQf. For Uie ace.
of stems In n- and iS see 247. Neut, ctfxapi and titktri for<^aptr, tttXwiS (133).

292. iUq^(<iA)}tfccr-)tru«,n^eXn'u(cv<XiriS-)Aope/uI are thus declined:

Som. tXyfHfl
Gen. (dXqM^t)
Dat. (dX,^...)
Ace (dX,«^) AXqM
Voc iXi|Mi

4Xi,M

DUAL

M. A.T. (dXi,M^)
0. D. (dX,«*.r)

AXi|l*tv

PLOXAL

N.V. (dX4«-«t) Ui|Mi
Gen. (dX^M-vF)

Aoc. Ui|lA

4XTN<r.(0
(dX,«^) «Xi)«<|

fi&n&«e («A«t»«

a. dXtran means indeed! Like dXi^t are deoUned au^iit el<ntr, (»ri>x4t

m D. The uncontiacted forms of tt stems appear in Horn, and Udt.
-«i and -««t are, however, sometimes coutraoted In Horn., and properlj shonld
be written -« and -«ii in Hdt. The acc. pi. maac. and t«m. la -tat in Horn.
Miii Hdt. From adj. in -«4i HdL has MH for Mefa, Bom. dwiXiMi tat
fwX</af, tvppeiot for iBpf*it%.

i,,Coog[c

78 DECLENSION OF ANECTIVES [ags

b. Hie aconsatln pL iXqftit has the form of the nominUlTe.

G. CompouDd adjectivM in -t|i not accented on tbe l&st syllable show races-
ahe accent even in tbe contracted forms, lliaf, ^tXoA^^ lover of trut\, neuL
ptKi\g6ri, airipKtit lelf-twfflcietit, neut. atrapm, gen. pi. a^ipiivi', not ai>raf»cd>i.

N, — Eicspt in neuter words In 'tUtt, -5XFf, -upn, and -^pa, aa riiiSn MWMt-
amtlling, toiiipn reaching to the feet. Bat rpr^par, not Tfaipur, from rpdipiii, 264.

d. c((v)a t»come8 «, not ni (66) : ttiiKcS,, Mti for t^Xita, /vft^a from
f4itXr4> crforiou*, Mtijt needy (O. idic\<oDt, MtoSt). But ie(a')a and ■«(«')<> yield
(S or iir, in or vq. Thns, fryia or iyiij (iy^^it heaUky), if^tra or tifv^ (t^v^t
co"*^V)i ep. U, 31, 2. Tbe torma In -9 are due to the analogy of snob forms as
ln^P^ {iit^it ntembting),

893. Stems in w. ciStufuw happy, ^itav boter: ■

Norn. «4S>l|un- iUu|>ov ^itwr PATtoo

Geo. «MB(|ioi-ot p«Xt4»i>-ot

Dat. (*Sal|ui^i PAitovt

Aco. tUalliav-a fCSiu|i*i> pdh-rtev-a or pAiia P&tIo*

Voc iWuiio* tffiaifio* piXrM* ptii.Ttm'

N. A. V. ttS^far-t pAifav-s

O. D. ttitiif^v^v PAtUv-m*

rfi.w {?j:!^ K?"

lp«LTt0«t pArtm

DM. iU«UfM^(*) PAriM-tC*)

-..^ -».^ {Jj;;^ JJ*"

a. Lilie (MaJfiur are declined lainutr iuf)iiar mfncj/'ul, d7RJfH>r iyruitar
unfeeling, ttpor iippor lenieUu, wiruw titer ripe, tii4iput vO^por prudent.

b. Like ptXriur are declined laliur fKifbr ^eatcr, imiiUai nUio* &a«er,
Airmt IXdrrai' lets.

c. The neuter nouitnatlTe and accusative hare recessive accent

iL CompuatlTes am fonned from stems in or and in ot ; cp. Lat. melfi>ri(
for meffof-b. « appears In jScXrIw for fit\Tio(a)-a, ace. sing, roasc. fern, and
Dom. aoa neut. pL, and in ptkrlcut for ^Xrw(<r)-(t, nom. pi. masc fern. The
accusative plural borrom the nominatire form. Cp. 261 b. The Bhortsr forms
were more frequent In ereryday speech than in literature.

DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES

COMBOHANT AND VOWBL DECLENSION COMBINED

29*. Adjectives of the conBonant declension having a separate
fonn for the feminine inflect; the femiuine like & substantive of the
first declension ending in -a (216).

299^ The feminine is made from the stem of the masculine (and
DeuterJ by adding the suffix -ux (ya), which is combined with the
preceding syllable in different ways. The genitive plural feminine
is always perispomenon (cp. 20S). For the feminine dual, see 287 b.

296. Stems In v (-m, tia, -v). — The masculine and neuter have
the inflection of v^x^ and iarv, except that the genitive singular
masculine and neuter ends in -at (not -at) and -«a In the neuter
plural remains uncontracted.

397. TjSui aweet is thus declined:

Kom.

Q«D.

Dm.
Am.
Voc

lltM,

K. A.V.
Q. D.

I,UI

N.V.
Aoo.

(♦Ito) <|M

Ifll

So ^oMt deep, rXuRd nsMf, lipit

broad, ii6i eharp, raxit

«o((I.

a. In 4Sc(d -jc baa been added to iiltf- =" 4'<>!-i ^ sLronger form of the Bt«in
tJv- (cp. 270). The nomlnatiTS maacallne 49>i' ix u«ed ior the accumtiTe.

b. The adJeotlTea of this declension are oiytone, except ^lufui half, ^Xin
ftmalt, and some contpoundB, as Sfrtixm of two cabiu.

298. Stems in v (-Ot, -«l*«, -av; -i|', -ii*s, -n>). /tc\ac black, riprpt
tender are declined as follows:

M D. Horn, hu naanlly tta, -i/itt, -dp, etc ; tomeUinea -A>, -hft, -if, etc
Tbe tomu without i (48) ue regnlar In HdU For -dv Horn, baa -fa In <4^
rtrrat the wtde $ta. itit and 9^\ut ara aomstimM feminine in Horn.

■ ooj^lc

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES

Gen. pAoiV-ot |u\a(vi)t pAa»-ot TJpit-'«t TtpiCvi|t T4p<v-«a

Dat. ^a*-i |iAa(vf| |i&a»-i T^piv-k ■npiCi'ii t4p(*-i

Wpf*-« nptlvK T^v-4

npfaMHC TIptlMU* TtpjW-OlV

H, T. pihac-K iiAaivu |jAftv-a T^pw n i^pnw Wp<*-s

Oen. itAivHt* p«Xuvfi* fA&r-mr rtpJiMtv npHnAv -np^v-wv

D»U i)Aaa-i(v) |u\a(rui )iAao->(i>) TVn(i') Tafrivu* t^i(v)

Ace. )LAaih«t )uX(Ui4[| pA«i^« rifmrmi nptliVt Wp«>-a

Lik« liAAt is declined one adjective: ntUt, riXotro, rdXaf wretched.
jk. >iAat is for fuXaM b? 37, 90. Wltli the exception of lUKii and rdXAt,
ftdjectiye aienu in t reject t in the nom. ^ng. fi/Xwri for fuXai^ri 96 a, 260 N.
The feminine forms iU\aim and t^/kih come from fuXar-ja, Tiptr^ia bj 111.
The Tocatives liAur and riptr are nre, the nomiuattre being used instead.

299. Stems in n- occur in a few adjectives and in many participles
(301). jpfitiv gracefid and vm ail xre declined thus ;

Qen. x'f'o'i^^t X>f^"P X>p(**'*M wa.vr-i9 riai^ «avT-i«

Dat. Xfl**^-^ XOft^v^U XBf'<*'-* 'n(T-( *<Erg vavr-t

Acc. X'P'**^'* X'P''"**-'' X"**** wi^T-a *anrv itd*

Voc XOf'** x^P**"** X"?*** *•• "«» wSi"

N. A. T, x'^P'*'^-* X'V^'** XVf''*'^^
G. D. x'H*'''''''''*'' Xf**'"'''**' X*4>*'*^^*''*

N. v. Xft*"-*) X'P'*'''^^ X'P'***'^ Mirr-ti vfiovi wirr-s

Gen. x^P^""** Xf**''^^y xf^^*^^* «i*rHn> *Ka4v v&vr^iv

Dat. xf^'^^W xf^""* X^f^^^C*) wSax(_¥) t4ntt ma\(_v)

Aoe. xf^""-** x'P'^''^ X"^**"* «Arr-ai *i«4t wii>r-«

SOB D. Horn, hta aiiMritan bloody, aniUm jAodowv, bnt ri/i^t and rifi^-

«it iiiilNa&I«, Tijtfli^a and rln'/nrra,. Dorio has sometimes -at, -Arrat for -dett,
-i«rr«>, as ^Mira. Attic poetiy often has the open forms -6t(t, -Am-vb.

M] DECLENSION OP PASTICIPLES 81

Uke x'P'"* ^'B infected rrtpint wlnfftd, ^wnfm voiced, latpuiia tearflU.
Adjflcttvsa ia -itn and -^fit aie generally poetical or Ionic. #wn|«T< meaning
wieel* la alwaja opea.

a. xv^*"! 'Bi are derived from xv**"***! 'irr-i by 100 ; X'V'" from xop^rr-
by 133. The a of war (for irJ[f(T)-) la irregular and borrowed from vat, Com-

pOonda have a : draf, iri/iwap,

b. From xBpT- ,ia derived x<v'«"'a with (ro-, not rr, by 114 a. x^V*^ ^ ^
weak form of tbe stem x'P^'^- i it appeara also in x<'«>'<" for x'V**^'" (C8)>
PaTtldplea in -«i (307) form the feminine from the strong stem -trr + m. taaa
slanda for rarrea oat of rarr-ja (il3a). wirrttt, tSti are accented contrary
to 2fi2 ; but rtrrit, iratrf, virOr are regular.

c. Adjectives in -Ua contract, aa /uXiroOt, /uXiroth-ro, iitXeravr, O. /uXiraDrrot,
^Xn-M^rrff, etc (fuXtridi Aonfsif). vr^j^tt has wTtfoSrra, xrtpaSvaa. So in
namea of places: ' ApytntOrrat Argtimumt for -iifftu; 'Pa|uoGi, •«Orrof, lor
'Pi^irfnt, -itrrot.

DECLENSION OP PAETICIPLES

30a Zfike iyttSoi, -^, -6» are inflected all the partioiples of the
middle, and the future passive participle.

aco. Faiticiples of the active voice (except the perfect, 309),
and the aorist passive participle have stems in vt. The masculiDe
•nd neuter follow the third declensioD, the feminine follows the
first declension.

a. Host Btema in trr make the uom. siog. maac without f, like ■yipui' (243).
Bat steina In trr In the present and second aorist of >u-verbs (jtfa^, S»ii), and
ill stems in an-, trr, urr, add i, lose rr (100), and lengthen the preceding vowel
(•avi, -it, -tu, -ut, 87). In like manner the dal. pL ia formed : -orr-^t = -aMi, etc

N. — The stem of participles In -ur, -«mt waa origloally wrr. y4pwii was orig-
nally a participle.

b. The nominative neaUr of all participle* drops flnal r of the stem (133).

C. The perfect active participle (stem or) has -ui In the masculine, -ot in the
neater, -wt and -ot are for -far-t, -for-x.

d. The feminine singular ia made by adding ja to the stem. Thus, Xkiwa

(Xiarr-iB), tAca (irr-jfl), lariffa (Is-Tair-ja), nfcwa (riStrr-ia). The perfect

adds -v(<r)-ii(, as In cU-via.

302. The vocative of all participles ia the same as the nominatlTe,

303. Participles In -ar, -it, -*a, -vvi, -ui freqoenUy nse the mmwiHt|^> for
Ibe feminine In the dual.

304. The accent of monosyllabic participles is an excepUon to 862 : 6r, trrt

(not 6wT6t), rrli, (trdrTM.

309. Participles in -•*, -o«tf«, •«« (a-verbs) : Xumf loosing (stem
krorf), w beiiig (stem itrr-).

SM D. In the feminine of participles from stems In an-, arr (SOS), AeoUo baa
■MTk, -ai^M (Xdawa, Mrotva), and -au in the masculine (XArut).

l;.C.OOg[c

DECLBMSION OF PARTICIPLES [904

M.V. Xtmw Xtowr* X«» «* o<mt <r

Gen. yfarr-ot Xsoio^ Xiavr-ot trr-ot ainfi ttir t

Dftt. X4srr4 XSoiro Xfcvr-t <vt-i oSrg trr*

ACO. Xtfavr-« Xfevra-* XSov trr-a ' aiom-v fc

If. A. v. XiovT-* Mo«v« X4ovT>« tvr-t «Cr« frr-«

G. D. IMvr-oi* XVoBnuv XWvt-mv <*t-oi* afiotuv Jit-al*

4. T. X^CT-tt X4ov(r(u Xtfon--a 5vt-«i ofa-oi 5vr-a

Sen. XWrr-aF X(^sw«v XMi-r-in <>t-«i> siw-Av frr-MV

3U. Xtfoun(*) Xootfnw Xtfaun(*) afa-iC*) oSnd aln(v}

Ice. X4an^«« Xln*v«« XtfoiT'a tiT.<H •fad tvr-a

So are inflecUd roiStiHw educating, ypi^ut writing, ^pur hearing.

«. All participles in -at are inflected like \tur, Uiose In -wv Laving the
icceiit of &r, JtTot, etc. ; as Xtviir, Xii-swa, Xtri* Aacfn; le/t. Snch pMtlclples
kre from w-verba, in whicli a is a pan of the tense Buffix.

b. Like participles are declined the adjecUres iniii, luaSt^ Mr wilUng, Jkuf,
Lcaiwa, i»et unwilHttg (for Uxur, etc.), O. inrrst, ijiotei)t, Jmn-M.

ao6. Participles in -s«, -in, ■«*: XiSvu Aavin^r {doa«d, ttrr^c setting.

N.V. X<a<« XfaVn Xfirav U^ tor&ra trriv

Gen. XtfravT-ot XtrtU^it Xtfrai-r-ot trrArr-Ot IvH[n|t l«-TA*t-o«

Dat. Xtf<r«rT-i XVirAirQ Xtfravr^ tor&i-r-i I«T4ff^ lo^vr-t

Acc. Xtfravi^a X6ra«t-v Xfaa* la^vr-a loToro-v IvtAv

DDAL

N. A. T. Xfa«tT-f XOrdrK Xtfrai-r-i Urit-r-t taitfvtt Iffrivr-c

G. D. XB<r&vT-«i* Mta-AaxiM> Xfa-ivT.«iv Ivrivr-Mv tn^ru* (v^rr-oi*

XfauvT-^ X4rSv<u Xfa-avT-a la^irr-«t tor&ru Urrdiv-ai

X0«4rr-a*. X0o4o4v XfaivTHi* IvT&rr-m to"r<«4* IvtAct-mv

Xfa«n(*) XVirdnut X&r<ffi(*) l«T£n(*) Urttntt laTWi(v)

Xfawr.«« IUI<r^a( XtfravT4 [rr4rr-M loTdrBt (vt&*t-«

hie declined raiStirii having educated, rT^ai Aapfng Ml,

"Ogle

3D»] DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES 88

307. Participles Id -«i«, -•»»«, -«■; -«vt, -««ra, -ov (fu-rerbs): nflciv
placing, &&nft giving.

nfclt -neibm -nMr 8«Soih 8iS«ftni EiSdv

TiB&^<«t r4((»i|t TiMrr-ot SiSd*r<«t StSovn-rgt ttSii>r<«i

nNi-T-i Titflrig nMcr-i SiSdvT4 StSovo^ GiSd*r-i

nNvT-a nMo-n-v nM* fcSivr-a &Eoeo-a-v 8iSdv

H.T. -nMrr-ii -nfcbru ntfor-a SiSd*-Ttt StStSo-tu &S<*T-a

Gen. nMiv-wr ntsvAr tiM*t-«> StUnr-av StSovrA* SiUir^vv

Dftt nMin(v) nltlron •nli[(n(*} 8iSoen(*) SiSoAriui GiSoO<rL(v}

Aec nNrr-M TiM«mt n«iT« tiSdyr^M Eificwif iMrr-a

So are Inflected Mi having plaeed, raittvMt having been educated, \uitu
kaelng been looud. Suit hminff given,
«. In pwtidptes with bwob In an- of fu-verba the s belongs to the verb-Btem.

aoBL Participles in -vt, -Vov, -**: fiuniSi akowing, ^tt bom.

Swn4i Biucvfaa itaaiv ^ ffcra ^

Samnfrr-Of S<uiv4a-i|t Siucv«VT-at ^vrr-oi ^&n]( ^nr-ot

Stucrvvr-t S«ii>tfa-n itunrim-^ ■ ^vvT-i ^Jo^l ♦I'rr-i

SwonfiT-a SKK»<ra-v S«Kvifr ^i)vT-a ^{lr»-v ^v

H. T. laxr^TT.*! SaKvtru StHccJwT-a ^ttrm ^Sru ^v>^-«

Gen. lwnnfrr-«¥ tiunVrAv SMcnlnr^n ^Wtbv 4A«''>> ^'t-r-w

IhU. Swc*Sn(>) SiMvArw 8HKvO<n(v) 4e<nC*} ^A-raxt ^S(n(>)

Aec. tMtrtfrT-«« StucT^o-Bf 8>LKrvvT.a ^rr-oi 4^rKi ^m>r-a

309. Perfect active participles in -«t, -via, -oi; A«Avk<k having
iooted, ttii^ knowing.

MBa. D. Hooi. bu ivraiit, iFraSra, iarait, O. ^Toirot, eU., Hdt. ^rc^,
hndvo, i^rtSi, Q. irTtOrat, etc. Some ediliouB hftve te-Ti^a in Horn.

lOglc

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES

N. v. XAmnh XAwcvta XAuK^ Mit itSvta ft84t

Gen. X<XiH(dT.ot XAvmilSf XAvxtfr-ot *tEdr-ot tlMMt <lS4T-ot

Dat. XAut^-i XiXwcirff XAinc^i «lSiT<i tlEvCf itSiri

Acc XA«K^-« XAucvto-v XtXucit ilSir-* *t8«(»-v itSit

N.A.T. XiXmir-i XAvkv(« XAwcAt^ itS«r^ tttaO iltAr-*

G. D. X«XHt^-o» XtXvKvlatv X«XuK«T-«ti> (tStr^wv «tS^i» ilMr-*i«

N.V. UlMtir-n X4XMt«t«i XAuc^-« ilSdr^ ttS«t« «t84r-a

a«li. IuXm^-w XiXiMwA* XiXoic^-a* «(S«r.«* <lEinAr itS4r-*i*

Dat. X<».iiKi<n(v) XiXwubu* X4\«c4o-i(v) itSdirL(v) itSvCoM tlStei(v)

Aco. XAvKdr-M XiXwnid* XiXvKh-« )ltiT-«t iIGoMt ftS<T-a

80 are inQeoled rrraiitiiictit, xrraiSaiiaiia, Ttriuituic6i having tducoted ;
trjcriit, TcTsruia, Tryofjt &om.

■. jirriii standinp (contracted from iaraiit') Ib inflected Jvriii, fffTflvs, ivrit,
O. ^rruToi (nitb irregular accent, from irTaiTes^,imivtp,iaTan>i pLN. Jorh^ro,
J^rOffat, iari^a, G. imliritt, irruvSr. 60 rttrtila, nSmliat, tiAkAi dead.

N. —^jTit (the mnial Spelling in the Dent, nom.) has -^ (not-i^) in imlt&tion
o( tfMi and ot forms in -vii, thos diatingnialiing the neuter {rom tfae maacaiine.

3ia ContraQted Paitidptoa. — The present participle of verbs in
■na, -cu, tMi, and the future participle of liquid veros (401) and of
Attic futures (d38) are contracted, rifuav honouring, waio^ making,
are thus declined :

N. V. (rifiiw*) Ti^Av (rifidomra) Tl|iAa-« (riiidot) T[|tA*

Qen, (Ti^n-of) Tl|iAt-T-ot (ri/iooilc-ip) Ti)tAa-qi (ripioiroi) Tl|tA*r-«fl

Dat (Twiiem) tI|»*»»-* (rijioMtrn) tI|iWi| (ti^wi) Tl|iA>T-i

AOO. (tI^ito) rl^Brr-Oi (rifiiawsr) Tt|iAra-v (r^idor) tI|iAi>

W. A.V. (t(M«f«) Tl4i«»T-» (ri*HM*ri) rt|Uff« (rvcierr*) Tl|»*»t^

G. D. (ri/iain-air) T[|Ui>T-Mi> (rifUM^wr) T(|tAr<MI> (ruwirrBtr) Tl|i£i-v-Mv

N. v. (t7>«Ioit«) T[|iAi>r-«t (rijiioiwat) rlpAru (rifiiorra) Tt|iA*r-a

Gen. (rituiiimtii) TlyAnr-nir (rifco^vrwr) Tl|UMrAi' (ri^ioin'wv) Tl|uirr-«(y

Dat. (riMowri) Tl|iAn(v) (riMOodvoii) rifuirAtt (rifufoiwi) Tl|iAaa(*)

Acc (rliiiarm) tifiAvr-ae (ri^MO*«fit) rl|utrBi (rifidorra) t^iAvt.*

SIO D. Awlie iM also Hfuut, nlm, I^kau from Tipipt, nlwn, S^Xoft^

ADJECTIVES OF IRBEGULAR DECLENSION

H. V. (bWw) w*iA* (rmfciwa) wot*<«« (roifcr) vMoS*

Gen. (roiA>rTM) vomSkt-^ (touo^i) «oi««n|i (vm^itoi) «oM9rr-ot

D»t (mwfciTi) womOio'h (tdmo^It) «ot«i«^ (Twferrt) vaw4i>r4

Aoc (rM^rra) *om4*t4 (rw^vuffar) TO>oOgm-» (■Woe) womS*

N. A.V. (roc^m) votatiTH (a-fuvdra) vowirl (roiArrf) woiaAiT'I
G. D. (TMdnviv) '■Mofar.M* (rwcofeaiv) voteWatv (roMdrreif) voto^rr-ot*

H. V. (rtiArm) «oioftrr-«t (tmAhwu) «oia4a-u (roi&rra) «oiatvT.a

Gen. (rsttbrtfp) vmoirTHn (ToWBUffut) wmovtAv (rooiimir) 'VOwfo>r.«M'

DaL (toiAwvi) «mo9o^(>) (reMoAroif) wotc<y»i< (th^ivi) WMoBsa(ir)

Acc. (roUarrat') «ote«vr4| (Towo^ai) woftjai (TMferra) *Maft»r-a

a. The prewnt pixUoiple of Si/Xa (iigXJw) man^itte Is Inflected like waian
thu, Ii^Ar, SqXoOffa, I^Xsur, Q. IifXoDrrDi, IqX«^^, JqXaOirof, etO.

ADJECTIVES OF IRREGULAR DECLENSION

311. The irre^lar adjectives ftryas great (stems /icya- and /icyaAor)
and TcAvE mucA (at«inB tdXv- and roAA^-) are thus declined :

Horn. fh^ P*y^n r*f waMt *oXX^ *oX«

Gen. f^iiXan p7iXi|i |MyiXe« mUlofl voXXIti woUmS

Dtt. IMtUv ImyAXu miii<t voXXf mXXt mXXf

Acc: ■''y** I'*T^^* p't^ voXiv v»U^v mKt

Too. iirfttt |MifAXi| |Uy*

p^iiXM itr^lXs hyU-
|uyAXmv iuyAXoiv iirfdXM*

K. T. pYiXoi (Ut^W (my'Xb «oUMt voMuU voXXd

Gen. |MyiX«* |>(TAXm> |i«yAX«v wdXXAv woUfiv «oXX£f

IhL (wfAXeit |trf<Uut(t ihy^Xaw «aXX«ti woUoIt voXXstt

Aoe. |u-fAXo*t f^fiXlm p»^tiAa, «»XXo«« woXX^ nXU

ni D. Ham. bu some forma from tbe stem t»\u- (ravXi^) wbloh are not Attio:
Q. wtKtt, H. pL voXfe, G. reUut, D. raX^vt (250 D. 2), rnUrri uid rsMri,

N. V.

«p$OiO

Gen.

wp^x

Dst

-P*.«

Aoo.

-p^sv.

86 ADJECTIVES OF IRREGULAR DECLENSION ^la

a. Except in the forms lUyait itfy*', ft^St t^B tdJecUve lUyat ii Inflected ■■ U
the nominstlTe sing, humc were /irvi^- ^at Is aometiiiiea found in tbe toc
■ing. Except in roXHi, roMr, raXtf, the adjectire r«X^ la inflected aa U the
nominatire slug. maBC. were i-oXXit.

b. Hie Blem i-oXXo- is from raXw-, i,e. ro\.f»-, iif being aaimilated to XX.
C. rpvoi mild forms its masc aud neuter sing, and dnal from the Stem rpyo-;

Its fern, in all numbers from the Btem rpdv-, as nom. rpetu for rpow-w fomted
like ^tia (207 a). Thus rpf as, rpitls, rpfer, Q. rpfur, rpitiat, tpitv, Mc, In
the plnial we bare

r ipSitt wra«ta4 wpfa or vpHfa

ir wpUa* wpbkd* vp^K or vpB^n-

>r v^aiir\{ii) vpblAn *p4<»< <«■ «p«to*(»)

vpOilKi «p4a or «pUa

d. Some compounds of raft foot (nS-) have -our In the nom. sing. neat.
aod sometimes in tlia ace. Blng. maac. by analogy to irXoOi (3M). Iliiu^
rplrDin three-footed, rflwavr (but ace r^irota Mpod).

ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING

312. Adjectives of one ending have the Mune termination for maaonllne and
feminine. The neuter (lllia maso. and fern.) sometimes occurs in oblique casee.
Examples : i,yn!ii dYrtlr-oi uninoun or vnknowing, droii AroiS-ot diUdleta,
tprj-lit ipy^iT-et white, Afiwai Sfiray-n rapaetoui, /uini^ iid*€ip-in bleued, dcdfwi
ixiiMrT-tt unteearUd. Here belong also certain other adjectives commoni; need
as substantives, as yv/ir^i 7u/u4r-oi light armed, winit winrr-at poor, ^uyAt
^v-iH-ot fugitive, fXif fXu-oi comrade, dXafdv dXaftKii Jtatterer. Some &re
mflaculine only, aa MfXarr))i (-oO) volunteer. Adj. in -Ii -liat are feminine only i
'BXXqvlt Greek, rarpli (eeil. yQ) fatherland, rv/iittx^* (rikit) an Mted Male.

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

313. CompariMS by -npec, ^iwrot. — Ttie usual endings are:
For the comparative : -rtpK m. -npd f. -rcpor n.
For the superlative : -TarcK ra. -ron; f, -rarof n.

The endings are added to the masculine stem of the positiTe.
Comparatives are declined like a$uK, superlatives like dyo^ (2ST}.

SllXei (&r)\o-) dear, &i|U-T)pot, ShM-tstoi ; lrx«pdt (tirxtipo-) ttrong, (rxBpd-

(^apv) heavy, pap«-Vtpat, pafi«T«TBt; iX^t^ (iX-^ar-) true, dX«tWr vnfes,
dXiiMr-Tatvi ; etisXtifi (timXtta-) famOM, t< ' '

A. a-oUat. Horn. hM also nXUf, roXXif, raXXir (like ifraBbt), and these fonaa
an commonly need bj Hdt irauX^ (tor woMt) ia sometimes fmn. in Horn.

3it] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 87

a. x'f*^*^v*i -irwrot an from x'lf'^V'i -T^Ttt (88, 299 b), from x'pi"'
grae^M. Compoimda of x^P^ grace *dd s to tlieetem (xo^t-o-), irbeuce *r'x»'
ttriiTtfait nxrre pleating, wtr^t poor has rtriv^tpn from warr-rtpn, witb ■ for ^.

b. UrigiiiaUy -^tpot had no other force than lo contraat one idea with aiiother,
and tUs funclkin la retained in aeflrepei right )( dfilartfioi Uft, iiiiirtfiot our )(
Wtc^*i yoHr. Horn, hag several such words : Afpirtpn wild )( tamt, S^^Ortpai
yuKutn )( men, cp. Arcadian ippirrtptt from ippj/ii male. Cp. 1082 b.

314. Adjectives in -os with a short penult lengthen o to «> : vio^
new, Kw-rcfNK, Ma-roroS) ^o^^iro^ difficult, voAnrui-ruMK, x<^"'"-n>ri>t.
An undue sucuession of short syllables ia thus avoided.

a. If tbe penolL Is long either bj nature or by position (144), a ia not
lengthened: itrrit lean, Xnrrir^pn, XmrrAraroi. A stop and a Itqnld almost
alwsTs make position here (cp. 146) ; aa rupdt Mtttr, titfirtpm, rurp^arsi.
mbt entptg and rrcvii narrow were originally atrfos, artrfot (Ionic nu4i,

trtaii, 37 D. 1), hence utirtpot, rrtrtirtpn.

3XS. The following drop the stem vowel o : ytpaii-t aged, ytpai-rtpet, ytpal-
Tann; taJiMih^ ancient. TaXsf-rtfKn, raXai-rarof ; rx'Aoiiii-t tlmB^ irxB^afTf^,
«XoAal.TBTiit ; ^IXsH (fear, i/iO^tpoj (poetic), #(X-tot(ii (316, 11).

a. Some other adjectiTea reject the atem vowel a and end in -aertpot,
-urarM, as fri'X** 9<<f«t, laot eqval, tptpmt earlg. These, like axa^atrrpat and
TtpKtitpat, imitate vaXofrcpM, which is properly derived from the adverb rdXw
long ago. So fiwaJrtpof, -alrarin imitate ittoai- in Horn. fuo-cu-irMiaf midfUe-a^ed-

316. unpei, -«gTttrt. — By Imitation of worda like dXifff/r-rtpaf, i\ite4a-
Ttnt (S13), -trrtpat, -wrarn are added lo atema in oii and to aome in m (con-
tracted to ov). Tbua, «Ual/u«t happg, tMiufar-ifTtpot, -Ararat ; drXoSt aimpU,
iT\a6rT4pM (for itrXi>-<irr<f)Sf), drWrsroi ; tStoui VieU-ditpoied, tiroivrrpn,
■idrrarM, and so in all others In -rom from mOi mind. (Others In -<»i have
■arrtpei: itpoArtpot more crowded from ABpiai.')

a. Some slenu in » aubatitute b for at ; aa (from hra^-liaiiar forgetful, hriKr^-
tliowir-rtfoi) iwiX^ii&jraTot ; wtur fat, xiirtpat, xufror*! ; riraif ripe has wrwal-
ri^M, rewalTHTm. Cp. 815 a.

b. Other cases : (with loss of «) ippviJro-i ttrong, ippuiitriartpot, -ivrwrot,
Itpiro-t wwnfxAi, ixpiTirTaTot, Sa/itrn-t glad, d^n-i aAundanl.

317. -impoi, -nrrvrat. — By Imitation of words like ixapi^Ttpm for d^opir-
rqm (83) from ftxcp" di^greeobU, -urrepot, -urraroi are used especially with
adjecUvea of a bad meaning, as iXewT-lrraret («X#rTi|f thief, 821), jtamnop-
Jrrvoi (nc^YB^Bt aAu«{M), XaX-JoTtpot (UXot taliuMee).

3I& ComparisMi by -Xmv, -imt. — Some adjectives add to the root
of the positive the endings -Ion' for the masculine and feminine, -iov

n4«. D. Horn. Ji^iiraTn (but op. Att.otCM'). ^•^ai'OT (MCffxirarot?).

Sit D. Bom. and Doric poetry tiave also -lur, which is aa old as -iwv. Forms
in -imt, -wTM ai« much commoner in poetry than in prose. Horn, lus piBivrat
{fiUtt d«Q>), ppdaatit iPfaxit thort), fiipSt^rm (fipaZit ihno), kMivtoi (xvi^
gUnioiu), Acwroi (AiAt quick).

88 COUFABISON OF ADJECTIVES [jif

for tlie neuter to form the comparative, and -ttrrac -17 -or to form the
superlative. The rowel (or the syllable /») staadii^ before s of the
nominative is thus lost

PouTiTi CbHTAmuira SnrBUATTTB

tirrmv (112, 126 f) T^X-"'^^
lutl.r (116) lUy-urrv*

4iS>^ (Urcet (i^ 43-ei^ pboJun)
Tax-i-l nsifl (ri rdx-oi ■u^TI'MM)
lUy-a-t prea< (t4 ^rfy-iAii ^eolnui)
dX-fuvdc pafr^ul (ri dX7-M pain)
ol^x-p^ iham^l (ri olrx-oi ihanu)
JX*-p<-« ftoteAI, AoMfle (ri fx»H>t hate)

ix«-t-»

IX*-iV^r«t

Forms In -lur ■» declined like ^Xrtw* (208), those In ■i^roi like iyaSit (287).

319. IrreKuIar Comparison. — The commonest adjectives forming
irre^ar degrees of comparison by reason of the sound changes or
because several Tvords are grouped under one positive, are the follow-
ing. Poetic or Ionic forms arc in ( ).

1. iiM,,«a

(Ifl-')

(w)

tA-A^

PA-rxmt

<^Ar(,»t, notlnHom.)

(^rsTOT, not in
Horn.)

■pilTTWI', KfNUFWV

«pAn,T«

(op. „in^ «r»w«)

C«/.^<r»0

(.dprurn..)

(^prv.,)

(«^pT«T.t, ^purm)

Xi(-» (X«l»^ \»lT.pM)

X*,™,

2. nafcX^I

KMtm (Kuii7-(/»l) p«{or

Xilp-»(x'P<'«'')»«"W|de-

XllpMTM

(ertor (x(v*r«pet, x*/""*-

r«p«)

v. V"" ('or *«-»»)

(|«wTo,, rare), adv.

water, (iy«*w (fa™')

JfiuTTo leatt of all

S. nU.^<M«U

mAXW

■cdMUo-nt (ic<iXX-at

beauty)

4. |i«|Mlov

5. i/lmrtal

pidM 818 0*I»»»>

rrm)

SIS D. Horn, has also iup8a.\iot gainful, crafty, mpttWr, Ktptmrai ; ^yIw>^
ihtiam mar*, mott drta^fiit (cp. ptyat cold, ^i-r^Xit cAKHn;), df^Toi (n)<dta
dear, jtfSoi eon).

j«i] COMPARISON OF ADJECTITES

6. fMMfU nMB |tUp*Tipn
{iXdxmm, L of A^c^} OUirrav, tXAwm- (for JXa- iUx»^«t

|uC«v (/invTDi, rare)

7. Ut|M litUa, pi. few Uw(t>v (Inscriptioiu) iUYwra*

(frr-dX(fbr Horn, rather Utt")

8. ««X^ MueA, pL tMny vXiCo*, vU», neuL wMtm, vJMlrm

vXatv

9. MS^ ««r W" (Ion- M*"') Hir™i
Of«<M) «il(r<pM) tfi,(r«r«, ^^wt«)

(jax^tpot) (tox^tbtoj)

11. 40^ <lMr (^fXTt^f) 4arara«

^iXcOnpof (Xenopb.) 4tX«lTaToi(Ze&oph.)

(^iMur, rare in Hom.)

a. ifuIiwT, dpwTot express ap(itw{«, eapaeUy or woriA (a&I«, braw, txedUnf) ;
ptXtirn, flfkriara!, a moral idea ivirtuout) ; tpttrTur, tpdrtfret, force Mid rupert-
oritD (atrong) (IJTTur la the oppoaile of tp^lrriiii); \iftar means tnore detirablt,
miiTt agTteai>U{S Xyvre my good friend) ; (ajtfwr, ntcMTtt express moral percer-
tiXf, anMTHiee ; x'^'i x'W'rcfi Iru^lllcfcnev, lack of a quality (Icm gooi)
(iMrtUcM, gooifor nothing la ^SXbi}.

b. Airrwr, fXiiTTar, Ai;ic'<>'''M Kter lo aliei MioUer (opposed to lulinr);
or to maltitode ; /cto«r (opp. to rXclur), /ulwr, fuJor, ^ror, 4«trrs also belong
botb to >upit and to itdfoi.

c The orators prefer the longer form of rXtttai, eapeoiall; the oonbacted
Titdt, T\ttom, bnt U>e neat. rUsr. rXciV Is not contracted from rkht.

(wfi b^ore) rptrtpot former rpfirot ^r«t

(twfy OMT, hejfotid} MpTtpat (poetic) htghar, Mprartt (poetic) hiffh-

mpcrior. ett, tvpreme.

(vX^rfer iMar) rXi^nafTtpoi rXt^cwfraTfti

(Tpaiyyw jiErvfeAi&Ie) rpoiyrfiafrtpnt

v«'T(pai [a(«r, Iiitt«r Errsrsi lateit, latt

a. -arM ^qwars in wrarof JUfrftatI, Irxoroi /ortAMt, extreme (from Vf).
321. In poetry and aometlmea In prose o

SMD. Hom. has irUrtpat j/ounffer, IrXfrraroi. Several defectives denote
place; hn^rtrtpot (tarar neorar), rapiIrcpDi (ripaietr b^ore), /uixoiTarot (fi«xal
JaarKCM). -am in fi^arof, fi^irarai (/iteot middle), tA^tm ImI; >AirM hwMt,
foe IrrarM Bom. has ^rdrwt ,' and if^aret loM from S«tfr^pn mcmmI,

90 DECLENSION OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS [3a*

-ram (fintOitit king'), trmfirtm a dotal cotupanion (trajpat comrade), ■tfn-t^
nuir« doglike, -rarot (nSwr dog), nvpirwpot more Tioittiyfvi (imOpot a goulk).
Aristophanes has rXn-rlrrsrai moit IhtevUh (cX^m)t Aitf, 817), and aMrarot
kit vety itif, iptittimiu.

333. Doabla CompAriaon. — A doubla cotnpuaUTe ooonn lometliiin to pnr
duee ft comic efFect, as narrtpitrtpiH (321). A ditublB miperUtive la rpi&rwToi.

333. Compuiaon by ftoAXov, fkaXmm. — Instead of ttie forma in
-rtpot, -TUTOi or -lav, -urrot the adverbs fioAAof more, ^toWra moat, may
be used with the positive; as pJaXXiw i^Duk more dear, dearer, pAXurra
4pjK most dear, deareM. This is the only way of oomparing parti-
dples and vorda that do not take the comparative and Baperlative
endings (jiS^Xov Jkuv more willing).

a. Compftrison by tuiXXar, /liWra Is coTOiDon in the case of compound
adjeotI?Be, adjeotires nith a pieptwitional prefix, verbal adjectives in -rit, and
adjectivra In -wt.

334. To ezpresa egualUy or tnferioritf evru at (often in correlation with
4»(p), frror lett, may be placed before the positive. Thoa, at good at Aand-
tome may be eipreaaed by ovrut dYoMt Oartp lati waKit, A^rtp d-yoMt dvtm rat
»bM), oEx 4vror raXif f (ot dToMt.

PRONOUNS

83B. The Penonil Pronoona. — The pronouns of the first, second,
and third person are declined as follows:

Nom.
Oen.
DaL
Aoo.

Wa; iw* enclitic
IpiIiluH enclitic
V: l-onciiilo

withoH

n9 ; ««« enclitic
v«(; ow enclitic
W; n enclitic

he,tht,a(,S26i)

gS; oienolitio
•I;oleacUtio
t; jeocUUc

N.A.
G.D.

«4Apo«

two

Nom.
Oen.
Dat
Aoa

%*v

4rAvou

r+<«(.)

nfi D. 1 . Homer Inflecu the penonal pronouns as f ollowa. (TIm (orm ifi^^
ifilt- are Aeolic).

I;.C00J^[C

nj] DECLENSION OF PERSONAL PEONOUNS 91

a- ^M encUtlo forms ;iou, /tot, fit ; roir, rot, rt are used when the inonoau
E wrampbatlc, the longer forms tiuS, liiai, iiU vaA the accented roD, rol, ai an

>I>OI>U>

Nohl

D«t.
Aec.

l-,C«ioL),l,Jl«.

li»ti»,(..d.)

nto, rio, «s (end.
A3M}, rrt,

nl, ... (.aii), m.

DUAL

a., k, k (ootl.).

rf, ft (end.),

IN., Ih. (aid.)
M, .t, ,11 (enel.)
«. 1, i (end.), p.. (ennl)

N.A.
G.D.

^♦-(enel.)
r«.«. (end.)

Kohl JjpA, IfiM 4|utt, <|tp*t (^od toc)

'^l r+.^(end.),r+«..

rV»».»«"W iiift-.^iHuW »+(«(,), r+i«W (end.),

'^ t «4i. (end.)

j^fV'M.'H" J|ifat,l|HM r+*M,»+M»(eneL),

"^ 1 ir4. (oncl.)

*«( (encI) is nsed ae kccus. of all genders and numbers.

S. Berodotos Inflects the petaonal pronouns m followsi

Norn. ffA v4

G«n. 4|iife,)|ufi,pn(encL) rfe, rrt, nw(encL) «4 (eooL)

.Dst. ^ol, |LW (enoL) ««:, thi (end.) «l (end.)

Ace. ifi, |u (end.) r^ n (end.) 1 (enoL), )uv (encL)

G«L iHiiw 4|i^ «4te-, tr^Mtv (ena)

DtL V^ V* v^I^' •^'A (end.)

Ace. \ ''''"' ''*'" 'fMi o'4*M (eucL), tMtIt

I v-^M (end.)

•f(rt to naed for torroii, -aft ; ff^i (end.) for adroit, -alt ; ff-^B (end.) for adri.

8, lonlo >ur (end.) Ic uaed In all gendei* (eum, cam, id), but not in tlie
phmL ififu, liifu oocur a few times, vMi r often, In tiagedy.

4. The chief forma peculiar to Doric are : I. I^iir also before oonaonants ;
0. Iniot, iiicBi, turn; D. i^w; PL N. il;iA; O. i^u,. i^,; D. itf>J>(r), '»<»;
A ^. n. T*, T^iTi ; G. tAm, twBi, rrft, tAi, t«0, rmS ; D. rlr, rir^ ; A. ri, ri>,
r«i PL N. l>iA; O. W>r; D. Wr, Ifur; A. i^. UL O. Mt, M; D. fJr;
A. i(r; PL O. r^tlto, ^te>; D. ^r, f fr ; A. r^^, f ^.

oog[c

9S DECLENSIOK OF aii^T^ [3*e

tiMd when the isonoim is emph*tic Thus, iit fMt ri pifi\tor gtv« nu the book,
otc iiial, dXM aal irifiauXtiouvi thev are plotting Tiot ogaimt me, but againtt yoa.
See 187 s. On the lue after preposkiona we 1S7 S. 2.

b. For ^(i, iiial, ri the emphatic tyuyt, liioiy (186 a), riyi occur. Also
ipaOyt, i/ityt.

C The use of the plural j/ou for thou li unknown tn Ancient Greek ; heoiw
ttfU is used onlf iu addreMing more than one person.

d. OfLhe forms of the thinlpenonalproDounonlfthedMlveB>raada'^Ivi(r)&re
OODUDOnly uBed in Attio prow, and then only aa Indlreet reflexlTeB (1228). To
ezpreas the penooal prononna of the third penon we find osaall j : inirot, oEroi,
etc., in the nominative (IIM), and the oblique lomui of airit in alt other cases.

•. For the aocua. ol aC the tragic poets use nr (enal.) and r^ (end.) for
maac and fern., both sing, and pi. (=ettm, Mm; eoi, tat). Doric so luea nr.
r^lr ia rarely Bingular (ef) in tragsdj.

t. iiitiir, ill*'; 4'>£'i Niui>>, b/ur, t/i&t, When uneraphaUc, are aomatimu aooented
In poetry on the penult, and -<■' and -it are usnaU; ahortened. Thiu, ititmr,
liur, if/iat, Bfiw'T ^'i !*«■ -*' and -ai are eometimee shortened even if the
pronouns are emphatic, and we have Iii4i', 4>utf , Mr, t/ti*. r^t occurs for v^£t.

326. 3tem*.~I. (OfH- (cp. Lat. nw), m- (op. UA. nJI-*), {i)iw-, 4»w-.
t/uO It from iitio ; intiit from d^i^ic-n (37) with the rough breathing in imlta^on
of {^uit ; -fftdr iTom iiiitur, ^M^t from 4/i/af with i not i| by 50. fyii ia not con'
nected wltb these stems. II. rv- and rt- from Tft; to-; r^u.; i/it- from iittte-
(37). IIL ( for e-f (cp. Lat. k), ^/ for e-tfi, oI tor o-^ir-i, and *^. ^e
form of the stems and formation of the cases la often obacore.

337. The IntenslTe Prononn oArit. — a&rit telf is declined thus :

Hue. F«n. Nant. Hih. Pars. IT«t. Mun. ram. Hoot.

Nom. a«T4| afHi aird N. A. a«rA a,M[ a»i4 Vom. •*?«( «1t«( >*tA

Gen. att«9 «iT% airoS Q. D, •4toI* airml* atrotv Gen. alrAv atrftv aAt4«
Dat a«r# »Iti a*T^ DaL atratt atimli airott

Aoc atr^ aMjc afrr^ Ace. atrott nMU atri

aaa outm is a definite adjective and a pronoun. It haa three
meanings;
a. teff: standing by itself in the noroinative, airit 6 dr^p.or i iwiip ttirit tlu

man hlttueif, or (without the article) in agreement with a auhataatlve

or pronoun ; as irIpAt a^rw of the man hivuelf.

M7 D. Hdt has utrhtr in the genltiva plural. For the crsais wArit (Horn.),
w^fa, T4i«r« (Hdt.), am 68 D.

i,vGooglc

39*1 .REFLEXIVE AND FOSSESSITE FBONOUNS dS

b. Mm, kar, O, them, eta. : Muidiiif bjr itielf In m oblique cue (nsTer in the

nomiuLtive). The oblique cuet of airit are generally used Inataad ot at,
at, I, etc., u 1 CBT^ ah-eS kU father, el ra2S*i atrSr AeSr ehitdrtii.

c. •ONK : when it la preoeded by the article in any case : i airit dnjp Uis tame

awn, ro0 atroB irIpAt of the tame num.
N. — Hie article and a^it may uoile by cnwii (88 a) : atrrit, atr^, rch'i or
rmtrtr; ra^roC, raJtrlfi ; ratr^, roh'g, etc. DiltlnguUh a^rT^i the MIM 1> bom
■vr^ UUt t. ; Toh-d the tame n. bom raOra thett thing* a. ; Tttiri from To^p.

329. SflflezlT« PronotuM. — The reflexive pronouos (referring back
to the subject of the sentence) are formed by compounding the
sterna of tne pereonal pronouns with the oblique cases of avroc.
In the plural both pronouns are declined separately, but the third
perscm has also the compounded form. The nominative is excluded
by the meaning. There is no dual.

mytelf thyttlf Ainwe{/; henelf, iUelf

Gen. l|MiiT^, -i)l navToS, -f|t (rAVToS, -%) l»Ta4, -f|t,-o4(a*Ta4, -I|t,-a4)

Aec V**t4v, -^ vmvtAv, •^v (ravriv, -l^v) kvriv, -tf, -i (sirdv, -^tv, -4)

G«n. %iA*«liTA* ^fAta.^TAv knAv or v^* «*rAv

Dat. V** a^tti -^ ^1^* A*Tot«, -at« kvrott, -oti, -at« or v^'"*'

Aec 1^«««*te«t,4« V>«a*To«i, 4* kim^ 4i, -i. or a^fif a4-

a. For JauT^f, etc, we find afrrA*, a^sTf, -oA, ahtOt, -i.t. DlsUngoleh afrroS
o/Ainuel/frora it^roO (328).

330. Poueulve Prononiu. — Possessive pronouns, formed from the
steins of the pereonal pronouns, are declined like iyoBw, S^uk (287).

V<t V4 V'* "ifi "*]' o*en; nit»« ^(Unpot -a -a* our, our otrni; ourt

9*t ^ win thy, Qiine own; thine i^inpat -S -o* your, j/otir own; t&urt
rit <t kv hi* (A«r, id) oun] v^npot -S -ov their own

Sn D. Horn, never compounds the two prononna : thus, i/M** airit, col
•dry, ol >»rv, N airht, I sh-if'. Hdl. has a few cases of the uncomponaded

forniB ; usually i/ittniTml, -ry, -rir, rcwvroC, Ivurw), ittirrSr, -ttct, -ott, and t^tur
mtrAt, etc. The ronns with ««n> started with ^wtry In the dative from to(T)
■iry, and spread thence to the other oaaoe.

no D. 1. Hom. has also rtit thy, iU for St hit, her own, kiiii our, l/iit
tour, r^ their (rarely of the sin^ar), rutrtpei of ut two, r^Utrtpei of you
tm>. For ifiit AtUo poetry may use ipit (sometimes printed i^ii) owr.

2. b. Hi In Horn, may mean my own, four own (1230 a).

.oogic

94 DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS: iXX^XoiV, i [331

a. DietiDgolah the idjectiTol from tbe pronominal use : i i/iit ^Asf or 6 ^(Xoi
i i/iM my /Wand (adj.) from #a«f i/iit a friend of mine (pron.). See 1106 a.

b. Ji is not used In Attic prow. For hit, her, itt, a^sfi, -Qt, -oS are tued.

33L Red^ocal Pionoou. — The reciprocal pronoun, meaning one
anotJier, each other, is made by doubling the stem of dAXot (dAA-oAXo-).
It is used only in the oblique oases of the dual and plural. (Cp. alii
cUiorum, aUer atteriw).

Gen. UXtiXoi* dXX<pi»v dU^iXMv AXX^Xmv AXXlpuw AXXt^Xw

DM. &U4pUH> UX^IXur UXiiXat* «U^k AXX^mm UX^iXom
Aoe. tXkt^ t>X4^ dXX4^ UXVMvt iXM^ kXXnXa

332. Tlte Definitft Atticto. — The definite artiele 6, 4t fo (sterna &-,
ir, to-) is thus declined :

Nom. i ^ Ti N. A.*iTATA Nora, at >t t&

Oan. T«S T^ T«4 O. D. «!» ralv rotv Qen. T*ir tA* *A»

Dm. Tf t^ t4 Dat. Toti rah *»(«

Ago. t«» ■Hfi T* Aoc. mit t^ tA

a. The defloite article la a weakened deraonatratlTe pronoun, and Is still used
u a demonatratiTe in Homer (1100).

b. tA (eepeclallf ) and toTv, the feminine forma in tbe dual, are ver; rare In
the authon, and are nnlciiown on Attic prose inHcriptlona of tbe clasBical period.

333. Demonatrattrft Pronoona. — The chief demoDstratiTO pronouns
are i&t thit {here), oi>rat thia, thai, ImIihk t^at (there, yonder).

Mom. tSi Ifii Ti6* o^TM aCn) To4ro k(t*«t tmlr^ bat**

Gen. tbSSi iHtrEi toSSi Totro* rairT)i rairon )mC*ov iatdnit ^Mtvov

Dat. rfSf r^Si vfBf Tetry rairQ rovrip Imlvf latlvg Imtiry

Acc Tirt* rfyAt t4S« toAiw *«^* -reftro luttttt* tmlviiv Ixttw

S9S D. Hom. bas also gen. t«u, gen. dat. dual rtur ; nom. pi. td[, toI ; gen.
pi. fern, rdwr ; dat. pi. masc. reuri, fern, rfiri. t^i (Hdt. TOivt, Tnn-i). Boric are
r£, rat, etc. ; pi. also N. toJ, rni ; O. fem. tSu. Generally poetic are rnvi, rairi.
Tol fi^r, rol H occur rarely in tragedy for ol fi/i>, ol if.

3St D. For Tour j( Hom. has also roiaSirai or THcriMi. Doric baa n. pL ro^oi,
ratru, gen. pi. fem. raurif (Aeol. Tairir). airet occurs in Udt (togetber witb
hi^rt). Dorio and AeoUo bare cQfoi.

DECLENSION OF 8&c oStm, tK«tvo«

Nom. »Ut aSi rABi oJtm aJroi Taftra faMtvw tatvu ImIw
Geo. rAySt rAvSl tAvSi reim* roirHV TofrM* kifvitv iultwr lm(MM>
Dat. rotrS* ratrSi toEo-G* to^toh r«irtti« -ninvt Intvou inliww faulmti
Acc ntrtt ^irtt riU T«6nvi rairai Tatn ImCvom intnU faatott

a. JUk la formed from the old demonstratire i, 4, rA tA(« or thtU, with the
indeclinable demonatraUve (and enclitic) eodiog -It here (cp. Ai-e from hH-ee,
Ft. ce-ef). For tbe accent of 49f, «I3(, aU< see 186.

b. oiroi haa the rough breathing and r In the same places as the article, w
corresponds to the o, av U> tlie a, of the arUcie. For olrrai as a TOcaUve, see
1388 a. (ofrrti la from j + the particle 'u + the demonstiative suBlx r* + f).

c. iicurat has a variant form mtwf in poetry, aod sometime* In pMM (De-
moathenea). (ixtitot stands for iK*[i}-*m from iiUi there + SUfBx -ovi.)

d. Other demonstratlTe pronoims aie

nrdrS. To*^ r<>^i>«f SO mucA, «o 7«a<>v^ pointing forward

TKlok rods. «.*»*. «*cA {In ^voWe) f (W whM follows).

ntXicia'3« r^Xun}]* nfXuii^t so oM, SO ^eal J

These are formed from St and the (nsoally) poetic rirn, rnet, nrXlxH with the
same meaning

e. Combinations of the above words and oDtoj are

THoffrot r«fa*ni r«.ffr.(r) SO mwA, *o mony ■) pointing backward

™->^„ r««fr, '"fi^W «<* (in 9«<«i«i,) ^^„^p«cede«).

r^Xuavrot r^Xua^q 'nfWs&r>(r) SO oM, SO freat i

Tbe forma In -> are more common than those In -e. AtUo prose inscriptiona
have only -«»,

f. The dual rarely has separate feminine forms.

%. The deictic snfOx -i may be added to demonstratiTOS for emphasis.
Before It «, c, o are dropped. Thus, iSt thte nan here, 41. roSt, O. rgvjf, rtiaSt,

etc ; nh-oirt, avr^ rovrt, a^nll, rovrigi^ So with other demonstratiTee and
with adverba : ToravrMf, obrurt, iiit Sot -i we have, In comedy, -71 or (rarely)
-ti formed from Y(t), 8(«) -|- 1. Thus, tirrti, TBimrvl, TamoSt.

33ft. Intem2>UTe >nd Ind^ntte Pnmoona. — The interrogatire
pronoun rit, ri tcho, which, what t never changes its accent to the
grave (154). The indefinite pronoun ric, ri any one, aome one, any-
thittg, aomething is enclitic (181 b).

tU t, D. Hom. always, Hdt. rarely, haa the final r.

SM D. Hom. and Hdt. have O. ric, rtO, D. riif (rji Horn.), O. rimr, D. rttm.
These forma are alao indefinite and enclitic (gen. rtOr Hdt). Horn, has ir#s
bx tbe indeflnlta rai.

logic

DECLENSION Ot T(t, tU, ETC.

Nom.
Odb.
Hat.

Tii

IiUtrrogtUtve

H. A. V.
G. D.

*(M

Horn.
Oen.
DM.
Ace.

«^l, T«

«^C.)

k. drra (not enollUc) Is sometimes used (or the IndefinitA ruti. Irra is
derived from nich locutions as roXUrro, properly raXXd -|- rra (fot rja).

335. (iXXoi. — The iadefinite pronoun SXkoi anoth^ (Lat. aliiu, op.
110) is decliued like oArit : cEXAoc, iWij, 3\>uo (never cUAov).

336. Aitm. — The indefloile pronoun StTm, ^wa;s used with the utlole,
means aueh a ont. It is declined tbns : sing, i, ii, ri Seiia ; roO, r^f, reC Stimi ;
TiJ!, Tp, TV '(IK ; r^'i Tl)r, tA iiira ; plor. (inaso.) ol San>, rSr Stlnir, Twtf ttTrat,
Exomiile ; j Stin toS J«nf rAr Jiim (iv^ryiiXcv ntcA a one ion of ttieh a 07i€
mpeaehed tuch a one [D.] 13. 6. Iiin ia rarely indeclinable. Its use Is
colloquial and it occam (in poetry) only In comedy.

337. Other indefinite pronominal adjectives are : Irtpot, -Si -oc : with
article, th* other, one of two, the one (Lat. alter, alteruter) ; without article,
other, another, a second (alJuf). By crtksls (69) Irrpoj, eirtpor, etc. kinpoti
■«, -m: each (of two) ulergue; pi. eUKer party,-iioth partiex, as vtriqur. Ika-
«Tot, -i|, -or: each, each one, every, every one, used of more than one {qvUque).
pLdvot, -i|, -ov : alone, onftr, »ole. wot (299) ; all, entire, every. The negatives
sUilt, ^i[Ult (349 b) no one (poetical tKrn, iiiiTii, in proee only afri, fi^ri,
declined like rlt ; accent 186), Lat. nemo, nuIIiM. oMiripot, jiqE^npot neither
of two (Lat. neuter).

33a Relative Pnmoana. — The relative pronoun St, 17, S who,
which, that is declined thus :

SM D. 1. Horn, uses the demonstrative forms i, 4, ri (33S) as relatives
(IlOfi). In this case the nom. pi. has rof, rof (332 D.).

2. Besides the forms in 38S, Bom. has gen, So (miswritten Sou) and firi.

3. Hdt. has Ot, f|, H, ol, al, rd. In the obliqae cases he uses toG, r^, eto. ;
though, especially after prepositions capable of elision, he has the relative tonns,

as it ot, Top' 1}, KWT %r, Inr' Sir ; also H i.

DECLENSION OF 8s,8m«

Noiii.tt4i8 N. A.«££ Mom. ot •! A

Gen. •; i{l aj a. D. «{v ttb «Tv Oen. Jr 4* m

UL 4 i 4 Dftt. olt alt at*

Aec C« V * Aca oCt &t <

t. Ttie bninine dual fortiu J and tlw &ie seldom, if erer, oied In Attlo.

b. fi if DMd aa » demouatratlve In Homer and aometimee In prose (1118).

t lie BDoUtJc particle -rtp majr be added to a relative proDonn (or adveib)
to emphuize the eonnecUon betneen the i«UciTe and its antecedent. Tina,
y-np, 4-rcp, l-rtp the very penon who, the very thing vihich ; so Oa^wtf jutt at.
yttf ii declined like St.

L Enclitic TE la added in i^' fn on eondition thtU, elit n (186 a) oMa to,
Iti iniunmch at.

339. The mdefinite or general relative pronoun Sarn, ^tk, i n
wAomer (any-who, any-whicA), any one who, whatever, anything wMeh,
indects each part {St and rtt) separately. For the accent, see 186.

1^*1, try i**^ <fn<^ ^*T

(mva 'l|tnMi S n

Nnn. olnm alriMt &n*m, Inrm

Gen. livTiva*, tnt* AiTiniii dynvav, &tm«

Du. aI«Tun(.), &t«tt «I«Ti«a(v) eWTivi(v), Srett

Ace. aWnvae SaTt*at Invo, ftrra

t. The nenter J rt is sometimes printed <,t( to avoid coofnalon with the con-
janetiim In that, beeaute.

b. The aborter forms are rare in prose, but slmaet nnivenal in poetry (espe-
(iillj frn, fry). Inscriptions liKVe almost always tfrou, frif, Ittil,

e. The plaiai Arra is to be distinguished from Irra (334 a).

PLinUL
(»n«) (t m) bra

((tTN), (5tTw) JtW (f«MV

firff Mm**

(tn*a) (» m) C^^vag) irm

aamMK osam. — 7 /^^ i

M

COBSELATIVE PBOKOVNS

b*

4. rli BUV be added to irtrtpot, Srot, sIm (840) to HMke thorn mora Indefliiit^
u iroJti Tu o/teAat«oev«r JHrut.

«. ott, 34i Of SitrvT-t may be added to the Indefinite pronouni to make
them M gonentl aa poaaible, m irrieaOr (or Srrtf ttr), IrrwaOr, inavc m^ out
wAatener, any fft'iV ^Iwtevtr, and so iroww'TuBt-ovr, Irrw-Jt4-"T(, or ivrtr-tf
Tar-oCc. In thee« oomblnationa all relatiTe or fntem^tlTe foroe Is loM.

f. The nnoompaunded lelattrea are often uaed hi an ezolamatorj senae,
and aometlmea aa indiraet iDtenogativML Indeflulie ralatlvM may be need aa
Indirect InterrogatiTea.

34a ComUtfrs Pronooiu. — Many pronominal adjectiTes oom-
spond to each other in forra and meaning. In the following list '
poetic or rare forma are plaoed in ( ).

(Endltls)

&*lMI*«

iBdtOalM RAxlT*

DliMtor

(SpMiaelor

HllldltWt

Iiidlrwt

llltBtl«Mt»

Titwhor

Tit

(4, 4.) sa. AiM

A«eAo,uAicA

Irrit tahoeMT,

wAlcAPuAotf

ai>m«on«,a»w

(here), ftte

gut

angoneuha

quif

o«, aliguU.

oCroi UM, that

quitgni*.

qMtdom

qvtcHnqttt

rirtpot

rirtpM or

trtpn (Ac em« or

irirvMt

uAiek oftwof

wTtpitoiUOf

UuoOuroftuo

lehdAflMr

Htarr

two (rare)

aiter

ofUittwo

t<t<rei>«9tM

wifot htne

woait of tome

Srot <M

Airiff*!

mucht how

quantUvat

»<»A«,

inangf quan-

number

w many at

(tH, niim»er

Ouf quotf

giKIHtlM,?tM)t

qmntuMCMrnqHe,

taMiu, tot

nbf

»«*t of tome

•IM o/uA(cA

Ara&t

ttfvhattortt

aort

aort,

o/wAateMT «or<

qnaiur

(«<C*><M

rtalU

■rikUm

rqMKM

aoofd,

VSUnof

ixqUm

kovoldf

oftome

*o

which age.

kmolarifer

age,$iM*

(t,W«.)

tOH^,

■be, (a» oW,

oratee

r<^i«<(

10

lotyOM

ri,X».()>-<>.

great

HO D. Hom. haa (Aeollo) n- In twrtrtpn, Imibt, and r» In Imt) rir«M,
•te. Hdt. haa ■ for « hk (_i}MiTtpat, (i)ii«M, (i)nibt.

.ogle

ADVERBS

•41. Or^ln. — Adverbs, like j^vpoattfoua and cxmjaiiotione, iim ortgiDaJlj
ease fonna, made from tbe atema of oouiu and pronouns. Some of Iheae nomi-
nal and pronomloal stems hsTe gme oat of common use, ao that tmly petrified
fonna ate left in the adTerba. Some of these words trere atlU {eh to be live
eaNS ; hi otbeis no coDadoDBDees of t^ir origin anrrired. Hanj advarbs show
old anSxea joined to the stem or to a case form (843) . It la eometimea vnoertain
wheUier we ahonld apeak of advtrbt or of noun* toUA local endingi.
Xominative (rare) : ri^ teiiA clenched JUl, bof once, dua^ pell-mdl.
Gtnttive: (np doqr afltr to-ntorrow, ^ next, wtO, oE where, oAroS in (Ae very
plaee, ArreJiir oat of lAa way (Jc + wtSQr) ■ by anali^, l/iwaliir in one^t wag,
Dativt i huiavlt at ptiblio cost, M$pf in secret, «(■{ in common, eto. (163T bj,

iXXf otAenriae, rg how.
JEnuaMee: very common, especiaUy anch adrerbe aa bare the form of the
accnaattve of neater adJectlTea, aa roU mmcA, iu*pir a little, vfon* at JInt,
T^iit^i' to-dat, roXXi ojten. See 1008-1611.
locirtfM.' i6n^ at home (_oIkoi hove), 'lseii«-*tt the Iithmue, nil «hitAer,ttnd
all adverba In -«. The -< of the conaonanlal dedenaioD Is properly tbe ending
of the locative, aa In UapaBai^ at XarathQn; -ewi (234) in O atema, In con-
trast to -wi ; -iai (-rrt) '■> ^ stems (S16) : MpS^i at the doon, nXarauri
ol .Rotoeo, 'AHnfti at Athene; further In rdXai long ago, /k^ there, turi^iatl
in fltU force.
InttmwtentiU : tut abote, Wr« Mow, etrm not yet, O-lt thut (bat the forma

in -w may be ablatives) ; tpvp^ and \iBpA in eeeret.
AbUMve: all adverbs In -m, aa in ae, •vtm thve, triftn otherieiee. Here, t.g.
original trtpU (cp. Old LaL aJtSd, abl. of oUw) became irqw (183), wblcb
look on -t from the analogy of each words as tU^li parallel to ifupL

342. Place. — To denote place the common endings aie : —
1, -A, -oi at, in to denote plaoe where (looative). -ou, tbe sign of the

genitiTe, is also common,
-ftr from to deoote the place tcAence (ablative).
ii (-{<)> -<ra to, toward to denote place whither.

la the following examples poetical words are bracketed.
rfM-i (abn-h) at home alas »i» fi-otn home aInCi (eUd*6i) Aomeword

(aiica- is an old accusative fonu.)
UJm-«i elteuhere IXXa-tiv from elmwkere UAo-n elsewhUher

orUX-«x-^ UX-ax-«-«n> AU-ax-^-t

M D. Bom. baa manj caaea of the local endhigs, e.g. tipart-»i in heaven,
*TvH'n'J^«M(iUassem6I|r; also after prepoaitiona aa a genitlvB case: 4t dU-
tao^of the ma, 'l\ii-atTpi be/ore Ilium. Cp./fiM», rM«r,M>r,SS6D.l. -Sain
Oa-tf to the tea, rtiur-ii to the ettf, rtf.jf^t to the plain. 'AiM^-t* (0 (the holIN
Of) Badee, I»4t timr^ to Ue hoim.

I;.ClK>^Ic

ADVERBS

[343

t^Wp»#i» from both (tytaWy n (o both tid**)

tide* ■

wvtT-*x-i-t*r from every wayr-ax-*-" *" «"

afde dirtction*

re)

aird-n lo (A< Beiy place
i|i<-m to (Ae tameplau

atrvt in (Ae wry pbux oAr^^tt from the very

if»i at the tame place ifi-tn from the tame

pUtee

'At^-n at Athent 'A^f^vl\-t€^ from Athene 'AUiraif to Athea*
'GkvpaelXrw\ at Olympia 'OXv|MrCK-Str JhHnOIyn^ta 'OXv|urlat< to Oli/n^ia

a. La -aft, -tt Is added to tlie aocaaulva (16BS), and Btanda for -a(,')t,
the old ace. pl.,+ -tt (Gng. to). Cp. 20, 106. The other ending &re added to
the Btem. -vi li naually added only to pronomlnid stems, -o-i forma a locatiTe
plural. » aometiinefl take* the place of 3 of the flnt declension (^ftfv9t* front
the root, stem ^{tU), or ia added to conaonant atema. Worda In •rtpo- lengthen
a to H. Between atem and ending ax ia often inserted.

b. -6tr may take the form -de in poetry, and espeeiallj when the idea of
wAen«e ia lost, as wpiati in front (134 D.)- -#a la found in Irea In all dialects.
-9m tor -fcf occnia In Aeolio and Doric.

c. Some local adverba are made from prepoaltlona, as inv above, ffw ouWtde,
tfm within, niru below, wpiadtr infroiU.

-Adverbs of matmer eni^g in -u^ have the accent
and foFQi of the genitive plural masculine with -t in place of -v.

Uta^

jutt

genitive plural Bumlw

Suml..

JMHlF

KOKil

bad

•' Ka«a*

M<«t

ill

timple

" farXAr

JwXAt

timplf

r«+V

plain

" ra^.

.^l+ft.

plal>av

^t«.

pleaiaat

■' 4U-*

ifiim

rHP^

prudent

pradenUf

UXot

oAer

" &XX.n>

&XXn«

otherwise

««■

all

in eti«t7 uay

A,

being

" bTM>

l*TM

r«.Hy

a. Adverbs in -ut are not formed from the genitive plural, hut are originally
old ablativea from o sterna (311), and thence transferred to oilier stems. The
analogy of the geDiCive plural aaslated the transference.

344. Yarlona Other Sndlnga. — Adverbs have many other endings, e.g. : —
Ht: i/ia at the tame Ume, ^Xs vera, rix» guieklg (in Attic prose perhapi).
-emue; nXXdcit many times, often, itar-riut each time, Totavrina to often, i*i-
*u at often at, vXnfTdni eery often, it^iyixa eeldom, rXnnUii more tfiaea. The
'fottiia without -f (irdn, «eX\iiin) are earlier, and -t has been added by imitation
of 111, Tptt. -ti)K : ruXXii^l^ (n thort. -So* : trior leithtn, rx<U* almott. -« :

30] COMPARISON Of ADVERBS 101

raftVMl In ^11 fe«y (341, looative). -rc : (r« when (Aeolic Srm, Dor. Sea), -n,
-wn: MfXavri voluntanly, 'EXX^rirrl in Oreek (_faahion).

345. CompAiiwin of AdTcrbi. — In adverbs derived from adjectlTes
the comp&rative is the same as the neuter eingular of the compara-
tive of the adjective ; the superlative is the same as tha neuter plunU
of the superlative adjective.

•H«l »f««'l'

a,+4«P«.

.rei^T^

Xfirrwt graafltllji

uXAi mil

KdXXurr.

tfil^ jrf««a««B

tfiU>r

Vi^

^TT«» I«« (310, 2)

<1«^

*> tMlI

t^r^

IpiVT.

(idv. of*TU*.ffood>

pa. wrv

l^iXiTT.

«. Admbs ol pUoe ending in »

, and some others, letaln u In tbe oompua-

Ure and superlative.

b. tyyit near has fy/^tpa' {-rifti), i-rrvrirn (-t>tb lars). rp^ Mirly has

c There aie oomB lornu In -«t from compantlTca : Itf^Xnrr^pui (Ar^aU-
rrtp»r) more tecurely, ^XTiiwi (^Tiar) better, SaperlatiTei In -on kre usually
poetic; as lUyvroT.

946l CotTfllatlTe AdvertM. — Adverbs from pronominal stems often
correspond in form and meaniug. In the nst on p. 102 poetic or
rare words are in ( ).

a. The demonstratlTes In ( ) are foreign to Attic prose except tn certain
pbrsoes, as (ol Ai even thut, ttS (jfiffi di not even Ouit (op. ISO c) ; trS^ /it* . . .
liH U here . . . there, (t«tr (^r) lal ¥•«» (») fiom thle tide and that.
Ii«» and IfAr* are usually Telatlves, litfa taking the place of sE ahere and oI
triUtJUr, and Irttr of iStr whence.

b. Tori iiir . . . Tvrt U Is syuODymons with wvri lUr . . . rvri tt.

C. ttr (339 e) may be added for Indeflniteness : iwueoSr in any wag what-
rzrr. tntfinEr from what place toener. wari Is often used after Interrc^tlTes
to giTe an IntenslTe force, as In rlt rtrt who in the world (as qvi tandem) ;
also with negatives, as in oftrort never, aiwiiroTi never yet. Other negatirea
an wlButiaB nowhere, oMo^f in no way, aMa/ifii in no manner.

Mt D. 1. Rom. has (Aeollo) *r In tfvvwf, in-iri ; Hdt. has ■ for the r-forau,
e.j. nQ. a4, S*ov, sArc, elo. HdL has <r<aOra, itMrtrtot imOta, 4rTMtr (126 D.}.

2. Poetic are rWi for veO, Ui for aG, 4fu< when, 4 uJUcA tsay, teA«r«, etc.

CORRELATIVE ADVERBS

DtlMtUd

(EhOIU.)

B«l»lT> Speelfle

wlwUrMt

rofi
vOurtf

T<rf

/rraiMa there
itit tender

»li wA««

iw<,« where-

^llMW

vheneet

tome place

irT*0$ir Ihenee
yonder

«fc> trance
((>«>r uihenee)

IvMer uA«nM-

(fOWW)

whtthert

Tcl to
lomt place

(Irfa) /.*We,
irraSAi thither
H<^t thither

a vhither

*™ wAflA«r-
(JO«er)

toAflnr

rori tone
Wnw, WW

t4t« then

iT,-a>hen

(ewr)

Tlmo

ritn«i3< that

4riKa (X wAfcA

uAJ«* time

W»y

eg teA«A
W<V?ftoto?

*lf n>m«

(rg) rgS., r«*TB
Mt* tmy, tAu«

g f« (cAfcA

tMI/, Of

9rg fntoUa

tear, M

Hum

irfl. fcow?

«o«mAou

(T.4.), («.)«.,

b™C.) (Aw.
JO, f» IM* wotr

wqr

dt lu, Aow

frwi ho»

M7. The numeral adjectivea and corresponding adverbs are as
follows:

S4T D. 1. For Ui« ordinals 1-4, tm 849 D. Horn, hw, for 13, JiUvb (for tfm-
Suca), tvMtn, and SnttUitKn (alao genetsllf poetic); SO, ibnvi uid <iIm^4;
80, rpdinvra ; 80, i^JdMrra ; flO, ^wntmmi KDd /nntusf^a ; 300 Mid 300, trv*-
rwi, rpti|KiriM; 0000 and 10,000, <iq«<xi^ i«ir(lx<lMi (-xcAmf). He hu abo
Um oidinaU 8d, T^rarai ; 4tb, rtrpmrti ; Ttb, J^NftarM ; 8lb, tyttmrei ; Ml,

1 •' (U, ftm, t» oiM wpArot jlrvt (««{ ohm

t f U» tmt fiitnpot Mcoad tit twite

S V iT«tt, ^<> three Tptroi third vpb tAHM

A S^ Tirrap*!, rtrTf» Wrfiot, -i|, -o* MTpfwit

• c' It fcrot KAim

7 r hrt4 Ifttpai twrdm*

8 1)' i«TA lySeot WAn*
» r frffa hotM Mm

10 i' Sfaa S4m»i, -1), •» !«<>•«

11 I*' Mom M^KaTPt Moidmt
U if «Mw> 8i«Mnt t<4wi«i«

(or rpd^KblSaim)

U iS' T<rrf i| (Wmip*) sal iti*^*i imI Sfaarat ttrrn fnc wtwJMi
Sfa>

16 W vd'mmlSaKa «4)«rrot xtl Uk**«i wmTiKiiiSaciKW
U) (T* InwlhKa (for l^KalSMs br«t k^ SAwt*! inmitmimi

103)

17 tf imnlSiKa lp8o^» xal Sfcoirat hrrmKuSniKit

18 tq' i«nMtBlS«it* <Y8e«» mtl BArarvi tvnHtakSatin*
111 tT lrw>«tt«« h&non
90 ■* *w»i(v) rfmrrti, ■^, •*»
SI ■>' «h Kol 4tMn(*) or

<aMt(Kal)(h

M X' Tpdbtavr* ifMbMvrdi TpiBnanTAjni

'•««; ISth, JMfa/urni 13th, T^>(rp««- r)w«^niroi ; SOth, fcuwri-Af; ud
ib« AttiD (onn of eacli.

1 Hdk bu <vM«w (>wwf/Kar«), mrtpttKattttt indeclliuible (r«rrvw""-
Brat), T^i^CMT* (jfotuvTit), TtartpintrTt, trttAtarra, SiqcJriw (ji^mrierrti),
r^c^iriM ! for fnn-M be hs» (Tmrn, and m etvdiaf , tlroxWnt, tlrt^i^xOuat,

y AmJIo bas vtitri for G (op. Bom. TtiiwAp<ikatjl»e-pro%gtAfi>rk'y, gan. pinr,
Tfarm Infleetod, aa alio Shtn, rtrrrprnxtrrttf, eto.; tor 1000, xAXih. Doric baa,
Iw 1, 4t (ST D. S); 4, t/tw^; «, fif; Ttb, l^wi; 12, JtviMtm; 20, ftnT<,
F<(wt; 40, TtTfAnrra {rtT^yttfTit'); 300, etc., Jwcarfn, etc.; 1000, xv^lw MKt
IiAIr (ST D. S}i for IM, r^m.

i,vGooglc

900 0-' StSicda^M. -m, -■ 8rfbce«taaTit BiKMviAmt

800 t' Tp«SKte>«i lytgKoo-too-T^ rpiSMOin&Kit

600

+•

wnrroKia-ioi

eoo

x'

it«4ruH

700

+;

800

«00

■v

1,000

A

Xttwi, -<u, -•

8,000

»

SwrxOuH

8.000

n

Tpinift-V

10,000

.'

rti-'.*.-.

ao.ooo

,"

100,000

.p

Su«a«i;^i«c

v«irraaoirian4t •mmucod-idKif

SwxH^taoTit Swx^'''^*^

rpto^awffTilt TpiffxiXtiMt(

|l«pWVT4l |Apl4«M

EwiiSpioaTit EwfiBpiiittt

SiKaKw^pw0-r4t SiKMtwfMpUkit

N, — Above 10,000 : tie itipMn 30,000, etc., fupiiiu m^^im, i.e. 10,000 x 10,000.

348. Notation. —The syelem of klpbabetlo natatloa came ioto use after the
Mcond century b.c. The flm nioe letteis stand tor unitB, the mcond niue for
lens, .the tiiird nine for hundreds (27 letters). In addition to the 24 letters of
the alphstiet, three obsolete signs are employed : r, a form Identical with ttie
late abbreTiatlOQ for rr, in place of the lost f (3), once used tor 6 ; 9 (koppa'),
in the same oider as Lai. q, for 00 ; for 900, "4 aampi, probably for san, an old
form of tigma, + pL From 1 t« 009 a stroke Btands obtuse the letter, tor 1000''b
the same signs are used but with the stroke belou the letter (a' = !,,» = 1000).
Only the last letter in any given serluB baa the stroke above : prt* 16T, ua' 401,
,0%' 1010. i is sometimes used for 10,000 ; ^ for 20,000, etc.

a. In the classical period the following system was used according to the
Inscriptions: 1 = 1, [III = 4, f (Wrr.) = 6. Tl =6, A (i^«) = 10, AA = 20.
H iinarir) = 100, H H = 200, X = 1000, M = 10,000, [^ {rtrrim tfai)- = SO,
C'X (jtrriKa xtXtoi + X^t") = 6000.

b. For the numbers from 1 to 24 the letters, used in continuous succeeeion,
are frequcutl; tised to designate the books of the JHod (A, B, r, eu.) and of the
dJtfiMf Cb,P, 7, etc.).

'349. The cardinals from 1 to 4 are decHned as follows :

8W D. Horn, has, for iiia, (a (J^i, li, far) ; tor ^fI, Jy ; Jfc, iiu (undeclined) ;
the adj. forms S«d and pL iowJ regularly declined. Foe 4, rfwapn, (Aeolic)
rlevfn ; Find, has rtrpaaa. Bdt. his iio sometimes undeclined, also Svuw,
ImIti; ffrvfpn , -a, rtrtifttf, rtrrtpgi; TtrrtptcaUS4ui 14 ondecUned. Aeolic
MfTtf 2 ; irir^upn, rivupm for 4.

i,vGooglc

MM tiEKi thrtt four

Kon. A pJM tf K. A. U* rptli TpCa Hrrttpn rfrropft

Gen. Ml |u£« h6t Q. D. S*«tv rpiAv nrrifmw

DU. M |u4 M Tpur((K) rfrrafn(i-)

Ace. I*a jkUc h Tprti TpU Wrrafiat Tfrraf*

L rff is for Jr-i (cp. 246). The atem Jv was OTiglnalljp ri/i (Lat. •«ut«I, lim-
pioL, tingvli), vreak forms of nhich are irwa^, d-rXoOt, from viitt- (36 b). ;iJa
■Unds for #f*-uu

b. stU dt, >i^^ «tf not even one unite (with change in accent) to fonn the
compoonds oMdi, >(^«lf no one. Theae words »re decUaed like rft : thus, otSttt,
iKvS*, aiti>, oMftit, eMt;uai, oMirii, etc., tuid sometimes la the plural (no
Men, none or no&odfei) oM/ki, ottirur, oiHgL, aM/mi. For emphasis the com-
poDDcU m»j be divided, as »iii tU not ohe. A preposition or i* may separaU
Ifae two puts, aa aM* Iri imtfrom not a tingle om, oM* ir M ne uni quidem.

c rpArot (prfnitu) means the flrat among more than two, rpirtpoi {prior)
the Om of two.

d. S6o may be used with the gen, and dat. pi., as Sio /ingiwr of turn montht.
Imu ooctus latdy with plntals : watrln . , . Suelt D. 89. 32. ivCit for ivvr does
not appear till about SOO s.c.

t. ln^ boA, If. A. liLtv, G. D. iiu^alr (Lat. ambo). But both is more
commoDly d^i^Artpot, -w, -a.

f For r^rro^n^-^KDpra, etc., eail; Attic proseand tragedy have r^ffopn, etc.

{. The fliBt numeral la inflected In TptU nol Una 13, rfrropn ml iita, U
rfufnUnw and lonlc Tervfpwmiten (very rare in Attic) are indeclinable.

3Sa The caxdinala from 6 to 199 are indeclinable ; from 200 the
cardinals, and all the ordinals from firit on, are declined like iyal^.

a. Compound nnmbera above 20 are expressed by placing the smaller nom-
ber first (with koI) i3t the larger number first (with or without ml).

Ut ral (r(Dri(i-) two and twtntf Se6Ttpn kbI ttmrrbt

■Tmri nX Mo twen^ and two, or dnri Mo ttotydf-lxoo ilrevrdt (ct ttirtpat

&5& = Wrr( mrnl •'nr^vra «al wrraKtam or rerracJriM (ical) rerritnTB (nl)

b. For 2lBt, Slst, etc., di (for TpAroi) kbI ilnrrii (Tpiaurrit) Is permissible,
but otherwise the cardinal is rarely thus joined with the ordinal.

t Compounds of 10, 20, etc., with 8 and 0 are usually expressed by sub-
tiacUon witb the participle of Sin lack, as 18, IS, Swir (Mt) Uomt rfrari. So
■uwl itm loteau rrrrdpuarra viith 39 ihipi, Iwir Sfeirs rtrr^mrra frq
M tMn; and witb ordinals irit </ar tliarrir hat 1A« 79th year. The same
ncthod may be employed In oUier numbers than 8's or 9's : irrA iraStorra
^fititm, i.€. 293.

i. An ordinal followed by ^1 Sim denotes the day of the month trom the
13th to tiie 19th, as * ^nrrg M i^n on the ISth.

I z::lv,G00g[c

391. WHll tJbe eolteotiTB words (996) 4 Xwm eavalrj/, 4 irrlt Dtett vrltK
ihttld*, numenla in -wi may appear eren in the singular : SiamvIA Irroi MOO
hone T. 1. 02, lir'li /tvplA nal TTpaucO. 10,400 hone X. A. 1. 7. 10.

352. /id^t, the graateat Dumtwr eipressed by a single word, meuu 10,000 ;
fUfiM, countitM, infinitt. Id tiie laUar sense the singular may b« naed, u
fApO. iimida infinite Bolttvde P. L. 6TT B.

353. Fractions ara expreasad In MTeial ways: Ijiuavt \, 6 lliiutvt tsO ipOiioO

half the Humder, nJ i^/iffftiw r Ar wtOr half of the ililpt, ri {j/utv rtO erparal/ half
the army, ii/uTdi^rTor ha^f a talent; rpta iiiuTdXarra 1} bUenU, rplro* 4/if>iHuii'
3} mitMc; rfKni^xip"' i> re^iTTTrfi^ior f, Arfr/itrof 1^, MirtinrTot 1), tuv r/rrc ol

Ko /uipat |. But when the numerator is less by one than the denominator, the
genitive la omitted and only the article and it*P^ are nsed : aa ri rpla iJfr^ |,
i«. the three parte (sell, of four).

354. Other classes of numeral words.

a. Distributive* proper, answering the question hour many eaehf are wanUng
In Greek. Instead, iri, tit, and nrd, with the accus., and compounda of rtfv
with, are used : nari jiio or airiin tiao bf two, two each (Lat. bini). The cardinala
are often used alone, as irSpl itiarif !ii<ru rtrrt dfryvptou laSs aingulia (HtlfM&tM
ddbo quinai argentt mina* X. A. 1. 4. 13.

b. MuUipltcaiivf In -rXoln -fold (from ^\e<,t, LaL -plex), drXiiDi aimple,
In-XoCt twofold, r^rXoOt threefold, raWartuaSt man\fotd.

c Froportlonah In -r\aaan: SirMiriot twice om great or (plur.) at moiqr,
wWarMaiai many timea ae great (manj/).

i. Sirrii means double, rptrrSt (rebia (from Stx-iot, r^x-wi ItS).

V. — Mult^lieation. — AdTsrha onawerlng the question how maim timeif "^^^
osed in multipllcBUon : rd Sit tfm S^n trrlr tuiieefive are ten. Sea also 347 N.

e. Abitraet and Collective Numben In ~it (gen. -di-ot), all feminine; ifA%
or itarit the number one, tinitj/, monad, Siwlt the number two, duality, rpiit
(rin((y, (Kod, 3Mdi dccad, decade, ilidi, inttrtrrit, x<^«tii MVfxdi myriad, iKvrbr
pSpiiSn a mittion. Also in -6t : r^trrift (-fot) (ha (Unl 0/ a tribe (properly the
nvmAer IAtm), rtrptKit.

t. Adjectives in -<u»t, answering the question or what dayf iturtfaJat (or rj
IcirrtpaJf) i99i\Bt he departed on the tecond day.

g. Adverbs of Divieion. — mvbxv singly, in one teay only, llxa, tixi in tw>
parti, doubly, Tpixi, TiTfiaxa,eUi.,re}Aaxv tnmanywayt, rarraxi In every waff.

VERBS

INFUDOnON: PRELIHISARY BEMABSB (S55-380)

3S8. The Greek verb shows distinctions of roice, mood, vn^bal
noun, tense, number, and person.

SM D. HdU has tttii (from SixS-m'}, rp^it for iirrlt, rprrrtii abo -w\^hm
and -^oriM. Horn, has Blxa and IixMi >yx" *^ '^x" i 'V'^ii r*r^rXf,

jte] VERBS: PRELIMINARY REUARKS 107

356. ValCM.— There are three voices: active, middle, and pasBive.
a. nie middle naually denotes tbal the subject acta on hinuelf or for Aiot-

c. Deponent verba have an active meaning but odIj middle (or middle and
pmive) forvu. If Its aorist has the middle form, a deponent is called a mid-
dle deponent (x'P'itVUK gratif)/, ix^pviinit); If Its aorist has ttte passive form,
a deponent is called a psasive deponent {itKiulcpai rtjteet on, /MffilfiitATp).
DapoDenCa omallj prefer Uie paaslve to the middle forma of the aorisL

357. Mooda. — Four moods, the indicative, subjunctive, optative,
imperative, are called jlnfle, because the.person is defined by tJie end-
ii^ (366). The infinitive, atriotly a verbal noun (358), is sometimes
classed as a mood.

358. TertMl Hoona. — Verbal forms that share certain propertim
of Qoana are called verbal nouna. There are two kinds of verbal
noons.

1. Substantival: the infinitive.

N. — The infinitive Is propetlj a case form (chiefly dative, rarely looatlve),
hateiD being like a mbstantlve,

2. Adjectival (inflected like adjectives):

a. Participles : active, middle, and passive.

b. Verbal adjectives :

In -T^, denoting possibility, as ^tXtpoi lovable, or with the

force of a perfect passive participle, as -ypmrTos written.
Id -rent, denoting necessity, as yparrioi that must be written.

399. Tmsrs — There are seven tenses in t^e indicative: present,
Imperfect, future, aorist, perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect.
The future perfect commonly has a passive force, but it may bt.
active or middle in meaning (see 681).

The subjunctive has three tenses : present, aoiist, and perfect.

The optative aad inflnitive have five tenses : present, futuie, aorist,
perfect, and future perfect

The imperative has three tenses : present, aorist, and perfect.

3G0. Primary and Secondary Tenses. — There are two olasses of
tenses in the indicative : (1) Primary (or Principal) tenses, the pres.
ent and perfect expressing present time, the future and future per*
feet expressing future time; (2) Secondary (or Historical) tenses,
the imperfect, pluperfect, and aorist expresaing past time. The
sectndary tenses have an augment (428) prefixed.

tM D. Horn, doea not nae the totare or fntore perfect Id the optative.

L, _ I; COOJ^IC

108 VERBS: PRELIMINARY REMARKS [301

361. Second Aorlsta, etc. — Some verbs have tenses called »econd
aoristB (active, middle, ajid passive), second perfects and pluperfects
(active only), and second futures (passive). The meaning of these
tenses ordinarily corresponds to that of the first aorist, etc. ; but
when a verb has both forms in any tense (which is rarely the case),
the two forms usually differ in meaning. Sometimes one form is
poetical, the other used in prose.

362. No single Qreek verb shows all the tenses mentioned in
S59 and 361; and the paradigms are therefore taken from differ-
ent verbs.

363. Hnmber. — There are three numbers: the singular, dual, and
pluraL

364. Fersmi.' — There are three persons (first, second, and third)
in the indicative, subjunctive, and optative. The imperative has
only the second and third persons.

a. Except in » tett caBM Id poetry (406 c) the first person plural U used for

the fint peiBon dual.

365. Inflection. — The inflection of a verb consists in the addition
of certain endings to the different stems.

366. Endings. — The endings in the £nite moods (357) show
whether the subject is first, second, or third person; and indicate
number and voice. See 462 S.

a. The middle hu & dlOereDt set of endings from the active. Hie paaslTe
has th« endlnp ol the middle except In the aoriirt, which has the active eudlngi.

b. The indicative Iiaa two sets ol endings in the setlve and In the middle :
one for primary tenaes, the other for Beoondary tenses.

c. The BubjuDctive uses the same endings as the primary tenses of the Indica-
tive i the optative uses the same as those of the secondary tenses.

367. A Greek verb has two kinds of stems: (1) the tenae-atem, to
which the endings are attached, and (2) a common verfr-ateta
(^80 called theme) from which all the tense-stems are derived.
The tense-stem is usually made from the verb-stem by prefixixkg
a reduplication-ayUable ^439), and by aflixing signs for mood (457,
469) and tenae (455). k tens&^tem may be identical with a verb-
stem.

368. The Tenae^tcms. — The tenses fall into nine classes called
ten»*ytt«ma. Each tense-system has its own separate tenBe-fltem.

VEBBS: PRELIMINART REMARKS

I. Present, inclwimg prtttnt koA imptr/eet.

IL FttOtre, " fulur* active uid middle.

III. Ffnt aoriMt, " fint aorlu active and middle.

IV. Steoitd aoritt, " tteond aoritt aclice and middU.

V. jnrtt perfect, " jlrrt per/ec(,^r«piupei?ec(, and/ut.p^i/., ocUea,
TI. Second perfect, " lecottd perfect and Mcond ptupcr/ect active.
VII. Perfect middle, " perfect ^nd pluperfect middle (pati.), future perfect.
niL ^r« jNunra, ' ' Jlnt aorixt and jlr«( /uiure patsive.
IX. Second panivt, " tecond aariet and wcond/uturepoMliie.
llie tenae-stams an explained In detail in 49T-GBT.

a. Since few verbs have both the jlr«( and second form of the ume tense
(301), moat verba have onl; six of these nine systema ; man; verbs do not even
have tix. Scarcely any verb shows all nine sjsleme.

b. Tliere are also secondary tense-Btema for the future passive, Ibe pin-
perfect, and the fntore perfect.

c. Tbe unae-atema aaaume sepanite forms in the different moods.

369i The principal parts of a verb are the firat peraoa singular
indicative of the tease-system b occurring in it. These are generally
six: the present, future, first aorist, first (or second) perfect active,
the perfect middle, and tbe first (or second) aorist passive. Tbe
future middle is given if there is no future active. The second
aorist (active or middle) is added if it occurs. Tbua:

Ain* ioose, kvtra, Ikvua, AAvKO, AcXu/uu, iXi$jjti.

Attiro leave, Xiu^u, XiXotn, XiXa/ifuu., Ikti^&ijV, 2 aor. iXarov.

ypai^ torite, ypaip<o, lypai^ yiypaijia, yiypafi.fuu, 2 aOT. paSB. iypd^Tpi.

OKonma jeer, aKu^mfiaij JtrKu^n, itTKW^BTjr.

3TO. The principal jurts of deponent verbs (356 c) are tbe present,
future, perfect, and aorist indicative. Both first and second aorists
are given if they occur.

poilvaiua vjiah, /SmiA^fuu, ^jSouXijfuu, i^Xr/Brp' (passive deponent).
yiyrofuu become, -for^mtiuit, ytytrqiun, 2 aor. irftvonTiv (middle deponent).
ifT/afpfua work, ipyaaofuu, tifr(aaaii.ifv, apyao-fiai, i\fyia0tp>.

371. Teib-stem (or Theme). — The tense-stems are made from one
fundamental stem called the verb-stem (or tbeme).

lUs vecfo-atem may be a root (103) as in t1-» honour, or a root to which a
derivative aofllx has been appended, as in ri-iHi-u Aonour.

372. A verb forming its tense-Btems directly from a root is called
B.pTinitive verb. A dentyminative verb farms its tense-stems from a
longer Terb-atem, ori^nally a noun-atem ; as StniXow enslave from
IniAvt tHave. Verbs in ^u (379), and verbs in w of two syllables
(in the present indicative active, as Kiyv speak) or of three syllables

110 VERB-STEMS, THBBtATIC VOWEL [371

(in the middle, as Sixoiuu reeeive) ue generaUy primitiTe. Odiers
are denominative.

373. The verb-Btem may show numerous modifications in fonn.
Thus, correBponding to Uib gmdations In ting, tang, tuny (SS), the verb

XcfT-w Uate showa the stems X«i^, Xoir- (2 perf. XZ-Xoir-s), Xir- (i tar. f-X(T-o-*};
tike verb ^f^-ujleeshovs^cvy- and pvy-(2tior. 1-^vy-a-r). lufi^miu brtak'we
And the three stanu^i^wY (2 perf. WifVa)! ^07(3 aor. pass, ippiyiir). otAA-w
•and haa the Menu ^tX- and traX- (perf. t-rrak-xa, 2 fut. pass, rrat^eiiai').

a. When the fandamental stem shows modiflcaUoiiH, it is ouatomary lot
convenience to call tts sborter (or shorteet) form the Terh-stem, and lo derive
tiie other fonna from it. Tbs student must, however, beware of aHBuming that
the short forma are older than the other forma.

374. The verb-atem may also show modifications in quantity, as
present XSt* loose, perfect Xi-Kv-xa.

N. — Various causes produce this vaiiation. \iu has v from analogjr to
Xfr^-u, (-Xv4a where tbe verb-etem \e has been regularly lengthened (6S4, 643).
For Attic ^Biru anticipate Horn, haa ^Mm for iptanfu (2B, 147 D.).

375. II Inflection and y* Inflection. — There are two slightly djf-
fereut methods of inflecting verbs, the first according to the common,
the second according to the )u system. The names at-verba and fu-
ver&A (a small class) refer to the ending of the first person singular
active of the present tense indicative only : Xv-u loose, rCBtj-fu place.

a. In the I* inflection the tense-stem ends in the tliema^c vowel. To this
form belong all futures, and the presents, imperfecta, and second aorists ihowtitg
the Utematie eowet.

376. According to the ending of the verb^tem, ov-verbs are termed :

1. Vowel (or pure) verbs ;

a. Xot contracted : those that end in v or 1, as \6tii loose, -wmUi^

educate, -jfjit-iai anoint. Such verbs retain the final vowel
of the stem unchanged in all their forms.

b. Contracted: those that end in a, c, o, as Tl/ii>> honour from

Tifia-<a, Toua make from itom-oi, &t]X5> manifest from S^XiT-ai.

2. Consonant verbs, as:

Liquid or nasal verbs : ^p-ajtay, /w-u remam.
Verbs ending in a stop (or mute), as ay-<a lead, m^ persuade.
N. — Verba ending in a stop consonant are called labial, dental, or palabd
verba. Consonant verbs do not retain the final consonant of the stem un-
changed in all their forms, Tbe final ccnaonant may be assltnllated to a td-
lowlng ooneonant, or may form with it a double consonant

377. Thematic VoveL — Some tense-stems end in a vowel which
varies between o and c (or » and ri) in certain forms. This is called
the thematic (or variaMe) vowel. Thus \6oim¥ Xit^n, Miwfur XAttc,

1= Coo^^lc

j»i] CONJUGATION: LIST OF PARADIGMS 111

AiWficF AjWtc. The thematic vowel is written °/( <^^ Vn ^ '^/e'r
7pa^"/T- See 456.

378. • is used before ji or * in the indicative, and in the optative,
• before jt or * in the subjunctive, elsewhere i is used in the indica-
tive (i) in the subjunctive).

379l In the /u infiection no thematic vowel is employed, and the
eudii^ are attached directly to the tense-stem. The fu form is used
only in the present, imperfect, and second aorist. In the other
tenses, verbs in pi generally show the same inflection as o^verbs.
For further explanation of the u and the >u infiectiousee602fF., 717ff.

380. HeanlafB of the Tensu and Uooda. — In the synopsis (382)
meanings are given wherever these are not dependent on the use of
the various forma in the sentence. The meanings of the subjunctive
and optative forms and the difference between the tenses can be
learned satisfactorily only from the syntax. Some of these meanings
may here be given :

a. SabjancUve : Uw;wr OF Uru^f let Ui loo$e, (tin) Xtu or \tvu (if) / looft,

(Fm) ypi^ (ttist) Imag torfM.

b. Oirtative ; (OSt) XA«i^ or \iraiiu (would) that I may Jook I ^tl) Mo^r

or Uraifuv (if) we thovld loott.

3BL CONJUQATiON : LIST OF PARADtOMS

L Tabs in •:

A. Vowel verbs not contracted:

Synopsis and conjugation of Xiu (pp. 112-118).
Second aorist (active and middle) of \xiina (p. 119).
Second perfect and pluperfect (active) of AciVoi.

B. Vowel verbs contracted :

Present and imperfect of rl/Ua, woUu, SifAou (pp. 120-123).

C. Consonant verbs :

Liquid and nasal verbs: future and first aorist (active and
middle), second aorist and second future passive of ^oiVu
(pp. 128-129).

Labial, dental, and palatal verbs: perfect and pluperfect,
middle (passive) of Wiru, ypa^, ■KtiBm, wparria, iXiy)(u
(p. 130). Perfect of the liquid verbs i.yyiXXio, tpttimi ; and
perfect of nXiw (p. 131).
n. TertM In px.

A. Present, imperfect, and 2 aorist of rWitfu, itrnitu, SiSutfu

(pp. 135 ff.).
Second aorist middle of trptafojr (p. 138).

B. Present and imperfect of Stuanifu (p. 140).
Second aorist : jSur (p. 140).

■| z:-:l,vG00glc

COSJUGAXION OF 0-VBKBS

[sto

OONJUOATION

X. (a) vowel VBBBS:

Stkofsis of

n. nrrcBB mrEM m. nan aobibt ttwrSM

ACTITB ;

Prenent lod Imperfect

Future

1 AoriM

Iodic.

Xim 1 looie or an
looting

X<» / «Aa{I tooM

IUto>/u<wIm»-

IXD«^» / loOWd

inff

Sub].

X4.

xw.

Opt

X<«,u

Xfo«,»

X<^,u

Imper.

X«t lOOM

Mvor loote

Infln.

X4<iV (o lOOM

XAmv (0 6« oAotit (o

\9nL to loote OP to

loou

have looted

Part.

Xtfa> loosfnir

Xtrmv aboU to loote

X4o«t having tootd

HiDDLK

Indie.

Xtfaiiak /loow (/or

XAro|uu / tKall looM

msMi/)

(/ormifMV)

a.ii6,in> / ««

«V«VJ

mVMyj

SBbJ.

X<-K«

X4«^

Opt

Xwilii^,

Xto«(,»|.

Imper.

XtfmlMM(/ortAv-

Xtroi tooM (/br fAy-

«!/)

MtO

Tnfln

Xtfw«» to IDOH (/or

Xir*<r«Mto6ea&oti(tO

XtfrofffmitolooMOr/o

»»«'( (efT)

I(Mwe(/orone'»«eI/]

hare loowd {/or

one'* mV)

Pul.

XB*,i«^Iooiini,(/or

XOo^P^^abotrtto

XiMriiMm having

OM'.WV)

loMeC/orone'^Mtr)

looted^oron^ttelfi

viu nwTPj

jsiviaTsmi

P«I*ITB

1 Futurt

1 Aorlst

India

"^Sl'^'

loDMd

4Xiti|F / wot JommT

Sab].

Like Middle

XvH Cfor »''^'")

Opt

11 .<

XvW,.

ImpM.

11 11

Xiht" (>« 'oc*"'

Infln,

\Mffa4at. to he about

XntfjMi to be looted OT

to be loo$ed

to have been loo$ed

PMt

1. ti

Xvlth AoDtnfT frccn

be looted

looted

[ Xvriei that mutt be looted, (requlriag) to be looted

3lt]

SYNOPSIS OF }

OF 0-VERB8 1

MOT CONTRACTED

>im (X«, XV) loot

XtLw^ jl or XAiKN
ULukAi Atpi or XtXimtpi
luhnKAf Irft or [UXvn] >
ULiafrmt to have loomd

Fwftst ud Plupaiftet Hlddla
XA«|i«i I have looted (^for myieif)

IX«X.V<|' / had loQttd (Jot mgrn^-)

XA«n (Tia, 714)

XiMrkt to Aaoe looaed (/or oi

XAafUvot ftorfn^ JooMd (/or o:

Ptrihot ud Plnpsrftvt PuitT>

XAifMU / Jiaire / been

ratan PdrTMt Puilv

MAttfM,. I thatl \.
been looted

■ TIm almplfl fomu of the perfect Impentlve aoUve of \iti probkbly ti«m
il Qreek (607), bat are iDcIuded to thorn the Inflection.

.ogle

CONJDaATIOH OF 0-VERB8

I.

(A)

VOWEL VEBBS:

383.

FNMM

I-p-ft-

I. ACWB

iHDicATira.

8.

1.
2.
8.

Urn

ASM

IXf)

Xfcw
Xtf««

D.

2.
8.

X4m*

IX«mF

IXMT1,.

X<r«f«v

P.

1.
2.
3.

X4m

IX<^

8MM

X<>«|if>
X<»n

X<MMt

SowmranTB.

, 8.

D.
P.

1.
2.
8.
2.
3.
1.
2.
&

X4m

X<-,-r

D.

2. Xistrm
8. XS.lnr

P.

1. X<iKH»

2. Xtfkti
8. XiM.

S.

3. X«i
8. XWm

Xtaw(806)

9ls] VOWEL VEBBS: ACTIVE OF Am*

HOT OONTBAOTED
Votes or X4a

In. 8. 1. ftto« tAym lkAim^

2. IXSroi XA«KM tKAiwyft

8. ftSn XAvrn OLiXtKik(v)

D. S. IX^TM )UX«*MMV flUXtMTW

8. OLSr&ni* XAfauw* ftAwrfn|v

F. 1. afc«^ X<Xi«4u* IllrtfcMpiw

8. IXbtm XAfNln OuXfnvw

Sttu. B. 1. Xiru ^4X«KA■ ft (Ml) or XA«kn (eOS)

8. XWgt luXwAt^t )kAi«i|t

D. 2. kinfrmi IuXmcAti Vm" X4XtKi|T«*

8. Xtfn|T«v UliMdTt t[nr XAtwipvr

P. 1. Xirm^nr ]uX«N*nf i|u* lUXAwiu*

S. X^vwn XAwtAmtn XAfaiM'i

On. & 1. XArwp X*Xm(^ «b|v (M4) or ]UX«kM|u, -ohi*

2. X<rMh X<MM (008) X«Xi«At 4(ik XiX««>Lt, -sliit

8. Xfo«s >*^*M (W0) X«X»«Ai (Ii| XAiKM, -oCn

O. 2. XAvawn' X«X«i4r« Ottnv, *tnr XiXtKeiro*

8. iMrotnir X«XMtdn •t^np', ifniv XiXtKoCniv

P. 1. X4nu|u* XiXwidm (tq|u*, «t|u* XiXAcmiu*

2. X<««m XtXvNint «Iirn, atn XiXJKOvn

& Xtf»«ur, X^TMW (N») XiXmAtw flipmv, itn XiXinim

Imv. a 3

h«n*

XiXvK^ (v4i (097) oi

■ [Xftw«(097)

X»««ri>r

XAmAnlirra*

XA<K*T»

X4»r.

\A»timl*rmr

X<X<«m]

XArw

XiXwi4r»

X«;w.(a06)

XAimfct, XA«nU,

XA«rt.(SO»)

i,vGooglc

CONJUGATION OF O-VERBS [383

S. HiDDLK '

& 1. Xtfspu

a. Xtfn, Xdik (626)
S. X^r<u

X4rii,XtfrH
X4m«

D. S. X4wfc«

P. 1. XM|u*a

2. Xtfw«i

3. Xtf>*r>i

ixur-k

X>,nl,..h
X<»««i

S. 1. X<«|iU
S. Xtfiirm

D. 3. XV«"
3. X«^r«o«

P. 1. X«A|u*a
a. XA^

S. X^MVTU

3. XA»o
3. XtfoiT*

X<nn.

D. 2. Xtfsui^M

Xtnotn

3. i3»Mv

XMl<«p

P. 1. XBolHfe
3. XAh«4i
3 Xfckrto

S. 2. XAiv

XMfMvot, Xl«|jiifnb
Xoiftyot (287)

XfriiMvoi, -4^
-o*(2S7)

I Xfw Id the middla usaall; means to rtleate for on«'a aelf, get tome c
firte, henoe to raruom, redeem, dtlloer.

A] VOWEL VERBS: MIDDLE OF )Am

VoiCB or Xtm

xa«|.«.

IXAVnv

2. tkUm

XAvrai

&iXv<ro

3. JXAfut*

XAvru

flUXvT*

D. S. «^aH»v

XAHTtov

lXAw«**

UXwrfcv

a4Xt««ir

P. 1. tUrd|irf>

OAtHfc^

S. Ainm*,

xa«r«t

&a«r«>

XAvvnu

OAxw

8. 1. X<r-|uw

2. Xtfru

S. X4rirnu

XAV-^w

8. X^njrfcv

P. 1. XlhrA|u«a

XA.V^£|u*

2. X*T-*

Xd^*Ot<T.

8, 1. W«(|H|»

2.X<^

8. Xinm

X.X.viM><V.vo

rdfM

8. X9r«b«ri>

P. 1. Xtombuk

XlXv(LiK>l t(lt|UV I

,r.I,u,

X. XW«c«.

«tT«

8. X<<r<urr«

or<b.

a 2. X«ru

XAw« (699 g)

& Xto4<r«.

XAir«> (712)

D. 3. X4aw«Dy

XAwpfw

8. Xte^brtov

XiXW«i>r

P. 2. Xtfirorif

XAlRF«f

8. X«<ri«««*

XA«r«M>

XiXWfu

X««4fum, -n. -«>'

(287)

(887)

3,q,z.-3bvGoogle

COMJDOATIOH OF O-TEBBS [Mt

Xrf4«r~

8. Famitb

VotOB or kU

rutDnParfiKil

lAllriM

8. 1.
2.
8.

1X4*,*

ix«tn

D. 2.
S.

]uX4<r«r«<»>

P. 1.

2.
3.

Ulinri.

StmraaciiTB. I

8. 1. Ulto«l|i^* X'^lff

8. UiAnMo X«lili|i

8. XAtfoviTo XAtt^ \j4lim,n

D. 2. XAimatuv Xatrirsv or Xatttirrav Xvt^owtvfcv

8. XAV«vl«4i|* X«Vt(n)i> or Xvtti^v Xii#i|rslv4i,i>

P. 1. XAQvo(|uI(i X«lit|>n> or X«I«(i||u* Xv*i)n(|wk

2. Xthtfrow*! XvMrt or Xvli(i|n Xw*V««**>

8. X«X4««i*ra Xvlit** or Xiil«[^v«v Xnl^—tw*

iMPBkATira. S. 2.

IxnitmTx, X<X<o-w*a> XiiH|»« XvMinvWi

pABTiotruL X«XVrd|u*gi, XvMi, XvhUs, Xii6i|r4|uiioi,

■^ -w (287) XiiM* (307) -ifc -w (387)

jSO a-V£BBS: SECOND A0RI6T, SECOND PEKFECT 119

SBL As examples of the seoond aorist and second perfect Bystems
(368), the seooad aorist aotire and middle and the second perfect and

pluperfect active of Ann* leave are here given.

lAoriMAotm lloritlHUdl* 1 PMlkM IPIniMtftat

1*11. 8. 1. |]U«*V lht*d|H|v UXaiva lUMtvi)

3. ttkimu SllrM XOrnvw AAa(vi|(

8. 8u*< IXImra XAomn AiXa(*M(>)

D. 8. IUvn*v JXhnvfcv UmItatw ftiXoCmrsv

S. IXn4n|* llu«Jp<i|* ]uX>(*«Tav IKAotmtr^

P. 1. lX(M|m DumifMta. XAekmiuy lUMtw^ur

X. lUnr* IU««r4i XiXstnn ftAatwM

8. IXmov iXIwevTo Uk»hrSn IXAohnnv

Sow. 8. 1. XIn Xfa»|Xi XiXatv^^fi (6Mo)or hiXalnt (69S)

2. Xt«i|l Xfvg XiXoHrAf jt XiXolvft

3. XI>) Xlvipmi XAsHTJki ^ XAohru
D. 2. Mvv** Xt'Tiirfcv XiXoMrin lirov XiXstvqrs*

8. XJiwrfnv X(«i|v4»v X(Xm«4t« ^tpv X«X«lwi(t«v

P, 1. Xtwafuv XwAfula XiXatv^ni fl|uv

2. XlrifTt Xtrqffh XaXanrdni Ifn

3. XlvM^ X(««*Tmi XiXowAm in

On. a 1. X;>Mf» Xt«I)ui* XiXM«Aiili|*(69»o) 0

2. X(i>oit XhrMo XfXwvAi Aifi

8. XhrM XlvMTa XlXanAt «(i|

D. 2. Xiw««««v X(««w4oi> XtXourin ■bfroc, ftrav XiXoIvsira*

8. Xtvaln)* Xw«(ffti|v X«XM«4n tl^inpr, tfin\v X«X«Mr«(Ti|i'

P. 1. X[««tp«v Xiv0[|ul» XtXoivAm ttinu*, (Iiw* XAchr«i|u*

2. XI*aiTt Xt«ta4i X«Xoiv4t« ttip« iln X«X«(«*it«

3. XXvaMv XXvgim XtXoMrtnt ihtsmc, •In> XiXatrouv

Up. 8. 2. X(n Xt*a«

8. Xvv^rw Xw4r9m

P. 8. Xlwm X(ww«i

8. XMrivra* Xib4i<h>

Xmt* XivirtM X«X«ia4Mu

t. Xi«A*,Xmb»- Xi«d|uMi, XAm«^ -Mta, -<■ (809)

ra, Xi«4* -il, •«¥
(9D6 •) tM7>

L;,.„-z:-:l,vG00glc

CONJUGATION OF O-VEEBS

I. (b) towel TBBBS: OONTBAOTBD TEBB8

388. Verbs ir iiu, -cu, -ou are contracted only in the present And
imperfect. The principles of contraction are explained in 49-66.
n/iaa (rifta.-) honour, voiiio (rou-) make, and finXooi (SifXa-) mcmijhat are
thus inflected in th« present and imperfect oi the active, middle and
passive.

a 1
s

Tirtt

nut

(h«.)

(•,Ura)

IilXI

D. 2
8

(Ti,ii>r»)

T(|Ut«¥

MMtlVV

(l,Xi.r..)
(•,Xto..)

p. 1

2
S

CF.Ar.)
(«*w.)

voMln

(J,«.r.)

8*-«l-v

ii<r..n.T

8. 1
2
3

<«!«")
(«««)
(M^)

Mil

(fc.1-.)
Chv*»)

<»«X«r)
(M«\«)

D. 2
3

(«,».*,.) «|Mt.p

P. 1
2
8.

(<«*r.) hvMtn

S.1
8
8

«rtt

™4

(i,w.)

(WW

D. 2
8.

Ti|.in.

(••Ar..)

(»,M,r..)

8,Xi™.

P. 1
3
8.

rt|^l„

(r«A».-)
(,w,r.)

...%»

(3,U-r.)

(.lU..

tllkto.

)«]

TOWEL VERBS: CONTKACTED V£BB8

AonvB— CdmIihM

*UUHT oniTm (sM 898)

8. 1. (ri|«(,.)
J. (ri/-.ll)

(.™l*)

(1,W,.)
(1,V»I,)

D.J. (,ip«lm„)
8. (,i™tr„)

tW^«f

(T«™*r,.)

(l,l».4r,.)

<,X^,r.,

I. (,ii™l^)

(»™.l„«.)

...Iw.,

(i.,^«J.fr«) flfl^olir*

(1,X1«»)
CJ,U«)

8qM

D.J. (ri>.t.r,.)

(™*.r.,)
(,™Jr„)

mMnr

(!,Wt,.)

P. I. (riftiM^r}
!. (rW«T.)
8. (rijJ^)

(T»fcw)
C»oA<T.)

nwtn

(J,xl»™)

(•,K1«.,)

PKBnxT INrSBATITa

S. 1. C"*-)

"•l"
"!*•

milk

(MX-)
(1,1.*.)

C™*r..)

mutnv

(.,Xl.r..)
(J,Wr..)

P. J. (rWr.)

nr^n

(,«At.)

(I,W.r.,)

rmsuwT ntminiTa

(*|Xfc.») »iiUt»

(rllUitr) Tl|iAv (THAtv) ««tAv

10. For the Inflnltln, m

¥ot the tnfiectioa of contracted puticiples, see 3
469 ■.

AtUe pioM tiwttjB, and AtUo poetry osumlly, use tbe coDtraotad fonn&

N. 1. — The open forma of verba tn -sw are MmeUmei found In Homer. Terba
in -Ml oftan ahow the onoontracted forma In Homer ; la Herodotus oontiaction
gniperlj takea t^ace ezoept before t and w. Verba In -«» nerer appear In tlMlt
anasntraoted forma In any aatbor.

K S. — rwA> Bometlmea loaea Ita i (43) except before o aounda.

.oogic

CONJUGATION OF 0-VEBB8

UlDDLB ADD TiUm

8. 1. (rfydtiMu} T{^A|iai
2. (r!MB,'i*^)Tlrt

B. CrW«-»)

.I,£ru (,«*riu)

«m<tTU

(l,X».r»)

8,X.W«

D. a. (r!M<U»fcO

woMtrio*

(1,X1««..)

S,,k.fcfc.

». (riM»r«)

ri|.V<> (™*rf.)

S. (trliiiM) IrtfkA (frNfcv) hraiaS (MvX&w) lfa|Xa«

S. (MfuUTg) *rtp&n (^Mitra] fcroutn (MqXJira} ai)]u»n

D. 3. (frvulwfcr) irt|>£««n (^ot^M-fcr) Inutvfcv (MitXWhr) ISi|Xote«ai

3. (Vv>i«*«(} M|i&a4i (/r«i^(*«>) tnuteli (MqXinrAr) tti)Xo«r«f

8, 1. (rifuUfiu) TtpL4|iai (roiA^fuu) TQiajtM (tifitim/ui) &i)XA|ku

Si|Xo(

8. (TifuiHi-g) T[|t^ (imiAiira) m«ti« (AirUiHrg)

P. 1. (rIfHoIficfa) T[^|u*B (tomI/mAi) vmoIimIs (SiXnl/tcfc) Si|X«l|u8»

Si|Xeto«si>

tM TOWEL VERBS: CONTRACTED VERBS 128

ICnnHJi AND Puura — CoMlvOti

PKCaBiri INPBXATITB

3. (rt^M^rtftr) Tt|i^rl» (reuMn) «wmMw <JqX«4r«w) S^Mfafa

D. 2. (rifuiwfcr) -rtii&vtav (rxAHrfcr) -vvutefcv (Ii(XWter) fii|X««v«w

i. Iriiuiveir) tifirtmv (rKWreWv) mulm4m» (ffWrfer) hiXAtrtMr

P. S. Cr;*>4H«i) T[^a««t (aWfrft) <M<to«i (J^XiMtft) lqX«9Hl

S. (riftoArfcii') rt^r*i»r (rM^fwr) *outo«w (9if)MAr«m) Si|)M«««m

(rifMiarAu) Tt^S««M (rw/trftu) «Mtfrtu (<«X«w<u) Bi|)m9Hm.
imaanm PAKnoirui

(r^i«4|i*r»i) TtH^fH*** (tbu^ivi) W0i«t|U*O( (J^Mfum) li^<|Mi<|

386. buBplM of ContTacted VhIm.

1. VerlM In -aw :
fcnri* dMMtvc (irdrq deetU) if^ M 1» moMm C^i Ul^Ut)

M* fJ^o^ Ob4 fkoHt) -mpdMiuu at(«m;>t (rnjaa trial} -

IHXtri* jmieliM (^Mrq pnuliiw) rAnriM JlnUh (nXivr^ end)

riioiw eonqutr {Mx^ sMory) TaX|iA« dura (rtKfia Oarlnt')

S. Vntai In -nt:

iSurf> do NToiv (UwM »^M) •<"<> fAAoAtt (olm ftovM, pcwtlo)

pMfN* OMtM (0a^ oaflMtiv) «oX^l4m nvLle loor (viX«(M tour)

nvftm order (ictofm onkr) ^Vd)4« envy (fMm envj')

plvi« Aote (/urn AoM) ^tMa Iom (^IXoi /Hmd)

8. Votta In -«•:

4{>4w tkiwt woriky (Iftw ivortAy) Mt6» malu valtd (idW oHOorMy)

h»X<n etulase (3o9hM «IaM) wa)U|U«m(ii:«aiietMmy(ir(riX(fw«i«ar)

l)Li»<if<ii ul JV (A«M^wf JVm) rMt>p<ii erowN (rr^^ivi enneM)

t>|«* ptrt under tlu yob ({Vy^ VoJtv) TMii*4« ktmatat* (ramvii AiiMM«d)

38T. Prtadptl puta of Contractwl Voiba.

tl|l4a f^V* M)M)«« Trrt|U|KK TtTt|M||MU h^.tj^r

hutm hjf^U. W^plra rrf^rbn nt^rajMi l»qfih|<>

«M4< «mV^ )>«i<|v« wtwabi^ ««nli||ia> Ivm^^v

l^hte Bi|Ur» tUfkmw. M^tUm B«tX-|tM O^Mt^

CONJUGATION OF Q-VERB8
Srirorai of y^fi-m honour

Pr».Aot.

lapt A«t

. rot Act

AM. As*.

I^ft Act n»p. A«t.

Ind. 11^

H—

«rt~

Mfl"

"<i"i- . •■>«f*'n

Sub. T{|.A

«!*»

Opt «Wv.-«l"

.Mp^idi«<r

Imp..!,.!

-^-I"'

Inf. ifjl&V

X|.4.mr

T»<l~

Fu. Tl|iAr

T»V~

rt|*4««t

7«t(,i1,llA|

Uld-Pu*.

Hkldk

llUdJt

iai.PMa.

M. IHlvlu

"rfOTI" '"'•1*11

Sub. ifi^Apu

«rt~l-

T«,wl>"i

Opt TlnFT

iGip. Mid

'tl"!^

nT*)Mlff»

iDl rt|i£««u

"M™*",

l^lt.FHCPMfc

Ibd.

l«l^*l<

Bub.

«l"lM

Opt

«„t,r.ci>v

rt„e.i,.

^I|»,™l|>,p.

top.

«ii<V

Verbal adiectlTM : -rtitiiTii, Tt|»|Tfat
Stxomh or tifpA-* Aunt

A«. Aat. Ftrt. AA Plnp. Aot.

W^pKo-a T^pKn iTfh|p4Ni|

ti||»<ra Titi)pSKAi £

»4pK4ni*

Far. hiplv tifpAffw (iipirKt TrfijpdMAi

UU. Pui. Ulddlg HIdrUg UU. Put.

Ind. •qpAiLU tfi|pA|i^ liipAo-tiiu lli|p)to^it* -nf^tpBiiM tTrf^p<|U|*

8iib. t^pAJiu lilpivwiuu nti|pK|J*oi ■

Opt. ^ffm' •w«"'l"P' •nf««»'t«1» T*||*|i,*ii*i itfi*

Imp. 9r\pt l^pSo-iu ri04)pSn

iDf. Ci|p&Hsi ti|piaw4u ti|pdo-av4M nh|pa«4«i

For. fi^]in«« tiipBo^iuivi ffi|parA|Hiioi nti|pK|ii*«i

PMiln (lata) PuiIt*

iDd. [»i|paevni|>«] »^pd»^> Verbal adjeodnst

Sob. Hft* ti|pBT«i

Opt [li|pKti(ral|U)v] liipBSibiv >i|p«Tfc|

Imp. ti|pAti)n

Inf. [t]|pBl^nff«»] ••|pBtii*w,

Par. [•ilpCtqrAiuvot] tiipKhlt

I z:-:l,vG00glc

TOWEL T£RBS: CONTRACTED VEKB8
STNOnn ov iwUn make

rrm-kM. lH.pf.Aat.

rsLAou

Aor. A St.

Pirf. Art. Flap. Aot

«i4n.

tw^ifn.

w«™iH«a fcnndlKii

Sob. «mA

«M^<r«

«»OLt|.Ati

Opt. «««(i|., -a^u

«i(i«M"

«Ui«u,u

Imp. «te

«(i,».

iDf. ->M*U

vo^ra*

»t1l<rat

Par. «Ma>

«i<t^i»

lltd.PUL

Ulddla

Middle

UU.PU1.

'«iVl*«'

«~i,,M~.4

OpL «M(,iv

««ii|<rol,»,t>

«D»|<ra(|>ip'

«-..1,J«».rfv

Imp. »»<

..(iHnu

«»Vw*-

«.»<M»

Ptr. «M««|UM«

mup^Mt

«n«»ltUi«t

FHdT.

Pt»a«t

ruU PBrf. Fmi.

Ind.

*«.^ifcp.

Sub.

««i^

Opt

«iT,fcl,V

Imp.

«^*,fc,Tl

Int

««,«i^«rt«

«KI|«|Mi

Ptf.

«.T,fc(«

Teibftl adiMtlTeii ; '

an.

Smonit or nXf-M com^iJtte

P»>. Aot. bapC let.

Fnt AM.

Am. AeU

F<rf. AsL Flop. Aot

lad. nU Mmw

Sabt TdL«

Opt TA.fap.,.atHi

TA.11I..-0V

lmp.Ta«

TflUn*

IdL nXilv

•nXitv

Pu. nU*

TlU*

TtMrtt

rmXwAi

MU. PtM.

MMdl*

lIld.PtH.

Snb. t.XA^

Opt nX«(|u,«.

tiW<am'

T.«W,J^A,.

Imp. nXot

TtrOMa

Int TAArfn

.A^m

nnXHTfLivoi

Puilt*

Ind.

Sub.

•nXw4A

Opt

^o*,!,-

f«X«rt^

Impt

loL

tA.^«»

i,vGooglc

CONJUOATIOH OF 0-TERB8

Stxomis or I^U-« man/lfut

OL TdL AsL k<K. Aet P

Ind. t^ «<tX«* SV^Wt. I»VUh« t«8^)iwM a<»i|)uhn,

Opt SijXolifn -otfu t^^AcMfu ti|Uv«i|u S«Si|Xmi^ iCi|v

Imp. MXm S^«m>

InL SiiXst* S^lAmiv li|XA«mk GtSt)]lMrf>M

lad. tV^VM t»V^^^' Si|XAn|Lai tA<tX>H«i. OrfiiUM*

(HPMik.ew)

Sob. hpiAiuu EA|X-|iJmA

Opt. Ai|X*(^i|* $i(X«n(|iV StCi^XaiiiMt «ti|*

Imp. ti|)Mfl fahtXan

Inf. SV^AWfai tVOrwUi t*ti|XAv««

PU. ll|to<|MT»» fil|]Mrl|M«0( tlt<|Xll(><W

PmOt* PiuIt* Fat. P«rf: P*«.

Ind. Si)lMHm)>«. O^kMiiv St^XA««|iu

Bub. »i|]ul«

Opt. 6i)]M#i(««l|Uf* B^XwIibiv Mi|Xw«l|Ufv

Imp. lqXMi|n

Inl SVi«*Vw«M »i|Xa*4|i» 8i8<|U*w««

Far. Sq}M*i|r4|u**( ti|lu4il( Mi^wtfMmt

VrabkladjMUvM: Si|Xi>T4t, SqlMrfet

niMARKI ON TKB CONTRACTBD VBRBB

399. In the present optatiTe active there are two forms : (1) that '
with the modal sign -i»-, baring -v in the 1 sing., and -ow in the 3 pi. ;
(2) that with the modal sign -l-, having -fa. in the 1 sing., and •» in
the 3 pi. The first form is more oommon in the singular, the second
in the dual and plural.

Tt|u^ip> (rawly rl^iu), Ti|»^r«- (rarely Ti^nl^or), Ti|t4|u« {rwely T:,ufii^,\
wtatipi (nraly nw^), vatrirn* (rualy vMoi^or), *o«Dtprn> (rarely rot^tv"^,
tqXadt* (nraly lqXoi>u), St|Xatm (nraly Stflnlirror), 6i|Xc^uv (rarely SqXotwu'')-

SM. Ten verbs in -ob shov ^ where we expect a. These are 8u^
thint, {£ live, wtuA hunger, n<u Kn^M, m JpAt (^sfe)) v/ia tnuft, w>«
five onuleM, jgA am eager far (nn)i XP"/"* "*'> *°^ ^ '^* ^^ ^^-

Mg] VOWBL VEBBS: CONTRACTED VERBS 127

aos. {■ Imm and m^* ^"^ "^ inflMted m follows in the present
indicatiTe, sabjonetiTe and imperadTe and in the imperfeot.

S. 1. tA
3. til

s- a

xrt
xrt~

H

IV-

«1

<Xf^1»
"XfV-

D. 2. lUn,

3. H'^

xrtrt"

Xl**"

WIT"

P. 1. K^
I. nn

». t>n

XPV*

t«(vr«v

<xp<r<h

JxpAM*

IlliillltlT«:

tv,xrt'*»

Futioipl*; tA>

'XPV»W

396L raiw btirti, kXiUw we^ do not ooDtnct tbe fomu In wbkh i hH dim-
tfipe»nd (88). Tbos, Mlw, Mini, Mln, d^fwr, mUt*, Klauri.

397. Yerbe in -tu of two syllables do not omitTact c with o or m.
The present and imperfeot IndicatiTe of vX«w «tfl ace inflected as
follows.

*X4| wlMtTMt wMn twkm hrXtftvo kXatn

a. S^ neei baa Mi, MUU Meeantn, >*!, I'm. >*>>. '* M*r wtot f> aeCM-
Mry; >J(^w wont, reqtiut, bu Ite, (ftToi, M^Sa, l^wftsi. Bat Wm btnd 1>
wnallj Ml eXMptloD, niAkiDg l<U, ttt, M^r, ftovr bound, ri JaDr (Aol *DAfet
Unb, filTjiiii. MIrru, bnt Sri^tvr, War ftppear in KiBia wriWn.

b. fA( •en^M oontncts. /)«A>, f/v ud r;^ h&Te lort « ; rUw, M«, rirfw
luan kNt i(^) ; Jfa Med to for tnvN ; Sin bind U for <^,m.

ass. Two verbs in -on^ lipim «Ma(, jliy^ *hjver, may have «* and y
instead of ov and ot. See 641.
Tlioi, Indie. ^'Tfi, >fif»», ftyv (or ^fT«')> opt. ^iV^', taf. ^ItA' (or >iT«0').

IWt. ftyOr. So IlpOfi, opt. U^i^ (or li<Mi), put llfiur (or ItpaCr).

a. X*«« tetuA, when ft drops its v (43), contrscu like lii\iit. Thiu, Xotfw,
ittta, itta, bat iMCfwr (for X<(K)a-^r), XaOn, XoOri ; and ao In oiLer format aa
fW Xafra., X«Cr<u, Xatf/Mwi.

b. ifcfwi M^Mt (Impmieet tMf«tr) baa the parallel forma otfwi (^/iq').

399. Movable y is never (in Attic) added to the oonttaoted S rin^
imperfect (JWu, not Iroutv).

i,vGooglc

CONJUGATION OF 0~VERB8

[*»

I. (g) oonbokant vbbbs

WOi Verbs vhose steins end in a consonant aie in gfinsral inflected
like QOD-oontraoting <i>-Terbs in all tenseB. Tlie future satire and mid-
dle of liquid and nasal verbs are inflected like contracted au-verbs.

401. Liquid and Nasal Verbs : future aotire and middle of
^n* thota.

rntora AeUT* Futim Ulddls

LiDHunva. S. 1.
i.
8.

(«.,J,«-(«)+..tor-<
(♦a»*rfl4) ^>rtiw

8.

4««n.

(♦"*'»•■)

P. 1.

a.

8.

S.
s.

(♦—Ill)
(♦.~l*

♦•""I

(».*.r.)

D. 2.
3.

(♦..*„.r)
(♦«.«lr,.)

(♦.»^(,.)

4..<.<»

P. 1.

a.
s.

(♦.*^0

(.fl-">

S. 1.
».

8.

(«.*«")
(»..*«)
(♦.*.)

T>. 8.

8.

(♦"-J'..)

*.m«v

P. 1.
3.
8.

(♦.rfc««.)

^orfcO ^>««* -* -of) -ij, -m.

(810 ) (987)

i,,Coog[c

4m] consonant VERBS; <fmyv 129

W2. Liquid and Nasal Verbs: first aorist active and middle,
second aonst and second future passive of ^Vw ahovi.

1 Aoriit AoUts 1 AorUt Mlddla t Aoriit PlMlra t Future Puitra

Ian. S. 1. 1^*K ^^rpii^rpi H&i^v 4>r4iro|iai

>->*V

4^mTe

I+4-1

♦..<l«™.

3. lh>«rv

lh>4'*r

♦.^^fc.

♦.Wi>..rt.
♦.^.^>,m,

8dm.

, 8. I. «-

Ml

D. >. t4.^r»

«-P»..

^.4|n.

P. 1. «Vi»'
a. «-r<
3. f4~«

+^"]»*"
+(i-™

On.

a 44» or M,», (UU) Mm.«

♦.,.1.11

♦.rijnu

D. 3. 4^nuTev

+l|.«.rf«.

♦«MtTor or
+•«!,,. o.

♦.r4.n>.rfn

P. 1. +^"1"

a. ^^.^T.

a. ♦<—«+*».,

(668)

♦.ntT.or
♦—to or

♦.,v»^

♦•Hi™.™

br.

8.a.+*..
8. tir<~

♦IH'

♦4-1*
♦•Hr-

D.a.+(i«,„
3. tn-<'~

^..1,^..

♦.rijn.

p. a. +*.„

+<t~*

Uw.

♦«~

♦.rf|«.

♦.MK'.fc'

Paw

(806)

..,(387) +.-1^ -»(a87)
♦«*(807)

.oogic

180 CONJUGATION OF O-TSBBS [403

PBRFBOT AND PLUPBRFBCT MIDDLE (AND PASSIVE)

403. In the perfect and pluperfect middle (and passive) of stems
eodiiig in a, consonant certain euphonic changes (409) occur upon
the addition of the personal endings.

404. Several verbs with stems ending in a short vowel retain
that vowel in the perfect (and in other tenses) ; such stems originally
ended in 17; as rtXi-at Jiniah, from rcXof end (rcXnr-). This tr appears
in the perfect middle stem (nrcXc-ir-fuu, rcrtXc-a-nu). In the second

Eirson singular and plural but one a is found : rtrikc-aai, rcriXt-irfft.
y analogy some other verbs have a cr at the end of the verbal stem.

405. In the perfect and pluperfect middle the third person plaral
of stems ending in a consouanl or of stems adding <r consists of the
perfect middle participle with turi are (in the perfect) and ^<nw were
(in the pluperfect).

406. Perfect and pluperfect middle and passive of Keiwat (Xa/w-')
home, ypd^ (ypaij>-) write, wtlOa (tuB-) persuade, rpi-rrv (rpiy-) do.

Perfect IndCcative

8.

2. XAii+ot

■r*TI«+«

D.

8. XOmI'ov

T*Yf«+»»»

«4«paxfc*

P.

1. X4X<l|t|ul«

2. UXatftt

7*T1»*fc

wiwpiLxU

Flupeifect

S.

Myp""

hmn(<n>i|i'

hmrpiffLilv
M-pKfo

D.

3. Uuht^hi*

)««to*,-

tnnrpdxhl*

P.

t^pdfHue.

hrtw^lir^B^

MicpBxe.

Perfiet SubjUTietUie and Optative

407j CONSONANT VERBS : PERFECT, PLUPERFECT 181

B. 3. MXi^o
3. Xdu(4««

PtTftU /mpenwiw

iTmM«

*f«(ff4av

«4ni«4<

.hpax«i

Perftel Infinitive and Participle

7*Yp&^ai v*«tt<r4ai Tnrp&x''^

407. Perfect and pluperfect middle and passive of jX<yx" (^A«yx*)
confiUe, ayyiAAiu (dTTtX-) annownce, ^W (i^t^) show, rt\ia> (rekf-)

Perfect Indicative

S. 1. iXI^Xrriiu

2. Ai^^ntV

3. ft^XiYVToi

D. 2. IXAX^tev

3. a^iXtTX*"

P. 1. A<|UY|U«a

2. AijXrfxt*

3. A^XaviUvoii iWi TiYTiXiUvoi ilo^ *f^cw)UvaL «lo{ T*n)i4-o--|UvM <M

8. 1. ttnUrtiv

3. AliXifim

D. S. ft^iX.TXfc"

P. 1. ai|X«Y|uea

2. iX4X,«lh

Piup«r/eet /ndfeatfre

(n^vtiqv 4-TtnXi-r0i|v

Perfeet Sul^netive and Optative

CONJUGATION OP O-VEEIBS

C4-

Perftci Imperalixe

s. a. a<ix.if

■mat.

D. 3. iX^Xrrxfe*

8. ft,i»re«"'

,ri+.*,.

nrO^^lotr

p. 2. ttllrrel.
8. tt,|»i,x«..

jjYyae..

TnA^-^

ftl/ect InJtlUtlte

and Participle

in*M~.,-n,

„^,4u

EXPLANATION OF THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT FORMS

408. The periphrastic third ptuval is used instead of the forms
detired directly from the union of the stem with the ending.

ThUB, ytypaiii±4rK tlrl is used foe yrypa^-rrv whlcb would become ytypi^rcu
l^ 36 b, V between conaonanta passing into a. The peripliraatic form 1h also
QSed in verba adding ir to their ftems, as rrreXt-f-tiim tlvl for rrreV-v-rrsi.
Stems in r that drop » in the perfect aystem form Uieir perfect and pluperfect
regularly ; thus, cptfu (jcpai-) judge liae Wnpttrai, UiKptrra.

T. — On the retention of -o

15 f.

409. Euphonic Changes. — For the euphonic changes in these forms
see 82-87, 103.

■- Lablsl Stems. — XAtifi-^iai is tor XiXnT.^iai, X<\«^*ii is for Xf Xiw-c-tfav,
XAci^ ia for XiXfir-vSi (103), In the same manner ore inflected other laUal
Stenift, as rpt^m (,Tpip-) rub, jAtra (^iw-) (flroto ; Tfrpi/i-iMi for TtTpifi-iuu, rtrpi-
^Bi for Trrpip-irai, etc. gt«mB ending in nw drop r before Mi '>nt retain it before
Other conaonanta. Thus,

rtTtiar-iuu becomes Tirtitiuu rtrt/tw-iufa becomea rtwimue* .

b. DenUl Stems. — i^rw-roi ia tor «i™*.7-a< (8.1), rirtui^w is (or wrrt^
tar (83), rAreitffc ia tor Tnrnfl.(ff)e« (83, 103). The v thus prodnoed nas tnuw-

«Q b. D. Horn, baa the original forme r«^fi^iUn>\

.OOglf

4iil CONSONANT VERBS r "PERFFXT, PLUPERFKCT 138

Innd to the flnt peraons rdrtut/uu, rtwitaiuBa, (86, 87). Like rirtiriiat,
Mc, are formed and inflected IftM/uu from ^rOtv (i//ni>-) deceive, wf^aaiuu
from #pdjt« («paff-) declare, loxiio/uu (100) from cwf^a (ox«rf-) pour a
tOation.

c Palatal Sterna. — wirfitailttorirtTpay-aai (07), r/rpiimi i»tot rtrply-
Tot (82a}, wtrpaxf* is for vrtpiv-ffSe (103). Like rAr/n7uai are inflected
T>Jiat (tX**-) leeace riw\ey-iuu, ayw (dy-) /eod flT/uii, iXXirru (dXXay-) «x-
ekanfie IfKKatiiat, rBpixru (ra/mx-) conjute Ttripayimi. Sterna In -7^ change

X before m to -r and drop one -y (as in AijXry-fUH for ^XiiXtyy-^'i 86 and
8G b), bat keep the second palatal before other consonants (as in ^X^XD'fot
for AitXtTx-ffiu, 07 ; iMiXr/K-rai for AqXryx-roi, 82). On the lednplication
ne 446.

d. Uqnid and Haaal Stems. — Sterna In X oc p are inBected like fyyiXfiui,
u vtAXw (vt(X-, rraX-) Mruf frraX^i, atpu (dp-) raUe lipimt, tyiipu (iytp-)
»ake ty^yip^au (446). SteroH In r retaining the naaal ore Inflected like wiifiaaiuu,
tt r^pattu (ffi)»ia»-) tlffnif)/ wtaliitaaiiai. (For -o-fioi see 91 a and b.) Stems
in >dK>ppli^ the nasal (669 a) are inflected like \f\viiai, as i/itni (xpir-) judge

e. Vowel Stems addinf r. — Here the stem ends in a rowel except befors

M and r ; tbas, rrri^t-tai, Tn-Ac.tfA»>, TtTf\»-a$t : but T€TA*-tf-/iai, TertX^«-fi«A^

N. — Since the stem of rtKiti is properly tiXit- (rfXcr^^u, S34), the original
inflection is rircXHr-tfw, whence rertKt-^ai (LOT); TrrAM-rot; TrrfXtir-fAir, .
r(rcXw-<rfe, wlience rrr^XM-ffoi, TtrfKivBt (103). rtr/Xca'/uu and TrTtJJriueu um

doe to the analog; of the other fonhs.

410. Hie forms ri^raai, hri^rso, ajld rl^art

g not atleated. Cp.

4U. The principal parts of the verbs in 406-407 are as follows ;

persuaded, 2 perf. s^aKLta I tnttt,

•rpApra do (»(«■»-), *pdf«, hrpBf*,
2 perf. -v^TpBYs / hone /arrd and
I hajie done, *^pB-y|UU, Jirp)(x(ir'-

tAim JInUh (rAt-r-), nXA, MXto-a,

i^riBAm announ^ (AttA-). *YT«".
4rfn^ ^YT^'n' ^YY^V". iYY*-

■W*+- wi(« (YP^). YPA+*. tll(»+*.

OivX- wt/*"* (»-YX-), *WTt-. <1^«yS»,

Uiw leave (Xt*-, Xtm-, Xm*-), Xtlifw,
2 perf. X&otv*, Xa4Hi|MU, iX«l4>i|*,
ia.9U«*v.

«^l« permutde ('nl-. viJ-, «oit-),
«l*w, hm««, 1 perf. wtwtum I have

4alM>iA(ns(^v-),^*A, I^vo, 1 pert .
■^^YKii I have thown, 2 perf. w4^i|*«
I have appeared, wi^tir^JU, ^ift%¥
I uos thovm, 2 Kor. paaa. t^ii-y /

i,vGooglc

CONJUGATION OF Ml-VEEBS

CONJUGATION OF |U-VERBS

CL3. The conjugation of /u-verba difEers from that of <»-verbs
only in the present, imperfect, and second aorist active and middle;
and (rarely) in the second perfect. The ^u forms are made by
adding the endings directly to the tense-stem without any thematic
vowel, except in the subjunctive of all verbs, aod in the optative of
verl» ending in -vu>u,

413. Verbs having second aorieta and second perfects of the
fu form are, aa a rule, u-verbs, not fii-verbs, in the present. Thus,
the second aorists : J^Sijv [Paiva go), iyvtav (yiyvaa-Kio ktlOV)); the
second perfect : riSvtLfLtv {Bv^vkui die).

414. There are two main classes of /u-verbs.

A. The root class. This class commonly ends in -ij-nu or -to-fiL
(from stems in «, o, or o). The present stem is usually reduplicated,
but may be the same as the verb-stem, which is a root.

Verb-stem

Preeeht Stem

PwMnt

riBt-, tAj- (for flifo, Atfn, 126 a)

i<-,V(fc'«».,»«"i)

Urra-, urrTf (for trurro, avm], 119)
SiSo-, SAt-

lijfu send
Zmj/u set
SiSai^ give

B. The -n/fu class. This class adds w (i^), after a vowel wu (vru),
to the verb-stem. In the subjunctive aud optative regularly, and
sometimes in the indicative, verbs in -vv/u are inflected like verbs

Verb-stem

Present Stem

Present

Kfpa-

Ktpoyro; Kipavvv-
ptryva-. fnjyi^- _
apiwu-, afiiwv-

iciyvim yoke

^ijyvviu break
o-^nvu/u extivguiah

C. There are ao
e preBenl Btem ;

me (mostly poetic) verbs in -nuu

, which add ra-, ih to form
' we tubdue.

413. All the possible fu fonas do not occur in anj single verb, rlffq/u
aod SlSu/u are Incomplete and Irregular in the second aorist active ; and Itfi-^n
aertt o-ui from vpimm la the onlj second aorist formed from rv/u-verbs.
trpii.11^ I bought, second aorist middle (from the stem rpui- with no present),
is Kiven In the paradigms in place of the missing form of tartnu ; and Itvt
/entered from adu (but formed u it from iBiu) in place of a second aorist of the
rilfu-verbB.

Alt} CONJUGATION OF Ti%u, Ivr^iu, S^u/u 186

a& (A) Root CUu. — Inflection of Ti%u place, umffxt ael, SiSufu
give, in the present, imperfect, and second aorist tenses; and of
JrpMi^i)!- / bought.

Prtaent Indicative

6. 1. Tt*j-|u t-oni-(u SUSm^

2. TC-hi-^ I-irTi|'« SUEh-s

3. r(-ti|-n I-aTi)-n G[-S«-vi
D. 2. T(-I(-Ta* t-oTo-Ta* St-So-'rov

S. ■K-fc-T»» T-OTO-Tor S(-Eo-Tor

P. 1.

Mptr/ece

& 1. tTL4n->

f-OTII-V

tB£.S<«w(746b)

2. t^[4Mi(746b)

!-o^^

l-St-Sovt

S. fcrt-fci

!-»T,

D. 2. l-T{4<-rov

i.S(-6o.T0V

t-<rTd'Ti|i'

J-6^W-n|.

P. 1. l-T^e.-|u»

t-O-TtL-pjV

l-Sl-So-iuv

8. l-rl4..n

(-OrTB-Tl

to-ra-o-av

PreMHi 5u6iunc«iie

S. 1. T>-M

l-^rti

EuU

2. TC^

U^rrfr*

fc-6f^

S. Tv4fl

Urrfl

8v4«

D.2. «*K»"

Ur,<l^.

Ei-M-rav

S. T**^™.

U*T<H«-

Gi-SA^v

Urr^Huv

Ei4«-|uv

2. T.*!^

l-<rrfl-T.

Gi-Bft^

8. -n-aA^

tiTTAMn.

GtJA-n

8. 1. Tl*l.|.-

&4.ln.v

2. T.J.1.M

UrT.(i^

G^^b)^

S. Ti*!,,

U^Wi

Si4i.£i,

D.3. tv4<Pt»v

l-irr«t^ro»

ti-6oC-rov

3. Tl*l^»

Ua™Un,»

Si-Bot^

P. 1. T»*HiO.

Si.8oI-|M*

Urrat^

3. Tv4ril-t>

l-vraU-F

ti-Mi^

l;,C00g[c

J6 CONJOGATION OF Ml-VEBBS

AoTtvB — OoHcludad
Frtitnt Optatlne

or (760) or (750) or (760)

D. 2. n-9tlt\-Tor UotuIh-tof 8i-&o(i|-t*i>

3. Ti-4)i^-Ti|v t-<rTai^-n]r Bi-SoU^-npi

P. 1. n-h(i|-|ui' t-ffTot^lun Si4o(i|-|u*

2. Tt-tili|-n t-«~rali|-T« Ei-Go(i|-t(

8. n-St(i|-<rav t-<rTa(i|-<rav Si-Sotif-v-a*

iVMcnt Imperative
8.3. T<-«n(T461)) I-m) St-Sm

a n-M^« t-a~r&-TW Si-SA-tw

D. 2. t(-6i-to* I>mi-rov

8. •n-ti'Tmr 1-»t4-t»»

P. % Tl^-n X-m-n

iVeMnt /r^ln^tK

FreuiU PartietpU
n-Mi, -Ara, 4v (SOT) t-«T^ ■«««, -iv (300) St4o«t, ■•Sn. -4v
(307)
Middle and Pamivb
iVMSiiI Indteativa

8. 1. Ttat^iw tHTTo-iuu 6U».|iai (747 f )

2. t(4<-««i I-«T»Hrai Gt-8»««i

3. rHi-ni I-rro-rai Et-So-roi
O. 2. t(-*i-«4si- t«<ra-v4o* SC-So-tftov

8. t(4c«4o* I-«~ra-«4a* E:-S»««o*

P. 1. ■ Tl-M-|U<> I-VT4-(Mk

2. T[-6<-ir<< I-rTa-ff4<

S. tI-»<-vt<u t-rro-rrai

S. 1. t-n-U-f.'i\v i-rTd-|»|v

2. t-T(-0f-ra f-«xa<o« l-Sl-Sa-va

3. J-rL4i-T« t-v-TO-^a l-K-So-ro
D. 2. l-rC-l«-«4ev f-vTo-fffm l-C(-fi»-««»v

8. l-n-Mirtip- t-rr&-ff«i|« l-6«-Sd-a4i|*

F. 1. i-nM-^i^ t.<rrtU|u*« l-Si-Si-piK

S. Iwrt4<-<r«< (-m-vti UU60-v«i

3. J-Tt-t«-iTO t-mt-m l-8(-^-t>T«

4i«] CONJUGATION OF rflV, 'i-rrwh ««-*-

HiDDLB AHD Pauitb — Condnded
Frettta Sulftiiitatve

r^4\^m. t-o-ril-Tat

TuH«'*>' Uo^-««o» Ei-SA-irfcv

vi-<1)-«4a« l-«-r^.««ov b4«.ff«ov

Ti-BA-|i4t« t-ori-iMSa Ei-W-|ula

■n-»n-**« UrHHrfc Si<EA-v«i

Pretent (Ratine

TVW+I,

l-^t+V-

-rv4<C-o

t-rf«tH>

n^t^

l-o-rrf^

Si-^NTO

n^rt-rt..

l-»TatMrt.»

TV^lt-Wip

UrraUiHil*

UrTa(-|u«>

l-<rm(.<r«f

n-•(^*t•

t-rrat-rro

rUrt-o

Tv**^C746oJ

Ti4olMr««>

T.*(.<*r

Tt*t.H«"a

n4»(>m

fT0jenf ifnpcrdtivc

T(4(-V<>

Z-m-ro

S(4*^

t-<rr4-<r«-

-rl4<.<r«o«

I-rra-«4M

SU&.-o*.»

t.<rTi-<r«.t>

Bi-Sd-rtev

TlJ«.«fc

t-«T<l*««i

U-G<>-<r4i

Gt-U-rf.*

l-TT4-,i.«,

.oogic

CONJUGATION OP

Sbcond AoBiar

Indtcative

AMt*

UUdk

AetlTe

Mlddla

AflUre

MUdli

s.

1.

2.
S.

Iimi twfAaro

(IS-«i,765)J4<-,iT

(TSfib
(IbHiai)' I-So«

(K-K.) . I^«

D

,2.
8.

l-fc-w

l-Si-vfld*

l-Bo-™.

(-SiMrll

P.

1.
2.
S.

i4«.TI

l-lvirav

l4<-<re<

l-m)-n

|.So-n

i-M-pA

Subj^ncaw

S.

1.
2.
3.

vpU-|»i (424, N,

-pin-™

2)84

s*

8A-mi

D.

2.
3.

wpln^.

SA-rav

SA-Hm
8A-.«t*

P.

1.
2.
8.

M.|MV

,pin-rf.

SA-n

SA-VTM

Pptotfee

S.

1.
2.
3.

ht-To, 6ot^o mill

irpiaC-|ii|v &a(i|-v
*p(.i^(42i,N.2) Soli|-«
*pt>i-n> SoCil

SoC-o

Sot-r.

D,

,2.
3.

aTaC-n)y

VplBL-rfov

Bol-™v
S«Uni|*

Sot.««M

P.

I.
2.
3.

•rt-rto

OTOti-V

»p*l.,uea
«plai-i-ra

S0t-|UV

Bot-T.

or (758)

or (746 c)

or (768)

ot (768)

D.

2.
3.

P.

1.
2.

3.

eotvTO

8o(n^

iv,Goog[c

CONJOeATIOM OF rjtvK, EIttik S!^

Si

ImperatiM

S. i.

s.

foe

.tHI-Bl «pU

S6^

S«9

D. 2.
3.

e4.««.>

P. a.

3.

crrfl-T. wpl<Kr«<

,Ed.«

&d-<r«.

fct-*«

ffTfy.»<M «p(aHr«»

S»».*ai

b-H«i

FartieipU
•id, Mrs, U-pVOf, -i|, irrdi, irraira, wpii-|MV9i, -I), Sott, So«(ra, SifMMti
•U(307) -oy <rT4-v(300) -o* (287) 8d-v (307) -^, -ov

SECOND PEEPECT OP |U-VBRBS

417. A few verbs of the fu class have a second perfect and plu-
perfect Only the dual and plural occur ; for the singular, the first
perfect and pluperfect are used. The second perfect and pluperfect
oi umiiu are innected as follows :

Second Perfect
iBdirailT* SDbjDDctlTB OpUUr* Impmitln

S. 1. (lm|Ka) ((and l-rrA WTaCi|-v (poetic)

i. (ImtKM} Wrf)-« i-ffTali)-t l«Ttt-Si (poetic)

3. (fantn) Wr^ Wrob)

WtoI-tov or -atifrev (Mlb) t«rTa-TO»
3. (-vfa-Ta* t-ffTl)-TO* i-crTaUn)ir or -ai^ngv t-vrif^uv

P. 1. l-st«-|uv i-orA-juv i-crTaC-p4« oi -a(i|p4r

i. I-«-ra-Ti i-<rHJ-Tt i-frral-Tt or -otipt l-«T«-n

S. l-rT&a^ WrA-m I-crr«Ct-* Ot -a(i|ra* iHrrd-vra*

brmriVE t-rri^wu Pakticifle WrA-t, l-rrAra, l-rrdt (300 a)
Second Plcferfbct
S. t. (iIvtV^) KMMi D. 2. f-rro^ni* P. I. Um-fM

S. (Arr^tafi) 3. t-<rTA-n|v 2. l-rro^

8. (rfv^Mt) 8. Wro-rMT

For a list of second perfects ot the /u form, see 704-706.

I z:-:l,vG00glc

140 CONJUGATION OF MI-VERBs [4"«

41S. (B) -vBiu CU«. — Inflection of the preaent sye'tem of inn^
Aoio and of the second aorist fSOv entered.

Ac

TITI

HiDPLI UTD PUUTI

AonTB

Pr.«Iit

ImporAH

PnHDt

In>p««»t

8. 1. Sfk-rt-|u(T46

a) i-Si(K-*«-v(74a&) Si(K-n-|uu

i^iK.K*.,in»

US-* (4le^

2. StU-n-t

J-EiU-*v-t

Si(M-*tMrai

Mfdt-vvn

!«-«

8. SfU-»-<rL

J.S.l«.»g

6t(K-w-Tai

Mtk-rv^

MB

l<Sik-nMrov StU-nMrfov l.EiCK<ytMr$ar I-S6>t«v

8. E>Ck-»-t«v

l.Si»-v«-T^w GtCK-nMrkv 14<M-v«-a4ip' «-S<.Ti|f

J-E.k-»-|U

J-S.w.><.p4e(i

MB-^

a. Sf(«-™-r,

GiCicwcr«i

J^te-nMr4i

Mo-T,

I^U-i^Mn

S«6>un«W«ie

l^U-n-m

a 1. sm*««

H-

S. S.«r«„«

6.«v*T|

s«ni

8. Sm«*«ii

SuKvinrai

Mb

wy*'

s*..,^-

2. S»i»«,,T.

Mi,t<

C^itaHve

ttMTi

2. tM*«M

3. tMcr««i

fcucrioin

D. 2. GMtrtDin*

StimoMq*

SMCVWi(|u«a

2. tMKviom

6<uiviour«i

8. 2. 8<U-t«(T46ft)

8ft4t

8. Sn«-v«<TN

G<u(-.4-cr«M

Si^

D. 2. t«(jc-vv-t»

bU-nirlov

&«-*•»

8. 8w-Wi-Tw-

si.'T*.

8<(K.»-<r«i

ss^

3. E>ui-v«-rrw

7»Vl»W«e

tf-i>nn>

StiK-vi-Mi (7«a)

6<C«-*v-ff«u

8».>».

SMi-*4|.anh-«*(80S, T46a} S<iN-i4-|u*M, -% -M MftHn,

.l«*(SM]

I;.C00J^[C

4m] synopsis of t^thu, umj/u

419.

Stmomis of t»iiu C*«-, ftf

ptace

fit-Att.

mpr.

Act. Ful. 4ot. Aor, Art.

1 P*rt. Act. 1 Flap. AcL

iDd. T{ll«U

M»i|r IV* l*nM>

TJHra (t<Mkn,

Sab. TtU

w

T.*t|«Ali

Opt. tA(v

•^«Hu S.!^

T.>V<At«T<|-

Imp. rttM

Ml

[nf. -nMnu

»<i<r«t> «rt*<u

Pu. TtMt

»^«v hit

T*,«*.

Piw-M. P.

Impr

M. P. Fnt. MM. 3 Aor. Mtd.

Pert U. P. Ptap. M. P.

Ind. tO^uu

irJV'P' eV-l"" MVl"

T«,4«» *,*(,tip

Sab. T>*«|>«.

M,uu

Opt. nM|iv

T*.a*».rtv

Imp. -r»«r«

Bofi WfHOtl

Inf. 'r(l*r«<u

•Vwla. NHoi Til.lv4<u

Pu. Tia^M>M

Ind.

Sub.

TrfA

Opt.

Imp.

InL

PW.

Verbal Adjectives ; irr6,, trriot.

420. STnoniH

T timiiii (iTfl., fl-ri^) ie( (in perf. and 2 nor. rtand)

Pr«. Impr.

Ind. la-nnuf

(.TTip.

Iimin i«{ Iim|v itood •[aT^Ki| sCood

Sab. LrrA

Opt. Ia-nlT)v

top. Irr,

lot WtA*«4

Imuuu ttand o-rt^|iai (intrans.) tv^E" «AaII •taild

I«T&|i,ip' imfrd|i,i|T (IraiM.)

Sab. Irriftu

rrV-lia^

rriyrai

Int Irmrfct

.rT^ia.»fcu

>^4ra<r4<u

P«. i^if^

irnirfiu^

lud.

4.TTdh,V UKM let

Sob.

ittup

<m>A

O^

o-To»i£nip

iBp.

(ttAV^

Verbal adjectives : 7T»T4t, <rT<iT(o»

I z:-:l,vG00glc

CONJUGATION OF MI-VERBS

[4«i

Stvopsih op S(S«p (So', iw-) giM

Ind, S(&»|u

ttlSow

U<r.

KMa

MBMRa

Kittai

Sub. G^

lA

bkiltei

Opt. SiSo(i)v

M-,4u

Mil*

Imp. GCEoii

Sd,

SA<n»

S.Cv»

Pw. GiSoH

Uirmr

Go«t

G<Gw<^

Pw. M. P. :

Impf. U. P.

Fnt. Mid.

1 Aor. Mid.

Pwf. M. P.

Pl.p. M. P.

Ind. GISoiMu

tt.U,.1,.

M.«,L.i

Oif,,

Hkp..

«Mrv

Snb. Gi«ft|Hu

Mr^

Srt.|J~,i

Opt G.«.C,.n'

S«™[K,,v

UlfV

Imp. 6IS»««

EoO

G«»r.

Inf. G(So<r«M

Urtfffai

Ete4u

Srftelcu

G.^,u»«

1 FuL Ph».

U,u»,

Ind.

iSM.1*

Sub.

EoM

Opt

fc*!,.

Imp.

IMt'

InL

[<.K|.<u

Pm.

Sohl,

Verbid adjectives -.

GoTdt, GOT^

422.

Srwopsii OF SilRvQ|u (B.U-) gAour

Prei, Aot.

Impf. AoL

1 Aor. Act,

1 Plop. Airt.

Ind. Gib(>v^

48<te*D>

GtCt.

II.4.

MS..X.

«M<lX1

Sub. G»Kr«.

fcii.

l.S.xi,i

S.;f.i,u

fcl{..i»

E.S.,xte .IV

Imp. GtlKvQ

B.*.

s.tt.„

be;..

GtG.ixl«u

Pu. S<un4t

E.(E«

B.CP.

S.1..X4.

p™. m. p.

Impf. M. P.

?ut. Mid.

P1.P.1I1J.

iG.»cvip^

G.[eoi«u

Ikfiri'

I«..,|L>.

^.M-m'

HIS-,-.

l.S„„J«,J

OpL Stun-wltinv

Gi^foliin-

S.I..,lUm.Ii

I'

Imp. EttKvwo

!«(.'

MI.*.

Mlt«r4.L

EtEitxIoi

[..{il.^..

i^llU^

\ Aor. I'M..

Lid.

S.Lxftl<r»,««

18.1x1,.

Sub.

8..XM

Opt

S.xtl^tM-

E.ixMt'

Imp.

MxV

Int

wixl^*' •<' «*■

G«ixH>o»

Fu.

>»x>n'4r""i

, l»x«*

Verinl adjoctives :

6.i.t4i, StucHn

i,vGooglc

ACCENT OF VEEBS

ACCENT

423. Simple or «ompound verbs usually throv the accent as far
back as the quautity of ^e last syllable permits (recessive accent, 169).

froMM, ivAiiar ; Irtt^, /rintr/iMr, aiiupitiu, rd^ffri.

<24. To this general rule there are exoeptioos.

■- ■acUtlc*. — All the fonuB of ^id lay, and ti/d am, except ^it and <t

b. ImperstlTM. — (1) Tha aecond person sing, of the aecond aorist uUve
imperative of five verba is ozytone : tlwi tay, AM come, tlipt find. Hi see, X^M
take. Their plorala sre accented tiairt, JXMti, etc.; compounds have reoeesive
accent : i^tiitc, drcMf, t^npi, wofiXafit.

(S) The second aorist middle (2 sing.) is peiispomeDon, as \apoO, rafioflaSaO,

C. Contracted Terba are only apparent exceptions : thus, e.g., rtfif for Ti/Uti,
I^Stfi for IiiXloMi, 0iXc?v for ^iX^ir So the subjunctive of the firat and sec-
oad aoriat passive \utii for \v6im, ^nriS for ^Ww ; the optatives XvBtinfw from
hM-i-iur, 3iJat;wrfrom Iii6-i-iiir; the futures ^ti3 for ipariii, ^nivifu for ^arioiiu,
turtir for ^wtttr, ^arSt for 4>ariar ; \iTtir for \aritr ; and the present and sec-
ond aorist active and middle aubjunctive of most /u-verbs, aa riffO for Ti$iit,
trr-u^oi, eO/iai, perf. uiriS^wi. On iiioiwi, Tiffeiiri, see 463 d.

N. 1. — In aUiematic optatives the accent does not recede beyond the diph-
thong containing -i-, the sign of the optative mood : Irrata, laTaliur, b^olro, Sc-
l*frg ; and ao In XvOttt^r, Xv0<hf.

N. 2. — Mmiuu am aUt, hrUrafuu understand, Kpt/ia/uu Jiang, iArtau profit,
and ^pu^F bought (749 b, 750 b, 757 a) have receaalve accent In the sabjunc-
live and optative ({(lovuu, Hiaraiiat, liratro, KpliiaiTii).

d. Poetic forms sometimes fail to follow the rule, aa iir being.

435. Inflnitivea, participles, and verbal adjectives are verbal nonns (S68),
and hence do not regolftrly show recea^ve acceut.

a. InflnltiTes. — The following inflnicivee accent the pennlt: all inflnlUvea

in -«, as XeXuWhi, Xvffqmi, lo-Tiimi, rrr^m (except Epic -ftnu, as rr^^umi) ;
ill verba in w the first aorist active, as \vriu, ruScuiru, the second aorist middle,
H XirArAu, the perfect (middle) passive, as 'KtMaBiu, rn-stlcGirAu, wttm^ffm.

N. — The present inf. of contracted verbs and the second aorist active Inf,
of H-verba h»ve the perispomenon b; 424 c.

b. PartictplM. — (I) Oxytone : the maacnline and neuter sing, of the second
aorist active, as Xii-iit, Xirir ; and of all participles of the third declension end-
ing in -« In the masculine (except the first aorist active), aa Xufcd XvSir, XtXiwth
XiXiFiJt, irrAi isTit, rtSefi rMr, SiBBit SiS6w, larii Irrir, ttucrtt BtutwCr (but
Urfit, roi^a-af). Also liir going from tl|u.

144 ACCENT OF VERBS [4*6

(S) F«roxjtone ; the perfect middle (passive) : \i\vpJm.

N. — Participles are accented like tuljectives, not like verbs. The fem.
and neuter noiti. accent the same ayllsble as the maac nam. if Ibe quantity of
the ultima permits, thus raiSriuy, raUMovra, raiifOot (not ralSniot) ; rw^ai,
*oilfff(iff>, roi^ac (not roliiaar) ; ^iXu*», ^tXaOfa, ^iXoOr (from ^iXfct).

c. Verbal Adjectives. — The verbal adjective in -rat is accented on the ultima
(\vt6i); that in -rcot on tlie penult (Xirr^t).

N. — Prepositional compounds in -tot denoting possibility generally aooeot
the last syllable and have thri« endings (2M), as iaiXurit dittolitbU, ittiprri-
removafile. Such compounds as have the force of a perfect passive participle
accent the antepenult and have two endings, as tidXwTti dimolved, i(alptT«t
choten. All other compounds la -rsf accent the antepenult and have two end.
ings, as ipam (mpatiobU, x'tf»^V^ arttfieial.

426. Ezceptlons to tlie recessive accent of compound rerta. — a. The accent
cannot precede the augment or reduplication ; St«i|u ant n&>rn(, iw^r uos abtna,
*Jr-9XMr the]/ tnUred, dr-^at they were abunt; i^-inrtu nrrlvrd (cp. rcroi).

N. — A long vowel or diphthong not changed by the augment receivea the
accent : vr~ttKt vxtt yielding (indlc. vr-clm, imper. ur-cm).

b. The accent cannot precede the last syllable of the prepoeittnn before the
simple verb nor move back to the first of two prepositions : rtpltct pul around,
cvriiOtt gite up together (not drtxam), (rir^jtiiflft put d"vni topeUmr (not g6y-
KoStt). Compounds of the second aorist active imperatives S61, h. Sit, and ex**
are thus paiozytone : tiriStt $et on, rtplStt put around, iwtaxtt hold on.

c. When compounded with a monosyllabic preposition, monosyllabic aecoDd
aorlat middle imperatives in -oi) from fu-verbs retain the circumflei: r^oStS
ittray, irfieO put in. Bat the accent recedes when these Imperatives pr^Bx a
dlssyUabto preposition ; drUou sell, EordAiu put down. The open forma alw^s
have racetaive accent, as ItSeo, xarieto.

S. The accent of uncompounded infinitives, participles, aorist passive, per-
fect passive, and of the second aorist middle imperative (2. p, sing., but see
4S6 c) is retained in composition.

e. drforu will be far from, iwiarat wQl be upon do not have recessive accent

f. Compound subjunctives are dltterently accentuated in the Mss. ; drotu«iat
and irbSuiuu, twiS^Tut and ^Wirru ; the aorist of Irtiu has rpoS/ioi and r^fui.
irtxi* has iriaxi^f^- Compound optatives retain the accent of the primlUvea:
dnloira, as SeiTo. For evteatro, wpoveoi^et (746 c) the Mss, occasionally have
rtfrftHTo, rp6irSotirSt ; and so wpiairo.

437. Final -at (and -01) are regarded as long in the optative (100), eloewhera
as short. Hence distingnisb the forms of the first aoriaL

3. Sing, Opt. Act. InQn. Act. 2. Sing. Im|^. Ud.

Aijw XviTiu Xvoxu XwTtu

6xiAiai diroAvmu diroXuTat iiroXvam

waiie&a muStunu muScCovu atuSiuoni

4U b (2) D. Bat Horn, has dXaXitfumt (dXdo/ui wander), dirax4fw>«t or dr*-
X'fw>M (Ix'vf"' at* di*tr«*Kd), trei/uiot (rtdv drive).

I;.ClK>^Ic

AUGMENT
43a The augment (increase) denotes past time. It appears only
ID the seoondary or past tenses of the indicative mood, namely, im-
perfect, aorist, and pluperfect. The augment has two forms, the
syllabic and the temporaL

429. SylUblc Augment. — Verbs beginning with a oonsonant pre-
fix < as the augment, which thus increases the word by one syllable.
In the pluperfect c is prefixed to the reduplication.

AJtu loose IrXiov ^Autnx /-AtXracn

wnAvn educate j-muSmor l-nuStucra i-rtwiuMuKif

a. Terlw baginnlag with p doable the p after the augment, ^rw throto,
l-ffimp, t-ffif^, *-ppi4«7iii ; f/r/fiiH break, l-ppitf«, l-ppii'^.

N. — pfi ia het« due to asBfmllation of /:^, u In Horn, tppefa dfd (and fp<fs) ;
of *p in Ipptot fltneed. Cp. SO a.

430. jMXcfuu tBiMk, Sihaim am able, /JXXu intend augment nfth c or wlUi q
(e^Mctilly in later Attic) ; thus, ^uU^v and 4^uU/i^v, ilvniiiitr and ^aunl/tqr,
M«nf#fr and Ifiut^w.

a. nieae fonna teem u> be due to paraUelism with ^Xo* (from MAw viih)
■Dd fAAw (from MXh).

431. Some rerbs beginning with a vowel take the syllabic aug-
ment because they formerly twgan with a consonant Thus,

ir«iu break (F*lf»B|n). •*^ »or- pw»- MSw--

UbicD^u on* eofXttred (FaX(a-KO|iai), Imperf. 1|]Unc4|ti|*, aor. tikmw (with tem-

pcmJ augment) or iputv.
4i6iM* pleOM (F»Urw), aor. fatk* (Ionic).
1*-«(Y» ofXN (pat^iu), imperf. t-r-iifytii,

Um permit (tfip^*)' ^^*< ^ton, itftiiv,
ttJfMi tU (for a-iSw|iai), ato^i)*.

IUtt* roll (F«Urn>), (DUttov, (Duta, ilXlxtn*'

Ouu* or VXn^ draw (nXxtt), «IXko*, itkinni, tlXictetip'.

Iw^jiw fnVna (««>opai), <tT4|i^.

JpfitoiMt wort (F«(rY4o|uu), tlfria(r^ip>.

lpr« crrrp («p*a), ttpvor.

)m^ entertain (pwriaa), ■Evrbn', iltf-rfaom, <(«>rUUi|v.

4M a. D. Hoin, hu IXXafle toot (for <-<rXii^), fntar eoam (tor <^ko»), ^-
ftlarrt ahook (for *Tf*«)tTo), fiJeivt feared (for *-S/:««r«). (««* fournwi ia
doe to analogr-

Ml D. 8;Ilablo augment in Homer before a vowel Is a mire proof of Initial f
in Utwow and some other verba. Similar Ionic and poetle forma oooor from

t\ttr, ifXu, i^H*, fXra), friOia, tpSu, i)tnx'^''t ^^-

■oogic

146 AUGllENT

fi||ii lend (o^o^|w), act. dn. «tt«v for M-rov, d*i|v tor t44^
Im|)u put (»-ioTT)(u), plup. (lo^Ki) for *-
Apd* see (pop&a), Up«y, Upua or Upaxa.
AM* piuA (FwH"). U«ow, Iwro, U<rfti|».

■tSov taio, 3 HOT. of ipdu (tor J-pLSov).
tCXoc tooA, 2 aor, of alpJa' (for t4Xe*).

433. Since f disappeared early, many augmented forme show no tt%oe of iti
exiatence, as, if""" ^''°''' "'''" dieell (fsiioi). Besldea c, i| was also used aa the
syllabic augiaent. Ttiis appears in Horn. it^lBtn (-71 ?), Attic pint you jfenew.

434. The verba iyrv/u, dUviropdi, (ir)i)fYiiCfu, ipiu, which bc^&n originallj
with f, show foruB that appear to have a double augment; as Mwr, MX«r,
(drVtrVDr (rarely ^voi-ygv), ^lipwr, ^iViuo (aiid ^V^a). Tbeae forms appear to
be due to transference of quantity (34) irom^-fiyvr, ^feiyar, ^foput (cp, 43S).

435. Temporal Augment. — Verbs begmning with a vowel take the
temporal augment hy lengthening the initial vowel. The temporal
augment is so called because it usually increases the time required
to pronoimce the initial syllable. Diphthongs lengthen their first
vowel.

a becomes i|

&Y. I^ad

V

fix-

<m

JXtQi. hope

(ll«t..

iix™»

liXim»

^irtc.

tKfTfMV

tirfrtwa

t<™««,

ifH<* mark off

'!•*■

V

ir-^

^b.

lA.lt. ™ull

«M"

{^».

lh».

iM-i

otpJ.. gtizt

im.

in"

nrt"i

aOJm play thefiitU

.,&<».

,av^

,,<\n">

.itxvi

tUi^ tiktn

«■«"■

««»-.

«fi)CO,uii jjroy

lix'^-

1*1|.T

iSw"

T'WI'

olKi« ibntn

V«»

,f«^

4'V"

W"!

436. InlUal f becomes f. jESw stag, gJaf. Initial it, i, P, w remain un-
changed. Initial a usually becomes ^ : ipiariw breakfast, lipltTTfaa. iniMant
and drUiu «zp«H(Z fonn dWtXwffa and dni\hwa, dwXii^r and dnjXiiSqr,

437. Initial diphthongs are sometimes unaugmented : a« In afndofiw dry;
n: (fn^r, n■'a^»' 1 <u: evp^^f and iffrp/^r from (ifilg-xu Jlnd, ed{diit)r and q^-
/urt from (Bxoaw prai/ ,- ov is never augmented, dnce It U never a pure diph-
thong when standing at the beginning of a verb-fonn.

4SB D. Initial a becomes d in Doric and Aeolic ; Initial oi and an remain.

44«] EEDUPUCATION 147

438. OmlMlon of the Angmant. — k. In Attic ti>gedy the Angroent fs some-
times omitted In cboiul poEaages, rarely ia Uie dialogue piirta (nieaseDgeiB'
apeeclieH), wliich are uearer akin to prose.

b. In xp^' (trom xp^ + 4') the augment is strictly annoceBBary, but is often
idAeA (tx^*) since tlie compoeieion of xp^' ^^■^ forgotten.

c In Homer and the lyric poets either the syllabic or the temporal augment
is oflen absent ; as ^ro and l^mro, p^r and fSiir, Ixor and tlxor. IterativeB
(496) in Horn, usually have no augment (^Ix'skow).

N. — In Homer the absence of the augment represents the usage of the parent
language, in which the augment was not necessarily added to mark past, time.
It is therefore erroneous, historically, to apeak of the omiatlon of the augment
in Homer.

i. In Herodotus tbe syllabic augment is omitted only in the case of pluper-
fects and itemtlves in axoF ; the temporal augment is generally preserved, but it
la always omitted In verba beginning with oi, au, », », oi, and in iyir^w, ite>Ju,
iRf7», (f>Ja>, iia, ipfUw, etc. ; in others it is omitted only in some forms (as d7B-
ftiu, lya, fXiu, ifpdai), and in Others it is variable (dry^Xu, irrw, ipx"- '■'-
tToiiai, it^ofuu} ; in cases of Attic rednplication the augment is never added.
HdL omits the augment for the reduplication in the above verlM.

REDUPLICATION

439. Beduplication ia the doubUng of the sound standing at the
beginning of & word. It is used in the perfect, pluperfect, and future
perfect tenses in all the moods, to denote completed action. It ia
sometimes found also in the present and second aorist.

440. VeTbal)eginiungw[t]ia^nipleconsonant (except p) or with a stop and
» liquid (X, ;i, r, p) place the initial consonant with t before the st^m. Xiv

loote, M~\vKa, Xf-Xue/hi, X^Xvfui, \t-\iaciiai ; ypi^ui virile, yi-fpaipa ; KKlrm
iadine, tt-KyjKn ; ^Xdrrw injure,, pi'fi\a</>a ; rptui lavi, ri'Tplirpm.

a. Eiceptiona: verbs beginning with yr, moat of those with 7X, and some
with fil\. Thus, yrapii;a recognize, i-yriipma ; yi^'iirKu Anoto, t-yruK» ; y^i^iu
<anie, I-tXb^q ; 0\airTiru sprout, i-pXiartiiia (usu. (S«pXdaT)j»a).

441. An Initial aspirate is reduplicated by the correxponding smooth stop :
^»nj<* murder, rt-^Muxa ; Sta $acr(/tee, ri-eva. ; x'P*^" dawWi «-x*i»™«.

442. In all other cases the reduplication la formed like the augment

a. Verbs beginning with a short vuwel lengthen tiie vowel, as (701 lead, i)x" !
iffitf »pt upright, ipSuKa ; d77AXw announce, Jf77(X«a.

b. Verba beginning with two or more consonants (except a stop with a
llqiiid). a double consonant, and p simply prefix t. p ia here dnubled (op. 42(1 a).

4M D. RedupHcation (or the augment for the rednplication) Is generally
retained in Horn. Exceptions ate tpx^riu and (px«ta from (pyv shut, Aruya
aritr, frrat from fwriiu clothe. On B^arai atoait, iSiypn' wo« expecting cp. 63*.

44S. b. D. Horn, has ^-puruitirot (^uriui loil), Iwupc (jttlpoiuu obtain)
for l-v/upt 446 ft, (mujKM (tevu urge) for i-K^v/tat ; Ionic has hri^iot.

148 REDUPLICATION [4«

Thna, icrl[u found, t-KTuia ; t-rtlfifi law, t-anpiiat ; arparinf'* ani Sonera/,

t-rTpQ,TliyiiKa\ ^t4u seek, 4-CiT^Ka; ftiiu tOKcA, (-^avKn ; ^Irrgg throw, tpfii^

N. — luiaivKti remtnd and irijtiMi acquire are exceptions; ft^finj/tw, ^-fu-

443. The verbs mentioned in 431 which origUiallj began with a consonant

now loat, reduplicate r^ularl;. Since the reduplicated consonant has disi^
peared oaly e is left, and this often contracts with the Initial vowel of the theme.
Thua, K^B for ft-fiya, from fiymiu break; lua/uu for ft-fua/iai from fugfu
pitth; (ffTifnB ioT iTirr^K» from Iiti|^ )et; lUa toTataexa from [i)fu (ffi-<ri|/ii) lend.

444. Pluperfect — The pluperfect prefixes the syllabic augmeat c
to the leduplicated perfect beginning with a consonant; when the
perfect stem begins with a vowel the pluperfect retains the prefix of
the perfect

Thna perf. XAuna, XfKviiaL, plup, i~\e\ini, i-\t\iffiir ; perf. l-aTaXna, l-ffraVoi,
plap. i-VTd\tTi, i-rrt\iLiir from otAXu. send; perf. i/yipmm, plup. iytptini from
iyoptiii harangue; perf. n/^na, plup. jj^ni from aipiai teize.

L Verbs showing ' Attic ' reduplication (446), In almost all caees aug-
ment the pluperfect.

b. The verbs of 431 follow the perfeots of HH; as U-rv (Aytv^u), tiivii'qt
(liWu), itiii)* (Irfiu), ifp'ivi from (f)pii-ftviu, tariiiii forma de-Ti)ro) ( = (-(*■) wr^ir^),
Ion. uid poet, trria) (rare in Att. prose). taiKa am like forms tific^.

445. Some verba beginning with a liquid or ;i take n instead of the redaplt-
cation; Xafi^nt (H^-) '"*«■ rf-^iJ**. rf-XijWwi, e^X^*i) ; ^yX^i* (^X") «Ma("
6|r lot, (r-\i7xa> iJ-MX'' i )'^*' co"ect (In composition) -tt-\oxa, -tl-ikixVr -<(-X«T^<u
(rarely W-Xry/iai) ; |u(fw|uw receive a share, tUiiaptai it it fated, tt-napra with
rough breathing ; also the stems ip, pi| tay, rt-ptita, tl-^ini.

a. a\-i)t^ is from (r«-«X)j^a by 37 (cp. Hom. fWa^t for i-a\apar), dimprai
is from fft-ffiiapTm (cp. Hom. Iii/iopt). The other forms are probably atialuguea
of «nq^a.

446. Attic Kednpliutloa. — Some verba whose themes begin with
a, (, or o, followed bj a single consonant, reduplicate by repeating
the initial vowel and the consonant and by lengthening a and c to i},
D to <a. Thus iytipa collect, iyqytpiai, iy-^ytpfiai ; iytipm awaken,

444 b. D. Hdt has ttn (for Ihm), f-Sa, itiOia. ; Hom. has luBt, and ttufft.

445 D. Hom. i«Uw /ear stands for St-Bfu from i»-Sfo(j)a (cp. ifiot'). So
t»lS»un for J«-Jfou(a. For StlSitrt greeted we should read 3i)j«cTa with -f-reda-
pllcallon. Hdt has bXi^ijia and -XcXb^ivi. XAi)w<a> occurs in tragedy.

446 D. — In Hom. ' Attic ' reduplication Is even more frequent than In Attic ;
thus, Mt)J4it from tin eat, <pi)^*« have /alien, iptp^ino (without lengthening)
from iptlwa overthrow, ipupixarui from ip^u reach. Fur other poetical forma
sea In the Llat oC Verbs dytlpai, ol/i/iii, dXd«fiai, ipaplana, tptlSu, tpifa, fxw, t{t».

430] POSITION OF AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION 14»

ly-^ytpitoi ; cXcy^w confute, iX--jXtyfuu ; SpvTriit dig, 6p-iopv}^ op-upirwuu ;
o^-rufu smear, dfi-npMa; cEX-Ai!^ destroy, ok-oikuia. So aUo ^ipta oeaf,

a. The name ' Attic ' was given by tike Qreek gnmnuriuis to this form of
redaplicaCioD though it occurs in Homer and in the other dlklecta.

b. dn^ hear hu dic-^EM for iii-iiiia(v')» ; iyit bu d^-ifaxa for d>-i)(Y)«X<>-
Tbe pluperfect aogmenta except In tlie caae of verbs wiUi initial t ; i)ic-i|iii),
A^ uitiei, druXiiXt) ; bnt ^X-^\^, ir^rty/ipK

447. KednpUcatlon In the FreMnt ^- A few verba reduplicate in the praMiit
by preBxing the initial conaooant and i, as 71-7x1^101, 71-Yriitf cu, /u-itrirKu, rf-n-v
ftw Tt-r(*)iKii, Tf-WTU for Ti-ir{e)r«j, [-trj-ijju for oi-onj^u, rf-ffifju f or 0t-#wu (126 a),
tf-Swfu. rl/t-rX^-iu fill (rXo-, rXir-) and rl^r^^ burn (rpa-, rf»r-) insert fi.

a. In some verbs the reduplication belongs to the verbal stem ; pifiAtu make

go ipifiaaa, SiSiaai leach Mllofo.

448. Sednplication in the Second Aoriat — iyv lead forms the second aoriit
tr-ayof, iT-d^u, it'iyatiu, Ay-ayttr, middle 47-o¥^1'' So alao iit-ryta and
^r-tyar from ^pu.

POSITION OF AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION IN OOMPOUND

449. In verbs compounded with a preposition, augment and redu-
plicatioQ stand between the prepositiou and the verb.

Thua, ivipfiilpti pa»» over, liwtp4fiamt, bTipp4prixa ; ilrpiWu Ihroa fnto, tlt^

a. Before i of the augment ix regains ita fuller form ^f (133 a), and tr and
rj' reappear in Iheii proper fonna which were modified in the present. Thus
lipiXkm throvi out, jf^^Uov, ixfiipXiiica ; iiifiiWu throw into, MpaWor; rvX-
X/yw collect, iriir^Xo'Bi', ffunlXoxB ; •fvpptrTu throiB together, ffuripptifia, tvrip-
fi^ ; «-iwnvii{)d pack together, irui^mia{Bt, irvrtirnnid^STir,

b. PrepodtloQS (except -ripi and tpi) drop their final vowel : dre^XXw throw
iiHiijr, ir-^PaWsr ; but rtpi^dXXu throw around, jTtpiipaWer, w/nfialru Utp for-
ward, rpoifi^r. But rpi maj contract with the augment (w/Htptiv).

490. But some verbs, which are not often used except as compounds, are
tnaled like nncompound verbs and tahe the augment before the preposition, as
JoffitfiiT' tat from tiihuuu, iiti9ipir set, eat from «in{U, ■i/i^ltira clothed from
i^ifptiriifU, itiStvSor (and (o^SJar) elepC from raStiSu, ^riffTd^iqr, V^^^'
from twlrrai'ai undertlaiid. hiiu forms 4*f«i and ij^lei. The simple verba occur
nuatly in poetry. But iroTmiu enjoy makes droXAauca, ^(rrdfid review ^raia.

441 D. Hom. has many reduplicated second aorists, as ri-rtStr from rtlSti
(ri#-) pertuade, HiXi/iiiv, Kt-K\iium from iVXn/iai command, X(-Xa0to0cu from
XaiMiH (Xo^) eteape the nottee of, n-^ij^o-Sai from 0cl3s/iiu (^3-) ipare, ip-ap»r
from ipaplcKa (ifi-) join, &p-opi>r from Spruiu aroute. The indicative forms may
take the syllabic aogmeat, as in i-rt-^paitr from ^piiu {tppaS-) tell. From
iritTu chUle and iptiat cheek come iji^sra* and Mnnt, and ipiKiutar.

150 POSITION OP AUGMENT AND REBUPlICATION [451

451. Doable AuKHWItt — Some verbs take two augmentB, one before and
the other nft«r Uie prepo^tion, aa ^r^txiitVi 4'--<'xVv' fiota ir-tx'M" endure,
^lix^Jivr from inx^ff annoy, fwrfipffiiiai from iraroptiu Bel vprigkt. So also,
by analogy to tbe foregoing, a fvw verbH derived from compound words : 4fi^-
tfifravr from iiuptt^Trriu dilute, -irrtiiiKi from drrtitWw (re to lato (drrilinEj.

432. CompouDds of Svo-- ill and iS uetl. (1) iuirTuxiu am unAoppVi '-'■v-
TiixDvv. ic^Lv-ri>x?(a. Svff-qp^ffTOUr, Sur-itp^trrigiia from 3ur-<vK(rr^ do not occur.
(2) tttprftriu do good, titpytr^ar, titpytnim (inacrip.), ihj/ryfrqjrii (texts).

493. Verbs derived from componnd nouns take the augment and the redupli-
cation at the beginning ; as iii»6o\6yaar, /u^ivSoXAyi'"' from /wBaXiryiu tell legend!
iliirSoMyoi teller of legends) ; ifKoSi/iaup, ipno^j^qua from oUoSo/idu hnild (ofieAi/un
llOUte-builder) ; ^/tw6\wr, ^firiXijni from J^roUu trrffflc in (i/aroM trafflc).

a. ^niXijtrid^ hold an aisembly (^jcuXiro-ia) makes i^K-iXqa-fn^r or jf-t-iXif-
vlator. iyyviu pledge makes ti-eyiur, irtytr^ti and (better) iyytar, iyy6iiam.

454. Verba derived from compound nouns whcoe first part is a prepoalUon
are commonly treated as if compounded of a preposition and a dmple verb ; aa

mriiyofiiui accUM (mrih'opoi), lanr/ipaur, loriry Jjhj™ ; ir$uiiitiiai pondtr (Irff^-
lun) irtBvii^STif, irrtSviifjaBai ; trmpiiu) swear faleely {hrtapnt), iriiipiniica ; fy-
X«/>(rui entrust (in x«M)' *wx»'*«'=.

a. But several verbs are not treated as compounds, such as di-ardu deceive,
iriariu distrust, irapiu am in diglculty, Toppiiriiitiiai speak freely.

TENSE-SUFFIXES, THEMATIC VOWEL, MOOD-SUFFIXES

455. Tense-Sufflxes. — The tense-sufBxea, which are added to the verb-stem
to form the teiise-steuis, consist of the thematic vowel and certain other letters.
No tense-snffixes arc added Co the verb-stem (I) in the second aorjat active
and middle, and second perfect and pluperfect, of ^-verbs ; (2) in the perfect
and pluperfect middle of verbs in -u and -jiu. The tense-eulBxes are aa follows : —

1. Present system, -%-, t%; -^A-, -%-, -at%-, -«%-, -»-, -™-, -(.>«5i ;
or none, as in ^a-p4r.

2, Future system, -a%-.
8. First aorist sytem, -ra-.

4. Second aorist system, -%- ; or none, as in f-ffrq-i'.

G. First perfect system, -la- (plnpt. -kit- from -ico- ; -mi- from -nt- ; -n-^.

0, Second perfect system, -a- (plupf. -i;-, -ci-, or ■<■) ; or none, as in t-rroTt.

7. Perfect middle system, none (future perfect -0-%-).

8. First passive syBlem, 0ti-, Sc- (future passive -eiis%-).

9. Second passive Byslem, ij, -t- (future passive -vii%-).

N. a In the aorist is properly a relic of the personal ending (806).

4ifl. D. For the Doric future -ae"/
see 642 D. — For the doubling of a i
644 b. D.

i,,Coog[c

401] THEMATIC VOWEL, MOOD^UFFIXES 151

middle of w-Terb«, and In all fnturee and future perfects. The thematlo vowel
in ttie indicative ie e liefore >i or * (luid in tlie optative of the teases mentioned) ;
elsewhere It la t. Thus, \ii%-, X>r^-, Xmt^-, XvAir^-, XfXuir^-; Xk-;-/u. In
(lie BubjuDotive It ia "/i?.

a. Attic bBciiptiona have both -M-Agv and -taSar in tlie Imperative.

497. Subjunctive. — In the mibjunctlve of all verbs the thematic vowel !■

"/jf-. ThOB, XAw-fMr, W)j-Tt, Mtrti-iur, irTtt\ri-Te.

M. Verba in -nim form their subjunctive like iiF-verbe.

498. In the present and second norist of ju-verbe, and In the aoriet paasive,
■/, is added to the tense stem. Tbus n^u/wt from riBi-it-iiti; BH from ei-ar,
rrffrf from riM-ir-T<, \,vtQ from \iit4-v.

499. Snfllz of the Optative. —The optative adds the mood suSix -i-, or i^
which contracts with the final vowel of the tense-Htem : Xios/u for \te^-iu, f iXoli|r
for ^XM-l^t, riAI^t for Ti8t^j)-r, -17. occurs only before active endings. When
the suffix is -iir-, the 1 pen. sing, ends in -r ; as riiiao-iTj-r = riiuf i/r ; when it la
-i-, the 1 pers, sing, ends In -/u, ss Ti»ulo-i-(u = tiuviU'

460. ii| is used as follows (in all other cases -i-) : —

a. In contrscted verbs in the singular, rarely In the dual and plural. -I-
^ipean in the dual and plural, isrely in the singular.

b. In liquid verbs in the future active singular : ^ralTt-r for #ai>*a-fi}-v. In
the dual and pluial -i- : 4>an>lnir, ipanHittr for ^arci-t-rst, •par*i-i-/itK

C In the singular of ^i-verba : TiStiiir lor Ti9t-lii-r, StBelTir lor SiSi>4ji-r, Mqrfor
Ir-ff-f. Here the modal sign is added to the tensu-steta without any tliematjc
TOweL -(- is more common in the dual and plural : TiStT/uf tor riBi-i-iitt, tilal-
^r for liBi^-fur, BfiTt for 8f-i-Tt. Verbs in -nriu inahe their optativee lilce XAu.

d. In the aorlst passive : \v«tltir for XuSt-tii-t, <panltii- for ^ir-lti-r. In the
dnal and plural -i- ie more common ; XvAri>ut for \M-i-iitr, ^aKiri for tpari-i-rt,

e. In some second perfects, as spaiXiiXt^alqi, and in the second aorlst ffx"'')'
from tx- (bnt -rxs^ in composition).

N. — In theSpL -u- is regular before -r: Ha-tt-i, rtSc-tt-r, \u9i-U-*.

461- 4. In the 1 aor. opt. act. of u-verbs the endings -cut, -<w, and -tiar are
more common than -oit, -si, -vxcr.

b. In the aor. opt. passive of all verbs and in the opt. of /u-verba and of con-
tract verbs -iTor, -inir, -tiuw, -in, -»• are commoner than -vfrar, -titriir, -aiiu;
ifr«, -ti|ra'. Prose writers use either the shorter or the longer forms ; poets use
only the shorter forms. Except in contract verlm -ittrt is very common In the 2
pL and is sometimes the only fonn in the Mas., as JdI^c, dtlnrt, ynl^t, -palvrt,
XAdrrt, ^nlirrt ; but the forms in question occur in prose writers and their
genuineuesa la therefore unsupported by metrical evidence.

UT D. Horn, has -%- Instead of -"/ie, especially in the 1 aor., 2 aor. of fu-
verbs, and 2 aor. pass. {Ifivviiiitt, iiiaii**, Tpartioiut ; also in fofur, cfSo^r).
These forms do not occur in the sing, or 3 pi. active, Viirbs in w rarely show
Itiii !j in the present. (Uther examples 532, (HIT D., 682 D.)

W D. -<v- ^ ^^T '^'^ '" Uom. in the dual and plural

i,vGooglc

PERSONAL ENDINGS

ENDINGS OF THB VERB : PERSONAL ENDINGS

462. To make the complete verbal forms, to the tense-stems in the
TariouB moods ate attauhed the personal endings in the finite moods
and other endings in the infinitives, participles, and verbal adjectives.
See 366. The personal endings of the four finite moods are given
belov. In many forms only the ;it-verbs preserve distinct endings.
Some of the endings are due to analogy of others and many are still
nnexplainod. The first person dual, when it is used, haa the form
of the first person plural.

(prlnurr taniu) (wocinduy tansM) (prlmirj t*nu>)

■DBJDHCTITI
Sing. 1. — OT -^

2. ., (for -,.), -•• (-^

8. -wi (for -T.)
Dtul S. -ra*

8. -i«v
Pint. 1. 1UV

2. <n

8. -wt (for -m)

8. -vTm ('Tttciw') -uttn (-fftfuMar)

4n D. ]>oric bas -n for -vt, -fut for -fi», -m in 8 pi. , and -rai, -#Mr, ->ia> (or
-T^r, sOyi*, ifi*- -Tar, -vBaf, -ii&p are also Aeolic.

The clow agreement between Greek and Sanskrit may be illuHtrat«d bj toe
Infleotlon ol Old Greek and Doric ^oM *a9. Skt. bhtiiii thine, l^far, Skt.
ibharam bore.

^fil bhi-mi «a-Ttrbhft-tte fi^tpo-r Abhara-m iiptpi^iir ibhara-liin
^i-t bbt-al fit-ith btiB-mAa l<ttpi-t ibbarvs i^ipo-iitr ibharS-ma

^irl bbJL-ti ^-ri bhS-tbA ttptpt-ir) &bharn-t iifiipi-Tt Abhara-I>

*«^Ar bhfi-this ^-rrl bht-ntl iifiipt^or ibli^n-laia r^xso-f (r) &bhBn>-D(t)

PERSONAL ENDINGS

M3. PRIlUIty BNDIMOS OP THB ACTtVB (tHD. AND SUBJ.)

«. t Sing. ^ ia found only In »u-verb8. Verba in -w have no ending

ud limplj lengthen the thematlo vowel (Xdu, \elru). Tbe perfect has no pet-
jonal ending, -a taking the place of a thematic vowel.

b. 1 Sing. — ( 1 ) -at le found in Horn, itrl lAoit art from tbe ;u-Terb tl/ii I
am; possibly also in ^ifi thou >aye»l. Attic d thou art la derived from ^c.
rlAf-f JB obscure. XAnt Is probably for Xut-^i, XmI', Xijci, to nhich t bis been
added. Subj. Xdu-i follovs tlie analogy of the indicative, but with long thematic
vowel. Ti0gi for rtM-pi. In tbe perfect -t (not for -iri) bas been added.

(2} -Ai is a perfect ending, as In <iU9a knoviMt for el! + At (88). From the
peifect it spread to tbe imperfects ItrSa watt, tteio-Ai uenUt, ttp-ri^Ba taidU,
and to fiSitffffa or ^tfiaS^ knewett. The perfect boa commonly -a-t. elffftii and
Vfci are late.

C. 3 SlnK- Ti is found in yu-vetba: ia-rl, rlBrtai for rtftf-ri (Doric) l^

116. XAti is obscure, bat It cannot be derived from Xuciri for Xvcri. Xilp, rt^
(for TiMn) follow Xi>fi, bat with long tbematic vowel. In tbe perfect, -< with no
personal ending.

d. 3 PI. — Original -m is retained in Doric Xi)om, whence Attic Xtetwt
(US a) ; irrl, Attic ttal. Subj. \6aai from Xdw-m, riB&ai from riBiut-tTL, vMOri
from THuiTt (Dor.). Many ^u forms are derived from -an-i, as riMao-i (riii-arri),
(lUui (iiii-arri), iaraai (jari-am;, laToai (from Irrd-arri), the accent of which
hu been transferred to -nSttai (747 D. 1), SiieSvi from (Dor.) -rlBt-rri, ilia-rri.
-iri from -fTi (35 b), properly the ending of tbe perfect after a consonant, ap-
pears as -JCci in Horn. rt^tSai; bat it baa been replaced by -an out of -am,
M In Trrpi^t^ai.

464. SECONDARY ENDtNOS OP THB ACTIVC [IND. AND OPT.)

The optative usiiAlly haa the endings of the secondary tenses of
the indicative.

4SS a. D. Tbe Horn. subj. MAu/u, tiJ^iivu, i-ydyuiu, are new formaliona.
Aeolio baa ^>l\.iiiu, SoKliutfu (indie.).

b. (1) rf< or (ff in Hom. and Hdt. ia derived from d + i. For this fonn
^<(f} may be read in Horn. Tbeocr. bas -ct for -ta {i/idXya, etc) and perl
Tt»WW.t(B67. 2. D.).

b. (2) -<rfc in Hom. indio. ♦S"*". Tl0ti<r9a., ilvrda ; aubj. «Ap<r9a also writ-
ten MAqrte; opt. (rarely) jiXaJoitfea, (MXtio-Sa, ~eBa occara also occasionally In
Doric (r«0a^0a) and Aeolic (lx»iff«". #iXij<rflii).

C Aeolic has tIAj, rod), (rr«*il«i, but i(iri TOyc. Subj. : Hom. iefKsat (alao
written MiX*«i ; op. Arcad. (xi)- ^^B". B^T'.

d. Hom. haa -»( in [a<ri (Arp gt>, tain tke^ are, and in jii^iei, ytyiavi.
AeoUe haa Xd04«i, ^IXnai. rl^uuri.

4M a. D. •> for -^ is very rare (^rpl^iv m Eur., i/iAfrTair in Cratinns).

e. Doric )Ji uw for .Sr(T).

t. -r ia regular in Doric and common in Uom, and later poetry ; •■ tfrt-r

• oo^k

164 PERSONAL ENDINGS [403

>. I Sing.— -V Btanda tor y. (133 c), cp. l^pa-r, Skt. Abhara-m. After a
CODsonantfi(BODaQtnaaat, 20 b, 35 c) became a: fXiwa for A wfi, Epic fa mat for
i)(«}a from V^ In the pluperfect -1] ia frou e-n (4ff7). -r is found In the opta-
tive when the mood suffix is -«r- ; elsewhere the optative has -lu.

b. aSing. — On-fftaBee<03b(2).

c 3 Siag. T dropped (133 b) in tKvt, trlgtt, and in tlie opt. \iot, tfii (cp.

Old Lat. tied). fKHirt has its -t from the perfect (cp. olir) and shows no per-
■onal ending.

d. Dnol. T7)v la rarely found for -rtr In the 2 dual (tipfr^r in Plato).

Horn, has trt^xtror SB 8 dual.

e. 3 PL r for -it by 13S b. -aur (taken from Uie 1 aorist) la need (1) in

the Imperf. and 2 aor. of ^-verbti, as trt9t-var, ISt-var; (2) in the aor. paas.
Afiftf-rni', i^dmi^ar (here -i- preceded by a short vowel occurs in poetry,
fiS6 a. D.) ; (3) in the pluperf. i\t\6a^itr ; (4) in the opt. when -«r- ii the modal
■nffiz (460). In the opt. -aar is rare.

465. BNDINQS OF THB UIDDLE (INDIC, 8UBJ., OPT.)

«. I Sing. — Primary -irai retains its rr in the perfect of all verbs (XAu-vai),
and ill the pres. of Mi-verba (tI^c-o-u). Elsewhere ir drops between vowels, as in
\ijl or ttta from \it-irai, \MiaT} or -ti, tpars from ^at^-o-oi, ri/i^ from Tiitdt-aai ;
■nbj. ^Ag from Xfiig-irat, ^4>7 from ^inr-ffai, 0^ from tf^e-o-ai, J^ from tii^-rai, f
from Itt-«ii(, ^iXg from ^iX^i^-iriu, SiiXo!' from 3ii\iji= S'>)\.6i}-<rai.

N. 1. — The forms -g and -« are found In the present, future, and future per-
fect. See 02s.

N. 2. — iil>v and Sirji for Sitoffoi, 4wtaTf and trlvTji for iwlvrafai, i^lti for
^lirrot, are poetic and dialectic or late.

b. a Sing. ao stays In all plupa. and In the imperf. of fu-vetbs. Else-
where it loses its tr, as in l\6ou from fXti-ao, l\6ra from /XAffa-ro, i^ifrv from
i^ilm-m, iXiww from i\lwt-aa, IStiii from (Sf-vo, Arpfu from frjila-«v, irlfiQ bant
iriiidt-eo, i<pi\oO from tipi\h-ff<i. In t)ie optative, Xfou, Xirsu, rifcie, cla, ht«(uo,
from Xilat-tfo, etc. ; rttivo from rlitioi-ffv.

If. I. — M^Kd or iiSinv and t^rloTid are commoner than iStrc^e and itrlvraee
from Jfra»ui am aAfe and iTlaTa/iai vndemland.

H. 2. — After a diphthonR or a long vowel In the 2 aor, indlc. mid. -«v la re-
tailed, as tlao (b)iu tend), &rtiao (dFlrqfu ben<fU).

(ftTifVar), tMiht {iil9o-vnw), *(Xi|S«» (<*iXi)*ij-ffii») , r(i4^>> (<j-p(i^)jHr«»). The
short vriwpl before r(T) is explained by 40. Horn, flj-* were became jr, used
in Dor as 3 pi. ; in Attic it was used as 3 sing.

466 a. D. Horn, ban Poi\iiu, perf. /i/unrai, but pres. Jdrursi, wapUraaai ;
Si/in Is unique (for SV"") ; Bn))]' ii^f^riu- Doric often contracta, as olg lor ab-M.
Aeollc Renerotly leaves tai open ((cfir«-si). HdU has open -tai, -^w.

b. Horn., Doric, and AeoUc have ^ner^iUy open forms, as Horn. ^XX(-«
(rarely jMXXni), ativtM. Iprio, fnU are from -no, Horn, has iiidpmo for AUic
*M*(>Kwo, and Tnay drop j- even in the pluperfect (Cirffim). When Doric con-
tracts on we have a. In UdL oo, to are open, but the writing m for to is found.

«e6] PERSONAL ENDINGS 165

c. Dual. — The 1 pi. is used for the 1 dual except in thi; three poetic forms
vV'IdfMfcf, X(\il>i<u0ar, iptuiiuBor. Hom. has -fSor for -adiir in ev^atc$«*.

d. I PI. — In epic and dramatic poetry -lUtBa is often used for -luSa for
netrical reuonH (^uUfMsda, iTiMTiiitaea).

e. 1 PI. —On the loBS of e in oBt {laraXBi), see \0S.

1 3 PI. — After Towel steme -rrai, -rro are preserved. After sterna ending
in a consonant -iTai, -rra became -arai, -aro hy 36 b. These fonns were retained
in prose tUl (^oat 400 b,c, (_e.g. rrrix"^'"- irirdxaTt),

M6. EHDINOS OF THE IMPERATIVB

1. Active.

a. 3 Sing. — XCt, \lrt, rlSti (for riBt^) have not tost -0i. -«( is found
in 2 aor. pesH. ^nr-4i ; la irr$-h and luTa-ei ; in some 2 aorists, like -irutSt,
rX^-fi, Tt-di, which are /u forms though they have presents of the w form
(687). Also in h-Bi be or know, C9i go, ^A or ipa$i say. Xtei/Ti \a for \v9^t
by 126 b.

b. ■* occura In Mi, tt, I6t, ax^t (and in the rai« eiyti, t(«t). This -> is not
derived from -Bi.

C. XOv-tr aor, act. and XC<r-ai aor. mid. are obscure in origin.

2. Middle.

a. s Sing. ra retains Its v in the (rai-e) perf. of all verba and In the pres.

o( >ii-verbB (AAuro, rlStce, tirraira). Klsenhere a is dropped, as in \tva from
U«-ra, XiTDv from Xit^o, 9av from M-00, ot from l-o-o, r^iiw from wfifo-a'a, rtjiA
from ri/uii-iTa.

N. — tMm>, Ura, SlSou are poetic or late.

8. 3 PI. — For -wTww and -o-Soi* we find -Tatar and -ffSuwai' in prose after
Thocydides, in Euripides, and in inscriptions after 300 b.c. Thus, Xii^iiKrap, Xvvd-
riwar, Xv^rArxrar, \v«i^9itaaT, \v8-firiiisar, \nriruisar, XiritSuiray, ^Jirdafiuffar,
^r^itrar, rliiAaBiavat, ^iXttTtiavar, ytypd^unrat, rrrtlfffiivar, Tiffiruirar, Siji-
Tiaraw, Biruvar, nSlataaai'., SirBiarar, -JlTairar, -trBiiiatr.

v. — lirriar for trrttr is rare. Attio inscriptiona have (very rarely)

[TO occur in Hom. regularly in the perfect and jjlupcrfect of
I stems, BS TtTpi^TcH, larai for ia-rrai, iaro for ijr-rro from 4/iai
(V*""} ; also in sterna ending in -1, as ItfiSlaTo, -arai, -art were transferred to
vocalic stems, sa pipXifaTat, pt^X^aro, Ildt. SuwfaTai. Horn, has -S-arai in iXif
XiUariu from Aavw drive. In the opL -aro always (^ytnlaTo for tfmrro'). In
IldL i| before -arai, -btb is ahortened, as perf. iTY^ami for 4>i^rai = ISytjrrai,
yStJJXfaro for -jpiTO. For mln-ai, Horn. iftnTai and i.i?ar(«, Ildt. has k^otoi. In
the opL Hdt. has -aro ; ^Xofara, JrfalarD. In Ildt. -arai, -ars occur even in the
present ayatem, rifAirai^ iur^rui, trT^sTO.

UB a. D. -01 is not rare in Hom. , prea. SltuBt = SlSou, fyrvBi, aor. ttidBt, pert.
rfrXttSi. Aeolic has f^Ta, *iXij. xfei, i^xo'i S'5i>< (Pindar) are very rare.

8. Doric has also -rru, as In raptxirrai ; Aeolic -rrsr, BB iptpti^tr, Doric

hH -ff0w (pi.) and -v0ur.

.OOglf

156 ENDINGS OF THE INFINITIVE, PARTICIPLE [4*7

BNDINOS OP THE PLUPERFECT, ENDINQS IH «4

467. Endings of the Plnp«ifect Active.— -11, ^i, -«(>') are derived from
■<(s')a, -t(v)tn, -((ir)(. In later Rreck the endings ate -eir, -ai, -n(,r), -«(rer,
-cirir'i -fifar, -tirt, and very late -tiaat.

468. The Endings -wtt, etc. —The a ol the endings -r8i, -rBai, -vSar, -v9tf,
-aBiu. (409 N.) has no exact parallel in cognate languages, and seems to have
vpnsA in Greek from forms like TtriKiirSt, l{uv-9t, etc., where a aigmh«tem
was followed by original St.

EITDINOS OV THE INFIHITIVB, PARTICIPLE, AND V&BBAL
ADJECTIVE

469. Inflnttire.— The following are the endings added to the tenae-Mam to
make the inftnitive.

a. -<v; in present and 2 aorist active of u-verbs, all futures active. Thus, \tttr,

Ttii&r, \twttr, XJrtiv, <paKJr from Xl)t-cr, Ti/tde-tr, \ixi-tt, Xict-tr, ^aW(-fr.

b. -«i: in 1 aor. active, as XOrai, TaiSFuvai, Stifai,

C. -vai: (1) present, 2 perf. of fu- verbs, the two passive aorlsts, as rtSf-icu, ivri-
mi, Xu^^nu, 0ai^'m; (2) perfect active, XtXvc^Mi, and tttf-nu fTom
e»-* {or*.),
N. 1.— The ending emi appears In the 2 aor. of /u-verbs,aaSoilKu from Si-iKi,

Stlrai from M-crat.

d. -ff4w; in other cases.

N. 2. — The infinlUves are old cases of sabstantivea, those In -ai being datives,
the othen locatives.

470. Paiticiplea. — The stem of the participle is formed by adding the fcd-
lowing endings to the tense stem.

a. -vr- : in all active tenses except the perfect, and in 1 and 2 aor. passive (301).

b. -or- : in the perfect active (for -for-) ; msac -lit, tern, -uid, oeut. -it (301 c).
c- -|uva- : in the middle, and in the passive except in the aorist.

471. Verbal Ad)«ctiTe*. — Most of the verbals In -rit and -rfci an formed
by adding tJiese suffixes to the verbal stem of the aorist tussive (flmt or second).

'i^lUS, ^X^ii, -rfci (i-^iMt'^r) ; irtirrit, -rfn ^i-welv-iiif) ; t«Xmt*i, -rrfm
(/-TiU<f-#«>) ; <rra\rit, ■t4oi {i-triX-^r) ; p\irrit, -T^r (^(^i!-«irr) ' ^O the

accent of oompomid verbals, see 426 0.

U7 D. Hora. has -», ip, -ti or «i-r (-« onl; in fitt), -taar, and rarely -a*.

-tt, -t ; Hdt. baa -«i, -lai, -« (-« ?), -ean, -«ra*.

400 D. -cv appears also in Horn. IBUr (miswrilten lUtir). Horn, has no case
of -cmt (for //hi write f/uni). For -<>• or -m Horn, often usea -|ui«i (also
Aenllc) and -|uv (which is also Doric) ; both endings show the accent on the
preceding syllable, as itvyiiiuwoi, l/t/ttrat (= tirat), ^Ainitm, ^r^/um, ^rd^m,
ifi/itrat, ifioiiiMiiitrai., Sa^tum ; tiM^v, (m^*, IW», S/^wf, t\^iur, HiimK Doric
has -fwr >n Che aorist pasaive, as alaxw'i^iiir. -lur Ix preceded by a short syllable
and generally stands heiora a vowel, -m always fnllnws a long vowel. Doric
haa -^r and -tr in the present. Aeolic has -ir>' in the present and 2 aorist.

trii CHANGES m the verb-steh 157

a. Some ue derived from other stem forma (prea. and fat.), aa ^f^ii,

[•tAt, tun-rii ; fincrit (cp. )uri-v = /itrii fut.).

473. Verbala in -rit, -r^, -rir either (1) have the moanlDg of & perfect ptW'
■Ire putidple, as npvwrit hiddttt, raiScvrit educated, or (2) ezpieaa poMibUity,
u iwfrfc MnkabU, iparbt vitible. Many have either sigDlflcatiOQ, bat Borne ace
paadve only, as roairbt done. See 426 c. N.

a. Usually pasHive in meaning are verbals from deponent verba, as iiiitirrit
IviUated.

b. Usoally acUve in meaning are compounds derived from transitive active
verbs; bat aome Intianaitive verba make active verbaJs, as purii flowing.

c Many are active or paaaive, others only active ; luiirrit blamtd, blaM-
able, Maming, rurrh fnisting la (rare), truiied, irpalcTo^ doing notMng, not
iont, ftwyurU toimding.

€73, Verbals In -rfoi, -r fi, -Tior expreea necetiity (op. the Lat, geraodlve in
-silw), as a<rr^ that must be jn'oen, waiSturiot educandug,

FORMATION OF THE TENSE-SYSTEMS (fl AND MI-VERBS)
CHANGES IN THE VEBB-8TBM

474. From the Terb-steui (or theme) each tense-stem is formed by
the addition of a tense-suffix (4o£>) or of a prefix, or of both. li.
475-495 certain modifications of the verb-stem are considered.

475. Variation In Quantity. — Many verbs of the first class (498 ff.)
show variation in the quantity of the vowel of the verb-stem, which is
comroonly long in the present but fluctuates in other tenses, as Av-w,
AiMTw, 2\u-<ra, but XtXu-Ko, XcXu-pu, Ikt-Orp'. (Other examples, 600.)

a. Some verbs of the Fourth Class (623 c) lengthen a short vowel of the prea-
ntt in some other l«nses. Thos, Xa/i^ru (Xa;3-) take, Xii^a^uu, rfXii^a, ttXiniiiai,
A4*#fr, bat 2 aor. tXaptr.

476. Towel Gndatloa (35, 36). — Yeiba of the first class show a
variation between a strong grade (or two strong grades) and a weak
grade. The weak grades, t, u, a, appear especially in the second
aorist and second passive systems ; the corresponding strong grades,
a (oi), (V (ov), i; (cd), appear usually in the other systems (ot, ov, to, in
the second perfect).

a. Expnislon of a short vonel between consonants (so-called syncope 498)
prodacea a weak form of the stem of the same grade as 1, u, a (80). Cp. yt-^r-*-
lioi bfcome (aor. t~ytr-6-iiiit), i-rr-i-titit (pi'es. t^-o-(uu fly) with l-tuw-a-f,
l-^ir,-o-r, i'Titif-r (477 c). So t-ax-o-' got from *x-" have.

b. a is the weak form of i| (a), as iu ri(icu iriKJir ; and of i, when t has X, Mi
r, p before or after It, as in Tpim, trpivitr (4Td).

477. The following examples Illustrate the principles of 476.

a. H «4 I : Xtfiru reave, Xif^w, 2 perf. X/\Mra, UXt^v^, /Xtl^r, 2 aor. IXwraK

ii.X>^lc

168 CHANGES IN THE VEEB-STEM [47«

N. — Tbe weak lonn appears when the verb undergoes AtUc ledtti^cMioti

(446) ; as in iXtUpu anoint, 2 perf. dXiiXt^a, dX^XiMuu ; iptlat tear (Tonio And
poetic), 2 perf. ip-ipiy/uu, 2 aor. Ilpuuir ; ipiira overthrow, Epic fpiipi.ra ; but
ipMw prop, ipiiptiffuu.

b. tv ov V : iUi(e)roiiat 1 shall go, 2 perf. tX^iXvBa (Epic iX^XovOa), 2 aor.
(Epic *(\<iSo») ; iitiyui Jlet, ^ntfo^uu or ^(vfiiu/iw, 2 pert. t<^«u7b, 2 aor. t^irror ;
Piufiom (for ^i«tf, 4;t), ;rti»o,iai, ^/ip4ijni (^w), 2 aor. pass. J«iii7>.

N. — x'fjpoi"' (for X"^"i *3). 'xw (for 'x*""). ha* " ■" t^X"". ''X"*^. 'X"*-
A|r ; 7(^ (poetic) urgt, tertoa, taniLu, irrithir or ittffiir nuhed. See also
T*^« in the List of Verbs.

C. n • »! fi^t'tviu break, ^^tw, (p^fa, 2 perf. f(ip"7a, 2 aor. paaa. f^pd-y^r ;
HiK-u nttU, T^fu, IfriTfo, T#rij™, *Ti)x*i». 2 aor. pass, /rioji'.

N. — Verbs of class c usually hare H in the 2 aorist, v in the 2 perfect (U
there is one), elsewhere t|. « occurs iti the present in Tpiiyugnau),2 i>oi.lTp»'t»r.

47a Qumgfl of ■ to o In the Second Perfect — In the second perfect
( of the vetb-stem is changed to o.

itWir-r-w Iteal i^«Xo^, (dio-)irrtf™ kill («t»*-, 519) -^ktofo, Xiy-u eolltet
eCXsXOi 'diTX^i fnt. Tcfo-a^i (from Tir0ri>iau, 100) v^nrfa, r^^r-u semi rArofi^,
artp^-a love laroiiya, rfcru bepel r^Dsa, Tpiw-u turn rfrpo^a, Tpi^-u nouriiA
rirpo^Hi, ipBtlp-u corrnpt lipStpa. So in Y'7(')'i>f'o< Aeeofne ^rVt'i T^Ton ;
fV((puauiciilen^piy7>pa(446). This change corresponds to that of « to •((477 ■),

«79. Change of « to a. — In verb-stems containing X, /i, v, p, aa t is
usually changed to a in the first perfect, perfect middle, and second
passive systems.

Tpir-a turn, rlrpaiiiiai, irfiwi)'' (1 *or. irpi^Syir) ; rpiip-w feed, rftpautMi,
trpi^Hit (I aor. iSpi^^t) ; mlpu (awtp-) eoje, trrap/uu, ivrip^r ; ipOtlpu (^p-)
detiroy, lipSapiiat, iipBiptir ; o-rAXu (o-tcX-) gtiid, frraXni, (irrcXfHu, itriXifr ;
Tilra Irir-) Kretch, Ttram, riraiiai, friftjv (1 aor.).

a. Also in the 2 aor. pass, of iX^ru tteat (^xXdirtiv), rX^mi temee (^Xdx^r),
WpTu f7laric2en (Epic iripriiv'). Many of Cliese verbs also show o In tbe second
perfect (478).

4B0. 'I'hie & is also found in the second aorist active and middle of jctiIvw kill
((icranK poetic), rt/iru cut (dialectal fratu*), rpinu turn (frpar or poetic), rfyrt
gladden (^i^ixd/iii' poetic), poetic iipie/uu see (tSpaiat). Also wipBa, irr^rffw.

4S1. I in the perfect middle in ir^cXe^iMw (iXArru steal), wtwXryiuu (irX/««
weave) is Introduced from the presenL

482. The S. in 479, 4S0 is developed from a liquid or nasal brought betvreen
two consonanl.' (3db). Thua, Iff-TsXfuii, Tiraiiai from trr'^iMt, Ttrpiai, Irie^t
from irrSrit (20 b) . Here ittX, tp represent weak grades oE the stem.

483. a. The variations t, », «k ■ appear In rpiwa turn, -rpl^v, Upnf't., 2 p«rf.
T^fio^. rVrpOM^uii, trpi^iB^t, 2 aor. pass, trpiwiit; frequentative Tprnwiv (SAT).

b. The variations t, o, ■ appear in Ttmiiai jty, worttfuu (poet) and freqnen
taUve rwrdo/uu (poet., Sdl) ftg about.

4lT] CHANGES IN THE VERB-STEM 169

48*. i|, « in the Second Perfect — In the second perfect o of the
verb^tem is lengthened to ij (a) : daXXm (Oak-) bloom, ri'^ijAa; ifmiyia
i'^ar-) ahoto, wi^r/fj.; fiaiVui (jiav-) moddeii, fiiit^gva; Kpaiai {Kpay-) cry
out, MKpa^

485. Addition of i — a. To the verb-sCem < la added to make the present
uem in toKiu tetm, fuc Jifu, aor. (anfa (Jdk-) ; bo in -/aiUai marry, iiSfa pu»h.
Unally < is added in some stem other than the preaenL

b. In many verbs t is added to the verb^etem to form the tense-stems other
than present, secoDd aorist, and second perfect, e.g. lii-x"/'^ ii"*X-) figl^t, naxaS-
W C=<"X'(')<'M<")i '/"Xnr^*"!^ >^^X1*«'- So ax*"*"" am grimed, ffeiXonat
vUk, ilymiiAi become, ttu want, (i)Si\u wish, fiAXu Intend, /iA<i it a care,
tloiimi think.

c. In BOme verbs t is added to lonu one or more tense-stems, as tidru (lar-y
Ttnain, lUfJn/Ka (m"*-) to avoid ~^-ta in the perfect. So, viiua dittribitte, Ix"
ioee, otxoiMt am gone. So also tapBittii, iaipaiKiiuii, pia, tTtifiu (poetic), ruTx*"*.

d. Some verbs have alternative presents with or without i. Here Bometimea
ODD is used in prose, the other in poetry, sonietiines both are poetic or both used
in pnne. Thus, fXnui draie (Hom. also iXtiu'), ldx<» lax^a eound (both poetic),
fOu ptHiit (both poetic), ^trrw and fiirriu throw (both in proee).

486. Addition of a. and a. — a or o Is added to the verb-stem in some verba.

Tims, lUHciaiiai belloV) (Epic 2 aor. /liiair), tiuiii'ifaiiair ; iXtmiuu <&\-) be cap-
turtd, 4Xii«-»;io( from iKa- ; Siahu-iu twear (i/ir) &iMaa, dtui/iam etc (ii»-) ;
tlxoiAoi am ffone. Epic olx<*" or ^xhko.

Urr. Lengthening of Short Finn! VoveL — Verb-stems ending in a
short Towel gvuerMy lengthen that vowel before the tense-sufflz
in all tenses (except the present and imperfect) formed from them.
Here a (except after t, i, and p) and < become jj, □ becomes to,

Ti/ii-v (ritia-'} honour, tIa^w, trttofna, Ttrl^^-i™, Trtint-fi, ^if"S-ftl'' ',
f^fii-<4 (ftfpo-) Aunt, evpi-vw, iPiipo-ffa, etc, (380) ; roiiia (tow-) make, »e<i)-<r«,
^fflif-d'a, rfro/i}-fra, rtraitf-titu, iroi-/i-$ijp ; S^\6*j (S^Xo-) mantfest, Svf\tif-^vt^
JJitW-va, etc, ; tiv permit, iiru, etc.

«. Note itpoiiroiuu, iinpoiirAinjv, etc., from itpoioiuii hear; XP^"' 'xw"
from xp^" P'"^ oradea; xp4">^>, ^XPV^M" from xP^P'^ use; rpttvat and
frn" from rtrpalm boT€ are from rpe-.

b. Verb^tems adding (oro (486), and stems apparently recelvini; a short final
Towel by metathesis (128), leii^alien the short final vowel, as ^dXafui (^i>X-)
Ki'h, fiau\f)-ai>iiM (iSouX*-, 48S), idw™ ("a;i-) am weary, jt^jf^iij-ta (*;ia-).

4t6 0. Some Ionic and poetic verbs adding! are dX^u, i\8o,uii, ytyiin^jfitfiu,
ittrwiu, tlpotuu, iMa, travpiia, nXaHu, JtAo/uu, utrriu, loJSoi, ktuw^u, tupia, \iiiKu,
lidiciiai, iiiiu, rar^MU, ^lylw, rriryiut, repiw, x^t*/' ^i^'w (poetic forms), XP"''
Vfi'w; iiarXanlfaa, dva^Io-i^ ; Epic fiitirrriva (JiSiir'w), rMjaa, rtri&^aiA.
■i^Vai (vtWu), ri^iJI^Dfiai (^dJo/ioi),

tS6 D. B Is added also in pfAxioim, yaiu, SiHuioimi, Xix*i^, ^uitdaiiai, fiifriiw.
All tbeM are mainly poetic.

.oogic

160 CHANGES IN THE VERB-STEM [488

48a Ratentlon of Short Final Towel. — Many veib-steins ending
apparentiy in a short vowel retain the short vowel, contrary to 487,
ia some or all the tenses.

■yiXi-u laugh, yt^iao/mi, i-fif£iTe., tycXirBtif ; Tt\fia finish, r«Xi3 (iDm T«U-«,
frAwB, rni>JKa, TtTi\teiiat, irt^iirSiir ; itiu) OKOfoplUh, irtau, <(>*r«, ^tOriMt,

a. The foUowliig verba retain Ihe finij short vowel of the vertMitem in all
tenflca? Ayo-^uu, alS^^/mtf iKi-cfim, A\i-af AvO-u, ipitrxtt (dpe-), ipxi-te, ip^-*^,
ifii-a, yt\i-u, iXaitu {i\a-), i\Ki-a, and IXi-u {iXtt-}, i^-u, ipdr^, tpa-^
(poet), Ar«Iw (Ar0i-, U-t-, iSo-), {^u, S\i-u, tXiianfuu (IXa-), icXd-w break, tuaiTtu
(lltSv-), (4-»i, ttA-ui (rru-, rrC-), (rri-w, tcU-w, r/>^-u, ^4Ira (0A-), ^Xd-w,
xnXi-w, x^-" (x*^)' AIbo al! verba in -ocrii/ii and -tyrufu (eicept Iff^ijio from
cpirwiu, txttngui^'), and SXXufu (dX-«-), S^rvfu (d^-, d>»-, dfw-), rrbpniu (orap-t).

b. The following verba keep abort the flual vowel in the future, bat lengthen
it in one or more other tenae^yatema, or have double future forma, one vith the
short vowel, the other with Ibe long vowel: aMu (aMirw, ^ytaa, Jkks, grM^*,
iniimt), S.xSi'ltat (Ix*-. *X^)- «nX^-u, I^X^I"'' (.I^X-^)< *^i *^ ("-i *<"),
r»St-a, TOB^-ai, tp6^ (Kpic), ^Mvu (^fla-).

C. In some verba the final abort vowel of the verb-stem remaina abort in one
or more tense-etema, but is lengthened in the futui'e, aa U-a bind, Ji^w, (Jigvo,
SM«B, Mtt^, iH»t]'. So cipiu, palru (^ii-)< ^"^^ (^"-)< >''"'" {»<•., Jw),
ttn-mu, Stu (Se-, Si-), tipltia (rip-e-), txw (ittx-, "X*"). *" (**". **-). h*«
(,*-, if), IirrriJii {ari-, ar^), \iw (\i-, \v-), rlftjju (*-, St,-), tI™ (ri-), ^ (#i>-,
^S-), and the root ip', ^ (tlmr).

d. Moat of the verbs retoalng to lengthen a final short vowel have verb-stems
originally eudlng in r (624) ; as rtX^u from reXdr-Lv (cp. ri rAot). By analogy
to tlieae, other verbs retain their short final vovrel.

489. IiMertlon of «■. — In the perfect middle and first aorist pa»-
sive systems, verbs which retain a short final vowel ami some others
asoally insert <r before the personal ending.

ThoB, T(X/iii (488d), rrrAtr/ut, ^(X/ir0irvi rvim draa, Itrratiiai, trrirBiir ;
KtXtiv order, mtfinriiai, <«(Xnifffli)» ; 7i7»iao-«u know, tymaiuu, iyii^eipi.

a. It the aoriat paaaive ends in -9rir and not in -v-Air, the perfect middle does
not insert a. Thna -^t, not -aBrit, oocura In all verba in -«uu except Xc^ ttone
to death, in alt verba in -w which have -^v preceded by 1], in all vrrbs in -9»
except x^ fifnp "?• Bnil 1" ''1 verba in -aw except those that retain 3. Stems
originally ending in e (S24) properly show a.

b. If the aorist passive ends In •aSTfr, the perfect middle may or may not
insert r. Verbs in -ntta and -1^ (stems -aS, -li) regularly have r by 83, GST,
In the case of other vertM some always show a, some nevpr show r, and some
are donbtfol. In many cases the later usage with a has crept into tbe Mm. of

4n D. Here belong Epic itifiia, «t/u, Xo^h, miciu, and the forma iMu.
-iniT, Am'b. iftt) shows i^ and tpi-.

4S9 D. Horn, has original forms In rt^paiiiim (^pdfw), anpuBiUm (top^Tu),
HtwiiiMt (rtlgu).

490] CHANGES IN THE VERB-STEM 161

tbe Mwriml Mithon (ho with the perfect of dX/u, fiaim, Spdu, fJIrni/u, nXclw
(ih^»), ff^ffw, xf^< ^i"^ ^^' ^^ aorist of Twtw).

c. lliB foUowing verbs show an inserted ir both in the perfect middle and the
wrist pudve in classical Greetc : alSinnai, yiyiiaiiu, t\K6u, B\6lu, 9pai>ui, n\^u,
iUh, i>a(0<'> KBpiwwVfu, ■uXto, itu, rl/arX-^iH, rploi, rTlrrw, ffpirmiii, ffelu, aa-
Mmfu, vritt, TarAd, tiXA*, tIki, Cv, ^Xdw, x^i XPV^^'

A. The following form only the perfect middle with r in classiceJ Greek : fivtiit,
Irrvfu (ttfuu, bat Ibtb Hom.)i ^^i f^nviu, fAii, *dJA7BD^i, tX^, ^Xciiiii (Hdt.).

e. The followit^ form only Uieaorlst passive with ir in classical Greek : iyattai,
iiaiu, irtw, ipiaKW, ix^l^^i liXilw. iairviu, Jp(U>, l\iui, Ipattai, ifiiui, IX^iOMU,
•Xt£i« (iX|fu), \t6u, iteBOatM, lunr^aita, itu, Sn>iuu (Hdt), roJu, i-aXoiu, nrdr-
ritu, -rifi-Tf^iti, fiaUi, ^Jinniiu, cripntu, xoX^Wt XP^'I"*-! Xfi^"-! TcM"-

t. Only in post-clasrical Grtiek U « attested both In the perfect middle and
aorist pMrive in ipttu, {iw, iXalw, (d'o) XsiJu, Xitu, fXXii/u, a-v^w, irrafv, iriu, f aitw.
— ^ Only in the perfect middle: iyaiiai, duotlu, d>^, 7«Xdu, Jpdu, ^^i^u, ffwfuu,
(V<'"<'*"> »Xotfu, /uMtKw, rtilw, Ala spin, ^vfu, rofu, raXafw, Trrdrniftt (and in
Ionic), ulinrpiiiu (Aristotle; eariier peri. T^pi)»iai), arbprviu, xf^^^i '^■*".
When the periect middle is not attested in classical Greek some at least of
the a fonns from the above verbs may represent classical usage, provided the
aorist panve has -bS^p. ~ Only in the aoriat pasaire : igioiiai, i\iu, ipiu, ffalra,
puitia, jttit, 'Diiti, tXaiKH, IfiUfiai, ifita, fiivrij/u, nfu, f^, ^x*'"") ■''' ^^'9' ^'
*iA6ff^0iiMi^ rX/w, m^, ai^^u^ 0fttH0.

2. Some verba have double forms (one of which may be disputed) in the
classical period: StvofioL: iiiirlfii\r and Wu»dffflt|» (chiefly Ionic and poetic);
n4&n«|u : ixpiBiiw and itrpiiritir ; Kpaim : fitpaviMi better than Kitpauafiai ; via :
tnuiai and rirtiriuu ; f|i*Gp* : d/uifiu/uu (and ifLii/iacrat), liniSTir a[jd lif/^Bift. —
Dialectal or dialectal and late are t^iiaBtit for i^oifiri* (jSodu), 4\ii\aiiiuu iJXififftjj
(A«iH»), njcdpir^i for njcAfXir^i (mp^FH))!!), xfirft-air/uu (irrrdmiMO-

h. Some verb-stems ending la r show -<r-^i in the perfect middle : ijHru,
IMUr<4, raxi"*, ripalrw, itpairv, ^Iru. Thus rfipaaiuu, fjiuriuu., lUiilnsiuu.
Dialectal or late ; S^Xdrw, mXaJm, \crTtni, Xuiialroiuii, {alru, tir^lm, riftiiafrw.

Od -wot see 679.

L Observe that some vowel verbs insertin); a do not lengthen the final vowel
of the verb-stem In any tense (ytXia, riKtu) ; and that some not inserting v
(i4u, B6u, X0w) do not lengthen the final vowel ia some tenses, iir-aitiu con^
"tend and rap-aiMu ^ehort do not insert a and )mve the short vowel in ali tenses,

J. Th^ insertion of a in the perfect middle started in the 3 sing, and 2 pi.
Before tbe endings -rai and -aBt, a was ret^ned in the case of verbs with slems
originally ending in « (as -rtKia), or where «- developed from t, s, e (9S) before
-TMi, -vit (wtrnaTot from wtrvera,!). See 409 b, 024. In all cases wliere the
verb-stem did not originally end in c, the aigma forma are due to analogy; as in
aKf>iMyaiiat (mXaSu), i/iXifa/uu (t(jltXi)/u), fyngsiim {ytynlMmw).

490. Addition of I. — The present stems of some poetical verbs are made
by the addition of S ; as t^-d-w »pin, irXiJ-fl-« am full (ir(^»Xij-^). Cp. B32.

410 D. A few verbs make poetic formn hy adding -S%-
the 2 aoriat tense-stem, in which a or * (u once) taliea the plac

aWEMK GRAM. — 11

iog[c

162 CHANGES IN THE VERB-STEM Uft

a. Host of the Indloative fomu seem to be imperteote, bnt dnce eome have the
foroe ol ftorlHta (e.^., Soph. 0. C. 662, 13,'U, O. T. S60), in certain editions tbey
Are regarded u second aorisls, and the iDtlnitives and participles are accented

(agtunst the Mrs.) on the ultima (SutaiStl*, tln.Bii»).

4SL Omiaslon of v. — Some verbB ia -vio drop the v of the vertml
stem in the first perfect, perfect middle, and first pasaive aystems.

Kfitru (n/Hr-), judge, E^EfH-n, ttxpi-iuu, itpi^r. So alBO iXlfw incline, irXArw

492. Hetattaeala. — The verbaJ stem may suffer metathesis (128).

a. In the present : Briaxu die, 2 aor. fflnior, perf. TtBuita,

b. In other tenses; ^dXXutArois (|9aX-), perf. ^^^Xi)ica, J/SXii^r (;9\^); HnimaU

(rcft-p-), 2 aor. Irifior, peif. r^ftirca ; SipKoiiai (StpK-') see, 2 aor. ttpa-
(or i r^fHTM delf^U, 2 aor. pasa. iri^ift and hpini* (bolb poetical).

4S3, Syncope. — Some verbs auSer syncope (44 b).
m. In the present : rlrTu/aliforiri-r(OT-<i.('Xu Aoldfor (ir)i.r(()x->(126e},
tilfitu tor lu-fiar-u.

b. In the (ature : rr^a/iM from rfro/wi jfy.

c. In the second aorist : Icx" toi isix-ai' Irom Ixm (,*x- tor rtx-, 126 e).
i. In the perfect : rt-wra-iiai havt expanded from irtrd-rni^

N. — Syncopated forms are properly weoil: stems (4TSa).

494. Rednpliotion. — The verb^tem may be reduplicated.

a. In the present mlth i : yi-^rii-cnta ('yKv-) know, riS^/u plaee, l-^r^-iu ttt,

SHu-/u give. The present reduplication may be carried over to other
tenses r 8ii(l(«)ff«« (eacft (99), ai8d{u. With t : Tt-rpaiwv bore.

b. In the second aorist : iyu (iy-) lead, Ihr-ay-or ; Iraiuu follow, isttn^r (foi

at-ttw-tiaf).

c. Regularly with * in the perfect.

495. IteratiTe Imperfects ud Aorists In -ow^-.— Homer and Herodotus
liave iteiBiUre imperfects and aorisls in -«i»>r and -gaiaiw denoUng a customary
or repeated past action. Homer has iterative forma in t^e imperfect and 1 and
2 aoiist active and middle. Herodotus has no iteratives in the 1 aorist and few

vowel of tlie simple verb. Such forms are chiefly Homeric, but occur sometimes
in Attic poetry, very rarely In prose. Thus, ^\irti6u (^\iya burn), /iidmfc*
(liiiiai pursue), tttx*^* (fx" have). B-fonaa are found in moods other than
the indicative (tlxiea, lUi^lu, iiiiriBart, SaiKABnr, tUiSur).

4M D. See the List of Verbs for poetical forms of iiutprt nt, Saptitu, epArrai.
p\iiiriuii, Saiid(^, I/^w, Top-.

i93 D. See the List of Verbs for poeUcai forms of iri\u, rtMlu, iitKu, iidiji-
ttoi ; also IriTiiBr fovnd, tviiptot tine.

IM D. Poetic ipaptatu (dp) Jit, and the iDtensiTes (867) luip-iiatpu (fwp-)
Jtath, Top-^ipw (itvp-) prow re4, ran-^aiiiu i^r-) shine irigM.^, nir^rtm («-pv-)
pv^. Also with q In S-it-tiK-^« greeted (Mss. Scfincrg).

I;,C.00J^[C

Soo] PRESENT SYSTEM: FIRST CLASS 168

En Uw 2 aoTlat ; and only from w-Terta. Herodotna ragtilarly and Homer lunally

omit the angnient. -aa verbs bave -aa-vimr or -a-«nr ; -ta verbs -tt-trmr, in
Horn, also -c-fjwr. -a-ffKor Is rare in other verbs than those In -ou. The vowel
preceding the suffix is always short.

M. The suffix -«9j- is added lA the tense-stem. Imperf. : ^rOyt^a (^tiyu
M^it Ix*-"" Cx" Aaoe), iiiiHrmfur (riidu eonguer'), yoiM-aa (Tsdu bewail),
KpOrra-ria (jcp^rw ktde), KaXiKxaf (laUu coil), {wri^ntro (fwrrii/u gird);
1 aor. : Iro-r^a-^jra (drgrp^ti) fHrn ateoif ) ; S aor. : ^iyt-vKt, rri-ca ttood.

VERB-STEM AND PRESENT STEM

496. From the verb-stem (or theme) the present atem is formed
in several ways. Alt verbs are arranged in the present system
acoording to the method of forming the present stem from the verb-
stem. Verba are named according to the last letter of the verb-stem
(376) : 1. Vowel Verbs, 2. Liquid Verbs (including liquids and
nasals), 3. Stop Verbs.

I. PRESENT SYSTEM
(PBE8&MT AMD IMPBBFECT ACTIVE AMD HEDDIiB)

497. The present stem is formed from the verb-stem in five dif-
ferent ways. There are, therefore, five classes of present stems.
The verb^tem is sometimes the present stem, but usually it is
strengthened in different ways. A sixth class consists of irregular
verbs, the present stem of which is not connected with the stem or
stems of other tenses.

FIRST OB SIMPLE CLASS

490. Presents of the Simple Glass are formed from the verb-stem
with or without the thematic vowel.

499. (I) Presents with the thematic vowel (<o-verb8). The pres-
ent stem is made by adding the thematic vowel %- to the verb-stem,
as Av-o, raihti-tii, vaii-fu, /liy-io, ■wtiB-w, iptvy-ai, and the denominative
verbs rifAa-ai, ^iXi-ta, ^aatkciio. For the personal endings, see 463 ff.
For the derivation of many of these verbs, see 522.

500. The final vowel ot the verb-etem is long in the present indicative, but
either long or short in the oUief tense-stems, of the followitiji verbs In -va or -ut,

1. a. Verba in -vw generally have i in Attic in the present ; aa \du loose, Btu
jfo timdtr, Wh nacrffiee (aimoet always), ^Aw makt groio (usually). Also in
4X4w, ifrttt, fipttStciiai, yifptoiiiu, iatpta (once if), ISptti, lax^i KarTiti, twtu,

SOO. 1. D. Homer has short v In IX^, ir6u, ffpvv, 9iv, ipdw, ^/liu, Taniit,
p6M, and in all denominative verbs except ipvftmm and HltiawL, where v is
metrically aeceasarj ; long v In {^, wrta, (w ; ancepe in ^Cu naerifice (i doubt-

164 FKEljENT SYSTEM: FIRST CLASS, SECOND CLASS [501

■wxOtf, (wXliiii (usually), /titMhi, iirtti (dvvlu), wria/, ^/uu, eritiiat, rptu. En ;
posalbly in tJXihi/uu, ^lltii^, fia, iia, ^\ia ; iXiw6ai, niipioiuu, wXifSiia (once {),
^T^. ifiu (S) 1b doubtful.

b. -vw baa t> abort In irda, ipiu, Pp6v, iXiu (but (XiWi), tttB6u, and in all
verbs Id -nw.

2. Attic h&H r in primitive verbo in -iw, as rfiUt, xf^f, x^^i but t in tIv. De-
nominaUTe verbs have i ; but tvStia.

501. Several verbs with medial 1, u in the present, show 1 or t, S or u in some
other tense or tenaoa. Thus, *W^u. press riBXittM, Tpf-yu choke twrlyrit, Tftfiu
rub rirpi^ irpltiiir, rtifiu raise smoke iriinir, ^*x" COOi ^i^Xi?'.

502. Verb-stems haviog the weak grades a, 1, v, show the strong
glades 1;, «, CI) in the present; as n}K-<u (rtiK-) melt, kdvoi (X(«-) ieaae,

a. To this class belong also \li9i4, ri^u, rierpia. am attonUheii, 2 aor. fro^r,
i\tl^a, {iaoiKO., 703), (fm (foiia), {el<aea., ri63 a), /fwficu, /fKlrui, rtLBu, ariipw,
VTtlxu, <tniSi>tiai ; iptiyo/iai, Kiiffu, rtiffc/uii, TdJx'"-

503. Present Stems in -»%- for tv%-. — The strong form cu before tie the-
matic vowel became tf (cu) and then 1 (20 a, 43) in the verba Um run driroiiai,
Wat «iOim tnuaa, irXJa lafl fTXcuffn, irW« bre<UAe friwa'a, ^ jlou) fieivojuu, x^
pour t^x""! ''xi'*"', 'xilS^'.

sot. (II) Presents without the thematic vowel (ju-verbs). The
personal ending is added directly to the verb-stem, which is often
reduplicated. The verb-stem shows different vowel grades, strong
forms 17, 0) in the singular, weak forms < (a), o in the dual and plural.
Thus Ti-$jf-ni, Ti-$e-iuv; t-imj-iu for iri-imj-iu (^ ot-irro-fu), T-ara-iicv ;
81-Jtu-fu, Si-OO-fl*!'.

a. All verbs in lu (enumerated 723 B) belong to this class except thoee in
-w/u (628 f) and -njfu (523 g).

SECOND OR T CLASS (VERBS IN -tmii)
505. The present stem ia formed by adding •t%- to the verb-
stem, which ends in r, ^, or ^. The verb-stem is ascertained from
the second aorist (if there is one) or from a word from the same
root.

ful), Mu rtmh on, rage, xSu (rarely Xdu), roirniu, fiioiiai. Pindar has v short
In Ww taarifier, Irx^"-: ^^< /""^u, ^^u, ^imi, in preaenls in -nw, and In
denominative verbs.

2. Horn, has i in tlie priiniUves rtoiiat and xpt" ', but rlw and rfw (riiw f ) ;
-lu in denominativea (except ^4"' B TOO). »>(«, dlg/Mt are from i[on(v)-iw,
Ai(ff)-l«>uti.

3. Where Attic lias ii, i in the present, and Epic S, 1, the former are due u>
the influence of ii, t in the future and aoriftt,

tOS D. TlLfse veriM end In-nrw in Aeolic (wrtiu etc.). Epic rXflu.a-Hlubave
« by metrical lengtiieuing (2H 1>.).

513] PRESENT SYSTEM: THIRD (IOTA) CLA^ 165

lAwTu cHt. verb-Btsm tor' in 2 aor, poes. i-nlnr-itv.

PKirTu injure, " '■ ^XojS- " " " i-fiXi^iii,

tay^Tu crer. " " taXu^ " xaMfi-ii hut.

^TTu throir, " " ^1*-, ^i^ " 2 iM)r. piu«. t-ppl^iir.
1. itrpixTu litjhttH, xaWrT" oppreit may be from -iri« (117, 507).
306. Some of the verbi of this class add f in the pneent or other tenses, u

^iwThi tkrotn, wtcrtu contb, rihrra Urike rvrliau.

THIRD OK IOTA CLASS

507. The present stem is formed by adding -i!i- to the verthstem
uid by making the necessary euphonic changes (109-116).

I. PRESENTS IN •{■

soe. Dental Verb-Btemo. — VerWtems in S unite with j to form
prenents in -fo> (116), as <*pa{ui tdl {tftpaS-ua), tkviCw hope (iXinS-),
i^utw carry (ko^u^-ij a canying), □{u Bmell (oS-fxiJ odour), m^opu seat
myaeif (IS-os seat).

■■ *4{tt tave (for vlctfio) forms ita tenses partly ttom the verb-stem o-w-,
putty from tlie verb-stem vwt-,

509. St«mB In y. — Some verbs in -{<■) are derived from stems in
y preceded by a vowel ; as ipmiiut seize for apmyifii (cp. ipvay^
mzure), itpiiai cry ovt (2 aor. «(tpovo»). See 116, other examples
S23 V III.

a. At*ii vhmA makes Its other tenses from the verb-stem ri^ (fut. tl'fiu, cp.
HoDl. Arrojioi).

510. A few Terhs with sterna In yy lose one 7 and have presents In -{^ ; as
<U{w leream (KXa-yT-^), fut. rXiiyfu ; raXwifu sound t/u: trnmpft iai\riyia
(tito \i{u lob, irUfte catue to wander).

511. firytft, ipyiuyie]d fi^fu do (poetic) sinti tpSw (Ionic and poetic). See 116.

au. Moat verbs in -{o> are not formed from stems in 8 or y, but
are due to analogy. See 516, 623 y III, 866. 6.

II. PRESENTS IN -TTa (IONIC AHD LATER ATTIC -WW, 7f)

513. PaUtAl Terb-fltemi. — Steins ending in « or x unite with t
to form presents in -ttw (-<ra\a).

**iA.mi guard from tu^a'-iti (^vAaci) guard (112)); iniptrTu proclaim from
Ifm^ (114^1 ft/wiw); TOpdTTW ditCurb from ropax-iu {rapax-^ eotViuion).

I. rfrrw cook is for rtt-ita ; all other tenses are made from m--.

tOI D. Aeolic bas -<rSw for -fu.

;::lv,G00g[c

166 PRESENT SYSTEM: THIRD (IOTA) CLASS [sH

S14. Several verbs showing forms in 7 seem to unite 7 with 1 to form prea-

euu in -T7-U (-ffffw.) Thus iWiTTu change. fidj-Tu knetxd, t\^tu ttrike (with

the 2 Aoriste pMSive iWAy-iir, iiidy-tir, ArXth^i)»), rpirTu do (i pert, ttrpiya,
CTt}, TdfTw arrange (ray-it eommaiuUr),

«. 80 Spimm* grotp, riTTia cvmjmm (G16 b), t&trti jmaA, rrSa— fold,
rArrtt load, rwptrru pipe, v^rra kill, ^pdrru fence. rpArru hu the lue pert.

SU. Soma presents in -ttu (ito-io) are formed from st«ins in r, $
like ttioae from k, x-

Poet, ipiaau rota {IpiT'fp rower') aor. ^ptea ; poet. topi(rru arm (*6pvt xipi/O-ei
Mjnet), imperf. iKi/nmat,

a. So also /SXlrrw take honey, wirru ^prtnkU, ttIttu pound, and perhaps *'Utt»

form; also i^ivao Udu, and poetic tfiio'vu, Xu^firrv, XIwo^ku.

b. xiTTw eompreu (ht-, h3-) fisfa, rira^iiat and v/niTfHu. Cp. C14 a.

516. Formatloiu by Analogy. — a. Abt + j and S -f ^ unite to form i, none
of the verbs in -ttu can be derived from -yua or -iiui. Since the future and
aorlM of verbs in -{iii might often seem to be derived from litems in i, x, ^^ i") '•
unoeitatnty arose as to these tenses: thus the future v^dfu (jii^y-att) from
Hpio ai^itu tlay (aipay-ua) was coufusad tn formation with ^vXd{w (^uXoc-fv),
and a present ff^rru was constructed like ^vXdrrtf. Similarly, Attic i^rdfm
(-o/uu) lor Epic dprctfw ; and so in place of (poetic) i,piiii>4 fit (ipiml-') the form
ititinu was constructed.

III. LIQUID AND NASAL STEMS

517. (I) Presenta in -XXa are formed from verb-stems in X, to
which 1 is assimilated (110). Thus, AyyMMi aiinoujux (Ayytk-i/t),
ariXXm send (artX-iot).

ns. (It) Presents ia -ouho and -aipat are formed from rerb^tems
in tw and -op, the t, being thrown back to unite with the vowel of the
verb-stem (111). Thus, ^oivu sAow (ipav-tio), Avofuuva name {ivotmy-iflt),
X!^i(x» rejoice (jfop-jfii).

a. Uaay verbs add -i<d to the weak form ol the item, as iraiiMlr-u for
dn^r-iH from in^f^iu, cp- notnen (3Sb),

b. Horn, has luJiilru and laiSdru honour, /itXaCru blacken and /ukim grow
Naek. Skivfairu slip is late for JXirMtu.

c. 'nie ending -atvu has been attached, by analogy, In »tpiiairu make hot, etc
(620 III, 866.7). Likewise -ukk (G19) in poetic iirriru prepare, parallel to iprtm
(In composition), by analogy to pafiim weigh dnan, iiStru naeettn,

SU D. Homer hai many caa<»i of this confusion ; as roXc^fki (n\(fut-> but
voXi^w, In Doric the { forms from -(u verbs are especially common, as x^t"
teparate, x<<fHffl> 'xiip^' iral{u tport has (late) fraits.

iv,Goog[c

I

5*3] PRESENT ST8TEH: FOURTH (N) CLASS 16T

519. (Ill) Presents in -civu, tipia, -Ivw, -ipw, -ivu, aad -ipw are
formed from stems in m, tp, Xv, Xp, vv, vp with i%- added. Here t
disappears and the vowel preceding v or p is lengthened b; oompoi-
sation (e to c( ; i toi; utoC). See 37 a, 111.

nlnt ttreleh (tii^u), ipBtlpu dtitroj/ (##*^X "f^*" ('^>-)> olftp^ pttv (bIktip-)
genenlly writLen alimlpu, iiiirtt ward off (d^un-), iiofiripoiiai call to wOiuu

u i^CXa (6^\~) owe, am obliged Is formed like rtlra, ^Ipv lo order to dii-
tingiUBb It from i^iAXu (A^X-) incrtate formed Tegulftrljr, Horn, tuw asually
Aeolic i^AXu in the sense of d^lXu. Stlpu flag i>*p-i>*) Is parallel to Up-u (406).

520. Teib-iteraa in -av- for (w(, -ap-). — Two verba with verb-stema in -av
hiTe prwentH in -out from -<ufv out of -tf-ivi (38 ») : Ka(« burn (lav-, kb/t.),
FdI. m^w ; and kX«i(« uwep (cXov-, cXb^-), fnt. iXai^ofuu. Others 024 b.

a. Attic prose often has kAh and icXi», derived from at^ before ti ((den, and,
with a extended to the I persoD, cdw). Cp. 89S.

521. Additlm of ■■ — The following verbs add t In one or more tenaB^flteme
other than the pieseDt : piWu throte, mSlfii tit, cXoJw weep, S^u meU, 6^C\m
MM, am obliged, x^^P" r^fotee.

522. Contracted VeriM and Some Verba in -is, -im. ~ a. Verbs In -w, .«^
■m, wbfeh for convenience have l>een treated under the QrHt clam, properly
baking here, ■ (y) having been lost between vowela. Thna, ti^u from ri/ia-iit
(ri^), aUiu dtoell from tlnt-s^ (altt- alternate stem to olto-, 220 b), lifXiu from
Jifk^^. So in denominatives, ss poetic utirlm am wroth (^ir"-(»)t ^A'» *Ote
(^rv^«). Frfmitives In -w, -iw are of uncertain origin. Cp. 608, 824.

S. — The rare spellloge dXvlu, Mu, /ufalu, ^u(w indicate their origin from -jw. .

b. So with ateoiB in long vowels: tpii do from Spi-iu, [S litie from Jvw
(cp. {^), XP^ C*"« oratiet from XP^M" (1* pera xpS'i 8M).

rOUBTH OE N CLASS

523. The present stem of the N class is formed from the verb-
stem by the addition of a suffix containing v.

a. -w^' is added : Idi-iu bite, riii^m cut.

So Mm, Kdfuu, rtw, vfrrw poet., rfni, ^Mru, ^Wrw.

b. •*¥%- is added : ate9.(ip-afuu perceive, Kitafrt-ir-u err.

So alfdfif, pKuariru, JopMw, dvexAin^., oHdiu, <)X<<rM»>, ^Xurxdw (60S).

c -a*^- is added and a nasal (fi, *, or y naaa1) inserted in the verb^etem :

\Mrprfi-lr-<i (Xa^) take, \a-r-e-Ar-u escape notice (Xa^-), tu-t-X'^'-" happen (tvx-).

So irMfw p/eoM (is-), A77iini CourA (A-y-), Kinxiru find (nx-)> XaYxdw

oMfdn 6y Io( (>"x-)< /^**l»w ''am (*ui*-), irurM»o»mi (ngufre (ri*-).

4. -*(9f- is added : ^*i-u mop up (also ;}Ad), lie-rt-tt-im ccme (also bw),

11* D. Aeolic has here -<rru, -ippu, -irw, -ippu, -urw, -uppw (87 D, 8); for
icifw, it haa rraJn* ; cp. Doric t^aipu for ^A^.

.OOglf

168 PRESENT SYSTEM: FIFTH (-wm-) CLASS [514

mi-ri-v Wm, dfiT-i^x-'***"' *"** ■"*) i'-wx-**-'-*'" promtte (cp. tffx-*" ^o'
«i-<rx-»>498a).

e. -«%- to added: Aoii™ dn'o* f or /Xa-iv-a»,

f. -nt (-vru after \ abort VQwel) to added (Koond class of /u-Tcrbs, 414) :
ttlftv-m shoia (8«ir-, preBentslem Siuirv-), lt6y-iv-^ yoke (pre7-)t ■>^«»« deatroy
(for iX-ni/u, 77 a) ; tipi-ri^iu. mix («(«-), ffiM8d-»i«-M' scMMr C™Jb-). Others
728 ft. Some of these verba have preBenta In -vu (74(1).

H. 1. —The forma in -wriiu apread from Umiu, opirniu, which are derived
from iv-mfu, apta-niiu.

H. 2, —Some verbs ia -f« are formed from -*e%- '•"■ -•n'f- ! "^ Horn. r(»*i,
^™,*M™,({»oMa' from Tcrf-o., etc., (37 D. 1). AtUc rr™, etc dropped the f .

%. -vn, -n) are added (third class of ^u-verbs 412); as in (poetic) iiiirr^iu
I eonqwr, siii^ra-iitii tee conquer (jofi-), and In cttS-rif-iu (rare in prose for
vaSitntu) acatUr. The verbs of tliia class, are chieflf poetic (Epic), and most
liave alternative forma in -aw. See 737.

Id two further divisions there Is a transition to the Iota Class.

h. -iv^- for -v-j^ ia added: paim go (^o-i^u), ntpSalru gain (^apSm—itt)
TtTptUru bore (Ttrpa-r-uii). So poetio ^Irm Bj»-inkJe. For the added v, cp.
tdK-r-u (523 a). See 618 a.

i. -tur%- for aii-i% is added: 6a^palninai snwll (&r4v>ar^/iai) , Hom. dXiroi-
nvuu Bin (bIbo dXir^pu). See 618 a.

924. A abort vowel of the verb-stem la lengthened In the case of some verbs
to form one or more of the tense-atems other Uian the present. Thus, XomSdrw

(\afi-) take X4V'o/uii (X<i0-) ; Jdiiw (jcuc-) biU mu {i-r,K-). So Xa^x'w. )u»
Mrw, Tirr^dRii, x-uf^nfuu (rvtl-) inquire, fut. Triimnai (rivS-),

a. jt^fv^ vojb«, iniyrvfu fatten, pi/yni/u brfak have the strong grade In all
tenses except the 2 pass, system, ittlyniu tnfz (commonly written lAyAiu) has
luy- only in tbe 2 perf. and 2 pass, systems.

525. Addition of < sad o. — a. Many verbs add < to the verb-stem to fonu
all the tenses except present, 2 aorist, and 2 perfect ; as atoMioftw, i^ia^int.
irSimi, aOfiru, iirtxSdniiicu, p\airrivw, Sap8ira, jti7x<'"'i MorAlM, 4WMni,

d^Xio-iifEn). One or more tenses with c added are formed by apSalnt, fXXv/u,

b. BjiuvM *wear has dfio- In all systems except the present and fatnre, as

d^icwa, ^ftittiiOKa^ but fUt. d;iaD;uEt from d/iA>fUU.

FIFTH OB INCEPTIVE CLASS (VERBS IN -O-Ktt)

526. The present stem 19 formed by adding the sufBx -ck^- to the
verb-stem if it ends in a vowel ; -wik'A- if it ends in a consonant.
Thus, ipt-iTKia please, dp^xia find.

a. Thto class is called inceptive (or inchoattve) because some of the verbs
belonging to it have the BCnae of beginning or becoming (cp, Lat -aco) ; nn
yyipifKti grow old. But very few verbn have this meaning.

b. In fftivKti die, imi-riatui remind, -tmw was later added to vertMleiua
ending in a vowel. The older forms are 0r4viw, luioHivtM.

M] PRESENT SYSTEM: SIXTH (MIXED) CLASS 169

c Tbe Terl>«t«m ia ofleo rodaplk^ted in the prweiit; as fi-yni-cat know,
ffi-fyA-€iar eat, ti-tfii^m run aaay. roetlo ip^'op-ltKii fit, poetic dr-o^i^jiw
ieatte, bftTe tbe lotto of Attic rediiplicatloa. idayu may stand for fu-(f>)«-vt(.

d. A slop coDSonant ia dropped before sku (OU) ; as Ji-t(i(ii)-ffinii ttaeh (cp.
Wtu-rti), i\i'(«)-»«jr amid, \ilCjt)-»«i* tpeak. riax'^ tuffer it for ra(f)-<rcH
(IM).

e. The preaeot stem ollau ahowa the strong grades w (weak a) &nd < or ir
(wtf«k a}. See b, c. Weak grades appear in ^dtriw toy, ^jcw /Md.

f. Oq tiie iteratives in -omi see 4S6.

S27. The following verba belong to this cIbbb (poetic and Ionic fonna arc

suurted):

t. Vowel stems: dX<4'">* (^Uih)T dia^u^iiaMiu* (Bto-), ip4am (dfit-), pinia^
(fia- (or /3»-, 35 b), ^c^^^i»ui (^po-) , ^Xtis-.w" (^X-, >t>j»-, ^\e-, 130 D.) , j34ir™
(^), 7»«idffiiw (cp. TtKcdw), 7J|(id£rj(u (yiipa-), -fifniirtiii (7H>-), SlUftaiHU
fliffhien, Jt(4pdiriiw (3pa-), 4^«i> (4j3a-), fXitrcu* (fXa-), »PifrTiEu (0at-, 0ra-),
fyifftui* (fcp-, flfW-), IXttirwifKu (i^a-), KutX^irur* (naXe-, kXtj-), nvlffnojuu'
(m*-), luBirmn (juBu-'), luiiw^tna (^ua-), nriaicui* (wi-), iriTpi^tio (B-pB-), »mS-
«™" (ti»u-), ^i^fiffnu* (^u-), TiTpiia-ira) (t/jo-), ^do-icu (^a-), x'i»'«i'* (X"-)-

b. Consonant stems : i\l^to,uu (dX-o-), dXiJmu* (dXvic-), iiipXirta (du^X- d^Xo-),
d/a-Xojrlo'iru* (d>irXajr-), dHXid-jctf (dt^X-^^-), dTo^fffcu* (drwi^), dpapi^ia^
(lip-}, JkJfo-mfuu* uelconw (ic-Iu-) and lirilricofuu (usnallj written Stit-)
toeJeoRW, a>«riirn> (SiStX'), *taKu (Ac-), iwavpUmu' (adp-), (Apfiriu («f>p-«-),
)4ett^ (Xo*-)' /"^"^ (/">-)> d^Xio-jti™ (4^X-t-), rdax" ('a*-)! ffr*pJ#it»
(ffT,p-,-), r>T6»-«,<a.« {t.^«-). iXil"™* (ilX»«-). XPflfa"*".' (x*^).
928. Addition of < and o. — aTtpltrKu deprive (cp. uTipoimi) makes all the

other lensB-stenui fromirTipe- ; tbplata baa cipc' except in (he preaentaod 2 aortst

— iUtm/Mi am eaptared (dX-) adds c in otber teus&-BCeniB,

SIXTH OB MIXED CLASS

529. This class includes some irregular verbs, one or more of
whose tense-steins are quite ditfereat from others, as Eng. am,
wu, be, Lat. aunt, fuL For the full list of forms see the List
of Verba.

1. aipAt (aifit-, JV) tate, fut. aip^u, gpirni, etc., 2 aor, a^a^.

2. (ttsr (,ftt-, U-) taw, vidi, 2 aorist (with no present act.) ; 3 pL otSa Jbiow

(7M). Middle inofuu (poetic). ilSor is nsed as 2 aor. of 6piu (see below).

3. (Iwor {tlr-, tp-, ^) upokt, 2 aor. (no pres.) ; fat. {ipiu) ipu, perf. if-pTr-ia,

t^iffMi, aoT. pass, ifpii^r. The stem jp- Is for ftp-, seen In Lat. c#r-buni.
(Cp. 492.) ^- is for fpi, hence (ffniiuii for ft-fpif-iiju.
*■ I>x*f4ai (^x-T AtvP-, fKut-t i\8-), go. Fut. ^Xniffo^uu (usoaU^ poet.), 2 perf,
A^XvAs, 2 aor. 4X0sr. The AUic future is ttiu »haU go (774). Tlie Im-
pMf. and Qia moods of the pros, other than the Indlc. use the forma of tt/u.

tM c. D. Horn, has Anu liken for frf:l(t)-«-iia>, also Imu from ^I(c)-«iw,
tit£(i) -cestui prepare, !*-il{K)-vmiiai vxlcome.

.oogic

170 PRESENT SYSTEM: SIXTH (MIXED) CLASS [330

6. itflt (,iir9-, a-, ^sT-) eat, fat. ISomoi (Ml), pf. M^iaics, -M^SMfHu, ^iaa,,w,

t M>r. f^a-yar-
S. 4*^ (Vo-i ''^i f''') *M, fuL S^ofMt, perf. ^lipan or jipuo, p«rf. mid.
itipiiioi or S/ifuu (itr-iuu), ^i^r, 2 Bor. tllov (see 3 abOTe).

7. riffX" (»"*-. »■•»*-) siUTe'', fut. rdva/wi for rttd-aeiuu (100), 2 pf, wimrSa,

2 aor. (tsA)!'. (See 528 d.)

8. tIw (re, TO-) drink, from rt-r-w (62S a), fut. rto/uu (Ut), pf, ttrma, 2 aor.

»TWF, imp. lift (466. 1, a, 6B7).

9. Tpix't (rP'X' f or Dpex- (126 g), Spait-, Jjh/U') run, fut, SpafioG/iat, pf. icafidfiqni,

2 aor, iBpa/tort

10. ^^ (^p-< d'-i 'ki», by reduplication and Hjncope^r-<Kicand<K7'-) Aetc,- fut.

sTirw, aoT, ^K-rio, perf. ^p-fnx-a (446, 478), in-iirry-iiai, aor, pass, fr^firi',

11. AWo^uu ((in-, i-yHo-) Auy, fut. ^niire^i, perf. jtinf^t, iaitiSiji. For Aar^d-

^i)r the form ^puifuiv is used.

930. Apart from the irregularities cf Class VT, some verbs may, by ttie
fonnattoQ of the verb-8t«m, belong to more thim one class, as palm (III, IV),
6a<t,palK,uu (III, IV), d#X»«tw (IV, V).

331. Many verbs have alternative forms, often of different claasea, as laiSitti
iGSafru Aanour, lew Udm come, iitKir-u grow black, luXalru (^Xar-iw) blodtrn,
■Xi^ (iXiiTY-) K^ayy-ir-u scream, ^•fidfat v^Atiu elaji (616). Cp. also iw6ti
IfOru) aeeomplUh, ipiu ipiru draw water, Horn, iptta, J/wcdvu, ifUKOirAu
restrain. Cp. 866. 10.

II. FUTURE SYSTEM
(PUTUKB ACTIVE AND MIDDLE)

532. Many, If not all, futUT« forms In a ara in reality aubjunctives of the
fltst aoTlsL XAo-u, waitciru, tstlfu, ar^irti are alike future indl<»tive and aorist
Bubjunctlve in form. In poetry and In some dialects there is no external dif-
ference between the future indicative and the anrist subjunctive when the latter
has (as often In Horn.) a short mood-aign (457 D.) ; e.g^ Horn, pi^o/ur, iful-
<fitT<u, IddIc inscriptioos toiVo-

533. The future stem is formed by adding the tense-siifftx -<t%- (tir%-
iti liquid stems, 535) to the verb-stem : Xi-aat, I tliall (or wiQ) looae,
Xiaofioi ; Af^u) from ri-6if-iu. place ,' Scifta from hi!jt-vu-iu shoto.

a. In verbs showing strong and weak grades (4T6) the ending is added to
the strong stem : XtiVu Xflf u, t^iu ri}(u, t*^ THi)ra/uu (60S), Sliuiu Siiirti,

534. Towel Tetbo. — Verb-stems ending in a short vowel lengthen
the vowel before the tense suffix (o to jj except after e, t, p). Thus,
riiiiai, ri/ujirai; idia, iami; tjttXioi, i^k^iTai.

a. On xfi^ V^"^ oracleg, xP<'o*"'< ""'i A'poAnMot krar, see 487 a.

b. For verbs retaining a ^ort fiiiAl vowel, see 488.

5M D. Doric and Aeolic always leiiRthen a to a (rl/idv-w).
b. In verbs with stems originally ending in -f Horn, often has «-«- In the future :
ir^ irif ntSai, Tt\4u rcM<r<rw ; by analogy JIXXvpi i\trw (and dUr«, ik^rai).

539] FUTURE SYSTEM 171

S3S. Liquid Terbi. — Verb-stems ending in X, fi, v, p, add -t<r%-;
then <r drops and t conttaeta with the following vowel.

^Hf (^ov) thuw, ^riS, ^Kij from >par-i(,tr)u, ttMr-f(ir)iti ; vtAXk ((TTcX-)
•emt, ffrcXoEr^r, vrtXiin from «reX-^(i7)D;i(f, rrTcX-^(ff)fT(. See p. 138.

936. a Is retalaed In the poetic lorms cAo-u (kAXu land, «X-), irriprw (lipM
«Kf(, icifr-), WproMiu (NpofUi warm myself, Sep-), £|»-h (jpvv^ Tottit, ip-)- So
ilao In the ftorisL See d^opJa-iw, ttXu, ntlpw, ^Ipw, iptpu In the List of Verba.

537. Stop Verbe. — Labial (jt, ^, ^) and palatal (k, y, v) stops at
the end of the Terb-atem unite with a to form ^ or {. Dentals
(t, 1,0) an lost before a (98).

icir-r-» (cmr-) cut, i^w, ici^gfioi J JJUt-t-w (fi\»$-) injure, ^Xd^w, pxi^aiAoi ;
tfi^-v mile, ypd^u, vpd^s/ioi ; rUir-u ueiRW, rX^fai, rX/fa/uu ; JJy-ti aaf, X^,
X/Ea^Hu ; Topdrru (ropax-) dflturb, ropdfu, Tapdfofiu ; ^pdfb (#pa>-) soy, ^piffu;
T(Um (ri^ wnf-) pemtdJe, rifffu, ir(l«a/iw.

•. Wben c or a Ih added to the Terb-acem, It is lengUiened to q or w : sa
pti^tmx (pavX-*-) wish ^vX^vo/uu, dX/riofwi (iX4-) am captvrtd iXiirs^ui. So
alio in the flist aoriat and In oUier tenaes where lengthening la regular.

93a Attic Fntnifc — Certain formations of the future are called
Attic because they occui especially in that dialect in contrast to the
later language; they occur also in Homer, Herodotus, and iu other
dialects.

539. Thcw futures uaoallj occur when <r la preceded by J< or < and these
Towels are not preceded by a ayllable long bj nature or poaltioQ. Here v la
dropped and -d- and Ww are contracted to -£. Wben i precedes r, the ending
it (-(r)fe which contracts to -i&.

a. mX/w coll, TfXAi JInlth drop the r of nUffw nX^ojui, niJria rttJwtpai

and tbe resnlting Attic forms are ai\a laXoS^uu, rtXQ (rcXoSftai poetic).

b. Aatfrw (^Xq-) drive bas Hon). Adu, Attic AS. — taeiloiuu (taM-) ttt baa
AUlc nM^daO^uu. — ^x^f ('"X**') J'f^ '>as Horn, imxif^t"" (and fiax'i'<''''>')i
Attic fux^Btmi. — JXXii/u {6\-t-) destroj/ has Hom. iMtu, Attic AS.

c All Terba in -^nv/u have futurea in -d(0)w, -ul. Tboa, ff«3d»C/u (««>»•)
sratter, poet. ffnMrw, Attic milS. Similarly aome verba In -erreiu: iii^iirrviu
(ifi^ir-) cliilhr. Epic iiii^iiau, Attic d^i^u) ; oriprvfu (rrap-*-) a|>rvffil, late er^
plw, Attic vTtpQ.

i. A rerj few Terba fn -a^ have the contracted form, fiifidtu (fiiff^t-)
ratue K go oaually baa Attic fii^a from fiifiiiru. So i(cTQiur = iferdtaiur from
iftriffi (xanlne.

«. Verba in -if* of more than two syllables drop a and Insert t, thus making
-i(r)t-, -t(v)ioiiat, which contract to -iS and -wDfuu, aa in the Doric future (540).

US D. These futuna are often nucontnicted In Homer (fiaXim, mirim, iyy^
UKtfir); regnUrly In AeoUci In Hdt. property only when coomea baton o or uk
UT D. Doric Iiaa -fu from moat verba in -{w (516 D.).
aa. b. D. For Hom. -en for -aa, aee 646.

i,vGooglc

172 FUTURE SYSTEM [540

So rofilfu (niuJ) comlili-r iD&kos n«u<r<u. noiinui, naiuii and [d like manner »fu-
tOfuv, both Inflected like raiw, wotoOfiai. Su j^wun, oUioSmi tram m(u <rccu»-
tom, olnll^u raloniie. But g-x'ti" (''X'^-) 'pfil niakea (Tx''"- n^fi etc. are due
to the analogy ol the liquid verbe.

N. — Such forms In Atlic U.'xIb as i^dro, rtKiaia, n/iiffv, fftfidati are ei

5*0. Doric Future. — Some verbs, irhich have a future middle with
an active uieaniug, form the stem of the future middle by adding
-irt^-, and contracting -aioiua to -umiaa. Such verbs (except vco,
ntwrio) have also the regular future in -^ro/uu.

(Xofu (kXou-, 620) weep nXatwoD/iai, f^u (n~, ki>-) nnim »«wo6;t«i (doubtful),
■■Wb ("■Xi'-i wXeu-) tail rXeuiroCjiai, rii^v (irn-, irHif-) brtMhe rnwuBfuu, wtwTia
(rcT') ftUl ri<roS/im, rvrBdro/tiu ^rv$-, Tti^) mweifuu (ODCCi), ^tiyi i^vy-,

a. The iuflectioD of the Doric future is as follows : —

Xftrfl, -ffoOfUU

\iw.6,«., -«,*,«««

«•«., -ffS

XSfffiTf, -ffeurfc

Xftnir, -iriurftu

XHr<r, -<rc(r«

XviraCn-., -traSn-cu

b. These are called Z)oric futures because Dodo usually makes all futores
(active and middle) in -viu -vH, -aioiia* -raufioi.

C- AtUcir(a'af'>uu(Ho[n. Tea-^^uu) from i-lrTu/oIf comes from rrrco^iot. Attic
l»w«r Isderived from 2 aor, trtria (Dor. and Aeol,) under the influence of rtatSftai.

541. Fnturea with Pment Fonna. — The following verbs have no
future suffix, the future thus having the form of a present: ffio^iiu
(jji-) eai, ntoiua (m-) drink, )(tui (xv-) and xiopM, pour. See 529. 5, 8.

a. These are probably old subjonctlves which have retained their futare
mesQing. In fto^t and nfo^uu tbe mood-sign is short (46T D.). Horn, has
pioiiat or ^cla/uu live, Hiu find, ic4» (written ictlit) lie, ifariu achieoe, ip6ti droto,
r»ii6v stretch, and dXidrrai avoid, rioitai go is for rwrofiw.

III. FIRST (SIQMATIC) A0RI8T SYSTEM
(first AOItlST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE)

542. The first aorist stem is formed by adding the tense suffix -ou
to the verb-stem: l-kv-aa I loosed, Xvaa, Xutnujiu; l-^tfa / a/totoed,
from StiK-m-iu. See 606.

S8B D. Horn, has demu, to/uQ, irtpiu; and also rrkiai, ebUu, Adat, drriAu,
Saiiiavi (045) , dniu, ^/)Aouiri, raRSoiwi. Ildt. always u.scs the -lu and -laC/iai forniB.
Homeric futures in -cu have a liquid before t, and are analogous to the futures
of liquid verbs.

MO D. Horn, igatJrai (&Dd trvtni, tnrai, larai). lu Doilo tbere Br« thzee
forma : (I) -a/ji (and -vS), -vfoiiai (and -aoOiiai) ; and often with cv from m ma
-4vm, -cu^in ; (2) -r(u with 1 from e before o and u ; (3) the Attic forma.

MS D. Mixed Aoiiita. — Hom. bos some forma of the first aorist with the tb»-
maUo vowel (?£) of tbe second aorist; as Hrrt, IfeirAi (<7w lead), ifilirrro.

, Coo^^lc

MS] FIRST AORIST SYSTEM 178

a. In tqtIm ohowing atrong uid we&k gndea (476), the teiue-«iiffix h added

10 the strong stem : wtlSie Iwturn, TiJKu frijfa, xriu Irraraa, Irr^fu (arm-, vrq-)

N. — rlffq/u («f-, 9ih) place, Sltu/u (So-, Jlu) j^m, Iiifu ( j-, 4-) (end have aorlsU
in IS (Iff n, ISwcB, 4ni in the singular : with i rarely in the plursl). See 756.

543. Towel Verba. — Verb-atems ending in a. vowel lengthen a
short final vowel before the teime-suffix (ci to ij except after t, t, p).
Thu9, rifiaio ittfiifira, iaai cwicra (431), ^iXt'ui t^i'Xijira.

■■ x'" (X"-, X'l^i X'f-) pour bM tbe aorJBts Ix"^ ^«i>ii)r (Epio f xn«, ^nd-
fH») from ^(uo-a, <x"«'''i*"l'-

b. For verbs retaining a short final vowel see 488.

544. Liquid Verba. — Verb-atems ending in X, ^ v, p lose v and
lengthen their vowel in compenaation (37) : atori (after i or p to d),
<toa,(toi, utoC.

^>w C^*-) sAoui, f^m for ^awa ; ripafm (irqMr-) Jlninh, twtpiim for
jr^uva ; rr^Uu (^-rcV) s«;ul, frrnXa f or fiTTtXiraj icpliw (iiptr-) judpe, fiviva for
igpitrti j AXXd/iu (^^-) f^^p, i^Xd^iTfF for i^Xtro^ijr.

a. Some verbs in -aira (~ar-) have -5™ Instead of -ijm ; ss yXvKalKit tioeeten
/yXicdiiB. So bx'o''v maJce thin, ttpSalrw gain, coiXslrw hollow OtU, \aralru
fatteti, ifrrmlwH be angrg, rtwaLnt make ripe. Cp. 80 a.

b. Tlie poeClo verbs retaining v in the future (536) retain It also in the aorist.
C ofpw iip-) raisK is treated as if its verb-stem were ip- (contracted from

i(fK in ittpu) : aai, Upa, ipu, Ipaifu, a/itr, a/wi, ipat, and ipiiiiir, ipu/tai, ipat-
IBIt, Spa^tai, ipiiitrat.

d. iftyna Is used as the first aorist of 4>fpw btar. tlra is rare for tJmr (549).

545. Stop VeriM. — Labial (w, 0, 4>) a.nd palatal (k, y, x) stops at
the end of the verb-stem unite with ir to form ^ or (. Dentals (t, &,
S) are loat before v (op. 98).

rt/ir-u send Irt/i^a, iwifalidintr ; fiXiwra (^Xafi-') injure IfiXn^a ; ypd^-v
mite (ypatfta, typaifiAnTjr ; w>i,it-w weave tr\t(a, ^Xcfd^i^r; U7-U say (X(£a ; ro-
pdrrtt (rapax-) ditturb irdpaia, frapii(d^T|r ; poetic ip4aru ('fxr-) rou 4^'Bi
fpafw (^paS-) tell tippaaa, /^poffduqr ; rtlB-a (ri^, ruB-, rottf-) persuade f^n^B.

a. On forms in «- from stems in 7 see 516.

inper. p^^n (fialrai go), iStrrrv (JiW tel), Ifov (Iiw cnme), olvc, tlirrrt, olrtp^t,
tlrtptiut (_^pK bring), imper. Spvto rise {tpniu niuaf).

MS a. D. Homeric i)Xeuini|r and ijUiiair avoided, Imja bamed (Att. (jtamro),
irtna drove, also have li»<t a-.

60 b. D. Horn, ufteii liaj< uri^'iiial ra, HH ytXda tyiXaaftt, T(XA< /rAcffffB 1 ill
utlten by analog?, om JX\D^ S\i<r<ra, titrviu tfuiava, naUw cdXnrira.

Hi D. Horn, has luiiiu -qra fm- -am after 1 or p. Aeolic a^imilotes r to a
iiitnil; as (icfKrn, driartWa, ttip^a-ro, •sovippaiti (= ai/rtlpiiia). Cp. Horn.
A^XA. {iftWt. increase).

Mft D. Horn, often lias irir from dental steuiN, ns inbiuava Iniuasiiiiir (jco^iJfw) .
Doric has -(a from most verbs In -fu: Horn, alsu has ( (4pira(e), See 510 D.

SECOND AOKIST STSTEM

IV. SECOND AORIST SYSTEM

(8BC0ND AOBIST ACTIVE AHB MroDLE)

M6. Dbe secoDd aorist is fonned without any tenee-suffiz and
only from the simple verb-3t«m. Only primitive verbs (372) have
second aorists.

547. (I) Q-Vetba. — d-verbsmake the second aorist by adding ?£-to
the verl>6tem, which regularly ends in a consonant Verbs showing
rowel gradations (476) use the weak stem (otherwise there would b«
confusion with the imperfect).

548. A. Vowel verba raret; form aeootid aorlBU, aa the Irregulftr aipiw «eue
(<rXoF,'S20, 1), iireiu eat (f^iar), ipiu (lUor). Iwuir draiJc (irtru) is the only
iacoud aorist In prose from a vowel stem and having thematic inflection.

b. Many v-verlM with stemB ending in a vowet bave wcond aorista fomed
like those of /u-verba. These are enimierated in 687.

M9. Verba of the First Clasa (409) adding a thematic vowel to the verb-
•um form the second aorist (1) by reduplication (491), as iyu lead IJrtKYo*,
and tXwar probably for i-ft-ftw-»t ; (2) by syncope (493), as -r/ra^isi fiy irritt^w,
hftifiit (i-i*p-) TOmt ir/fiiltfl', Ittoiuu (rer-) follow irriitift, Itnperf. Arbfafr from
<-*nro*o|», ifx* ("X-) '""'* ''X»*; (3) by using a for t (478 b) In poetic fomm
f480), as rpiwu turn trparoT; (4) by metathesis (492), m poet Sipm/iMi tee

SM. (II) Hi-Verba. — The stem of the second aorist of /u-verbs is
the rerb^tem without any thematic vowel. In the indicative active
the strong form of the stem, which ends in a vowel, is regularly em-
ployed. The middle uses the weak stem form.

HC D. Horn, baa more second aorista than Attic, which favoured the fiist
aorisL Some derivative verbs have Homeric second aorists classed nnder Uiem

for convenience only, as mtr/u eound fiTuror; iwKdoiuu roar l/umr; ttTtr</4it
hate laroyor. These forms are derived from the pure verb-stem (48G d, 6G3).

547 D. Hom. often has no thematic vowel in the middle voice of u-verbs
{MiyMi* from i^ofui reneive). See 634, <tB8.

5tt D. (1) Hom. has {r)KiK\tTo (tHo-iiai command), \fljiSor (X4«« lis hid),
iri^paSt (ippdtu tell), rtriSrlf (riiS-u persuade) . itpitaKer {ip6t-u cAscl;), ^((n-
tnr and Irinvtr {itlrTia chide, inw-) have unusual formation. (2) ^X-^
H'^y (ri\t-iuu am, come, Tt\-). (3) twpaSt* (wip6-« lack), haiior (rfa wm ad).
(4) j9X9r« (jMXXu Ait, 128 a).

sh] second aorist system its

l-mt-iK (ffTQ-, oTif-) »et, second aorist tmi*, fmit, tmi, toTifra*, irrirnir,
frr^tur, ftTifri, tcTYiQut ; middle Mi-iOft from rif^iu (flt-, ftf-) ploca, Mi-fqc

from lUtffu (ta-, Su~) J7IM.

551. Originally only tba dual and plural showed the weak fcrma, wMob ars
ntained In the second aoriala of tIAj^u, m<a^, and hiiu : f««t*r, fSo^u*, «I^» (j-j-
fur). and In Horn. ^Ti7r (also ^r^t) from l^igt went. Elsewhere the weak
padee have beea displaced by the strong grades, which forced their way In from
Ihe ilngalar. Thoa, f7»r, t^Sr in Pindar {■=tytu-va*, f^v-ffar), which come
from fyntri^T), ^«v><t) by 40. So Horn. IrXit, Ipi,. Such 3 pi. forma are rare
in tfae dramatic poeta.

a For the alngalai of tIA|/u, I(3h/u, I)|tu, see 766 ; for the ImperatiVM, 769 ;
faithelQfiniUTea, 700.

552. No verb in -B/u hu a second aoilst in Attic from the stem In u,

5M. The difference between an imperfect and an aoriat depends formallj/ on
(be diancter of tiie present. Thus l-^ij-r tatd ia called an ■ Imperfect ' of ^ir.^ :
but t-vrt-r Oood is a ' second aorist ' because It ahowa a different teDSfr«t«m
than that of Irni/u. Similarly l-'Ptp-oi' is ■ imperfect ' to fipv, but (.rH-ar ' oec-
ond aorist ' to rlrru Iwcause there Is no present rnw. lffTtx«> is Imperfect to
nlxt, but BBCODd aoriit to rrtlxa. Cp. 646 D.

NOTB ON THS SECOND AORIBT AND SECOND PERFECT

554. a. The second aorist and the second perfect are nsually formed only
from primitive verbs (372). These tenses are formed by adding the peiBOnlLl
ending (Inclusive of tiie thematic or tense vowel) to the verb-stem without any
consonant lense-sulfix. Cp. (\ira-r with IXv-a-t, trpAwiir with tTpi^-d-i/r {rptwit
(Mrs), yt^fo^i-K with UXv-jc-a.

b. The second perfect and second aoilst passive are hiatorically older than
the corrBspondlng first perfect and first aorist.

c Tptrv turn is the only verb that has three first aorlsts and three seccmd
aorists (606).

d. Very few verba have both the second aorist active and the second aorist
panive. in cases where both occur, one form is rare, as Uvm* (once In poetry),

'r^r (r^rrw itrfite).

e. In the aame voice both ^)e first and the second aorist (or perfect) are rare,
■s l^faffB, f^AfF (^n> anlieipaU). When both occur, the first aorist (or
perfect) in often transitive, the second aoriat (or perfect) is InlranHitive (810);
u far^ffB I erected, i.e. made ttand, tarift I atood. In otlier cases one aorist
is used in prose, the other in poetry ; frttra, poet. triSar {wtl9u persuade); or
they occur In different dialects, as Attic ^d^r, Ionic /M^Agv (6i*Tti bury);
or one la much later than the other, as Anf a, late for (Xirar.

t»} with i taken from fm-Xw Mid

_ l;.C.OOg[c

176 FIRST PERFECT SYSTEM [55S

v. first (k) perfect system
(first pbufect and pluperfect active)

555. The stem of the first perfect is formed by adding tia to the
reduplicated verb-stem, ki-kv-na I have loosed, l-Kt-kmii 1 had looa^.

m. The n-peifect ia later in origin than the second perfect and seema to have
atart«d from vetb-Htema in -k, as f-ouc-a ( = fi-foiK-a) from ttxu resemhle,

b. Verba ahowlng tbe gradationa ti, ta : «, am i, u (476) have «, cv ; as rtl$it
(wiB-, imB-) persuade rtrtita (660). But J^Soikb /ear hu « (cp. 564).

556. The first perfect is fonned from verb-stema endiiig in a
Towel, a liquid, or a dental stop (t, 8, 6).

557. Vowel Vertw. — Vowel verbs lengthen the final vowel (if
short) before -ku, as ri/ia-u honour Tt-rlfiij-Ka, ia-ai permit ad-m, irmi-ia
make wttniti-Ka, riAj/u {$t-, Oif) place Tt-Oij-Ko, Si.'&ufu (So-.&n-) give St-Sto-xo.

558. Thia appliea to verbs that add i (485). For verbs that retain a abort
final vowel, see 488. (Eicept a^ivn^ ("?«-) extinguUk, wliich has fir^^ca.)

559. Uqoid Vertw. — Many liquid verbs have no perfect or employ
the second perfect. Examples of t!ie regular formation are ^otW
(^v-) show, ire<ttayKa, iyyiXXat {AyyiK-) announce, ^yytA™.

a. Some liquid verbe drop » ; as titpma, titXum from Kplne (npir-') Judge,
■Xlvw (itXt»-) incline, rtlm (rcf-) ttretch has Ttrana. from Ter^iMi.

b. MonoByllablo etema change < to a ; as laraKto., tipea^to. from rr AXu (rrcX-)
■end, ^tpu i^fftf-) corrupt.

N. For a we expect a ; a ia derived from the middle (IsraXfiai, f^BapiiaX).

c. All Btama in n and many others add < (486) ; as rtiua (Hfi^i-), dintribulf
mtfit)ica, iU\u {iixK-f-) Cart for iitnfXvKO., Tvyxiru(Tux-f) ftiQipen rrrvxnica.

A. Man; liquid verbs suffer metalhcais (402) and tlius get the form of vowel
verbs ; as fidWa C(9oX-) tkroa pifi\tita ; Br^aKu {Bat-) die Tffl«|m ; icB.\fu (xaXt-,
kXtj-) call KiAi)iM ; tdf/Mi («<«*-) am weary n^ifujito ; r^ftmi (t(»i-) cut rirti-^ta.
Also rbrru (rrr-, tto-) f(Ul rdrrua. See 128 a.

UB b. D. Hom. JeDw (uaed as a present) is for StSfo^O-a. !tiS- was writ-
ten on account of the metra when f was lost. Hom. SiSia is for J<-3(^)i-a with
the weak root that ia used in StSiiier. See 703 1).

SST D. 1. Hom. has the i-perfect only in verba with vowet verb-stems. Of
these some have the aecond perfect in -a, particularly in participles. Thoa u-
titii<it, Attic Km/iiiiiiit (tiii't-u am weary'); utmiy^At (np^nvfu sotiate); rtfb-
■oiri and rt^iiat (^itw prodacf).

2. In some dialects a present was derived from the perfect stem ; m Hom.
inirY-t, Theocr. SiSoIku, rttptm (in the 2 perf. : Theocr. rerit«u'). Int. T^gviKvr
(Aeol.), part. unXtfarrtt (Hom.). rtitpUw (I'lnd.).

3. From lUix-TiKtt {laiKionoL bleat) Hom. has tbe plup. iiiiiL^m*.

.oogic

56b] second perfect system 17T

sea stop VsitM. — Dental stems drop t, S, B before -xa ; as -m^
imfi; wufi-, wmS-) persuade wartiKo, KOfu^w (tofuS-) earn/ KiKOfUNo.

VI. SECOND PERFECT SYSTEM
(second PERITECT AND PLCPEEITECT ACTIVE)

SO. The stem of the second perfect is formed by adding a to the
reduplicated verb-stem ; yi-yp^ift^ I haue uiritten (ypoi^).

562. The second perfect is almost always formed from stems end-
it^ in a liquid or a stop consonant, and not from rowel stems.

a. it^ma (iteiui hear) is for iKtiKo(_f)-a (dis^- = dni^, 48).

963. Verb-HtemH ahowing variation between short and long vowels (478)
luve long vowelB in the eecond perfect (a is thus teguUrly lengthened), Thiu,
T^nf (tou-, r^c-) melt T^ia, xpi^u (upay-') cry out t/tpaya, ^alrw (^>^) sAow
iri^wa have appeared (bat r/^yta have ahovin), pt/yri/u (fiay-, ji'Tt-i tify-i 4'^'' c)
hrrtUc Ippt/yoL.

a- rfutfa em arcuttoned (^— rt-vfuS-a) has the Mrong form w (cp. ^fct
evftom, 123) ; Horn. ISw (Attic iSl^ aeObstom).

964. The second perfect has a, « when Uie verb-stem variea between a, «,

0 (4TS, 479) or i, «, « (477 a) : rpi^i-ta (rpt^, rpo^-, Tpa<^) nourish rirpoipa, Xefvw
(Xir-, JWiir-, Xaiir-) leave \i\am, rtlBu {rtS-, t«9-, iriii0-) persuade r4ratH IrtMt.

969. Similarly verbs with the variation u, at, av (470) should have su ; trot
this occuiB only in Epic efX^Xai/Ba (=Att. A^Xuffa); cp. A«i»(«)-7(>l«u. Other
verbs hare tu, as ^c^u JUe ri^irya.

566. After Attic reduplication (44A) the Bt«m of the eecond perfect bas Oio
weak form ; <iX«I^ (dXei^, dXi^) anoint dXiJXt^.

967. Apart from the variationB in 563-666 the vowel of the verlj-stem re-
mains onchanged: asY^^^o (,ypi^ write), k^kv^ (jcfrrru sloop, ajp-).

966. The meaning of the second perfect may differ from tliat of Che present ;
aa tfiriyopa am aieake from lytlfa wake up, aiainia grin from snlpa mBeep.
The Mcond perfect often has the force of a present ; as r^oiAi trutt (v/rtun
have persuaded). See 819.

969. Aspirated Second Perfects. — In many stems a final t oc ^
changes to ^ : a final k or y changes to x. (^ and x here imitate
verb-stems in <^ and ^i as rpt^, jpiWdi.)

MID. Horn, has several fortliH unknown to Attic : SiSeinra ISovr-i-u sound),
(oXra (IAt-b hope), topya (^^fu wort), xpa-^PaiiXa (^iJXop«i Wicft), iUhd^ ((iA«

care for).

MS D. Bnt tiSia fear from iFt-. See 656 b. D., 703.

i69D. Horn, never aspirates r, (3, «, 7. Thus «itoiri4t = Alt. wnofiif («*r-T-i*
aa). The aspirated perfect occurs once in Hdt. (_iwtT6n4>ri 1. 86) ; but Is mt-
known tn Attic until the fifth century b.c. Soph. TV. 1009 (drar^po^) to Uw
onlj example In tragedy.

OBEEK SRAM. — 12 ,

178 SECOND PERFECT SYSTEM [5t»

Kitm (an-') cut WiD^n, ir/^r-w send wiwo/upa, ^Urrw (fititfi-') tnjttn p4-

fSXd^a, Tptfiu (TfHp-) rub r/rpl^a, ^Uttw (^vXai-) (fttartl -rc0dXax> ! t^-"
(rjx^) nouruA TtTpotpa ; ip^rru (Jpu^-) rliff 'pi&pi'XB'

570. Host Buch stems have a sbort vowel immedlatel; before the final coa-
tosant; a long rowel precedes t.g. in itU-ri-iu idSuxa, aipirTu (nipuc-) -uirf-
fux"! rriflaia (rrTii-) Ivrnx"' r^/H^ and r/SXt^ Bhoir r. ^ coDtraat to i In the
present (rpt^u, fMfiu). vripiyia, Xit^v-w do not aspirate (t^npya, poeL XAa^ra).

571. The following Terbe have aspirated second perteolB : i7w, iXXtlrrw,
Arotyu, pliirrti, ItUiViu, liiixw (rare), Mj9w, rniptrTa, cXArru, ic^rw, Xayx^mi,
Xa^i/Siim, \dirra>, Xtyai collect, ^ttu, lulyiniiu, rtiiwv, rUnu, rpdrrw, xr^w,
r^Tru, Tpiwa, Tfitfiti, ^ipa (fniiex")! ^Xdrrui. in^ya or itvofYrv^ bas two per-
fecta : iritfx'^ &■><) Mifyt,. rplrTui du has r^/Kt7a have dont and /ar« (tMl^ or
HI), and (generally later) r/rpaxa have done.

573. Second Perfects of the |u-fonn. — Some verbs add the endir^
directly to the lediipUeated verb-stem. Such second perfects lack
the singular of the indicative.

Irrq/u («Ta-, (tti)-) »et, 2 perf. stem iifra- ; Ivra-iur, Irra-rt, irr&-vt, lat.
iari^rai ; 2 plup. Ifra-rM (417). The singular Is supplied by tbe forms In -at ;
as Imjai. Tbese second perfects are enumerated in 704.

573. Stem Gradation. — Originally the second perfect was Inflected througb-
ont witbout any thematic vowel (cp. the perfect middle), but with stam-grv
dation : strong tormti in the singular, weak forms elsewbere. -a (1 singular) was
Introduced In part from the aorist and spread to the other persons. Corre-
sponding to the infiection of elSa (704) we expect ir/irgi0a, niirtifBa, rirntt,
irtritTtr, trtriBiKr, ■rtwrt, rerWan (from wiriSfri), Tracea of this mode of
inflection appear in Horn. yFyiTtir (from ycyjTttr, 35 b) yiyaiar from yiyam ;
ri'irroi>, ttKTiir, Umii from laum ; triwiBiut ; ni)uiiitt from i/J/uira ; rtrtuSt (for
rn-aPre = xftgert) from rixafBa (other examples 704, 705). So the maac. and

neut. participles have Che strong forms, the feminine bas the weak forms (fw/iv-

Kifa, iixiMtiiia, as tlSiiit, iSula).

VII. PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM

(PERFECT AND PLXJPBRPBCT MIDDLE AND PA88IVB, rUTUBK
PERFECT PASSIVE)

574. The stem of the perfect and pluperfect middle and passive
is the reduplicated verb-stem, to which the personal endings are
directly attached. Xikv-itai I have loosed myself or have been looted,
^X(Xv>i»v; iiSo'tuu {Si-iio-fu give), &iSay-fiai (SciK-vii-fu ahou)). On the
euphonic changes of consonants, see 409.

BT4 D. A tbemstic vowel precedes tbe ending in Horn. iiiiifi\tTu (jiAm can
for), ipiipTTM (Sfittiu route).

<.:C.Oi_y^k

5«3] PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM 179

STS. The stem of the perfect middle is in general the same as
that of the first perfect active as r^ards its vowel (557), the reten-
tion or expulsion of v (559 a), and metathesis (559 d).

rifiik-u Konour rtri^ii^iuu im-lieifoir ; roi^-u make rcTofir-^iai ttrewai^/air ;
ypi^-v write yfypan-iiai ; nfiltu (Kptr-) jitdge titpi-iiai ; rtirui (rir-) ttreUh rira-
wu \ ^tttpv C^/>-} eorrvpt lipSap-iuu ; ^\\u (^X-) throw ^^Xi^uu ifii§\1iii.ii*;
rtiSH (»iS-, Til*-, irmfl-) perauads rirtia/iai irtirtla;i^r.

576. The vowel of the perfect middle sl«iii should show the weah form when
there is variation between t (ei, <i>) : o (oi, su) : a (i, v). The weak form In k
kppean r^ularly in verbs containing n liquid (4TD) : that In v, iu r^tw/ui from
rvrMrafui {rvB-, wmt-) learn, poet. Irrv/tM hasten from vftu (iru-, tev-) urge.

977. The vowel of the present has often displaced the weak form, a* hi

TfrXc7;u' (,r\it-u wravK), XAci/i/ui (XcIt-w leOW), rirturiiai (wild-ti perSMOde),
ffnrvftw {^ty-m-ia yoke).

378. A final short vowel of the verb-stem is not lengthened in the verbs
given In 488 a. e is added (4S5) In many verbs. For metathesis see 492 \ for
Attic reduplication see 446.

S79. f is retained in endings not beginning with n, aa ^m (0ai^) sAote,
rl^rrtu, wilmtit. Before -^i, we have n in &i,Mii.iiai from i^tra (i^vr-) tharpen,
but OBoallj V is replaced b; r. On the iiiseiiion of r, see 48S.

sea Fotore Perfect — The stem of the future perfect is formed
by adding -a%- to the stem of the perfect middle. A vowel imme-
diately preceding -a%- is always long, though it may have been short
in the perfect middle.

\t-ti loote, X«X*-ffo>Mi / shall have been loosed (pert. mid. XAC-fioi), ti-m
bind Stt'^eiuu (perf. mid. SiSt-iiat), ypi^-u write ytypii/i-oiMi, itoWw call m-

581. The future perfect nmisJIj' has a passive force. The active meaning is
found where llie perfect middle or active has an active meaning (1046, 1947).

«<TVof«u thall poism (^nfirrviiat possess), MupdEotiai shall cry out (^nfxpiya
erf rmf), ttt\Ay^iuu shall sereant (ii^iXa77a scream), /u^ri}va/iai shall remerti'
ber (fi^finr/iu remember), rrro^ofiai shall have ceased (r^av/ioi have ceased).

582- Not all verbs can form a fature perfect ; and few forms of tliis tense
occur outside of the indicative; Btauere\tHTir6utyvf Thuo. 7. 26 is the only sure
example of the participle in classical Greek. The infinitive iie)iriiataSai occun
in Horn, and Attic prose.

583. The periphraBtic conslruolion (601) of the perfect middle (passive)
participle with Iwiuu may be used for the future perfect, as t^tutiiint f<roiuu I
fhtiil have been dfcrived.

ckXi}!'!), ttxa't^'iotTai \ ntKaB'^aaiiai,

180 FIRST PASSIVK SYSTEM (BH PASSIVE) [$^

384. Future Perfect Active. — The future perfect active of most
verbs is formed periphrastically (600). Two perfects with a present
meaning, irr^Ka Island (*<mwju set) and TiSytjKo. I am dead (6vq<tk<o),
focm the future perfects iirr^ I shall stand, rdSirq^ui I shall be dead.

VIII. FIRST PASSIVE SYSTEM (OH PASSIVE)

(first AORIST and FIEST KUTaRB PASSIVE)

PIKBT AORIBT PA8SIVB

585. The stem of the first aorist passive is formed by adding -Ap
(or-tfi-) directly to the verb-atem: l-kv^w I was loosed, i-<ftdf^^ I
«HW shown ('paiyia, ^i^), i-&6-$7)-v I was given (fii^iofu. So-, Sto-).

L -9^ appears lii the indicative, imperative (except the third plunU), and
Intinitive ; -$€- itppears in the other moode. -0q- is found before a aingle oonso^
nant, -fit- before two consonants or a vowel except in tlie nom. neuter of tbe
participle.

SS6. The verb-stem agrees with that of the perfect middle herein:

a. Vowel verbs lengtlien tlie final vowel of the verb-atem, aa t(-tJ>ijj-^i,
^i»M|-#ij», On verbs whicli do not lengthen their final vowel, see 488.

b. Liquid stems of one syllable change « to a, as r^-ra-^iai, tri-ftir (rtlww
ttrelch, r«>^). But crpi^ia turn, rpfwu turn, rp^u noarith have iaTpiipBrft, trpt-
^6ti*, ktpi^iB^w (rare), tbougb the perfect middles are fv-rpafiwii, T^pa^i/uu, r^

C I^mitive verbs showing In tiieir stems the gradations < (», cu) : o (at, ov) :
a (i, u) have a strong form, as tr^ii^v from i-p^uj {jfew-, Tptnr-, rpar-) turn,
IM^Otii from \tlru (Xiir-, Xfii--, Xoir-) leavt, h-Xn)wftj» from xW« (r\u-, rXtv-)
saa.

d. Primitive verbs showing in their stems a variation between r : ir and » : h
have, in the first aorUt passive, the short vowel. Thus, rlA^fu (ft-, A)-) irt^n,
m<4iu. (So-, S<a-) MWqr.

•. Final v is dropped in some verbs : Ki-tpi-imi, inplSriii. See 4S1.

f. The verb-stem may suffer metathesis : ffi-ffX^riiiai, i-^^Biir. See 492.

g. Sigma is often added : le-n/Xcixr-^uu, i-ti\tia-e^r. See 48».

587. Before & of the suffix, >■ and 0 become iff, k and y become

X (82 c) i T, &,$ become <t (83). i^ and x remain unaltered.

iy-H ifX-ftr ; jiofiifw (kiimS-) imiila-diir, tilS-ia iriie'-ftjr; -ypi^nii iyfitp-Bijr, ra-
pJTTta JTopax-') 4Tapix-»V'- ^ __^_^

SM D. Ham. has ttxap^u and Kixapiaoneu from x^'P" (JCV*) rejtiire.

Its a. D. For -^ar we find -Btr in Hotn., as SUKpieer.

IMb.D. iarpi^frir is Ionic and l>ori(t ; Horn, and HdU have irpdpff^y
from TpiriM. Horn, has tripi^eiir and MpifieTit from T^pru gladden.

6M e. D. Mom. haa iii\ir»it and /nXiaqr, ^npfi^r and jk^iI^v ; lip6r»^r s= Att.
I>/iMi)P (lip^ «rec(), dfivrtfrAiF (dravr^M revive).

jm] second passive SYSTKM (H PASSIVE) 181

588. 9 of the verb-stem becomea r in i^i-9iir for ^S^^^^, ftnd io i-ri-^Tit tea
t4*4^w from rle^iu (fc-, A)-) plaix and eia (So-, ffii-) $acrijice. See 126 c.

FIRST FUTURE PASSIVE

309: The stem of the first future jiassive is formed hy adding
-ir%' to the stem of the first aorist passive. It ends in -&tfaoitat.
Thus, miScv&Tt-m^uu. I shall be edticaied, X\£^-aoiua I shall be looaed.

Tifutw, tri/f/iejir Tlntfiifiaiiai ; ^dw, tlABiir UBiiaaiiai. • Xcfrw, Hjl^S^r \ti^64ivoiuu ;
iilBti, httaB^r wiur^aoiiai ; Ttlnt, triffiir Tal^o/ioi.; tAttu, irix^' ■raxH'^lfu ;
Ttf«u, MSiir Tte^Q/uu ; tlSa)u, iSidiir IoAfra>uu ; SrUrviu, Utix'h' Anx^<W<M-

ix. second passive system (h passive)

(second aohist and second future passive)

sbcond aorist passivb

MX The stem of the second aorist passive is formed by adding
T (or -t-) directly to the verb-stem. Thus, ^/SAa^ijv / mos tn/ured
from yS\<Jirrw 09Xoj8-).

a. -ir- Appears In Uie Indicative, imperative (except the third pluial), and
inflnilive ; -t- appears in the other moods, -ir- 'fl found before a single oon-
WDant, -t- l>efore two consoDantB or a rowel except In the nom. neat, of the
participle.

591. The second aorist passive agrees In form with the second aorist active
of fu-verbs ; cp. Intraositive tx^p^r rtjolced with larifr stood. The passive nse
WIS developed from the intransitive nse.

392. Primitive verbs showing In their stems t^ grades ■ : d : a have a.
Tbiu an I of a monoe;llabio verb-stem becomes a, as in rUn-w weaee twMtnit,
tUr-T-u steai ^nXdnir, ^Ipu (_^9tp-) corrupe HiSipTir, FTiWu (ortX-) ««nif
lvTO.^r, But \iyu Collect has O^qr.

993. Primitive verbs showing In their stems a variation between a short
and long vowel have, In the second aorist passive, the short vowel. Thus t^iw
(t«-, rim-) "Kit trix^w, l>^niu (^ay-, fifiy, part-') break ipfdyrir.

a. Bnt rXi^rw (irXav-, rXry-) xtrUCe has hMyit' o"'y 'n composition, as
iinrid-nw; otfaerwlae /vX^mr.

594. The second aorist passive is the only aorist passive formed In Attic
pmee bj iyri/u (Uyiir), ypi^ (iypi^lr), Sipm (Md^ifr), ddrria (^d^ifv), iciwTu
(itit^w), iiairu (f^nfr), ri^ti {hrrty^t), fiiwTW (^ipfii^r), piu {ippiiir active),
tfrrviu (ippiyTl*'), »iiT« (^liiriii'), at:6,wru {ivKA^v), vwilpa {itripifr), rrt\\u

[l^tiptir pasB. and intr.), ^iu (in subj. #uw), xofp" (,*x^' active).

IM D. Horn, has no example of the first future pasdve. To express the
idea of the passive future the future middle is used. See 802. Doric shows tho
active endings in both futures passive ; SaxBv^tBm, itayfo^tivtt

HOslD. For trrai' we genanU; find trtfrom-qpr, 40) in Horn.; also in Doric.

182 SECOND PASSIVE SYSTEM (H PASSIVE) [595

595. Both the flnt oorist passive bod the second aoriat psMive an iormed

but ffu»«\^»), /idrTK (i^7i»), lul-yrv/u (^iidytir), iifTnifu [.^rdyiir), rUjcw
(trMiTit), tXi^tu (ftr\i)7i7« anJ -<»^<'71f), fitrru (ippt^ftj^ ippl^i), artpltxit
\ieyt(4»t,>), BTpiif^ (iarpiifiiir), TdTri* (^dxftlO. J-^™ (.fritrir), rpiru (*rpd-
»il» pass, and intr.), Tp<^« (irpifnir pass, and intr.), Tptffui (^trplBv, irpi^^^r),
ipalinD {i^tdrjg wwt shovm, i^irrir appeared), ^fiiyniu (ii^dxSri'), V*^" C*A*-
Xif")- Host of these verbs use eitlier the one in prose and tbe other in poetry,
tJie dialecu, or late Greek. Uuly the forms in common prose use are Inaened
la biMdceis.

996. Only those verbs which have no second aorist active shov the aeoond
aoHst pasaive ; except rpfrw, nhich has all the norisis : active frpt^a and frpo-
ror turned; middle irpt^Aint' put to flight, frpavVl' turned mytel/, took to
fiight ; passive irpi^Biir vsas turned, irpimir ieat turned and turned nm»elf.

SECOND FUTURE PAS31VB

597. The stem of the second future passive is fonoed by adding
•v%- to the stem of the second aorist passive. It ends in tfrofiat.
Thus, pXiffi-iiaoiim I shall be injured from ^Xarra 03Aa/3-) i-pXa^ifv.

kAt-t-ai, iK&wyiy (ST^irii^uK ; ypi^a, iypd^r ypa^'iroiiai ; ipalru, i^r^r (q>-
peared, ^i^v/wi ; ^iStlpa, i^6&py)r ^tfapita'afuu ; r^w/u Jlx, iniy^r iray^oiiai.

598. Most of the verbs In 6M, 606 form second futures passive except iy^iu,
dXel^w, ^drru, Ppix"^ ^tiyrviu, SU/Jw, eXAttu, fiafw, nirrtt, ^wrtt.

But many of the second futures appear only In poetry or In late Qreek, and some
Are found only in composition.

PERIPHRASTIC FORMS
899. Perfect — For the simple perfect and pluperfect periphrastic
forms are often used.

a. For the perfect or pluperfect active indicative the forms of the perfect
active participle and ilnl or ^r may be used : as XiXumii il/u for X/Xuno, JwXunit
<|r tor iXiXtKit. Ho /Se^^cdrcT ^aar for iffiffotfi^iturat {^Sia come to aid) ;
tC/d Tt^ijKi^i for t49j)kb I have plai-fil ; ytypa^iii 4*' tor Jytypdipf) I had written;
tiii<iy6t!it lir I had suffered. Such forms are more common In the pluperfect
and in general denote state rather than adion.

b. For the perfect active a perlpbraais of the aorist participle and tx^ I*
Hometimes used, CHpecially when a perfect active form vrith tnnsltlve meaning
is lacking ; as ffTifirfit lj£u / have placed (^ItrtiKa, intransitiva, etand). ipaaMt
tx" I have loved. So often because tlie aspirated {>erfect is not used, a« fxta
rapHai thou hait itirred up. Cp, kabeo with tiie perfect participle.

7 D. Horn, has only Saiittai (iSi^r learned), my^'irB'u (^tulyOm mtx).

«Hl FERIPHHASTIC FORMS 183

c. In the perfect Kttive subjancdTe imd opUUve the forma In -jiiii and -mi/u
m ntj me. In Iheir place the perfect active participle with S aud tfiir is usu-
lUj employed : X^XvuiIif (XiXsirdii) H, ttiiii. Uther foniu tlian 3 aing. and S pL
•lenre. Cp. 091, 694.

d. The perfect or pluperfect passive is often paraphrased bj the perfect par-
ticiple and irrl or 9v; as yeypaH'^i^r irrl it gtanda Vritten, iari ittoyiiint it
Mandi reaoIiKd, ■■(VJTy7eX/i^»» fl» = » (i/j^yi'«XTo (rapoTTAXu give order*).

e. In the third plural of the perfect and pluperfect middle (pasaive) the per-
fect middle participle with iltl (Vi") ie used when a stem ending In a conBouant
would come In direct contact with the endloga -ptu, -pro. Bee 408,

f. The perfect subJunctiTe and optative middle are formed by the perfect
middle p*iticiple with iS or tXtir : XiXu^mi S, lliir,

%. The perfect imperative of all voices may be expresaed by combining the
perfect participle with laBt, fa-ru (6B7), \thvKiin laSi loose, etc, tlni^ror
Uru let U hOK been taSd, ytyiwin taru P. L. 961 o, yiyor&m tsTuaai V. L. TT» d.

k. FeriphTasB of the Infinitive Is rare : TtSntKltTa thai to be dead X. C. 1. 4. II.

60a Futare Perfect Active. — The future perfect active of most
▼erbe is formed by combining the perfect a<;tive participle with itro-
fiat ahali be. Thus, ytypai^m irroiutx I shoil have written, cp. scriptua
ero. For the two verbs which do not use this periphrasis, see fiS4.

a. Tbe perfect middle participle is used in the case of deponent verbe i drs-
XiXayntivt tvtiiat And. 1. 72.

«cn.. Patnre Perfect Pauive. — The future perfect passive may
be erpressed by using the perfect middle (passive) participle wito
ScrofMu bKoR be. Thus, hlitvonivm i<rax9t you mil have been deceived.

FIRST CONJUQATION OR VERBS IN (1

608. Verba in -u have the thematic vowel -% (""/if-) between the

tense-stem and the personal eudiugs iti tlie present system. The

name " (o-conjugation," or "thematic conjugation," is applied to all

verbs which form the present and imperfect with the thematic vowel.

603. Inflected according to the lo-conjugation are all thematic
presents and imperfects ; those second aorists active and middle in
which the tense-stem ends with the thematic vowel ; all futures, all
first aorists active and middle ; and most perfects and pluperfects
active.

604. Certain tenses of verbs ending in -<u in the first person
present indicative active, or of deponent verba in which the personal
endings are preceded by the thematic vowel, are inflected without
the thematic vowel, herein agreeing with ^-verbs. These tenses
are: all aorists passive; all perfects and pluperfects middle and
passive; a few second perfects and pluperfects active; and those
second aorists active and middle in which the tense-stem does not
end with tbe thematic vowel. But all subjunctives are thematic.

184 O-CONJUGATION: VOWEL VERBS [605

MS. Verbs in -«> fall into two main classes, distinguished hy the
last letter of the rerb-atem :

1. Vowel verbs : a. Uncontracted verbs, b. Contracted verbs.

2. Consonant verbs : a. Liquid verbs, b. Stop (or mute) verbs.
K. Uitder 2 fall also (c) those verba whose Bteros ended in a- or ^ (^S^)-

606. Vowel Verba. — Vowel verbs UBually do not form second
aorists, second perfects, and second futures in the passive. A vowel
short in the present is commonly lengthened in the other tenses.
Vowel verba belong to the fii-st class of present stems (498-504 ; but
see 612).

607. Vowel VertM not contracted. — Vowel verbs not contracted have
verb-stems ending in f, v, or in a diphthong (at, a, av, tv, m).

(l) ieeiia eat, wptu tme, xpt" anoint, poet. Slw fear, rtu honour (600. 8);
(«) iriiii accorapliah, fuSiw am intoxicated, Xdu Zoom, Mm taerifiee, ^ta produce,
tuKta hinder (find many others, 500. 1 &); (cu) traiw tcratch, -kUw strike, rrala
Humble, raXaiu virestte, dytie/uii am indignant, ialv kindle, ialoiiai dfcfrfc,
\Aaloiuu desire eagerly, poet. /Mla/uii desire, nfu dieell, ^atia etrfke ; (») kX^
(l&t«r iXifu) thM, atlto thake. Epic h(u split and rest; (au) aw ttadle, Bpaite
break, direXa^ enjoy, ra.6u makf. cease (vate/ui eeaer), poet, taii* rut; (n)
PaffiXttw am king, pouXtiu cotmiU {ffau\t6oiiai deliberate), fftiptiti hunt, xt^xiw
order, \tiu stone, ToiSciiw educate, x'p'^'' dance, ^rtiw elay. Most verba in -tua
are either denominaiivea, as part\t6w from ffafi\f6t ; or are due lo the analogy
of such denominattvefl, as ruStiw. tt<niuu taste is a primitive. Ma> run, riu
neim, irXAd sail, w*ia breathe, fiiu Jlow, x^^ POur have forms in (v, v ; cp. poet-
<rt6u urge, i\r6a avert, d^c^ am grieved; (ov) itt6u hear, xoXoiadoek, rpatu
beat, yatu teaih.

608. Some primitive vowel verbs In -lu, -uu (622) formed their present atein
by the aid of the sufBz i(_ji), which has been lost. DenominaUves In -<», ^k,
•o/ui regularly added the suffix, as puet, fiijtl-u am viroth from >ii]h-jh (ji^n-s
wrath), poet Saxpiu weep (idxpu tear), poet, ^iri-u beget from ^Iru-ju, fwAiu
am drwik, puriKtOu am king. Poet. SripUiiai, paarlu, li^la/iai, mjiclu, dxA^,

609. The stem of some of the uncontracted vowel verbs originally ended
to * or f (624).

610. Some verba with verb-stems In vowels form pteaeutB in -m (523), as
■Ik* drink, *«™ perish ; and in -ff.w (526).

611. Vowel Verba contracted. — Vowel verbs that contract have
verb-steras ending in u, c, o, nith some in S., -q, «>.

612. All contracted verba form their preiient stem by the help of the anfflx
j(»). and properly belong to llie ThinI Clasfl (622).

613. Some contracted verbs have verb-stems which orleinally ended In v
or f (624).

6»] Q-CONJUGATION: LIQUID VERBS 186

614. Uqnid Teiba. — Liquid verbs have verb-Btema in A, /i, f, ^
He present is Tarelf formed from tbe aimple veTb-stem, m in nir-<e remain;

ordinarily tlie ButBk i (j/) is added, Ba in o-tAXu (rrtX-^) tend, xftnv (_-^fti*)
piigr, trtlru (crei-jM) tlaj/, ^alru (^ai^isij fflow.

615. A short vowel of the verb-atem retn^DB abort in tlis futore but ia
leugtheaed in the first sorist (644). Thus :

■. ■ in the future, i| in tbe aoriat: ^alta (^at^) ihoiB, 0arA, (0i|m. In tUa
elaoa fall all verba in -oipw, -atpu, -a\Xw.

b. « in the future, «i in tbe aonst : /Jr-a remain, iitrQ, (finm ; vtAXh (^rtX-)

•e>d, rrcXS, fa-mXa. Here belong verba in -iXXu, -c^iu, -cfiw, -tpa, -tiftt,

c. I in tlie future, I in the aorist; *\tr» (iXip-) ineline, cXTrS, hXim, Here

belong verbs in -iXXu, -iw, -ipw.

d. fi in the future, ■ In the aorist: ri^ C'vp-) drag, aOpS, tavpa. Here belong

verbs iu -vpv, -um.
For the formation of the fnture ateni see 636, of tbe aorist stem see 644.

616. For tbe perfect stem see 669. Few liquid verbs make second perfects.
On the eliange of «, a of the verb-atem to d, >i In the second perfect, see 47S, 484.

Liquid verbs niih futures in -w do not form future perfects.

617. Monosyllabic verb-Htems containing t have a in tbe first perfect active,
perfect middle, first aorist and future passive and In all second aorists, but o in
the second perfect. Thus, ^Stlpa (^Scp-) corrupt, I^Sapta, t^Bap/i^i, ii^int, but
Jt-/^«>pa haoe dettrayed (810).

618. A few monosyllabic stems do not change (to a in the2Bor., aer^iuwetit
Irt/ur (but (rajuw In Hom., HdL etc.), ylynoiuu (ytii-) become iytii6iAtit. See also
9ilm, BipojMi, itXoiuu, root ^r-, Feir liquid verl» form second aorialH.

619. Stemsot morethanonesyUabledonotobange the vowel of the verb-stem,

620. Llat of Liquid Verba. —The arrangement la according to the classee of
tbe prewnt stem. Words poetic or mainly poetic or poetic and Tonic are starred.

L /MXo^uu {fiovX-t-), IBi\ia (_ie<\t-), (JMw* (c'X-c-), rXXw*, /liXXw, piXu,
WXo/iai*, ^Mu (Epic ^iX-). — fipi/ua*, y4iia, Siiiu', SipiuJ*, rt/ia, Tpi/ui,
and ytiiiv (yaii-t-). — ylyniiat (_ytr-t-), liirw, id/iriii' (/«»-)> rira/iat,
fflVrw*, frirv, and yiywriw' (yeyur^-). — Verba in -tfia and -tvu have
cmly prea. and Imperf,, or form tbeir tenaea in part from otber atems, —

Upn, fpOfiot (^j>-<-), fppu (_ipp-t-), Bfpo/iat*, atlpoiiat, ^pw, iwaiifiiu",
(travp-i'), mnd xvpiifi {tvp-t-), ropiu* (rop-t),
HL *f*XXo^. drvAXu, afiXXu*, AXXo/uu, dririXXu*, 0i\\u, ioiBdXXw*, BiWa,
MXXu*, MdXXofui*, «WXX», i<t>ti\» ii<pt\., it^>XO. A^AXu*. rdXXu,

TMufXXw, «AX«», irr^XXui, -tAXu, rlXXui*, r^dXXu, ^dXXui. Mva verbs

(the following llat Includes primitives, and most of the denominaUvea In

J Greek from eniant ir-stems, kt from atema which once contained

olfu*, irSpalia*, i^paina*, jfi/ulm*, Spalr*J*, tt^pahu.

■14 D. npipgifOat in Pindar is made from ^^u {4>tpu knead").

oog[c

186 O-C0NJU6ATI0N : STOP VERBS [«*i

AaufMln*, IoJm;*, atlnt*, xpalru', icu^lnf*, jwfwim*, XS/iaJpa/ioi, /f^rf-r
fui, t«Jra>, iniialKa', Tigialru*, rtoliu*, ire^wJiu, jlolnf, iralru, fffioIiH,
artfi/Mirtl*, TtnTOlrBiuu, ^airu, ^Xey/ialru, x'l*'^'''*! xp^nn. All OthOT
deiKiminaUves In -airw are due to aualogjr ; aa drfiiairw, aAaCw, TXwahw,
Surxcpolm, txipairu, 8tpiiaiiu, IrxraXnu, xtftoira, cDiXafm, (Malpu* XMUni,
}in)iiain^, iiapalma, /lo^afm*, /ua(w, /udpaffU, iDpalm, ipiialra^, dv^paiit-
lUU, TfraJw, wtpalru, wmpalru, jbvTafm, Ttrpajru, ^wfni, Mpolm*, A^oJni,
XaXtnfni. — dXttCva', yelvo^uu*, ^pnJfw*, Dcfnn', KTeffw, impcfno", vrdnf*,
relfU, ^adKii*. — itXtiw (<Xi-P-), Kptru (cpi-r-), ilplm*, irfNi^uu (Xmopll.),
ditru. — alrx^, d\70rw, iprtn^, PaBiru, Pofitrw, ppaitrw; Ifltwu,
Bnpatnii, (Mm*, Xn-rdm, Jfdru, ^/rrAtu*, rXfrw. — a[pi*, (UnraJpH, 7vh4m^,
ttalpu^, ^0al|>u*, KaftiJpu, fWp^fpw*, /i«7Bip'>^i veipa', OKaifv, rtniialpaiMi,
X^f (xi>J>-<-)i ^alpw- — ^Y*'f"i (UkI^'i f<ipw, iytiptt, tlpoiuu,', -ttpu
join, ifpu* toy, Vffpu*, Ktlpa, ittipoitat, wilpw', gwilpii, rd^w*, ^ttlftt. —
otMrtpH (mUwdtten olrrefpu). — mi^po^Lai*, >ui^iip(i>uu, im^poiMi', ittf-
fitpi^, iiipa*, iiipoiMi, dXo^dpofUi, tropifitpai', rtpai, iptpa*,
IT. a. nlfiiw, T^^fuj b. j^Xurnltv) (i)^X-<-) ; h. ^afiw, npJojRii, Ttrpalnt
(tieo Clu* ni) ; i. 6rppalK>,iiu{6<r<t>p-c-), also C\aitBm. V. See 6:iT.

621. Stop Verbs. — Many verb stems end ia a stop (or route) con-
Bonant.

The present is formed either from the simple verb-stem, as in rX^-« veave,
or by the addition of r or i (y) to the verb^tem, as in (SXirru (^Xo^) tnjure,
4iv\iTTiii (^uXan-ju) gwird. All lenses except tbe present and imperfect are
formed without the addition of t or ( to the verb^tem ; thus, /SXd^w from
p\afi-r-ai, ^Xdfui from ^uXai-ff-u.

622. Some monosyllabic slems show a variation In the quantity of the stem
vowel 1 or u, as rp^u rub perf. Tfrplipa, •fitx" COdl 2 aor. pass, htrttxt'i ^4'*' intlt
(Doric rlcu) 2 aor. puss. irSintr. Cp. 475, 4TT c, 600. Many In onosy liable- stems
show qualitative vowel gradation : i«oi;sniov;ai|«;a«a. "Fot exampln
see 477-164.

623. Liat of Stop Verbs. — The arrangement of the examples Is by clasHs
of the present stem. Words poetic or mainly poetic or poetic and Ionic an
■tarred. The determination of the final consonant of the verb-stem of verbs in
-{n, -rrw (poetic, Ionic, and later Attic -o-rw) is often impossible (616).

V — I. ^yjvbi, Bpiwu, fXru*, Mrv', troiMi, tprlxal*, Ipru, Xdftrw, Xflrti, \irt,
/lAroT*, wifAwu, wp^tt, pirtaf, rtpru, Tptrw,
II. (t*Tpdrr«, 7inl^»Tiij', Sirru*, iriwri^, ip4rroiiai*i iiwru*, ni^vTw,
jtX/ttu, irdirTtai, /uiprrbf*, fftfrrofiai, fftifTTW, aicifpiTTOitaL*^ riri^rrtf,
XaXArrw, and 3suirf>.i* (Sainr-c-), KTowiu' (rrvr-c-), tAttw (rmr-c).
P— I. ipttpoiiai, SUfiu, Xef^u*, ai^iuu, irrel^u*, Tfi^w, itipa^at*.

II. ^d«TU, laXAirrw. — IV. c. Xa^dru (Xo^-].
ip — I- dXil^u, yX^w, 7pd|pu, ipi^w, )Uii^)tax, xl^ (^^i), rf^i fr/^,
erpi^, Tpf^, tA^u*.
IL drru, ;}<fTru, Spiwru', Wttu (126g), «p«rrw (12Gk), xpihrru (irp*^,

cfiii|}-), ic«TTw, XdnTw, ^iTTW, ^Tu (ippi^^t, but ^tiT-i^), tfiArrv.
IV. a. Wr«i" = ir(irT-«.~dX*di«»(dX«-). — V. d»«*J#K«« (d*-*-).

I;.C00J^[C

«t4] O-CONJUGATION : STOP VERBS 187

T — I. l«T/e»i«i" (S«T-(-), mjtAb* («w-<-), rar/e/iBj (iroT-<-), r^fioi ("sr-,

IIL iypi*ttfl, oifidtfvu*, ^Xfrru (^\it- from >Ait-, 130), Ppdrrit, ipUa,^,

XJtrtfOfuu*, wvpinu (rvper-, rvpry-).
IV. b. d^M^dm (d>ui^-f-), ^XuTTdiu (^\a.rr-(-).
S— L f>w, a\it«w> (dXi>«-t-), inipiu*, ipta, rSu*, cfBofuu*, /rtlTw, ^Sw*,
(ta0)ffiIiK (iM-f-), ifittiuH, K^tu* {irqi-t-), KvUrSu*, fMoiiai' {luS-f),
fiiltaiiai', riptaiuu, nwiriu, crtiSti), ^tUaiim (also Epic 0cu)e-), ^tito-
lioi, and mXaJ/u* (m\ai-«-).

III. Ex&iuples of denoininatiTea from actual 3-Btems. yvittilu, SncdfiH, >i-

Xdfle, (uTf(l{»^«u", 4*(fi>/iai«, iralfw, rtfiTiJta, ^aicdfta, — ■iXlJ*/«u, !«#-
pllu, AirJfif, ^plfhi, npclfu, Xi^jHifiai, vrMtii, ipporrltu, ^^^({W.

IV. drSinf* (ia-«-), «pJaiw (japSa,^, ttpl-t-), oiad«*» (o/J-c), XM^Mt

CX«*-. Xo'S-iX**'-)-
t— L ii»w*, aXffs^utO {i\9-t-'), dxAifw, /S/x&fw*, (Twh (^, 603 B), iptiB^.
txii^, nieW, kXiWh*, XitAri* wtlSu, riptti', trtMo^nu*, rv«w, and
yifiiM (Tir»*-), (iWw (<i^«-)-
ni. nptrrw*.

IV. b. airM><ivia<(<air»^), d>-txMH)fiai(^X'^).^<^>M>w(aap#^), JXwMh
(JXwf-^), J^rMrti i\aS-j, «uirMru (>ui«->-), nirMK/uu (rii»-).
V. >irx«''0TrB^Kw(ge, 126).
K— L pptxu, l4piaiMi; Siiinu, eliu field, thai* raembU, f>jcti, iptixi^, iptKt^,
Uku, Inu*, iriiii^, iWiKii, (i*7i:«", T^itu, tUtb (tk-) and Stiiiu (Jo«-»-),
H^Kiaiuit (/tijK-o-), flSnia^uit (»uiic.<i-),
IIL oiWrrafuj, ^ttw, ttBiTrafiaif Alrrv, iritriri^, Bufr^wt/^y nyp^rrtt, fiB-
XdrTu, Mi'T^Wi v^Tw (and r^Tw), rXlss-a^uu*, ^/rirrw, rriirrw,
^Xdrrw.
- IV. ft. Mxw) a. ln^Aia<(Iii-).— V. See 62Tb.
Y — L Atu, dfiA7*>, dfr^Tw*, twtlyu, Hpya, ipttyt/jMi*, 9iXyiii*,B^u,\iyu,\iiy<ii,
dp/yu", iityn, arfyu, arifrju, r^lyyu, riyyu, r/i^u*, rpiirfu, ^ttyu,
^Biyyviuu, ^\/yii, tppiyu, \I''yv, and piyiu (^y-t-), irrvyiu (rrvy-e-).
in. Va>* and ^lu» (611). —djUfuu*, dXaXdtte", dkardj^, dfnrdfto, stadf^
/hwrd^lu, Kpitld, rXdfU*, arifu, artrdiu, ir^d[lH* (it^ttu). — SattM",
Aiifii[ta*, Kf)f{1d, /uurrffw, irsXrffltf, irrijpf^ CTlfVi, irrpo^nXIfw*, irufil^,
Tpl(ta», ^p/ijfw*. — dTli{Jijiai» 7p<ll*i, *i*f«, iJXiiXrlJW, ff^fifll. — o(/uiflil.
IV. C teyyim (ft-y-). _ V. >ijff7« (5B0c).
X— I- 4tX"i dpX". Ppax- !n ippa-x^, Pp^", tWxo*«u, ^^<^;«^^ 'WTK". 'PK*-
flat, •Cxofiai, f XH (ir«x-). Mxw*, fffxw (ffurx-"). ^t'X"|^ t^X"!^' (("X"^).
»)JX»*"i oTx^fiBi (oix-«-> o/x-«-)i i';'WX'*'i ■"'px'^'i •"■((xoi*, Tnixn*, Tjrf-
X«*i Tptx" (rpSx-o-), f ^X", itSxu, and ppuxiapm* (3p6x-«-).
m. d/i<ww*, ^^TTW, SpiTTu, 6p^TiMi, wrieaie, XTiiKtaa*, TopirTu.
IV. C. <iTX*'w»(i"X-«-). ^7xd™ (XBx-).'-'O'Xi™ ('"X-*. 'OOC-)- — d- **»-
TiffX'^»*'<''{il*"'"<X-)i i'l'tffx''"*"" ('''O:-)' — V, Jiidffjta (JJox-).
^)^— L lX««»(dX(t+^d\«-),afft«. — IV. b. aiii>u(a6i^-y. — l. *^« (V-<-)-

tak. Verba in «■ or pd). — Some verb-stems ended origiDally in

l;,C00g[c

188 INFLECTTON OF O-VERBS [6aj

a. Sigma-4teinB (cp. 4B8 d) with presents either from -«--» or -c-in). Thus

(1) from -«-»'. lUaiiai, aiw burn, Yttlu, cvw, {Vut, fpo^, icf»fiu, rbro^cu* (n-
ra-aiiat, op. >Ar-TOt)i f^w, «'". ■rpiui'; [2) from -<r-j» (488 d): d7a{afiw*,
sfJ^Bfuu, dK^a^wt (Hom. imlwJti.)^ dfu^ui, TfXiu, «Ju* it/ifft, iXcIu* (i.f.
■Xi^u) c«Iebriif«, iio^ia*, XiXaia/uu*, iiaiBiuv*, miu* (Jio«J/, rtmlu (Hom.
Hinfu), oln^ufMlw*, oto^uu (from iUimi), rmeioi (Hom. trriStUi'), wtIttu
^rnre-tv'), riUw (Hom. rtXtiu), and some others thst do not lengthen tLe
vowel of the verb-stem (488).

Also otbera, such as ipfvKtt (dpn-'), Iwniu., {tirni^u, rpinv/u (732). — » is
retained In Tipaoiuu*.

b. f-eUms (from -y-ju): Totu*, 3alu* kin^t, niiw (520), iXniu (620), ml^

«uijm, ;tou 1 222. — For the loss of /; in Mw, etc., see 43, 603.

INFLECTION OF ft-VERBS
635. Verbs vhich end in <u in the first person present indicative ao-
tive, and deponent verbs in which the personal endings are preceded by
the thematic vowel, have the following peculiarities of inflection :

a. The thematic vowel usnall; appears in all tenses except the perfect and
pluperfect middle (passive) and the aorist pasalTe (except in the sabjonctive).
These three tenses are inflected tike /u-verbs.

b. The present and future singular active end in -w, -cu, -« (403). The ending
-fu appears onlj in the optative.

C. The thematic vowel o unites in the Indicative with the ending -rrt, and
forms -cvirc (4a3d).

d. The third plnral active of past tenses ends tn -t.

e. The Imperative active has no personal ending In the second person aingn-
1^ except -4-1 In the first aorist.

f. Except in the perfect and pluperfect the middle endinga -av and -«o loM
r and contract with the final vowel of the tense-stem (486 a, b). In the (^>t«live
contraction cannot take place (Xil9i-(r)D, k6rai~{f)t).

g. The Infinitive active has -tit (for -t-tf) in the present, future, and second
aorist ; -c-rot in the perfect ; and -u in the aorist.

h. Active participles with stems in -otr- have the nominative maacnlino in -h>.

626. In 627-716 the method of inflection of all tu-verbs, both vowel
and consonant, is described. The examples are generally taken from
vowel verbs, but the statements hold true of oonsonant verbs.

Forms of oi-verba which are inflected according to the non-tbematdo
conjugation are included under the a>-rerb8.

PBBBENT AND IMPERFECT ACTIVE AND MIDDLE (pABSIVB)
For the formation of the present stem see 497-631.

627. Indicative. —Vowel and consonant verbs in -w Infect the preMnt by
attaching the primary endings (when there am any) to ttie present stem in -^

(Ml INFLECTION OP O- VERBS: PRESENT 189

(-"/tO- ^'■'i ""f^ (r(f(i-tf), ipaini, XfCrw. The imperfect &ttaabee the Moond-
uy andinga to the pnseDt stem with the augment. See the p&radigma, pp^ lU,
110. For the active fDmui -m, -«i, -«, see 463.

628. -v Mid -<i ara loand in the pree. fut mid. and pa»., fnt, pert.
[•M. *-(r)ai yieldB gj (written £1 in the Old Attic alphabet, 8 a), which ia
luiiallj given as the proper spelling in the texts of the tragic poete, whereas ci Is
printed in the testa of prose aiid comedy, n was often written tor v (p) after
400 B.C., as in dyaSei tOxc'i Bince both had the sound of a close long «. It is
often impoflsible to aettle the apelling ; but poiXa \ei$ht»t, oT^i thinkett, and 0f<i
ihalt tee (from ipiv) have only the -<i forms, -n is sometimee called Attic and
Ionic in contrast to -g of the other dialects, including the Eoinri.

629. SnbjanctiTa. — The present subjunctive adds the primary endings to
the tenae-etem with the long tlivinatic vowet. For the endings -nt, -g see 488.
Thos, Xitu, -pi, -T), T-ifi^i (= TtiiA^t), rifi^ (= tiM-p)! ^ainaii4t, -qre, -hkti (from
-arri). Middle Xto-fuu, Xijj (z= X6ij-o-(u), \6^^ai; rliiS^tot (= W^if-irfcv);
^ttri'iiM0a, ^air^-aSt, ^alrv-rrat.

630. Optatlre. — To the tense-stem ending in the thematJc vowel (always o)
are added the mood-aiga -i- (-»-) or -iir- (450, 460) and the secondary peraonaJ
endinga (except -lu for -r, where the mood sign is -i; 469). In the 3 pt. we

a. The final vowel of the t^nse-stem (a) contiscta with the mood sofflx (i),
<H becoming ot. Thus \ioiiu (Xi)(m-m<), \ton (XOo-t-i), XAo"' (XAo-n-'), Xiaf/n|>
(Xn-t-f(i,r), Xteu (X«D-i-<ni).

631. Impeiatire. — The present imperative endings are added to the tfinse-
Hem with the thematic vowel t (o before -ituii). The 2 pens. sing, active has
BO ending, but uses the tense-stem instead (tb18«w, ^ik). In the middle -aa
loses its V (466, 2 a) ; \tav from Xitc-tfo, ^Inc from ^alut-ao. On the forms in
-cTwra* and -taSuaaii for -errur and -taBtdt, Bee 460, 2 b.

633. Participle. — The present participle adds -rr- to the present stem end-
ing In the thematic vowel o. Stems in -o-rr have the nominative singular in -u*.
Ulttsmaac. Xtfutfrom Xuarr-t, fem. Xltouo-afrom Xuorr-ja, neut. Xuor from XDaf(T).

See 301 a and N.

63t. A few^ a>-verbs in the present and imperfect show forms of
the ;u-conj ligation. These are usually Epic.

Ux^itax, 8 pi. J^xoTBi awiit for Sixgrat, part, Siy^tvat, iniperf. /8#tw But
these are wFten regarded as perfect and pluperfect without reduplication. iiiynii»

m D. Severer Ihiric has txv and fx" ; Milder Doi^c has tx'-^' i Aeolic has
Ixv- Bom. baa iiitntir, iidirlium, iniriiixr.

M D. Aeolic has fem. -etira in the present and second aorlBt (37 D. 3),
XlW>, Xfirwtfa.

l;.C00g[c

190 INFLECTION OF O- VERBS: CONTRACT VERBS [635

InBomepftnogeeisAaaoondaoiist (688). — n» itol (626. 6), Inf. H/uku. — Ipin
(Oittpiu') in tipiarmi. — Xoirrai lootA Is from Xierai, not from >oiu (cp. 898 a). —
otuai fAinifc is probably a perfect to ofofiw (oi~o-}. — tirdtt wound in (Bra, oird-
Ittrai Is 2 aor. — ^pu bear, Imper. <p4pTt.

CONTRACT VERBS

635. Verbs in -aa, -tio, -«» contract the final o, <, a of the verb-stem
with the thematic vowel -<>/t (-"/ii) in the present and imperfect
tenses. Thus, rZ/uu) tIiim, ■mnim irotu, SijAdbi SijXu ; tTifuuni tiinant, iroUm
Iwwaav, i&^Kaov ^SifXow. The rules of contraction are given in 49-
b5 ; the paradigms, p. 120.

•. Open fonns of -*a> verba occur in the l;ric parts of tragedy.

636. Subjunctive. — Tbe tiubjunctive adds the primaiy endingk For tba
oontractiona aee 69.

637. Opfaitiv*. — dM becomes f • 'ai and iot become or. Thus, -tio-i-^ = -vw,

-ao-hr-r = Vl'i -*i>-t-»tiff = Vfl' j -/»-i-Mt = -«'*«. -«'-'i;-» = -«'l*i -«-(-fLflr = ~ol/t^v ;
-&Hi-fu = -sifu, -o-ftr-* = -o^ifi -vo-i-HT)!' = -«lf«)i'. TbuB, Ti^i^igt (Ti>uu-Jit-F), rifiVv*
(rf^uuW^), Ti^tf (ri^uw-'q), Ttiufiait (Ti>i4Ki-4-f«tr), xaici* (twAm-o'o) , tbwit*
(iroiA>-i-To).

638. In the ttngular -ow verba usually end In -^>i>', -^, -<it, nrely la -fiu,
•^i, -V. -iw verba usually end in -tlir, -«(i)t, -olq, rarely in -atju, -011, -oi (-ol
chiefly in Plato).

639. In the dual and plural -aw verbs usually end la -$T»r, -ifrfr, -v/itr,
-yrt, -iftr, mrely m Vl'''"'t "V^l't -t'tftr, -<^ti, -iftrar. -na verbs OBiially
end in -oi^'or, -olri)', -^iju"', -o^Ci -oitr, rarely in -olirroi-, -wijTift, -olii/Mr, -oiirr'i

640. Few oasea of the optative of -«u verbs occur. In the ting, botb -ol^^
and -oifu are found ; in the plur. -wfier, -otrt, -our. For fily^iir from ^tydw Mver
see Ml.

641. Several contract verbs have stems in -a, -17, -cu.

These are tbe verba of .304, 398 with appareDtly irregular contraction, and
tpS do ; with presenla made from -o-ju, -17-iu, -ot-ju. Thus, from i^a, t^tt, (i^
and xfi^iiai, )t/i4f(ff-)ai, x/"^"' come fiS, fj'i fS 'nd W^»«"> X^5> Xpfrr"* i *"
Si^4r, ircir^r from liifi'i-ir, rcini-ft. lSp6u, ^i^iu (SOB) derive the forms in ■ and
y from lApw-, ^i^w- (Zfipt^, fiiyiSna from IS^wr^w, fiiyuff-^'). The fotma in -«v
are from tbe weaker atems Itpotr-, filyaa-.

641 D. Hum. haa Snfilior, ttiniur, rtiriianat, fiidouai, xp4v (Msa. x^fur)
utteritig oraeleg, YtXiiw, ISpiiu. Tbe verba in 3<M, except SupQ and t«>i3, hare
stems in i) and d (36 e) ; thue, In II<lt., xp^'^" ^""n XP^""' ^^^^ X/>'" lmper„
XfAlttrtt from x^. xv^T^"" br 34. Horn, and Ion. ^iu bM (Iw stMii {kt
(^f-H»)■ Hdt. baa i^>, Jif ^r, but icrSf, viian.

I;,C.00J^[C

CONTRACT VERBS IN THE DIALECTS

CONTRACT VBRBB IN THB D1AI.KCT8

642. •«■ Verba in Homer. — Horn, leaves -ow verba open 64 times, u raurim,
•iavsi, iXdci, dwSuUHwo, 7od«i(tfr, TqXtVilBrTat. When contracted, -aw verbs bsve
the Attic forms, aa i^S, i|)$f, ipi ; as rtipf maJeett trial from wtipit-(r)ai from
Tupit/iMi i 4pw didttpran from ^)pit^a)o from ipia/iai.

643. Wben nncontractad, verbs in -aw often sbow in the Has. of Horn., not
the original open forms, bat "assimilated" forms of the concurrent Towels,
«, ui, aif giving a double a Bonnd b; n prevailing over the e sound ; m, att, cut,
•or giving a doable o soiuid b> the o Bound prevailing over the a. One of the
Towels IB commonly lengthened, rarely botli.

at = (1) on : ipitff9-u = ifdasBat, d7ii-

= (2) «. : ;»H»«i<» - ;»».«&<«.

tc9t = iyiacdt.

a«=(l) «v: 4p4«T. = V*V^'-

= (2) »« : ^rdMrBa, = ,,,AacS<u, tyd-

•oi, = (l>o-: i,d.»,ra = i,,Wa. W-

M,= a) .»;M«f = *^','<t« = W».

oiw< = Viufft, dUw (from

= (2) ■, : j«wi«U. = VJoatA^

dXito imper. of i.Xi»iia^) =

ai = (l) ^i *iB' = '«k".

A\U,.

= (2) ■«= '"'v wooest 2 sing. mid.

=: (2) — ; 4pdM*. = i,0,^a, Jpd-

ovffi ^ tpJiasi. ax, here Is

derived from -cw-: 4pa-

»"■-!", 4^""--ia, iiAorri;

!• = (1) •- : ipdu = ip4«, poiw* =

or by contraction in dXiw

/h,4«r.

fromdXtUii.

K. — dMw from dXd«o wander is unique. 7f Xiiarrn is from yt\^ (Ml).

644. The assimilaied forms are used only when the second vowel (In tho
unchanged form) stood in a syllable long by nature or position. Hence hpomiur,
ifaan, dpasTo, do not occur for ^b^uv, etc. (/ifudfunii for laiiium Is an excep-
tion.) Tbe fint vowel is lengthened only wben the metre requires it, as in ^iflA-
•n-tt for ifidtrra — w — \j. Tbiia two long vowels do not occur In succeaaiou
Except to fit tbe form to the veise, as iumr\ivi for lunaijii \ but iipiiotiu, not
W^fu. When tbe first vowel is metrically lengthened, the second vowel is not
lengthened, though it may be long either In a final syllable (as in lumiAf) or
whan it represents the spurious diphthong sv from -orr- (as in i^iiw^a, SpAvri
In i^iMwo, Ipitiwi from -orrja, -am).

645. The OMimilated forma inclnde the "Attic" futut« in -au from -avw

(630); M l\6itvt (= AdoHTi), tptitia, ja/uif, Sa/i6aiiri.

646. Tbe a«s{mi1at«d forms are found only in the artiflcial language of
Homer, Heslod, and their imitators, and nowhere in the living speech. They
ore commonly explained as derived from the contracted forma by a proesM ot
'didtaction,' and as Inserted In the text for the sake of tbe metre. Thus ^i^

192 CONTRACT VERBS IN THE DIALECTS [647

peQrrn, the Spoken forma wbicU bad taken the place of origlnftl V^'i Poi^rrn,
In the text, were expanded into ip^ft, ffaburrt), by repetition of the a and s.
While the reatoration of the original uncontraoted forms U generally possible,
and is adopted in several modern editions, a phonetic origin of many of the forms
In question is still sought by some scbolsis nbo regard ipio as an intermediate
sta^ between ipia and ipS. It will be observed, however, that the forms in
(148 can be derived only from tlie unsasiui Hated forms.

647. In the imperfect contraction genersJIj occurs, and assimilation is raj*.

649. Some verbs show la for ao, as Hrrtor, rphrcar, lurUrtor, ttrtorroi,
Cp. S49, S63.

649. -OM verba In Herodotus. — Hdt. contraota -aa verba as they are con-
tracted in AtUc. In many cases before an 0 sound the Mss. snbadtute c for a
(toKiiJu, ifiar, iipolTtot). This e is never found in all the forms of the aame
verb, and the Mss. generally disagree on each occurrence of any form. — HdL
always has -^'i V/'V'i ^ ^ optative.

690. Hw verbs in Homer, --a. Hom. rarely contracta ta and » (eicept In
the participle). In a few cases tv appeara for », as rauiiair ; rarely for nu, as
TcXtvri. When the metre allows either -a and -«i, or -«i, the open forma are
sliglitly more common, ti is often neceasarj to admit a word into the verae (as
iTfiiaOm, liplKti), and is often found at the verse-end. -t-t-at, i t », in the
2 sing. mid. may become -tun, -tia, or ~iai, -la, by the expulsion of one t ; as
(iu0(idi or luMai toy fat, aUtie shine regard.

b. Kinfu, TcXcfw, from -ta-ia (Kijcea--, rtkiS') are older forms than kuAu,
TtUu. See 488 d, 624. 9tia, rXtlu, wittu ahow metrical lengthening (28 D.).

C. On -ii»wni in Horn, see OGT.

651. -<w verbs in Herodotus. — a. Hdt. generally leaves », tu, «oir, open,
exci'pt when a vowel precedes the t. in which case we find tu for » {iyroearrtt) .
In the 3 plur. -/tvri is kept except in irn((wi. For -^-« in the 2 sing. mid. we find
^D In alTfo. tr, iii, in nlems of more than one syllable, are usually uncontracted
In the MsH., but this h prolMtbly an error. Bti it ii necestary and Stir are never
writlpn otherwise. — The Ion. tv lor to, tov, occurs rarely in tragedy.

b. In the optative Ildt. baa -/w after a consonant, as »>Au, but -ol after a
vowel, as roioi^, roioi.

eo = (1) au : Sijiion-o = 8t|i4ujpTo. I 001 = o^i : iijiioid- = IijiA^v.

(2) wo : vrr6iyrTai = irniorrai. I oov = ooi ; iptouffi s: ipiwu

b. Bdt. contracts -ou verba as In Attlo. Forms with tv for ai>, as aunuiGvt,
UixaUvt, are incorrect

6S3. Dwic. — Doric (5f) D.) contracts « and mi to v', «' &nd og to p ; ■•,
■u, to a except in final syllables; ri^iS, rl/iit, riw^,
rl^i7, Ti/t^w. Monosyllabic stema have w from a + o 01
-ao have alternative forms In -cm (64S), as ip4u, ri;i/u.

fBci] PCTUBE, FUTURE PERFECT 19S

6M. Hm oontiactloiii of -at Tsibi In Doric may be illoamtod tbnsi

BeTcnr Dorlo MDder Dork

^Uu, ^i\u, ^iX£w ^<UH( ^A

^iXMfMf, ^iXbfitf, ^(XlMfin, ^tXOfitt ^(XAifin, ^tXaCfiM, ^dut^

a. iH for M is a dipbtbong. m for m la oommon lu Theocritiu. In Cretui
1 (s |r) for ( [a often expelled (Koaiiirra = /aaitforret).

655. Verba in -ov contnot m and «r to « in Severer Dorio and to w in
Milder Doric.

656. Aeoltc. — In Aeolio contract Terbs oommcnl]r paaa into tlie ^t-conjoga-

UoQ : TtfiaiM* I -Oiti -at, rtftifu'^ rl^re, rt/uiuft^ Imperfecti iri^iarf ^l/iaif irtfia, etc
tnf. rtfiiw, put, rtfUnff -arroi, mid. rtfii/uuj inf. TifiA/iMrai. &0 ^IX^/u, ^IX^/i*^,
fOtfrc, ^ilXewi, J^fXiii', inf. ^Aiir, part. ^fX«i, -crrsi. Thna 1^m< from tpiu
= AtL ipdit, tiAiiiu, ofng^u. So alBo 34'^f"i ^ pL 94'>'«"i I'll. Iit^ur. Bealdes
tbeae forma tre find a few examplea of the earlier inflection In -su, ~n/, -on, bnt
tbeae forma usually contract except in a few oaaea whei« e la followed by an o
sound (rn-ferriu). From otber tenses, t.g. tbe fut. In -^a, ^ has been traoi-
lerred to the preseot In djtrfw, ro^w.

657. Horn, has Beveral caaea of contract verbs inflected according to the fu-
eoajngaUon in the 3 dual ; rvX^-riii- (rBXiw gpoit), rpwrvitir^iir (i-^wauMw
iptak to), irtik^t-Tiir (di-ciXb threaten), i/iaprli^nir (i/ia/rriu meet); "iao "^
i sing, impert. (aiUa keep tafe). In Ibe Influltlve -q/unu, as yaiuurat (Tsdw),
Tttr^pow (rcirdw, 041), fiX4/H«( (^>^^)i ^Ofi/iitrai Uld ^o^nu (j^iu). Bnt
i^Wv luw d7;r/fUfai.

FDTnSH ACnVB AND MIDDLE (582 ff.). FUTUBB PBBFVOT
(680 ff.)

658. All vowel and consoDant Terbs in -<0 inflect th« future alike.

659. Indicative. — The fntate active and middle add the primary endings,
and ore inflected like the present ; aa \Aff«, Xfoefioi. On the two endings of tbe
Mcond singular middle, see 628. Liquid verbs, Attic futures (638), Doric
fatnres (640) are inflected like oontract verba in -tu; thus ^ai<£ ^ntHiiat, laXO
nkoSfuu, and rwaC^ui, follow ■-«& rHsD^ioi (3S6).

a. llie only tutnre perfect active from an u-verb is rtSrtiim Aall be dead
(G84), whicb ia inflected like a future active. Ordinarily the periphrastic forma-
tion li nsed : XiXniicdf tae/tai Aall hang iooud. Tbe f nture perfect passive (X(X^
racial »\all have been looted) ia inflected like the future middle. The periphrastic
forms and the future perfect paaaive rarely occur outaide of tbe indicative.

660. Optative. — Tbe inflection ia like the present; \tv^-iu, Xi)««-t->nrr. In
the i^tatire lingular of liquid verba, iir-r, -n^, -a/, in the dual and plunl -i^Qr,

I;, Google

IM PIK8T A0RI8T pfi

•i-ri|r, -l-ptr, -i-rt, -w-r, ue added to tbe Mem eDding In the themmtio vowel o ;

thna ^no-Jirr = ^nJl't ^r^B-I-fWr = ifiaroiiur. So in AUio futorea in -itu, u

^<^{te (688 d) eauae U> go : pifi^r, -^, -4ii|, pL ptfi^^r.

661. InflnitiTV. — The future inflnitive active adde -<r, aa ti^na' from X*«'(-<j>,
^Hir from ^W(r)»«j>. The infinitlre middle adds -vHi, as Uvcffftu, ^OKirAu,
from ^>^(ff)(-ff^

662. Faitldple. — The fntore participle bas the aame endings aa the pKaent:

Xllrwr Xfoowra XSmir, fhiFSr ^PBftrs ^ivBr ; middle, Xivj/icfat, ^MNifwmt.

FIE8T AND SECOND FOTOBB PASSIVE (589, 597)

663. All ?eTb8 inflect the first and seooiid future passive alike,
that is, like the future middle.

664. The indicative adds -^loi to the M«m ending In -^s- or -^o-, aa \u^
«o-iiat, ^r^o-nai. For the two forms of tbe second penon Hingulai aee A28.
The optative adds-t-fii|>>, as \i>titro<-ti.iir, ^nfr»4-f»i>>. The inflnlUiv adda-^Ssi,

a Xuf^t-cBoi, ^Mw^rireat. The participle add* -/Mmt, aa XvArri-fumi, ^r^

FIKST AOBI8T ACTTVI AHD MIDDLE (542)
669. All Towel and oonsonant a>-TerbB inflect the first aorist alike.

666. Indicative. — Ttie aecoadarj endinga of the first aorlst active were
originallf added to the Mem ending In -r- ; Ihna, Auva '^w-i, Hmr-r, Aw-fwr,
Aiw-rt, Aitf-rr. From llUivfi came fXSra (_'\ij Sfi o),*the a of which spread lo
the other forma except in the S ali^., where « was borrowed from the perfect.

a. In the middle the aeooudar]' endinga an added to the atem ending In -«a-.
For tlie Ion of t In -n, aee 465 b.

667. Snbjnncttn. — In the subjunctive the long themotlo Towel -t/^ is
BulMtitated tor tbe a of the Indicative, and theae forms ai« inflected like th4
present Bubjunctive: Xta-w XifufMi, ^rv ^ijiatm. For the ioee of « In -rai
aee466a.

668. Optative. — To the Mem ending In a the moodHiuffix i is added, making
ai, to which tbe same endlnp are affixed as in tbe present : Xlffa-i-/u = XAo-ufu,
Uo-o-l-zitrf = XwoJ/itr', ^n-i-fu = ^foifu. The Inflection in the middle la like
that of the present For the loes of r in -«o see 466 b. — In the active -tuit,
-tiM, -(ur are more common than -wt, -u, -our.

6el D. Horn, has dt^^fw, ifiiut, Cfcir. Doric has -nr, f » ; AeoUc has -q*.
UT D. Horn, has forms with the short thematic vowel, as ipiairoiur, i\y^

etri, ttiua-ljaeTt ; ito$^tiMi, i^<^tat, IXavJyiMfe, JtiXitrrrsi. In such lorms aOT-
Ist subjunctive and Intore indicadve are alike (&32). Pindar baa ^c/ur,
tiSi-n^i (4GT D.).

OM D. Horn, has both aeta of endings, bnt that hi u is rarer. In the drama ;
-wM ia very much commoner than -wt. -oit is most frequent in Plato and Xeno-

Its] itbst and second aoeist passivx 196

669. Impanttn. —The Tegnlir endingi (409) ue «dded to the stem In -aa
(or-s In liquid verba) except in the active and middle S alng.. In wliiob -er and -u
lake the [daoe ot -■ i XOvo* XurdrH, XSffot Xiirdrfw, ^xc ^rItv, «4rai ^qKlr0M.

670. IttflaltlTe. — The aorlat aetlve Infloltlve enda in ~<u, iritlch la an old da-
tive : Uw middle euda in -rBai : XOrot Xtea-vAu, ^Mt fi)M-«fat, a-X^ rXitu^fai.

671. Paitidpla. — He active partleiple adda -n- like the preHent: maao.

ntrit ttotn XSvarr-t, fern. XJrlra from Xutfirr-io, ueut. XOrar from Xwa>(r).
See SOI. The middle enda is -fwivi: 'kuv^tum, Vfid-fmot.

FIB8T Ain> SBCOKD A0BI8T PABSIVB (585, SdO)

672. All Towel and consonant verbs m -a inflect the aoriats
pasdye alike, that is, according to the fu-conjugation, except in the
mbjunctive.

a. Vowel verba rarely form aeoond aorlala Qtat are panlve In form, m ^
jCoie, Ipp6vr (808). Bnt ^tu la properly not a vowel verb (aee 603).

673. Indkattre. — Tbe bidleative adda the active aecondary endings dlTectiy
10 the tenae atem ending In -Af- (flrat aoriat) or -if- (aecond aoriat). The liifleo-
lion ie tbua like that of the Imperfect of a verb In -ixi.

OMit^ fcritq-t iXMi|-T«v Mk-rev lXtti|.Ti Mh-rt

aMi| Mti| a«Mi-Ti|* WMTit* lXM<i-ira* trlU-irm

a. For -vof we And -r from -*(r) In poetical and dlalecUo forma before which
1 baa been ahortened to < (40), thua lifiiffitr for £w"tAtrar from ipiiAu urgt.

674. 8iib}ttDctira.— The BQbJnDctlTB adda t*/^ to the tense Bt«m ending
in -it- or -•- and oontracta : Xuf ^ -gi, -g, etc., from XuWh, -^, -/p, etc ; ^fS,
-%t, -f trom fapfa, -tt%, -tf, eto.

675. Optative. — Hie optative adda -I- OT-«r-to the tenae-stem ending In
-4c- (» -C-, and oontraots. In the alngular -i^ Is regular ; in tbe dasl and ploral
-i- la generally preferred. Thus Xi^f^r from "KuSt-lii-r, ^rtli)i from ^ari4t-f,

phOD, lea common in poetry, and very rare In the oratora. Neither Thuc nor
Udt. baa -ail, -ai is rare in pniee, moat examples being In Plato and Demoathenea.
Rdt. has no caae. In ArlatoUe -oi ia aa common aa -tu. -oTer \t very rare in
poetry, in Tboc and Hdt., bnt slightly better repreaenCed in Xenopbon and the
otaion. -tttr is probably the regular form in the drama. — Hie forms In -cuf,
-f, -itar are called " Aeolic," but do not occnr In the remains of that dialect.

on D. Aeolic has -oti, -oiro, -«f (37 D. 8).

671 D. Hdt. leaves w open {alptSiu, ^niufi) but contraota tij, ig (^r£).
Horn, baa aome forma like the 2 aor, aab], of fu-varba. Thna, from Bo/irdu (Sd-
iirwt) MiMae ,* 3s/i4w, -ih|(, -ihi, -4«T(. So also ia^w (la- learn), vaT^g (rirru
tmte to rot\ ^t^ (^m jAou), r^r^o/ur (r/^w OMttM). The spellingi
«ith n {/e.g. lafMlm, Sulw) are pTOba^ It

196 FIB8T AND SECOND AORIST PASSIVE [670

Xu^traw Irom XvM-i-rnv, ^nTrsF from ^r^t-rsF, Xufci^F from XsM-l-fiiF, ^mEif

from ^F^-u-r. The inflMtton It like OiaX of the present optutre of a fu-verb.
)L«e*-[i|-* Ti9i-ti|-i' \ii<(-t-|u* nlt-^u*

X«(<-(l|^ Til>-(l)-f Xvlt-t-TttV Titt-t-m' XiAl-t-Tf Tlh-I-Tf

X*f<-(i| Tih-(i| X«tf4-n|v nleUr^v Xnh-tt-v nBt-h-v

c -(fivuF is used only In proee (but PlUo and laoeratee faare also -c^f).
-<li|r( Ib almoet klways foond tn the Has. of proee writerB; -circ occnis
only In poeti; (except from ;u-verb(i). -cuf la more common In proge than

-I^aF.

676. Imperative. — The endings of tbe imperative are added to the
tense^tem ending In -Av or -r-- Before -rrur, -97- and -if- become -8«- and
-«- (XtiMrruF, i/iarimjr). For -ri luBtead of -ffi In the first aorlat (Xd^i) see
136 b.

677. InflnitlTe. — mi la added to the tense-Atem in -6t^ or -9-: Xu04.4Bt,

678. Paitldple. — The participle adds -rr, as masc. \uStli from Xwfcrr-t,
fem. XiAura from Xvetrr-na, neut. XuMr from X0«tf(r). See 301. So ^anh, etc.

8BCOND AOEIST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE (546)

679. Most verbs in ta inflect the second aorist according to the
•Hxmjagation ; some inflect it according to the fuKsonjugation.

680. The inflection of most second aorisu of adverbs is like that of &n
imperfect of w-verbs in tlie indicaUve, and lilce that of a present in the other

UuM>v l-Me-T XCn X«t

I-Xm4-|H]v U^W-|»|v Xi*«« (424 b. 2) X&m

X(«ti Xtm ' XwfCv (Xur4-«r, 424 o) Xtfii* (X<t^>

Xtew-fMt Xim i^M X(«4-«4at X^-«4u

XmH(-|ii)* XBs-{-|ii|« XmtAv Xdov

XHr4-|uvo« XU-)u>i«t
For the loss of r in -ra in the second person singolar see 466 b,

6SL A namber of tr-verbs form their second aorists without a
thematic vowel, herein agreeing with the second aorists of ^vetbn.
Gp. j8uv p. 140. The second aorist of yt-yvi-aKia knoK is inflected
aa follows.

677 D. Horn, has -^wfoi, as inoiaSiiiitni, Ja^fumi (and it^^m.). Dorie has
-litr, Aeolic-F (iit96chit = utewHlmi).

6M D. Horn, has the inflnitivet iMiitm, dwiittr, tlniw. For faWur (Attic
Am^f) etc., iarim should be read. ~inf in HdL is erroneooa. Doric has -^i^
as fiaX^r (fikiffMm go). AeoUo hw -VC) as Xi^v

6l7] SECOND A0RI8T ACTIVE AND MIDDLE 197

683. The indicative is inflected like iimiv (p. 138) ; the subjunc-
tive, like S& (p. 138).

a. We expect lyfom, tyKiur, etc, (661), bat the abcoug stem 7n(- baa been
tnnsferred to the dual aod pluml. So alao Id Ipt/r, t^trir, MXur. — Subjunc-
dTe ^, ^gt, pg, ^^oi>t ?^^ ?^<i ^^i. On Ibe fomution of tbe BobjunoUve
Me m D.
6B3. The opUtive is inflected like SmV (p- 138).

yvstili ^fVDtmv or ipwti|T*v ipntn or yvohiTt

7in(i| Y*^(n|v or ip«iJit^ fmiia or Yvoh)va*

a. So Paiv, palraf 01 fialiiTor, patiitr or Paltifi4r. In tbe 2 plur. the Mra. of

pran miten have only -tifr* (yrtlipt, -fiaiw) ; but -ii|r< fs not attested by tbe

erUenceof vene.

684. The- imperative ia inflected like crrijtfi (p. 139),

a. In oompoaitlon Jiiyndi, iripiiei (1S8). For ^^ (from palm) -pi In
compoaitlon occdtb In poeti;, aa dxt^

685. The inflnitlTe adds -o«u, as yvSmot from yvi»««u (like itt^ku
from vnfoxu). In oompoBition SiayKumu (426 d).

666. The participle adds -rr-, as masc. yvoK from yvoyr-^, fem.
rwSoa from yvayr-ifl, neut yvdr from '}vov(t). See 301. In composi-
tion Suxyvout (426 d).

a. Before rr the long vowel « la regnlarly ahortened to o by 40.

687. The following (u-verbs have second aorists of the /u form.
Uirnfuu (AX-0-) am captured, MXur or 4Xw» (dXw, dXolifi', iXdHu, 4Xofit).
Mw (|Sa-> {TO, l|9iti- (/Jut, jJoJit', |S^ and alao -pi In oompiwitioD, ^ku, ^t)-
Mh (^»-) I'M, '/Jfui' (/}i£, pii^r, piatai, piett). Horn. ^(iirii> Imper.
nfiifuM (Tfpo-) ^<no oI<l, yvpittu poet., Tvp<tt Bom.

TrrnWicw (7«-, I"™-) tnow, (■yiMi' (Ttfl, ■yml^r, TrBtfi, ftHto.t, -ywtft).

■JiJp^cu (3p>-) *^>t, only in compoaitlon, -itfAr {-Spii, Spalrir, -J/ianu, -Jt^t),

Hdt. has ISpTtr, Sp^rai, ipit In compoaitlon.
Stu ()*-) CTiler ISur entered inflected p. 140 (Jdti, opt. Horn. Shi and USSiur for

liNfq, fra^-fur ; SOti, SSwu, «»t].

'z" ('x>-) Asm, rx^ imper.

6n D. fTMr, from fr>u''(''} by 40, la found in Pind. Hom. haa Itvr, frXav,
frru;niid. t^v». — Bom. baa ^rt)> and jSib^v. — Hom. haa p\^at, Skwni —
Snlq. : Bom. tiaa yniu i\Au, ymiyt ytv'j T^ Y'Vi fffi^ ■''"^i y^v, ynio-
fa rWl^ar, -fi^iur ^Mufur, yrii*ri ^rAnr pQnw 4Mttviir.

•H D. HcHn. haa Tni^mu, IlWat, Krd/icm, and -rriiM*.

i,vGooglc

198 FIBST AND SECOND PERFECT [SM

■rftvw (KTtff KTO-) kat, lirlr, fcrlt, frri, rrrXfur, 3 pL IrrSr 661 D, Bub].

rTinfur, inf. xrdfWKU ir^fu*, part, icrdt ; JxTd/iigr imm AUIcif (jtrdrte, n-i-

fwivt) ; oU poetic forma.
wfro/iai (t»t-, tt»-, ttb-) j(|f, poet IxTifr (xraf^*, rrdf), middle jrri^qr (■ri-

bAu, TTd/w»i), irrd, rr^St, rrQivi aie late.
t(»* (ii-) dHnA, r»i Imper.

rjtAXu In da-ovjcAXw (ffccX-, atlu-') dry up, dirorKX^xu-
rXtt' mdvrt, tat, rX^ioiiai, poetlo frXq* (t\&, rMliif, T\99t, rti^wKt, rUt),
^irv (0Ai-) andefpota, f^^ir* (f^S, ^#a(qi-, ^xu, ^Mt).
#0w (#i!-) produce, lipir imuproduetd, am (#m eubj., ^umi, #k 308).

688. The following u-Terba have In poetry (especially in Homer) aeoond

aorlats of the lu form : IDMiuu (aXo-g, aXre), iraupdw (iro^pat), dfmpl^Ku (apiit-

»0. ^ (.iv'^), ^^« C{««SX^,», rflXirO. P<PpA'<". (tpp«'), root T«<- (T^"-
ffra^wd), Stxoiuu (Mn-d), Epic «x4™ {'«Ixl». "X'tf, "X'liJi «tx9»w* ""i «'X<f-
fMivt, nx((i aad xixitfuiot; properly from xlx'ti*'), 'Xdu (drdiXit), kX^m (kXCA,
irfxXiA), jcrffw (rrffuiof), root Xfx-C''"*" I(Xd Afnunl/to fMt), Uw (X^e), oArdti
(o9ra, o^ifUMi), *iiXXu (rdXTe), rcXilfte (*irX([/iii») , r/fiffu (riptoi = r«fiHf-tfAu),
i-Xiiu ((■■Xui'), ife- (4(iirwTg Twniued), rrfiffffw (Kororririj*), vniM (trtiiair,
frvTO, fftffMRn), ^(w (i^(>iT|F), x*<* Ox^l"l'< X*»«*»")-

fX«Ts, riXro are properly first acrbta (foi iX«j«-v-ro, TaX-ff-rs), r being loot
between two consonanta (103).

FIfiST AlfD SBCOND FEBFSXn; AND PLDPEBFBOT AOITTB

(555, 661)

689. All Towel and consonant verbs in -<u inflect the first perfect
alike. Some verbs in -u inflect the second perfect according to the
•H»njugation, others inflect it according to the pi-oonj ligation.

690. Indicative, — Originally the endings were added to the atem vithont
any thematic vowel. Of this unthematic formation a few tracea anrrlve (673).
In the 2. p. sing, the ending is -i, hat origlnaliy Sa ; In the S p). -non stands for
Ko-nrt ont of Ko-n-i (100). Thus MXumi, -^i, t, r^rgfi^a, -«, -«, elc The peri-
phras^o combination occut* In the indicative (G99 a).

691. Snbjimcttre. —The perfect aDbluncUve Is commonly fonnrd periphrafr-
ticaily by the perfect active participle and a, pi, p, etc. Thus \t\utiit ly*yp»-
^ii) a, etc., XEXuitArd (yrrpa^iTn) Afuc, etc. Of the perlplu»tlc fonns only
the 1 and 3 sing,, 2 and 3 plur. are attested.

692. Inalancee of the simple perfect sabjimotive (XtXtfra, ytypiiiu) are very
rare. The simple form is made by subatituting the thematic vowel m/^ for b in
the tense-stem. Only the sing, and the 8 plur. are attested from v-verba.

693. Besides tiaa (alia) and ^mtuni) etc., AtUc proae has only aboat 16
occurrences of the simple perf. snhj., and from the tollowiug verbs only : ^rw.
Mat, tytlpa, fsua, ^rjf^jcu, Xanfiinu, XaiMvH, rirxf, ratO, ^tu, HlppOCr. baa

forma from fiifipiiaia, rtrH, ti^h. Tben an about SO oocnrrenoea In tha

1= Coo^^lc

fm] - SECOND PERFECTS OF THE HI-FORM 199

poatry. AtUc pom vriten show about 26 oaws of the periphimA from kD

694. Optative. —The perfect optative Le oommonly formed peripbntMlcally
b; the perfect active participle and <fi;r, dip, tfi), etc Thna i^Xviij (yypai>it)
rf^r, etc., XiXvK^R (yrfpa^u) fl*i«», etc. The dual la exceedingly r»re,

695. Occwiionally the simple fomu are tued (XiMm/u, ytypi^iiu). These
m lormed by adding the mood-«ign i, and the endings, to the lenee-atem wltli
Uie thematic vowel (o). All the -«r-fonna are attested ; of the -t-forma
only the 3 aing. and 1 and 8 plor.

696. Of the simple optative there are abont 26 occnrrencea In Attic proee,
ud from the following verbs only ; dvox«p<9t 'fOTaTO, tlapdkyti, wafiaSlduiu,
louo, -tcritKtu, h-^trw, Brina, Xiuddiu, icaraXiIi-u, vtufl, rivx"' 'P^PX'/'^h
ifiatrTu, piu. In the poeta there are about 16 occuirencee. Prose writers show
tbmit 106 ocoonenoea of the periphrBHtlc forms.

697. Imperattre. — The usual form of the flnt perfect ImperaUve Is peri-
[hrastlc : XeXvinkt tir A, Ivtu, etc. No clasaloal Attio wrllei uaes the simple forma,

690. The second perfect Is rare, and ocoura only In the eaae of verba which
liave a present meaning. From active verba Inflected aooording to the u- conju-
gation there occur nx't'Tr* ffupt, At. AcIl. 138 (xdo-jtw, x<>^)i Biid nip^Trrt
KrM(A,FMp.416 (ji/>ii^). Meet second perfects ^ow the fu form and have pres-
ent meaning, as TiBtaBi (Horn.) TiSrAru from SrjfviH iit, MiSt from Sitia fear,
and ittxpsx^ trom KpAtv in Aristophanes. Host such second perfects are poetical,

699. Inflnitlve. —The perfect infinitive adds -i-nt, as XtXuWnu, XtXoir^xu.

900. Participle. —The aoCOxes of the perfect participle In the nominative
■le -(/:)(£>, -vta, -(^)^, as \t\u^<it, X«Xawdt. See 801 o, d, 809.

701. Plttpeitect Active. —The ploperfect la formed by adding -ca, •«at, -te,
-rrw, ■■<r^r, -*iut, -m, -taar to the reduplicated stem. By contraction from
AtXvna, -csi, -« come the forms AiXdnj, -v -titfy In the later language a
^xead ttam the 8 sing, and waa used throngfaont, aa f\AAKtif, -m, -<i, -«ir«v,
-<f^1r^ -«fwr, -«irt, and very late -tiaar. The beat Mas. of Demosthenes have -«v
is 1 ^ng. Instead of the simple pluperfect we find perlphraatio forma, fi99 a.

BBCOND PBKPBCT8 OP THE |U-FORH

702. A few B-verba form their second perfects in the dual and
plnral without a by adding the endings directly to the stem. Herein
these forms agree with the second perfect of /u-verbs (417). In the
singular « is used.

6M S. Doric baa -^r and -ta, aa Mtfdtf = StttnUm, ■frfirui' = yriatim,
AeoUe baa -^w, aa rcfnU^r.

700 D. In the 2 pert. Horn, aometimea baa -Ar-oi for -ir-iit, as mx^iq^t, -Ctm
{aiiatt AN (Mary). In the 2 pert Hom. aometlmes has a for Attic •) In the (emi-
nbe, aa iptifiiii ipa^la from ipvp* iipttpUiiw JW). 8ee GT8. Aeolio Infiecta
the perfect participle aa a present in -uir, -«rr*f. Thus Hom. mtx\^tTtL% for
oAri^rat (lUfte teream), Pind, rc^ptnn-af (^ptn-u cAudder).

I; C00g[c

200 SECOND PERFECTS OF THE HI-FORM ■ [703

703. The second perfect Sitia I /ear dbiuU; bas the fonns of tlu flnt per-
fect I/Ioura in the Blngolax, leai fiequently In Uke plonL

Ptrftst FIsperfest ButttDDoUn

SJbun or 6«w IMoIkt\ or tttSd) Mb* (rare)

USoLKM or N&M ISaS«Ui|t or 4S«Sti|t Optitin

tttouN or GOm ttAilMi or Urfte S«8i<(<i* (nre)

SAm* ISSim impmuw

Vhrw ttf8(n|» 8ai«i(poet.)

eOiluir or Gdatmiuv WSi|mv MUmu or SiSeudvw

Win or SiS«U«-n

MOn or BtSeUSn

a«H*t, -MO, -ot or
SitoutAti -vta, -4t.

704. Other second perfects Indected Uke Nita mre the following :

a. palru (pa-y go, 1 perf. pipn^a hme gone, ttand fa»t regulu ; 3 perf. 3 pi ^

psct (poet.), Mibj. S pi. ptfiOai, inf. fitpiroi (poet. mkI Ion), put. ptp.ii
(contracted from ptpaiit) ptpSva, gen. pip&rat.

b. ilymiuu (yir-, yor ) become, 2 perf. yiyeiia am regnlar; 2 perf. part, poet

1«Yih (contracted from 71701*1), yryOaa, gen. yijiirM.

C. tr^^Kv (0av-, 9ra-) die, 1 perf. rf$niKa am dead regul&r; 2 perf.dn. rMraror,
pi. TUtaitir, T^trart, Ttlrari, 2 plup. 3 pi. irMna'ar, 3 perl opL rcffmliT'i
Imper. rtfriru, lot. rcflntnu, put. ntfxtit, -cOra, -c4i, gen. -*urn.

d. hma {ft-feuc^) am like, apptar (Ik-, tU-) hu the ^ forma f0i7/i(r(poet.),
«Qa«'i for ioix-v-iai (poet, uid in Flato). fowa {iifKii plup.) has aJao lli«^
foil. fomiB; ioltti, tolimiu, Amr/nu {tUinu poet,), haait (ttxiit also in Plato) .

C EpdfW (cpBT-) CTVOut, Sperf. Wipa-ya as preeent, Imper. iE^iipij(lfi and mi[pd7cT(,

a tlieiiiatic form (both In Aristc^.).

705. Other Terba with second perfects of the fu-fonn (chiefly Homeric) are :

Xxrys (aw»X*)i /ScfttAr™ (fltPpOra), ^<fp» C*7P*7«fw). MxoM" ((AiSXi*f«' ) -

708 D. The root of SAia Is jf i-, strong forma Sfti^, I fat-. Horn, hu ilt, tier
fearedjfted; for USoma, BUia be has JdSgucs, ttlSia, etc (once iiJlairi). Here
tt is dne to metrical lengthening. ItlSv, a present in form, ia really a perfect
for i«-Jfo(i)-a.

7M a. D. Hom. hss 3 pi. ptpHvi, Inf. ptpiiur, part, ptpaiit, fitpauia, gen.
fitPaOrat i 2 plup. pdpaaat.

b. Hom. has 7eTdaT( and Yrydju-i, inf. ytyiiut, put. 7t7aiit, 7c7avia ; 2 plop.

c. Hom. TiSraSi, Ttftiiurai and retrAittf, rttfnrdi -qurai and -irtrii, fem.

d. Hom. Imperf. t\ti, 2 perf. 3 dn. JFTrrar, 2 plop, tifni flm-if*, fclcwoF, part.
jHiih ((biii « 264), <(jnii(i and ATnu (cbiicuiu Z 41B) ; mid. JfTjcr*, n'lTTa. HdL
has bIm, o(Kii(.

Ill] PERFECT, PLUPEEFECT MIDDLE (PASSIVE) 201

tilBn (fmiaiif), wi^x" (v^oo-fc), rtlBti ^iriwiBiiMr), rtrra (rfWTiii), root So-
Uam (Maih), niOt rXo- (rfrXa>ur, rtrXolqr, r^XaSi, TtrXifumi and TtrMpar,

PEEFBCT AND PLUPBEFBCT MIDDLE AND PASSITE (574)

TO6. All vowel and consonant verbs in -<o inflect the perfect
middle according to the /u-conji^ation.

707. IndicatiTS. — The perfect middle ie lafleotad ^y adding the primuy
middlo endings directly to the tense-stem, herein agreeing with the /u^ODJaga-
tion. The pluperfect adds the secondary middle endings. In vonel verbs the
brmulon Ib aimple, oh in XAi^;iu, tKt\6-iit)r. But in consonant verbs, the con-
sonant U the end of Che stem comes into collision with the consonant at the
1)^nning of the ending ; hence certain eaphonic changes described in 409.
The peiipbiastio form occurs in t^ 8 pi. and sometimes in the 3 dng, (690 d, e).

a. Stems in r avoid the forms -w-tai, ~r-aii; Ihus, from ^(tu, instead of
rl^prn, tri^am the pedphrastio rt^aanirvi •!, IjaSa Were probably used.

708.

periphra

709. From two verba, whose perfect stem ends in ir-(a), the simple forms are
coiutnicted. vrdAfuu (rra-) acquire, perf. t^trtnuu potUM (1M6), forms Its
tabjanctive by adding the thematic vowel -"/if- to cf-icra ; thus iH-«-d-w-»ai =
lerrS^wi, iw-rrd-q-iriu = nrrj, n-rrd-if^u = nerval, etc. — ^ufiv^VKW (m^-)
remind, perf. /Uitnuuu remember (1946) ; iti-iiri-i*-imi = ik/iw&iuu, luiant-ii-iigBa =
ffffd^ictfo. With ttmHiiat, fK^rQfuu, cp. irrHiMi, p. 187. The periphrastic rirrif-
liim A, iiiiinj/UnH S OCCOT.

710. Optative. —The perfect middle optative is commonly formed by Hit
periphrasis of the perfect middle participle and (f^*, diii, ef^, etc. Tbos X*Xv-
frfm «fi(ii, etc.

711. Some verbs add 4-iiv', -a-f-ftirr to the tense-stem (TOQ). — a. rrioiuu
(«■«-) acquire, perf. tiKTiiiiai pouett (1946) ; opt. tturtt-t-iiiit = Ktur-iiiiir, jhit^
H* = mrr^o, mmM-TB = nir-^ro. Less fiequent and doubtful are tttTtfiiiiw,
-^, -vro, -ifiit6» from «icT^-»-f-/iij», etc

b. luiirfrica (/im-) remfnd, pert iii^irTuuu rsmember ; opt lu/irtti-iair = »«*wif-
iii|», fK^iHK-ffo ~ *«**»S», /M/iint-I-T-o = fK»iriro, etc. The forms lu/tn^iair, -<ft,
■yra, etc., from ^^inr-<-t-fiitF, etc., are uncommon and suspected.

e. laUw ((a\f-, «Xif-) call, perf. xiitXiiitai am coiled (1946) ; opt. miV^J-W.
etc = iwXjhcq*, hkX^, mcXpre, icn'\iiie8iL,

d. |MXXh (/SoX-, |9Xt|-) throw, perf. 8ui^^i7*«i, opt StafitfiKiirei.

N. — The forms in -i(>iqF, etc., have the fu-fonn; Ihe doubtfol -flfiifr, etc.,
belong to tbe w-conjngation.

TM D. Hdt hM luiimiiitBa, vid this fonn may be read in { 108.

711 D. Horn, has XiXOn « 288 =: X«X^4-rp (op. SalrEro). PiaA. has ft^tMiaro.
li^iuaw In Xoi. Is from itiitrtiuu.

.o..|c

202 BO-CONJUGATION ' [th

712. ImpentlTe. — In tbs third persoD Blnpilar the perfect meaning la itga-
Urly retained, as tlf^Biii let It have l>een said. The 2 alng, uid pi. are genently
found only in Ihe caae of perfects with a present meaning, u M'fqrM remevt-
btrl ^it Ti^Afiy,eBt do not be afraid/ rtrauro ttopi See6«8.

ft. The dual and 3 pi. are npparently wanting. The 2 Blug. in -mo from stemt
In -I doee not occur. For wl^ana, rttpae/Unit la8i was probably used.

T13. Attia prose writers have dn^^Xi^Su, iraunplirBu, dp^Su, iirHieBu,
ipeHtr&Uf Ktiao, -nrlffBUf k^jct^o, //^nrrftrBt^ rtTaUrfiVf rrwtpii^^ rrwoL^tt^ Ttwpd-
«Hi, rntiifSa, wttfii^Bt, rrrix^u, TcreXfi^Bu.

714. Instead of the simple forms of the imperative we Snd the periphrastic
use of the perfect participle and faA, Iffru, etc. (699 g). ThiiB el/nuUrot Irru =

715. InfinitiTe. — The perfect InflnltiTe adds -cBai, tm \i\6-a8au Consonant
■tetoa lose the cr by 103, as XtXitr^ffiu, wnpaxBiu (400), i\^\iyx9iu, tc^fAu
(407).

716. Participle. — The perfect participle adds -/i^roi, as \t\ii/UpM, XcXxwiJioi,

wrwpajiUiat (406, 407). On the r of re^nuf^m see 409 d.

SECOND CONJUQATION OR VERBS IN HI

717. Verbs in -/u usually have do thematic vowel between the
teuse-Btem and the pereonai endingB in the present system (except
in the subjunctive). The name " fu-oon juration," or " non-thematic "
conjugation," is applied to all verbs which form the present and
imperfect without the thematic vowel.

71S. Of verbs ending in- -/u the following tenses are inflected
according to the ^u-conjugiition (except in the subjunctive) : all
non-thematic presents and imperfects ; all aorista passive ; all per-
fects and pluperfects middle; those second aorists active and middle
in which the tens&^tem does not end with the thematic vowel ; one
verb (jlimjiu) in the second perfect and pluperfect active.

719. Certain tenses of verbs ending in -/u in the first person pres-
ent indicative active, or in -pai in the present middle (and passive)
when not preceded by the thematic vowel, are inflected according
to the grconjugation. These tenses are : all futures, all first aorists
active and middle, most perfects and pluperfects active, and all sub-
junctives. Verbs in -vvut regularly inflect the subjunctive and the
optative according to tne at-conjugation. Furtberraore, the 2 sing.
ill the present and 2 and 3 sing, in the imperfect active of certain
verbs, and some other forma, follow the lo-conjugation (746).

72a Verbs in -fu add the endings directly either to the verb-stem
(here a root) or after the suffixes yvoi r^ Hence three classes are
to be distinguished.

717] m-CONJDGATION: PRESENT SYSTEM 208

A. Boot olasB ; aa ^m^ ^Vi verb-stem (and root) ^, ^. This
class often shows reduplication In the present and imperfect, as Si-
Sw^ give.

N. — Two verbs have vertHstema ending in a consonant: ttiU am (tv-iu) and

B. -w class } as &i'ic-vu-;u show, verb-stem Shk-, present stem $cm^

C. A few verbs, mainly poetical, add w, r^-i as truS-n^/u vn^-w
licr scatter, Scifi-i^fu Safi-ra-fuv, subdue.

731. Deponent Terbe without the tbematlo vowel an Inflected according to
tbe fu-oonjugatlon.

PRESENT SYSTEM

732. Verbs in -^ belong to the first or simple class (604) or to
the fourth class (62^.

FIRST OB SIUPLB CLASS

723. The present is made by adding the personal endings directly
to the verb«tem, which ia a root. Tnis verb-stem may be used in
its pure form or it may be reduplicated.

A. Some verbe of thta clasa witli no active bave a verb-stem of more tLan one
syllable (nsnaUy two HjlUbles).

724. TTiiTediipUcated PreMBta: tl/U (ir-) am, itia (t-, tt-) go, ijitcu (V-) »%
iitl lag (4 laid, 3 ling.), itTiuu (»>-) lit, ^ig^ (0b-i ^) KtS, X/"t it ^ ntMuarf
(79S) ; and poet. 1 iffu (dtr-) Mow.

725. Depooenta. — Afo-fuu (and dYda/wi) aimirt, iioriuu <^pear, SIi-imi fiee,
makefiee (cp. ilti), Sira^iiat am able (737 a), irl-VTo-iiai under>taHd,tpa^iuu love
(poet, for ipim), trroftai fit (tate, see 726 a), jcp^/ui-fuu hang (Intrans.), 6ro-iian
\***U, vtnrpat (poet, bj-fonn of xtraiiai) fly, trpii/nir bought a second
aorut, ^TtB/uu tifflna,

a. Other such foims are Horn, l^iot (^fa^uu) itrive, ^pv/mi and tpv/iai retcut.
Ion. Ulb^u talcA. ^(mfrat D 248 owes lu if to sach non-present forms as

726. Bednplicated PreMnts. — IfS^fu bind (tare for 3/u), Sli^iu (Jo-. !»-)
gire, lifiu (^, 4-) tend, br-^m (rro-, vnt-') eel, ntxpti" (xpo-i XP^) lend, twlmnu
(iim-, irf-) betffil, rl/irX^u ('X*^ '^v) J^t rlitrniu (rpa-, rpii-) bum,
rWq/u (fc-, ftf-) plaet.

a. Also poetic ^l^>u (^a-, ^) jro, in Horn, ^fiii etriding, >l-fit;uu (also
Ion.) leek, for It-l^^^iot by 116 (cp. f^A# Mcit)! IXw" C^^t t^i- for ri^Xo-,
#i«X«-) am proplOoM. Iwthuu (late) for rMifwu j(y Is an analogue of Irrafuu
and la not properly rednplicat^d. rtrfniiM bore Is late.

727. Verba In -^reduplicate with 1 In the present. 6ee414,447. W-ft-rX^pi
and rt-ft^^fu may lose the Inserted nual in compounds of tr, but only when
if takes the form Jft- ; aa iiarlwXiuu, but iir^ia-\)uta: Doric haa sfTxw- In
4-d-r^.iu tbe rednplicatlon takea place after a vowel (verb«tam ira-, '»¥-)•

204 Ml-CONJDGATION: PRESENT SYSTEM [7*8

«. R«daplication to In plaoe only in preaent and impeifeol; but Horn, hu

liSiiroiitr,

FOHBTH CLASS

72a Most /It-verbs of the fourth daaa add -*v (after a vowel,
~ryv) to the verb-stem.

729. Verb-HtemB In -a : api-nvfi* mtx, Kpt/id-riviu hang (lutrans.), reri-

tru/ii ipread, eKiSi-'tviu scatter.

730. Verb-Bteme In t (for m) : l-rniia (in prose iiL^tf-nviu) clothe, apt-
wm/u satiate, a^i-rmiu extiagitiah.

731. Verb-BMms in u ; fti-vrEMi gird, ^li-rrviu ttrengthttt, rrpii-nvtu ipread.

732. All the forms in -vrvfu Htarted from verb-atems ending in ir : f m^u from
h-nv-tu, r^rrviu from apta-rv-iu, fiinvfu from ^-rv-iu. All the Other Terlis
are analogues of these.

733. Verb-«tenis in a consonant: iy-rv/u break, Sp-niiuu earn, StU-tviu
ihow, ttpy-niu {= rfpY") 'hut in, itfry-w/H yoke (iro)iiTti~iviu often written
-rrlrnifu (= jtrclH*] kill, iHly-rv/u (miawritten /ily-iviu') mix, -aly-rviu (= -ctyia')
open, SKKv/u (i\-t} destroy, i/ii-niiu {iiii-t-, iiiro) neear, 6iiipy-rv/it viipe off,
tp-niiu rouse, w-iy-tv/u (ray-, 1177-) Jtx, r)4y-niu (once, In iarkiyruaSai Thuc
4, 125; op. iXiSttu), Trip-rv/uu sneeze, ^iJt-w/u (^n7-> ^ijT-i ^lO^) break, vrip-
miu »preod, #pJ7->S^ (= ^drru) inclose,

734. Foetlo verbs: dl-wfui take, i-niu complete (iniv), tx-nttM am
troubled, yi-rvum rejoice, Sal-K'/u entertain, tal-ni/iai excel, Kt-niMi move my-
Mlf (cp. Kiriu), ipiy-rviu reach, rd-nuai etretch, with ru carried into Other
tenses (toi^b), Ti-rv/iai (cp. Epic rtru from ri-r^-u) better rtlruioL, chastitt.

739. The verbs whose verb-stem ends in a liquid or nasal often form tbe
tenses other than the present by adding « or a, as SXXD/u (from iXwfu) fiXcvo,
jX<6X«a (iX-«-) , iiitviu Siiiooa (i»i-if-) .

736, nrfu-verba form only the present and imperfect according to the lu-
conjugation ; with the exception of afii-rmiu, which has 2 aor. lrfii)T. The
2 aorist passive and 2 future passive are rare, aa ^i^rii/u Ippiyifi iicpa,y^oiteu.
fifryrC,- ttiyi,'.

737. -vifiu. class, A few verbs add vtf in the singular, va- in the
plural, to the verb-stem. These verbs are almost entirely poetical or
dialectical ; and show by-forms in -vam. They are :

SiiLniiu (8a^t>i£u] tuMue, Klpnjui (Kiprdui also Epic) mix, ttpliiHiiu (mlswritten
icp^lirtiiu) suspend, ripnuu sell, rh-nnu (rrrniu) fpread, aiclSniiu (ajod KlSnifu)

736 D. From verbs in -rSfu seeond aorlsts middle an formed in Horn, by
only three verbs : iiidytvia (oommonly written ftyAiu) nUx (/ucrs, tpw/u rouae
Aprt, r^rrivu j(x nrArifxro.

744] INFLECTION OF HI-VERBS 205

a. Only lo the middle ; iiAtmmt JtgJU, rlXpofiai (riXidu) approach. Id Si'
■Wui am aEiI«, « has grown fast (cp. JvMrif).

73& Stem Oradatlon. — Verbs of the root class show in the stem
Towel a rariation between strong and weak grades in the present
and imperfect indicative active. The singular has the strong grade,
the dual and plural have the weak grade. The optative active and
most middle forms have the weak grade.
a- i| 8UtiDg (original uid Dor. a), & weak ; ^id ^tfiit, t^n* t^a/uri br^pt

b. i| Strong, tweak: tIStuu tlBtiur, triSTii irlBtiitr; hguUiitii.
e. m strong, o weak: iliuiu SlSaiitr.

d. iiatrong, i weak (cp. Xclru fXinv) : tliu vill go, t/jtw. The grades ii, o^ l
appear in eUi3, subjonctlTe ol oTSa know, pi. br/wv for fS/uv (709).

739. In tbe aeoond aoriat IffTijr / ttood the atrong form boa been carried
from the Hingolar through the dual and plural of the indicatlTe, llie atrong
stem occniq aJao in tlui imperative (vtQA, ar^ri) and inflnitive (o'T^mi).

740. The second aorlat Inflnitive abowa the weak atem: Stirai from M-iku,
SwHi from St-*rv. Cp. 469 N. vt^mi ia, however, from ar^-cfai (460 c. N.) ,

741. A few root veriw retain the atrong grade ii throughout. Thua, poet.

f qfu blow S^/ttr ; iirrtt ia from dqrrci by 40 ; ll^fuu Hek (poet. Sl{«ireai ia from
il{i>liaiy, vlftw'Ktiiu fiU 2 aor. iim'Miitrir, opL ^/urXtf^if.

742. Verba adding ni ahow the strong form of the verb-atem in the preaeut.
iin-rv-iu break 2 aor. paaa. ippAyiir, luly-tii-iu (miawritten iitiniu) mix 2 aor.
paaa. t/tiyi', piiy-rv-iu yoke 2 aor. paaa. ^^ih^f.

743. The ending n variea between Strong rS and weak fS, Thua iilnrviu

tficrflfici', iSwUrOi iStUri/ui.

INFLECTIOM OF MI-VEBB8

744. Verbs in -fu differ in inflection from verba in id in the present
and second aorist systems and (rarely) in the second perfect system.
Verbs in -^i have the following peculiarities of inflection:

a. Tbe endinga ->u and -«-i (for ori^nal -ri) occur in tbe pieaeot indicative

active: rtBrf-iu, Ti$it-ai; ^tf-id #ip-ff(.

b. Tbe S plural present Indicative active baa generally tbe ending -aei, from
t-arrt, as TiSiivi, leriai- So in the 2 perf. active tarSai.

C The .3 plural of active past tensea haa -aar : iriBt-fur.

d. The imperative ending -Bi is aometimea retained : ^%-el, ar^i ; aome
fonns never had it: rlBa, ttri).

t. The middle endings -vat and -ae regularly retain a : rlSt-jv, irtdt-aa.

N. — But not in the subjunctive or optative ; and usually not in the second
aorist; aa rifff for TiMir-<rai, n*a for nBi-l-re, (#ou forlfc-e-o.

t Hie infinitive active has -wu : rM-rm, StS6->ai ; the 2 aoriat acUve haa -•»«■
twelj : etUot for M-enu, SaSm for Unrat,

.oogic

INFLECTION OF MI-VERBS [74S

'- Imve the nomlnatlTe slag. mMC ia

745. ForiuB of -lu verbs which are inflected according to the
thematic conjugation are included under the Second Conjugation.

746. (u-Terb8 may paas Into tbe w inflection elsewhere Lbnu in the subjaoo-
Uve. ■. Verbs in -rOiu often iiiQect the present and imperfect active (not tht
middle} froni a pre«eDt In -riu; u Stuttiv (but UBualt; Sittni/u), Stutrttu, ttu-
fitt, inperf. ittiKroor, -n, ~t, etc. ; Imper. ttUn/t, int. Itucrini', part Snurtur.

b. ri^iu, trriiiu, Ifiwfu, Iq/u, ete., show BOme u-forms in pres. (and Emperl.)
htdic. opt. Imper. and InSn. ; but the formB riMu, lariu, SiSiu, \iu, do not occnr
in the 1 «lng.

c. In the present and second aotlst optative of TlBtnu and l<itu there ta a
tiansltlon to the u.«onjugatlon bat not In the 1 and 2 singular. The accent U
differently reported: (1) as iFlhepi«sentSwereri0fci,Uu; ('2) aa if the preeenta
were rtSu, lu. Thua :

Active : d^teiTC for i^tZrt, i^ur for d^cur. — Middle : TiMVe, twi9oliu0»,
avrSoira, iriStSwra (also accented rlAiiTa, iwWoirra) ; rpotiTO, rpMtr$i, Tpooirrt

(alao accented rpioiro, rpAouTB), Hdt has -Mhtd and -tfEire. The form is
•oire tor -tho occurs especially In Plato.

d. The Hu. vary between t^SHimi and rWu/ui, dvoS^fut and iriftiiiai (434 1).

e. Some other fu-verbe show alternative w-torma, aa nitwXia, -tu (rl^rX^fu),
rarpia (rl/twpiiiu), Horn, iyitiiai (_iyx/iai), and tUafiat (IXt||u). So oft«n with
-milM verba (737), aa 9a^ and Sd^n^t, iKlprS and npfdt.

PRESENT AND IMPERFECT ACTIVE AND MIDDLE (I'ASSIVE)

747. Present Indicative.— a. The primary pereonal endings are added to
the atem with the strong form In tbe singular and the weak form In tbe dual
and plural.

b. In the 2 sing. rlAjt, ftp, torQi, StfurGf, etc., <r has been added tA the Stem.
This r is obscure in origin, but cannot be derived from -ri. rifcit is tare.
C. Bring. r(*T»., IffTije-t, etc, with -Ti for -Ti(4fl3o).

d. 8 plur. TiMdtri, lirra^t, etc., from Ttet-am, Uri-am (483 d).

e. For the retention of r in rlS^^ot, etc., see 406a, b, and N. 2.

f. tlSa/tat in the middle present and Imperfect ia used only In comporition, aa
iroSitoiuu. But the simple form occuia in the pasalve.

746 0. The tragic poeia never have tbe w-torma ; tbe poeta of the Old Comedy
seldom ; those of the New Comedy often have the w-fomis. — Plato usually has
-niri. Hom. has ffl>vn>ai> (and {i^nwa*', &prvat, fijuw, i/inrfrw, etc). HdL
uaually keeps the ^-forms, but has some w-forma in 2, 3 sing. 3 pi. present
indie, and part., and 1 sing., 3 pi. imperfect. Doric usually has the w-fonns;
Aeolic has fnhw, and Sunr infln.

747 D. 1. Horn, has rf^ir^, rUiiiri and riSti, riSttffi ; MoU and tiioirfa, (1-
Sur\ (usually) and Jilor, aitaOn, ^ttt'^i from ^iryn^Frt, Oo't (Aqr go and tUi
they are. On bravKt see 496. Hid. iuAfiran from ^idfiratm.

,= Cooiik

nO INFLECTION OF HI-VERBS: FRESENT 207

T4a bnperfect —irWtu irtfiti, ISlStv iiltovt itlltv (for iSa«f, -m, •»> are
Iheouitlc fonns (746 b). For Uia imperfect of Siraiiai ttnd ^iarofuu see 466 b,
^. 1. For the retenUoD of r in irlBtro see 4«i6 b.

749. SabjnnctlTe. — Attic Ti$ii, etc., are derived by contraction from the
(onoB of the weak stem to wbich the tbemUic vowel u/q baa been added. Tbns
tiWb, -^i, -fy, TiBiuiur, -iir'-i -if" ; !i44u, -i^t, -AUi iiiiuiur, -Ji)T», -Uut. laru
is derived from Im-iu. See 748 b. Verba in -w/u regularly intlect the Bubjnnc-
life like w-verbs ; iiutria, -iyt, -i^.

a. Similarly Ihe middle (paMive) forntB are derived from riMtr-^uu riM^(f )a(,
etc, iMtt-jLti SiJtiir-(a'}ai, iariu-iuu laTirf(a)at, etc. For the loss of a lu htu
we 4fl6a. -miu verba ia&ect the mid. BubJ. like \baiuu.

b. I^Kfiu am able, twlaraiiai understand, Kpi^a^m hang, and iyaitai admirt
put o/q in place of the stem-vowel so thai there is no contractioo ; iiniiiai, Sfrp,
Hr^at, luniiuea, etc. So, too, twpiinitr, Tpfufxai (T6T a).

e. Traces of -vTiu in -riifH verbs are very rare : fi^rirai Hipponai IS; cp.

^UtaSirriTtu K Vh. T7 b.

TSO. Present Optatire. — The optative active baa the secondary endings
■nd the mood sign -iif- In the aingnlar, -i- (-«- 8 pi.) In the dual and plural. In
the dual and plural the longer (-i^) forma are rare. Tbna TiBtlt/r (TtSt-ht-'},
TiBiI/ar {TM-i-iitr), laraliir (lirro-lir-r) lirraur (lirrd-ic-t). The shorter fonna in
dual and Iduial occar in poetry and prose, the longer forma only' in prtise.

a. The middle (paaslve) has the secondary endlnga and the mood sign •<-
throughout; rifcffiqr (ritfe4-/iiir), lirraJ/njf (Iffrn-l-fii)*), laraliitBa {ljTB-t-iti6a),
Ii&urre (Siji-i-rro). On tiBoTto, etc.. Bee 746 o.

b. The accent follows 424 c, N. 1 (ti0cito not rlflnro). But the verba of T4eb
aieeicepUonal: iiraa Siraa-o ; and SO dnio Ahito fromdrln)^ benel!e(424c, M.2).

?51. Present Impeiative. — t10» and Sllou are formed (cp. woUt and i^Xsv)
from rOt-r, Slia-t. Urn) and itUru Bbow the atrouger stem forms.

For the middle endings and the retention of r, see 460. 2. a. — On the forms
TiMiuvar for Titirrar, riBiriurar for tMhSut, see 486. 2. b.

2. Hdt. has T10EI TiBiisi ; IsT^ is doubtful ; iiSaU, JiJoT, JifoOri, Im-c Itb-i, -t^i
KoA -ritual. Middle; -aroi and -aro (Imperf.) for -rroi, -m In rif^ariu ^iMaro,
wT&Tsi Urtero, iurAiTu Jitiv^rg. -aT<u,-«Ta have been transferred from the per-
fect and pluperfect of consonant stents, such aa leypiipiiTat, tytypditiaTD (430 f),

3. Doric has tirrSfu, and a for 17 in all tensea (o'Tdru, (rrcura, frrsv); -ti in
8 ting. tIB^i ; ~m in 3 pi. rlStrn, SlSnrri.

4. Aeolic has rtdtit, tISii, tUcuti ; riTTai, foTa ; StSat, llSu ; H/itai,

741 D. Horn, has ^10(i, MMew, iSlSou. — Hdt. has hrcpirl^ca 1 sing., illSmir,
flUttv, trrd and drlo-rT) (both in Maa.). — In poetry -f occurs for -o-av as rlfcv,
briv, tlSw (464 e. D.}.

74B D. Dor. has riW», -4ioiu>, bat contracts « -t- 1; to q ; pi. JiJulm (and
rVifrri). Dor. has Iiiro/wi, JariTot; Hdt. ^flrTijTu, ^trr^WFrai, Juv^WFrcu.

750 D. Horn, has the ^fonne JoitOro and Joifdara, Plato has rtri^o.

TBI D. Hon. has Irrq and ■ia^(«'Ta, JiJIwA, ^/irfi-Xirh, l/itv^i, (^mVi, torws and
trroo. tWUv, brw occur in the drama. Pind. has afi« (active).

.oogic

908 INFLECTION OF HI-VEKBS: FUTURE, AOBIST [73s

752. pRMnt InflaitlT*. — The aotire mUU -ku, Ha middle -vAu. S«Ic(v>u
ftdmiu the form Stun^-f.

733. FieMnt PuUdpl*.— The tcdve addi -rr-, the middle finoi. Tbiu
riMt (r(0*-iT-t), rigtiva (jiit'iT-ta) ; nM-/itivt. For >«ic*4« wa find hutiriwr.

THE FUTUBBS

754. The tuturee of verba ia -fu do not differ in formatirai and
infleotdon from those of verbs in -tt.

dtlfo^uit, itixHiniiM, S*Stl(aiMi (l&te) or JfAetT^t^mf Irofui ; iitiytviu : ^ulfit,
^X^'*"'< /UYi^v^uu (poeL), iup*HeiMi (poet.) ; r^ni|u; ■'4(*'i rsT^vofw.

a. jrHtM i> tli« only fuloie perfect from a ;u-veTb (5tti).

FIBST AOBIST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE

755. The verba ri^/u, [i)/u, SlSu^ form the singular active of the first
aorisl in -r-a, thus, (^m, IShko, )('">' Tlie fomu-of the aeoond aoriat (TG0) are
generally used In Uie dual and plural and in the other moods.

a. The form in k rarely appears outside of the singular, chiefly In tlie 3 pL,
as (iwmr (— ftoraf), less froqueDtly In the 1 and 2 pi., as ISAtatur, -ar*.

b. That K was not a suffix but a part of an alternative root appears from *
comparison of ^k- in fffqjra and perf. rMfica wmiys^ la flcL

C tvTtiiu has tirrtira I let, placed (mid. Irriiriinir), to be distinguished from
Saor. firrqr Ittood.

i. ifi^itiniir ia an-AtUc ; liriit^r (in oomp.) is rare and probably found on);
In the Indlc. ; Mwdjuq* it very late.

BBCONC AOBIST ACTIVB AND MIDDLE

756. Indicative.— TfA)/u, tnia, BlBv^ use the short grade forma in dnal and

plural active: ISt^or, t-4ii-iiir, Itt-nt ; O^ot, thitr, a-aar (tot l-i-Tor,^^.);
tSe-luy, tSe-rar. In the singular the x-forma, f9i)Ka, 4"i Huta, are used,
brtim has Irrti,. Iimii, Urn (for ivntr, 464 o), lar^iur, ete. (p. 138).

a. vfihniu exiingiiUh is the only verb in -rEfu forming a second aortat (IcPv,

tfiS, rjJflt)*, iT^St, v^fw, aptlt).

7BS D. Horn, has ~iitrat or -m preceded by i; In d^^vu d^rai from Stuu blou,
Ti#4fHMu, inx4;tfni and ax^m M from slxirfu. Also Iffri/urai (and Irrd^i).
IkvyrAxrat (and {myriittr, once {hry>4»u')- -*"' ^f^' ^ short vowel, aa riMiur,
titifKv (once iiJoGfoi). Doric haa -riBtiaw, Sitiiut. Theognla has tiA», rvmU-

TBS D. Horn, has ri^/uvai E 84,

TBBD. Hom. haa f»q«i>', riwitai', <»(«;«>, »4Mro; Hdt »F*f*arrs; Fbid.

7B6 D. Horn, haa older -* for -<raw In forlr (he oses firrq^ar abo). Dor. bw
Uir, IrrSr, Hot. For the iterative tri^xt, ti^xot aee 4G6. 1

Hr] inflection of W-TSRBS: SECOND A0RI8T 209

b. The middle use* the weak stems -ft-, -i-. So- in t-6i-iia,t, -ti^,,r (tor i^iair'),
i-th-imr (only in coniposiUoa). For the Iobb ala \a-at (JlSev, liou) see 46S b.

C. In prose the on); uncompounded eecond aorists middle ue trpidniif bought
(pre*. Ar/aiuu) ftnd di^i/t derived benefit (6rlr<iiu). ir^ntir keeps i| (poet, tniao,
irilitrat). IrTi);u does not make Che form iaraii^r.

757. Second Aoriat SubjunctiTe. — AU the forms of the 3 oor. snbj. are doe
to contr&ctioii of the thematic yonel with the weak Hiem-vonel. Thus 9&, etc,
from Wh, Mgi, Btji, Btufitr, etc. ; &, etc., from fu, hQt, luat ; Sa, etc., from iliu,
J*Bt, S^ ; «T(5, etc., from ^tAij, arfjii, etc., with e from ^ before a Towel. Cp. 882.

a. ^puljiqi' has ir^fuu with "/, In place of the final vowel of Qte stem
(749 V).

758. Second Aorlat Optative. — The forms o{ the optative of the second
aorist are made and inflected like those of the present except for the reduplica-
don. Thus, hi the active i M^r (fc-Ii|-»)i cJ-"iii» (irTo-lif-i-), Seijuw (_ii-i-iur},
tour (S6-ie-r). The shorter forms are preferred in the dnal and pinral, and
poetry has only these ; prose admits either the longer or the shorter forms.

a. In the 2 pL cases of -of^t ( Mirrt) are more nnmerous than -ere ; but Qt^
usually lack metilcal warrant

b. Second aorists of stems in u lack the optative fn Attic.

e. In the middle: etlimt (0«4-^)rr), Sof^ir" ('«-<-/"l>')t ->>>")>' C'-'-f'))')- ^"^
M^kOb see 746 C. For the accent of rfilaie see 424 o, N. 2.

799. Second Aoilat Imp«atlT«.— On 9i-t, BA-t, l-i, see 466. 1. b. These
Terbe abow the weak form of the stem (fi^-ru, Bi-rrur). rrrtr;u and r0inviu have
-A In rr^L, r^^-A. For vr^i the poets may use -vtb in compodtlon, as ^riffrii
Maitdoff.

a. The middle adds -vd, which loses its v after a short vowel, «s in teP for
$^», SeS for Si^o, rplu (and poet, r^lo-ffo). «- Is not dropped alter a long
Towel (dnfTo)- Cp. 46e b, N. 2.

C D. Id poetry: trrdnnit (prose WrrVv') from riraiuu fig; Hom. rX^ra
Vproaehtd, t§\fTa tea* AU (others, 688).

TS7 D. Hie BDbJancUve shows tncea of an earlier double form of inflection :

1. With short thematlo vowel: #4«i, ^«, 94<Tgr, ^ofttr, e^t, Bijovci,
Homer i tfifa;icr, trrijaiuw, .«nfn'sr, nxitiiftf'i Siiofitr, ivt&iloiuu.

2. With long thematlo vowel : ^w, «4]n, «4di AHt^'i ^"/"i ^i^t'i f4wrt.
Horn. A(m, »iJbi, ffv, aritiii, ffr^fu, (l«hi, Siji or Silraai, 'rtptar'^wrt, iiiaei.

By sbortenlng of the long vowel of the stem we obtain a third form :

$. Bii, Wpt, 0^, ehrow, Stuitn, Bhri, BiuvK. Hom. d^, Biuiur, «Tiu,i**,
Hdt. Wu, Stuiur, BfuMi, SiuitOi, ariuiuw, Araarfiaai, Aeoiic Mw.

4. From 3 are derived Uie contracted forms Bd, Bit, 9x, etc. Hom. draorg,
^, tv or Svri, a<Sfu> ; Dor. iQm ; Hdt. -^, -^rm ; Sufur, -J^t, flOri.

H. — In Hom. the Hse. oft«n have « for ir of the stem, as Btlu, ptia, Btiaiitp,

7M D. Horn, has oTai^ar F 788, the only case of -of outeide of the singular;
>0it (for Ii^ir), iKKiar (for -tM^fitw), and ^tfn-a (for ^I-i-ro) from ipBtru perith.
7M D. Bom. has Bio and («««.

210 INFLECTION OP Jfl-VERBS! PERFECT [76a

b. In oompoBltion riplfn, iritn, vapdo-Tiftfi, irteO, rpoMi ; bnt KKritati, rtpl-
Sou, rtpiSoaet (120 b-C).

C For the 3 pi. 9iT*mt, iiruvat, hSarar, Bee 466. 2. b.

760. S«coDd Aoiist InflniUve. -

761. Second AorUt Participle. — The active adda -n-- like llie preaent : Mt
(fe-rr-i). S'ufa (_Bt-rr-ia), tin (Bt-rr); rrdt (irrii-rr-f), UTotra (irra-rrtB), ardi

(VTa-rr). The middle adda -turn, aa Sf-^wat.

FIRST AND SECOND PEBFECT (AND PLnPKBFECT) ACTIVE

762. IndlcatlTa^ — The perfect of tI^iuu !a rUtim. A later fono tMcum, not
foand on Attio inscriptiona till alhir 200 b.c. and due to the analogy of (Tub,
■till appean in aome texts. rWm ia Doric. For nMrrocs Attic oaed rararr^-
#ji> Ixa (cp. 690 b).

a. The dual and plural of the eecond perfect and pluperfect ol Ilrr^^ (41T)
are formed without x: ItTtcror, ftfro^r (without augment In tbepluperf.), irriai
from i-<rra-awTi, pluperf . Irra-far, The dngular ia supplied bj the I perf. farqn

763. Subjnnctlvo. — ^s-rilcaiand trrO appear In proae and poetry, irrta^
A In proae,

764. OptatlTO. — <rr4»vu occnra in comp. in prose, d^wT-Orn dtr In riato,
Ttfhi*it ttiit and BtSuKira tltr in Demoethenes. ttraliir la poellcaL

763. ImperatlTa. — taraffi 1b poetical.

766. Infinitive and Participle. —inTirat and irr^ ate much more commim
than iariiKfnu and ivT^tiii.

PEEPECT MIDDLB (PABBIVB)

767. TiStifiai even in oompoaltion la rare and la unknown on Attio inscrip-
tlona. For the paaa. perf. aSiiai (791) waa used. Doric haa Titiiiau

IRREGULAR HI-VERBS
76a tiyL (iff-, cp. Lat. ea-w) am has onlj tlie preaent oad future
systems.

780 D. Horn, haa Btiitmi, Siiur; ffritfwKu; ibtitrtu, JdfM*; and BtXwt, «T^m,
Saint. Dor. Iiaa 9tii*r, tbiitr, vriiar.

766 D. Horn, has ^rd^ttu and ivrA/im, tTraiit, -airat. HdU baa icniM,

-tuToi. Doric haa -*ia lor -ufo (iaraiuia),

TBI D. 1. Homer has the following forma :
Pra. ind. 2 Bing. lari and th, 1 pi. tliitr, 3 pi. (dtfl, and) Urt not enctftlc
Imperf. flo, I., !<.», 2 sing. J)ffff«, l^ff., 3 sing. i|«, f^r, «,r, «» (rare), 3 pL frav,

Ivar; iteratire (496) Iffuni (for U-vmr).

i,vGooglc

IBREGDLAR HI-VERBS: *lf£

ladl»tl«* BnbJODiitlt* OpUUn ImpmUn

Sbg. 1 ,1^

i it

8 Irri

*

«1

Ira

S l^ri.

(p..

■ l^np c

,r .1—

irraF

IVT**

PhtT. 1 Wyiw

Kir- ■

Irrt

8 iirt An ilqra* or atf> lrr» J|«w«

bfln. itvw Putlciple Ar, oiro, Jv, gen. <vro«, aSviif, JtvT«t> etc. (806)
Pirecti (with middle fanra)

IniMi, Iri (or lm()i ln«s Inrfcv, faw4»v, iv^juto, Inrfc, Ivvvnu, opt

tral|ii|v, btf. Iffwfni, put. Io^iuvm, -i|, -a*.

1. ThB impenUvfl 8 pL Ittrmraw occon in FlMo and DemoBlfaenea ; Jrruv In
Plato ind on InscrlpUona.

b. In composition fir retAlns fl8 accent, a« drdr, ivsP^o, dritrot, «tc. ; and
io hm, as dr Amu (426 e).

T€9. Tlie optative lorrni (rq^wr, tfTrc, «fifav* are tonnd orly in proee writen.
•Ffwr occnn io poetry and Plato, dr* only in poetry, dtr In poetry and [WMe and
more freqaently than dV-

770. Ibe indioatlTfl ilid ia for *^ff-^ (37) ; il 1b for •in (originally iwi,
463 b) ; tv-rt ntalna the original ending nj iIbI is lot (ir-)fr7-i, cp. Lat. »unt;
h^', with r ttefore ft deepfle 106 ; the « ia due to the inQuence of irr*. The
(abjunctire fi la for (w, from ^-w ; tlie optative tfi/i is for iB'tif-r ; il/un for ir-i-
M't cp. Lat. almiu. Ibe infinitive ilnu la lor ic-rai ; the participle 6r is for
'4r, from to-w*.

Sati}. (li, fg(, 8 elng. (p, fyri, Jrt, S p). fwo-i (twice liri) ; i/Jrttm has 1 sing. /irrA>,

mod prrtlt (with metrical lengtiiening).
Opt-rfift, etc., also twi, (ei; Imper.2 sing, fr-ro (middle form), foru, 3pl.l«Twr.
Int. (Imu and f^'*'** (lor fa'-^mot), If/tr, also ffum, Ifur.
Pan iiir, Maa, Mt, etc., rarely the Attic forms.
Tnt. often with ar : Irrsfuu and frofisi ; S sing. driTcu, frrcu, (fftfercu, also inr<U

Tsi (aa in Dor.), ItttrSeu, tvaitmm.

i. Berodotos lias pres.ind.S sing, rfi, 1 pi. «j^r; Imperf., the Attic formaand
(a, i ring, f u, 2 pL lore ; Iterative Ukd* ; sabj. tu, Imrt ; opt once ir-foi, tt-^mr,
laai beq. dtr ; part. iir.

3. Dor. prea. ind. 1 sing. i)»tJ and iliJ, 2 sing. Arirf, 1 pi. i/Ut and (J;iA (Find.
(WO. 8 jri. irrl ; tmperf. S atng. 4f (for V-r), 1 pi. 9*»f, 3 pi. Vtar and j^f ; inf.
4*<'i <fiU*> ; part. i<i' and fem. (arra, pi. f rm . Fnk ^nO^ioi, -Ji '^o* or -tiTat,
UnSpTmi (640 D.).

4. Aeollo fwu ont of tv)u ; imper. Ivr*, port. Iwr, bra (S^^io) ; impert Im.

I;.ClK>^Ic

2 it

tm

low

3 ,Wi

In

I«

Daaia hw

Enrov

Imtov

8 Its*

totn,.

Plur. 1 Vw

t.|U«

loHUV

3 tn

t-Ti

tOLTI

212 IBRKGULAB HI-VEBBS-. «T|l.l [77>

771. Old AtUc f ta from 1)a (Horn.) = 4ru, (.«, ir- Augmented + tbe eec-
ODdur; ending n, which becomw b by 36 o. 4i for 4tf0a is rare. The 3 p). wu
originally i)i>, conttSrCted from 4" (Horn.) ; this 4' came to be osed as 3 ling.
B; analogy ^a %iur fare the 1 sing, ^r iraa lortned.

772. Inflected according to the u-conjngation are the aubjnnotive, the parti-
ciple &¥, and eeverel dialect forme.

773. cT|u (t-> cl- i cp. Lat. i-re) f^ has only the present system.

Puuon IimincT

iDdlotlTs Snbjaaiidia OpIaUn ImpecMlT* IndlaatlTa

Sing. 1 <I|u ta lokju or tsEq* f« or ^iv

I»v {(wfc or fai4

It* jnit or fn

troi" flTOir

It» ^T.

8 Om bri lou* UiTit* ^av or j«n*

InfioitiTe : Uvai. Participle ; Uc, loOvm, Uv, gen. Uvtm, loio^, Uvtm, etc.
Verbal Adjectives : 1.t6% (poet.), tr^ei, t-n|rfai.

a. The imperatiTe 8 pL triM-ar oooura rarely In Xenopbon and Plato.

b. The participle l<ir is accented like a second aorist. Tbe accent of the
simple fonn of participle and infinitive is kept in compoeition, as wapuit, rapir
oiwa, dm/rai. Otherwise the compounds have reoesrive accent so far as Uie rules
allow : wiptiiH, Arno't, but i'ia, rpov^iur.

774. ttw In the indicative present means Ithallgo, laruffoinf. Bee ISM.
For I go Ipxa/tat is used in the present indicative, but not (in prose) in the
Imperfect, or in the other moods. The scheme of moods and lenses is as fol-
lows : Pieseot : indie. Ipxoitai, sub], fu, opt bi/u or lofir', imper. tti. Inf. Urut,

part, liif. Imperfect : in. Futnre : d/u, iXrmtoliair, tXiinrfiu, IXnrifUMt.

7T5. In the Imperfect the older prose writen nsnally have So, i*t»$a, {«-■>,
the later have ittr, itu, fa. The plnral forms gn^r and iurt are not claa^caL
Prose writers seem to prefer i-m to irar. Tbe g here is the stem n angmenied.

778 D. Horn, has 2 sing, data (Hesiod d») ; subj. t^a and r^if, TuffiF and f|.
to/ur and lo/itr ; opt, Ulii and r« ; tnfln. tiurat, tytr, and Um (twice). Tmperf. :
1 sing, Ida, d»^o», 8 sing, (fft, it, fa (at the veree-end, it ?), U ; dual Ir^r,
pi. ioiitw, Ifirai', tw^irar, bar, Ifiet. For ffio, (fif, dp^an some write j«, jn, pcr■l^
Fufurs ; ifro^wu (1 4d2, a 213. fiianiiai 3 8 and fti»a.Ta, iftl^ar* probably oome
from fii,uu itrtee (778).

Hdt. : ^a, fit, jfi'rar (Hss.), but g f or qi is ooneot

i,vGooglc

ml mREGULAR HI-VERBS: Tl)|U 213

777. tiliu (i; ■^) smd is inflected nearly like r^/u (p. 135). The

inflection of tne present and second aorist systems is as follows ;

Amiti Hiddlb (Pahitb) Hu>i>id

IhvL Impvf. BBooDd AOf. Pna, ImperC B«oond Aor,

B. 1 Tv' V (iIm) It|uu Uh,1|> — iTjii)*

2 lip, tdt (746 b) tm (746 b) (^koi) ftru(466 ») Iwv _ tin

3 bin fu (ij«) bru ftro — <It*
D. 2 I*To* trro* — «Irsv fwfcv Cirfcv — (to^n*

3 Itrov Un|v — ■Inp' Iivfc* Uff4ijv — ilvfiiv

P. 1 fipt* f(|uv — it|u* tV<*> ^'••> — (Iix**

2 Im Im —tin t«r«« Uatt — itff««

8 tSrtC463d) fw«v — *t««v fwrw brre — flvre

8. 1 U
! lil
S 1|

-a

U
ttnu

-*-

D.2 t^iw
3 t4.«.

It

-4rf.'

P. 1 U,»
2 titn
s tan

It

s. 1 Uir

-An

—"1

— d«

— tin

(-.It.)

D.2 bt7«vor
U.rn'

— a™, or

htofcv

777 D. 1- In Horn. A)«u nan^ly tus the Initial i ebcM. Prttent; -ItU, tfrt
■nd -lA Iftri Itoid t»-rri, int. UfHKu and -liiar. Imperf. ; -t»», -bif, -En, 8 pL ttr.
Fttturt! tiru, once i»-irti. PCrtt Aortat: i|<nt &Q<^ him^ iriin,iitr once, f^**
once. Second Aorttt : tor the augmeated d-fomiB Horn, has uaoally tlie anaog-
mented t- ; as tvm, Irro. In the miijuncUTe iitffilw, fi«Mp< i^fv< ittfUiur.

2. Hdt baa -Ici (accented -b()i lur't Imperf. -In, peri, ^rhtrrax lOT ir^lwrat,
pan. int-prr-t-iiitot for fwAnf^ivt.

8. Dor. haa p«rf. fmo, Inimi.

L;N,-z:-:l,vG00glc

214 mBEGULAR HI-YERBSi f^u Znt

P. 1 Utptv or — iliuv OT M^ck — ^IfJtm,

2 UCn or — (tra or bto4i — dvlf

Ul^w — ilipi (— oWfi)

8 trtivor — fbrOt faD>ra ^dvr*

P. 2 bn —In tia«l

8 Utmv (460. 2, b) — fvtov Ur«M(4S6.2,b}

PAHTIOrPLI

falf, bt<r>, Uv — «It, — ftn, — tv t4u*oi — I|uvm

Fntnre : — Ifrm In proee only In compoeitlon ; — Ijrofiu only In composition.
Fint AotiBt : ■i{KM in proee nsually In comp., — J|Kd|iT|* ; both only in the Iodic
Perfect Active : ~ tko only In composition.
Perfect Middle (PaasiTe); — iI|L«(plnp. — iliupi], — rfv!*,— ilvfcu, — fCpJvot,

only in compoeition.
Aoriat Peaaive : — ■ «Iti|v, — 4M, — M|*u, — Htd, only in compoalUon.
Future Passive : — tUfrofo^, only In composition.
Verbal Adjectives : — trii, — Met, only in oomporiUon.

778. Since tig^u is redapllcated (probably for rt-nHu) the Initial i ahottU be
abort, as It is in Horn, (rarely in Attic poetry), i is probably due to confmfon
with the i of Horn. [>>uu (^fU/uu) tbivt, a meaning that tt/ioi occasionally abowa
In Attic U/uu meaning hatlen occurs only in the present and imperfect.

779. « is for i + e In the second aorist active (^l-i-iur = <t^r), perfect
active (i-i-ta = duo), perfect middle (f-i-iuu = it/uu), second aorist paatfve
(i + i-9tir = ttBTfi). In the ooriaU / 1h the augment, In the perfects the first i is
the reduplication of the weak stem i-. The first aorUt f-m has the strong stem
form. Present subj. Ii3, igi, etc., are for Mu, U^i, etc ; aor. sub]. -*, -fr, etc,
are for -*«, -f-jp, etc,

780. Much confusion exists in the Hra. sb regards the accentuation. Thns
tor Itit we find bn, and in Hotn. Tpotii (present), as if from im. See 740 c

7S1. For il4tlotr>, d^Wr and Tpooim, t-pooUdt, rpooJ^ra (also aocenlMl Tft-
am, etc) aee 740 c

}M] IRREGULAB Ut-VERBS: ^ti|L{

TC2. The Imperfect of i4hnu 1b either d^ti^r or if^f^v (4fi0).

783. +T|ll{ (^-, ^, cp
m the present as follows

783. 4^)^ (^-, ^, cp. Lat. /3^ tHi^i sa^ yes, or assent is inflected
' I follow

♦»i

1^.

OulS 4«^
8 4aT4>

♦V"

notfonnd
not found

Ptor.! 4^i<.

♦■Jni"

♦4"

S ^mri +ft«n. ^at4* OT ^ifnv fdrrwv l^wra*

Infin. : 4A>m ; Partfc. : poet. ^At, ^ar«, ^iv (Attio proH ^irxmv) ; Verbnl

Adj. ; ^ti% (poeL), 4>tW
Futon : ^V*>. ^^v^'i +4«^>-

Kiat Aorist : IfipM, 4V", +1iow|u, , ^flnu, ^^ivflt.

Pert. Fua. Imper, : m^^Aatu let it be laid.

704. All the fonoa of the preeent Indicative except ^ift are enclitic (181 o).
— Id compoidtlon aiii^/u, ai/i^t (but the Has. often have atip^t Uid fu/i^pf),

7SS. In the optatire ^in does not occnt, perhape by chance (461, 683a).
^u>(T, ^w(« are ordinary Attic ; ^alinut, ^ijrar are rare.

786. Uiddle fotme In present, Imperfect, and future are dialectic,

787. atf ^(u meana r^te (Lat. ntgo). In the meaning; amert, ifiiaKU la
eoMmmilj naed outside of the Indloative. In the meaning taj/ often, ^atu la
ued. f^^K and ^^n* itre aor. and fut. In tiie meanlnp say yes and attent.
I^t, (^ (and ^fu) often coneepond to IM. inguan, inquit.

788. t^r and ^fl, ^qv may have an aorisUc force. I#i|r and poet, t^iair
an both imperfect and second aorlit.

TM D. 1. Horn, baa ^f irAi for ^]fi ; faibj. ^4o *»d «Sri (463 c. D) for 0$ ;
imperf. f^v, ^r, f^^rta, ^^Ba, l^tqi, ^^t, 8 a. (^qr, rarely ^fj, I pi ^a/Ur,
3 ^ l#w«*, ^«tr«r, f^i-, ^K.

2. Doric fifif, ^pkrl, ^n-1 ; Imperf. f^, fta ; Inf. ^/itw ; fut. ^iroi, ^e/uu ;
aor, f««<ra.

3. Aeolio ^a«u or ^o^ ^iirSa, 3 a. ^To-i, -S pi. 0auri.

TM D. Middle forma cf ^fU are rare or unknown in Attic (Plato haa perf.
imper. ri^drAt), but common In other dialects ; yet the prea. indlcatlTe middle
is rare- Horn, has Imperf. i^avr, l^m or ^ro, etc., imper. ^lio, ^dirftd, etc,
int. ^irt€u (and In choral poetry), part. ^fuMt (also In Hdt). These middle
forma are MtlTe In meaning.

S16 IRREGULAR HI-VERBS: ^|iat [tSq

789. woi (4i^) sit is inflected only in the present system. The a
of the Yen>-steni appears only before tw, to.

■Jj/rv* '^rfc* ^rt* 4^* 4"^ 4**°* H"^

4<rT<u qv4ov ^VTfu ff^t ^^ i{o~ra 4"^^ ^r^n

The sabjunctive and optative are wanting ; present Infinitife ^v4at ; pani-

dple 1||uvoi.

a. Uncom pounded 4ftai occurs only In Epic, tragedj, and Herodotus. The
miasing teuaea are supplied by I^^wt, tfu and Iftfuu.

790. In place of ijpu we find usually KoB-ritua in Attic prose :tnd
comedy. Ko&rjiuu sometimes is perfect in meaning (I have sat, I hare
been sealed). The o- of the vetb-stem does not appear except before

TO.

PiBiirt iHPRTurr

Indlatln SabJanctlTB OptaUn Impantln IndlatlTa

8. 1 Kdhtiuu KatA|Mt KoBol^ifr iitat^ti,i|* (450) or Ka^|H|v

3 Ki0i|irai Kotil ksBoId nUhfro kitiin KaM^

8 kUtitu «al1)TU KototTO KaSfjvi* itc6My]T» KolVra at

KsMtn

D. 2 aUtirtoy «a>4)94o* Kotatvfov KUi|a4ai> lKdti|««ov nM)v4m

3 kUi|o4«v KoSl^rfe* koSbCo^v KoJUfotrnv bMUfriitr KoMiv^ii*

P. 1 KoMjiuhi KoWiMltt imlaliufe bohJiuta (toMhuls

2 tMtivtt KoKtarfc Koaoilrfl Kd>t)V«i licd>l)irfl< Koll)***

8 tMt\mj, KoAAvToi Kototvro Kot^i^itv fKd(i|Tra Kah)*T«

InAniUvei ko^V^**; Participle; ■att^finat.

a. He imperatlTe has xiStv in comedy for jtd^o. In the imperfect Jntff^tqt
is used about as often as lofffii''-

b. The missing teoees ue supplied by xaSi^iiai, «aWfw, xotfifefuu.

79L. Kct^l (mi-) lie, am laid, regularly used in the present and
imperfect instead of the perfect and pluperfect passive of TvE^Tfu
place.

7H D. Hom. has eEarsi, and fsroi (twice), tfaro, and fars once (once frro).
V Is probably the correct spelling for *!-,

TBO D. Hom. has 3 pi. Koftlttre (la^aTo ?). Hdt. has «iT/ar(u, xariuTa ; ca-
»%rra not m^o.

TBI D. Hom. hat 3 pi. pren. icfarai, jr^rai, ttarrni ; imperf. ntrrs, nlan,
■fars, iter, tivttra ; mibj. rSriu, and ntrai for «(i)-«.tu ; fat. ntUoiuu.

HdL faaa 3 oing. prea. c^n-oi and Ktrat, 3 pl. iAitu ; imperf. Imro, pL VWaro.

m] IRREGULAR HI-VERBS; otSa

lodlot Bntd. Opt Impw. iBdIS.

Sing. 1 Mripu 4ki(|mp'

3 Kdroi MCra lltaro

8 Mtitti H^irat mkivrt Mtrlv Ikuto

Doa] 2 ntvfcv Mt«4M knvfc*

S Kitffhv mMb* )a(««i|v

Finr. 1 «C|uk k<l^a

3 Mtmu (KaTa)KiMVTai («p<Mr)KiaiiTa KtCrtvf Ikuvto

InflnittTe : lalo^ai j Participle : ki(|uvoi.
Future : KilropAk, KtbrQ or nlira, Ktlrrru, etc

«. In tlie mibjunctive and optative net- becomes at- before a vowel (43),

b. CompoandB have recessive accent in tbe present indicative and ImperaUve :

r^dm/uUf wapdKttaa^ but raptmturffatw

792. ^-|11 (cp- ^^ a-lo) Mf occurs only in tlie present and Imperfect 1 and
3 sing., and Is used In parentbea<« (as LaL inquam, inquit).

Forms: 4fii, i)rt; 4t, 4. Examples: rat, ^iiil, vai boi/, I tag, boj/t (emphatic
tepetiUon). frf ^<S taid 1, 1) f St mM A« (1113).

793. "Xjp^ ^ ^ neeetaary is really an indeclinable substantive meaning ntctt-
tttf with Uie verb understood. In the present Indicative iarl Is U) be supplied.
ElsBwhere xp4 unites with the form of the verb to be eupplied ; as subj. xn
Otrt + 5). "Pt- X/^'i txrt + rf^), 'nf. xp^iit (xrt + 'I""), part. Indeclinable
Jf^* Cx/>4 + '*) i Impeif. xp^* ixp*l + 401 and less commonly /xp9>' ""^th an
ugment because the composite character ol x/>4> tfaa forgotten, fnt xji^rrai
(Xrt + »»T»).

a. Aw^xPI ^ n#ces has pl. dnxfiAr't part, droxp^r, -xf^a, -xp^'t Imperf.
iaixfli fQt. iraxJl^irel, aor. dT^ji^i.

»». otSa (18, «'&<, ofS- originally with f ; cp. Lat. wi'deo) know is a
aecond perfect with the meaning of a present, and formed without
reduplication. The second perfect and seoood pluperfect are in-
flected as follows:

T9B D. Hom has i), Doric ijrf, Aeolio ijiri.

T9> D. Hdt. has xp<fi XP^^r XP^'f^r but iwpoxpi, inxp^'-

TMD. 1. Bom. has alScit > 337, »;«', (^-vi (r<r<ra<r<farf<ra<ri 138); subj. «» At

r 288 and UA# (T Z236), (fSafui- and cr^trf with short thematic vowels; inf.

liimtu, ttiur ; part tUvia. and Uirto. Ploperf. g Jio, f^qrftt r 98, 4(M«'(-<>> f )

X 180 wilA q as augment (433), gSif, {>«, ijilJci t 206, 8 pL trar for ISs^r.

FoL daoita^ int. Mytriiur and -«'(ii'.

2. ndLhasoTtat, n^rand»r3afM>(rarel;),(>rj&ri, snbj. (liAv, plup. jStn, gSo
(tin T), -vMari, f S«ra>, fat. dStlrw.

3. Dor. has ba^ (pl. Uuiar, Irarri) and ofjo. Boeotian has Ittu for fm-w.
AsoIk has fUmu and off^

IBREGULAB BO- VERBS: ol&a [79S

Stafrl

Mo.

ilSA

.iwt-

«tq

ortf8»»

3

•Ms

.»9.

.tMlt

br«t

fti|<r«a

ordbt.

S

otSi

<tSfl

.lS.(i,

brr*

flS-C")

Diuia

U-nv

dWi™,

<ISflT».

Inw

i^

8

brrev

.IS4t»

.Witr^y

IVTWV

*<rTT,

Plor. 1

loiuv

.IMpv

.IGrtpoo

r .«.!,„«.

i^}^

oriS^

2

I«-n

.ISflT,

,lUlTt

,I8.[1T,

Iim

i<m

iSrr,

3

brln

itUn

tlSihv

CoTwr

TJ"-

tf5«r..

InfinltlreitSfofu; Participle tlSAt, ttStita, itUi (800); Verbal Adj. Ur^ot; Futon
■(b-»|UM. Compound riniSa. an co)ueiou» of.

795. The Tertbatem has the meaning ^nd out; hence Oie perfect onta me«n«
Z have found out %aA hence 1 know.

796. Id Ionic and lal« Greek we find Mat, Ma-iit*, etc. These form* Are
rare In Attic olirSat occurs In comedy.

797. In the optatlre dual and plural proae wiiteie have either the eliorter
or the longer forms ; the poeta only the shorter forms.

798. Pluperfect ySar, jitii occur in later Attic (Demosthenes}, but are
suspicions In earlier writers. itavBa occurs in the beat Maa. of Plato and else-
ifbere, but it la leaa correct Attic, jiqi ia incorrect. fSti la rare, iarer, jvqr
are almoel entirely poetic. In the plural fSviur, jS«te, iStiaar are pos^lassi-
cal. ^ttiui, iStTt occur rarely In the Attic poets.

799. ota-9a is from olS + Sa; trrt from It + rt; taBi from H + ft (BS). r^^,
(older ftiur) gets Ita r from tm (87). frfffi Is from B + aawrt, with • from
(Horn.) [«-ar= JS-ru with the ending -«kv (cp. ttUfi 704 d). jSif is for ^-t^t^
with J, as angment (43S).

PBCDLIABITIES IN THE USB OF THE VOICE-POEMS, ETC.

800. Some verbs in the present appear in classical Greek in the
active voice only, as Paivat go, Ipwu creep, t/kw trenMe; others in
the middle only, as oXXofuu Uap, 0ov>kOfMU with, koBt^/uu Bit, xct/uu tie.

eta.. Outside of the present some active verba show middle forms
especially in the future, as p^<muu, thaU go, ixovvofuu ah/xU hear (803) ;
and some verba exclusively or chiefly deponent show active forms
especially in the perfect, as yiyvofua become yiyova, fiaivopai rage
fUliipn, SUpKO/uu poet., 2 aor. I^kov, perf. StSupKo.

803. For the passive voice the middle forms sufiBced in most
cases ; many middle futures are still used passively (807), ae SSut^tm-

■M D. Horn, has iKri/i^r teal killed, hxim' t"" ttagtd. Cp. also gSwAiiqi
and aXStrBtr (alSia)iai reipect), dfrar* and AlaS^t (Uaitat think'), ^oXiMd^qv tuid

107] VARIATION OF VOICE: PUTCEE MIDDLE 219

fiu aAoO be wronged; and traces of the passive use of the aorist
middle appear Id Horn., as tfiX^ro wa» hit. This use was largely
abandoneHl when -^ and -tfi^v came to be used as s[>ecial marks ot
the passive. Originally neither ipf iioi -A^ was passive in meaning.

803. The second aorist in -^r is primarily intrsnslUve tad shows active
inflection (as Imir ttocd). i/la.ny so-called pssslva fonna are in fact mereij
inUansillTe aorists of active verbs, as ippirir from ^u fiow, itamUnrv from Ktrw-
Mpu lie dovn, and do not dlSer in meaning from tlie aortola of deponent verbs,
sa ipAnif from iialra/ioi rage.

BM. The sorists in -^v that ai9 called passive are often active or middle In
meaDing, as ^rtitr took pleatKre tn from ^ta/mi, do'x''^' fi^ luluaned from
■irxtH* ditgraee, alaxiiBimt am luhamed; iipylaOTir became angrfi from ifyliM

FOKIfS OF ONB VOICE IN THE SENSE OP ANOTHBR

805. Fntnn Hlddk with Acdre Heaninc. — Many verbs have no
active future, but use instead the future middle in an active sense:
Xa^ifidyii) take XiJ^m/uu, yiyvmlKio ktiow yvuxToluu.

a. IHost such verba denote a physical action, as the action of the vocal organs;
tlie action of the organs of sight, hearing, smell, touch ; the action of throat,
moath, lips ; bodily activity in general, volnntary or involnntaij ; and otbar
aspeclB of the physical aide of human organlam.

806. In tbe following Itat of active verbs with middle fnrarea thoM marlied •
have also an active future ; those marked t sometimea have an active future In
Uie Oieelc All verbs adding -a^ to form the pieaent stem (628, b, o) have a
middle future except b^>w, XarMw, i^Xirjcdw, Verba denoting piKlse or
blame usually have both an active and a middle future.

■^Sh tj3a<l» d/d •k\4{u

tcUsAf t7eUw •tfittt •j(Ww

UoXifM 'rupAoKm "Hvitii* Kfiitt

pail{u iiUti 'ffiyyiru Miricu

Paint (see TOS) Siiriiu ^rBiwu

4^iM SiSpiaKti Bpifiiiat 'writ

'pktrit *Suiat tifiru riu moin

a. Compounds of %<apl'm with i,-w«-, wy-, rapa.-, wpor- have both active and
middle futures ; other compornids have only the active fntmres.

807. Fntore Uddle with Paadve Heaninc. — In many verbs tbe
future middle has the meaning of the future passive, as <Uiuc*u wroitg,
^jut^crafwi ahail bearonged.

otta

Tf»T«

•xl<ro»

Ul^t"

wXiu

fr\iM (JtX,.)

ilXoX<(>

rwit.

rpix"

tSfiwifU

■roMw

rp^u.

ipiu,

Hu,

Tvyxifti

ArtrritU

•h**^

r«MIw

>ipi<*

t^I^ril*

*#*T«

walttt

t<r.wdu

•iMn

rirx"

<r«.i»T«

xJf«-

^xv»i»

t^OlFidfbi

Xil^

rlw

(late)

•x<^»

220 VAKIATION OP VOICE: FUTURE MIDDLE [toB

B08. The following verba commonly use the fature middle in a passive seme.
(All ot these have the future paaedve In iMe Greek, except dfi^ur^^^w, Mu, ttpyu,

imSp*ii», alidt, mlayiyta, TpMrroptiu, ffrp«;)X4u, rruyiu.^

iyto4i not to know ilri" '^i" luuTlfiu whip arptfiXiu rack

Ay^^ltfMi contend ixwi-ifm tsosA out altiv inhabit arvyfu hate (poet.)

illicit wronn inttpiiu lie in wait ii»>^*u Offne rofKLrTu diUurt

itt^ur^io ditpute for iMtHlit reproach Tup^uffuard

irUyrviu optn, C.LA, *ti^i;X.i)» plot -raaarfoliu edu- Tfii^u nourith

2. 106* (not found againat ate rp^u rub

in literature) tx^^" ^"'^ tdXiWw wage war iu rain

lpX>r rvU tx" htne rpoarjopria fOTt- ^Mia love

(iMffxai teach Btpurtia (end tell ^uXirru guard

tilt permit kuUw preeent sroj

soft. Some verbs use in a passive sense both a future middle form

and a future passive form ; on the difference in meaning see 1738.

iyt lead, Sfo^xu, ix^"!''"- iiofrvpiu bear viitneu, luprvp-iiiiotiai,

irariw deceive, iraT'^renai, jfamr^ fia^ufn|A^o»uu.

S^e/uu. waXaptiu balegt, raXuifiic^rofuu, r*Xi-

«ifd>w inereaee, odfVa^uu, a^^iiaaiiM. opKtfiiiatiiai.

fDiAwTU hurt, ^X^^ofioi, /JXa^ittfOMU. rfiTTiado,rpifopai{rwe'),'wpax9ii^»l''t.

AfUw manifest, JirXiitfs^iai, SqXwtfi^a- aripia deprive, dTi>rT<p4ffOfu(i, iirorr*-

IMi. pifiiftaiuu.

{^iai fine, tiiiu^tttfuu, {>|fuw^D/wi. Ti;ulu Aonour, ri/ifo-afiai, Ti^^tf^a-ofiw.

mUu call, jmXaO^uu (rare), K\ii6^oiMt. ifipllu iniult, i^puD/iw, ippict^QiiMt.

nDMh-TM proclaim, iici|pit£e>ia( (rare), n)- ^pu bear, ofirBfui, ofrffilffowu, uircrr-

piixHmiMt. xSVofHu.

(frftw judge, KpuvBttOi, tptlHtrapai. ^partu : tara^pariicoiuu deepiee, mro-

ijyu tag, X/fD/ioi (tragic), Xex^«/u>> ^^nrffikB^"-

Mru leaw.'iivaXd^o/iai, iro%*t^eiitaiMi, it^t\tiii aid, d^XfrB/wi, ii^Xi)tfi(aefiai.

aiO. Middle DeiMnenta Deponent verbs whose aorists have an

active or middle meaning with middle forms are called middie depo-
nents. The aonst passive of such verbs, when it occurs, has a passive
force. Thus aiTtaaiuu accuse, ■Qriaaifj.tp' accused, ^Tii^ Koa accused.
Others 813 c.

ail. PsMive Deponenta. — Deponent verbs whose aorists have the
passive form but the active or middle meaning are called passive
deponenta; as ^ouXofuu tm'ah, aor. Ifimikj^. The future is usually
middle in form. Most passive deponents express mental action of
some sort.

612. In the following list verba marked * have a fntnie paaalve (onn and
also a fnture middle form ; as JiaX^^uu convene, aor. StcX^A)* converted, fuL
IioX^^iw and tia.\txHffi>iuu thall converge. But Ijtotau take pleature in baa
only tiaS^iau, and ^Tio/iai j/ield to, am wonted has only ip-rri^aoiuu. Vertia
with t have also an aorist middle, but It Is less common, or poetic, or lata Qraek.

Ill] VARIATION OF VOICE: DEPONENTS 221

tlyufiMi admlret +v4»*i» ^l/rrioiiat field to, imif^w

■taJMfuu feel sAatM, iUvSt/r (iw)Kndiniat eontider, ^rtK|l.^|e^w

IXiafiu (usu. poeC) wander, ^XiO^r (r/iii-)A>fiAvw> am eager, rfnctfiifu^v
tVAXiofMi contend, lnuKX^evr •t(«Hi-)X*yo>iiu eonverte, JnUx^'

liprfcftu denjr, 4^p4^r (<x^-)/ii\o/ia. care /or, irifitX^e^w

Hxtfuu am grieved, iix8iv0<tr (jura-iiiOo/uu regret, /kti/wXi^p

^k<f« "*«*. ipo^y^^w (480) (dT.-)»*>M" deqwfr, dr(»40,F

Mm« WOHl, ««««5r •(8m-)w*>M»' r(yJ<!C(, Stlro^,

itpaiMu (poet.) (M, «//)x»V' (<^)k^M"' (Afn*o/, ^re»4«,F

ItH/uu am dbU, itur^r (430) t(Ar..)wiA>,«i (Aini on, ^(mtAfp

^rri^ioi oppow, *»om(4tffl» t (xpc) ro^^ioi foraee, provide, rpoe-

triarafim vnderitand, ■fptirrifiiir raifi^r

Ifa/iai ipiw love, ipdaeti* ofufuu think, ifi/fiir

(Mo^/KU am cautioM, DdXa^iffq* ^iXsri^i^o^uu am atnbttiout, J^tXerifiih

tfSofui take plea»»re in, f/u&iir Ar'

«. Some verba use either the aorlst middle or aoriat passiTe without distlno-
tkni, as troiM^iiat bivouac, ■wpayimTtiieiiai am engaged in.

b. Some verba use both, bat prefer the aoriat middle, as droc/iln/uu antaer,
iMitKfftotau tpeak in d^enee, niiuf^iuu bla'oie.

c. Some verba use the aorist passive in an active or middle Bense, as irtphiuu
doMbt, pass, be disputed, aor. i^api}9iir ; ropdu prove, wtipAo/iai trji, sor. irtipi$tiii
(ien often in'tipdjdn'^r), fuL ntpiifouai and mpaf^aiiat, ipiu (poeL (/xuuu)
lave haa 4p<''^> /s" ''> ^'>^ie vn'tA, fut /pwrS^ofuu.

813. Depments witb PasaiTe Heaning. — Some deponent verbs have
a passive meaning. This is avoided by g^ood writers ia the present
and imperfect or future passive, is not frequent in the aorist, but is
common in the perfect and pluperfect passive. Thus S.vfKfivtrta (d>re-
npiBif) Tuvra Ikis answer is (vxui) made is not good Greek. Few verbs
show the passive meaning in most of these tenses ; as Sn/ioiuu buy,
am bovght, lav^^ was bov^M, luyrnuu have bought, have been bought.

a. Picaent andlmperfeet: iyurifaiiai cotOend, am contended for, pidia/ai force,

amforeed, yj/itelitiiai tnaltreat, am maltreated, itrieiuu bup, am bouglit.

b. Future Fasdve : iraprto/uu deny, dirapn)9^s/uu, ipyiliiitat teork, do, IpyairHt-

t. Aoctat Faarive: These verbs (,middle deponente, 810) have also an aorist
middle; the aorist panive la used in b paaaive aense: d7urf{b>iai contend,
mlxltviiai harati, alth-Ttiuu epeak darkly, atnia/iai aecute, ixta/itu heal,
PtAiaiuu force, ttx^/uu receive, taipfoiuu preeent, ipiyiioiuu work, do, ini^
fmi lead, dtiaiiai behold, Uo^t heal, Krieia* acquire, Xu>iai»^i maltreat,
imflioiiai oftuse, luiUoiia^ imitate, i>t^ipeiuu lament, Tpo^arlfB/iot feign an
etetue, xP^f" tf , dr/e^t bHg. drexplra^uu has AmfXrarQ anneered,
irticplf^w nau. means was separated.

i. Ferfflct and nnpertect : These verbs use the perfect middle in the middle ot
the pMBlvfl sense: iyull!;»|M^ eonteTid, atrlTraiuu tpeak darklj/, ofridwuu
aecuie, Awaxfliaiuu anmer, droXar^fuu make a defence, ^uijbfiai fi)rc«,
h^ltit^ai eontider, ipyiitiat work, do, tOxeiMi pray, inio/uu lead, rrioiiai

223 VARIATION OF VOICE [814

oeqHirt, iiHfiititai abuM, taix^'ioi'ai detiie, lu/iieitat imitate, rappqri^jiifui
tptak boldlji, ■wnMriiaiim net at {diKharge the dvttet of) a ci'tiMn, vpa-ffia-
Ttie/uu ant engaged in, ttiitTitiiat vfetr, xp^fu" vee, iirioiia.i bvy.

G14. Active Verba with AorUt PsHive In » ICiddle Suae. — The
aorist paasive of some active verbs has a reflexire or middle sense,
either Bometimes or always. Thus cb^ptUva gladden, jfii^pavSip' re-
joiced, Kivcui move, Jkivit^ was moved or luooetj myself, ^ouvi show,
i^injf shouted myself, appeared {l^aydrpi usually was shoam).

a. These verbs ue often cftlled ni(UUe patsivet.

b. The middle and the paisive form of the future of auob verba Is often
found, the middle being (reqaently preferred.

815. Aorist Passive and Future Middle forms :
•Irx'w (liegrace, irx^*^' fiU ipyit" anger, i>iriW9^r heemtte anfry,

Cahamed, alvxvumiiai ipyioOiuu

Atniit vex, 4"^^' felt vexed, ini^oiuu ip/idu incite, itpit^r set out, ipiK^oiioi

twdym urge, {/rtlx^* urged, trtifoiiai rtlBu persuade, ^((o^r obeyed, rtlaa-

ft^paitH gladden, iii^pdwff^r rejoiced, iitu

f4#pa»0fiai irXurdw cause to Uander, frXar^Oif*

Aritt move, UXr^hir moved (Jbettirred) mndered, rXar^ttimi

mytti^, KlrfynjiAi woptiu eonvey, hroptMit' marthed, wv-

KniiAu put to ileep, /irai/i^Ajr lag dotcn pticaimi

to sleep, «Hfi4rafHu ipopiu terrifn, 4^p^r teas (tfraid, 410-

\nrim vex, tXuriBiir grieee4, \uriiatiiai P'fyioiiai

a. i.rii9iMt set sail, cardTo/uu land, hir\litiitu ann tnv»elf, ipidiaiitu lie al
anchor, generally have an aorist middle.

S16. Aorist Passive and Future Passive forms :
lutirirtw remind, i/ii^ifB^r remembered, r^XXu trip up, deceiae, te^Xifr erred,

linfrff^o/uu failed, v^Xiiffoyut

Trpi^ turn, isTpi^t turned, arpa^i- rifiH cau^e to melt, trit^f ditMolved,
ffPfiw JanpufsAed, rarfffB^uu

817. Passive Aoriat and Middle and PaMlve Future forms :

draXXdrTw rdease, drifXXdTi)' departed, draXXdfo^iu, iraWayirofuu.
^Ittt ihouj, i^iiryir appeared, ^nC/uu, ^riivaiiai (B10).
81B. Some verbs have a passiTe aorist rarely in a middle sense ; with the
middle aorist in a different meaning.

ntldiu brinjf, iniilvBiir betook myse\f, haiuciiatr carried off.

r^{u save, ivMiir saved myeelf (uos soned), /vw«4m9' saved for jnjf.

self.
f(Mw deceioe, hftivtifw deceived myaelf (via* deceived), /fniri/iqr Ijad.

819. lusomeverbaahowinglst and 2nd aorist, or 1st and 2nd perfect, thefiist
tenaee are generally tr&nsitive, the second tenses generally intransitive. The
future active of these verbs Is transitive. In aome transitive verba the perfect
(usually the 2nd perf.) is intnnaitive.

•ivl TRANSITIV£ AMD INtRAlfSmVfi 228

kfMfk: (ntna. nmrtyriiu break, -mfn; intnuu. nrAyrvuM break, 3 tar. -H-nir;

2 perf. Sya am broken.
pultm I/O : Ukdb. ^4*1* lAofl cauM to go, 1 aor. tftifra.. Ion. and iweL ; intruiB.

2 aor. f^r toeiU, pf. p^Pi*a have gone, ttand/att.
tim: UftDa. eatwe to eater, eiak, pat on, Steu, tSura, SiB6*a ; lotrans. enter, pati

under, ttoiuu. Situ, 2 aor. livr dived, uent doum, tiSim have entered, gone

down. la proHe usually naraifu make ttuk, ttriivca, Karaltaai; caroadofiai

link, isTBitffvfuu, tariSur. — Of another't clutties, iwSiu (Mtitfa) meUMpttt

ON, iToStt* Mt<^ (dT/awo /fVSwa) mean take off; of oru'« own cloUies, '*-

5A»fiu and MSuw mean put en, droJte^ioi Mtciim (iHSir itilvr) me&u

toiiepf.
tylpn: tiajis. roHW, uolv up, ^pfl, 47<V<h Btc. ; intrans. iyiipeiiat wojbc, <nn

owiJte, tiwptftyo'Bfui, 'trUpBiir, 2 aor, iiypSfi^r aieoke, 2 perf. iyfiiyapt ant aieake.
b-n||u Ml ; tnns. imtiri* shall set, 1 aor. (vnia'a eel, JfrdA)* tOM («t, trTo/ioi

mt for nqrwf/, *T4'a>4a(, ^TqirfifMjr. Four active tenseB are intiaiu. : 8 aor.

Iffrvr (Bet myself) Hood, pf. Urim (have set myself) itand, om 1(0)1(1(11?,

d^Tifini Hood, toos itanJi'np, 2 perf. (araror slonii, fuL pf, iarifya lAoII ttettd.

So slao brofwi Mt myteXf, ttaad, crlfffaiuu.

N. — The same dlatlnction prevalli In the compoundsi irtimiiu rai»e up,
Atttr^r Hood vp, i^lSTiiMt let off, caiue lo revolt, irtariir Uood off, r«VOlMii,
i^wTtfica ant dielant, am in revolt ; ^^Irnt/u >et over, htitTtiw let myuHf over,
i^tanim am let over; n$laTT))H let down, eelablUh, tarirrtit tttabliihed m}f-
lelf, beeame eitabllihed, taHmiiai am ettabltibed. The aorist middle hu a
different meaning : laTes-T^aTs ettablUhed for himulf; evricriau introduce,
uiUU, ttrtmuur banded together. '

Ura team : trans. Xcl^w, l\ir»r, UX«ra have left, have failed, am uianttng.

\tirt)uu, mid. = remain (leave myielf), pan. = am left, am left behind, am

Inferior; 2 aor. mid. i\itrt/nir left for mjfeelf(in Hum. wo* left, am Inferior),

UfsfKu toitl leave for myaelf, xeill remain, be left.
paint: trana. madden, innairti, -fuivfl, -iiitim; intrans. rojKi iwtnfiw, fcamOfuu,

^/idnfr, 2 perf. fJiofim am raging.
AXBfi: trans. lUitroy (prrdo), itriKKi/u, -«Xa, -liXM-o, -«\iiA(n have ruined

( perdidf) ; intrans. periih {pereo'j, iriWu/uu, -oXeB/uu, 2 aor. -uX^qr, 2 perf.

-^XifXa am ruined (_perii).
hMm : tran*. pertuade, rtleu, frcwa, rirtuia haK periuaded, tr^t^r, rtitt^

geitat; intrans. (p«miade mj/ielf) obey, believe, rtlSaiiai, rcteofioi, twtiat^r,

•wiwtitiiMi am convinced; 2 perf. rinifa I tnat (= wirrttii) la rare In proae.
«4^yp«p* : tniu. fix, make fa^ r4fw, Iriifa, iw^xBnr ; Intrana. am fixai,

freete, r^n/iai, rirr^rofuu, iriyiii, 2 perf . rfmrya am fixed, J^oten.
•wtrm drink: 2 aor. friar dranJt, 1 aor. firiffa eauaed (o drfnjfc,
vX^ttm: tnua. (erryif, iixXiirTm, unrnrX^tt, -^Xirfa; intrang, am mn't^kte^

ftrf do .' rfrpSxa (probably lat«) lave done, rtwpiyn have fared (well n fit)

and fcoM done.
^^fMlpi ; trana. brtak, -^fw, (pfifa ; intrana. break, burtt, ^iiyrviuu, -fi*yfn,Mi,

tffiy^T, 2 perf. tppvya am broken,
wfttitfik : tiana. extinguiih, pi« out, iraafiirniu, irivptat, drw/Mrffqr ; Intiana.

224 TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE [to

be actingvUhed, go out, irarpim/pM, iwovfi^o/uu, iwiafiiit imiU out, ds-Af^ii
am extiitgnUML
«4pn> ; tmuk ntokfl rol ; intruia. rot, riraiiai, Uif^ rotted, 2 pert, ttr^ra, am

•H[im: tnin*. eaiuc to neU; intniiB. melt, r^m/uu, trirf^w, 2 perL r^n am
nteUed.

^ttbrn : tram. lAoiC, ^aru, f^^n, t^^yxs Aqd* ihenm, ri^a^/iat, i^w^r vai
thown, made known; tnns. tiHio mKow, declare, ^nlioiuu, ^nOfitu, ^td^^>
aJiovMd (rare and poetlo in Uie simple fonn ; di-e^fdfn)r declared U com-
mon); Intnms. «&our orwieV, appear, ^alm/wi, ^i^ofiat and ^>«0>uu, ^n|>
ajipearMi, 2 perf. t^^ki have thown tnyxelf, e^peartd- The middle ineaiu
thovi onetelf, appear; the pMslve, ant thown, am made evident, ^r^raiiai
means aAoII appear or thatl be f Aown, «nd la not very different In aense from
^aroStai (but see 1T3S, ISll).

4<«If : trans, dettroy, tm^iStlpu, -^BtpSi, '4^0tipa, -i^Bapta ; Intiani. am rvinei,
Sia4>8tlpoiuu, -t^eipiiw, -i^Sap^raiiM, 2 pert, Sii^fapa am ruined in Hom., hart
dettroged in Attic poetry,

4tfa : tmna. bring forth, produce, ^iw, I^Uva ; iDtrans. am produced, come into
being, t^fiai, ^iev/iai, tipvy, 2 perf. ri^vxe, am by nature.

830. Poetic forms : ipapi^ttt (Ip-) fit, 2 aor. ffptfior trans, and Intrans. —
ytlmim am born, tyttrd/i^r begat. — iptUw rend, 2 aor. Ijpiiair tnuH. rent and
lotrana. lAinered. — iptlru throw down, fifitrer trans, threw doan and InUans.
fell. — tptv/M route, 2 aor. ipoptr tnuis. routed and Intrtins. have risen. — div-
yiynifiat read, iniynm pertvaded Id Hdt., 2 aor. ijiytur read, recited.

831. The following are poetic intransitive second perfecta : ipipm ft (ip—
plftu fit, Irana.). — (oXxa hope (Epic At« cavM to hope), — tiiaitm tonvm
(rflw frott&b). — Spupa havt artten itptv/u rouse).

3,q,z..3bvGoOgle

PART III

FORMATION OF WORDS

822. Inflected words generally consist of two distinct parts : a
stem KQd an inflectional ending (191) :

iSiptur gift, stem Supo-, inflectional ending v;

Xvofttv we loose, stem \to-, jnflectionaL ending fuy.
a. The inflectional endinp of nouna and Terhs, and the lormation of Terb*]
tlems, have been treated under Inflection. Tbe formation of words, sadUcnaed
here, deals primBTily with the formation of noan-etems, of Terbal Btems derived
from nonns, and of compound words. Uninfected words (odverba, prepoai-
tiona, conjanctions, and particles) are mostlj of pronominal origin and obacore ;
(och adverbs as show case forma are mentioned In 341 fl.

823. Some Btems are identical with roots (root-ttems, 193) to which
only an inflectioim] ending, or no ending at all, has been added.
^«v-t ox, cow ^iS-i mouse £-> hog, toa

lU ome (stem it-) vai-i ihip 0U{ JIame (<f\ty-u bum)

Up wtid &ea>t(gen. frip-ii) &(• voice (stem 5t-) x'¥ Aand (gen. x'^p-i')

i\i^ thi^(_t^fw-T-atteal) ra6i foot (tteva rot-) x^<^'' frth (slem x*)'-)

BM. Most fitems are derived from roots by the addition of one oi
more formative aufQxes.

ii-fa-T gifl, stem iupa-, root Sw (^Si-tu-m ffivt), gniflx po-,

'ipaii-lta.T-ed-t KTibt, Item ^rpo/ifiarcv-, root ffio^, suffizee /mt and n.

a. Moot words are therefore built up from root, aoffli, and inflectional end-
ing by a ptooeaa of compoeitJon analogous to that seen In compounds (869 D.),
in irtitch tbe ouioB of the various elements yields an Idea ditlereut from that seen
in each of the parts.

825. A stem is primary if only one suffix is added to the root
(SvpcM') ; secondary, when more than one suffix is added to the root
{ypofir/iarw^).

826. There are two kinds of stems : nonn-stems (substantive and
adjective) and verb-stems.

837. Words containing a single stem are called simple words, aa
Avyv^ ^peecft; words containing two or more stems are called com-
pound words, aa Aoyo-y/xl^o-f ^eech-writer.

aaxBK OBAK. — 16 236 ,

^ FOftMATIOM OF WORDS [tat

838. According to the chantoter of the suffix words are called:

a. PrimitiTe (or PrinMry) ; formed 1^ the addition of a suffix either

to a root or to a verb-stem to which a vowel, usually t, has been
added (486, 486).

Boot ypa^ ; ypi^-u turlte, tfa4^ wrOtitg, -rpa^-ti^ wrlUr, yfitH^
sonttthing teriUtn, yp^irinii line.

yeth-OMaytr-tlaftfi-ffBaibeeomt {iytriimr, yi^t^iMi.'): yht-rir* gat*-
tU, origin ; np-t (r/fHf bore^ : ript-^po-t gimlet, inttrununt for baring.

b, Deaomlnative (or Secondary) ; formed from a noun-stem (substan-

tire or adjective) or adverb.

ffoiiriMT-^ writer (stem ypaitiimr-, DOm. ypimid) ; tittup»*-Sft Aoppt-
lUM (stem tMovwr-, nom. •MaW') i imaa-rini jui^ee, itna^tn-t jitM (Ilcf
right); ^(X-Mi-i fliendlTi (^iXa-i dear); iouXi-w etwJam (J*SX«-i tlave);
ToXw^i ancient, of old date, from the adverb riXm long ago.

829. Suffixes forming primitive words are called primary suffixes }
suffixes forming denominative words are called secondary suffixes.

■. The distinction between primary and aecondarr snfBzes la not original
and is often neglecl«d. Thus, in Snrit terrible (^iti- fear), k la a primary mf-
fix i In ^nrnrit dark ("irot, 866. 11), It la aecondary. go Engllah -able Is both
primary (readable) and aecoDdary (companionable).

b. It is often difflcQlt to determine wbeUier a suffix is added to a Terty«tem «r
to a nonn-atem : Iaxu-p6t Uroag (l^x^' strength, laxi-u am Urong).

c. A primltiTe woid may be termed from a verty-stem which la ilaelf denoml-
natlve: rofiu-riff bowman from t^i6-u tkoot with the bow, derived from rif>-r
bow. A primitive may be formed with a aufflx derived from a denominative :
^Xey-upt-i burning (,t\fy-u bunt) with vpe from \iyo-p6-t (Xt7*-t) MhrOl.

i. A denominative often has no oorreepondlng prlmlUve ; someUmc* tha
latter has been lost, HOmetimea it was prMumed for the purpose of woid-forma-
tiOD by the imitative prooess always at work in the making of language, Tbos,
S4ii-r-*a-r bed, from Sc/i-n-r (lin-u buHd, eomtntet).

830. To determine the root all suffixes must be removed from the
stem until only that part remains which contains the fundamental
idea.

a. Hoet roots are soon-rDots or verb-roots ; bat originally a root waa nelthw
noun or verb (198). Soroe roots are pronominal, and exprete direction or poai-
tlon. Greek has many words whoee roots cannot be discovered. Hie form of
a root in Greek is not necessarily tiiat which Comparative Grammar sbowi ww
common to the cognate langnages.

b. Since the origin of many words, even with the help of the cognate lan>
goagea, is uncertain, we are often at a loes where to make the dividing ibia
between root and snfflz. Suffixes are often preceded by a vowel which may be
regarded as a part of the aofflx or aa an ezpanalon of the root (b; some soholan
re^rded aa a part of the root Itself).

831. Chances of the TOot-TOwel. — a. The root-vowel ia aomattiiMa antnf,

■33] FORUATIOH OP WOBDS: SUFFIXES

■ weak .' «s M (wMk i) ; «, M (««ak «) ; i| or ■ (wwk ■ or «)- lk«(>-fM
TtnvaU, Xmv-^ mnoteteff, cp. Xds'tf, f-XiT-oc ; ^lOY-ll( team, op. {k^-ri>-fu,
{vy-dr yoiU ; ffrou^ •«aj, #n<i-w Aoatett / Xf^-it forgeffuinett, XofMrv (^«*-)

(*<ry-, ^-, A-7-). Cp. 86.

b. <oftenTsi{MirtUia,KimetlmM wWia; iiBometlmw v«rl» wttha. 7Jr-»4
t^iprtng, yt^r-tiuu (t"-) ; t4>-o-i totu, r«in* (r**-) Btreteh ; rpa^-ipAt i0ell-/eil,
rft^-i tuntritlmtent, rft^-u tumrWh ; Aptiy-^ ftclpfn^, if^iy-a help. Cp. SO.

833. Boot-ditannliMtlTN. — A ooiuoiuuit aUodlng between root and anfflx
(or endiDg), and not modifying the meaniDg of the root, ia called a root-detcrnitMa-
tfte.

pltpaf pedeibd, bam fimlru go (pa-) ; tr-t-m (poetical for igSlm) eat, for
JM-H, ep. loaio It-- ; tX4-«4( (poet.) amfidl, rXft-i-at eroted, T\ri-0-^ taOelif,
ep- r(|t-«Xf.^ ; n-B-f-fiii dtqr'* >oiinM|r, vrA-^ftif a ml«, from Irrvfu (rro-) ;
«^4-X-4* <*4P^ ^ ffidtf le^w. — On the InoBrtion of r, we SSO.

a. The origin of loot-deteiminatlvea U obacnre. In part Otey may he
relica of rooti. In part doe to the analogy of worda containing the coiuonanUi la
qneatioii.

8331 SnffizM. — A anffiz is a formatiTe element added to a root
(or to a stem) and standing between tlie root and the ending.
Saffixes limit or particularize the general meaning of the root; but
only in a few cases is the distinct meaning of the suffix known to us.

^ The origin of the Qreek mfflzes Is often obscore ; of those Inherited
from the parent language only Mone were employed to make new words ; otben
were formed by Greek Itself (productive saSxeE), From the analogy of the
modem languages we Inter that some saSxes were once Independent woida,
whicli, on beooming a part of a compound, lost their algniflcation. Thns 'hood,
•head in tMldhood, godhead are deriTed from Old Eng. 'hid,' Gothic 'haldns'
ekaraeter, nature; -ehip In tnenenhip, covrtthtp, comes from a lost word meaning
' sh^M ' ; -4 In friendly from Old Eng. ' lie ' body. So -AS^ meaning tmellia^
(Site) , as in iMtqt fragrant, acquired a range of meaning originally Inappropriate
to It by passing Into the general Idea of ' full of,' ■ like,' as in rMiiiqi grang
(nla), XoifuM^ peMtaential (Xai/iif), r^nidJirt iea^p4ike (v^). This sufOx la
distinct from -«Iifi having the form of, like (898 a).

CoDTRsely, many solBzea, themselven insignificant, acquired a definite meaiw
Ing by reaaou of the root with which they were associated. — Irrespective of Iti
meaning, <n« word may serve as a model for the creation of another word ; aa
tiarvatton, eonttellation, etc., are modelled on eontemplation, etc

b. Many dt«y11ahio safBxes, due to a combination of the Snal letter or
lettoia of the itam and an original monooyllablc suffix, adapt themselves to Inde-
pendent use. Cp. eoo-tinafore^o-inn because ot patrlot-im, -able In laughabls
and proftoMe (from proba-bUtt). Thus, patronymics In •ttfirt, -hIJIiti 846. S, 8;
woidsin-«(raB4Sb,((; -<ulMS68.Sa; -«£» 861. 1 ; -Arrtpot SIS ; -^i|t 848 a, S. ;
-4>.<868.8; -4^1868. 9 b; -tbt 86B.Sa; -dm 868. 8; -Uwr863.S; -41^ 84Sa,
N„844. 3 a; ^t|Mt86a9; -dr^t 848 a, N., 844. 2 a; and many otbera.

c Simple mfBxea an oftao added to case fortna or adverha, thus frodoalng,

228 FORMATION OF WOEDS: CHANGES IN STEMS [834

by oontominstlon, dtnyllablc eufflxee ; as ipx'H't-t anetent 858. 2 a ; voXtu-^
of old dtOe ess i),4affri-t vernal B68. 12; ^v^i-ni-i natural 858. 6 b ; cp.ii-Aiu-o-t
mariitt (AXf).

d. Uany ootnpoimd suffixes are formed by the union of two BufSzea, new
Rtema being creaMd by tbe additlau of a suffix U> a atem, as : Ti|p-io 851. 2, lo-s-to
852. 6, (tfjt^u 864. See 854.

e. Sufflzea ott«n allow gradations: n]p, ntp, np, Tp (36 K. 1) as fn So-ti)p,
tii^vp, tirufia (out of Hvrt/^i^d) ffiver ; i^dX-rf>na harp^laper ; fii|v iiv : Xi-/ii)>
tar&our, \(-^u-i) loJu) ,' pMp pop : Tit-fu*p, rti^-iiap goal ,' ap p : U-iiip uxUrr,
U-pi hydra ; m av : Titr-tir oocenter, tern. rArrain, from rorav-ja ; and in
Uwr Uon, fem. Utura (843 b. 5).

834. OungM In ttans. — Various changes occur when a suffix is
added to a stem.

ju The flnal tdwbI of a stem Is contracted witb the initial vowel of a soffix :
i^lSur tmall tnake (D^i- + i>u>r from f^i-i). 80 when a consonant is dropped at
the end of a stem : aUa-io-i vtntrable (oJdiit reverence, stem uSiw-), ^a«iX«-i5
kingdom (fi<uri\ri-t king, stem piuriXef tor ^wrihcv, 43), drrc-ib-i rained (Avrv
cBj, stem d^f/r- for ivriu-, 43). Cp. 868. 2.

b. A long final vowel of a stem m^ be shortened before the Initial vowel of
a Buffli : Slxi-io-t jvtl, ifcir right, stem Sua-. (Properly SUoi is an old ca«e
form, 833 o, to which -0-1 is added.)

C A flnal Towel or diphthong may be dropped before the initial vowel of a
mUBx : amp-li uitdom (r*^> w(«e), rtfi-io-t honoured, coMtlji (riiii honour, stem
T(fu-), /3u'iX-M^ royal (/SiwiXed-f king), nUr-icA-f civic (voXfriri c((i«en, stem

<L The flnal letter or letteis of a consonant stem may be dropped : viat^po-aini
teapwanet, moderation (aii^pur temperate, stem iru^por-'), /uX-ijJpiar little aong
(fil\-at aong, /aXeff-), i\iie-iri-t genuine (dXijff^i -^1 trae). So apparently in tlie
case of a vowel st«m in ItarS-rvroi belonging to the matler (SeirxATiji),

e. The finai consonant of a etem undergoes regular euphonic change before
tbe initial consonant of a suffix ; p\in-iui glance (p\hr-w look), Juiw-riic a judge
()m5-T^, from Saii;u}udge, stem lucat-), rla^i-i faith (= iri0^t-i, from r(itf-«
perauade, stem n*-), WJii stgle (= \ty-irt-t, from X^-u gpeai).

(. Stems In * have an alternative in t (cp. trro-t, voc. Jm ; 220 b). This
t ofl«n appears in denominatives: alui-w dwell, oUi-Tip houte-tervant, oln-io-i
domesUe (aIio-i hotiie).

g. Derivatives of a stems may apparently show u in place of S ; as arpiirui-Tiit
Moldier (fTpariA army),'lra\iii-Tiit an Ilaliote, Greek inhabitant of Italy ('iroXia
Italg). See 843 a, M. Stems in a have i) in rl/iii-dt honoured (rifii), stem rlfii-).

h. Vowel stems, especially those derived from verbs, often lengthen a final
short vowel before a suffix beglnulnif with a consonant : roCif-fia poem, rotti-ai-t
poelry, iM^-rif-i poet, TBH|-Ti-ii4-t creative, poetical (mJ-a make) ; Jcv^cv-r^-i
priioner (^Btaiii-t, Sta/ii fetteri). Verbs with stems in a, 1,0 usually show in
derivatives the stem vowel as found in the tenaes other than the present ; as
>qX&4d man^est, f ut. IifXii-o-w, SijXu-fft-i manifntation ; ip6a plough, fnt. dfit^u,
<P»-rt-i arable land, dpo-rifp ploughman ; tdp-UrK-u find out, int. eip-+
dtteovtry, bnt tlp-*-rit discovers, tip^-riii diaeaverer.

S3«] PORMATIOK OP WORDS; SUBSTANTIVES 229

L Vowel BtBum Eometimea insert a vowel before a saffli beginning with » con-
■ODaul : roXi-^-riT-i, Ionic for i-sM-Tq-i citizen, rraXl-t-dfio-r (poetic) citj/.

j. CoDBonuit sUmt, and Towel nems not ending in o, often hIiow o Iwfora a
■offiz in denomiiuitiTeB ; a stem In -«r is tbiis replaced by one in -o : ru^pa-
r6nf temperawx (tii^pu* temperate, ru^poir-) ; oi/ur-^ii bloody (oIm, -arot
Uood) and irn-i-«f ahadowy {atti. ihadote) b; analog; to 4oX6-«it wll|r, 868. 3.
Cp. 873-875.

B3S. Several aubataDtlTes are fonned by rednpllcation ; dY-vy-if traintng
[ti-u I«(ul)> «-«M food (Ionic rS-« eat), vi-T"!, -^rrin giant Some, by me-
Uthesis (128 a) : r/i^t-t evtting (r/^r-u eu/).

B3G. Insertion of aigma. — Between root (or stem) and suffix r Is often
found, and in some cases It has become attached to the sufDx. This parasitio
letter spread from Ibe perfect middle, where It is properly in place only in
stems in r, 9, 0, or IT ; as in rx'-'-/'^ cleaving wltb a- from f-vxi-r-zioi by
analogy to JFir^cur-rai for i-ax'^'"" C'x'f" cleave). In -o'-riri the transference
was made easier by words like s^ur-rii cloven for axil-™. This a appears
befoi« many Bofflzea, and iMually where the perfect middle has acquired it (489).

|1A: ard-v-iia Epaam (inriiiii rend, Ivwaairtiai), tiXto-a-na eomntand (_Ktkii-ci
command, ati\tvciiai), i/ia-a-iM ttain (^/nalni (tafn, ^w^iiair^i). — |>a : rra-v-/iit
= cri-ff-im, nt'^tv-v-liit command. — ftij: ii-v-ii'^ setting (^Btai uf), — ti]i: jnX<v~
»-Ti(t tlgnal-man, ipxi-»'-"f' dancer (ipx-i-oi^ii dance), iuri-r-Tip lord (S6ra-;iai
am able). Also in l/M-ff-riipiot yflcariou* {tpd-u do), ipx+*'-''p" dane(iiy-;)(aee,
wWii-v-nini/ulnetg. -a-it has displaced S/i, -0-fi (832) in Jcfi^ odour (earlier iliif),
^v-ff-iiit (and ^<i-9-iiii) rhythm.

837. Insertion of tan. — In a tew words r is Inserted before the mifflzea ;»,

fiB, lof, /tJir. Thus, i^-e^-ioj command {itphitu, TOOt i, i), Xat-r-fui dqyth of the
tea, iA^-iti and iu-r-^ijr breath (itiiu blovi). In iprr-iii-r oar the r may be
part of the verb^tem {iptraw, 515), and have spread thence to the oUier words.

POBMATION OP SDBSTANTIVEfl

83& Some enffixee have a special sigDificance ; of these the most
important are given in 839-856. But suffixes commonly used with
a special function (such as to denote agency, action, instrument, etc.)
are not restricted to this function. Only a few have one function,
as Ttpo to denote comparison.

a. The instrument may be viewed as the agent, as in ^(u-v-rifp hammer, lit.
tmaiher, fram fiai~a tmash. rpo (8(13. IS) may express the agent, iDSlmment,
or place. Suffixes Dsed to denote actions or abstract ideas often make concrete
words, as rpa^ nurture and nouriihrnent, iyyt\-la mettage (cp. Eng. dwell-
ing, elothlng). rapStttMt means ferry, ferri/-boal, ferryman'* fee. Words
originally denoting an agent have lost that meaning, as ro-r^p father (orig.
protector), and in many cases the original force is changed.

839. AOBNCV

a. The primary suffixes to, njp, rop, rpo, ev, denoting the agent or
doer of an action, are mascnliiie.

280 FOBHATION OF WORDS: SUBSTANTIVES tM

1. iS (tiom. -H-)) : KtM-^^ ><l9« (KfUn decide, ifH-), iXAr-rir-i (Ai^ (icX^-t-«
fteoO. roHfnf^ poet, i.e. nwier (rW-w maJte), nilXv-Tf-i fim«-fiaytt
(a6\l-v play the flvie), ttat-^-rii-t pupil (/iaiMru learn, itad-t-'), iK-l-TTf-t
tvpplUad (lt-ii*-aiuti come, it-).

% *i|p (Dom. -r4^) : Sa-r^f giver (i(-<H-fu give, (e-, jw-), vw-rV Hvtotir (fH^
•ae«).

5. Top (Dom, -THp) ; ^i(-rup orator ('^w aAafl Kiir, //>-, ^), tt-p^-Mti Aom

tpojfc«N, rrlr-Tup fovnder (kt1{w /owwI, rriA'), rWrrgy conugHmder,
poet. {miuUrv give a ttgnaJ, <rifiMr-).

4, rpo (Dom. -rpA-«) : U-rpi-t phjftUlUM (U-Ofwi Aeol).

6. n (nom. -a^): ypa^-t6-t writer C7j>d^4 torUe)i TM-<A-t /(tfJUr (rkra

begtt, TO-).

b. The primaty Bufflzes rpiS, rpid, ntpd, rtS are femlnina.

1. Tpit (oom. -rpit) ; aM^-rpff /mote jtMt04>Ja|r«r.

2. T^ (nom. Tpuk) : wot^pim poeteu (Ute), <fii\^pit femaU \arper (f iXXit

play the Aarp, ^'''M-
8. TtifB (nom. Tipu from r</i-f,ii) : rii-r*!^ fein. of ctt-ri^ t6-rtifa tern, cf

4. TiS (nom. -rii) ; Ir-i-rtt female *upplia«t fern, of U-4~tV'

c. The ume root or verb-aCem mfty hftve dlSereot sufflxM denoting Qie agent :
7vr-/-r^, 7ep-«^ijp, '(**4-TUf begetttr; iui$-if^plt, or f«#-iH'pu> /MHate pifpil,
fern, of iioB-^t^rii.

4. Words In tup, -rpii, •<vt are ozytone. Words In -rup, •rnpo, -rpia have
leceniTe accent. Words In -r^ aie oxytone or parozytona.
«. See also a> (nom. -tir) 861. 18.

840. HAHBB OP ACTIONS AND ABBTBACT BtTBSTANTIVBa

B. SnbstantiTee denotiug B,ctiona often express abstract ideas,
and names of actions and verbal abstracts are often naed con-
cretely. The following suffixes (except fio, nominatdve -/i^, and
«r, nominatiTe -«c) form feminines; all are primary except id in
some words.
1. n (nom. -ri-i) : Tb'-Tt-f /attA (rtl9-tt penuade, iri#-), ^-T*-t mmour (#wiJ
tag, ♦o-).

5, «\ (nom. -tft-i) I Mftf «lvle (X/y-u tpeali), r«(i7-7i-t po«trv (rot^-w mojlf),

^J-v(-t decdir (^(-v-M <f«cav), J^i-f act o/ giving or ^^ (3f-aw-f« j/m,
)»-, Iw-), M-vi-i placing (ri-^rt-iu place, 8t-, Af-), rd-tf'i't («iufo)i (foT
Tf-fct 86 b, from rtlm ttretch, rev-), n ia derirnd from rt after a
vowel (116).

8. ml (nom. -vli) : In SDbBtantlTea from verba In -«{)* out of -aS-iw ; ai
ionftarU examination (to«M{w «xanifne, !•■ fu'O-

4. n (nom. -rD-t 863 a. 17) : nre, poeUc and dialectic, a^if^tt eating (poeU
M-H eat), 0oi)-rt-f «Aontfiv (tSo^-u *Aotil).

6. |w (nom. -|i&4, maso.) : jiwv/ii-t jrnmil (liiii-M purme), rra^fii-t mue*-

inji (wrip-nrtiM tneeMti). On #-/w see 832, ff-«w 836, r-fM SST. Cp.
801. 1.

t4i] FORMATION OF WORDS: SUBSTANTIVES 281

6. fM (nom. -fiq) ; yni-iai knottledge (Yi-omWiw kitow), ^fot report, oMm
(^f-fiJ M|r}, Ti-/i4 honour (poet, rf-it Aonour), fv+^q ni«monr (/u-finf-"*'
ramfad]- SeealaoSfil. 1.
T. pa (nom. -^) : riX-fu daring (rA^-rw dure).
S. «r (n<Hii. -«t, nwit.): Si-»t ftar, {iiy-at cold.

ft. il (nom. -J£] : primitive, from Teib-atems, as iiar-U madneM (^rsfioi raft,
fmr-). DenomhubtlTe : ^ytiur-i& iovertig«tf (^yiniir leader), titprfivtm
Und »trvie% {titinrr-ia from iiifrr4Tiit doer of good deedt). Wfthoat uiy
iiotui4(ero: roXupcU tiege (roXupK^M btttege). Verbs in .«i>m derired
from mbeUntiTes, as railt6-ti edHcatt (rati child), sbow abstraots In ^11
for *(_«)'» (43) : raiitlA tdueatton, rrparfla campaign (aTpurtitiMi Mm
tkejltld), /W(X(ia retgn, kingdom (^oriXt^Ho am king).
10. •,«: we86». 1,8.

k. Han^ feminine BubBtantives expressing the abstract notion of
tbe adjectiTe are derived from adjective stems (a few from Bubstan-
tive or verb stems). Many of these denominatives express qKoHtg,
cp. Eng. -neu, -hood.

1. dt (nom. -W) : from adJeetivM In ip and -not, .out, as dX^flna trtiiA for dXi|-
fcv-ia from dXi)^t true; (ra«a wani for irS»(t)f~ia from Jidnit iM«il|ri
44 a, SOS d ; iVmo JtJndseM for (A>«(a)-ia from ttrto-t diwvt Mnd.
1. i> (nom. ~Ja) : )MawMr-fd AoppiceM (cMo^mt Aiqipp), rcMoxla ' ollfonca
(jriiiiMX" Jtghting along with), va^-IA witdom (vt^i wtie). Bince r
becomes # before u we have d^Kirla tmntortalOy (dMrarv-t (mmortol)*
Cp. 86». 0.
1. rni> (nom. -ritni) : StnM-vini Jvttlee (JCxaw-f futt). AbetiKCts In -vvrn are
prcperiy fern, of adj. In -vvwn, as Tirtfg-a^ni ^ (y^86^vrei io}iftU).
-•rini by analogy In iiarr-wtni art ofditinalion (^rri-i leer). See 866. 7.
4. T^r (nom. -rv) : ^iXi-r-^, -r^oi friendship (#fte-« ^end), (ri-nri, -Ttrrt
tqttalitg (b^-t eqital), rt6-nit youlA (rfc-t yoHnp), i-ax^-r^t lAJohieM
(raxt-t thick).
6. aS (nom. -it) : abetiact mbttantlTes of nnmber, as rpt-it, -Hot triad (rpttt).
tnwii, -i»M *nU (jUnt afone, tingle). See also B68 b. 8.
e. Some neuter abstracts express qnality ; rix-" Ipud (rax-^' ft^trt),
Of-rt width (tJM-i brood). See 840 a. 8.

d. A temfailne adjective la need sabstantively in poet, rirvn) vtidom from
Tuvri.^ lOiK ; witfa leceaaiTe accent In f x^ enmity from ix^p^ ho»tHe, M^^
learmth from tipiii-i worm.

•. Some oompoond adjectives In -iji yield (by analogy) abstracts In -U not
in -cUj as iiruxlh misfortune from d-ri>x-4i ai^ortunaU. Pluctnatlon often
oceuia, aa in mn^ui icumr^ld malf(iniiv from niio-4^ fU-d(«pMed,' Old Atde
iX^fi(=Ion. iXifMlq) for dX^fftw.

841. RESULT or ACTION

The result or effeot of an action is expressed by Ota primary
sufflxev

I;.ClK>^Ic

!S2 FORMATION OF WORDS: SUBSTANTIVES [84s

. ft (noni. -Of, nent.) : yir^t race, famUy, stem ytf-W' (vl^c-oftai am bom,

i-^f-^r, 7<r-), Wx-at child, stem rtx-tr- (rbrw bring forth, r«K-), 4tBi-ai

lie, stem ^nii-<r- (^(^S-u deceive).
': for [Dom. -ju, neuL) : ypiii^iia thing written (ypi^-u write), ri^/M thtmffht

(n^bi thinJc), mlit-iia poem (jroti-a make), Sip-iia hide (iip-t* JloiOt T^tf-fta

tection (riiirrw eat, Tt)ir, Tiof, 128 a).

M3. IN8TRUMBNT OR MBANB OP ACTION

The instrumeDt or means of an action is expressed by the primary

I. rpn (nom. -^pe-r, neut.) : ipo^po-r fiovgh (ifii-u plough), \i^p9-r raiuum
(Xft-ureleoM, X5-), riI-V'Tpt-rr<UtU(rtUiithake,C3i»),!l-taic^po-rteaeker't
pag (iiM*i« teach, SiSax-), Xm-rpiht bath (bathing-water; \a6-u VKok).

% l-p* (nom. -Bpa-r, neut.) : K\ei-8po-r bar for closing B. door (iXif-u lAue, 832).

8. rps (nom. -Tp3, fem.) : fuii-rpd kneadiag-trough {iiAttu knead, fwY-), fi'i-rfi
compact (ipiie ipu shall eay, Ip-, ^c-), x^-^P^ Pot {x^w pour, x<^)-

4. Ti|p-w- (nom. -rijp-M-r, neut.) : in a' fen words, as iro-rt)p-i»-v cup (*t*H

drink, rv 629); eeXt-r^p-io-r «pefl, charm {Bfky-u charm). Bee 868. 14.
6. ■« (rare ; nom. -ubr, neut.) : rpo^ia pay /or rearing. See 863 a. 8,
6. p» (nom. -p^i neut) : rt-t-pb-r wing (riT-npai flu),

843. THE PERSON CONCERNED

a. The person concerned or occupied with anything is denoted l^
a denominative formed by one of the following secondary suf&xes :
1. m (nom. -tC-t, masc.): -/pofi^iiaT-ti-t eecrttary (ypiMt", -btsi angthing writ-

ten), Up-ei-t priett {ltp6-i sacred), Irr-tO-t horseman (tnro-t Aone), x"^-

(d.1 coppertmith (xoXxA-t copper).
8. T* (nom. -rir-i, masc.) : ra^-rir-t iailor (rau-j thip), raCi-riri bowman (rifo-p

bow),tUi-riiii houit-tervanl(tliai-thouee,SSil), Str uti-Tti-t pritoner (9Sit).

S. — Bj analog]' are formed: lir-irii-i bed-fellovi (fiVnj bed), following tUi-

Tf-i ; ir\-tTift heany-armed Mldier (Sr\o-r, fa-Xa armovr) ftjlowlng TaXl-.r^-i

from older t^~-i 1 arpari-iiTii-i toldier {arparriA armg) following ica-fui-nr-*.

See 834 g.

b. The following secondary snfQxes form feminine substantives:
1. ta (nom. -i4} 1 corresponding to masculines In -ri-t, u ifptia priettett for

l<p-*u-ia (ltp^6-t priest), fiafl\tia queen {paai\-t6-t king). See -airs below.

5. »S (nom. -1() : tpap)taKAt torcereu (0d/i»uuni-r charm, poison, ^laptuui-ti-t lor-

cerer), xar^iK-h female huekiter (mtijX*-! Auctifer), ^vXax-li female gMard

(^.ixoi).

8- TiS (nom. •rtt) : corresponding to mnBcuUnea in -^if' '• e'l^-rit houae-maid
(oijt/-T),i), »aXr-T.i female citieen (xoX1-ti,i).

4. ittS, WvS (nom. -irra, -lara) : from ja added to Stems In r or ■ (112, 1 14),
■s e^rra female serf tram ^r-j^a (^i, ^-it serf), KlXiwa Cilicisn looman
from KiXic-ia (Klhi^ C(Ifc£ait) ; later, by analogy, (Joo-fXirra 9U«en.

6. OM* (nom. -oow) corresponding to masculinee In-w*: X^-am Uoikm (U-«>

tU] FORMATION OF WORDS: SUBSTANTIVES 283

lion), ttpir-ntn handmaid {$tpdr-uw atlendant), Aix-iuri woman 0/

Laeoxfa (A(Ik-u( a Laeonian). Sy analogy, io o stems; \iic-aua the-teo(f

(X£io-i). -aim Stands for -ar-ia, -an being a meak form of -wr (633 e, 36 b).

N. — Ifunes of deaUn in aojthiiig lunallj end in -i-i&X^, -m ; fem. -rvXit,

■iJm (thX^ Mil) I as j3(^\i(>4-<iX^ bootteller (_pip\lo-r book), airi>4(;iXi)f ^ntin-

dtaler (iriro-( (fmi»), i^i^tiXti bread-teoman (d^o-i bread). Cp. aim xarqUt

under lS.

8M. OBNTILBS OR PLACB NAIfEB

Oentiles are denominative nouns denoting belonging to or coming
from a particular country, nation, or city. Gentiles are formed from
proper nouns by secondary suffixes.

1. «■ (nom. -tit, gen. -4ut, masc.), iB (nom, -It, gen. IS-oi, fem.) i

nXsroM^ -Jut, nXBTcuh -(ioj a Flataean (^ HXdriua) ; ''Zperpirit <Ht
ErttTian H 'BpirfHO) ; Utyaptit, Tieyapli a Megarian (ri JStyapa) ; AloXiff
AeoKan (AfoXot, mythical ancestor of the Aeolians).
a. -ft i-tSot) may denote a land or a dialect: ^ Aupft (7^) Doris; ^
A/eUt (YXitfrra) tAs .^eoltc diaUcl.
% i< (nom. -nf-t, masc.), nS (nom. -rii, fem.) : T(7«i-nji, To^A-rii of Tegea
(i T«7^o) ; Zra^-sA-Tiji, Sra^-ia-Tii 0/ Sparta (if Sripra) ; Xlylri^-nit,

A(>if7-Ttt o/.^«^na (^ AP/iKt) ; Su^n/^l-nji, ru^op-i-rit Sybarite (i/ Xifiw
pit); ZinXi-ii-Tqt, £i<«Xi-i3.-rit Sieiliote (4 SueXia).
a. liic endings -irqt, -vri)t are due to analogy ; see 643 a. N.
3. Other gentllea, properly adjectives, end in -wt. -iS, as 'A^ru»^, -aS of
Athens (oJ'A^qnu), Hn^r-M-i for H:Xirr-io-t o/3fife(u> (Ht\irrat),'Ora«tT-
im of Opus CChrab) ; (i) Kit, (i)"^ ^ 'lur-tjitf Tbnfe ('Iwr^t 7onfan>) ;
*6.«, Wj preceded by a(Ti), i, as ZapSi-iri-t of SardU (ZifOta), Aofi^u-riri-i
o/lrimywoctu (Ai/i^smi), Bufarr-in-i Byzantine {Bviirrar). See 863 b. 12.

B45. PATRONYMICS

PatronTmics, ot denominatiTe proper names denoting descent
from a father or ancestor, axe formed from proper names (^ persons
by means of the following suffixes :

1. U (nom. -tift, masc.), S (nom. -i, tani.) :

B^nt-jtr-i ton of Borea* fem. Bopcit-t, -&t from Bap^o-i

Stems in i shorten S to a ; from ancb forms arose

i. all (nom. -ASif*, masc), aS (nom. xii, fem.) :

OvTt-dav-i son of ThettiMi fem. 8eirrt-<it, -dSof from B/irria-i
From this type arose a new formation :

SL mBK (nom. -utS^i, masc.), wiS (nom. -uii, fem.) :

ttfiwr-tiSn^ toniif Fherts fem,*<pi|T-i4t,-ti!-«tIrom Wpijt (-ttw)
Il(iwir-ui3ir-t ton of Prrnns (fem. Utpviftt, -li-ot) from lltfiari-i
I«\afu(HlJir-i »on 0/ Telainon from TcXa^* (-ilnt)

uogic

234 FORMATION OF WORDS: SUBSTANTIVES [I**

4. tlB (nom. -f>%4, muo.),'ifi (noin. -It, fem.) ;

TarraX-iSn-* won of Tantaliu fern, TarmX-ft, -IS-n from TdrraXo^
"SiKpoT-lt^-t ion of Ctcrrrp* fern. K<cpoir-lt, •Jt-at from K^(p*<^(-«m)

{Mx-fJir-t ion of OeneiM tern. OJnf-tt, -U-ot from <H*(^

A^»-(t^ «on 0/ UiX) lem, Air<*-'<i -"-« from Afni (97*}

Stems In o drop a ; Htemi In iv (ir") drop v ; items in ai (w) drop i.

5. tov or Ici* (poetic and rare ; nom. -twr, maao.) :

Kpor-lur Mil o/ Cronua (also Kpav-Utr(3i B^°> Kpor^r-ot or Epar4w»«i
according to the metre, from Kpiro-i.
ft. iMvS or IiB (poetic and rare ; nom. -tiini or Irq, fem.) j

'Ax(w-<ii»^ daujfAMr of'Aicpltto-* 'Aipjjffr-fi^ dou^Ater o/ 'AS^frro-t

846. Variations occur especially In poetr; : a. Horn. IIqX«-Uif-f« IlfXcJ)^,
Hif'^ir-Uair-t, and IIi]X*-(«P, «on q^ IXifX*^ ; 'Ar/itJiT^, 'Arpt^S^-t, and 'Arpt-twr,
•on q^ "Arpii-t.

b. Two patronymic endings ; Ta\a-Mi>-lli}>i ton of ToXol-t.
G. Ttie stem drops or adds a syllable : AivnX-Uir-i son 0/ AncoUw, twt ;
AofiT-*T-(i^-i wn o/AdfiTo-t.

d. -iihri Is naed in eomio formations : ic\nT-Utr-i son o/a tAi^.

e. -rtii Occam In the dlalacts, as 'ETo/uiviirJs-i ^lamiitondat.

t. -toi, -CUT, may Indicate descent, as TtXa/uivu roT oh ion ttf TWobuk, Tvr-
lo^U Arydrirfi dauptor of 7)indareiu ; cp. Tennyson's " Nlobean danghMr/'

847. A piuronymlo may include the father, as ntiai^Tfor iSax the FtMMrr
Mae (Peisistratm and his sons).

848. Host gannlne patronymlce are poetioa] and belong to the older lutgnage.
In the olssaioal period patronymics rarely Indicate descent in the case of historical
persons ; as fldpirUirf, 'ApwrrJIi^t.

849. Metronymice denote descent from the mother, as titorWift son of
Alfd*, *tXvi*-M4-t son of*r\6pi.

890. Relationship is sometimes denoted by the BofOzes iBm (nom. -iMt^ son
of) and ita (nom. -tS^ daughter of) ; as d9iX^-i9o£>-i n^pAMS, dliX^^ nice*
(dttX^i^ bntlier).

PU^CE

851. Place may be ezpressed bj the secondiuy Buffixes
1. to (nom. -w-r, nent.): AurAvisv (scU. Upir) tempie of Dionj/mu, 'Hpaar

Also H-M (nom. -«(b->, neat.) : from BnbstantlTes Id -rf-i Kid hf exten-
sion in othets ; as ^aXn-ia-r /orire (xa\it-<^ eoppertmith), 8qs'c-u* 7^
•Mm (e^c^), \ay-tit-r plaet for tpeattng (\irfo-t ipeeck), pwT'cia.r seat
o/ Ms Mueee (juiva mute), 'OXv/tirnttt Otytr^Ovm ('OM/triD-t Otympiati
Zevt).
n|p-i« (nom. -T4»-ie-r, neut); derived from snbstantiTes In -nip (or •r^t) ;
aa iicpairip^a-w auditorium (itpoiT'ip or dapoAntt hearer), i/ffrntT^ m >
loorb&op (^/rfoffT^j) loorJkman), |)ouX(vr4/Hor ssimM A«NM (fifXiwrif et
(JovXtvnti eomwfllor, •enntor). See 668 a. &

I;.C00J^[C

Is6] FORMATION OP WORDS: SUBSTANTIVES 285

1 m (nom. -tir, gen. -fiv-ot, inasc,) : itip-iir aparttn4Tit for men (ir^p, irlp-ii
«mh}, Irr-iSr Mabl« (Irro-t Aorm], wapetr-uiv maid'it'e apartment, Par(A«-
aoa, temple of Pallaa (wa^Mm-t raaidirn), alr-iir wlne-rellar (sIhm ttine),
lftnX-<ir vtnegaril (^S/irtXo-i viae). Forma in -tAr occur, u mpifrtp-tiiw
ieve-cote (rtpterfpi dove), otniiF.

4. tnS (nom. -rrct, teni.) ^ added i^ <*', Irtjmr^ni apartment /or men, itwatatf-
rrii opuKmetU/rir uoiMn.

fc mkB (noni. -ttirii, fern.) : ^J-wrid ra«e-fied Qii»-r rote).

t. tfl (nre ; nom, -rpi, fem.) ; J^x4-«'Tp2 ifancinf-}>(ace (ifixf-^/"" dattee),
nXat^-^pi wrestlinff'^roiuid (toXoI-h wrtttle). Cp. 838,

DIIflNUTIVSS

SS2. Diminutivee are denominatiTes formed frooi the steras of
tubataDtires by various secondary eufflxes.

1. M (Dom. -«>-», neat.); rmS'lo-r ItttU child {riut, irtuS-h), iprtBio-r small bird
(V><>i SpriOot), iawtl-iO-r maall ihield (do-rit, dff^U-ot).

N.— TriayUftbic words are poroxyCone if the flnt syllable is long by nature
orpadlion.
1 tSis (nom. 4)M-r, neut ) : derived from sncb words as irrll-19-T ; as fi^fr-Uw-r

dagger ((f^t *uonI,stem {1^17-), pa-liut-r tmall cow (^3-i), aluUiO'* sinaU

kovte, elm + iSiet (oluld), IxSiSui-r »mall fish (_lxMi}. See 833 b.
8. Bfw (nom. -dfur, neut) : TOiB-ipio-w liuU Child.
t. iB-pw (nom. -tipier, neut.) : iu\-i3pio-r little toiig (/i^Xii),
G. Mm (nom. -^XXmv, neut.) : Ar-£Uia-r little epic or verMtelt (frat).
1 irwo, wKft (nom, ■(•■net, masc., -(ir<)j, fem.); di'e/i«x-io'jnM tnantHn, *ai8-i«ro-i

jfoung fray, roil-lriinr youn; girl. From tbis comes -iiri-is in dn-ij-tono-r

«aaU*ftfelit
893. Many other diminutives occur, as aKi« ; in riMinr wine^for (rlAit) ;
(t,ll;iD d^li, -Usf smal/uofron (Sftofa), rqirtt, -tSoi ii2et (r^ro-t) ; iS-«i : of Che
young of animals, M Xw^ttfi ieo(/''« vshelp (Xfiie-i), also laStOt ton's ran, grand-
wa (uMi) ; ix'= JprdXtx*) younn blnf (d^aUi) cAlcJt ; ix<*: cXfx*^ (f^^id xuX-
ixn*r, KvKix^') •"mA cup (irtfXiO. Rare or late are -auMwv, 'd«'iav, -d^nar,
•ilifin, igxApi^w, or, 801. IB, -tfXai, and over 26 oOiers. See Xd, SaO, 1,
8M. DfrninotlTss am often combined : ruJ-tnc-d/iur stripling, luipdiMor,

pBt»f-i*ian, itiip<ui-i\K-uif, /utpoc-i'XX-fJtti' stripling (jitipai laas), x^aT-un-liar
tloalUet (xXarfOi {V'<'l>M>' flt*e«t ({V^' onfmaJ).

BSS. Some words, especially such as denote parts of the body, are dliulnu-
tlTS in form, but not la meaning; as (jmrfor skull, 9itplar beatt (= S/tp), rtifer
pMn (vftar ground), all In Homer, who has no diminutlTes. Diminatives oft«n
•mployed tend to lose their diminutive value,

B54. Diminntlv«a may espren affection, familiarity, daintiness, and some-
ttmes pity or contempt (cp. dar-Hng, lord-ling). See the examples under 862,
lad ate rmrp-liior iaddj/ (tut^/i), iSt\^iSio-r dear little brother, Zunpar-llior
dear Sockf, Afiptix-iBr manikiri. Some endings often have an ironical foioe, u
rWr-ot riA Awl, yi^pttw JM^ellg.

iog[c

FORMATION OF WORDS i ADJECTIVES

FOBMATION OF ADJECTIVES

857, Adjectives are formed by the same sufBxes as are used in
substantives, the same formation producing in one case a substantive,
in another an adjective. Many words formed with certain suffixes
(lo, /Id, vo, pa, to) are used as adjectives or as abstract substantives
(usually feminine or neuter). Thus ^iXta friendly or friend»hip; so
trri^vo-^ croton {irri^ut encirde^ was originally an adjective. Many
sufiixes have no characteristic signification.

Adjectives are either primitive (from roots or verb-stems) or
denominative (from substantives or other adjectives). But this
distinction is often obliterated and difiScult to determine.

89a. The following are the chief adjectival suffixes:
1. o, K (nom. -o-t, -If or -a, -o-») : primary ; X#i»-i-j remaittinff (\ilr-a leow,
XiT-, \ttir-, Xoi»-), >tuK-6-1 bright (\i6trtru ihine, Xmic-jw).

S. la, iS : a common aufflz expressing that which pertains or belong* in any
way to a peraou or thing. By union with a preceding stem Towel we
have aw, (ID, out, 410, vu>.

Primary (rare) ; 47-10-* sacred (4701 eipiatlon) ; with a eomparatlre
force: AXXot other (dX-w-t alitit), itlrat middle (iLcS-io-t mediut, 113).

Secondary In riit^io-i toorthy, coitlj/ (ti^ii) honour) ; ^IX-um frimdlf
(^IXo-i dear) ; ipSso-i ste'p (ipSb^ ttraight) ; r\a6a'ur-i rich (rXoSrin
rieha, 116) ; a(«wo-i jutt (iJn-jj right, 834 h) ; oht-io-t domettic (oIjw-i
house, 834 f) ; rirp-io-j hereditary (war^p father, rarp-, 202) j piwftt-
i»-f roj/al (^BiriXc^ hlng) ; 0ipt-ui-t of gwnmtr (Sfpoi, Oeta 8tptr-) ;
a»o-w-[ venerable (cJJiii Ouime, Btem aJJ«c-, 260) ; 4p{ot hcroU («pifi
Aero, iipaf-, 267) ; iri)xi^-w-i a cubit lonff (_wflxv-t, 268). The femininee
are often abstract aubatantlves, aa ^iX-(d frieitdthlp.

a. The ending -au» has been transferred from 5 stems, as in xV^->»-'

of or from dry land (x*!"-"')- "^^ 'o"n i-OHit occurs ; S/nx^iuo-i
worth a drachma (trMx/ri). -<idi has become independent In drip-titi
manly (if^p)- On gentiles la -lai, see 844. 3,

b. Ionic ^io (nom, -iji'oi), properly from ateois In tu (iv), as Rom. ^^^'4-1*-*

brazen (pertaining to a ;^aXiKi^i brazier ■ Attic x<iX«oi, -oOi, see 6fi8. 4),
jSaffiXi^-to-t royal ; and trannferred in Ionic to other stenia, as In wAi/t-
iio-t warlike, dj^Bpui-^io-i human (Attic irBpiircio-t), drip-^i'a-f manlf.

8. fvr lor ^tvr (nom. -ex) forms denominative adjectives denoting /ulne** or
abundance (mostly poetic).

Ti/Lii-tii (Ti*i5») honoured, and by analogy SerSp-ittt woody (tirtpe-r
tree) ; x"*"'-*" graceful (xdpi-t), 8oX4<if urflj (i*Xo-t), and by analogy
ol/uT-^ii bloody {aXm, -ot-oi ftlood, 884 j), ix9v-i-tit full of fi*k.
«pu-i-tn chilling (<:p«-gt cfti'ii). Also In tipi-ta moiJdy (>dp<St, -tJrct).

4. m (nom. -co-t , -aCi, 290) forms denominative adjectives denoting moMriOI :
xptvtn, x/iOvaOi yolden (xpv'^' gold).

■sB] FORMATION OF WORDS: ADJECTIVES 287

a. (0 ia derived from t-j/t, seen In XP^"^ (poetic). Een t li part of the

stem (834 f). On -qiai see S58. 2 b.
6. w (nom. -^it -tt) : primitive: •jitui-^t falte (^fAi-oi dtctive), ro^^t clear,

wp^r-^t prone, ^>-4t htalthy. Very commou in compounds, u

d-«^X-4i unAamMd, wcui'e (d-priv. + r^aX- in ff^XXw trfji).
6. M, aKs, LSB (nom. -kbi, very common, cp. 864. 1) : nuuiy deDomlnatives

formed by these suffiies denote rtlaUon, many otlieia jUneu or

abaUv.
■.Denominatives: iMwri-xb-t prophetic {iiAm-i prophtt); ^ivi-iA-i no^ral

(^^(-1 nature); ^Xu-ii-i /eminine (0$Xt^ /cmole); baptirt^t DariC

(Ad^w-i i^riiu).

b. From ^uat-ti i, etc., m vtbh taken as an independent eufflx in fiotw-ijiA-t

atiuical (^Cffn muie) ; pappap-iiii-t barbaric (_pdftPafio-t barbarian,
foreigner^; SiJoffiaX-iici-i ablt to leach (SildinaXo-f teac/ur); lutBiiiuer-
uii-t fond of learning (jti0iitta,-)MTet thing learjtt); Ktpa)u-iiii-i Fotttr^
quarter, Ceramlctit (^apa/tii-i potter') ; ^ao'iX-iic6-f royal (^ofiX*^
king'); t^pw-tii-t heroic, from 4pw(/r),-(it A«ro; 'Axai-wi-t or'Axa^c&-t
(88) Achaean ('Axui-t jlcAnean).
N. — d^-ori-i oMe to rule (ipx-'i),ypa^-tt6-i able to write oi draw {ypa4l-^^),
need not be derived directly from the rooL

c Eop(t4i-<uri-i Corinthian (K»filte-a>-t Corinthian'); ffvo^Sti-oiA-t contiutng
oftpondea (crari-t'ia-t spondee').

d. T-ucd represents iii added to the verbal in t6- (cp. also /wtf^/uT-iiii-i).
Hius, X«(-riici-i mited to peaking {X^-« ipeoi); aio-fl^-riici-i capable
o//Mlinjr (alirMrs^uu /eel)i d^d>iir-Tijil-f skilled in nrnidtering (ipiB-
piti to number)! ipSi-riiti-i practical, able to do {ufArTo do); irtrr-
Tiij-f reflective (anir^-oiiai look carefully, consider). Added to a
nonn-Stem : rait-rttS-i nautical (^rait-s ship).
T. Xa (nom. -Xo-i) : primary (uHually active) and secondary. Cp. 880. 1.
Primary in Sti-\6-i cowardly (i^am-jro fear, !i-, )«-, Sat-) j trrptfi-\i-t
twitted (jrrpi^-a turn) ; rv^Xi-i blind (rt^-a raite a tmoke) ; mtXst
hollow (= (o^-iXa-f, Lat. eao-«») ; rpex-"^*-' running {Tptx-a> run) ;
rfi-«Xii-i like (foini am like, tU-) ; cnfir-fiXo-i bent (rri/ir-r-w benii) ;
^if-uAi-f iparfn? (^I3-aiuii epare). drar-ij-Xif deceitful ^iwirv deceit,
irBTd^i (iecelre) may be a primitive or a denominative. Cp. 860. I.

a-X«d denoting quality in Airr-aX^o-t attracIiM, roobAtnjr (d/nrdfw
ftiie), tapa-aXia-t bold (Sdpv-^i boldneu).

8. |w (nom. -lu-t, 801. 1): primary: hp-^ii-c uarra (d/p-u warm); aecondai; '

In fpi-o-iia-t seventh,

9. >-|M, r-iiia (nom. -i^w-i, -<riiu-i) : often denoting able to or jif (». Adjectives

in 1^ are primitive or denomlna^ve, and are derived from i-atems ;
those in -aifa are denominative and come mostly from stems in o-i -f fw
(■a xfi-"'!"'-' useful, from xp^'-i use); but vi/io has thence been
abBtract«d aa an l[i dependent suffix.

I&r-i/u-i approvrd (Soi-^-u trem good); >iix*>''«-< warlike (iiAxt) bat-
tle); rift-iiio-t coiiformable to law (r6iia-t); iS-iii-i/ia-t eatable (^tt-a!-^
food, poet. tS-v eat); Ka6ri-ii»-t eombuttibtt (Mtv bum, caiL«t-t bum-

2SS FORMATION OF WOBDS: NOCN SUFFIXES [85!

In;); Ufft-fu-t abU to loott (X^^-i-t looting); IrwA^itia-i Jltforrtdiaf
(lrri[0)iai rtde); dXii-ffifio-t MUy to (aire (iUrn^wi, MXwr).

10. |w* (nom. -imr, -liar): primary Id iir^iimr mlnifvl (ju-it»i-cK»iMi temem-

btr), T\4t-itar enduring, wretchtd (f-TXir-f endttrtd'). Cp. 091. 8.

11. w (nom. -lo-t, Bbl. 11) : primuy (usually paMire) uid wcondu; (829 %).

Sometimes denoting ilwt vhich mag, can, or mtut bt done.

Frimaij in tfi-v^i fearfvl {tiSoi-K^ ftar, !'-< it*-, '•(-); rcft-r^^ (0
btrtvtTtd(iii^iMiTtvtTe); riS-a.rk-s per»uaaive(rtt$-it penuadttwi^,
■ndL,Taid^); irl«'-vr»-f (rtuHnp (vrlf-u). Secondki? in fmrci-tii-t Ani
(=ffic»r(ff-»-f from tK^-»t darkneti).

13. 1*0 (nom. -m-t, 861. 11); forms denomWtiTe adjecUTes of mattrial, u

U0^pB-t inf ttont (XUo-i), fdX-i>«-) woodtft (fdXs-r); to denote lime,
and derived from enoh forms as <a^-i^ ««nial (lap *pH>y), •■ in
4fi<^r4-f &v dag {iiinlpa), x^"-"^ of yetterdag (.x^ii) ; other naea:
Mfiiix-ifo-1 human {ir0pura-i man), dXir^ri-i (rtnufne (dXi)^ inu)
(HO Id Xo-tHo-i = Xd^ra-i rionp (Xdt ((one). On -it>«i, -tivt in gen-
tllen, see 844. 3.
18. po, pB (nom. -p6-i, -pi) : prioiarr, ftnd secondary. Primary, In tx^-ptf
hated, hoitile (Ix^-" hate), Xafir-pA-i sKining (Xd/tw-u thine), x'^o-p^
alack (xi^M-a Blacken). Secondary, in #0^1-^14.1 fearful (,^tfiot fear,
'pap%-, 834 f), upoT-tpi-t mightu (tpir-»t tnigluy, primary or secondary
in dnd-^i grievon* (Aria grief, int-v grieve). See 860. 8.

14. Ti]p4o (nom. -T^pw-i) : in denoroinatives, derived from aulMantiTes In -ry

(or -rrit) to' Uie aofBz w ; but the subetantlve is not always foand.

au^iip-io-i preaeniag (vw-nip laviour), whence the abstract rttriipli
(868. 2) tqfety ; fcXn-ri(p-io-f enthanCing (fltXn-r^p cAarmer, fl^i-w en-
chant), whence fcXmtpwi' (842. 4), \v-T-ip-ut-t ddivering (Xi^4p),
ip/iifr^pior etarting-place (^fidw, ipuQ/tar Hart).

16. « (nom. -<)-i, -cw, -tf) : primitives are liSi-t eieeet (^S-o^iai ampleated), r>x-*^
•wyi (tiIx-" steiftntf), fioB-i-t deep (pdfl-oi dgXA). Cp. 869. 8.

16. aStv (nom. -cMift, -S8«i) : in primitlveg (rare), as x/m-iii^f prt^er (rpAr-«

b<«««m); usually in denomluatives denoting fvlnett or (inUIorfly:
vot-iiiitf gtxufg (xofa), oJ/uT-iiJir' loojUnpifjfceUomf (a7;ia). See 833 a^

17. SnfBzes of Degree : lav and ur-n (318) usaally form primiUvn ; T<po and

raro (313 fl.), denominatives. r<pa occurs also in w6-Ttpa-tvhiehoftti>of
wp6-Ttpoi earlier, iw-rcps-i later, ini-rtpa-i each. On Uie suffix rtft
apparently without comparative force, see 1068, 1083 b. tr~Ttpe-r is
snbstantlvlzed (boml); from 4r in.
18 Suffixes of PorticiplesandVetlialAdjecUves (primary): active iTiOT.SOIaiC;
middle and passive lura. Verbal adjectives denoting completion (usu-
ally passive) TO ; possibility and necesailj re, t» (471-478).
On ttie formation of Adtbrbs, see 341 fL

LIST OP SOUN SUFFIXES

The llat fnoludea the cliief snfBxes used in substantives and adjeotives. Sepa-
ration of a sofflz from the root is often arbitrary and uncertain.

IS9] FORMATION OP WORDS: NOUN SUFFIXES 239

899. VOWBI. SUFFIXES

L •: nom. -«-t masc., fern., -»-r neuL A coaimon sofBi In primitiTes deDOlfng
p«iaoiu (usually male agents) or tbings (otlen abatiBOta).

dfiX-^' Itoder from ipx-" lead; [Vf-6-r yoke from l^Hyv-fu i/oka
({V7-, (WT-) ; \irr-B-i sptech from My-u apeak ; rd/ir^i cuftont, law from
»^fi-» dittribule; vriX-v-t expedition from triWu (orfX-) tend; rpo^-i-t
(i, 4) none from Tpi^>-v novrish; •php-O'i tribute from ^f-u htar,
bring:
K. The rootB of some words appear onl; la other languages ; oh-o-i lunut,

Lat. vK-u-a.
b. Tbe BufBx has the accent when the agent is denoted. < of tbe root
nrles with o (S31 b).
% (: nom. -■ or -q fern. A common sufBx in primitives, UBoallf to denote
tbingH, often abstracts (octfon).

ifX-^ brginning from ipx-" btgln; X«t^ pouring ttom \tlp~wpour;
I'^X't fin^ from ;uix-a>uu fight; aroul-i} Aas<e from awtii-w hatttn;
•T*v-fl r(*o/ from o-t^t-u thetter; rpo^ij nourisftmenl from rpiip-u
novrlah; t&x-^ chance from Tvy^"''*' happen (tux-); ^V-*! *™P froi"
#^-« 6«ar,' *«7-^ JItfAC from ^^v jfae (^it-, ♦<vt'-).

a. The mots of some words appear onl; In other languages; yvr-ii woman

(Eng. qiteen).

b. Hoat sabstantlres accent the sufflx ; but many accent the penult.

S. i: aom. -ai, ip, in a few masculines, usually compounds; TuSo-rpl^-^^
trainer of isoys in gymnaalica (rfitfiu rub).

4. I, [: primary, In t^i-i mate, poet, rp&x-'-' runner (rp^-w run), :rJX-i-t eit]/

(originally riX-i-i), Ifr-l-t yearling. Many words with the i-sufBz liave
taken on S or t ; as i\-*-t-t hope <\vf-j-«f (IX:r.«fuu hope), x<'p-''' graee
xip-^-n (xttJ/K* rejoice, x<V-)-
& m: in a few primitive Tert>al adjecUves {ij-to-t 858. 2), but common In
denominate adjectives (858. 2), rare in substantives: rv/iifi-ia-t bride-
groom Crifi^ bride) ; in names of things more concrete than thoee end-
ing in -id : liaprip-m-r a tettimony (cp. /lofirip-ii teatimony) ; in gentiles
(S14. 3) ; in diminutives (852. 1), often in combination with otlier
diminutive sufflzes (o^u, iJu, i/XXu, etc. S62) ; often in combtnation
with a final stem vowel (861. 1, 858. 2).

5. i<, A: rarely primary. In 4>6ta fiight (,^<r,-<» flee) ; in verbal aiMtracta :

liarli madneaa (810 a. 9] ; usually secondary In the fern, of adj. In
■it : Paptia = fiaptu-ia, rfrra pitch (= iriK-ia, cp. Lat. pie-Ug), yXHrrt
Umgne = yXufX-i" (op. yXux-t-' point, -yXix-" beards of corn), CflrTa aetf
(843 b. 4) 1 In the nam. fem. of participles in rr, or (xisura from Xvorr-jm,
\t\irn-ia); In denominative abstracts expressing quality (840 b. 1, 2);
In names of persons: roft-U-t ateieard (jipr-f-ai cut, f-ra^i-oK), Nii-U-t-
Sieiat (»fnj victory). — Often in combination with other sufflxes; wva
84-1 b. 5 ; -*-«> 840 a. Q ; w«-a 843 b. 4 ; rpia, rtipi 8.?H b. 2, 3.
T, pa. pi: primary, in Spot for lp(f)oi boundary, icf]i{f )6t etnpty, Xbi(/;)4i 1^
(Lat. laevua), iia\(_f)6t beautiful; (probably) secondary in verbals in
T^ (Xvt/oi that muat be looaid) and In adj. in -aKht (800. 1).

logic

240 FORMATION OF WORDS: KOUN SUFFIXES [860

8. * (•«} : primary, io adjectivee (868. 15), in aiibBtaiitiTee : yir-v-s cAtn,
'VX-'-' fore-arm. — B, « : primary, in feminiDea : lax-it ttremglh,
6^p-v-t eye-bTote, rit-v-t (Horn.) corpse, at. Lac. nec-are. — 10, «■ (i|ii):
primary of the agenl {8S9 a. 6) ; rarely of thinga : loir-c^ ehiiel
(jiir-T-w cut) ; secondary, of the person coucenied (843 a. 1), in gentiles
(844. 1}, rarely of ttiingBi Sorax-ri-t reed-thieket{Sirt^ reed) ; ImdimlDu-
Uvea in -^Siit (863). — 11. oi (nom.-<i): primary In wtt9-<i rti9aSt ptr-
tuaeiou (279), — 12. «p (Dom. -ui) : priinaiy in ^pim 4p»«t hen (267).

860. SUFFIXES WITH LIQUIDS {\, p)

1. Xo, Xb I primary, in 4iv-\a-r race, 4iu-\4 dan (^6-u prodnct), ti-^o-i /dl
(Lat. j)f-Iu-i), (tiy-'^Ti loop 0/ a yoke (_it6y-n-iu yoke); aS-\ii-t corUett, aS-
y^rprise, ru^-Xi-t blind (rl^^-w raiee a amoke), nrptP-Xi-t tteUtfd {rrpi^-u
tarn). Cp. 858. T. Secondary, in vaxu-X^ thickiah (dimin.). bXo, oXS:
primary, in i(i^a\4-i navel, «/>6T--aX*-» clapper (upAr-e-i notte"), a^-a>4
head, Tpox-aX4-j running (jpix-ui), iri~a.\ii-t fat (lioinj fatUn) ; secondary.
In iti-aXi-t level (i/i^t one and the tame). Developed from this ve oXw,
•XaS: Ti-aX/o-i /at, npf-aUn-f loiVy (ic^^-oi {rafn), see 868. T. fXo, tXS:
primary (prob.], in ett-eKo-t like (fona am like, cii-), k^-Ai; cloud (Lat.
nebula) ; secondary, in 8v-iU-Kj) attar, ifXo, ii|XK : tdr-titto-t hucluter
(agency), 0U'i;\i) «acr(/Ic« (B6-w), ^-ijX^t (o/ty (vjl'-oi An^'U); primai; or
MCondkry; irarii-\6-t guileful (iui-n) guile, iiraTi-^t cheat), t-iy-v\6-i mute
(#tT>) fOenee, aiyi-u am mute). iXo, iXs : primary, in TfMx-'Xo-t aandpipiT
(rffx-a run) ; secondary. In d/i7-'X<n p(w»<ona(e {ipiyi). Ao, Oa : pri-
mary, in rrpi^-iXo-i foji (arpiip-u turn) ; secondary. In i-M-iXo-f tandal
(wiSii fetter^ rait foot). vAo, uXS : primary, in tiirr-u\ii-t finger, rra^
uX4 bunch of grapei. Secondary, in ^u'li-iiXo-i email (^/ua-i-t). 9\o, nXs :
tftrS-it:^ beetle. aXo, wXB ; primary, in OS-uAo-r image (rfS-tfuu reMemble),
t6x-"M prayer ((Ex-^caO- ^^^ forms : oXm, aXijto, iXw, i|Xio.

S. X«: primary, in ^Xu-t female (root ^ ffee «ueJ!;}.

S. ^, pli primary, in subetantives : dr-^i-f Jleld, Lat. iif«r(J(7-w), ivK-pA-tcoiTiw
(cp. rlt-tM), yaiir^pi-t lon-in-laui (yati~i-v marry, for p see 130), 4x6-fi-i
enemy, Ix^P^ hatred (fx"-" hate), {.pyu-po-t tilver, it-fa hydra (wf-fp
water); rarely, of instrument 842. 0 ; of place, in ti-pa eeat; primary, in
adjecUvea (868. 13). o^ ofA: primary, in pM^-apo-w eye~lid (fitJr-u
look), rdX-opo-T batket (tXIhi, rX^nt bear), Xtr-api-i ehiny (cp. Ur-ai

fat). Kpo (ipo), ipS (iip«) : primary or secondary, in in-Cpbt tpievovt
(Ifla grStf, irid-u grieve), \ur-Ti-pi-t painful (\ir^ pain, XSr^-u grieve);
■econdary, in drS-^pi-t Jlovtery (*»fl-oi), and perhaps in ror-tip&-t toilsome
(t4w-i, rori-oitiu toil), ipo, tpB : secondary, in ^fft-pi-t terrible (♦ifSo-t
terror), whence rn-epi-t thady {jrtti. ehade); alM> in rtw6-tpi-i falher-in-
lav! = lit. one who binds (cp. rti^iia = rerB-aiia cable), Ir-tpai thoie beloie
the earth (ir). vpo, vpa; secondary, In 'Kiyu-p6-i (Xit^i) ehrill, whence
primary lx-«po-' chc^ff, t\ty-up6-t burning (_^>Jy-ti bum). Vpa, OpS: pri-
mary or secondary, in Isxi'-pi^ strong (Iax6^ am slroni/, bxi^ ttr^ngth);
primary, in^ir-upo-r rind (\ir-upeel), yi^pa bridge, apaiMpS: primary.
In dr-dpS late iiinu7i«r {ST-ioBtr at the rear, qfter).

I;.C00J^[C

Hi] FORMATION OF WORDS: NOUN SUFFIXES 241

I. ft(nre): primary, in Sr^i-t hl{^t<(l> (dc-^s-i higher), It-pm knowing (kUtr,

fi. f (lure) : prinuuy, in tir-pu tear; cp. Old Lat dacruma for locrtmo.

S. ap; prim&ry, in fir-op, frsT-ot Il««r (263 b), rt-ap fat, l-ap spring. — T. «p,
lyi primary, in i4p itf-Qi air (Ai)*" Mow, of the wind), alS'^p, ~ip-ai upper
aiT{atB-u kindlfl. — 8. Mp: primary: gen.-sT-«i.' vS-up water ; gSD, -tupof :
t^i^ ichor, aerma ; gen. -op» : by koalogy in a^o-npir-up pomnting full
power* i*piT-tt power}. — 9. apB: primaiy, in r\^-$-<ipii (louioj latietg,
cp.e38.

861. SUFFIXES WITH NASALS ((t, v)

1. |is, ^ (nom. fi»-« ; -pi and -rii>) : primary, in BabsCantivea denoting acUona
or aiwtract ideas (810 a. 5-7), and in gome concreus ; x^-f^ Juiee (xA*
pour.xOiTP"*'-'"! ''"'Ct'^*-"'*'''**'''''''"')! in adjectives (858, 8, 9), On
T-iio -^-fK^ -$-iM -^iw., S'lio -a-pa, see 837, 83:i, 8a(t ; secondary, rarely In
nbMantlves : tpv-pi-t coppice (ApS-i tree, oak), or adjectives ; trv-iio-t true
(irt fit real). — i-|w: secondary, derived from i stems (868. 9). — 2. iior
(nom. -;ia): primary, denoting result (811, 2). Here to iia frum p.f (cp,
fre^ui name, LaL nonten ,* T^piu goal, Lat. l^rmeti) t has been added ;
Cp eognumeTttum, — 3, iini (nom. -^n^): primary, In rot-p.'ir tkepherd,
)u-»4r harbuvr. — 4. p4M> i primary, In partlcipleB: Xui-pxro-t. — 5. }i*
(nre) : primary. In ^7-^-t tpeech (poet, for 0ii-/»r),^O. ^iv (nom,
-pit): piiia.,^-pt-t turf (^-ptf-iubreak'). — 7. p,i«,^*K:prim.,in ffri-pro-i
jar ([-ffTif-Mt ael, sfanij, aror-), 0i\t-pro-r dart (fiiWu (ftroio), rat-prii fioek,
\t-pnilake. — 8. poir (nom. -pi)») ; primary, In i^i-fuir leader (i^^-of«i (end);
adjectives 858. 10. —9. |u)i«; primary. In rXi7-iT-^^ /wZne** (r(>i-rX^>u
JUI). — 10. (utv (nom, -/uiii') : primary, in x<'-*"i' winter, X(i->«i>' meadow.

II. fo, *>: primary, in vr-m-i sleep, tar'ni-i emoke, woi-i^ punighm^nt, ♦fp-nj

douMr C^p-w bring), Tit-n-r child (rlrru bear, t«-), in adjectives (868, 11) ;
secondary, in adjectives (858, 11), in nXil-n) moon (— o-fXair-ni, tfXat
gleam).— 0,99, a»a ; primary, in irT^^-aw-i crown, (rrf0-ii«i diaiUm (irriiMii
enelrele), Spfr-aiv-t, Ipar-drq riekle (^Spir-w pluck), tpy-nno-t tiislrumeHt
(Jfpyar work), 97n-dini whetetone (fify-w whet); in adjectives; rrty-ari-t
(cp. <rrry-r4i) water-tight (ot^-u thelter); secondary. In pr-T-ini jodder
(^-rft-t, p4-»it4i graze), tSp-aro-r teat (tS-pa eeal). Era (mra), IM («)•■) :
aecondary, In gentiles (844. 8). fvo, ivK: primary, in rnpd-int-t maidtn,
A\-ini elbow. Tp«, ip« ; primary, in ri-*^nf nufM (Sfi<r#oi yiue *ttC*).
>*o, ivS; secondary, in ndjeclives of material and time (858. 12), and in
fmS-ir6-i slender, pr't^lni millet, ivto, imS: secondary, in adjeciives of
material (858, 12). ivo, in: primary, in x«^-i'*-' iridle, afKira-r part-
try; secondary, in gentiles (844. 3); in patronymics (845. 0); In ipii0p-ira-\
red mullet {ipvSpi-t red) ; ^X^-lrij a kind of ^oXjS.ii (a bvlb-root). aw,
•rS; primary, In t\-in-i battU-rout (itX-apju urge on); in abstractB, as
ifi-or/i pleasure (_tS-apai am pleated), vra, v*((: primary, In m^nr elub,
Tlr-vo-t reiving on {wtlB-u persuade). Bra, Brtl : primary, Jn icM-Sre t
danger, »ltx-ini disgrace, ara, «vB; primary, in coX-wvi^ AflJ, *op-i t|
eroto. — 12. ra (rare) : primary, tn \ci-r6t tmokyfire.

I;.ClK>^Ic

242 FORMATION OF WORDS: NOUN SUFFIXES [S«i

18. at**: aecondai^, of the penon oouccraed (843 b. 6). — 14. «v: primmry,
in fiAai iii\ar^ bliKk. — 15. » (nom. -^r): primuy, in rfy-^ ttitder,
dpp-ii» male. — 16. n» : primaty, in T<ir#-4r inqnirer (nMnifiu, mrtirvrnt
inquire). — 17. I* (nom. -it): pritatiTy, la iA^doIpMn, A!U traaail. —
18. a* (nom. -ur) : prlmu7. In wordB of agency : rtxr-w earpenter, Tfiiy~iw
tUTtla-dow (r/iiiu munnur, rpvy-), vXM-u^ tnnte (cUfM doth, KkuS-); snd
in oU)eta,UEfi[-iirAnafre((«jiaan(Ififce,(ti^),X'-<i' now. — 19. isv: aoeond-
aiy. In fiaXait-J»i> darling, diminutive of ^Xaii-t tofl. — lev: primu;, in
compftratlTee; ^S-iw* tweeter (i^-^) ; secondary, in pationymica (846. G).
— pov; primary, \a rlwr fat. — 20. av: secondary, in woids denoting
peraona poasesaing eome ptayaical or mental quality, as yi^Tp-mr ffltitto*
(yaar-^p belli/'); to denote place (861. 3); in names of montba : 'Attftrrir-
piiir. — 21. p«i>: primary, in a{(f)iii' one, gen. oliJi-ai. — 22. tavi second-
ary. In patronymica (846. 6). —23, i«i«: secondary, in patronymiea
(846. «J.

863. SUFFIXES WITH U^BIALS (w, ^)

1. ow: primary, In ftiX^ ttake, pale (molXXw »tir up; tplit f). — 3. mn:
primary, in lair-mft gnat.—&. ^o, ^K (rare) : primary, In c^-o^ (Ac
ttmple», lEDpu-^ htad (_itipvt helfoet) ; uaaally In names of animals, >a
Ipitfa-i jtfii, (Xa^t deer; secondary, In late dimlnntivea ; ^f^^t^-r f»
eect (04/1 beaet), Ktp6-i^i»^ petty gain (tipa-ot gain).

863. SUFFIXES WITK DENTALS (t, G, •)

a. SufflzeawltbT.

1. t: primary, atthe end of stems, aBi-Tnit,<i-^»uH--attirUnoim ('yt-T'^^n'

8. m, tK : primary, in verbal adjectives in -ri-i (4T1) vrith the force of a
perfect participle, as yru-ri-t knoun (-/^^^li-vKu ktioiB), aror^k-t
placed, standing (IsTif-iii »et, place), or with the idea of possibility,
as Xif-ri-t able to be looted; in verbal abstracts, whicli sometimes be-
come concrete : ni-ro-i, nol-rti bed (ni-fiu lie), ppet-ri thunder [ppt/t^
roar), ^u-ri-i" plant (♦()« prortuee), lo-rb-r drink (t(»« drink, ra-
£29), pio^bt, pio-rii life, means of living iplo-t life) ; in numenls,
T/>I-ri>-» third, tt-^a-i aeXrtU'S. — In supertatives, w-to primary, tl
^•uTTB-t laeetett (41^1) ; rare, secondary, as dXirA^<r-riiT<i-t most true
(iXrfi^ii). — tK (nom. -rir-i): primary, to denote the s^nt (839 a. 1) ;
secondary, to denote the person ooncemed (843 a. 2). — ore, orC:
primary. In fti»-arn death (9irj-ffKu, en-tin die), tdft^To-i Kearinru
(idu^fu, ta/i-tit am teeary). «to, *t* ; primary. In Ta7^T*-i fnM
(j-iy-yu-iu mate hard) ; secondary. In tit-*rji-t bed-felloa (»ir(| bfd,
843 a. a.). KTt SnG, ip* TpiS, I-rtl InS, htR MTkS, In gentiles (844. 2).

8, T«T (tut) : secondary, In suhsta. denoting quality (840b.4). — 4. T»fe:
primary, In verbal a'lject[veB(4T3). — 6. T»pS'. primary, of tbe agent
(SSdb. 3), — 6. T<po:st^condary,incomparative8(313) ; BOtsuoUvised
in tr-Ttpa-f bovxl. — 7. nfp: primary, to denote the agent (6.19 a. 8),
often regarded aa the InBtrument : ^urr^p hammer (838 a), dpv-r^^

Hs] FORMATION OP WORDS: NOUN SUFFIXES 24S

Indie.— e. Ti|p-to : componnd MifBx, of plaoe (S&l. 2), of mettne (842. 4),
of nagcB (flii. 6): epcx-ri)j>io reward for rearing (tp^^-b) ; in sdjcc-
tlvee, 668. U. — 0. n : primsaj, U> denote action or &n abeiract idea
(840 ^ I) ; rarely, of persono i /tdr-Ti-t iter (uair-oiuu rage, am in-
tpired, liar-).— 10. Ti8 : primary, of the agent (8391). 4). — 11. T»f :
primary, of the agent (8S9 a. 3). — 12. TpK : primarj, ot Instrument or
meam (B42. 8) ; of place (861. fl). — 18. rpiB (nom. -rpia) : primarr, of the
•gent (880 b. 2) . — 14. rpiS (nora. -rplt) ; primary, of the agent (889 b. 1).
— 15. rpw : secondary, in i\X6^p-uM belongtag to another. — 18. rps
(-^p»4, Tpo-r) : primary, to denote the agent (8S0 a. 4), Inatniment
(848. 1), place, as Wo-rpo-r theatre (place for seetTip), Wt-r^*-* bed.—
17. Tv; primary, of actions or abstract ideas (840 a. 4); In ia-rv cilf,
4i-Tv rprout (#i)-u produce) ; secondary, denoting connection with a
numeral: rpir-ri-i third of a tribe {rpi-re-t third).
IB. It : primary, in xipit, tlpiT-ot (and Wpwt, 268) horn. — 19. ifr : primary,
in rinfi, -ifT-oi serf (irin-oiiat toil), rXdr-iTT-ci p7aneEi (irXaMt-w lOander).

— 20, it: \iT\iaa.Ty,i\i iiiKi^-iT-at honey ('La.i.mei), xi-p-*t VTa6e(j(aliiu
rejoice, xi^)- See8G9.4. — 21. [tiS (nom. -int, fern.) : secondary In
words denoting place (851. 4). — 22. nt: primary. In yAwi, -wrat
langhtcr (ytM-u laugh). — 23. rr : primary, In acUve participles
(except the perfect), as XAo-rr-at ; In some adjectives inflected like
participles (ixiir willing'), and in participial substantives: Spdt-ur ter-
pent (tipK-aiioi gleaf», Ipair-ciV), also in \fur lion, iSd/iai adamant.

— 24. pfVT (nom. -tit): secondary. In adjectives denoting fulneti
(858.3), and In some proper names of pUoes : 'OiroiH Oput from 'Ont-
ftrr-i (844. 3).

b. SoAzes with 8.

1. S: Recondary, in palronyinlcs (846. 1). — 2. 8-ava: secondary, tn sitri-
Sar6-t a nohodg (sffrii nobody), properly from riS, neuter of ri, + ari-t.
— «-6aim: primary, in^i7-*-8a»i-t cAiKiBff (^h'-^u thudder). — 8. S-an:
secondary, in iMuiSarit foreign, properly = i\\oS, nanler of iWoi (cp.
aliud), + ari-t. — 4. S-a : secondary, in patronymics (846. 1), — 5. S-io:
rrd-S-io-i standing (i-ar^iu), with J prob. from a word containing th«
ealBx>,aaifir^Su>-t public from in-^aii-r publidy. — 6. 8«v. primary,
in iii\-t-aiir care (itf\ti is a care), i\y-rf-Siir pain (i\yi-u ruffer); sec-
ondary, in tvro\TiBiir a etg>-shaped hnUov) (mrfX^ cup); cp. ix^tr-idr
dittreas (ax*-»« burden). — !. 8in«i primary, in luKi-tilir^ eon (see
Iwr).
S. bS: prlmaiy. In n^i, -dS-«t tnme-JlaJce (>i^-w, better wrlip-u, mow),
^iTf-it exile (^tHy-u flee, ipuy-), \tt^»-4t torch {Xd/ir-u thine) ; second-
ary, in abetract femlninea denoting nnniber (840b. 6).— 9. vai,
10. ioSH : secondary, in patronymics (845. 3). — 11. alio : secondary,
in Knr-«VMi4io-i from the sliotilder (iS^io-i), derived from lix^-ii-'o^
dtvlded(Sixiit,-dtet divided). — 12. \£: primary, in in-lt, -fS-ei thield,
Ar-ff hope (f\roiiai hope) ; secondary, in adj. as tv/itMxii allied
(riXu) from eiiLiiaxo-% allied wUh ; in words denoting the person con-
oemed (648 b. 2) ; in gentiles (844. 1), as llipal, Pertian woman ,■ in
leminlne patronymics (646. 4).— 18. tSs: secondary, in patronymics

244 FORMATION OF WORDS: NOUN SUFFIXES [864

(M6. 4).— 14. iSm: secondary, In n&ioe* of relaUonahlp (860).-
15, iSn: Becondary, in diminutives (668). — 16. iSu : secondM?, in
dlmliintivea (B52. 2), aJid txansferred In /uup-tSio-t doomed {iialpa doom).
— 17. 18: secondary, in rrq^Jj sfreave (rrij/i^ Ifg, (AlffA). — 18. vSb:
secondary, in patronymics (846, e). — IB, •(«- : secondary, in adjec-
tiveg of falneu (868. 16).
c. SnffiieH with S.

1. 0 appears In safflzea that are obscnre in Telatlon to root or stem (832) :
6prU SpyiS-ti btrd, i^iiiaBot sand, jn>aA>t eup, HXtSn ordurt ; several In -tt
(probably not Greek), afl /p^^ir0(H ch<ci;.^ci. — 2. SXo, MiBi primaiT,
in yfl^^-ff\o•^■, ytf-i-SKii ram (yiy-ToiMi herxnnt, 7<r-). — S. tXw : aecond-
ary. In -)tr-4-0\iii-i belonging to one's hirlk. — 4. tpo, #pa ; prlmai;. In
ip-Spe-f Joint {ipaplanai join, ip-), iri-fii-Spi ladder (paint go, fia^y.

864. SUFFIXES WITH PALATALS (■, f, x)

1. Ko, kS : primary (rare), in H-"i box (jl-e^iu place) ; secondary, tn »A-
jeotiTeB(8&8.6). — o«co(rare): primary, in ^X-aii-i «o/l (Op. Lat.inoHb);
aeoondary in adjectives (868. 8. c). — laito: secondary, in jriip-io«4-t oflit
Lord.^wQ, lA: secondary, in adjectives (868. 0), In genUlea (844. 3).
— 2. ma, o-kS : primary, in Sfimot quoit (= Six + axo-t from Sw-*!^ tkrott),
Po-vt^ food (cp. pisKa feed). — lo-ico ^ secondary, In dim! natives (852. 6).

3. ok: primary, in lutpoi laat, ptipix-io-i lad dimin. 864, t6\a( JiatUrer. —
4. Sk: primary. In Biipii breatt-plaU. — 6. lk: primal?, in ict\tt cup,
i^Xif comrade. — 6. Ik: primary, in Wplif, -ttei partridge. — 7, ■« : pri-
mary, in Kfjpu^, -Cirat herald.

8. wf : primary, in Opraf rc^aeiout, ipwny-i teixure (cp, Apuitu tetie). —
9, lY- primary, in ii^rrti, -ir-ot uAfj>. — 10. vy: primary. In Srrut, -trT«
rial. — 11. yy: primary, denoting something hollow. In ^XsTt pAolanx,
gi\Tirti Irvn^et, Xdpi^f larj/nx.
12. ixo: secondary, in ipTi\<xo-i chick, dimin, (dpraXf-f chicken).

S6S. SUFFIXBS WITH SIOHA

1. n (= n) I primary, denoting actions or abstiaot ideas (840a. 2) ; rarely ot
persons : wi-ri-t husband. — 2. na ; primary, denoting actions or absUact
Ideas (840 a. 8). — 3. ina 1 primary, in fKr-dp.«w-> raised /Hnn lAe groHni
(lUT-aipu Hfl up, ip-).—4. iri|io: in adj. (S58. 0). — 6. m|*« : in «(r>
anirc-t uttAnpj^. — 6. (m> : secondary, in Tpiaimrri-f thirtieth from rpui-
mrr + to-i. — 7, rv*o, Twd ; secondary, in adjectives ; CouU.^'um entlavtd
(IdSXd-i), Mpfftinf bold — eapao-vunt {9ipff-<rt onrage, 120 c), and In tlie
feminine, to maice atietract substantives (840 b. 3).

8. BO- : primary, in ylp-M prize ; varying with st, as in rip-m r^par-ot portent
(268), or with tff (264 n. 3).— fi. w: primary, denoting qmUity (8*0 a. 8)
or result (841. 1) in sdjectives (868. 6.) — 10. lo- : primary, in cins ifaK,
foand in milw (= tnia-ia. 600.2, D). — 11, intf: secondary, in wotdi
denoting the person concerned (843 b, 4). — 12. av : primary, in wiSii
thame (aibOi from alSo(a)-iit, 266). ~ 13. lo^ : primary. In compantiiras
(29S d, 818).

W] FORMATION OF WORDS: DENOMINATIVE VERBS 245

DEMOHIKATITB TBBBS

866. Denominative verbs &re formed tiom the st«m3 of noims
(substantives or adjectives). Verbs lacking such a noun-stem are
made on the model of the ordinary denominative verb. The prin-
cipal terminations are as follows :

1. -mm : derived chiefly from words with d BtemH (a few from worda of the aeoond
declenaon). Verbs In ->u denote to do, to be, or to have, that which ts
Bzpraned by the stem.

rZ^id-u lumovr (ri^i), stem Ti>u-), ifitfri-u brealefoM (ipwra-r brtak-
fatC^, roXfui-u dare (r6\iut daring, stem raXwi-), is/ci-u icear long Aofr
((jfnr Aafr). («/id-w, tuJl to tleep, has no primitive noun.
On -tau and -ou denoting a desire or a Ixidily condlUon, see 868 b.
L •«•: derlvedcbiefly from ?^-sMins(S3if), and thence extended loftllkiDdsof
ateiDi. Verts In -tv denote a eondiHoa or an aetivlty, and at« often
Intran^Uve.

oUi-u dmeli (olm-i house, bU%-), ^M-a tote (^Av-i dear, ih'^%-),
tntferiti lerce (inipintt Mervanl, liwiiptTa-), tirvx-^-a am fortunate
(rirvx'it fortunate, tirux"-), fiff-f-i* hate (jufof liate, tiianr-y, au^per-i-a
am temperate {viixtipur), lULftrvp-i-n bear teitneu (iidprvt, -«>>-»»).
a Some cu-verbs from iir-Btems have older forms in -tlu (624 a).
S. ••• : chiefly derived from o-stems. Verbs in -du are usually f acUttve, denot-
ing to eauie or to make.

ji|Xj-w manffeit, make clear (Sip^-t), SovU-u enalave (JtoCXo-i), {^U-m
enmlate ({^Xo-t emulation), (^lui-v punith i!ii/ili damage), ixaariyb-m
vMp (fiiffTi{, -iTOf vihip). i/Au plough has no primitive.

On the formation of the present stem of verba in -ow, ~<w, -«w,
see 622.

4. -f«* : derived from subetautlvea from tv-iteme (007) and thence eztanded to

other stems, cvw-verlw usually denote a condition, sometimes an aclivCtg.
fiaaiXr6-u am king, rule (fiaai\t^t), fioii\fi-u cotintel (fiovX-i), uriv-
rti-it venture, incur danger ^KlrSun-t), riuti6-a educate (rati boy, girl),
Btparti-v attend {0ipitat attendant).

5. -Sm (rare) : from v-atems, as ianpt-ti ieeep {iitpv tear). Cp. 608.

& -Bt«, '^ ; derived originally from stems in d or -y (as 4\wlita hope = tkmS-^,
Afnrd{i< iHzt = dpTST-iw), and thence widely extended to other eiema (cp.
623 S, y). Snch verbs denote action.

■yvfvdftf exercite (Yvfvdi, -iS-at itrlpptd, naked); irayxifu compel
(dpd^jcq nccesntgf) ; dri^fu duihonouT (irliwi) ; ^td^^iai u»e force
(pli force) i Sw/iuitu wonder (0aO^) ; •pparrlfu take Care (^/urrli) ;

tppl{u intuit (£^pi-t ovtrage) ; n/iilu eontider (*d>i«-i custom, law) ;
mx'i*' fortify {jiXx-vt wall, stem rtix"-); xoWi^M^ <^ " favour
(X^P**! 't'"' favour).

246 FORMATION OF WORDS; DENOMINATIVE VERBS [M7

■. Verbe in -ifv and -lajti derived froni proper names expresa aa adoption of
language, manners, opinions, oTpolUict:

i\>.t)rl{u gpeak Greek ('EXXit>}, ^ux"i{u act like a baeehanU
(floKxi^i), Xaiurlfw imitate Laconian mannert (Adcuv), lafilfi* tOe
viith the Medea (M^«oi)-
b. Verbs in -< fw, -«f)it, &nd -ufw ore rue (ri/fw preti, poet. Strrifu am Uml,
jKouiifu cry euckoo).
1. -ttint; originally from stems in -av +iu(518),butusaall7exl«nded to other
stems. See 620, III.

fuXoiKv blacken (^lAai MoeA, ^Xa*-), ti^palva gladden (tC^pnr glad,
ti^pop-), ni/iaiiHa tign^fi/ (^v^fAO, intftar-o) sfffn), xa^'*'o''v om onjr'V
(xaX«x4-» ftanJ, angry).

8. 4va: from stems in vr+iu (&19). Tbe primitive words often show stems

In V. See 620. III.

PaBtm deepen {^aBO-t deep), Tax'fu haaten (t>x^' 'wfA), aZrx'>*
Jft(rrae« (aFrx-ot shame), Bafipiru encourage (eip^i courage),

9. OnotherdenominatiresinXw, vw,pw, see020, III; on inceptives see &26-528.
10. Pai&Ilel formations are frequent, often with dLSerent meanings.

ifiuriu take a middag meal, aptrrf^d give a mlddai/ meal; in/d-u,
(poet.) iri/tiv, dri^iifw diihonour ; Sau\ia entlave, SouXiiai am a slave;
t6imiior4m am happy, (Mai/uflfu aecottnt happy, eongratvlale ; Sappdia
am eourageoue, eappim encovrage; iptitit, bptliu make one moear an
oath; ipiiiiu urge on, ip/iairu (^poeL) ponder ; ipfiiu lie at anchor, ipiiifit
anchor trans, lipids awihorage) ; riAttUm (roXif/I^ Epic) mage tear,
wt\4ti6u make hoitile; viaiiiti put in thelter, mid. take up one's abode,
tuTiriu am in camp, atririu encamp, go into quarters ; ra^ipariai am tem-
perate, trai^ptrlS'u chasten ; Tvparriu, Tvpantiu am absolute ruler, rapw-
fffu take the part o/ahiolute ruler, Tupamdu (late) smack of tfrattny.
Cp. 631.

867. FreqnentAtiTes and IntenaiTes. — These are mostly poetical, -no in

grpv^ia turn conslantlg {mpiipa lum), Tpaxiv gallop (r/>^;i;a> run), t«tA«m<u,
Turdofuu, and roT^B^uu, fly about (r^ro^at fly). -rrpiK In iSatTpiu drive ((Kin,
Aai^Rii). -Tui In aiiprdu spring (_«-itlpui ikip). -mt* in i\nfTiJu drag about
(IXku drag). With reduplication, often with change of the stem-Towel, in
rotwrSu puff {rria breathe, rtu-), ropl-tpa gleam darkly (^pa mix), rap^alrtt
shine brightlg (4nlrv bring to light, make appear).

868. Deaideratives express desire. Such verbs end in -mw, -wm, and
larely in -oh. Thus, nXc^iTia-iiui detire to wage war (rsX<;i^<d), draXXo^du wUh
to get rtd of (iXXdrrw exchange), ye\aartu leish to laugh (yt\du) ; rTpanrr^iu
vith to be general (ijTpariTViJi) ; ^riu wish to shed blood (^*oi murder).

a. Verbs In -uui and -aw are formed from substantives. Those In -veiu may
come from the future stem.

b. -law and -aw may denote a bodily affection : i^AiX/udw suffer from oph-
thalmia (6^a\iM), ffpvYx^'* ""t hoarse (fipayx^ hoarse). Some verbs io
-tjTTOJ (■.«*»■«) have a. similar meaning; tu^XiIt™ am blind (rw^Xii), and even
Xi»uiffffu am hungry (Xi^i hunger).

■7*1 FOEMATION OF WORDS: COMPOUND WORDS

COMPOUND WORDS

8G9. A compound Tord is formed by the union of two or more
parts ; as Aoyo-ypa^ot tgaeechFtoriler, St-ef-ojio^ outlet (lit. way out
through).

M. Compouikb of tliTee or more parts nsuolly foil into two aeparMe unlta ; u
^T;pax«-/ivo— fuxli battle of the froge-and-miee. Such compouuds are oommon
iDGomedyi aarrpri'e-Stm—riir-mrpyliratcalltfpenertioaofjuttiee.

b. In a compound word two or more membere are united under one accent ;
M in bliekbeny contratted witli blaclc berry. Mo«t compounds in Greek, an
inflected language, are genuine compounds, not mere nord^roups such as are
common In Englieli, nhlch ia for the most part devoid of Inflections.

c. Every compound contains a deflning part and a defined part The defining
part nsually }n«cedea : ri-Tux'}i fortunate, as opposed to iur-rtx^J unfiirturuUt.
Ttie parts of a compound stand In various syntactical relations lo each other, aa
that of adjective or attrihiitive genitive to a Rulmtantive, or that of adverb or
object to a verb, etc. Compounds may iLus be regarded as abbreviated forms of
syntax. Cp. 895 a, 897 N. 1.

FIHST PAHT OF A COMPOUND

87Q. The first part of a compound may be a noun-stem, a verb-
stem, a numeral, a preposition or adverb, or an inseparable prefix.

a. 'Hie DM ol stems in composition is a survival of a period in tlie history
of language in which inflections were not fully developed.

FIRST PART A H0UN-8TBH

Bn. Hiat Declension (H-stems).— The firat part may
a. end in a or ij (rarely): dyai>a-r6iui-! cleric of the market (iyopA), tiKYt^pt-t

brtn^ng victory (i^).
h. end in a: Sus-^pd^o-t vriler of lavi-tpefchet (Slnr juttiee). Here a is
■nbetitnted for 5 of tbe stem by analogy to o-stems.
N. — Compounds of 7fl earth have ytu- (for ytit- by 34); as ytw-iiirp^t
sureejror (Innd-meamrer,* lurptu nwosure). Doric has liriUrni. Cp. 224 a.
c. lose iU vowel before a vowel : K^oX-aXT^* eaaaing head-ache (m^aXiJ head,
aA7-oi pain).
872. Second Declension (o-stenu).— The first part may

a. end in a: Xaro-rp^^A-t qisMA-urita*.

b. end in a or q (rarely); Aa^it-^\o-t dear-ihooting (fXo^i, PHAm), Here q

is due to the analogy of o-stems.
c kiae B before a vowel; lAir-afixo-' monareli (tola r«I«r: iiiro-f alone, Ipx-»

nth).
V. — Wolds of the 'Attic' declension may end In u, as Kw-iipo-f custodian
1^ « tensile (Mifa).

248 FORMATION OF WORDS: COMPOUND WORDS [Sn

073. Tliiid DMlenaLon (conaonant atonu). — The flnt put mkj

a. show Ibe Btem (i, u, au, ou): M(»^>-*^^»-t i)tqrfr«d (/lim-t Msr, vArw, C{ii

-EoXs-t, op. LaL coJo, and 131).
N. — A few conaonant alems retain iLe coDsonant: ^Xi'y-xaXai dipped m
Mae£ bile (fiASt, x<>M)' See also 870.

b. add 0 to the stem : aa)iaT-a-ili6\ai body-guard ^ffH/ia bodg, ^Urrw gttord) ,

f»rrp-i-iniXii mother-cilf, metropolii (fit^qpi riXu), ^vat-e-Mrroi natural
j^ilogopher (^ri-t nature), lx8u-o-vi!i\v* fishmonger (fx^> rwXt^ mU).
C add a (rarely 7) : ra^^-nirTpa-v toater/or uoaAtnp tAe/eet (raPi, nwrwj,
XivMraJ-T)-SpiiftJ5 toreh-raee.

874. Compoands of rSi ad asnaUy show t<*-, as rii'-ra4>o-s (and rdtf-ra^
101 b) all-wae, wttp-ftfaOt fnnkntu ('all-epeaking'); but bIbo warr- la wirr-
apx" all-ruling; and ««rr-«- in io>T-o-riiXio-ii bataar (tuXA* «(().

875, Neuter ateniH in iiar uanally show /uit-o, aa d7aXfiar-o-iriH£-t aCulptor
(iyaXiM Statue, roi/ui mait«). Some have /la, as ^Hju-icXuri-i o/famovt name;
noma Bhow f(D for ^rr>, as tdiu>-ppo,ylA hemorrhage (ol/u, -aroi blood, fiiiytv)u
break, 80).

876, Sterna In <«- (nom. -qi or -ot) usually drop tv and add 0 ; aa ^n4-*-
liaprvpiu false lettimuny (^tvS-^it) ; and eo stemB in aa, aa xpio-^yo-t JUA^eating
(cp/ai, ifiaytir 52Q. 0). Some stems in eir and or retain ta and ur (In poetry), aa
roKir-riM-t Wielding a shield {ffiKai, rdXXu), ft\ar-4^po-t light-bringing (ffAai,

^/Kj); some add 1 (forsake of the mptre}, as dp«r-f-T/»^i mountain-bnd (Ipvi,
r/H^^ui); these may belong to 879.

877. Other abbrevlatians : •fa\a-Biiri-t RUfM (7aXaicT- milk, 9fi-v$<u give
t^ck), >uXi-i)J4t honey-noeet (/uXit-), kXiu-m^ Madfc teUh eloiuif from
»Xai>^ blaek (cp, 129 c) and W^i doud.

B7B. Words one* begliiiiliig with p O' v. — When the second pan conslsia
of a word beginnini; with digamma, a preceding vowel is often not alided:
KOMo-tfrila (Epic) doing ill (lawr faxaiir,oi) from fipyo-r mork; lairt-tAlfl err»-
cent-ehaped (fiiii^ moon, fttSot shape) ; riiii-opn (later Tifwi^) avenging (ri^
honour, fvpiaa observe, def'nd). — Compoands of -oxot, from ir^w hme (orig.
cixui, -"x^) contract : iXitpnuxof holding an allotment of land («X4p*4 lot),
ToXi-oixoi protecting a rity (for roXi-o-oxoi)-

879. FlecUonal Compouida. — A compound whoae 8rat part la a caae
form, not a stem, is called a flectional compound (cp. iporltinan. kin^oli):
(1) nominative: Tptur-tal'BiKa thirteen; (2) genitive: Ai4ir-«oupot Diotntri
(tons of Zeus), 'BXXf)a"rorrai Hell«'» sea, Tlt\orir-w7)iroi (for ITiXMTor-rqtfat,
106a) Pelops' inland; (3) dative: Sopl-\itrTot uon by the spear; (4) locaUve:
ji«-iripot vaufarer, IluXai-Tir^i bom fn J^ftu. — From sacb compounds deriTa-
Uves may be formed, aa 'EXXirrrirruii of the Helltspont, tmirtx^pU hatred <tf
the godt.

FIRST PART A VBRB4TEM

880. Some compounds have as their first part a verb-stem (cp.
brealcwater, pick-pocket, catch-penn;/). Such compoimds are usually

«5] FORMATION OF WOEDS: COMPCUITD WORDS 249

poedo adjectiTeB. The rerb^tem is usually trauBitive and bas the
Eonu that appears in the present or aorist.

881. Before a vowel the vurb-stem remains micbanged or drops a final
towel ; before a conuunant it adds i, o, ar i : ipift-avris eMeld-bearinfff iua-4.rBpi»-
m watt-AatiNf {juri~a), U-t-xt^ptS. (12Gd) holding of bands, Iruce, Xir-o-rrpnrli
detrtioii oftht army, rin-i-pev'hit prevailing in the Senate, ELfix-t-r'<riiii> mosler-

882. Tho Terb-etam adds iri (before a vowel, c). Some Insert t before
(1 (r) : nr^I.-reXit saving the state (o^^), ^tf--ajrwu Craven, lit. throwing away
a ihieU (^tir-r-w), eiift^fwt (and SaK-i-evtioi) heartr^ating (^Sin-iMa'), VXc-c-o-l-
raXof leitk long train, lit. trailing tlie robe (cp. Ax-e-xiruv)

A. Th'» t Is the Towel added in many Terb-stemB (4&5).

FIRST PART A NUMERAL

8831 The first part of a compound is often a numeral: SiWom
biped, rpi-rcvt tripod {having three feet), TiBp^mrov /our-horse chariot,
tot-^Am' contest in Jive events.

FIRST PART A PREPOSITION OR ADVERB

884. A prepoaitioD or adverb is often the first part of a com-
pound : dotiSoi entrance, dn-o-^iTyoi Jtee from, €v^rv}(^ Aappy, &u-
iirtfTTos euer to be remembered.

». Except when the sabstantive is treated as a verbal (as In rfr-olM m-
tniiee,cp.*ta-iirai enter), prepositions are rarely compounded with subslaniivea.
Hob, rir-Sev\oi /tllaw-slave, ivo^iSavtoMt (= 4 Irri nn S.) under-teaeher ; also
iwi-\mnt tehitith.

b. The ordinary euphonic changes occur. Obserre that »p4 before may
«atnct witbaoretoau; rpotxii or rpoBxii hold be/ore (cp. 449 b). See 184 a.

c q ■ometimes is inserted after a preposition or talces the place of a final
Towel: tnp-^-tant ennqaif.voiu, /v-^^Xot having achieved.

i. Akin to adverbial compounds are some In <pi.\-o, aa ^iXo-Mo^t one viho
fiadlii leamM.

FIRST PART AN INSBPARABLB PREFIX

BBS. Several prefixes occur only in compositinn :
I. 4(v)- (ir- beiora a, Vowel, i- before a consonant ; alpha privative') witb a
n^aUve force like Lat. (»-, Eng. «n- (or -l«<s) : di-djioi unaorthy (= d*»
<{wf), dr-ifKUDt vitllke, ir-iMuHit anodyne {iSirt) pain, cp. 687), d-Htt
•fl/y, JPrifin tmhanoared, O-dnt gndlees, yifiat iya/iot marriage that la
no marriage, d- is also found before words once beginning with digamma
or aigroa: d-^4t unpleasant (fvB6t), i-6paTn unseen (ftpAu), d-nrXof
trOAouI shields (o-orXor), and, by contraction with the fallowing vowel.
intr (irfituf vmolUlng). But ii- often appears: dr-Arurref (and
S-t\mt') ttnhnpfd for (feX»-(i), dt-arXDi wiftftONt shifld.
a. a-, 4r- (for J, S6 bj represent weak forma of I. E. »«

■ ooglc

260 FORMATION OF WORDS; COMPOUND WORDS [MS

i. \f»' half (LU. Mmf-) : liiu-KiKXiot iMti^milar (cAtXof), iiuSKfi lUiV <>*
much again (Aot vhole), 4*u-<*iii half-dead.

3. S«r- (opposed to «C well) ill| hk-, mfo-, deno^ng something difficulty bad, or

lal^iut 0/ fll /ortKiw (contrast ci)-rux4Ti (^x'P'f'i (Mar/iuf), Sw-Aptarat
m-^ttutd, Ma-wapit iU-ttarred Parii.

4. ii- (or A-) copulotfne denotes union, likenett (cp. Lat. co»~) ; d-(J\m>#M <I^

tenant, agreeing with (rArvdof potA : i.e. going on the eune road),
d-riiX«rTS( of the Mtite weight, d-rii oil together. A TulBtlon of 1-copu-
Utive is d-(H<en«f«e: d-nirfi strttcAed (riivu «tr«teA), d-rttM leetl (Wiar
^ronnd).

a. i-copiilative stands for so- (from ru 20, 86 c), snd is connected wilti

ilM, j/Mu, and i/ia- together.

6. r^- (poetic) with the force of a negative (cp. Lat. n«} ; n)-mtM unavenged

(Toir4 puniehment), r^-nr^i freeing from pain and eorrow (riwtm).
In some cnsea rq- aia.y be derived from r (not) and the if of the second
part, as vQTit not eating (poetic fJI-w, cp. 887).
8. Ap«-, Ipi^ (poetic) with intensive force (cp. ipi-rrot beet), ift-rptwit very
dittinguiihed (rpirtt), l^Ti/Mt preclouM.

7. kya^ (poetic) IntenaiTe (cp. 170* verf) : iyd-itToret loud wailing {trim

8. [K-, S«- (poetic) intensive (for Si> = lis- verg, 116) : fu-fHr^i mnr eowra^eoM*

(/Jnt courage), Id-rmoi tftiob-fAoded (»ii).

I,A8T PART OF A COMPOUND

8Ml Componnd SsbtUntivM and AdJecdTea. — The last part of a
noun-compouud consists of a noun-stem or of a verb-stem with a
noun-Buffix.

8S7. Nouns beginniRft with I, <, 0 lengthen these vowels (1 and * to it, • to
w) imleas they are long by position. ffTpar-iiyit armg'leading, general (orparit,
Ayw), t6~-^rtfiatiiiUh fair wind (cv well, dvt^t), iir^^Xaali driving out of foreigner*
(ffvaii Aa4m), dr-dnifui nameletM (<i»-( Sniui), dr-iiifuiX« Uneiwn (dr-, i^Ut).

■. Some compounds of Atw Irad show a : Xox-dT^ captafn (Xix"' conipan|i).

b. By analogy to the compound the simple form sometimes asaumee » long
TDwel : 4Kfii«r<ra windy. Cp, 28 D.

c Lengthening rarely occurs when a preposition or riit precedes : »ur-Mf»rli
etMUpiraq/ (Sfinifu saiar), rar-'iyvpti general atBembly (^iyvpu = iyopi),

d. llie lengdiening In B8T is properly the result ol early contraction (rrpars
+ ■■>»>)■ On the pattern of such contracted forms irrational lengthening occnn
when the fiiM part at the compound ends in a oonaona&t, as Siw-^Xrr^ (for
l*#-aXfY^) en«I from dX^w care for.

aaa A noun fornung tbe last part of a compound often changes
its final syllable.

N. Masculine or feminine nouns of the second or third declensions naoally
lemsln unaltered : tr-9in itupired, d-rou cAJUJeu.

1= Coo^^lc

•»«] FORMATION OF WOftDS: COMPOUND WORDS 251

■■ •**, -^1 -«v : form compomid ftdjeotivM from nouns of Ibe flnt deelennon,
n«nl«n o( Uie Hcond decleiuion, nouiu of tbe third d«cleDUon, uid from man^
Tail>«UDW. t-Tijiat dithtmoured (Ti>i^) , vttSttrri oontpanion at UM* ()*triv-r
M«aO. ir-tiiMt bloodlett (_alita, 876), imriry-x'f^ hundred-handed Cx«'c). *<w*40-
*ip« brdtyinif tribme [.*ip-*t), it<*^fi^ ffeogn^her 871 b. N. (yr-i-h-}, tx><^
*-ti-r^ fi*k-eiainff i^yir 620. fi).

b. -^1, -n: lonn oomponnd adjeotlTM from noatis ol (he flnt and thiid d»-
elenaimu, and from many Terb^tems : d-rvxift itnfortmnate (rixv), ><u-rr4i
ofUn ftan {firat), ti-it^t htaMifal in form (dSoi), ri-yu^f qviek <a Itanting
OwvMnr, fwtf-), A-^r^T (iwftibla (^w, im*-).

d. Neatora in iia make adjeotiTea in -/u*r : rp&yiim thing, A-wpijiiar inactive,
tr^r mind becomea-^pN* : tC-^^v wtlUainded, cheerful.— warip /tUAer become!
■mimtf -. l^irmp fat&erleu, ^t^a-wiritp loving hit father.

a. Compoimda of y4 IomiJ end In -Yiuf, -Yivt: nrA-ytm wblerranean,
Xtwriftm of thin aoll. — Compouuda of raOt >A^, nipaj horn, yftpai old age
end In -wt, as rtpl-ttm euperearffo, ^l-xtpm Itiftg-nnOered (IflS a), A^pm free
fH^noldagt.

889. The last member of a compoond Is often a rerbal element that Is
BOt naed aepantely: dTaX/iar-«4'«ii stoti^'maker, tetdptor, Ar-^mvt au^jMt
(iMmim hear, dbn^ima), \ayo-ypd^ot epetfArWriter. -^pgi bringing, -l»nat titltdlnff,

-jpafwi rnnning are need separately in the meanlnga tribute, building, race.

890. An abatract word can enter into oompoaltion only b; taking a deriw
tire ending (nsoallj -u) formed from a real or asaumed compound adjectlTe :
nf-t ik^, f(ix<t JIght =! Ht^iMX"> whence nv-fiaxls naval battle; *t tvell,
Poii\i cowucl = iIE^vXm , whence t&-fiou\li good counttl; dr-neg., ipxi fule
= tr-m^x"'! whence if-a^li anarchy ; rC aeU, rpSfu doing = *tiirpi$at, whence
ti-rpiili vieB-dolng. Craitrast tt-ptvXli with *po-pav\t forethought, ti-iryla
eutogt with i-^XoYef prologue.

a. Only after a preposition does an abstract word remain unchanged : xf-
peuX^fortthought. BxcepUona are rare: iuae».^ofA reee^ ofwaget(_tuf9h, ^opd).

891. Campcrand Verba. — Verbs can be compounded directly only by pretlz-
Ing a prepoaltion, as iriifi->idze^«i fight along toith.

M. A prepoaltloii (wp6-$Ma) derived Its name from this use as a preflz. Origl-
naOy all prepoaltlons were adverfas modifying the verb, and in Homer are partly
so naod. See 1888, 1639. Cp. upheave atfd heave «fi.

893. All oomponnd verbs not compounded with prepoaltlons are denomina-
tlres (ending In -m) and formed from real or uaumed compound noniis. From
•avt Mp and Mx? fight oomee rg^iuix" fighting <n «A{p«, whence ravfMx^
fight in ehtpa; to tbnieiUtt build a houie from oln-tifiot hvute-buHder (tint,
Mfw), Coatrast dra-trttfa bring over, convince with irTiarim dtebelleve (<-*w-
m); irrt-Xtym tpeok againtt with ifia-X«Yfo o^ree (iitlAafytt agreeing^, — >>
dyYAXw announce good newt cannot fonn a verb ttay-iMm.

a. AniiiM (trlit) a^tonouT, 9axpux*t ehed tear* are exoeptioDS. di»</ioitw
make wiiike la not from dr> and ipiaiiit but from Ar-itiaut unlOee,

252 FORMATION OP WORl>S: ACCENT OF COMPOUNDS [Sn

ACCENT OF COMPOUNDS

893. Compounds generally have recessive accent, as <t>*^A^iim
hving-honour (ri^ij). But there are many exceptions, e.g. —

a. PrEmltiTee in -d, -4, -itt, -*6i, -itin, BJid -^ai uauolly keep tlieii accent vrben
oompouudedi except diasyllablc words la -i, -i), -))■ whose firul part ie not a
prepoBition. Thus, «piriit iuAge, iiroxpir-ii actor, imixitplTtp inUrprtter of dreamt.

b. Compound adjectives in -171, -ts are ueuaUy oxytone : t6-ytrlii leell-bor*.

894. Compounds in -oi (not •rsi or 'Koi) lonncd by tbe union of a noun 01
adverb and the Bt«ni of H tr&nidtive verb are :

«. oxytone, when they have a long penult and an active meaning: rr/»r-irTlt

general.
b. paroxytone, when tliey have short penult and an active meaning: rarpo-

trhnt parricide, Xc0o-^Xgt thruviing-iitoneit, Xai/io-ri;uit throot-cutting, iSpo-

ipipot mater-carrier.
C. proparoxytone, when tliey have a ibort penult and passive meaning; nrpi-

KTOm slain by a father, Xi9i-/^Xai pelted with stones, XoiM-^ofw* vlth

throat cut, aiti-ipaifiiit writlen lellh one's oteii hand.
N.~AcUve compnunils of -oxm {tx-", 67S)i -<VX<" {ipX-^')< -ffCXot (<riiXi-M
rob), -ropdn ^ripd-u deetroy) are proparoxytone ; irl-oxtt (retn-holder) chariot-
eer, Irw-apxoi eomma)i<ler of honea, Ufti-ruXot temple-robber, wTa\l-rop9et lacking
ettie*. ^apSaOx't ebfjf-bearer (^t^iii) is coulfACted from ^ojHi-oxot.

MEAKINQ OF COMPOUNDS

895. Compound nouns (substantives and adjectives) are divided,
according to their meaning, into three main classeB : determtnatioe,
posaeesive, and prepoaitional-pkrase, compounds.

a. Tbe logical relation of the parts of compounds varies so greatly that boun-
dary-lines between the different classes are difficult to set up, and a complete
formal division is Imposaible. The poeU show a much wider range of usage
than the prose-wrltets.

896. Determinative Compounds. — In mostdeterminatirecompoands
the first part modifies or determines the second part: the modifier
stands first, the principal word second.

Thus by hand-work a particular kind of work is meant, as contrasted with
maehine-viork ; cp. apeech^wrHer and letUr-writer, race-horse and horte-raee.

a. The fli^t part may be an adjective, an adverb, a preposition, an inseparable
prefix, or, in a few cases, a substantive.

897. There are two kinds of determinative compounds.

(1) Descriptive dstermliuttve componnds. — The first part defines or ez>
plains the second part in the sense of an adjective or adverb. (This class U
less numerous than the second class.)

■Up^^toXh t^tptr eiCy, citadel (i'pi riXif), i^iMtouXai felloio-tlave (AfuO Sair-
\t6m, cp. S85. 4 a), d^f-Yont late-bom (i^ri ytwiiurM), xpa-ptv^-i forethoufkt.

ags] POaMATIONOF WORDS: MEANING OF COMPOUNDS 253
Jji^i-MSt^v av^itheatrt (a place-for-seeing round &bout), S-7fH^dt not uiritten

{at-inpnntiinit).

t. CcipMlotice eompotindt are formed by the coordination of two substantiTM
«»dJBctlveB : iiTfi-iiarra physician and tetr, -rKvuO^itpat neeetlg-bitleT. Similar
ia ifeq^-mutf. So also in numemlH : Jil-Scia two {and) ten = 12.

b. Comparative compounds (generally poetic) are iitXi-tiS^i hOBey-meeet
OiAt, 4i^), roS^rt/iot^lpa Irig, teiik feet fiei/t a» the mind. Cp. eagle-eyed,
gol<f/l*h, blocthead. Sncli CDtnpounds are otten poaseaaire (898), as fieta-ld-
nviot roty-fingered, xp"""*-***"!' goldtn-haired.

(2) Dependent deteTmlnatiTe compounds. — A substantive forming either
the flret or the second part stands in the sense of an oblique case (with or with'
□at a prepoBitioa) U> the other part.

Accusative: >ayo-^pi^Mi epeeeh-WTtter (Xfrvovt tpd^r), <rTpaT-^6i army-
leadinff, general (irTparir iyut), ^nX^repotrai tuviag manJtind (^iXAr irSpiinin),
ttvu-irJliuii tapertUtiout (itititt rtdt Saliient) ; cp. pickpocket, tightieer, paint-
taking, iooth»ayer, latighter-loviiig.

Genitive ; aTpa.T6-rcSot camp {arpaTou -riiat ground on lehith an army U
encamped'). In dfii-Xiryai worthy of mention (Afwt X£7eu) the derinlng part
stauda second (869 c) and Is governed by ibe adjective part like a preposition
(cp. 899). Cp. ringnxitter, law-offlcer, jeet-book.

(Ablative): irriio-rinr^ thellering frum llf wind; cp. land-breeze, sea-breeze.

Dative: i»-4-*ot godlike (trot fcv) ; cp. churchgoer, blood-thirsty.

(Instramontal) : x^'P-o^'h"' made 6y htiad (x'jwl TOHjrit), xpiwW«TOt
iouiuf uiilh gold ixP'''"? 'fii) ; cp. thunder-struck, storm-raept, slaT-sown,

(tXKiative) : aUo-^riii born In the house (^tr oliy yrwiturtis'), iiot-ripot ieay-
fartr (879) ; cp. heart-sick.

5. 1. — The Greeks did not think of any actual case relation as existing In these
componods, and the case relation that exists ia purely logical. The same form
may be analysed in different ways, as <)yi\dy6piiir<ii ~ ipAini irSpiiwovi or = ^Xm

K. 2. — finch compounds may oEten be analysed by a preposition and a de-
pendent noon ; &4-)|i^TBt god-built (Jxi Tur BtQr ifDfrii).

898. PoaseMive Coropoands, — lu possessive compounds the first
part defines the second as in determinatives; but the whole com-
pound ia an adjective expressing a quality, with the idea of pos-
session understood. In most possessive compounds the idea of
having (Ix"*) ia to be supplied.

So, In English, redbreast is a bird having a red breast, tlie first part being an
attribute of the second.

itr/vpi^aiot having a silver bos; fHtKpi-x"p ftnrinff long arms, long-armed;
ttniUli having the appearance (cTfoi) of a god, godlike; aii-ifipar having sound
mind, temperate; TiBp-trroi having four horses; iii6-TtHroi of like character
(ifw- ocean only in compounds, but note Sju'ct lilce); roXv-c^^Xot many-headed ;
«*-Ti7j+i having good fortune, fortunate ; ii«B-«Ti)i lasting ten years (cp, a tteo-
year-old) ; in^-idiai having piUars rouTid about; Ir-Bwi in^tred (having a god
leithin : tw iavrf Mr Ix"')-

254 FORMATION OF WOBDS : HEAVING OF COMPOUNDS [899

«. AdjaetiTSB In -tiHn from ttlot form {irrtp-a-nlit ttar-lOce, IxBu-o-atM
jUh-IU^, ^»-o-«iJ4f OTMCtrnf, nXv-«)4t of manp kind*, a^aifi-ftiSit spherical)
an to be dtotlDguIaliMl from tboM la -Mi/t derived from «> mieU (833 a).

b. Bngllab poncMlTe oompoands In -ed apply tbat endlog only to the <«>ni-
ponnd u a wbole and not to either nieniber. In Hlltoo : deep-tXroatod, vMiU'
ha»d«d, opmt-htarttd ; In Keati: tuUI^-cocbneed. Bealdes thoae in -mI there
an others aucb as Bluebeard.

c. Many posseesiTe oompounds b^n witb !(>)- negative or >im> iU ; aa I-twi
cJUItficM (AaoinjT no eAlIdren or not haoiiig cAfUren, raitai sdc (ichf), i-rl/wt
dithonowed {having no honoar), 3fo-^vXsf f/J a(l«i««d (Aatrln; evQ coHnaels).

899. Prepoaltloiul-phraM CMBpmuida. — Many phrases made of a
preposition and its object unite to form a compound and take or
adjectiral inflection. Such compounds are equivalent to the phrases
in question with the idea of being or the like added.

tr-M»f colonbt (auail from homt : it' aTnu) ; iyxtifilSioi in the hand, dagger
(ir x*fO i fyx'^P'^ native (in Iht eottntrj/: ir x<^pv) i triBoKiTTuit daelling on
the eoatt (irl hUrrg) ; t<t-i«Tun on Ae hearth (^' itrUf) \ laTiytun ntlder-
ground, cp. tvbterranean (rari yttt) ; npiSo(ot contrary to opinion (wofi
Ufu) ; rapi-^pur out ofone't mind, La^ de-mem {rapi Tijr fpira) ; &w-tdevr«t
under liatattg to give account (ir iMAhui) ; so ifipoOSat gone ( =rp4 iSoC ttri-
fitrtt, cp. 121 a).

a. From such phissw are derived verba and Hnbetantlveg : iyx^'pl!'' P"* 'nto
one'i handt, entnut, Siax'^pifi' ^f' '" hand, manage (iii x"p^')t JianvSr
oetam-tcale (4 Ii^ rirSr x'P^^' ru/i^i^ the concord Arovgh all the note*).
By analogy to itrvliir ovt of the vaji (in roSOw) come tiantiir in the tony and
i/iritiM impeding, /^troJIfte Impede.

b. Tbe oompounds of SOB repieaent UU at syntas used so fraqnently togstber
that tbey have become adherent.

3,q,-Z.-dbvGOOglC

PART IV

DEFINITIONS

900. A aentence expresses a thought. Syntax (mWo^ arranging
together) shows how the different parts of speech and their different
iufleotional forms are employed to form sentences.

901. Sentences are either complete or incomplete (904).

902. EvetT complete sentence mnst contain two members ;

1. The Subject : the person or thing about which something is said.

2. The Predicate : what is sud about the subject.

Tbna, ri B4pet (Bob}.) frtXt^a (pred.) the tufitmer | came to an end T. S. 109,
fXfc (pred.) K^pvi (mbj.) a herald \ came 3. IIS.

903. Complete sentences are simple, compound, or complex. In
the timple sentence subject and predicate occur only once. A com-
pound sentence (2162) consists of two or more simple sentences coor-
dinated : ry S* vmpauf imptvorro Sti rav irf&bu, Kai Turtra^ipviTf ttwen
but on the next day they marched through the plain and Tiaaaphemet
iept/olknoing them X. A. 3. 4 18. A complex sentence (2173) consists
of a main sentence and one or more subordinate sentences r tnrar* 8«m
yi^pav BtafinXrttv, linrtaStv ivatfTot ivheneoer it mat necessary to croM a
bridge, every one made haste 3. 4. 20.

90t. Incomplete sentences consist of a single member only. Such
Kntences stand outside the structure of the sentence. The chief
classes of incomplete sentenoea are

k. luteijecUons, mch u d, ^, aiar, offui.

b. Anerentloufi which oerre sa a predicate to a aenUnoe spoken by another :
tmJ|f», wurelg, 00 no, ^Xwra eertainlji, icaXui very well!

C Headinga, titles : Ktpov 'Aripwit the Rtjiedttion of Cfrut, 'Awriyirf the
AnUfone, rvfi^x'" 'Afnratmw tal etTTaXuv the AUianee qf the Atheniaita and
nestaiiatu C. L A. 4. S. eo b.

d. VocstfTes (12S8), uid nomiu&tives used in exclamation (1288).

«. Bxclamatioiu wlthoat a verb : StBpe hither t

R.— Examples ol snob inoompieta Heiit«ucee fn EngUab arp oh, OMtweHjf,
■a tMHidcr, right about face, away, fin t

256 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [905

903. True impersoaal verbs (932) have a grammalical subject in tbe petMoal
CDdlog ; but the real subject is properly an idea more or lens vogue thai in present
to the mind of the speaker. Similar in nature are inflaitivea used Id command*
(8013).

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

906. The most simple form of seatence is the finite verb : hr^
he-ia, Xtya-fLcy we-aay, hrt-<r$t you-folloui.

Hare the subject is in tbe persoaal ending, tbe predicate in tbe verbal Btem.
No otber single word than a verb can of itaelf form a complete sentence.

907. The subject of a seoteDce is & substaiitive or oue of its
equivalents.

908. Bqairalents of the Substantive. —Tbe function of the substantive
ma; be assumed b; a pronoun, adjective (in masculine and feminine more fn>-
qnentlj with the article), numeral, participle, relative clause (ot tXif^&iicKT rir
roKittluw ra^i 4fTY<^^' tho^e of the erttmy aho were captured made (Ke aam
report X. A. 1. 7. 13) ; b; tbe article with an adverb (ol rjrt the men nf that dag),
or with the genitive (ni rfli rixvt the (nci"denM 0/ fortune, fortune (1299)); l^
a prepositional phrase (oI i/ufil rir Suipdrtr Socrates and hit foiloweri ; twl tUy*
a great port), a preposition with a numeral (t^iuyor ttpt dn-anwlovr abotU tight
hundred look to flight X. H. 6. 5. 10) ; by an Infinitive with or without the article
(1QS4, 2026); and by an; word or phrase viewed merely ss a thing (tA l/nU
Ih-ar -Kiyw, ri/w w&Xir Myw ithtn I Sag Fnu, / mean the State D. 18. SS). Cp.
ll&3g. (Farthermore, by a clause in a complex sentence, 21S9. 1.)

909. The predicate of a sentence is always a verb. The verb
may either stand alone, as in IIcptKX^ AiniXBc Perides departed; or
it may have certain modifiers, called comjAementa to the pivdieate
(nouns, participles, adverbs), as ItepiKX^v Ssr^XSt irpwroii Jlrat (ipyii,6-
fMKK in anger; ron then). Cp. 9M.

910. Predicate Nouna. — Kouns (substantival nr adjectival) are
often used as complements to the predicate. Thus,

■. A predicate substantive is a substantive forming part of the
predicate and asserting something of its substantive : IIcpiKX^ SP^
orpaTtjyoi Pericles was elected general, tlKta^ tuMvov vpttr^evr^ you
elected Aim envoy L. 13, 10.

b. A predicate adjective is an adjective forming part of the predicate
and asserting something of its substantive : u iyiip &iKai6t irm the man
i» juat, ivifiurav GtpiKkia tirro)^ they thmight I'ericles fortunate.

911. A predicate substantive or adjective may often be distinguished from
an attributive (012) in that tbe former implies some form of ctnu be. Thia.
rpwfifirrir and lirvx^ In 910. After verbs signifying to name or call, dru
is sometimes expressed (1016).

912. Attributive Adjecdve. — An attributive adjective is an adjec-
tive simply added to a noun to describe it, and not forming any part
of an assertion made about it : i Stkoiot dvijp the just^man.

im] appositivk, copula, object 257

913. All adjectivea that are not attributive are predicate. So irptfroi i^-
nrro lA«y loere lAt first to arrive (1042 b), roirif ^iXif xpSifuu I treat thi» man
lu a frltnd (= tlrm, ^ xfiviiai, ^l\oi /btI),

914. Uoder ndjecUves are included partlciplea: 6 lUSXur (atu-ib.) rAXifm
Iht future war, TaCra droit (pred.) dTtin* Maying tkit he went off, ipm »t
tftwrnrrt (pred.) 1 lee gou hiding.

915. Fredicate substantivea, adjectives, and participles, in agreement eitlier
with subject or object, are mora common in Greek ilian in Bnglish, and often
call for special sbifta in trnnelatiim : /uriiipoui iitubiuaar rat i^ulfai they lifted
the waffoM and carried them out X. A. 1. G. 8. Cp. 1S70.

OT6. Apposltive. — An appositive ia a noun added to another noun
or to a pronoun to describe or define it r MiArwSij; 5 crrporTyos Mil-
Uades, the general, J/uTs oi Icpcts you, the prieMx, touto, 5 aii etxts, iti
rafitari, "x^V '^''^< tohicti you visiilioned, ia alivaya i>reaeiit, (1 mean)
Ititttrt P. Th. 172 d.

817. CopnlA. — An indeterminate verb that serves simply to couple
a predicate substantive or adjective to the subject is called a cojnda:
Sov^f ^y 'A0tjyauri Xetiophon was an Athenian.

a. The moHt common copulative verbs are tint be and yl-iMir$M becnme.
Man; other verba serve as copulas; KaalvravBai bn-'ine, n^ui/m, irdpxuy, wtt^r
(poetical) be, iatiir seem, ^Ixtr^ai appear, rnXfiv-Sai, iraiiijlt^at, iimitit, rX^tr
(poetical) be en I/fd, rvyxitir, Kvpttr (poet.) hoppen, turn out, alpitrBat be chosen,
ro/iiitaSai be regarded, uptrareai be judged, and the Utie.

918. a. TTie copula is strictly the predicate or la a part of the predicate with
its Bupplemeota.

b. The above verbs may also be complete predicates : tari Btit there is a god.
C. For the oraission of the copula, see 944.

d. A predicate substantive or adjective stands in the same case as the subject
when coupled U> It by a copulative verb (ffS^).

e. For (li«i added to a copulative verb, see 1615.

9EL9. Object — A verb may have an object on which its action is
exerted. The object ia a substantive (or its equivalent, 908) in an
oblique case. An object may be direct (in the accusative) or indirea
(in the genitive or dative) : Kupw &ocr<i <f /ivSs (direct) rffl 8nii\^ (in-
direct) Cyrua will give six minae to the ^ve, IXapoy rrj^ (mvrp (iudirect)
Toy 'Opoyrav (direct) they took hold of Orontaa by the girdle X. A. 1.
6.10.

92a Transitive and Intransitive Verbs. — Verbs capable of taking
a direct object are called transitive because their action passes over
to an object Other verbs are called intransitive.

a. But many intransitive verba, as in English, ate used transitively (1658,
1559), and verbs usually transitive often take an indirect object (I34I S., 1460 ff.,
MTl fL).

■ ooglf

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

KINDS OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

921. Simple sentetices h&ve six forms; Statementa; Assump-
tiODS, Comm&ndB, Wishes ; QuestiouB ; and Exclamations. Of these,
Assumptioiis, Commands, and Wishes express wUl. See 2163 S.

EXPANSION OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

922. The subject and the predicate may be expanded hy amplifi-
oation or qualifioatioa :

933. Expansion of Ute Snbjsct. — Tbe aubjact in»7 be expanded : A. Bj
tn^ificatiaa : E«rfii lal nSiriwr dr^^^ua-ai Xenioi and Paaion tailed aieof.
B. By qualification : 1. By an attributive adjective, i iyaSii iriip tht good man,
an attributive subatantive denoting occupation, amdition, or age, d>H)p rrparvtii
a captain (U66), an adjective pronoun or nanieral : ii/Jripet ^ot a fiiend of
ovri, Sit ToEiif tiBo children, 2. By tbe genitive of a noun or BUbdtiuitive pro-
noun (adnominal or attributive genitive): vTt^m xp^oS a ermaa of gold, t
wKT^p ifUir ovr father. 3. By a prepositional pbrase: iJAi utiI toC Y^Xi^w
a teaf down the hill. 4. By an adverb; ol tSr itSpwroi tbe men of the praent
day. 6. By an appositive (910). A subsUntive in any case may be qualified
like the mibjecl.

924. Sxpuulon of the Predicate. — The predicate may be expanded : A. By
ampHfieation .■ ol \axiyol di-^Xtfef (ol /rsfouf aurui the raptairts tUpaned and did
to. B. By q«alificatiiin .• 1. By the oblique case of a noun, a Hutwtanlive pro-
noun, or a numeral. Thia la called tbe object (9 IS, 9-JO). Thus : ipa rbr irtpa
I aet the man, ^yur^ iKniiMi I hear a voice, ilrcro t^ ^-fiiiin h/: fallmntd tht
guide, iy»r$ i^hsi he love* u», /^■^t tj)> iiixv he v>on the battle (ct^naie
accusative, 1687), tlw*a Sira I gave fen. The oblique case may be fulloved by
an adnominal genitive or a dative : ApS -woWoiit rSr voXItuIt / see mang of the
citiient. 2. By a preposition with its appropriate caae : jJXAot ^1 rat ffnrrdi
theywent to their tentt. 8. By an infinitive ; m\ri iri\8tir he wishe* to depart.
4. By a participle : Ap^fisi X^ur / will bi-gin mn tpeech. G. By an adverb or
adverbial expreaalon : rf Caru let him know leell, r^i fvirrii iXSt he tame during
the n{ght, ir^iiBt Tpiraiet he departed on the third dag (1012). Un <M>mplemenl*
to the predicate, see 000.

AQREEMENTi THE CONCORDS

925. There are three concords in simple setitences:

1. A finite verb threes with its subject in number and person
(949>

2. A word in apposition with another word agrees with it in case
(976).

3. An adjective agrees witli its substantive in gender, number, and
case (1020).

(For tbe concord of relative pronouns, see 2501.)

.oogic

ni] THE SUBJECT 259

926. Apparentviolationof the concords is to be explained either by
A. Conttnation according to sense, where the agreement is with the

n»i gender or number (e.g. 94tfa, 950-963, 958, 996, 997, 1013, 1044,
1050, 1055 a, 1058 b) ; or by

b. AUraclioa, when a word does not have its natural construction
because of the influence of some other word or words in its clause
{e.g. 1060 ff., 1239, 1978, 2465, 2502, 2522 ff.)- This principle
extends to moods and tenses (2183 ff.).

THE SUBJECT

927. The subject of a finite verb is in the nominative : Ki^ ifiaS
Ognu aiUed out.

928. The subject nominative may be replaced

a. By a prepoakional phrase in the accusative ; iii^iitUi* ta»' intarwit r< xai
t^arrn eoiuider individucUly and all togethtr T. T. &L

b. ByagenlUveoI the divided nhole(13I8): ncXXijwi J« rarit etrritf t t(>4>
IHW iiiAxorri rt ml ir xi^K twlrror itaripur the Pelleniane WhO teert Oj^iottd
laOt Tke^iant kept up the eoiOeMt and teverai on both »idet fell on the ^ot
XH.1.2.20.

OMISSION OF THE SUBJECT

929. An unemphatio pronoun of the first or second person is
generally omitted : Xiyt tov vo/mv read the lato (spoken to the clerk
uf the court) D. 21. 8.

930. An empbUlc pronoun is generally expressed, as In eontraeie; ai pit
BiVi. M^Dv, iyi) t iwtiiu do thou vrait for him, biU I will depart S. Ph. 128.
Bnt often in poetry and Mmetlnies in prose tha pronoun Is expreHsed when no
contrast [b Intended. Tbe ftret of two contrasted pronouns is sometimes omitt«d :
i>M, li paiXti, lUr' t*l Tif rriMTtiiiaTi, fytli f iSfXti roptitrBat fiut, if ifdu pr^er,
fmaia mith jfour ditutoH, lamieUUng logo X. A. 8.4.41. Cp. 1190, 1191.

931. The nominative subject of the third person may be omitted
t. When it is expressed or Implied In the context; i rit rariip i>offtiTai fdi ri

UxtTi wi»ji VOW father U afraid le^t he suffer death X. C. S. 1. 22.

b. When the subject is Indefinite, especially when it is the same person of
UiingssUie omitted subject of it preceding IntlnltivB(987a) : ^ tdE ottsBai tiSfm
[itatli), a bSk oMtr tht ignorance of Chinking one knoag what one doet not
t>aw P. A. 29 b. Often In legal language : i »i/ui, gi tiXiiri ri iauroS iitinu
taiisgoi twut &w i9f\j) the lavi, vihlch enjoins that a man has the right to dis-
pot of his property as he withes Is. 2. 13.

t When a particular peraon is meant, nho is easily underatood from the
ntustion : rait liinin irayniatTai he {tJie clerk) will read the laws Aea. 3. 16.

1 When it is a general idea of pereon, and usually in the third peraon plural
o'lerbaof soffing a,nd thinking : iit \iyavfir as thty say D. 0. IS. So ^rl thejf
K^. ttarrau people think; cp. aimt,fertmt, tradunt.

.oogic

260 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [931

e. Id deaoriptloiiBot locality; 4r jJEpiifirMn /or 11 CtIieplace)(MU«(«(^T.T.U

f. Iq Impersonal veiba (832, 934).

932. Impersonal Veits (905). — The subject of a true impersonal
verb is a vi^ue notion tuat cannot be supplied from the context:
Afn ^v it waa late, koXSo^ ix^ it is well, ■ijByj ^v ifufi^ ayopav ■rX^dmima'
U was already about the Ihne when the markel-place isJvU X. A. 1. 8, 1,
avT^ oil irpovj(aiptt, it (the course of events) did not go well with him T. 1, 109.

933. An impersonal verb the subject of which may be derived from
the context is called quasi-impersonai.

a. When the indefinite (( anticipatea an infinitive or auliordlnato proposition
which forms the logical subject, (1985). So nitli Jdhi it seems, tniiifialrti U hap-
pens, IfwTi U is permitted, rpirti, tpotiiKa it is fitting, ^cdrtrai it c^ean,
tftftrii it happened, ilr^it /u v.nit me in mentem, iii^oi it is evideM, eta. Tbun,
tfiSi rpov/itti vpofiiurripom dm tt behooves yon to be morexealous X. A. S. 2. IS,
tlS'in a^«>T h-ut ir ottaSt d^curru it came into their thoUfrhCI hoie thejf should

reach home fl. 1. 17.

b. 80 also vrith xri, '« '( is necessary ; as, ttt a ikStlr gov ought to go (111- to
go bindsyou). The ImpeTBonal conBtmclion with -r^v teeqaivalent to itX (2162a):
fioifiirrior iarl tdii rpiyimfir bfuw you must rescue the interests at Btakt D. 1. 17.

934. In some so-called Impersonal verbs the person is left unexpressed be-
cause the actor Is understood or implied In the action. So

a. In expressions of natural phenomena originally viewed as produced \iy a
divine agent : Pparr^ tonat, iti pluit, kI^h ningit, x«Mi«' ^ i* stormy, Irtun
it shook, there urns an earthquake. The agent (Znit, A Mt) la often (in Horn.
always) expressed, as Zc^ dfTT^TTci luppiter fulget.

b. When the agent Is known from the action, which la viewed as alooe of
Importance : iraXxl^i the trumpet »ouuAs(i.e.ica,\wiiicriita<kKwti<i thetnampetfr
founds the trumps), ^jttipvfc proclamation loat mad» («e(I. i n^puO, 'viud"' the
signal is given («eil. i jt^vf or & o-aXTtyiriii).

939. In impersonal passives the subject la merely Indicated In the verbal
ending : 'Ktyrral t« not ypi^troi ^eehes (Xiyei) and writings (Tpi«iaT«) ar»
composed P. Phae. 281 b. This coostniction is relatively rare, but commonest
in tiie perfect and pluperfect: etf AXXuii atrraU TrrirriTai their l(Aour has not
been lost P. Phae. 232 a, iril a^ott raptrtiiaa^o uhen their preparattont were
completed X. H. 1. 3. 20.

936. Subject of the Inflnitlve. — The subject of the iofiiiitive is in
the accusative : JkcXcvov aurout TopoiioAu CAey ordered that they lAtndd
proceed X. A. 4.2.1.

a. See I9T6. On the nominative snbject of the infinitive, see 1973.

937. Omission of the Subject of ths Infinitive. — The subject of the in-
finitive la usually not eipreesed when it Is the same as the subject or object
(direct or Indirect) of the principal verb: f^<r iet^ur he tatd he VOM ailling
X. A- *■ 1. 87 (contrast dixit h velle), rirrn alnBrrai rtit «wi>t rA ^oOXa Aro-

944] THB KOMINATIVE 261

Tptwttr emrpboOy pray* the gods to avert evil X. 8. 4. 47, 1*« w rprtt ^itipit *pj«
•inv grant me the eorUrol of him for three days X. C. 1. 3. 11. Cp. 1060, 1078.
■. Ad indefinite eabject ol the Infinitive (riFd, ir6piirBvi) Is luudUy omitted.
Cp. B31 b, 1980.

CASE or THE SUBJECT : THB NOHINATIVB

938. The Doininative ia the case of the subject ; the oblique cases,
vith the exception of the adnominal genitive (1290 ff.) and adnominal
dative (1502), are complements of the predicate.

939. The nominative is the case of the subject of a finite verb and
of a predicate noun in agreement with the subject. UpoiaiK Tmp^
Proxenut wag present X. A. 1. 2. 3, KA*apyof ^vyas ^v Clearchua viaa
an exile 1. 1. 9.

a. On the nominative subject of the Infinitive, see ISTS; in eiolamations, 138B.

940. Independent ITominatiTe. — Tlie nominnUve may be ueed independ-
ently in citing tbe names of persons and things i rparitXri^ rV '''^' ironipAr
nir^i- truniiHn oiiini^mjt he received the Common appeilatton of the vile, i.e.
'iKformer* Aea. 2. OS, t4 S' butit Bto» X^io, Xfyu tV *i^f when I tay Tou, I
meati the State D. 18. 68. Cp. 008. (The accua. is also possible.) So in lipts
(cp.QWc): rfffij^ a&i iroiip-iJtflirfJi) ■ Btli iiinai iuBpiawini I aatume two ktndt of
poetry : the divine and the human P. Soph. 2M d.

941. Aaentencenuiybegin with the nominative as the Butiject of the tbotight

In place of an oblique case ; ol li «1X<h, it ra twlanrrai ttraii xp^^'i ''' ^^aiMt
■iro^clrai; biU OM for frieodt, if one knotes hote to treat them, uAatthallwe call
them t X. O. 1. 14 (for ro^ li t^Um . . . rl ip^aiur tint).

a. On the nomlnstiTe in suspense see under Anacoluthon (Index) .

943. In referring to blmBeU in letters a mtm may use bis own name in the
nominative, either in appoeition to the first person contained In the verb (9T6), or
M suliject of a verb In ^le third person : ec^iurTSii^^t tifu vopd vi I, Theiiiittocle»,
have come to you T. 1. 137, ' Jtpraiipirit K>Mf" Jrtaxerxtt think* X. H. 6. 1. 31.

a. A speaker lefening to himself in the third person usually soon reverts
to Die fliet person (D. 18. TO).

943. When there Is no danger of obscurity, the sabject nuty shift without
warning ; >iJar iiip roO* Xo^dnvfir, rai i" iXSat oix iSut^ffitrtt, dW dCD^^owir

they eaptwed out §hlp; t?te rut they were unoAIe to capture; but they (the

ibipa) etcaped T. 7. 2C, rOr niitur ainur itairrt rl tt\t6aM^ col t1 rapa^e^^nirir

\tar what the lawt themtelvet command and what trantgretaioat they (my oppo-
neals) AoM cotnwicted S.GO. US.

THE PEBDICATB

(htUsion of the Verb

944. XIllpili of the Copula. — The copulative verb c&uBt is often
omitted, especially the forms iirri and ctiri. This occurs chiefly

^2 STNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [ms

a. In general or proverbial MatemenU : mr^ 4 rCxn 'at fi f>A)kw dV3>'<"
ehance U common to all and the future cannot be ee^nnad I.l.'ia; b. in expre*-
aiona of uecwait;, duly, etc. : iiiyicii ^XdrrtirAu it it neeestarg to be on oar
Ifuard D. 9. 0. So witti Spa, vupit, tU6i, xp'<i', >'«'• verbals in -rfor (2162), u
«tpaw*vriBr rait Biait we mvK tense the godt X. M. 2. 1. 28; c. witJi Tariont
adjectives : dfm, Svrarit, rpiSvtioi, Ilcouf , oIm, ^paMtf, frw^uii ; thua, 4 V^4
ttvXttttr troliai t&e «oul if ready to be a aereant P. Phae. 262 a, cf ni hrtptantn
rirtpar tptlrivi if anybodg thuuld atk whether U it better X. M. I. 1. fl.

949. Other forms of dm are leaa commonl; omitted: loirureiw troiiiat (tcfl.
tint), ol/uii ti ml AdxTO r6rSt (_tcil. troi/ior tlnu) I am ready to auttt jruii and
Ithink that Lachet hfre it alio ready P. I^ch. 160 a, dA <rA X«ve7P*^ (aclf. (I)i
are you not a speech-arUerf D. 19. 260, n>£ ir iidaif (teil. ^t) tAe n^ht (mu Aal/
(ron« Aee. 8. 71, irota iJytii Kal oMa>«Si rpit ffoO (Mil. 4>tb) j/ou are taUtlag
abturdly and not at all like yourself X. M. 2. 3. IG, t«i Stm /irrlrr^ x'P"
(aetl. (rru) to the godt let our heartiett thanka be given X. C. 7. G. 72. Cp. lOil.

946. In lively discourse the lorm of a verb Bigaifying to do, *p<dt, come, ffo,
etc., may be omItl«d for brevity. Tlie ellipaia is oflen imcoiisciotts aiid It is
frequently uncertain what is to be supplied to complete the thought. Thus, W
a\>^ (tcU. iroliiiraw) i iripsi\tvffar : uAot elie did they do except plot agatntt uat
T. 8. 89, eiSir IXXa (tcil. roii^r) 4 ri\iw r^r a^oC iwo\iirur doiug nothing eUe «x-
eipt leaving his native city 2. 16, lnrl(3cil. ■yinrrnj.'); to what purpose 1 0. 19.267,
Ttfil iiir rwiraii narik irxeXijv (scil. X^(u) oAotit thi» by and by 24. 167, fi^ fial ^v

iiMovt (,ecil. M^ir*) f>oue of your Ifgendt for me f At. Veap. 1179, d\V (itk^uM)
hiper but consider another point L. 18. 79, A iflXt *<uSpe, a-oT H) {tell, il) >al
t6etr (teil. <|nit} ; my dear Phaedrvt whither, I beg of yon, are you going and
tehenee do you come ? P. Phae. 227 a, ot* h xipam (_»cil. ipp^tit) j wfll yon not be
ofl to tAe crouw ^ Ar. Nub. 671, rpit at (setL l/ctrtiu) 7onlrw I eutreat thee bg
thy knees E. Med. 824. Cp. 1690.

947. Kal Tavrn and that too takes up a preceding expresaion: Aiptwripavt
■h-sdi ittiprtrt ... (at raSr' th aiVrjii AfT made tAem more savage and that too
(otoord* htmteV P. O. 516 c ; often with concessive participles (2063) : M/wn
J^ obi jf^^rn, nalTairra rs/i' 'A^ufau Af to3 M^nrni t^vovAe dfd not oafc /or Jfenoa
and tAot toaaItAottpAhecam«/t-omj4rf<i«M, .Venon'i gvett-fritnd X A. 2. 4. 16.
Cp. 1248, 2083.

948. A vert) that may easily be supplied from the context is often omitted.
Tbua, ib.1 p/lBa, raiiTQiMi (icil. TsitJ*) t ft i*a>r *Diw if I leant better, / tkall
leave off &a\-agv^at I do unintentionally P. A. 20a, d/uXVai Jin-ip si roXXal (aejl.
Ht-pAoirrai) not earing for what mo»t men care for 3<lb, 'avaMii iiir^nrs rmSrm.
■vTui (scil. Ix«rra) tip^rtrt if you inquire about thit later, you tetll find that it
is 10 24 b. See under Bracliylogy (Index).

CONOOED OF STJBJTICT AND PREDICATB

949. . A finite Terb agrees with its subject in number and person.
Thus, roOro rl ^if^irMi iyi'rro this hill aas passed L. IS. 6S, 1 tiSou *yA p^M

wi^nO" I^'t loAlcA I fear lett you may itiffer D. 9. 06, iw S* di-o^F'^^wrai ol dUa^ :

9573 CONCORD OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE 268

Ivi^r Irarrn T«EfmXi> 6it( ^ tA« rett vote apofnK (following), tM lAoII oO
nlnni boot affain X. A. 1. 1. 15, tA ^iiv riUt ^Xu itrir iiiA (Amc tuo ttrangen
an frUHda of mf m F. O. 4B7 a.

a. Tlifl verbal predicate, wben a coptdaliTO verb (SIT), maj be attzaoted
u the nunber of a predicate nouo, whicb often stands between aobject and
Terb : rt x'*^* tsPti), tetp wp^tfat 'Err^ ittX JicsXoCrrD (Ate pIoM loAtcA wu
formerly dailtd Nine Waj/M T. 4. 102, irir ri lUwr rSt mx^* ll'ar rriSm Tptt%
IA« entire fpace bUween the wiUlt wm tAree itade* X. A. 1. 4. 4. So with the
paiticiidea of auch eopuUdve verbs : rifr ^Sorfir Siiinrf ih dyaWF 8r (for olo-ai-)
imcAoM ^^er;Iea«urB im ^(( were a good P. Pr. 8Mc.

WITH ONE SUBJECT

Subject in th» Singular, Verb in the Plural

95a With singular collective BubstantireB (996) denoting persons
and with like words implying a plural, the verb may stand in the
plural.

Thno, T* gTpaT6wtSor h o/Tfj tx'"" rir'' kyir irtx<ipavt the army retHmed
holdlHg Agil at fault T.6.60, TOiaoraiKoiaairaiiriXil^Ay^lt^rtftxirTO pavi\a
Iht dttt after hearing such argvmenti, choat Agaihm* Icing X. H. 8. 3. 4. So
with jJiwXi^ lenate, iiiptt part, rXQAit muUKude, i^iMt people, S^^' Uirong.

991. So with (mrrot : rwr iatnaH Ixainn icul iralJtwr iml ;m>qf«iTUr ifx"""^

itery tiuin i» maeter of hie own children andproperty X. B. L. 6. 1.

952. If tuoTTot, itiTipot, IXXoi are added in appoiltion to a plural iubject,
llie verb generally remains plural : iyii ti mi vi iiaKpir Xjts' iKirtpot i-wrrtlTxiaT
hnlh yo% and I have carried on a long controversy P.Pr. SSI a. If the verb
Follawa the apposition, it may be lingular : oCtm iiit AXXai dXXa X^tt thae say,
MM one thing, tome another X. A. 2. 1. 16. Cp. 082.

953. A subject in tlie singular, followed b; a clause containing the prepo-
Bition iitri wUA, rarely takes a plural verb: 'AXxipidliit /urd MamSiw Tr-rtni
rfropfrarrn Arilpaaar Alcibiodes and Mantithew exaped beeaute they imtc
M«{I provided vtlth kortee X, H. 1, 1. 10.

Svhjea in the Dual, Verb in the Plural

954. He first peisoD dual agreea in form with the first person plural (462).

955. A dual subject may take a plural verb : UtyotftStyri irpoaiTptjmv
iio ytavuTKu two yovtks ran up to Xetiophon X. A. 4. 3. 10. In the
orators the dual verb is almost always used.

99C The dual and plural verb may alternate; atperir dXA-ifr rt col titrpi-
{ura the two aoolB have made their choice and put U into effect P. Pbae.

me.

957. The neuter dual may be followed by the dual, theplntal, orthe.
<«tb(AlM,SOD, M4W).

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

Stdtject in the Plural, Verb in the Singidar

9sa A neuter plural subject is regarded as a collective (996), and
has its verb in the singular: KaX» V ''<> "^y^ '^ aacrificea toert
pn>}>Uious X. A. 4. 3. 19.

N. — 'I'he iieuier plural seems to have been orJftimUlj' in part Identical in
form with the feiiiinine sin^lar in a, and to have had a oollecttve meaning.

959. A plural verb may be used when stress is laid on the fact
that the neuter plural subject is composed of persons or of several
parts: ra tc\>) tuiv AaKcSai/ioctW avrov fiiTrffiij/av the JjOiCedaemoniaa
magistrates destjKUched him T. 4. 88, ^vtpa ^traf koI iTinuv koi iy9p<iviav
'xyiTToXXd vtany traces both of horses and of men toere plain X.A.I, 7. 17.

a. With the abovi! exception Attic regularlf uses the siiigular verb. Homer
lueB the singular three times as often as the pluml, and the plural lets freqneDll;
with neuter adjectives and pronouns than with subHtantives. In some cases
(B I^-'i) the metre docidea the choice.

960. Folloninf; the construction of Amni raCro, we find Siiar Tuiha when it
hnd brm thug decided X. A. 4.1. IS, Mid also Sierra TaSra X. H.3.2. 1». See
S!07S a.

961. Pindaric Conttruetion. A maacnltne or feminine pinral sahject occa-
sionally is lined witli ivri, l)y, 7(7nTai, aa : tan tal it rah IXXaii rdXwiv ipx""^
ri «al i^ittt there are in tin other cities too rulers and populace P. R.402 e. 'i'he
verh uaiially precedes, and the Bubject Is Btill undetermined ; hence the plural
Is added as an aftertboughL (Cp. Shakesp, " far behind his wortti | romex all
Che praises.") In Greek poetry this construction Is rarely used with other verbs.
On fortr oT, see 21J1S.

a- 9' was originally pluni (4M e. D), and Heems to survive la that lue.

Subject in the Plural, Verb in the Dual

963. A pltiral subject may take a dual verb when the subject is a
pair or two pairs : al, Tinnk Spo^tri^v the span of mares ran <!' 392.

a. This is common when S6e, i/i^u, du^ipw are used with a plaral subject:
tie iriptt xpiMrt\Mm 'A^tSi JicXry''^* m4 tdu» iidxtr tvn men eotning to Aeiit
urged him not to fight T. h. R9. But even witli these words the plaral is pre-
ferred. The neuter plural with S6o rarely takes the dual verb (F. Tim. Me).

WITH TWO OR MORE SUBJECTS

963. (I) When the subjects are different individuals or things and
stand in the third person

964. With two mbjeots In the tinKular, the verb may be dual or plnntl :

CritUu and Alcibiadft were able to keep control of their i^petitea by tht hrlp

m] CONCORD OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE 265

o/Uiexantpt« X. H. 1.2.24, Ed^/t^Jav mI Zo^cX^f d^j;iwKii h Kipnpar irrpi-
TMwar on their am'cal fn Coregra Enrjimedon and Sophoclee proceeded to make
m aUaek T. i. 46.

965. In Homer the verb maj intervene between the Bubjecta (Alemaitte
Conttrvetian') : tit 'Kxiporra Hvpi<ti\eyiSar rt fifetinr Kiiidrtit Tt PgriphUnetium
and Cocftiu fime into Acheron t 613.

966. The verb may agree nlth the ueaieat or most important of tiro or more
mbjecta. The verb may be placed

a. Before both SUbjecta ; i|jc( ^r h Gtpnyipat cot i 'EfiixHrrDi di Aiafitr rol
V«w''iM< Thertagorat and Execeetua came to Letbot and aettled there I). 28. 143.

b. After the first subject : S tc noXi/iapxot ^h mi 'A>ti)iarrtt Hoi Nijn)jnrat
nl £XAm Ttx/t Jt32«inarehu( eanM and Adimantua and NiceratUM and certain
oOurt F. R. 32T b, ^\X*at ^x"' "^ '^ "^ '^V Fhaliniu and hit eompanionM
iqiaHed X.A.2. 2. 1.

C. After both subjects : ri PoiAivriipuiw col i S^im wapaparai the tenate and

the pMpIe are ditregarded Aea. 3. 260. (Cp. Sb&keap. " my miatrew and har
liMeT Bt^a.")

967. (11) With Beveral subjects referring to different perBons the
verb is in tne plural ; in the Jiral person, if one of the subjects is first
person; in the second person, if the snbiecta are second aud third
person : ifuii Si xoi iyui toSc Aryoficr but you and I nay this P. L. 661 b,
iffuTt au. oiS( ovK oAAi^r Bji rivn huvaXfLiSa. ifSijv jljkiv we and Ihese men
could not sing any other song 666 d, ov tni pivos ovSi ot trot ^'\oi irpaiTM
Tavnir S6(av iir^tri not you alone nor your friends are the fir A who have
held this opinion 888 b.

968. But (he verb may be singular if It refers to the nearer or more tanportaitt
or more emphatic subject ; wiptifu xaHyi nal that ^pvtl^Kot tal IlaXviiiidT'/li Ian
praent and lo are Phri/niacut here and Polyeratei X. A. 7. 2. 29.

969. The verb may agree in person with the nearer or more important snb-
Ject: rirtyifi'KKkiiriltaHiiitit foryoiiareaOreekandsoareuie X. A.2, 1. 16.

970. With subjects connected by the disjunctives v or, ^ — j eiAer — or,
»T« — »6r< neither — nor, the verb agrees In number with the nearer subject
when each subject is taken by itself : alrt ab otrr ir iXKn sMeli JAhit' irrurtit
atither jrou nor anybody else could reply X. M. 4. 4. 7.

971. When the subjects are taken together, the plural occurs : a Aq/w^<3r i
BimwtII^ fxowi tS» ^^r vhat Demophon or Therippides have o/ my property
D. ST. 12. This is unosual.

973. When q than unites two rabjects, If the verb follows j, it agrees with

the second aubject; rtxn <U1 pikTun i V)fuTt 4fii3r airur hifuWfuea /orfun«

aluagatakubetttrcaTeofusthantBtdo o/ouraeives D.4.12.

CONCORD OF PKBDICATB SUBSTANTIVES
973. A predicate substantive agrees with ita subject in case:
tLXriaStp fyr arper^yoi MUtiades too* a general.

263 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [974

974. A predicate substantive ma; agree in gender and Dumber
with its subject ; but this is often impossible: ry^ii r ji Cfirw irpllyfuira
the affdira of mortals are chance Trag. fiag. p. 782, «vit' ^ 'Akiiavipos
Alexander was everything J). 23. 120.

975. A predicate substantive or adjective agrees with the sabject of tbe
gOTemlng verb when the subject of the inSnitlva la omitted because tt is tbe
same as that of the governing verb (837): nix 4;kiXo7tJom AcXirrai Ifictir 1 ghall
not admit that I Aove come uninvited P. S. 1T< d, ttwtp dfuO^ur A(Mcp« elm if
indeed ue claim to be free X. C. 6. 1. 4.

On the agreement of demonatratiTO and relative pronouns with a
predicate substantive, see 1239, 2602 e.

APPOSITION

9TS. Concord. — An appositive (916) agrees in case with the word
it describes ; koAoki, Smvij 6r)p(if no* luylarg p\a0v to a flaUerer, a ler-
rt&te beast aiid a very great source of injury P. Phae. 240 b. An
appositive also agrees in case with. the pronoun contained in a verb:

TaAtfv/3ios, rjKia, Aavaihay {nrnpir^ I, TaUhybius, have COTM, tM Sei-VClnl

0/ the Danafds E. Hec. 503. (Jp. 942.

977. An appositive to a poBWssive pronoun stands In the genitive, in
agreement with the personal prononn implied in the possessive : ri* tpir
(— iltoB') rsS raXaiTiipav ffUt the life of me, weteh^d one Ar. Pint. 88, t* i/ti-
T(/i' (= tfiflr) atrdf niuiiaSt you toUI regain your own Dr4.7. Cp. 1200. S.b,
130S.2.b.

978. An ^>posttlve Id the genitive may follow an adjective equivalent to a
genitive: 'A^nut (_=' kSTirui) flv, riXcui t^i luylrrift being an Athenian, a
eittMen oj the greaUtt city P. A. 26 d.

979. Agreement in number between the appositive and its noan is unneces-
sary and oft«n impossible 1 B^^u, riXii irrvytlTur Thebea, a neighboHriag city
Aes. 8. 138. So with lUpa In poetry : -fd/ioi, xpo'^'' 'AfipeStrqt tOpa, auariaj/e,
tifl of golden Aphrodite Theognis 1203.

980. An appositive to two Hubstantives la dual or plural : Sifpai col ^ipot,
li4ptM i<iiifio6\ii) daring and fear, bno unintelligent eountellort P. Tim. 99d, urwat
vAivt T(, xipiai rvfttitirai tleep and toil, eupreme eonepiraton A. Eum. 127.

9SL Pirtitive Apposition (irx^fta Kod* Skw ko! /iumc, conatrw4ion of
the whole and part). The parts are represented by the appositives,
which stand in the same case as the whole, which is placed first to
show the subject or object of the sentence : ru o&u, 1) piy ds iiaxapm
I'^crovf , ^ S' lit raprapov two roads, the one to the lalanda of the Steal,
the other to Tartarus P. 0. 524 a {diatributive apposition). The apposi-
tives are generally in the nominative (o fur, ^ «■' ; oi fiAi, at Ss), rarely
in the aoouaative.

iv,Goog[c

giq APPOSITION 267

1. 11w whole tOKJ stand In the singular : Xiytrat if'ix^ 4 t>^' '""t (x*"> 4
KlfMar; tBith regari to the $oitl, it One laid to have iatelltgenet, tht Other fottft
P.PtLgSb.

902. To the wotd denotdng the whole the appositive may be a
collective singular (atfjunclive apposition) r oEtm /tJr iEUot SXXa. Xiyti
theie toy, aome one thing, some another X. A.2. 1. 16(cp. ^pwrov 8< dXXoc

oUo P. Charm. 153 C), ot trrpaTijyoi ^paviayi tKoOTiK liirtAoyiftraro eOcA

0/ fhe generals defend&l himself b)-iefly X. H. 1. 7. 5. Cp. 952.

963. The apposiUon may be limited to one or more parts : n<\twwriiviM at
gj (iinuxx fi ii« M^n tum-lhtrde of the Petoponneeians and the alliet T. 9. 47.
Often with participles : («1 'AP^mmi} iyfiii4reitr»r jtai reCSt taS fraut, ^dffnorro
W T^tv^iiTi^ vdXu jiitffAu lAe ^tAtnldiu befAouiiAl tKemeelvee ofthie verse tOO,
U( old m«n saving Mat 11 had been uttered long before T. 2. 54.

9H. In pardtive'apposltion emphasis is laid on the mhale, which is slated
*t once M the subject or object of the sentence. In tlie genitive ot the divided
«liole(lS00)emphau8is1aldon the parts; thus, TwrTi\(uraI /i^rTupamCrroi, oJ
N litfiMpartOrru, »l H ipioTOKpartirriu of etatet tome are deipotic, other* demo-
craHC, othert arMoeratte P. R. SS8 d.

965. Cooabiictlon of the Whole and Fart In Foetrr. — In Homar and
later poeta a verb may take two objects, one denoting tbe person, the other the
pan especially aSected by the action ; rir t' Ao^t rXljt' aix^ia him he »mote
(■ Ihe neck vilth hU saord A 240, ^ at rUat rl^<i the v/ill math thv feet r 856.
Bm the accusative at the pan, often explained as an appositive, was an external
object (1654 b) that became an accusative ot respect (1801 a). Ta'AxouS"'!' f^a
*tht tiifieX iKiarif ixpSl^ and i?ieeet mightj/ etrength In (A« Aearl of each of the
AAatani A 11, hdory is a partitive i^jpoBitive, co/ifltl 1" l<x^ dative and gram-
BuUcally independent of 'Ax<ua£rti'. The construction is very lare in prose :
lA ilfrtr aAr&t iptri) w»faye»aiiilni raXt ^uxotf if virtue it imparted in the touU
of their ton* P. I^h. 190 b.

98L AttributlTe AppMiOan. — A substantive may be used aa ac
attributive to another substantive. This is common with substan-
tives denoting occupation, condition, or age (usually with iv^p, 3y6pi»-
»ot,yOT^; iriip ^wp a pidilic speaker, Syriprvpawos a(Uspot,xptaPvnu
ir$ptwn old men, ypav; yvirq an oid woman. So also weAratmu ^p^Ktt
Thracian targeteen X. A. 1. 2. 9, SXtSpot iSaKt&iiiv a scoundrel of a Mace-
donian D. 9. 31, *EXA^ (far 'EAAiji'tKot), as oi *EAAi}Mt reXrairrai the
Qrrek targeteera X. A. 6. 5. 26.

•■ In standard proee 'EXX^r is need as an adjective only of persons (In poetry
also of things).

b. The addition of Mip often implies raspeoti iripet rrpari^ui fellow tot-
dlert X.A. 1. S. 8, J irtptt StmrToi Jurymen, gentlemen of the jury D. 27. 1.
(Cp. ^bemcM.) Tlie addition of ittpvwot often implies contempt : intpuwot 7ifi
• i*nltni/ faiow Am. 8. IM.

c Hanj of the mbetantlTes thai qnallfled by an attributive subatanUve were
Mi^inaUr pattioiplea, as yipur irip an old man P. hja. 3S8 b.

268 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [987

967. Descriptive Apposition. — Here the appositire describes some-
thing definite that has just been mentioned: ^ ^fixripa. s^!Xis, ^ K<xr4
ta-fa^vvri tSiv 'BAAnvuf our city, the common refuge of the Greeks Aes.
3.134.

98a ExpUiutory Appoaititm. — Here the appoaitive explains a
general or vague statement : tovtov ri/iipM, ly wpvravtitf oir^fftav I
propose this aa the peaalti/, mainleiMnce in the Pryianeum P. A. 37 a,
/uyivrav kokov iiraAAu-^, irov^pid^ delicerance from the greatest of evils,
vice P. G. 478 d. So in geographical statemente : Kiivpov utavt . . . i%
Haipoi/ she came to Cyprus, to F^phoa 6 362 ; cp. k imtpuis, Bouw to the
territory of llie Dorians in which Boeum lies X. 1- 107.

989. In Homer the Hubaumtivail article at the beginning of & gentenCQ mHJ
be followed by nn appoaitive noun at or near the end 1 4 V Hkovii i/ia rouri yvrii
titr but ghe, the vioman, w.nt unrnillingly with them A 348.

990. Toih-a, aih-i roth-o, a^i, iKtiro ofUu introdocB emphitUcaUy a followbig
■ubstantive (or tin equivalent, 008): ittini ttpSalrtir iV7(iTiii, tI)* ^Sontr this
(fi»me\y) pleasure U regarda as gain P.R.eOCb. Cp. 1248.

991. Appoiitlon to ■ Sentence. — A noun in the nominatiTe or
accusative may stand in appositioD to the action expressed by a
vhole sentence or by some part of it.

>. The ftpposittve is nominative when a nnmtnative precedes: iiMvar- Uar^
rpt^taaa I vat tipsy, a mffleient exe.use Philemon (Com. frag. 2. 6.31).

b. The appositive Is accusative, and states a reason, result, intention, effect,
or the like : fibfitt diri wipyev, Xirfpir SXtSpar AoUl hurl thee from the boUIe-
menl, a grieuous death 0 T35, 'EXir^i m-inifitt, Ho^Xev Mr^* rixptt
let us slay Helen and thus ca^use a sore grief to Heiietaut K. Or. 1 105, tMoifw-
rg(T|i, luvSir iitlarwr \iyar blest be thou — a return fur thg most loelcome lidtngs
E. El. 231.

N. — The appodtive accusative is often co^ate (1503 f.): ipit BdpvrWi,
dtXTTOf Ihtx* thott beholdest Eurystluus, an unexpected sight E. Heiacl. 930.

992. An effect or result may be denoted by an appositivs in other cases:
twiftSr rpoaitirBal fioi lout /lifun fri Tirdy me need, il seems. Some further teonls
to act ^ a spell P. L. 903 b,

993. From the construction In 691 b arose many adverbial accnsativfs
(1606 S.) such AS x^P"" on account of, rp6<liaair (11 pretence, iwpedr gratis; ta
St rit St Tpiiwr iwl nfiwl tpfyaiTo . , . x^P" 'Efropot ahorver of the TrujaM
ntshtd at the tAfp* as a favour to Hector {for Hector's take) 0 744.

994. Manv neuter words are used in apposition to a sentence or
clause, which they usually precede. Such are ifi^ortpov, ifi^oryta
both, TO Scti'oraTov the most dreadful thing, Svoiv $&.Tipov or O&Ttpa. one
or the other, to ivavriav the contrary, to kc^oAjuov th£ ctiief point, to Xtyo-
ixtvov as the saying is, oiScrtpor neither thing, o^futov hi sign, ruc^^piof
St evidence, to nAnmuw the last thing, to r^ wap<niuat as the proverb

m] PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF NUMBER 269

r«iit, auTo rmro this very thing, nifn-a rovro this same, thing. Thus,

Tim alii^ortpa Tavra, Koi ctHvus r^ iroXu fccu TrkoiKTunit tkose V>ho QVe both
logal to the Utate and rich U. 18. 171, drctv on Sti Svoiy Sartpov, ^ Kiivovt
it OXiMy fi^ autdy 17 avrov iy iioKiSoyi^ he said that one of tioo things
was necessary — either that they should not live at Olynthus or lie him-
lelf in Macedon 9. 11, to Sc (liyurrov, iroAc/uw ivr tlprprrji ^ovrif and
tcW i> tcorat of all, liaving tear instead of peace T. 2. 65, AXX' 1;, ri
Xtyofurmi, Karony iofiT^ ^ko/uv ; but have we come ' q/ter a feast ' as the
saging is f V. G. 447 a, toSto avro to toS 'Oiijjpov in these very words of
Homer P. A. 34 d.

993. Very commnn are Introductory relative clanaes forming a nomlnatiTe
predicate ol the sentence that follows : i St rirrtir tariraTer but what is moM
(emWg o/all L. 30. 29. irrl la regnUrly omitted (944). Such relative clauses are
loUowed by an independent sentence, a clause wllli STt,bj trt -yip, trar, Srar-Ydp,
ri. Similarly t4 8" ((Txaror irdrr«», Sti but what U WOTtt o/ all P.Ph.66d,e(c

PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF NUMBER

996. CollectiTe Slngalar. — A noun in the singular may denote a
number of persons or things : 6 M^Sck the Medes T. 1. 69, to 'EKk-qyiKov
the Greeks 1. 1, to fiappaftiKov the barbarians 7. 29, ^ TcXlvOtn tlie bricks
3. 20, rrrov ly(ti> tts )(iX!av I have abntU a lliottsand horse X. C. 4. 6. 2,
fiiip^ dmris ten. tltousand heavy armed X. A. 1.7. 10. On the plural
verb with collectives, see 950. Cp. 1024, 1044.

a. So trith the neuter participle : tA iMxi/urar almost = ol paxliiwoi the <^)m-
hntanu T. 4. 00.

b. The name of a nation with the article may denote one peraon as the
npreaenUtive (King, etc.) of a class : i ULaxtiiir the Macedonian (Philip) D. 7.6.

997. The inhabitants of a place may tie implied in the name o( the place :
AirflM ir^rrif poiAifSirra laU rpi rsO wo\4iiav Lesboi revolted, hating wished to
do $0 even before the oar T. S. 2.

990. IHstrflmtiTG Singular. — The singular of abstract nouns may
be used distributively (rarely with concrete substantives) ; Suot Sikouk
i-fiyoyro iv ru tavriy ^up all who proved themselves jjist in their lives
P.A41a,Sia'4<M>oi t5v rpoirov different 'n charat^er T. 8.96. The dis-
tributive plural (10fl4) is more common than the distributive singular :
cp. ytayiu rat o^ivk youtJis in appearance L. 10. 29 with ^ScTs t^v oipty
jieasing in appearance V. R. 452 b.

999. Dual. — The dual is chiefly employed o( two pemons or things which,
by nature or asaociation, (onn a pair ; i^6a.\iiii the eyes (both eyes), x*'P* the
Anniif, Ittw a span of homes. Tbe addition of d/^w both indicates tjiat the two
Ihin^ belong together ; ifio emptiiisizes the immber. Both i/t^ and ii!o were
earlji used with the plural. The dual died out in the living speech of Attica by
300 B.C. Aeolic has nn dual, and Ionic lo«t it very early. In Horn, the dual li
used freely, and oft«n In conjunction with tbe plural.

270 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [laoo

lOOa Ploral. — The plaial of proper names, of materiaUi, and of
abetracta is ased to denote a olaas, (1) of proper names : 9na^ taM
like Theaewi P. Th. 169 b. (2) of nuilerialt : here the plural denotes
the parts, the different kinds of a thing, a mass, etc. : to^ boa Hdt
3. 78, Tcvpoi, KplSai wheat, barley X. A. 4. 5. 26, dm vrinet 4. 4. 9, Kpia
meat Ar. Ran. 663 {xpais piece of meat), ^kun hot days T. 7. 87,
6Ua timber T.7.25. (3) of abstracts: here the plural refera to the
single kinds, cases, occasions, manifestations of the idea exprefised
1:^ the abstract substantive ; or is referred to several persons :

rai/uxrwai misunderttandings X. K. 2. 6. 6, OaXrq degrees of heat
M. 1. 4. 13. Used in the plural, abstract nouns may become con-
crete, as Ta^' funeral T. 2. 34 (ra^^ sepulture), (v^pocnvtu g<ood cheer
X. C, 7. 2. 28 (ew-^pocnJn) wiirfA), ^apiTtt proofs of good toiU, preaentt
D. 8. 63, (iJFouu cnaes o/ benevolence, presenis D. 8. 26.

a. Hao; concrete sabstaQtlvea are commonly UMd only In the plnral:
WXiu gate, Sipat door, ri, 'OMnria (Ae Olympic /etttval; and tn poetry tiifwert
Aouw, (M^ani ladder, Mm-pa bed; cp. 1006.

b. The plutaJ, especially in poeliy, ma; coireapond to the Engliah indeflnite
sing;ulari tirl ravsl by ihip.

1001. In Homer the plural denotes the variouH tnrma In which a quality U
manifsated : Ttmiiiwai the artt of the carpenter 1 2B0. In poetry, often of feel-
ings, emotiona, etc. : /larlai (attacks of) madneei A. Pr. 879.

1002. iMtiitt (jutSirtt) denotes clasaes of men, states, nations (D. 6. IS).

1003. The neuter plural is often used even in reference to a single
idea or thought in order to represent it in its entirety or in its de-
tails, as T& i\ti6!i the truth. This is very common vritn neuter pro-
nouns: i}(€ipot^iiow Si' ravm yip ^rurrdti-riv but I waved my arms,
for I knew how to do this X. S. 2. 19, St^ rax<a>v quickly P. A. 32 d.

«. Thucjdldea ia fond of the neuter plural of verbal adjectives naed im-
petsonall; : ^ir^fimrrB ro^tiarria ilwai they voted that H tool n«eeMarit to vuke
tear T. 1. 88, iMwara. fr it was impo$atble 4. 1. Cp. 1062.

loot. Dlatributlve PlnnQ. — Abstract substantives are often used
distributively in the plural : o-Iyu rw rcon-uw wapi wpetrfivripaif
the thence of the younger men tn the preaenee of Uteir elders P. B. 426 a

1009. Names of towns and parts of the body are sometimes plural :
'hS^vax Atfiens, B^^ Thebes, vtt/^ and oruitn breosA (chiefly poetic).
The name of the inhabitants is often used for the name <^ a city :
AcA^' D. 5. 26.

1006. Floral of Majesty (poetic). — The plural may be used to lend
dignity: dpavt*. throne S. Ant. 1041, aic^Trrpa. scepter A. Ag. 1266, fia/iara
dwelling t6; mu&ra favourite in prose (only in the plural form).

lOOT. Here belongs the allusive plural by which one person is
alluded to in the plural number : SoramW OayaToun by the death of

■ois] PBCULIABrriES IN THE USE OF NUMBER GENDER 2T1

our lord A. Gh. B2, nStwn rpis rwv ^tXraruv 7 (ClTtaemnestca) Ka»-
ing ntffered at the haada of lay dearett onea (Oreates) A. Eum. 100.

lOOa Pbml of Modesty. — A speaker in referring to himaelf may
UBS the first person plnial as a modest form of statement. Id
prose, of an author : tyyoid voff ^tiiy iyhtro the reflection once occurred
to me X. C. 1. 1. 1. In tragedy, often with interchange of plural and
aiagular : cl mtkuofiarfia fii) iiaBtlv a, jSouXo^uu if J (Oreusa) am pr^
MHted from teaming what I wish E. Ion 391, Ucrevofwr ifu^ irii*
yotuiSa . . . arpatneiTyatr I entreat thee, aa I graxp &y beard E. H. F.
1206. See 1009.

1009. In tragedy, if a voman, speaking of herself, uses the plural
rerb (1008), an adjective or participle, in agreement with the subject,

is feminine singular or masculine plural; ^un- fiaprop6tuif$a, Spiov .
a Spov oi /SouXopu I call the sun to wit-aeM, that I am acting againtt
my mli E H. F. 868, ipxtSfuv ^/uU ol wpoOy^irKorrt^ vJfitr U i* enough
Oiat I (Alcestis) die t'n thy stead E. Ale 383.

1010. *lri, ^ipt, iyt ma^ Iw need as stereotyped formulas, without regard
to lb« number of persona addressed : ttwi iim, iJ 'Ztinparit rt nU t^tt ol IXXm
idlmt, Soerau* and Iht rat of you F. £u.2BSb.

1011. One peiaon may be addressed aa the representative of two or more wbo
tn pTcsoDt, or of bis family : 'irrlne, oS rut icrt* . . . /laff' tiiur Soiwrfat
AnUnout, itistnno uitt pouibU to /east iallh j/oa fi SIO, w rinor. If ripwrtf ;
Mf ehadrt», are ye here t S. 0. C. 1103. So in draoiatio poetry, tfae coiyphaeDS
■uy be rc^farded as the representMlTe of the whole chorus, as w {Aw, i>4
■ Mn rlt (JM> Urttngen (addressed to the whole choms) do not ask (the sln-
gulac of the coryphaeus) t»e who lam 8. 0. C. 207.

1012. Greek writers often shift from a particular t« a general statement and
itee ttraa, thus permltUog a free transition from singular to plural, and from
ploial to singular] aUi rirt cvyx"^* ^ riptnos- iwStnr/pBii yifi aftri rararo-
rifa sirals ainrrai x^Ait Rol even then does the degpot rejoice with the rest ; for
Ounors theyartinwa»t, the more submissive he thinks to find them X. Hi. 5.4,

PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF QENDER

1013. Crastnctian according to the Sense (026 a). —The real, not Uie
gmnmatical, gender often determines the agreement: u ^JXrar', w rtfiiasi
Tiintltli Tixmit O dearest, O grfatlg honoured child E. Tro. 735 (tliis use of the
■tlributiTe adjective is poetical), ri /itipiKia rpii dX\i}Xoui JiaXryjfient the touths
coiztrtlnjf with one another P. Lach. 180e, raSr' tXtyir i Aroii^i wni n^aX4t
V{fXi|Xi>«^ this AaiKeless filltyw spoke thus when he eaToe out D. 21. 117.

1014. So In perlphtases^ a Tti\tiiAx'>» f* rar/pa Itiir mightf lelemaekus,
Ifasinff at Us foAer r 476, ri W rSr rptrpirrfyar iltO' • • • x'ip"^" ^fl tsslmr
roiJif ne the elders delighting tn their ^ort P. L. 667 d.

1015. Hie masculine is used for person In general : eit dr^ftroi rlrratrsf
tMsm, atn 'x<"v' ^^ riitra unft^fful herself, she %fiU not endure that others

1= Coo^^lc

272 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [loiA

bear cAOdren E. Aud. 712, irirapot ir g (SiXrlu^ tiff i in)p rfT 4 Tvn) wAfel
«Mr 0/ lAt two it superior, lehether (Ae man or the vomaa X.0. 7.27. So «l
70M^ pareaU, ol s-oite ^ilJren. See 10&5.

See also 1009, 1060.

PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF PERSON

iGLd. T(f or irSf may be used in the drama with the second per-
son of the imperative : Itv tk, dtrdyvcAAi yo, one of you, amiOnitce
E.Bacch.l73.

100.7. The second person singular is used to designate an imagi-
nary person, as in proverbs : ^x^ imiuXmi rqt o-cavrou core for tky.
own »ovl Men. Sent. 551, and in such phrases as tIScs iv you tootdd
have seen (1784 a), ityrjmuo Sv you might think, as credideris (18^).

t. Hdt. OBes the Kcand person In directions to travellers (2, 30).

See also 942.

ADJECTIVES

ICOB. Adjectives modify substantives (inclnding words need suh-
Btantively, d08), and substantive pronouns. Adjectives are either
attra>utive (912) or predicate (910).

1019. The eqaivftlents of an adjective are : a participle (ol rapiwra rgXiru
the tUiiem ako are present); a noun In appoHition (A^fiwrMnrf i fr^up Demot-
thene* the orator, i.e. not AtiimaSir^j i irrf»Ttrvii, ifuii nl 'ABifTaiai fou Mhe-
tttaoM) ; an oblique case (ot^swi xpSffoC a croioa of gold, rflt afr$i ymiiuit ty<i
I am tiieminded) ; an obliqae <!aBe with a prepodtlon (oI iw rg 'AvI^ 'JXri the
eU(e* in Alia); an adverb (ol rdXai the anelente). (Furthermore, a cUme In a
coinplez aentenoe : ri rtlxtvm, t 4' nh-Mi, olpabri (A«y captured the forirrts
which HNU there; cp. 2642.)

loao. Concorl — An adjective agrees with its substantive in
gender, number, and case. This holds true also of the article, ad-
jective pronouns, and participles : thus, A. Attributive: & Sucotat ir^
tke jutt man, roS &Mauni dvSpof, ru &kiuu jvSpc, oi itKaun SfSfHii etc.,
Dvroc i iy^fi this ntdn, rovrou rcSi AvipOi, etc., ^ ^tAoura tfvyiinjp the
loving daughter. B. iVedicoCe.' mAos o dywv the ;)riz« ia glorious,
ravr iorly ik^ these things are true, al ipumi Soxmiaju. cfrai ^uruc
t?te natures whuA seem to be be^ X. M. 4. 1. 3.

On the f^reement of demonstrative pronouns used adjectively with
a predicate substantive, see 1239. For relative pronouns, see 2601.

ArrBIBtJTIVE ADJECTIVES
ADJECTIVSa UBBD SUBSTANTtVBLY

lOU. An attributive adjective (or participle) generallv with tlie
article, often dispenses with its substantive, and thus itself acquins
the value of a sumtantive.

iv,Goog[c

io»7l ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES 27S

a- Thia occurs wbeii Uie aubstantlve may be supplisd from the context ;
wtien It is a general notion ; or when it Ib omitt.ed In common expressions of ft
detinite characlfr, when the ellipela [^ consdouB.

1022. Maacaline or feminine, when the substantive is a person ; i Ilnut the
juM man, Siicaiot a juKt man, ol 'A^qKiut the Aiheniant, ol roXXol the ntanp,
the rabble, ol iXlym the oligarchical party, tl ^vU^roi all vsho will, i) jcoXi} the
brauli/ul teomaa, 4 rtniva (A«>»v(Aer (poet., R. Ale. 1<)7), iicK\tiaiAlevf<u jeomen
in OMeiitbly.

1023. Neuter, when the sabBtantive idea Ib thing fn general : ri iyae6r the
(highest) iTooff 1'. R.50«b (but rd iyaSd good thing* L. 12.33), ri <lXq«/i truth
P. G. 47.'! b, tA i[«i4f the commonweallh Ant. 8. p. 3, rb ia6itmy the fatvrt Am.
3. IG6, ri \tyiiunr aa the aaying it T. T. 68, d^t /iicar iiittpft about mid-daf
X. A.l. 4. 1, iwlraUovera mide apace T. 1.18.

1024. In wonta denoting a. collection (096) of peraons or facta : ri inr-iKoer
the eabjeeU T.6.«D, t4 pa/>papix6t the barbarian force X.A. 1.2. 1, t4 iumui-
XUiAr the allied forces T.i. TT (and many words In -k6b), tA 'EXXijnni Greek
history T. I. tIT ; and in worila denoting /eativals (rd 'OXii/iTia (Ae Olympian
Samea X. El. 7. 4. 2B).

1025. With participles, especiailr la Thucydldee : ri dpyi^/um r^t ipy^t
thrir angry feeling* T.:!. SO, r^t iriXtwi ri rt^^Mr the dignity of the State 2.68.
The action of tlie verb is here represented as taking place under particular
drciuDstances or at a particular time. These partici|d«e aro not dead abatrao-
tiuiis, but abstract qualities in action.

1026. A substantivized atljeotive may appear in the neuter plural
as well as in the ueuter singular: ra Si^w toC Ktpdrot the right of the
mug X, A. 1. 8. 4, r^ SiXafiTvos to voXXa the greater part of Salamia
T. 2. 94, iwi xXfioToi- ArOpiawtav to the greatest part of ma-nkind 1. 1,
h roCro Sucmixuit to tliis degree of misfoHun^ 7. 86 (cp. 1325).

s. On the construction of r^t 7qt 4 'oU^ the greater part of the land T.
2.50, see 1313.

1027. In common expressions a definite noun is often implied
(.such as ^iiipa daij, o8o$ may, )(tip hand).

A. Masculine : icdXvDt gulf, & 'linim the Ionian gulf T. 6. 34, arpardt force,
i »j4t the land force 1. 47

b. Feminine : -yfj loitd (x*** country) — iri rgt iaurHtflrom their own country
T. I.Io; Quf 4 'EA\iu oiie" ii pipfiapoi neither Greece nor barbaric land D.9. 27;
■f*A|U| judgnenl : card t)|v ^fiifr according to my opinion Ar. Eccl. I&3, it r^i
RJiiitfilt according to the prevailinf opinion X.A. 0. 1. 18; 6Cki| luit: ip^uiiir Karii-
yopoSrrts bringing an ncciiaation tn a caae where there it no defence P.A.lSc;
i||i^ d(ty : riir iartfalir the next day X. C. 1.2. 11, rg rpartpaif the day before
L 18.22; ajpot wing: tIi eiimv^t the lowing T. 4. 96 ; ^tpit part: tUarii
a nnratieth 6. 5* ; t>otpa portion : 4 -rt-rpaiUn, (1. 10. 81) or 4 AiiapiJrtt (D. 18.206)
the allotted portion, detliny ; raO* ahip : 4 rpi^piit the ship with three t>anki of
onrt; Hit way: tUtl^ by Ike ttraighl load P.L. 710ft, r^* roxltfrv by the

274 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [loil

aAofteit w^ Z. A. 1. 3. 14 ; t^*i| art : /utvuij the art of mutte P. L. OSS k :
Xf(p hand: ir ttii* on the Tight luud X. A. 1, 5. 1, ii ipirrifAt on the left
1. 8. 3) +<|^ oole; T^r itarrlir SUlf iOtro he voted in oppoiition to tlitiiu
F.Lacli.l84d.

1028. The oonwzt oftan detennlnes the Hubstimtive to be supplied : nv-
rat iiritpaior bt iySyit (rXry'i) ralniir (Asy thouted, tAof he had dealt him
(too, lOeS) /eur blows X. A. 6. 8. 12, rplt riXawra cal x^iii {tpaxM*} tkne

talent* an4 a (Aoutund drachmas D. 27. 84; cp. a dollar and ttoenCy (ceata).
Cp. 1572,

1029. From such substantivized adjectires arose manj preposi-
tional and adverbial expressions of wliose source the Greeks them-
selves had probably lost sight. Many of these seem to be analt^es
of phrases once containing 48os : t^i- oXXok yjnjtftittu^t you vote to no
purpose D. 19. 181 (i.e. the toay leading eUewliere than the goalj,
ira T^ tfrnrifi al the very beginning T. 7. 43, 4™ T7S Unjv on on
equtUity 1. 15, ii itttyrim from an <q^x>site diredioti, facing 7. 44.

AOBEBUENT OF ATTBIBDTIVE ADJECTIVES

1030. An attributive adjective belonging to more than one sub-
stantive agrees with the nearest : r6v kojU)' itdyafav ^S^ Kot yvnum
ei&uuova etvai ^iffu the perfect man and woman are happy I maintain
P. G. 470e. In some cases it is repeated with each substantive
(often for emphasis) : tv aiofi.' i)^av koI ijiuxh" f*"' having one body and
one aout D. 19. 227.

1031. But occasionally the adjective agrees with the more Important mibetan-

tlve : i ely>Mi Sinrtu iwri 6^\ait cnl it/utt^Xior 'irrmtit the aiffluM U word

Mwn and a half AttU obolt X. A. 1. G. 6.

1033. Of two adjectives with one substantive, one may stand in
closer relation to the substantive, while the other qualifies the ex-
pression thus formed : roAtt ipvhV f^r^'? ^ large deaerted-eity X. A.
1.6.4.

1033. If one substantive has several attributive adjectives, these
are sometimes added without a conjunction (by Asyndeton) : xpii
ipraa, ipi^aa, ypipva flesh of lambs, kids, sioine JC. A. 4. S. 31. This
is commoner in poetry, especially when the adjectives are descrip-
tive : lyxpi fipl$ii luya. tmPapor a spear heavy, huge, stoiU H 141,

1034. Two adjectives joined by nm' may form one combined notion
in English, which omits the conjunction. .So often with n>\ut to
emphasize the idea of plurality : ■xaXXa Kiya$d many blessings X. A.
fi. 6. 4, voXAA KOI Suva many dTeadfiU mifferings D. 37. 57.

a. iraUt •clyneit means an arCHoerat (In the political aense), or b naed ol I
a perfaet qm^itt or action na Uta moral wuw) aa T. 4. 40, F. A. 21 d.

I

■o+i] PEEDICATE ADJECTIVES 275

1035. An attributive sdjecUve is ofteo used ia poetry instead of the attribn*
liMgeniUTo: pitt'SpiKXr^ti B668 the might of Heracle* {cp. "aNioboandangli-
tn" Tenn;Bon); rarely in prow : toto^, «0>wi r\t8piajoi a river, aplethron in
icUUh X. A. 4. It. 4.

1036. An attributive adjective belonging iogicaliy to a dependent genitive is
ollen ased in poetry witb a governing substantive : reiini AripQr {drat|tar kindred
ttrife 0/ men S. A. "IW (for atnfe of kindred men), Karely in proae In the caee
of tlie poHseesive pronoun : it r^i liitrtpf iaBtnZ r^t yiiofi in the vieakneit of
lOKT pHrpose T.2.S1.

1037. An attributive adjective ma; diapenee with its substantive wlien that
rahsiantivB is expreased in the conleit : iirrix't ""flt nXM^Ti)! (t/x'v) rSr
TiKfi. Ae thire* in the fairest of the arU F. Q. 448 c.

1038. A substantivized participle may take the genitive rather than the case
proper to the verb whence it is derived : fiatriMm rpev-iimrrit relatione of the
ki»f T. 1. 128 ; conlraat HtptrX^t i i/ui rpoB^tuw Perieleemy relation X, H. 1. 7. 21.

1039. Adjectives used substantively may take an sttributiTe : ol
ifUitpn Sw/uyctE youT enemies X. H. 5, 2. 33.

PREDICATE ADJECTIVES

UMO; The predicate adjective ia employed

1. With intranaitive verbs signifying to be, become, and the like (917): ^ H
X^i llirXof yt-riiniTai the favour hae been concealed Aee.3.233. So with
•ctlve verba which take a preposition ; Mfioui tBt^et hr' <tSi(Xo« rott UunfffoMri
touhate enacted latex viith regard to offe.nAere who are unknoxen D. 21.30.

b. With transitive vertw: (1) to qualify the object of the verb directly and
immediately : rn^t taKoit xPV"^' Hf^r<" to judge bad men good S. 0. T.009,
(S) to eipnaa the result of the action (the proieptic use, 1&79). So with aCfnr
Unw, elpiir raite with itiyai great, /leritipot on high, ^^XAi high, iiaxpii large.

1041. With verba of taying and thinking the predicate adjective is usually
eonDected with Its noun by tlrai, with veT\ia of pereeiting,sho-iaing, by &r (2106):
Mim yip aliuu Scuiiirttr ilnu Kaxir for I think no one of the godi i» bale E. I. T.
391, lifXal fnt^ rj)r iia$^itir aitrar it thovit that the will itfalie D. 46. 34. But
(Iniit sometimes omitted (MG), SBrnyhf xaXat npiieitiiwieit iyattt aiiayjrtiiaa-
iHtforiBe have agreed that all honourable actions are good P. Pr.369e. On the
oaiisslon of &r, see 2117. For dm with verbs of naming and calling, see 1616.

lOU. Several adjectives of time, place, order of tuccesrion, ete., are
lued as predicates where English employ? an adverb or a prepoei-
tiou with its case: lii^KiwKnu rpiToibt they arrive on the third day
X. A. 6. 3. 2, Kari^vw /jKirraim they deiKended in the dark 4. 1. 10. Id
snch cases the adjective is re^rded as a quality of the subject;
whereas an adverb would regard the manner of the action.

a. Time, place * xp^'">t late, Spfptot in the morning, tti/rtpatoi on tAa smomI
dof. rsoTouM how mantdayef Inraiepitt In the open air.

uogic

276 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1043

b. Order 0/ tuceaeion: rpOrat, wphtpot Jlrtt, vvrtpat later, lUvot in tKt
midst, TiXcvrauit last, wrarot last.

N. — When one action is opposed to another in order of sequence, the
ftdverbs rp&Tor, rpirtpoi, varanr, etc., not Che adjectives wpurot, etc., milBt be
osed : TpOror iiir ildxput wokir xp^nr . . ■ tlra Si fXefe Toidic firit he wpl for

a long time, then he xpoke asfolloas X. A. 1. %. 2. Heoce distingoiah
Tpb^st rj tAXk TpDET^jSnXi he was the first to attack (A« dty.
wpi^-g rp tAXii irpofft^a\i the city Was the first place he attacked.

irpCrTay r^ w6\n tpeff/pii\t hit first act was to attack the cit).
The same mie Rpplies In the case of pirut, pinr, m iiirrit Tfjr IrunoMiw f^paf »
this it the only letter I wrote, iiinr tipoj^a riit ixcoToXi)r / only wrote (but did
not send) the letUr. But thka distinction id not Always observed (Aes. 3. 60).

1043. So also with adjectives of degree, mental attitude, manner, etc :
^porrai si XMoi raWtl the Stones are thrown in great numbers X. A. 4. T. T,
Toil rtxpoii fcroffiricJoKt i-*4SiMa.r they restored the dead under a truce T. 1. 63,
ol 8nl tiiurnt Ttiarviivl vt the godt tend yon forth favourably X.C. 1.6.2.
So with x^st high, ia/um gladly, itoiMuit, Utir wUHngly, Span under oaih,
al^ritun tuddenly. On iWm, see 1272.

AGREEMENT OF PBEDICATE ADJECTIVES (AND PARTICIPLES)
WITH OHE SUBJECT

1044. A circumstantial participle (2054) referring to a collectJTe noun (n96)

may be plural ; rd ^Tpdrtiiiui iropl{(ra irfToi> utrTtrrtt roilt jSoSi t^ army pni-
rtded itself with provisiont by killing the cattle X. A. 2, 1, 6. So after oMrit, as
oittti iKM/i'iSTi (= rimi it dYpvri^p i^irar) to6i itroXaXtrrai TirB^Srra tut OJte
slept because they were all bewailing the dead -V. H.2. 2.3. Cp. 950.

1045. A plural participle may be used with a dual verb : tytWaairyir tfi^
fiki^arrti eit iXXifXiiut both looked of each other and bvrtt out laughing
P. Eu. 273 d. A dual participle may be used with a plural verb : roO tot' tri
^pilptBa i where in the world are wet E. 1. T. 777.

1046. A dual subject may be followed by a plural predicate adjective or
participle : il yip Ttt ^a(l) rii rJXci raira rXela-rui ilaSUr alriat ycyir^aSai if
any one should ansert thai these two cities have been the cause of very many
blessings 1. 12. 1.06.

1047. A predicate adjective is neuter singular when the subject is
an infinitive, a sentence, or a general thought: :jSv iroAAouf Ix^pmn
tx'iv; it it pleasant to have many enemies? D. 19. 221, fi^Aov 8" o« tovt'
ttrriv cUijtf^ it is clear tluU these things are true 2. 19.

1048. A predicate adjective referrins; to a masculine or feminine
singular subject is often neuter singular and equivalent to a sub-
stantive. This occurs chiefly in statements of a general txutb,
where the subject refers to a whole cla-sa, not to an individual thing.
Thus, KoXov tlp^ peace is a fine tiling D. 19. 336, shrurrof this woAi-

■os>] AGREEMENT OF PREDICATE ADJECTIVES 277

Titan ^ nipomt dfspotimi is an object of miatnist to free states 1. 5,
futCwToAig ivot iv&pot the State is larger than the individual P. R. 368 6.
So also in the plui-al (1056).

1IM9. So with namM of places : tm Si 4 Xatpiima tcx^'ra* rijt ^wariAt
CharroMa is on the frontier of Boeotia T. 4. 76.

1050. A predicate Biiperlative agrees in gender either with the
subject or (usually) with a dependent eenitive; vmnav ;^aXar<uTaroc
^Oam envy is the most fell of diaeases Men. fr. 53o, fn!fLj9ovAo$ d^n^
XJ7<n/u»raTov droyruiv ruv KTrffiarmv a good cQtinsellor is the mosl useful
of aU possessions 1. 2. 53.

1091. For a predicate adjective used where English hM an adverb, cp, IM2.

1092. A predicate adjective Is often ueed in the neuier plural (eapeclally
with verbal adjectivea in -rdi and -r^oi in Thucydidea and the poets): traBli
hti^ 4r, dnhrre vihen (all) VMU ready, he pnt ovt to sea T, 2. 56, da^rara fr
Tth AaipoAt iiitrtc9a.i it teas impossible Co resist the Locriaas 4. 1, iSiicn ivixm-
nrteilrai they decided to make the attempt 2.3. Cp. 1003 a.

WITH TWO OR MORE 8UBIBCT8

loss. With two or mora substantives a prediciite adjective is plural,
except when it agrees with the nearer subject : ^ojSik koi vojuoe Uok^
(puTu KiaXitiw fear and the law are capable of re^mining love X. C
5. 1. 10, ■KoXkSiv 8t Xoyon' mil 0opvffoii yiyvofiivov there arising mw;h dia-
euititm and confusion D. 3. 4. See 968.

1094. Wilh aubntantlves denoting persona of like ^nder, a predicate adjee-
tlve is of the same gender : 'AydBur ul Zwcpdriri ^nral .^j^alAoit and Soeratei
tnl^ P. a 193c

1055. When the persons are of different gender, the maaculine prevails : wt
wf war4pa rr Ktd lattipa taX A&eK^&j koX r^r invrov yumiita a/;)[/mXi^airf yrytnf'
ti^povi, Uir^n when he saiB that At* fitther and moCkir and brothers and w^e
had been laade prisoners of war, he bw»t into tears X. C. 3. 1. 7.

a. But perHons are Bometlmes regarded as things ; txn airUt taX riKm ad
yvrauat ^pavpo^n Ihane their ehUdren and aivea under guard X. A. 1. 4. 8.

1056. With anbatantives denoting things of like gender a predicate adjective
it of th« same gender and plural. A neuter plarat with the singular verh la
nften preferred: tdyintial rt nl ivniutit ml ri^l S^Xd f«riF iy»Bi trra noble
birth and power and honour are eteartj/ good things P. Eu. 270 b.

1057. When the things are of diRerent gender, a predicate adjective it
neater plural with singular verb : \i9ti rt lal rXlrAii col (6\a lai Ki/miim irdirrm
ippililJra oUIr xri"')'^ iarit stones and hrieii and pieces o/ uiood and tltss
throan together at random are useless X. M. 3. 1. 7.

105B. When the Bubetantives denote both persons and things, a predicate
uljective is — «- plural, and follows the gender of the person, it the person ia
more important, or if the thing is treated as a person ; yp^Jia koI y/pttrM mot

278 STNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1059

tptfiara dXlya lal ^oDt nraXtXaifui/nut old uomcn and Old men and a few tktcp
and oxen that had freen [^ behind X. A. 6. 3. 32, 4 rixn <■•' 4JX(r**t Va' '«»
Iftui KipuH Fortune and Phii^ loeM mael«r> i^tAe giinatUm Aw. 2. 118,

b. or Is neuter plural if the peiBoa is treated like a thing : 4 naXXftrni wMtid
Tf Kot i jrdXXiffroi dr^/i Xotrd ir inur rfij JwAfcti toe sAouU ttiU have to treat 9}
eA« nobteit poli^ and tAe noUest man F. R. GOS a.

lOSd. The verbal and the adjective predicate may agree with the first of mo
subjects aa the more important ; BpiurJfai nal ri tX^Am irl ri lariopa, r^f siXflu
^p<t**To /SouUfuivi nr* An/iat /Xcfv a^T^r UroeidO* toitA (Ae 6uU; <^ hi» troopt
turned to the uf^rpart oft/^ eitf/ loithmg to e<g>lure it compUtelv T. 4. 112.

For further uses of predicate adjectives, see 1160 S., 1168 ff., 2647.

1060. When the subject of the infinitive ia the same aa a genitive
or dative depending on the governing verb, it ia often omitt^

1061. A predicate adjective referring to a genUioe rcfcukirly stands in the
genitive, but a predicate subetantive or participle generally stands in the accusa-
tive in agreement with the unexpressed subject of the infinitive : Kipou MMm
At TpoSSiioTiriiu Tcr/rAu the)/ entrtated Oyna to ahovi himaelj tu zealout ai
pouible X. H. 1. 6. 2, tri rulr itoiUtav /lav rp<wTdTi)i' 7(i^ffAit bj/ those irAo

begged me to become their chi^ X. C. 7. 2. 23, ifaimi u/ii3r fBtXijcal uov daoCriL.,
itraXiryiiti^Hiui tA rX^Soi tu> alriwr I beg of you that you be wiiliag to (itten to
me, poifing heed to the number of charges Aea. 2. 1.

1062. A predicate substantive, adjective, or participle referring to » doliie
stands In the dative or In the accusative in agreement with the unezprMsed
subject of the Infinitive : nr o-ai fftj-Tir iripi ytr^Sai now if is in your power to
prove yourself a man X. A. 7. 1. 21, Aaietcu>t«fl«T f{«m> liu* ^fXout ytrialax
i( ii in your power to become friendt to the Laeedaemoniani T. 4. 29, (Safer
ah-DH . . . iiaw\ia^iiimi wpcUnai they decided to arm themaelvea fidly and to
ddcan^ X. A. 2. 1. 2, tSo^r airolt rpo^ifXojrai KaTaffT^ArTai ffL>YJiaXc(v to^
vrpaTnirit they decided to xtation pickets aitd to agaemble the soldiere 3. 2. 1.
aiiit^fptt o^oii ^l\ovt tlroi itSWar fl woKfiitaui U ii for their interest to befriends
rather than enemies X. O. 11. 23.

For predicate nouns in the nominative or accusative in agreeioent
with omitted subject of the infinitive, see 1973-1976.

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES (AND ADVERBS)
POSITIVE

1063. The positive, used to imply that something is not suited
or inadequate for the purpose in question, is especi^ly oommon
before an infinitive with or without Jort (wi) : (t6 Siup) ^ypor

toG»] COMPARISON 2T9

Itr^w &m Xaumurffai the footer fs too cold for bathing X. M. 3. 13. 3,
r^ct SXiyai ifixntiv skips too few to defend T. 1. 50, iianpan Jv uif fitu
Kr/vr it ioould taJce too long for me to state And. 2. 15.

10G4. Apoelllve adjective followed by the genitive of the same kdjective
hM, In poetry, the force ot a superlative : laiA ccuiSr viot of vsoe S. 0. C. 1238.

1065. fuXAov ij rather Hum, more . . . than may be used after a posi-
tive; rpo6&iiuK paXXoy ^ ifiiKaK more prompt than ktwUy A.Ag. 1691.

COMPARATIVE

1066. The comparative expresses coatraet or oomparison. Thus,
itiircpot is riglu in coatrast to its opposite, Spurrtpot left. Cp. 1082 b.
Usually comparison is expressed, as d re nu ^ipov icell or ill T. 2. 35.

a. When the poaitive precedes, uaXKor alone may staud for the comparative ;
as in /ninl rclfuu iralimi taXIn na\Xar(i,e, d{ii^e/wi) oJ rariptt then t"^ tsortAy
of praite and itill more worthy are our fathers T. 2. 36.

b. The pereona or things with which comparison is raada may Include aH
othenof the same class; ii/iSir i ytpalripot the elder {= eldest) o/tu X. C. 6. 1.6.

1097. The comparative is sometimes iised merely as an intensive
and does not differ essentially from the positive: toittiov KaTa&tarrtfiot
at a disadvantage with (inferior to) theae men D. 27. 2.

10G& For the use otftaXXoy instead of the comparative, and iiaXurra
iostead of the superlative, see 323. When either form can be used,
that 'with /loAAoi' or fiaXurra is more emphatic. Thucydides some-
times uses vXiov (tl), ro ■xkcov instead of /mAXot.

1069. The comparative degree may be followed by the genitive
(1431) or by rj than .* tro^iorcpot ifim or (ro^urcpM jj iyat wiser than I.
The genitive may precede or follow the comparative. With jj, the
persons or things compared usually stand in the same case, and
always so when they are connected by the same verb : ^tAu yap oi
ai paWor $ iopovi jftovs for I do not loee thee more than my own houae
E. Med. 327.

a. The genitive is naual If two subjects would have the same verb la com-
mon ; as ol Kp^rn ^pax^rtpa rSr TltpvCtr frAfcvor the Cretont shot a shorter
Uttatux than the Persian* (= f ol Uipaai) X. A. 3. 3. 7.

b. When two objects have the same verb in common : U the object stands
(I) In the aeeutative, the genitive is preferred, as Ifmi Sok,! KOpot, eirriraj a*
Vf dT«*^t 4>i>^t' oMtr tJTTiiw iavToO Cyrut teeme to me to love all tehom he
Aid* excellent quite as much as he loves htmse^ X. C. 2. 3. 12, but the accasaUve
is not nncommon, as E. Med. 327 quoted above ; (2) in the dative, the genitive
Is frequent, as rpoa^ta /ui ^Wnt Mpur . . . ipx*" ^ behomee m» rather than
<HherstandeT.9.\%; (-1) in the ffenttioe, the genitive is very rare (X.M.4. 3. 10).
Here f la preferred to the genitive for the sake of euphony: ol -yip ronfpel
nW vXiiirvr *6tpyiTiiir ^ si xpvrrtl (not tiSf xpvrSr) Siorrat for the wicked
need more faoourt than the good X. H. 2, S, 27.

280 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1070

c. Tb« genittre is often uwd irhere 4 would be followed by BOme other
owe Iban nominntiTe or accusative, or by a preposition : raSra toii drXlraii sfx
V'o' Tflr MuTiS» (= Jf Toil «ifirait) xopeureXrio^uii / adiiwM IhtK exhortotUiat
to Ae hoplitet not I'U than to the tailort V. 7. 63, {let fi\trttr) th r^r t/iwtv^w

(ifiXXsr T^i dpn-^j { = ■( eii r^i- iptr^r) we mB#( foot ai tkill more than (>t)
eouroire Aristotle, Polltica 1300 b 6.

d. iHTTuv (x'^P<"t irliiaTtpot, uaripei, etc.) aiStr6t inferior to aoae, greatrr
than all; here ^ is not used). Thus, iou\tiar iouXclai aMt/u&t Ifrtar airxfi^' '<>
mdure a nio«( rfisj^rnce/ui ifuscry X.M. 1.5.0.

1070. The word following fl may be the subject of a new verb (eipreased or
nnderslood) : iiincti Wi tptiTtetat SiiavriXtu rtrtuStiiuta i) oSth tee have been
edueated by a better teacher than they (have been) X. C. 2. 3. 13 ; but ihis word
is more often attracted into tbe case of tlie preceding word : nrii nol U Saro-
ripaw 4 TonJ*!* ( = i) Tiuitt iarlt) iviiSiiaar some have been rescued from danger*
eeen greater than these T, 7. 77. The genitive la also coninion williout 4 : Myur
Sri oBtu , . , toiJtou iiSton atnti iririxoi saying that he had tKver mtl loith ttMtttr
toine than this X. A. 1. 9. 26.

1071. wi for 4 la rare, and suspected by some. But cp. A. Pf.629, P. A.
30 b, :ib d, K. G-^e c.

1072. MoWtni q may be used though a comparative precedes ; alptrdr*^*
irri iiaxoiiiraiit i.wa$r<jrtu* |ia\Aor 4 ^^orrat v<fiitr9ni it is more desirable fur
men to die fighting ijaXber) than to snve Uiemselves by running ateag X.C.3.3.51.
Kere u^XVor ^ is to be taken with the verb.

1073. Instesd of the genitive or ^, the prepositions drrl, rjii(w. gen.) or r^,
wa.fi (w. acGUB.) are sometimes used with the coinpsrative : iji.Ttirfiaa.<i8iii nipt-
riircpiiv ttrai rir iiaXii Odiarot drrl rou alaxpoS fJIou (0 make a noble death mure
aesirable than (instead of) a shameful life X. K. L. 1). 1, ^i) ralSai ripi rXibm
ToioO rpb Tov diiEiifai' do nol ronsider children of more account than^tietore} jutliee
l*. Cr. Mb, x"M<i" /uift*' wapi r^r KaBtimiti/iar upar a cold too severe fur (in
comparlaun with) the actual time of year T. 4. 6.

1074 In statements of number and measure ^ may be omitted after the
adverbial comparatives r\ior (itXcif) more, IXarror (ftctor) less, which do not
alter their case and number: riitwu oix IXarrar SitA ^4p«rrax wSp he sends not
less than ten men enrrying fire X. 11.4.6.4, riXtt rWar wtmwx'*-^'** dxipwr
a eity of more than SOOO men o. 3. 10. Even when ij is kept, r\i«t (rXtif), etc.,
remains unclian^t-cl ; Jr rXttr ( = wXtlevtr) 4 tidicMtoit trtnr in more tAan fOt)
gears I>. 21. 141, ra^d> irXti* ^ trxotfi ;il^tdjat mors bowmen than SO myriads
X. C. 2. 1. 6.

a. In place of the ailverbiat TUar, etc., we find also the adjecliTal tonus
with or witliont ij or with the gt-niiive : rofirSt w\eltvs 5 -rrrpati^x'*^* more Aow-
men tAan iOOO X. (^. a. 1. -'i, trti yrfonln rXilai iploii^mrrt more than 70 |i*n™
oM r. A. 17 d, Irw&t irXtlaut rpumwfu* more (ftan 300 horse X. H. 1. 3. 10.

1075. Tbe genitive sometimes occurs to^tber with 4, ■'■id either when the
genitive has a separate construction, or is a pronoun to which tiie 4 clause stands
as an appoeliive. or of which it is explanatory. Thus, rpo^u s-Mor ... 4 Sin
vratluw he advanred m-re than ten stades X. H. 4. 6. 6 (here rhA>r is treM«d ■« a

iota] COMPARISON 281

solwtuitlra), rtt yifi hr •fimra Totfr^t fwrlS /ati^r # . , , 4fi& nwAi roH& ; for
NiA<il ModneM eoKld be preoter than (tAls) . . . to Me u* (II f Is. 1.20. Cp. lOTO.
10T6. Compendious Comparison. - — The poseessoT, rather than the
object possessed, may be put in the genitive after a comparative : tt
0 4fUK antucov KTijaaifitOa fof yiipm/ tovtiov ( = rotr Tomntv tinrlKov) hut
if ice Aould raise a caaalry-force not inferior to theirs X. C. 4, 3. 7.

1077. Compjulaon witb a Holm rapresentinE a cUoBe. •- When one peisoo
or tliiof is to be compared, not with another pemou or thing in regard lo its
qnslltj, but with on entire idea expreaaed t^ a dause (e.jf . 4 Airn with the inflni-
tiTe, f HI with the potential optative, or 4 and a finite verb), this clause may be
tbri<^ed into a subatatitive or a participle. Thus, rpSrriia Axltsf kimUciit an
rttnt be/oad our expeaations (loo great to be expected) T. 2. 04, wpoaitripta nS
Bupti wpoi6rrn adnaiKing further t/wn the proper tn«a*ur« 0.o. further than tftejr
lAoHtd have gone} X. A. 4. iJ. 34, wi tSu yt wapdrrur oAk inrpiiami X'V" <» ^e
Mief that they could not fare wvree than at present (< t4 xapiira iffW*) T.7,87.

1078. Reflextre Comparison. — The compaTative followed by the
teflexive prououo in the genitive is used to denote that an object
displays a quality in a higher degree than usual. The degree of
increase is measured by comparison with the subject itself. airro% is
often added to the subject : avroi avrw ^/UMBmrtpoi yiyvarrm, thej/ learn
vtort easily than before 1. 15. 267, wXova-toirtpoi tavrSiv yiyvopjann becom-
tig richer'than they were before T. 1. 8. Cp. 1093.

1079. Proportional Comparison. — After a comparative, ^ Kara with
the accusative (1690. 2 c), or ij iaart, ^ in, rarely « alone, with the
infinitive (not with the indicative), denote too high or too low
a degree : ovAa in vkum ri Kark rmn vtKpmK iKij^$ti more armt
"■ere taken than there were men slain T. 7. 45, tjio^pai nrj n fUmov ^
U7TI iftipay Sumtrdat kokov r^ woXti iruii^-g I fear lest there should hefall
the Stale an evil too great for it to he able to bear X. M. 3. 5. 17 (2264).

1080. Doable Comparlaon. — Two adjectives (or adverbs) referring
to the same subject, when compared with each other, are both put
in the comparative ; ^ is always used : ^ <Ip>7>^ iyayKouiripa ij ■coAAion'
o jKoce inevitable rather than honourable Aes. 3. 69, (nvrofiwripov i}
va^WT^Kw SuiXf}(0>jyai to discourse briefly rattier tlian, dearly I. 6. 24.

a. ttSXXtP mny t« nsed with the flrat adjective in the pOHitlve (cp. 1065), and
4 before the second : rpieiiiai fuXXav 4 ao^iuTtpi with more affection than prv-
dt»ce B. Med. 4«5.

lOSl. A compaTative majr follow a positive to mark the contrast with It :
ml tuipi ni lulfu both tmati and great(et) D. 21. 14.

loax The comparative may stand aIone> the second part being
implied.

a. "nu which la exceeded is indicated by the sense only ; tl vffiirtpoi the
vlKr (tboae wiser than the leat); trtlfiiirfai triXtit i/mltaut rat yni/iit Ix'"**' •*

282 SYNTAX OP THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1083

time of peace Stales are actuated bg higher eonviciiottt (thui In time of wmr}
T. 8. 62. So T( rtilrTtpor lomething neu (mors recent th&n that already known)
P. Pr. 310 a, (often = a ealaJnUy ur a revululionar]/ movemerU) ; umpar %Kor they
came too late T. T. 27; EUid often where we aupply ia usual (right, fitttng, etc).

b. The Horn. SqX^fpiu yiimtiat implies a comparison with men. In KE^ . . .
iyry6m lirirpd^ dfiefmnt, rarpbt H inrotac-r^pov CyrHt Wat bom of a vtother of

vaperior, but of a father of inferior race (HdL 1.91) the compariBOD is between
the qualitiea of mother and father respectirely. Cp. 818 b.

c. The comparative denotes eicesa: tifl!;ofirtpy9itirix>ip»0rmtiiuKptitKami
ircpiirlrrBMi by entering upon undertatingi too great thej/ encounter no slight
troubles X. M. 4. 2. 36.

d. The comparaCiTe ii used to soften an expression (rather, lomewhaf) -.
i,yfoiK&Ttptr somewhat boorithlg F. G. 480 c, iiiM\fmpar tropttrra he proceeded
rathtr eareletslv X. H. 4. 8. 36, Here the quality Is compared with its »bsence
or with Its opposite.

1063. The comparetlTe la often used where English teqnlret Oie posftlTe : oi
yip x"P" roXXdcif iimitir for 'lis not a bad thing to hear often P. Ph. 106 a.

1084. SttenEthened forma. — The comparative may be stren^ened by tri,
rsXX^, fuufup (ISIS), reU (1609), rsXA In, elc. /wXXor is sometimes osed with
the cOtnpaTntive : aliTX'"r''lpOT4pw uiXXor tov Siarrn more bashfVl than thejl ought
to be P. O. 487 b. 80 the correlative Jvy, Sfet : Sfv (^'{V"' ('v> '>> t^'u, rara^y
fioXXor ipy^h ^io( ttai the braver they are to appeataneei, the more tAejr decree
our aager I* 10. 29.

SUPERLATIVE

lOBS. The superlative expresses either the highest degree of a
quality (the relative superlative : A o-o^urarot Airjp the wisest man) or
a. very high degree of a quality (the cAsolute superlative, which does
Dot bake the article 1 ttvnp <roi^<ImiTOf a very wise man). The relative
superlative is followed by the genitive of the person or thing sur-
passed (1315, 1434). On the agreement, see 1050.

a. The class to which an individual, marked by the superlative, beltHIgs,
may be designated by a genitive of the divided whole (1316) : i ro^iiTerat rtS*
'EXX^m' the vriteit of the Greeks. So often by rdrrut; wirruw it^piiwitr iynt-
luriffTaTu the most senieless of all men Lye. 64. On the soperlatlve with IXXwr,
see U34.

b. With two the comparative eihansts all the degrees of compailson: hence
TpArtpm and rpiSrot, va-repot and uiTTBTOt, itdrtpai each of ttBo, and ttarrat each

of Keeral, are carefully to be distinguished.

1086. Strengthened Forms. — The superlative may be strengtheoed by pre-
fixing jri or wt, rarely i (also Svor or Arut in poetry) ; hi rXcfrm oi many mm
as possible, Sri rixt^ra as qutckli/ at possible, i Ipmrew the very bet toaj/ X.C.
7. 5. 82 (Switt tpivra A. Ag. 600). Art or & is always added when a preposition
precedes the snperlative : in tli gT*Kira,m into as narrow eompats a* ponHtle
X.O. IB. 8. wf and fri may l)e need together: in tri fiiXTimi i/ii ytnivtat for tne
to become as good as may be P.S.218d.

■om] comparison 283

a. With in and i, isrely with Srn (not with tri) , a farm of iSra/uu or eI6t t4
tifu, etc., uiay be Bmployed: t^■qy^<">l"> ^l"' "^ " Sininiu iii ^/MxvrdTur I will
nlate to you in Hie britfest ternu I can 1. 21. 'i.

1087. otoi may strengtben the superlative : tparrtt ri irpd7fiara 06% sTa
Pfkri^Tt it rf riXtt jrra ob«en>fnp (Aat affalrt are not in the very be*t itate in
theeiti/ L. 13. 2S. USvn OTiwivoi take the place of oTot, afonn, or a Bynonym,
j)f timiiai is usually added: tiyayoi ■ rumidx'^ Ario'oiit rXd^-Tovt <3i>i4^i|r /
bnmgkt the very largnt number of allUi I could X. C. 4. G. 29. b-rtlat is rare
(Thuc., Plato).

1068. (It drjp In apposition to the person designated may be added to
■tnjngilien the euperlatWe : 'Am^ur T-Xfiira tU iyi)p Svrifunt i4>f\ftr Antipkon
being able to render (most aid as one maci) aid beyond any other man T. 6.08.

1089. ir rait is used before the superlative in all (tenders and numbeis (esp.
hi HdL, Thuc., Plato) : li^ii 4 vrri^it . . . ISoir ^aXXor, 9i^i ti nli rp-irt) ifiiirro
the revoluiton teemed the more cruel tince it urns the Jlrtt T. S. 81, ir roii irXii-
«rai 14 r^i Sfi airoii htirorra they had the very largest nwaber of ships 8. 17.

1090. /idXiffTo, or tXcu-tov, litytHTor, occurs with the superlative : el ^Wra
dn^Arai-ai the Very stupideet P. Tim. 92 a. In poetry paBu- lias the effect of a
niperl&tire: ^oMrXsirrat exceeding rich A. Sapp. 656.

1091. col even, roXX^, imxixf (1G1»), faM (1009), To^d raU, nirra (rd
rdrra), the correlatJTe Ir^ aleo Btrengthen the superlative.

1092. In poetry (rarely in prose) a superlative may be strengthened by the
addition of the genitive of tiie same adjecUve in tbe positive 1 S laciSr idnrri
oh, vaett 0/ the vUe S. O. T. 834.

1093. Reflexive comparison (cp. 1078) occurs with the superlative : i/ifiXC-
nrs ti4r»t b^bO ipf hU tight itiUits dulled P. L. TlGd.

ADVERBS

1094. Adverbs &re of two kinds

m. Ordliury «dvert», denoting manner, degree, time, place, etc.
Ordinary adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, other adverbs, and (rarely)
substantives : ottu^Scv ycro/uros getting behind X. A. 1. 8. 24, tWi^ i^oa
ifraigktway he shovted 1. 8. 1, ^Mpdv nfiq cdready clear L. 4, 6, n-oAv
iarrov much more quickly X. A. 1. 6. 2, cS uaXa very easily 6. 1, 1, ciko-
rwc Tpowov nva in a way reasonably D. 8. 41, tiAXa crvfii^opa a great
niafortune X. C. 4. 2. 5, /loAa trrparmA! an excellent general X. H.
a 2. 39.

b. Sentence adverba (or partides) are adverbs that affect the sen-
tence as a whole or give emphasis to particular words of any kind.
Greek has many sentence adverbs, some of which are treated more
folly under Particles.

Sneb are words of InteirogMion (4, Spa, fifit) ; of sfBrmation and confidence
(f^ M4M0, indeed, 39" """eljr, yi at leait, even, ff really, n^|l in truth, n} aurely.

284 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTEKCE [lOM

Tol tureltf) ; ol MUtXTOinty i,litm, »(rf, rixa pefh(^); of n^^atlon (o*, n^, *Ctb.,
(i4r<>', etc.) ; of HmitaUon (fir 17dl B.).

1095. Tbe eqaivalents of an ordinary adTerti are: an oblique case (/(SiurfXcMr
aKoaittTi) he reigned for ttnenty yean, 1681, 1682 ; itoitit <rxovSi to listen alteu'
eivelj/, r% ivTifial^ tropeOBm they proceeded on Che next day, tuid maDy oLher
dalivaa, 1537 b ; in tJ(p ToxtoTij* he came iii the quicke^iC viay, aud many olhei
ftccusatiyee, 1606-1611) ; an oblique «ase witb a prepowlion (8ii rixout ^Xfc he
aame quickly = rax^ut, d»' ettm ipiiwuiu I start Ji-om home = ttnoetr, it ri
in^rti dearly, JSfisu rpit ri/r i(lar he gave acevrding to merit = iiii-n, rpit
piir forcibly — (Sial«i)[ a participle (7>Xii^ tJrt he taid aUh a laugh, laugh-
ingly). (FurthBrmore, a clause in a complex sentence, as limfi-ifamt . . .
eirror f fli Tif ii iftro leaping in more qukklg than one would have thought
X.A.I. 6. 8; op. 2188. 3-)

1096. In the attributiTe position an ordinary advert may serve afi
an adjective ; iv riS vkrjalov TmpaStlatf in the neiglibouring park X. A.
2. 4, 16, o ixtWtv ayyt^iK the messenger from that giutrter P. K. 619 b,
Topa^ ^ TOT* tlie confusion of that time L. 6. 35. See 1153 e. n.

1097. a. An ordinary adverb qualifying a verb is often bo used ttut it may
be referred to the subject or object of the sentence where an adjective could
stand. Thus, &rTt . . . inro\a)i^ittrBiu. tittiitun 4 lari riir ii&r to tu lo b« rr-
garded at greater Qii. in a ffrtaler way) Utan (aaxrding to) their deaerU 1. 11.24.

b. Six" and x^M' apart, inii far, i^yit near and some other OTdinaiy
adverbs supply, with <[nu or -rlyrtrBat, the place of miaaing adjectlvea Thus,
xw^t ffo^ia frrlr Aiipflit leiedom it different from courage r.Lach. lG5a.

1098. For adjectives used adverbially, see 1042 ; for degrees of comparisoit,
1145, 106B i for the genitive or dative aft«r adverbs, 14ST if., 1499 ft.; for adverbe
used as prepositions, ITOO fl. ; for a relative adverb used with names of tbiiiga
as an equivalent of a relative pronoun preceded by ir, tls, i(, see 2499.

THE ARTICLE-ORIQIN AND DEVELOPMENT

1099. The article o, ij, to, was origiDally a demonstrative pronoun,

and as such supplied the place of the persona! pronoun of tne third
person. By gradual weakening it became the definite article. It
also served as a relative pronoun {1105}. (Cp. Germ, der, demonstra-
tive article and relative ; French le from tile.) o as a demon strati v*^
is still retained in part in Attic prose (1106), while the beginnings
of its use as the article are seen even in Homer (1102).

i, ^ T< IN HOMER

1100. In Homer i, ^, rd is nsually a demonstrative pronoun and
is used sulistantively or adjectively ; it also serves as the personal
pronoun of the third person: i)M to ^u/iofai but I marvel at this
S 655, Tov kaifi^pa iwurPoXav this proting brawler B 275, r^ S jyw
mr Aiio-oi bvt her I wHi not release A 29.

ties] THE ARTICLE 285

1101. In its tvbttantival use i either mnika a controst or recaUa the subject
(ilie ^uuphoric uiK). But with dWd, Si, a^ip the subject Is generalljr changed.
It »ft«n precedes aii explanalor; relative clause : rSn gl rvr ppvral ilai of tkose
wAo are noie mortal nun A2T2.

1102. i, T], t6 olteu approaches to its later nee as the definite article or ia
actually so used : rir /Ur . . . rin S' trtpor E 146 (cp. 1107). a. The snbHtao-
tive often stands in apposition, aitd ia added, as au alMrthooght, to the demon-
strative (especially 6 ii) wljicli is stltl an Independent pronoun: atrrifi i roZrt
flfait iSir iTTiu^nvcr but he, the old man, teas leading the way for them tg226.
In some cases the appositive is needed to complete the sense : irtl ri yt toKit
itauiiitr iarir iaiSoi Since thtt — to listen to anunglrel — it a good thing a370,
b. Often with adjectives and participles used Hiibstantively, with pronouns, and
idverba ; especially wlien a ciinirast urdistinction Is Implied ; ol dXW theothen
*Z'l. Tiifffiiura tlie things that are to be A TO, tA rdpoi formerly N228. The
•ttribntive adj. befure the noim : roit toit thy *672, ri iiiyurra d<0\a tfte
grriUest priiea '1'040; and in apposition I'lp^rrArdX^rilf Irrts, the beggar ffSSS.
Hom. bas war^ip aliixit 8360 (but dues not use 6 rar^p i i/iis).

1103. In Horn, i contragta two ohjects, indicates a change of person, or a
change of acUon on the part of the sane person. Attic i dfflnet.

1104. The transition from the demonstrative to the article la so gradual that
it is often impot«ible to distinguish between the two. Ordinarily Homer does
not use the article where it is required in Attic prose. The Epic use is adopted
in general by the lyric poets and in the lyric parts of tragedy. Even in tra^o
ilialogue the article Is less common than in prose. IldL has i Si and ht, 6 yip
forht.

6, ■^. t6 as a relative

1105. The denionstratire o, ^, to is used as a. relative pronoun in
}{omer only whon the antecedent ia definite (C]). that) : ro^ta 8" i^tva-
piit, ri oi vopt xo^Kiof 'Api;« he stripped off the arms that brazen Area
had given him H 146. Tlie tragic i>oet9 use only the forma in t-,
and chiefly to avoid hiatus or to produce position : KTuvmitra roiit ob
j(pil KToyur slaying those ichom it is not right to dot/ E. And. 810.
(d => Of E. Hipp. 525.) On the use in Herodotus, see 338 D. 3.

6, I], Td AS A DEMONSTRATIVE IS ATTIC PROSE

1106. Tlie demonstrative force of 5, i}, to' survives cliiefly in con-
nection with pai-ticles (^ev, Si, yi, toi'; and with kiu preceding 6).

1107. d is a dcmniutrative commonly before itfr, U, and pspecially in con-
trasted expressionK : i ii4r . . . i Si the one, thit . . . the Other, that, as in ol ^v
iropttorro, al e' tfwitrTt the one party proceeded, the Other follotoed X.A.3.4.ie.

IIOS. The reference may be indefinite ; in which case rli Is often added :
rail iiir ArimHiM, ra^ i' t%i^a\tt mmt he pill tO death, and other/ he expelled
K. A. 1. 1.7. cl vJr TiKf iwiSr^ator, ol 1' l-ptvyaw gome v)ere killed, but others
tMcaped C. 8. 2. 10.

286 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [iioj

1109. Witb prepositJoai the order Is osnallr Inverted : it /lir r^r, tit U
rif (1863 a).

1110. In I&t6 writeiB (but In Demosthenes) the reUtive !■ used tw in 1107:
wiiStit, it /liw dnupAr, tit &i It ToOt ^uyiSat Kariyuw dettroyittg Mome dtieM, into
Other* brinffing back their txiU» D. 18. 71 (the flnt instance).

1111. Note the adverbial expreasiouB : ri (tA) ii4r , , . ri (ri) ti on IA« one
hand . . . OH the other hand, ptvllf . . . parilji (so also roifro /Ut . . . r»Or»
I^ 1266) ; tA Si Ti partly, ri /idw . . . rj U in thi* vay . . . in tAot uoy, ri M
whereat (1112), rv r« there/ore.

1112. i 3^, 4 ij, tA N (without a preceding m'f clause) often mean btit(oran<l)
he, she, thie. In the nomiiiatlTe the person referred to is usuallf different from
the subject of the main verb : KD|»i StSurm sh-y /liplavi tipuKoii ■ i Si \aPAr ri
XpialB' K.T.X. Cyrut gtvei him (Clearcbus) 10,000 dariea ; and he taking the
money, etc. X. A. 1. 1. 9, Toih-a irayyi\ijivrt roii crpartiiratt ■ TBit Si Ihrof U Ifw
Sri ^701 rpti ^oviX/n they report this to the loldiere ; and they had a tiupSeion
that he wu leading (them) agatnxt the king X. A. 1.3.21, tS If sdit fm TOMVTor
vrhereae thit it not so P. A. 37 a.

VARIOUS USES OF A (St), f| (1{), Td DBHON8TRATIVB

1113. Am a penonal pronoun, chiefly after ni, and in tlie DominatlTe : nl
ft (4) and he (_ehe) : »! ot ttrer and they laid X. A. T. 6. L Also in 1) f ft and
he said P. R. 327 c (792). So not rit (nir) osed as the accusative of taX Ot, as sub-
ject of a following infinitive in indirect discourse: nal T6r ttreh and (he said that)
he said P. S. 174 a.

1114. In the nominative St, J|, are usually thus written. Some write t, f , of,
a( when these words are used as demonstratives ; but i iiit ... A 3/ is rare.

a. The forms St, 1, here apparently relatives with an older demonstrative
force, may be in reality demonstratives, Si being the demonstrative (article) ( to
which the nominative sign -t has lieen added. From this St may be derived, by
analogy, the demonstrative use of S, and of oli, oui in fixed expreaaioQS (1110).

1113. Also In Tir talrir thit one and thtU one L. 1.2.1, ri icai rt this and
that D. 9. 08, tA rat rd D. 21. 141, oBrt rwt ourt rait neither to these nor to those
P. L. 701 e. In the nom. it tal 3t such and stidi an one Hdt. 4. 08.

1116. In an oblique case before the relativea 3f, Iret, ttm : rir rt BMAvii'c*
. . . K9XTitatt<pititff*tTi)iTo6Tavtlriu,tiAi>Ttipa.tvapiiBiiaxa«daswitne»sIteiU
produce both Euthyeritus and t^e man who said he teas Af> truuter L. SS. B.
ipiyirai roD S lant Irar hi aims at that which is equal P. Ph. 76 b, and often in
Plato in defining pliilosophiceil terms,

1117. Harely with prepositions, except in trpl toB (or irparaS) before this time
T. 1. 118. On iw Toft with the saperlative, see 1089.

6, \, t6 AB AVI ARTICLE (ths) IN ATTIC (ESPBCIALLT
IN PB08B)

1118. The article 6, 4, ri marks objects as definite and known,
whether iudividuals (the particuUir article) or claaaes (the generic

iiM] THE ARTICLE 287

article). The context tnuBt determine the presence of the generic
article.

a. Umi* to no Indeflnlte wtkle in Greek, but a, an is a(t«ii represented by
'h (ISBT).

THE PARTICULAR ARTICLB

1119. The particular article denotes individual personB or things
aa distinguished from others of the sauie kind. Thus, ^viroi
i>4p«n>t the man is mad (a definite person, distinguished from other
men) P.Pha6.268c

U3a Special uses of the particular axticle. The particular article
defines

a. ObjecU weU Itnown ; i rUr twri r««t»raToi ZiXut Solon the witeU of the
Srwtn (AiiK«) F- Ttm. 20 d.

b. Objects already mentioned or in tlie mind of the speaker or writ«r (thA
ttnaphotie article) ; ilror Sri TdXarrof ipyuplou troi/un itr)r SiCmi . . . i Si Xs^ikp

ri riXuTsr >.t A. / »aSi that I wot readg to givt Mm a UtleiU of tilvtr . . . and
It taking Uu taint, etc. L. 12. 0-10.

C Objects qiecially present to the senses or mind (the deictic article) : XsjM
t) ptfOJat tate the book V. 'I'h. 148 c, peuUium rj)r ^Xl' rai^'oi taking to
fgkt Uu battie T. 4. 91. Hence the article Is regularly used with demonstrative
pronouiB <117e).

N. — llie foregoing (a-c) uses recall the old demonfitratlve force of the
■nicle. Words that ordinarily hare no article may reoeiTe the article when this
older force to present.

4. Objects particularized by an attributive or by a following deecripUon :
t Ivm i'A^Mlur the ptopU of the AthtttUmi Ae^ S. l\^, \iyriir iwiaTa\iit, qr
twtiB^r read the letter Ihat he tent D. 18. 39. Cp. 11TB d.

•. Ol^tB marked as tuuai or proper under the circumetances : ri lUpvt rSr
l-^ir A IidcH* ei* fXo^r the proMeaOor did not get the (requisite) part of th«
Met D. IS. 103.

i. Objects representatire of tbelr class (the dittrtbutive article, which resembles
Uk geoerie use ; oft«n translated I)y a, each) : briffx'*''"* )<^<"' ^p'b iiialipiiKt
nS ittit6t ry rrpariiiTn he pronitea to give each soldier three half-daric* a month
Z.A. 1.S.21. But the article maybe omitted: tal crXgrro Sha, I» iwb 0uX^
oad ihef ehoM Un, oneflrom (each) tribe X. H, 2. i. 28.

U21. The article often takes the place of an unemphatic possessive
pronoun when there is no doubt as to the possessor; Kvpo^ Kam-
r^tiprac diro roti Sp/iariK riv Btipaiia ivi&o Cyrus leaped dovm /rom hit
chariot and put on his breastplate X. A. 1. 8. 3.

THK OENBRIC ARTICLB

1132. The generic article denotes an entire claas as distinguished
from other classes. Thus, 6 SiSpmrtK man (as distinguished from
other being^, A ytpovm the aged; Stt rov arpartarrqv tftoPturSai /laXXaF
Tw 3p}(ovTa ^ rovt woKi/Uoot the (a) soldier should fiat his commandar

a88 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE {im

rather than the enemy X. A. 2. 6. 10, wo^pw o aaKo^nrr^ the informer
in a vile thing D. 18. 242.

1123. In tb« singular tbe generic article makea a siagle object ihe repre-
sentative nf the entire cIbbb ; in the plural It denotes all the objects belonging lo
a class. The generic article is especiall; common, in the plural, with adjectives
used substantively : otli: in rts tt-rot in rait taKcipyovt mil diKioiii (Is tmraytXir no
one could lay that he permitted the male/actor and th* uirongdoer to deride
him X.A. 1.9. 13.

1124. The Article with Participles. — A participle with the article
may denote an entire cla^ : o ^ovXoiuvoi any one who wishes. Cp.
2050, 2052.

i Tuxiir any chance comer, i iryv^Mf*' a gvide, aix ivapiiTtTt tQt t9t\v'i'-
Tur iwtp t/Lit Kittittittt you leill not be in team of those who teiU be teilling
lo encounter danger for you 1). 20. 106, ol Xr/oroiaDiTd neiesmoagere 4.49.
The same sense is expressed by rni i with a participle or adjective. On tbe
snide with a participle In tbe predicate, see 1162.

*. When the reference is to a particular occasion, the article ma; be particu-
lar (2052) ; as 6 X^ut the speaker on a definite occasion.

THE ARTICLE WITH NUMERALS

1129. The article may be used with cardinal numerals

a. When tbe numeral states tbe definite part of a whole (expressed or tmder-
stood): dr^a^ Twr Xix"* i<idira drrur el Tp«?i of the eompaiiiet, numbering
taelet (In all), there were absent three X. H. 7.5. 10, dt rufi. roit Sita one
man in (comparison with) ten X. O. 20. 16, T«r rim rat iio fuf/ui (too fiJVit
T. 1. 10, tio iiifii two thirds 3. IS. (Tbe genitive is omitl«d when the denomi-
nator eiceeds the numerator by one.)

b. When the numeral is approximate : Ifuiiiar iiiJpai i/v^ rat rpUimrra tkt]f
remained about thirty days X. A. 4. B, 22, 7i-r<»Arei ri r«m|i(i»Ta frit about
fiftn yeara of age X. C. 1. 2. 13.

C. When the number is used abstractly (without reference to any definit«
object) : Arut nt) ifttt tri lartr ri SiiStra lit ti beware Of laying IS U twice 6
P. B. 387 b.

N. Ordinals nsually omit the article and regularly do so In statements of
time In the dative (1640) : Sturipif ^iftl t4' r6\tr trtixtf' <» the aeeond month
they fortified ift« oi* T. 8. 64.

FLUCTUATION IN THB USE OP THE ARTICLE : OMiaSION OP

TFK ARTICLE
1126. Tbe article Is often omitl«d (1) in words and phrases which have sur-
vived from the period when i, ft, ri wss a demonstrative pronoun ; (2) when »
word is BufBciently definite by iteelf ; (3) when a word expresses a general con-
ception without regard to its application to a definite person. Tbe generic article
is frequently omitted, especially with abstracts (1132), without appreciable diBer-
ence In meaning. Its presence or absence is often determined by the need of
distinguishing subject from predicate (IIGO), by tbe liiylhm of tbe w

II3S] THE ARTICLE 289

II97. The article is omitted in many adrerHal desi^atlons of
ftm«, mostly with prepositions (except i)/i(pat by day, rvxriK by night).

Tbas, Tifil niirii idrrni about midnight, &ita lif juat before dayllglu, Spf Iroi/t
at Iht Kcuoa of the year. So with 6ii9pos dai/break, icJXii ^flernoon, irripa
nrniag, lap tpring ; and it valtur from childhood. Most of lbs above cases
ueeurviTalH of tbe older period nhen the article had a demonstrative force.

1128. The article is very often omitted in phrases containing a prepoaitioii :
iwifxirel Xlryov in th4 beginning of the tptech D. 37. 23, Hu piXHv out of reach
ofthtmiaiilet X. A. 3.4. 15, 'Hiiva rijk /rl SrpBjiiy. Eton on the Strymon T. 1. 88.

1129. Words denoting persona, when they are used of a class, may omit tlie
Uticle. So irBpuwoj, arpaTirti', 6tit divinity, god {i Btii the particnlar god).
Thiu, wArrv* pjTpar irdpuTbi iani man is the measure of all things P..Th. 178b.

1130. Adjectives and partjciplea used substantively have no article when the
refetence is general ; /liaoe TifiifAt midday X. A. 1. 8. 8, 'f'uxpi' cold, Btp/itv heat
P.S. 18Gd, rtta^ai rpojcaraXif^afi^nut ri iKpa tO send men to preoccupy tAe
Mj/ht* X. A. 1.3. 14. Rarely when an adverb is used HdjecUvely : run ixBpQi
M^r 6\)8poi the utter destruction of the enemy D. IB. 141.

THE ARTICLE WITH ABSTRACT SUBSTANTIVES

1131. Abstract substantives generally have the article: ^ iptri/
fuAAoF ^ i) 4n^ "¥£<* Ta$ ijiuy/it valour rather than JliylU saves men's
lit-ts X. C. 4. 1. 6.

1132. The names of the virtues, vices, arts, icCenees, occupations often omit
lb* article: ri tuitpoitini, rl paria; what it temperance, what is madness t
^ M. 1. 1. IS, ipx^ 0iMaT pir fToiwi, fx^P"' ^ i'iyi praise is the beginning of
friendship, blame of enmity I. 1. 33. Similarly fwiwirii music, yttupyH agric^
tire. So also with S^ opinion, »ui mind, rix"! art, ripot laui.

1133. The article must be used when reference U made to a definite person
ur tiling or to an object well known : it rUr 'EWi/tur eOtain the goodtoill of lAt
Grttks Aes. 3. 70, {tiur} 4 trxoH your utual idlenees D. 8. 63.

1134. The article may be omitted in designations of space ; as pdftii dep^,
'■im height; also piyt9ot size, rX^flm siee, amount, lint and tnpa, used as
accusatives of respect (1600), maj omit the article.

1133. The article may be omitted with some concrete words conveying ft
ceneral idea, M ^i(x4 loul, a<ipa body (but the parts of the body regularly bavft
the article).

THE ARTICLE WITH PROPER NAMES

1136. Karnes of persons and places are individual and therefore
omit the article unless previously mentioned (1120 b) or specially
marked as well known 1 ©oukuSi'Sts 'Aftjvalos TJmcydides an Athenian
r. 1. I, Tois arparMrav avruiv, rovs irapa 'KXiap^ov dfftAflovras, (id Kvpos
Tor mxiap'jfm iwv their aoldiera who seceded to Clearchns, Cyrua
alloKfid Clearchus to retain X. A. 1. 4. 7, 3 SoXuv D. 20. 90, oc "Hpa-
^« the Seradeaes P. Th. 169 b.

2dO SYNTAX OF TS£ SIMPLE SBKTENCB t"3T

1137. Nmdm of deities omit the ertlcle, except when emphatic (r^ rbi- Ala
byZeiu) or whea definite cults ere leferredto: ri r^'A^i^t fSot IA« tanetuert
0/ Athena (st Athens) 1. 16. 2. HMnes of festiTsIs vary in prose wriien (do
article in iiiscriptiooe) : nsM^nata titt Farutthtnata (but Ilaratf^iwloif twi
fHipoi't at the Letter Panaihenaea L. 21. 4). Names of ehiines have the article.

113B. Nsmee of nations may omit the article, hut •! 'BXXqm is usual when
opposed to ol pAp^apM the barbariaiu. When nations are opposed, the article ia
usually ahsent : i rixtftot 'A^qralw* col IlAawern^ltii' T. 2. 1 (but 6 riXc^i tu>
Ili%»w»miaUir xal 'A^ralwr 1. 1). The name of a nation without the article
denotes the entire people. Names of famiUea mi^ omit the article : 'AvKXifrid-

a« r. R.4oeB.

1139., Continents : 4 Elpiirq Europe, 4 'A^U Atla. Other names of coon-
trles, except those originally adjectives (as 4 'Amn) Attiea), omit the article
(Al^^ Lifiga). ySf and x*^ may he added only to such names as are treated
as adjectives ; 4 Boun-tit (t^) Boeotia. The names of countries standing in
the genitive of the divided whole (1311) usually omit the article only when the
genitive precedes the govemlug noun : ZimXiaf rt rXttrror the tiiott of SieUf
T. 1. 12. The article is generally used with names of monntains and rirers ;
but is often omitted with names of itlandt, mos (but i lUn-gi the Ponttie), and
wiitdt. Names of cities usually omit the article. Names of citiee, rivers, and
mountains often add a-AXif, rtraitit. Spat (1142 c). The article la omitted with
proper names joined with airii used predlcatively (1200 b): s^oAi '\9^ialovt
th« Athenian* thtmaeltet T. 4. 78.

1140. Several appellatives, treated like proper names, may omit the article :
^sfftXe^ the king of Persia (i pa^iXtdt is anaphoric (1120 b) or refers expressly to
a definite person). Titles of official persons : rpuriHu the Prj/tani, rTpartrrti
the (Jenrralt. Names of relationship, etc. : rariifi father, dr^p hastMmd, yvrlj
wtTe (but the article is needed when a definite Individual is spolten of). Thus:
itar Si T0 iiit irfrrifp, rif Si yvrii tal raiStt to one there came hia miithtr, to
another hU tpife and ehildren And, 1. 48. So also rar^i fatherland.

1141. Similarly in the case of words forming a clsaa by themselves, and some
others used definitely : jXiat sun, oipanti heaven, iSpai leasona, ttpavrdt Ihundfr,
MmTef death; Srrv, r6\it cUg, iicp6ro\u cUadet, iyopi market-pliet, raxat
oUy-VMll, rpurartior prytaneum, w^nt Uland (all used of definite places) , MXarra
tea as opposed to the mainland, but 4 BAXaTra of a definite sea ; Mmilariy 74
earth, land.

1142. When the name of a. person or place is defined hj an apposi-
tive (916) or attributive, the following distinctions are to be noted:

a. Persons: nipSUiat ' AXriirtpou Prrdiceat, son of Alexander T. 2. 99: the
official designation merely stating the parenta{;e. A^iuatinii t 'AXuurSirmn (the
popular designation ) distiDguishes Demoathenee, the son of Alemhene* (T. 3. 91 )
from other persons named Demosthenes. (Similarly with names of notioi**-)

h. Deities : the article is nsed with the name and with the epithet or (less
often) with neither : rf Ail r{ 'OXvfnfy to Olympian Zeut T. 6. 31, Atl IXnStplif
to Zeut guanUan offireedom 2.71.

ii4«] THE ABTICLE 291

& OMgnphkal Hunu ara nmiaUy treated u attTlbntlTef, h i Et^wn
nrwh the river Saphratee X. A. 1. 4. 11, ^ BiXfin Uf»ir iate Bolbe T. 4. 103.
la * Terj few cases (aix timea In Thae.) i la omitted with the noioe of a
tlTer when worattit la inaerted ; but Hdt. oftea omits i. With the names of
nocntaina the order is ri Il^Xtor 6pat Ml. PeiUtn Hdu T. 129 when the geodei
igreea, bnt otberwiae h rt Spgi Tj)r 'lariiwtir la 30. Ittone T. 3. 66 (rarely aa iri
TJ Alrrj TV jp« at tlie foot of SB. Aetna T. 3. 116). With namea of latanda,
tDwna, etc., the order Taiies : ri UapSinor riltta/ta the town of Parthentum
X. A. T. B. 21 ; 4 ^irrrdXtut r^n the itland of Psgttaiea Hdt. 8. 96 ; Tpayta 4
r^TH tke itland of Tragia T. 1. 110 ; rsD Ilnpaiut rw Xifi^Hi of the harbour of
PtiratHt T.2.g8; ri ipptipiew ri AipSa>or fort Labdaloit 7.3. The citg qf Mende
would be H^fSq riXn, 4 HMi| 4 rihii, HJrJq i^ ri\<i.

OTHIR U»8 OF THE ARTICLE

1143. A alngle article, used with the flnt of two or more nonna connected by
aid. prodacea the ettecl of a sfngle notion : bI rrpanryl nJ yaxiyof the generate
and nipteiju (the commanding offlcen) X. A. 2. 2. S, r» /itylvTit xal iXaxiarit
nh U«(anreM and (A«*maII««tiAip« (the whole fleet) T. 1.10, 4 r^rnXXiSf iio-
MiTtKoH^m the calvmntation and envg of the multitude P. A. 38 a. Karet;
*bea the ntbetantireB are of different genden : rtpL rat iairrHr ^Sxai jtot ffd/utra
coitantiitg their oisn live* and penotu X. A. 8. 2. 20.

1144. A repeated article lays atreM on each word : 6 Op^ lol i fiipPapn the
Tkraetaii and the barbarian D. 33. 132 (here the subject remaina the same), ol
frptTifytl lol aj Xa;tairs{ the generaU and the captains X. A. 7. 1. 13.

1145. Instead of repeating a noan with the article it maj solDce to repmt
the irtlcle : i piot i rSr tiiwrtvirrut q i r^r rupormiirrur the Iffe of persons in
a private ttatlon or that of prince* 1. 2, 4.

1146. A anbataiitire fallowed by an attributive genitive and forming with it
a conpoDiid idea, uenally omits the article ; rtXtin'^ raO pitu (the) end of his life
(-life-end* •■ l(fe-tlia«) X. A. 1. 1. 1. (Lees oommonly 4 rtXnrrj) roO piau
E.A.1.9.80.) (^1296 a.

U47. When the genttfve dependent on a snbatantive la a proper name :
ftfTl Ztfleiat dAiwi* i^ler the capture of Euboea T. 2. 2, and furik t4> Mepou
Awit after the capture of Letbot 3. 51. A preceding genitive thus oftpn takes
the place of the article : Sii xpi"" vX^ftn bg reason of the extent of time T. 1. 1.

1148. Concrete coordinated words forming a copulative expression may omit
Ae article : rpit ttr vaU«»' tal ■yutaut^r Urrtiu tiiai by gvur children and aivee
I bfteeeh yov L.4.S0, rAXir lol aUtat liiur ro^Iorf surrender to us four eilf
ltd house* T. 2. 73, Upsuu nl it/mi priestettee and priests F. lt.4t)la, Cp. man
isd vffe, hvrte and rider.

1149. An appoeltive to the peraonsl pronoons of the flret and aecond persons
lu the article when the apposltive would have it (as thlr4 pei'son) with the pro-
noun omitted : b/tsU ol ^/lim wph iiii xArrn voiipiWm do you, captains, all
■^nfer \rith m« (•! irr'/^ti <ni>4^Mwiwi) X. C. 6. 2. 41, oi c^Mpti xp<ii^* «l
Kri^a Tou i*nnh wti/iMtw we Ortams do not make very much km nf foreign

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

THE ARTICLE AND A PREDICATE NOUN

IISO. A predicate noun has no article, and is thus distinguished
from the subject ; nxAcLrat ij axporoAtt In inr 'AOipniwv xoXis the acrofo-
lis is atUl called ' city ' by the Atheniajia T. 2. 16.

1131. Predicate comparatives and BuperlativeB, possessiTe proDonna, and

OldinalB liave no article : vti-Tir r4> iuainav yvratia raawv tu^ponvriTiir ilnu I
thovght that my toi/e looi (the) most virtaoua of all L. 1. 10, Xaipt^r <«iti
iriUpot Qr Chaerepkon totu a /riend of mine P. A. 21 a. Cp. 1 126 d.

1152. Even in tbe predicaU the article la used with a noun reteniog to a defi-
nite object (an indinidual or a clan) that 1b well known, previously mentiooFd
or hinted at, or identical with tlie subject : si f ftXXst ^i^cipoOvi fiiWtn' rir
A/firroi' draiaXovprei ri* rpaiiriji the rest try to strike Dexipput calliiig hirn
'lAe traitor^ X. A,6.6. 7, Wh-oi Ij^ar ol ^n^jemi rir rxryx"' Ihete mtn «yrf
thoBewho {at I have Mid) avoided the inquiry Ai\t.0,2T. ol tiW^kkm rofii >>d«wuii>J
iaBtrtis irSpural tliri tal at rgXXol the enactors of the lava are the vteak men and tlif
multUnde P. G. 4S3 b, iriirTeut Si clpoi rir Su^iWorra Mdrura he aiapet^d thni
U tau Menoa who traduced him X. A. 2. 6. 28 (here aubject and predicate could
chaoge pioces). So also witli i nh-if the lame (1209 a), eirtpor one of two (60),
raiwarrlor the Opposite.

eUBSTANlIVE-MAKING POWBB OF THE ARTICLE

1153. The article has the pow^er to make substantival any vord
or words to which it is prefixed.

a. Adjaotivea : i <ro^ the wige man, ri tUowv jtufi'ce.

b. Participles (with indefinite force) : i ^uUucnt whoever un7Ja, the first
thatoffer$. Cp. 1124.

N. 1. — Such participial nouns appear in active, middle, and passive forms.
andadnutthedistinctionBof lense; ol ietXivntrit /alriiii those who ahall beteHliifj
to remain X. H.T.6.24.

H. 2. — Thncydides often substantivizea the neuter participle to form abetract
expressions : t^ r6\tui ri riitii^rot the dignity of the State 2. 63. Such parti-
cipial nouns denote an action regulated by time and circumstance. Contrast t6
Stit6t fear (in actual operation) 1.36 with tJ iAii (simply /eor In the abstract).

C. Preposition and case: ol iriT Hi T/Ay^T-aw thoM in potter, the goBernment
D. IB. 247, ol<Fr5*\«i? those in the prime of life T.0.24.

d. With the eenilive, forming a noun-phrase (1209) : TdTOrarporiiiT fir the con-
ditton of the eotdiers X, A.3.1.20, t4 riji ipyii the outbursts of teralh T,2.60.

e. Adverbs: otr IrSoKrvrtXanfiiwirroitiUoUKTii Kartitliripraf thoKwhotrrr*
inside utere arrested and those oulmie \rere cut rfoicn X. A. 2. ■'i. 32. Similarly
ol rir* the men of that time, ol ittT the d'od, ol wdXoi the ancients.

N. — An adverb preceded by the article may boused like an adjective: idpdut
KuPtfiw^Tii, Ae good pilot P, B, 341 o. The article is rarely omitted.

lie*] THE ARTICLE 293

t. InfinltlTea : ■oAoilrfi'eiiicaXcM'CaiTiiMTUF^Soi^i'lpxxrAu Chej/ aalt inttm-
peranu being ruled by one's pleasuret P. Ph. 88 e.

J. Any single word or clause : ri bmtt Sror^^u, TJjniXt.X^u when I sag
Tom. I mean the State D. 16. B8, Inif&itri Sluiit irtx/rv reSI 4>iroii omitting
(Uie words) ' let Mm mbmit to judf/metU for the murder ' D. 23. 220.

POSITION OF THE ARTICLE
jiUr^utive Position of the Article

IIM. A word or group of words standing between the article and
its noun, or immediately after the article if the noun, with or without
the article, precedes, is an attributive. IhuS, o <ro^o^ dvijp, o ivr]p 6
<ro^, or ^fi o aoifiot (cp. 1168).

11S9. Tbifl holds true eicept la the case of Buch poat-poaltive words as yi^r,
•If. yi, Ti, yip, 34, dI/uu, oSr, rolni* ; and Tit in Hdt. : rUt ni Mtprtiiit one of the
Prrsi'iiu 1. 8I>. In Attic, tIt intervenea only when an atlributWe followa the
article : tw> fiappipuw nrit Irwtur some of the barbarian caralri/ X. A. 2. 5. 32.

US6. Adjectives, participles, adverbs, and (generally) prepoaitions with
their cases, if preceded by the article, have attributiix pogition.

1137. (1) Commonly, aa in English, the article and the attributive precede
the noun : 6 tofiln irfjp the viae man. In this arrangement the emphnsia is on
the attributive. Thus, rg rpibrti itiiip^ on the Jlrtt day T. 3, 96, tr ry rpi toB
Xpirv in former timet B. 53. 12, rir ix rSlr 'EW^tunlt raii fiappipovt >I^Pay IS^r
aeeiag the terror int^red by the Oreela in the barbarians X. A. 1, 2. 18.

IISB. (2) Less often, the article and the attributive follow the nonn preceded
bj the article ; i ir>ip i s-o^t the wise man. Thus, ri sTpdrcu/ui tA tSp 'ABTiralur
the army of the Athenian* T, 8. 50, ir ti roptlf t% iiAxpt *rJ MXottof on the
jitumey at far as the sea X. A. 5. 1. 1. In this arrangement the emphasis is on
the DDon, as something definite or previously mentioned, and the attributive ia
added by way of explanation. So to^i xina -tBit xb>"«^ JtS^uri they tie up the
dog*, the tallage ones (I mean) X. A. 6. 8. 24.

1159. (3) Least often, the noun takes no article before it, when it would
have none if the attributive were dropped ; dwijp i a»<p6t the wise man (lit. a
vtan, I mean Me wite one). Thus, /uixo" raif rXiWi in the greater nvmber
ofbaUlet-T. 7. 11, vimiu iiit 8teis, ritaiu It itSpiiwoii roil d^aftiii I associate
jeich gi>d», I associate with good men X. M. 2. 1, 32. In this arrangement the
atiribotive is added by way of explanation ; as in the laat example : with men,
the good (I mean).

1160. A proper name, defining a preceding noun with the article, may itself
have the article : i lUcX^ i'A^ttfoAruit (his) brother Arethvsius D. 53. 10. Cp.
1142 c. Ad appositjve to a proper name has the article when it designates a
characleristic or something well known ; i Ti\uriira\a^i^n/H\iS7uun Solon of
ancient times mat a lover of the people Ar. Nnb. 1187, Jiafffwi- 4 M«7"p«*t Fasten,
the MeffarianX. A.. 1.4.1.

294 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [iiSi

1161. The genitive of a. stibBtantiTe limiting the meanii^ of an-
other substantive may take any one of four positions : —

a. ri tdD narpit ^(Oklor the father't book (very common). Tliiu, 4 ''•''

rtBrtiirruw iprri) the valour of the d«ad L. 12. 36.

b. ri^i^XlarriToOrarp^ (leas common). Thaa, 1, oUlU, Xlimm the hotue
0/ Simon L. 3. 32.

C. roO rarpit t6 pifOJo* (to emphasize the gealtlve or when a genitive has JQit

preceded). Thus, rfi vtinft ri iiAytSot (A« grtatniu oftht victoTy X. H. 0. 4. 19.

d. tA fiifi^er r«£) rarpit (verj common). ThlU, i^ T6\ta rwr Xt7Anwr lAfr

q^ntfry o/ tft« tptakera L. 13. 41. The genitive of the dividsd whole (ISOS)
is BO placed or ae In c

N. 1. — A Babetantlve with no arUde la HOmatimeB followed by the article
and the attributive genitive j ^1 aair^r lirrn r^r Btm^drrai going to Ae tnw
(namely, that) of Xenophon X. A. tl. 4. 19. Cp. 1169.

1162. The order bringing together the Mine forma of the article (tv'*'«I>™
warpit /St^Uoi;) ia avoided, but two or three articles of different form may etand
together: tA r^f raS (afrarrDt T^rqi l>Yor the wort of the art of the iOool-«iT4eT
P. PoL 281 a.

1163. The attribative position Is employed with the posBeaeive prononna and
the possessive genitives of the reflexive and demonstrative prononna (1184), adrli
meaning lame (UTS), and rfit expressing the turn total (1174).

1164. Twoormoreattrtbutlvesof asabstantivearevariouslyplaced: (1) th
rat dXX&i 'AptatLitii riUit to the Other Arcadian eitiet X. K. 7. 4. 38. (S) ri ir
'Ap(s9l9 Tj tdO iiM raS Aucalou ltp6t the tanctuary 0/ Ljfcean Ze«$ In Are^ia
P. B. 685 d, (8) ^f Til- fwl rf ariiuiTi roD Xi/iimt rTinO trrn rir (ripor wtpytt

to the other tower at the movth of the harbovr which tnu narrow T. 8.90.

(4) it tS oUlf tS Xo^^JIdu ri rapi rb 'OXufimur in the hotttt of OhorvMes
by the Olj/mpieum And. 1. 16. (G) iri rur it ri 'Aalf riXntr 'EXX<rrIiu>
from the Greek cities in Asia X. H. 4. 8. 16. (S) rpit rj)r in Tfjt £i«Xui
Tui 'AB^raiur nryiXiiT jtaioirpi^far with regard to the great failure of the
Atheniant in Sicily T.8.2. (7) ri t»xm ri fuufiAr ri rirwo the long eouthem
wall And. 3. 7.

1165. A relative or temporal clause may be treated as an attributive : 24X«r
i/dtit Toit attt afrrot irdp^rtut Solon detested men like thte man here D. 19. 264.

1166. Position of an attributive participle with lia modiflera (A = article,
N =z no»n, P = participle, D = word or words dependent on P) : (1) APND :
Tir i^Mer/it&ra tlrtvnr rg T6\tt the danger intending over the State D. 18. 176.

(5) APDN : rc>»i npurrqiimi rg riXn nrjdroio D. 18. 179. (3) AUPN : Tir
T4TtrSrt\«np.<rTdrraiiMunr D. 18. 188. (4) NADP: troitiorlxaSir^lurTiiw
. . . KaraiavXiiiaoiUrrir irarrai he has in readineMt a force to enslave allO. S. U.

1167 a. Especially after verbal sabstantlves denoting an aetton or a state an
aitrlbatlve prepositional phrase is added without the article being repeated : rj^r

fU7dXi)P HTpartlir 'A^nluv real tvv fuMiixM' it tJ-^vwrn the great l^ptdition of
the Athenians and tluir allies to Egypt T. 1. 110.

b. A word deflning a tubatantivlied participle, adjective, or inBnitive may

ii7>] THE ARTICLE 296

be placed befon Um utlole lor ton^iaria : jcot rtOrm rwh dS^at nXoO^r aid in
aitl itnttntott thote who htnt lenowltdg» of this D. 67. 66, rtirtiw r*ti inrrha
uiiA tA0 ofpotfta of that T. 7. 76.

Predicate Position of Adjectives

lUa A predicate adjective either precedes or follcnrs the article
and ita noun : ov^ i iv^p or 6 &y)ip tro^ot the man is toise.

TbnSidrtXtrrg rtcndr/rn^ar thef retirttt toUh their victory iaeompUte T. 8.27,
f rXI|> (x"*' t4> n^oXifr wftA Ai> Aeod bare X. A. 1. 8. 6, rat rpiiptu d^tJXiwar
xn^ thqf lowed t)/lA« •Afp« utttout their crew* T. 2. 93.

a. This iB called tbe predicaM podtioD, which often Lentb emphasis.

1109. A predicaM adjective or mibatantlve may tbuB be Uie equlTalent of a
diiue ol a complex aenteDce : iSiwarar r^r ntpl alrrur ^r4uT|r naTaXfl^oimr
tkei vUI leave behind a remembrance of themtelvet that will never die 1. 9. 3,
iripm -wivar n Ath tA rrpdm^w ke asked about how large the force ions that
he VKU leading (, = rifrerTi ail Tivrpimiijiiiyoi 2d47) X. C. 2. 1. 2, ra/ Juti-rMv
riw iaiit/dx"* ^^' irf*inrli,r tXapat Aej/ received the leadership JTom their allies
(being nilling) mho were willing to confer it 1. 1. 17,

1170. A predicate expression may Ktand iualde an attribDlive phnse : i tfiiif
(pred-) XrrAfuKx ytupyit he aho is caBed a sklifiil agriculturist X. O. 19. II.
lliis is common with participles of naming with Uie article.

1171. The predicate position is employed with the demonsuatlTea airtt,
lit, ittiKit, and f/i^H, A^i^ipat, ixiTipoi, and Isarrot ; with th« poascMlve
gEnitiTea of peiBOnal and relative pronouns (1186, 1106) and of aOrti (1201) ;
witho^r^ meaning h2/ (1209 b); with the genitive of (he divided nhole (1306),
u re^Tur «l wXttrrpi the most of these X. A. 1. 6. 13, ol ipttrei rSr rtpl atrh
the bravest of his companions 1. 8. 27 ; and wttb *a> meaning all (1174 b).

a. This wise man is a(rm i ito^iit drfp, h to^ Mip bCtoi (and also i ca^
•Irwdr^p)-

PECULIASITIES or POaiTION WITH THB ARTICLE

1172. AdJectlTea of Place. — When used In the predicate poeilion (1168)
(Npat (ht^h) means the top of, |iirot (middle) means Oie middle of, l>xai«(
{erteeme) means Oie end of. Cp. auntmtu, mediiu, extremus.

AttrOutttt PoMlon PridieaU PotOtm

t4 b^r iK,, the lofty mountain *'^' '* "^ 1 "« '"-P "^

t4 tfot Atfior J the inoBnIaiH

i,,a^iy.pi the central markst i^iiypi Uhe centre of

t^ 1 • r- ^ dTopa liiini the market

i i^X^r^ -^" the farthest Uland ''^^'' ] '*'" "^,^^"1'' °{,

' * ^ ^ -^ 4 rijant irxirii the island

Thos, rtpl ixpau ratt x'P'' X'V^^ gloves on the fingers (^points of the
tanilj) X. C. 8. 8. IT, Sttt iHvoo raC rapaStlfov >ci fimvs (hrough the middle of
ihe park X. A. 1. 2. 7. The meanhig of tbe predicate position la also ezpresMd
by (ri) itper roO Spovt, (t4) ^ar r^i iyep&t, etc.

296 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1173

1173. |i^rot, ii)uair|. — (1) Attribntive : A iiirat rait the only whi, bI liiiUtiai

X^TEi half-favoun. (2) PredicaW : iiint 6 rait (or i raa /liroi) rmlfti the
boy playl alone, fjnurvt i ptot (or 6 /Sfvi liiuaui) hdlfofUfe, rd Apiiara r& liiiinL
half of the char iota.

a.^i%: (I) Attributive: b airit dr^p tht vane man. (2) Predicate: air^ 1
ir^p or & Ariip atrbi the man himself.

1174. vat (and in the strengtliened forme drai, fi/irai all together), a. In
tlie attributive powtioa irai denotes the wbole regarded aa the aum of all iu
parts (the sum total, the eoltective body) : oJ rirrtj roXirai the tchale body of
eitisens, i) rita 2i«\Id the whole of Sicils, droitTHMi t-o*i irarrai MuriX^ralaut
to put to death the entire Mitylenean population T. 3. 38.

N. — Hence, with numbera, ol nirrtt, rJt oiifwam In allt i^tiam tnX x^^*"
Dl i-drro 1600 in all T. 1. 60.

b. In the predicate (and uoiial) position xai means all: Tirrn at TaXiru or
(often emphatic) ol xoXItbi rirrn all the citizens (individually), rtpl rdrrai
Todi 0cDi)t ilatp^icairi cat tit Srie'ar rl)>> w6\iy i^fuiprilfdirir they have commitlfd
impiety towards all the gods and have sinned against the tchole Slate I.. 14. 42.

C. Without the article : rdms roXiTai all (conceivable) citizens, fuv^vadiit-
m nirrat irBpiireut hiring every conceivable person L. 12. 00.

N. 1. — In the meaning pure, nothing but, irSi U Btriclly a predicate and hu
no article : tinXi^ •ppmipoiiuKit ini wirrur roXtnlur hemmed in by a ring of
guards all of whom are his enemies ( = nirrtt 1/^ S>r ^poufwiriu roX^^uol tlci)
P. R. 570 b. So wava. rnmli utter baseness.

N. 2. — The article ts not used with rSi It the noun, standing alone, -would
have no article.

N. 3. — In the singular, rat often means every : air o-oi iraira iSJt rfhropoi with
you every road Is easy to travel X, A. 2. 6, fl, rata Si\aria every sea T. 2. 41.

1175. CXot: (1) Attributive: ri Sknr arpdreuna the ■whole army ; (2) Predi-
cate : SXov ri tTpiTtvpa (or ri ffTpdrti/ia SXai') the army as a whole, riir rCitTa JlXiir
the entire night. With no article : S\or trrpiTtviia a whole army, 5Xa aTpuTtiiutTt
whole armies.

1176. Th.e demonstratiTe pronouiiB ouros, oSe, txtivK, and oArot a^f,
in agreement with a noun, usuallj take the article, aod Btauid in
the predicate position (1168) : ouros a dy^p or d Av^p oCtos (never
6 ouTos A.vrip) this -man, avri^ b hrqp or o 6.vi)p outos the man himsetf
(6 QVTos dvijp the same man 1173).

1177. One or more words niaj separate the demonstrative from Its nonn:
i TtiTcii tpat Toii d»9pi^ev the love of this man P. S. 213 c. Note also rfl* otalur
Ttrii tUv ittlnir Some 0/ their slatxt {some of the slaves of those men) P.A.33d.

117& ooTot, 5&t, (Kcivo« sometimes omit the article.

a. Regularly, when the noun Is in the predicate: atrij (otgj Invj) iroXoYfi
let this be a sufflcient defence P. A. 24 b, eluai <fiil>> rair^r rarpUa ttrat I think
this is my native country X. A. 4. 6. 4.

b. Usually, with proper names, except when anaphoric (1120 b): itiTrti
e«uin>ilii|( that (well-known) Thueydides Ar. Ach. 708. S

1= C.oo^^li.'

iiS4] THE ARTICLE 297

C. URully, wfUt definite nnmben: rairm rpiijam iwis lAcM thirty mtnae
D. XT. 23.

d- Opdoiully, wbeD a reUUve claose follows : iwl 74* Ti)rji ^Aifur, it i ol
wmripn intuf H4Jwi> itpdrtivur tee kavt eomt againtt Ihi* land, in mhleh our
/atherM conquered the Xedes T. 2. 74.

e. la ihe pbnue (often contemptuous) oCtm drip P. Q. 606 c ; and in other
eipressioiis denoting some emotion : ii^pttwot tlrrtfft D. 18. 248.

f. Sometimes, wlten the demonatraliTe follows lla noun : hrlypaiiiia riSt T.6.
61). So often in Udt.

f . FieqnentLy, in poetry.

1179. Am^i iii^iTipoi both, ixdrtpat tach (of two), horror each (of seTeral)
ha*e the predicate poelUon. But with tuaafoi ttie article Is often omitted : csri
T^r iiiJpir inianiw (day hg day and) every day, naS' itdariir iiiiipir every day.

1180. The demoHBtraCives of quality tjai gKantitg, TetoCrai, roibaSe, ToanBrti,
TMivSc, T^Xucoi^ai, when they take the article, usually follow it: rSr Tooo6rur

lel TMoitTur iyaSaw of to many and gueh bleatngt D. 18. 306, rolh-o t6 rDuin-»
l9ot tveh a practice as this 21. 12S. i 3«(ra lucA a one (OSQ) legnlariy takes
the article.

«. Bot the predicate position occurs: rcra^^ 4 rpiirni TopovMiH) irpit rir
riKtiiar >i/rX«i 10 great teat the fint ormomcnt which croued over for the war
T. 6. 44.

1181. An attribatiTB, tollowing the article, may be aepanted from its noun
by a pronoun : 4 rdXtu 4^£r iiiiaa our old nature P. B. 1B9 d, i^ mHi avri) Mk
(for avrif 4 "(H) Ufa) tAf« narrou rood X. A.4. 2. 6.

1182. Possessive pronouns take the article only when a definite
persoD or thing is meant, and stand between article and noun : ri
jfior /^jSAiW nty hook, rh. ^/lirtpa. fii^kia OUT books.

C But nameB of relationship, r6\ti, varplt, et£., do not require the article
(1140).

1183. The article ii not used with poHseasive pronouns or the genitlTe of
personal and reflexive pronounH (cp. I1B4, IISS) :

a. When no particular object is meant : ifiir fiipfJar or fiipxtar /wu a book of
mine.

b. When these pronouns belong to the predicate : fuArrl)! Y^n ah\ I Aatw
hteome apv^il ofyourt P. Enth. 6 a, q6 \6yavt iiiauroS \iyurnot ipeaking word*
of wty oion D. S. 41.

POBITION OF TKB OENITIVB OF PRONOUNS AND THE ARTICLE

1184. In the attrlbative position (llo4) stands the genitive of the demoiutra-
tlve, reflexive, and reciprocal pronouns, ri rnfrw pifiXlar or ri pi0\lot ri rcirev
hit book, Ti i/iavTaO ^i^Xloi or ri fiipUow rb ifiavroO my oum book; furn-^/i^aro
Tf/r iaVToS Svyaripa mt tit ralSa alfTijt he sent for his daughter and her child
X. C. 1. 3. 1.

a. Hie type rb PiffUar to&tbv is rare'' and suspected except when another
aUribntlre Is added .- rj fBr Cfipti t»6tov )). 4. 8. The types ri pifi\l»r iiuarroO
(Udt e. 23} and t» atrtS ptftUof (T. 6. 102) are rare.

298 STNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [ii«s

UU. In tiM predktto portion ■ta&di

a. The geoitin of the petaon>l prononiu (whotber partitive or not): H
fiifiXior mn (mil, aAroD, etc), or turn (cau, ah-sO, eto.) rl PifiXIcn when othet
voTcU precede, m tt fx« »» r^' i3(X^ifF who ko* yawr tMer (o w(r« Aod. 1. SO.

b. Tbe genitive of the other proooona tued ptutltlvely.

N. 1, — Homer doei not nae the article in tlie abore caaea, and often emjdoyi
the orthotone tonna (riti ^a cXM tAf ^eot /ame r 21t). Eveu in Attio
JfioS for ;iMr ooooTB (iiieO rd ^oprfa m|r uore* Ai. Veep. 1308).

K. 3. —The dlHerenoea of poaitlon between IIU and 1186 ma; be thua Ulna-

tt**^' Mt hook U pnttf : nUr Jrr< t4 JSi^Xigr «»<>.

nUv fori fiBU t4 ^iflUar,
Jfy prstty boot .* rft nU* /hit fitfiKlor,

Iheil read ttefr booJ:* .* tA JowAr fiifitJa tmytynirtmiri.

IHTBKkOQATIVBI, UJMt, ««X4t, iUyo% WITH THE AKTICLB

1U6. The inteiTogiitiTfls rlt, roui« ma^ take th« articlfl when a
question is asked about an object before meotioned : SO- rw 8q
JiMiKi, i fcZSpc, &vrdfM$a Kpivar. 4AL fi xou ; SoOB. Sow at laat we
can decide thoie qwatiotu. P&. (The) what gueationaf P. Phae. 277 a.

1187. So even with a peiaonal pronoun : A. iiOpa SJ) «iM i^fid* ... B. •-m
X/v<'( *«i roftA rltai to«i Mi I A. Corns kOKer traifkt to m. B. Wkithir
doyau nMONand wAoonyou tAal/amtoeometo (yon being who) f P.Lya,203b.

11B8. UiAat olAer. —i lX>«i in tbe slngnlar nioaUj meana tke rtM (^ dUq
'EXXii tA« rett o/ Oreeee); in tbe plnral, IA« otkert (ol IXXm *EVXii»(i 1A« other
(eetert) tfreei*, hut iXXgi'EX\i|iKf oiktr (alfl) ffrMki). A subatantiTlzad adjeo-
ttva or participle luoally ha> the article when It stands In apposition to ol IXXh :
raXXa ri rnXirtil tke Other civic offoirt X. Hi. 0. 6. On axXoi, 1 AXXm (aotne-
tlmea (rtpat} heeidet, see 12T2.

1189. wsXii, ilklft : ri wb\S luually means the grtM{tr) part, •! roXXoI lie
multitiute, tA«TOl^rcrotMl; rXilam aeveral, ol rXiIam lAc m^jorfty, tAe man;
T\tittn eery man^r, si rXcivrai (ft« most,' dXI^w /«u, ol 4X1ym tJl« oI^jrarcAj (as
opposed to b1 roXXel). l^ote rsX«t predicalire i ^*1 /<1^ nXXi tA xpA isAm Ac
•aw that (Asre tso* iiAandanee ofneat X C. 1. 8. 6.

PRONOUNS

THE FKBSONAL PBOVOUNB

1190. The nominative of the personal pronoun is usually omitted
except Then emphatic, e.g. in contrasts, whether expressed or implied :
JmI 3^t ifui. >A 0i\tTt xti'AtrAu, iyta avy i/uy ifnoM nnoe you are not
Kiiling to obey me, I will Jbllow along with you X. A. 1. 3. 6. In con-
trasts the first pronoun is sometimes omitted (930).

llftl. Wliere there la nooontissfthe addition oftheinQnoan may itnngtbeii
the *erb i *( ^iitt roOre 0ti\n Iwoxfti^tt, ri U ToirriBtn My* tfyou do not mM
to reptf nn to thU, tell me then Z. C. fi. 6. 21.

iigS] PERSONAL AND POSSSSSIVB PRONOUNS 299

1192. Thitfvnmi/uGtipeljMii <fi^ and the aooented fotnu of the immonn of
tbe ■eoond penon (S26 a) m lued when emptiMla Mid uiually after prapoal^
tioOB : Kol rtlrb tfii «vtA f Swicdi im lal tiffin rap tiioB and aJUr pmatUng o*
m» jroN g<ne nw pUdgsM of faith and reeefiwd them from me X. A. 1. 0. 7. Cp.
1ST N. 2. On the reflexive lue of the penoual prouoaaa of the Snt and secoDd
penona, see 1821-1224.

1193. iyii, ai (i^, ah) kre nrely used of %a Imaginary peiaon (' any-
body ■): D. e. 17, X.B.A. 1. II.

1194. Tbe nomlaative of the pronoun of the third penon li replaced by
iainti (ol abeent petsoiu), Kt, atrst (of preeent pereona), i iUp . . ,i U (aX the
be^nning of a eeutenoe), and by afrii in contnutt. Tbe oblique oaaee of tbe
foregoing replace oE, etc., which in Attic proae are naually Indirect reflezlTes
(1228, 1229). at and f in Attio proee oocor chiefly in poetioal paMagei of Plato ;
in Attic poetry tbey are perwinal ptononna. The prouoiui of the third penon
ii Teiy ntM in the oraton.

1195. Homer oaea fe, eT, etc, m pereonal prononn* (= a<r«0, atrf, etc., in
Attic), in which cue they are enclitic : JiA /uvrarfnrr, r^v U ripi ttifiat dy the
aHofdivtiuUioii,vil^ehFh<MbtugaBetoMm AT2, Homer ^ao neea fa, iil,eui.,
either aa direct (= faimD, etc. , ISIB) or ■■ indiiect reOexif ea ( = otroO, etc., 1336).
la the former caae they are orthotone ; In the latter, either enclitic or otthotone.
Thna, at watSa fcuiira ylniTQ he begat a ton like unto hinueff S 800, ad nri
tifir iiuJef at l/rnti AtnQf he aoy* thert U no one of the Danaane litt unto
himtelf I 806. Hdt. agreea with Horn, except that iC, ol are not direct reflezivea
and otthotone ; r^lvi (not r^i) la lefiexlre.

For the article with a poaaeaalve |>rononn see 1182-118S.

1196. The poaseflsivfl pronouns (330) of the first and seooud per-
sons are tbe equivalents of the possessire genitive of the personal
pronouns : tftm ^ fiov, trot '= trmi, ^fimpof ^ ^I^^Vi i/urtpos = Sfuav.

a. When the poaaeaslTes refer to & definite, particolai thing, they have the
article, which alwaya precedea (IIBS); the penoual pronouns have the predicate
poeition (1186). Dlatlngoiafa 6 i/iit if-CXot, i ^IXai i Iii6t, i ^Xai ftau My friend
from ^(Xm iiiM, ^IXsf «iau a JHtnd of mine.

b. A word may atand In the genitive In appoaition to the peraonal pronoun
implied in a poaKaaira prononn. See ftTT.

1197. A pooKarive pronoun may have the force of an objective geniUve
(cp. 1331) of the peraonal prononn : fMf rg i/tv ottt offrietuUh^for me Z. C.
3. 1. 28. (#(XU 1, fftif nanally means mffriindghip (^for other*)).

use. The possessive pronouns of the first and second persons are
sometimes re&ezive (when the subject of the seuteoee and the pos-
sessor are the same person), sometimes not refieziva.

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

1199. riRBT AND BBCOND PBRSOHB SINQULAR

1. Not reflexive (adjective my, thji (your); pronoun mine, thine
(t/oura)).

l|iAt, v^ : ipi tAw ifiir ^o* Ae tea mg friend, ipi rir ^f waripa the Me* f 0>r
fattitT, arifyti rhr tfiir raripa he love* my father (or tJf waripa rir l/iiw or
ror^pa ti* iiiir ; or rir rtripa luv or /lav rir vaTipa), ol iiwl i^ai^iol n*\-
XfoKt it rUf ruf •firo-ar my ej/ei will proee to be more beautifvl than gowt
Z. S. 6. 5.

2. Reflexive (my ovm, thine (i/our) ornn).

a. Vavrafi, o-t«vroe, in the attributive position (veiy oommoii) : fXofSar rir

ilunrroO /ufBir (or Ti» /lurMv rir itiavToS") I reerived mjf (oion) pay, r6r
iSt\<pit rir iitavroB littitfa I sent my (own) brother Aet. i. M, xirl ruil
ravT^i nnuri iJrl rati i/iah 7(X;i; art thou laughing at thine own mimty
and at mine f S. El. 879.

b. iyM, vit (leas common): ari^yt rir tiiir waerip* I love my (own) father,

cTipritn T^ir ~rj)r lapipa you love yoHr (own) tnother, 4 'm4 'V*^ nty w(fe X.

C. 7.2.28, <lS«X*4i T^t ^rpJt rflt Mi brother of nty mother Aad. 1. 117.
C l|iit>«4«e, rAtairoe(pofltiaftl}: rir ^/lir d^roPrar^M ((346, aO.T.416}.
d. |W«, •«v(rere): riv rnr^ fuv Ant. 1. 83.

N. — When the possMBor is not to be mistaken, the article alone is pUeed
before the sabattuttlTe uid the poaaeealre or reflexive prouonn 1b omitted (op.

1121). Thus, rr4prfiu rir var^pa gOU lOM your {OWO) father, trtpyti rirrurif^
he loDM hit (own) father, rr4py»vri rir wtrtfa Aey love their (own) father.

1200. FIRST AND SECOND PERSONS PLURAL

1. Not reflexive (adjective our, your; pronoun ours, yours).

«. %iiTip«t, ifinpat: i liiUrtpat ^IXoi our friend (more common than i ^Oot
i^fiAr), i i)iJrtptt ^fXof yow friend (more common than i ^f\«t hiiAr), t^r^
«ir wMoiium 4 f'l^' 4 rQr iiurtpm nrbi making a eeareh for yom or for
anything of your* L. 12. 80,

2. Reflexive (our own, your own),

a. 4|pinpoti i^irtpot (common) : aripyQiiew rbr tuiirtptr ^tXar we love o*r own

friend, eripyrrt rir tittrtpaf ^IXar yon love your ovm friend.

b. Usually the intensive AirOr Is used with 4/i^(pof, fyi/ripot in agreement with

4)iur (i^af) implied in the poMCBsive lorms. This gives a stronger fonn
of reflexive. ITiaa:

Io«e our own friend, alxMniuw. 4 rflr ^(Xwr nvt 4 4/i^cpar a^Sr a Ao<u«
ri(fl«r /or »oma on« of our friend* or our ow» P. Q. 6U b ; arifywrt rir
b/Urtpar airSr ^IXov you l0V6 your own friend, SM^tirt Tobt ralSai nit
biitrtpovt airlit teach your own childrtn 1. 3. G7.

C. ^ipAv, ifSir (rare): alTiiiiMearoitraripu i/nAw l^ u* aeenie our (own) father*
P. Laob. I79c.

d. f||Ul* otrAv, jfiA* aAtAv (very raie) : SInuor 4>ia> . . . ^abwte »ir« 4fid>

■km] possessive feonouns 801

uirAr rfi 3if«t Mttrrtpmit it i» not right for u* to thtne ournlvei inferior
to our OVm fame T. 2. 11, rd rflr tm» «il tA l>n&r o^fir tirXa {A« «{m4)-

«enti bo(A (t^ |KH>r Aoncf and poMrMJnM X. C. 0. 8. 81.

UOl. THIRD PERSON SINGULAR

1. Kot reflezive (Ats, her, its).

a. aiTafl, *Arf|i, «h«fi in tfae predicate poaltlon (very common) : 6pa rif ^flwr

odroC (a^i) J «ee hit (Aer) JViend, yiyiiaKur airaS rjgv drS/xlar Jtnowjn^
U> eoura^e P. Pp. 810 d.

b. kilvoa, etc., or rvtrw, etc. in tba ftUTibuti7e position (very commoD): ifid

Tiwiiiii" ftlXa*, of rir ialrov I tee my frind, nothla, d^UfoOrrot rap' 'Apuijgi-
Kol r^i'tolwi'ffTparulr tAey tomt upuitA ^n'oeutand Aflaimy X. A. 2. 2. 8,
wopttiXiMi rtvai rili rv^aii /riTificlwir Ac tummoned iome of hi* /Mendt
L.8.11.
C t*, 4, •*, Horn. Mt, ii, Ur (poetical): rfiv T^fw Mr ttik imfXXat A« nunrfed
her beeauM of her beautg X 282. Horn, hu <{ rarely for airev, ah-^t.

2. Beflexive (his oum, her oton).

M. lMi«e, kvH^i, in the atlriliutlTe position (very common): vriprfti rhii tauraO
^Aar A« lovei hit own friend, ip^ rti* 4ai/T^i /nrripa the eee« her own motlter,
ri/r tairroB iStX^w SlSuai Xt69ji he gtves hit own tister in marriage to Sen-
thea T. 2. 101, A^plfti YvnTra r j)* ^avraO he mifutet hit own wife And. 4. 16.
This \b the only way In prose to express hit own, her own.

b. tt (Uf): poetical. Sometimes In Homer If (^ii) lisH tbe setue ol MM wUfa
no reference to tbe third person (1230 a).

C It aAtoS, ««rf|l (poetical): Sw a^iB rarfpa (K20i).
1202. THIRD PERSON PLURAL

1. Not reflexive (their).

I. airAr tn the predicate position (very common): 6 ^fXat afr^r their fHend.
b. 4Hi(M>r, *«4Tair In the attributive position (very common): i re^wr (^ittlrar)

pDiM lAeir friend, Sid r^r iKtltuii ArvTlAr beeaHte of diatrutl of tAem

And. 8. 2.
C r4««r (Ionic): Hdt.6.68.

2. Befiexire ((AeiV ovm).

A lavrAv (very common) : rr^n^iwt roh hurar ^IXaut IA«tr Ioe« (A«fr otm
friendt, rdc ^ovrwr nintdx'" Kan^pirovw Ihty defpittd their own alliea
XH. 4.4, 7.

k *4<npoi •trA*. the iotendTe aArdF agreeing with r^Of Implied In r^ifwi
(common): o/t/Tai roOf c^rripovt air&t HuniaOrrat Ihty call their own

tlaeet a* witnettet Ant. 1 . 30,
C v^Av >frrAr, without the article (rare) : t1 Jfj/ura aiarpdrrBrrai ff^fiv ■^Oo

TpM^pB^^Mi (A«v contrived that their own uamet were added L.13.T8.

C^. 1234. Tbr t^O* a6ra* iB not ueed.
t, •^Jrtpot (rare In pioae) : Boiurot iiipoi rb a^tpot TKptlx"ra the BoeMan*

/umtihedtheir<MmconttngeiaT.i.i3.

808 SYNTAX OF THE SUFLE 8ENT£NCE [1M3

•; v4** lo *^ pradloMa portion, oeoaaioiiBUy In Tlincrdlde*, u i«dt £iiwidx«M
MMur» t^Of thet wn ttfraid 0/ their oum aUUt 6. 14. Cp. 1226 N. t.
1203. BmniiMay of poMtMlve tonna (poetical forma In panadie^).

a. NotnflazlTe

t\g vin BBu your 6*i/r^p«f VAf

JUf, JUr (h Horn., iva) a^roD, -^ th«iT a^rHr

(ct Horn., nre) { (jt^tf Ionic)

N. — iiikhtfm and Wrqni m« more oaed than ^nx&p and £fcdr.

b. lUflexiTO

mv own '/lAi {ifiia ah-aB, -4i) //wirtO, -4i
(Ay OWH ffit (fit ch-oO, -4t} ftauraO, -^i

own (<t) (tt adroO, -^f) «ai^oO, -ft

our own 4fi^(pa> it/i^n^poi 0^3*

your Otn ifi^i^t v/i^tpat atrHr
their OVn r^ipn r^tpm airSr
(ran) taurQr, r^tl*

(mr.).

N. — In the plontl 4fA> ah-Br, 6fi(>>> ah-tlti' are replaced by ^/i^rtptt ah-Sr,
bli4rtptt ah-Sv, and theae forms are commoner than jfitirtfei, hithtfot. r^H-ip«
abrSw la leas oommon than tairr&w. ff^tptt in poetry may mean mfne own,
(Mm oim, yoar oun.

THE PBOKOUN avnfe

UOt. aMt U used as an adjective and as a pronotm. It has three
distinct naee : (1) aa an intensive adjective pronoun it meana telf
(ijMs). (2) Aa an adjective pronoun, when preceded by the article,
it meaas same (ideti^. (3) In oblique cases as the personal pro-
noun of the thira person, Attn, her, it, them (eum, earn, id, eoa, etu, ea),

1209. Only the firat two uam ne Homeric. In Horn, airit danotea the
inlncipal person or thing. In opposition to what Is subordinate, and Is intensive
by contrast : airir ml ttpdvorra the man himttlf and hU attutdant Z IB (cp.
inhriir' sAriv col rulat P.O. 611 e and see ISOBd). On adrii as » reSexlve, see
1228 a; on tirit emphatic with other pronouns, see 1238(L

1206. a&TOi ia intenaive (»^f)

a. In the notaintUive case, when standing alone: afrrqt ri^ y^r
ItrxoK they (the Athemane) seued the land theiMdvea T. 1. 114. Here
avrat emphasizes the word understood and is not a personal pronoun.

b. In any case, when in the predicate position (1168) with a sub-
stantive, or in agreement with a pronoun : airii i dyijp, 6 iyifp atmic
ths man himtelf, atmn roC dy^wt, roC dv^poc aJfmC, etc.

1207. WitL a proper name or a word denoting an indlvidnai, the article ii
omitted : odrlf H/wr Mtnon AfMM^T X A. 2. 1. G, xpi ah-vC paaOJ^ in front
of Ma Oreat KinQ himtelf 1. 7. 11.

1206. The word empbaalMd may be an obUqna oasa whloh most be anpt^iad :
n»T* M Ml ah-it i BpAvIMf T^ Qtrwti^Y 79 ■>! adroit (wfl. To?t eMvoXaK) ^Om
«r Mrai and Smaidat AtewfT olnt fsid tiM A< ame at a (ritid to lh» eoaalry

iMfl] THE PRONOUN odrw! 808

of At Tke—aUan* ana to As nte$$aliaiu tkcmwlm* T. i. 78, 3*; ralruw toCt' 1t%
tnrMr («ril. 4fi£t) ah-stft tM mtiM foTthviah eouidcr tAi* moUer ovrMivei D. 2. 8.
1309. 8ped»l rendetingi of the emidiBtio ah-it :

a. Br a»ei/. fw it»elf, unaid^, otofM, etc: a^ 1i dX^ffna (JW ncuted InilA
Am. 3. 207, rA«Xiar raO x<^i> o^ri jto^^r ^PX* A« jfrtater part o/Aeplaet
ma $trong in itMelf (^wUhmt utifMal fortiflostion) T. i. 4. On a^oA drS^i
men and all, see 162fi. <i6t6 with a noun of any gender Is used by Plato to donote
the lOitraet idea ol a thing : airi ri xaXtr ideal btantj/ B. 493 e, utri tuwurint
Had JMMbx 472 c.

b. Jvtl, m»relv; airi ri Nur fiut what tM mini X. A. 4. 7. 7, airi riU*
Merely tAt* T. I. 1S9.

C FolKMorflif .- Arlpat at ad rait /ti) irm\»uiUteu airti hicr par tioufi men
uko uninvitsd turn tAefr anu eiMn ivalnft tAoae teAo do not ojjL tftelr owM-
ance T. 4. 60.

d. The Matter (Bald \ty a papil or ria*e) ; A^rii 1^ tAe JTofter (PTthagona)
Mlita((pMd£i;it)Dlog. Laert. S. 1. 46, rlta»r«ii Ah-jf. rliA^rii, ZiM^nrt
IF»o'* IAi»/ rft« JTotter. ir*o'» tke Mattert Sotratet Ar. Nub. 880.

e. With ordinals : ifii»^ rfwr^tvr^t SiimTin a^it ft« uot cAown enti0|r wftA
sbu other* (f.o. UnHelf the tenth) X. H. 8. 8. 17.

1210. After the article, in the attributive poeitiou (1164), avr^ in
any caae means aartu.

Thna i BiVrit ir4/i, nu^l; ^6) dH)^ i atrii lh« same man; toO a^roO S^mw in
tke tame mnuner T. i. 68, ri a^i ro^n tAue eame Aingt X. A. 1. 1. 7, •! tpAi
tirwtf aid T>^ tSv sh-Ar U70V1 Urorrn lAa people viho are eonUmtaUf making
the tome tpee^het o&owt the tame thtngi Ant. 6. SO.

a. Soasapradloate: tr^ iiirb atrit ttfu, t^U U lurmfiiiCytTt I am the tame,
it it gou 10AO change T. 8. 81.

lan In Horn, ntrtt, without the article, m>; mean tA« mom : Vx' " 'V
eirliw itir, ^rwtp si IXKtt and ka glided him by the tame loajf at the othert had
goM # 107.

1212. abrit when imemphatic and standing alone in the oblique
cases means Aim, h«r, if, them. iKeXtvor aM/v iwUvai they ordend her
to dqtart L. 1. 12.

1213. Dnemphatio a«raD, etc., do not stand at the be^nning of a aentenoe.

1214. o^eO, etc., usnaU; take up a preceding noan (the anaphoric use):
loUfxit M Ad|inrrsr Xtyi *^t air'-i' luJtt «iiMDioa(n(r Damnipput, I tpeak to
him atfollaait L. 12. 14. But an oblique oaoa of adrAi te often suppressed where
Eogliih employs the pronoun of the third person : ^/n-irXaf iritrur rifr ftAiait
Iwirtiae having tatlffi^ the rtUndt of aU he iiimieted them X. A. 1. 7. 8.

121s. ohvS, etc., may be added pleonasticallj ; iropd^ o^ut Ty i-di-rv, ipirt-
rrn A* Iwwtit, niiiiaxt'iw etri IxeUl try, tinee lam an txeellent AorMtnan, to he
an ally to my gran^aAer X. C. 1. 3. IB.

1216. aArsS, «us., are emphatic (= sfrsO rstfrou, etc.) in a mi^ olanae whftn
followed by a relative clause referring to airoi, etc. : itpiiKu airi. Si tttf fvirv*

804 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [m? !

Ti Ifii Ipyt rXtfffTDu A{iii roitlfu clrsi yon have metUiotted (Ae veiy qualUf for
which I ootuideT my work worth the highetl price X. M. 3. 10. 14. Bnt when
the islative clause precedes, airai, et«., are not emphatic: oui Si iiii tvputtor,
nnrd^v airalt iwoiifiar they bultt a cenotaph for Chote ahom they coald not

find X. A. 6. 4. 9.

121 T. ofrsu, etc., are oft«D used where, after a oonjauction, we expect the
oblique caae of a relative pronoun ; S fii) oISc it^S' fx« atrcS a^pir/iiv. which he

THE EBFUiXIVB PRONOUNS

1218. Direct ReflexlvM. — The reflexive pronouns are lued directly
when they refer to the chief word (usually the subject) of the sen-
tonoe or claase in which they atand.

■ywMi atavrir learn to know thyneif P. Charm. 104 e, r^Trn iaiiriir the kitU
herself X. C. 7. 8. 14, n9' iavrait ^vKmaiiutm rik Ar\a mxpiSaaat nil b^i a^oiii
offer dtliberiUing apart by eAemwIoef tAey turrendtred their arm* and themtelsrt
(their persoiu) T. 4. SB. Lew oommonly the reference is to the object, which
often stands in a prominent place : reit Si ripMlmiii d^^cev ^1 tsi lain-ar w6\m
but theperioeei he ditmixted to their own cititt S.. H. 6. &. 21.

1219. The direct refleiiveB are reguUr in prose If, In the same clause, the
pronoun refers emphatically to the subject and Is the direct object of the main verb :
iiiavrir (not i/ii) traiva I praise myielf. The usage of poetry is freer; rWm
ri iiiSMtaf 4 W i' mourn thee rather than myweV B. Hipp. 1409.

1220. The refieiivaB may retain or abandon their differentiating force.
Contrast the third Example in 1218 with wapiiogar a^t attain they turrcndered
(themselvee) T. ?. 82.

1222. The personal pronouns are sometimes used in a reflexive sense :
Bpitr^rrit ri lau col X^arroi roXXl nol di>d{ia titoi wailing and aaying much
unworthy of tnyeelf P. A. 88 e (contrast itaiati nWi ni drdfia ffurroS yau will
hear much unworthy of yourielf P. Cr. 63 e), ioica ^i dSiimrM ctroi / (teem to
myseff to be) think I am unable P. R. .338 b (less usually 3oi>3 inairrf'). 8o in
Bom.i iyir ipi Xtaa^u I will ranaom myself K 378. Cp. 1195.

1223. iftil, ei, not iiMvrit, vnvriii, are generally used as subject of the infini-
tive ; iyii ottuu koI i/U tal ci ri dJiHiv toG iSiKiurBai rdnof itytieSai I tMak that
both irou and I believe that it ii worse to do lerong than to be wronged P. G. 47i b.

1224. The use In 1222, 1228 generally occurs when there is a ccwtrau
between two persons, or when the speaker is not Chinking of himself to the
azclnaion of oUiers. Cp. 1974.

1335. Indirect Reflexives. — The reflexive pronouns are used indi-
rtdly when, in a dependent clause, they refer to the subject of the
main clause.

iv,Goog[c

i3>9] REFLEXIVE PRONOLNS 306

'Op/tfT^ Itaan 'AtfirnJovi ittvrbf naTiytir Oregtes pertaaded lh£ AthcTliattt tO
mCore Aiin(w(/') T. 1. lit, i^SKen i KUapxot drar rh rTpdrmiia rpit iatirir
lx*a rjt' yinn' CUarckua vriahtd the miire army to be devoted to himielf X. A-
3. 5. 29. Cp. sibt, se.

1226. Wben Uie sabject of tbe leading clauae Is not Uie aaine u the subject
of tbe subordinate clause or of che sccuHative with tbe iuflnltire (19T5), tbe
context mDEt decide to which subject the reflexive pronoun refers : (d taT^ofai)
(♦f . . . imTtlSarra toJi t^ui aftrir , . . oEtui SiaTiSimu rait 4airT^ rvrirrai jr.r.X.

the accuser taid that, by penuading tht yovng, he (Socrates) so dilated hi* (i,e.
Bocnues'} ptfpi'*, etc. X.M.I. 2.62.

1S27. ^trroC, etc., are rarely used as indirect refleslTes in Bdjectl?al clauses:
ri p«>d7ta, Ira rpit ri fauTSr (yi) ^r, ivtl^arro they took Vp the wreekt, at
■uiDy at were eioae to their own land T. 2. 92.

1238. Instead of tbe indirect iavrtv, etc.. there may be used

a. Tho oblique caseu of a^it : irtipa7o rait 'he-iintmn r^i itatriripy^t rofm-
Xfcir he tried to dirert the At/ieniaat from their anger againtt himtelf T. 2. Sfi,
When JovrsG, etc. precede, airoo, etc. are usual Instead of the direct reflexive ;
tM* JovtoC ifiinrit itt^altrro Swipdrft tpit TOitt iyu^Crrat ah'y Soeratet tBOt
teont to tet forth hit opinion to CAow who converted with him X. M. 4. 7. 1.

b. Of the forme of the tliird personal pronoun, ol and ftfitfi (rarely ot, a^i,
a^Ar, and <r^i) . Thus, ■ipiira airiit tl i6e\iiaei Siitar^at al he atked her if the
would be teilUng to do him a lervice Ant. 1. 10, redi raHat itiXtiMir roi) Kipm
Stiadai SutT/idfM'Au r^ffif they ordered their boyi to atk Cynu to get it done for
them X. C. 1. 4, 1, u\titvfi yip i^iui uii^ luri c<plir roKtiialt for lAey urge at
to XMke war in eommon with them And. 3. 27, f^i; H, iwii!i) dE itp^mu rlir i-ix^r
d^ireSrftii r^i tit rbwor rtrk jai/iifior Ae taid that when hie toul had

departed out of him, they (he and othera) came to a mytieriotu place P. R. 014 b.
See lies.

N. 1. — r^ii may be employed In a dependent sentence if tbe pronoun is iueU

tbesabJectofaHUbordinatestaCement, and when the reference to the subject of the
leading verb is deuianded by way of contrast or enipliasis : tlvKyayiir rodi AXXoin
rr^Ttrro^ . . . \(yar itfKtvir airoiit 5ri tiiir S» (tto* a^itit ir/iyatr tJjjp STpvTii,t
4 Zno^Sr after bringing in the rest of the generalt he urged them to tay that
they could lead the army jnet at well at Xenophon X. A. 7. 6. 9. Here atral
i^i) is possible. In tbe singular ai^Ai is necessary.

N. 2. — Thucydidea often uses the plural forms in reference to the nearest sab-
ject: Todi iv/ifidxivt iSiSiirar eif-ur they were afraid of their own alliet (— ir^r
■JrAr) 5. 14.

N. 3. — favraS, etc., are either direct or indirect reflexives, «t and <r^fri are
only Indirect reflexives.

1329. oC, ff^i, etc., and the obliqne cases of sArii are used when the sub-
ordinate clause does not form a part of the thought of the principal sabject.
This is nsnal in subordinate IndicaUve clauses, and very common in St, and ut
tlsnsM, in Indirect questions, and in general in subordinate clauses not directly
dependent on the main verb : rUt »pArjS«o.i-, ot aplirt (1481) r«pl rUt norSUr
(Tirx«' i^irrn, ftitft^vi thry thought no more about their ennnyt, who were abteiU

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1.30

1230. The refiexire proDoun of the third person is sometimeB used
for that of the first or eeoond : Set ^^t ivcpiaBia iavrom we mMt oak
ourselvea P. Ph. 78 b, mumyytXXc roit cain-ou give orders to your men
X.C.6.3.27.

1231. Reciprocal Reflexive. — The plural forms of the reflexive pro-
noiiiiB are often used for the lecipiocal iXX^aw, dXXiJAoK, etc. : ^fuv
airoii 8uiX(£ojmAi we will OMverae with (punelves) one another D. 48. 6.

1232. But the reciprocal rnoBt be used when the idea * eEicb (or or with hlm-
■eU ' is expreiued or implied : fiaXXnv x^lpo""" ^' ^"< dXXifXvr lamii ij rott oAr-wr

ISfoti d^aAiM (= ij irl rofi a-lrroS luaaTot dfoflori) thep take greater pieotvre tn ont
another' f troubles than each man in Ais own good fortune 1. 4. 198, «i>T( yif
MvTori nvre dXXriXoii iaoltvyoSirir thr,y an in agreement neither with thenuelvet nor
tetth one another P. I'hae. 2-'(T c. Reciprocal and reflexive may occur In the same
senteDce without diSeience ot meaning (0.46.9). The leflexiTe is r«golarl;
used when there is acontraat (expresBed or implied) withdXXoi; ^r^lviw iavrcSt
/t&\\»f i roll iWoij irSpiiroi! they envj/ one another more than (tbej envy) the
reMt 0/ mankind X. M. 3. 6. 16.

•trtt BHPMATIC OR RBPLBXIVk WITH OTHBR PROHOUHa

1333. Of the plural forms, ^/lu* airQr, etc may be eltLer emphatic or
reSeifve ; airSr 4^uiv, etc. are emphatic on); ; but npUr airiit is only reflexive
(■fc-af a^^r is not used). In Horn. aiT6r may mean myulf, Ihytelf, or htmtelf,
and * atrir, ol aArf , etc are either emphatic or reflexive.

1234. iiiiSr (A/iiSv, aift&r') a^Qv often mean 'their own men,' 'their own
side ' : t"^^' aipSir rt a<>T(iy lal Tur (u/tMxvr KaTaJiiwSrra leaving a gorrUon
(conaistlDg) of their ou>ii men and of the alliet T. 5. 114.

1235. air&i, in agreement with the subject, may be need in conjQDCtion
with a reflexive pronoun for the sake of emphasis : aiVrsl t^' iavr&r fxiipmir
they marched by thejoselvei X. A. 2. 4. 10, a^ii . . . iaur/it ir liieif tXTtriStn
ToG rrpaTaxiiou he located hiinielf jn the centre of the camp X. C. 8. 6. 8.

123S. airii may be added lo a personal pronoun for emphaais. The forms
4iii airhr, airSr fu, etc. are not reflexive like iiiaarir, etc Thus, toAi raStca rtiit
iiudt iex^f *■>' '''^ airrii i^piae he diigrao-d my children and intuited me tnj/tetf
L.1. 4. Cp. a^4> iiai Irlaavro he sprang fipon me myself E46G. Cp. 329 D.

1337. The force of airii thus added is to differentiate, lliiu liii o^ir
means myself and no other, iiuarrir msana simply mytelf withnnt reference to
others, b/iat aArot!< is the usual order in the reflexive combination ; bat the
differentiating yoa yourselves (and no others) may be i/iSt a^fdi or adroit bpir.

i«4«] DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOnNS 807

THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS
12381 The demonstrative pronouns are used substantiTely or ad-
jectively : oStos, or ovrot h Av^pi '^'s mun.

1239. A demonBtratire pronoun maj agree in gende^ with & substantive
predicated of it, if cotinecced witli tlie substantive by a copMative verb (BIT)
Mpreased or understood; alrii (for toCto) dpfirrij St3a9ta\lalhta U the be»t
manner of leitrning X. C. 8. 7. 24, (( if tu Taiiriji' (for roSro) tfpjjnjr IniiKaiifiirti
bui (f any one reganU this at peace n. B. 0.

a. But tbe unaltrscted neuter is common, eepecially tn definitions wbere the
proDoan ia the prediCEkte : roOr' fanr 4 ditatixTiint IMs fs (wbat we call} justice
P. B. 482 b. So Bix J^pti tbBt" iarl : iB not thii intolencef Ar. Kan. 21.

1240. ovros and SSt this usually refer to something near in place,
time, or thought ; ixilvo^ that refers to something more remote, o&ro&l
and iSt are emphatic, deictic (333 g) forms (this here).

1241. Distinction between oJrot and SSi. — SSt hie pointa with emphasis to
■n object in the immediate (actual ur mental) vicinity of the speaker, or to
Bomething just noticed. In tlie drama It announces the approach of a new actor.
U( is even nsed of the speaker himself as the demonstrative of the first person
(1242). sJrot itte may refer to a person close at band, but leas vividly, as In
sialeinents in regard to a person concerning whom a queHtiou bas been ashed.
When Sit and otroi are contrasted, IB* refers to tbe more important, d^oi to the
len important, object. Thus, iW lit fiaaiXtih x^P*^ bvt lo I here cornea the king
R. Ant. 155, aurji r Ant vm) here the (the person you ask for) it near thee 8. El.
1474, col toOt' dnxinv tin rOrS' iXyttn ao that at obey both in them thing* and
in thingt j/et more grievout S. Ant. 64. See also 1245. olrot has a wider range
of use than the other demonetralives.

1242. Mils used in poetry for /7.i: t^SH= i)wS) yi t^r,, tr, while I am
live S, Tr. 305. Also for tbe pngBesaive pronoun of the flrat person : tl tu nigi'
initrriu Xfryouf if any one thali hear theae m^f uiorda S. EL 1004,

1243. aurat is sometimes used of the second person : rlt ofn-M^ ; aho't thta
hrrff ( = mho are you f) Ar. Acb. 1048. Soineiclamationa : o5rot,r( iro«Hf you
thfTft what are you doing f Ar. Ran. l&S.

1244. TdSt, rdit rirra (raBra irdiTa) are used Of something cloae at hand :
oil 'Ittrtt rdSt tlrlw ttie people here are not Ionian* T. 6. 77.

1245. mrtK (rotovrot, roo-ovrot, and trurus) generally refers to what
precedes, oSc (rouKr&, roawrSc, nJAiKotrSe, and <>>&) to what follows.

Thus, Toiiit IXtfir he apoke at folloiea, but raiaSra (roo-oPr-o) tlriir after
tptaiing [Ami. Cp. 6 KOpot itoiirat to5 Tuiffpiau tomuth Toidac wpii airbr IXtfi
Oyruanfler hearing thete winls nfGobryaa amwered him aa foil/net X. C. 6.2.31,

1246. fat sItm meaning (\) he too, liteteiee; (2) and in fact, and that too,
points back : 'AyIbi *»t ZutpiTTft . . . lat TD^w iTtSar^iiy Agiut and Soeratet
. ■ . they too irfre put to death X. A. 2. 0. 30 ; dx^ur irrl . . . lal Tuirar rertipat
it Is characterittic of men toithoM retourcea and that too worthleaa 2. 6. 21 (cp,
1320). On ical r.Cr. see M7.

808 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [i»47

1247. But oEtoi, etc. sometimeB (especially in the neuter) nfer to vbat
follows, and S3t, etc, (chough much less nfwti) refer to wlint precadea : pari H
Tolhor tlrt ToaouTor but qfl»r Mm Iv. tpoke a$ folloWM X. A. 1. 3. 14, r«taiT*vt
Uyniif tWtr he tpoke a* follows T. 4. 68, roiiSt wap»xi\tv6iitKit exJiorting them
(Aim (as set forth before) 7. 76, uSi dirrcuair they bury them tknt (as described
before) 2. 34, o^TUf f^n the ccae ie as follows (often in the oratoie) .

1248. cStm (especially in the neuter ravro) may refer forward to a word or
sentence in apposition : in nij tootij ii&ior imdrrai, ri wilaepTai that theg mag
not consCder litt alone (n&mely) what they shall tvffer X. A. 3. 1. 41. So also
ovruf. intirat aUo may refer fomSird : intin tepSalnrir int'rai r^r iSai^r thii
(namely) pleasure, it regards as gain P. H. 606 b. Cp. 090.

1249. oEtm (roioSmt, etc.) is reKulnrly, Sit (rwiiSc, etc.) lurel]-, lued as tlie
demonstrative untecedeiit of a. relatiii': trar Toiaura X*7!Ji, a aUtlt ir ^V""
4i*/)*rw» whtn yon say siich things as no one in the world would aay r.0.4T3e.
tvTM is often used witiiout a conjunction at the beginning of a sentence.

1250. When lit retains its full force the relative clause is to be regarded as
a supplementary addition : oG ij) oSr tnta X^u raiiTa rdrra rif iarl but Aere'j

tAe reason uAjr / say all this I 1*. Charm. 16t>a.

1251. The demonstratives otret, etc., when used as anteeedenls, have an
emphatic force that does not reproduce the (unemphatic) English demonetm-
Uve those, e.g. in you released those who were present. Here Greek uses the
participle (reAt rap^rrat istMiraTt L. 20. 20) or omits tbe antecedent,

1252. 0^01 (less often 4Ktiroi) may take up and emphasize a preceding subject
or object. In this use the pronoun generally comes first, but may be placed
after an emphatic word ; roi^arrti (Tt^Xtjii hlni4>laa.rro fit TttSrijr draypi^tw Toh
<\iTi|plout having made a slab they voted to inscribe on it the (names of the)
offenders Lye. 117, t Ar cTvpi, ffi^uH rn^aii whateeer you say, hold to it
P. R, 346 b. The anaphoric a^it in its oblique cases is weaker (1214).

1253. Tovra, Tai>ra (and afrri) may take up a BubstantiTe idea not expressed
by a preceding neuter word : rf Tfi^'EXXdia ^XmB^flowaip- inult it oit' luiir airiXt
fitfiauOiar mrri (i.e. TJjr i\tu0tplif) xfho freed Greece ; whereas we cannot seeiire
this (liberty) even for ourselves T. 1. 122.

1234, aCrot (lees frequently iriinn) Kiined of well known persons and things.
Thus, rojfvlot oEret this (famous) Gnrgias H, Hipp. M. 2S2 b (cp. Ule), to^tovi T»*t
ff6»^rrat these (notorious) iiiformTS P, Cr. 4.'i a (cp. (gte). Tin 'Apt#T€lSifr
iutrer that (famous) Aristides f). 3. -li , KaXXfar hiinr that (infamous) CoIIiaf
3, 19. isttf^i may be used of a deceased person ( I'. H, JW8 a).

1255. When, in the same sentence, and refcrrinu In the same object, i^ot
(or iKtim) U used more than once, the object thiix dpsii^nated is more or less
emphatic : 6 6t6i /(aipoi/itm Tifruir rdr mu> toiItihi x/>4''" inipirats the god
deprives Ihetn of their senses and employs them as his mfnltfen P. Ion 634 C
For the repeated oSrat (/letMt) an oblique case of airit is usual.

1256. To!ho iiir . . . T«i^o H first . . . secondly, partly . . . partif haa,
especially in Hdt., nearly tbe sense oi rb lUr . . , ri Si (1111).

i»«3] DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 309

laST. iMtvoi refers back (rarely forward, 1248), but impltea re-
motenesB in place, time, or thought.

Kijfiit mftipf ^affiUa Kal ri itiu/i Ixttrtr ariifnt Cyrut perceives the kinff and
the band around him X. A. 1. 8. 20, r^n /ntm ArtxXA>twu' pimder are thipi toQ-
iH^ttptouaT. 1. 51.

1258. Jnifot msy refer to mj person other than the speaker Euid tbe peraon
■ddreMed ; ami may be employed of a peraon not detlnitely described, bat
lefeired to in a supposed case. It Is even used of the person already referred
to by a^if in an obliqua case : ir atr^ JiJyc dpyipiar lal rtlSjit iitinm if you
ffiee hint money and pertvade him V. I'r. ^llOd. tuimt, when so used, uaaaily
stands in a different case than n^ii. Tlie order iKtiwti . . . ahti Is found :
wpit iiir itilrein tix tlrtr t,ii txoi 7rii*iT|i', d\A' dT^irc^ftr airait ht did not ttU
Ihem the plan he had, but dismissed them X. H. 3. 2. 9. *

1259. When used to set forth a contrnst to another person, intim may eren
refer to the subject of the lending verb (apparent reflexive use) : h-ar tr rp rp

ipSvtf ilnAt tiiaGrrit n tal tiictltat ^iBtiparrat tfftrn they (the Athenians) see V*
(the Dorians) in their land plundering and deslraying their property ( = T-4ioifT(a»)
T. 2. 11, A(fc rsiT XaXJsfwi Sri JJisi clrt Ara\(a<u irWiiiHv itilroMf ourt nXtfuTr
M^m he said to the Chaldaeant that he had come neither teilh the detire to
destroy them (Uttrovt is stronger than adroit) nor because he xoanted to rear
vUKOum 5.C.8. 2. 12.

1260. In the phrase Si* tmmi. Sit marks a peraon or thing aa present, iuirot
t person or tiling mentioned before or well known : S3' itiinct ^il lol I am ht
8.O.C. 188. Colloquial eipressiona are tow ^wfw there it is! (lit. tAto U (Aat)
Ar.Acb.41,andTU' <»;» Ituldyouso K Med. 98.

1261. DteUactloo between olmt and iKitvo*. ~ When reference is made lo
one of two contrasted objects, oEtoi refers to the object nearer to the speaker's
thoagfat, or to the more important object or to the object list mentioned. Thus,
Arr* ToU Sr iucuircpDr iuintt tdii ypiiitiaair ^ roiroa Twrtiiwrc so Aal you must
witA more justice put your trust in those lists (not yet put in as evidence) than
in these muster-rolls (slresdy mentioned) L. 16. 7, <l Si rs^i aat Soni luitpiii
cIpu, tutlrt (ararjipTor bul if this appear to you unimportant, eonsider the foUou-
la; X. C 6. 6. 29. iairet msy refer to an object tlist has fmmedlal«ly preceded :

tal (f<r) ri ^Arirrar di(, ^j) ri ^trrsr, itarrat Xiystr ■ ir ttxtrt fiir (I.e. tA
^f*r*r) yif 4 ^^tt airii ^oiitiTui, ^1 rairTe Si (ri pfKrtanir) Tip XJ7v Sti vpod-
■ft^tai tiSdiricaiiTa riv iyaSbr roXtrii* it (s necessary that all should speak vihat is
alieay* mom salutary, not uihat is most agreeable ; for to the tatter nature her-
self atll inellne; to the former a good eltiten naist dtrea by argument and
inmructlon D.8.T2.

THE INTEEEOGATIVE PRONOUNS
12S2. The interrogative pronouns are used substaoUTely rtt;

vhot or adjectivelf T(s dnjp; w^ man?
1363. The interrogativeB (pronouns and adverbs, 340, 31d) are

used in direct and in indirect questions. In indirect qaestions

810 SYNTAX OP THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1*64

the indefinite relatives Sotk, etc, are generally uaed instead of the
intem^atives.

tI j^Xcrai iiiilt xfi^'^ai; for what puTpote dott he detire to employ vif
X. A. 1.3. 18, oiK oMb 8 ri Ir rii xp4'«Ts s^nt I do not know for ahoi Mereiee
any one could employ tliem 3. 1. 40, A. *ifiJ«' iartr ipa r^t iiM«n ; B. twifAta ;
A. Wliot'sthetinHofdavf S. iromuk), what time of day UU t At. A.y.l4O0.

N. — For paculiarities of loUirogalive Sentences, aee S06Q, 266&.

1264. tI ia nsed for rln as the predicate of a neat«r plural subject when tbe
general reealt is sought and tlie subject Is considered as a unit : raOrs St r( tartr r
but these things, what are theyt Aea. 3. 167. rira emphasizes the detaib: riw'
eHw 4(rTi TtSra i D. 18.246.

1269. t(i asks a qne^lon concerning the claae, rl concerning the nature of a
thing : tlwi T(t li rix"> '"y nf what tort Che art is P. G. 44(1 a, t1 to^ipoatrii, t(
nXirucJi ; viKnt is temperaaer,, lehat is a slateamanf X. M. 1. 1. 16, ^Mmv Si
tKowHy i ri (fir eonadtring what envy is (quid tit invidla) X. M. 3. 9. S.

THE INDBPINITB PEONOUN8

U66. The indefinite pronoun rt;, rl is used both anbetantively
(some one) and adjectively {any, »ome). ris, rl cannot stand at
the beginning of a sentence (181 b).

126T. Intheamgular,TtiiBUsedinacoIlectiveBeDse: Mervb(H^(for(itqrbo(^);
cp. Germ, man, Fr. on: dXXd iuir« rit ixtiyot but everybodj/ detests him D. 4. 8.
Uavrbt Ti», irSt ra each one, every one are genemlly used In this sense, rii
may be a covert Bllusion to a known person : iilma tie iJtir' some one (i.e. you)
will pay the penalty Ar. Ran, 654. It may also stand for 7or we. Even when
added to a noun with the article, tU denotes tbe indeflritenesa of tJie person
referred to : Srar 5* 6 cApwi -wap^ tii, i/iuv Jo-tii Irrir iiyf/uir ktX. bvt whettever
your master arrives, whoeter he be that is your leader, el«. 8. O. C. 289. With
a iubetanlive, rlt may often be rendered a, an, as in trepit m iuriarrit muAher
dignitary X. A. 1. 2. 20; or, to eKpreaa indeBniteness of nature, by a sort of.
etc., as in (t iiir Stal Tifit ttait ol Sai/ioutt if the ' daimone* ' are a tort of godt
P. A. 27 d.

1268. With adjectiTes, adverbs, and numerals, tIi may strengthen or weaken
an assertion, apologize for a comparison, and in general qualify a statement :
teirtt T» irip a very terrible man P. R. 696 c, m^u^ r.t a sort of ffod-Jly
P. A, 30 e, rx'Sit Ti prettf nearly X. O. 4. 1 1, rpiitorri nrtt about 30 T. 8. 73,
But in lapefinrri tiki i6o tiftt the numeral is appoaltional to rtWt (certain,
that is, two ships joined them) T. 8. 100.

1269. rlt, tI sometimes means somebody, or tomething, of importance: ri
Sttilt Tifii (tni tin seeming to be somebody D. 21. 213, fiaf/ rt X^tir he teevied
to toy tomething of moment X. C. 1. 4, 20.

1270. t1 is not omitted in Saoiiaarbr ytyta what yov say it wonderfkl
P. L. 667 a. 4 T» 4 aM(li meana few or none X. C. 7. 6. 46, 4 rt 4 cMlr Httle
tr nothing P. A. 17 b.

i,vGooglc

JtkXKf frvoc, ^kAA^Xotv

THB ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS ak\(K AND frtpov

1271. oXAoc strictly means other (of several), Jhtpof other (of two).
On 6 £Uu>t, ol .IXAoi see 1188.

&. Frc^M is sometimes used loosely for dXXof, liut always witli a sense ol d^-
fmnet ; wben so used it does not take tbe article.

1272. iXXoi, aiid Irip^j (rarely), may be used attrlbntively with a sabalao-
tiie, which is to be regarded as an appositive. In this sense they may be
rendered baldei, moreover, ai vrell: ol *\Xoi 'A#jjkiioi the Athenians at well
(the athera, i.e. the Athenians} T. 7. TO, roii 6r\h-ai la) roi)i dXXoti Iwwiat the
k'iplUes and the cavalry heiidea X. B. 2. 4. 1), yipuw x^P*^ i"^' ir/pou rtarlav an
old man eomes viith (a second person, a yonng man) a young man besides
Ar. Eccl. Si9. Cp. " And there were also two other malefactors led with him to
be pat to deatb " St. Luke 23. 82.

1273. iXXai otiier, rest often precedes the particular thing with which It la
contrasted : ri t« i\\a trt/iriet cai /ivplavi ISuK Saptiiioit he gave me ten thou-
sand dartes besides honouring me in other aays Oil. he both honoured me in other

fays and etc.) X. A. 1. S. 3, ry itir AXX^i arparf iiaixaiej, iKarbt Si rcXrairrai
xpniitra With (he rest of the army he kept quiet, but sent forward a hundred
peltasts T, 4. 111.

1274. dXXoi followed by another of Its own cases or by an adverb derived
from Itself (cp. alius attud, one . . , one, another , . . another) does not require
tlie second half of the statement to be expressed ; AXXot AXXa \iyti one says
'■lie thing, another (soeu) another X. A. 2. 1. 16 (lit. another other things). So
i\Xai iXXut, dXXcit IXXdMv.

a. Similarly trrpof, na vu/t^itpa irdpa Mpoot wUiri one calamity oppreitea one,
nniMer others E.Alc.893.

1275. Aft«r 6 AXXoi an adjective or a participle nsed substantjvety nsuaJly
rtqaires tbe article : raXXa tA lUyixra the other matters of the highest moment
K A.22d. Here Ti ixiyurra lain appositiun to raXXa (1272). ol JXXoi rd'Tit oJ,
rsXXa -wdrra rd sometimes omit the final article.

1276. 6 axXoi otten means usiial, general: wapi rbn dXXa* Tpiwar contrary
to my usual ditposition Ant, 3. |3. 1.

THE KECrpKOCAL PRONOUN

1277. The pronoun jAA^Aoii' expresses reciprocal relation: As ff
tiScnjr iUijXovf if ywii nui 6 'A^paiara^, ijoTrafoiTO iAAijAovt when
Abradatas and kin wife sate each other, they mutually embraced X. C.
6. 1. 47.

1278. To express reciprocal relation Greek uses also (1) tlie middle forma
(1720); (2) the rrflexive pronoun (1231); or (3) a substantive Is repeated : drjjp
fXt» ir3pa man /ell upon man 0 328.

Od Relative Pronouns see under Complex Sentences (2493 B.).

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

THE CASES

1279. Of the cases belon^ng to the Indo-European lacguage, Grreek
has lost the free use of three : instrumental, locative, and ablative.
A few of the forms of these cases have been preserved (341, 1449,
1535) ; the syntactical /wntrfioiis of the instrumental and locative
were taken over by the dative ; those of the ablative by the genitive.
The genitive and dative cases are therefore composite or mixed cases.

N. ^Tbe renBODB tbat led to the foruiatiou uf composUe caaas are either
(1) formal or (2) fanctional. Thus (!) x'^Pf '» '"'"' ila'- *n(i locj \iv«i
repreaenia the instr. \iyoit and tJie Inc. X^im ; in oonsonaatal Htenu both Abla-
tive and genitive ended in -at ; (2) verbs of ruling may take eilhur the dat. or
the loc, hence the latter case would be absorbed b; Uie formet ; furthermore
the use of prepositions especially wilb loo. and instr. naa atteadeu by a certain
indiflerence as regards the fonn of the case.

1280. Through the iufluence of one construction upon another it
often becomes impossible to mark off the later from the original
use of the genitive and dative. It must be remembered that since lan-
guid is a natural growth and Greek was spoken and written before
formal categories were set up by (iraminar, all the uses of the cases
cannot be apportioned with definitenesa.

1281. The cases fall into two main divisions. Gases of the Sub-
ject: nominative (and vocative). Cases of the Predicate: accusa-
tive, dative. The genitive may define either the subject (with nouns)
or the predicate (with verbs). On the nominative, see 938 £f,

1282. The content of a thought may b« expressed in different ways in dif-
ferent languages, Thux, rtlBm n, but persuadeo tibi (in classical Latin); and
even In the same language, the same verb may have varying consirucUons W
express difCerent shades of meaning.

VOCATIVE

1283. The vocative is used in exclamations and in direct address:
iZcv Kot 6toi oh Zeus and ye gods P. Pr. 310d, avOpiovt ray good fellow
X, C. 2. 2. 7, The vocative forms an incomplete sentence (904 d).

a. The vocative is never followed immediately by ti or yif.

1284. In ordinary conversation and public speeches, the polity w is uisaslly
added. Without w the vocative may express astonishment, juy, contempt, a
threat, or a warning, etc 1'hus duofeit A^xW i ^'v hear, Aachine»T D. 18.
lai. But this distinction is not always observed, though In general & has a
familiar tone which was unsuilcd to elevated poetry.

1385. The vocative is usually found in the interior of a sentence. At the
beginning it la emphatic. In prose 1^, in poetry u, may stand between the voca-
tive and an attributive or between an attributive and the vocative ; in i>ovtr)- ^
may be repeated for emphaais.

I9M] THE GENITIVE 318

1286. In bite poetiy a predicate adjective may be attracted into the vocatlv«:
SkfSM icdpt yinu bleited, oh boy, mayi»t (Aou bt Theocr. IT. 60. Cp. Uatutine
paler ae« /ane libt»ti\u audit Hor. S. 2. 6. 20.

12S7. By Uie omiagion ot ir6 or (m>< tbe nominative with the article ma;
■tand Id apposition to a rocative : u itSptt d1 rnpAi^rj you, p'«ntl«men, who art
pmtnt P.Pt. SSTo, w SSpi tai el iWei nipirai Ot/rusandthe rett of you Persian*
X. C. 3. S. 20 ; and in apposition to the pronoun in the verb : i rati, dnXoMn
b&9, attend me Ar. Kan. 521.

1388. The nominative may be used In exclamations as a predicate vrith the
labject unexpreBaed : u Ttjtpii Btoli oh loathed of heaven S. Ph. 2&4, #Aot i
MtrAu ah dear Menetaus A IBS; and connected with tbe vocative by and:
htUut koJ Bijiu oh city and people Ar. Eq.273. In exclamations about a peiMm:
A Tmmwf oh tA« noble man F. Phae, 237 c.

a. olkai is regular in address; ofrDt, tI rdrx«ii » Salvia; Ao (ft«r«, I tat,
Janthiat, uAoI ii fie matter with you t Ar. Vesp. 1 ; i ofrroi, A/it Ao MeiY,
/ni|r, 4jax S. AJ.8B.

GENITIVE

1389. Tbe genitive most commODly limits the in»aiiing of sub-
Btantives, adjectives, and adverbs, less commonly that of verba.

Since the genitive has absorbed the ablative it includeB (1) th«
genitive proper, denoting the class to which a person or thing be-
longs, and (2) the ablatival genitive.

a. Tbe name genitive Is derived from ciuue genitivut, the eate of ortfftn,
tbe insdeqoate Latin translation ot yttucii wrOtit oate denoting the clatt.

THE GENITIVE PROPER WITH NOUNS
(ADNOMINAL GENITIVE)

1390: A substantive in the genitive limits the meaning of a sub-
stantive on which it depends.

1391. Tbe genitive limits for the time being the scope of tbe substantive on
which it depends by referring It to a particular class or description, or by regard-
ing tt as a part ot a whole. The genitive is akin in meaning to tlie adjective and
tn»y otten be translal«d by an epithet. Cp. rT/^aiot xp"'^'"' with xpwrouf ari-
^m, ^ipn raXti^u with i-aX^/iuit ^i0<it, tA (Spot rXiSfiou with t^ rSpoi T\t9pio.hr
(1035). But tbe use of the adjective Is not everywhere parallel to that ot tbe
genitive.

1393. In poetry a genitive is often used with ffia, litni, aSim might, etc,
intfead of the corresponding adjective : ^Iq Aio>i4S(at mighty Diomede E 781.

1293. In poetry Si/iaf form, tipa and rt^aX^ head, etc. , are used with a geni-
tive to expreas majestic or loved persons or objects : 'Ivfi^nit tipi S. Ant. 1.

1394. xp4f(a thing Is used in prose with a Renitive to express size, strength,
etc. : v^kcrfenfriSii rd^LroXii n xP^l''^ " '"T lifge mast of /lingers X. C. 2. 1. G.
Cp. 1828.

814 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [i^

1295. The genitive with lubetantlves denotes in general a coonectioD or de-
pendence between twowotda. Hiis connection must often bedeUrmined (I) bj
the meaning of the words, (2) by the context, (3} by the facts presupposed u
known (1301). The Bame conutriictlon may ofteci be placed under more than oue
o{ the differant cloaeee mentioned below ; and the connection between the two
■ubstantiveB ii oft«n bo loose that it is difiScnlt to include with precision all cases
under specific grammatical classes.

a. The two tubstantivee may be so closely connected a* to be equlTalent to a
single compound idea : reXturi roO plov 'life-end' (cp. life-tfme) X. A. 1. 1.1.
Cp. 1146.

b. The genitive with Hubstantives has either the attributive (I1M), or, id the
caaeof the genitive of the divided whole (1306), and of pemoual pronouns (1186),
the predicate, position (1168).

1296. Worda denoting number, especially nonierals or subetantlTea with
nuineraU, often agree in case with the limited word luHtead of standing in the
genitive : ipipot Hirirapa TdXon-n a tribute of four talent* T. 4. 57 (cp. IS2S),
h TBI mDi, al i^poifnvr Hv, ■ot«0u74jt(i Jletiny to the alilpi, lIBO of which were

keeping guard i. 1 13. So with ol /Uv, d1 Si in apposition to the subject (981).
■ QENITIVE OP POSSESSION OR BELONGING

1297. The genitive denotes ownership, posaessioii, or belonging;
4 oUia -^ Stfiutraf the house of Simon L. 3. 32, A Ki-pov otoXik the expe-
dition, of Cyrus X. A. 1. 2. 5. Cp. the dativi; of possession (1476).

1298. Here may be clasHed the genitive of origin : ol SdXuinii r6«uii the lam
of Solon D. 20. 103, ii inffroX^ toB *iMrirDii (A-' Ifttf.r of PftiVip 18. 37, cdfura
■watTolut dWfudv waves caused b) ait kinds of aindi B .196.

1299. Tbe possessive genitive is used with the neuter attlcle (singular or
plural) denoting aSaira, conditions, power, and the like : rl rur i^ipur Me
poioer o/(AeejjAor» P. L, 712d, t6 r^t rixi^f the function of the art P.G.<60c.
tA tqu Z6\arot the maxim of Solon V. T.ach. 188 b, SJifXa ri rUr »X^fu«r the
chances of war are uncertain T. 2. 11, t4 t^i iriXfui the interesU of the Stale
P. A, 38o, ri ToO Ji)^u ijiponl is on the side of the people Ar.Eq. 1216. Some-
Umes tbie Is. almost a mere periphrasis for the thing Itself : ri r^t rixv ehaitre
D, 4. 12 ri rgt iruT^plai safHg 23.163, ri r^i Arfai, Aridi}TDr' iinl the qualitp
of holiness, whatever U is 21.120, ri -rHi' vpiir^vTipur iniHy we elders P. L. 667d.
So Ti tbOtov S. Aj. 124 is almost = oDtoi, as roi^i la = iydi or i^. Cp. L. 8. IP.

1300. The genitive of poseession may be u»cd after a demonstrative or rela-
tive pronoun : T«i}ri fiou S.a^XXii he aUacks this action of mine D. 18. 28.

1301. With persons the genitive may denote the relation of child to parent.
wife to husband, and of inferior to superior: SouiiiJfJitt i '0\ipiiti ThKcydidfii.
the son of Olorus T. 4. 104 (and bo vlin is regularly omitted In Attic official
documents), Aiii ' kprtiut Artemis, danghter of Zeus S. Aj. 172, 4 Zjurudfuni
MfWrlxl Melistieke wife of Smirylhinn Ar. Ecct. 46, hvSit i *tpix\/cvi Lgdus.
the slave of Phereeles And, 1. 17, «l M^wnt the troops of Menon X. A. 1. 5. 13
(ol roG Hlrunt arpaTiArai 1. 0. II).

lyrj] THE GENITIVE 816

a. In poetry we m&j have an attributive ad jeettTS : TAa/ninai Attn ( = Hit
i TiXa^Oroi) B 6^. Cp. 846 I.

1303. The word on whicb the poaaeBslve genitive depend* ntay be repre-
i«nt«l by the article : dri t^i tairrar from their own country (771) 'l'. 1. 16
(cp. 1027 b}. A word for dwelling (oUli, iiiu>% and fiiso Ufir} is perhaps omitud
aim iw, tit, and BometimeB after t^. Thus, it 'Apl^ipom at Aripkron't F. Pr,
320 a, ir AartroB (*c<{. le/iy) at the tkrine 0/ Dionyiui D, 6. 7, ili Sttaetii^u
^T-ir to go to tchool X. C. 2. 3. 9, in IIaT/»(X^i>i Ip^ofuii / come from Fatro-
clat'* At. Mnt. M. So, In Homer, tlr(_tls) 'AlSia.

laoa Predicate Use. — The genitive may be connected with the
noon it limits b; nie^ins of a verb.

'Iwwatpdrtit hrl eUlit /irydXijf Hjppoeralet iM of on if^/luential home P. Pr.
316 b, B«un-c3v 4 TiXit Irriu the eltj) leitl belong to the Bototiam L. 12.58, 4 Z^Xnii
irrt tQi 'Afffcii ZeUa ia in Asia 1). C. 43, oiSi t^i ah'^f ep4-n,t i^inrro nor did
tkff belong to the lane Thrace T. 2. 20, i Siti<,ti toO ^ti^f^HaTet, raOr' irrlr the
clatue* in the bUl which he attack*, are these D. 18. M.

1304. The genitive with tint may denote the person whow nature, duly,
autom, etc.. It la to do that set forth in an tuflnldve subject of Uie verb:
wirlSf ^ptir ot xarrit, AW' irSpii ao^S 'ti* the tage, not ever) oiu, vho ea*
bfor poverty Hen. Sent. 403, Samt Smatov raOr' dm roXfrsu thU teemi to be the
duly of a Jvlt eUttm D. 8. 72, rOr tiKiirToit ivrl cal rl iavTdr aifittr col r<k -iHr

ifTTMit/rwr '^uffirtir it i» the eufton of conqueroTt to keep inhat is their oten and
lo take the poateinona of Uie defeated X. A. 8. 2. 30.

1305. With verbs signifying to refer or attribute, by thought, word, or action,
anything to a person or cUss. Such verbs are to think, regard, make, name,
Aooae, appotttt, etc.

ityliiB , . . ri I* iXXa r^t T^X^t deem that the rest belongs to chance E. Ale. 780,
Tflt iKeuftpttriTur attur n^irdcura deemed a daughter of a houte moit free E.
And. 12, iiii ypiipe rOr Irrtitir irrtptTrieifuirrur put me down 01 one of those
rko desire exceedingly to serve on horseback X. C, i. 3. 21, rfli Tp<lm;i riftut
rttariiUtot assigned tn the first class L,. li. 11, t^j iyaS^t r&xv* '■fl' r6\tui <Ihu
Titifiu I reeton as belonging to the good fortune of the State D. 16. 254, tl U
nm r4' 'Aalir iavrir wnaDrrai but if some are claiming Asia as their ovm
X. Ages. t. 33, M^fet tiiis iavrai tlrti he thinks that j/ou are in his power
X. A. 2.1.11.

GENITIVE OF THE DIVIDED WHOLE (PARTITIVE GENITIVE)

1306. The genitive may denote a whole, a part of which is denoted
l>y the nonn it limits, The genitive of the divided whole may be
used with any word that expresses or implies a port.

1307. Position. — The genitive of the whole ntands before or after the word
denoting the pan : rwr BpfuSiy wiXriurral targeteers of the Thraciana T. 7. 27,
■I SropM r Ar roXIrfl* the needy among the citix'.ns D. IS. 104 ; rarely between the
limited nonn and its article : ol rwr AtUor i^utnintroi. those of the vnrighteovl
mi« conw here P. 0. 5260. Cp. 1101 N. I.

.oog[c

316 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [ijoi

1306. Wheo all are incladcd there is no partiUoa : so in ovroi wAwrn all of
thett, all the»t, rirrafitt i/afU It/ur tkert leere /our of u«, ri rir rX^fM rir
jrXirwv the entire body uf Iht hopUte* T, S. 03, &r« ittri r<3r ifalur oi nMNf of

jfou as belong to the 'pters' X. A. i. 6. 14.

1309. The Idea of division is oft«D not explicitly stated. Bee thlnl esampla
in 1310.

1310. (I) The genitive of the divided whole is used with sub-
Btantives.

fiipot ri r^F fiappipwr BOmt part of the larbarianM T. 1. 1, el Aupi^f ^itAr
thoteofut mho are Dorians 4.01. Tbe governing word nuty be omitted : 'Vx'><
rar 'HpaxXttSAi' Archiai (one) of the HeracUdae T. 6. &. To an indefinite
substantive without the article maj t>e added a genitive denoting tbe q>ecial
sort : 4(paASt Il^p^qt rfif iit/ioTMc Pheraulai, a Fertiati, one of the common
people X. C. 2. 3. 7.

1311. Choiographlc Genitive. — r$t 'ArncQi ii Oli^r to Oenoi in Mtica
T. 2. le (or ii OlT<n]r riji 'Arriii^i, not it tqi 'ArrtK^ 01»«ifr), T$i 'IroXfat Asiy^
th« Iiocrion* tn 7ta2ir 8. 80. Tlie article, wliich Is always used with the genitive
of the country (as a place well known), is rarely added to the governing anti-
atanUve (ri KitMior r^t EA^lEf Cenaeum in Bvboea T. 3. S3).

1312. (II) With substantive adjectives and participles.

«J finest Twr irSpiiwur tAe mivtt among men D. 27. OB (but always oI tr^tt
irBpawot), iii>ro% tOf Tpurirtiir alotlt of the piytatU F. A. 32 b, iKlyot B^wr
feiB of them X. A. 8. 1. 3, ri3v iWar 'EXXi}rur i potiXi/itrot tohoetier of the rttt
of the Greeks so desires T. 3. 92. So rA naTamxpi atrQw nO irrqXtUov the part qf
the cavern facing them P. R. &15 a. For nihil novi tbe Qieek aays oMiw n»ir.

1313. Adjectives denoting magnitude, and some otben, may conform io
gender to the genitive, instead of appearing Id tbe neuter : trt/iar r^t y^ rV
roXXit* then ravaged most of the land T. 2. 66, rgi tQi 4 iplmi the bett of the
land 1. 2, This construction occnrs more frequently in prone tlian in poetry.

1314. But such adjectives, especially when singular, may be used in tlie
neuter : tUt 'Apylur \ayiSur ri wa\6 the greater part of (he pteJcsd Argtve* T.
6. 78, iri i-oX* t5» x<^pai "^er a great part of the land 4. 3.

1315. (Ill) With coiiipara,tives and superlatives.

^liOr i ytpalTtpoi the elder of us X. C.6. 1.6 (1006 b), ol rptcfiiraToi tSw rrpat-
TityStr the oldest of the generals X. A. 3. 8. 11, atrif wirrur irtpiirar rXiltT^
Xpiiiuf iTTttirdKTif) ine make use of imported grain more than all other people
D. 18. 87. So with a superlative adverb: i^ rout ipu/ri tm lr\a rawrbt r*v
arparowiSmi mg ship teas the best sailer of the ahole squadron L. 21. 6.

1316. In poetry this une is extended to positive adjectives : ifiiieUrrst
itlp^f conspfeuous among men A 24S, ^ ^l\a yuraiKHr oh dear among laomen
B. Ale. 460. lu tragedy an adjective may be emphasised by Uie addition of Um
same adjective In the g^tive ; ififtrr' dppib'w* horrors unipeakabU S. O. T. 46&
Cp. 1004.

1317. (lY) With substantive pronouns and numerals.

,ooglc

tjM] THE GENITIVE 317

tlfiiPmtrar,tl f oil tome o/ them and not othera P. A. 24e, ot DrrtporlX^^Ar-
rar rdp raJu^iJwv IhoK iif the enemy who were taken later X. A. 1. T. IS, atttlt
irtpdnft no one in the world P. S. 220 a, rl rov rtlxtvi a part of the viatt T.
T. 4, Til BtSr one of the godi E. Hec. 104 (rli 6*i% a god X. C. 6. 2. 12), t, rOv
woWiw one of the many thlngr P. A. IT a ; rarely after demonstrative prononna :
Ta&TOu rUt it0p<iwar to thete {of) nMn T. 1. 71.

a. With SKiyvi and with numerals Ari and <£ are rarely added : it rpiOi tr
one of three 8.Tt. 734. ii with superlatives is also rare, See also 1688. I c-

X318. The genitive of the divided whole may do duty as the subject of a
Suite verb (928 b) or of the inOnitive: (f^asar) iriiiciyrirat aipHi wpit 4itttovt
Aef *aid that some of their number aisociated with them X. A. 3, 6. 16.

1319. Predicate Ose. — ^r I' a^Sr 4aXr>oi anil among tkem viat Phalinvt
X. A. 2. 1. T, ZiXwr ti3v iirri irn-piOTOi iii\^ Solon teas called one of the Seven
Sages I. 16. 235, rQi iTowuriTun ir cfij it would be very Mrange D. 1. 26 ; and
often with verbs signifying to be, become, think, tay. name, ehooee. With some
of tbeae verbB tli with the geDitive may be used instead of the genitive olotie.

GENITIVE OF QUALITY

13aa The genitive to denote quality occurs chiefly as a predicate.

Mr Tp6wou i/ruxliiu being of a peaceful diapotition Hdt. 1. 107, ol Si nm rgt
aii^ yrAlttis iXl-yoi naTi^irfon bat some feie of the same opinion fled T. 3. 70,
rairra reviTAXXur iari X47u» this calU for a thorough elucusiion P. L. 642 a,
fcup^raT atrdf, lilj hraTipou roE XAyou, dXX" twrrifov roB piov iarlt contidvr, not
the manner of hit speech, but the manner of hit life Aos. 8. 168, tl iom mOr-a
nl Sa-wirtit /itydXrii aai rinir roXXdi' mi rpiyitaTtlit dm if thete matters Mem
to involve great expente and much toil and (rouble D. 8. 48.

a. The attributive use occurs in poetry : xV^w tiSMpar Edpiirat Europe
vttA Itt pattvrta amid fair trees B. L T. 134, Xiujc^t x'^><" rripu^ a wing white
a««uns(of whil«anow) S.Ant. 114.

1321. The UBS of the genitive to exprew quality, correspoDding to the Latin
genitive, ocouis in the non-predioate poeition, only when age or tize Is exactly
enmased by the addition of a numeral (R^nitlve of meaaure, 1326). The Latin
genitive of qoallty in muller mirae pulchritudinit is ezpreased by yurli eavpavli
(dXXM (or raC idXXovt), fvrti laviiaali IStXr, yiirii tx'wt Sav/iAvmr irx^^ui, etc.

GENITIVE OF EXPLANATION (APPOSITIVE GENITIVE)

1322. The genitive of an explicit word may explain the meaning
of a more general word.

'IXiau riXti E642, as urbt Soma*. ftXXai warrolair ittitun blattt formed of
wfadf of everf tort 1 202. This conntruction is chiefly poetic, but io prose
we find Hi ititfa xP^i" a montter (great aSalr, 1204) of a boar Hdt. 1. 86, tA (pt\
T^t'lrrAnp Mt,Ittone T. 4.46 (ver7 nre, 1142 c). An nrlirular infinitive in
the genjtire often defines the application of a substantivp ; iiutiia 4 roC srnrSai
tOirtt ■ eit titStw the ignorance of thinking one known what one doe» not kruno
F.A.30b.

318 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENl'ENCE [1313

a. Bat with traiia tbe penon or thing uuned U usoally In ftppoaltioa u
liofw ; T$ ti rtttririf iSifnir tttita KaiXlvrparar I gave tA< yt/ungett the itmM
CattUtratut D.48.71.

GENITtVH OF MATERIAL OR CONTENTS

1333. The genitive expresses material or contents.

Ifimt iibiTur the fence (coaBlating) 0/ (he teeA A 850, Kp^r^ Ifiiet Starti

a ipring 0/ sweet water X. A. 0, 4. 1, trupol atrev, ^iXur, \ltar heap* of eora,

mood, atvnee X. II. 4. 4. 12, ifantvia riXarrti ^6ptv six hundred taient* in tatta

T. 2. 13(cp. 1298).

1324. Predicate Vm : ore^divut ^ut Irrat, iXX' ot x^EwIoir crouiu tkm
were of rote*, not of gold D. 82, TO, iarpuiJini irrl Hit XlBev a road was pmed
With ttone Hdt. 3. 138, and often with verbs ot making, which admit, also Uie
Instruinentai datlre. Udt. haa rowwSoi iw6 and I* rmi.

QBNITIVB OP MEASDBE

133S. The genitive denotes measure of space, time, or degree.

drrd araSlur Tttx'i a wall eight tlade$ long T. 7. 2, rirrt ^iitpSr airla pro-
viiinne for fhe dayt T. 43 (cp. foua pedum qutndeelm, exUivm decern annnmm).
Leu commonly witb a neuur adJMtive or pronoun : irl lUya ixiipvar Buriiuitt
they advanced to a great pitch of power T. 1. IIB, tI Jifiii tone honour (aliguid
famae') 1. 6, d;i4x"V' tiiai/iorlai (_»omething i'lJlHite in tht wiff of hap}i(tteiu)
ij\flnite happinett P. A. 41 c (with omphaaiH on the adj.). But tiie phnsea fit
teuTo, lit TQvoOra iipiK4ffSai (4(nr, i\Be7r, rpevpalmtt, usually witli a peraoDa)
subject) followed by tbe genitive of abstracts are common : tit ravrt »piinvt
iipUire he reached auch a plteh of boldneu D. 21. 104, it rarri iK^t in uwr
detpottdency T. 7. 56, ir roirif rapamcu^i fn thit itage of preparation 2. IT.
mri tdOto iiaipoS at that critical moment T. 2. The article with this genitive is
unusual in classical Oreek : th toEts rfji iiXnc&t to thit Itage of l^e UG.3.
Some of these genltivea may also be explained by ISOS.

1326. Under the bead of meature belongs amounf ; tv^t iimZt Tpiaaiat an
income of two minae X. Vect. .3. 10. Cp. 12M, 1328.

1327. Predicate Use. — ^ttSA* irtit J th TpiAarra. when a man it Ihlrlf
peart old P. L. 721 a, ri Ttlxv 4' rraSUn Jrr^ the teallt were eight ttadet long

T.4.fla.

8UBJBCJTIVB AND OBJECTIVE GENITIVE
1320. With a verbal noun the genitive may denote the subject or

objeut of the action expressed in the nouu.

a. Many of these genitives derive their constnii'tlon from tbat ot the kindred

verbs : tdC vlarot iriBiiiia deeire for water T. 2. G2 (1340), x^^" ^^^ anger bt-

eaute of hit ion 0 138 (1406). But the verbal Idea soinetimeB require* tbe

accusative, or (less commonly) tbe dative.

1339. In poetry an adjective may take the plaoe ot tbe genitive : tirmi

jSorlXtut the return of the king A. Pen. 8. Cp. 1291.

IJ38] THE GENmrfi S19

1330. The SntjMtlTa OenltiTtt is active la seiue : ruti ^^pat ^^i tJiA
ftar nf the barbariatu (nhlch they feel: si pdp^apai ^^Cn-tu] X.A. 1.2. 17,
4 fimtAAm twwpiili the perjury of (A« king (^offiXrii iriopiitt) 8. 2. 4, t4 ipjiCi-
umr T^t Y*uMqt their angry feeling* T. 2. 619 (such gsnltlTM with BabstantiTe
pirtici^ &re commoa ia Tbucydidaa ; cp. 1168 b, N. 3).

1331. The Objective Genitlre te pEtadTe lit Beme, and Is T«y common wltb
rabcuntiTcs denoting a frame of mind or an emotioD : ipbpoj rir EiXi^iruv the
ftar qf the Seioti (felt towards them ; ^o^rriu mii GIXuthi) T. 3. 64, 4 rflir
'EU^wr tiroia good--v>m lowarde th« Oreekt (tinti roti 'BXXi^irt) X. A. 4. T. 20^
4 rAr nXS» tf'irniM'la fntercouna wMh tA« good (rirtvi roU mXoit) P. L. 888 a.

L The objective genitive often precedes another genitive on wblob it depends :
ftii T^t ivitiiaxlit T^i atriiatut ailh the requett for an alHanee T. 1. 82.

1332. Various prepositions at« used In translating the objective genitive :
I Awt wdiitiiM (Mr With the goda X. A. 2. 5.7, Spimi ttUr oathi (>f the god*
E. Hipp. 657, Star eixtU prayer* to the god* P. Fhae. 244 a, iUiic^«u1tui> ipy^
anger at tnjuMtlee L. 12. 20, iyupdrtia iiSar^t moderation in pleatttre L 1. 21,
ilTitiliarQr lixii victory oner pleamre* F.L.840c, Tp6riua pappdpur tnetnorial*
of victory over barbarian* X. A. 7. 6. 86, rapairtatii rur ivroKXaySr exhortation*
te reconciliation T.4. 69, ii,09ei (filXur tiding* about fiienda 8. Ant. 11, rod iiS9tt
iptech uifA thee S. O. C. 1101. In eardrou XArii release from death t 421,
vnarawwX^ toVmam respite from war T 201, itlBunoertain whether the genitive
itobjecUveorabUtlval (1302).

1333. The objective genitive is often need when a piepoBltlonal ezpresston,
^ling greater precirion, is more usual : tA Hryo^r if-ij^iviia the decree relatfnf/
to (jtfl) the Megarian* T. 1. 140, dr j^oirti r^t yQi a deteera upon the land [i\
'4' 74>) 1. 108, driffTOtfit Tur 'AAfralwr reoolt />'ont t/w .^tA«nteiM (dri rwir
'i#V«iwi>)8.6.

1334. For the objective genitive a ponMsive prononm la aometlmea used:
H|r xiptr for thy take P. Soph. 242 a, its^XJ) 4 ip.'^ ealunmiaUom o/ dm P. A.
20e. 1 J^ ^d^ ia uaoally objective : the fear uAlcA I ijttptre. (But «v0 ftSfci
ipeeeA triCA (Aee S. O. C. 1161.)

1335. Predicate Uw. —od T<lr lamSp-rur oIktdt, dXX& r^i gfc^t uwyioM^O')
(twK/orwron^-docn, but /or jtulfee E. fr. 270.

GENITIVE OP VALUE

1336. The gecitive expresses value.

1^ Tpi&r raXdrrur offering* worth three talent* L. 30. 20, x^"' tp«x/'^*
Hf^r ^tiyu lam defendant in an action involving a thoutand drachma* D. 66. 26.

1337. n«dic«te Um : reit alxpaXilrrwt Toaoirnt xPVI^rar KturSai to rantom
Ae (oftivtt at *o high a price P. 19. 222, rptUt Spax^S' roriipii &r a Ihreepenitg
ngut IS. 200.

TWO QBNinVES WITH ONE NOUN

1338. Two gflnitives expressing diSeceat relatioiu mar \» used
*ith one noun.

i,vGooglc

320 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1339

>I ifSfivroi Jii ri ouriSr I4at Tofl Bati-Tou taTwptMorrat by Tttuon of their frar
<tf death nwn tell lies P. Ph. 86 a, Hartaov rptnpOriir TC'pit a eAorut of old t*e%
in honour of Dtonyiut P. L. 666 b, ^ tou Adxi7"» tar wtur ipxti Lachet* «>«■
maiid of Ihe flttt T. 3. IIG, 4 4auliu^ tpatnoltr^a Tt^f KipaifAt the formtt otn-
jpatioK of Coreyra by the Fkaeaeiant 1. 25.

GENITIVE WITH VERBS

1339. The genitive may serve as the immediate complement of a ,
verb, or it may appear, as a secondary definition, along with an
accusative which ia the immediate object of the verb (930, 1392,
1405).

1340. The subject of an active verb governing the genitive may
become the subject of the passive construction: tfunjpariK tpSiv r^
yvmiKot iamparai Niceratua, icfu) is m love v>itk kis wife, is loved in
return X. 8. 8. 3. Cp. 1745 a.

THE GENITIVE PROPER WITH VERBS
THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE

13tiL A verb may be followed by the partitive genitive if the
action affects the object only in part. If the entire object i^
affected, the verb in question takes the accusative.

'kipirrtat S' ly<iiu BvyaTpwt he inarried aim <tf Adrttslut' datiglUen S 121.
rSr TiiXwT XaM^dMi he takes some of the Mlta X. A. 4. G. 35, Xafiirm to0 fioffiapi-
KoO a-T^i-Dv taking port of the barbarian forae 1. 6. T, KXtmrrn roS ^mrt teii-
ing part of the mountain secretly 4. 6. 16 (op. toD dpoui «X^cu n 4. fl. 11), t^i 7(1
irtiior they ravaged put of the land T. 2. 66 (cp. rifi ySjr riaat Irt/ur 2. 67 and
Irtiior rift 74? t1|i> xaXX^r 2. 56), taTtiyii r^i it^X^t he had a hole knocked
somewhere in his head At, Vesp. 1428 (riif cc^aXV Kartayirai to have one'i
head broken T). 64. a5).

1342. With impi^raonals a partitive genitive does duty as the subject: reXi-
limi oi iitrijr airi the hail no ehiire in var X. C. 7. 2. 28, l^l oUatMtw rparfkn
TodTov ToO rpiyiiarot I have no part whrUener in thia affair And. 4.34. Cp. 1318.

1343. The genitive is use*! with verbs of faring.

wirrn lirTtixa* r^i iopr^i all took part in the festival X. A. 5. 3. 9, ^crcSI-
Sarar iWiiKait Sr (= Toirrur *) elxor tttani they shared with each other what
eadl had 4. 6. 8, ri ArBpiiwtrtr yini p,rrtl\i)^r iBanairlai the human race has re-
ceived a portion of (mmortatity P. L. 721 b, itItou Koiruvttt to take a share of
food X. U. 2. 6, 22, iiKaiorinis otSir bt^r rpoa-^m you have no concern I'n right-
eous dealing X. H. 2. 4, 40, woXirrla, it f rfrifaip oi lUrvrrir ipx^i a form of
government in tehlch the poor have no part in the management of affair* P. R.
660c. So with iieTa.\ayxiti' get a share (along with somebody else), ruwl-
pirttu and MtroiaSai take part in, iieratTtU and luraroittrSai demand a short in.

1344. The part received or taken, if expressed, standii in tbe acoaHative.
il rinanKit rmw iityi""' iyai^' i^ix^'Tn lUTix'""- tyrants have the smaUtatpor-

I3S0] THE GENITIVE SSil

lion in 1A« grtatMt bleninga X. Hi. 2. 6, roirur iitrtnTti rb /lipot he demtmd*
Ail (Aare af this At. Vesp. 973,

a. With lUrt^Ti the part may be added in the nomiiutive : itiriim x^f*'
tiw Ktwpifiiirur /iipot ]/e too AaBS had a lAare in Viete doingt E. L T.

1345. The genitive ia used with verbs signifying to touch, takt
hold of, make trial of.

(4 rirot) It^are rUr drflpiirwr the plague laid hold of the men T. 3. 48, r^f
Tfdftqi T^ airiit fxcf^ I hold to the tanie opinion 1. 140, ir tS ix'I'^'V iimSiUrf
on IA« eoueh next to mc F. 3. 217 d, imMptrft rUr rpiyiUrur take our public
poHCy iit hand O. 1. 20, Srm rtipyrra Tcil Ttlxin to make an aUempt on (&
part of) lAe IMril T. 2. 81. Sovilh^o^ir touch (rare in prose), drr^trffot elfnp
lo, IriXa^i^Mirfci and avXttMitfiirtaBiu lay hold of.

1346- The genitive of tbe part, with the accusative of thej)«r*on(tbenbo)e)
who haa been touched, is clllefly poetical : rbr Si wtairra roaur fXa^ but him
aihefia, he seized hg hit fret A 403, fXa/Jov r^t i<ir7)t Tir 'Opirrit tlUf took hold
of OrotUa* bf the girdle X. A. 1. 6. 10 (but /wO \ap6iitrot Ttjt x«>>^ taking me
bf the hand P. Charm. 163b), iyttr T^t iiwlat rif Irror to lead the horse by the
bridle X. "Eti. e. fi ^cp. paSt f iyiniw apiut t&ev led tA« eote by tAe Aortu Y 439) .

1347. Verba of beseeching take the gCDitive by analogy to verbs of touching :
t/ii W-o-^nra fitirur she besought me by (clasping) my knees I 4G1 (cp. timIw
bfrilurM iJaatae<u beseech bj) touching hit chin K 464).

134& The genitive ia used witli verba of beginning.

a. Paitittve : 1^ Ki^v ^X"" '^'><' ^if" ^' he taid that Ofrvt began the
dlscuttlon a* followt X. A. 1. 6. 5, toO Utou 1ipxf"> ^' he began kit speech at
foUowt 3. 2. 7. On ipx'ir as dlstingulahed from ipxtaSui see 1734. 6.

b. Ablatival (1391) denoting the point of departure: vie S dpfa^uu / leill
wtake a beginning with thee I 07. In this eense dri or ii is usually added :
iftd^trot drt iroO D. IS. 297, ipioimi irb r^i Urpur^i \iyur /will make a begin-
ning bf tpeaklng of medicine P. S. 166 b.

1349. The genitive is used with verbs siguifying to aim at, strive
after, desire (genitive of the end desired).

irtpiirvm-oxitti'Bai to aim at men X. C. 1.0.S9,t^UfitttiTunapSlirdettr-
lug gain T. 1. 6, rirrtt rdr d7a$w> tnevineOtrir all men detire wAot it good P. B.
4S8a, TiiparTlir taXiir the pattionate love of what it noble Aea. 1. 137, rfitOri
Xj>wulrur thfy are hungry for viealth X. S. 4. 36, viXif /Xiu^c/ifai Si^iiiraira a
slate thirsting for freedom 1'. R. 662c. So with ttmittr shoot at (poeL), Xi-
XaicvOu desire (poet.), yXlxtaSai detire. ^\iTr love, woBtlr long for take the
aecDoatife.

135a The genitive is used with verbs sigtiifying to reach, obtain
(genitive of the end attained),

T^t iprritt i^ttteai to attain to virtue I. 1. 5, ol immoral ppax^tp^ if^rrilttr
4 Hf ^ijcnurfat rUr a^rSonrriir the favelin-throaers did aot hurl far enough tc
Ttaeh Ote Uingen X. A. S. 8. 7, rwarSQr fmx' he obtained a truce 3. 1. S8.

322 SYNTAX OF THE SIUPLE SENTENCE [1351

So with n^tv obtain (poet.), cX^pan/ufi' intiertt, intruyx^'^'' f^ ^ ^^ <'>n~
xdmr, when compounded with ir, trl, wapd, rtpl, aod <rCr, takes Uie dkUve.
"^■fX^""' obtain bg lot usually lakea the accoaative,

a. This geDJtive and that of 1340 form the gtniave o/the goal.

1351. The genitive of the thing obt^ned ma; be joined with an ablattral
genitive (1410) ol the person : tH Si H) wirrur oli/itSa Trifwffai iwalfmi in a eatt
where ue expect to loiii praise from all mtn X. A. 6. T. 33. But where the thing
obtained is mpressed b; a neuter pronoun, the accusative Is empiojed.

1352. It ig nncertain whether verba signifying to mi'ss take a partitive or an
ablaCtvai genitive: oiitU ^iLipTnttr didfiji no one miaeed hie man X. A. 3. 4. 15,
ff^oWirei rflj Si(in dieappointed in ejpeelaUom T. 4. 80.

1333. Verbs of approaching and meeting take the genitive according tc
1313 or 1349. These verbs are poetical. Thus, imiut Tadpur for the parpoMe
of obtaining (bis share of) bulls a 26, drnto-u ToCf ir/pat Iwill encounter thit
man If 423, wthAirtu i«A> to approach the ships S. Aj. TOO. In the meaning draa
near to verbs of approaching take the dative (1463).

1354. The genitive is used with verbs of smelling.

(Jta ^pau I tmell of perfume Ar. Eccl. 624. So wrtlr lOpov to breathe (smell of)
ptrfime S, tr. 140.

1355. The genitive ia used with verbs signifpng to enjoy, taOe,
eat, drxTik.

i.'iaXsiaiier tirrar rwr iyaS^t tce eTijoy all the good things X. M. 4. 3. II,
titixov Tou XA70V enjoy the dtscotirae V. R. 362 b, dXfir«( otrov fyiirarTo fett
tasted food X. A. 3. 1.3. So (mrel;) with 4|jirfe< take pleature in.

a. Here belong htltir, irtmv when thej do not signify to eat up or drink
up.- liiiHr iaBUiw a^Ar to eat them alijie X. H. 3. 3. 6, rirttt Ukm drink some
uinax 111 M boire dn tin (but wlviiii slnv drink wine B 6, as biiire It vin).
Words denoting food and drink are placed in the accusative when tbey aie
reftarded as kinds of nourishment.

1356. The genitive ia used with verbs signifying to remeit^>er,
remind, forget, care for, and neglect.

rSii ir6rrur ^i\ar i/JurVo Temembt-r yOiir absent fYiends I. 1, 26, ^Xofuu I"
lifiat iiaiirTJffai Twr iiial wtwpiriiUrat I dtsire to remind yon of my past acttont
And. 4. 41, i^iDiiia nil iriXnetiiuSa t^j clndi Aiau I fear lest u:e may firg't the
way home X. A. 3. 2. 25, ^i/uXi^ioi ol pir irolvylaii>, ol Si tmnar some taking
care of the pack animals, others of the baggage 4. 3, 30, t^i ra» niXXa» Sif^t it'
iiiiai ^porrlfeir vte must pay heed to the world's opinion P. Cr. 48 a, t( i/ur riji
rSr wtiWQr Uftii fiAiij what do vie Care for the world's opinion? 44c, roir
artutaioti atx <ilirrt T^i iperjii d^itXcir the Serious Cannot disregard virtue 1. 1. 48,
litlStiii JXryufxTrt /iitii laTa^poxiTe (cp. 13S5) rUr wfotrrrKiiUmr AettAcr nrgltct
nor demise any command laid on you 8. 46.

1357. So with nvrtitottiut rememhtr (but usoally with the accua., especially
uf thlnp), inrmiawta not to ^eak of, in^wAu owrefor, irrpiwevStu give heed to.

■3(3] THE GENITITE 823

liaiuicSai think detplg of, rpeap&r make provitUm for (in Hdt.), fvra^iAii lun
it repentM me, jcarafuXc?* mgleet.

13SS. M&Q7 of tbeae verba also take the iicciisatlve. With the acciu.
ftffv^Au means to remember sonietAJnp at a whole, with the gen. Co remember
tomelhing about a thing, bethink oneself. The accus. is usually found with
verbs of retarmbertng aud forgetling wbeo tbey mean to hold or not to hold in
memory, and when the ubject ia a Ibing. Neuter pronouns xansl stand la the
•ecus. iri\ar6drtfBai forget takes either the genitive or the accusative, XaiAi-
Mvfci (usually poetical) always takes the genitive. tti\ti it ii a care, iniUKtirem
care for, iiturTfiicu think about may take ripl with the genitive. olSa generally
means 1 remember when It has a person as the object (in the accusative).

1359. Verba of reminding may take two accusatives ; raC^ hriftniir l/iSt I
hate reminded you ofthia D. 19. 25 Q62S).

1360. With /lAci, the subject, if a neuter pronoun, may sometimes stand
in the nominative (the personal construction) : raCro Bt^ fuX^a Qod villi care
fnrtKia P. Fhae. 238d. Except in poetry the subject in the nominative ia very
rai« with other vrorda than neater pronouns : x^po' to^-i iilkavai P. L. 8H5 e.

1361. The genitive is used with verbs signifying to bear and
perceive: ixovtiv, kAwiv (poet,) kear, (tucpoacrftu tiaten to, altr0Avea6ai
perceive, wvOivta^M hear, learn of, otivUW understand, 6tT^piUttsj0oi
»cent. The person or thing, whose words, sound, etc. are perceived
by the senaes, stands in the genitive j the words, sound, etc generally
stand in the accusative.

Ttrdt ^lOHir' elrirrtt I heard aomebodi/ toy D. 8. 4, dioitsarrci t^i cdXrivyot
hearing the sound of the IrvmpeC X. A. 4. 2, 8, iKoiaami rbr Sipupon hearing
the noiae 4.4.21, ixptninemToO 4Sorroi listening to the singer X.C. 1.3. 10, Aroi
iXX^Xur (vrfnrar oil mho understood eadt other T. 1. 3, IwtiSir ruri^ rit ri \ty6-
pita when one undentandt Khat i» said P. Pr. 325 c (verba of understanding,
rvwUrat and trUravSai, usually take the accus.), tpoiiiuiu* iaifipiilniiiai I smell
onion* Ar. Ran. 064.

a. A supplementary participle ts often used in agreement with the genitive of
tlie peraon from whom something is heard : \iyarm iiieG itpoiaorrai ol t^ the
lOHng men wUl lieten vshen I speak V. A.STd.

b. Tlie accusative is almost always used when th« thing heard is expressed
by a snbetantlvized neuter adjective or participle, but the genitive plural in the
caae of ntrai, U>, afirii, and St is frequent.

1362. A double genitive, of the person and of the thing, is rare with dndtit :
iflp irwtfi Tfli ypa^^t iimiar dmtne /loii to Ufteii to iJij jimt pleas as regards the
iHdlftment D, IB. 9.

1363. iaiitir, altreirvrSai, rureinirBai, meaning to bei:ome aujare of, learn,
take the accusative (with a participle in Indirect discouTHe, 2112 b) of a personal
or impeiHonal object : ol H XlXarat^t, liii ■ivBarra trStr t( Srrai roiVi 9i)^alain m
tmiKmitUntr t^* ri\ir but the Plalaeans, mheii theii liframe aaare that the
neban* were iTtside and that the city had been eapliiml T. 2. S, TvMiutnt 'ifrra-
iipt^w TiSr^iTa having learned that Artaxerxe» was dead 4. 50.

824 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1364

a. To Ji«ar a thing is usually tUoiifii n when the thing he&rd is something
definite and when the meaDing U aimply htar, not lUlen to.

1364. imitir, itpo&rSoi, wvneinvBai, meaning (d hear from, learn from, take
the geoitiye of the actual source (Ull).

1365. dmidtir, iXrinr, iBidirtaSal T\wot may mean to hear ahovt, hear of:
it tf « Ti9»ri3roi dioArui but if you hear that he la dead a iSS, cXtfuv aoS hearing
about thee S. O, C. 307, wt twieorre r^t n6>Mi Ka.rtt\r)mifiirtt when they heard of
the capture of Pyloa T. 4, 6. Tor the participle (not in indirect diaoonne)
see 2112 a. rtpl is often used with the genitive without ilte participle,

1366. In the meaning heed, hearken, obey, verbs of hearing generally
take the genitive : t»w rirrur, tx\iyov 3' t avii^ipa litlen to eBerythiag,
hut cAooK that inhich u proJUable Men. Sent. 606, ri3r rrXiidar iKaiar to rubmit
to eneniet X. C. S. 1.4. rtlStr8t.i takes tlie genitive, instead of the dative, by
analogy to thia use (HdL 6. 13, T. 7. 7S). (On the dative with in<itt» obey
seelMfi.)

1367. ataSiMTBaii takes the genitive, of (lees freqaentiy) the aocusitive, of
the thing immediately perceived by the senses : rfli Kpavy^i ^aBarro they heard
t\e nol»t a, H. A. 4. 4, ^aSno T<k fifibiitra he perceived what teat happenfng
X. C. 8. 1. 4. The genitive is less common than the accusative when the per-
ception is intellectual : in iadorro Tttxtibman v)hen thfy heard that they were
progreMing with their fortijUation T. 6, 83. Cp. 1383.

1368. Some verbs, ordinarily construed with the accusative, take the geni-
tive by the analogy of i^BAMaBai, etc, ; tym iTova ifuiv loioOiroi he kaea that I

was acHng obMrdlj/ X. C. 7. 2. 18, dTnoGrTci dXX^Xw* I n tJyo^r eaeA nf u*
mistaking lehat the other »ayt P. O. 617 c. This consttniction of verfaB of
knoaing (and shouiCng) occuie in Attic only when a participle accompanies the

13G9. The genitive is used with verbs signifying to jUl, to he JvU
of. The thing filled is put in the accusative.

at* tfirX-ie-ert r^' SdXarrat rpi^pur,- will yoH not cover Ihe tea leith yovr tri-
remeg f D. 8. 74, inr\f>atti oiTiSr (o implicate in guilt P. A. 32 c, Tp«#^t ttrrt^U
to have plenty of provi$iom X. Vect. 6, 1, Tpiijpjij rtiay/Lfiti itepiiiur a trireme
atoviedwith men X. 0. 8.8, ipptm ittsToBceai to be filled with pride P. L. 71.3 c.
So with rX40(ii', rXiipsDv, yituir, wXavriir, fiptBtir (poet,), ^piitiF (poet.).

a. Hero t>elong also x>'/> <''<'d{t> AiqX^i 'Ap<ot hie hand drips with naer^fiee to
AreMS.'FA.U2S,ptevaetlfreS)'4irTa(Kit intoT.irfited with nectar P. S. 20Sb, 4 irrr^
^ti^uxpt" uisToi the Spring Jloiet with cold water P. I'hae. 230 b. The instra-
mentai dative is sometimes used.

1370. The genitive is used with verbs signifying to rvie, eommand,
lead.

0ciar ri iBtliirrvr <px<" <I '* divine to rule over willing subject* X. 0. 21. IS,
T^t Be\iTTiit hpirti he Was matter of the tea P. Menex. 2S9e, 'Bpwt tS* *iSr
pasiXtiti Love it king ofthegodt P. S. l!)r>c. inrTra tQi i(6SM he led the eispe-
dlUon T. 2. 10, a-rpoTTf" ^ur iirur to be general of the mereenariea X. A.

1375] THE GENITIVE S25

2. 8. 28, So with Txjfiantir be abaolute maiUr of, inivcti* h» lord oj (poet.),
ifitfortUit i>« couiiaander uf. ThU genitive ia connected with that of 1402.

1371. SeTeral verbs of mting take tlie accusative when tbey mean to oon-
quer, overcome (ao uparttr), or when tbey express the domain over which the
role extends ; as riiw UiMrirwiirot mpSaBt ni) i\ittatd l^ttaBiu try not to Itnen
four dominion over the Feloponnae T. 1, 71. iiyni^fal tik meaoB tobt a guUt
to ang one, thow OMg one lAe tiKiy. Cp. loST.

QENITIVB OP PRICE AND VALTJB
1373. The genitive is used with verbs signif jing to buy, seU, coat,
value, exchange. The price foi which one gives or does anything
stands in the genitive.

AfyvplottMflaaS^i^i.raSiirSatiwriit tobuyortalla korte for money P. R. 8S3b,
Bf^urracXAi rQr inyiaru* iupt&t ^iltMrat tftey Heemed Themittotlta vsorthy of
the ffreateat gift* I. 4. 154, o&t irraWam-tiir fu)i riir ^iXori/iia* oOSitbt tipioai I
mtut itot barter my public spirit for any price D. 10. 223. So with rdrTar rate,
luaBair let, /us-AiiwAii hire, i/r/iiadv worjb, and with any verb of doing anything
for a wa^, aa oi t^ rap ifiUpir x^^ror T& tUyurra rfft r6\rur dToXu^fc^ft thoMe
w&o haoe ruined tA« Mghett trUereete uf the State to pnrchaee ^hemeral popvlarity
I>. 8. 70, r6a*ii tiSdatti ; rfrre im^n for kmn mvch ioet he tfitch f for five minae
P. A. 20 b, ol XoMaibt iiurBoO vrpartiowTai the Chaltlaeans terve for pay X. C. 8.

2. 7.

«. The inatmniental dative la also used. With verba of txchaftgtng, Atrl la
usual (1683).

1373. To aalue highly and lightly Is rtpl roWaO (rXclont, i-Xcb-rou) and
rtpl iXlyou (AArrsmf, iXaxl^Tm} rl/iivSai omie(irPa> : ti rXtlarov Ifia rtpl Ao-
XlvTou woaiToi, TJk ii ^af\^«pa rtpL i-Atfont he makeg least account of tehat tl
most in^ortaat, and ut» higher what it leu ettimable P. A. 30a. The genitive
of value, withoot rtpl, is rare : roXXod Tut^vt^^t i-ciiKaiwai a di^Koa Upvrayhppu I
etteem It greatly to have heard ahat I did from Priilagora» P. Pr,328d.

a. The genitive of cause is rarely used lo express the thing bought or that tor
which pa; Is demanded : oiSira r^i auramlat ipyipior rpirrti you charge nobody
anything for your teachfag X. M. 1. 0. 11, rptU /Lmi Sn/iplirKeti three minae for a
tmall chariot Ar. Nub. 81.

1374. In legal language TifiS> nn tutirau ia to fix the penalty at death (aald
of the Jury, which is not Interested In the result), rlfoirStl tik ^xiTair to pro-
pose death <u the penalty (Raid of the accuser, who Is intfreated), and Ti>uUr0ai
TifBt to propose a penalty against oneself (said of the accused). Cp. tIiiStoI
PS* i iriip Amtrou the man proposes death as my prnalty P. A. 36 b, dXXi tif
4vt4i T7^4rw/uu / Trut yip it tiot to&tiiv ^'i4t^|aa,%Tt bvt shall I propose exile ai my
peitaltyf for perhapi you (the Jury) might fix it at this 87 c So fcfdrsv with
Vlmr, Ai^wti', bwiyttt. Cp. 1379.

GENITIVB OF CBIMB AND ACCOUNT ABILITY

1375. With verba of judicial action the genitive denotes the crime,
the accusative denotes ttie person accused.

826 StNTAlt OF THE SU1PL& SENTENCE [1376

atri&tSni dXX^Xout tmI ytytnutima to aeeute one another of what had A^k
pentd X. Ages. 1. 33, Aiiinw ^r KaKvyoplat, r^ 3* atrp )^4^V ^nv ^eiyu J brint
an acciisalion for dtfiimation itud at the »ame trial am proaecated for murder
L. 11. 12, i/ii i MAvToi iatjitlat ijpi^ara Jgelttut proteCUUd ia» for tmpiell
P. Enth, 6e, IJipur iKpl^tiiriit tkry were tried for bribery L. 27. 3, On verba of
aeai^ng lUid condemning compounded nltb card, see 13S6.

1376. So wilh i^mrScu and noXdftir jinnieh, tlai-feir and rportoKiiaiu
fummon (n(o court, alfiti* convict, ri/iwpturStu late vengeance on. With rliLuptlr
avenge and \ayxdti' obtain leave to bring a suit, the person avenged and the
person a^ln^t whom the suit is brought are put in tho dative. So with Sued-
jtr^ol Tinl Tim to go to law With a man about nometking.

1377. Verbs of judicial action may take a cognate tecuBUive {ilKiir.ypa^ir),
on which the genitive of the crime depends: ipa^iii' ufip€wt lal tin^r xoKirftplii
^frriu he usill be brought to trial on an indictment for ovtrage and on a civil
action for slander D. 21. 32. From tlila adnominal use arose the construction
of the genitive with this claaa of verbs.

1378. dXfiTEwffai (ixanii) be concfcted, ^XircdKir lose a niM, ^tOycir be
proieeuted are equivalent to passives : Air tii i\^ chor^i , . . nr ioTpaTtlii tit
tt^V if any one be condemTied for theft . . . and if any one be convicted of deter-
tton 1). 24. 103, d<r()3(lat ^nirarra Ini McXi^tou being tried for impiety on the
indictment of MeJetug P. A. S5d. ^Xurndicii may take Jfirqrasaccfiuateaccus.
(iiiti\tlifm SIkjiw to be caet in a tvit Ar. Av. 1457) ; the crime or the penalty
may stand in the genitive (with or without Sliair), or In the accusative : ^ia«
xXn-^i i) Siipur S^Xoier all tcho had been eonnieted of embezzlement or brilieij
And. 1. 74, i4> tfi^r Sanirau llin}r i^Xiiw having incurred through your verdict the
penalty of death, Irri rfjt dXqMa; li^XtiiciTci /lox^^plat condemned 6jr the truth
to naffer (Ae penalty of wickedness P. A. 39 b.

1379. With verbs of judicial action the genitive of the penalty may be
regarded as a genitive of value ; Barirev xpirovai they Judge In matter* ofUfeand
death X.C.I. 2. 14. So iritei.rTiri0atirau to impeach a man On a a^pital charge
X. H. 2. 3. 12 J cp. rt^» tfafdTov 1374.

a. with many verbs of judicial action rtpl is used.

GENITIVE OF CONNECTION

1380. The genitive may express a more or leaB dose connection
or relation, where mpi ia sometimea added.

With verba of laying or thinking : rl 6i Iwwur otti ; but what do yov thtnJc of
hoTaes T P. R- 4i>9 b. Often in poetry : tlwi U |u< iroTpdi but tell me about nq
father \ 174, toO jtooiYi'iiTou tI *ifi; vihaldotttkousay of thy brother r S. El. SIT.

1381. The genitive is often used loosely, especinlly at the beginning of a
construction, to stale tlie subject ot a remark : firirei <J» taiarupyi, rir IrrA Ktnl-
iaiuf rfliW yumiitii, f( MMTom itX. if a horte it vicious, u>e lay the fault to the
groom; but as regards a vsife, if eke conduct* henelf HI, etc X, O. 3. 11,
(iu-a^wf St (sl Tur dXXuit rtxi-Sir and SO i*n the cate of the other arts too
P. Charm.lS6d, t1 AJTi3vr<iXXi3vcaXwri what about the manf beautiful things t
P. Ph. 78d.

1387] IHE GENITIVE

GENITIVE WITH COMPOUND VERBS

13S3. Tlie genitive depends on the meaning of a, compound verb aa s whole

(1) if the almple verb takes the genitive without a preposition, as inrcintm

teithdrmn, rapaXkir releam, wapaxaptTt *i(>Tender(1392), i^UrSat de»irt (1349);

or (2) U the compound lias acquired through tlie preposition a Bignlflcation
difiereal from that of the simple verb nith the preposition : thus iwayrirra
rfi iknitplit despairing of freedom L. 2. 4t> cannot be expressed by yrirrtt
dxi t9t JXfufcpUi. But it is often difflcult to determine whether the genitive
depends on the compound verb as a whole or on the preposition contained in it

1383. A verb compounded with a preposition taking the dative or accusa-
tive may take the genitive by analogy of another compound verb wliose preposi-
tion requires the genitive : so iiifialntir Spui' to set foot on the boundarieB S.O. C.
400 by analogy to iripatrtir rUr Spur P.L.T78e.

1384. Many verbs compounded with ir6, wp6, brfp, iwl, and nard take the
genitive when the compound may be resolved into the simple verb and the prepo-
Eilion without change in the aenae : rodi avij^idx'"" drorp^arrci T^i •ynil'itt
dianiading the allies from their purpose And. 3. 21, rpoawttriX-iiirar t^i dro-
trdirtttt theywere despalrhed bffnre the remit T. 3. 6, xoXXoit ii yXwrTa wpcrpix"
T71 Staroldt in nuinjr people the tongue outruns the thought I. 1. 41, (at weXt/tioi')
nepud^rrai iifilar the enemy are stationed above us X. A. 5. 1, D, r$ tuipirrt
rpvrv To5 Tilxovt (o the first one setting foot on the wall T. 4. 116. This use is
mnet frequent when the prepositionB ai-e ueed in their proper signification.
Many compounds of 6wip take tlie accu-tiitive.

a. This use is especially common with lard against or at ; /ii) pan icardriri
dan't ^>eak againtC me P.Tb.l49a, xaTtjfnifari pw he $poke falsely againit
ne D, 18. 9, fn-Sfl mxryXtiTT.f; ^u he mouthed lies at me Ar. Ach,380. The
construction In 1384 U post-Homeric.

1389. The verbs of accusing and enndemnlng (cp. 1375) containing nari in
compooition (1:07 0717 riiojtrii- decide agninst., KaraiiKiitir adjudge against, nars-
i^T^(f«rAu rote against, KaraKplmr give sentence against) lake a genitive of the
person, and an accusative of the penally. taTityopeir arouse, ■aTa^iYviiiriEni'
and nray^^litrdoi take a genitive of the person, an accusative of the en'me.-
tarayrSiKU Sup^iorlar ipoS to pronounce me guilty of bribery L. 21. 21, ro^tv
ftiUar jrara^tr^ftrAit to vote kim gailty of cotnardiee 14. 11, rUr Jia^VYirrwi
tintor Kara-iii6rrtf having condemned the fugitives to death T. <t. 80 ; person,
crime, and penalty : toXX^i> ol nriptt HirSi0fuv eirarct laT^Mixrar our fathers
passed tentenee of death against nuiny for favouring thr Persians 1.4.167. The
genitive is rarely used to express tlie crime or Uie penally : raparipan airaS
mxtfttr to accuse him of proposing unonetitutional measures D.Sl.fi; cp.
ii9fAwftr Kttrwf'^ipireirTur fldxiTor. men w/io fldnc been condemned to deotA
P.B.66ea.

1386. In general, prose, as distlnguislied from poeti?, repeats the preposi-
tioD contained In the compound 1 but xari is not repeated.

1387. Pu^-n.—BdnTotairartaTwyrUiiTtri sentence Of death teas passed on

828 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE ^130

Hum L. 18.89 (so Kar«y^^;i^Mt 4> /lou i Mnrof X.Ap.27), tarrr'ptJr* atni

»tx <(«w» /nf*i»*iJt ht UNM eepecidHj occmed of favouring the Ptrtiana T. 1. 96.

FREE USES OP THE QENITIVE

1388. Hon; verba ordlnarll; coDstmed with the accoMtive are alao fol-
lowed by a genitive of a person, ^)pareiit1y dependent od the verb but in realiiy
governed by an accuealive, generally a neuur pronoun or a dependent clausr.

Thus, rdi* adrtS iytiiiai I admire tkit in Mm X. Agea. 2. T, rovro iruiiSi 'A->if-
nXlou I praiae thU in Agtsilau» 8.4, a^wr tr fflai'/iiura /ira* oilOHfaAed at uiit
(AiBif in them P. A. 17 a, 'Aflijm&n ff*w» toSt-o oiit ilxo«(o>Ta. (A« ^fArAi'aiu wifl
not bf satisfied aith tkera in thit T. T. 48, J ^fi^rru fidXivra V"' toAfcA lAef
moal cemiire in lu 1. 81, tt iriaw reC irnrpii 80a i^pix* i^ you admire in
mv/alA«r loAat h« Ao* don« (Che actions of my father) X. C. 3, 1. la, tia$€iiiaii
airir Satir xi^P"' ^X"" eonttmplating Aou large a countrn then poi*e*t S. A.
3. 1. 10, Baaiiilta rdp irrparijyCiw 9ti 06 wiipHrra.! ijiur iiiTapl[ttr ririjp^ist /won'
<I«r tAoe At general^ do not try to tupply us with moneg for proBfslont 6. 2.i.
iwiriiist Si airOr ml iit Hiipfirar dXX^Xoui ke took nott alto Aou thej/ luked ladt
Other questioTi* X. C. 6. 2. IB. So with StttptU obttnt, Irramtir feA nupiciom
of, IreuimrStu eonrtder, etc.

1389. FroiD such constructions arose the use of the genitive in actuil
dependence on the verb without an accusative word or clause : S-foa-ai afir-Bv yuii
admire him X. M. 2. B. 33, eav/uifui rwr l/rip r^i IBiit Si£iri dirtSr^Mir McXin-ur
/ wonder at thote who are Killing to die in defence of their per*onal opi%ioiu
I. 8. 93. The use in 13S9 recalls that with aUrHwBoi (1367). On dY>«««.
tfav/idfiEtr with the genitive of cause, see 1406.

1390. A form of the genitive of poaaeasion appears in poetry with verbil
adjectives and passive participles to denote the personal origin of an action (cp.
1298) : alnit SiSatri taught of her S. Kl. 344, iicSitiixStlj rdr car' aim* infomt'd
by thoee in the house S. 'fr. l);S4, irXin*l» evytrptj struck by a daughter E. Or. 487.
Cp. tilrtsrot given of Hod; and "beloved of the Lord."

On the genitive absolute, see 2070.

THE ABI-ATIVAL OENITIVE WITH VERBS

1391. The same verb may govern botli a true genitive and an ablaiinl
genitive. So Spxcf" to begin (1348 a) and to ttart from, lx<'^i to hold to
(1346) and to ke^p onetelf from. In many cases it is difficult to decide whellier
the genitive in question was originatty the Inie genitive or the ablatival genitirF'.
or whether the two have l>een combined ; e.g. in tvtiti /HkD roiiiri} a cap mndf
of hidt K 262, ritTfXXor M/faro 1,t d\Ax'>"> he receited a goblet from hie irift
a 306. So with verbs to hear from, inow of (1.164, 1411), and verhn of emo-
Uon (1406), the partitive idea, cause, and source are bard U> distinguish. Other
cases open to doubt are verbs of misting (l3tV^), being deceived (1392) and the
exclamatory genitive (1407).

GENITIVE OF HKPAKATION

1392. With vei'ba signifying to •■rtme, release, remove, reatrain.
(five up, fail, be dintatU frum, etc., the genitive denotes separatiun.

i3M] the genitive 829

Xihtir rAr r6rttr to etfUt from toll 1. 1. 14, iwiVTinii) x'fpt^l'^"! Sucaiovirft
Inmltdfe divorced from jutliee P, Menei. 246 e, iitra^Tas rfli 'Aftj»o(«>' {u>i-
jHXlai viitMrauing from the alliance with the Athenian* T. 2. 67, raOaawra
uMr rip FrpaTtiylat removing him from hit offlce of general X. H.6, 3. 18,
tpr/trlv T^f iyapSi to be excluded from the forum h. 6. 24, rSffai laicov to eave
from eeU S. Pb. 919, iKiiXuar r^i roptlai aOfbr theg prevented him from paiainff
S. Ages. 2. 2, ait dffcii S6a iripat Iftt roB ;i4 mTaJuMi «aeA sJtJn uifll Jlscp two
wn /rom (fnjh'np X. A. 3. 5. 11, XAydu rAtttrit to end a tpeech T. 3. 6B, r^t
Anritplttf xepaxapi^ai tMrrifi to turrender their freedom to Philip D. 18. 68,
ti wintw i^Ure, e6 tirtitui i^rara, ti xmi^rur iifietSrrt he did not relax hU
toil, itand aloof from dangers, or ipare hie money X Ages. 7. 1, ^nreiprti
Tit iKrliitr diac^polnted of their expecttaiont 1. i. 68 (but cp. 13G2), i, r^rot
ti nU Ji^vuffa T^t trtipov Iht island being not far dlttant from the main-
land T. 8. ei.

1393. SereiBl verbs o( sepsnitian, such m i\tu0tpouT (eapeaially with a
penoml aabject), may take iw6 or ti when the local Idea la promiDent
Kanj take also the accoutive.

1394. The genitive, Instead of the accusatiTe (1628), may be used with veibs
<^d^fming: iroartpti lu rUr xpll'^rwr he deprives me of my property I. 17 . SB,
TuriXXur A^ipoifurai xp'^l'^ra taking aaay properly from others X. M. 1. 6. !!.

1395. Tbe genitiTe of the place whence ia employed in poetry where a cod>-
ponnd yerb woold be nsed in pnwe : fiiBpar taraaee rite from the step* S, O, T.
m (cp, hwarUrTaw^iu Afcwr then ri*e from their teatt X S. 4. 31), x^f^ <U^
ratting f*om the ground S. AnL 417.

1396. The genitiTe with verlffl aignifying to wmiU, ioct, empty, etc
Buy be classed with the genitive of separation.

t<}f tteniltlar Bin dnp^aoiu' «fe shall not want proviatont X. A. 9. 3. 11,
'rafnv affvoT* vravffrrt you never lack praite X. Hi. 1. 14, irSpOf rAwSe wt\ir
arini to empty thU city of iU men A. Supp. 660. So with /XXdrnr and eri-
t<*fi lack, iptiiiwr deliver from.

1397. Siu I lack (Ihe peraonal conatmction) ueuaJly lakes tbe geniUve of
qtuutiCy : ToUuii) ye Sia nothing of the sort P. Pbae. 228 a, >uii/»0 IStar tr xv'
Twf ^Urfi* (Irai they were nearly at dote qiiarterivrith the hoplites X.H. 4.6.11,
ntttrmi iiu {^Xour lam to far from admiring D. 8. 70 (also tmto&tof Siu).

1398. SAfioi Iwant, requeet may take the genitive, or the accusative (ifgn-
lartf of neuter pronouns and adjectives), of the thing wanted ; and the genl-
tire of the person : ipuriiiam Stbh Uwrn, '\vKuir, fipii, lio'x'^'"' irt/aBiMt being
ctktd what he needed, he said * / shall have need of tmo thousand skirts ' X A.
8. G, B, TcOra bftUr Ntpat I ask this of you P. A. 17 c. The genitive of the thing
ud irf the person is unDBual i itAfurot 'Ktpov AXXoi ftXXifi rpAfitut petitioning
Cy** aboMt different matters X. C. 8. 3. 19.

1399. >tl (ImpeiHOnal) la frequently nsed with genitives of quanUty : r«X)iae
M aWm lx«* far /"»" 'Aaf being the case ¥. A. 35d, titi roXXoC BtJ D. 8. 42
(oDtyinD.) and afS* 6\lyev Sti no,farftomil D. 19. 164. S(7r may be omitted
(but not with TaXXoB), Wving iMyov and futpQu in the aense of almost, all but :

380 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1400

iUyov wirrti almogt all P. R. 662 d, iMyui tTXov riir r6\iw tA«|r aU but took
eAe eUv T. 8. 85. On Situ used absolutely, see 2012 d ; oa Siur wltb numenU, 860 &

1400. Jtei fiel tih>i unmans I ham ne^d of aomHhinff. In place of the dMln
(1467) an accusative of the person is rarely aliened in poetry on tbe analogy
of J(7wlth the iDfinitive (lOSS) : oi t6h>u toXXdS p« 4<t 7 Aaoe nred of no ^nal
(oU E,Hipp,23(otleii In E.). The thing needed is rarely put in th« accnsative:
ttn Stat Ttf x'PV if the chorus need anntMnjf Ant. 6. 12 (hem some regard rl as
DomlnatiTe). Cp. 1602.

GENITIVE OP DISTINCTION AND OP COMPARISON

1401. The genitive is used with verbs of differing.

ipX"* ir/aBbt aiStr Siaipipti larpit AyaSoO a good rater differt in no rttpret
from a good father X. C. 8, 1. 1.

1402. With verba signifying to siirpnus, be inferior to, the genitive
denotes that with winch anything is compared.

Tl/iaTt Tofrroi* /r\roiitiiTt7ri you had the adrnntagt over them in honovra X. A.
8. 1. 37, ViJwo Toii SanToi thfy were oeerpmeered hy the leater X. H. 6. 2. 6,
trrtpeTrTSrlprfar to be too late for operations D, 4.38, 4fiAi- Xfi^Mrrn t^^feTior
to »> X, A. 7. 7. 31. So with wpea^itit hold the first place, Apirrritir be bcfl
(poet.), iixiaunBai full ihorl of, litartKTttr he Worse off, ^XarnikfAu be at a dit-
advantage. ncSirAtf tiwi is chieSy poetic. iiTT&aBai aft«n takeg iri. Akin to
this genitive Is that witli verbs of ruling (1370), wbich are often derived from a
substantive signifying rnler.

1403. Many verbs ciimpounded with rpi, rtpl, Wip denoting supeiiorit;
take tlie genitive, which may depend on the preposition (1384); rix" rfpuy4tov
airaO goa excelled him In gpeed X. C. 3. 1. 19, -rriiuT) rpoix'ir tSf Irarrlut to
excel tAe enemj/ in spirit T. 2. 02, toU SirXoti ahliw iwepipipoittw tee surpass tArm
in our Itifiiiitrp 1. SI. So with ■r/neini, Irwtfifxi"- rfioriiiar, rpgipttny, and
rpwuptlrBoi prefer, i-pewTijit^Ku be at the head of certainly take the genitive by
reason of the preposition. iwtp^Wtir and irtppaiKLr >urpa>» take the accoaa-
Uve.

1404. The object compared may be eipreased by rpt, irrl with the genitive,
or by rapi, wpU with the accusative. See under Prepositions. That in which
one thing is superior or inferior to another usually stands la the dative (1613,
1615).

GENITIVB OF CAnSE

1405. "With verbs of emotion the genitive denotes the cause. Snch
verbs are to wonder til, admire, envy, praise, blame, hate, pity, grieve
for, be angry at, take vengeaiice on, and the like.

/Aitffuwa T^j rbX/itii t Hr \ty6rrair 1 woiulerpd i( the hnrdihood of the tpedttr*
L. 12. 41, ToSrav if airetli T^t rpfbriiTos admiring him for hit tnOdntMU X. C
2.3,21, fil^aiTtnB KiD, rqi Si BtMit (rruyu / envy thee for thy prudence, I hate
thee for Ihjf cowardice S. EL 1027, ri qMat^nva roP rp&tiev I thought you happf

Mil] THE GENITIVE 881

brcanae of your dispontion P.Cr.43b, rir/xalpai t Sir iiytnuUrar I ihare the joy
at what Aoj happened D. 15. 16, df^jCCirSai rut Bltriur d/uXou/i^mr to put up leiA
Ute neglect of mjf household affain V. A. 31 b, rif itmt titaioii aMaai rpoSviiiat
it ii right to praise the Mlrangerfor hit zeal E. I. A. 1371, qSwot irBpl rfSt ttipi-
mii^Tur ft^iB)/^ never XBiU thou blame me for my tidinga A. Sept. 651, roD riMit
ifrripem^Bt he pitied him for hit miaery X.C. 6.4.32, oM' i/kAi xi'^'riit Hpeif
aWiir nor is it reaaonable to grieve about them T. 2. 62, ointrt SimJirai iX/rraurt*
ifii^a9€, dX\' &r alrral Xa^^ctnri x^P" f'''^ V'" "re no longer angry at their
thefts, bat you are gratpfut for what you gel youraelves I.. 27. II, riiiap^ajrttn
atradt T^t triStrttat to take revenge on them for their attack X.A.T.4.28. Here
belongs, by analc^y, voy-ri'/niateii' a<To?i xph T^t frieHfilii it ia neceaaary to for-
give them for lAeir deilre P. Eii.300c (^xmaaily ffvyyiyinirKnrTiir hriSvitSar tuI or

a. The genitiTe of cause is partly a true genitive, parti; Bbi&tiv&i.

1406. Witb tbe above verbs Uie peiaon stands In the accusative or datire.
Some of tbeae verbs take tbe dutive or ^1 and the dative (f.p. A\ytir, trimr,
txParSai, ^Kir) to express Uie cause of tbe emotion. See tbe Lexicon.

1407. The ^nilive of cause is used in exctnmatinns and is often preceded
by an interjection: ^S toS irSpit alai for the man I X.C. 3. 1,39, rflt T^xiTt mr
Qllttek! 2.3.3. In tragedy, the genitive of a pronoun or adjective after ttfiBt
or &imi refers to the second or third petson. For tbe fiist person the nominative
is used (oTjiwi rdXmra ah me, miaerable ! S.Ant.654).

1408. Allied to the genitive of cause is the genitive of purpose in toO with
tbe infinitive (esp. with m4, 2032 e), and in espresaions where tutta. Is usually
employed, as 4 t(^' drdri) vuKmiuds-Ar rsD rtpl ^wk^i 6\fdpeii the vihole fraud
wot contrived for thepurpote of ruining the Phoeiana D. IS, 76.

1409. Closely connected with the genitive of cause is the genitive with verbs
of diaputing^ ei ^otfiXci imroiaiiitea r^t ipx^' ue hare no dispute with the king
nlwNl hia empire X. A. 2. 1. 23, 4fi#iir^4Tii<r» 'B^x^' r^t w6\fat he dlaptOed
the poaaemion of the elty isilh Erechtbeua L 12. 103, Ip' eut iiii f)iur imrrtibetrai
Tiff i-wayw^ftt ; UMtl then he will not oppoae ua about the tvmoenl (of the army),
vill hef X. A. 7. e. 6. dmrowi'irAu claim may follow 1349 (t^i riXiui irrt-
ruoirTo (A«y laid claim to the city T. 4. 122). Verbs of diaputing are some-
times referred to 1343 or 1349.

GENITIVE OF 80CRCE

mo Tbe genitive may denote the snuTce.

rititwi^^irtTeelwei wine was broached from the caiki ^ 306, doptfau lol Ila^w-
vdrdai yiytoirrai ratlin tOa of Darius and Parysalia are born two aona X.A.
\.l,l, raSra N rav TvxiTn obtaining this of you Q.6.S2, pdBt /lau talrili leam

thtKOtofi-omme X.C. 1.6. 44.

1411. Wlthverbsof AMrfni7^om and the like the genitive is probably abla-
tlval rather than partitive (13114) : i»oC itatirfret wStar t^i iX'ieeiat f)-om me you
ihall hear the whole truth P. A. 17 b. reiriaw nreirtHuu Srt ait tparir Uri ri Ipot

I Ifanfromtheae men UuU the mottntainit not impaasabte X. A.4.S. IT, TiHai>rd

382 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [mm

Tov rapirrn ItXmr »ueh a tale I heard fiom tome one teko iwu present S.E1.424,
ilSiKu Si em XPii^ I duire to knout of thee S. El. 668.

■. Usually (except nith TtureirtaSa^i) we h&ve wapi (di-A rarel;), ^ or wpii
(in poetry and HiU.) with verbs of hearing from.

b. The genitire wkb (Fnti in warpii S tt/i iyii«<iii> I am of a good father * IW.
Taairur iiif icrt vpayimat of sucA anctntort are gou X. A, 8. 2. 13 is often re-
gaided aa a geniUve of source, but is probably possessive.

OENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES

1412. The genitive is used with many adjectives corresponding
in derivation or meaning to verbs taking the genitive.

1413. The adjective often borrows tlie construction with the genitive from
that of the corresponding verb ; but when the verb takes another case (aspecially
the accusative), or nhen there Is no verb corresponding to the adjective, the
adjective may govern tlie genitive to express possession, connection more or less
close, or by analogy. Many of the genitives in queslion may be classed as objec-
tive as well as partitive or ablatival. Rigid distinction between the undermen-
tioned classes must not be insisted on.

1414. PosWBsion and Belonging (1297).— -dfpunroiriiTdrruFdpe/H^wrfoFf
common to all men P. S. 205 a (cp. miinircit 1343), Itpii raS abroO Btou sacred to
the same god P. Ph. 85 b, dI (frfim t&i i<)itmiii6Taii tiun the dangert belong to
the commandera D. 2. 28. So with ofnibi and iiiix<lipun peculiar to. lautit
(usaally), ofKCwi inclined to, appropriate (o,and ISwt also take the dative (1499).

1415. Shanng (1343). — <r<«iat v^oxoi partaking in wMom F. L. 6S9d,
M/unpoi rirrur having an eqval thare in energthing X. C. 2. 1. 31, ifiptvt d/ui^wt
having no part in warUonneee P. S. 181 c. So ix\iiipiii without lot in, Afitroxt
not thariiig in.

1416. Tonching. Desiiing, Attaining, Tasting (1346, 1^60, 1366). —If >*-
»Toi (7X0VI not touching a apear S. 0. T. 069, x^P" ^* rpMviuu ytr/tr^iuSa grati-
tvde for the objects of our zeal T. 3. 67, raiitiat ^it^aXoi having attained to
(possessed of) cvUnre P. L. 724 b, i\tuecplis 47*110x01 not tasting freedom P. R.
676 a. So Stctpui passionately desirous of.

1417. Connection. — diciXoufln iW^Xaiv dependent on one another X. O.

11, 12, Td Toih-wr iSt\it>i what is akin to thia X. Hi. 1. 23, t&h rpxifm^ntt tri-
fUKu ixoStlitii ejrpo&ilions agreeing aitk what had preceded P. R. 604 b, ^f-ryat
virmi iiiSexo' light succeeding sleep S. I'h. 867. All these adjectives take also
the dative ; as does euyytr-^t akin, which has become a substantive.

1418. Capacity and Fltnesa. — Adjectives in -ait from aeUve verbs, uid
some others ; waparavacTiicii riSf tit ri' viX(>ior ri> erpOLTifyir tlrcu xf>4 i™' 'opi-
vTiidr Tur ^iTtiafluf roTf ffrpaTitiTati the general mutt be aNe to provide tehat ta
needed in war and to eupplg provisions for his men X. M. 3. 1.6. So StSttvwttXiiih
able to instruct, vpimiKii able to effect. Here may belong yiiim itpoJA rip* for
marriage X. C. 4. 6. B,

1419. Experience (1346).— iai^v t^rtipoi acquainted with the roads X. C.
6. 3. 86, TTtt 9a\i«avt txirT'iltar acquainted with the sea T. 1. 142, ISuiriij rvtfro*

nO} THE GENITIVE S33

nStfr,mi Htutaied in thii btutnesi X. O. 3.9. So wHhrpIjJuv ikilled in, ri/^Xii
blind, Iwtipet unacguainled, iyinwavrot unpractised, AnlStvrot uneduealed, d^iif
nntKCuUonud, J^i^taA^i late in learning, ^iXa^0i}i fond of learning,

14aa Hemembeiing, Caring For (1366). — jra«i)>«in)A«mt mindful of crime
A. Eum. 382, ^i/uX1)t tu> ^IXuf attFaline to friends X. M. 2. 6. 36, dntiiMur r^r
niltwr Hnmfnd/ul o/ <I<iR0er> Ant. 2. a. 7 ; and, by analogy, riryyuii^r T^r
<>4kwr(furA/uif>Ti)/ulrwr/or9fD(n;Fo/Au>na>i£fror8 X.C.0.1.3T. So d>uX4t care-
fru o/, ^iXftffuir forgetful of.

1421. Peiception (1361). — Compounds in -^iroof from duo^ : \6yur icaXdr
'ntuNu Aearer* of noble Kordt P. R. 409 a, &rii«wi QtaraXHr tubjeete of the
naiaitant T. 4. 76, inr^nMt ruir yoiAj* obedtent to parents P. R. 468 d, Iriiiriw.
luMu f^RoranJ qf culture Aea, 1, 141, So ou»i)in»i Aeai'fnp (ojefAer, *oT^in»i
trfvyiiijr- tr^Koet, taT^mm, and frr^iwi also take tbe daUve.

1422. PnlneM (1389). — x<<f>« 4 r^^' tFrfwrri} the cili/ieasfull of rejoie-
% D. IS. 317, rnpdSiuret iyplwr eTiplur vXilpi,! a park full of roUd beoiU X. A.
1. i. 7, rXouritirepoi ipporirtiin richer tn good eense P. Pol. 301 e, ^Xijupoi rA>a-
•riii penfrtiH* o/ good-will P. S. 197 d, (■■Xijo-toj j(P1*«It«» greedy of mone)/
X. C 6. 2. 20. So with r^iirXmi, irtf;iirXiut. TXiJptjj may Cake the dati7e.

1423. KaliDg (1370). — Tofrrijt ntfun t^i xiip"' miwter of this countrf
D.3.16, itpariit iprf^ unrextratned in passion T. 3. S4. So witb ^ici»Tift mruler
o/, ttnipirup complete masttr of, dc/idrup intemperute in.

1424. Talne (1372). ~Tii>-ii d{fa J/ia /ir^r a rug worth ten minat X. A.
'. 3. 27, iifci x;n|fidTur dAc linrr^ rirpufdlian is not to be bouj/Af /ormoneir 1.2.32.
So with dn-if ut loorth, iiripporiis in equal poise with (T. 2. 42), d{>6;Kpeut (tUHcfenC,
'rffiii HnioortAy. AfiAr rin with the infinitive deuotes it it meet for a pertott to
da tometlUng or the litce.

1429. Accomitabillty (1375),— afriMTo^wr aeeonntable for this P. 0.447 a,

'mxn Xiireraflau liable to a charge of desertion L. 14. 0, iftpelit nUixot sub-
jfitoa trial for in^iety P. L. 907 e, frirortX^t ^ipcu tul>}e.ct to tribuU T. 1. 19,
Ti^ur Irww6«ums b/ut renpOTitible to J/oii for this Tt.S.iiO, iBv<" Tar HSiiniiiiTur un-
pinishedfoT offences Lye. 79. (Mxet usually takes tbe dative, and bo l/wtiivm
>i>^*niiu; dependent on or exposed to. The above Gompounda of i/ri take tbe
lenitive by virtue oC tbe Bubstantivs contained in them.

1436. Place. — Imrrlot opposite and a few other adjectives denoting near-
nenoT approach (1353) may take the fjenicive, chiefly in poetry : irarriot larar
Aj(»<i' they stood opposite the Achaeans P 343. Cp. raC Hirrov i-rmdpfiai at
M angle aith the Pontus Ildt. 7. 36. itarrloi usually lakea tiie dative.

1427. Separation (^l302).—<pl\uti.yaaarlp7uuii deprired of good friend*
^ U. 4. 4. 24, f vx4 ^iX4 irii»uiToi the soul separated from the body P. L. 899 a,
*nJi(Xal xpvi'^'r'" Sparing of money P. R, 648 b (or pertiaps under 1366), EXiff
laSapiw clear of undergrowth X. O. 16. 13, ArauffTot yivt ttevfr erasing tamenta-
l""u E. Supp. 82. So with AnWepof free frvnt, iTtit ptire from, innocent of,
iW«fAi berefl of, yviirds stripped of, pimt alone.

1428. Compounda of alpha privative. — In adilitiim to tlie adjectives wttli
"Ipha privative which take tbe gi;nitlve by reason of tlie notion expressed in the

384 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1449

verb, or by analogy, there are mikDy othen, Bome of which take tha genitive
because of the idea □{ Beparation, especially wheo the genitive is of kindred
meuiing and an Bttributive adjective is added for tlie purpoae of mote exact
deflnilion. Thua, iri^i deprived of, iraf^t not offering, irt\it free from
(1392) ; as ri^i^i drifisi depriued of honour P. L. 774 b, draij ipp^rat raiiut
WUhout male children 1. 12. 120, to5 ifiiiiTm BiA^tos dfl^aroi not teeing the laost
pletuant sight X. M.2. 1.31, I^ukii t^Si tQi dpai without atterinff thit cur»t
S. O. C. 865. Tiiis ie more frequent in poetry than prose.

a. So when the adjectives are passive : ^fXur liXai^st vnarpt bg friends
S. Ant. 847, cp. iiKuit Juff-dXarrat niiilt no one U hard for evil fortune la capture
8. 0. C, 1722. The genitive with adjectives in d/pAa pHvatfw is Boineliiaes called
the genitive of relation.

1429. Wont (I3Q6).— dp^ara KiiA 4»A;(hf charioti deprioed f(f tbeir
drivers X. A. 1. 8. 20, Mti,, dprrfl. lackiHg virtue P. R. 381 c. So vrlth r4rv
poor, AXiri}t and iwiSe^i lacking.

1430. Diatinctlon (1401). — aid*opet tQi 4XX»» different from the reMt V.
Par. 160 d, (Tcfnr rd i^i> tov i.ya»ov fdeaeure is different from what is good F. G.
600 d, dXXa rSi Sittluw at variance with justice X. M. 4. 4. 25 (dXXoi is •Imoet
a comparative). So with dXXsMf and dXXirpiot alien from (also with dat.
trnfavourabte to, disinclined (o). Sii^iopat with dative means at variance toUh.

1431. Comparison (1402). — Adjectives of the comparati re degree or imply-
ing comparison take the geniUve. "Die genitive denotes Uie standard or point of
departure from which the comparison is made, and often expresses a coudenaed
comparison when actions are compared. Thus, ^ttih* dtiafl^t ro^S, 8ti\dt dr-
Spelau an ignorant man it inferior to a wlte man, a eoteard to a frrare man

P. Phae, 2.'J0a, tptiTTbt ian \i~tm ri icdXXoi rflt ^uwutif the beauty of tfit woman
i* too great for description X. M, 3. 11. 1, 'Erlhifa rporifii KApov r^rrc iHi^paa
d^n-o Epj/axa arrived five days before Cyrus X. A, 1. 2, 2G, i:aTaSttirTifii.r rj)r
Sjfar T$[ 4\tt5iit tXn^r the reputation he acquired ffll short of hit vepeetation
L 2. 7. So with Jfifrtpet, bartpaiet, rtpir-rht. Comiwrotives with <, 1069.

1433. So with multiplicalives in -irXaiii and -irXd^iai : JlirXdvu Awit^nr
Jv (Xa^cr it returned dvuble what It received X. C. 8. 3. 38. So witA rDXX«a-r4f.

1433. The genitive with the comparative often takes the place of 4 with

another construction ; iffKuliTtpir ian ^t) OyiaDf giiiiaTDi ( = j) fif) i>yi(7 vci/uiri) ni)

fryMi V'i'xn 'vroiiceai it it more aretchcd to dwell with a dtsrawd *oul than a dii-

eated bodji P. G. 470 b, irXfloir. «uffl rCr 'ABvnlut (= fl ol 'Affquun) TUft^^
they came leilh more ships than the Athenians T. 8. 52.

1434. The superlative with the genitive is both partitive and ablatival ;
the latter, whpn a tiling Is coinpari'd with many things taken singly. Thus,
ffo^iiraroi itSfni-iuy P. A. 22c means wiffst among nirn (part.) and wiser than
any other tingle man. The partitive idea is the stronger. The comparative
and the supt^rlative idea are Ixith expressed in dti)/i jvKiilit vlir drsXArat of^n
^^rTft Tffl» dXXut a reasonable man will bear the loss of a son more eaailv than
other men (and mo^l r<mly if all men) P. It. 603 e, HTpaTtli ^icyJari) twv wpi
afr^t ail expedition grenter than any preceding it T. 1. 10, rut dXXur urraroi the
latt amoitg nations D.6.T2. Cp. iiim rur i\Xu* = alone of alt D.S1.3S3.

i«39] THE GENITIVE 385

IMS. CaOM (1406). —tiial/iur tou Tp6rov happy because of AU ditpotitton
P.PL 6Se, MXduK r4i auiufitpit viretched because ijfthy lot S. O.T. 1347, pi\am
hmiami rnO /uyiSovi date* wonderful for tlieir sixt X. A. 2. 3. 15, wtplipa^^ rsD
art^pert^Ku fearful of becoming an object of contempt P. Phae. 238 b. 8o
with Tthij And rXit^utr loretcAerf.

143& Free Uae.— a. Compound adjectives formed of ft preposition and
HibHuitiTe may take & geDitive depeodeDt on the subetantlTe : gK^r^ urav'Kn
wder tile iheUer of the tent S. Aj. T96 ( = ^i ai\i). Frequent in poetiy.

b. Some adjectiTBB are freely used witb Uie genitive in poetry, as yipjii Ililpi*
>«i lM9piai 4>Dtur the marriage Of Porit brinffing Tuln on hU friends A. Ag. 1156.
TliiiiinreinproBe: ri rap irticoupanl'ix'"'' fife that protecu against cold X. M.
13.7, tamupyat /lir rOr AWai, iairroO Si icairovpybTtpot doing evU tO the othtrt
hu r»0Te to himself 1. 6. S, h t^i 'EXXdioi dXint^iDi the curse and destroyer of
Grrece Aes. 3. 157. These adjectives ftre practically equivalent to anbetautlvee,
Cp. anaiu patriae.

GENITIVE WITH ADVERBS

1437. The genitive is used with adverbs derived from adjectives
which take the genitive, and with adverbs akin to verbs followed by
the genitive.

Ti TvArou ^£9f uAdt comes after this P. R. 390a (1345), ipvriKUt rx<""> roC
oftaiMii iheg are in loee with gain X. 0. 12. IS (cp. 1340), dei AvmIov straight
for Ae Lfceum P. Ljs. 2a3 b (cp. IBvirt nit he made straight for the ship O 893 ;
1363), tmrrUr irdrrutin the presence of all T. 6. 26, r\t^lot e^pUr near Thebes
D.B.2T, KciXnu rAai near tAe JV^ile A.Supp.308 {VAGS),-,t*(ui iiuXtrrtpot tx*tr
ht too neglectful of one" a parents P. I.. 932 a (135e), t* rirrur tUt i^wtlpm ainS
ixinitr of all those acquainted with him X. A. 2. 0. 1, littSttbt irtlpat tx'" '" ^
luxperienced in nothing 1. 1. 62 (1345), iftut iripbs iyaStO in a manner worthy
o/n good man F. A. S2e, rptwirrui rSn rpi^rrar in a manner appt't^riate to
the doers P. Menez. 239c (1372), fia^pjrrui ti3> dXXwr irBpiirur above the rest
of men X. Hi. 7.4 (1401), raviipii e&rtoi earirnv etl 'wickedness flies faster than
fate' P. A. 89 a (1402), wstBtx^ (xouira toQ iStXipoO mourning for her brother
I.e. 6. 2.7 (1405).

1438. An adverb witb fx<" o' S'sreiirSat is often oaed as a perfpbrasis for
in idjective witb elm or tor a verb.

1439. The genitive is used with many adverbs (a) of place,
(b) of time, (c) of quantity.

a. iiifloMlr Tov T^ iialiair x^^P^' to make an attack at some point of their
amatrt X. C. «. 1. 42, ataBiiiirat ol i)» lamu perceiving what a plight he was in
D- 23. 166, ol irpMXiiXv^ iat\ytlii to what a pitch of wanliin arrogance he has
tone 4. 9, irraOta t^ rofdrtlai at that point of the administration 16. 62, tlSfwai
"■n y^ 4vrir to know where In the world he is P. R. 403 e, rippa 1(1^ roC ^lov,
hrirm 34 tyyit alreadff far advaared in life, near death P. A. 38o, ^1 rdtt
*ati\itot o» this side of Fhasells J. 7. 60, rpbi §ap&r tuB ScAmAmv north of
Ht. Seombrus T. 2. 06, AXXw IXXg r^ riXwrn some in one part, others in aanther

336 SYNTAX OP THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1440

pari 0/ the ettg 2. 4, irarriKpii r^f 'Arnit^i oppotita AUica D. 8. 36. So with
irrit iniide, tlrm ioitMn, ixaripwBtr on both sides, iirurett bfhind, rpiaStr btfore.

b. Tqt^K' ivrir Ipa t$i Wp«t ; at vihat time of dag f Ar. Av. 1408, rfi iuiifit
(■pi late in the das ^- H. 2. 1. 23.

c, rSr 7»ia6rut Aiiji' enough of such matttrs I'. Charm. 163 d, robrtit fXn
enough of this X. C. 8. 7.26.

1440. Moat of the genitives in 1488 ue partitive. Soioe of the adverta
falling under 1437 talce aUo the dative (A7:t'i fyt^'i r\TitU>r in the poets, ^{$1,

1441. The genitive is uwd with adverbs of manner, especiBlly with the
intransitive (xu, ^cw (Hdt.). The genitive usually has no article: wi Tdxon
tKoarat tlxtr as fast at each could (with what measure of speed he had) X. H.

4. 6. 16, in roSUr elxor as fast as my tegs Could carry me Ildt. 0. 116, Ixorra
ei ^frCit being in their right minds E. Hipp. 462, <£ iriifwrot tftir to be in good
bodily cowiilion P. K. 401 d (cp. 407 c, r<ii>i v7utrut Ixorrat ri iriitiaTa those ah.
are sound in body: with the article, 1121), xj'Vf^''"' *^ Itnorrts well off lldi.

5. 82, Toi tbMhou iniXiSi iS6Ka i riXis KuBlaTaaffai . . . T^t ti iri ep^iiri m/iiSti.
XP^ffui ({fir they thought that the city aas well situated for the war and teould
prove utifnlfoT the march along Thrace T. 3. 02.

1442. This use is probably derivfMl from that wltb adverbs of place : thns
xui tx'« lAfirij in what state of mind are j/ouT V. R. 406d is due 10 the
analogy of Toi; iifiis ; (cp. Sroi yniiaii S, El. t)22).

1443. The genitive Is used with many adverbs denoting separaUoo. Hios.
Iirr<u 1) fix*l X^P^' tou ffii^utTot the lovl will exist without the body P. Ph. Me,
Slxa ToB t^irr^pou tXtJAiui separate from your force X. C. 6. 1, 8, vpirw tv*
rrnUr far from the sources X. A. 3. 2. 22, iuroSiir iWi/Xott rsXXcSr ml tyaMt
Imiitt you vail prevent one another from enjoying mnny Nettings X. C.
8.5.24, \i8pf tHw irrpaTiuT2r leithout the knouiledge of the eoldieri X.A.I.
3. 8. So with ffai outside, inrln without, outside, ripir atroM, nfit^ unbe-
known to.

QENITiVE OF TiME AND PUVCE

1444. Time. — The genitive denotes the time within which, or a\
a certain point of which, an action takes place. As contrasted with
the accusative of time (1582), the genitive denotes a portion ot time.
Hence the genitive of time is partitive. Cp. rw pkv \aj>M»va 'ti i
ftw, rov 8i 6ip»K xPT'^toi^'w Txp vSari durinff the (entire) n-inter Iht
god rains, bid in (a part of) summer they need the tvater Hdt. .t. lit.

illUpaj by day, ntrit at or by night, /uriiiifffili! at midday. StlXtp in Iht ,
afternoon, ifripii in the evening, Bipovt in summer, x"**i3"* '" winter, flfwi ;
in spring, iviipii in autumn, tot! Xoiirai; in the future. The addiUnn of article |
or attributive usually dellneR the tjme more exactly. Thus, aiKaSr ^iSi iiir dipnt ]
fvx'"^'' ix'i't ^** '* x«f '*'«> iXwii^f ; Is it not pleasant to have (a honse) rool j
In summer, and warm In ^einter f X. M. 3. 8. 9, yx""' '^^' fKrii he rfrjinrtnl
dtiring the night X. A. 7. 2. IT. col 4^(ni Hat wjcrit iyur hei rail rtXtnlom liotk
by day and by night Itading againut the enemy 2, 6, 7, fhrrw vt \mw»i it^tiri

I;.ClK>^Ic

.45o] THE GENITIVE 337

iciirtu div^i iftat thty eaid that for the fature (at any time in the futore) ft
fhuuld no longer be permuted to let an example of lawleianeis 6. T. 34. (Dis-
itoguUh ri Xiiirdr /or the (entire) future Z. 'J. 8.} irrit leithln is aomettmes
ailded to tbe genitive,

1445. The addition of the article may have a dietrEbutive sense i B/>ax^J)r
fti»i^« T^t Ti/Upit he received a draekm a day T. S. 17.

1446. The genitive may denote the time gince an action hu happened or the
lime uiUiI an action wilt happen ; •>iSii% )iA wu liptirqic Katnir oiSin roXXwt trQr for
ntattj/ yean nobodi/ haa put i iipic gneilion to me 1'. G. 448 a, ^airiXih ei naxt'To*
Uta iiiupQw the ting v>itl not Jight for [eii days X. A. 1. T. IB.

1447. The genitive may or tiia.y not denote a definite part of the time during
which anytliliig takes place ; the dative (ixea the time explicitly eilber by speci-
fying a definite point in a given period or by contracting the whole period to a
definite point ; tbe accusative ezpreaaes the whole extent of time from beginning
Loend : cp. Tg H iertpaif el iiiy'ABiiratot t6 ti rpaiaraur cJXor Koi TJ)v 4#i/pdt dn-

ON the next daf the Athenians captured Che suburb and laid uxtsle the land for
that entire dan, vhUe the three hundred Heionaeans departed in the course of the
foUoaing night T. 4. 130 ; i/tip^ H ipii/itm rpirn in oUeBtr &pii,Tfra,f, -raOriir ri
ilinilarTo Kal T)|f Ttriimjr nol r^t »^>«'Ti)t utxP' opIcTgv beginning on the third
dag a/ler their departure, they continued their work (all) thU day and the fourth,
and on thefi/lh until the mid-day meal 4.90.

«. Tbe genitive ol time is less common tlian the dative of time (1639) with
ordinals, or with Oii, oCrst, iKcirot ; as rairiit t^i nurii T. S. S7, P. Cr. 44 a,
ittitou ToC M>it in the cvurse of that montii X. M.4. 8.2. For tipoai we find
h Mptt larely and, in poetry. Bipti. T. 4. 133 has both tdv aAroC Sfpovi and it
rf airf eipei in the Course of the game summer; cp. Iffoi ^ti It rt etpti ml x«-
Hun 6 'ItTpet Hdt. 4. fiO and 'Itrrpoi Irrai ^« eiptm nl x">"3»i *• *^ (.('^ ^"^
jtoipt with the same volume in summer and lointer').

1448. PlAce. — The genitive denotes the place within which or at
which an action happens. This is more frequent in poetiy than in
proee.

rtSltf ifUKlptr to chase over the plain E 222, Iftv toIx»v toS tripem he WM
titttng by the other viatl (lit. in a place of the wall) I 218, XiXou^rai '(taanlt
kining bathed in Ocecnus E 8, etri JIfiXou li^i o6t' 'ipyitt ofr« Mm-iitii neither
in saertd Pylos nor in Argos nor in Mscenae <ji 108, ritS tlmti^a rtixiw thov
tiidit admit thl» man within the wnlli B. Phoen. 451, Uku toG rpirw to go
foTUMtrd X. A. 1. S. 1, irtrdxirKir r^i iSoS rait ax^^trtp^' Tpambrtai they has-
tened on their way those leho came up more slowly T. 4. 47 ; Xuiai x'V*' einowri
they dwell on the left hand A. Pr. "14 (piissibly ablatival).

1449. Many adrerbs of place are genitives in form (ofrroE there, leC where /
(MtMwG noahere). Cp. 341.

DATIVE

1450. The Greek dative does duty for three cases: the dfttire
proper, and two lost cases, the instrumental and the locative.

388 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1451

A. The dative derives its name (4 Smxi, rrOrn, eanu dattnu) from th«
use with tilArai (1460).

1451. The dative is a necessary cainplement of a verb when the
information given b; the verb is incomplete vrithout the addition
of the idea expressed by the dative. Thus, Wtfenu lie obeys, calls for
the addition of an idea to complete the sense, as rots vo/mk the laics.

1452. The dative a^ a voluntary complement of a verb adds some-
thing unessential to the completion of an idea. Thus, airoU k
fiipfiofxn iir^XBov the barbarians departed — for them (to their ad-
vantage), liere belongs the dative of interest, 1474 If.

1493. Bat the boundaiy line between the oecesdary and the voluntary
complement ta not alivaya clearly markeii. When the idea of the actioa, niit
the object of the action, is empliatic, a verb, usually requiring a dative to com-
plete Its meaning, may be uaad alone, as rciBrrai he it obedient.

1454. With many tntransitlTe verba the dative is the sole complement.
With transitive verbe it is the indirect complement (dative of the irtdirecl or
remoter object, usually a person) ; that ia, It farther dednes the meaning of
a verb already defined In part by die accusative.

1455. Many verba so vary in meaning that they may take the dative either
alone or along with the accusative (sometimes the genitive). No rule* can be
given, and English usage is not always the same as Greek usage.

1456. The voice of ten determines the construction . Titua, rtUttr riti toper- :
laade tome one, rtlBtrBat rm to perruade oneself for some one (qbej/ tome one), <
ia\tittr rtfi raura roinr to order tome one to do Ihit, vapaiit\t6tv>ai rin ravn

TButf to exhort some one to do thia.

DATIVE PROPER

1457. The dative proper denotes that to or for which something
is or is done.

1456. It is either (1) used with single words (verbs, adjectives, and some-
times with adverbs and substantives) or (2) It serves to define an entire sentence ;
herein unlike the genitive and accusative, which usually modify single members
of & sentence. The connection between dative and verb Is leaa intimate than
tbM between genitive or accusative and verb.

1459. The dative proper is largely peisonal, and denotes the pemoo who is '-
teterested in or affected by the action ; and Incindea 1401-1473 as well as 1474 fl.
The dative proper Is not often useil with things ; when bo used there is onall;
peisoDiitcation or seml-penouiflcation.

THE DATIVE DBPEHDBNT ON A SINGLE WORD
DATIVB AS DIRBCT COHPLEMENT OF VERBS

1460. The dative may be used as the sole complement of maoy
verbs that are usually transitive in English. Such are

i4<T] 1'HE DATIVE 889

1461. (I) To ben^, help, injure, pleate, displeate, be frietwUy or
hottiie, blame, be angry, threaten, envy.

fit^UToaif^StttuJnatohe^theviTongtd E. L A. TO, a^ Ar 4nix'^' fO' ii^r
ke vombt not now be trtmbling ut U. 3. 5, dn-i rsE auttpytlriavrali ri cn^farr*
^WcdfMwir dXX^Xsd itutead of eo&penatng for their mutwoj interest*, they re-
vile OKC another X. M. it. 6. 10, (t ratt rMofir ipttKuwrH iiritiw, rataf iw /linn
ttn ifitih irapieioKiitr if lee are pleanng to the majority, it leoatd not be right
if ut thould dUpleoMe them alone T. 1.S6, tintir roii tutSmt to be fi'Undiji to Ou
ill-iaUntioned X. C. 6, 2. 1, i/al Vr'P>T<" tA«y are angrj/ at me P. A. 28 c,
ry Bttfiiidfn i^tOaur theg threatened TTieramenee T. 8. 92, tt ^$»rar rait rJwv
rwirir not eheriehing envy againet the rich X. A. 1. 9. 19.

1462- Some verba of ben^tlng and iufnrinff talce the accusatiie (iL^XiTv,
pXiwTtir , 1691 a) ; fiiatTr Tin Aate »ome one. XOriTtXtic, avin^ptir be (<f admm-
lagt Uke the dative.

1463. (II) Zb meef, approach, yield.

t*tl Si 4»i(Fri(ffB» oJretf of iTTpttTiryal 6ii( mA«ii the gentraU met them X.A.
S.3.IT, repiTi^x't'o ^^(p<t>'« hemeete Philoerata X. H.4. H. 24, irafwtB£xf>4
fwiwt xt\d{»ir teAof tdid bea«tt one mutt not approach X. C. 1. 4. 7, «A I" M
Myrg n>t 0i«i;rt /ill futx"" V'^'tf to n«e«88(tj( and v>ar not v>ith heaven E. ft. 716.
Oa the genitive nltb verbs of approaching, aee 1353.

1464. (Ill) To obey, serve, pardon, trust, advise, command, etc.

T«i rSiioii rtlStv obey the taie» 1. 1. 16, rji biitripif iiiii^6fi<f Ifwamittr to be
tubmrvienl to your interetu T. 6. 08, irnifStiui SovXiijit ruv iiSowSr if you are
the tlave of no pltature 1. 2. 29, irlffmor airf <U ir6\nt the cities trusted him
X. A. 1. 9. 8, rrpartryif rrpan^cui TapaiMpm a general advielng hia men
P. Ion 640 d, T^ Hurf h^/iv" iptiy^r he onlered the Musian to fiet X. A. 5. 2.
iS>, TV KXtApxv 'PM ty" he ehauted to Clearrhut tu lead X. A. 1. 8. 12.

14S5. KtXf^if command (Htrictly impel) may be followed In Attic by the
wctuallTe and (usnally) the infiDltive; in Mom. by the dative either alone or
with the infinitive. Many verba of commanding (wapayfiWttr, iiaKitjAtsSai)
take in Attic the acciualive, not the dative, when uaed with the inflnttlTe (1900 h.).
Aramter (and iKotiir = obey} may take the genlUve (1366).

1466. (IV) To be tike or unlike, compare, beJU,

ttuUrai rwT niuii!T«i to be like lueh men I*. R. 349 d, tI oPr rpirti ipipl winrri f
vAol then btfitM a poor man ^ P. A. 30 d.

1467. The dative of the peraon and the genitive of the thing are uwd vrith
the ImpeiBonala ><( (1400), ndrirTi, ;i^i, tuTatWKti, Tpoa^iat. Thiu, lusSa-
Mpvv irSpi Tupitnf Stt a tyrant need* mfrcunarie* X, Hi. 8. 10, ut a6 iierir airoit
'EnM^iBu ttKumucft a» they had nothing to do with Bpidamnue T. 1.29, t6x i"
ffititura lurliu^tr abri^ he did not repent of hi* act* of violence And. 4. 17, ra^y
T^ Bsun-laf irpoviiai ottit he has nothing to do tollh Boeotia X. A. 3. l.Sl. (fwrl
imtHsin my poaer does nut take the genitive. For the accusative instead of
the daUve, see 1400. Cp. 1344.

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

verb taking the dative can form a peraoDal pasaiTe,
minative Bubject of the passive. Cp. 1746.

DATIVE AS INDIRECT COMPLBMENT OF VERBS

1469. Many verbs take the dative as the indirect object t(^ther
with an accusative us the direct object. The indirect object is com-
monly introduced iu English by to.

KCpei ilJwffif afr^ (f /i'^rCir luaSir Cyru* givet him pay fiir $ix monOu X. A.
l.lAii^ -lit 'Tptarhfi Wwot iiap^imTi) he presciUed a horse to the Hgrcanlan X.C.
8.4.24, ri Si a\Xa Siatti/uit roli rTpartiyo'' to distribute the re»t to the gtTierali
X.A.7.5.2, /litpdf iityd\ifi tlndaai to compare a small thing to a great thing
T.4.36, T4iirut airv iyt'^" nentUnrj a tuMseni/er to him X.A.I. 3. 8, itux'oS-
lial vm S4/a riXan-a / promite yoii (en talents 1. 7. 18, tovto atl S' i^Uiuu I lag
thit charge upon thee S. Aj. 1 18, rapinti toU 'Aflijmioii rmdat he adviaed the
Atheniant asfolhncs T.fi.S, iiiol inrpi^ai rairiirTtir ipxiy to rntrutt this com-
mand to me X. A.0. 1.31, XtyftrraOra Toit arpaTiiimut to say this to the tOldien
1. 4. 1 1 (Xtytif rpti rm lacks the personal touch of the dative, which indicates
interest in the person addressed). A dependent clause often represents the

1470. PaMiTe. — The accusative of the active becomes the subject of the
passive, the dative remains; ialnf avrii 4 x>^ Mi9)t thit land teat given to

DATIVE AS DIRECT OR INDIRECT COUPLEHENT OP VERBS

1471. Many verbs raay take the dative either alone or with the
accusative.

aiStri liin^fuu I find fault ailk no one D. 21. 190, tI At hm n^it^oia; vAaC
fault iBoatd you have to find with me f X. 0.2, 15; frwij^crfl reii *wTt lamattr-
vant i>f the gods X.C.8.2.22, 'Bpwri irSr irnipirii he serves Eros in everything
P. S. IHOc ; TSfHimXnion'ai rnlt rtpl itiirt ^luXKuiidna they exkort Uutse teho are
$trlBinfi for ticlory 1.9.79, To&ra toii irXtrait mpanXcAi/uii I address Ihii txhor-
tallon to the hoplitea T.7.63; imiSi^t rait dSKoSvir you reproach the guilty
L. 27. ttl (alRo accus.), Qyi^alaLt r^r dria^lat 6ttiSlt(>uti they upbraid the Thebnns
With their ignorance 1.10.248; tfmrt m^fd^ivi having prai/ed to the gods T.S.^,
t^iimoi Tui Scaii riyaBi having prayed to the gods for success X. C. 2. S. I (rp.
alrtiV Tiri ti, 1(123). So i»iTi,uir (iyta\i?r) rin to rensiire {accuse) some one.
iwiTlnat (tyKoKtlr') tI tih •■riigure something in {bring an accusation affainsl)
tome one. So ireiXtlr threaten. ; and iptnat, 4Wfn», Api/ycr Ward off {rirl ti
in poetry, 14831.

1472. ■(iitwptir (iKiet, TiiuiptTseat) Tin means (') arenge some one {lake
vtngeanee for some one), as Tiftupiimr aoi toD vaiSit iiriffnnE^Bi / promise t-
avenue you because of (on tlie luurUyrer of) your son X, C. 4, (J. 8, tl rl/uafHiaen

H79] THE DATIVR 341

}}aTpiK\if rAr ^rar if you iirenge the murder o/Patroelut F. A.2Rc. riiiufiMSal
(rarely Tiiutpfir) nm mi'aiiK to avfniji^ iiaeaelf upon lomt one (/ixiiiVA someone).

1473. For the lialivp of purpose {to wAo( endf), coinnioii in r,atin with a
second dative (dvno dari'), (ireek ubch a predicate noun : iKtlKfi it x'^P^ i&ptt
M9n the country too* giofa to him at a gift X, H.S.I, (I. The usage in Attic
iiiMriptioiw ((Xo. TM Sifian iiaUi for the door* C. I. A, 2, add. 884 b, 1, 38) is
siiiuewhat Bimllar to the Latin unage. Cp. 1602.

A. Tlie inflnitive was originally, at least in part, a dative of an abstract
■ulutantive, and served to mark purpose ; rli t ip aipiiK SiOt IptSi {vf^m
iidxwia^ : «Ao then of the gods /wrought the twain together (for) to contend in
strife/ A 8. Cp. " what went ye out tor to see ? " St. Matth, 11. 8.

DATIVE AS A MODIFIER OF THE SENTENCE
DATIVE OP INTEREST

1474. The person for irhom something ia or is done, or in reference
to whose case an action is viewed, is put in the dative.

a. Han; ot the verbs in 14(11 fl. take a dative of interest. 1470 B. are Epecial

1475. After verbs of motion the dative (usually personal) is uxed, eapeciallj
in poetry : x<<f>Bt ^l">^ 6piyiirTat reaching out their hands to me /t 257, •f-ix"
'AiSi rpotwfitr hurled their gouU on to Hades (a person) A 3 ; rarely, in proee,
after verbs not conipounded nith a preposition : f-xitret {*e(l. rai raOi) 'Pirylv
fitting in at Bhegium T. 7. 1. Cp. 1485.

1476. Dative of tbe Possessor. — The person for wliom a. thing
exists is put in tlie dative witli ilvxi, yi'yvtir&iii, {nnipx"v, ^"vai (j)oet.),
etc., when he is regarded as interested in its possession.

<XX«t litw x^^^wrd iari, ^/ur ii (6tiiiaxBi ii7atlol othera have riches, ice have
good allies T. 1. SO, r^ jmly xa^ $tSr Sipa ylyrerai gifts are bestowed upon the
just man bjf the godt V. R.613e, Intipx" V^' tiSi' rOr i-nrTiitlar vie hnre no
supptg of provisions X. A. 2.2. 11, raai BriToit f#ti iikp^s death is the natural lot
of all men S.EI.SaO.

1477. So with verbs of thinking and perceiving: rir iyaSir ipxitra p\i-
nrra tifioi- di^pwioii itituatr Cyrus Considered that a good ruler teas a living
late to man X.C.8. 1.22, eappeiri /id\iara iroXi/imi, irtir Toil /wirloii wpiy/uiTa
TinMrurTai the enemy are most courageous when then team that the forces
opposed to them are in trouble X, Hipp. 6. 8.

1478. In the phrase 6npA iiart') tih the name is put in the same caae as
hvfia. Tbus, liofa dcoirriu S»^ aurf elm 'A7ri0uH I thought I heard his name
i»u Agathon F. Pr.316e. S»/ui pol Im and Sro^a (^run/tfax) tx" Br^ treated

IS the passives of inpdfa. Cp. 1322 a.

1479. Here belong the phrases (1) rf (iffni) ipol tal aol; \ehat have I to do
vUh thet f; cp. ti T^ riiuf (at T^ ^attinf; what have the law and torture in
commonf D. 2fl. 30. (2) rl rairr' ipol; what have I to do with this t D. 54. 17.
C3) rl/futTUorj what gain have IT X.C.S.S.lt.

342 SYNTAX OP THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [t4So

1480. The d&tife ot the ponesaOT denoiea that sometblng ia Kt the dteponl
of a penon or baa fallen to his abare temporarily. The genitlTe of po«se«ioD
layi atreaa on the person who onni somethiog. Tlie dative anawsis the quenJon
v)/tat b it theU he hat t, the genitive auswera tbe queaUon tnho U U that ha» tomt-
thingt Tbe uses of the two caaes are often parallel, but not interchangeable.
Thua, tn KPpot, ol ai fm rb irb riiDSt Cyrv», to whom you teill htnafvrth btloag
X.C.0. 1.8, 4 would be iaapproprlote. With a noun in the genitive the dative
ot the posMSBor is need (r^r iKaripou fv/i^x"' '^■^. 1) ; "1th a noun in the
dative, the genitive of tiie poaaeaaor (roi^ iaur^t fu/i^x*" ^- i^)-

1481. Dative of AdvanUse or DlaadTanUge {dcUieut commodi el
incommode). — The peraon or thing for whose advantage or disad-
vantage, anything is or ia done, ia put in the dative. The dative
often has to be translated as if the poBseseive genitive were used ;
but the meaning is different

iwitHi airroii ol pdpPapoi it rljt zii^f dr^Xtfor afltT the barborUmM had dfparted
(for them, to their advantage) from their country T. 1.69, iXXo arpiTtviia an-y
ouHUYtTo anofAer arvty vxu being raUei for him S, A. 1, 1.O, dXXy i rouvrn
TXavT(7, talcix iaiirf nieh a manis rich for another, and not/orhfnue//P.Menex.
246 e, ffT(^>aElir0at t j 9cji to be crovined in honour of (Ae god X. H. 4. 3. 21, m^-
rrUqi IwpaTTt tMwrif Philittidea una working in the inUrext of Philip D. 9. 69,
1-6, TCf^l^'' '^^^' irfpffHi lai^F money is a eaute of mitery to nuritfcuut
E. Ft. 0S2, ol Bpfut «1 ry iiniaaBira impifiarTtt the I^rociaiM who COMW too
late (for, ),«.)fo help Demosthenes T. 7.29, ^t i^ i^^t/paroiV'EXXqffi/HTdXHrnuur
Ipfft At* day xeill be to the Greeia the beginning of great lorroHS S. IS, Jr rd
oxH rUr olMTur imtpi if any of your slaees runs away X. M. 2, 10. 1.

a. For the middle denoting to do something tor ooeseif, see 1719.

b. In the taat example In 1481, aa elsewhere, the dative of a per«on«l poo-
notui ia osed where a poeaeasive pronoun would explicitly denote tho owner.

1482. A dative, dependent on the sentence, may appear to depend on a
aubatantive : rot H tJ^w iptpa ry Svyarpl to you 1 will give a huMband for
four daughter X. C. 8. 4. 24. Common in Hdt.

1483. With verbs of depriving, wafdinff off, and the lihe, the dnUve of the
person may be osedi ri vurrpartitit d^Xtii v^lvo ndttf^ar theji diked him
to relieve them (lit. tote away for them} ftom terving in (Aeioar X.C.7.1.44,
AaHuwiF XoiTiv iiairor ward off ruin from (for) tAe Aiaoj A 466. So dXiEa*
tal Ti (poet), dp. 13G2, 162a

1484. With verba of reeeivlrtg and (myinp, the person who gimet or *eUf
may stand In the dative. In iix'^t^l t1 rm (cbivfly poetic) the dative denotes
Ibe interest of tlie recipient In the donor : 8^fu«Ti liirrt tiTa.% »he took the eup
from (for, i.e. to please) TAeinfs O EST. So with tI^bu vpluiial «h rd x'V^*' i
at what price am Ito buy the pigt of yout Ar. Ach. 812.

1485. With verbs of motion the dative of the penon to whom la properij a
dative of advantage or disadvantage : j)XA ratt 'Atfiffalaii 4 ^7T(\f> (As mettage
MDM to (tor) the Athenian* T. 1.61. Cp. 1476.

1486. Dative of FMllng (Ethical Dative). — The peraooal pro-

i4>g] TBE DATIVE 848

uonns of the first and second person are often nsed to denote the
interest of the speaker, or to secure the interest of the person spoken
to, in an action or statement.

iidiinivfU luu liii $npufftir pray remember not to fivike a diitvrbanet P. A. 27 b,
ifiiiurtirtp«i Yit^a-aprai i/ur ol ritt your young men will groa let* cuUtvaUd P. R.
646 d, TDuirra ifur lari i) rvpnnlt nicA a thing, you know, is denpotitm HdL 5. 92 if,
'ifra^pw^t t/ur "frriartii iart xoii Artaphemn, you kmtu), i» Hytta^e*' to*
b. 30. The dative of feeling may denole nurprlBe ; & n^tp, wi «t\ii fun i rdrirM
oh mother, hoa handsome grandpa is X. C. 1. 3, 2. With the dative of feeling
cp. "knock ine here" Shttkeap. T. of Sh. 1.2.8, "study me how to pleue the
eje *' L. L. L. 1, 1. 80. roi surely, often used lo iDtroduce genenU atUemenls or
maxims, is a petriSed dative of feeling (= rot).

M. This dative In the third person is very rare (aArg In P. R. 843 a).

b. This constmctloD reproduces the familiar style of conversation and may
often be translated by I beg you, please, j/ou see, lei me tell you, etc Some-
times the Idea cannot be given In translation. This daUve is a form of U81.

1487. fyo\ po«Xa|Urf ^rri, etc. — Instead of a sentence with a finite
verb, a participle usually denoting inclination or aversion is added to
the dative of the person interested, which depends on a form of Hvax,
yiyrta&iu, etc.

rif r'Mifu T&r U\aTai&ro6 0tv\eii/iifi Jtrrwr'A^tnlwi d^Irrarftu the Flatotaa
denocraey did not with to revolt /rom the Athenians (= ri w\ijSei vit ipa6\rra
i^lrraatai) T, 2. 9 (lit. it vxiB not /or them when wishing), at poviteiUteii iaitif
i TwrTufff, finfo-tf^a-B^i if these men (the jory) desire to hear tt, I shall take the
matter up later (= ir etrei imitif /SofiXwrrai) D. 18. 11, trnti\Buiitii, a ret ^o-
nifv **rlt let us go hack if it is your pleasure to do so P. Ph. T8 h, tl iiii drfi/nit
fnur l^ty/ui if 1 have come against your will T. 4. 86, 'Sinlf rpoaiexoi^'V 4' rt
TBpArSr 'ETwrafuf Sieiotwosprepared for the news from the Egestaeana 6.46,
4> Si o6 Ty ' KfTieiyAip i-xflaitfrif this was not displeasing to AgesilauM X. H.
5.S. 13. Cp. quibus bellum volentibut erat.

1488. Dative of the Agent — With passive verbs (usually in the
perfect and pluperfect) and regularly with verbal adjectives in -to;
and -T«of, the person in whose interest an action is done, is put in
the dative. The notion of agency does not belong to the dative, but
it is a natural inference that the person interested is the ^ent.

(^ Kol ro^oit wtwparrai has been done hy (for) me and these men T>. 19. 206,
twaiii aireU raperKiivrre tehen the]/ had got their preparations ready 'J'. 1. 40,
Tar»rri ;tDi tlp^ffit let SO mueh have been said by me L. 24. 4, i}/iii^it0ai ri
fifiXi let <t have been decreed by the senaU C. I. A. 2. 66. 9.

a. With verbal adjectives In -^bt and -rfcf (2149) : rott otKoi i>iXuT^ en-
Titd by those at home X. A. 1. 7. 4, ijiiSt y Ari/i r^t ihevBtp^i iywurrior we at
least must struggle to defend our freedom D.9.T0. For the accoe. with -rioi; see
8162 a.

1489. The usual rpstrlction of the dative to teuses of completed action seems
to be due to the fact that the agent Is represented as placed in the poeilion of

344 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [i«o

Tiewing an &lread; oompleted acUon in tbe ligbt of ita relation to hhiiOTif (inter-
est, advajiuge, poBsession).

1490. The dative of the agent ia rarely employed with other tenses than
perfect and pluperfect: \iyrTat iiplr it saiii by u« I'. L. Tl&b, tt/h Ktfimpaintaix
iapSrro the shipe were not seen bi/ (were invisible to) tA« Corej/raeatu T. 1. 51 ;
present, T, 4, 64, 100 ; aorial T, 2. 7.

1491. The person bi/ whom (not for whom) an action is explicitly
said to be done, is put in the genitive with inr6 (1698. 1. b).

1492. The dative of the personal agent is used (1) when the subject is
impersonal, the verb being transitive or intransitive, (2) when the subject is
personal and the person is treated as a thing in order to express scorn (twice
only in the oratora : D. 10. 247, 67. 10).

1493. 6r6 with the genitive of the personal agent is used (1) when tbe iiub-
ject is a person, a city, a country, or is otherwise quasi -personal, (2) when the
verb is inti-anaitive even if the SLibject is a thing, as rut reixwr inri tu> ftapfiipur
tatTiatiruir the Kails having been destroyed by the barbarians Aes. 2. 172, (3) in
a few cases with au impersonal subject, usually for the sake of emphasis, as
i!lt iratpa ^r . . . irh tup dXXwr alKtlwr maX inb twh ftiTtrwr iitiMpT^f^tnt that
she was an helnera has been testified bg the rest of his relatives attd by his
neighbours la. 3. 13.

a. nKoaeai, ip-ri^Bu to be eoaquered may be followed by the dative of a
person, by Inr6 rtwt, or by the genitive (1402).

1494. When the agent Is a thing, not a person, the dative is commonly
used whether the subject Is personal or impersonal. If the subject la pemonal,
iri may be used ; in which case the inanimate agent is peiaonified (see 1698.
l.N. 1). I)r6 Is rarely used when the subject Is impersonal. !ix6 ia never uaed
with tbe impersonal perfect passive of an Intransitive verb.

DATIVE OF RELATION

1495. The dative may be used of a person to whose case the

statement of the predicate is limited.

ititiytir ah-ott itt^aiJartfit ifTLt 1) Ji/dir it Is safer foT thfm to flee than for us

X. A. 3. 2. 19, T^jfpe. ia-rlt tit 'HpiKXtiar iifjfiis ^tpas iXoCt for a (ri'renu it il
a Ivag day's sail to Heraclea S. 4. 2. Such cases as ipiiiat lylrrro reit BTpaTuiraa
the siildiers began tn run X. A. 1. 2. 17 belong here rather than under 147S or 1488.
a. (■! restrictive Is often added : /latpi ii% ytporri AiAi a long road (at least)
for an old man S. O. C. 20, auifiparintJ it ui tXi}0« oi ri. TwdJc ttiyutra; for
the mass of men are not the chief points of temperance such as these f F. R, S89 d.

1496. Dative of Reference. — The dative of a noun or pronoun
often denotes the person in whose opinion a statement holds good.

Ydfiovf rait rpiiraut iyiiui lUpirjiat 6 ^aptiot Darius Contracted marriate*
most distinguished in the eyes of the Persians Hdt. 8.B8, wici rixir roit h^tbii
(o be virtorious in the judgment of all t!ie judges Ar. Av. 446, ffsXXoiiriF tlrrfSt
pitiful iu the eyes iifmany S. Tr. 1071. rapi is often used, as in iro^ Ai^ly
uptri in the vpiiilon uf Darius Hdt. 3. 100.

i,,Coog[c

1499] THE DATTTB 845

1497. The dative participle, without a noun or prononn, is fre-
qaeatl; used in the singular or plural to denote indefinitely the per-
son judging or observing. This constmction is most common with
participles of verbs of coming or going and with participles of verbs
of considering.

i Bp4icil irrip frl St(ii th rit UirTor efrTXfcm TAniM t5 on tA« right ok you
latl ittUi the Pontta X. A. 6. 4. I, t\rtat Sri if Wn Jtia/Sdm rir itoto^i' hrl
xanr ^ipai they said that, when you had cro$ttd the rivtr, the road led to Lydia
3. 5. 16, tit «ir drovor luXirri^p^ieif rat iuptat vivt r'Stlavi (im j ie it not itrange,

oktRVier^et, thatgffl* are more fregiieiit nawf Aes. 3, 179, ri /lirlfuetriirro-
M'V ruvui 'A" iyivStpiiii'l)!' ^j/ou touched the aur/aee the body was not very hilt
T. 2. 4ft, Tpii i<pfytiar vrnwav/iinf i twatririii tou Sttalav i\i)$t6ti If you look at
Ihe matter from the point of view of advantage, the panegyrist of justice speak*
thf. truth P. R. 68»c So (ut) .u«X4m ,It«, (X. A. 8. 1.38) to speak briefly
(liL/or one having brought the matter into small compass), run\im D. 4. 7.

a. The pnrticiple of verbs ot coming or going ia commonly lued in stntementa
of geogi^hical Bitoation.

b. The present participle is more common than the aorist ia the case of all
T«rbs belonging nnder 1497.

1498. D&tlve of the Partldple expreMing Time. — In expressions
of time a participle is often used with the dative of the person
interested in the action of the subject, and especially to express the
time that has passed since an action has occurred (cp. " and this is
the sixth month with her, who was called barren" St Luke i. 36).

d'opoSm i* air$ fpx'ri" Upaiaiteii Prometheus comes to him in his peTplexil)
P. I'r. 33J O, S"o^Om nptva/iinf ot liwtii irruyxinvin irptirff&riui Vjhile XenO-
phon tea* on the march, his horsemen fell in with some old men X. A. 8.3, 10.
The idiom is often transferred from pereonB to things ; fiiUpai iiAXi^tu Ijirat tj
VimXittv iiXuinilf irrd, tr' it ri 'E/ifiaTor jcoT^xXfuiraf about seten days had
passed Hnee the coptitre of Mytilene, uiken they sailed into Embatum T. 3. 29.
Thit construction is frequent lu Horn, and Hdt. The participle is lurely
omitwd (T. 1. 13.).

■. A t«mporal clause may take the place of the participle : rg arparif, d#'
li HirXtvrir eti SiuXISr, <fSi] ^irrt Sie ral r(n-i}iion-a frii it is already fifty-tWO
IKan Mtnce the exptcLUion tailed to Sicily Is. 6. 14.

DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVS8, ETC.

1499. Adjectives, adverbs, and substantives, of kindred meaning
with the foregoing verbs, take the dative to define their meaning.

jJuiXii ^IXbi friendly to the king X, A. 2. l.M, (<!nui rf SiSw we" di^osed
to the people And. 4. 16, toii rf«o.i Itxot evbji-et to the lams O. 21. 36, ix^pir
A<rfc^ cat rifioit itarriot hostile to liberty and opposed to law 6. 26, fuwiax'f
TlnmH rtlflng on the alliance T. 6. 2, 4i6pif Jtijjhhm subject to tribuU 7.67, 4r
nt^c t^ia roit X^aii if you act in accordance with yonr words 2. 72, vrparAi
(«t ■■! raparXVMi rif rporfpf an army eqval or nearly so to the former 7. 42.

346 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1500

(U<X^4 r& PviXtitMTa rcA tfyoit plant like the deed* L. 2. 84, dUi}Xo» do^iWMt
In a tmy unlike to each other P. 'Hm. 36 d. For subataiitiveB ae« lfi02.

«. Some adjectiTW, as ^l\at, ix^pit, may b« treated as aubataaUTea and
take the genitive. Some adjectives often difier slightly in meaulng when tJiaf
take the genitive.

ISOO. With i a^T^ fA« »ame. — rii*tiiTii* ywiimr iM tx'" to be of the mitt
mind aa lam L.3. 21, toC n^oC i/uil rin^iiit of the tame father as I am D.40. 34,
rah-i ^parOw ifial ajfreeing v>Uh me 18. 304.

1301. Witli adjectives and sdverbe of similarity and diselmllarily the com-
parison is often condensed (brachylogj/) : i/ialir raU hi\an tlx' riir ivS^a
th* had a dreu on like (that of) her tervanlt X. C. 5. 1. 4 (the poesesaor for the

thlnft possessed, ^ rg iveifri r£r BovXSr), 'Op^ti yXOvaa ^ irarrla a tongue »nl(le
(that of) Orpheitt A. Ag. 1629.

a. After adjectives and adverbs of likeness we also find xat, Srrtp (Avrtp).
Thng, waStit TaSrir ftrtp raWdai wphtpcr wnrijAirt tO tvSer the tame a* yo*
have often tnffertd before D. 1. 8, oix i*u)(«i im-oi^icairi lal'O/iqpoi they have not
composed their poetry at Homer did P. Ion 681 d.

1902. The dative after Bubstantires is cblefly used when the substantive
axpreeses the act denoted by the kindred verb requiring the dative : trtfiavXIi
iiitl a plot affatnttme X. A. 6.6.29, SiAloxiit 'K\tiripif a meeetior to Clennder
7,2.6, 4 t/di r^ 8tf &»vp^lA mj/ lervice to the god P. A. 80 a. But also In
other cases; ^tXfs roi'i 'AB-itnlmi frifndahip for the Athentant T. 6. 6, vnm
Stoit hymn* to tile goda P. \i. 607 a, iip6iia toEi aTp^Ttuo/idroit tuppliet f<ir the
troop* D. 3. 20, 4Xst rali eipau nail* for the door* (1478).

a. Both a genitive and a dative may depend on the same sabetantive 1 ^ riS
M*0 lirit bfur the god'i gift to you P. A. 30 d.

INSTRUMENTAL DATIVE

1503. The Greet dative, a.i the representative of the lo8t JDStra-
mental case, denotes that by which or with whick an action is done
or accompanied. It is of two kinds: (1) The instrumental dative
proper ; (2) The comitative dative.

1504. When iJie idea denoted by the noun In the dative is the fnstmmeHt or
jiieant, it falla under (1) ; if it is a person (not regarded as the instruinent
or means) or any other living being, or a thing regarded as a person. It belongs
under (2) ; it an action, under (2).

1505. Abstract substantives with or witbont an attributive often stand in
the instrumental dative instead of the cognate accusative (1677).

INSTRUMENTAL DATIVE PROPER

1506. The dative denotes instrument or means, manner, and
cause.

1507. htattUtmutoiXtuu. — l^aWiiuMSoii hehitmewithttoueal^a.S
tqrtrn i^rjj hehurUhiaaxMbim fjiurtt with hit ax) X. A. l.b,12,TaIi )utx*ipatt

ijh] the dative 847

Hrfrrn hacking them wlik their twordt 4. 6. S6, tiiir Urot toOtoh ht aetsom-
pliilitditBtkingbvthU D.21.I(U, f^rJuwat x^4»iw» tiiqi punished hitq by a/iw
r. i. 66, tarro, ToXXy (EiarO during a htavg rain X. H. 1. 1. 10 (9S4;. So
«iU) Ux*flai : rSr ri\tur od Stxoi^rur atroii iyopf otU do-Tfi, viari Ai ml l^n^
MtkteUtadid tu)t admit them to a market nor even into the town, but (onl;) (o
voter and anfhorage T. 0. 44. Often ir[th puslvea; iftoia/i^iiiiQt rUi^it bvUt
ofbTiek*X.A.2.i.l2.

>. TIm instrumental dative la often akin to the comltatlve dnttve : iXtifHvM
nt rt KoJ trdpeict aandering teilh his thtp and eompanioni X 191, nturt*
ilxinwrui then thall go viith thfSr shipi 0 731, Kifif Kal ^inti ri rXfci' tn-viiA-
X"" 4 friT^^tg the\i fmtght aith patfionate violence and brvte /oree rathet
than by a igitem of taetles T. 1. 4tl.

b. Panons may be regarded as instruments : ^vXarTJ/wtM ^Aofi dtfendi»ff
tkemtelve* bgpiekfti X. A. 6. 4. 27. OfUn in poetry (S. Ant 164).

c. Verbs of raining or enowing talce the dative or accusative (1670 a).
UOa Under Meuu fall :

a. ^w dative of price (cp. 1S72) : /iJptt rQr (Uurq^rut ri> ifrlvwi i{«rpIaiTo
IlUjr AmiI tA«m««IcM /rom the danger at the price of a part iff their itt^tut gaitu
L.27.9.

b. Barel7, the dative vrith verbs of filling (cp. 1860) : Idn/iivi r&r ri rrpir
Ttti» tXhtMv the entire ar^ny being filled with Uan T. 7. 75.

C. Tlw dative of material and eonttUuetit partt: nartaictuAtarQ S^itam
Tptxfiii Uxvpoli he made thariott uilh strong whctU X. C. 6. 1. 20.

'^O'* Xf^^" t(*B (strletlj employ oneself with, get tamtthing done lellh;
cp. uU), and sometimes Knil[ar, take tlie dative. TbOB, tir* rt^ott (tsTi n/il^iMi)
X^si »ltf olf 4 dXXir 'EXXdf nfii^i neftAer acM according to these in*tUMlo»t»
iu>T obsertes those accepted by the rest nf Greece T. 1. 77. A predicate noun
maj be added to the dative ; to^tdii xp^rrtu Sapv^ipoa they tnake use of them at
a body-guard X. HI. 6. 3, The nae to which an object is put may be expressed
by a neater prononn in tJie accua. (1573) ; tI x^vbiitSa. rairif -, what use thall
wemat«ofUtD.a.e.

ISIO. The instrumental dative occurs after snbstantlveai fl^^n tx^i"**
Inflation by iHeans of gestures V. R. 397 b.

1311. The Instmmental dative of means ia often, especially in poetry, re-
inforced by the prepositions ir, air, Wi -. ir Xj^wt rtlBtm to persuade by words
S. Fh. 1393, ol Aeot Jr T«f ItpoU /ir4>iqrar the godt haee shown by the victima
X.A.6. 1. 81; ri»7ibi?;8<v«« heavy with old age S. O. T. 17; t4X« x'P»1' **"
ittntpfaoi dX>iwa a city captwred by our hands B 374.

1513. Datin of Stimdard of Judgment. —That by which anything is
measnied, or judged, is put In the dadve i (v»^i*Tfn(ffinTo raSt ^vi^Xaft t*»
rXIftor they measured the laddera dp the layers of bricks T. 8. 20, r^ IfXoi.
%T tt was plain from what followed X. A. 2. S. 1, oli rpit toVi dAXavi m«J^n
M ~-f.-Jp— *-■ we must judge by what he has done to the rest D. 0, 10, i-in xp4
tfttirtmi rk jiAXarra iiiXut sfiiB^trffai ; a^ ab* ifaitipi^ ra cat ^psF^rn nl Xi7V ;

by what standard must we judge that the judgment may be correct f Is it not by

348 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [isij

a^erience aiul misdom and reaeoning f F. R. 682 S. Wilb verbs of Judging /■

1S13. Htuiner (see also 1527). — The dative of manner is used
with comparative adjectives and other eimresslons of comparisoD
to mark the decree by which one thing differs from another (Dstlre
of Measure of Difference).

«*o^5 iUTTuy H head ahoHer (lit, by the htad) P. I'h, 101 &, oi) nXXui
iliUpoH vartpot ij\9(>' he arrived not raaay dagi Jaur X. H. 1, 1. 1, I6rm Sits
IllUpiut rpi aanSiiraUir cowing ten daffs be/are the Panathtnaic festival T. bA'i,
TtHTDiiTy -fSior ^H Stf'v t\eiu K^KTittiai tkc jKore Iposaeat the more pieaaant ii mg life
X.C.6.3.40, l■o^^li) lul^uir ftl-fpero 17 ^j) j«y i^ wXiloin tytyrortii the ihovting
became much lotidrr as the men increased in number X, A. 4. '. 'i-i. So with
foXXj by mucli, i\ly<fi by liUle, t^ rarrl in every reipect (by all odds).
«. WlLh the auptrlativB : /uipy ipiara by far the belt P. L. 866 e.
1S14. With coutparatlves the acciisntlvea (1680) rl, rl, oM^r, xqi^^ withoDt a
substantive are alwayu used: o66ir ^rror nihilo minui X. A. 7. 6.9. In AtUc
prose (except in Thuc. ) irsXii and d\lyor are more common than roXXy and iXtyy
with comparatives. Horn, bas on); ir«\i laltur.

1516. The dative of manner may denote the particular point of
view from which a statement is made. This occurs chiefly with
intransitive adjectives but also with intransitive verbs (Dative nf
Respect). (Cp. 1600.)

irilp i)\itl^ In riat a man still young in yean T. 6. 4.S, r«it aiiiuuri ri rUa*
laxlx"""^ 4 "<• xf'^iw^* a power s( router in men than in money I. 121, dffStriyi
Tv<rii>utri aeale in body 1). 21. Kij. tJ 4xi»i Tp&x^ harth of voice X. A. !.6. 9,
^par/irti SuKp^pur distinguished ill underatnnding X. G. 2. 3. .'1, Ti» rtr* ivriaa
wpaix"' superior in power to the men of that time T. I. 9, irifuiTi mwtal a
truce so far as the name goes (I. 10.

a. The acctisative of respfcl (1600) is often nearly equivalent to the dative
ot respect.

1517. Cause. — The dative, especially with verbs of emotion, ex-
presses the occasion (external cause) or the motive (internal cause).

Occasion : rfi rixv ^X'ijit '■onfident by reason of his good fortune T. S. 97,
6auiid{w rg daojiXifa'n ^wti ruy ruXOr I am astonished at being shut out of the
gates i. 86, Tdifro.t iJffSi, he was pleased at this X. A. I. 0. 26, i}xM»u«a reft
yyeniiiiKiit we wre troubled at what had iireurrtd 6. 7. 20, x'*-"^ ♦'p* *•'»
Ttapouin rpiypamw I am troubled at the present oecurrenees 1. 3. 3. Motive;
#(Xl9 lal tirolf iriittm following out Of friendship and good v)iU X. A. 2. 6. 13.
Occasion and motive: al ttit iropif iKoXaiint, al ii irtrrlf some (carried tbeir
itwn fond) became they lacked servants, others through distrust of them T. T. T6.
u^pti lal oit alnf to6to wtiHr doing thi» out of iiuolence and rtot beeavse he var
drunk D. 21. 74.

i,vGooglc

ism] the dative 349

1518. Some verbe of emotion bike hrl (witb dat.) to denote the cMue ; bo
alnya lUya ^tponU to plume onetelf, nnd oft^n xalpm refoice, \uvit$ai grUte,
irftmxTtir be veced, ataxtfuSiu be atliamed. Many verbs take tbe genitive (140G).

1519. Tbe dative of caose autiietiines approKimatM to a dative of purpose
(UTS) : "ASijmEbi lip' iinSi fip^jjirdi Atorrinir naroiKlati lite AthsniatU have ttt
nut agaijut »s {xeilh a vieie to) to restore thr Leiinlinea 'I'. H. 33. This conatruc-
iton is common wiih otber verbal nounn in Tliucydidee.

1520. Caiuie is often expressed by Jul with the accuHative, Wi witb the
^njiive, less frequently by iitipi or ripl with the dative (poet.) or Wip with tbe
gfniUve (poeL).

COMITATIVE DATIVE
1321. The comitative form of tbe instrumental dative denotes
the persons or things which accompany or take part in an action.

1522. Prepositions of accompaniment (furd with gen., ri>>) are often used,
especially when the verb does not denote accompaniment or union.

1523. Dative of Auoclatlon. — The dative is used witb words de-
noting friendly or hostile association or intercourse. This dative is
especially common in the plural and after middle verbs.

t. laicoit ifuKui mOrii ttp^av (arit if thou auoeiate wiitli the evil, in the end
Ihou loo wilt hecome*enil lkg$elf Men. Sent. 274, dXX^Xon SiiiXt-yiaBa we Aom
eoaeerttd telth each other P. A. 87 ^ rf w\-iea ri. ^TiB/rra Koinirumi commwii-
caiing to the people lehat had been said T. 2. 72. St6ium toAi ^e^rrai fuHXXdfcu
**lai aaklng that they reconcile their exile* with them 1. 'H, tts \6r/oui m i\0nt
(0 have an inleiviein vilh gou X. A. 2. G. 4, lurtax'^i")'" ^' CivA' toe have
participated in t"""" feetivalg X. H. 2. 4. 20, iXXiiXoti erotSai fa-oHjo-aim they
made a truce with one anodier 3. 2. 20, airroii Sii <fii\lat Itwai to enter inlo/riend-
ihipwilhlhem X.A..S.2.8. ^ with verba of me^ttn^; rpatrj^x^'^aii '/"'■"'■O'Xi'-
Kiraiid irrirtx^it'i d'arra*.

b. nXXoii jXf-roi iiaxiitin fem JIghling mith many T. 4. 39, Ktpif roXe^ioSrrn
vmging tear leilh Cyrus 1. IS, d^i^n-puToCffi i^iw 8i' cBroiat el <pt\ti toIi *IXdii, ipt-
{Miri li tl iii^pot dXXi}\aii friendi diupvte with fi-lendi good-«<itureilly, hvt
adter»arie» wrangle viilh one another P. Pr. 337b, tlrit dXX^Xwi SiKi^arrai Iheg
bring lawtvits against one another X. M. 3. 5. IS, iM0ipta6iu roirroii to be at
variance with these men I>. 18. 31 (and so many compounds of Bii), ait t^i) rait
Xtrout roil Ipyta ifuKnyttr he said their words did not agree with their deeds
T,6.&6. So also Tirl tii w<\iiitv{Sii Mxv^i '''X''/™*) ""'i "^"^ ifiiat xupitr, etc.

N. 1. — roXe^Tv {iiAxiaSai) air Tivi ifutri Tirai) means (0 wage war in on-
jUHFtiOH with rnimf one.

S. 2. — Verbs of friendly or hoBlily ossociaiioii, and especially pfripbraaes with
rmiio-eoi (wi\tiior, awoviit), oftPn take the accusative witii uph.

1524. Dative of Accompaniment. — The dative of accompaniment
is used with verbs signifying to M-com/ninji, fnll'iir. ptc,

it6\i>vMr TV irr^'l^'V «> follow the leader I'. R. 474 c, Itrtreai bitt* /MXa^uu

.'.oog[c

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

1525. Wttb «iTd«. — The Idw of aasompftniment Is often expresHd ^}J
airii loined to the daUve. This use Is common when the desliuction of a per-
son or thing Is referred to. Thus, rw> tt&f itU atrah irtpiifir one of the sAipi
1BU\ U* crcui T. 4. 14, tlim Ijmt (It rat rdfnt atrett art^raa he bade thrM
nome to their potts, crovrnt and oil X. C. 3. 3. 40. 'Hie anicle after ah6t \a nn ;
uid rit is rarely added (X. C.2. 2.S). Uom. has this dative only with lifelesa
objects.

1526. Dative of Militwrr Accomp«Dlttient — The dative Is used in the
description of militar; movements to denote the accompaniineDt (troopH, ships.
etc.) of a leader: iftXairti ry aTpuTtiiueri varrl ht mtavhet ovt viith alt hi*
amy T, A. 1. 7. 14. sit Is often used with words denoting troops (T. 0. 62).

a. An extension of this usage occurs when the persons in the dative an
essentially (be sams as the persons forming the subject (distribntlTe nee): ^r
l^tmiTt ol raUfuw nl Ivwiiy ml irtKriurTntv the enetnv purtued u» w£(A their
«(tniliv and peltattt X. A. T. 6. 20.

b. The dative of military accompaniment is often equivalent to a d^Uve of
means when the verb does not denote the leadership of a generaL

1327. Dative of Accompanying Ctrcumstance. — Tlie dative, nsual ty
of an abatraot substantive, may denote acoomponying circumstance
and manner. •

a. The substantive has an attribute : roXXg fi»v ^pocinttrra they attacked
Vtth loud iho^UM T. 4. 127, warrl r«Ht vdth all one's ntfgJU &.23, rixv *,t»9i
vUh good fortune C. 1. A. 2. 17. 7. So rai^l (oM<r<, VAif, rttrif rji) rptiw^.
Manner may be espressed by the adjective, as pmlif Amtrv drof^rimv to di*
(by) a violent death X. HI. 4. 3 ( = pi^).

b. Many particular subsiantives have no attribate and axe used adverbially :
$ttf tp6iiif to run at full speed X. A. I. 8. 19, pit by foree, Jlcg jutUy, 3iXy bf
er^A, (jif) Ipyv in faet, VvxS gaiettg, mfuS^ (witA care) entirely, ximiuf in
order, duly, iciK\if round about, (t^J \lriif In word, wpo^Arti oitensibly, vi7~p,
ffiwr§ fn lilence, vmujp haetily, with difflcultj/, t^ A\it9il<f in truth, rf Sm in
realUs, ipyi in aager, livfi in hastg fiighU

N. — When no adjective Is used, prepositional phrases or adverbs are gener-
ally employed : rOr Kpaiiy%, air Jfig, luri Knqt, rpii ^lir (Or ^lafut).

C. Here belongs the dative of feminine adjectives with a substantive (Uy,
etc.) omittod, as Tintrj in Ihii wag, here, iXXj in another wag, eltewhere, w-J, §
in what {which) wag. So tij/uirf; at public rxpenee, IS!^ privately, atif in com-
mon,wiionfooL

N. — Some of these forms are [natrumental rather tlian comitatlve, e.g. rurrg.

1S28. Space and Time. — The dative of space and time may some-
times be regarded as comitative.

a. Space : the way by which {qua), as twoptitra rp U$ 4' rpiripar twofJiaura
he marched bg the road (or on the road ?) which he had made btfort T. 2. 9fi ;
b. Time ; tarfiipii wt tKttwii tv xp^nf rtiffSttg She Charged that the had been

THE DATIVE 851

Some of thew nses UK iutni-

WITH ADJECTIVES, ETC.

1529. Many adjectives and adverbs, tuid BOme BubstantiTes, take
the instraineiital dative by the same constniction as the correspond-
ii^ verbe.

vtiwiax"* <»^D<i tArfr allj/ D. 9. 68, xi^ S/iapei rp AaKctufwrluf a country
horderitiff on that of the Lacedaeraoaiant 15. 22, diJXovffs retrait eoT^omtahte to
thla tS. 267. So ntrit (cp. 1414), ^iti^miraf, au-nf^t, lurahies, aod iid^pai

meaning at oarlanceuftA. — iro/ifrm ry iiifiv cot^ormaily (o the law F. L.B44e,
i H^ riitat Ttirif the lain next to this B. 21. 10. Many of the adjectivea belong-
ing here also take Ibe genitive irhen Ihe idea of posaeeaian or connection Is
marked. — tpa chiefly in the meaning at the earae tine. — atinirli tdii iitpift
MtcreowM wltA men P. B. 466 c, irtSpoiii, ry rtixliritaTt auack on the fort T. i. 28.

LOCATIVE DATIVE

1530. The dative aa the representative of the locative is used to
express place and time.

•. On the iDBtnimental dative o[ space and time, see 1626.
1331. Dative (rf Place. — In poetry the dative without a prepoai-
ticm is used to denote place.

a. Where a perton or thing U : vrat itiaif fpuA taking hi* etand In the middle
of Ike court 11300, yi titira she lay on the ground S.O.T. 1266, hIrf dpco-.t to
dweU among the nountalng 0. T. 1461. Often of the parts of the bod; (Horn.
H/iif, tapSiu, etc.). With persons (generally in the plural) : ipiwprwiit Tpiitaew
eontplciioiM among the Trojani Z 477. tsio-i 9* iri^Tii A 68 ma; be row up among
them or a dative proper (/or them).

b. Place whfther (limit of motion) : milif win fell on the growiA E 82, oKt^
ifSiopMtUtii moord into Ui theath * 333.

1532. After verbs of motion the dative, ae distinguiBhed from the locative,
denotes direction toiatrds and la used of persons (1486), and is a form of the
dative of interest

1533. Many verbs capable of taking the locative dative in poetry, require,
in prose, the aid of a prepoHitlon in composition. The limit of motion is usually
{168B) ezprened by the accusative with a preposition (e.£r. tit, rp6<).

1534. In prose the dative of place (chiefi; place where) is used only of
proper names: nidiiT at Pj/tho, 'laBiiot at thf: Mhiaus, SaXafuR at Salamlt,
'OXcfiTlui at Olf/it^ia, 'A04npri at Athent (inacr.); especially with the names
of AUiC demes, as ^nXifpai, eopimt, MnpaeuH. But jt Mapa^ulR and it JIXo-

Tuuioocnr. Some deme-namee require it, aa it KdIXs.

1335. Many adverbs are genuine locatives, as ofiw, rdXai, rarjiifiiZ, feX^poT ;
'AH"t"i nXaTatSo-i ; others are datives in form, as crlcXy, nXoraiBii.

1536. With names of countries and places, Iw is more common than the

I;.ClK>^Ic

352 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SEXTENCE [1537

locative dative, and, with the above exceptions, the place where is expressed in
Attic prose with ir.

1537. Verbs of ruling often take the dative, especially in Homer : Hi^^u-
i&rtavif iroinrt A ISO, riyimttir ffairi^fvfr j) 59, ^px' i' "pa ff^i' ' XyaiUifroit
B 134. Kaiely in prose : iiyiiirOtl rm to serve aa guide (leader) to eome one, f*i-
vTarttrTin to be »et over one; ipx"' f'' nieana onlj = to be archon (ITvfleJiip"'
apXO"-ot "Aff^-afon T. 2. 2). Cp. 1371.

a. Onlj when stress is not laid on the idea of supremacy is the dative,
instead of the genitive (1370), used with verbs of ruling.

1938. It is not clear whether the dative with verbs of ruling is a daUve
proper (/nr), a locative (_ainoag ; cp. it 4ali|{iv imaiit ir62), or an instrumental
(fiy). ipx'", if/'i'iai may lake the dative proper, iriariit, jSoviXnicip, iqurcir
may take the locative daiive.

1539. Dative of Time. — The dative without a preposition is com-
monly used to denote a definite point of time (chieSy day, niyht,
mojUh, year, seaaoti) at which an action occurred. The dative contrasts
one point of time with another, and is usually accompanied by an
attributive.

ToAriir iiiv rtir ijldpat airrai tfutnt, t% Si ifTtpulf jtrX. throughout that dof

they teailed there, but on the day following, etc. X. H. 1. 1. 14. So rg -rporepalf
(he dag before, r% Si-uripif the Btcond day, 'EXa^^XtAwt ;ii)>ii (xrn (4^pf }
^Irorrot on the sixth of waning Elaphebolion Aes. 2. 90, tv^l ml Wf on lAe la*t
Q^tfte month D. 18. 29 j rplrtf uv^ in the third motUh L. 21. l,ir«ptiim r^ Wp«
when nanmer wat coming to an end T. 1. 30, ifijiroirT^ Ith in the tixtieth gear
1. 13 ; also with tpf (xofiunt Hpf tn the lointer eeiuon And. 1. 137).

1941. The names of the regular recurring festivals which serve to date an
'occurrence stand in the dative : naraetiralai-t at the Panalhenaea D. 21. 156,
■-ail AiDriwloii at the Dionyaia 21.1, rai'i rB/uraii at the proceK»ioiu 21.171, r«if
raayiftBii at the repreaenlation* of the tragediei Aes. 3. 170. ir ia rarel; added.

1542. /> is added:

a. To words denotijig time when there is no attributive : tr ry x'V^" '■•
winter X. 0.17.3 ; cp. 1441. b. When the attributive is apronoun (snmetlmesi) ;
(tr) imirg ri fiiUpf. c. Tn statements of the time within the limits of which
an event may talce place (wliere iin-6i with the genitive ia common); to state-
ments of bow mnch time anything takes; with numheni, JXiyoi, ro\6t, etc.
Thus, 4t Tpurlr iiiUp-w for (during) three dai/» X. A. 4. 8. 6, ai /{(Sur ri ir
brarrt t0 xP^'V ^po-x9lrra ir lui ii/idpf StiXuS^nu U is not easy tn Ml forth tn a
single day the acts of all time T.. 2. 04, ifiXiueai rifr iia^o\itr ir otrat S\tytf xfi^fV
to clear myself of calumny in ^o brief a time P. A. Ifla. ^f is rarely omitted in
prose, and chiefly when there is an attrlbutjve ; w? 'vktI T. 6. 27. d. Always
witli adjectives or adverbs used substantively ; ir ti? iropim, it t^ rirt. e. To
words denoting the dale of an event, not a point of lime : 4r ri rporip^ rperfitif
in theflrtt embassy Aes.2. 123. Thuc, employs fr, as ir t^ iartp^lf inxX-trl^ ia

1552] THE ACCUSATIVE S5S

1A« oMtmblj/ held the day nfttr \. 44, but urn. (lie simple dative, as /idxs '" the
battle 3. M, ialrji ti fir0o\i in that iaetrrtSon 2. 20, t^ irpvTipf ittXTi^if in the
fint ataembl]/ 1. 44.

DATIVE WITH COMPOUND VERBS

ISM. Many compouDd verbs take the dative because of their
meaQing as a whole. So AvTi)(ttv hold out against, dp^urjSnrctv dispute
mUk (1523 b).

1545. The dative is used with verbs compounded with <n5c (regu-
larly), with luaay compounded with iv, iwi, and with Bonie com-
ponoded with impa, rcpi, wp6s, and vn-o, because the preposition keeps
a. sense that requires the dative.

iltfiKiiiit aitrif looking at kim P. Charm. 162 d, ArUai J^irowiV irSp^weit to
treats exj)eeliUion$ in men X. C. 1.6. 19, a^oii htiweiri -rb 'EXX^nciv the Oreek
force/ell upon them X. A. 4. 1. 10, hrfmrTc aOroJt theg preseed hard upon them
5.2. 5, rvKiJiin» a^aii to be their aeeompliee in vsrong-doing 2. 6. 2T, (urisavi
)((X^y ilitvSoiUnf they are eoneeious that Meletua ie speaking falaely (i.e. they
know it as well as he does) P. A. 34 b, otrai du iraprttrorto fSsiriXct these did
not join the king X. A. G. (I. 8, rapivrw bftit i t^vi let the herald come viith ut
3. 1. 46, EfK^^tTi -KpaaiTptxa' 6<ia ninUiKw two youtha ran up to Xenophon
4. 3. 10, WoMtiaSai r^ lp:^<irri to be subject to the ruler P. G. 510c.

a. So especially vrlth verbs of motion and rest formed from Mmi, rtrrnr,
TiWm, Tpix"'< dm, ylyr*a9ai, nurftii, etc.

1546. Some verbs of motion compoanded with wapi, wpt, bwb take the
•ccuEative (1559).

1547. Some Terbe have an alternative construction, e.g. refipAWtm : nrl rt

iweett a perton with something, rl nn surround something with something.

1549. When the Idea of place Is emphatic, the preposition may be repeated :
l)iiuirarTn in tJ 'ArriKg remaining in Attica T. 2. 23 ; but it is generally not
repeated when the idea is (i^urative : toii IpKoa imttntt abiding by one's oath
1. 1. 13. ficrd m»y be Used after compounds of air : iter 4poi iruv^Xti A« sailed
IB tontpany with me L. 21. 8.
1990. The prepositions are more frequently repeated in prose than in poetry.

ACCUSATIVE
ISSL The accusative is a form of defining or qualifying the verb.
a The accusative derives its name from a mislnui elation (casus aeeusa-
tinu) of the Greek (* b/tioth:^ iTaiii, properly casus effectivus, 1564 a).

1552. A noun stands in Uie accusative when the idea it expresses Is most

( ! '■K)^[i:

854 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [ijSS

ImtDedlnUl)' (in oontraat to the dative) and most completely (in conlnwt to
the genitive) under tlie iafluence of the verbal conceptloD (in contrast to the
nomlDative).

1553. The accusative ia the case of the direct object (919). The
acGQsative is used with all transitive verbs (and witn some intransi-
tive verba used transitively), with some verbal nouns, and with
adjectives.

1554. The direct object is of two kinds :

a. The internal object (object effected): i iivifp rarm ««AX&(
•wXifyat Ike man strikes many blows.

N, 1. — Mere tbe object ie already contained (or implied) In the verb, and iu
addition ia optional. Tbe accusative ot tbe internal object is aometimes called
tbe accusative of content. The object stands In apposition to tbe result of tbe
verbal action. The effect produced by the verb is either (1) transient, when tbe
object is a nomen acttonii, and disappeais with the operation of tbe verb, aa In
/cdxT' ^x"'" to figftt a baau, or (2) permanent, and remaine aft«r the verbal
action lias ceased, as in rtlxot rtix't^tr to bufld a wall. The latter form la the
accusative of result (1578).

N. 2. — Almost any verb may take one of the vsriettea of tbe internal object.

b. The external object (^object affected): o av^p rihmt t6v
vaiBa the man ttrikei the hoy.

N. — Here the object is not oontaiued in tbe verb, but is neoesaary to explain
or define tbe character of the action in question. The external object standa
outside tbe verliai action.

1959. Many verbs may take an accusative either ol the external or of the
internal object : rinwar tXijr felt Umber, riiiMa rdi rplxet Cut off (A« hair,
Tifinir 6B6r open a Toad, but arorSat or Spina riitmr, with a specialized verbal
Idea, to make a treaty by tdaying a victim (pass. Hfinia /tm4^)i riii-rtir iSir makr
one'i tootf (poet.), T«x'f"' x"p'<" fortify a place, bat T«.xJf«» rttxot bvild

a mall. Cp. E. Rupp. lOflO : A. rcuvs liiv ^in ; iiaSiir xpi!** •rMcf. B. rintt

yunlitat, itX. A. Victorious ta tehat victory t This I would learn of thte.
B. Oeer all women. Here tbe constmctlon ehifCs from tbe internal to the exter-
nal object.

1596. The direct object of an active transitive verb becomes the
subject of the passive : o mus vn-o tov dvSpos rvrrcroi the boy ia atmek
by tiie vian.

a. Tbe object of a verb governing tbe genitive or dative as piineipal object
may also become the subject of tbe passive (1340).

1597. In Greek many verba are transiUve the ordinary English eqnivaleola
of which are intransitive and require a preposition. So nur&p rt, alyir n to keep
silence about something.

15SB. Many verba that are usually intransitive are alao need transitlTdy in
Greek. Tlma, Avt^lr sin against, itiaxtpalttit be disgusted at, x*^* T^oitt at,
^ta0ai be pleated ai, Sanftiir weep for, Cp. 1696 b.

i5«s] THE ACCUSATIVE 866

a Foatical : 4crnr agitfUt, wpit vita pan on her way B. HeO. 6S, irXitr laU,
V>»XJ{iir rattle along (tportlr ttrike UdL 0. 68), iAiatttr make ihine, x^p*^"
Mr, i\lrv4ti ttir celebrate the god by chorufea, bj/ dancing.

1359. Hftny intniwiclve Terba are used tranaitirely when compounded with
■ pnpcaiUon, e.g, iiaitdx'irSv fight over again. — i-wcfidxt^BM drive off, iwaeTpt-
ftlai abandon, irvx^P*'' leave. — iio^afxif paa$ over, liarMr tail aeroie,
litfipxtrttu go through. —ilvUttu i»nn« into the mind, tlrr^lr tail into. — ^jk^I-
HwpoM, ^xrp/rwAu gtt oul Of the vsav of, ifarax'^f*'' ehun, ((Irravdai avoid. —
tr^rprnTtinr march againit. — KaTataviiaxtif teat at eea, KararpX^lurr tvbdue
tom^UMv, mranXircdcrAu reduoe bypolwy- — laripxarBai Beek,parme, utriirai
go in quett of, — a-Kpa/JafKit tranegrtte. — wipiUnu go round, rtptlfTatSti Mur-
nmnd. — wpoaomlr dteell in, vpoanlttiv ging in praiae of. — ivtppalrtii omit. —
h^fX''^6*c<?>e,/'w>- — ivfpx'^^f't*^^ ""i i>nitw4(u teithetand, i>rox*>P*fi'
(kiiK, i^laTarBai witJutand. *

1560. Convenel;, many verba tbot are usually transitive are need iotranal-
tirely (wUh gen., dM., or with a preposition). Some of these are nentiotied
hi IGOl, lfi92, 1596. Sometimes there is a difference in meaning, as ipfrtnt =
Mtitff, with acciu., ^pleaie, with dat

IHl. The aame verb may be used transitively or intransitively, often wltli
little diftBrBnee of signification. Cp. 1TO0. This Is generally indicated in the
treMment of the cases, eg, aiaSdnirBai n or tik» perceive aomelhing, in^/uirSat
n or Tin eontider lomething, nt/i^cSal Ttm or nn blame some one.

1SC2. On >« fi«( Tint and Set ii4 timf aee 1400. With the inf. the accos. is
uiul (daL and tnL X. A. 3. 4. 85). xp4 f^ rim is poeUcal ; vrtth the Int xpi
takei the aocos. (except L. 26. 10, where some read SimUvi). (xM ia an old
DO*U> ; op. XP«<ii XPel^ "M*! and 793.)

INTERNAL OBJECT (OBJECT EFFECTED)
COGNATE ACCDSATIVE

ISM. (I) The aubstautiTe in the accusative is of the tame
origin as the verb.

rtXX^r 4i\uiptar ^Xvo^Drra talking much nonwnM P. A. I9c, (vti^uy* rV
#vt4v rafT^v he ihared fn the recent exile 21 a, TJ)r it SaXofun hu/mx'"' ■■"'-
Mxifarrn vietorimu ia the eea-flght at Salamii D. 69. 97, rai inrxfam at
•(tm Irriaxt^rt the promitei which he made 19.47, 4 afria 4' ■iTiwrnu tAe
ekarge they bring Ant. 8. 27.

a. Sometimes the verb may be sappreBHed, as iii^r /tir t^st rdelt (ttxniuu)
fw iu tkeae praj/ere A. Ch. 142.

156S. T%e c(^nat« accusative occurs even with adjectivee of an IntronsitiTe

dtaracter: /i+r« ti «^t &« riir intimti ao4>laf ufrt Aiiae^i riir iiia.0lir being
neUker at altieiee after the fathion of their witdom nor ignorant (ffler the fath-
ion of their ignorance P, A. 22 e, Mtavt 4ralitrar iriiMr rnAttt Hart nrX.

356 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1566

th*V diffi^nehited them in tucit a wag that, etc. T.6. 34 (dTttievi/rBfirvarB^^^
rar, cp. 16UB).

1S66. PassiTe : iriXf/ias AroXf/uirc tear teat teaged X. H. 4. 8, 1.

1967. (II) The substantive in the acciiBative is of kindred mean-
ing with the verb.

<f^XA.» axXoi 48oii ikeg ieent fvrih on Other expfditlons X. H. 1.2. 17, rivl^r
Ka,>^ii/iiarv6\tiiori<rTpdTaMraftheytef/fdtehil ii called the Sacred H'orT. I.IIS,
I^Bfrnrt Ta&rif t^v riaor he fell ill of this ditease I. Hi. 24, drSpircv i>6aiw 0Xa-
srir born to man'a eatate S. Aj. 700.

1568. PauiT« : riX(/iac frapixOv ^ffar teas Mtlrred up D. 18. 161.

1569. An extension of the cognate accusative appears in poetry with Mortal,
ffr^rai, (o^lftiv and like verbs : riwar, Smr<L tttrai the place in tehfck he it
lituated S. Ph. 146, tI Imia rtrpip; tehj/ ttandt nhe on the roekf E. Sapp. 987,
Tfilrata xii0l{wt titling on the tripod B. I.>r. 960.

1570. An attributive word is usually necessary (bat not In Iloin.) ; oUier-
wlse the addition of the EUbetantive to the verb would be tautologous. But the
attribute is omitted ;

a. When the nominal Idea is specialized: ^vXanat ^Xirrtir to stand tentrg
X. A. 2. 6. 10, <l>6por iiiptir to pag tribute b. .'1. 7.

b. When the eubatantlTe is restricted liy the article : riw wif^nar -raXtutir
to wage the present aar T. 8. 58, rlir To/ir^r ri/rrtiw to conduct the proceation
6.5e.

c. When a plural substantive denotes repeated occarrencea : irpiiipipxv"
rpaipapx^' '" perfomted the duty of trierarcli D. 46. 86.

d. In various expressions : 'OXd^rta viidu to win an Olympian victorg T. I.
12e, T^ii' rau^axliy KK^ai to be victorioiia in the ata-fight L. lU. 28, 9tttw ra
(wtyy^Xio to offer a aacriflce in honour of good ntws X, H. 1. 6. 37.

e. In poetry the use of a subeianlive to denote a special form of the action
ot the verb is much extended : oriftif al^ia to drip (drops of) blood S. Ph. 7B:J,
'kpTI'WM'ir to breathe war A. Ag.STo, nBp Stiapfiit looking (a look of ) jlre r 446.
This use is common, especially in Aristophanes, witli verbs signifying the loot of
another than the speaker: pxintir rSrv to look muatard Eq.6;jl, ^Uteip Arwrai
to loot «n6e((</ Com.fr. 1.341 (No. 300) ; ep. "looked his faith"; llolmES.

1971. The substantive without an attribute ia (rarely) added to the verb as
a more emphatic form of statement ; \llpor XigpcFt to talk iheer nonaenae Ar. PI.
617, Zppif Wplf«» to insult griei:ou$ly E. H. F. '08. Often in Euripides.

1972. The substantive may be omitted, leaving only the adjectival attribute ^
ruffoi' SLTXijy (acil. rXiff^t) atrike twice (a double blow) S. El. 1415, ToCrar dW-
Kpayar at iKlyai (sell. rXicyai) vainur Iheg called out that he had dealt him
too (lOfiS) few blows X. A. 5. 8. 12. Cp. 1028.

1573. ITsually an adjective, prononn, or pronominal adjective is treated as
k neuter substantive, Cp. iiryiX' iiia/triniw tii commit grave errors i). &. 6 with
fJyuiTa iiiapriiiiaTa anapTineiri P. <i. 52u d. 'i'lie Singular adjective is useil in
certain comiiioii phrases in prose, but is mainly poetical ; the plural is ordinarily
uit'd in prose.

i58i] THE ACCrSATrVE 357

ifii) yt)Mv poeL (= iiSir yi\t>iTa ■yj*""') to laugh tietetly, lUya (^(Mot) ^«f-
iiTiu he it a great /tar, /i^a ^ponSffii /u-l toijtv highly elated at thli X. A.
1. 1. 27, *«<fiiF 0poKi A« If (00 proiirf 5. 6. 8, ri lui. "EXXiJhb* tfificnif (o 6« on the
tideofthrtirerk* l'>.U.^,iiiyurri>tUini*Tc had the grenttninfiHence L.30.U,
iati iiffplitiv tn mnllrrat terribly X. A.U.4.2, rair^ ir/uirflt6oiuii ae /ulJUled our
mittion a* amhagtadnri in the. (oine tvan ])• 10. 32, t1 flo6\cTai i)/iir xP^*^'!
vAot KM (!(»•« A« uFi'sA (o make of utf X. A. 1.8. IS {= rfn ^Xcrsi xf''"'
XP^t^h ep. XP^A>i "•( x/Klaf I'. L. 868 b).

1374, PauiTe : roC^o ofic ij/'iiireiiirar they leere not deceived in thin X. A,
S. i. 13, Tsfrra oMclt ftv rEnr^di) )io one uoufd {i« permotied of thin r. L. 836 d.

1575. For & cognate accusative in conjuuctioii nkh a second object, see 1620.

1576. NoU the expreuions jixd^v ilinir deade a case, Sudftoftit Slair nd
JO to hue teilh aomtbodg, ttiitav ypa/p-^y nra indict somebody, #cli7n> Simir Ttr&i
be jiut on one's trial for stimethiag; ypi^faSul Tina v/io*^» indict one for a
public offence, ixiytir ypaip^r he put on onn's trial for a public offp.nct. Also
iyurtfeBai iTTiiiOr (= iyUnx xTaiiov) be a contestant in the race-courae, ■icSi'
irdJior be victorious in the race-course, nKay jfii;> V}in a case, Huar yriitet' Carry
(t retolution (pass, yyii/rrir lirTafBai), ii^Xtir Slit)' lose a case.

1577. The (rarer) dative (<#i(Jif) ra/iptir, fiiabf earirif dirofi^irnir, i/xtyeir
tni) expresaee the cause (IblT), maimer (I&IS), or means (ISOT).

ACCUSATIVE OP RESULT

IXinif sAriiviu to smite (and thus maibt) awound E331 (sooAXJ)* Aa^mr ^ 74),
Tpicptitir T^f tliriir^r to negotiate the peace (go as ambasBadorB (rptafitii) to make
Ibe peace) D. 10. 134, but upta^tinr vptaptlar to go on an ev^assy DinarchuB
1.10, ritur^ iiiwTn.r to coin money Hdt. 3. 56, vrorjat, or V"' T^f K'f (1566).

1579. Verbs signifying to effect anything (nl/xii' raise, aOfnt exalt, Siiietut
teach, rpi^iw rear, rvStieir train) aliow the result of tJieir action upon a sub-
itanlive or adjective predicate to the direct object ; <rt efl^ul y' ott fratSumar
««*► Thebe* did not train thee to be base S. O. C. 919, toStoh rpiiftir rt nl oUfni-
irfT" to nurse and exalt him into greatness P. R.MS c, tromoSoiA^arrti airi
v^ifXirf^F raiting it higher T. T. i. Such predicate nouns are called proleptie.
Panive ; ii^a.t it luxpod tlXiirroi irSfiFO' Philip has groan from a mean to be a
KightfperMon D. 0.21. Cp. 1613.

ACCUSATIVB OF EXTENT

1580. The accusative denotes extent in space and time.

1501. Space. — The accusative denotes the space or v&j over uAi'cA
an action is extended, and the measure of the space traversed.

Iftir (rrpsriar) rrtmt Mo6t to lead an army over narrouroadt X.C. 1.6.43,
l(t\ttrti rraSiuit rptij, wapofdyyat tlxati nol iiv he advances three *tages, (uen^r-

858 SYNTAX OP THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [i5««

two panuangt X. A. I. 3. 6, ir4x<' 4 nUrata r^r Onp&r vrolbvi ipioitt*»rT»
Ftataea la leventy Hadei dUtant from Thebea T. 2. 6.

a. Tbla use la aaalogouB to the cognau accusative atter verbs ot tnotktn
(lHUevt iiiXBiiw, r\tir MXarmr).

ISBZ. Time. — Ttie afcusatire deaotea extent of time.

l/Mircr ^ti4pai trri he remained lenen daj/g S. A. 1. 2. 0, iuiifiaxH' twot^atr*
hmrirlrii EAey made an alliance for a handred i/eart T.3. 114.

1963. The accuaatlre of time implies Ihu the action of the Teib coren the
entira period. When empbaaia 1h laid on tbe uclnterrupted daraUon of an
mction, rapd with tlie accusative (16»2. 8. b) and tii with the genitive (1686. 1. b)
ftre used. The accusative of time is rarely employed where the dative (l&U)
il properij In place : r^rtt riit iiiUpar Aes. 3. T.

1584. Duration of life mny be expreased by yryerit : frq yryo'^ ipS«itit-
mrra teventg yeart old P. A. 17 d. (Also by elmi and the genitive, 1337.)

1585. To mark (a) Aoid long a situation has lasted or (b) how mneh ttnw
has elapsed since something happened, an ordinal is used without the article,
bat often with the addition of a^ool The cuirent day oi year la Indoded.
^us (a) Tijw larriiia Tt^Mur^a^aw TptrortTot Tourt my mother who dtedtwojfean
ago L. 24. 6, iriStS^iaiia Tptrifr ^i) iiiiitpir he hai been in (Ae etty tine* dag iMffOrt

IWItenlav P. Pr. 309 d. (b) irrrrf*^ *[\iwroi Tplrar 4 Ttrafrcr fm r«wrt
'Spaior reixot roXiafub^r tha la lAe tAird or fourth {rear tinee U WW siuiottMeed
Mot Philip wo* benaging fort Heraeum D. 3. 1,

1586. On the accusative of extent in degree, see 1S09. With a oompanttive
we find iraXtf and i\l-iof as well as roXXji and i\lyif (1C14) ; arid always rl, tJ,
»te4r with the comparative.

1567. Time and degree ate often expressed by prepoaittons with the aeciiM-
tlve. See Frepoeitlotu under 4^iM iwd, Sti, h-i, card, npd, rpit, dr6.

TERMINAL ACCUSATIVE (iN POETBY)

use. In poetr7 after verbs of motion the accusative may be used
without a preposition to express the goal.

dffru KaSiuZor /uXiit having come to the cilg of Cadmtu S. 0. T. 36, r4p^otU*
Xf 'EXUia ue teill eonveg her to Greece E. Tro. 883. Of perton* In Horn, (espe-
olally with Itiiaitat, Uu, liArw = reach) and in tbe lyric parts ot the dnum:
linirT^pat i^rrv came unto the suitor* a3S2. Cp. "arrived out coKst";
Shakesp. In Hdt. S. 26 ^n/i^r iiiUat Urivreai means use declare that it b^Jtf m.

1589- Tbe limit of motion is also expressed by -tt (ArrvSt Hoa., in pnae,
'A9i)(«^ = 'ASiJjdi + 8« J )i»»ifif« or x'>/«lf*=X«^* + *». Op. XV>»^i •'"»«)

and, regularly in prose, by tit, trl, rupi, wpit, in (with a pecaoD) with tbe

EXTERNAL OeJECT (OeJECT AFFECTED)
1S90. Of the many transitive verbs taking this actnisattve the
following; deserve mention :

iS9l] THE ACCUSATIVE 859

ISSL (I) Thdo anything to or say anything of a person.

a. <9 (mXAt) weuTr,Sp&r (rarely with irpdrMnJ, ritpytrtir, ini^nu, 6^\^
(tbo with dat.), $ipawr6tti; coiut renU, (axaOr, (SKOV^civ, pXiwrtit, iZistlr, ifipU
(it, piAtw9ai, itiMlfivBoi requite, ri^iupMBai punish, Xti^mrAu (also with dat.),
XH^ie-Au (wiao with dat.}.

b. (f (nXviJ \iyeir, >i\oytir, imttattitir, Swriitir, irpoatvrtir, nuAi X^)w,

U93. rv/i^/wir and XiwiT*Xe7i' profit, ^$*'w http, Xaitapiuteai raft at take
tha dat., djinir ii^re aod (^^[^ir iiuull also tatce dt nra or rpli nn,

1593. c> (naicat) dmrfcif, ri^x'^* are naed aa the panlTes of eO (■■«&)
Wvc!. ""'". Cp. 1762.

1594. Hanj' of the above-mentioned verba take a donble accusative (1623).

1595. (II) Yerbe expreBsiD^ emotion and its manifeatationB,

a. ^fitiaSai, BtSiiiat, rpiit, itrX^TTtrSai, itaroxX^Tirftu /ear, wrijcwr

enveh btfore, rfXap™ftii beware of, dapptJr have no fear of (have confidence
in), alttJftat •(and in avie of, alaxitireat feel »^ame before, Juo'x'pa''*" be dii-
tputed at, Dtttir pity, rttdtir, BpTjHiip, SaKpttir, it\itir (cXafcif) lament, weep over.

b. x''tp*" r^oice at and UltaSai be pleated to hear take the acciis. of a peison
only in the poeta and only with a predicate participle (2100), al<rx6iit<reai, xbI-
par, fSffffci, ivtf'x'PB''<>' oBUally take the dat. in prose. fapptU may take the
InRr. dat. (Hdt. 8. 76).

U96. (Ill) Verbs of swearing.

i^iirat twearby (roitStait, puss. ZrAi ifuiitorai) and noearto(Tirtpinr,^tim.
i Ifmi iiuiiutTai). So trmpttlt noear faltely by.

a. JfinWi Toit tn6t may be an abbreviation of iiirtm Ipm (Internal object)

b. The accusative Is used In aaaeveradons with Uie adverbs of swearing iti.

Nay, by Zetu : ith (rir) Ala, oi /li (tIi) &la.
Tea, by Zevs : nl M (rir) Ala, t^ (tAv ) Afa.
lU Is n^atlve, except when preceded by tal. pA mny stand alone when a nega-
tive preoedea (often in a question) or when a negative follows in ttie next claoae :
M rlr 'ArJXXw, eh Ar. Thesm. 29tl. iiA is sometimes omitted after ei, and after
ral: o« Ti¥ 'O\vitrow S. 0. T. 1088, nl rtr xtpar Ar. Vesp. 1438.

C Hie name of the deity may be omitted in Attic under the influence i^
sodden aempoloasnesa : fi&rAv — oiaiyt not you, by — P, G.46ee.

1597. (TV) Various other verbs.

^ttytrjleefl-om, initSpirntr escape fl-om, irtSptitit lie in watt for, ^Mrar
anOelpate, ♦uXiTrwtfai guard oneself against, intttaBiH defend oneself against,
Xarfdmr MCope tht notice <^, pAttir wait for, iii\ttrrir and triKtlrur give out,
faa (t4 arpirtvua i frirn irfXiwt com failed the army X. A. 1. 6, 8).

lS9flL The accusative is rarely found after verbal nouns and adjec-
tives, and in periphrastic expressions equivalent to a transitive verb.
(This usage is post-Homeric and chiefly poetical.)

I;,C.00J^[C

860 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1599

xoat rporaiirit(= wpvwiiatiiaa.) etRorting tht Ubationa A. Ch. 23, rA ptriupa
^potTdTT^t a tpeeutator about thingt abnne the earth P. A. 18 b, trMT-iiioftt f*"
tA wpov^KowTa they loere acqvainltd taicli their duties X. C. 3. S. S, rtXtitat dropt
ripi/nt tear providing difflcultieg (Ihinga for wliicli there U no provision) A. Pr.9(H,
TsXXA rvrltTuifi (a buuse) full ofguiUj/ secrets A. Ag. 1090, iri ^fifut a5I« (o eaeape
(Am S. Ant. TSTi ffBpf4iei|iu(= 'fafiMp^O ^A '^vr'^f^*" »ay'no'h) tkequettion
P. Charm. 168 o, rfSfio-i ti? !^« roii iroo-TiXoui (fley <ir« (» mortal /ear of tht
envoyt li.i.iB; otLer caaea 1612.

1599. Elliptical Accautire. — The accusative is sometimes used
elliptical ly.

0Eto>, a at Toi (wtl. icaXw) Ao / you tAere, / am calling you I Ar. At. 274, /i^,
Tp*i « fciSi' TXJt ;« rpoJoiHi (= >iif, ■■(lii eia» ff< alra) do not, I (mplore thee by

the godt, have the heart to leave me / E. Ale. 2T6, ^4 /uk rflt^agir (acil. xAptxt)
no excuse I Ar, Acb. 346. Cp. 046.

FREE USES OF THE ACCUSATIVE
ACCUSATIVE OF EESPECT

1600. To verbs denotiag a state, and to adjectives, an acousfttivp
may be added to denote a thing 111 resped to whicA the verb or
adjective is limited.

a. The accusative uiuaHy expresses a local relation or the instmnient. Thr
word reatricted by the accusative usually denotes like or limilar to, good or
better, bad or vioree, a physical or a menial quality, or an emotion,

1601. The accusative of respect is employed

a. Of the parts of the body : i iiSpiiirot rir id«TiyXo» iXYif the man A<m a
pain in hit finger V. R. 402 d, rv^\it rd r' Sra riv re wouv ri t Shimt' tl blind
art Uiou in earl, and mind, and eyes S. 0. T. 371, rMai dir6i 'Ax')^'"^ Horn.

N. — The BCcuaative of the part In apposition to the tnbole (98b) belongs
here, as is seen by the pasalve. Cp. Tdv -wXiji' aix^n htm he tmote on the neck
A 240 (^dXc SoSpor 'A/»ra »r' nAx'™ * *00) With fiipXvai UKwM lAou Oft tmOten

in the abdomen E 2»4.

b. Of qualities and attributes (nature, fonii, size, name, birth, number, etc.):
eta^fpti yvrii itSpit rV 4><^>r Woman dil/fra from man in nature P. R. 463 b.
oMi loiKtr BrTfTat iSaviT^i S4)tat tal lUoj ipl^ir nor ia it seemly that mcrtnl
viomen should rival the immortals in form and appearance (213, rsrau^, KMna
Sroiuk, (Spot Bio r\iepvy a river, Cydnus by name, tao pletbra in width X. A.
1. 2. 23 (so with v^'Dt, 0iSet, ti^ctloi), rX^^i ui SurxO^uH about two Ihovsaad iu
number 4. 2. 2, \iior Hrrii d 7^*01 tell me of what race thou art E. Baccb.4e0.

c. Of the sphere in general : Stint liixv terrible in battle A. Pers. '27, yirBrBt
rj)i> Siiroiar transfer yourseliws in thought Aes. 3. 153, rb tiir hr' ipai »lx'M^>, tA
I* Jrl ffsl (T^ufffui so far as Imytt-lf teat concerned I was lost, but through yvn
am saved X. C. 5, 4. II. Often uf indefinite reiaUona : Tdvra naiii base in iill
thinys S. 0. T. 1421, roirt-a d7=Wt t^ajTrm ^jiiSf, irtp ro^ii, 4 8* d/iaftji, roin-a ii
taitii each one of us is rji-.d in iii'rilera in vhich he is skilled, but bad in thi'Sf
in which he is ijrnuranl 1'. Lauh. I'J-I d.

iBii] THE ACCUSATIVE 361

1602. Very Tarel; liter subaUtDtives: x*'f<^^<^'xiiw^^l' a forrior valiant with
(tA|r) arm r £42, vtStlat rat (h^tii youtht by their appearance L. 10. 29.

1603. For the mccumUvb of respect the inHtnimental datlre (1616) ia also
employed, and also the prepoalUons eli, at-ri, rpit, e.g. iia4>if*t* if*r% or Ot
iftriP.

1604. Not to be cocfiued with the BccusatlTe of respect Is the accuBaUve
after intransitive adjectives (1606) or after the pssives of 1S32.

1605. The accusative of respect ia probably in its origin, at least in part, on
MGUsative of the internal object.

ADVERBIAL ACC08ATIVB

1607. Host of these adverbial accusatives are accusatives of the internal
nbject ; thus, In rAoi Si tlwt but at loM he said, tAm is to be regarded as

standing in apposition to an uneipreased object of the verb — loordi, which tMr«
Me end. Many adverbial accusatives are Uius accusatives in apposition (991)
ind some are accusatives of respect (1600). It is impossible to apportion all
cases among the varieties of the accusatives ; many may be placed under differ-
ent heads. The use of adjectives as adverbs l^/Uya rXairms very rich) Is often
derived from the cognate accusative with verbs (^o •■Xoi/T«r»),

1606. Manner. — Tpiw»rTiwi inHomemay, TlmrpAwtr intehat way f rirlt
(nvTor) rir rpinr in Ait nay, -rirrn rp&war in every viay (also warri TfAwtf),
tIi* TsxfffT^v (iiir) in the quieke$t way, Tj)r itBtlar (isit) straightforteard,
T^iro, titpiir grain (1016), tln^r nfter the fathlon of (Slniv Tofdrou like an
arrher V. L. 706e), rp6ifitMif in pretence (IrXtt rfi^vit ir' "RWiiiiTirrev he
tniltd pro/us«Uv M the Helleipont Hdt. .'j. 3;l), x^f" /'"■ '*< »a*e "/ ("t-
fittour): oi Tiir'ABiinlwrxipiritrpartdiiyTo did tKit engage in the expedilioH out
0/ good aill to the Atheniaw Hdt. G. Oil, roD x^p^' .fw leA-it reason f Ar. Plut.
33. r4« rj)v Ifxu x^P" for thy gake I have ctime S. rh. U13. Cp. 093.

1609. Measnre and Degree. ^-lUya, iityi\iL grtatly, roXiJ, TDX\d mucA, ri

■»U, rk raWi fOT the moat part, &ra» at much as, oiSir, iiifSit not at all,
TtnOrD* so much, ri aoraewhat, ipx^' '"' ''^J'' ^X'^' at all with oi or »ii( (ir r$
rtfaxpiw oil liTTit ipx^' ipBUt ^uXntnrAii i( ii utterly impostible to deliberate
eorreetly offhand Ant. 5. T-'i).

1610. KotlTe. — t( why f j-oBto, raura for (Ai» reason (cognate accus.) : ri
^\»n qvid (enr) eenfsH == rf m IJic i)X#»i; toBtb xafpu (=riu>rij> riyr x<^'
X«W) therefore t rejoice, miri tbDt-o f,Ku for this very reason have I come
P. Pr. 310 e, tsBt' ixStrBi for this rriuoH j^r.M are rpj-ed X. A. 3. 2. 20.

1611. Time and Succession (l-'it<2) : rl rOr now, ri vdXcu of old, rpirtper
More, ri wpirtpoi- the former lime, rpwrot firit. rb lar' itpx'< ''< f^ begintttnff,
'i rpwTOf in the jir»t plar.', ri rt\iirra,iat in thf last place (tor t4 StArtpor In a
series use trura or (wart J/), ri \inrit for the future. iipH)r at the poiiU, jvU,
tmifir fn seosoH.

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

TWO ACCUSATIVES WITH ONE VERB

1612. A oompoDiid exprearion, coiuUting of tbe accontiTs of an abatnet
•absUutiTs and roMi^Snt, rlBttBai, Ix'", etc., la often treated as a eimpla vett ;
and, when transitive, goTeme the accuaaUve i t^iw x^' naToBpoiialt Xifav frouiTg
(= iX^^ra) he ravaged the eoitrarg by hit incuTBtona T. 8. 41, 'Vdov ^Mpat
^4^ciD( IBtrre (= iifrij^Iffawo) they voted for the destruction o/ lUum A. Ag. BH,
/»fi0i|r (x" I' l^' rpUri w (= l» lUu^iiat) I blame thte firit fur one Ihliiff
E. Or. 1000, ri »' if pir,f XQ^i* lexin (= 'rtXartfdHi) what lie* between thou
hatt no memorj/ of 8. 0. C. 683. See 1698. So with other periphrases In
poetry; rttra laixtru Xirftw {= /laxpirepeii TpM^vtS') I epeak at length to Mf
ehildren S. O. C. 1120, tl U fi' Sf itl X^ui t(^xf (.= *in9« \h'") if (holt didt
alieaya Qtegin to) addrtu me thvt 8. El. 660.

EXTEBNAL OBJECT AND PREDICATE ACOnSATTTB

1613. Verbs meaning to appofitt, caU, dtoose, consider, make, nante,
akow, and Hke like, may take a second accusadTA as a predioato to
the direct object

rr^rirri* a^it iriStiff he appointed him general X. A. 1. 1. S, rartpt ipi
InXaiV* ycu were wont to call me father 7, 0. 38, tUpttrfui odrir rir 'ItJwr
fitvi^a Stn«Tii> to ehooie the king of the Indian* him»e{f to be arbitrator X. C.

5. 4. 8, oi yip Sixaior otri roiti tOKoii fiirnr xf><)0'Tai>i n>iU{tir alh-i Toit x/>lf#rWt
jKomAf for it ti not Jutt to contider bad men good at random, or good men bad
6. 0. T. 809, Ti/iMtov irrpaTtryii' fxaporirrnrat thep elected TimoAeut general X. H.

6. 2. 11, rj)' 'iv^' '■>■> fi'TX'^P^''" ^4^^ I $h<Ul eoneider j/our eilenee a* conaetA
P. Cnt. 436 b, invrbw itrrbriii rnroliriHr he hne made himgelf matter X. C.

1. 8. 18, iir l/ii abr Stpiworrn TBi^rn '/ VOX make ne jfow servaTit X. O. 7. 42,
■It ToAf 'EXXqni irauT6ii ao^ter^if irap4xur showing yovrtetf a tophiet befort the
Oreekt F. Pr. 812a, ti/me^ rirra rapix'" to render everything eaeg to learn
X O. 20. U. Cp. 1570.

1614. Tbe absence of the article generally distinguishes the predicate noon

from the object: twvrri>'>'tre to^i cJXaiat roil a&ToB rXwa-wr^rain rflv TvXn-Ar

TM^tir he promteed to make hit Jlatterert the richett of the cUt*en* L. 88. 4.

1615. Especially In Plato and Herodotus, after verbs fligniryliig to iwmw, to
ealJ, the predicate noun may be connected with the external object by (a
redondant) tlmi (Oil); va^vriiw dfoiiitoufi rir irSpa ttmt they call the man
a *cph((t P. Pr. 311 e, frum^r Ix't r/uicpit Tt col fiifTM (trai he it called both
thoH and tall P. Ph. 102 c. This is due to tbe analogy of verbs signifying to
thini or tav (.lOil).

1616. A predloaln accusative may stand In apposition to the object : ftwm
tupaii rikX^pa I gave them (Ac price of their rantom a» a free gift D. 19. 170^

1617. This use Is the source of many adverbial accusatives (993, 1600 tL).

1618. PaaalTe : both the object and the predicate accusative of the active
construction become nominative (1743) in the passive construction: a^lt rrpa-

tfajl THE ACCUSATIVE 868

rfrh ipM^ he htmtelf wat choten general L. 12. 6fi, stral iVfiaMrw K^ifmrnrrat
Ikei iAb/J themteleea be called lawgiver* P. L. fiSl d.

IKTEBNAL AND BXTEBKAL OBJECT WITH ONE VBBB
1819. Many verba take both an internal and an external objeob
uaoi The external object refers to a person, the internal objeot
(cognate accnsative, 15GS fE.) refers to a thing. Here the internal
ol^eot stands in closer relation to the verb.

h riXiiuit dc^nfcrroir raiitt&r airvit twaltwan (Afl viaf taught thefn a Immm
Ifccjr tntll hold In eiierla$ting rtmevibranet Aes. S. 148, rstfaiiriir IxBoj IxSalpw rt
IJuste thee teiA meh an hate S. £1. 1034, H/Xifr jt lu ^pd^aro t^f ypa^iir rairiir
XdHu* brought thit atxiaatton agalntt me P. A. 19 b, fXmt, ri lur pi}M the
woHiid that he dealt htm E TBS (1578), HtXrtdSqt 6 r^r iw Mapaean /tdxvr mi'
fifPtpiit nc^Si Mtlttadei who v>ort the battle at Marathon over tht barbariaiu
Am. 8. 181, riw iripa T^m* rat rXtnii to ilrlke the man the blone Ant. 4. y. 1,
aiaiet /at rsvro ri JMfta thes give m* this appellation X. 0. T. 3.

1621. PsmItc (1T4T) i rSaan etpartar gt/Mirtuiiitm receiving every manmr

tftervice P. PbAe, 266 fc, TtrrirSai wtrr-^Kiirra tXitT'' '" A< itrudc Jljtf blow*
Am. 1, 139, 4 K^it, 4r iKpt»ti the aaitenee that vxit prottouneed upOD blm L. 13.
GO, rat «idx«, tffit TUpvtu ^rr^tiirtr tS lotmtt the battle* in tehieh the Ftrtfaiu
■ere d^tated 1. 4. 145, Sreiia If mcXq^Jmi ZinXi^u eall«(f bg tht one name qf
meatan* T. 4. U.

1622. So with verba Btgnifyiiig to do anything toartay anything of a person
(IGOl) : raXXa iyath t/iit trolw he did yon mtKh good L. 6. 8, tbvtI >k m-
ttn tkafevhat they are doing tome Ar.Vesp.e96, ri ruaOrt iwatra'AyvrCXaar
IpralM AgeiilaH* for aucA merits X. Ages. 10. 1, roit Kopirflsif raXxi n est
iwi IXrjrc h« Aidl nian|r bad thing* about the Corinthian* Hdt. 6. 01. For Om
loeamtln of the thing, ril (nXOi), raxAi may be sntetftuted ; and tit and t^
wtth the iffntitlTft oocur.

1623. The acctiMtlvB of the person may depend on the Idea sxptened by
tha oomblnation of verb and acciuative of the thing (1612) ; u In n^ roXifitovi
^n*tmi taxi to have done harm to the enemy L. 21. 8 (here ttpyitOiu at Itaelt
doM not tnean to do anything to a penon).

1624. When the daUve of the person Is ttaed, eomethlng Is done /or (1474),

not to him i rirru frnlirrar roit ivoSamOrir they rendered all honour* to the

dead X. A. 4. S. 23. «ii or rpii with the aceosuive Is also employed.

1625. Passive of 1S23 : Sfm AXXs ^ vUui ItStnttrc oil the other wrong* that Ms
State hoM Mti^brsd D. 18. 70.

1626. Verba of dividing (tiiuir, ruTariimt, SuupiTr, r^^xtr) ma; take two
secnsitivM, one of the thing divided, the other of Ita psrta (cognate scons.).
Ibaa, K^ ri trpirm^ mr/vci^M S<M«a tUpn Cyrus divided the army into tunlvt
dlvMmu X. C. 7. 6. 13. tit or nrd may be used with the accnsaUve of the parts.

1627. PsMtve : liiprriu 4 iyopa Ttrra^ia iJpy, the Agora U divided into fOur
tart* X. C. 1. 2. 4. df and nrd maj be lued with the accosative of the parts.

864: SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLK SENTENCK [i6*S

DOUBLE OBJECT WITH VERBS SIONIPVtNO TO ASK, DEMAND. ETC.

1628. Verba signifying to ask, clothe or itudothe, aiii<-eul, demand,
dejmee, pennade, remind, teach, take two objects in the accusative,
one of a person, the other of a thing.

nu Tovr ipwru SI that' s not the quettiait rm atking i/oii Ar.Nub.64l; x"^"
rir iairrtO ixtitar ^fi^Iro-f he put Ai« own tunic (in him X. C. 1.3. IT, llai I*
'AriWar alrrit itSiat i/ii-xi'V^Vpl^* Ar*^B lo Apollo himttif divert* f)i« o/mg
oracvlar garb A, Ag. 126B ; rj)r Svyaripa ttpvwn rir Sirarar rov irip6t ht con-
Ctaleft from hit daughter her AtMJfantTi death L. 82. 7 ; KOptr olrcir rXsw to atk
Cyrus for boats X. A. 1, 3. 14, ui tyJt rati rtm 4 '*'fn£^i|> luvSir j) v^ifra that
I «ver exacted or naked pay of any one F. A. 81 o ; roijm* tjiv r^j)* i.'wnvTtfA
lu htdeprieei me of the value of thetetktngi It. 26.13 \ t/iit toStb ei wilSu lean-
not penvade sou of this P. A, 37 ft ; dm/in^H t/iai nai roii ttrStrovt I will rtfniitd
you of the dangers aUo X.A.S.2.11; tUMt U^a^i lu rairtir r^r rixr^' nobodf
taught me this art X. O. tO. 16.

1629. Both person ftnd thfng are eqcally goTsmed hj U)e verb. Tbe accusa-
tive of the person ie tbe ezteraal object ; the acciuUlve of the ttaLng ia Bometimes
a cogoate accuaatlve (internal accusative).

1630. Someof these verba also take the genlttve or dative, oremplofpiflpo-
sitions. Thus ipur&r nra rtpl rifoi, aJrcir (alriiffSal) Ti ropd ti»i, Aworrtpiiw
or il#i>v»ar«al r.ni ri»i (tibSj ti) (1394), or rif( ti (148.3) ; dra^^rirmir rwd
Tini (1856) ; raiSciftr riri tiki or ntik th (or rpit) with the accnsative.

1631. The poets employ this constniction with verbe of eleaiuing (a form
of deprisittg) : xpia A[fTo Sk/i^t he tea* waihtng the brine from hi* ^in f 2S#,
al/ia KiS^/iar 2apriiS6ra cleanse the blood from Sarpedon H 067. And with
other verba (in tragedy), e.g. Tl/mftiaOai avenge on, iirnXStTr seek to avenge on,
imtiiiHu execute judgment ori, ^wtawipnett charge.

1632. Paaaive (1747) : ihri ^niriX^wf impayiUrot rt&t ^pon having had the
tribute demanded of him by the king T. 8. 5, tan Fttoui drWT^pirrTat <Ul who hare
been deprived of their hor*es X. C. 6. 1. 12, oix IrtlBarTo ri in-nttMrra they
loould not credit the neat Hilt. 8, 81, moruijr iraiStuBtii hoeing been inttmeled
In music P. MeiLei. 2;W a (here imwriiii Is possible), a6itr dXXo iiii^icrrai Attftr-
i-oi J) twiaT-^itiir Tnan is taught nothing else except knowledge P. Men, 87 c

1633. Tbe accusative of extent (1680) ia freely iiaed in the same wntence
with other ac^.LlsatLV(«, as hrtptrtyicirTtt rlr Atvxailur laB/iir rit raOt having
lutnled the thipa across the isthmus of Leura* T. 8. 81.

On the acousative of the whole and part, see 98f> ; on the aocusa-
tive subject of the infinitive, see 1972 S.; on the aocusative absolute,
see 2076. See also under Anacoluthon.

TWO VERBS WITH A COMIWON OBJECT

1634. The case of an object common to two verbs is (lenpraUy that de-
manded by the nearer ; oi itt reli itailorplpaii iyta\tTr aiS tK^iXur it tJ'f

TJX(u> we mtMf not oetnite (Ae trainer or baniik httn from the eitie* P. O. 460 <L

I63S] PREPOSITIONS 865

■. The farther verb ma; contain the main idea ; ^trt^ val drotenfidjki ri«(
he cauuret tome and rtjeett them at tAe scrutiny L. 8. 83.

1633, Tbe construction U usually ni1ed by the participle, not by the
finite verb, when tliey have a commou object but different conatructlone, and
tepecially when tbe object stands nearer the participle : roiirv Soii ^t)iiita
Ti,pr6tae<u iri\tvatr V^X^t having gteeti him guidei h« ordered him to proceed
quietly X. C. 6. 8..&3; and wlien the common object stands between, as rpQ<rtt-
#4rr(t Tw'i rpitrraa rpfnori falling upon the foremost they put Ihem to flight

PREPOSITIONS

1636. Prepositions define the relations of a substantival notion
to the predicate.

«. All pTspoBitions seem to have been adverbs originally and nostiy ad-
Yerfas of place ; as adverbs they are case-forms. Several are localives, as rtpl.

1637. Tbe prepositions express primarily notions of space, then notions of
lime, and Anally ara used In tlguraiive rulations to denote cause, agency, means,
nuuiner, etc. Attic often differs frnm the Epic in using the prepositions to
denote metaphorical relations. Tbe prepositions deflns the character of tbe
veibal action and set fortb the relations of an oblique case to the predicate with
greater predion than U possible for the cases without a preposition. Thus,
lunt Si iiniaT^iP fiiri he ipake among the suitors p 467 specifies tbe meaning
oith gmt«r certainty than ^nj^r^fiiriB Icivi. So i 'EXXi^wv #i^t may mean
the fear felt bf the Greeks or the fear caused bg the Greeks; but with if or rapi
(cp. X. A. 1,2. IB, Lye. 130) the Utter meaning is stated unequivocally. The use
of a prepOMtion often serves to show how a construction with a compoeita
case (1270) is to be r^^arded (genitive or ablative ; dative, instrumental, ot
locative).

1638. Derelopment ot tlu Use of PrepAsiticnu. —

a. Originally the preposition was a free adverb limiting thf meaning of tha
verb but not directly connected with it ; xar ip (ffro doom he Kale him A 101.
In this OHe the preposition may be called a ' preposltion-advprb.'

b. The preposition-adverb was also often uEed in senieiices in which an
oblique case depended directly on the verb without regard to the preposition-
advert). Here the case la Independent of the preposilion-adverb, as in ^\t^pur
two tiKpua rtina from her eyelids, amag, tears fall f 121K Here fi\t^>ipar Is
ablatlvai genitive and is not governed by 4ir4, wliich serves merely to define tlie
relation between verb and [loun.

c. Gradually the pre[M)si linn -ad verb was brought into closer connection
ritber (1) with tbe verb, whence arose compounds such lut iiroil»T(ni, or

•i) with the noun, the preixmition-adverb having frued itself from ilx adverbial
relation to the verb. In this siat'e, which Is that ot Attio pnwe, the noun was
felt to depend on the prepoaitloii. Hence arose many syntacUcal cbangeK. e.g-

866 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [i6m

tlia aociuaUTe of the limit of taotion (1688) wu kbuidoiied in irobb for tb«
pnpoBition nith tlie acciuaiive.
Prepositions have three uses.

1639. (I) Prepositions appear as adverbs defining the action of
verbs.

1640. The prepooltion-adverb oaualiy precedes the verb, from wfalch it ia
often separated In Homer by nouns ftnd otber words ; iiiiir ir6 \iuyir i/iS^
to wani off destruction from (for) lu A 67, ifpi yip jm M the goddett tent b«r
/ortA A 106, txf lira yaZi the earth held him fa*t B 69B.

1B41. So, M links connecting sentences, rpii it ml and n! rpii and betUea,
trl S4 and betidet, iieri Sf and next, thereupon (both in Hdt.), ir U and awwnf
thenvwber (Hdt.).

1643. The verb (usoalljr iarl or tint, rarely tl/tC) may be omitted : ot yi^ rti
p4t» Ttun ir^p for no racA man U among them ^ 93. Cp. 944.

1643. The prepodtlon-ndTerb may do duty for tlie verb In pu&Ilel clkiues:
Srtptt ir/rrar, &r iiir tp 'Arptf^qi . . . ir f ipti MiffH^r^ the men TOte ftp, roM
■9 Atreide*, rose up Meriona 4 860. 8o In Hdt.

1644. (II) Prepositions connect verbs and other vords vith the
oblique cases of nouns and pronouns.

1643. It Is often Impoaaible to decide whether tbe preposlUon belongs to Ibe
verb or to the noun. Thus, it Si XpDvirli "lit P^l A 439 may be Chrj/MOa vent
Ota of the ehip oi; ChrgitU aenl^ut-from ('f'^) the eh^. When important
words separate the prep.-adv. from the noun, tbe prep.-adv. is mote prop«riy
regarded as belonging with the verb, which, together with the prep.-adv., |;ov-
ems tbe noun : dfi^t Si xoXtm S/mu itrterrai and hi* mane Jloat»-aboiU hie
thoulden Z G09. The Mss. often vary : rai^t* iyA /uB' ifUXnr (or fiato^Oitor)
vtth thete I wot wont to aieoeiate A 269.

1646. (Ill) Prepositions unite with verbs (less frequently vitb
nouns and other prepositions) to form c{»mpounds. Cp. 886 B,

a. From this use as a prefix the name ' preposition ' ^rpiStnt praepoattto) is
derived. Tbe origin^ meaning of eome prepositions is best seen in compoonds.

1647. Improper prspoaitloiu (1690) are adveriM nsed like prepositlona, bat
Incapable of forming compounds. The case (usually the genitive) foUowing an
improper preposition depends on tbe preposition alone wlthoot regard lo tin
verb ; whereas a true preposition was attached originally, as an adverb, to a
case depending directly on tbe verb.

1648. The addition of a preposition (especially iii, mrd, rtfr) to a vvital
form may mark the completion of tbe action of the verbal Idea (ptrfectin
action). The local force of the preposition Is here oft«n lost. So lia^rtytu
triMeed in emaptng, taraStilittir tucfeed in pumiing, vvm\tir aeeomplM, earrf
into effect {jtlittr do, perform).

1649. Two or more prepositions may be used with one verb, either sepa-

i6s8] PREPOSITIONS 867

ntelj, as adverbs, or in composition with the verb. Thus, vrQ Si r<ip4i (or irap'
*E) he »tood forth hetide htm A*86. When two prepositions of like meuiing
aitt Died Id comptwltioD, that prepoaltlon precedes which hs« the narrower
nngB: ovfi^in'^Mr take part <n uritA, in^ijripifrilnatai to be jnit round about
OM a erow*. Whea two prepositions are need with one nouD, the noun usuAlly
depends on the Moond, while the first defines the second adeerhisUy ; as An^l
r*pl v4i' round about a tpring B306. It Is often nncertsin whether or not
two prepoaiUons dionld he written together.

a. Bnch compound prepoaltloiia are iii^ttpl, rop^f, ^fx, irix, Mn, irarpi,
iMWfi, rtftrpi. Improper prepoellions may be QHed with trae prepositions, U
fi^X^ */f ri rrfurliwttnr a* far at (into) the camp X. A. 6. 4. 20.

1C50. Tmesis (rfi^vif euittng) denotes the separation of a preposition from
its rerb, and is a term of late origin, properly deeoripiive only of the post-epio
tangnage, in which preposition and verb normally formed an indissoluble eom-
ponnd. 'Rie term 'tmeeis' is Incorrectly applied to the language of Homer,
■inc« in the Kpic the prep.-adv. was still in process of joining with the verb.

ICSl. In Attic poetry tmesis occurs chiefly when the preposition is separated
ttotu the verb by unimportant words (partJctes, encimca), and is employed for
the sake of emphasis or (in Euripldea) aa a mere ornament. Aristophanes uses
tmeala <mly to parody the style of tragic ohonisee.

1(52. Bdt. nses tmesis f reqnently in imitation of the Epio ; the intervening
words are At (= olr), enclitics, Bi, /Ur . . . li, etc.

16S3. In Attic prose tmesis occurs only in special osses : irr a wait (ri-
«^«r) and fit «8 (itMiJi) nuir (Tio-x"')- Thus, Ssavi iB »«-^aiToi ^ »4X«
irr' *B ir*wlvi*» o" whom the city ha* requited viith beaeJUt for the senifce thtf
rendered U D. SO. 04. Here tt rrrolipin is almost equivalent to a ringle notion.

1C54. The addition of a preposition to a verb may have no eHect on the
construction, as hi inp^wai rfj* rt<ii, whereas fi^nur^ rtiit originally, and still
In poetry, can mean go frxnn-the-ihip ; or it may determine the construction,
as In rtprytfiaeai i/me to rurpat* me D. 18. 236. Prose t«nda to repeat the pre-
fixed pniporitlon : ixpilrai ix tQi hJh T. 1. 137.

1635. A preposition nsiwiiy assumes the force of an adjective when com-
pounded with substantives which do not change their forms on entering into
composition, as virotat a national meeting (iSbt), Otherwise the compound
nsnally gets a new termination, generally -«r, -w» neuter, or -It feminine, as
ir^wiow dream (y*Toi), twiyovrli thigh-mueele (ytrv).

1636. The ose of prepositions is, in general, more common In prose than In
poetry, wliich retained the mora primitive form of expiee^n.

1637. A noun joined by a preposition to its case without the help of a verb
liaa a verbal meaning : irb rir&r ipx*^' iKmOtpia freedom from all rule P. L.
MM a (Cp. i)Mttpat)n dri r.Hi ).

16SS. In geneml, when depending on prepodUons expranlng relatJoos
of place, the aconsatiTe denotes the place (or person] toward ahieh or the
^ace over tohieh, along which motion t^es place, the dadve denotes rest in

868 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [iSsg

or at, tiie genitJve (ablative) paiiiiig from. Tbua, iJKu ropi ai /AaB« coRHta
jrou T. 1. 18T, A rap iiarri} pip^apo^ fAe barbarians iu his oion tervice X. A.

1. 1. 6, Topd PmCKim coXXdI >pii Kvpar dir^Xfc' many camt oner from |A« Mb0

to CVt^s 1- 0' 29. Tba true genitive denotes various forms of connection.

1659. Coostiuctio PrugDans.—a. A verb of motion isoftqn used wilti »
prepoBltlon nith the dative to anticipate the rest titat follows the action of the
»erb ; ir TV irora^ (riffiv they fell (into and were) in the river X. Agea. 1. SB,
This use is common with tiS^vei, ISptar, mSirTitmi, etc., and with tenses of
completed action which imply reat ; as ol /r tj r^if itipti Jia^^rArn the bms
uAo A«l crowed (o (and were in) the island W 7. 71.

b. A verb of rest is often followed by a preposition with the accnsative to
denote motion previous to or following upon tbe action of the verb: rap^ardi
ZipSta (they came to Sardis and were in the city) they arrived a$ Sardia X. A.

1. 2. 2, it KZp^m- hiitTiffaw they icere aaned bg reaehing Cyrene T. 1. 110, ipitn
irpiffiarrtit lit AtutSalfiota he teas ehoten ambaatador (to go) to Laeedaanott
X. H.2.2. 17. Cp. 1082. 1. a.

1660. Stress is often laid on (a) the starting-point or (b) the goal of an

a. nrai^irSt diri SdrSpur roij Irraui tying hit hortBt to (ftom) trea
X. H. i. 4. 10. By anticipation of tbe verbal action (attraction of the prep.
with the article) ; r^r it6 DTpaToriBou rdfir l\irtr he deserted hia pott in Ike
army Aea. 3. 169, ol Ik Tfit iyopai KaTa\,-r6rrtt t4 finia (^i^o» the market-peoplt
(oJ /* TO (l7sp^) left their warea and Jlfd X. A. 1. 2. 18.

b. With verbs of cnllpeting (depo(i».», rvWi^eir) and tnroUing {iyypiiHtr):
tit Tiilcr iefiolloiTat they are muafred in(_to) the plain X. A. 1. 1. 2, tit ArSpti
lyypi'pat to enrol in(to) the list of men D, 19.230.

1661. So with adverbe: *rou AiiXi)8o/«» where (=iBMthrr, ftroi) tee kaee
gone X. 0. 6. 1. 14, SOer irtXlrantr, irarfXeaiiiii let t(» return to the point wheiir'
(= where, Srov) we left off P. Hh. 78 b, iyvoci t6v Ittiffm rit^iaw StOpo (|(gfTa bt
doei not knote that the roar in that region will come hither ( = rbr itti liiW^Kr
h»mr) D. 1. 16.

1662. Some adverbs and adverbial phraaea meaning from are used with
reference to the point nC view of the observer : inaTipaSeii on either tide, ttStr
ml (leiw nn this aide and that, it jrfiai on the right (a dextra), ol dri r^t n^rip
th€ actors, ri Ik toC t^enoO rtix"!, rd ^t rify naW-ifrvr t«xo' the wall (seen) fron
the iathmna, tAe leall toioard (looking to) Pallene T. 1. S4 (of the same wall).

1663. Poaition. — The preposition usually precedes its noun. It may be
separated from it

a. By particles (fUr, Sf, yi, ri, yip, oir) and byalMoi / think: ir air tJ »ilui
P. R. 46fl d, tit ii yt olpat rSt axxii TiXflt to the other eitiet I think 668 c.

Note that the order riir pir x'^P^' (1166) usnaliy bocomea, e.g. rpit pit t^f
Xi^pir or fpit Ti)r xiip" 1^'- Demonatrative i /nit and i Si, wbeu dependent od
a preposition, regularly follow the prepoeition, and usually with order rsTersed
(1109) ! iw pit dps Toil 9vp^ato6p*t, if ti roii eil in some (A(np> th«n we agree,
but not in others P. I'hae. 263 b.

iWg] PBBPOSITIONS 869

b. BratblbntlveB: (hEatrrpaunifai' lo tAepta(no/(Ae Cav>t«r X. A. 1. 2. II.

C. By the accusative in oaths uid entreaties (with Tp6t) : rp6t m r^lt it^rptt
(y my molAerAcre I implore (A«eB. Phoeo-ISAG; cp. per f«d«oi»rouidBM 1690,

If . — A prepoBttloD ii usually placed before a auperlaUve and after At or >rt
qualifying tbe superlatiTS : in irl rXiTrror rafi IfiCkav over the very grtaU$t part
of the throng T. 2. 31. raXii, rin, iid\a may precede the prepoaltlon and lt«
caee: nXi> ir tXiIok alrlif wUhfar better reaeon T. 1.36.

1664- In poetry a preposition is often placed between an adjeotive and Ita
lubstanlive; very rarely in proee (roif!* it rilfti (n the following ffiann«r
P.Criti. 116c). *

1665. rtpl is the ouly true preposition tiiat may be placed after ita case in

AUic prose .- ira^fft ri/n about wUdom F. Phil. 40 a, Ar iyii atSir otri ntya tin
lanpir w4pt tratu about vihiek I understand nothing ettW much or Ifub P. A,
IBc. When used with two subetantiTM ripi la placed between them : t»B haf»v
T( wipi sal T09 drarlw eonaemlng both thM vihich it holy and that whieh U ««-
koly P. Buth. 4 e. wipi occurs very often in Plato, only once in tbe orators and
possibly twice in Xenopbon. On anastrophe, see 176.

a. tftta and x^P^' (usually) and Iku (sometiniea) are poatpoelUTe. The re-
tention of tbe postposltiTe use of ttpl may be due to the influence of tuiM-
In poetry many prepositions are postpositiTe.

VAKIATION OP PREPOSITIONS

1666. The preposition In the seoond of two closely connected cIsums may
be different from that used in the Snt clause either (1) when the relation ia
cneutially tbe same or (2) when it is different. Thus (1) (( r« rfjt Ktpttpit
al iri -rift i/wtlptv from CoTcgra and the mainland T.7.3S, and (2) o(lr« icari
■nr atrt Itik 0iiMmit neither by land nor by (the help of the, the medium of
the) Ma 1. 2. Cp. ia6&

RBPimTION AND OMISSION OF PEBIPOSITIONS, ETC.

1667. a. ?or the sake of emphasis or to mark opposition and dilferenee, a
preposition is repealed with each noun dependent on the preposition : card r«
rbXi/ior nil card ri)* AXXi^ SIuTo* in the pursttit of war and in the other oeev-
palione of life P. Tim. 18 c

b. A preposition is used with the first noun and omitted with the second
when the two nouns (whether similar or dissimilar in meaning) unite to tonn
a coroi^ex : rtpl roi} Sitaltn lal iprr^t ' eoneeming the justice of our caiue and
Hit honetty of our intentions ' T. 3. 10.

t. In poetry a prepoeition may be used only with tbe second of two nouns
dependent on it : AeX^uIr tiri AavUai from Delphi and Daulia S. O. T. 734.

1668. Tn contrasts or alternatives expressed by 4i 4 • • - 4i ■■>' • ■ > "^< etc.,
the pcepoeitlon may be repeated or omitted with the second noun : ml sari y^r
ai mrA $iyM.TTat both by land and by tea X.A.I. 1.7, rpit ixSpAr^^Oar to foe
or friend D-21.1U.

1669. When prepositions of different meaning are used with the same niNin,

870 SYNTAX OP THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [167a

the Dooii is repeated ; thiia neither iipo» (tAe earth) nor under the earth Is Or
M y^ tig iwb 74t P. Henex. 246 d.

1670. In ezpluiatory appoeiUonsl dftiues (968) the prepoeilioD ma; b«
repeated for the sake of oleamwi or empbacU ; aa i* ndrwr ol dto^wrTol ytytr-
7-ai, ix rOw iwir^Stovdrrur #™«Ta the Men 0/ mark eotne from thote who hart
praetUed each art P. Lack. 183 0, and oomuioDl; alter demonstratlTes. lite
prepoalcioa is not repeated when Bucb an appoaltloaal clause is cloavly coQ'
nected nlth what preoedei ; iliit |tq>l m^u rcpl Mt iiinv, SvAtlat irr
i^4vStplit, iytrtltffiai nor thotild gou thiitk that gov are contending for a eliigU
ieette alone: to avert slaMry inttead 0/ maintain lug jomt freedom T.2.68. A
prepoelUon is usually not repeated before descriptive sppoBilional clausea (987):
"W xfitMrvt MXttt, ifftpaiou vpiy/iarot gou are ialkiny abovt wealth, an
itaelable thing Com. frag. 3. 38 (No. 128).

1671. Before a Telative in the same oaae as a noun or pronoun dependent on
a prepoaitloD, Uie prepoeitloa Is nsually omitted ; tari rutr^v r^r ^XuULr %* 4>
iyii rOr hewataltiuU age at lehteh I note am D. 21. 166, ^(X«>tiu Inri iw (_= nt-
rwv Si) ^iXciV-u U laved fiy vhotn it i» loved P. Enth. 10 o. But the pTepoeition
is repeated if the relative precedes : wpit S rit rf^Oia, rpit roOro Im wpii tt
ixuBTor tpyar StI miiittir it i» neeemarn to §et each individwti to tome one wort
to which he it adti^ted by nature P. R. 423 d.

1673. In nato a preposition Is often omitted In replies: i^ttium — ^*
Wnf ; ^ijau, raS iyaeeO, ^i^o/wr overeome — by whatf he wUl tag. Bf the
good, we thall eay Pr. 366 c.

1673. The prepoaltlan Is usually omitted with the main noon or pronoon wiien
it 1b used In a clause ol oomparlson with &t (rarely Hvrtp) at: Ittin ripi p^pii
aal Tpo^ T^t ziipdi ^iiX(tfn0ai iheg ouffht to take thought for their countrg
a* (A«i> mother and nurie P. R. 414 e ; so, uBually, when the two membeia are
closely united : ut rpit M6t' tfii ei rdXif^ X^i apeak the truth to me at to o»r
who knows At. Lye. 998. The preposition is often omitted in the clause with it
(A»tp) at, 4 tAan ; ol rofi' iMir avrwt ut ri TMaDT-a rouir iraXMirir who om
their ruin to nothing to much at to turh a eourte of action D. 19. 863, t^I nv
fi^Uorroi ii&>Xor ^ovXflWtai J) roD rapiwrat to deliberate about the future rather
than the prefenC T. 3. 44.

1674. A preposition with its case may have the function of the subject, or
the object, of a sentence ; or it may represent the protasis of a condition.

Subject : l^mytf wtpt ijtriijioirfoui about eight hundred took to flight X. H.
0. 6. 10 ; (gen. absol.) oHHiXry^rur ttpl irTatotImn, Xaflii «h-si}f jtBTa^sim
when about wmn hundred had bef.n eoUeeted he marched down with tA«n> S. 4. G.
Object : Sii<pe*ipttt it dircKorfwi theg killed about eight hundred T. 7. 32. PrM-
asis: ittl Sii 7' Wt ainii rciXu Ar drwXiiXuTt for had it depended on pour
telve* you would have pertthed long ago D. IB. 49 (cp. 2344).

OHDINART nSES OP THE PBEPOSITIOMS

1675. Dm of the PnpoalUiHU in Attic PrON. —
Witb the aocusaUve only : <l*d, rit.

i,vGooglc

iCBi] PREPOSITIONS 871

With Um dfttire only : ir, tit.

With the genitive only : iwrl, drJ, ii, rpi.

With the Mduative and genitive : dii^, Sid, nrd, iitri, bwfy.

With Mcuntive, genitive, »nd dative : hri, t^fi, Ttpl, wpin, bwb.

a. With the dative are also UMd in poetry : drd, iii^l (aiao in HdL), fiml,
iri (Ar«), ii (Jt) take tbe daUre in Arcadian and Cyprian.

b. The genitive i« either the genitive proper (of the goal, 134S, 13S0, etc.)
or tbe ablatival genitive.

c The datUe is nmally the locative or the InBtmmental, luely the dative
proper (as with iwl and rpit of the goal).

1676. Ordinaiy DiSerancea In Meaning. —

A^.*,pl

round o&oitt, near

Std

oviini

rto

tari

agaiAMt

^i

IDftA

afttr

Mp

Ourn

otoM, in beKatf of
arm Dativs

over.

'^1"1,.T.T,

irl

OM

on

to, toward, for

"fit

from

w((ft,iMar

(0, contrmyto

Tpt,

onOuiiitof at, bettdei

», (oioarrf

i*«

bv, under under

un<{«r

1677. Certain prepoaitions are parallet in many uses; e.g. iri and xsri,
iwTl aad rpi, dri and i*, dfc^I and npl, 6wip and rtpL, irl and rpit, tir and

1678. The agtnt is expresBed by different prepositions with the geniUve :
iwi of peiaoiis and tUngs penonlfied (1608. 1. N. 1): the normal usage in Attic

prcwe.
rufi : here tbe agent Is viewed as the sonice. The action la Tiewed as starting

near a penon, or on the part of a person.
)ui through: tbe intennediate agent.
dri: indirect agent and sonrce (rare) to mark the point of departnre cd the

action. Chiefly b Tbno.
/( : chiefly In poetry and Hdt. In Attic prose of emanation from a sonrce.
wfit : to mark tbe resnit as due to the preeenee (before) of a person ; chiefly fn

poetry and Ildt.

1679. Mran» Is Expressed by Jtd with the genitive (Uie normal usage in Attic
prose), iwi, II, it, vir. Motive Is expressed by brb (gen.)i ''' (accus.), trtsiL.

1680. Prepositions in composition (chiefly drd, Sid, jcerd, irtfr) may give an
idea of completion to the action denoted by the verb (1648).

a. Forthensageafteroompoand verba see 13S2f[., IMSB., 1669.

LIST OF PREPOSITIONS

UttL Aj*^ (op- it^v, Aft^irtfm, hdX. amhi-, amb-, av^) originally

372 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [t6t>

on both aides (either externally only, or inside aod outside), hence
eAoui. Cp. the use of Ttpi (1693) throughout. Chiefly poetic, Ionic,
aod Xenophontic. In Attic prose chiefly with the accusatiye.

1. A|4( ufM the OenitSve

LocaI (very rare uid doabHul) : ol d^l rairiit elxitrTa T^t vAXwt dwelitrt romd

about thitcitg Hdt.8. 104 (oulybere). Cmue; about, eoncertting: d^t «^

\iyu raiSit 1 tpeak about th]/ ehUd E. Hec. 580, iiupl ur tlxf l^^itpif^fi

quarrtllitig abovt ahat theg had X. A. 4. G. 17.

9. dfi^t teilh the Dative
Lockt : i/i^i A/ioirir fx« rim he ha» a Attld about hie Aouldere A 627. Catue :
^tfiifitii ifi^l rg Tvnui afraid on aeeounl of hie wife Hdt. 6. 62, ift^ ^ipt
bf reaeon of (encompaned by) terror E. Or. 835 i Means : d^I rt^lf ' teith tht
environment of poetic art ' Plod. P. 1. 12. Often in Pindar.
8. dfi^C ioi(A the Aeeutative
Local : i/i^ HtX^ar about Miletut X. A. 1. 2. 3, tlpancr itut-' 'A^iXfa thef ran
around AehUlfJ Z SO ; temporal : iiufil ItlKiir totearde evening X. A. 2. 2. 14.
Number: d^l roii Ju-x'^'xn about tKOthoutand 1.2.9; of occupation with
an object ; d^l Jtiirnr tlx'r he wot buif obout dinner X. C. G. 6. 44.
a. al d^l rim the attendants, follonera of a, peraon, or the person himself with
bisattendants, etc.: dr^pi-avd^i^ SCfwrrirT^v oru of tfie tniaty adherents
o/Cyrue X.A.I. 8.1, ol d/i^l Xapliro^r CMrix^ut and hUmen 4.3.21,
ol iiupl npatrayipir the school of Protijgorat P. Th. 170 c. This last phrase
oontalns the only use of Aivpl in Attic prose outside of Xenophon.
4. Aji^I in Compoettion
Around, about ■ Ift^i^XXtir throw around (m both tide*), i/i^Aiytiw ditpute
(itwuJl; on both »ide*).

1682. &*i (Lesb. iv, Lat. an- in anKelare, Eng. on) : originally vp

to, up (opposed to Kara). Cp. Sya.

1. hvi, vnth the Dative
Local only (Epic, Lyric, and in tragic chornsee): dri rr^rrpy upon a ettff A 15.

2. hri with the Aecutative
Up along; over, through, among (of horizontal motion). Usually avoided by
Attic prose writers except Xenopbon (three times in the orators).

a. Local: To a higher point: iri riw rera^r ap etream Hit.l. \9i (cp. tmri

rtr rartiiir). Extension : drd rrparir through the C<mtp A 10, d»4 ra«i*
riir y^r over the whole earth X. Ag. 11. 18, ParA^at dri rriti tx"' hating
king* in thy mouth B 260 (cp. tii rriiumt (x<>*)-

b. Extension in Time : iri r^kts through the night Z SO. Sto c.

c. Other relations: DistrlbntiTely: dri ix^rir ftvJpai by hundred* X. A.3.4.

21. iwhrSratiiiUiAr daily X. C. 1. 2. B. Manner: drdic^TM wUh all their
might (np to their strength) X. A. 1. 10. 16 (better AtUo «t4 tpirat), drd
hiyt propoTtionMa^ F. Fb. UOd.

PEEPOSITIONS

8. A*A in Compotttion

Up (irirTar9ai (toiutuji, invrrpliptir (urn vpaidt doun), biKit (iraxwp*'' go boct,
dro^firgfricnr mnirul), apain (^ramiv breolAe again, iiitiwipavSai praetlit
coiutatuif), attea with a reversiDg force force (draXfair vniootti).

1683. ArrC: originally fn the face of, opposite to; cp. gyro, iyavrios,
Lat. ante (with meaning influenced by jxMt), Germ. Anttoori, ' reply.'

1. ArrC toUK the Genitive only
Local : iif Jr ivrtitbrn Ktafiding opporitt to (from the point of Tiew of the
speaker, i.e. behind) which (plne-ti«ee) X. A. 4. 7. 6. In other meanings :
Iiatead of, for, aa aa equivalent to : irrl To\iiiau tlfiirt peace tnaltad of
uar T. 4. 20, rk rap i/iel JMrSsi drrl rfiF ofmu to prefer what I have to
offer you here intlead of what you have left at home X. A. 1. 7. 4, rj^r

raXnTJ|r <lrrl r^f tuo [lirruw ctmiplit ^XXdjun-o they exchanged death for
the Bufett of the living P. Menex. 287 a; in return for, hence di«' Stov
wherefore 8. EL &B6 ; for rp6t In entreaty ; r irrl raUuw rOrti l-arettnir
we entreat thee by these children here S. O. C. 1326.
2. Avr( In Compotitiolt
Imtead, in return (dmSiSSrai give in return), agatiut, in oppotitton to (drriM*
7(1* ipeak agaitut).

UM. t'w6 (Lesb. etc. iarS) from, off, aioay Jivm; originally of
separation and departure. Cp. Lat. ab, Eng. off, of.

1. d«4 with the Genitive only
L Local : ■arnrqi^'at drri roO trrau leaping dotim from hit horee X. A. 1. 8. S8,
M4^ru» dri trrov he uted to hunt (from a hoiBo) on Aor«<bac4; 1. 3. 7,
drj AiXdtfffqt at a distance from the tea T. 1. 7. Flgnntivdy: i*i
StQr ipx^l"*^ beginning with the godt X. A. 6. S. 18.

b. Tempoial : d^' isrlpat after evening began (after sundown) X A. 6. 3. 23, di-t

TBu afraS nrfwlou on the lame tijr'ui' 2. 5. S2, AtA r£r rirvr i^fter meoll
X. R. L. 6. 8, d«' oC M'nce.

c. Other relations: (1) Origin, Source : in prose of more nmote anaestrr:

rote fJc dsi ^utr, roh )' Jf a^£r rflr 0tfir 7«7»>iTa> aom« descended
(remotely) from godt, others begotten (directly) of the godt themselves
1.12.61. (This distinction Is not always observed.) Various other
relations may be explained as source,
(2) Author: as agent wtcb passives and intransttiTes, when an actitoi is done
Indirectly, through the Influence of the agent (tri of tlie direct action
of the agent himseit). Not common, except in Thuc. (cliiefly wltb
TpdrrfrAu, \iytvtai, and verbs of like meaning): twpdx^^ ■''' 'irAr
eUiit tfyew nothing was done under their rule T. 1. 17. The starUng-
polnt of an action is often emphasised rather tlian tlw agent: iri
raXXflr (bI rph nXXott Xfryw yvywiiurti ^eechei made by many and to
many T. 8. 93.

8T4 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1685

(8) C&nae (remoW): iri ToAraa toG ToX^^Mrst tryriB^ ht teat prai*td in
aoKtequ^nce of thit bold deed T. 2. 25, ravta odt Awi rixv fytlf";

iW' dri wapaffau^ T^t ifi^t tAi( happened not from chance bttt bf
reaton of the preparationt t made L. 21. 10.
(4) Means, Instrament: rrpirtuiia ruipAf(t» diri xp^I^tu' heraited a* armf
bj/ meant of monet X.A.I. 1.9; rarely of petaons: dr' sAr^r ^Xdf at
to do injury bg meant of Aem T. 7. 29.
(G) Hanner: iri roO wpoi/Mroln openly T. 1. 66.
(6) Conformitj : dri roD fa-sv on a basU of equality T. S. 10, d*A ftiw^xl"

afrAn^Hu fndrpeTuIenl bj/ virtiu of {aecordinj) to") an tUliance 7. 57.
K. — Itwb with gen. Ib sometlmea prelelred to the simple gen., often for
emphasis ; ol XAyw d^' ^f^> the uordi that procetd from you T. 6. 40, d\fY« dri
toXXSt a few of the many 1. 110 (cp. 1317 a). Thuo. haa many free uses of dr^

2. &v4 tM Conipo>(t(on
From, away, off (drUKu {ro aviay, trvrnxlt'" vxHl off), in return, &a«t (iwt-
tiSim give back what ia due, druriTr demand what it one'* right).
Separation inTOlvea completfOD (henoe dranXlrnw utterly contume, dro-
9Utr pay off a wu), or privaUon and uegaUon (iraye^ritiw forbid, dr»-
TvYx''"!' mits). OfI«D limoat e<)aiTalent to ad Intenalre (irt^ttu «p«ai
out, dcBtncrtfrat jMlRt out, dTaraXftdr dare isUhout retene).

1685. S*& (Lesb. (£) through, originally throvgh and out of, and
apart (separation by cleavage), a force seen in comp. (cp. Lat. du-,
Uerm. gun-achen).

1. iUi aith the OenUive
a. Local: through and out of (cp. Horn, ji^k, imrpi), as Si fi/iw (7x01 ^Mtr
ihe ^pear teent clear through his thoulder A 481, dnCvu did riKavi to litten
from beginning to end Lye. 16. Through, bnt not out of: Sid roXcfitif
(7^1) rapttttSai to march through the enemy's counfrti X. Hi. 2. 8 and often
In flgumtire expressions : Jlid x"/>i> 'x'" to control T. 2. 13, Sti vrtiimrtt
fxor to have in one'« moutA (he always talking of) X. C. 1. 4. 25 (also Irk

1 Temporal : of nntnterntpted duration, as did wvrrit through the night X. A.
4. 6. 22, >id rarrit conttantly T. 2. 49.

c. Intervals of Space or Time : Std S'ica ArdXtiur at interval* of (en battlement*

T. a 31, )id xpinv qfter an interval li. 1. 12, intermUtently Aes. 3. 220, J.d
tdXAbC at a Umg di*tanee T. S. 04.

d. Other relations: Means, Mediation (per): *irit Si ivrroS ipse per*e D. 48.

15, Std Tftfrau ypi/t/tara Tiiupai tending a letter by thi* man Aes. S. 162.
State or feeling : with ilm, ylytwSai, fx"', ot a property or quality ; did
^flav lift they are afraid T. 6. 84, )i' ^'v^Jat *H" he kept in quiet 2. 22,
fKkir if/ur Sii fiiix-ni to meet ut in battle 2. 11, a^oii lid^Xttf Uim to eiUer
into fHendsh^ wtth them X. A. 3. 2. 6. Manner : did rax^' quickly T. 4. &
2. SiA loith the Aectitative
A. Local : of space traversed, through, over (Epic, Lyrlo, tragic obonuea): Sti
S^IMTB through the hallt A 600 ; lid ritrt. 6 610 is qnasi-temporal.

■«S] PREPOSITIONS 87d

b. Cuiae : melng to, thanka to, on aeeo#iU of. In eonstquttiet <^(cp- propter, ob) :

itd Ttfii Ste^ irifl&iai' I VKU taeed Ihanla to the godt D. 18. 240, ri^d^Mi
it^ li iavrir, dXXik Jiii tifar wpoyiniir honoured, not for hitiuelf, bat oh
aecomU of the renown of hie ancetlore V. Heoex. 247 b. So la tl ^j) Jid rim

(rt) had it mil been for in sUtements of an (nnsunoouuted) obBUcle : >al-
rorriu Kpan^arrn it t&i parA/ut r^-y/idrwii, il ^j) Jii KOpow it aeemi theg

vould have got the belter of the power of the king, had it not been for
Ctrw I. 5. 02.

c. (id is rarely need (In place of l*tm) to denote a purpose or object: lii rJ)r

r^ipar SAfar for the aake of <Ae(r Aciiour T. 2. 89, )i ^ifpttar for epite
D. 39. 32 (cp. !id riroc Ima b^ulSit on aecQvnt of dieeate (n order to gain
health P. Lyg. 2IB e).
1 tid with gen. 18 used of direct, Jid with accos. of indirect, ageno; (fault, merit,
of a person, thing, or situation). Jtid with geo. Is used of an agent emplo;«d
to bring about an Intended result; Sid with acciu. is used of apetson, thing,
or BtAte beyond our control (accidental agency). (1) PerHona : fr^Sfa*
ravrs St Sifiunix'" the)/ effected this by the vtediatioa of Euryma^tu
T. 2. 2, rh flit Teirout dToXuXira what has been loet by ((A« favlt of) thete
ram D. 6. 34. The accus. marks a pereoa as an agent not as an Instrument.
(2) Things: ri/im, >■ £r fKivOipiai h ^In rapomtvar^trai IdiM, by meant
of which a life of freedom will be provided X. C. 3. 3. 62, Iti rsdt r6iiMH
(JeXTtsvi yi-yriitiwei irBpvwei men become belter thanke to the latet B. 1. 22.
Sometimes there is little difference between the two oases; Si' &r irarr'

driiXcTB D. 18. 33, S>' stt iwarr iTiiXrro IS. 3G.

N. — iidwith gen. (=tArou(rA) Is disUngnlsbed from tberimple dative (=b|i)i

li' it 6iMiiuw ml •) ittiiiiur P. Th. 184 o.

t. For tU with accus. to express the resson for an action, the dative Is some-
times used (1617): rotf Ttrpiyitirmt ^^odiunt rtii 'A^niisut fearing th«
AtheniaTis by reaeon of whal had happened T. 8. 08. The dative specifies
the reason less detlnital; than Sid with Uie accusative. '

1 Whea used in the same sentence, tbe dative may express the Immediate, Sul
with the accus. the remoter, cause : dr^oclf fwniruf lii r^it ffirotdd* im-
Xiipfir they gave ground from Ihe fact thai they were weak through lack
of food T. 4. 36.

{■ lid with accus. contrasted with iwi with gen.: ^m/wr nfrri 3i iuina Art
r^ s&tbG nicCSi droXnUrai IM shall eay that it (the body) it dettroyed
on account of thoie (remoter) eautet (as badneaa of food) by ilt own eoft
(immediately) P. B. BOO e.

3. M in Compotttion

Tirorngk, acroit, over (Sis^Imc erott), apart, atunder {ttatbrruT cut in two,
taucptrtir dttcemere, tia^peir differ, tiatvyrim dit}oin), severally (Sia~
Mirv dittrlbute).
>«- often denotes Intenrity, oontinuance, or fnlfilment (SioM/mi' remain to

the end, Jio^Afpti* dettroy completely'), iia- is common in the reciprocal

Diddle (1726), aa In IiaX^«r0iii rnnverse; often of rivalry (el SuToXirn'ifiow

rfcdl ttatetmen, tiaMrrl{«rAu contend in throwing the javelin).

876 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [iW

1686. f h, It into, to, opposed to ti ; from ^ + c (cp. L&t aba from
ab + a). See on h. On at with the genitive by ellipsiB, see 1302.

1. lit with the AccufotiM only
In the Old Attic alphabet (2 a), generally used in Attica in the fifth centDT^,

EZ waa written, aod this ma; be either ilt or '(. In the foarth cenluty KIS wu

generaUy written. In Thuc. it la printed, but ita correctneM ma; be doubted ;

other Attic prose writers use ilt, the poets th or (Ibm frequently) it. It ia not

true Itiat In poetry it Is used only before conBooaiita, tit only before vowela.

«. Local: ot tbegoU: ZuaXtt if 'IroKtit itifiytrar it £ite\IAr the Slcelteroutd
over out of Italy Into Sieity T. 8. 2 ; with a peraonal object : ^X8tr it t*i
'A^lit it itfpiirain iwipovi he came from Asia to (a. land of) poor men T. 1. B,
trwijira ipiit^aiTa it (v. I. rpAf) fiatAia he dl^atchei a letter to (the
palace of) the king 1. 137 (of sending, etc., to individnala iit or rpit ia
used); agaltut: irrpiTvivar it Ti|r 'Attuo)^ theg invaded Attiea T. 3.1,
rAXifuf Tsi) Kofiii^foii it rvit 'AArMUsit tear betieeen the Corinthians anti
the Athenian* 1.5fi; with verbs of rest, 1069 b. The Idea of motion bolda
where Eng. naea in or at : TcXcin-dr tti n to end in T. 2. Gl. Eztennon :
IliXM-iirnia'fovi tto^aXiir it rs^ 'EXXiirai to raiee a prejudice against the
Feloponnesiant among the Oreeki T. 3. 100; in the prtienee </ (eoram):
it ri nHiir X^iv to apeal: b^ore the aaaeml>iy i. 68.

b. Temporal : of the goal : up to, until ; hiiU upto my time HdL 1. 52, it tAm
finally 8. 40 ; at (6^) such a time (of a fixed or expected time): rpotirt dt
Tptriir fiiUpiw ropaiHi commanded them to be present on the third day
X. C. 3. 1. 42, ijtTt tit TfMBiEiHfr)|r iitiipar Come on the thirtieth day 6. 3. 6,
Limit of time attuned r tit rauOrw ntpir i^yii^m arriving at avck a
time L. 16.6. Extension (orer future time): tit riw Xwrir x^mr in all
fubtre time L. le. 2.

e. Meaaure and Limit with numerala : tit x^^" (o the number <tf (up to) a
thouiand X. A. 1. B. 6, tli i6« turn abreast 2. 4. 26, it ApaxM' to (A« atnouKt
of a drachma T. 8. 20.

d. Other relations : Goal, Purpoee, Intention : 4 ''4 rarplt tit »t iwffkiwti
yovr country looks for help to you X. U. 6. 1. 8, XP^^ *'* '''< «'^fMmi Io
use for the slingt X. A. 3. 4. 17, riuStittr ili d^^r to train with a viev to
virtue P. O. 610 e. RelaUon to : (sUr tit rrpariA* excellent for the armt
X.C.S. S.e, often In Thuc. (= r/rft with accus.). Manner: tit kw^ in
teaaon X. C.S. 1. 8, eli t6ruiur to the extent of one'a poteera 4. 6. 62.
S. «lt fn Composition

Ittto, In, to (tlrfialrtu' enter, tWrfirrta get fn, exact a debt).

1687. K m (poetic ht, dv, tivQ, Lat. »n with the abl., en-; opposed
to dt into, ti out of. On ir with the genitive hj ellipsis, see 1302.

1. h teith the Dative (_Loeative) only
a. Local : fn, at, near, by, on, among : It tripr-^ in Bpatta T. 1. 138, 4 it
Eopfrtfy fi'xf the battle at Corinth X. Agea. 7. 6, riXii nimuitiif it ry
^iiilnt rirrif a City buHt on the Euxlne X. A. 4. 6. 22, ir rj Mtf i«Tipc<tt

i6n] PREPOSITIONS 377

itanding Hpon t)k« bed L. 1. S4 (^r ot anperpoaitlon U nre), x^i iw ra«u
■Uinfwi TsTi 'SUir«'ir {atra famous amoni) all (A« Gre«j):« P. L. d31 b, ir
iiur ISiiiHrripv'" It* made an harangue btfore (coram) you D. 8. 74. With
Terb« of moUon, see 16&9 a. Of circumstBnce, oocapatlon, u el <r rsft
vfAyiiaair the m«n at lAe head ofciffairt D. 9. 66 (so ir tlpirg, (/rift d^X*!?.
^Xwro^f , ^Pv (Tmu J <t o^Wf Ix*" tobJanw, <v VyplX"' tobeanfrrvuUA);
in the power of: it t$ 0ff ri rAai Ifr, ai* i/ul the itttn retted v>ilh Sod,
»ot viith me D. 18, 19.1, ir iaurv tyirere he came to hitiuelf X. A. 1. 5. IT,

b. Tempond: in, letthln, during {cp. 1H2) : itrimlTivtr inftvej/eart L, 19.
29, ir mrSalt during a truce T. 1. 66, ir if vihite.

C. lotttumBnt, Hskiu, Cauae, Manner (oTfginall; local) ; ir 6^Sa,\iUirn'
Owfuu aee urith the ej/et A 687, b iA Kaiurr6ta6ai to be endangfreA by
(La to depend on) a single person T. 2. 36, ir raCmt 4) Xvra^fwtDi 4 x^^
porrn either grieving or rejoicing at this P. B. 003 c, tr rs^y tiiXuaai to
mate clear by this 392 e, i» ti? ^»pv openly X. A. 1. 8. 21. Cod form itjr :
it nit iiietoa ri/uytt m^rami rat tplirta deciding according to eqtial latO$
T. 1. 77, it ifiAl in my opinion B. Hipp. 1320.
N. — tn many dialecta, e.g. tliote north of the Corlnthi&a Gulf (lanljr in

Pindar), /» retains ita original meaning of in (with dat.) and InM (with acouA.].

The latter om appears tn itSiiM loteardi the right.
S. (* in Compoeitton

In, at, on, among (iiirlrTiiw fall tn or on, irrvyxitnr /all In with, fYTcXSc
lavghat, itiirtit bind on).

lESB. it. In out, out of, from, from within, opposed to ir, ^t; op.

Lat. eXfC. As contrasted with &r6 avmy frvm, li denotes ,/ViMn within.
I. IE, Ik wUh Ae (Ablatival) OeniUve only
In Arcadian and Cyprian it (= ii) takes the dative.

1. Local : if *iH>4in)i tXairut marching out of Phoenicia X. A. 1. 7. 12 ; of
transition : it rt^latot t^tvyot (Aey Jled when at (from) a greater dtalanc*
1.10. 11. On ^ in the conjtrveCio pratgnans, see ISaOa.

b. Temporal : it roO iplmu e^fter breakfatt X. A. 4. 6. 21, it nUat from boy-
hood 4. 6. 14.

C Other relations: immediate sacccMlon or trandtion : dXXijr i^ IWiit rSKvti
iiutfiilitrm exchanging one city for another P. A. 87 d, ix ro\iiiau rna^
furat ttfi^rnt making peace after (a atate of) war D. 19, 133, {k ttux^*
i-Xvtfo'iN ylftorTM from beggar* they become rich 8. 66. Origin : Immediate
origin (nbemaa iwi Is used of remote origin, 1684. 1. c): iyaSal tal ii
iyaSat noble and of noble breed P. Phae. 246 a. Agent, regarded as the
source: with pass, uid intr. verbs instead of ^t6 (chiefly poeUc and in Hdt.):
rJX«t in fiairiMut SiSoiiirmi citieM a gift (having been given) o/(by) the Icing
X. A. 1. 1. 6, i,iu\oytlTo it rirrut U wa» agreed by all T. 2. 49 ; but it is
often used with a different force, as in rSt rvxirrut ittpirttt rimtmrtf^'"
M AoM been tettled by the vulgar (^»m conitlluenl parts of awho1e)Lyo. 62.
CoDseqnence : ii ■(roD roC (^tvv In eojueguenee of the fact itself T. 1. 76.
Came or ground of judgment (wliere the dat. is more nsual with inanimate

378 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [leig

objects) ! a oE SaptiKXtr afrrir for ahich reaion he atcvud k(m X. A. & ft.
11. Material: ri iyKurrpaw l( ilinarrot th' hook of adamant F.R.61SC.
Instniment and me«IU : it rOr wimr rat dprrai tTatBai to acquire bf Ulbovr
the fruiti of virtue T. 1. 123. Cunfonuily : ix rSr r6nur in atcordanee wiA
the law» D. 24. 28. Manner (rare) : it nS Irov on equal tervu T. S. 3.
Partitive (cp. I.^IT a) : ix tvI* Bt>Ri^Rgr tlvl they belong to the clow that
ha$ power V. G. 526 e.

2. It, Ik in Compoiaion
Ont, from, off, owty (cp. /(tXatmr drive out and awty") ; (rft«n with an impli-
cation of tul61ment. completion, thoroughness, Ksolution (irwlpSta tatk
utterly, MMvait Uaeh Oiorouehly). Cp. 164S.

1689. twi (cp. Lat. ob) upon, on, on the surface of; opposed to
into under, and to vrip when iirip means above the surface of.

1. I*( Willi the Genitive

A. Local : upon : oh' irl yift qC^ bw6 yiji neither upon the earth nor under the

earth P. Menex. 24Sd, trl gpdnv txiia4{tri> he teated himself on a tkroiie

X.C.e.l.e; oftbe vehicle (lit or figur.)uponwAic&.- /vlrCir [TrHrdx'w^

to ride on horiebacle i. 6. 68 (never /rl with dat.), ^t rift iii.ijt Miii ca

mg ihip Ti.il.e ; in lite direction of : irl lipiiur fptvyt he Jted toward

Sardi* X. C. 7. 2. 1 ; in the presence of (cp. rapi with dat. ) : irl lioprtpar

before wUneue* Anl.2. t. 8. ''' is rarely used of mere proximity in poetry

or standard prose.

N. — In expreHsions of simple fmperposltion iwl with Ihe gen. denotes familiar

relations and natural position ; whereas irl with the daL gives clear and emphatic

outlines to slAtemente ol the definite place of an object or action, Is used in

detailed pictures, and marks the object in the dative as distinct from the subject

of the verbal action, irl with the gen. is colourless and phraseological, and often

makes, with the verb or the subject, a compound picture. Even In contrasting

two objects irl with gen. Is used rince no special point Is made of position.

With (nnemphatle) pronouns of reference (a^oG) twl with gen. is much more

fnquent iban irl with dat. The distinction between the two cases Is often tbe

result of Feeling ; and certain phrases become stereotjped, now wltb the gen.,

now with the dat.

h. Temporal, usually with personal gen. : in the time of: frl rSw rpvyin^r in
the time t.f our aaetator* Aes. 3. 178, iw iiaB in my time T. 7. 86, iwl rat
AinXnieu TiUfuv in the Deeelean tear D. 22. 16.
e. Other relations : fUMir ^i r^ irolit rlji a^4' to perttit tn the Mm« fi>B)
D. 8. 14, i trt rut IXXwr Iffar*, raCr Ifi' b/i^i' a^iSr d^tMirt tcAat |roa tee
in the ease of others, that you ignore in your own cote 1. 8. 114, ill ioMti'
ix<ipovr they proceedrd by Ihemsrlves X. A. 2.4.^0, irl rtrripur fbvr deep
1. 2. IQ, ol irl rwr rpay/iiTui the mrii in potMT D. 18. 247.
2. Iwl vUth the Dative
«. Local : on, by : elmZt^r *rl t^ laBiJf they dwell on the isthmus T. 1. 66. ti irl
toMwt r<rx<x (As wall by the tea T. 4. The dat. with ^I denotes proxini'

tSgo] PREPOSITIONS 879

It; muofa more frequently than tlie gen. with iwl ; but denotes Boperposltion
1«H ofteD than the gen. with hri.

b. Temporal (rare in prose) : 4> 4^' ''' So'ltatt tkt sun wa» ntar ielting X, A.
7.3.84.

C Other relations : SacceMlon, Addition :.Ti twl ro^y y' drAnpIrsi atitwer the
next qtteition P. A. 27 b, dt^rif ir a^y he tok itp after him X. C. S. 8. 7,
hi T^ rlrv f^" relish with bnad X. M. 3. 14. 2. SuperrLaioa : ipx-" ^1
ra^Qii fv lAere MCM a eommander oter (ftem X.C.5.3.6fl. Dependence;
ta0 tanriarlr ir iiial as far a$ is in my power 1.8.8. Condition; i^i otrriir
ilffinir Imiiisiiuta on What terms Ke jTMde the peace D. S. 6, Reason, mo-
Uve, end, a« with verbs of emotion {instead of the simple dative, 1517) :
rdrra ravra 9au)iA(u hi rf tdXXri / am astonished at all these tree*
becaate of their beanty X. 0.4. 21, odr hi tjx>1I 'f<°^<i <1^^' ^' raiScIf
you learned tbU nof to make it a profession but to gain general culture
P. Pr. 312 b. HosUlity (less common in prose than in poetry ; usually with
aoens.): it Art ry M^iif ivnixaxH the alliance against t&e Medes T.3.S3.
Price : irl rivy ; for how much f P. A. 41 a.

3. iwl wiA the Accusative

«. Local ; of the goal ; i^tXaiiiti iri rbr rera/iir he marches to the river X. A.
1. 4, 11, difitiairTo irl riy rara/iir they arrived at the river 4,7, 18 (rarely the

gen. with verbs of arrival), irtpatrer irl rir trrar he mounted his horse

X. C.7. 1.1. Extension : iwl rEaar 'Aalir IWiyiiun famoua over all Asia
P. Critlllae.

b. Temporal : extension : trl roXXot 4/^pii for many days D, 21. 41.

C Qoantity, measure : irl lUKpir a little, irl rXior Still more, Irl ray in gen-
eral, rXdroT fx"' r\tu>r 4 trl Sio triSia wider than (up tO) two ttades
X. C. 7. 6. 8.

d. Other relations : Purpose, object in view : ri/irtiy irl Karariair^r to tend for
the purpose of reconnoitering X. C. 6. 2. G, irifreiXay irl xfjijfiaTa they sent
for money T. 6. 74. Hostility ; ItXmf iri roh 'ABiiyalovt tiiey sailed against
the Athenlajis 2. 00. Reference ; rb Ar' ifii (with or without thai') as far
as lam concerned (mora commonly ir iiwl) ; ri yt tr ittXyoy thai L. 13.58.
N.— To express purpose hi wiOi accus. is generally used when the purpose

in'olves actual or implied motion to an object ; hi with dat is used when the

porpoM may be attained by mental activity.

4. fa'( in Composition

Upon (hiTpd^ir lorrte upon), ooer (_irir\iiy sail over), at, of cause (irix^t-
ptir rejoice over or at), to, toicard (hi^oirfletr send assistance ("), in ad-
dition (_iritiStrixi give in addition), against (irifiov\t6iiy plot ayaiimt), <(fter
(triylytteu be born nfler, trifaviltir repair) ; causative {ira\ii9iinw
verify) ; intensity (hutphreir hide; iri^avXiinreai furthrr deliberate =
rijlea) ; reciprocity (hijHiymffSai dXXiiXoit exchange frUndly dealings).

1690. Kairi, down (cp. kiitoi), opposed to dm. With the genitive
(the genitive proper (of the goal) and the ablativaJ gemtive) aod the

880 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [iSg"

aocusatlTe. With the genitive, the motion ie perpeadioular ; vith

the accusative, horizontal.

1. ttard viith the Oenitive

a. Local: down from, down to-aard, under: i^itwn nari r^t rfrpat harint
leapt Aottrnfroimheroek X. A. 4. 2. 17, cnT' Ikjmi uuerip, Romplelely (donri:
from tbe summit) P. L. 909 b, iiux^ latri. x^i^i 4x*^« ^'* ■ox' "o*' dnvn
under the earth * 100, iiiptt ta-rk rfi n^aX^i rarax^aivn Aacin^ pourri
myrrh (doom) over their Aeadi P. B. 398 k ; nrely of rest : i HTik y^t the
man under lAs earth X. C. 4. 6. 6.

k. Tempoial (Tery rare) : jtori rarrb roG alSMi /or oH etemitti Ljc. 7,

c Other relations : agaimt, u nr' f/uvnO ^cZf (o <p«at ajialnat mgMlf P. A
37 b 1 rarely in a. favourable or neotral aense, aa at tari Aqjua^Mnui Ivoiih
(Ae euInfriM on Demoilhenee Aes. 8. GO, card rdrrwr Mytti to (pMt vM
regard to alt X.C.I. 2. 18; bg (nitti verbs of swearing), aa iiitirruw t1>
J^nr card li^^r r<\((tt>r lei (hem twear the oath by (111. down ar«r) fiill-
grown vktim» T. 6. 47.

3. natA \vith the Aerutative

a. Local; twXat nri ronifidr tAejr laiVefl dovtn-Mtreara IIilL4. 44, mrl rai

ebrAiotif i^ntbitmi following to the entrancee X. C. 3. 3. 64. Ektenaiati :
*af AXqr ri^r ir6\ir throughout the entire dig Lyc. 40, *ari y^r by land
L. 2. 82, aiiiisrrn ra(>t loi^ a^oAt purfufng EAose ttationed oppotite Iftem-
■eleej X. A. 1.10.4.

b. Temporal (poat-UDmeric) : x^ri rXoCr during the voyage T. 3. 32, cbt' fini-

notTir xp^"" ot 'A<it time 1. 136, ol laf tavrir hi* Contemporaries D. 20.73.

c. Other relations : Purpose : (STik Bdr jjcif come for the purpoMe of aeting T.

6. 31. Conformity : larA rat^oui ^^rw/i an orator after their style P. A, 17 b.
■arl Toit ri/iaut according to the lotos D. 8. 2. Ground on wbich an act ia
baaed : xarik ifiiXlar owing to friendthip T. 1. 60. Comparlaons ; ^I{m
4 (STit iitpvn rtwmiHiTn Aanlni; ettifured mjferingt too great for (thtn
according to) tear* 7. 76 (op. motor guom pro). Manner : «»»■ V^Jt"'
Quietly T. 6.04. Distribution: hut Um, natiou by nation T.l. 122, lln
Ipaxi^ '" i*tpa ten dracAmoe tAe mon Aes. 3. 187, nrd rr^ii a^o^ per
te T, 1. 79. Approximate numbers : tari reiTi|(orra about Jlftf HdL 6. 79.
3. Kord in Compoeition
Down from above (jrarartmir fall doicn), back ((■raXttTeii' leoM beAlmJ).
Bjjofnst, OflrerseJjr (laraYiYriiirKttr condemn, detide agaiiut, xKra^fttl'
deapiee), completely ((OTBTerpoCf stone to death, r».rev8l»ii eat up), often
wiUi an int«nstTe force that cannot be translated. An Intiwuitive verb
wfaen compounded with xari laay liecoine transitlTe (IGSO).

16n. |ur& : original meaning amid, among (cp. 0«mi. mil, Eng.
mid in midwife^ Hence properly only with plurals or collectives
(so in Horn, with gen. and dat.). furd denotes participation, com-
munity of action. mSa (Lesb. and other dialects) agrees in ineanii^
with iutA, but is of difFerent origin.

!•*»] PREPOSITIONS 881

1. |UT& tetth the OtnMM

Ciaallr of penona hni abatract iioudb.

Lotxl: timojtg, together with, u ntfif/ufsi jurik riSx dX\uf lining mnon^ (A«
r«t P. K. 369e, eOcm /kt" ^iifwr to «acr(|I« in company aith Iftera X. C.
8.S.1 1 on tft« afde of, aa ol ^m-d Ktpsv pipfiapoi the barbariaae in the army
of Cyrv* X.A.I.T. 10, iitTi r£r i)<tiiiiiiiwr xsXc^iv fo wage war on the
Mt of the wronged D. 9. 24, »tf ^wri roS rXi^fevi vitthout the consent of the
people T.3.6B; betldet: 7<i4iwn)i ^n-ii roi) fuirrai «1 SiwrAt (Aowlrv
A(n»M(^ j>o«i«r/i(i a» well at tagaciout T. 2. 16. Accompanying clTcam-
gtancaaCconcuTTentactorstaU) ; iirri Kittitut rriitiiiirM (r^rrdfif) Amrfnp
(KQufmi their potition amid danger* D. S. 36, XArit iMri ^A^v grief owt
terror T. 7. 75. Joint efficient cause : iirr^ rimi A(ti0/par ^bI^qf r^r
'EXXdIa by {amid) tlrvgglei they fireed Oreeee L.3.66. Conformity; tur^
tOt rbiiur in occonJonce with the Ioim 3. 82.

2. peri wiih the DaUve {Locailxe)

Chiefly Epie (OBUally with llie plnnl or with the collective dngalar of persona
or things penunified, or of the parts of living objects); iirrii uriirTtipta
tvTtr he ^pate amid the lullora f 467, ^irri ^0! la their heart* & 245.
S. f,rrS. with the Aecutative

Local: into the midst of: mipoii IpiwaF iirri Xair 'Axaifir they dragged tht
dead into the midst of the hott of the Aehaeatis B S73 ; with an idea of
purpose : liwai iirrh siaropa to go after (in quest of) Ntsbir E 73. Exten-
sion over the midst of : tirr\ rXifitr throughout the multitude B 143.
Phrase: ;itTii x'^fi" 'x'" (^ ^OBe in hand T. 1. 188.
N. — From the use in iirr tx'ia Pain Staio he went after the Mt^s of the goddtte

>30 isderiTsd the prose use: after (pi time or rank), as firri ri Tpaixi after

the Tn^n war T. 2. 6S, nfri Bioit f iix^ tfcutmriir aftf the gods the soul it most

dfn'iu P. L. 726. The range of fm-i with ace. in Attic prose Is not wide.
4. |UT& in Composition

Among (itrraSiiirti give a share), after, in quest of {/in-ax^^i-tifci send for).
When one thing is among other things, !t may be said to come after
another, to succeed or alternate with it ; hence of succession (^#i|fit>Hi>ii
diumuM ; cp. ;itf iuitfaT after daybreak), alteration or change (iitraypi-
^> rewrite, furofiAor repetxt i.e. core for something else).

When contrasted with ttw, firrd ottea denot«a participation : i lUrexn
the partner, i avnir the companion, rir often denotes something added.
But iirri is nsoally the prase preposition for air, though it does not
mean inclu«it>e of.

1693. wapA (Horn, leapai, Lat. poT' in porrigere) alongside, by, near.
Except with the accusative napd, is commonly used of persons and
personified things.

I. wapA with the (Ablatival) Genitive
I'nully eiHning or proceeding from a person, in Uom. also of thln^gi; cp.
de ehe*.

logic

882 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [iCgi

«. LocftI I ol aArsfiaXiiOpm rapi fiarMut tin detaien from (Ac ttng Z. A. S. 1. S.
In poeir;, where we miglit expect, the dat. (1009 a) : fY^ero rap 'H^qi liL
he awoke fi^m Ae tide of Hera O 6. In standard Attic prose rapi with itie
gen. of 1. thing ja ezcenively rare. When so used, the thing is personified,
or the thing impliea a peison (as rjXir, ipx^i i/arpoi),

b. Author, Source (cp. 1110) : with verbs of receiving, taking, asking, learning,
tending, eUS. : ro^ tHjSur r^r lpx4r i\iiifianr Ripirai the PerttatU
wregted the empire from the Mede* X. A. 3. 4. 8, rapi toS i/iASat"* <"
learned fnym you X. C. 2. 2. S ; 4 vopl rSr 6t!ir rilnia lA« ^ood-tom OR
ihe part of eAe ^odi D. 2. t (less commonly inH) \ with paolves and in-
tiSDaiUves (instead of imb nith the gen. of the agent) : rl rspi r^t Tixv
tapifiirra, the gifll of Fortune I. 4. 26, rati-a ropi rdfrur j/ioXofnTOi
tMt fa acknowledged on all lidea (on the part o/ oil) L, SO. 12.
2. wopd teffh the Dative

Almost always of peisona in standard Attlo prose ; cp. ehe*.

M, Local : oi rapi t^ifrpl riToOrrtu tt ratlti, iWi rapi rlf Sitaaniyjf tKe hoft do
not eat with their mothers, but with their teacher* X. C. 1. 2. 8, tV ipd
firnraOr to met* with me (aa ehee moi) 0. 1. 411 ; of things : ri rapi tfaUrri
Xwp''> ^he places along the sea X. A. T. 2. 25.

b. OtJier relations : PoBsessor : ri lUr xp^'tor ra4>& roirif, nl It riwtvrai wap iiiXi
this man hat the gold, gov the dangers Aes. 3. 240 ; of the superior in com-
mand : ol naph ^so-iXfi trrn CAoa« Under the king X. A. 1. 6. IS ; of the
person judging : inlTiai raph toU trpnTMirait blameleu in (A« i^lniom
of the troops X. C. 1. 6. 10, i/io^ByiiTai raph ry Siifi^i it is agreed in the
opinion of the people Lye 54 (here rapi denotes the spliere of judgment);
with the gen. after a passive (1092. 1. b) it denotes the source.
8. vapA with the AceusatiM

a. Local : of motion to, In prose only of persons : f ■< rap i/U come to me X. C.

4. 5. 25 ; motion along, by, pott (a place) t ropd T^r TX^ri tail along short
T. 6, 13 J of parallel eilenl (^along, alongside, betide) with verbs of motion
and of rest (often the daL), and often when no verb is used : llrwtp fXa^F
mDr, MStrar rapi ri rpowaiOr the ship they captured they set tip atonfftide
of the trophy T. 2. 92, rf«» aArf, ^rti, rap' tein-ir he told him to remain
dote by him X. C. 1. 4. 18, t} rtSior ri rapt Tdf roTopit the plain extending
along the river X.A.4.H.I, Ifr rapi riit iSimpiiini there was a spring by Ihe
road 1. 2. 1-3. Contrary to : rapi Toit f6iu>ui 4 tar airoiH contrary to
(i.e. going past) the laws or in accordance with them I>. 2.1. 20; in ad-
dition to (along beside) : txa rapi raCra i\\o n X/ttit hefidet thll I have
to say inmelhing else P. Ph. 107 a. Phrase ; imp' 6\lyor traioSfro KX/a^tpa*
they treatfd Cleandfr as of nn acwant (cp. ' next ta nnihing ') X. A. 6. 8. 11,

b. Temporal ; (duration) rapi rirra ri» xpi"" throughout the irhole time n.5.8,

(momentary) irn/id riAiiKl in the hour of danger Aes. 3. 170, rap' atririli-
niiiara at the time o/{i.e. immediately after) the offtnaet themsetvei D. IB. 13.
C. Other relations : Cause = Sii : rapi t)i> liwripa* iMXnaf in eorueqnemix of
ournegltgence l>,4. 11, tt rapi ri rpoametraai ntMifrai if 0 Wat pretenltd
bf being perceived <n advance 19. 42. Dependence : rapi rsi/re y*y«M ri

1093] PREPOSITIONS &88

rOr 'EMifntr tht firtvtu* of tho Qreelu depend an Otii D. 18. 2B2. Heas-
ore : rapi lutpir fXte/wr iiarifinioiiefftiiai We had a narrow eacapt (cama
byalittle)^om6eli)lie>Mlan«dI. T.O, riif^ra\ib\ifarT.2.%. Compariaont
iitrairaw ro/i' dXXqXa contratt teith each other D. 18. 306, x"l^^' iulf;w¥
ropd r)|r loMffTiricurar Apar gtomijf TOfntAcr more tevere than via* to be ex-
peeled at the Meaton then pretent T, 4.6.

4. vo^ in ConpotUion
Al<mg*ide. by, betide (rapitmi go alongHde). beyond^ pant (ja^\a.6tar drive
pagf), over (^Trapopar overlook), aiide, amUa (rapatoitir mitunderttatid).

1693. vtpl around (on all sides), about; cp. *-^Mf round about.
Lat. ;>er in permngnus. irtpi is wider than ^^': cp. X. Vect. 1. 7 ofi
npi/ipvrof oSira airrip v^o^ . , . tt^^iAiAarras yop iart it (Attica) is not,
like an ialattd, surrounded b)/ the aea . . . for it has the sea on two aidet.
On npt post-positive, see 1665.

1. -npC mtth tA« Qenitive

a. Local (poetic) : rtpl rpirun prfiaiii riding on (astride) the teel < ISO.

b. Oiher letations : about, eoneeming (Lac de), the subjecC about lehieh an act

or thought centres : ripl rarpfiof fiaxotf^um fighting /or their country T.
6. 69 (cp. inrip), itiami npl Tov vlaO fearing for hie ton X. C. 1. 4. 22, \iytir
rrpl rft tlp^nii to ^eak about peace T. S. 66 ; ri wtpl riwi instead of ri
■Ktpl rifo 1b used in the neighbourhood of a verb of saying or thinking (which
takea ntpl with gen.); ri, rrcpl r^f dprr^t the relatione of virtue V. Pr. 360e.
Baperiorlty (cp. 14(^) : wtpUcci ivfauHr •(Jot thott dimt eurpati women t»
beauty r 246, rtpl rarrii roiad/um regarding as (more than eraryt^Lng)
aU-imponont T. 2. 11 (cp. 1ST3).

a. «pf with the Dative

t. Local: about; of arms, dren, etc., in prose: tTptrrel rtpl roiir^x'!^" col-
lar* about their neeka X.A.I. 5.6, i Ttpl rwt ciiiiaair Ix""" the clothes
about their perton* L ep. 9. 10 (only cose in tlie oraton), Tt^ tavpl A SOS.

i>. Other relatlODB (usually poetic) : External cause i icfirarrn Tipi rait rvurtp
afraid for their ships T. 7. 6S (with verba of fearing, rtpl with the gen. is
ftar d^ or fear for"). Inner impulse : xtpl rippti from fear A. Veis. 6M.
8. w*fi uftA the Accusative

S. Local : of position : dr^«TfiXav nSit rtpl HtXtwirtv'"' they despatched ships
round about PeJoponneie T. 2, 23, ificaur xtpt xSrar rJJi- ZmtXlar they settled
aU round Sicily 0.2; of persons : «t wtpt 'Hpt*\iiT<ir the follomrs of
Seraelitus P. Cral. 440 c.

b. Indefinite statement of time and namber ; rtpl SpSpor about down T. 6. 101,
Ttpl ifiSoifiMrre, about seventy 1. 54.

C Other relations : Occupation : oJ rtpl rftn /wiwic^r Smi those teho are engaged
in liberal pursuits 1.0.4 ; connected with, of general relation (_aith refer-
enee to") : ol riiu* d1 wepi roiit yi^uvt the laiee about marriage P. Cr. 60 d,
rtpl Stodt ive^icTarti most impiou* in regard to the gods X. H. 2. 3. &S,
T& rtpl rat raCf naval affairs T. 1. 13. Verbs of action (except verbs of

884 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [it»

ttriv(tig) prefer wtpl with accus., verb* of perception, emotion, knowing
prefer npf with gen. But the caaM often ahffL
4. np[ in Cutapotition
Around, about (wtptix't' turround). beyond, over (rr/iuiHu ezeel; and rc^wpii
look btj/ond, overlook, tuffer) , (remaining) over CT(pi7JY™rSm remain ortr,
retitU, and excel), exceedinglg (rtpixap^i very glad).

16M. «pi (Lat. pro, for) before. Cp. Ivri, which is narrower in
meaning.

1. wfi with the Genitive only

a. Local: rpl r<3* d«uf iSr in front of the wtgow X.C.d.2.3S.

b. Temporal : xpi rgi ^ut^'H W<>^'* *** haule X. A. 1. 7. 13,

C. Other relations : Defence or care (cp. Irrip) : liatirSuiititir rpi ^oviVw to
tnevr danger in defence of (prop, in front of) the king X. C. S. 6. 4. Prefer,
ence (cp. dirl) : ol JvnoiiDrrti rpi iixaioirOr^ ilmlir thoae tnho laud itfjurliet
in preference to justice P. R. 361 e, rpi raXXou mitlrSai to esteem highly
(in preference to much) 1. 6. 138, ^wmif rpi rSaiit to tpeak for them {-u
their tpokeeman) S. 0. T. 10 (drri rutric = a» their deputy, lirip rattt at
their champion).

2. irpd in Composition

Before, forvsard, forVi (rpepi.\><tir put forward'), for, in heha^of, in defence »/.
In public (rpoayopeitir givepublie no(ice), beforehand (rp6S7t\ot masi/fl
btforehand), in preference (rpBoipttaea ehooie in preference).

1695. vpii (Horn, also Trporl), at, hy (^fronting). Of like meaning,
but of different origin, is Horn, b-oti.

1. wp4f vUh the Genitive

a. Local (not common to prose) : ri rpif irripit ntxtt the mail fating the i»*t

X. H. 4, 4, 19, t4 braf&yia txarrn rpit To5 tot«»o6 hating the pack-aniniith
on the side loaard the river X. A, 2. 2. 4.

b. Other relations : Descent ; rpit rarpln on the father's side Aes. 3. ISO. Char-

acteristic : ad tip if v rpit mO Kipov rpiraa for it was not the tsay of Cyrvi
X. A. 1. 2. tl. Point of view of a person : rpi% iwdpiirur alaxp^ t^"" <'>
the eyes of men 2. S. 20. Agent as the source, with passive verbs (inalcnil
of Irwi): WXayttru rpit rirruw it is agreed by all 1, S. 20; to the advantage
of; rrorSii Tnqffd^ni rpij Oij^afwv /tSkWor 1} rpit iwruir making a tmrr
more to the advantage of the Thebant than of his own party X. H. T. I. IT ;
in oaths and entreaties : rpit Btat by the god* X. H. 2. 4. 21.
2. vpdt leith the Dative
Xn a local sense, denoting proximity (general!;, In prose, of towns or buildings.
not of persons) : r/Aj rg riXii r)|r Mxi' r«cur0(u to fight near the fity
T.e.4I) ; sometimes like it, as rpit ItptSt ntt icoiMtt inrtt^m to be dfdi-
cated in the common shrines T. 3. 67. Occupation : 1)r JXoi trpii ry X^fviri
he uias whotly intent upon hit gain D. IS. 12T. tn addition to : rpitatriitt
besides these T. 7. 67. In the pretence of: rpit t^ )4(uTi|rp tjytit to tptak
before the arbitrator D. S». 22.

i69C] PKfiPOSlTlONS

3. rp6t toith tht AectitaMve

a> Local (directloii towEird or to, strictly fronting, fading) ; t/iSi ACp/uc rpit
■iroAt we will lead you to Ihtm X. A. T.6. 6, Tpit wiraw (tmeard the) south
T. 8. 6, Ufoi rpit Toij ToXf/ifoi'i to go agaiutt the enemj/ X. A. 2. 6. 10.

b. Temporal (rare) : rpii iiiiipi* (oioard daybreak X. H. 2. 4. 8.

C. Other relatioiui : friendly or hostile relation : rpit iiii X^rrt tpeak to me
X.C. 6. i. IS, ^iXfa rpit buat friendthip with yov I. 6. 32, Ix^pa wp6i ra^
'A^Tclovi enmity to the Argivet T, 2. 68, but 4 rpit lipai Ix^P^ our enmity
d. 80, 4 irixfftM rpit rail Q^paievt our enmity to the Thebant and the
tnmitt qf the Thebani to vi "D. IB. 36. With wonls of hating,
aeeuaing, and theli oppoaites, rpit ia used either of the subject or of
the object or of both parties involved. With words denoting warfare
wpii lodicatea a doable relation, and the context must deCermbs which
party la the aggressor or awoilaat: rav/MxH KopH^lur rpit Ktp/npalevt
a eea-fight between the Corinthiani and the Corq/ream T. 1. 13 (here
tai often enfflces, ai i JLuaSiuiiorlur lal 'HXeiwr riXc^un X. H. 3.2.S1).
Relation in general ; oiSir abrl} rpit r^r riXir ivrh he hot nothing to do
with the city D. 21. 44, rpit roit 9todt tttrtfiOt fx'" (" be pious toward ttie
god* Lye. 16, Purpose : rpit ri j to vthat end t K. C. 6. 3. 20, rpit x^-p"
lityitr to epeak in order to court favour D, 4, 51 ; with a view to (often
nearly = iid) : rpit Tavra pou\tita6t rt wherefore be teeli advited T. 4. 67,
*pAf rk rapirra, In corue^uence of the preient circumMtanctt 6. 41. Con-
formity : rpit rj)f i^lar according to merit X. C. 6. 4. 29. Standard of
judgment : eiti rpit dpyipior r^r tiSaipotlir iKpirar nor did they ettimate
hc^ineet by the money-ttandard I. 4. TO, x<V> »* 'P^* f^ rM\Bat rur roXi-
Tur t'Kax^'^V " territory Very email in proportion to the nttmber of iti
cUUene 4. 107 ; and hence of comparison : al ^a.v\bTtpa^ rUr ipfpiiwi»r rpit
r«6t (vrrrwripovt . . . i/iainr bJedCo-i rai ri\ia the eimpler elatt of men, in
eompariton with the more axtate, manage their public iiffairs better T.3,87.
Ezijiange : ^iorai rpit 4io>«i (SToXXdrrro'tfu to exchange pl€a*urei for
fleaturea P. Pb. 698.

4. wp6t in Composition
To, toward (rpovAaimr drive lo, rpaarpirtir turn lowarH), in addition
lrpoa\»tifidr*ir take in addition'), againel (^rpaatpoitir strike against, be
(HVry with). Often In the general aenae of additionally, qualifying the
whole sentence rather than the verb.

UBS. »*■ (Older Attic fwv; cp. Ion. fiivot from komos ■= Kotm,
Lat. cum) with.

1. rfr with the Inetrumenlal Dative only.

a. In Mandard (i.e. not Xenoptiontic) prose gir baa been almoat driven out

of use by prri. It te need (1) in old formulae, as aiw (T>it) Statt teith the

help of the god*, vir (rtSi) SrXon in arm, etc (of things attached to a

person) , air rv intelligently ; (2) of sum totals {along with, including) , aa

386 SYNTAX OP THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [x<b7

*i* rait tfiyeit wXiai 4 tixa rtEXoira fx" ^ A<i* '"O'v (A"" «** UOttU* in-
tereti included D. 28. IS.

b. «iw U usuaJly poetic (lare in Comedy) and Xenophontic ; ft IB often nsed in
the formulEU of & (1) uid of persona and things peiBonlfled- Its older and
poetic meaaing is along aUh (of Bomething secondarj or added lo the
action) and teilh tAe help of. Bo in Xen. i together with, along with : gir
rp yvraud ittTttIt to tup with your v>Ve X. C. 9. 1. 49 ; to reinforce tbe aim-
pie dative : iicoij>v8tir rit rm, rofxttcirSru tiw Tin (1624) ; with tbe collat-
eral notion of help ; with the aid of, as rir tuttrtf iUx"f" tojlght with hit
help X. C. 6. 3. 6.

C. Means and Instrament (tegatded as accompaniments of an action : tbe coml-
tatlre inHtnimental] : i^ kt^u aurur tara oiiaiiHi air rj ^fp, iWit ^SXlMr
eir ri tuepyirlf they (friends) are acquired, not by forelhle nteang, but ^
IcinditesM X. C. 6. 7. 13.

d. Manner : rilr 7 Aurt 1jk9«r they weM laughing X. A. 1. 2. 19. In ecnformiti
wUh (opp. to wapi,) : tit irfTpri^i ti} S-^iuf wapi rote ft/ian ilr-^^tmwtMt,
dXXi air T»it riimt ^mrrtii^ rrX. he did not permit the people to rote
contrary to the lawt, but, in eotiformtty with them, oppoted hivuelf., etc
X.M.4.4.3.

2. riv in Compoeition

Together with (au/ifiiaOr live with, avitropttmBoi march in company with), to^
gether (^avufiiKKia conicere), eotnpletely (nifirXigpeGr .ilfl up), contraction
in ^ze (aorriiumr eutihort), and generally of union or connection. Stand-
ard praae aaee <nv- freely.

1697. i«^ (Horn, also fercui) over, Lat tuper. 7oi the contraat with
iiti, BBS 1689.

1. W4p wUh Ae Genitive

a. Local : from over : Mp rir Ixpar nir/j}(ui<op they tame down over the heigku

T. 4,26; over, above: irtp r^t niiiait •ri\o^»t Ijr above the village wom a
htU X. A. 1. 10. 12.

b. Other relations : in defence of, on beha(f of: ^xV»' Mp b)uir fighting

for you (standing over to protect) P. L. 642 o ; in place of, in the aanM of:
*Ti> \i(u lal irip aai lol irlp imCr I Kill tpeok both for you and far owr-
telve* X. C. 3. 3. 14. Purpose : ittp toC min-o \apt7r in order to get thi*
D. 8, 44 ; concerning, about (often = r*pl in Demoa and the later oraton ;
in inacr. after 300 B.C.): *4(J<ii ftrip roD iM>^rTat fear for the fittVTe
T. 7. 71, nil rt(A rfl* iiioJur /iijj" irip rflr (Ju i[pi.fiii,Tt,T notabont yonr
iuet claim* nor about your foreign ijdereet* D. 6. 3fi.
2. hwif with the Aecusative

a. Local : irip oitir ip^trt he paued over the threthold r 03, si btip 'EUf

eworrtt olnQrrti those Who dwell beyond the Belleipont X. A. 1. 1. 9.

b. Temporal (= rp6) rare : irip t4 lit,»iti before the Fertian wan T. !. 41.

c. Measare : irip tj^u more than half X. C. 8, S. 47, iwtp titpttn, beyond

the power of man P. L. 839 d.

I;.C00J^[C

PBEP0SITI0N8

S. 4«Jp In GtmpoHtloft
Over, above (IrwtppiXktu- crott ovtr, iatpix'" trans, hold over, intr. be o&ok),
(n behalf <>/• for {bwtpiiax**' poet, fight for), exeeediitfflg {Ifwt^peitn be
over-pntid).

use. im* (Horn, also inraC, LeBbiftD ira-), under, by, Lat. sub.

1. imi with the Genitive

A. LooftI (rare in Attic prose] : out from under (poet., cp. IrrtK): ^tu xpiin) ini

mlovi a spring fio\M out from a cane i 140, Xo^iir ^Dr iwi dfuif';' tal-ing

an ox from a vngon X. A, (J, i. 26 ; under (of rest): t4 bri 7fli (a flied

phrsae) drarra oil thinjr> under the earth F.A. 18 b.

b. Other relations (metaphorically under the agent]/ of) : Direct agent (with

pusiTea and with verba having a passive force); contrast iii, 1685. 2.d :

vMrrn ihrt raO tared ^ pou X. A. 2. 6. 14, aladSiiem ^' n^OfiiXuv iit-

/omed bj/ deeertera T, 6. 2, a ixoitiy iri itepiirar to be well ipnlu-n of

by men X, A. 7. 7. 23. With passive nouns : ^ fri-i MfXi)Toi. 7po»i} (A*- in-

dfctmenf brought bj/ MeUtv* X.H.4. 4. 4, iXflirif tri t^i ^vXQi I'ncTtitfon

&(r tAe j'enate D. 19. 82. External oanse : iriiXtrt iri Xi/icu perished of

hunger X. A. 1, 5. 6, ode Arl ToXd iM rflr Irrtat t^tirrn not going out far

beeatiteof the cavalrj/ T.S.ST. Internal caose: inrb tQp iirYlfTtiniiiniS4rTti,

ri/i^ (ol a^aui jcol li^Xlai cotutrafned by 'Ae etrongeet motlvei, honour and

fiar and profit T. 1, T6. External accompaniment, as pressare, In ir6itvor

^a /larTtyair the]/ ihot under the lath X. A. 3. 4. 26 ; sound, in bw6 atKiirQr

to the aeeompantment offiute-piayera T, 6. TO ; light, in Art ^nO wopttte9ai

to go with a torch X. R. L. 6. 7. Manner : irb irTauJ^i haitily T. 3. 33.

N. 1. — irj with the genitive of a thing perBoniSes the thing. The things so

peraonifled are (1) woids implying a person, as Xirtoi, (2) external circum-

staaces, aa vvia^opi, tlrlSm, ri^ot, (8) natnrol pbenomeoa, as x<>>»'*i (4) emo-

tioDB, as ^eite*. The dative ma; also be employed. See 1493, 14M.

N. 2.— On Aritaexpraeatlie personal agent with the peri. pass, see 1493.

2. hrt wUh the Dative

«. Local : under (of rest) : hrim iri riK iiripif to stand under a tree P. Phil.
88 c. iri of place is more common with the dative than with the genitive.

b. OtlieT relations: Agent (poetic, except with verbs signifying to eiiucn(«) : Irwi
raiiarpiPs iya9f wrraittuiUm educated under (the guidance of) a good
matter P.Lacb.lB4e. Cooperative caase (poet.): fif) itr ititiun mnw^ he
went under a blatnetess eonvov Z 171, Subjection : ol Inrb pairi\it Srm the
•ubjecte of (i.e. thoee under) the king X. C, 8. 1. 6, ^' ah-f rDiiJirwrtfu to
Tiring under hie oun pouter D. 18. 40.

3. vw4 with the Accutative

a. Local : Motion under : bit ainir (tAf U^r) irrVaf rJ rrpdriv^ hailing the
armjf under the hill X. A. 1. 10. 14. Motion down under (poet) : tl/i bri
yaiat I AM go doten under the earth Z 333. Extension or position : ol

388 SYNTAX or THE SIMPLE SENTENCE t'<n

fari ri epot (S^ui the village* at the foot of the moutttoin X. A. 7. 4. 6,

Proiimit; : n-ani^n) 1^ Etfioia vri rj)r 'Arric^v Enboea lying elOM bf

(under) ^Ufca 1. 4. 108.
b. Temporal (of time impending or in progreaH) : irrli wdera at the egiprwuh of

night (JU& noctem) T. 2. 92, Ari rim-a during the night Hdt. 9. 68, iM r^r

clpijrqr at the time of the peace I. 4. ITT.
C. OUier relatione. Subjection : iwi ir^at rBwis-^iu to bring uitder their own

may T. 4. 60.

4. inrl fn Compottlion
Under (Ow^tMhu place under), behind (^oXcIxtiv I«ati« behind), tecretlt (cp.

itiu(«rA{ind ; ^or^um' eend as a ^y), gradually {brttaraffal-mir deaeend

by degreea) , slightly (Inro^almw thine a little) ; of accompaniment (^^S«r

accompany viilh the voice) ; of an action performed b; anotber (^tt^p^t-

«Sai have oneae{f proclaimed by the Tierald).

IMPflOPER PREPOSITIONS

1699. Improper prepoaitions do not form coTDpounds (1647).

1700. With tlie Genitive.

Hie lilt below contains Bome of the advetblal wordB used u prepoBltiDoai
[The more important words are printed in fat tjrpe. An asterisk denotes
words need only in poetry.]

dTxnv near, poeL and lonio (alao with dat.). tm tnithout, except, beti^t,
owoy from, rarely after ite caae. irrla, irrlar facing, against, poet, and Ionic
(also with doC}. trip without, apart from, away from. &xp* and ii^xp* at/ar
at, until (of place, time, and number). Siniir after the manner of (acena. of
ilni). Slxi^ apart from, unlike, except, (yf** near (with dal, poetical), rirv
(Ira) within, ixdt far from, poetic and Ionic, itaripuetr on both tide* of.
IxTdt wUhouL liiTporhr b^ore. JvarrCov {n the presence o/(poet. againtl,
gen. or dat.). fviKa, Ivtrnv (Ion. (Ikib, tXntxtt) on aeeowU of, for the take pf,
^Bith regard to, usually postpositive. From such combtnatioos as ro^rav (turn
arose, by tusion, the illegitimate preposition ouMca (found chiefly in the t«xts of
the dramatists). fnpBt* bcneaih. ivrit within. I(«i out <if, beyond {fA time),
ezc^L [Mi straight to. KaramKiii over agaimt. k/i^b, Utfpf unbabwvn
(0- |wnt* between- lUxpt as far at. r6r^» apart from. <ww«nr behind.
wipot* before. xAot" n«ar {also with dat.), vipi beyond (ultra), wipi*
across (traits). icMfr except, as T\iir ArapariSuw except tlaves X. A. 2. 4. S7.
Often an adverb or conjunction : rarrl S^Xot r\iiw Ipal it is clear to eeeryb^df
exeept me P. R. 620 a. vXiirlav near (aleo witb dat.). tippu, wpint far
from, rp/** btfore (Pindar). irxtSi'' near. rijXi' far from, x^' fi>^ *^
take of (accoa. of x^pn), usually after its case. X'P'* without, aeparaU frowL.

1701. With the Dative.

<|Mi together with, at Iht tame time wUh. i^9 together with, close to,

1702. With the Accosative.

A( (o, of persons only, usedafterverbaexpTeaaingorlmplyiagmotion. Fro^
ably used especially in the language of the people.

1709] THE VERB: ACTIVE VOICE

THE VERB: VOICES
ACTIVE VOICE

1703. The aotdve voice represents the subject as performing the
action of the verb : Kawo I wash.

a. Uader action ia tuclnded being, as 4 ^> t^icfi tart the wty it long.

1704. Active verba are transitive or iiUranstlhe (920).

1705. The action of a transitive verb is directed immediately
npon an object, as tuttid tw mT&i / strike the boy.

1706. The object ot a transitive verb is always put in the
' accnsadve (1553).

1707. The action of an intransitive verb is not directed immedi-
ately upon an object. The action may be restricted to the subject,
as iXya I am in pain, or it may be dehned by an oblique case or by
a preposition with its case, as iXySi rots ito&k / have a pain in my
feet, i^MTo cIs r^r b^oAii' lie arrived at the city.

170O. Many verba are uaed in tbe acllve «oice both tranHltively and intnui-
sitively. So, in Engllrii, turn, move, change. Cp. 1567 fl.

a. The dlatinction between tnositive and intranHitlve verba ia a grammatical
convenience, and la not founded on an eaaential difference of nature.

1709. Active verba ordinarily Uaniltlve are often uaed IntranBitlTely ;

«. By the elllpeia of a deSnite ei(«nial object, which in aome caaea may be
employed, aa Syttr (ri trrpd-rtatia.) march, atptir (T<|r Aytipar) hoist the anchor,
(rai (Bvt) fftt voder sail, rtnrt, iwaipttt (tm raOt, rir arparir) sail avxtg, march
aiKir, tidynr (ri* ^loi) live, i\a6mr (rir twror) ride, (rj Sfina) drive, (tA*
fTparir") march, taraXittw (ri>i)t Trroui, ri iir«(6yta) halt, lar/x"' (j^' mSr) put
in thore, •wp^cix'" (jir nvi) pay attention, TiXmra^ (rbt plor) die. The original
wnae haa often been so completely forgotten that it becomes poaaibte to aay
ttpttr rf vTparf set oul aith the army T. 2. 12, iXtUm/f ISpeBrrt t<P Irrif riding
wfth his horse in a tteeat X. A. 1. 8. 1.

b. Tpirrtir, fx'" ^th adverbe often mean to keep, to be: <S rpArmr fare
well, Ke.\At tx'ir be well {bene m habere'), fxt'-r tiirut be SO. 5o wben a
reflexive pronnun Is apparendy omitted ; tx «*roC stop there I D, 46. 26.

C. Many other traiisitlTe verbs may be used absolutely, i.e. with no definite
object omitted, aa ninar he a vietitr, iliiatr be guilty. Cp. 'amare' be in
love, ' drink ' be a drunkard. This ia especially the case in compoanda, e.g. of
IXXdrrnv, df^iv, JliSdm, iXtntir, Xa/ifiintu, Xcfveir, fin'riiirai.

d. In poetry many uncompouuded transitive verbs are used intranaltlraly.
Many {ntransitive verba become transitive when compounded with a prep., espe-
cially when the compound has a tranaferred senae, 1669. In some verbs let
sorist and lat perfect are tranaltlTe, 9d aoriat and 2d perfect are intranaiUve.
Cp.8lS.

890 SYNTAX OP THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [i7»

1710. Instead of tlie sctlre, a periptirasis with ytyrtaSai ma; b« lued, often
to ezpiess Bolemnity. n-^rvrtU ylyrorrai they turned informtrt T. 3. 2, ik^i h^
eriit yitrg ' do not be guilty of ovtrage ' S. Aj, 1002,

1711. CunutiTe Active. — The active may be used of an actkm
performed at the bidding of the subject: K^mk ril /Siwri Acut KarcMaMnr
Cyrvs burnt doion the palace (i.e. had it burnt down) X. A. 1.4. 10.
So vith ioroKTtivav put to death, Oitrruv bury, dmiofu'v build, rai&tur
instruct, i.vaK^pvTTtiv publicly proclaim.

1712. An infinitfTB liiniling the meaning of an adjective ia lUDally actlTe
lrh«ie Engluih em^oya the paeaive (cp. 2006).

MIDDLE VOICE

1713. The middle voice shows that the action is performed with
special reference to the subject : XoS/iat I wash myself.

1714. The middle represenU the subject as doing snmethiDg In which he is
latereeted. He may do something to himself, fir hitiuelf, or lie may act with
somelbing belonging to Mmieff.

1715. The future middle is often (807), the first aorist middle is
almost never, used passively.

1716. The object of the middle (1) may belongin the spbere of the subject,
■s his properly, etc. : Xoi^ofuu rat x'^P" t wath my hands, or (8) It ma; be
brought into the sphere of tite subject : ra^ irXIrai fimW/i^arrD tAcy tent for
the hopUtes, or (S) it may be removed from the spbere of the subject : drolUo**'
rh' altiav I tell my Aoiue (liL give away). Ueie the abject Is ftlao the property
of the eubjecL

1717. The Direct ReflexlTe Middle repreaents the subject as acting
directly on hirmtelf. Self is here the direct object. So with verbs
expressing external and natural acts, as the verba of the toilet:
A\<iii>ttr$(u anoint oneself, XoDo-doi wash oneself; and KoapjuuBai adorn
oneself, xn-ftxivova^ai crown oneself; yviivaicirBia exercise oneself.

a. The direct reHeiive tde& is tai more frequently conveyed by the active
and a reflexive pronoun, 1T23.

b. The part affected may be added la the accusative : iruiaaTii rir )nipir it
smote hit thigh X. C. 1. 3. 0.

1718. So with many other verbs, as Urareai stand (place oneteff\ rpl-
TnrSol turn (lit. (urn oneself), iijXaiwSiu thme oneself, rdrTotfu post ottMtlf,
ira\aytta$ai defend oneself (argue onetelf ojf), *aJ»w9ai thoui oneself, oppMr,
TBptwKtvdJtffSai prepare oneself, di-iXXiHrtfoi dettroy onetelf, perish.

1719. The Indirect Reflexive Middle represents the subject as
acting for himself, with reference to himself, or with something b^onging
to himself. Self is often here the indirect object. So vap^ta^ pro-
vide for otiesey {vopSitii' provide), ^vXiirrctrAu guard against (j^v^arrar

iTHt THE VERB: UIDDLE VOICE 891

ifep guard), uIpeurAu choose (take for oneself), wopr^eirftw fumUh (vapi-
Xur offer, presenf).

1720. Cues in wbloh the object Is to be rerooved from the sphere of the
■abject jtmj be resoWed into the dative for oneaelf (1483) : rtir ^feiiiiiw in-
Urtn to laji atide your UidoUnet D.8.46, H-pti/'iirTo toAi Iwwiii they rovtei
tie analri/ T. 6. 98, t»4i tx^fvit i/iirmiai to ward off the enemy for them-
kIki, i.e. to defend Unitueleet against the enemy 1. 144.

1721. Hie middle often denotes that the subject acta nith something be-
longing to blmaelf (ntalerial objecla, means, ponen). It is often used of acts
done willingly. Thua, Ta^^»0u furnish from one's oun resources, twayyiWt-
Tlai promise, tnake profettton of, rlStaBat rijp ^g^» give one's vote, rlBraBai ri

IrXs ground arms, droteifairlhu yniiiJir set forth one's opinion, Xa/iffdmirSat Tim
put one's hand on (seize) something. Thus, iaraaiidwm tA {i^ having dravin
their smords X. A. 7, 4. 16, waiSat tuatoiuaitlim ^aaw (Aey had rtrmovei their
chiUren T. 2. 78, rpowoMw CTviiitm having set up a trophy X. II. 2. 4. T, ArXs
npiriaDu to procure arms for themselves T. 4. 9, ArXIrai iirrtri/i^aTii he sent
forhoplite* 7. 31, 7ur«j(a 4TaYi^))v I married L. 1. S.

1722. Under tbe indirect middle belong the periphrases of rouivBai with
Terbal nouns instead of the simple verb (cp. 1764). rwcif with the s»me nouns
means to bring about, effect, fa^ion, etc

ilri"i' rouiaBat mate peace (of one nation at war with anoUier).

ilpiirfw wmtii bring about a peace (between opponents, nations at war : of an

individual).
f^r TDutrfloi (= Oijpat) hunt, B^par roittr arrange a hunt.
HrfBw mitiaBai (= kfyiir) deliver a speech, X^ar woutr compose a speech.
nuifuxiai muifBoi (= ravimxi*') fight a navai battle.
rwiiuLxli* nttlr bring on a naval battle (of the commander).
Uir waUiaSai (= Uritt*) make a journey, iSir rou/tr build a Toad.
rSUiior rauivBat leage VMT, riXiimr riitir bring about a tear.
tironti.! tttaeBai Conclude (make) a treaty, or truce.
rnrSai Tmtit bring about a treaty, or truce.

1733. Active and SeflexlTe. — Instead of the direct midijle the
active voice with the reflexive pronoun is usually employed ; often
of difficult and tmaatural actions (especially with avrot lavrw, etc.).

tA ftrXa itofiiiovKr tal a^i afrrodi they surrendered their arms and thent-
setves T. 4. 38, /ifBiiait a&rtr hiring himself out D. IQ. 29 (not lurBurititnt,
which means hiring for himself), cnrsXAun Hfr sh^t ovtbS Svnurrtlar he kim-
trtf has put an end to his omn sovereignty Aes. 3. 233, ^iiuiaw iaorir he has
dishonoured himself 'D. 21. 103. But legularlj iriyxtireai hang oneself (1717).

su The active and a reHeiive pronoun In the gen. or dat. may be used for
the simple middle when the reflexive notion is emphatic ; naTaXelrfir rirtypd/ir
Msra imirruw to leave behind them their torilten compositions P. Phoe. 267 d.

1T24. Middle and Keflexire. — Tbe reflexive pronoun may be used with
tbe middle : iavrir droicpfrrwAu to hide himself V. R. 303 c ; often tor emphasia.
as in contnsts : vi ittr fivi jJoo-iXAl «X«wal Tim ^ir^ai airif Kipv, 'i ''

392 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [174

iauriw iwif^av9ai tome sag that the king Itnied orders for lome one to tiof
him (ArtapaMa} oner (the body of) Cyma, lakiU othert tan that he tlew himttlf
wOh hi* own hand X. A. 1. 8. 29, cp. alao rl r^r riXir rpoe^a rautw, *px^' «)
TupawriSa r&r 'EWttruv ipHaar tavrlf (BTwrinult^tfrnt iCKixrof, what Hd it b«-

won the cltg to do viheti U tavi J^ilip compatting for himte^f dotnfnfon and
deapoUc rnnay over the Greekt f D. 18. 00.

1T2S. The CansktlTe Middle denotee tbftt the subject bu Bomething doM
by anothei for bimseU : iy& -yip at rairra iSiSafi/air for I had j/ou tauf/ht tJkfi
X. C. 1. 6. 2, irapnTlSftreat rlrow to have food ecned up 6. 0. 12, Sm trXa i^^nr-
Tu, Tax^ AX^B roiiyo-pn-ai all who have had their amw taken from them will toon
get other* made 6. 1. 12, teury tairiir tarmctudraTo he had a tent prepared for
hltneeff S. 1. 30.

«. This force does not belong ezcloaively to the middle ; cp. 1711.

1736. Reciprocal Hiddlc — With & dual or plural subject the
middle may indicate a reciprocal relation. So with verbs of con-
tending, conversing (questioning, replying), greeting, embracing, etc
The reciprocal middle is often found with compounds of Suf.

ol iB\riTal 47«^f«n-a lAe nlhletet eontended T. 1. 6, tararTtrrn 4ii^x"ro when
theg had got intopotUion ther/ fought 1. 49, iriip ittpl SirXiyorro they eonvenrd
man with man S. 93, triialynrSai iXXitXwi to haise frlendiy intenxuree with oit
another X. C. T. 4. 6, raCra SiantiuOrrai theg will divide this vp among MetHMlcM
L. 21. 14. So atrtSaffat aecHie, 'Kv^alrerffai maltreat, niii^taeai blame, d>iiX-
XarSai vie, rapwct\t6nrBai encourage one another.

c. The active may also be employed, as r»\tiutr wage war.

b. Some of these verbs have a passive aorlst form, as tuXix^' (812).

1727. The reciprocal relation may also be expressed (1) by the oae of tbe 10-
flextve pronoun (cp. 1724) with the active : ^raiwti iauTM th^ are miUuaUg
envious X. M. 3. G. 10 ; (2) by the use of dXXijXwr, etc., with the active : d#i^-
fP^tSM' dXX^Xiiif we are at variance with one anntlier P. Fhae. 263 a ; (8) by
repetition of Uie noun : rruxii rruxv ■p6oi*ei = beggars envg each other Hcsiod
W. D. 26. The reflexive pronounB and ilXXi}\ur, etc., may also be added to the
middle.

173a DifferencM between Acttn and Middle.— As contrasted with tbe
active, the middle lays stress on tlie conscious activity, bodily or mental partici-
pation, of tlie agent.

In verbs that posssBS both active and middle : ^uXidMSu deliberate, pvi^ti-
nr plan, rraSiiar measure, ara3ii&r9an calculate, nmrtir look at, atnwntSti
consider, ixe'^ai cling to, niwBai cease (1734. 14). The force of the middle
often cannot be reproduced in translation (dnfeaSu, Ti/iaaBai, iptBiMl^Sti, t-
wvptlrSiu), and in some other cases it may not hare been felt, as in Ipsirtu
In poetry (rpoQpitSv occurs In prose).

a. Man; such verlM form their futures from the middle : indrotwt, fwtpat,
^laiiHtfeiim. See B06.

b. In Terbe in -biu, the middle signlfles Chat the subject is acting In a manofr
appropriate to his state or couditlou ; nXirt^nv be a cUissn, nXtTftfirtfu act <u

i7Mj THE VERfi: MIDDLE VOICE 39S

• eittxen, ptrform one's eivie dultei ,- rptafitittr be an envoy, wptaptitaSat nego-
Hole a* ewmtf or «en^ ennoyt (of the StMe In ita negotiations). But thU force of
the middle it not always apparent.

1729. . Middle DeponentB (810) often denote bodily or mental action
(feeling and thinking) : oXAnrdoi jump, irtmrAu Jly, op;((u7Au dance,
oixtirBai be gone, StpxnjAu look; ^avXtv&ai. wish, iua6a.vt<r6ax perceioe,
aKpoaa^tu litUJi, nifL/fxa^ blame, oinrdai conjecture, think (lit. take
omens for oneself, from <Sfw, Lat. avis, auspicium), ^yfioAu consider;
oXcM^/Koftu latnejU.

a. Some of the verb* denoting a functional state or process have the middle
either in all forms or onl j in the future.

b. Verbs denoting bodiiy actirily regulaiiy have a middle fatore, 806-800.

1730. Deponent verbs are either direct or indirect middles ; direct : frrw-
xntrSai undertatt, protnUe (lit. liold onetelf under') ; indirect: rroirffiu acquire
/or OHetey, iyuriitaeiu contend (with one's own powers).

1731. The middle may denote more vigorous participaUou on the part of
the subject than the active : aiivrSai dart, but 9Uiv run.

1732. He active is ofUtn used tor the middle when it Is not of practical
importance to mark the Interest of the anbject In the action. The active implies
what the middle ezpressee. So with iirra-rliurur send for T. 7. 16, SiiXiiv arm TJ)r
yniiniw setting forth Ihetr opinion i.XJ, t par tuarrT-^ami setting ttp a trophjf 7.6,

1733. The passive form may have reflexive force, as tlmie^iui set oneself *»
motion, ^roXXaT^rai remove uneaelf, inarrtaSftrai oppote oneself, o-w^m tave
oneself (viMr^t save yourself P. Cr, 44 b). Some of these middle passives may
take tbe acctuaUve, as a/a-^vt^wit be ashamed btfore, ^Pii9^nu bt tffraid of,
ii«T«TXir¥4>e' viiw be amtued at some one. See 814 B.

1734. List of the chief verbs showing Important differences of meaning
between active and middle. It will be noted that the active is often tiansitive,
tbe middle inbanildve.

1. alpilc taks; alfistrtai choose.

2. Afirm ri n*t vaard off something from tome one, iiiixir nrl help some
one; ifiifwtai ri d^end oneself against something, iiiinrM ti^b requite

» give back; ixcSirim sell (give away fOr one's profit).
4. brrmv attach; iwTwSairiim touch.

6. ifx*" begin, contrasts one beginner of an ac^on with another, as Ipxttf
roUfwv take the aggressive, (Mjfce the first blow [bellwin movere'), ipx'" X&toh
be the first to ^eak, ^px' X<V^' Ulxur hebegananvt^iirovokedaisaidt L, 4. 1) ;
ifX**f" make one's own beginning, ae contrasted with the later stages, as
tpxt«Bai nM/iav begin vtarlilee operations (bellum ineipere), ipx*'^^ raO \6ytv
begin one's ipeecA. toXZ/idu of c Spioptr, ipx'l^*<»" i* i/iUniiitia vie shall not take
the initiatiite in the oar, Aut upon those who lake it up we shall retaliate T. 1. 144.

0. Y>4uivmafTv(of themaii,ducer«);7af«ur«ainian7(ofthewoman, Ruberi>).

7. Tffi^wy •i/iar propose a laa (said of the maker of a law whether or not be
is bimwlf Mibiect to it); Yp^^rftu Tpe^> draie up an indictment for a public

894 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [17M

offence, ypiftaBal Tin f>Hng nit agaiiut wtM om (have him written down in
th« magtetratea' records).

B. SonI^iv (make of anything a Sint loon) i.e. put out at inttrfM, tend;
Sbk{{m0u (have a idm made to oiietelf) Jiave lent to one, borrow at inttr^M.

9. Swdtii* eive judgment; Sixi^trffai (Sitter tii>J) go to law with a penon,
conduct a ecus (properly get some onB to givejudgmeTW),

10. i«i4>i|^(i(i> pill to vote (of the presiding officer]; iri^^ijiu'fet vot*,
decree (ot the people),

11. Ix'L* hold ; tx"9at r.nt hold on to, be elote to.

12. tinv aacrifice; BttaBai take autpUet (of a general, etc.).

15. lurtoS* (put a lurBbi, rent, on anylhtog) i.e. let for hire (loetuv); lurOtJ
vBa* (lay a luaSit upon oneself) i.e. hire ieonducere). Cp. 1728,

14. raitiv make to eeate, ttop (trans.); raiarBat cease (fnU.). Bat raw
\tyar ttop tallcing.

16. n(hiv pereuade; rtlftsBat obey (pertvade oneself); rtrQiBa Itnut.

16. TiMrat rifior frame or propose a law fur others (said of the lawgiver,
legem ferre or rogare) ; TlhrSm ri^ur make a law for one's own Intetvet, foi
one's own Slate (said of the State legislating, legem aciaerre or fubere). airtit
(^iypi^itt ri/iout) ol irBpuwoi tBtrro . . . Snit al^iai rtis r6i/avt re^r-BUt reii iwBfiii-
ro» BtinK men did not make the unwritten lawi for themteUei, but I think the
godt made theie laiet for men X. M. 4. 4, 10.

17. T^ptpitv Tin aeenge aqme one, rtimprtr rod rin puniiH A for B't latitfacr
tfoft; TtiMptUBai Tin avenge onetelf on (punish) tome one.

18. rtniv IIkik pav a penalty (^poenai dare); rlrtrBai Slc^r exact a penaltf
(poenat sumers).

10. ^nt)<Ami.rritdieatt}nomeone;^v\irTtrBatrirabeonone'*guardaffain*t

20. x^* 9'v' "" oracle, and lend; xfii^Sm eontult an oTade, and ute.
PASSIVE VOICE

1V3S. The passive voice represents the subject aa acted on:
ittidow, iviSmiyro, imaav, liraioyro they pushed, toere pushed, they struck,
taere struck X. C. 7. 1. 38.

«. Tbe passive has been developed from the middle. With the exception
of some futures and Clie aorlet, the middle forma do duty as pssslves: wlftirai
taket for himself, i.e. cAoo«es, and is ehostn. (For this deTelopment <A the
passive, cp. the reflexive use in «e trouver, sich Jlnden.) So Wxvrot hat
poured itself, has been potired. In Homer there are more perfect middles used
passively than any other middle tensee. Cp. SOS.

b. Uncomponnded iaxiiiv sometiinee retained its use as a paa^Tet frx#<i*
is late.

1736. The pssslve may have the sense allow oneself to be, get onstdf:
iHiarrh ri toX ^ii7iw<>o> tarrying and allowing ourietves to be carried ocnu*
the border P. Cr. 48 d, dnx^an ro/rflf you will incur Me hatred nf OoraUu
P. Phil. 68 c.

1737. Uany future middle forms are used passively (607 S.).

.oog[c

1745] THE VEEB: PASSIVE VOICE 896

1738. The fntare middle formi In -vo/uu ore dereloped from the pment
■tem, and eiprew durative action ; the (later) fature passiTSS tn -^viul, -f^ivoiiai
are developed from the Kuiiets In ti* and -Afr, and are Boriatlc Tim dlSerenoe
in kind of action ia moet marked when tbe future middle forma an used pauivel;,
but il is not alvajH found. toU aXAsti EvM«tx>" rapiSnyiia vo^ nruTi^art, It
Ird^lo-i^TBi, SariTv iiiiuuaiiiMrtir give to thtrett of the allte* a plain exomplt Chat
vihoeter twoUm thall bt pundAtd (ia each ctuw) with dtath T. 3.40, lap iX$,
fcrdry Syuuu^tTiu tf ht it convicied, he will be punishtd (a Bingle occnireiiae)

letth death I). 23. 80, i ilxuM i/MeTiyiiarrai, arptffXiiamu, M^ffrrai, iniauMlrnui

Ti-piaXtui the jiut man will b» tcovrged, racked, fettered, will have hi* ejfe$
burnt out P. E. SSI e, rin^a^Mi I »hall ei^oji honour, riia/S^aoitu I thalt b«
kiunoured (on a definite occasion), i^Xi^ro^uu / thall receive lotting benqft,
A^Xifi^aiMi 1 ehcdl be benefited (on a definite occaaiou). Cp. BOS, 800, 1011.

1739. The second aorist paBaive was originally a second aorist actiye (of
the -fit form) that was used intranaitivelj to distinguish it from the transltiTe
flnt aorEst, as f^n ahowed, i^nir appeared; IfiStipa dettroyed, i^tiprir am
dettrofed; <{^\ir£a wot terrified, ifewMyiir wai alarmed. So iSdiir learned,
fypi^r Jtoaed. Cp. lan/va placed, lirr^r ttood {B\0).

1740. In Horn, all the second aorlst forms in -^r are IntransitiTe except
frXih'?' <uid irCmir wM ttrucJC. Most of the forma in -^r are likewise IntranaU
tive in Horn., as iipirfftiw appeared (in Attic toot *Aoun).

174L The perfect paasiTS in tbe third singular with tbe datlTe of the agent
(14S8) ia often preferred to the perfect active of the first person. Thus wirpA*ral
!•■ it hat been done by me is more common than rtrpAya oirfrfix' I hate done.

1742. Tbe passive may b« passive of the middle as well as passive of the
active: oI^itbi la taken or u chosen, ^idlkrw doet violence or mffert violence
{it forced), -ipiSii laat taken or teas dwaen, iypiiM tea* vritten or oat indicted
iytypait^Bi is eommonlf middle). Tbe use of the passive as passive of the
mUdle is poet-HomeriD.

a. Wben deponent verbs have a pasdve force, the future and aorist have the
paasire fwro: iffiisBiir I differed violence {leat forced), but ipiaaiiofr I did
violence. This holds wben then was once an active form, Cp. also riiMptit8<u,

lUTaripTtatai, ^'v^fKr^at, mXcib'tfu.

b. The aorist passive may have a middle sense (814),

1743. The direct object of an active verb becomes the subject of
tbe passive : ^ KuttoX^ vko tov iiSaiTKaXm) ypa^enu the later is torittmi
by the teacher (active & StidtrnaXiK ypdi^ rip' irumA,^).

1744. The donate accuBative may become the Babject of the
passive ; nXc>ioc iroXifujdri war uhjs waged P. Menex. 243 e (roXt^uiv
woKt/uir, 1564).

1745. Active or middle verbs governing the genitive or dative
may form (unlike the Latin use) a personal passive, the genitive or
dative (especially if either denotes a person) becoming Ote subject
<^ ^e pasaive.

I;.ClK>^Ic

896 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1746

«. With the genitiTS: tpx'"! 7T'/»i*^"i »*T*^fat^w, mrvrtXir, >Br«)hf^l«ir

(nTB^if^fjwVcu), dfuXciv.
b. With the d»tive : iniKtir, irianiw, tynaXilr, iripmiKtittr, ^irifuv, imtSltnt^

C> Exftmples : oi* 4t(aur oGrei i^YCftf wtftrftu £^' 4/i£r tA«y did not lUnJk U rlffbt
to be governed bj/ v$ T. 3. Gl, iitlm mTr\f-^plv9ii h4 toot cottiemnmd X, B.
6. 2. 36, but eiMTBi B^TUf KaTFynirth) the penaltg 0/ deatA wot pronowiced
agaiatt them L. 13. 39 (pass, of caraytArat tinror o^dv), 4^ ^fur ^(^
X«tf«rSat Arjp 4;ii3v ah-Af fij) nro^porqtfiSii*' '( ** tifM /c" tu to take ayun»el
for ouraejsei lAoI IM ranv not bo brouffU into eont«nipt X. A. 6. T. 12, iraXf-
^Orriu ^r &wb riSr T^ir X*^' a^uf rtptntftiwrur, irurroGrrai S* A^t' clr4m»

then are warred agaitut bj/ thoie who dwell around their coitntrp, and are

dtetrutted bj/all L G. 49, rult Av trtfioi^avi n airif, i n ^i) jcol ir^fiBv\et»^r
Or airaO; how coufd 1 have plotted agaimthim, ualen Ihad been plotted
againit by him ? Ant. 4. p. 5, ipeartiStli Inri toE 'OSwriut emiied bj/ Ot^wwa*
X M. 4, 2. S3 (contmst Lftl. intiid«tur mihi ab aHqtto).
N. — The above principle does not bold when the accnsatiTe of an external
object InlATTeiies between the verb aod the duive.

1746. A verb goremlDg an oblique case rarely forma In Greek (ontike
Latin) an Imperaonal passive : ttul ptpoifirttai ry t< r<0>«DTt not ry riiuf my aid
haa been given to tlie deoeaied and to the law Ant. 1. 81. The unae naed is one
from the perfect stem.

1747, An active verb followed by tvro accusatives, one of a pei^
Bon, the other of a thing, retains, when transferred to the passive,
the accusative of the thing, vhile the accusative of the person
becomes the nominative subject of the passive. Examples 1^1,
1625, 1627, 1632.

1V4B. An active verb followed by an accusative of the direct
object (a thing) and an oblique case of a person, retains, when trans-
ferred to the passive, the accusative of the direct object, while the
indirect object becomes the nominative subject of the passive. Cp.
I have been wiUed a large estate.

a. With verbs aignifyiag to enioin, «ntru»t .- ol B«iuto1 tbCtb twtvroKp^rn
iFtxiipour the Boeotiane having received thete itutructiotu withdrevi T.

6. 37 (pass, of IntrriX^tiw raOra toTi Boarroii), 4XX« T. *«rf»>» iwirax»^ta«t
you wttl have some greater command laid upon you 1. 140 (pasa. of
fririErriif dXXo ri /allow tiur). Both acooaatives are intern^; and so.

in ol rur 'ABi/nlur irtTrrpamiiru T^|r ^vXanif thoee of the Athrnia** wAn
Aild been entnuted leith the watch T. 1. t2fl, ^uXbjoj* is equivalent u>
an Internal accuaalive. The nointnaUve of the thing and the dative <^ ibe
peraon aometlnes occur ('Tukt, Toiri hrtTtrpairre 4 ^uXBint the Ionian* to
whom the guard had be«n entrutted Hdt. 7. 10). The dative is commoD
when an inf. is oaed with the pass, verb; iweriroKn r '
the baggage-earrfert had been commanded to go X. C. 6. 8.8.

1= Coo^^lc

i75«l THE VEKB: PASSIVE VOICE 897

b. With other verba: dwvriaieirra rai *t<pdXii Kaeing been dea^itatad (had Qioli
heads cut off) X. A. 2. 6. 1 (pan. ol dwariia*'- rat m^aUi run or rtmr).

1749. A posaiTe may be formed in the case oE Terb« ordinarllj mtransitiTe
bnt allowing a cognate aocusative in the active : Itawi rait iroXtfUwi ^tT^rrrat
(AcMMmy A(M had enough good fortunt T, 7, 77(rfTi'x"''<»'^. 1678), mttrlmti-
#«rai Oe rtik will have been run Ant. 5. 75. See 174fl. TbU i* common with
neuter pawtve partiolplea : ri iiat^iiin airi} the imptuue aett committed by Aim
L. 6. 6, r& r«l ci/ul Ptfiiuiiira the life led bt you and by me D. IS. 205, tiI m-pXi-
Ttunitaaintt iMr polUiealatti 1.28, liuifiTtieiiTa «rror» committed X. A. 6.&.30.

a. Some Terbe deocriblng the action of tbe neather ms; be used In the paaaiTe :
■n^jfmoi ir^MortltriiiiTv Ihejf retitmed to the eitji covered with gnov> 2.H.2.4.8.

1T90. The cognate subject may be Implied, as in the cue of Impersonal
pasairee, in the perfect and tensea derived from tlie perfect Thoa, triilti ah-oTt
ra^cvM^nvTs vihen their preparations xtere complete T. 1.46. X^n-oi it it said,
tfifXdAt U vas made known, followed by the logical subject are not impersonal :
Mi|Xd^ ry Tpirv iru\ii\M rd xMMa^a H was tAown how the moneg had be^n
lost Ant. 6. 70. See 936.

1751. Greek uses impersonals from intransitivee (corresponding to Lat.
ambulator, itur, curritur) only when the active is itself intransitive ; as USeKTOi
it ha» teemed good (cp. SonJ).

1752. The active or the middle deponent of a transitive verb used
transitively or of an intransitive verb may replace the passive of a
traDsitive verb.

dKviav (poeL >U«r) be called; be welt (rS, xoXfit) or Ul (icai:Qi) tpoken of,
= pass, of \ty*ir : rCr icJXiiMf iifainvaur now they are called fiatterers D. IB. 46,
r(t irr iiM jccucte dxijuMp ^ rfrowOt ; viho has been til spoken of or suffered at mf
hands f L. 8.S. Cp. bene, mate attdire; Milton: "England hears ill abroad."

Ui«icw4(u be caught = pass, ot alpiii; aa iir i\ft reOre rpirrur If you are
casylU doing thU P. A.29 c.

&w«hg'viaiv (dt«) be killed = pass, of iwarriltur, as iwtSrgrmr iwh Irwtar
tkeif were killed by lite eajsalrg X. C. 1. 1. 48. But not in the perfect, where the
uncomponnded r^ntna is used,

TClfvwfat be bom = pass, of r/rrnr beget, bring forth : tuSci abr^ oim *il-
yi»wTt it To^r^ A« had no children bg h»r X. H. 6. 4. S7.

tbap &o4v<u be punished = pass, of finuaOr, as iw' atrHw i-otfrw* Jln|« liaras
Utejf were punished bf these very men X. C. 1. 6. 46.

jpifailt be dtfeated = pass, of nicSr conquer, as ir6 rdt avu/iAxur (irrii-
»f >«t wortud bf their allies And. 4. 28.

MvrUvu (jtoWpxeffflai) return from exile = pass, of sariytir restore from exile,
as ^ i^tyapx^' taTtXBtir to he restored by an oligarchy T. 8.68.

Mt«4a* (lie) be placed = pass, ot the perfect of ■nBinu ; rtlBoa roi'i rA^uHi
THt iwi tSt ^offiUur suiilrtit obey the laws established by kings 1. 1. 36.

X«YX^*** (obtain by lot) be dravm by tot = pass, of xX^poGr : fXaxo* ltp€6t
I became priest by lot D.57.47.

'■irX** (sitffer) be Created well (rff) or ill (toK&t) = pass, of rotirv (t>,
mtOt) 1 a tbM(t« ^' a^Ow well treated by them P. O. 619 o.

398 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [i7S3

«f«TMv la txTtxTiiw (_fall out) be ei^Hed = pool, of UpdiXaw : •! tmwnmii^
iwi mO 34/uv thorn who had been eij>elled by the people X. H. 4. 8. SO,

^tiynv (^JUe) be prosecuted = pBAU.ot Sniair (be indicted = ypi^irfiai paaeive):
be exiled = pass, of iK^Wat. t>o iTa^<&yii.r be at^uUted = pan. of divXitir.
ThuB, irtfitlat tptiyur iiri HeX^gu pruteevted for impietg by Meletiu P. A. 36d.

1753. Other equivalenui of paaaiva tonus are (x<"> '"'IX^""! Xaf^mr,
tued with a sabstaiitiTe of like meaning with tbe active Terb : Jnfia (xxr = dn-

fUi^0iu,(ruyyni>Hri'f>:(i>orav7T>iifO)>TVYX'''*"' = rirVXtyRirKM^ai, f raiMr Xofi^i-
■nvor frslnu Tiri'X^'"'= 't'"*^'^^- So with middle depooent*: tUrlirtx*"
s airififfeni.

1754. The passive ol the perlphraeis with reuZriu (1722) is made with
ylyrwe<u : 8o tip)J«i ylywerax peace is made.

1759. The a^nt of the passive is regularly expressed by vrd and
the geTiitive; sometimes by dn-d, Sia, ix, napd, Tifioi with the genitive,
or by inra with the dative (in poetry). See 1678.

1756. The instrument of an action, when regarded as the ^ent,
is personified, and may be expressed by ix6 with the genitive :
iXuFKiToi inro Tpi^pow he IS captured by a trireme D. 53. 6.

1757. The dative, or a prepositional phrase, is regularly used with
the passive to denote the instrument, means, or cause (1506). The
agent may be viewed as the instrument : in prose, when persona are
regarded as inatruments, the dative is usually that of military ao-
oompaniment (1526).

1758. The dative of tbe agent used with the perfect passive and
verbal adjective is a dative of interest (1488) ; on inro with the gen-
itive used instead of the dative, see 1493, 1494,

THE MOODS

1759. Mood designates by the form of the verb the mode or
manner (modus) in which the speaker conceives of an aaBertion
concerning the subject.

1760. There are four moods proper in Greek: indicative, sub-
junctive, optative, and imperative. The infinitive (strictly a verbal
noun) and the participle (strictly an adjective form of the verb) may
be classed with the moods.

THE PARTICLE av

1761. The particle iv (Horn, xiv, kc) limits the meaning of the
moods. It has two distinct uses :

a. la independent clauses: with the past tenses of the indicative

and with the optative ; also with the infinitive and participle
representing the indicative or optative.

b. In dependent clauses : with the subjunctive.

i,vGooglc

■tm] tnn pABTicLE Sv ddd

1763. No Mparata woid cut ba used to tnnBlate ir by ludf ; tta (one
nries M it modifies the ineaniDg of the moodi. In general ir llmltg the force
of tbe verb to pMticolar conditions orcircLunstances ('under ttie clrcuuiBtiaaes,*
> in that caae,' ' then ■),

1763> Id Homer dv is prefsired In neg&live, air, xi in relatiye, sentenoes.

1764. PositiOD of &v. — Ir does not begin a sentence or & clanse, except
kiter a weak mark of punctuation, as tI ett, Sr rtt ilrei, TaHra \iyit inuw rCr ;
uAy tAcn {tome one nii>Al wy) do you tell ui Mfi now f U. 1. 14. In inde-
pendent sentences nitb Sr (Indie, and opt.) the particle Is often separated from
its verb for emphasis, and is attached to negatives {ain ir), InterrogatlTes (t(i
ir, tSi Sr), or to any emphatic modifier. It vi commonly attached to verbs of
Ktftng or tkitiking : air tfur iiir ir iHiiai clru rffuof If I should remain wftA yoM,
I Uiink I Mho«ld be esteemed X.A.I. 3. 6.

«. So with oiK oK ir tl (or oi* ir aI3a (0 followed by a verb to wbloh Ip
belongs : oAc otf ft* tt wtiaotiit I do not know whether J could pertuade £. Hed.
MI (for wflrium tr).

1769. Rcpetidan of &*. — av may be repeated once or twice in the
same sentence.

a. Ir is placed early in a sentence which contains a miI>ordinate elanse, in
order to direct attention to the character of the construction : lutoO/ut f tr im
To^TB wporwouiOiitiioi wpocfia^iir Ipnti/oripif ftr ry 6pfi xf^f<u if we lAouId make a
feira attack here it Menu tomtwe should find the mountain to have fewer
de/enden X. A. 4.6. 18.

b. For rhetorical emphasis dr Is added to give prominence to particular
words: rb yip rwalrr' ir ti* ir Vy'^kt' I^ icX^vi and who would not bt
angered upon hearing »ueh words f 8. O. T. 339, wOi Sr ait ir ir Jtfig eirM/i ir ;
how thould J not jaUiy die f S. fr. 07.3.

1766. &* without a Verb. — ir sometimes stands without a verb, which Is
to be supplied from the context. So in the second member of a sentence with
coordinate clauses : oUa Art voXXoAt ^r ifytiiim dr Jolig, roXXoAi f dr (Solif) ini-
ptn I know that he would give many guides and many hostages X. A. 3. 2. 24.
Often with rwt dr (tfir) ; how can {eottld) it be ? F. R. 353 c, Td:^' dr periu^ P.
Soph. 266 c.

«. So with in ir, Oarep ir il (2480) : ro^t i TaSirat HQpa raXXd ^/mp, Ai

Ir (leO. Hp^ I'll) '{ »l"v fuydXou Oadatas came with many gifts, such as one
might offer from large means S. C. 6. 4. 29, iiopaiium Swp ir tl ruTi fearing
like a child {Hanp ir i^fftim, tl rail Ijr) P.O. 479 a.

b. lAr tl is often used for the simple (at tl (2372) nnd withont regard to the
mood of the following verb ; sometimes there is no verb in the apodosls to which the
dr ma; be referred, bs lanr ipa ri i\iiMf, lir it p^ rif iattl, i t^ 8m rtparrot ry
Srri doipXoi tAe very tyrant is then in tratha very slave even If he does not seem so
(oany one P. R.6T9d (here ml efjiJt'««>i<l'>|dr is implied), drd may be also
•o naed that dr belongs to the apodoals, while ml, though Ko'ngwith tl In transla-
tioD (even <r)i affects the whole conditional sentence. Thus, rS/r ti imi iottJ, Mr
ififinmr tl (rn) KarayiyriiiiBH, tA rpwimrra rouir but as it is, it seens to me that,
eeen if anf one should condemn hit wanton ossotiU, he wouid be acting properlf

400 SYNTAX OF TH£ StHPLE S£Nt£NC£ [i7«7

D.21. 51 (hen ir goea nltli rouTr, It. rawfq 2r). iJr {T Ml)f, foUowod b; a
limiUng upieMion, may generaJly be regarded as jcsl Jf ( = M>) with a Kibjuiic- '
tive uodantood; aa iWi iiot rdpti lar v/utpit tlwnt ttt permit me to fojr &Mt a
tMnI (= *<U Hw wofii') S, El 1483.

1767. OmiMlon of &*. — it is sometime* omitted when it may be Baj^>lled
{rom the iweoeding sentence or dansa. So otton with the secODd of two Terbs
that are ooDnected or opposed : rHwohiBrr iw; 4 S^Xof h-i fi/ioo-i (dv); what •oovM
Ae Aoea iIob« f it it not clear that he aould have laten art oathf D. 31. 9, sdr'
ir oliTaf fx" ^'Y'" o""* tifti rtiadilirrt nellhtr tan he aaiert nor can nou be mods
to believe D. 32. 17, By retention ot earlier usage the subjunctive ia eometlmea
used without drwhere it is commonly emploj'ed in the later language (2327, 2SS9,
S56& b, 2587 b). Here the diflerenoe is scarcely appreciable except that the omia-
^on giTee an archaic tone.

DBPBHDBNT CLAUSES WITH Xv

1766. SabJniictiTS witb A*. — Conditional, relative, and temporal
clauses requiring the subjunctive must have Sv, which is more closely
attached to the conditional, relative, and temporal words than it
is to the subjunctive.

a. Hence the combinations Mr (4*. i') on which cp. 23S3 j Brw, iwir^r,

irilr{irir),irtairtiomtl, trt, irirt, iril, irriSii + ii. When the particle does

not thus coalesce, it is usually separated only by such words as intr. Si, rt, yAf.

b. The force of it with the subjunctive cannot usually be expressed In Eng-
lish. For A* hi final clauses with in, arm, and %«, see 2201. In Hom. «r(K^v)
[s found la dependent clauses, 2S34 0.

THE MOODS IN SIMPLE SBNTENCB8

1769. gg 1770-1S49 treat of the use of the moods in independeDt
sentences and principa,] clauses. The dependent construction of the
moods was developed from their independent use. The use of the
moods in subordinate clauses wa^ not originally different from that
in independent sentences and in the principal clauses of complex
sentences. For the uses of the indicative, see also 1875-1958.

INDICATIVE WITHOUT &*

1770. The indicative mood makes a simple, direct assertion of
fact; or asks a question anticipating such an assertion: ^Xfi€ As
came, ouk ^XSt he did not eome, iKtwrtrai he viiU come, nrt ravrtt wot^-
ow; toA«n m'' he do this 1

1771. The indicative Btat«s particalar or general suppodtions, makes afflrnia-
Uva or negative assertions, which may or may not be absolutely true. Thua, fn
assumptions, id/iapTi th itwr ■ svyyniit-^ irrl rliutfUit rairtfi tappoee •onw oise
InvAnntarUy eommiUed an offence ; Jar hitn there U pardon rather than pmiM-

,= Cooi^k

1779] INDICATIVE WITHOUT av 401

ment D. 18. 274, and often after xal >i}, aa ital Sit rtfrSri antt tuppote thtf ar«
dtad B. Med. 386.

1772. The indicative may be used to express a doubtful aseertion about a
prewnt oi past action (negative a4 or f<4 <>#) : <l^V ipa . . . ii.ii 6 Kr-iviinrin f r
i raSr tiwiir but I Suspect (I.e. perhaps) afl^ all it a>ai Ctaippu» leho taid thit
P. Eu.290e, dXXft nil tqSto ai koX^ iiitaStri'lisaiaf but jierhapi vie did not do
well in agreeing to thii P. Men. 89 c. Sucb sentences are often regarded aa
qaeetlOQB with the effect of doubtful affinnation.

3.773. The Indicative may be used alone where in English we employ an
auxiliary verb : rwrtfuv St Stoii rui o^ ttrtu etoit Miu^r ; since he trxtattd in the
godt hojB could [or thonld) he believe there mere no godsf X. M. 1. 1. G, 6\lyou
<tXar tJ)> wiXtr a little more and theg viould have taken the city T. 8. 35, dw-wX-
Xtffutfa me might have perithed (ue were in danger of perCehing') X. A. b. B.2.
Cp. 2319.

1774. UnfuUUed ObUgatlon (Propriety, PouibUity). — With the
imperfect indicative of impersonal expressions denoting obligation,
propriety, necessity, or possibility, the action of a dependent infini-
tive ia nsually not realized. (Examples 1775-1776.)

Snch eipreBaiouB are fS«, XJ")' ("'' ^XJ^i'}' rpoa^ti, loifdi l^r, i(uni ff, tU6t f *,
S'taiaw ijr, alaxfiir ^r, {(jjr, naXui tlx", verbals In -rAr Or -rior with 9f, etc.

a. For the use of these expressions (also with If) in the apodoeis of unreal
conditions, see 3313, S31&.

1775. Preaent. — Thus, (la at raura iro»tr yos oaght to he doing thi$ (but
are not doing it), riiOait itt, ^r (ttt theee men ought not to be alive S. Ph. 418, t1
ri7{t; ott ixp^'viyir why art thoutilentf Thou thouldtt not be silent E. Hipp,
297, tUii <)r ifut ... ti.il ^wXaKrSt, Hmtp i4}f, (viifittx''' you thould not be ilack f»
your allianee, at yov are at preient T. 0. 76.

1776. Past. — tSti at TsCra roiQa-ai (or ttttif) you oughi to have done thit
(bat did not do it), iifjr ret iXBttr you might have gone (but did nol go), irVtr
mirv ravra vw^s-u ht could have done thit (almost equivalent to the potential
indicative ravra troliiatr it, 1784), ISti ri inixupa rirt Xafitir I ought to have
taken the pUdgea then X. A. 7. d. 23, ifiov Ijr dcoCo-oi ft would have been worth
hearing P. En. 304 d, lUnit i^^r he might have remained D. 3. 17.

1777. The Qreek usage aimply states the obligation (propriety, possibility)
aa a fact which existed in the post (and may continue to exist in the present).
In Engliah we nsually ezpTess the non-fulfilment of the action.

1778- Preaent or past time is denoted when the present infinitive Is nsed.
When the reference is to present time, the action of the present InSnitive ia
always denied. Past time is denoted when the aorist infinitive is used.

1779. The expressions in 1774 may also refer to simple past obligation
(propriety, poaeibllity) and have theordinary forcaof past indlca^ves: Ktitiimr
he had to remain (and did remain) D. 19, 124. The context determines the
meaning; time tI tAh fftiifievSor ixpffr rouir; (D. 18. 100) by itself might mean
either what wot U the duty of the $tatemian to do or what wa$ U the duly of the
Uatetman to have done f

SIWSK OKIM. —20

403 BTNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1780

1780. Uttattalnsble Wiaib. — A wish, referring to the preseat or
past, which cannot be realized, is expressed by a past tense of the
indioadre with ^$t 01 with d y^ (negative juij). The imperfect
refers to present time, the aorist to put time (op. 2304, 2305).

(ffilxnjSfXrlM't^p^Mi aould that thonhadttinovr) a better h4a» B.El. 1061,
tl9t ffN Ttrt rvirrtt6niiw tOOBld fAot I had then bMn with Oee X H. 1. S. 46.

1781. An uuaOftlnAble wish mB,j also be exprewed by i^\ow (<ntffhty wUti
the present or Korlit laSnldTe : H^Xi Ktpm (9* twuM that Cf/nu ie«re (now)
ollre (Cjrufl oughl to be alive) X, A. 3. 1. 4 (1776). The n^aUve is fi4 : fifaor'
iS^Xar Xiniv rji* ZnOprni uould that I had ueBer left Sq/rot 8. Ph. 969. ^9t 01
■J yip (poet. utBt, At) may be used before £i^)wv i tt -/ip d^Xsr oIoZ ri rfru tl
ranal mici ipydtkirtiu would that th« muttUude were able to do evil PI. Cr. 14 d.

1782. ipiiv\6iair followed by ui Inflnltlre may exprees an nnattalnable whh :
ipiHi\iiaiT iiir aiK iplt^r Irditt I would that Iioere not eonttnding hert (u 1 Kta)
At. Ran. S66. {ipovUn^r ftv vellem, 1789.)

17B3. The lodlcatiTe la also used In other than dmple sentences : in Anal
sentences (2203) ; In object sentences after verbs of tffort (£211), of eavtion
(2220 a), of /faring (2231, 2SS3) ; In coDsecutive eentenoHS with Am m that
(-2374), in condlttonnl sentences (2300, 2308, 2323, SS36) ; in temporal BeDtencos
(2306) ; In object WDtsuoas after In and in with a verb of taying, etc (8677 tL).

INDICATIVE WITH &*

1784. Put PotentUI — The i^t tenses (usually the aomt, lees
commonly the imperfect) of the indioative with £y (kw) denote past
potentiality, probability (cautious statement), or necessity : 3 one Sm
tforro which they covld not have expecied T. 7. 55, n't -Aft Iv 4^firi ravnt
vtMirAu: for who would have expected theae things to happen f D. y. 68
(note that Sv does not go with ytviaBax by 1764), tyyw b rw one might
(could, would) have knoum X. C. 7. 1. 38, vrd kw roAcuri^pani rtp &ios
iikev fear migld haue seized even a man ofatoui heart A 421.

a. This is especially frequent with rli and with the ideal second peison (cp.pv-
taree, erederet): ir&t'>'t i' Jlow>ould (could, might) have obeerted X.C.8,1.83.

b. The potential optative (1829) in Homer refers also to the past.

1785. A protasia may often be extracted from a participle, or Is Intimated
in some other word ; bnt there is no ntference to any definite condition, bene*
a defluite ellipsis Is not to l>e supplied.

1786. UnrMl Indicative. — The indicative of the historical tenaes
with df (niv) may denote unreality : rrfr« 6" avrS ri -wpSyit Ar tKfirero
i4t avroS but the cate would then have been decided on its own meriu
D. 18. 224, HOI Ktv iroU) Ku&ov ^ and in that coat it were far better

Til.

1787. This nee of the indicative with Ir to denote nnrealtty is not Inherent
in the meaning of the past tenses ot that mood, but has been developed from tlM

ITW] SUBJUNCTIVE WITHOUT Sp 408

pHt potential with whlob the nnreal iDdhutlTe is dowljr oonnectod. On tiw
common lue ot thla conatnicijon In the ftpodoala of nnreal condlUona aee 3S03.
OnMM<>,oU.,aeea815.

1788. Th« Imperfect refers to Hie preseDt or the past, tbe aori«t to the past
(rarely to the preaent), the pluperfect to the present (le« commonly to the past).

1789. ipovUtair dc (ptllem) I thovld like or thovld hate liked may express
■n imattainable wish : iptvXipTiP it Xliiura rfir afr^r iriii'^r ifiol %%*" i thoald
kme liktd Simon to be (OT I wiah Simon VI ere) of the lame tnind at mfaelf L. 8.
81. On iffevM/ait wltliout d», see 1782.

1790. IterMlve IndlcatlTe (repeated Actlra). — The imperfeot and
aorist with cb- are used to express repeated or custoinaiy past action
(post-Homeric) : 8ii]piDT(uv of I vsed to a^ F. A. 22 b, Av iktitv he ukm
wotU toaay X.G. 7. 1. 10.

1791. This constnictioa Is connected with the past poteatial »nd denoted
oT^Klnallr What could or would take place under certain past circumstances.
ThOB, dratmiifiiiiiir cBr aOrQr ri woi'^/iara , . . intpiiruir ir »Ot»I>i rl hfyoin atcord-
infflp, taking up tketr poenu, I ufd to (yiovld) OMk them (ns an opportunity pre-
sented iuelf) vshat they meant F. A. 22 b. In actual use, since the action of tbe
verb did take place, tbis construction bos become a, stateoient of /act.

1792. In Herodotus this construction Is used with tbe itetailvB forms :

iXolw^n Iv the kept waping 3. 110, ol Si tr Iliptrai ^iptatar rd irpAfiara the Ptr-

tiamt vere wont to wfn the cattle i. 130.

1793. Homer and tbe early poets use Sr (air) with the future IndicatiTe
frith a conditional or llmlUng force : iral k4 rtt iff ipM and in tuch a raee tome
one vill (nuv) tag Ihut A 176, This use ts found also In oondiUonal relative
sentences (2606 b). In AtUo dr Is found with tbe future in a few passages which
are now generally emended. In P. A. 29 c there is an anacolnthon.

1794. dv Is not osed with tbe present and perfect indicatlTe.

SUBJUHCTIVB WITHOUT it

1796. The chief uses of the independent subjunctire are the
hortatory (1797), the prohibitive (1800), and the deliberative (1806).

a. The name tubjunetive la due to tbe belief of the ancient gTBjnmaiians that
the mood was always subordinate. Thus, tFru thall Itpeakf (1S05) was explained
as dne to the omission of a preceding poi\*i, i.e. do j/ou with that I tpeakf

1796. The Independent subjunotlTe refers to future time. It has three main
uses 1 (1) the Tolnntatlra, expressing the vAU of tbe speaker. This is akin to
the impesatlTe, (2) Tbe dellbemtlve. This is possibly a form ol the «olonla-
tive. (S) Tbe snticipatory (or futntBl). This anticipates an action as an
immediate future possibility. Whether the anticipatory la a form of tbe volun-
tative Is uncertain (op. fcA vsUl tehen,Jevevx voir, dialectal a veutpleuvotr).

1797. Hortatory SnbiaoctiTe.-^The hortatory Bubjimctive (present
or aoriBt) is used to express a request or a proposal (negative fi.^.

404 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1798

a. Ususl]7 in ths fint peraon pluial: >0r fw/wr ncil dndmfin raB ir^At let
ua ffo KOTO and hear the man P. Prot. 814 b, ullvn intUt tapia W'l nol flw tA«re
pet 811 a. 47e, ^pt (*^}, in Horn, a-^ (8^), iometimw preaodes, u 47« ffcmrS-
;i» eome, let ut eoiuider X. C. 5. 5. IS. (A (8*) nwely precedes.

b. Len frequently in the Bnt person Hingulaj', nhich is uau&llj preceded
(In afflrmative sentenceB) by 4ifpt (JiJ), in Horn, by iyt (8^) : ^pe !ij T*pl ro*.
y'^l«'>wT«t rfTw leC menoM (|p«(iit about the bill D. 19. 234.

1796. The first person singular in negntlve exborUtions (rare «nd poetic)
may convey a warning or a threat ; ^4 "'• I^P^'i (ol^nv" *<v^ rqtirl mx*'* '^
man, Itt mt not find thee bg the h/illote th^ A 20. This ose is often regarded
H prohibitive (1800).

1799. The hortatory use of the sabjuncUre compensates tor the absence of
an Imperative ol the flist person.

1800. ProhibitiTe SabjanctlTe. — The subjunctive (in the second
and third persons of the aorist) is often used to express prohibitions
(negative ^ij).

m. Usuallf in the second person ; tafiir iSiiiiair" ^ ""t '^^ heart X. A.
6. 4. 10. For the aorlat subjunctive the present imperative may be employed
(1840); liii T«4fftl> (or f<) "I*') ''li^ri ^ not do thi» {not iii) mgi).

b. Less commonly in the third person, which usually represents the second :
inMpji Si liriiilt and let no one tuppote T. 6. 64 (= /i^ ^rekdpiiTt do not
luppoie).

c. liie third person of Uie present snbjnnative is rare: /d) ralrut nt of^tu
(= liii ol-iiitSa) let not any one think P. L. S61 E.

N. — ai n^ with the subjunctive of the second person In the dntmatfc poets
occasionally expresses a strong prohibition ; oi /ij] X^p^riri don't talk notuense
Ai, Nub. 367.

1801. Doubtfnl Aswrtion. — The present subjunctive with /ii) may eiprecs
a doubtful asseitlon, with /i^ oi a doubtful negation. The idea of apprebeosion
or anxiety (real or assumed) is due to the situation. A touch of irony often
marks thU use, which is chiefly Platonic. With fi4 (of what may be true) : ^4
i-fpauiTtper i rb iXriOit tlwtlr I tntpeet it'* rather had form (lit. too rude) to tell
me truth P. 0. *62 e. With »iJ) ad (of what may not be trae) : iXM ^^ aix wrwt
txB hut Irather think this mny not be 10 P. Crat. 436 b, fii) eix i SiSarriw Aptr^
Virtue it perhapi not a thing to be taught P. Men. M e.

1802. In Horn, n^ with the Independent subjunctive Is used to indicate fear
and waniinf;, or to suggest danger ; ni ti xoXwffd^wni ^^{u caiiir ufai'Axuu' mny
he not (as I fear he may) in hi* anger do aught to injure the lotuof the Aehaean*
B ]95. Usually with the aorist, rarely with the present subjuncllve (o IQ). The
constructions of 1801, 1802 are used as object clauses after verbs of fearing
(2221).

1803. Srui flit Is occasionally so used with the aorist subjnnctJYe, and with
an idea of command : Arm nii ittlff's rit majr no on< say (as I fear he may) X. S.
4.8. See 1021.

1804. From the use In 1601 is probably developed the construction ot ^ fit

isti] SUBJUNCTIVE WITHOUT Sp 405

with the aorist (len often the prwent} subjunctive to denote on empbaUc dxaial ;
as >d f(4 watfuiMi qh^Mo^u* I uUI not cease from tearcMng for wtadom P. A.
20d, tOxtrt t^ ttwnrtu Jh^iXeh 4fut laraXo^Tr the king mill no longer be able to
overUike v X. A.2. 2. 12.

laos. DellberAtlTe SnbJnnctiTe. — The deliberative BubjimctiTe
(pteseDt or aorist) is used in queatioua when the speaker asks what
he it to do 01 say (oegative /i^.

a. Usnalty hi the first person : rfru/ur 1) alyaiar; shall tee tptak or keep
lileneef E. Ion 758, rlSpdiru; reiipiyui; what am I to doT whither ehall Ifttf
E. Med. I27I, >i4 ^a^u'; thall ve not »ayt P. R. 654 b.

b. The (rare) second person is used in repenting a qnestion : A. rl ir« riSii-
ptta ; B. S Ti rCfliTirfc ; A. /n aluct thaU tee lake your advice T B. In what
ihiHi you take my adnicc f Ar. At. 104.

C. The third person is generally used to tepreaent the flist person ; com-
monly with Tit, as ri rii cImu roBra ipi; hiw ahalt angow tat thii it lot
(=W*a^»;) D. 19. 88.

N. — The subjunctive qnestion does not refer to a future f«t, but to what \a,
under the present circumstajiceB, advantageous or proper to do or ny.

18D6. pat\a, poi\itB€ (poet Sf\nt, SUtTt) do you with often precede the
■abjonctive : po6\titn ttra; do you vitahmeto gay to yout P. O. 621 d. This is
ft fnsion of two distinct questions : ^6X« dayouviithf and (Tvw thall I sayt

1807. The deliberatiTa subjoncUve may ha replaced by a peripliraals with
Jt( or xrt Bod the InSnitive, or by the verbal adjective in -^tor iarl. Thna,
illitU Si rpao-fi/nvfur ; 4 i"' xp4 towTv ; and ihalt ve wait f or what mutt toe dof
8.TT.390, rlwiuwio'; (= tI raiOiur;') ahat are we to do f Ar. P. 922.

«. For the deliberative future see 1016.

1808. Deliberation in the past may be exprened byflci, xf^'Cx/'iOi''^'^^'
with the infinitive, and by -r^r (verbal adj.) ))r.

1809. The negative In QaMttosa. — The nse of ni (not a^) in questions is
due to the fact that the constraction of 1806 is simply the inUirrogative form of
the hortatory sabjanctive : ^Hfitr let vt tay, i^ii ^Hiur -, are vie not to tay t Dis-
tinguish wirtpew piiw ifiHiur 4 fii) ^^lui tlrai ; shall we tay that it It force or that it
is not f X. U. I. 2. 45, from 9um> raw' ^ui X^cirAu 4 oB thall we tay that thit
is well taid or not f (oB = oix 6pBQt U^taBiu) P. G. 614 c.

1810. Anticipatory SnbjtinetiTe (Hometic Snbjnnctive). — In Homer the
subjuDctive is often closely sbin to the fnture indicative, and refers by anticipa-

Uon to a future event (negative oA) : ad yip ria raimit dv* iripat, oiSt CSuptu for
never yet taw I such men, nor shall I see them A 202, tal ti Tit (JJI* fCrgiri and
one will tay f 276. Ar (c/r) usually limits this subjunctive in Horn. (IBIS).

a. This futural subjunctive Is retidned in Attic only in subordinate olaoses
(3327), and in t( rdtfu (1811).

1811. The eobjunctive is used in TlriBv; what vttll become of me; what am
I to dof (lit what thall 1 undergo f) as P. Eu. SOS d. So t( yimiuu ,- quill me
Jlttt Thna, fi /uu iyii, rl wAStii rl ri /let fifuora yinfrm; ah, WM'* nul

406 srin-AX OF the simple sentence [tiii

uiAoi (* to becMM of met tekai vMl ht^pptn vnto me at tha laitt * 466. Tba
aabjaDCtlve here le not delibentive, but zetera to a tutoie event.

1812. Tbe subjunotlTe without ir fa alao naed In dependent clsnaei of pnr-
poae (2106), liter verbs of fearing (2226), to tbe protiwk ol oonilltionni (3327,
8389) and condlUoD&l lel&tiTe BenteDoea (2667 b).

SUBJUNCTIVE WITH tr

1813. The Bubjunctlie with At (Diore commouly xii) la nsed In Homer fn
Independent sentences and cUoseB (negative od). Cp. ISIO. llius, *yii Si k
iyti B^n'Sa but in that cote I will take BrUel* A lU, et* iw nx Xfolirtia ^
of no mali to the4 thall be tJty bow A 387.

OPTATIVE WITHOUT ttr

1014. OpUtircof Wish. — In independent sentence!) the optative
without ay is uscd to express a wish referring to the future (negative
fi^) : u irol, yimo -mrpov curuxarrqjos oA, hoy, vMyest thou prove more
fortunate than thy aire S. Aj. 560. From this use is derived the name
of the mood (Lat. opto unsh).

■. So even la reUUve sentflnc«B: Uw tort, t idi T^wiro, Xi/lMM tl/r r*Xw
if ever thtj/ eaptvre Hie dty, which Meaven forbid I..8I,14.

b. Under nlshea are included execrations and prouetatlona : JfoX*(fi^v may I
perUh Ar. Ach. 824, lof r trtSt^it, 4 fiJ) {V^r, SupoSM^arra and I will proM
tAol gon took bribes, or mag I not live Ar. Bq. 838.

1B19. The optative of wish is often introduced hy <I yJft, difc
(Hom. ai yap, aWc), or by ft, is (both poetical) : d yip yamro vxmld
that it taight lutppen X. C. 6. 1. 38, in JXoiro may ke periah S. EL 126.
(«K is properly an exclamation : Aoto.)

1S16. The optative Introdnced by tl yif, eto. fs aometimee explained aa a
protasis with tbe conclusion omitted : itit ^IXsr ii^r yiive oh, if jroM wmU
beeomeourfirientlX.a.i.l.SS. Cp. a352e.

1817. An unattalnaUe wisli, relerrlDg to the present, may be ezi»eaed
by the present optative In Homer : tt^ iipiiatiu uouU Chat / were yotang agam
H 1&7.

ISIB. Unattainable wishes, when they refer to the fntnre, may be expt«aMd
by the optative : tl fm ytmra pBiyyot it jSpa^Wi would that I had a voice in ng
armt B, Hec.itSA. Wishes represented as hopeless are ezpraaaed In tbe post-
Homeric iangoage by the psat t«nsea of the indicative (1780) or by A#(Xo* (1761).

1S19. Horn, often nses the optative with a concMaive or permlssfve force :
twtrru ti tai ri ri$iniu after that I mag (lit. mag J) »vffer tome toAol vUl * St A.

1820. Imperative Optative. — The optative may express a oommand
or exhortation with a force nearly akin to the imperative : Jiupiav^at
fyetro let Ghiriaophus Isad X. A. 3. % 37.

1821. Potential Optative. — The potential optative, irtiiob in AtUe ngo-

laq] OPTATIVE WITH Sv 40T

luty UkM dF (IBM), b oooailonftlly foand In Homer and later poetry In an
tariier form, wlthoat that particle : ^la Mi y iOiktir ml r^XMir irSpa raiirai
tatOginif^ a god,ifke*o tofllfd, bring a maa t<ffeevenfivm ofnTi SSI, f&crQt
4 U^M nt quleMtr than a man wttid $peak E. Hipp. 1186. This oonatraction U
nqtected In proae.

a. Uraallr in negative aentences or In questions expecting a negative answer
(with (d) : 0* it)f yip rt KtmArtptw AXXo irdfei/u for I could not (conceivably)
(tUTcr anytkinff worte T821, rtAr, ZtO,86ra,ru rfi irtpOr imppaala lardrxM;
tAy power, oh Zmu, what treipau of taaa can cheek t S. Ant. 0O4.

1822. The optative afl«r aU trrif Srru (fiwM, Arot) In Uie diamsUita la
inobably pot«nti^ : nit %vf Jh-un X^fu^ ril ^(vJ^ loXd I could not call faltt
Mlngtfair A. Ag. 620. ir Ig nmall; employeid in this construction.

1823. The optative without Sf (c^r) la also used elsewhere, as in
porpoae clanaeR (2190) and claoeeB oi fearing (222G) after a secondary tense ; in
the apodoais of conditional sentences (2300 d, 2326 d, SSS3), In relaUve aentencM
(2666, 2608) ; and at the repreaentative of the Indicative (S616) or snhjunotive
(3610) In indirect dlaoonrse after aecondat; teuKB.

OPTATIVB WITH Ir

UM. Fot«ntl«l Optative. — The potential optatire with 3y states
a future possibility, propriety, or likelihood, as an opinion of the
speaker; and may be translated by may, mighl, can (especially with
a negative), vwat, tuoxld, ahould (rarely toiu, dtaM). So in Latin velim,
videaa, cogruneaa, crtdtu.

7mtitt f ar hi riOtf dvrut f x« VOX "MV see that thii it to X. C. 1. 6. SI, Irav
TCf tc 4fwk*v4r««r oO would agret 1. 11. h, Ifiiut iw ipoliafr I (would gladly
Uk) ahoaM like (o ost D. 18.64, aAc Ir Kipoa thou canst not take S. Ph. 103,
iiytiii iv tU( / wtll tell thi* A. Supp. 028. The second person alnguUr is often
hideSnlta (oiu), as yreiirt dr (^eogaosau) =7>«iif rif it.

a. The potential optative nuigea from pooeibility to fixed reaolve. The aorist
optatiTe with dv and a n^ative is very cominon.

b. When stress is laid on the idea of possibility and power, necessity and
obligation, Greek usee lAro^ui, ttlor xp^ with the infinitive (statement of /act).

c. The potential optative with dv is also used in dependent sentences ; In pur-
pose clauses (S202 b). In object clanaea after verbs of ^ort (2210) and verbs of
fearing (3282), In causal clauses (2243), in remit clauses (2278), hi the apodoeis
at conditional (see 3366) and conditional relative sentences (2560). In indi-
net diaeoarse tlie infinitive with Af or the participle with iw may tepreeent tlie
optaUve with dr (1B46 ft.).

1B25. Usoally these optatives are not limited by any definite condition
prcaent to the mind, and It is unneeeasary to supply any protaslH in thouf^t.
In aome oases a protasis Is dormant In a word of the sentence (each as jtnolwt,

tlm&rwt). TbXiM, In ah ixyil^ravi tlrat jiioluf ftr ^eXsfi^Hiri wAont you WOUlA
inetll eonMer to be ungralefiil Aee. S. 100, Aiiafwi may stand for tl Smaltn
^•Xa^iwTf : Iffou thould eontider the matter >tis({y. So eCr* Mi#v*i wMm f

408 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1896

Simrroi ^pnr ' SiappayUr yifi ir ktX. thty neither eat more (Aait thejf can t>rar,
for otberwiae (i^ tiiey ahovld eat more : tl ia6ioar rXilu) tAty (ooujtt burst X. C.
8. 2. 21. Tlie potential optative is alao used as the nuiii clause of less Tiiid
conditions (2329) in which the protasis has the optative by .assimllatioa vo the
mood at the apodceis.

182S. The potential optative with Kr is used to soften the statement of an
opinion or fact, or to express Irony : Irt^Ar rt tovt ir rfir thi» ia (would be)
aliotker matter D. 20. 116, rinroi/i ir, tl rif 1111* -nit txBpoit rTuyilr 1 mutt be mad,
if it i»madHe»stoh(iteone''afoea A.Pr.9T8. So often with tsut or rix^ perkapt.

a. With a negative, the potential optative may have the force of a etrong
usertion : at yip Ar drAfciM, iWIt ti^/'v rii* 96pir /or Ivill not po away, but
I mill knock at the door Ar. Ach. 236.

1827. {SoirXof/iqr ir (veli'm) IB often used as a soflaned optative of wish:
^Xaliaii if toOto outu ytrirffat I eoatd toiih that thi* might be the retvlt
{aiTiy4rw.ro may U reault thut) P.A. 19a. For i^vM^r ir see 1789.

18S8. The preMnt and aodst are used of what will be, or what will prove
to be, true (faturoreallzation of a present fact) ; iprri) ipa, at Ivar, fryl<i4 ni ir
ell, tirtae then, it teemt. mil (prove to) be a kind of health P. R. 444 d. The
perfect is used of what will prove to be the case as regards a completed action .-
•-Of ir X(Xi[#Bi ; hoiB can it have eacaped mji knoieledge f X. S. 3. 6. Usaally the
perfect is here equivalent to the present.

1839. The preeent and aorist are rarely nsed of the past : (a) in Horn, of
past powlblUty : lal r6 utr frF drJXairo and nov) he might have perithed E 311
(Attio dr^Xo-o 4^ 1784), dXX4 rl «r ^/fai/uj 6trt what covld I doT T BO.
(b) in Hdt. of a miid assertion ; tsutb ittr koI ^einf ir dwoar they may kace
laid Ihi* out of envy 9. 71, tti/varf ftr otroi Kp^tt Ikeae joouid prove to be (might
be, must have been) Cretan* 1. 2. Both nses are doubtful in Atdc proee.

1830. The potential optative with ir may be nsed, in a sense akin to that
of the imperative, to express a command, exhortation, or request: X^it ir r^r
th^air tell me (yoQ may tell) yoar requeat P. Par. 126 a, rpoiytn ir move on
P. Phae. 220 b. This court«ous formula is nsed even where a harsh command
might be expected : x"!"^' "' <f'» '<" rix'< go viUhin viUh all apeed S. £1. 1491.

a. In TwS^' ir Tfiartliair ; tahither pray ahall I turn f Ar. Ran. 296 the naa
is akin to the delil>erative subjunctive (IBOG) or deliberative future (1916).

1831. The potential optative with ir is used in questions ; rlt ait it i^Xo-
f^iaatT; vsho uoutd not agree T (oiStlt: aeil. oix it dfioXoY^o-Mi) X. M. 1. 1. G.
So even the optative of wi^ : rl a^ iptip rfit m4 'lifirar tiSoit ; but if thou dost
not abide by thy oath what doat thou invoke apon thyaelft E. &ted,7&4 (lit.
mayett thou tuffer tehatf).

1832. rOt ir, tIi ir with the potential optative may be used to expieoa a
wish (especially in the tragic poets) : xiii a» iXoJ»m' o!i, would tliat f might die
£. Hed. 97, rli ir ir rixtt /liXw ^talpa oh, that aotae fate vionld ^edily come A.
Ag. 1446. Properly this usage is not a wish, but is simply a question hovi the
wish may be fulSlled.

1833. The potential optative irlth Ar (especially with negatives) may ex-

■S4o] IMPERATIVE 409

change with the IndicAtWe : ^/d ■■! aiit &r ^wifitliir I attert and cannot dett|r
D. 21. 101. It is often stronger, though more conneoiu, tbui the tatnie indica-
tive : oit Iw ripi ^fiaaiiu I viUl apeak no more S. O. T. 348.

ISM. The fatare optative with ir ocean 011I7 in ft few Biiq>ected puMgea.

lUPBBATIVE

U3S. The imperative ie used in commands and prohibitioDs
(n^^tive /11)), All its tenses refer to the future.

M. Under commands are included requeata, entreaties, summons, pteaciip-
tloDS, exhortations, etc.

b. For the tenses of the ImperaUve, see 1840; for tlie inflnltive used as
an imperaUve, see 2013.

POSITIVE (COMMANDS)

1636. In exhortations £y€, ipipt, t$i (usually with &^, sometimes
with vif), often precede the imperative: 3.y< 8^ ixowmr* come listen
X. Ap. 14, JvcTi &(irtii<Fcir( go note, take your supper X. H. 6. 1. 18,
iXX' tA dwi but come, say P. Q. 489 e.

1837. rat Is sometimea used with the second pereon in poetrj : <(kom wit
hear, everjf one Ar. Tbesm. 872.

1838. The Uilrd person ma; tw used in questions; otiaiBr KtlaeuTaBra 1 thatt
lAete point* be etablithed ^ P. L. 820 e. Cp. 1842 a.

1839. The imperative may be used in aesumpttona {hypothettcat Imperative'),
to malie a concession, or to grant permission : t^O y tttx tcru let St be atsumed
a* far a* I am concerned D. 20. 14, avrun ix*ru it ri X^cu aunme it tc be at
you ni|r P. 8. SOI c. 80 even as a protasia ; SttfiTu, tiyii tTipia let Kim tet it
forth and IwBl be content D. IS. 112.

HBOATIVB (PROHIBITIONS)

1840. Piohll)lUons are expressed t); iii with the present or aoriat subjunc-
tive in the first person plural ; by ^4 ^t^ ttiB present Imperative or the aorist
subjunctive In the second and third person singiUai or plural (cp. 1800). The
aorist imperative Is rare in prohibitions.

A I Person. — 1>4| -vp<4«|u* ((tl| yp&<|w|W*) : *(* luuj-iiuBit /i^f alaxpi^ i".
Xd^wfa let u« not act lOee madmen nor perith disgracefully X. A. 7. 1. 29.

B. 3 Person. — |i)| ypi^* If^ YpA4*") = ''t Bai/ialt don't be attonithed P. G.
482 a, M »ap«fitrrt don't raise a ditturbanre P. A. 21 a, ri nir nlti, tA Si m4 "Ut
do thii asd r^f^tn from doing that P. Pr. 326d, fij) fi^a \iyt don't boast to
P. Ri. 06 b. — ^1) YP^+IX if^ YP^^n) : fvii lav^Tit riit and do not won-
der at lAtt A.Ag. 670, ^4 Bo^fi-^T]Tt don't ralie a ditturbanee P. A. 20 e, /li)
<UMt roVv (lon't do otheraite F. Lach. 201 b, /aiSaiilit IXXwt rai^ff-gi Ar.
Av. ISS.

N. — The tTpe f^ yp^+D* '" never oaed. |i)| ^p&^v occurs rarely in poetry
(i\410,Z134.— ■348, 8. fr.4&3 parodied ill Ar.Thesm. 870).

,= Cooiik

410 BTNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [iSm

C. 3 Peiwo. — |i4| ypa^irm (|i)| ypm^trrmr) : fntlfli taavKfm Ut no one im
mc T. 1. 80, fiiTJtti reur' iymlrv Itl no one be ignoraiU of (Af* /aa Am. 8. «.
|i)| Ypail^Tn (|j,)| Ypai|(d*T«v) ; ;iir><tt HfturdrH I«f no one think X. C. 7. 6.73,
>i4r' iTe7>i^>« >it|M>> ft^Tt KaTn^nirrbi ie( AJm neither acquit nor condemn in
anv vxiy Aea. 8. SO ; and in fire other panagea giving the actual usage of the
orators. Id the third peraon Uie ooiiM impentiTe ia much leal common than
the preaeut imperatiTe.

N. — The type |i)| irp&^ i> oaed only when the third person repreaanU the
fiiHt person (ISOO o). |>)| YP&^ Is much more common than /ij) ypa^drv in the
orators, e.g. /afitit tfau^o-p let no one be aetonithed D. 18. 100, /iqJdt Mfiif let
no one think T. S. 18, D.33. 1.

D. The perfect imperative is rare in prohibltlona (^1) n^^fl* T 0. 17) and
la oaually poetical. Cp. 696, T12.

1841. a. 1^1 ypi^ like don't write, is ambipioaa and may mean, according
to the Hituatlon, either ceaK vnrillng or abstain fiom writing. Commonly m4
ipd^ meaos do not go on writing, write no more, and is an order lo st^ an
action already begun. In many caaea, however, /ti) with the preeent Impetmtive
does not refer to the Interruption of an action already begun, but to an action
still in the more or leaa dJataut future against which the speaker urges realstuice.
Sometimes the reference to the future la directly or Indirectly indicated by the
context.

b. pii ypd^Tit UBuanj has tbe force of (I beg that) j/o^ will not write, (uke
care that you) don't write, and la commonly a complete prohibition against
doing something not already begun. Sometimee, and eq>ecially la expressions
of a colloquial character, ^i} with the aorlst subjuuctive marks the speaker's
interruption, by anticipation, of a mental (less often of a phy^cal) action that U
being done by the person he addresses ; as ^4 Saufuiviit (P. L. 801 b) in reply to
an exclamation of surprise. Here the type /tl) ypdi/'Dt often expresaes impatience,

c. If fij) ypi^ elicits a reply. It is (iXX') oA ypA^, white M ypA^t la
answered by (dXX') e6 ypii-u. Thus, /i4 / itSliiurn rait •plXau (Thu n^r.
iWoiStldmu do not teach me to be baae to my ftiend*. Butldonot S. E1.3B5,
«t oBr Ixn» irofiyiirrtpor ^/iT* *rii(ifBi in BtSairri* ianr ii iprr^, /i^ ^fcr^o^ dXX'
irtitifyr. dXV . , . oi ^Bor^u now if you can show u* nwre clearly tltat vfrtve
it capable of being taught, don't refuse, but thow u*. Well, I will not r^fiue
P. Pt. 820c So M ypipi commonly answers ypi^, aa S^u/idtu, ft f iyi,
Kal ah-ii. dXXi (i^ Sai/ia^, l^ij / myself am aelonithed, laid I. Cea»e your
OMtonishment, taid the P. S. 206 b, cp. S. El. 896. So /i^ ypdifv answers ypdirt,
as In Hdt. 8. 140, Ar. Lya 1030.

d. fci) ypi^ and /il) ypiif-\ii are often found in closely connected elausea, as
Mttaix&t ei/jMirl iiot, liitii fi' ^ir^pi <fon'f be angry with me at all, nor ruin me
At. Nub. 1478, fi^r' imtirt ft^T i^' Irat xandr do ROt thrink from me nor tttfT

any harth wordt S. O. C. 731. The second prohibition may be more specific than
the first, as ruira ■ /aiSir tlrj/t n}rip> be tUent, don't toy anything chOdUk Ar.
Nub, 105. Less often nij -ypd^pi Is followed by nfi ypiipt, as uti pait*^f.rt ry
vfTorAJTi Inrd ■ ^i^ ttoptttrt (they will say) ' do not Come to the aid of one wto
hat enffered grievoutly ; Aotie no repard/oryour nart' D. 21, 211.

e. The difference between /t^ ypdifit and ^4 ypifv* ^ virtually a dlBerencs

1= Coo^^lc

iB48] INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE WITH Sv 411

of tanaee, th« pieseot denoting on aclioa contlnning, In process ; the ftorlat, an
action concloded, aummarlzed. So /><} ^wpov don't be fearful, ii^ ^p-<i9%t (Ion'!
be friffhtened. In mazimB fi4 with the pieaent imperative Is preferred: /i-ti i:\irTi
don'I be a thi^f, h4 xUf pt don't Meal this or that. laiKtri may be used in either
conatracUon. The distlnotjon is often Immaterial, often a difference of tone
ntlier than of meaning ; sometimea too roblle for dogmatic statement.

1842. The imperatlTe may be used In aqbordlnate clauees: tpiriipis tint
... Ac Kpfir Ipt^/iew there are mixing-bovil*, the brims of vhteh thax timet
crown S.O. C.4T3.

a. Especially after oU$a Interrogative in dramatic poetry : ohlf S Spirar ; do
yott know tebat yov art to do ? S, Hec 326, olo-tf' i^ ralttaon; do fO" know how
Ibid you act f fi. U. T. 648. olsff S baa become a partially foBsilized exprcBSlon,
and can be used as subject or be governed by a verb : oI«M rvr S /mt ytriaSu g do
yoK £now what I muit have done for rue f E. I. T, 1203.

1843. The nse of the imperative la to be ezpl^ned aa eqalvalent to !<i or
Xri i'^tl> ^^B infinitive.

1544. Sp la not used with the ImperaUve.

INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE WITH Sv

1545. The Infinitive or parUclple with tr represents either a past tense of
the indicative with St or the optative with ip. The context determines whether
the Indicative or the optative is meant. The participle with Ar is poet-Homeric.

1846. The present Infinitive or participle with ir represents the imperfect
indicative with ir or the present optative with it.

a. (IftT.) iiaiu AonSai/upfout ir iraxuptir ir' tticou I hear Ae Laeedaemontani

uted to return home (= ir irtxiipovr, ITOO) D. 9. 48, otarei yif rbr raripa ait ir
^X^rrnr; for do pou think my father would not have laien care t (= ait ir
t^\<xntr, 1780) D. 40. 36 ; n^^bn-fi ir ri^qi Tu7x<iKi>' in the belief that they
tetmld obtain reward (= ir ti^'x*'""*"') X. A. 1. 9. 29.

b. (part.) 9r>p I'X' f4 tuTi rlXeii airir trtrMorra Ti/r flrXinrJiniiroT wapffiTr,
Uvrdrur ar Irrur . , , dX\i}XiHf H-iPintSiTr which presented him from tailing
agatntt the Pelopowtete and laying it waste city by city when the Peloponne-
BiaDS would have been unable to come to the reteue of one another (= iiirtTw
ar ifo'ai') T. 1.73, riXX' irtxur Irtp ilwdr, rn/iaXdru though I might be able to
my tnveh else I past it by (_= Ir fxo'fu, 1824) D. 18. 268, iraf (a Xeyoii^rri AiiaiAriiT'
tr that miffht moat flatly be called Wisdom F. Fhil.SOc (=4 <ra^fa X^airo dv).

1S4T. The fntnre Influitive and participle with ir are me and mispected.
1848. The aorist infinitive or participle with Ar represents the aorlBt indica-
tive with ir or the sorlst optative with dr.

a. (inf.} KOpiiyt, elipUicir, ipi^m ir SoittT ipxur ytriaeiu it aeema probable
that Cyrve, ^hehadUeed, would have proved himeelf a moat excellent ruler (= it
iytrtra) X. 0. 4. 16, Hart nal liiiiriir ir 7vwm BO that even a Common man aivld
have underttood { = ir fynd} X. A.O. 1.81, TlirMptBawaetTn what do we think
our faU would bet {= rl ir wi9»tiMr i} X.A.i.1.11.

412 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [i>m

b. (part.) ip&r rh roparclxcfui fiftlvt i' Xq^r teeing Iftot tltt i
teall eoutdeofUy be captured (=ar htr^Sclit) T. T. 42, norMaiat i\iir koI IvrvMi '
a> aAriilxcir, cf ^^X4A|, ira^SwKrtirter Ae And (eieed PoMdoca and wouM kan
been able to Ice^ it himself, had hewtihed, he gave it up to them ( — iSvrtiffit tr)
D. 33. 107, offre irra oUrt a, ittiiitn XoTamawiv they fabricate itoritM uAtcA ,
neither art, nor could be, true T.6.36 (^= a tOrt Urtr oht ir lim-ni).

1849. The perfect inflnltive with iw represeuts tbe pluperfect IndicatiTe
with At or the perfect optative With ir: oM' Ari (Ir) p^iatur rdrra roS^ i>rl
rSr pap^ipuir ir ^Xuk/hii 7 itnoto lAot A« UKiitid ray that all thit Would tune been
taplured £y the barbariaTte (= Ir iiXiimaar) D. 19. 312, ^etrs to^ il7faa(ivrat
(trSpairaiiilcif Ir SiKalm nmX^BM he thought that thote vho did not know lAit
might justlg be deemed lervile in nature (= nxX^iUroi it thr) X. H. I. 1. 18.

For the ialinitive and participle without iv see 1866 ft, 1872 ff.,
and under Infinitive and Participle.

THE TENSES
189a By the tenses (' tense ' from tempos) are denoted ;

1. The time of an action ; present, past, future,

2, The sti^ of an action : action continued or repeated (in process

of development), action simply brought to pass (simple occur-
rence), action completed with a permanent result.

a. The lime of an action !■ either absolute or retattte. Time that is nbeo-
tutely present, past, or future la reckoned from the time of the speaker or
writer. Time that la relativelf present, past, or future in dependent clauses is
reckoDed from the time of some verb in the same sentence. In dependent
clauses Greek has do special forms to denote the temporal relation of one sctioD
to another (antecedent, coincident, sabBeqDeot}, but leaves the reader to infer
whether one action happened btfore, at Ike ttMtite time at, or qfter another
action. The aorist is tlius often used where English has the plupufect (IMS).
See IBBS, lOU. Unless specif refeience is made to relaUTe time, the ezprc*-
sions "kind of time," "time of an action," in this book are osed of abaoluic

b. In independent clauses only the tenses of the Indicative denote abaolate
time ; in dependent clauses they express relative time. The tenses of the sub-
juncUve, optative, imperative, infinitive and participle do not refer to tbe differ-
ences In kind of time. Thus ypd^nv and ypiif/at to write, ytyptt^rtt to Jtni*h
writing, may be used of the present, the past, or tbe futm« according to the
context. On the tenses of the optative, infinitive, and participle in Indirect di*-
conrae see 1802, 1860, 18T4. Tbe future infinitive may be used, outdde of indi-
rect discourse, to lay stress on the idea of futurity (1866 d).

c. Kven In the indicative the actual Ume may be different from that vrbich
would seem to be denoted by tbe tense employed. Thus the speaker or writer
may imagine the past as present, and use tbe present in setting foitii ao event
that happened before his time (1883); or may use the aorist « perfect of an
event that has not yet occurred (1084, 1050).

I;,C.00J^[C

i>5»] STAGE OF ACTION 413

d. Id tlie sab^niioUTe, optative (except In indirect diiooarae), and trapentlra
tlie kind o[ tline ia Implied only by the maod-lDrms, not by tlie lenses. The
lElation of the time of one action to the time of another usually has to be inferred
in all the moods.

e. The stage of an action Is expressed by all the tenaes of all the different'
moods (iaolDding the participle and Infinitive).

f The action of the verb of a aubordlnale clause may overlap niUi that of
tlie verb of the main claase. See 2368.

KIND OF TIME
um. Only in the indicatiTe do the tenses show time absolutely
present, past, or future.

a. Present time is denoted 1^

1. The Present : ypa^ I write, am writing.

2. The Perfect : yiypai^ I have written.

b. Past time is denoted by

1. The Imperfect: typa^ I wrote, wa» wrUing.

2. The Aorist : lypaifa I wrote.

3. The Pluperfect : lytypa^ I Aod written.

N. — Tte only past tenses are the augmented tenaea.
■ c. Future time is denoted by

1. The Future : ypmfHo I dudl wrUe.

2. The Futuie Perfect : ytypaf^nu it wUl have been loritien, rctft^u /

afiaU be dead (aAaQ hime died).

STAGE OF ACTION
18S2. Every form of the verb denotes the stage of the action.

a. Continued action is denoted by the present stem :

1. Present: ypa^ I am vnriting, TtiSat I am permtading {trying to

persuade), i*6ti i» in bloom.

2. Imperfect: iypa^w I was writing, imiOw I was persuading {trying

to persuade), ^v6€i was in bloom.

3. Future : ypa^m I shall write (shall be writing), ^aaiXtwra he wiU

reign.
N. — Continued action is Incomplete ; hence nothing is stated as to tlie con-
clusion. Thus 4it6yti he fiets does not state whether or not t^e subject suc-
ceeded In escaping.

b. Completed action with permanent result is denoted by the
perfect stem :

1. Perfect: yiypa^ IvunoK'qv I Aave written a letter (and it is now

finished), ^w$i)ict has bloomed {and is in flower).

2. Phiperfect: tytypa^ twurroXijv I had written a letter (and it was

thien finished), ^v0^Ka had bloomed (and was in flower).

414 SYNTAX OF THE 8IMPLB SENTENCE [1S5S

3. Futare Perfect: ytypdijitTai it vnU have been written, rtSw^ia he
wiUbedead.
c. Action simply brought to paas (simple attainment) is denoted
by tbe

1. Aorist : lypaijia I wrote, hrtura I persttaded (succeeded in pertnad-

ing), ipafftXivn he became king or lie was king, ^vSijn burst into
Jlower or loas in Jtower.

2. Future ; ypa^ii I shall write, ptunXxwtt he wUl becotne king.

N. — The aorlet lenue (dipwrof x<>^> from Vi*' iffine; unlimited, Uidefi-
nite, or undefined time) ia ao named because tt does not show tlie limlutioii
(V«>) of continuance (expressed by tb« imperfect} or of completion irith pei-
manent leenlt (expressed b; the perfect).

1853. The present stem may denote the simple action of the verb tn present
time without regard to its continnance ; as tfaufidfiii / am ttieed Kith attonUh-
ment, iirTpirTii U lightens (once or conlinually), SlBu/u I make a pretenL Thi»
is called the aorUUc present. On inceptive verbs, see 626.

1854. The future stem ma; denote either continued action (as In the present)
or simple occurrence of tlie action of Che -verb (ss in the aonst). Thufl Tpdf m
/ shall be wrUiag or 1 >hall write. See 1910 b.

less. Some verbs are, by their meaning, restricted ta the tenses of con-
Unoed action, bh ipir behold, ^pttw carry ; others are exclusively aorlatic, sa
ISiir properly glance at, iiryiirir bring. Verbs exprening different Idnds of
action in their several tenses (as ipar, Ittir) unite to form a verbal syMem.

1856. The difference betiveen the present stem (present and Imperfect) and
the aorist stem may be compared to the difference between a line and a point
(both starting point and end). Thus, IpxtrSai go, i\Btlf come, arrive; ^4pn*
carry, twryKtl* bring; ivtiF accompany, lead, iyaytiw bring to a goal.

1857. For the ' pragresaive ' tensee of Engliah (fo walking. Hot been fffoinff,
etc.) Oreek has no exact equivalent. The periphrasis of the present participle
with iaH, etc. is employed to adjectivize the participle or to describe or character-
ize the subject like an adjective, i.e. thesubject has a quality which it may diaplaj
in action. Thus, ApiSKarrts itrptt Vie art acceptable T. 1. 38. ical rdrr' Aratrxt-
fufdl icat tit aStrbi roiofijKMI ri ToSroir i)iapriiiiaT' irrlt and he takCM upoa httn-
aelf and adopts all their miadfedt I). 19. 36. irrl may be emphatic : frrt r^v
Stxa Stetpoiiitror there exists a tuto/old divition P. L. 89G d. Bome participles hav«
become completely adjectivized : avfi^tpuf veefid, Siapipur superior. Cp. 1961.

1858. Primary and Secondary Tensea. — The primary tenses refer
to present and future time (present, future, perfect, and future per-
fect), the secondary or historical tenses refer to past time (imperfect,
aorist, pluperfect).

a. The gnomic aorist (193! b) is regarded as a primary tense, as is ttae aoriat
when need for the perfect (IMR), and the imperfect Indicative referring to
present time (1T88) ; the historical present (1883), as a secondary tense, llta
subjunctive, optative, and imperative moods in tbeir independent ntes ptdnt to
the future, and all their teases therefore count as pihnary.

i«)] THE TENSES OUTSIDE OF THE INDICATIVE

THB TENSES OUTStDE OP THE INDICATIVE

1859. Thfl tenses of the moods except the indicative do oot ex-
press time in independent sentences.

laea SubJanctiTe. — The subjunctive mood as such refers to the
future. The tenses do not refer to differences of time, and denote
only the stage of the action (continuance, simple occurrence, comple-
tion with permanent result).

Preaent (contln nonce) ; ri airdii i/ia ianpifiiiuSa let ve at the lame time
htep developing our raourctM T. I. S2 ; Aorist (aimple occurrence) : raiMiiiiitBa
ttr TpArer rlir tarinir let us procure the monej/fi''*t T, 1.83; Perfect (cowple-
tion Witb perniiuieilt rCBUlt) : Iin, Ijr ftj) vraxaiuai, rtSi^tairir that, in COM the]/
du not submit, thep may be put to death (lit. may be dead kI once) T. 8. T4. The
■oTtet coiiuiioD)y replaces the mote exact perfect because the perfect is rai«ty
Dsed.

ft. The future time denoted by present or ftoriat (rlriKiS^io; or tI TDt^vw^oi
wAot thall we do f) ma; refer, according to the sense, eltber to tbe iie^t inoniQnt
or U> aome later ^me. Greek has no sabjunctive form denoting an inlealion to
do tSw or that. In dependent conslractlons (Including general conditjons] the
action of the present ts generally coincident (rarelj Bubsequent), tbat of the
aotiot is geneisllf antenor (rarely coincident), to the action of the leading ?erb :
XoXnolMiwi, irnSit alrrtU To^aryAXui rfHtr ri ^iptiatan then ore angry uficn-
ettr I bid them drink the poison F. Ph. 1 16 c, twtitit iwarr di stoqrc, uptmrt
ahen yov (shall) have heard everything, decide D. 4. 14. The use of the aoriM
of time relatively anterior to the action of the leading Terb (— Lat. future per-
fect) la, like its other referencee to lelailTe time, only an inference from the
connection of the thought (IBSO a),

b. Present and aorlst subjunctive are occasionally used in the same sentence
wiAoni any great dHTerence In sense (X. C. 1. 2. 6-7, 6. 5. 13).

C An Independent or dependent subjunctive may be ingressive (1Q24) : i)r
yip 6 nXovTof nii ^X^n for if noto PluHii reaxiers hit sight Ar. Fl. 494.

d. In general conditions (2836) the Bubjunctive refers to general time, denot-
ing what botds true now and at all times.

UGl. Optative (not in indirect discourse). — The reference is
always to future time. The tenses do not refer to differences of
time, and denote only the stage of the action.

Present (continuance) r rX*tfirio» B* w/ififf" Ti» •"^ir "'Oi' I (always) count
the wise man wealthy P. Fbae. 219b; Aoriat (simple occurrence): tt yip yipoirg
woMid that U might happen X. C. 6. 1, 38 ; Perfect (completion with permanent
resnlt) : rrfnfqf die (lit. mag you be dead) Z 164.

a. In general oonditlons (2336) the optative is used of past time.

b. In dependent conatructlons (Including general conditions) the action of
the present is generally coincident (rarely anterior), that of ilie aorUt generally
anterior (rarely coincident), to the action of the leading verb : tt th rdJ* a-opo-
fiidtti, irvfiit IfTu ToQ 'AvMXum if any one violatet this, let him be accurst of

416 SYNTAX OP THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [iStt

Apollo A««. 8. 110, iwttHi ii iroixltlii (ri latiiuripaw), tlirjim wofA rir ZMXplm
wheatver the prison wo* opened, lee (»]*fayB) teent fn lo SoeraleM P. Ph, fiQd.
The aoiist is oflea preferred lo the more exact perfect becaiue the perfect wt»
rarely used.

c. An independent or dependent optative may be iugnaslTe (1924} : <J

Ttifit/fiaaitur St 'ilp<iir6r, oMir ir ifiai raStir ^Toufuu tf ue Aould enttr upon il
tear on accouni of Oropttt, I IhinJc we »Aould tuffer nolAlnjf D. 6. lfl>

18G3. Optative (in indirect discourse). — Wheu the optatiTe in
indirect discourse represents the indicative after a past tease of
a verb of saying or thinking, each tense does denote time (aa well as
stage of action) relatively to that of the leading verb.

a. The present optative repreeenta tha imperfect as well aa the prewnt in-
dicative.

b. The futnre optative (flrat in Pindw) occurs only in Indirect diacoone
after verbe of taj/iiig and thinking. In object clauses after Swut, 2S12, and iti
Other indirect ezpreaslDns of tbon^lit.

C. When the optative in indirect diacouise represents thesubjonctive (36191)},
lla tenses denote only stags of action.

1863. 0. Premnt opt. = present indie. : dnifiiMl rl jMXwrro he demandtd
wAot (Acy wanted (= r( 0a6\t<ret ;) X. A. S. 3. 4.

b. PreMDt opt. = iinperf. indie : SiTryiBpTo Art irl nit rdKi/ilaut vMmir (Jkqr
explalntd that thejf kept tailing a^aitMt the en«mv ( = ixXioiur) X. H. 1. T. 5.

C. Future opt. = future indlc. : S n tm4'« '^ n^au tin He 4bt not tell
even these ahat he would do (= cMikw) X. A. 2. 2. 2.

d. Aorisc opt. = aorist indie.: i/piiTa rf vdtou* he tuked what had ha^^ened
to them {=tI hrAStrti) X.C.2.Z. \fi.

e. Perfect opt. = perfect indie. : fKiyor Sri U iitri Aqfwvtf'Mvt rapeiittimut
v^fii uireit thq/ taid that the troop* of I>emottheHe» had ewvendered ( = npalt-
iduffO T. 7. 8S.

1864. Imperative. — The imperative always implies future time.
The tenses do not refer to differences of time, and denote only the
stage of the action.

a. Pieaant (continuance) : nii YoRiV rt^ honour thj/ parent* I. 1. 16, rirr*
riXi|#4 X/x fell (go on and tell !:# detail) the toAole truth L. 1. 18, rait tmn
ittlrcii SlioTt offer the horse* to thetn X. C. 4. fi. 47.

b. Aorlst (simple occurrence) : ^Wfor irpit ri ^ look (jMtt a glanft)
touard the mountain* X. A. 4. 1.20, ttwt ttate (In a word) P. A.24d, 1iit!t rtit
Frvrnt air* give the horse* to u* X.C. 4. 6. 47.

c. Perfect (completion with permanent remit): rtrdxA* let him lake Us
place (and st«y there) P. R. 562 a, tlf^Bit let it Aoee been said (onoe for all)
603 b.

N. — The perfect active and middle are generally used aa presents (r«#nlm
let him be put to death P. L, 038 o, lutuwiirtt remember D. 40. 30). The perfect
passive (In the third person) U used of a fixed decl^on oonoarning whM Is lo
be done or has been done.

itM] THE TENSES OUTSIDE OP THE INDICATIVE 417

186S. Inflnltlve (not Id indirect disconrse). — The tenses of the
infinitive (without dv) not in indirect discourse have no time of
themselves aud express only the stage of tlie action ; their (relative)
time depends on the context and is that of the leading verb (present,
past, or future). The infinitive may have the article (2025 S.).

«. Presnnt (continnanu) : oMi pou\t6tir9iu In api, dWi ptpovfitSaSai it it time
no longer to be making vp one's mind, but to have it made vp P. Cr. 46 k.

b. Aoriat (uinple occurrence) : rsu ntir triBvuiii the tUaire of obtaining
drini T. 7. &4, iipdnTe ytr4irBai began to be 1. 103, buC ipx"» ttytf<r9ai 3. 18 (the
tense of ylymiuu depends on tLat of ifixtitat \ not ^tp^ara ilynrBat), Sti roit iwip
K^oC X#7orTof pM^ai (IngrsBsive) one must conceive an acertion /or thote wflo
QMoJ; (n hi* behalf D. 9. G3.

c Perfect (completion with permanent reanlt): see a. Often of certainty of

d. Pntnie. — When the context abows that atrem ia laid on the idea of futur-
ity, the future inflnitive, referriug to future time relative to the main verb, ia
sometimes used instead of the present or aorist: oi* iriiKwXtatir Jvmrol Irrn
Hit being able to prevent T. 3. 28, soXXov Uti xar iitamoO IptU I am far ftom
intendittg to ipeak to my own disadvantage P. A. 87 b. On the future inflnltive
with /WXXw see 19&9.

N. 1. — The action set forth by a dependent pieaent or aorln inflnitlTs (with-
out Sr) not In indirect diBconrse has no time except that which la implied by the
context With verba aignifying to adviee or to command, and when the infini-
tive expresses purpose, the reference is to future time. Uaually the action of the
present and aorlat la coincident with or antecedent to that of the main verb.
The action of an aorist infinitive with the article and a subject Is not always rel-
atively past. The perfect (without it) has no time apart from the context ;
iCB action is uaually antecedent.

N. 2. — On the use of the present and aorist with verba at promising, etc., see
1S68; with fiA>u, see 1669.

N. 3. —Observe that verbs denoting continuance (as x^n* remain) often ap-
pear In the aorlat, while verbs of transitory action (as Umi send, hurl) often
appear in the present.

N. 4. — Present and aorist occasionally occur In close conjunction without
any great difference In meaning, as rpoo-^m t/ilt toAtqu larajfiTi^lftatat , . .,
3<i fviji MtaTor a&Toi naTa^if^laairBai it ia fitting that you vote against him, U is
necessary that you pass a vote of death against him L. 13. 69 ; cp. raviMxff'^
and pau/MXiir T. 2. S3, ^urarurri)! ylyrtafiu and yttivBtu Ant. 1. 10, 1. 11.

1066. Infinitive (in indirect discourse). — The tenses of the infini-
tive ill indirect discourse denote the same time relative to that of
the leading verb (present, past, or future) as was denoted by the
corresponding tenses of the indicative in direct discourse which they
represent.

a. Hie present Inflnltive represents also the imperfect, the perfect Infinitive
represent also the pluperfect Indicative.

I;.C00J^[C

418 SYNTAX OF THE 81MPLK SENTENCE [1M7

1). The action of tbe present b juomSj ooinoideiit, that of the aoiiat aateriot,

to the action of the Isading verb.

C Tbe future infinitive i£ found chiefljr in indirect disconree and in aoalogout
conatructionB. With nAXw, see 195G. It ma; have the article (3026).

18G7. a. Frasent = pres. indie. : ^/il rmha iiir ^XtUfilaf tJm I tay thU it
nonsense i= itrrO X A. 1,3,18.

b. Present — iniperf . Indic ; Krriflat l&rStu a^it ri rpuO/ii ^furt Slesia* rmerU
that he himaelf cured the wound (= lii/ttir) X. A, 1. 8. 26. With it, 1840 a.

C. Future = fut, [[idle. : f^i) 1) dfcir AiunSu/iavfoiii j) alrroS iwoxTtntr he taid

that he aovld either bring the LacedaemoTiiani or IcQl them on tht $pot ( = l(m,

droKTtrS) T. 4. 28.

d. Aoriat = aor. indic. i irraOSa X^n-u 'Ar6\\ur itStipiu Xapriaw then
Apollo issaidloha-ceJtayeiiMargva»(_=iiiStipt) X. A, 1.2.8. With tr, 1848a.

«. Perfect = pert. Ind. : ^irl ijKiiniar ytrtpa^rai he sage that he has teriUtn
an eTUOmStim (= yt^pa/pa.') 1. 10. 14, l^aaar rierim rir liripa they said the man
was dead ( = USniti) Ant. 6. £9.

f. Perfect = pluperf. Ind, : X^croi dripa ruA JnrnrX^x'oi it It said that a
eertain man had been faseinated (_= ^ntwkifCTa) X. C, 1. 4, 27. With dr, 1819.

1868. The coDitmctlon of Terbs of hoplDg, etc. ~~ Verba aignifying to hope,
expect, promise, threaten, tieear, with aome othera of like meaning, when Uiej
refer to a future event, take either the future infinttive (in indlKCt diacoune),
or the aoriat, leaa often the prsaenC, Inflnitlva (not in indirect discoqiEe), The
uae of tbe aoriat and present ia doe to the analog; of verba of will or den're
(1D91) which take an object infinitive not In indirect diacoune. The same anal-
og; accouDts for the nae of /rt instead of at (2TS6). The present or aoriat inflii-
itlve with ir, representing the potential optative with in, occqib occasionally.

«. if iXrlSi &r tA nCxq rQr 'A^nluv alpirtir hoping that he would Capture
the walls of the Athenians T, 7.44, Arli . . . irrpa^rw hope of being brouffAi
up L. le. 6, i\wl{ti Svrarit tlrai ipx"' ^^ esrpect* to be able to rule P. R. G73 c,

fX*>< rtri iXwlla ^4 ar . . . r^r raBr iwo\icai; have yov an^ expectation that
j/ou would not shipwreck the vettel T X. M. 3. 6. S8. /Xrl^ with the present infini-
tive ma; mean I feet sure that I am.

b. rix^ra eMira eltii i^r airf jSoirXttvirfu tlroi it is probable that V«ry »OOn
no one will wish to be with him X. C. 5. 3. 30, 4^t ilxii irutpariivai it it liMf
that we shall succeed T. 1.121, oAn tttii aireii rtpMivHr rt&rlx'it it it not likelg
l/ial they will continue to have ships to ipare 3. 13. With tU:6t the aoriat ia pre-

C trArx^o raSra TDnfniv he promised that he would do this L. 13. 14, iwf-
rx«rg fieuXiirafBu (most Mae.) he promised to deiiberaU X. A- 2. 3. 20. Tbe
aorlM infinitive is especially common with verba of promising and must refer to tbe
fature. With the preaeut infinitive bwvxiw/uu means / ai*ure, profesa, pledge
my word that I am.

d. <tnfX« impt^tir he threatened that he would destroy them Hdt. 0. 87,

4r«[XiIffar inmrtitai drarrai th^ threatened to kill everybody X. B. 6. 4. 7,

e. Smiettr 6/uii/iiKiiTt you have sworn fAot you wilt give judipnent D. 39. 40,
iwymif*! Tip KtpaopXfrTiir iiiiaai . . . dmi iiir tJjc (1^x4'' f'k' ■ • -i »4w«i 8*

iiut iniavKU riir x<^' he compelUd Cersobl^tet to swear that (Ae kiitffdom

1873] THE TENSES OUTSIDB OF TH£ INDICATIVE 419

•hottM 6e fN eonmon and that theg ihtnUd all mtore to yaw the territoty D. 23.
170.

t With Ifcmvu A dependent InflDitive may refer to the pieMnt, past, or
fatura (e). Thus, iitrdrrn f^irtfr . . . 'AxiXUd rdXi> sutaring that they see
AeiMU* again 8.Ph.86T, 4;in>MwifiJ) 'twUit thtf ivitar they did not drink Phe-
recnUM 143 (Com. fr. L 167), d/uw imiiw ilnninu he twore that he had said
MrfAliv (direct = oAUrfr/rq«) D.21,I19.

1869. Verba of uf II or dMfn (1991) regularly tahe the present otaoristinfln-
itive not In Indirect disconise ; but iu some cases we And tbe fnture inSnltlre by
awimllation to indirect diacbuise throngh the analogy of verbs ot promiting, eto,
(1866). So with po6\aiuu, i$ftM with, U^w meaning command, Sit/tai oak, iifiUnai
detire and some othera (even S^nfioi am able) tliat have a future action as tbelr
object. Tbus, iifiiiiitww Sfiitir being de$irout to gain control T. 6. 6, (U^mtm iwi-
jwXatt tftrBai unable to be eareflU X.. 0. 13. 12. aiaiwu/uu may follow tbe analogy
of fiAAu (1969) ; t4f r6\rtiar SurooBm wpoW/iui ofireir thej/ intended to carry on
the mar with teal T. 4. 121. In tbeee and similar cases the future is employed to
ttrass tbe future character of the action. Some editors would emend many of
tbeee future*.

X870. Verbs atgnitylng to foretell bg oracle nsoally take tbe present or
aoriat iufluitlve like verbs Blgnifying to command.

1871. A few cases stand in our texts ot an aoriat infinitive referring to tbe
future after a verb of saying or fAiiiitinif, e.g. Miufar ^fSlert Kpmitrai they thought
tA«y tcouU eatiln maaler tbem T. 2. 8. Many edltora change to the future or

3073. Partkl^e (not in iadirect diacotirse). — The participle, as a
rerliaradjective, is timeless. The tenses of the participle esjness
only continuance, simple occurrence, and completion with permanent
result. Whether the action expressed by the participle is antece-
dent, coincident, or subsequent to that of the leading verb (in any
tense) depends on the context. The future participle has a temporal
force only because its voluntative force points to the future.

a. Present (cOQiinaative). Tbe acUon set forth by tbe present participle Is
generally coincident (rarely antecedent or subsequent) to tbat of tbe leading

Tprb: i/rya^ianu /lir i^^frrur, Ipyatriiitiiu it ilttrHHir the women took Ihrir
noondav meal ahlle they continued their teork, Itut took their atifgier when they
had *(o^p«J leork X. M. 2. 7. 12,

1, Antecedent action (= Imperf.) : ol Kipaoi rpigBti air i/iiir raTTAfuni rOr
4^crTi)irav(r the forces of Cyrus that aere formerly marshalled vtith u* have now
dtmrted X. A. 3. 2. 17, rail rlrrt rapirrn nfTids'arrai viiv^i^aut they will accuse
those mho were their counsellors at that time P. G. GtO a, ol Koi>lrBuii iiixpi ro^ati
TfioM/utt rpi^rerrn iriUrar rfji ^iXoKiiciat the Corinthians, who up to that time
had been acting xealously, now slackened in their vehemence T. 6. 32. An adverb
{tpirtptt, TpicBtr, T&Tt, mri) often accompanies tbe participle, which is aome-
timM called the participle of the imperfect.

2. Subsequent action (especially v.nen the leading verb denot«B motion):
fnff^ar rphfint i-rtOAerrai T^t T0O HXq/uipfgv \^if they despatched messengers

420 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1B73

« U« ecfiure of Plemvrlum T. 7. 3G. An attributive present pait

W. rOr may refer U) tbe fttaolute present, thou^ the mala verb U past : r^r mi

Hautriir nXsvfi/rqt ynrrar tA«y $etlled in At country "ou called BotuCia T, 1. 1:!.

S. The pieaent participle denotes that an action ie In procees, is attempted,

or la repeated.

b. Ftttnie (chiefly Toluntative) : at avr^\9aiur in pafft\it ToXtfi^retrn im
haoenot come together for the puTpoae 0/ vmging war viiUi the king X. A. 2.3.21.

c. Aoiiat (simple occumnce). The action set forth by the aorist participle
fi geaeially aolecedent to that of (he leading verb ; bat It is sometimes coinci-
dent or nearly so, when It defines, or la identical with, that of the leading Tert\
and the subordinate action la only a modification of the mun action.

1. Antecedent: inrrlfsit ^(ip« after tnpper ht advanctd T. 3, 112, roAt An>-
Mpoui ArwtTtlrarm ±wtxiifivar ^/ter killing the free fHRn theg wUhdrea 6. 83,
twB/iiffitt^ he took an oath and taid X. C.4. 1.23, IjSn I' irl raira woptiaoiiai
ToroCrov aurir ipierivit 1 shall at once proceed to thiM matter after hamng put to
Aim certain qvtttioiu D. 18.124. The aorlst participle la often thus nsed when
it takes up the preceding verb : nSr fiir SawrtiTt ■ Stiwrijvarrn Si dnXaiicrt take
VOW tvpper now, and \ehen you have done to, depart X. C. 3. 1, 37.

2. Coincident : /r/i n <{a^pT7T< i/iaO aara^if^iiiiiani do not commit Ihe errnr
of eoiul«ffinin{r me F. A. 30 d, <> y ^oii^ai irtitriifit fir you did well in retnind-
ing me F. Fh. 00 c (= irinntrit iit tt rixuir). So also when an aorist participle
Is used with a future finite verb, as imWaxH^I'M pio" A^nCra by dying 1 »haU
be delivered from life E. Hipp. 3M. See also 2103.

8. The action of an attrihutive oorlst participle Is rarely sabsequent to that of
the leading verb. When this is the cose, the action of the participle is marked
SB past from the point of view of the present (like the aor. Indlc.) : •) *BXkifi>n
la-rifo* Kkifiirrn niitt rpt Tur Tpuirat iSpiei IwpHar the petite later tailed Bel-
lenet carried out no joint enterpriee prior to the Tri^n war T. 1. 3, "Zirvpat at
Xpifiair, b1 rSr Tpidcorra yo'dfuni, SXta^arrsi larin^ui' SotJ/nu and ChrmOH,

who (afterwarda) became membere of the Thirty, aeeueed Cleophon L. 80. 13 ; cp.
ytr6iurot T.2.49, 4.81.

4. The aorist participle is often ingresBive or complexive (1924, 1S27).

d. Perfect (completion with permanent reauU) : laTaXofi^iovrt BpitOir
fefXi)XirAiTs they found (historical present) that Braelda* had arrived T. 8. 60.
A perfect participle may have the force of a pluperfect If accompanied by an
adverb tike rpivStr (cp. 1B72 a. I) : j rpirtt xtxTtinim he whopoueeted tt before
S. Ph, 778.

1S73. Constroction of Xavf&iw, ^Kiw, nrfx^*"- — A supplementary aorist
participle with any tense, except the present or imperfect, of ),ar6iwu eacapt the
notice of, tpBina anticipate, rvyx^ru happen usually coincides in lime with the
leading verb: tXaSor titaurir aiSir tlwiir 1 wai uneameiovely talking nontenee
P. Ph. 76 d, XVofur iwiirnr6rTa We shall fall on them unavtaree X.A.T.S.43.
Bui the action of an aorist participle with the present or linperfect is generally
prior to that of the leading verb : irnt irrtiril/r y fr^x"* ^^° chanced to hart
tpoken in ojg}oeition L. 12. 27. See 2090.

1874. Partic^Ie (in indirect discourse). The tenBes of the parti-
ciple in indirect discourse after verbs of intellectual perception

iS79] PRESENT INDICATIVE 421

denote the same time relative to that of the leading verb (present,
past, or future) as was denoted by the corresponding tenses of the
indicative in direct discourse which they represent See 2106,
21t2b.

a. Present = pres. Indic. : the MtlOQ la generally coincident ; irnlir yrdcit
iriffroAfum ioA«n thty find out that they are dUtnuted (^ Jri i-rieroi/uea)
X. C. 7. 2. IT; rarely antecedent (when the preaent = the imperf. Ind.) : grid o-e
MyoTa ill I know that you alviaiis uted to M)r(= 9ri fXrvci) 1. 0.6.

b. Future = fut. indlc, : iynti rir tri\iiui* StSf Iffarra he ia ignorant that the
i«ar wm eojM htre (= »ri i riXt/wt <{«) D. 1. 16.

C. Aorint = aor. iodic. : rir itffior triur M r4» UtMtirrjiaer AMrra we
Jautte that the Mede eame again*t tAe Peloponnete (= Sri i MfjSin 4Xfc)T. l.«9.

d. perfect = perf. indic. ; ei yip fStrat a^iw TtBr^K&ra for theg did not know
that he vae dead (= tn riemi"') ^- A. 1. 10. IS. The perfect may also represent
the pluperfect (cp, J872 d),

TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE
PKE3EKT INDICATIVE

1B7S. The present represents a present state, ot an action going
on at the present time: iXrfi^ kiyia I am idling the trvih L. 13. 72.

a. On the present nithoat any idea of duration, aae 185S.

ISTCl Preaent of Cnstmnary Action. — The present is used to ex-
press a cnstomary or repeated action ; oEtk piv yap v^p, lyia S atvor
wlrm for this man drirUa water, wkereaa I driitk wine D. 19. 46.

1077. Preaent of Oeno^ Truth. — The present is used to express
an action that is true for all time : iyu St n-pof (^ r^ iXijStuiy xparai
lime In-ingg the truth to light Men, Sent. 11.

a. The present la an dbtolvte tenie in auch aentencM. The future, aoriat,
and perfect nay also expreea a general truth.

107B. Conatlve Preeent — The present may express an action
begun, attempted, or intended.

r^r Si(,ar To^r rtlBawir b/iSt drs^aXcir they OTt trying 10 periUOdt (rou tO
throte amag thit renown 1. 6. 12, lUuitl vm mirlir ra^c yumIks / offer you thU
ux,man hereetf at a wife X. C. 8. 6. 19, wpUaoro, r^r 'EXXdJa they are tryiitg to
brtray Greece At. P. 408.

a. This nae U fonnd also in the infinitive and participle \ ^iXIttsu trl Bvfdi>-
Tior vapiirrin when PhU^ it preparing to advance agaitM Bytanttum D. 8. M.

b. The idea of attempt or intention ia an Inference from the context and Ilea
in tbe preaent only so far as the preaent does not denote completion.

1879. Preaent for tbe Fntnre (Present of Antldpatlon). — The pre-
sent is used instead of the future in statements of what is immediate,
likely, certain, or threatening.

fwrof » T*r Xbynr Ka,ra>Atiuw ; thoU «t hrevA (UT in the laiddit t P. 0. 606 0,

422 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [iSSo

(ol (I PotXti, npaxtpa 'M toO p^iiarM, tut \r etryt and (^ yoti wlfA, I wOI jrleli
you eA« jloor HRlil jfou (ell iu Aeo. 3. 166, driUufuu / am on (A« Mtv> <i^ ntfa
AdL G. S6 (bo driiXXtrrs 5. 37 of put time), */ svrq 4 riXit Xtr^^cru, 'x*"" "^
4 rdf-a ZinXU ^ thit city it taken, tke viuile of SicUy at well i» in thtirpover
T. 6. 91.

a. Sometimes in questlouB to Indlcftte that the declaiou moat be made on Uie
spot: 1) rat Uyaiitr; or how thall we taf f (what must we uy T) F.G.480b.

1880. tliu ia regalarly future (J tJuUt go) In the indioatiTe preaenC In the
Bubjunctive it is always future ; in the optative, Inflnltire, and parUciple it may
be either future or preseut. Cp. 774, In litr ra&ra X^< go and lay thtt (X. C. 4.
5. 17} liir is used of lime relatlrely past In Horn. <I/ii means both / go and /
Aallgo.

1881. Ipxpfuu, rapemfLoi, vit^tat (poet.) may be xxafA in a future
sense, yiat means either I pour or / ahaU pour. JSo^uu I »haU eat,
Trfofuu / »haU drink, axe present in form. Gp. 511.

1882. Oiacnlar Present. — In prophecies a future event may be npaiai as
present : xfi^wv Aypti Hpiiiiev riXir ftS* xAn'Sn in time thie exfMdftfon xoHl a^
tur« Friam't ctt|r A. Ag. 126.

1883. Hiatorlcal Prewnt. — In lively or dramatic nanatioii the
present may be used to represent a past action as ^ing on at the
moment of speaking or writing. This use does not occur in Homer.

i ii BefuffTBKXQt ^t6ya ti Kiptvpar . , . Suumnlltreu ft rlir ffimpot TJltmtttodt*

fied (JUea) to Careyra . . , mu (it) trantported to the mainland T. 1. 136.

a. 'i.'he historical preaent may lepieeent either the descriptin imperfect or tba

b. The hlsMrtcal present may be coordinated with past tenses, which may
precede or follow it : A/u ti rg 4/^p9 ri 'Mn rpav/Ktirt lol ol^r at daj/braak A«
attaulCed the town and took it T. 7. 2Q, avra 14 dvtypi^rru rimt AtfXmfiir ri

ri h'Xa accordingly they all enrolled themtelvet and toot the amt X. C. 8. 1. 19.
C. The historical present is lesa frequent In subordinate clauses (T, 2. 91. S).

1884. Annallitic Pnaent. — Closely oonneoted with the historical
present is the annalistio present, which is used to legister histoncitl
facts or to note incidents.

^aptUu rat Uapuadritn ylftvrrtu nUti lie of Dartut and Paryiattt were (art)
bom two eons X. A. 1. 1. 1, wpi Anmixii*u yi-fi (ZntUq^t) riXtvr? , . . Anrrvj^t.
Jqi 7a^i EipuSi/iitr, it r^t *l . . . yiirru fio'^rqp for Zeaxtdemut died bffort
Levtychlilet . . . L. married Surydame, from her wo* bom to him a daughter
Hdt. 6. 71, (ol 6 /nsurii (Xir7"< '' 4 Kapzi|Un« al^Oiri ttfo ri\m 'EXX^vUsi

and the year came (o an end in which the CartAaginlant eopturtd two Oreek cUiet
X. H. 1.1. 37.

1885. Present of Put and Present Combined. — The present, when
accompanied by a definite or indefinite expression of past time, is
used to express an action begnn in the past and continued in the
present. The 'progressive perfect' is often used in translation.

iSgo] IMPEBFECT 423

Thus, woXm 0bv>mCCu I Itave been Um^ (and am still) wondering P. Cr.
43 b. Cp. iavidvdum loquor. So with wipot, wori This use appears
also in the other moods.

a. So witli verba ot hecoing, taj/lng, leanUng, whom kcUod commenced In the
past, bat whoM eSect continues Into the preMDl: ii Jr ixoiu from what I htar
(.Aoce heard) X. A. I. 9. 26, iwip Uyw as I laid P. A. 21 a. So with aitffinuM,
fiyriiaKu, liayBiru, Tupftlro^t. IpTt Jutt Is often found with iheee Terbs.

b. The perfect Is used instead of the present when the action is completed in
(he present.

1886. Presaiit for Perfect. — ^xa I am come, I have arrived, (^/"u
/ am gone, have a perfect sense ; as also tpjpitoi, AifuKymnta. Ttius,
ScfiurroKA^ ijKoi irapii fri I Themittodea have come to you T. 1. 137, olSa
arti oi)(inmu I knoto where they have gone X. A. 1. 4. 8.

a. 4(u may be need In connection witli the gnomic aorist (P. 6. 188 a').

1S87. Tbe present of certain verh« often expresBea &n enduring result, and
may be translated by tbe perfect ; daitH 1 am guilty (diuit tl/u), I have done
wrong, riiO, uparul, I am vtetoriout, I have eongvered, ^rrfljioi / am conquered,
Iftryit I am the defendant or / am an exile (ol ipii^iirTti the fuglUvet and the
exilr»}, rpolltaiu I am a traitor, iXLrteiuu I am captured, aripaiuu I am
derived, yliniuu I am a descendant.

^■H tit rj)v v^r olKlar, iSitS f aiiir I am Come to thg hoiue, but Have done no
wrong L. 12. 14, irayyfKiitTi 'Xpiaiif Sri 1)imU 7* tU^ittr §aai\ii report to Ariaeu*
that ire at UaU have conquered the king X. A. 2. 1. 4.

a. So, in poetry, itnSi, ^tu, tIktu, Bwianu, SWu/Mt. Thus, fit rlmn at thta
uoman (Aa« born thee =) U thy mother E. Ion 1660.

1888. In subordinate clanses, tbe action ezpreesed by the present may be
(a) contemporaneous, (b) antecedent, or (c) subsequent to that set forth by tho
main verb. The context alone decides In which sense the present is to be taken :
(a) fXrrtv tfri (rn^iot tfi) -ttyiitBu atrelt he laid Chat he teat ready to lead them
X. A. 6. 1.38; (b) when the present states an action begun in tbe past and con-
tinued in tbe present : Htlrt Si Il/jwai tx'""^ ^^ cpdni, (ri rtSlor) tarl Toii ^aai-
Um from the time that the Perttani began to hold tmay, it betongi to the king
Hdt. 8. 1 1 7 ( and with the historical present : ui ti ^(yiiOfToi hr aOrf, iartwTtvnr
uhen thejf came to it, they ruthed in T. 7.84; (e) iyirrrtfi^pi . . .ti rnpi raOra
ircuttr, nXiifnt an ordinance was paued . . if they act contrary to thii, to
punith them X. C. 1. & 38.

1889. The imperfect represents an action as still going on, or a
state as still existing, in the past : Kvpot ovwai ^xtv, AW* tn vpoir^Xavit
Cyrus had not yet arrived (1886), but was still marching on X. A, 1. 5.
12, IfiairlXctxv 'AvTio;^ Antiochus teas reigning T, 2. 80, The con-
clusioti of the action is usually to be inferred from^the context.

1890. Imperfect of Ccntlntiuice. — The imperfect thus represents
an action as continuing in the past : SiiiltOapar A^vat'uii' wcvtc koX drnm.

424 SYiirrAs: of the simple sentence [tsst

0* fmcxttXiopirovrTo thetf put to death tiventy-_five of the Athaniana wko
were besieged (i.e. from tiie beginning to the end of the siege) T. 3. 68.

1891. Tbe imperfect of verbs of sending, going, sailing, eschorting, etc.,
which Imply coatinuouB action, is often used where we might expect tbe
aorist of concluded action. Thus, in Ivtiiraw, the actinn ia regarded aa un-
finiabed aince the goftl is not reached : Arr'^n' trtitrtm lal roiit rttpoit &roawir-
S«m dir^Siwar IMy tent a messenger taid tumndered the dead under a truce
T. S. 6. In /kA*mv gave ordert, urged, requested the command, etc, is re~
garded a« not jet executed. In jrXrycii aArmi roiiSt he tpoke to them at follatM
X. U. 1. 6. * (followed by the speech and ^el ii raur' tinr 1. 6. 12) the speech
U not thought of as a flniahed whole, bat aa developed point by point, aa id
4vhS^ Si ttrm ToOrt (y^ir, fk^ia but when he had taid thie, J said Ant.e.21.

a. Id mesaeDger's speeches the speaker may go back lo the time of receivlDg
a command: Unt v JiAfuor al rrparitytl rii^V^' the geueralt order jfou to
dtjiart to-day At. Ach. 1073.

1S92. The Imperfect, when accompanied by an expression of past time, la
oaed of actions which had been In progress for some time and were atil] io
progreaa (cp. 1886) : ri '?^iyla^ irl roMr xftfor iaToalafe Bhegium had been Jot
a toTig time in a ttate of faction T. 4. 1. If the action ia regarded as com-
pleted tbe pinperfact Is used.

1893. Imperfect of Cnitomaiy Action. — The imperfect ia used to
express frequently repeated or cuatomaiy past actions: iirti dSor
avrov cHircp wpotrSti/ wpoercKuvoav, mu rore vpixrtKvitftrav V>ken they caug/it
tight of him, the very men who before thie were wont to prostrate them-
telaea before him, prostrated themselves on this occasion also X. A. 1. 6.
10, ( ZsMpaTTff ) rovf iavTov iwiffi/univTai mix JsytaT-rcro jfp^fiara SoCT&tes
WO* Tiot in the habit of demanding money from those who were possum-
atay attached to him X. M. 1. 2. 6. See &lso 2340.

a. Tbe repetition of a simple act id the past is expressed by roXXini witli Um
aorUt (19S0).

1894. ItsTatiTa Imperfect— dv may tte used with this imperfect (ITM):
ivfMjui if ra iTi -wWtlu airoS ittitir people would (used to) desire to hear
ttai mor« from him X. C. 1. 4. 3.

1895. CoiuitlTe Imperfect — The imperfect mai7 express an acdoD
attempted, intended, or expected, in the past.

(ruAir ainCt, nol <njt trtura, raAravt Ix"* 'raptvi^iii* I tried to pemMde tken,
ami I marched aiBOg with those ahom I tveceeded i» pertitading X.C.6.6.2!,
•jMtrv" ««o"* * >' iTvyip^ »** XartMwif Philip Offered (propoaed to give)
Batonmsvs, but he (Demosthenes) dtttuaded them from aeceptlna it Aaa. 8. 83.
eri^aiw lartimXeOrr' fl*T«it the. Thrbans tried to enslave them D. 8. 74, ^horr*
ii Tiir K/pjcu/Mr theji Kwre for pushing on to Coreyra T. 4. 3.

a. Here may be placed the imperfect equivalent In sense to l/uXt^r with the
iDftnlUve. Thns, ^rtiti oB* airii tytyrinv iy^ n^t tl"!>' t*^' * ««»»•. »ti
U TfiiiMf Ion' Aevalur iwiiXKoow I VMU on the point »f becoming theirm^iTdmr

iSn] IMPERFECT 426

{itOtrfeetMrHt eram) had I not told you what I heard. And buidei I threatened
tkrtr hundred Athenians wUh death And. 1.68. So ia-wXU/itrv I \eai threatened
vtth death.

1896. Imperfect of Reaiatance or SefasoL — With a negative, the
imperfect often denotes resistance or refusal (wmild not or could not).
The aorist vith a negative denotes unrestricted denial of a fact.

T^r wpiikTtair atx UixtaBt j/ov would not accept the propoeal T.8.&4 (rj)r
Urrtliw dAi ISiiam they did not receive the ntpplicaeioii 1. 24), i pit aix tyiiui,
i 3i lyiiiar the one uoutd not marry, the other did D. 44. IT, oMi ^urj)r ittmor,
tlTu «\X» Ti ^XoiT-o \fyu they wowid not even litten to a ej/llable if ever my
one withed to tay anything to the contrary D.1S.43. So tin tCi he would not
Moa ihewtu not for allowing).

ia97. U simple podtiTe and negatlre ore contiBsted, the soiut Is pre-
ferrcd witb the Utter: ri twipxarri re aiit^it (positive w[th present) nol
twiyf&foi fBiUr (D^otlve wltb aorist) to preterve what yott have, and to form
no KMO plan* T. 1. TO. Bnt where tbe verb itaeU contains or implies a negative
idea, tlie present is used: wapeTiiai xat >i4 iwoStuiar to be pretent and not to be
abroad Aes. 2. 59.

1898. Imperfect of Description. — The imperfect describes manners
and customs ; the situation, ciicnmstances, and details, of eveuts ; and
the development of actions represented aa continuii^ in past time.

hitrit T« Toitt i^' iairrv Emrtp /aiToO raJtai trtiia, of re Ipx^l""* Kflpiiv in
raripa, httpom ht (Cyrus) treated hi» tubjedt with honour a» if they were hte
own children, and hit luftjert* reverenced Cyrvi like a father X. C, 8. 8. 2, rf*4»
iirP6iiadir rt wdrTIt loJ r/mrrtairrtt liiixefTa, 'iMaur, /uSoBrra, firwor, twaloiTO
^mediately all raised a ihout and falling upon each other fought, pHihed and
were pvahed, struck and were struck T. 1. S&, irtl ti roirra fyf^Sii, iwtpriarTii ■
Tfir St irarriirrwT ol /lip irierggKor, ol ti l^iruyar rdXtr «tiru, el Si ipiur and
when theee word* had been spoken, they proceeded to advance ; and of those who
wtet them some vxre killed, others fled back indoors, and others shouted 7. 6. 29,
irrparirrn Si a^Qw 'ApurreOi Aristeus teat their commander T. 1. W ; cp. X. C.
I.S. 28, X. Ag. 2. 12, X. A. 4. 3. 8-25, laocr. 1. 9, 7. 61-68, D. 18. 160 0., Aes. S. 193.

N. — llie imperfect often hoc a dnunatic or pononmic force: it enable!
tbe reader to follow the course of events as they occurred, as If he were a
spectator of the scene depicted.

1899. The imperfect is thns often used to explain, illustrate, offer
reasons for an action, and to eet forth accompanying and subordinate
circumstances that explain or show the result of the main action.
Deecriptive adverbs are often used with the imperfect

irraSSa tiittmt iiiiipSx witrt ■ taX T«fi rrpoTiiiran d*eft«TO fu^Mt xMor # rpiAr
m>2v, (ot ToXXdni Una hil rat Bipit irirwr ■ i ti fKriSat \iyur fi^^* «^ SSj>at

f V iniptm there lie remained for five days ; and the soldiert whose pay was In
arrears for more than three monOis k^t going to headquarters and demanding
their dues ; hvt he kept exprtising his expectation (of making pafment) and tM*
plainly annoyed X. A. 1. 2. It. See also 1907 a.

i,,Coog[c

426 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [igao

UOa InchoatlTe Imparfect— The imperfect may denote the be-
ginning of an actioa or of a series of actions : tra^ fit mupoc Vt
itpovipaXXw btU when the proper time arrived, they began an (proceeded
to) attack T. 7. 61.

1901. Imperfect for Vttamt — In descriptions of places and scenery
and in other statements of existing facts the imperfect, instead of the
present, is often used by assimilation to the time of the narrative
(tuually set forth in the main verb).

d^orro irl rir totoi/iAf «f 6ptf r^f T^r Hupdnir x<^' nl ^4' ^A' ZmfftAf

tltegcame to the river whteA divided the country of the Maeronet Jtom that oflAe

SqrtAeni X. A. 4. 8. 1, i(t\aim irl roraiiir r\4ini IxSiir. dvi oI Xipot etait iriiii{at
he mareKed to a river full o/Jtih, which Hit Syrtant regardtd tu goda 1.4.9.

1902. — Imperfect of a Troth Jnat BMOKnbwd. — The imperfect, QMoallr
Bome form of dru, with dpa, la often used to denote thM a present fact or truth
haa joit been recognized, although true before; oMJr ip 9v rpiyiM it ia, at it
afpean, no matter qfter ail P. S. 198 e, roOr' Ip" fr dX^Mt IAIj U tnit afler all
B, I. T. 851, dps i)TfvrM you know, lure etumgh X. H. S. 4. S. ipn ture enough,
after ail appean with other tenaea (P. Cr. 4S a, P. Ph. 61 a, D. 19. 160).

1903. The Imperfect may refer to a topic preTlooa^ illiii iiiwil : f* 4
lunviKii itrritrpo-pat r^ YvfuarriK^t tl itiitr^ai mu«fe U (u we hare Men) Me
counterpart of gymTuutia, if fou remember the iieeumion P. B. 622 a, Tbb u
sailed tbs phtlotophical imperfect.

1904. The epistolary imperfect is rare in Greek. See 1942 b.

1905. nn, tji^v. — The imperfect of verbs expressing obligaiion or
duty may refer to present time and imply that the obligation or dutv
IB not fulfilled : triyijo-at i^i^' ISu Xr/uv keeping silence when he ought
to apeak D. 18. 189. So with ijQnjv it were proper, cUot V it ttere
fitting (1774). But the imperfect may also express past obligation
without denying the action of the infinitive, as {Set fiwctv J& vat
obliged to remain (and did remain) D. 19. 12^ irtp tSu Su£cu qttod
ertU demotistrandum Euclid 1. 6 (1779).

190G. Imperfect for Plnperfwt — The imperfect has the force of
the pluperfect in the case of verbe whose present is used in the sense
of the perfect (1886).

ThOB, ffov Ihadeome(nnij Ieame'),ihcim' Ihaddeparted,uiit»MrIu>ai
vtetoriont, ^rii^' Iwaid^eated (1752). So ('OW/urui) oli 'ArfporMdft wayapd-
TiQt iAti Ute Olgmpic gatnee, at wMek Anibvethenee wo* the eieior (= had won)
in the pajtcratium T. S.49.

1907. In aQbOTdlnftte claofe*, the action expreased bj the Imperfect maj be
(a) coutetnporaneouA with or (b) antecedent W ttial aet forth by the main verb :
(a) Tsroh-Bi Ifra, at {«*iTarm fr( h r«» rsXiiyirlfir itaMrrBiTo thlt %KU tluir toUil
number uihen thep began to be heeieged T. 2. 78 ; (b) t4 rXMi» 4nr, t, 4 ir\4»^.
On veuel arrived in which we (had) tailed AOL 6. 30. Qnekhasnoapecialform
to ezproM Ume that la aaurior to the paM.

iftif] FUTDBB INDICATIVE 427

1906. Imperfect end AorUt — The Imperfect and aorist ofteD oocot lo the
aame pueage ; and the cboioe ol Uie oiie or the other oft«n depends npoa
the mknner In which the Triler maj view e glTcn motion. The Imperleet maj
be repreeenled by a line, akms wliich an action progreMee j the aorlat deuoteg a
point on the tine (either aUutlng point or end), or Burreya the whole line from
beginning to end.

a. The imperfect of ' oontinuanoe ' or 'duration' Impllei noUiIng ■« to the
abaolute lenglh of the action ; cp. rdXiv mtrik rix" ix^in^ tj|> vrfartir he took
the army bark at quUkln ai potiibU T. 1. 114 with xart rix" ^''X'^PV A«
retreaUd at quicklf at pottlble 1. 73. The imperfect does not indicate 'pro-
longed ' action in contrast to ' momentarj ' action of the aoiisL

b. The Imperfect pnts the reader in the midst of the events as the; wen
taking pUce, the aorlat stmplj reports that an event took place : Irnra ^liXal
JiMtca inifiuior, Sr intiro 'AmUat, col wpUrn Ari^ then twelve Ught-armtd vun
proeeedtd lo cltmb up under the leaderahip iff Antmeaa, who \eat the fint to
mount T. 8.2S. Cp. T. 2.49,8. Ifi. 1-2, 4. 14, X.H.4. 4. 1, 1.6.63-64, 8.9S-I00.

1909. The tollowiog statement preaenta the chief diflerencea between
imperfect and aorist as uarraUve teDsea,

Imperfect Aoritt

clnmmstances, dst^la, coorw of mere fact of ocourrence, general etats-

progreae, endnrlng condition, con- oonaommation (cnlmlnatlon, final !••
tinned aotivit; sue, aummary process)

general deecrtpUon isolated points, cbaiacterlailcezamidea

endeavour attainment

actions snbordlnate to the main maia actions, withont reference to
action other ootions

Cp. (unrrpirtuor thejf temed (ctM tAmn in the via

plA tfUh them (both in T. T, 67), trtiBor I tried U

m pemading (both in X,C. 5.6. 23).

PUTDRB mDICATIVI

ISia The fattire denotes an action that will take place at some
fatnie time: XiTi^cnu fiaifky riXayror he sAoU receive a taimtt aa hia
retford X. A. 2. 2. 20.

a. The action Is fntore according to the opinion, expectation, hope, feai, ot
purpow of the speaker or the agent.

b. The action of the future la either conlinoaUve (like the present) or, like
thalof the aorist, expranw simple attainment. Thus irifvw means / ihall trg to
pemtade, or / thall eonvineo (reaoltative), ^MiXitfnr I thall be king, thall
relffit ot I thall become king (IngrefclTe).

1911. When a verh has two fabirea, that formed from tlie same stem m the
present is properly contlnoative, ^lat tonned from the aorist stem marks simple
attainment : tluis, Ifn J «AaII Asm, vx^tm I *AaU get ; aa rtot rair tlx6rtn avnM

428 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE Itftii

iwXiitfiaior f{cir and I gt^ppottd ufIA rtaton that this wouM eonttnv* to D. 19.
168, StiPoEdi IxoiMTi iiir dr(x#£i, *T< f'txBpoTipwt axil'""'!'" the Thtbatu art hot-
tile and will become itill more to 6. 18. (But ttu usnolly does duty for ax^"- )
So, dyd/B-o/uu tJiall b« angrj/, ix8^rS^ire|uu ehallget angry, fepijatitai ahall con-
tinue fearful, ^^q^rDfisi ihall be terrified, ala'x>'>«<'«ic thall ftel (coDtinned)
thame, alaxunlHiroiiai thoil be athamed (od a single occasion). Cp. 1738.

1912. He future represents both our ahall and will. Wlien ToluntoUve
(leill), the action of the subject ma; be (1) the result of his own decision, as of
114 Toiitffw toSto that I never mil do D. IS. II, or (2) dependent on the will of
another, as ^ PouXii fiAXci alptiaSv Sarit ipti iwl toTi iroBanuai the Senate it
about to choose some one to speak over the dead P. Menei. 2ii b. The use of
the fature la often Blmilar to that of the BubjunctiTe, e^ieclally In dependent
olaoBcs.

1913. Verbs of wiihing, atktng, and otber voluntatlTS verbs may appear In
the future vhere English has the presenl : rovtSror vfit tou riryxiiinr fimiMiraim
I (lAail) with to obtain only to much at tAjf handt B. Hed. 269, rapaj-r^rt/uu f
b/ikt laitir ixftaSftnU /at I (^shall) beg you not to take any offence atmeD. 21. 5S.
Cp. Lat. eentebo.

a. in many ouea the use of the future indicates that the wish remains
unchanged ; and there is no reference to a future act. Sometimes the future
appears to be a more modest form of statement than the prraent.

1914. Onomlc Fntnre. — The future may express a. general truth:
iviifi JirUMc^ viov Asrokiirat pfirra olaa tuiv iXXav a rea80nable man, if
he loses a son, will (is expected to) bear it more easily than other m«n
P. B. 603 e (cp. 1434).

a. Hdt. uses the future In deaorfpUona of cuMoma and In dlrectiona to ti%j-
ellers (1.178,2.29).

1915. Fntore for Present — The future may be used instead of the
present of that which is possible at the moment of speaking: cup^
■TO/uv Tovi t^ortfiovt raiy ivSpHv . . . irri rov i^r hroBv^triaxv rimXtSu
aipovfiivotK tee shall find that ambition* men choose a glorious death in
preference to life I. 9. 3.

a. The future may denote present Intention : alp* wMficTptr, tl itax'^ raitt
your spur if you mean to fight Ar. Av. 7SQ (In tbis use iiifK>j» is more common
(1969)). So in the tragic t1 M{«i; viKat do you mean f E. Med. 1310.

1916. Dellberatire Future. — The futtire is often used in delibera-
tive questions: ri Ipduiuv i} ti ^ijirofuvi what shall toe say or tchat
thaU toe propose t D. 8. 37.

a. The deliberative tnture may occur In connection with the deltbemtive
subjunctive (1806); tln/fur 4 ely&iit'i j) ri Spiraiurs thall we tpeak or keep
tilentf or what shall we dof E. Ion 768.

1917. Jiiulv« Future. — The future may express a command, like
the imperatiTe ; and, in the second person, may denote concession or

■gas] AOBIST INDICATIVE 429

permiasion. The negatire is o£. The tone of the jussive fatnte
(which is post-Homeric) is generally familiai.

fa oBr rai^rrt j/ou will do that P. Fr. 38Bll, dra7r^frtu riii ri/ut — iror
ll-irmaiM the cletk teitl rtad the law— read IX 24. 39, o^rif y*i^*i you viill
judge /or yovrtelf P. PhiL 12 a, rxouSij leru t^i 4JoS you w(H have to Aurry on
IA( raarcA T. T. 77, tfuii air, lar au^pvr^t, a6 Toirou dX\' I/imt i^lataBt »0U, (^
you are mite, }iov will spare, not Mm, but yourielvet X. U. 2. 3. S4.

1918- The fuLure with ai interrogative is used in questions in an imperative
sense to ezprew urgency, warning, or irony : nit tfi/tir . . . b6k irl ri/r iKtlnv
rX(vffdfu4a; lAall u>e nol go forth . . . shall ue not set sail against his country?
D. 4. 44, oA 4iv\i(iffBt ; will yos not be on your guard f 6. 25. In exliortatloos
addresaad to oneself: eix draXXax^'Ofiai SuiuS; shall I not eeate front my
passion r E.Med. 878.

«. fii) with the future ta a prohibitive sense is need in a few suspected pae-
Mges CL.29. 13, D. 23. 117).

1919. ai /ii) with the second person singular of the future In the dramatic
poets denotes a strong prohihition ; as oAfiJf SuTfibiitu don't dawdle (yon Aall not
dawdle) Ar. Ran. 4S2. o6 ^i) with an; person of the future indicative Dccasionally
denotee an emphatic future denial ; as ro^t waw^pait at ^i) s-n-c ^\rtav% loiiiarrt
foa wUl ueer make the bad better Aea. 3. 177.

1920. fron and Swat tfi are need with the future in ui^nt exhortations and
prohibitions: ftrwt air treats Sfut r^t IXivBtpldt prove yourselves then worthy of
freedom X. A. 1. 7. S, frwt rolnr ftpl rsO roU^wu utiSir iptit say nothing therefore
about the war D. 10. 02. For the fuller form of this use after aabtu, mriiTi,
see22ia

1921. fvtff fnt (negative iwut M »') niay express the desire to avert some-
thing ; U Arui ^4 o^'Xpo' ^ttToiiitSa mini we don't appear bate X. C. 4. 2. 39,
iXX' Cruf fi4 a«x ot^ t' fffa^uu but (1 tear that) / shall not be abU P. B. Mfld.
Cp. 1802, 1803, 2229.

1922. On ir (W) with the future Indicative, see 1793. On the periphrastic
fntore see 1969 ; on the future in dependent clauses, see 220S, 2211, 2S20 a, 2229,
2231, 2S28, 2640-2661, 2664, 2668, 2669, 2666 a, 2673 c.

AORIST INDICATIVE

1923. The aoriet expresaes the mere occurrence of an action in
the past. The action is regarded as an event or single fact without
reference to the length of time it occupied.

itlr^ar at KepiipauH col nui wirri nil 3/jca Sii^ipar the Goreymeans were vic-
torious and destroyed fifteen ships T. 1. 29, Ilaiiingt iwaliivt Paeonius fedt I. G. A.
318, tSoiir rp (iovXg it Was voted bg (seemed good to) the Senate C. L A. 1. 32.
a. The uses of the aorlst may be explained by the figure of a point in lime :
t. The starting point (ingresslve aorlst, 1924); 2. The end point (resultaUve
aorist, 1030) ; 8. The whole action (beginning to end) concentrated to a point
(complexjve aorist, IBST^.

I;,C.00J^[C

480 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SEMTENCE [im

mt. Ingnwin Aotltt. —The aorist of verbs wboBe present de-
notes a state or a oontitiued actioti, ezpiessea the entranoe into that
state or the b^inning of that action.

a. This holds true of the othw moods. Giesk has no apeoisl form to deoote
entrance into a stale In pieeent time (18(8).

ipX" rutt 9p(a became nler

^turtXnlw am king, nle /pwCXciwa became Jtlntf, cuunded (Ae {fefVM

pUwtt look at ipKi<l-a cost a glaace

iaitptia weep iSdniAca bunt into tear*

fovXrtfM am a dove tl»t\mra became a ttave

ipO tow ipiffv' fell in lone

tappH am coNTOfieoHt iedppt^a plucked up eovra^

ro»a am ai it6ay,<ra fell ill

rtavra am ricA fvWn)» became rteh

«-oX«^a mate tear iro\l,a^a began the vnr

elya am Hlent irtrtta became elUnt

a. Bsrelf with the seooud aotist: frx" took Kold, took poueMton of, got, ts
UMMTpiriHi T.X«wT^arrot 'Irrlfii ^txt T*c ipx^* wften FeUMratut died Hippiat
awxeeded to hltpoaer T.6.M, So jrM^qr became aware, Icntu took mg maad
(perfect Itriin am etaading).

b. The aorist of these verlM denotes slso a dmple occiuiencs of the adion
ae aa hlsUirlcal fact : iparCKtum mil king, ruled, ir6ffitf a was Ul. Thus, ^nim
w4iTt nl TtTTapiiam trti tS» 'EXX^niv jpfor Uejr Aeld the lupremacf o*er Orette
forfortv-fiw vean D. 8. S4 (cp. 1S37 fa).

1926. Resolutive Aorlat — In contrast to the imperfect (and
present) the aorist denotes the result, end, or effect of an aotion.

Thus, 47B7or I brought, ifioi\nm I decided (^ifiotXtvor I mu deliberating),
tt^ I aharpened, twtaar I Mtruck in falling (IrtrTar Ivm in the act of falling),
fr«tfa lEuceeededin permadlng (_ISS&).

a. The same verb may be a leeultative aorist or an Ingreeslre aorist. Thus,
tfflaXar I let ftv » miasHe (ingresslTe), and / hit (resoltatlve); nr^o 1 fot
po*$euion of {lagnauvey, ani I kept baek (reeultadve).

b, titrntA c* E. Ion 1291 means / tried to kill yon, since rrdrw denolM
properly only the act of the agent, and does not, 1^ kUl, slso connote the
effect of the action upon another.

1927, Complezlve Aorist — The complexive aorist is used to surrey
at a glance the coarse of a past action from beginning to end : rovrf
ry TpSiry ript raXiv irciyfurm' it was in this manner t?uU ik^ fortified the
city T. 1. 93. It may sum up the result of a preceding narrative
(often cont^ning imperfects, as T. 2. 47. 4 ; 3. 81). The oomplexive
aorist appears also in other moods than the indicative.

a. This Is often called the ■ oonoentratlve ' aorist, beoMue It oonoenttatM the

tgji] AORIBT INDICATIVE 481

entire coniM of an BCtloo to % dngle point. When owd of npid or tatftanUna-
oas Ktion thla aoriat in ofien called ' monentatj.'

b. TLe coniplezlve aorUt is tised either of a long or ol a ihoTt period of

lime: rirfapa jul Sin (tit iri/iMrar at rwpwtai the ptoee lotted fourteen yeare
T.2.2, 6\lyar xfinr inriiuimw 4 i/uuxiM the leaffue lotted a Mori Ume LIB,
iXBtr, iiaor, irli^a veni, vidi, vtci (" Ca«aar'e bng of oame, and law, and con-
qoered") Plutarch, Caes. 60.

1928. The aoriat ia commOBly nsed with deflniie nomben. The Imperfect
la, bowever, often employed when an action la represented aa Intfirrapted or a*
proceeding from one stage to anotber. Tbns, imSBa timn EOpot iti'*f«'' rpiinrra
Cfrnu remained thirty days lAtre X. A. 1.8. 9; rirrafiat fi^rat Aout hift^m
ol ^unii TM>t vrTtfiOr, 4 ii roirtv ifniaXeyla fieri rsGtf' wrepor airoit driiXsri r for
the fottr whole e/isving nwntht the Fhoetant remained »afe, but the/altehood of
thit nan liftervHtrde effected their ruin D. 18, 78.

1939. The aorlst ennmerates and report* past ATenta. It may be emploTed
m brief continnooa narration (X. A. 1. S. 6). Aa a namtive teoae it la often
lued 10 atate the chief events and facta, while the other paat tenaea aet forth
mbordinate actlona and attendant ciroumHtanceg.

1930. Empiric Aorlit — With adverbs signifying often, alvmya,
aometim^, already, not yet, never, etc., the aoriat expressly denotes
a fact of experifinoe (JfiTOpw).

■vXXat ToXUjut fMifirui friffi^ioDrm rh fspirr' dx-iiXxrar nwiiv men oflen toee
Kkat they have from a de^rt for greater pomettton* D.23. 1I3, iSviioOrrn irifin
ftwit rponuF fvTirtfar faint heart never pel raited a trophy P. Crltl. 108c. So
with mUi ; 4 y\Swa nXXsdt «li JXrfpor Ifyayir the tongue bringe many a man
to hit rain Men. Seat, a06. Trom this nae proceeds 1081.

a. The empiric aodst is oommonljt to be translated by the present or perfect.
The statement in the aorlst Is often based upon a concrete historical tact aet
forth in the coutazt, and the reader is left to infer that the thought holds good
tor all time,

193L Onomic Aorlrt {yvauxf fRiaxim, proverb). — The aoiist may
express a general truth. The aorist simply states a past occurrenoe
and leares the reader to draw the inference from a concrete case that
what has occurred once is typical of what often occurs : -raSutv Sc r*
r^wioi lyv-t a fool Uomt by experience Hesiod, Works and Days, 218,
niUoc /Mv yap Tj jfpavov tii^oxrcv ij voavt iiidpayt for beauty is either
muted by time or withered by disease 1. 1. 6.

a. The gnomic aoriat often altematea with the present of general truth
(IBTT): oiyip 4 rXtfjii roftvniet ri/i iprf^r, dXX* -f iTifJa- aiii ri T^rniiSai raU
AtuWpMf irrl itmir . . . dXXi rd <^' ufSfMi for it it not Ae More that cause*
aver, but the ditgraee; nor it U the bealiitg that it terrible to frttmen, btH the
I'snitt D. 21. 72. Cp. P. R. U6 e.

b. The gnomic aorist is regarded as a primarr tense (1868): ol rfprnrtM rXotf-
riwJf Iv^Xurrot rapaxf^i* /roftrffar tyrantt make rich i* a flMHMKt wAot»«Mr
IhtyyOtk D.20.16.

iv,Goog[c

432 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1931

1932. Akin to tbe gnomic morlat la the aorist employed In general deacrip-
UoDB, So In Imaginary acenes and In deacriptioiu of manners and dutoma.

Thoa, traSir i^iUarrai el TtTtXnrrqjKirn (It rir tAtof, oI i ioi^iur licarrtw n^fci,
TjiSTDr iiir luSuidvarTO ot rt tmXSn not htilut Ptiiaarrti Kai si /i4 uAen fA? drad
reach the place whithtr each U teveralt^ conducted by hU geniiu, Jim of all Ihey
have judgimat pronounced upon them at thet/ Aave Heed mil and devoaltjf or
not P. Ph. 113 d, ^apot Si airtiiitpiii tiv^^tarrn at tpiis jtar' Hr liifrar iiii a^2r
liirn ToAi 6^$a,\iu6i i^er having woven a mantle on the tame dag the prietti
bind the eyes of one of their number wUh a tnood Udt. 2. 122.

1933. IteratlTA Aoriat — With Ir the sorlKt may denote repetition (1790) :
ant ir he UMed to aay X. C. 7. 1, 14. Distinguish 2303.

1934. AoriBt for Futnn. — The aoriat may be Hubatituted for the fatore
when a future event ts vividly represented aa having aclually occurred ; JthU-
foir dp, ([ /t» ii) Xfl^cif / am undone if thou dott leave me E. Ale. 386.

1935. Aoriat in Similei. — Theaorist la used In similes in poetry, and uauallj
oontalDS the point of comparison. It may alternate vith tbe present. Thtu,
^pm f inlhi nt tpCt Hpirtr he fell atfallt an oak IT iS'2, ntn S it K^wr dM-
^alrrrat offXiM dtrrV | rs/i^alrut, tI/ti S bStij tSi ri^a stibtrre., { At 'EUrwp irrX.

and aefrom out of the eiovde all radiant appeare a ban^l ttar, and then ofoim
ifnJt« within the ^adwy cloud*, «o Hector, ate A 62.

a. The aoriat in 1931, 1936 is uaed of time past (in 1934 of the future), from
tbe point of view of an sasumed or ideal present.

193fi. Aoriat tor Preaent. —The oorist is used in queations with r( «(* •<
and t1 ei to express surprise that something has not been done. Tbe queation
Is bere eqnivaleut to a command or proposal : t1 ot* adj;l ml ai uwl/wttgAt im;
vihy don't tou recall it to my mindf X. Hi. 1. S. The (lew lively) preaent, and
the future, may also be osed.

1937. Dianatic Aoriat — The SiA person singular of the aorist is used in
the dialogue parts of tragedy and comedy to denote a state of mind or ao act
expreaalng a stale of mind (especially approval or disapproval) occurring to tbe
speaker In the moment just passed. This use is derived from familiar diacooiae,
but Is not found in good prose. In translation the present is employed. Thus,
4r^>, fY^Xoo-a / am delighted, I can't help laughing At, Bq. 890, iStfiiair ti
^^t^w I welcome the omen S. El. 866 (prose Six'i^ rit oluvir). So ^rrftwa /
appram, Ivf^na 1 underetand. Sometimes this use appears outaide of dialopie
{iwirrvra I tpum A. Pr. 1070, Ag. 1198).

1938. With verbs of ^wearing, commanding, toying, and adviting the aori*
may denote a resolution that has already been formed by the speaker and i^
mains unalterable; ai . . . tlrar ri^tt yi^ tita irtpit 1 eommani thee (once and
for all) to depart from out thit land E. Med. 272, Ariifuwa I notar 'aof'
S. Ph. 128G. This use U not confined to dialogue.

1939. 80 in other cases : r& rDl>r' f\^ia ; »A cdrMJ' <Itw( Uxii Amb aoidK
thou {what Aott thou mean)t I do not knoa how thou meanett tJ.Ai.270. Cp.
w with the aorist (B 113, r 439).

1940. AoristforPerfect.— In Qi«ektlieaoriBt, which simply aUtwa (Mt

I;.ClK>^Ic

IM3] AORIST INDICATIVE 488

occnmnee, is often employed where English oks the perfect denoting k pieaeat
condition resulting fcom a paat action. TIiob, wapitiiiaa. hi/Sii, irtpn ^IXw /
(bave) ramnionnJ gou, my friends X. A. 1. 6. 6, i iiir rofnir rSktiiot iwirrut ^fai
Tu» ilfiif/Jnat irterif^t ■ tal yiifi winfripoui H-oJiftre nj nXXodi jiin!l)nL>i iwo-
Itimir ^rifKoat sal wpii roAf 'EXXqwi tiapi0\rtKt nti rdrrai rpSnul reraXoiTii/njm
4(ut now iA« war An* deprived »» of all the blaginga that have been mentioned;
for it htu made im poorer, tompell^ ui (o undergo maajf dangert, hat brought
w into reproach with the Oreekt, and In every pouible way hat cau»ed ui tVtffer-
fn^r L 8. IS. Sometimes the aorist is chosen because of Its affinity to the nag-
itJTe, as Tw» alurrut dM/h mrituriw itW Iratrat wirpaa ke (has) [fl/T not one
Hf hit tervantt, but hat told them aU Aee. 1. 99. This aorist Is sometlmea
ngaided aa a primary tense.

«. Where an aotive transitive perfect ts not formed from a partlcolar verh,
or is ranly nsed, the aorist takes its place : ^tpaiur lUt d^ip^ai riit riXir iraj
fptvfiir Ir ri iupvwiXn tarirT^tr he hat deprived the Pheraeant of their ettf
and ettabliihed a garritoa in the acropolis I). 7. 32 (KoBiaTiict tnuisiUve is not
clastic;. So 47<'Ya>' 's used for j|xa.

b. In Greek of the clHssicat period the aorist and perfect are not confused
tkongh the difference between the two t«nses is often subtle. Cp. D. 19. 72 wilb
». 177.

2M1. The aorist may be translated t)y the perfect when the perfect has
the force of a present (1946, 1947): hrnfi/air I have acquired (ttrntiiiax I pot-
sesi), i9aiuaaa I have viundercd (rt^aii^iaiia / admire). Thus, (rrifro s^it ri
nftbrit iicT-tieaa keep thytelfvshaC thyself haul gained Hdt.7.29.

1M2. Eplstolaij Tenses. — The writer of a letter or book, the dedicator of
anoEeting, may put himself in the position of the reader or beholder who Tlews
the action as past : ittr 'AprafiAifiu, Sr vw Irttafin, wpirrr negotiate with Aria-
hms wAonl / tend (tent) to yuu T. 1. 120, Tpoldr ii^rrci 'Apytlar rr^Xai Xi^vpa
Tsfra . , . fru-ffdXfurar the Arglve armament having raptured Troy hang {hung')
«p these spoilt A. Ag. 677. Cp. 1023 (last two examples).

a. The perfect is also used : irirra^Kd aoi rSrSt rir \iyor I send (have tetU)

fou thit diteourse 1. 1. 2.

b. The imperfect (common in Latin) occurs rarely : Itnialtpyot /i-^miXi raft
afm x*^" "' ''Y'afHit (al ttirii otrrat l^maii [fx>"] Htnesiergus sends greetings
awf vishet for good health to his friends al home and says that he himself it
icell Jshreuheft desoeflterreicbischen Archaeol. InBt.7 (1004), p. 94, rw> Si raSra
tpHirrur Sxf "^ SSt i \iyot iypi^tra tiurli/Kires rptepiraret St rur iSiXifiur tj)>

'^x')' <'x' "P '° f^' ^"(^ of '^" portion of my work, TitipJionut, at the eldest
of Ae brothers uAo urou^fit this deed, maintained control of the government
X. H. 6. 4. 37.

1M3. Aorist for Pluperfect, ^- The aorist with many temporal and causal
conjunctions, and in relative clauses, has the force of the Eng. pluperfect. So
frith Irtl, ireiH nfter that, since, ht. in uthen, iri because ; regularly with wptr
before, Im, f^xP* vntil : f*tl JriXnyii, irfiar after the trumpeter had given the
ttgnal, they advanced X. A. t. 2. 17, irtl Si rvr^XSew, fXcfc nudSt and when lAey
had come together, he spoke as follows X. C. 5. 1. 19, itiXtvai /u TiJ^ArwroXir f»

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

1944. In subordinate clauses the action expreaaed by the aorUt iiuy be
(a) coDl«inporaneoua, (b) antecedent, iir (c) sub^iequent to that set fortli by
ttte main verb. Tliv context alone Uecideii In wliich aeaae the aoriat is I'l be
taken, (a) ir t^ xp^'V '' ^f^x* S"* Wi1™to Kxrtr&tiat dwring the time he waiiri i

ke learnrd all he cmld T. 1. l.'IB ; (b) irpiwarro it rin niropiar, SBtrwip iirni-
yoim the]/ turned t'lienrtt Panurmlia, the vfTy place from which they had put out
T. 2. W (Boe iei;5) ; f .:) iitdx""' i^XP^ ti 'AfiinUb. dr^Anff ar ihey kept fighting
until the Alheaiani had eaUed ateay X. H. 1. 1.8,

PERFECT INDICATIVE

194fl. The perfect denotes a completed action the effects of which
still continue in the present: ra oU^/iam mVoSafiiTnu the rooms have
been consti-ucted (their construction is finisued) X. 0. 9. 2, rat riKtK
avrSiv vap^pijTat he ba8 taken awag (and atill holds) their cUiee D. 9. 26,
jnr«'Afj^ Ihaee Jo>-me'I (hold) tlie opinion 18. 123, (9«j8ou)U«^iat I havf
(am) resolved S. El. 947, n jSouXcuurfiov rouXy; oiSiv, !^ d Xo^^i/S^,
i)Jia ^t^ovXtvfuSa laknt are you connpiring to do f Nothing, aaid
Charmidea; we have already corupired P. CliaruL 176 c.

a. The eSecta of n'conipleted action are seen in tbe resulting present alMe.
The Btal« may be that of the subject or of the object : i^pijeiir, koI tn iral tit
Tttopifftlliai I viae glruek xoilh ftar, and even at the present moment am itlll tn a
ttate of agitation Acs. 2. 4, ol roMium rat f-roriit Xi\6itifif the enemy have broktu
the truce (which is now broken) X. A. 3. 2. 10.

1946. Perfect with Present Meaning. — When the perfect marks
the enduring result rather than the completed act, it maj often be
translated by the present.

Thus, icJcXiiiuu (have received a name) am called, mf name ta, c/icTfMi
(have acquired) posaeai, iiiii.niiin.t {have recalled) remember, riSr^a (have
passed aivay) ant dead, tlBiaiuu (have accustomed myself) am occiotontrd,
iili^ltrniii (have clothed mynelf in) have on, r/roiSa (have put confidence} (msl.
IvTifiEB (have set myself) aand, pi^xa (have stepped) ttand and am gone,
fyruKa (have recognized) kitote, wiipita (nafui sum) am by nature, sfb (ha*«
found out) knoiB.

a. The«e perfect* praesentia do not in nature difler from other perfects.

1947. 'Intenaive' Perfect. — Many perfects seem to denote an
action rather tlian a slate resulting from an action, and to be
equivalent to strengthened presents. These are often called inten-
live perfects.

Such are : verbs of the eeneei (Sfiopta, gaze. wt^piKa ihndder), of tuttained
lonnd (,Kiicpiyabatet,\i\iira thoul, pip^xa roar),of «nu>tfon(n^40«iai am filled
wUh alarm, yfyiiea am glad, lituriU caret for), of ge«urt ieix^'* tttp tA« MWUti
agapt^t uid mauy othera (irutti" «" l^li Bte.).

I;.C00J^[C

igS4l PLUPERFECT 486

a. Bnl most U not >U of tbe verbe in quevUoo mnj be reg&rded u trne
perfects. La they denote a mental or phyuctJ state resuliiog from tlie accom-
plishment of Ibe actioD ; Ihos, wi^pita I have thuddtred aitd ant note fn a Hate
of thuddering.

b. CerUiiD verba tend to appear in the perfect for empbaals ; riBniKa cnw
iead, drUwXa perith, wtwpata sell (Aati« sold).

IftM. Empiric Perfect. — The perfect ma; get forth a general trulb expi«uly
bated on a fact of experience ; 4 draffs veXXoii ^if drDXiAXcHt lack ofdltclpllM
ennowhaM been t/i« rain of mana X.A.&. 1. 38. Cp. 1930.

1949. Perfect of Dated Past Action. — The perfect U aometimea uaed of a
put action whose lime is specifically stated : tpp^iuu rbrt I wa$ intuited on
Aat oceattoa D. 21. 7. This use approacliea that of the aorisL

USO. Perfect for Pntnre Perfect. — Tlie perfect may be used Tivld)y for the
fntnre perfect to anticipate an action not yet done ; car raCro tin&iur, ritS' 4fu>
trcTglirrai and (flee conqver in that guaiter, everylMng ha* been (will liave been)
aecumiiiitheit bfiu X.A. 1. 8. 12.

a. Especially with the phrase rl hrl rtn, the perfect anticipates the certain
occurrence of an event : ri hrl tiAti^ itoXtiXa^r for all he could do, toe had
perMfd X. A. 6. 6. 23.

19S1. In snbordinate claoaea, Uie action of the perfect is nsnally (a) con-
tempoivneous, but may be (b) antecedent to that of the main verb. The con-
leit alone decides In which sense tbe perfect U to be taken, (a) ol ii Btpiramt,
imS^i h drrlroXa Ko^wr^iia^r, atro^XsCfft vihile our attendant* dft'Tt. now
tkat we have been brought down to a level with the Ryraciunns T. T. 13. (b) i
*« ^n **xm«< 'oE^' d^OfTB Fortune Aim taken back what *he luu lent ytnt
llen.tr. 698.

Oa the epistolary perfect see 1942 a.

PLUPERFECT

19S3. The pluperfect ia the past of the perfect, hence it denotes
a past fixed state resultiog from a completed action : i^ffovXtv/i.Tp'
I had {uxu) reaolued.

a. When the perfect is translated by the present, the pluperfect is rendered
by (be imperfect : ImxtiI/i^f wag in poexetsion, trtBtiiai he wa» dead, fii) ifcnetc,
liuprliiair remembered. Cp. 1940.

1953. Pluperfect of Immediate Occnirence. --The pluperfect may denote
that a past action occurred so immediaUly or auddeiUy that it was accomplished
almost at the same moment as anoliier action ; in Si iX^eriaat, l\i\vrTo al
rworSaX and when they were cnplurrd thK truce wae (already) at an end 1'. 4. 47
(the tact of their capture was equivalent to tbe immediate rupture of the truce).

1954. In HDbordlnate clauaes the pluperfect is rarely used to mark an action
M anterior to an action already past : IIXBami 'IrM U rut roXiftlur «lt /rtrV^
VAftt iwi nrwrnnr^i' the Indians retiiraed whom Cgrui had tent to get neiM of
the «n«nub X. C. a. 2. 0. the aorUt is usually employed (ltt4:i, 19M b).

,= Cooi^k

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE S£NTENC£

FUTURE PERFECT

1993. The future perfect denotes a future state resulting from a
completed action : ivaytypaij/onai I shall stand enrolled, S^^imvi he
stiail be kept in prison; ^ 6vpd Kcxknacnu the door will be kept ahut
Ar. Lys. 1071.

a. Most future perfects ue middle in foim, passive in meaning (681).

b. The active future perfect is usuhII; peripbraetle (600): ri Murr ivt^tBa
^nuirtt IM lAofl hate determined oa our dtUy I). 4. SO,

1996. When strew Is laid upon complete fulfilment, the fnture perfect may
impty rapldit;, immediate consequence, or certainty, of action accomplished in
ibe futurt) : ^dfi, not m-pdfn-u tpeak, ani it Mhall be done iiutanter Ar. PI. 102T,
tttit 'A^iatbi d^toT^ffi ' Avrr ipo^i ftfur oiSflt XfXfif iru Ariaevi will toon teitk-
drato, so that ue shaft have no friend left X. A. 2. 4. 5.

1957. The future perfect may have an imperative force (191T) : tlfitrrrm
yif T(t\t|*ft for the truth fhall (let It) be iipoken 1. 7. 76.

1958. When the perfect has the force of a present, the fnlure perfect tl ilMil
like a simple future (1M<t) : kckXi^d^ioi / thall bear the name, /uiirii^aiiat sAoJI
remember, mrtT^B-afiai Khali po«t«s«. So in the two active forms : rrf rffw t
ihall be dead, irr'ifu I ehall itand.

A. The aorist subjunctive with St ('2324), not llie future perfoct, Is used to
denote a past action in relation to an action still in the fntnre.

PERIPHRASTIC TENSES

On the periphrastic forms of perfect, pluperfect, and future pe^
feet, see 599, 600.

1959. Periphrastic Pntnie. — A periphrastic fnture is formed by pfiJw
lam about to, intend to, am {deitined) to, am likely to (strictly think) with the
preeent ot future (rarely the aorist) iiifliiitlTe. Thus, a iiiWti \iyiir ml rdXu
Jo«r what lam going Co say has long hern your (pinion X. C. 3. 3. 13 (cp, 1885),
KUarfpM fi^Wti ^itir Cleander i» on the point of coming X. A. 6. 4. IS, Uirtit
(fuXXw aXytn he purposed to Uifllct tuffering B .18, liitWor Oifiiot ttwat I tmu de»-
fined to be Aappy r 138, a wort roptioiTa tal rXiu-rpi /ifWoitr Sf fvSai, r^arnXAr
Toit 4il\evi iffTovSaioXo^fEro if ever Cyrus teas on the march nnd t)iiiii)r letre likely
U> ratch tight of him, he aummoned hit frienda and eiiynyed them in earnett
talk X.A.I. 9. 28.

a. The present infinitive usually occurs wltli iiJKhv as a verb of teltl, tlie
future infinitive with /UWu as a verb ot thinking.

b. The aorist is used when It is important tti m^irk tlie action as ingrceslve.
KBultative, or complexlve ; Srip iJWu waetir ipJmt T am doonted to mtfer
A. Pr. 825,

c. fiAXu / delay usually takes the present, rarely tlie aorist, Infinitive.

d. rut oi lUWti and rl ai lUXXu mean why thould I not / Tbiia, t( t tt
mAX« -TftUtar tln.1 ; houi thould U not be rtdiculout r P. R. &30 a.

,ooglc

1967] THK iNb'INITIVE 437

1960. ffwXXar is used of past inteotion in ffwXX< KaraXAtir he teat about to
itopfurlhe night X. A, 1. 8. 1, roh larkout K\iirtir liitWor they intended to dote
the enlrancM T. 4. 8. f;w\Xar with tlie iuflnilive denoting an unfulfilled past
iiiUDtiou is a periphiaBiH for an aoriiit indicative nith dr. Thus, 06 svar^ari^ir
f>uXXor they uouM not have joined /orcei D. 10. 159 (= ait it aurtcrpdrtv^ar).
Cp. reetvnu eram, etc.

1961. With «t)U. — The proaeut and perfect participle are freely used vltb
the lortas of tifii to form a periphrasis, especially when the participle baa an
adjectival character (1857): 47<< ita^9ap«ninvt ririt tlmt; do you think that
tome are being ruined f ¥. B. 492 a, nl t^x>o' 3w#0ap»x/i«i Ifforrai the artt toil'
be rMi*«d X. C. 7. 2. 13, if r reOrt aun^ipot thit vxa adwiniageou* Ant. 6. 18 ; j
MXmws is stronger than 0An, S. O. T. 560.

1962. The aorist participle la rarely so used, since It denotes a single act,
not a cbaracteriatic : l^aat H tiki koX -fttiiiatei t^ NIiclp X^« rplmptr wftt rimt
oitd eommunicationt between Nidat and eotne periont had aetvally been held
hefnr* T. 4. 64.

a. With fcoiHA the aorist participle equals tlie future perfect : oi irian-ieit
try; be Hlent, won't yon, onee aitd/orallf S. U. T. 1140.

1963. With Ix*. — The periphrasiB with Ixu and the aorist participle Is
analogous to the perfect in meaning, and emphasizes the permanence of the result
attained (chiefly in Hdt. and th^ drama): injpAfai ly I have proclaimed S.Aat.\92.

a. In Attic prose Ixu usu. baa a separate force ; *tpti rpibif tx*i ta.ra,\afiiir
he lately teitrd and now occupies Fherae D. S. 1 2. So with the (rare) perfect :
Ti friT^atia tlxn ipamKofiuriUm they had carried up to the lorts the proviiiont
and kept them there X. A. i. 7. 1.

1964. With y(y*o|iu. — The forms of ytyn/iai often combine with a partt-
Hple to form periphrases. Thns, /14 «'a>^i>' - . - m-ttnai yir^ lett thou dMtroy
thytelf S. Ph. 778 ; In prose this periphrasis has the tone of tragedy. On
ttywiuu with a substantive, see ITIO, 1754.

1965. With ^alro^oi. — The aorist participle is ufied perlphrasUcally with '
forms of ^tnnat. TlinB, afix ^ip ifi^r oMi Ti3r rd^wr ^purrlrit oif di'iu'anTi^af

^r^vrrai (t will appear that he took no heed, nor felt any reMntm«nt, con-
cemittu you or (As law* D. 21. SO.

VERBAL NOUNS
1. The Infinitire. 2. The Participle. 3. The Verbal Adjectives
in ~ro% and -riot.

THE INFINITIVE
1966L The infinitive is in part a verb, in part a substantive.

a. Many enbetantives are closely lelaled to verbs, but not all verbs can form
substantives. All verbs can, however, form inflnitives.

b. The word tnjtnitive denotes a vertwl form without any llmltatlou {finU)
of number and person.

1967. The infiuitive is like a verb herein:

i,vGooglc

438 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTEN'CE [igM

a. It shows the dlgtincUons of Tolce and tense (but not tbose of aainber and
person). Uavlug lenses, it csn express different atages of action (ution aitDplj
occuirijig, continuing, or finished); wheresa the oorresponding substantiTesiTS
furth the abstract idea without these distinctions. Contrast troKir, ruV'"!
ToiQrcu, TEiraii|ii^HU with irnlitini making,

b. It can have a subject before it and a predicate after it, and It can h>ve in
object Id the genitive, dative, or accusative like the corresponding finite verb.
Infinitives scarcely ever stand in the subjective genitive ; and the object of an
infinitive never stands in the objecUve genitive.

c. It is modiSed by adverbs, not b; adjectives.

d. It ma; take dv and with that particle represent it with the indicative
(ITBf ft.) or it with the optaUve (1824).

e. It forms clauses of result with Arrr, and temporal clauses with irfl^, etc.

1968. The infioitiTe is like a Bubstaotive herein :

a. It may be tlie subject or object of a verb.

b. With the (neuter) article It shows all tlie case forms (except the vocative):
ri (jaO, Tip, Ti) \*«i>, Xdanr, etc,

c. It may be governed by prepositions ; rpi roO XAttr.

1969. The infinitive was originally a verbal noun In the dative (in part pos-
sibly also In the locative) case. The use to express purpose (2008) is a saniral
of the primitive meaning, from which all the other widely diverging uses wen
developed in a manner no longer always clear to us. But the to or for meanlnf;
wen in iiapSirtir fimu" we Aone com to tearn [for UaTaiHg) can also be dis-
cerned in a^Hfui lUtt I Itave power for teeing, then leaueee. Cp. 2000, 2006 s.
As early as Homer, when the datival meaning had been In part obscared, the
infinitive was employed as nominative (as subject) and accusative (as object).
After Homer, the infinitive came to be used with the neuter article, the subetan-
live idea thus gaining In definitenesa. The article mnst be used when the infini-
tive stands as an object in the genitive or dative, and when it depends on
prepositions.

1970. The infinitive is used as subject, as predicate, and to sup-
plement the meaning of words and clauses.

1971. The negative of the infinitive is ^i;; but oA, used with a
finite mood in direct discourse, is retained when that mood becomes
infinitive in indirect discourse. Sometimes, however, ii^ is used in
place of this o£ (2723 ff.).

SUBJECT AND PREDICATE NOUN "WITH THE INFINITIVE

1972. In general the subject of the infinitive, if expressed at all,
stands in tlie accusative; when the subject of the infinitive is the
same as the subject or object of the governing verb, or when it h

ms] 7HE INFINITIVE 489

•TfiBi cfS^Mt I tUiJc Oiat I knmt P. Pr. St2 e, Uipr^ l«i) tlrv Ae hAJ \e wol
a iVrnan X. A. 4. 4. IT, t,^ oix ^tjtrlicv inXirrot J)««r I shall not adtnU that
I hast come nninvUed P. S. 171 d, inot^ytit npi iid Hum TTfi^Ai'i do pok
adiHit that van have bttn guilty a* rtgardarmf X. A. I.e. 8 (cp. 4.S.27 [ii2:i88).

a. 'Ilie uomiiuttiTe is osed wheo the liifluitive, expreBsing some action or
■tace of ibe lubject ot the nuun rerb, hu the articla in an oblique caae. Thus,

TMiTHr dfiwMlf IiA ri rarpifii a^^ ^(\si dfoi juat^rV'nir t^^^ requesU on tkt
ground that he wot hi* Aer«cjf{ary friend Aee. 3. 62, roih-a 3' trolti it tdD xa^"'i>
(t>«( thit he effected bp rea«on of kit being gevere X. A.2. 8. 9, irl r>p Vowt rati
Xiirofi/mt eJ«i (icT^/iToirai (colonisla) ore «en( ouC (0 6« the equals of those aho
itag at hiime T. 1. 84.

b. The nominalive Btanda nsuall; in sentences with Stir, xfi^"" ^^'H-, depen-
dent on a verb of saying or thiaJcing. Ttiaa, i^YmJ/iitii . . . rtpitlmi Stir a^Sv ml
iityaXa^iirxirtpot ^oIkvAu I thought t ought to surpass them and lo show myself
more magni/t/^ent D. 10. '23G. Here iiyiiiii,^r itlt ia equivalent to / thought it proper.

c. When the governing verb is a participle in an obllqne case, a predicala
noun usually agrees with the participle, and rarely stands in the nnmlnatife.

Thus, draXXsTeti rairwr rOr partitriat imarriit tint being rid of those vho
profess to be judges T^ A. i\ a, rat ipx'^ SISuhti , . . rail ill jifdrii' dpJrrott ilm
U diipnues the offlBei to those uiho alu>af/s seem to be the most deserving
P. Menex. 2SB d.

1974. A prononn subject of the infinitive, If (wholly or partially) identical
with the subject of the main verb, is generally expressed when emphatic, and
stands in the accusative (cases of the nominative are rare and suspected) ; but
the indirect reflexive a^lt stands in the nominative or acciisaCive.

elfui iiit rXtlw xP^/ura tlfryivOai 4 IXhavt airSoo I think I have made more
maneg Ikanany two others together F. Hipp. M. SB2 e, ityitai/uKii iitavrit triMnt-
trtfaw <f>«i (emphatic for iffiiaiiitroi iruuUvTtpQt «)k») deeming myself to be too
honett V. A. 36 b, roit Si B^alovt i^tirg . . . M<r«i* frwt ^Xirai rpdrrtiF tevrir
he Ihought the TTiebans would lei kirn have his oan way P. 0. 9, «£ r^ii diuMurSw,
iXX' fnlrcut /i&Wcr he said that not they (the speaker and tlie otbf r Lacedaemo-
nians), but they (the Toroneana) rather had been wronged 4. 114 (but rffii In
122B b).

a. After ■ preceding accusative with tlie Infinitive, a second pronoun refer-
ring to a different person, and also subject of an infinitive, must also stand in the
accusative whether or not it dtinotes the same person as the subject ot tlie gov-
emmg verb. Thus, dXXl nnilt^n 4iiat niw Mltreal ow, a^Ai (Hee below) Si
rvTiJo-ei* ; ml 4^i iiir iwoil/ij^itirScii ffou, ffi (not m)) i' ti raiiTdrffai but do jiou
tbink that ise are going lo put up vilh you, ahile yi>a strike us yourself f and
that we are going lo acquit you, while you will n^jt cease your oulrageous con-
duct ? n. 21. 204. ttrit, above and in KX^u> o6k f4>ii avrit, dXX' lalnr nTparry'ir
Clean satd that not he himself but that Nicias was in eommnnd T. 4. 28, is not
the ezpnaaed subject of the infinitive, but airbi of direct discourse {airit rvn^nt,
airit at OTpartnui') ; hence a^jt is not used here fornaurlr {iaxtrbr).

1979. When Wie snbject of the infinitive is diffprent from tliai nf ihe gorem-
inf; verb, it shinds in the accusative ; and a predicate noun stands also in tha
aocuaatiTe.

3,q,z.-3bvGoOgle

440 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE ft^je

roiit{lt yip l/iSi iiiol tinu mt irnTplia ml #iXaiit for I think you are to DM botM
fatherland and frUnda X. A. 1. 3. 6, rir tip KoKir i^iraMr tatpa iMsI^iv. tlmi
^luu for I maintain that tAe noblt and good man it happ^ P.a.4T0«L

1976. A predicate noun takes the case of the subject of an inflnitiTe ItBcU
dependent on a eubjectlesB inGnitire. Thus, ijiur ti niaiiifi tenir r^i warm-
iawtiit ifialrwBai theg manage it to that thej/ teem to ju to appear in vartout
form* P. B. 881 a.

1977. Several Inflnittvea may be used In anccewion, one Infinitive being the
mibject of anotlier : -wtpX roXXou voMi'^vot nrfi*'^ ii(ai b^pl\ti,r pti\tv$at regard-
ing it of great importance not to teem to ang one to teieh to behave ovtrageovxlf
L. 28. 5.

1978. When the subject of tb« inflnitive 1b the same as the object (fn the
genitive or d»live) of the governing verb, it ia often omitted, and a predicate
noun is either attracted Into the genitive or dative, or standi in the accusative
la agreement with tbe omitted subject of the infinitive. See 1060-1002.

tftartr ij/uip d7aSort iJhu or tffintr iiiut d7aflo*t ttrai it it in OUT power to be
good (lit. to be good ia pottible for us). Thus, StiiuS' dt i^dr . . . ixpatvaaBai
rUr \eyoiUrur, irBa/ttiBimit Sri ktX. we ask J/oU therffore to litten to what it
taid, contidering that, etc. 1. 14. 8. Cp. rSw an titcnw iwipl ytr^rtai quotrd
in 1062 with AantitufatUiu IftvTir liur ^IXsut ■yftiaBai it it in your pover tn
become friendt to the Laeedaemonians T. 4.20. The latter constnictioa may
be explained as abbreviated for l^tfrir b/ur (tfut) ^fXout rti^Au.

1979. Tlie subject of the infinitive is often retained when It is the B&me as
the (omitted) oblique object of the governing verb. Thus, rapiiyynXt v* tfrX«
Tl9tr0at ToAt'BWtim he ittued ordft* that the Oreeki ihotUd get under arm*
X.A. 2. 2. 21.

1980. An indefinite or general subject of the infinitive (riri, tiMi, Aw^^A-
rotii) is commonly omitted ; and a predicate noun stands in the accnaaUve.
Thoe, tfiiXirdfiBiTor elm Stt one (rird) mutt be humane I. 2. 16 (cp. 1084), ^ar
rapairtir 4 rsMrra Knpriptir it ia eniier for a man to give advice than to fn^mre
tufferlng Men. Sent. 4T1, SpSrraiyip 4 liij SpSrrai ^Sior Banirfor it it prefttraNe
to die in action rather than doing nothing E. Hel. 814.

1981. The construction of the nccusatlve with the Infinitive seems to h«T«
originated from the employment of tlie infinitive to complement the meaning
of transitive verba ; as In nXe^u rt dirtXectr / command you to drpart. Here
the accusative was separated from the transitive verb and fell W be tbe inde-
pendent sabjecl of the inflnitive (f command that you depart). Gradually the
accusative with the inflnitive was used even after verbs incapable of taking an
obj ect-accusative,

PBllSONAL AND IMPERSONAL CONaTRDCTION

1982. Instead of an impersonal passive verb with the accusative
and infinitive as subject, (ireek often uses the personal passive con-
struction, the accusative becoming tlie nominative, Bubject to the
leading verb.

Thus, Kvpst iJT-yAftj Hn^ai Cyrws was reported to have conqvtrrd iiisteoil i.f

iB«5l THE INFINITIVE 441

^VrAff KOfor ni^tu it tras reported that Cyrut had eowptered, and tlauit tl/u
irtXBtU I am jttatified in going aviay instead of jlniiv Isrir i/ii i,irt\Btir U i*
tight for me to ffo atean. EngliHh somelimeB bos to use the Imperaonal coDStruo>
tton in place of tbe Greek peiHODsl construction (cp. 2107).

•■ The peraonal construction is more common with Afycrai, d77AXtrat,
ifuXo^frcu and other pAssive verbs of saying (reguj&r with passive verbs of Viink-
lag) imthrviifialrtiUliigipeM; with dmviiaibi n^cewaiv, Ifiot loortAy, liKaunJUKt,
Svrardt pottibie, hieriiStui% JU, etc., followed b; A form of tirai, instead of An-r-
lajar, Sfar, etc. Thus, i 'Aofipiet cli ri)r x'^P"' aWaD i/ifia\tir iyyfX^rrai th«
Auprian it r^orUA to be about to make an ineureinn into his covnlry X. C. 5.
3.80, mXXiJ Til dXo7(i fu/i^oJ™ ylyrfrBiii much abaurdUy would renult P. PhiL
65a, aiiowt .1 tlrttr U it right for you to apeak P. 8. 214 c, rijr ahlar otrii iirri
SlKiumt (>:«' tl " right for him to bear the blame D. 18. 4. Both construcliona
together : rel yip 34 U7rriu rdn yt Tt0€partSB6ai A 'AriXXuv, nl at rdiTa imlrif
xtM/unr wpiTTtir for Apollo it said to hare bent greatly terred by yoit, and
(it is said) lAot you do everything in obedience to him X. C. 7. 2. 15. Cp. 2104.

N.^ J^Xii im and <fiiinp6t icri take Sri or the participle (2107) ; fqXjv irrt
and ^mpir irTi lake Sri, not the infinitive.

1983. The personal constractions totS, hma (2OB0 c), Sfu are regular Instead
of feni, fwM it teemt, Sti it lackt (much or little). So will) ^In^i for tpalrtroi.

StHu yip lun dSvniTot elm for I teem to be unable P. K. 3t)8 b, ionifUr iioi
mV^irftu if ttemt to me that we are encamped X. A. 1.3. 12, n)* yt ii/tSw (Miaf
^viXflVt (1hi noiB at leatt ynu seem to be our king X.C. 1.4. S, toXXoD Nu iyi
twtp ipatnou i»-oXo7«ffflai I am far fi-om tpeaking in my oten defence P.A.SOd,
lUMpeO Utiiatw Kirpar troBut lara^x'^f he alviOtt (lacked a little) occHpitd th»
tehole of Cypmt 1. 9. 02, rf »i) X^«c ^hIki you teem to tpeak iwK Ar. Nub. 408,

tL 9a«i ital T(*B i\9iir for Socfr t(i iioi iXBrir it teont to me that some One eamt
Is very rare. Jecti meaning U seems good, it It decreed always takes the infin-
itive (1084, 1991). Smw belieee has the construction of 1U92 c. Cp. 1998.

THE INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE
AS SUBJECT, PKEDICATE, AND APPOSITIVB

19H. Ai Subject. — The infinitive may be nRpd as subject, espe-
cially with quasi-impersonal verbs and expressions (933 a).

ypilifiBTa tiaSiir lit to learn to read is necessary Men. Sent, OB, rl xp^ rauTwi
vhal must be donef X. A. 2. 1. 18, tbaiMt (iarl) raXiit roSro Jl|»t to perform
Ihii viell it a credit T. 1. 5, rdvir iSiiy x"^"^' C'^^O to please eeerybody it diffl-
eitU Solon 7, tloitr a^reit rpoLimi (t seemed hest to them to proceed X. A. 2. 1. 2,
tvii^pti adroif ^IXaiif ttrai it it for their interest to befriends X. 0. 11. 23. Cp.
1082, 1B78.

1983. Such qnasi-impersonal verbs and expressions are Sii it it necessary,
Xf^i (properly a anbatantive with irH omitted, 793) it is necessary, Semi it
leemt good, f^ri it it possible, I£(jt> it is In one's p(neer, Mr rf icri It it pottt'
ble, wpfrtmnd rpat^m it isfttiin,/. rvn/ialvti it happens; and many expreasioni
formed by ivri and a predicate noun, as Simr it it riykt, Sluaitr it it fual, dnfi-

442 SYNTAX OF THE 8IHPLK SENTENCE [iftse

u'ot it Is neeeuary, tv^arir it U ponibU, dMnrnr (ot ASfrara.) it ii tinpomiblt,
alaxpi' It >■ diagrarf/ul, isUr (t ta honourable, OpCL and (aipii i{ is time. With
the last two uxprcwionB Uie old dative use of the inflnitiTe is clear : Spa fiovi^^
cr0« it U time /or ^utuiekring P.Sopli.ti41 b.

A. On the personal l{iAi it/u, IlKtuii ti/u, iaxiS, see 1Q82. For Sti fu roirrv
\tynr ire And the personal Ho/uu tqDto \iyar. Note the attractlun in t6 tX^Ak
T^r irirrur tlrtit the nvnUier of the iMui/t it is puaaible to mention L 5- 110
(tor To6TOr i (ttrrit).

b. Stt and xp^ regularly take the accusative and InQnitive (cp. 1G62) ; Ariyi-^
it f> neeeuarg takes Che accusative or dative witb the infinitive.

c. The subject of the influitive is expressed or omitted according to tlie

d. Koner shows only the beginnings of the use of the Infinitive as a real
■nbjeci, !«. not a grammatieal subject, as in 19M.

1986. Aa Predicate. — In definitions the infinitire may be used as
a predicate noun with iari.

ri yifi ywlira^ iwifT^ittit Xaptir ivru for to leant ft to get knoteledire P. Th.
209 e.

1907. As an Appoaitive. — The infinitit^e may stand in apposition
to a precetJing aubatantive, pronoun, or adverb.

(It olurii ipurrot, ifi'f^t Ttpl *dr/>qi one omen U beat, to fight for our roiin-
trji M 24^i, iJwtr . . . rtOro iiinf ipir -rirrtt, ry rp&reir frrcS^ I li/!d all to pnf
heed to this onlg, viz., to fiilloie their leader X, C. 2. 2. 8, tal b/iat St ourm, S-Kotin,
. . . twcUitiior, Tefli iiir yepatripBvi wporiiiii; rUt Si rturlpur wptTtTiiifjaBiu and I
have Initrutled j/oti, too, mg children (Ui thit effect) to honour your elderg ia pre--
ferenrt to i/ourteleei and to receive honour frum the younger in preference to them
X, C. B. 7. 10.

1988. The infiaitivB not in indirent disoourse, and in indirect dia-
course, is often used as the object of a verb.

THB INPINITIVB NOT tN INDIRECT DISCOURSB

1989. The infinitive as object not in indirect discourse is used
after almost any verb that reqnirca another verb to complete its
meaning. The tenses of this infinitive are timeless, and denote only
sta^ of action.

1990. The infinitive may 1)6 the only expressed object, or it may
be one of two expressed objects, of tlie leading verb.

roUowii raXi SiiiaKti x/f^Sni riiuut a good education teaehet ohedieitre to
the lavit X. Ven. 12. 14, Si<iyty<i<tnf at roit AynSois nl rain *<ut^ iSUafy, He
tnught you to diitiiiijuiah the giu'd and th', had X. M. 3. 1.0.

a. Verba signifying to aak, bid, forbid, permit, teach, el«., allow an inSDitire
as one of two obj«cu.

b. Many verbal ezpreasiotis, formed by a BubBtanclve and a verb, take the

InHnitive. Thus, ro^ dXXout SiSiamir rix"!* Ix^vnir theg JM*MH the »kttl to
teach {the) othera L IS. 11. Cp, 2000.

I . iv,Coog[c

■gM] THE INFINITIVK

A. Oy«e* Injlnitive after VeH>» of WSi or Desire

1991. Verbs of waH or desire (and their opposites) are often fol-
lowed by an infinitive. The infinitive with a subject accusative
denotes that something should (may) be or be done. The negative
is p.^ (see 2T19-2T21).

4fcXi>r adrav dioiciv thfy were wOHng to NtUn to Mm X. A. 2. 6. 1 1 , ipm/XOorrQ
Uiirtiw riir wiXir they planned to Uaoe the dtjl HdL 6. 100, ri ilurra . . . f^il
rottlw he Ktkt to do what he like* beX X. H. 4. 6. II, fiariMIt df lof ri dirinrXcir
the ting agkg that j/ou tail ateay X. H. 3. 4. 25, Ejc^nx /t^ iworrnrai he entreated
that they thavid not put him (self) (a deotA L. 1. 26, riimurm . . . vrpartOt-
*0ai ^1 Kaplir the^ tend orders that he thall march upon Carta X. H. S. 1. 7,
fioft rXtrr rir 'AXxtpMfir it tooj decided that Aldbiodtt should tail T. 6. 29.

a. Verba of teill or dtstre with wx sccutatlve subject of ths Infinitive form
one of the olasBes of iiubstwillve clMues introduced in Engilsli b; thai, though
the infinitive ia English is often more idiomatic.

1993. Of verba of utU or desire that take the infinitive some have
an object

a. In the accnsstive (or are fntnuuritive), e.g. : aipoOfiot ehooee, oCtA, alreO-
pAt oak, &(iA claim, aei, poiiX(io|iai reiolve, po«]u>)uu viiak, mill, EikuA ileem
right, SMiooSfuu intend, tSOiM (poeL SAa), with, will, ■tB8a am tcont to, tri-
X>4>*i attempt, Ui permit, tifrA seeh, uAtim command, tuggett, invite, |iAX*
delTf, viipAfuu try, i^tm tend, «pohi|io8|uu am zealous, vpoNoXotiwk invite,
vpOTpfr* nrpe, mi Sa fciuten, am eager, rwavSHm am tager, roX^ dare, ^AA

b. Id the genitive, e.g. : Sfa^mi aak, hiSv^ and ipfy^^oi detlre.

C. In the dative, e.g. : lOxofuu prag, wn^fiOAit and vporrdrrii command,
fn^otduio parpo««, wfifeAiim advite, twrphfu and o^x^'P'* permit, 'rapoivA
rxAort, SonA |mi I have a mind to; and X^n, ft«o*, ^m»A, ^pit« tell (and PoA
(AoM) In the eeose of command.

N. — irriht ■rj7e to a course of action, takes the infinitive, rtlSu eonvlnte
generallf has wt, rarely the sccusative with the infinitive. Thus, ttuBt* airrir
K*tf a^rhii rapt6trBti he urged him to go by himself X. A . 6. 2. 1 3, oi yip rclrorrai
tl nKXtl, in vl> oh^ o^ '^eiXiivat irUrtu for molt people will not be con-
vinced that of your own free tvfU you did not detire to go aieay P.Cr.44c
(iuflnitive X.H.I. 1.20).

1993. Verbs of will or desire not to do anything are e.g. : tiimiia, ^^oCfui
ffir, ifitiyu aeold, dicri3 scruple, aUxt*»iiai, afAouyuu (2126) fetl thame to, irayo-
pt6u furbid, tuXtu hinder, ir^x'!"'' abUain from, cfXa^oDfuu, ^uXdrro^i beuiare
of. Thus, ^^viiai tukt-tx'^* " ^ A"'' (<* r*f^te you P.G,467e, a^x^vo^ai
i^iflrtir Ti\ifiTi I am asliamed to Ull you the truth P. A. 22 b.

1994. Under verbs of will or detire are included verba expresdng an activity
to the end that anmethlng thall or >AaII not be done. Thus, ttium I'ffer, give,
StitiiAx»iMt struggle against, rot£, fiarpdrrcviai, (or^rrdjltfiu vtanaae. effect,
rafix" offer (others in 1092, IMS).

444 SYNTAX OP THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [iggs

1995. Sereral verbs of will or desire take Swm with the fulare or tbs fmb-
junctive (yetba of ^ort, 22U, 22U) ; or f«( with the subjuRCtive (verbs of /ear,
2225) ; some take the participle (212S S.).

1996. The Infinitive ma; be rmcA witli the

c. Oenitlve or dative when the expreBHion of desire is addressed to a petaon
and tlie genitive or dative depends on the leading verb. Here the sentence ii
simple. Tlius, J^iui t/iur . . . Ti tltaia fif^taiaSai I a»k jrou to render a jutt
verdict J. l^. 6i , ^tit IWau wavi fOfiiyytWtr fiarXltiaSai he ordfred all tkt rrtl
to arm thenmeleea X. A. 1.B.3,

b. Accusative when tbe action of a petenn la desired (example in 19TB).
Such sentences are complex.

N. — Verbs of eommanding allow either a or b; but only Kt\t6it witb the
accunative percnils either meaning : a'Stiu ft rain'a M voxir / tell yuv mat to
do thii aud / coramand that j/ou ihall not do this. Cp. 1081.

1997. Several verbs signifying to lay are also used as verbs of wt7I and then
mean command. The agent commanded usuall; stands in the accusative sub-
ject of the infinitive. So with X^u, dxor, #pdju, i^uiQ. Thus X^w / iyA
Si\if titaicTip^r Xapritltay that thou ahalt take mioetetet by craft 8. Pb. 101,
re^ott fXryof rXcit / told them Chat theg should sail D. 19. 160. rdrrn fivyr
TO^ Toiriiir ipiarriu JloCrai Utiir all said that the ringleaders should mjfer punish-
ment S.. A. (i. T. 34, tlrtr r^r 86par itt^iiaSat theg commanded that the doOT
should be shut (and stay sliut) X. K. 6, 4. 7, {SoriXe^ Ifp^i" rd'si rai ir rj
'EXXdli riXcii iiiiTar6iioin ilm fie king issued a vrilten order that all iheeitie*
in Greece should be indepeitdent (not: v>rote thai then aere IndependeiU) X. U.
6. 3. 12.

a. The agent may stand in the dative as x<*^^' ^'Y" '■" ^ ^^ f^** ^ SV
S. 0. C, 840.

1996. The present ftnd aorist infinitive (both timeless) are tbe usual tsawt
of the Inflnitive after verba of vtiil or desire (see IBW). Tlie perfect is raie;
as (lavf TJir Sipar HicXiu-fat (1907). SokS and ietw (u> Signifying / have a
mind to or I am determined to take llie present or aorist like Soni: rir tit
ifdyttr totCi I have a mtnd to bring out the ass At. Vesp. ITT, iyi atr pat lasA
. . . iKprf^aireai ktX. nou I have a mind to show, etc. P. Eu. 288 c. Cp. 1983 a.
When it is clearly denoted that the action resuWed on is to tollow withont delay
the future is oaed ; as In iWi /un Soku . . . oi rttetrfftu a.iT^ but I AM deter-
mined that I will not ace^ his opinion P. Tli. 183 d.

B. Some verba, as n\tiw, which might be held to introduce indirect disconise,
are classed under verSs of will or desire, because, like these verbs, they do not
regularly lake the future Infinitive ; and because, unlike verba of saving and
thinking (which admit alt the tenses of the infinitive) they introduce infinitives
which do not show differences of time. The future infinitive does not ez[H«ss a
command. For a few cases of the future after verbs of will or desire, see 18fl0.

1999, Verba siBnifyioR to hope, erpert. promise, threaten, and nvear, wben
followed by the aorist (less often the present] infinitive (1868), have the con-
struction of verbs of will or desire. When such verba take the future infiDitivB
they have the construction of indirect discourse.

i,,Coog[c

•009] THE INFINITIVE 446

B. InJlHitive after Other Verba

9000. The iDfinitive follows many verbs, especially such as deoote
lAitUtfiJltneM, necetaity, etc. (and their opposites).

ttxtri iSirtra . . . fiartitir he UKia no longer able to live T. 1. 180, hic twi-
rrifUMf kHOwittg how to neim X. A. 6. 7. 26, nt^tial n irarrtt . . . kiiofrii-
tti* and all men are hy nature prone to err T. 3. 4G, iiarBirovait ipxttr ti jcbJ
ifXtatai. Ihef learn Aou to ffovern and be governed X. A. i, 9. 4 ; &1bo after tlie
iiDpenonBls of lOeS.

a. fju / can is rterlved froiu the meaning / have especially wltb a ^erb of
taging. Thus, Atdi *\i,yar fx'"^" «>(<' they can proclaim a stroke of Zeut
A.Ag.aa7.

C, Infinitive after Adjectives, Adverbs, and Substantives
aodt. The mfinitive serves to define the meaning of adjectives,
adverbs, and substantives, especially ttiose denoting ability, Jitnens,
mpacUy, etc (and their opposite^;), and generally those analogous in
meaning to verbs which take the infinitive (2000). Here the datival
meaning (^purpose, destination) is often apparent. Cp. 1969.

2002. Adjectives and Adverbs. — Unrot 4/ui li^Xcit able to attttt »» X. A.
3.3.18, SarbtXiy'". iiutii ^.unu skilled in speaking, evil in life Ae8.3. 174, al«
^tXwr able to love D. 26. 2, Itoi/ioI tlri ^dxtaBai they are readj/ to fight X. C.
4.1.1, ipx'" lifii^BTOf nott worthy to govern X. A. 1. U. 1, Hit . . . d/i^x""'
tUiiBtir rrpartiiiaTi a road impracticable for an aitny (o eii(«r 1. 2. 21, xi^^"!"
Stafiairtir hard to croMt 5. 6. 9, irin^ia, 6itit quick to conceiee T, 1. 70. So also
after jI^Aim easy, iilii plediant, iitauit juat, irayiaun necessary, twir-itSiiot tuit-
able, d7aMt {food, olVtot responsible for, iiaKaKbt incapable of; cp. dXlysi 1063.
After adverbs: iitXXwra litir most ^endid to behold X. C. 8.3. 6.

a. Some of these adjectives take the infinitive b; analn$;y to the related
verba, aa vpMD/iai tealoiu (vpaAD^iaD/uii), Jmar^iurr kiioicing hole (fwlaTaiiai),

2003. olo« fit, trat *^ffle^e1U take the infinitive like the fuller expreagions
Towilra aim, Totaih-M Hvet. Thus, oi tip i^r Upd ata ri rtSlor dpStir for it teat not
the proper teason to irrigate the plain X. A. 2.3. 13, Star dira^t svffleiettC to live
off of T. 1. 2, Totoirrai oTot . . , Ttl$tr0<u the kind of a mnn tn be convinced
P. Cr. 46 b. On rfroOrot Arn (uii) see 2263. Horn, has Uie infinitive after Tnuit,

2004. Snbatantlves.— Ah, el niln bpir 6\lyev ^Xiifar txowi raiititirBai
jour children are almost of an age to be educated P. l.ach. 1H7 c. With iari
omitted ; rxoX^ 7< ^^uV^iMftir we hare leisure to learn X. C.4. .1, 12, irdviq
rtl8tr$mt there is need to obey X. H. 1. 0. 8, rcpafmr ftq lipa it is high time 10
JIntih X. A. 8. 2. 32. Cp. I9Bri.

3003. The infinitive U added, like an accusalive of respect (1001, 1002),
to iDtranaittve verbs (especially in poetry), to adjectives (more [re([iiently in
poetij). and to enbetaiitlvi'i! (rarely). Thus. Toiot ISii' xur/i In asjfct (lit, to
look on} TheognU 216, ip&, trvyrii of a repuliive expression X. A. 2. 6. 9, d«oii-

146 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [kwC

vsi raYEdXwt fx" ^ ^ o^'V J**!* to Ae'f I^- IC- '^i ftiOfia ml tuc^laat a wuxnd
even to hear of P.L,«66d.

2006. Tbe Infinitive limiting the mesulng of «n adjective U commoDly aotlie
(or middle) in CMee where the pasaive is more natural in English. Thus, Xtrrtt
Svrarit taTanfjirat a ipeeeh capable o/ being underttoiid 1'. Ph. HO c, iitot trnv/ii-
tfai lenrthy to be admired T. 1. 138 (but d{iot 0ai>^ft.rAii X.C. 6. 1. 6).

a. The active une ia due Co the old datlval function of the infinitive : Svmrif
iBTan^voi capable/oT undentaiiding.

a007. The infinitive, with or without iort or &t, may be used with
^ than after compai-atives, depending on an (implied) idea of abiiHy
or inr^ilUi/. ij uwrf is more common than ij or ^ ^. Cp. 2264.

rb yifi AaniM iitT{et 4 ^piir fur the ditraae it too great to be borne S.O.T.
~ 1203, 4io(h5itat nil n >wi[t» 4 ^rt ^fur tiraettii tatiir rf riX« vufi^p / fear leU

fime calamity befall the State greater lAan U can bear X. H. S. 6. 17, ^fux^ipi
4 in ((itrturBcu too thorl to reach X. A. S. 3. 7.

a. The force of 4 ^rt may be expressed by the genitive ; M, xpdrrar Xiyn
(T. 2. 60) = tptimt i) <S»T« \tyr»ai. Cp. 1077.

b. Words implying a comparison may lake the infinitive with Arr« or ««
(1068).

D. Infinitive of Purpose and Bemdt

aooa Infinitive of Purpose. ^ The infinitive may express pnrpoee

(usually only with verba taking the accusative).

Ta*Tjj» tJ)f Xiip"' trirpifn Siapwdffat Toit 'EWtfair he gave this lattd omr to
the Greekt to plunder X. A. 1. 2, 19, ri Ij^ffv (toC irTpBTt6^a.To,) nriXiri ^vXdr-
Tiiv ri grpaririSoi he left half {of the army) behind to guiml the eantp 6. 2. 1.
Um 4rl paaMA odi tylirtra ri Itpd EA« iaciifices did not turn out (favourable)
for going againit the king '2. 2. 3, 'ApuTrdpxv • ■ ■ tiort it/iJpir AToiiay4aat9u
jfoa granted a day to Aristarchus to make hia defence X. II. 1. 7. 28, 4 sipi 4 ip.^
irlifHTo . . . tlaiinu ry Sfofiinf n iiau my dour slond open for ang petitioner
of mine to enter 6. 1. 14, rafiix" iia-orin Iparit I offer mytelf to be quritiniud
P. A. 3.3b, TBI 7i™r«ii» riitr iptpoiaai the women bringing (something) to drint
X.H.7.2.9. Cp. also 2032 e.

3009. The infinitive of purpose is used in prose especially after verb* ine«ii>
tng to give, eatraat, choose, appuiM, take, receive. Verbs signifying to and,
go, come usually take the future active participii: (2006) ; but T. B. TiO has Wn
rdt Hur rpa&ire/i'l'at ii rir iJyar \tniira T\ivaa.t they sent ahead ten shipe to nail
into the great harboTir ; and in poetry the infinitive often denotes pmpuae after
these verbs, and after itm in Homer (A 20) and Hdt. (6. 26).

3010. After verbs meaning to have (or be) at one'i dUpoaitloH : ol rr^nA-
TBI ipy6pior oit ttx"' trurlTl^tirSai the toJdiem did not have money by mean* of
ahlch they could provifio!Hhemti-Ir<e» X. A. 7. 1.7, iai ttJi t' tart col >-M nff-
[laBai there it ttiade and grate to tit down In V. Phae. 22flb.

3011. InflnlUve of Result — The infinitive may be used with mtk

i,,Coog[c

WM] THE INFINITIVE 447

(sometimes with As) to denote a result, often an intended result
See 2260 S.

«. Bevenl verba, Hubetaatives, and ailjectiies usually taking tlie infliiltlvi;
also admit fivre with the infinitive (1!'2T1) ; and tbe InHnitive is fuund where
itti with tbe [nllnltive might lie expected : ^i^»iorn}auri* i^Sirra Tounr iXtietpor
dm Ihey recall thai he km emaaeipaUd (lit. released to at to befite) D,2Q. 26.
Hers ttae redundant infloilive etprbsses an Intended result.

N. — This redundant use of •!»( is common In Horn, and Hdt.

E. Abaoltite Infinitive

3013. Certain idiomatic infinitives are used absolutely in paren-
the^cal phrases to limit the application of a single expression or
of the entire sentence.

a. V«ifa« of SayinK- — in hat tlwtif, in <twtir »o to ^itak, almott; {in)

drXfii ttraw, iit avrtUm (1497) tlttU, it {ir §pa.xt'i at) avrri^i tlrtlt to apeak
brlffif, eoneiselji; in ivl war tlTttr, ri ai/twai tlrtir tpeakiug generally ; c-x'Sir
ttwtir to to tay, alraoH (poene dixerim) ; air 6tif tiwtir in Qod't name; and ho
In with \4y*ir, ^pitfetv, itpijeBai, as in ir ritrv ilp^aBai in general. Kxaiiiples:
4AifM yt in (vet ilwtTr ciSir tlp'^Koair not one trord of truth, I may tay, did
Ihey litter P. A. IT a, iyaedr iiir IrXiSt tlirtJr aiSir yiyort T^ ri\n in a uord the
State gained no advantage Dinarchiu 1,33.

b. vt (f*et) (IrtU is often osed to limit too strict an i4)p1icatioii of a general
(Ulement, especially i-ii or oMcft. Tbus, irdrrct on Vtoi tfirerr nearly every one,
«Md» in trm ctrtir almoit no one. It is thus used like paene dixerim ; rarely,
like M< (ta dtcatn, to soften the strength of a metaphor.

c Especially common Is the absolute t\rai in ixiir tXrat wQlingly, Intention-
""P* if f"* ^n A^'P "i usually in negative or q»asi-negative statemeiita (imir
may be inflected). Also In t6 tari riihor (_irl ro^v) ttrat at far at he it
ronetraed, in , . . dm at far at ... it aincerned, tA r£r tlrm al pretent.
, Examples : eiii ^mt iniiT elm -fi\i,tra Tapani nor do you tnti-ntioitally
eautt ttrangert to laugh X. C. 2, 2. IG, inaOaa tlnu oi* ire\tUrtin it it not
leaUnffty teparaUd P. Phae. 262 a, ri yi 4w ixiiror iJrai iaiiSTft (it) to far, at leatt,
at it depended on him you would have been taved L. 13. 58.

d. Other ezpresslona : '^i itatr, ii% ifuil imit, in t/iol tptrat at it teem* to
tte, in my opinion, (ilii) tltitrai to make a gaett, (wt) rviJ^iWtiw to compare,
(in) itttvirai to the ear, dii ^fw/ir^o-Bi to recall the matter, Sret yi i^ tlSirai a* far
at I knote, etc.; S\lyov lilr, lUKpoC Sitr almost, all but {itlr may be omitted,
13lf9). Examples: i yi^i KtiStiittdi Irvxt irifipw mettiiurei toS KXfirfou, i^
Sanir /or Gletlpput, it teemt to me, happened to be Bitting at a dittance
from Cllnta* P. Eu. 274 b, lunpaS Sttr rpiu rdXarra almott three talents
D. 27. 29.

e. Some of these absolute InflnitlveB may be explained by reference to the
idea of purpose (2008) or result. Thus, nvrtUm elwiir for one compretting the
matter to qwoit (cp. uf paiieit dieam), nitfieO Selr to a* to lack tittle. Others
recall the adverbial accusative (1600); cp. i/ut lattiw with ynii^ir 4uir.

■448 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [J013

F. Infinitive in Commands, Wishes, and Exdamationa

3013. Infinitive In Commands. — The infinitive may be used for tbe
second person of the imperative. The person addressed is regarded
as the subject. This inhnitive is eommoner in poetry ^han in prose
(where it tias a. solemn or formal force),

tapffur rvr, &i6ii.ijSn, trl Ipibtavi /lAxt'Bai isilh good ctivrage note, Dtomed,
fight against the Trujam E 121, ai Si, KXcaplSi . . . rat r6\at irat&i irttiia
but do you, Clearidai, open the gates and sally forth T. 5, 0.

■. Tliia infinitive inay be used in conjunction nilh an imperative: dxsAcn
Xt^ ■ HIT* Ti rirpia Toit x*o' rtvnv hear ye, good people t drink the Pitchert at
OUT tire* drank I Ar. Ach. 1000.

b. The InSnltlve for tlie third pereon of ttie imperBtive often ocean in legal
language (laws, trentles, etc.), and does not necesaarily depend on the principal
verb. Thus, frii di tlrat rat sraySii rtrr^Korra and the treaty shall continue for
fifty years T. 5. 18. In this construction the infinitive has the force of an InOni-
tive dependent on llofc (i{ inas voted that) or the like. So in medical language,
u *tmr It uSdip it is well for the patient to driitk mattr Hippocraws 1. 161.

C. Tbe infinitive (with subject accusative) is rarely used for the third person
ot the imperative when there is an unconacions ellipais of a word like Sbt grant,
or ttx'l'^' 1 pray. Thus, rtix" o-DX^o-ai ttupira nlXii itl p^(, ffu^u U ettaf

iiiir Si/urai ri\ir let him strip off my arms and r^rry them to the hollow *h^,
but let him gite back my body to my home H 78.

i. In negative commands (prohibitions) M-i ^ith the infinitive Is poetic and
louic: olt >iJ} rt\iltirdo not approach thtse (=>i4 rAc^) A. Pr.712, utii raXeb
rw O^iov and do not call him happy yet Hdt. I. 32.

2014. Infinitive In Wishes. — The infinitive with a sabject accusa-
tive may he used in the sense of the optative of wish, usually with
the same ellipsis as in 2013 c.

flcol loXirai, biJ fa !oti\elS.i riixfif ye gods ofmgeoHntry.iaag bondage lutt hr
my lot I A. Sept. 263, & Ztv. iiryttfirSiu iioi 'A#i|«Joii» r<(ffwSoi oh Zeut, that it
be granted to me to pnnish the Athenians! Hdt. 5. 100 (cp. it Zti, Sit /a r«i«o-
fftfoi /lipa* rarpbt oh Zfus, grant that T may avenge my father's murder f A.Ch.
18). This construction is very rare in Attic prose: rir iiiytiyiTtir Ixom /|i/>iu
. . . i\a^par iaS^ra the hunter should go forth in a light dress X. Veu. 6. 11.
Here no definite verb can Ik supplied.

a. The nominative with the infinitive (fnatead of tbe optative) after ai lif
occurs in Homer (1, 311. a, 378).

2015. Infinitive in ExcUmations. — The infinitive is often used in
exclamations of surprise or indication. The subject stands in the
accusative.

liU wnStit rdtt that I should sufier this t A. Earn. 837, roiovrori rp/^r utra to
keep a dog like that t Ar. Vesp. 835.

On the infinitive with itp' ^ («^' ^i) see 2279 ; with irpiv, see 2453.

lou] THE INFIMTIVB 449

■NFINITIVB AS OBJBCT IN IHDIRBCT DISCOURSE

aoi6. The infiaitive is used as the object of verbs of aayivg and
ihiukiBg. tjuch infinitives denote both time and stage of action
(CD. 1866).

a. The finite verb of a, sentence placed In dependence on a verb of lajfing or
Ihlnking that reqalres the InSnitive, becomes inflnitlve, which Inflnitive stands j/i
the relation of a subetantive as subject or object at the leading verb. Cotnmonly
as ot^ea : thus, KCpoi *i/f Cyni* U tlctorlouM, when made the object ol 0^f he
taj/t, becomes a part of a new sentence 4irtvl Kfpor rijcif, In which KDper near i«
the object of ^al. As tubject, when the verb of taging is passive : thus, In
XiytTai KOpor wicir, the last two words form the BUbject of X^yrroi.

2017. Verba of Maying are e.g.: say iHiU, 4)d^toi, \^yv ; eonfett i/ui}^y&;
proniae ^itxniiiat, iroSixoiiat, trayyfWafiai, ii^ltraiuu ; prtUnd rpoatomBptu ;
tuxar tiiiKiu; deny iwnprouttai ; gainsay im\iyw; dispute d^iff^^fl, etc.

Some verbs of saying admit otlier constn)ctions tban the infinitive, and espe-
cially trt or in (26TB). \/yai, tlror, 4ipi^, ^K& with »ri or ui mean say, with
the infinitive commnnti (1997).

a. ^iii toy, assert, erpmi the opinion that In classical Greek is almost
■Iways followed by the infinitive, but by Sri very often in the later language.
^^ fr. occurs In X. A. 7. 1. 6 (4,,,^ ip. in L. 7. 19, X. H. 6. 8. 7 ; D. 4. 48, 27.
IB by anacoluthon).

b. X^w »lale (impart a fact) takes either the infiniUve or (ri or iit. The
infinitive occuib osually with the passive (X^crai, etc.) either in the personal or
impereonal construction (1982 a). The active forme of \iyu> with the Infinitive
mean command (1997).

C. tlror said Usually takes Sri or (^t ; with the Infinitive, it commonly means
rmamanded (tiH)7). Cp. the double use of told.

N. — ilvor meaning said nlth the infinitive is rare, but occurs in good Attic
proae: And. 1.67, BO; Thuc.7.35; Lys. 1(1. fl, 10. 9, 10. 12 ; Xen. H.1.8.7, 2. 2.
15, C. 6. 5. 24, S. 2. 13 ; Is. 2. 29; Lye. GO; Aea. 3. 37, S. 69; Dem. 16. IB ;
I'Uto, G. 473 a, 603 ri, Lach. 192 b, Charm. 174 a, Hipp. Maj. 291 b, Pol. 20:) c,
liBO b, L. 664 a, Clltopb. 409 a, 410 b. In poetry thU use is frequent.

2018. Verbs of thinking aimoet always take the infinitive. Such are : think
iyai^iai, otaiuu, iQtH, nidfu; ftope Awiftii ; suppose faroXa>i^«ii; svspecl irotrttu;
gufts */id{W ; feel eonfidr.nt xuiTtiu ; ditbelifve diMrri. Tlio use of wt is rare,
while 8ti is very rare (2680).

a. Verbs of perctiviiig sometimes take the infinitive by analogy to verbs of
thinkitUj; aa intia, alaSiniiat, rvrBiraiuu, (2144).

2019. Each tense of direct discourse is retained (with its proper
meaning as regards stn.^e of action) when it becomes infinitive in
indirect discourse; but an imperfect is i^epresented by the present
infinitive ; a pluperfect, by the perfect infinitive. See 1866, 1867.

2030. An original ou of direct discourse is generally, an original
ILTi is always, retained in indirect discourse. But in some cases on
becomes f.^ (2723 ff.).

SUKKOUM.— 2B

I . f. Cookie

460 SYNTAX OP THE SIMPLE SENTENCE t*o"

2021. The infinitive is the subject of the passive of verbs of gaging \
aud thiakirtg (1982 a). So with &mci if seems, ^vtrtu it is plain, etc |

2022. The infinitive represents a finite verb after verbs of saving

and thinking. i

a. rlrot ^aair ilrai theg asgerl that they are loyal L. 12. 49, sMtlt i^atat '
. fffniaitiir afrir iiobodn said that he ifcneio him 23. 3, al irrtiiiwtt oH ^drir (2692) i

(Ihu dXXiii AS6r the gnidea lay there is no other mad X A. 4. 1.21, Tdrrn ipeiti i
ri Xoiiri^ utiiii tXni ttpSoKnirtpiiy r^i dptr^i everybody JB ttme to rome will to) i
(Aaf lAere i» nothing more profitable tAan bravery X. C. 7. 1, IS. OUiei exAmtdes
1867.

b. fiaaiKtii riicSv ihrt(T« (A« itinff thinke he i> vietorioue (= niw, cp. ISST)
X.A.2. 1. 11, Dro/ui 0A7-><rT(ir irriu 1 think it fa best 6.1.8, ^i^TTcuor ^( ^wiXri !
Umu they luepeeted that they were to go against the king 1.3. 1, {Ztatpir^i) t1 |
iymtlr iatiTbr fyTUTdraj , . . fiarlat i\ii~il(tTti tint Socrate* Viae of the opinion j
that /or a man not to know hitaeelf aaa very near to madaeta X. M. 3. 9. 6. I

C. When a word of saying Ja expressed or Implied in what precedea, Bevenl
infinitives may be used where the indicative Ib employed io tr&usl&tioD. So in
the narratiuD in X. C. 1. 3. 5-6.

2023. The infinitive with iv represents aji indicative with in or
a potential optative with An. See 1846, 1848, 1849, 2270.

2024. Verbs ai^ifying to hope, expect, promise, threaten, and stcear
take the future infinitive in indirect discourse, and the aorist (less
often the present) infinitive not in indirect discourse (like verbs of
will or desire, 1868, 1999). iX.v^<u ravra vot^uv I hope that I Aaa do
this, (Xxi^iii Tavra im^via or voUiv I hope to do this.

THE INFINITIVE WITH THE ARTICLE [ARTICULAR INFINITIVO

2025. The articular infinitive, while having the character of a
substantive, retains the functions of a verb. In its older use the
articular infinitive is a subject or object; the nearest approach to
this use in Homer is Atiif naX to ^Aoamiv to watch is aim trouble
V 62. In the tragic poets the genitive and dative are rarely used ; in
the speeches in Thucydides and in Demosthenes al) of its fonr cases
appear with great frequency. The articular infinitive may take
dependent clauses.

2026. The articular infinitive admits the cooBtrucUons of an
ordinary substantive.

Norn. t4 «ou(v making or to make, t6 vm^vw*, t4 vrnftraw v* ««iotyfai
Gen. ■rafl woutv of making, roB voiVjomv, toO aoif^rat, etc.
Dat. T^ voui* for mnking, bit mnkinti, t^ -Boi^ja^iv, vf «m4*w> ©tc
Ace. tA nutv. ti mt^^a^HV, ti irai1|a-a(, etc.

2027. The articular infinitive is treated as subject, predicate
noun, and object like the simple infinitive (1984-1986). .

•o3>] THE INFINITIVE 461

aooa The negative of the axtioular infinitire is /nf.

3029. The articular infinitive may indicate time (after verbs of
nyiiu/ or thinking, 2034 g), or may be timeless.

303IX The articular infinitive ia in general used like the infinitive
without the article, and may take Sv; as regards its constructions it
has the value of a substantive. The article is regiilarly used when
the connection uniting the infinitive to another word has to be
expressed by the genitive, the dative, or a preposition.

a. The articular infinitive la rarely used, like a, true substantive, with the
Hibjeciive genitive : t4 t" eS fparar airHr lupMlaBf imitate at lea*t their wisdom
D. 10. 269.

20aL NOMINATIVE OF THE ARTICULAR INFINITIVE
Subject (1084) : rioit rb rty&r iptlTrir iart toO XaXtir in the young liUnee U
bttler than ^xtch Hen. Sent. 3B7, rb n*\oworniftovi nbroii >iji pajfi^m wapir.xt'
t/iir . , . ZapUif liXorir ifif fact thai th« Peloponnfsiaiit did not come to Iheit
attUtaiiee enabled you to puniih the Samians T. 1. 41,

2032. GENITIVE OF THE ARTIOULAB INPIHITIVE
«. The genitive of the artlcnlar inflnlUve Lb naed to limit the meonlug of mb-
Btantives, adjectives, and verbs.

b. Adnomlnal (1200) : roO iri^r ^tBvidi^ from deetre to irini T. 7. 84, rpit
Ti)r riXiv rfwff^aUmi ^i IXwiiu IjMor Tsf> iXiTr they attacked the dly and enter-
tained hopeM 0/ taklag U 2. 50.

c. I'artitlve (1300): tsu Bapvtir rb rXtUrar tC^Tt^irft having gained the
grtidest amount of courage T. 4.34. After comparativeB (1481) i rf olv tanr . . ,
rav Tt!t ^CXhi dp47«>' idXXior i what then it nobler than to kelp one'* frlendt t
X.C.1.5.1S.

d. After verbs ; twiax'/"'' tov Satpitir im detieted from weeping P, Ph. 117 e
flip. 1302).

e. Pnrpofle (cp. 1408), often a, negative purpose : roD nii rh, Sdwa roUit in
frder not to do Vhat wo* just D. 18. 107, frnxfoftl 'ATuXdiri) . , . roD (i^ Xpffrai
.. . EstBu^ytir T^iw Zi^ia-t Atalaitte was fortified to prevent pirates from ravag-
Isg Eaboea T. 2.32. More common is the use with brip (2032 g) or Imkh.

I. Genitive Absolute (2070): ir ialmt Si flrrot aitl roD h>x<'/»<' ""' '*" ^1"'
I'ru Itl ri Tpoa/itrareat since the power of attack is alwaj/e in their handa, so {n
OUT handf should lie the power of repelling it in advance T. 8. 12,

J. After prepositions, e.g. drrt reO ftrt K5/>£5r «»oi . , . M ^fiiriHt troptiero
iutead of going agaitvt Carta, he mnrchfd toward Thrygia X. H. 3. 4. 12, tm,
"i tm^portty withovt exercising tdf-coatrot X. M. 4. 3. 1. To ei^resH purpose
Ibe genitive with iw4p i> very common ■ brip to3 ioitrai» ytriirBai »«>iio< . . xdrra
tfA^pariirrmi he devote* hit every tffort that he may become master ;f these
I), 8. 45, bwip roB M rb mKpAiiicmr rm^aat in order not to do vhat a>a» com-
t»a«ded 18. 204. Fnrtbennore, after dri, rpi, iid, luri, ttpl, 6ri, Into, x^P"-
X«)>Ii, rXiJi-, ittxfit i and after adverba. In Hdt. roC may be omitted wtux inti.

,= Coo^^k

STNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

a033. DATIYB OF THE ABTICDLAR INFINITITB

a. With verbs, adjpctivt>s, and Rdverbe : thus, fn . . . dns-rwiri ry iiti rrri-
laieBtu Irrb Su/iitai ihat the}/ may dittrwit my Kaving been hoHoured bg iiviat

poieent X. Ap. U, t^ j^t Irri n trarrlor, Siarip rf typTffoptni t4 jntfltMutj U II
lomeChing oppoted to living, a* tieeping toteakitigf P. Ph.TI c, oiStri rSurirritr
r\ier Kttfiiriitc *(X.Trof fl t^ rpiT€pot rpii rolt wpiy/ioai ylynaBai Philtpkia
coaqnered tu by nothing to much as by being b^orehand in hia operttUinu
D. 8.11, ilia TV TiMar at the lame time that we honour I'.H.iObe, frBrMry
xperrirttt equal to tormvilng beforehand A. Ag. 262.

b. After prepoaillons : t.g. oi yi^i hrl T^ SouXni, dXX' i-rl Tip ifuSw rolt Xniro-
liimt ttmi iKwiiararrai (diroiEoi) for colonists are not tent out nn the baits of
being inferiors, but on the basis of being tht equate of those who are Irft at hoist
T. 1. 34, b itit wpit TV nt/Sit in T^i ir/w(r^((ai \m^it, rvbt alx)ui\i!)Tmn . . . fMain
ths one, in addition to gaining nothing from the eDibassy, ranaonfd the prisunirt
of tear H. It). 220, it ry ^fWMiv yi^i M^it Jj^'toi jSloi for life is sKeetett tn being
conscious of nothing S. Aj. 663.

2034. ACCnSATIVB OP THE ARTICULAR INFINITIVE

a. Object (cp- 1*W9): Sttait ri n^ fearing to live P. A.28d, fa-rfi.* ;rf»f«^i
■aiir rb iiitttr, t\a.TTor Si ri iSiniaetu use rail doing wrong a greater evO, being
xeronged a lesser P. G. 500 a.

b. After prepodtioiia : e.g. iih/iarar iyaBir rh nt^t^X'" ^Iktu tl% rb nTS-
jrptrrur riynSi iibfdif itee appears to be an advantage of the greatest imporUxnet
viUh regard to th« successful aceomplishment of ercftlent objects \. C. 8. l.S, tw>
iwirrut irtplowTo! ttai wapik tA riciir theg are indifferent to everything in ron-
parison with victory T. 1.41, rpAi ri iirrpimr JtEffSai rtraiStuitiiot aehnoled to nt'xf-
erate needs X.M.^.2.^. rOi (x"i 'pit Ti ief)<tir iw U-ii ixXnroi irt Seirw, A'lr
do you feel abnvl being irilling to go uninvited to suj^er? P. S, 174 a (cp. MAwi
ivUrai). Furllieniiiirf, alter Sii, irl, tari, lari, rtpl.

C The accuMtive of tlie tnflnitive with t* appears afWr many verb* ami
verbal expressions whicti usually take only the simple Inflnltive. Such verbal
expregsiniiB may be followed also by a genitive of a noun. Thud, ri vnMor U
i-Di rapairS I commend speed tn thee S. Ph. 630, tapSlai i' JflirTaiiat ri Spar I trilh-
draa from my resolulinn so ae to ( — and) do this thing S. AnU llOS, /taBir yip
aix ir ipntnTir tI JpSr when I am informed, I wilt not refuse the deed S. Ph. 11*-,
ri rpaBuiuiaeai Si rundCfirriF olicor iraiStioiitr aAriJr loe trained her to shoui teal
in assisting to increase our estate X. 0.9. 12 (cp. 162B), tA ipan $(ttptnt tl you
refuse to love P. T.ys. 206 a.

i. So after aJjectives. Thus, /larpit ri apltai tuSts x^ X«i-ii x^>vt the
future is lon<j (t.e.. time enough) to decide (Aft S. El. 1030,

e. This object iuflnitive after verlM is often an internal accusative. The accu-
sative after verba and nounn Ih. in many cases, like nn acctiaative of lesperi
(ttlOO); as Td Spir oiK iSiX^rar they refused tn do ffS.n.C. 442, oJe-x'MTOi t1
ToXpir they are nttiamed to dure l*.Siiph.24Tb, oM' 4p^ tbi rtifanrrtm irri
eipvn nor have J courage to remove thee S. O. C.47, t4 pit ti r^r y^ ^At

•037] THE IXFIXITIVE 458

hfii\SMir . . . (lanl list they are able to make an inroad into our country
T-B. 17- 'I'hia mliDitive after adjectives (and BonieCiuieB after verbs) occurs
when the simple iiifioitive expresaes purpose or result, as in rlt MitJur . . . roS
drtXcI^^ ri /t^ mn dmXovdrr ; what one of the Medes remained away from yoii
KOMHolio aUeni you t X. C. &. 1. 26.

{. SomeTerbatahe the articular infinitiTeafi an object when the simple Infini-
tive cnuld not be used : iiJmr ipir t4 raliir rif iXivniiuror taking heed only lo

ttritt aitff one he eaughl X. C. 1. 4. 21.

%. Verbs of toying and thinking rarely lake tlie articular inflnltlve (also with
i')i foMi Ti M tWmi; wilt thoa ttaear thou didst not knowt 8.Aiit.53G,
iTt fkwiiot yif tfixaiiat iiipayiitm._ ri fi4 raflfE* 4» dXXo iXJjf t* fiificiiMt for 1

conw wiUi good grip on the hope ihid I can niffer nothing aaue what it my fate
S. Ant. 2SG.

b. On the use of the object iufinltive nlth ri /i^ and tA iili »i, see 2744 and
a740.

1. The accusative with the Infinitive ma; stand In the absolute construction:
ird-ltrb iXOtir rairoB, ilfui fftir rira atrhr ir a{rTiiri,yayt'.r T^y Tl/uiplir at for
hit coming, I believe that tome god brovfiht him to hit very pviiithmeat I.yc. 01.

OTHEK USES OP THE ARTICULAR INFINITIVE

2035. Apposition (cp. 1987). The articular iDfinitive, in any case,
is often used in apposition to a preceding word, especially a deinon-
Btrative.

rtPri iari ri Uinir, tA tXiar T&t dXXwt {>r'<^ 'x'"' injuetiix it thit : to seek
to hme more than other people P. G. 48Sc, tI yifi roiiTDu fiatupiiirtper, tdO yy
mx^'" i"^- /or what it more hleteed than this: to be commingled with the

earth, etc. X. C. 8. T. 25, ioai to^v Sm^iiptir iritp tHii dXXiiiv f^ur, rfi ti/i^i ipi-

■ytffioi man differs herein from other creattires that he aspires after honour
X.IIi.7.3.

3036. In Exclamation (cp. 2015). — Thus, i% n^P' '"" '^ *'*
xXifSivTa. itvpo Tirxeiv my ill-luck! that I showld happen now to have
been summoned hither! X. C. 2. 2. 3.

2037. Wth Adjuncts. — The articular infinitive may take various
adjuncts including dependent clauses, the whole forming one large
substantival idea.

rt iiir yiif wM! iroXu^ttirat carA rit TJXc^t the fact that Vie have tost mveh
ill the war D. 1. 10, rinitiuu , . , ri i-AiItii rSr wfiayiidTuii 4fiai ^irt^ory/mt t^
fi4 fMJWff-Au ri iiorra tmtir, 4 t{! fiij tutiim I am persuaded that more of your
adrantaget have escaped you fmm your not being willing to do your duly than
from your ignorance 3. 3, tal yifi Tdrv fun Jsiti Apponn dr^pi/wau ilrai rb (iityi-
X»ir Ipyau Srr«t ro5 ^ur^ t4 Storra rapaamiiittir) til) ipmir toOto, iWi »poir«™-
MrSOi ri nil rmi *XAoit woMrait Hr Siorriu raplfiiir and in fact, since it it a teri-
out bualnen to provide for one's own necessities, it secnw to me to be the part
of an utter foot not tn rest content with that, but In addition to take upon himietf
tke bwrdeti of providing for the needs of the rest of the community X. H. 2. 1.8.

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCB [mjI

OOHBTRTJCTIONS OF THB INFINITIVE WITH VERBS OP hindering

2038. Yerbs signifying (or suggesting) to hinder take both the

simple infinitive and the aiticular infinitive. Such verbs may take
the strengthening but redundant negative /«J (2739) ; and some,
when themselves negatived or appearing in a question expecting a
negative answer, admit the addition of tlie sympathetic ov (2742).
Heuce we have a variety of constructions (described in 2744 ff.)

THE PARTICIPLE

3039. The paiticiple (jtxroxti participation) is a verbal adjective,
in part a verb, in part an adjective.

3040. The participle is like a verb herein :

«. It slows Llie disLiiictions of voice and tense, lu tenaea mark action
simp)]' occurring, continuing, and completed.

b. It can have an object in the same case (genitive, dative, accoaative) u
tbe finite (onus.

C. It In modified by adverbs, not b; adjeclives.

d. It may take Sr, and, wltli that panicle, repreaenU dr with the IndicadTe
or Ar nitb the optative (1846 ft.).

aou. The participle shows its adjectival nature by being inflected
and b^ admitting the article before it, both of which chatacteri stirs
give it the character of a noun. It follows tbe rules of agreement
like other adjectives (1020). Unlike tbe adjective, it represents &
quality in action (ep. 1857),

2043. The participle is always used in connection with a substan-
tive or a substantive pronoun, which may be contained in a verbfti
form, as SuiyDun iiav€ayovm they spend tlieir time in learning.

2043. The tenses of the participle (except the future) not in
indirect discourse are timeless, and denote only stage of action
(1872). When they stand in indirect discourse and represent the
indicative, they denote time relatively to that of the main verb.

3044. The future participle marks an action as in prospect at the
time denoted by the leading verb. Since it expresses an idea of
wiU, it shows that an action is purposed, intended, or expected.
Witli the article it denotes the person or thing likdy (or able) to do
something (= fuXAuv with inf. 1959). The nearest approach to mere
futurity ap[)ears in f^eneral only after verbs of knowing and j>en!eit>-
ing (2106, cp. 2112 b).

i f iriip airftf Xa^iiit VX*^' ihfpdirur but ker hu^and had goA« to hunt harrs
X. A. 4.6.24, 6 imai^nn otieli lirru there will be no one to guide ua i.*.h.
ToXXi . . .itiThrti ffrporTTVeTB (= rS* ^lAXerro ill rTparrffliaiir) l^*" htvKo

wso] THE ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLE 456

intend* to be a good general mutt have manfqtiaHfieation* X.M.8.1.6, taMvii^
ytf i^tf, for I knew that t thovldioi muH) die H. Aiii,4au (cp. SlOfl).

aCMS. The negative of the participle is oi, except when the parti-
ciple has a general or conditional force, oi- occurs in a sentence which
requires ^i}. See 2728.

a046. The participle has three main uses.

A. Attributive : as an attributive to a substantive.

B. Circumstantial (or Adverbial) : denoting some attendant cir-
cumstance and qualifying the main verb like an adverbial phrase or
clause.

C. Supplementary : as a supplement to a verbal predicate, which,
without such a supplement, would be incomplete.

2047. The circumstantial and supplementary participles are predi-
cate participles.

2048. The attributive and clrcamstantial partlciplee are commonlj not
necemary to the comtrucllon ; but the removal of a supplementary participle
may make the conatructlon incomplete. The circumatantial participta is used
by way of apposition to the subject of the verb and, though strictly predicative,
nay agree attributively with a noun or pronoun. An attributive participle may
be circumstantial, aa el ftij ividtttm iiartMirat rtiw iSir irvKT4ptaaar drirm thote
mho (i.e. if any) uere unable to complete the march patxed the night teflhout
food X. A. 4. 5. 11. A participle may be both circumstantial and supplementary,
a» dtuntwriK Spylt^mu (T. 1. 77) thev are enraged ni being wronged or bccaute
(when, If) tAey are wronged. CircumHtantial and supplementary participlea
often cannot be sharply diatinguiahed ; as wttb verba signifying to be angiy,
a^utmed, content, pleaind (2100), inferior to, do wrong (2101), endvre (2098),
come and go (2099). Thus, dSiKi^TaDra Tai<3r I do wrong in doing thi* oi I am
gvQtg in doing Ihig: in the first case raDra miur Is appoaitive to the subject
nf the verb ; in the second these words define the predicate idjeotive Atunt oon>
tained in dJicA (s: diucd tt/ii).

THE ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLE

aota The attributive partdciple (with any modifier), with or with-
out the article, modifies a substantive like any other adjective.

i i^arifKiit KirSiiim rp riXfi the danger impending over the Staie'D.H.n^
ol Smt ix^pol the exittlng enemirt 6. 16, i rapiir naipit the pretent rriait 3. 3,
ri S»t£Xu]>> iroiiaibiimt Spot Ihf mountain called Cot]/laeum Aes. 3. 86, ol
AUXav v^« ica\a6iuiiai the so-called iilande of Afolvs T. 3. 88 (cp. 1170). For
the position ol an attributive participle with its modifiers, see 1106.

2050. TTie substantive with vrhich the attributive participle (with the arti-
cle) agrees directly, may be omitted, the participle thus becoming a subatantlve
{1153 b, and N. 1) ; as, i otitaii fi«v\6turoi i-riirai rchoever wanti to go home
X. A. 1. 7. 4. Neuter participles are often substantival, as rd Storra dvties.

a. Sabstaotivet or («iative clauses must often be used to translate suoh par-

uogic

456 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [mji

llciplea, u i ^*iyuw the extU or the defendant, ib lUWot the ftUure, ol ntQrra
the eictori, i rMwrur the thief, ol Sarirrtt the dead, i vuBtlt the man who hat
Imen naved, ol SciiirM Ihom trhu are t/fraitt, oJ iSittiiunyi those uAu are ibeiKj)
wronged, i rtir 7riir(n|r raiiifr tttiir the one who gave thit opinion T. 8.68. i
irrauB' lavrir Td(it T^t TO\lr(lit tin' iyii the man who took this potilion in (It
State aai I D. 18. 02. The piirticiple wiib the article ma^ represent & relative
clause of purpose ur result, as X. A. 2. 4. 5 cited in 2044.

30S1, A participle may be modilleil by adjeetivea or tabe a genitive, when
lis veilial nature ban ceaaed to be felt : ri fuxpi rvii^ipami t^s ri^tut the prllf

iMereal" <•/ the State D. 18. 28. Cp. aeiupipot l/t t% riXtt it wa» advantageon*
to the StiUe IS). 75 (liere the participle is used lilie a predicate). TImcydidee
often uses in an alMtract eense a Bubstantival neuter participle wliere tbe inflnl-
tlre would be mcire common, e.g., ri SiSiit fear, rb eapaaSr courage (for ti
9etiirai, rh Sofittir) 1.36. See ll&3b, N. 2, In poetry many participles ara
used gnbetantively, aa i rntir father, 4 rtinvaa mother, el rttdwrtt parent*.

2052. The article with the participle is either generic or particular (1124).
Thus, i X^uv the definite ipeater on a particular occasion, or orator in gen-
eral. So 6 oi ipdiriii the deflniCe person who did not do something, i )ii) tfi»U
Any one who did not do Bomething (a supposed case), b ;ij) laitSw iwep^wot att
fx« Mjcd the vnmarrted man hat no troublet Hen. Sent. 437. Generic are
i Tvx-it, i pmiUiam, 2060 a.

a. nuticiples having an indeflujte force may, eapeciaily in tbe plural num-
ber, be used witliout the article. Thus, mTarrrf^o/i^nuf Irr/irt he Kit men to
reconnoitre X. C. 3. 1. 2, dJiioStrn wapatiiuSix . . . iii6ntv9iii we ehall endramvr
to avenge ovnelvet on any one who injuree u» X. A. 2. 3. 28.

2053. A participle and its substantive often correspond to a
verbal noun with the genitive or to an articular infinitive. Cp. post
urbem conditam and Ulilton's "Since created man."

rf «<Tv trtXtiwom iril{<irro thrg infferedfrom the failure of the cropt (= tj
r«P <r(raii AriXtifn) T.3.20, Bi" b/iat (if) fii«iax*'""-at by reason ufyow notjoin-
ing the altianee (= lii rb f/(ai nij £uu^uix4i'<») Q' ^i *<<tA ZupiKovaii oltirBilrit
ttfter the foundation of Syracuee 6. 3, Alhrn airbr 4 x<^M ropSoanini the raraj-
mg of the eoiintrv grievrd him X. A. 7. 7. 12, ^ tfr/ti vit rif pb^tf Xi^yoFri tmtti
hit wrath wilt dieiippear with the cessation of his fear X. C, 4. 6. 21.

a. Except in expreaaions of time, such aa ifia ii>ii ipxoii/Hf at the beginnie^
t^f tpring T.2.2, iwl KbSpov Pa>ri\e6iiirrn in the reign of Codrtii Lye. 8t (cp
1689 b), this conHtructioa is in place only when the part, is neoenBaty to tte
sense. In poetry : Z«^ teXam inriiuret swearing by Zeus it ridieuloui Ar.
Nob. 1241 ; in Horn. A 601, I 882.

THE CIHCUMSTANTtAL PARTICIPLE

2054. The circumstantial participle is added, without the article,
to a, QOUQ or pronoun to set forth some circumstance under which
an action, generally the main action, takes place.

a. Tbe eircutnstantial participle thus quaiiflea the principal varb of the seik-
tence like an adverbial clause or supplementary predicate. Cp. tirri raSra dwt

M6t] THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE 467

tffleneaMi Ite taid with yt\&r tJwt he taid langhtnglt/. Sach participles usually
have the force of Buboidlnate clauses added to the maiu verb by conjunctions
denotiiig timt, condition, ciiiiae, etc. ; but may often be rendered by adverbial
phrases or even by a separate fiaita verb, which brlogB out distinctly the idea
latent in the participle.

b. The circumstantial participle has no article. In agreement with a nouD
and ita article, it stands before the article or after the noun (_i.e. iu the
predicate position). By the agreement of the participle with a noun or pro-
noon, the predicate of the sentence 1h more exactly dedned.

2055. The circumstantial participle has two main eoiiHtnictions
each equivalent in meaning to a clause of time, cmidition, cause, etc,

2096. (I) The subject of the participle is identical with the noun
or pronoun subject or object of the leading verb, and agreeK with it
in gender, number, aud case.

(aJ irfpwxoi) \tir6rrti t^» 6Sic iptiyorm iXlyai iwitrf/rKn by leaving th€ road"
and making off only a fein were killed X. A. 4. 2. 7, rpvrtielia.rrtt KipuK^ rikipitr
wpttpeOwra hnving tent a herald in advance to proclaim year T, 1. 26.

3097. (II) Absolute participial clauses, in which a participle,
aJid not a Suite verb, forms the predicate. These are of two kinds.

aOBS. A. Oenitive Absolute. — A pai-ticjple agreeing in the genitive
with its own subject, which is not identical with the subject of the
leading verb, is said to stand in the genitive absolute. Cp. 20T0.

KSpot intuit M ri i^ aMoAi taMttrm Cyrna atcended the mountains v^thovt
OBIF ont preventing him X. A. 1. 2. 22.

N. — The English nominative absolute is represented by the Greek genitive
ftbsolnte. Cp. Tennyson : " we sitting, ail I said, the cock crew loud" = i/n&r
lafiilltiwvt, trip (Xryor, lUya ^rtr i iXtirpaiir,

2099. B. AcctiaatlTe Absolute. — When the participle has no defi-
nite subject (i.e. with impersonal verbs), the accusative absolute is
used instead of the genitive absolute. Cp. 2076.

tf-vtiifa* T^i rarpl mI tJ /iTp-pi ya/ai r^r Kunjdpoi' ffvyaripa on tht approval
of (lit. it geeming good to) hia father and mother he married the datighter of
Cfoxaret X. C. 8. 5. 28.

aOGO. The circumstantial participle expresses simply circumstance
or manner in general. It may imply ''arinns other relations, such as
time, manner, means, cause, purpose, concession, condition, etc. But it
is often impossible to assign a participle exclusively lo any one of
these relations (which are ])iire]y logical), nor can all the delicate
relations of the participle be set forth in systematic form.

2061. Time. — The time denoted by the participle is only relative to that
nf the governing verb, and is to be inferred from the context. Each participial
form iu itself eipressee only stage of action (1850).

Atoieiai ro« arfiaTtrtaU raOro Mef* t4 tr^ttuiia tvraya.'itif on hearing this U

aeemed best to the generaU to collect the troops X. A. 4. 4. IU.

458 SYN'I'AX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [aofa

•. Sevenl temporal participles have u) adTerbfsl force : in['|u*«i in Oit
beginning, at first, TiXiimiv at last, finally, iiaXmiv (or irurx-i") XP*"" 'V'*'
a while, GuiXilirKv xp^iw "l iMervatu, xpovlfav/or a long time. Thus, irtp nl
ipxifuni flToii as 1 said at the uulset T. 4. 64, riXmrSit ixaXiwiurit at lott he bt-
came angry X. A. 4. Q, ](i. tiote iptd)i(*oi iiri tivot beginning teitk or etpeeiallf,

20G3. Manner. — raf^\avr<,r rtrtrfitiiH they marched patl In order X. A.I.
2. IS, Kpairfijii raWlir HvUvr itaXuStm <LXXii\oiit Ihef made a loud noite by eall-
ing to eath other 2. 2. IT, v/wffXrro fiAXhjn T»1t fiiuni iii/Urur iwtfaittt 4 waft-
H^r3> ^n he jirpfprred rather to abide bg the lawe and die than to dttobeg tlum
and live X. M. 4. 4. 4, ^arl lit* iiTvx'^1 (Ihi, m mil iart mXSt roaSrret yoit
claim to be favoured hg /urtane as happily you are in /act Aea.it. 232. To
characterize a preceding statement nltli tlie participle In appotition to tbe sub-
ject of the preceding sentence ; tbu8, ipeHi yt rafrs Myarra yet, and aaying thit
correctly X. (>. 16. 2.

a. Several participles of manner have an idiomatic meaning, e.g. iriatt
quickly (lit. hating acfompliahed), Ix»v continually, pertiitently (lit. holding
on), iMtiv tefretiy, KXaCHv lo one's eorrow (lit. weeping), xv-ifr with impu-
nity (liL rejoicing), ^pMv haititi/ (lit. carrying off), ^itrtit b^ore (lit. antiti-
paling). Thus, Smy' di-^nii kiirry up and open Ar. Nub. 181, lnwinvr ruittrai
\a8iit Tfjr ^uXuitf he tailed out unobaeraed by the guard T, 1. 65 (cp, 2096 1),
•pXvaptit Ixur you keep trifling P. G. 490 e, nuToy obStU x^lp*" <tS>c4r« HO »"<
ui'tl terong him with impunity 510 d, df^ififiii /u ^fttirai you opened tbe door
before 1 could knock Ar. Tint. 1102 (cp. 2006 e).

2063. Means (often the present participle). — Xji^fitwoi fuvi they live by
pillaging X. C. 3. 2. 26, ^<j Kpir Apwr tA «(XXoi, dXXi rir rpirtr judge by regard-
ing not beauty, but {by regarding) character Men. Sent. 333.

2064.' Cause. ^ Uapi^ara , . . Itr^x' ''V ^^PV, ^iXoCini a^ir fidXXar ^ tit
Paai)\i6arra ' ApTofip^tir Pary»ati» favoured Cyrus because she loeed him more
than ehe did Artaxirxes the king X. A. 1. 1. 4, irttxtrro i(pi<r<> al^xp^ roiiilawra
ilm they held aloof from gnlni because they Utought them disgraceful X. M, 1.2.
22, t1 yitp Jeliirff r^iSpa ourm iwtlytaBt ; for vihat are yon <ffraid of, thai you
are so desperately in haute i X. H. 1, 7. 2tl,

a. r( iioMv wAnt indueed hiin to (lit, having learned what f), rt v«tA* wAot
potteued him to (lit. hating experienced what f) are used with the genera] sense
of where.fore i in direct (wiili i n in indirect) queationa expressing surpriw or
disapprubation ; as rf iui.8hrr%% i/tapriiptTTi b/ieh ; what put it into your head* (o
give evidence? D. 45. 38, tI va06tT( \i\iriu$a ; what potteued ut lo forget f
A3i;i. Cp. ri ^ou\i^um.

b. Tl Ix"* ; ivhat't the matter with you f {lit. having what f)

2063. Purpose or Object. — Tlie future (sometimes tbe present) participle Is
used to denote purpose, especially afl«r verbs denoting lo come, go, tend, nn-
ffion, etc. Thus, tporinfarra •dipvua xiXi/ior vpocpaurra hoeing sent a herold in
advance to proclaim wnr T. 1. 29, i ^p^opoi irt t^w 'EXMSa Sov^uaiimna 4UN
the barbariaat proceeded againtt Greece with the purpote of entailing it 1. 18,
aurtKi\ttai' i-wi luc xiXdie dxiffiSf itoufOtUnvi (2052 a) rgt ropA Pa^Aiut /ri-
<rT<iX4j they summoned from all the cUiet men to listen to the Utter from the lci»g

THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE 459

•irai Sti ktX. theg teiil men to loy that,

2066. OpiXwition OI CoDCeBsioil. — afiS^v ipH tpit raura txwr tUelr I Kill
mate no reply to thii thongh I might (speak) du m F. T.acti. 197 c, roXXal yip
trrn tiytrtU tlci* mel for man]/, atbeil noble bj) birth, are ignoble E. El. &51.

2067. Condition (aegative always i^i). — ri Si xMur (= /arcX^i) iKmrdx"
but if jfou litUn j/ou shall toon knoie Ar. Av. 1390, aiK a* diraa iti) no/iAr (= c)
n^l td^uu) tiBai/iarttr j/ou caiinot be happy vnleas t/ou work E. fr. 461.

206S. Any Attendant Circumstance. — imXX^fai trpdrtviia tro\iipKtt MIX^
Ttr having eollecttd an army he laid eieffe to Milettu X.A. 1. I.T, mpayyfWti
Ty K\iipxv ^apitri ffimit taor fjr airif arpdrtviM he gatie orders to Cleardiia

to tome with all the force he had 1. 2. 1.

a. Ix"» having, Hybii leading, ^Jpw carrying (mostly of inanimaW objects),
Xp)l|u*ot luinjf, Kapir taking are used where Engliab employs telth. TbuB,
IX'tr arpariar d^MiTai he arrives with an army T. 4. SO, ^o^ xP'^f"" wUh a
thout 2. 84, iicfKtuai Xa^vra irSpat i\9tir Sri wXtlarovt he ordered him lo come
Kith all the DMR he eovld (or to take . . . and come) X. A. 1. 1. 11.

b. In poetry participles (especially) of verbs denoting motion are often
added to verbs of gieiag, tetting to make the action more picturesque (H. 304,
8.AJ.&54).

2069. The force of these circnmstantlal participles does not lie in the par-
ticiple itself, bat Is derived from the conlezt. Unless attended by some
modi^ing adverb, the context often does not decide whether the participle has
a temporal, a causal, a conditional, a concessive force, etc. ; and aome partlcl'
plea may bo referred to more than one of the above classes. Thus, rariip f
iwtAUr otic <x" f 't"' **^' (Men, fr. 454) may mean : a father by threatening
(=t(A«n or because or (for though, he threatens) does not excite much fear.

GBHITIVB ABSOLUTE. ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE

3070. GenltlTe Absolute- — A circumstantial pai-tlciple agreeing
with a geoitive aaan or pronoun which ia not in the main conetruc-
tion of the aeutence, stands in the genitive absolute. Like other cir-
cumstantial participles, the genitive absolute expresses time, cause,
TOndition, concession, or simply any attendant circumstance.

a. Time: tbUt' twpix^l ^^"""^ ""'P'^rrnoBiTtt these things jorre effected while
Couon wa* in command 1. 9. 56, roitaiw \ix9irrtiiii iritriiaa,* thin imid, they rose
X. .\.3.3. 1,'HM™ ... VlliSi^r ixi-rrui ta\u,piilif tl\<,i' th<Ti blockaded and captured
Eton lehleh teas held by the Medet T.1.9B.

b. Cause ; rQr raiiiiTitr 6ti\uro)Jrair tal al fuxal dppmfT^fpai '/lynniu by
the enfeebling of the body, the spirit too i$ made weaker X. (). 4. 2.

C. Opposition or Concession : cat lUTawitaiiiiiim airroS ii6t iOiXui i\»tlr even
though he is sending for me, I am unwilling to go X. A, 1. 3, 10. nairtp is usually
added (2083).

d. Condition : ttoiau inl rSt In iTanpBuBJjrai ir ri rpiyuara rotfrwii yrfre/ii'

460 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1071

wuw if thete meatures should be taken, I am 0/ Uie opinion that even noir 'ivi
alvaaon mighi be rectified D.S.Tfl.

«. Attendant CircurosLftiice : Kilp«i dr^^q Arl t
ascended the mountain* iHtkoitt oppotUion (lit. no
(or Hinee no one oppoeed bini).

2071. iK^v teilllng. Akuy unwilling &re properly participles and an Ireatad
as such (cp. 21 IT c). Thus, iiuS nix ^'itrai wiihuut my content S. AJ.46G.

a. ixut, dtna^/uiiQt, iippaviwrf dcXirr^ur, drdfit'^ros, dnfxoXoyo^/utiet, irl^t
ftre the only casts in Greek shonlng the earlier method of iiegaliving the parti-
ciple with alpha privative. Klsenhere ad or ^1) ie used.

3072. The genitive of the participle may stand without its noun
or pronoun

a. When the noun or pronoun may easily be supplied from tbe context.
Thus, Dl ii raX^tudi, rpoaiirrair (r^v 'EXX^rwr, prcTtou^y mentioned), Wwt ith
iiavxlaio* the enemy, a» then ^'ert apprvaching, for a ahile remained t/nirt
X. A. 5.4. 16, ipdira, l*j|, i3 KDpr, ... it (iiiaS) TiX))*§ ipourroi put Jrour gtiri-

"tion (^taid he), Cyrus, on (Ae tuppiisUion Oiat I will ipeak the truth X.C. 3.1.1*.

b. When tbe noun or pronoun may easily be supplied otherwise ; here, e.f.,
dtSpiirur or rpiy/iiTitr la satd to be auppUed granimatically. Thus, tirritr il%
Hixv when (men) are going Into battle X, C. 3. 3, 64, toC™» rir Tp6wor wpixHr-
■nar t^i rb\tut ylynrat t4 xpil"''^ Vthen (things) have bapprned in thit taf.
the property belongs to the ifitale D.24. 12; and in iarrn (A>6t, 9iI4a) toKX^
lohen it was raining hard X. H. 1. 1. 16. Quaai-luiperaoaal verbs (933] thus take
tbe genitive rather than tbe accusative absolute : ourut Ix'rTBi in thit Matt of
thing* P. R. 381 c, influenced by o^ui ixirrar X. A. 3. 1. 40.

c. When a subordinate clauae with 6ti fellows upiiii the participle tn tbe
passive. Thus, hayytX^irrun Sri *olnraai r^ hr airrait wXlavtir it having
been anuounced that Phoenician thips vtere sailing against Ihem T. 1. LIS, dtXir-
Mrrai Brt ir Tail raual rdr 'EXXiimi- ri wpiyimra tyirtre it having been tliOKM
that the salvation of the Greeks depended on their navg 1.74, The plural is
used when the eubjecl; of the subordinate clause is plural, or when severtl
cirouiDstancee are mentioned.

3073. Exceptional ty, the subject of the genitive absolute is the same u
that of Ihe main clause. The effect of this irregular constmctiun is to emphaNiw
the idea contained in the genitive absolute. 'I'bus, pi>riSi)admi>i bfi&r irpoM/im
ir*Xi» Ttpoa\ti/ivet nvTitbr (x<"»«' »i^n \( you atsit tw heartily, yuu will gai*
to gour cause a Slate having a large nary 'I'. 3. 13, The genitive abaoluu ngualty
precedes the main verb.

a. The genitive absolute may be used where the grammatical constniction
demands the dative. Thus, Sia^fititiTot nifutXiovt . . . fyyiKSii air^ tri Hf^f*
iipisTrtict when Pericles hail already cros'fd over, neics jons hromjht to htm ihul
ilegarahad revolted T. 1. lU (in Latin: I'rrlcll tarn transgresso nuHtialitm eM).

b. The subject of the genitive absolute may hf idemlcal wicU tbe object ol
tlie leading verb; i)\»e» hri t<|» 'Ewltavpor ui ipiiieu oSffiji . . . alpfvarrti thef
came against Epidanrus pxpectlug to allure it undefended 'i'.G.OO.

2074. Observe that the genitive absolute diEfera from tbe Latin abtative abao-

«>76] . THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE 461

Into herein : 1. The aabjeot need not be eipreised (9072). 2. Tlie subject man
■ppe«r [d Uie leading clause (2073 a). 3. With a aubetantive the participle fir
is always added Id prose, wheraas Latin has to omit the particlpli;. Thus, nai-
tar trntr iifiXit nobit pueris F.S. lT3a. On tiuit inorret me invito, see 20TI.
i. Because it baa a present participle paaeive and an aoriat nnd perfect participle
active, Greek can use tbe genitive abeolule where Latin, tbrnugh lack of a past
participle active, bas to use a clause nilh dum, cum, etc. 'I'buB. 6\tp t^i r6\twt
ir reit vaXt^iaTi iirttrott iwirprrtitinit ri arpaTtrii Cam beilicU in perieullt
nnirfria retpvblica imperatori commlctatur X.H.3.1.^, r»u raiSAf YiXdrorrst
ntm puer ritiMtl. Latin usea tbe abeoluLe case more frequently than Oreek
because it employs the perfect participle passive where Greek utiea the aorlsl
participle active. Thus, KGpoi auyiia}J<iat to6i arpaTtiyoiii lirtr Cl/rus, eonvo-
fatis ducibnt, dixit X. A. 1. 4. 8.

3075. The genitive absolute took its rise from such casea as Za/n-i{Sam f
tx»t tim-o rxo^iau iwiirrot but torrow came on Sarpedon for Glaacas — de-
partinff H 892. The genitive, here properly dependant on A^b' li""' cuaaed to
be felt OS dependent on the governing ezpreesion, and was extended, as a distinct
(v>nstrucUon, to cases in which tbe Jtoveming expression did not take the
genitive. Cp. tbe development of the accusative with the infinitive (1981).

2076. AccuMtiTe AbMlute. — A participle standa in the accusative
absolute, instead of the genitive, when it is impersoDal, or has an
intinitive as its subject (as under 0). When impersonal, such par-
ticiples have Qo apparent grammatical connection with the rest of
the seDtonce.

A. Impersonal verbs : hiov, iiiv, luroy, trapiv, TTitoa^Kov, niXav, fura-
luXov, vapixoy, mpaayo¥, tv)(6v, Zokow, &>fav, or SdfaiTa (mtrra), ytvo-
finw l-w i/jLoi as it teas in my power.

(tMi ri luitit luAr olfnfvcrcu il^f ri fXarroi' (alpturBai) no one teiil choote the
grmter «vit when it f* pomible to ehoote the leu ¥. l*r. 3o8d, i^t (^vX^i) mr
^UH rtijtir ad larir aizif to Which he noiB claimt admission though he has no
right L. 31. 32, J^Xof yifi Sri tleSa ii^of yi iroi for of course you tnoio hecauie
it runeerna you P. A, 24d, atTt/tAarrt Im iirri Ti, iy Ili)X^, xaXSi TFapaaxi', 'i
(vtipiira.p then repented that afler what had occurred at Pylo», although a favour-
ablr, occasion had presented itself, theg had not come to terms T. 5, 14. Cp.
2088 d, 2087.

N. — Apart from Sifar, rvxir, tbe accusative absolute of the aorist participle
of impereonal verbs is very rare.

B. Passive participles used impersonally ; ytypa^frov, StSoyfiivoy,
tlptyiii'Oi', wpotrrax^iv, TpotTTtraynivoy. V[}. E»g. ijranted this is an, f/iis
done, tohick said.

ilnitfnir g oiratt iwnrrar itHSt . . . (Mewi mix <"«">' though it una told
thfm lo meet here, theg sleep and have not cme At. Lys. 13, rpofraxSfr tu, irri
nS Jibiou MtKiiwa H-fnt ilt 'BXXVoiroi' a command having been given (It hating
leen commanded'' me bg the people to convtj/ Menon to the Hellei^M D. 50. 12.

462 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTEKCE . [1077

N. — The aorlst participle paBsive ia rarely used abaolntelj : d^XifM*, ^'fn-

fir, naTax'VOTop'lWi', tvpuSir, iptaSir, wtpatSir, rpeeraxtt', Xf"!'^'-

C. Adjectives with ov : SAr^ov Sv, Suvutov ov, aSuFaTor ov, aitTjfpw iv,

jEoAovOK, Jfptaiy (xp«i> + ov), et«.

at tixl iaiieaiitr . . . olir ti dii (at aumrir te« dW not TfiCHt gnu although it

was both feaiiible and possible I'.Ct.Wh, in ait iraytaiow (o>) rb tMrrtir, ah>j

tAv lUTTorra on the ground that stealing is not ntctssarg yon accnae At thief

X.C.6. 1. 13.

2077. The imperBonal cliaracl«r of the above exprcssiona would not be sliowD
bf the ^eDitire elnce the participle iti tliat case marks a distlnctiOD between mM-
culine (neuter) and feminiue. The accuBative absolute, irhictL occura flrsi in
Herodotus and the Attic prose writers of the fifth century, Is probably In Its origin
an internal accuBative, developed, at least In part, by way of apposition (991-9W},
the neuter of a participle or of an adjective standitig in apposition to an idea in
tlio leading clause. Tims, rpofrax^* afrrott oix *r4Xft^a» tlavyaytir (Is. 1. 2S)
(ftcy did not dare to bring him (n — a duty that teas eiyoined (^although it wai
enjoined) upon thftn, Cp. Ttteii S' 'OpiST-^w nittipn . . . trtltai, rpbt aix irarra
(PnXFiat ^ipar he pfrfuaded Orestes to slay his mother, a deed that brings not
glory in the. eyes of all R. Or. .lO.

2078. The participle of a personal verb may be used abmlulely if it Is pre-
ceded by in OT &aTtp. Thus, itix"" rpit roAt ^^i riyaB^ IiSAm, at tsiVi 6talrt
miXXirTa ilSlnai iirs?a d7a(U imi (Socrates) prayed to the gods that thry would
give him good things, in the belief that the gods fcnote be^ what sort of thing)
are good X.M.I. 3.2, siurS iStlrmar, Siirrtp ToSro TpotTrrayiUiQw adroit they
were svpping in silence just as if this had been rnjnined upon them X. S.l. 11.

«. Cases without uit or Hattp arc rare. Thus, JAfarrs iiur raih-a tOktrtt
irtpat ttnaci on reaching this eonchision you ■shose taeray men And. 1. 81 ; cp.
lifo»T»OT« X. A. 4. 1. |:i (by analogy to tieit -oi^ra) and SofiiiTiiii' rtOrtirX. H.
1. T. 30. Neuter participles so used come chiefiy from impersonal verbs, but
T. i. 125 has tupiaeir tUSir ol MawSAwt ixiipovr fr' tltou the Macedonians pre-
ceeded homeieards, nothing haring been accomplished. The neuter subject Is ■
pronoun, very rarely a substantive (1. 5. 12).

ADVERBS USED IN CONNEXJTION WITH CIRCUMSTANTIAL
PA RTICIPLES

2079. Adverbs are often used to set forlh clearly the relations of
time, maimer, canse, p-oncessinn, etn., that are implied in the parti-
ciple. They occur also with the {lenitive and accusative absr.Inte.
These adverbs motiify either the principal verb or the participle itself.

ADVERBIAL ADJUNCTS OF THE PRINCIPAL VERB

2080. Tlie adverbs tiniTa tliere'ipoii, Tin, ttra (less oflen /rroSfe) tActt, 4l&i|
already, o<rn> s-i, wlien used wiili the verb ol llie sentence which contains a tem-
poral participle, emphasize the temporal relation : (tfiwn S^iiat) itpaaa^ma
iiA T^Xoui T^t diroXofiij r4r« flSij fiT^/fVffftii ktX. (/ beg yon) when you have heard
my defence to the end, then and not till then to vote, etc And. 1.9, irip tuylrrM

THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE

2081. I^a al Ihe mme lime, aJrrdca iminetUaCely, «Uit ttraightviaj/, ^uraffi
helUKCn, in (Ae midtt, though striclly modifying the msin verb, are often placed
clow to a temporal participle which they modify in lea-ne : i/ia min-' eiwiiw i^iari,
taiftitg thU, he rose X. A. S. 1. 47, rj) Stiiv nipf ^^r 'AAimlwr cWAt dvo^/Sqiiin
. . . trltarra they fell upon the right aing of the Athenians at eoon aa it had
dUen^arted (lit- upon the right wing when it had aisembarked) T. 4. 43, Oan-
ariwTtt iuTa(i StiwtoStret getting up in the middle of tapper D. 18. 189, ToXXa^*"
lu #ir^x« ^tyorra luraifi it often checked me when the words leert on mj) lips (in
ibe very act of speaking} P. A. 40 b.

2082. A participle implying opposition or conceasion (2060) may have ita
meaning rendered explicit by E|uii yet, nevenheleaa (with or without nolrfp,
S083), lira then or tmra aJterioaTdi to express censure or surprise (then, for
all Ihaf) : rAf irol Afun ml ^r t§ roXt^y drrci BappoS/ier with you, though vt are
In the enemtet' eountry, neverthelese we have no fear X. C. 6. 1. 26, (weir' iiroXi-
rdr ro^ ttoit irHit iitrtli ; and then, Chough you deaert the gods, wilt you
remain kertt Ar. PL114S. S/un may attach itaeU more closely to the participle,
tlxnigh belonging with the principal verb : vtiBtu Tvni^f, mlrtf at vrfyyut Sikm
take the advice of women none tkt lets though thou litest U not A. Sept. 712.

2083. With participles ot opposition or concession (2066) : xalnp although,
kmI (infrequent), although hsI raOru (947) and that too. Thus, irun^tiktiu
VM calrcp rtArtpai &r I give yoH advUx though I am your junior X. C.
4.5.32, drm-Xti oltaSt taiwtp lUaov x"/'<3»< ^"" he tailed off home though it
vas tnidwinter X. Ag. 2. 31, K\iuinn xairip ^niiSrit oSira 4 lrri<rxr<rti iwifiri
Clean'' t promim, iToane though it was, teas fulfilled T. 4.39, lol SaDXai dv yip
lifitox r\ovTUF iriip for. slave though he be, the man of wealth Is held in esteem
E. fr. 142, dJinTi Itri iripa i^fur rir artuSai&raTor SiatfiBilotti yiXir irantlBti; ml
rain-a svrw roX/iuoi Brrn t^ 7/Xwti ynu do 'trong in that you corrupt the moat
earnest man we hate by tempting him to laugh, and that though he is lueh an
enemy to laughter X. C. 2. 2. tft. On xalroi see 2893 b.

a. In Homer the parts of aUrtp are often separated by the participle or an
emphatic word connected with it; (al ixriffi rtp although distressed M ITS.
r/f may stand alone without «al : drdirx'o mfi'l^'V ■"P '•«<"" «Pi thongh vexed
A 686. Both uses occur in tragedy. The part, with rip is not always concesxWe,

b. In a negative sentence, vtU {^i|80. with or without wip, takes tlie place of
nf : as yvtaiKl rtitm, iLTiSt riXjfi^ (Xiiut listen to a woman, though thou hearest
not the trvth E. fr. 440.

20B4. With participles of cftuse (2l)fl4): oCtm, Si&TOfiro (raihu), iKToirOft
Thus, irtXi/uroi ri laiid^ia . . . nal Sri a^uit . . . otx IrrfT^Xfor, Sti raSra
Tptrtuor larvrar because they hnd picked up the wrecks and because they (the
enemy) did not saU against them, (for this reason) they set up a trophy T. 1. 64.

2085. With participles of cause (2001) : txt (in tn). ota or elo* (obr Bii)
Ina$mueh aa, state the cause as a fact on the authority of the speaker or writer.
Tbua, i Kii^, At* rait Cir, . . . fitro r% vraXp Cyrut, inaemuch as he was a
ehild, was pleated with the robe XC. 1.3.3, 4muif* Uw4pis irb rsO arparawitov.

1= Coo^^lc

■164 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [aoW

olor Si 3ti xpi'oi' i^tiyiiJiit ga ^1 rat viiriSttt Starpt^i I returned (n the eoening
from the camp, and, as I arrived after a long absence, / proceeded to m|r aoeiu-
totned ItannU P, Charm. 153 a, tta i^ <l'ii>?w' rpii Deirnr . . . tuf ^iXrarrir,
, . , irtXaOnuai iiiasiaueh aa the peJlaite mere giiing off to tupper, Ihej/ rode
agaiiiet them X. H. b. 4. 39. iurr* has Ibe same force in Udt.

2086. With participles of cause or parpoae, etc. (2064, 20<to) : it. Tbis
particle sets forth the ground ol belief on wliicb the agent acta, and detinias
the thought, awertion, real or presumed intention, in tlie mind of t1i« subject
of the principal verb or of some otJier person ineiitjoi>ed-pr<jiniii«^ntiy in Uie
sentence, nitboat iraplicating the speaker or writer.

a. Thus, itijXBtr vt wiiiirarTtt may mean eitlier theif departed under the |
impreaeion that they had been victorious (though as a matter of fact tttpj luaf |
have been defeated) or pretending that they had been victorious (when Ibev |
knew they bad been defeated). The ase of in implies nothing as to tlie opinion |
of the speaker or writer. On the other band irijXBor riic^ffarrti ineans that, as i
a matter of fact, and on tbe authority of the writer, tbey had been victoriona j

b. ill may be rendered ae if (though there in nothing conditional in the Gnek i
use, aa is shown by tbe negative oi, not ^4)< l>y f" the opinion (^belief) that, on |
the ground that, under pretence of, tinder the impression that, becaune a* he said
(or thought) ; in the Aojw of, wfW the {avowed) itUention o/(witli the futuie ;
partiviple).

C. 4n-aS0' f/irror ilif ri igper Karix'Ttt ■ ol f oi nartixo', <tXXi /uurrit f r itip
n^wt there thej/ remained in the belief that they mere occupying the mnnMi'l;
b-at in fact they were not occupying it, eiiice there w>aa a hill above them X. A.
4.2.6, Tai>riti' rljr X'^P"' t^irpvin Suprdirai roTi 'E.W'^ir liit voXeuldr sOvar he
turned lhl$ country over to the Oreelu to ravage on the ground that it was hoslUe
1. 2. 19, TJ)^ vpi^orif ijtoitiTO wt HifflSdi ^uXifuni inpoKtir he made his prelenre
as \fhe viished (i.e. he gave as his pretext his desire) to expel the Pisidian* I.S. I,
rapes mil dfttrro in waXt/iiiffarrei they made preparations to go to war (_with the
avoiBed intention of going to war) T. 2. 7, mWattfiArti KOpor ui drorrerwr he
seized Gyrus for the purpose {as he declared) of putting him to death X. A. 1.1.3.
and often with the future participle. After verbs of motion wt is rarely used.

A. in with the absolute participle : o6 Set iSifieir in eiic tiriKreir Srrmt 'Atv-
Milw* we must not be discouraged on the ground that the Athenian* are not irr'I
disciplined X. M. 8. 6. 20, t^rye Bapptiw dii (arairriioo^wr roirur h ri, liot JK
bade him be of good cheer in the assurance that this wanld arrange ittelf in thr
right way X. A. 1.3.8, in i^y '^ii, roui* aArsTt S n ^l!XBirrci, xoXX«>i irirrart'
in the belief that it leas already in their povser to do what they pleased, they pel
manp to death X. B. 2. S. 21. Cp. also SOTB, and 2122.

2087. Wmp as, just as, ae it leere, an adverb of comparison, denotes thai

tbe action of the main verb is compared with an assumed case. Thus, tartai-
IM^ 6vrtp i^t iieuxlar 47«i» we lie inactive }uH as if it were postihle to late
one'* eaee X. A, 8. 1. S, ApxiBrro . . . Cump triituiriiimi they danced at it teerf
making an exhdiition 6.4.34, ol Si At Ijtauaar, Hrrtp auii iyplou ^r/rret, birci
iw' adrif but wheit thry heard him, just as though a wild boar ht^ appeared,
they rushed against him 6.7.24. Cp. 2078.

i,vGooglc

ID9I] THE SUPPLEMENTARY PAETICIPLE 465

a. When ft condition is meoDt, we have fiompivit (tteripaKf)'. Cp. 2490&.

b. Ham. nses At re, wt tl, in tt tt like Aaiitp or in. iit tl, in d n occur alao
in tragedy, and do not liave a conditional force. Tlius, 6\ii^iptiurot in tl 6ara-
ririt Kiirra beiBailing him (M i/Ac leere going to death 11 .128. Cp. 2481,

THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE
20sa. The supplementary participle completes the idea of the
verb by shoving that to which its action relates.

noes. The supplementary participle agrees either with the subject
or with the object of the main verb; with the subjet't when the verb
is intransitive or passive, with the object when the verb is transitive.
atnr iravi/aiii iiuat vltttpur 'I never ceaied pitsing ourselree X. A. 3. 1. 19,
TtitrtrTrrat have ittKovu/nut I put a Hop lo the poor hfingitTonged D. 18. 102,
iiipar ei jtoTOf^Pmi lal Toi>f m-paTiiirai ix^/'^""'* thrjj Haw that they (Ihtnt-
flvet) toere not sueeetding and that the tuldlert teere indignant T. 7.47, iSi-
■oirfa ^Pumr id^nia I proved that Philip ana acting unjustly 1). 18. 136, «6»t
f\rfx9^*Tai-rt\olot Hf he vsili straightway be prorrtl to be ridiciilaut X.M. 1.7.2.

a. Wben the object ia the same as the subject, it is commonly BU|>pressed,
ind the participle Bgrees witli the subject. Thug, ipa l^aiiaprirur I net that I
trr E. Had. 350, foft dfiitrof £» knoxB that yi>u are a fool X. A. 2. 1.13, oi*
tiaiArtwSt t^awaTii/itni ; do ffo« not perceive that yoii are being derfired ? X. H.
7. 1. 12, iSii\uv* raw rtixun tara^ipordi he ghotred that he denpiaid the laies And.
4.14.

b. For the sake of emphasis or contrast (and to secure greater symmetry)
the object ma; be expressed by the redexive pronoiin, Tlius, olSa tiiavrir Stnlut
■'Xi"lf''vraAn>ii I know that I have preaealed mycaee h"nej<tlg 1. 1&. 321, Ififo' ei
Ttreitit&TiL TsDro saurir $how that you did not do this yiiunelf D. 22. 20, a^^tp
iij>iili<, (oi a<irhr^iilritt^v\i6nmi, mi 6^i oiirftira^mii novthehnowi both — Mat
fif i& hirMet} plotting agalntt you and that you are aware of it 1X8. 18. Observe
i\Aiga.r»r avra^i ^ri t^ X6^y ft6fitn)i (agreeing with llie subject) without inow-
ing It they fotind thenuelveM on the hill X. A.(i.3.22. On Uie use with fftixuSa,
see 2108.

c. loum (the personal use for the impersonal (oiia, 108.1) usually takes llie
participle in tbe dative ; as, toumt 6icrovm Mfttr you teem reluctant to ^eak
P.K.414c; but also in the nominative (see 2133}.

3090. Many verbs supplementing their meaning by the participle admit of
the canatTQCtlon ^Ith the infinitive (oft«n with a difference of meaning; see
2123 ft.) or with a snbelantive clause with Srt or ui.

2091. The present or perfect participle is often used as a simple
predicate adjective, especially with dfu and yCyvofmi. The aorist
participle is chiefly poetic.

f imr dnrravpr/i Tintt tMrTif there viere some who distrusted FhiUp D. 19. 53,
(KUapX'") pi>J>iil'ti'^t t i)» lai iiudpai itnl nrnTbt liywr iti Toil roXtitlivt Clear-
i^hus wo* both fond of danger and by day and by night led his men again$l the
taentif X. A. 2. 8. 7, iyii r4 rpafit tliii raiff i Sttpatiit I am the one who hat done

466 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [logi

thia deed t>.2\. 104, i t»Sto otx ttn ytyrtiittet *ttp' iiitt; oris not lAl» tometkin^
that take* place in utf P.fhll.SUc. So wltb adjectivized parllciplefl (1867), v

rvft^fper lit r§ rdXci it lous adnantayeoui to the State D. It). 75. Ho with tripx-
am, am atiumed ([). Ib.-iiS).

A. Here the participle ban the article whea it desi^ai«a the subject ittelt I
(third exuuple ; cp. 1162). But the article ia not used when the participle marks
ft oLtaa In which the lubject is included.

3092. The auppleinentarj participle after certaia verbs represents
a dependent statement.

In 4»u" KSpar ir KiMilf irra. he heard that Cyrut letu in Gtlichi trn Btauda
for iarl, wliat waa lieard being " KSpei ir Kikuttif irrl." This ia ahown by the
fact lliat the sentence might have been, according to the principles of tndirrel
diaaturie, Iftouirtt In Kspoi tw KiXulf cfi] (or ttrl, 2R15). With verba not intro-
ducing indirect discnurae, however, there is no auch indirect stAtemeDt; u in
hrairarTo iiaxiiam the]/ ceaeed fighting I>. 23. B.

3093. Accordingly, from this point of view, the uaea of the aupplemenbu;
participle Ate two : (1) not in indirect discourse, and (2) in Indirect diacoiuM. I

a. Some verbs take the participle either In indirect dlacoune or not in iodi-
reel discourse (2112). It la gouietlmes impoasible to decide whether a participle j
stands in indirect discourse or not (2113) ; and the dlHerance, especially after
verbs of perceiving (2112 a, b), maj be of no great importance to the aenae.

THE SUPPLEHENTABY PABTICIPLE NOT IN IKDIRBCT DISCOUKSE |

2094. The supplementary participle not in indirect disoonrse is
often like an object infinitive, the tenses denoting only stage of
action and not difference of time (cp. 1820). Thus, compare wmSoitir
ff* kiyovTa we stop you from apeakiiuf (of continued action) with
Kiakioixat trt kiytiv we prevent you from faking (also of continued
action).

2098. With verbs denoting being in some modified way (3096-
2097).

2096. TVTX"** (poet. KvpSi) haj^n, am )uit now, ImtHhi eteape the notice
of, am secretly, ^M*i* anticipate, am beforehand.

a. With these verbs the participle contains the main idea, and la often tepre.
■ented in translation by the finite verb with an adverbial phraaa; thoa, npir
trtyx'^" ^ happened to be there, or he ioa> there by chance X. A. 1, 1. 3.

b. The action of ^6ina and XarMiw usually coincides with that of the sapple-
raentary participle (present with present, aorlst with aorist). But the aorist of
a finite verb Is occasionally followed by the present participle when It 1* neces-
sary to mark an action or a state as continuing, ait fXofcF la like an Imper-
fect and may take the present pardclple. The aorist of rvyxi*" very often
takea the present participle. With a present or imperfeet of rvyx^vvi XavMiw,
^Mw, the (rare) aorist participle refers to an action oi st*l« aotertor to that ot
the present or imperfect, liauy of the case* of the j^eaent of nrrx*'- witb the

ao«a] THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE 467

aorin puUolpte are biatoiical pTeea&ta ; and in some caaea the oorist participle is
used for the perfect. With other tenses than preeent or huperfect, an aoriat
participle with these verbs refers to aa aotiou or state coincident in time (cp.
1B73).

c TU7x''» often loses the idea of chance, and denotes mere coincidence in
time II amjiut how, Iieatjutt Chen) or simply /ant (imm).

d. Examples. n<i\i,tm : rpafttSr rtiyx^f I happen (o he proxentu D.
A2.G, ipttra Tiryx'>v»" rpiiarrit they Aoppeit to hate fared Ike bttC 1.4. 103,
irtyxaror tJyuf I VOM juet laying X.A.3.2.10, Sent irrnriir ft iriyxatt

tai yniitnr iwoltitiyiiim who happened to have tpokea in oppoiition and to
hare declared hie opinion L. 12.27, trvx" KoB-liiitrai trraSea I was, hy rhance,
eitting there I'. Ku. 272 e. havMnt : (fioria tsC roijii i\irean p&ttair he enter-
tained the murderer of hit son aithoat kjioieing it (it escapfd hie notice Chat he
UNU, etc.) Hdt. 1. 44, f XoAir iatXeirrtt they got in eeeretly T. 2. 2, tit fXaSei dro-
SiSpiarur yon did not escape notice in aUempling la escape {your attttapt at
etcape did not escape nolire) P. R. 457 e, (\a9tr iraSpit he escaped teithnut being
noticed X. H. 1.3.22, X'^crt xdrfl" ixo^wUorro you will submit to every possible
calamity ere you are aware n.6.27. ^tirm : e6 iIiMpii i(ayiium i rirot j.tX. the
horse is no sooner led out, etc. X. Eq. 6. 10, ^niwir (hist, pros.) ^1 ry tfx^
ytrdpimt rain reKtittavt they anticipated the enemy in getting upon the auntmft
{they got to the summit before the enemy) X. A. 3. 4. 49, oit t^eaaaw rue6iitroi rir
ri\t/ior ad l|(or eeareely had they heard of the war uihen they came l.i.6B,ir6-
ripM ifiSiiaorTai rj)' Tikir irjaSir ri nf/iaarrtt which party shall anticipate the
other in doing some service to the State 1. 4. TO. Without regard to its mood, the
present and imperfect of ^Hna are folloned by the present participle (rarely by
the perfect) ; the fatuie, aorist, and historical {u^Bent are followed by the aorist
panidple.

e. aix it ^0ina (^roiri) with the participle is used in urgent, but poliu,
eihortatlona, as «£( it ^Mtau \iyur the sooner you speak the belter (i.e. speak
at once") X. 11.2.3.11. Strictly this is equivalent to you would not be antielpat-
ing (my wish or your duty) . if you should speak. X^i 4i$irat might be said
according to 2001.

t XarMrv and ijMne (rarely rvyxira) may appear in the participle, tlius
reverunK the ordinary constrnction, aa aui\a$iir tafyxfrai it rijr MirvX'inir he
entered UityUne secretly T. 3. 25, tpeiyarra Ijiii S-gaCiar riji' intlnut y^r we got (Ae
Wort of them by ravaging their territory X.C.3.3. 18. Cp. also 2062 a. The
preeent participle is rare,

2097. Si&Y*- SwYCTiapAi, Swt-nXA, Sto^iiva continue, keep on, am continu-
ally.

Iiiyowi /lafMnn-n they art eontinnally (they spend their time in) learning
X. C. 1. 2. 0, tpia iaeiorra ol irTpaT-ivrsi Suylyxirrt the toldiers kept rating meat
X. A. 1. 5. f.. JcareXii itlaH* he Continue* to hate X, C. 5. 4. 36, S/njwPrM. itrrt-
Xov^r, we lanienttd continually 1. 19. 27, 1 ^^wi Xn/ir/iAra.riit dr iiaiiirtt the sua

continuee to be most brilliant X. H. 4. 7. T.

2098. With verba signifying to begin, cease, endure, grow weary of
an action.

I;.C00J^[C

468 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [sogt

SfXafuu beyin (2128), vaiw cause U> ceaie, 'toAoiuu, X^y« ceaae, &*»-
X*(mt, GtoXtln*, Mt.((v« leaix off, IKktiwtt fail, &*^s|uu gi^pport, MkfnfA

endure (ilo somcUiing pntiently), K&fim grow xeeary, Ava-fopiia give up. etc

ip(otuH iri Tiji laTpixrji X^ur / teill htijtn iay upeech with the heating art
P. S. 18« b, Ttttlou TouTo -tc^thiunt J mill p«t a ttop to thU huppenittff P. G.523c,
raCvoi Xiyouaa lit. slop talking E. Hipp, TOO. oiriiroTi tUXtiror {^uw I xeBtr
left oS seeking X. Ap. 16, Ar^xov yriiix<^' support thy ivSeriags K. fr. 1090, o*»(
rif itapTipoet iKoiur kt\. neither then did I listen patiently, etc., Ae8. 3. 118. ^
xiii^^ ipl\i>t ipipa (iKp-ifTwr dij not groin wearg of doing gooit to your friend
F. G.4T0C, dwtipi)ta . . . rd Si-Xa tfitpuy ta.1 it rdfti l-ir mi ^uXacai ^uXiiTTor
Kal iiaxi*fot lam tired of Carrying my arms and going in the rank* and mount-
ing guard and fighting X. A, 5. 1. 2.

«. Verbs sigiiilying to tnpport, endure ordinarily take the present participle ;
but tbere are cases of tlm compiexive aoriaC in reference to acto to which one
must submit despite all n'SLstauRe; so, witli di>^x<>^<< X. C. 6.2. 18, D.41. 1 ; cp.
oi* fiviexiaSt itoiaanTii L. i:(.8 (lldt. 5. 80) With oiK linlxayn dm^orrn X. H.6.
6. 49. The aoriBt participle seems not to be used with the object of dt^x'**"-

2099. With some verba of coming and goiiifj the participle speci-
fies the manner of coming and going, and contains the main idea.

(3^ 4it6yia* he took to flight {<eent fleeing) B 665, otxorrai Jtiiiurnt they hart
gone fii pursuit X. A. 1. 10. 5, v)c*;"l» imyiiitm I put to sea 1>. 60. 13, alx"'"
6a.niiit he it dead and gone S. I'h. 414, oi tovro X/fut tpxa/uu I am not going to
tay thle X. Ag. 2. 7.

2100. With verbs of emotion (rejoicing and grieving) the participle
often denotes cause (ep. 2048).

Xalpo, ^Sa|iai, -rtpirofuLi., ytytfia (poet.) urn pleased, take pleasure, Lyvwi,
trrtfn/a am content, inavaitTa, (LxB<>P>'^ X"^™** +*?" am vex^d, dSupleared,
p^luf ^<t make light of, Xiiira9|uu grieve, ipyl\offut. am angry, alo-x^Topoi.
atSoO|uu am ashamed (2120), |UTa)i&o)iaii, iitroiiAn |uh repent. (Verbs of
emoUon also take Srt or ui, by nliich construction the object is simply staled ;
with the participle the connection is closer).

xai/iM Sia\fyiittyot ToFi vipdipa Tptip&ran I like to converse with very old m*»
P. B.328d, fern liStrat \iyor itl, \i\7i0ir ai>Tir Tolf fi>»urr» <ir 0ii/>Ot Ae WhO
likes to be always talking is a bore to his companions without knowing it
S.fl. 99, o^ d7iii'w iiir trl Tuiron I am not content to live on these condilioiu
1. 12. 8, oit it A-x^^'f"!!' ^uo^dwr / should not be annoyed at learning P. I.ach.
18^ a, x^Xfrut f<ptpar ofulai KaTfXtiworrti they took it hard at abandoning their
homes T. 2. 16, iiiKoiptm ol ivBpvwiit naWar 6p-ili»rT<u 4 /^af^xH mett are
more angered at being the victims of injugtice than of eotitpulstnn 1. 77, oi 74*
aJffx'*VM<u tiareimr fur I a'n tiut ashamed to learn 1'. Hipp. Min.3T2c, iirrtid-
Xnrro Tai vtotlit 06 tt^diterot they repented not having accepted the truee T. 4. 21,
oB tai luranAMi avrui irai^v'e^l'^'V i do not repeM having made mcA a d^enee
P.A.38e.

A, The participle agrees with the esse of tiie person In regard to whom the
emoUoD is manifested: imiorret xolpouvir i^eraltiUiva t«i obv^iVM id* <!»«

1= Coo^^lc

lias] THE SUITLEMKNTAKY PAKTICU'I.E 4l)9

ss^T, alai 3' oj! Ihq/ like to hear Ikr framination of thou who pretend to be
leim, bvt art not to in reality P. A. :» c. Tliis construcLion mual be dUlinguiBhed
from that occurring ill poeirjr, wLeraby verbs like x<>'/"and dx*>*«i (wbichcom-
fflonlj take the dative) ufUiU admit the accusative and tlio participle ; rait
lip fiatfitit 9nl 6riatarra.t ai xaip«v'i for the godt do ttvt rejoice at the death of
the righteottt E. Hipp. 133».

b. So with verbs meaning; to latiale oneself: vrur^mit^mi aix <m-ifirXiwg
1/0% could not Ktliale yoarself v>ith pramiaes X. A. T. 7. 46.

2101. With verbs signifying to do well or iU, to tnirpass or be
inferior, the participle specifies the wwiiiner or tkal in wliich the action,
of the verb aynsista (cp. 2048, 2062). So with xaXm (tt) btou, a&irw,
afiapTaita ; viicui, xpaTui, jriptytyvofuiL, ^rrui/ial, ktiwofuu.

(0 y twoiiira.t dm^inirrai /u yoM did well ia reminding me P. Ph. 60c (cp.
1872 c. S), taXut Irolriirtr ourai TiXtuT-iirai Tir piar he did loell in ending hit life
that L.28.S, jniffnrfc dx(n)o>Tct you ici7f profit bj/ hearing P. A. 30c, iSiniTi
raU>uw ipxorrtt (1734. 6) j/ou do temng (a being the aggrtssora in the tear T. 1.
-il, oix InfvfiiuBa (B rotovrris w« iihiill not 6c outdone la well-doing X. A. 2. 3.
2.^. Here belonfm 'w' x»*>'i*'' ironpindiitm do me the favour to reply (^gratify
me by relying') P. R. 33B a.

2102. With mipaimi try, itoXk iyKCipM am urgeTlt, trarra xoiw do
ettrythijig, the participle ia rare in Attic; more commoQ in Hdt.
with wupSi/uu, TToAAof cyK«/uu, iroAAot tifu am urgent, etc.

nifUffi^icAi iXfyx'rrtt 1 ahall try to prove Ant. 2. "y. 1 ; iraXXAi j}v Xiffs-i^nt
ke begged often and urgently Hdt. 9. 61.

2103. With vtptopui (and sometimes with i^pw, daopio, rpoltfuii),
signifying overlook, allow. (But not with iH.) Cp. 2141.

tutfit rfiyrStitro* rir irffpurar rtpiap^iut UP allow the man to groiff greater
(tee took telth indifference on hit growing power) D. il. all, at wtpieiSar ifiauriy
Sttiar yeri/i"" I did not niffer myself to become iibscttre 1. 12. 11, tTXrirar iri-
itit . . . i/^imTfr fiit rifj rftXir ytyofjJrrit, riiv H x^P^" rop6avfLiinjv they had the
courage to look ealmly on their city made desolate aiid their country being rat-
aged 1. 4. W. So exen Trith the uncompounded dpu in poetry. ( With the infini-
tive rtfopS no longer connotes perception and simply equals lH allow.')

aiM. With some impersonal expressions taking the dative, such
as those signifying the advantage or consequence of an action {it is
fitting, profitable, good, etc.), and those implying confidence or fear.
(The personal construction is often preferred.)

Iw^piirur rit Ottf, el (Bfrreii) ifeXi^iowii' iiui*»f tvrm they axked the god
whether it mould be better for them to make war T. 1.116, ri riS' oCtv ^fXo»
(isrl) ittKK-riitirtf ^ it is pleaidng to him tn be. called thaB A.Ag.lSl. Personal:
•It waM/ucr ftr rS xi'pi'" iiTit;iii»nr to whom the settlement of the place wa> a
menace T. 1. 100, ofui lUrur ^Xrlur {4rTlr) he i» all the better by staying at
hovte D. 3. SI (tor lUrtir aCrir ^r»r im).

210S. The paitlciple occurs with various other verbs, each as 9atil{u am

470 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [jioe

viotU; wfiriwTt and vu^ff^ru happen; iroSttriviu, raSlttt, rapQanmitU, mem-
Ing render; iprS, Itarit tl/u am n^cieitl.

On i/iai povXofiiva iarl, etc., see 1487. On l\<o and the participlf
in periphrases, see 1%3.

THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE

2106. Veiba of Enowing end Showing. — AfUr verbs signifying to JctuMS,
be tgnoranl of, learn (not learn of), reiUember, forget, »how, appear, print,
aeknotoledffe, and announce, the participle represents a dependent suUemenl,
Ottoh tense having the same tores as ttie oorresponding tense of the indicatiTe or
DpI&tlve with Sti or in, the present including also the imperfect, the pertect
including also the pluperfect.

Such verba are : olSa. yiyvAticm, hrCo-rofLu, h*oi, ^Mti.vi (2130), (aixl
&Y*oA, |U|in»uu, firJikvtdKiiLaL (2134), S^^A, (In) G«(KW|ii, ^v«, ivo^ob-,
4a(rafi<u (2143), louts (i089c, 21S3), (tt-)My\», 4p»XoY« (rarely), &Y7CUM,
voiA repreaenf (21L5).

»i -yip ^itaar airit TtSnjtiro (= tWhik) for they did not know that he aai
dead X.A.I. 10. lis, fy™ rl|» iffffa\)ir iaaitirriii ( = (iTTru) fte inets (Aaf lAe iBtonoH
woTiM fdite plnce T. 2. 13, At i/u!f ttltToaSt iiit&i rpoi&na (= rpoCiiiiiR) yoH itioia
Mat Ae betrayed ua X. A. 6. 6. IT, rU ovrwt rh^^^t Airir i/iSt Ura lyntl tAt iai-
$iv iriXtttat StOp ' flfotra ( = flf et) I «>ho of you it to tiTaple-mtaded Of %0t to tiioje
that the oar ^Bill cnme hither from that quarter f D.I. 16, (Xtppdniaar') na-riiiatt
riXia tvtaa 4 Siiitm Ixewar ( = lx«') he learned that ChertoaetHa eontainrd
eleven or tieelve ettiei X. H.3. 2. 10, ii4ii,nuuu dmiaat (— ^lotwa) I reiaember to
have heard X.C. 1.6.0, ^^itj^i Kp.Tff rfSf fui^n-a « (=:fvi^8B) I remember
that you vxre in company with Critias here P. Cliarm. Vi& a, trit^X^iurf ^/vi
yiporrtt Smt (= ia/Ut) we have gladly forgotten that «w are old E. Baccb.
188, Seffu (aArir) nWHr tfardrMr <n-' (= ^rl) fur / tefll lAau (ftal ike
detente to die many times 1). 21.21, St^x^<rtTlu roSrs rtrot^Kiit (_=wcrti^a)
he will be shown to have done this 21. 160, raOre rb ypd/ttia tti\et y^S^ ri^r jia-
^iciFa^f-av (^!=4vtI) this clause >/iow8 (Ant the will wat forged *b. S4, Uriwo-
^(fwri T»it ^eiyorrat »aXnJ lorrwwii (n-af (= thl) If they aAotO (Aa( the exilft
uere (nveterate rtucale L. 30. 1, 4 V'i'x'l iBArarQt ^aJftrot »IiFa (= /vrf) it seem
that the soul is immortal P. Ph. 107 c, dJimDi^ ( =^ dituri) ♦iXwxo* ^4\oto
/ eonoicted /ftiiip 0/ aaing uniuttly D. 18. 138, pt,Sivi i^rrx^"-" ywJV'M
(=ll'«tfJeTat) Ae will eatily be eonvieted of lying 27.19, A^iaXoTod^ufc AMrrn
(=4Xfc>ur) I acknowledge that I came I.. 4. 7, atrv KBpet friar fiartdawra (= In-

vrpoTtiti) rpCrrtt ifYTt'^x^ 1 wat the first to announce that Cyriu was talcing the
field against him X. A. 2. 3. 10.

a. Except with iy/tWu announce (toAot it certain}, verba of taj/ing orlAiai'-
injf rarely lake the participle in prose, e.g. riirt raCra StSoyiJn inir tiiult
(= tt firft) think that this U our ananimout opinion P. B. 460 a.

2107. The personal constructions El|Xit it|u, ^av^dt it|u 7 otn plainlp
(impersonal S^\it and ^Kpif irriw An) are followed by a depeDdent ataMment
in the participle. Thas, l^\m ilr MfUK/i (= a^Xsrft in nbiTa] it wot dear th(g
he thought X. A.2.6.27, Mwr ^repit i)« TdXXdni (= ^oMirir it Srt 9ioi) it wot

«i»] THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARI'ICIPLE 471

tMent that he ofitn taaifieed X.M.I. 1.2, dnifcli IQXot 4* (sJ^W fr Iri
iniAl?) he ahowd hit dittatU/artioit X. C. 2. 2. 8,

2106. Tliepaxtldplewitho^vaiS»orrvf7i'Y*dn(wa>neo>iac(ou«, accompanied
^ the (Utirs of th« reflexive pronoun, tutty stand either in the nomlnatlTe agreo-
ing with the subject, or In the dative agreeing with the refleztve. Thus, vurtit^
■kit ttrf Ipyor il^aaiiim contciout (to himself) that he had dona the deed
Ant 6. 6, ifiavT^ furrf't oUtr triaraitinf I wat coHfciont of knowing nothing
P. A. 23 c.

a. When the subject la not the same aa the object, the latter, nith the par-
ticiple, may stand in the dative, or (rarely) In the accusative. Thus, {urCo-affi
UtXHrif iiir iiaiiaiiAnf, tfial ii i\iiet6om thej/ knoU> a* jeell as MeUtui that he U
Ipap, and (as well as I do) that I am gpeaking the truth P. A. 34 b, rvnitAi ra»
iA«idTwr SwiXsvf ittrfxarrai knaviing (Aol tiava patticipate in the eontett*
D. 61. 23. (The force of rit at times almost disappears.)

21M. The use of the participle to represent a dependent statemeot come*
from its ciicumstantial use. Thus, in ai yip iSrrar airbt rtei^Kdra (2106),
Trfntrtra agrees with the object of fjirar ; and from thq/ did not know him a»
dead the tLought passes into tAey did not kaow (the fact) that he wat dead.

CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS OP PERCEIVING AND OF FINDING

2110. V«rb« of Perc«ptioii. — Verba stgnifying to $ee, perettve, hear, lear»
(i.e. (ram by inqvirs, hear of), when they denote physical (actoal) perception
take the participle. When Uiey denote Intellectual perception they may take
the participle or ffri or wi with a Anile verb. (Tlie Homeric usage is less strict.)

3111. Such verba are, in Attic, ipA see, ataM*o|iai perceive, Ajcoia hear.

a. Hot in Indirect DUcoone. — Here verhe of perceiving denote phftteal per-
ception— Ibe act perceived or heard of . With diodw and rurMiofui the participle
stands In the genitive ; with oJvMfVfiai it usualJy stands in the accDsative (aa
with ifa), but someUmes in the geniUve. (See 1361, 1367.)

tli* KXAtpx"* Su\ainrra he eatB Clearchtu riding through X.A.I. 5. 12;
lUrMiMm AaiivpOK\a wpi% r^r larrifa. xai^n-olnrra perceiving Lavtproelet angrf
teith hit mother X. M. 2. 2. 1 , 'J7<'i)0'cu rureri /lov 4 i-evSti/apTVpedrrai 4 vi*o4^r-
Totrrrtt ; hace you ever noticed nw either bearing false witneaa or playing the part
ofaninformerf 4. 4, 11 ; ^tovaar ah-oB ^rfffarrat they heard him epeaking X.8.
3. 13; in H66arre r^t Tlihtv nriiXirfiM/iii when they learned of the capture of
PglotT.i.S.

N. Verbs of physical perception, ipH (especially) and itoiu, regularly take
the present participle In Attic prose, wbicb usually refuses to distinguisb between
I tee a house burning and I see a houte burn. The conipleiive aorlat, summing
Dp the action, does however occur, as in liter tXa^r fariii^'iirar . . . ilium
lehett A« aaie a hind break cover he gave thau X.C. 1.4. 8. Cp. rnirra tJSor
Hilt. 0.22.

b. In Indiioct Discoime. — Here verba of perceiving denote inlellectuiU

uogic

472 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [1113

perceptioQ — tbe ftict that sometliiDg is perceived or beard of. With ireitt ud
rvi^dn^i the partictpie stands in Che accuBatlve (aa with ipu, aladdnoiuu'). Cp.
ISaa, ISttG, 2144, 2145.

ipa/tt* TciwTo. i\-ri99i trra i X^m we tee that eveiytktiig jfon *ay i* tnt X. A.
S. G. 24, aMiteiiai raOra o'urui fxB"'' / perreive that thit U m X. M. 8. 6. 5,
yfiMHfe Kiptr it KiXutlf Srra he htard that Cyras leaf in Cilieia X, A. 3.4.6.
Srar tXirji ntii tjiorr' 'Op/imr'' Jehen she heard from any one Ihat Orette* w7I
return S. El. 293, wiMiitm 'Apraiipi^r riflninira hnving learned that Artaxertet
viae dead '1'. 4, &0.

2113. Verbs of Finding. — Verbs of finding and delecting (lipbat, ^*m)-
Xafi^im ; pass. iXitKufiai) in their capacity as verbs of pert:eiriinff take the
participle (a) not in indirect discourse, of the act or state in which a penon or
thing is found 1 or (b) in Indirect discourse, of the fact tliat a person or thing
1h foond in an act or state.

a. jT^puf i^iK6;itm i|Bp( rait itSpat Sii^Bappfmn the berald, on hu arrirol,
found the men already pitt to death T. 2. 6, (upijToi i-ib-tui rpirTur he hat been
found to have dealt faithfullff DAO.S^i, an tp iWai T»it Xo^i/Mrp •/■aiiliAtm
if then he catch anybody else lying P. H. 389d, 4> ^ifSouXdiwi ixt^inrriu ifhebi
detected in plotting X. Ag, 8. 3.

b. «ii Tiir'lMov AXwirit tiplmuti v^iei, loirat r^r ipxiir T^t Ix^/np tltej/ caa-

eJtkJe Ihat the beginning of thetr enmity tea* on aceownt of tht capture i>f Himn
Hdt.1.6.

2114. It isoftendifl3cuItlodiaUnsuishtlietwoconBtructionBnf 2113. Thna,
mTaXa/iffdnvai rtufrl rrdvu To4t Ti3» 'A0r)taliiir ttarrloin iKwrw-tamirat (T. 7. S3)
m&j me&n they found that the anli-Athenian party had been recently a^Urd bin
revolution (ind. disc.) or them recently expelled (not in ind. disc.). So taraXap^-
Mitfi . . . ToXXa A^ntTTtitira they found the other cittea in a state of revolt T.
1. 60 {that they had revolted would be possible). In tbe meaning dfaeocer, find
iUTa\anffifw does not take the aorist participle.

2115. vai£ meaning represeiit has the construction of the verbs of SI13.
Thus, rXijffidJVHTOi Toil »(Dl)l roil irBpiiraa oUr t aiToIi iroi^ifcu it it post&U fOt
them (poets) to represent the gods as draviing nigh (omen 1.0.9. Cp. 2142.

OMISSION OP <v

2116. The participle w is often omitted.

2117. After Are, ola, ui, or Kaintp, &t Is often omitted In prose with predi-
cate adjectives : vvtitlwavt (Kofitr iiufnTipovs rpii iavrir in ^ilXevt ffSi^ (Srrmi) hf
took both to supper alth him tince they ivere noiD friends X. C. 3. 2. 25. Sui-li
omission is rare in prose except after these particli's ; tl <|TTDut (*«■(») t-Af reXt-
Itlur \y]4>8tia6ptea if ice shall be caught iit the mercy of our enemiet X.A.0.
e. 13. With predicate substantives, even after these parlicles, &r is very nivl)~
omitted (P. R. r,6Hb).

a. In tbe genitive and accusative absolute the particles ol 2117 osually pr^
cede when &y is omitted. With the genitive absolute the omission la very rare
In prose 1 it irolnut (Jrrur) jf/nf/uiTNi' just OS though the property unm at their

aiM] THE PARTICIPLE 473

ditpotal X. A.7.8.11j bixtliiUpAt IjSii (ot^t) U bfing already day T.6.59. In
poetry th« sabaUuiUve mually suggests the verb; Infitrrv^Tipoi «di»ii (errot)
^Xm* with no friend to guide him S. (). C. 1588. Accusative absolute : ibi laXAi
(BfI dY*p(^rAii airir on the ground that it it admirahU far it (the speech) to be
delivered T. 8. 36. Without the particles of 2117, the oniisBion of 6r is poetical
(S.Ant. 44). The omission o((lr wtth adjectiTea ending in -or aids euphony.

b. itiir willing, Atctat uHwilltag are treated like participles (2071) ; i/Mu iiir
oix itirrat ngaintt my uUl 8. Aj. 466.

c. A* must be used when it has the force of fit the eapacitg of.

2118. A predioate subslantire or adjective, coordinated with a participle
in the same construction, may omit Hr; ea ai ^^iuit lit /iii iLBp6oit tal dXA^Xovi
wfpiiulwiai Sit\0tir tJjip raXr/ila-t it wnt not eatj/ fur Ihtm to paaK through the ene-
my'» country except in a body and after having waited for one another T, 5. 84.

2119. Hr may be omitted with verbs taking a supplementary participle ; so
witli verbs meaning to perceive (2111 ff.), know, show, announce, find, dlacoter,
etc.; especially ifkli ^a(»>uii, tvyx^"' (poet. KupH), SianXiS, 3ia7l7n^i, rarely
wltb rtpMpO and eviipalrti. Thus, ipa iJyat (flrrs) rbt i-y&n I see that the contett
ia important T.2.46, ir fr Xippor^iaif w66iir0t tlXtrwoir (trra) if you luarn that
Philip is in Cherioneaua D. 4. 41, tt fcoSiii •palrolro (_&r] 6 TuPpiat if Qobrya»
term to be false X. C. f>. 1. 4, %l tii eBhiui (&>) riryx'tH' '/ any one happens to be
friendlg Ar. Eccl. 1141, dxirwr (&r) iiatt\eit you are continually without a
tunic X.H.l.e.2.

'fll WITH A PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE

2120. &f is often used with a participle in indirect discourse to
mark tiie mental attitude of the subject of the main verb or of some
other person mentioned prominently in the sentence (cp. 2086^;
sometimes, to denote emphasis, when that mental attitude is already
clearly marked.

in littit tlSir teBi /u be assured that I know nothing (lit. understand that
ynu are to assume that I know nothing) S. Ph. 253, i^\»t 9> RSpot in frtiiun
Cyrus uas plainly bent on haate (Cyrus showed that It was his Intention to
make haste) X.A.1.6,e.

2121. A participle wiib ui may follow a verb of thinking or saying though
the Terb In question does not lake the participle in Indirect discourse witliout
Ht, TliUS, wt rd pfXrurra PouXtdorrn hxUpillirTo they kept insiHing in the belief
that they were recommending the bfat course T. 4. 08. wi trrpaTrfiirorT iiti raimy
rift rrfarijytar ^^Sfli b/iuy Xtyh-u let no one of you say (i.e. speak of me in the
Mt^) that I will assume this command X.A.i.SAH.

2122. So alter verbs admitting the supplementary participle in Indirect dis-
course we may have the genitive or accusative absolute with in Instead of the
participle or a olaose with Sri or at. Thus, «i woXiiuiv gn-ot rap' iiui' di-n77fXi3 1
shall I report from you {on the assumption) that there is war f X. A. 2. 1. 21.
in iiiad atr lirrai, Arn ical \iptU, mra r^r -rviifiqr 1x"' raake up ynnr minds (on

We assumption) Ihatlamfoing wherever yvu go C= 6e sure that I am going.

474 STNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [ain

etc) 1.8.6 (h«re rj^r yniniiT Ixf oonld not take tb« pkrUclple without in);
iit i-dw /K» ianOr, Dvrui tr9i rest ouured (Aol ft it mg decided opiftfOn (lit. oa
the aesumplion that thU aeemt »o to me, underttaTid accordinfflf) X, H. 4. i. SIX
For wt with the absolute participle aot Id indirect diBcouree, eee 2085 d.

VERBS TAKING BITHEB THE PARTICIPLE: OB THE INPINITIVB
2133. Some verbs admit either the supplementary participle or

the infinitive, sometimes with only a Blight difference in meanii^.

Cases where the difference is marked are given below. (Most of

the verbs in question admit also a substantive clause with on or

&i, 2577).

2131. Inflnltlve &nd participle here difler greatly when the infinitive e:

purpose or result, Where the infinitive ehowa only Its ebetract verbal n

it difFers but little from the participle (cp. 3144).

2125. A participle or Infinitive standing in indirect discouree is indicated la
2126-^148 by O(ratio) O(bliqua) ; when not standing In 0. 0. this fact is ordi-
narily not indicated.

2126. alrx4fO|uu and aISaD|uu with part. (2100) = I am aahatRed of doing
something which I do ; with inf. = I am athnmed to do something which I have
red^ned from doing up to the present time and may never do. Thus, roDro itir
aim aftrxdn^uu \t^w ■ ri Bi , , , afrxi'"''"!' '' \iynr I am not awhatned ofwxf-
ingthU; but the /olloviing I should he afhamed to eon X.C.6.1.21, aJ^xt"!"!
ttr biuw tlriir tAXtjS^, Shu% Si jiip-hir 1 am aehamed to tpeak Vu tntUi to you;
neaertketese it mutt be spoken P. A, 22 b. With a negative the distinctton may
disappear: oM* ttlaxi"^ ^Mnv Afiqi ttrdyar (v.l. ilaiywn), oAt itnttiiaroi oUc-
fit, Kol riitevt ufrsTetutf ; are you not ashamed to bring a eavie itUo eovrt out
o/timy — not/oT ang oJTence — and to alter latesf D. IB. 121.

2127. AWxsiMt (2096 ; rarely with the Inf.), »r\im and toX|iA (both ntrely
with the part, in poetry), WejUva : with part. =en(lEtrr,>tifiniil to something that
is present or past ; with Inf. venture or have the eovrage to do something in the
futore, Thus, rdrxorm iittlxotra tttey snbmiUed to »vffer T. 1. TT, ttt^x*"*
rA> iritrrra. irl r^n xtipSr S^curAii they had the COnrage tO recetM the invader of
th*iT eonntry Hdt.7. 139; waiSa . . . 4>atli 'Aik(>ii)n)i wpiBirra rX^m thef Mq)
that Alemene'i son bore up in bondage (lit. having been sold) A. Ag. ICMI;
irSXfii ^aW6titrm he submitted to be struck u lAl, riXfiqirsr 6pS<ii ^pownr Mopere
aude A. Pr. lOOD ; aix ^o^m tipt\o6ncm he cannot sfand being improved P. G.
.'i06 c, ([ i/ioiuriouri x"p^' '/"' imuipi/itMi if thei/ thali dare to raise titeir handi
against me HdL 7. 101.

2128. ifx«f<^>f^- 1?'^ (Horn. Ipx") with part. {2008), begin todo mtneAinf
and continue with something else; with int. (usually present, cp. lUOGb) be^s
to do something and continue with the same thlnjc- Thus, dpto^uu AtSdvcwr Jrr
r£r Stlur I aill begin my instruction teith things divine (later the Hibject Is the
desire for wealth) X. C. H. 6. 2, w6eii 4pfar6 at liSiirait ri/r rrpanryfiv ,- at K*at
point did he begin to trarh y"u gtnernlshipf X,M.3. 1.6. dpxwuwith the pu>
ticiple occurs only in Xenophon and i'lato.

L;,.„-z:-:l,vG00glc

•137] VERBS TAKING THE PARTICIPLE OR INFINITIVE 475

2129. 'pY*''K* ^'h P«t- <" O- O. (2106) = recognize that tomething U ; with
int.in three QMS ; (1) in ().(). = Judge (_decide) that something U {a verb ol wUl),
as lyrueaw apiaXtiirtpor dm the]/ judged thai it traM mure priffitable X.A.I,
fi. 17 ; (2) uot in U. C). = rttol»e, determine to do aomething, as Ifnt luittit roii
in tUt tiitrtiiitr rp»vtttuirovi he retotved tu purme thote uiho were hanging ott
hU left X. H. 4. 6. 9 ; (.?) not in <). U. = learn hou to do lomething (rarely), as
ylTfrurKt t^ ift^ tpartly learn to control thy temper Men. Setit.itO.

2130. MKveiuTrlth part, in 0.0.(2100) = thoie that somelhtng 1» ; vilh inf.
(drajflxnifu) not In O. 0. = thiiw hoai to do aomethtng, tngtruft. Thua, iriStt-
faw ti itT'M'^ Jiaitfiirtit ri ^iritSna the guidea directed them to take proeinoui
X. A. 2. 3. 14.

2131. Si)U with part (and inf.) In 0.0. (2106) = ahoie that tometking It,
tndieaU; with inf. not in O.O, = command, nake known, eignifi/ ; asinrq^^n

M4^M> T«it i^mOiplit J(afi^Hi/t wf trpit ri/i^iJiX" cu^rir rs/xtnit he made knnwii bj/
proelantatton that Unite who wanted fi-eedom thoatd come to him aa an allg
X. Ag. 1.33.

2133. Son|>4w wltli part. In O. O. (2106) = prove to be, as Wtiet rtrtt «>T*t
bAtdI r<pt r^r vJXtr iSniMrev''' what tort o/periom i/o« proved jfoumelva to he
(n regard to the cttf L. 31. M ; with inf. in O. O. = pranonnce. an optnion to be
correct. Thus, iianKiidfitiitr irtpl raXy re tiyaff^ Ifnoffiir dm . . . jtfMTlrTqt

ftupylit we approved the idea that tilling of the toil it th« bett occupation /or a
gentleman X. U. 0. 8.

2133. louca (198-3, 2089 c) with nom. part = appear, oftener with dat. part,
(fllrictiy = am like), appear ; with int. = teem. Thus, UUart rvpanl^i itSXKet
4 reldTtltta 1iS6ium you appear to take delight tn detpotiimt rather than in eon-
ttUvttonal gotemmeatt X. H. 6. 3. 8, fgnat ttSidri rah raXXatfi strictly you are
like on* Kho feart (I.e. you appear to fear) the mnlttlude P. K. G2T d, odi (nuit
(IS/Mt he teent not to kno\e X. Ap. 29, loucn troucrlptir et methinka I pitj/ thee
S. Ph. 317.

2134. fanXa>#i««|MU with part in 0.0. (2100) =/o>vet that tomeAlng it;
with in*, not in 0. 0. = forget (ftow) to do tometking. Thus, 6Xlyav irtiuMiite'
tlrtir Zhave almott forgotten to mention P. R. 563b.

2135. ttfimt with part. In O. O. = judge and not in O. O. (2118) =find that
something it; leas often with Inf. In CO. = judge, aa (tyHcrn r-ain-a naipiiirrara
timt he fovnd ^judged) that this teat the most opportune uojr Hdt. 1. 126. mfii-
•m^uu rarely with Inf. =Jlnd how to (K. Med. 196), procure by asking (Hdt.
0.38).

3136. |wvMv« with part. In 0.0. (2106) = I^orntAat (ometAfnpft; withinf.
not In O. O. = learn (how) to do eomethlng. Thns, SuifitfiX^iifm oO iiaitdmt you
do not perceive that yon hare been calumniated Hdt. 3. 1, iv lra{ iiABwiiiw ipyol
nr if we one* leom to lite in idleneu X. A. 3. 2. 2G.

2137. (M#h||M(Ie(ifo), etc., with part, cleave off; with \nt. = neglect, permit.
Thoa, at yifi iriti i*iAt for he did not ttop aiming after them Hdt. 4. 126, iitKaai
Ti SAirra rpirrfr they neglect to perform their dutiet X. M. 2. 1. 33, tuOitri tun
iJyaw allowing ni« to tpeat 8. El. 628.

476 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [aijl

2138 |UtivT|(UH with part, in O.O. (2106) = remtmber that aomOhiiig It;
witli inf. not in (J. O. = remember Co do sometMng. Tliiis, (Wfuijirft* iriip iysHj
ilnu let him be mindful to be a brave man X. A. 3. 2. 30.

2139. oKa and 4«laTa|iu with part. In 0. 0. (2100) = know thai tomething
is; with Inf. not In O.O. =kKOW hovi to do something. Thus, trurripMroi kit
knoieing how to neim X. A. 6. 7. 26. lu poetry (verj rarely in prose, except
with iwlirTa)uii <n lldt.) these verbs take also the inf. (in O, O.) in the meaning
knaxe or belieee : trurTdfuBa ^hJ wii tot atrdr f riJSoi \aiccir we kaoto that he ha*
never yet t^oken faUehood S, Ant. 1094,

2140. wui« with part. (2098) = Wop what Is taking place; withlnf. =pmeid
something from taking place. Thus, framrar tpupiuiUravt r\^69t rtSir thejf ttopptd
their terror at the number of «ft(p» P. Meiiex. 211 b, wa6<rarrtt rh iiii rfottMfit
iytit rijv AXiidSa preventing the merchantman from drawing near T. 7. 53,

2141. vipMpA, etc (2103) with prea. part. = viev with indiffertnet, with
aor. part. = »htU one't eget to ; with inf, =i i*t lomething hat^H through negli-
gence, or simply permit lianj. Tims, wrpuXSt rir airai -rar^pa coi furra rif
iraynatun ararllarra Kal Tt^tin-irafr' oi rvxirra rfi» »/ilfujv he looked On with
Indifference while his oren father woe in want of neeeailiet when alive and («hat
his eyes) to his failure to receive the customarg rites t^er he had pasted aa^
Dinarchus 2.8, at 'Ax'V'fl' . . . 'i rtpii\J/ie6ai iSiKaun ri aifrfTipa Sia^tapirra it
did not seem tikely that the Acharnians would shut Oitir eyes to the destruction
of their property T. 2. 20, o^ iaiirai lipavar rtpii^iereai eiSita they re/tisrd to
permit any one to enter 4. 4S.

2142. iroUa with part (2116) = represent; witli int not In 0.0. = cause,
effect; with inf. in 0. 0. ~ assume. Thus, dtunS/uiut toi>i AXXdvi (Ihu r«w? eauit*
the others to lose their iinmf!a Ildt.T. 129, T«iii>uSa (conj. rl oliiiuBa) rir ^U-
co^v nid^tiv ktX. let us assume that the philosopher holds, etc. P. R. 681 d.

2143. +at«|Mii with part in O. 0. (2100) = /am pladiJp,- with inf. In 0.0.
= I seem or it appears (but may not ha true) that I. Thus, tpalntriu ri\^
\iywr he is evidently speaking the truth, ipaLrtrai TiXijeg \iyar he appears to tt
speaking the truth (hut he may be lying). Cp. tJ ^up^ . . . tXaiar t^nrs
lit. 6^ his voice it appeared that he wa» weeping (but he was not weeping) X. S.
1. 15. The above distinction is, however, not always maintained.

2144. The following verba take either the participle or the infini-
tive (in O. 0.) with no (or only slight) differeuce in meaning:

ataUiKnau, (UoAd, rvtMHwuti (2112), dryAXw (2106), xatffjb (2106) and oM-
aTit)H, tapatrttvi^ita.t, itio^jiyu (2106), wtipQitai (3102), trirpirai and ttnliu
(part, rare), i^erd/iru (inf. rare), ft»«^{to wonder, rlBitiui suppose, the eiprw-
»ions oC 2104, etc. Both iiit)nit[vQ and participle with rviAlnfiu in Hdi. 5. IC,
«, 40.

2143. Verhs of intellectual perception (2112 b) take also Sn or fc.
So with dfcovui, lufT^vofuu, irvv6a.voitai. Cp.

iaiai with Ben. part. = Ihear (with my own eara).

imia with accus. part. = Ihear (throDfth others, l.e. I am told) AaL

iKoiu with Inf. = I hear (of general, not certain knowledge, as by report) tAot

REMARKS ON SOUK USES OF PARTICIPLES

THE PARTICIPLE ■WITB av

2146. The participle with dr represents the indicative with S,v
(17S4 ff.) or the potential optative with ov (1824). The present par-
ticiple with Sy thuB represents either the imperfect iDdicative with
ay or the present optative with Sv; the aorist participle with Sy rep-
resents either the aorist indicative with an or the aorist optative
with Sy. Cp. 1845 ff.

KEMARKS ON SOME USES OP PARTICIPLES

2147. The abundance of its participles is one of the characteristic
features of Greek. Their use gives brevity to the sentence (cp,
2050), enabling the writer to set forth in a word modifications and
amplifications of the main thought for which we require cumbersome
relative clauses. But an excessive use of participles, especially in
dose conjunction, marked a careless style.

«. The participle may contain the leading thought, the finite verb the subor-
dioate thongbt, of a sentence. Tbtu, ri f it^Hrtia tbvto ypi^u . . . rail Spttut
T^r raxfrqi' i,'ro\a/ifidiiir, tr txirrur rdr BpfKuir . . . TaOra ri x'^P^'^t ' '"■'
«tT«t iUffUft . . ., ovrw ilymf9' al BpKoi I moved thii b(U thaC tlie envoys should
Kith all »peed rtneiva Philip's oaths in order that when the oiUhs aere taken the
nrac(ans might be in powewton of the placet ahieh the plaintiff Ai* j""' nvie
>itrn ridiculinff (lit. while the ThracloTu were in poue»»ion, etc. . . . the oatht
Might under these circumetances be ralijted) 11.18.27, ^CXa/ui 6\iya imripaui
irm/iriawi marapairtir I wish to recall a fevi thing* to the memory of each party
and then tit down (_descend from the betna) L. 12. S2. Cp. also 20UU, 2090.

b. Tbe participle may repeat the stem and meaning of Ilie finite verb. Thus,
ol t^x^MfM* it Tit TaSrra aEfaiTo and gome one might (praying) utter this prof/er
Ant. 6. 1.

c A participial construction may pass over into a (wnBtructiou with a finite

Tert>. Thus, liApTVpa iiir . . . oMira •wapaax^li"^ ■ ■ ■ TapeiuXciirTs H crX. lit.
prod»ctng on lAc one hand no wllnees . . . on the other hand he exhorted, et«.
I). 57. 11, wpov4pa\ow T# T«x'if»MiT(, iWif Tt TpiiKf rnpiaarTtt nl (ilX'"^)' irfit^i-
■¥•701 lit. thfy attaeted the rampart both making trial in other uiayi, and they
brought up an engine (i.e. and after trying other deeicet brought up an engine)
T. 4. 100.

i. A participle may be used In close connection with a. relative or iuterroga-

tive pronoun. Thus, oM' irrip ols ktoitikAtu^ irepiiram tivSvniatTi itahoytaitu-
»i not evrn calculating what had been the conduct of the men for whom you were
S/oiag to risk your ifcea I). 18.08, iXavniUroir mil i^pi(oiiiyar tal rl laiir oixi
ru-x^Tw* rar i) oltau/Urii /iiiriii yiyot (Ae whole civilii^ed trrirdi in filled toith
ni« who are harried to and fro and intuited, nay, whit misery ie there which
they do not tuffert 18. 48.

«. In contrasts, two subjects may, by anacolutbon, belong to one participle
in the nominative, though tbe participle t)elongB to only one subject (T. 3. 34. 3).

(. Two or more participles may l>e coordinated without any connective.

478 SrSTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [si4l

Thia la conunoa in Homer vrben one putli^ple forma a contrut to, or Intcauiflea,
tuiother participle. Cp. Ij nl htHfir' 'Ax(^4' xvtiiiuKi i^irt Wwr, luptiip^r i^pf
irr\. he ipake, and wittUtng in tumult rushed upon AfAUlu, mging o» high,
roaring teith foam, eic, * 324. Tbls is very are in prose (Aaa. 3. »4).

g. In prose suoh cotirdinaiian without any connectlTe ia Incompleta. OM
participle, e.g., oflen defining another, as In j KOpoi Cr6>jifiAr nit ^fiy*wm
ffvXUfai rrpdrniM iro\i6ptti MlX^ov talcing iKe exiloi uHikr ht» proUetloit,
Cgrn* oolleeLnd an armg, and laid aiege to ItileluM X. A. 1. 1. 7. So even wben
tlie participles are connected, aa i^piiit rt)" Buipuxa ad raparpi^ai dXXg ri Uttf
bf draining tAc canal and (i.e. In consequence oC) diverting the vmter tlaevher*
T. 1. 109. One participle may l>e appoaitivs to another. Thus, iitraaiw n^
eawTtt tr rott IrrfSvi, ^inmrres tlSitm ^i^evSai riaoi eltw . , ., JicAimr iraypi-

^aSai TciFrat by making a retieto in the pretewx of the tavalrT), alleging that
then tithed to jind out hoa mang they V)ere, they ordered ail to tn»cribe tAcM-
Melees X. H. 2. 4. g.

h, A participle with case abaolute may be coordinated with a pnrtidple net
in an atisolute case. Thus, ol Si d^iio^rtij tQt ki^i ral ArfKrarraw r^r wlrrvx^'
itaiirarTti . . , xoXi fwtpfiiirBiirar they viere murh encouraged os the arrival oj
the ihlp and on hearing of the tuceesa lehich teae unhoped for T. B. 106, /urmrtir-
^$lrrtt ^\Boiar1ioiSttii KoKframt v)e came tummoned oratnoont'B call rj.4.11.

1. A finite verb may have two or more participles attached to it In different
relatlona. Thus, ol rtKrarrid rpotpaiiArrti . . . Iiafidrrtt rJ)r x^fi^P^'t ipSrra
rp6^Ta roXXi . . . rpor^paWor rpii ri j^iiipfav the light-armed troop* qfter ntn-

tilng forward and croailng the ravine, proceed to attack ths iironghald on mring
quantitlet of eheep X. A, 6, 2. 4. Of aaveral aoriat participles, one may be rela-
tively earlier in time than another.

]. A participle may be added predicatively to another participle, and oflen
follows the article belonging to the main participle. Thus, ol furrii mToXfirt-
iitm tho»e who were being left behind alive T. 7. 75.

k. A participle la often omitted when It can be aupplied from the context.
Tbua, iipiilrarro (at airaL . . , frniJ) tal roit 'AB^frattvi (Ap^iM-o^nvt) ilStr thff

too came to anchor when they taw that the Athentant had done to T. 2. 86.

Z14R The imrticiple often agrees with the lo^cal, and not with
the grammatittal, subject. The participle thus ofteu agrees with the
subject of the finite verb which the writer had in mind when he
began the sentence, but for which lie later substitutes another verb ;
or the participle may later be used as if in agreement with the sub-
ject of another finite verb than the one actually employed.

a. A participle In the notiiltiative may belong to a finite verb requirinj; an

oblique case. Thua, dxo^X^it rpit toSioi' ri* (TTiXof . . ., tSii(i iiai ri-rfa\n
final (= ih'Tjff'l*"!'' xd7JtaXo>' tini.) on looking at this rs^pedltion, it termrd to me
to be very admirable P. L. 686 d, fx"""" ■ ■ ■ ipx^' ("I'lffTiiip . . ., Siutt e*W»

TH&rar ii/iai tr^/u (= aiSnil roiriiiv irltpB^iu*) i^aiiaprtlt although we pnitrmtd
the greatett empire . . . neverthelett none of thene reaione induced *u to iln
wrong I. 4. lOi,(So(trairolt ( = iPmi\i6>rarTo) oi 7si)t wapirrm /linw dxoKTtitm dXX4
ml TBit ararrat MvriXqniBvt . , , iwucaKiOrrtt rj)f drirroffir ktK (hey dteidtd

■i4g] VEEBAL ADJECTIVES IN -tA? 479

loptatodtaA not merelj/ thntt mho were there but also all tKe Mf^Ienaeant,
urgiag against them thtir rfvotl, eu. T. :i. 30.

b. Two or more BubBtariiiv^s or [ironounH with tlieir participles ins; stuid Id
putitlve appoaition (081; to the logical subject. Thus, rt rtpl I1«Xbf l>w' i,up«~
rtfmr uri Kpdrai iroi^iutro (^ dfi^Tipoi iwot^i/iavt'), 'A0igm(bi /lir . . . rtir riffor
ri^wtJarrti , , ., niXoratf^iruH Si tr ri ilrii/K^ ffrparSTcIniHtra' the war at
I))lu» tool vigoroutlg waged bn both tidee, fA« Alhtnlan* on their part bg tailing
around the Mand . . .the Pelopoaneiiani by encamping on the mainland T. 4. 23.
Cp. \lrret S* ir dXXiiXoiirit ippiBoMr naiot, ifiiXai iXiyx-^y ^dXan biUer vntrde fiew
U>ud from one to another, vsatchman accusing watchman S. Ant. SG9. As the
«eiil«nce stands, we expect ^it-am i\iyxorrii% ipiXaia, but tlie flnt clauw la
eqolndent to taitit Xiyevt ttmiuv dXX^Xovi. Cp. eaviidtomt iXXat dXXti IXtytr
one tpoJee to the other in aatonishmeTU P. S. 2S0 o. Cp. fl82.

C. Without regard to the fnlloning constTuction, a participle maj atand In
the nominatiTe. The use of the genitive absolata would here be proper, but
woald cause the main subject of the tliougbt to occupj a subordlnAte poaition.
Thus, trirttiir tq ^opnjSdfou rrpaTertStlf, r^ /lir wpoifivXat^t adraC Hiw-av
Srrvr raXXsl tnaor attacking the camp of namabaetu, he ilevi a large num-
ber (= a-eXXote i'TixTfirt) of Mj/siaru who eonttituted htg advance guard X. H.
4.1.24.

N. The nominative participle is Bometimea found in clauses without a flnilA
Terb, but only when some finite verb is to be aapplied (cp. '1' 640), as with tl,
Hr, »rap (X. M. 2. 1. 23); •nitii Sva ti-i at far as ia poaaibte (T. 1. lU); in replies
In dlalo^e, where It stands in apportion to the subject of the preceding sentence
(P. Pb. 74 b); or is interposed as a parentheela (ri) rouDr in D. 23. 143).

d. Xiikewise a participle maj stand in the accusative or (rarely) in the dative
when the constraction demands another case. Thus, ir«l Si avyyrtinii (= airy-
yrJiit^ irrl at) \iytir riS" irrt, /il| rdaxouvar in fyd racult it it excvsable for
thee to tpeat that, Hnee thou doit not svffer cruelly ai I do F,. Med. B14, Ifr 4
yriili^ ToB 'Apitrim (= ISo^t rf 'Apurrti), t4 ^r /mB* iavrod vrpaTiwtSer tx"^'

ir TV USiif twtriiftiw td^ 'Ahrnfsui Aristeu* decided to keep hi* own force* at
the Itthmtu and uateh for tht AthentanM T. 1. S2.

VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -^tot
On rerbal adjectives in -rds, -nj, -riv, see 426 o, 472, 473.
2149. Verbal adjectives in -riot express necessity. They admit
two coDStructions :

1. The personal conBtruction {-riot, -ria, -rmv), passive in meaning,
and emphasizing the subject

2. The (more common) impersonal construction (-rcov, Tf'a, 1052),
practically active in meaning, and emphasizing the action.

Both constructions are used with the copula ci/u, which may be
omitted. The agent — the person on whom the necessity rests —
is expressed, it at all, by tlie dative (never by inri and the
genitive).

I;,C.00J^[C

480 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE ["lyj

aiSO. Verbal adJeotlTM from tnuuitWe verbe take the persona] constraciion
when the subject is empbasized ; but the impetBonal construction, wheD the
eniphaals falls on the verbal adjective itsell Verbal adjectives from intiaiuitiTe
verbs (that ia, Buch as are folloned by Uie genitive or dative) take only the
impersonal construction.

a. Oblique cases of verbal adjectives are rare. Tbua, tepi rSr b/ur r/AKrit^w
concerning what need be done by us D. 0. 28.

2151. The PerBOnal (Passire) Conatructlon. — The personal verbal
in TtK is used only when the verb from which it is derived takes
the accusative. The verbal agrees with the subject in gender,
number, and case. The agent, if expressed, must always stand in
the dative.

rvraiiit th ^liir tiTi SiaffaTioi a river m««t be croued hg vi X. A. 2. 4. 6,
li^Xir^ o-iu 1^ 'i^t i-TTl the State must be ben^nted bf you X. M. .S. 6. 8, i^
toCto oi rmirrivr this must not fit done 6j) me (/mil«( ttot do thi»} X. A. 1.3. IS,
ol irvfiiiaxt'* t9i\orTti e8 iroiTjT^oi those who vmvld be alHei tnutl be WpH trtatrd
X, M. 3. 0. 27, ofi , . . TOffoCro flpij ipirt b/ur (rra roprvrfa ; dO J/Otl »o( Kt *acA
high mountains that musi be traversed by you t X. A, 2. 6. 18,

2152. The Impersonal (Active) Construction. — The impersonal
verbal stands in the neuter nominative, usually aingular (-t«ov),
rarely plural (-r<'a). Its object stauds in the case (genitive, dative,
or accusative) required by the verb from which the verl^al adjet'tive
is derived; verbs taking the genitive or dative have the impersonal
construction only. The agent, if expressed, must always stand in
the dative.

TV (UhoOm-i toriof tlimr the mong-doer must suger pvni*hmeat P. Euth. 8c
iruTTi itol biiiipotn Sortor lol kitwrior VK must give and receive pledge* and h'ls-
tages X. H.S.2. 18, rir fidnror iiiiir firr' tSSofias aiperitt larlt we tniuf prfO-r
death with honour 1.6.01, rtunfor rarpit XAyoit / mu*l obey my father's o^m-
maitds K. Hipp. 1182, rturrior riSt (ffot) thou must obey in this S. Pli. 014
(distinguish xturT^uj' /o-t* irr one must persTtade thee), #ij;J Jij ^Birrtor cIhu tbTi
irpiy/uiffir V'* / Sly that yim must reniler assistance to the intfivata at Mat'
IX 1. 17, Toil pfXow titpyer^ior, rijr iriXi» iSt^XjjTfoc . . ., TrSf ^k^hAtut iri-
luKirritr you must do good to your friends, benefit your Statr, take tare of four
Jlorks X. M. 2. I. 28, fi^Ty (in/taxo' iyaBol, out oi vapajor^a roit 'A^nimt Itrtr
we hare serviceable allies, whom we mmt not abandon to the Atbrniaas
T. 1. 80, hf'^laawre . . . ireX(«ir''» «I™' they voted that they must go to
war 1. 88.

a. Since the impersonal constrnction ia virtually active, and hence equivalent
to ill with tbe accusative and inflnlLive (active or middle), the agent sometimes
stands in the accusative, as if di-pendent on SiT. The copula Is (perhaps) always
omitted when the agent is expressed b; the accusative. Thus, rir ^vXV*»'
tiSainara iJtai a-UHJipoatrrit tuaiTHr Hoi io-jtiirftip {= itX StiiHxn ml i^iair) it is
necessary that the man who desires to be happy should pwtue and p
perance P. G. &07 c.

I;,C.00J^[C

•■ss] SUMMARY OF FORMS OF SIMPLE SENTENCES 481

SUMMARY OF THE FORMS OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
§§ 906-2152 deal, in general, with the simple sentence. The fol-
lowing summary shows the chief forms of simple sentences (d21)
used in Attic.

21S3. STATEMENTS

1. Statements of Fact ^direct assertions^ as to the present, past,
or future are made in the indicative mood (negative aS), 1770.

A. Statements of fact include statements of present, past, or
future possibility, likelihood, or necessity, which are expressed by
the indicatiTe of a verb denoting possibility, likelihood, or necessity,
and an infinitive (1774-1779).

B. Statements of customary or repeated past action are made in
the imperfect or aorist indicative with Siv ('negative ou), 1790.

2. Statement of Opinion (usually cautious, doubtful, or modest
assertions) as to what may be {Tnight be), can be (covld be), may {vtight,
could, Komd) have been, etc., are made :

A. In reference to the present oc past : by tfimiXaiaw Sv I ahoidd
like or IfhovM have liked (negative oij, 1789. (Rarely by the indica^
tive without Sy, negative fi^ or /ti] oti, 1772.)

B. In reference to the past : by the aonst or imperfect indicative
with Sr (negative oi), 1784, cp. 1786.

C. In reference to the present (statement of present opinion the
verification of which is left to the future) : by the optative with Sv
(negative o£), 1824.

V. In reference to the future : by the present subjunctive with
un or uM otr (1801) ; by ov uii with the aorist subjunctive to denote an

emphatic denial (1804).

ASSUMPTIONS

Assumptions, including concessions, are usually expressed by the
imperative (negative /i^, 1839. Other forms occur, as Kot fnj with
the indicative (negative ofi), 1771 ; a verb of aasuming with the accu
sative and infinitive, etc

8155. COMMANDS (iNCLUDTNG EXHORTATIONS)

1. Podtive Coromanda are expressed by the

A. Imperative, except in the first person (1835).

B. Subjunctive, in the first person (1797).

C. Future indicative (negative oi) 1917, 1918 ; with mtok (192((>.

aaiHK OBAM.— 8]

482 SYNTAX OP THE SIMPLE SENTENCE [ms»

D. Optative without 3y (1820) ; potential optative with «b- (neg^
tive ofi, 1830),

E. Infinitive used independently (2013).

2. Negative Commands (Prohibitions, 1840), including Exhorta-
tions, are expressed by fiij with the

A. Present imperative (1840) or aorist subjunctive (second or
third person), 1800.

B. Present or aorist subjunctive in the first person plural (1840).

C. Aorist imperative iu the third person (rare), 1840.

D. Futiire indicative with ^ok fi.^ (1920) ; with ov lyq (1919).

E. Aorist subjunctive with on-uK ^ij (rare), 1803; with av fi^ (rare),
1800, S.

f . Infinitive used independently (2013).

1. /uj is the negative of a direct expression oF a wish, and of all
indirect expressions of wish except a-ius oi" with the optative and a
form of y3ou\o/((u with the infinitive.

2. Wishes for the future, whether the object of the wish is reason-
able or unreasonable, atLainiible or unattainable, are expressed by
the optative with or without cide or ci ya,a (1814, 1815). Indirect .
expressions are: ir£« ov with the optative (l83J); jSjuAm'^tv or with |
the infinitive (1827). !

3. WishesfoT thepjesent.' that something might be otherwise than
it now is, are expressed by the imperfect with tl6( or tl yap (1780),
Indirect expressions are ; (wjitXov (with or without «Itf« or d yap) and
the present or aorist infinitive (1781); j^ouAd^ijv (with or without
5..) with the infinitive (1782, 1789).

4. Wishes for the poet : that something might have been other-
wise than it then was, are expressed by the aorist indicative with
uflc or u yap (1780). Indirect : u^cXov (with or without clfc or «> yip)
with the present or aorist infinitive (1781),

5. Unattainable wishes for the present or past may be entirely
reasonable.

2157. QUESTION'S

A simple question results from making any form of statement
interrogative. Direct and indirect questions are treated in 2636 ff.
See also the Index.

2196. EXCLAMATIONS

Exclamations form complete or incomplete (904) sentences. Direct
and indirect exclamatory sentences are treated in 2681 ff. See also
the Index.

3,q,z.,3bvGooglt'

COORDINATION AND SUBOUDINATION

COMPOUND AND COMPLEX SENTENCES
COORDINATION AND SUBORDINATION

ZU9. All sentences other thiin simple sentences B.re formed by
combining simple sentences either by coordination or subordination.

am. Coordination produces compound sentences, subordination
produces complex sentences. Complex sentences have been devel-
oped out of coordinate independent sentences, one of which has been
subordinated in form, as in tliought, to ajiother.

3161. Comparative Gramnuu' shows that, hlsUdcally, coordination was pre-
ceded by liniple juxtapoeltion and followed by aubordl nation. Tbus the simplest
form of assocUtIng the two ideas niyht fell and (Ae entviy departed was t^f tfi-
trro- ot TdU/uei dr^Xftit (or in reverse order). From this was developed a
closer connection by means of coordinating conjunctions, e.g. r>{ {iiir) tyfrero, el
Si ToMfusi liir^XAiv or ol Si tdU>uo> irijXBfii ■ ri( iyinro (or rd£ y&p tyirrro), or
wi( tyfrrre col ol voX^/uoi dirQXAir. Finally it was recognized that one of Uiese
Ideu WHS a mere ezplination, definition, or supplement of the otiier, and henc«
dependent or subordinate. This stage Is represented b; the complex sentence:
twtl (St() f^ tyirtTB, U iro\inm dtr^Xfot or r^f iyii^a, Am ol toX/;u« dv^XAx,
and ao on to express various other relations. Since Greek inherited from the
parent Indo-European language both the subordinate and tlie coi)rdlnal« sen-
tence, it muBt be clearly understood that tbe above examples of the process of
development of sent«nce-bnilding, though taken from Qreek, illustrate an earlier
period of the history of language than Greek as we have it. Though it may be
po«8ible to reconstruct the form of the earlier, coordinate sentence out of the
latfi, labordlaale sentence, and though we have examples of panillet coordinate
and mbordinate sentences in Greek, the subordinate sentence did not in Greek
regnlvij' go through the previous stages of simple juxtaposition and coordina-
tion. A aabordinBt« construction produced by analogy to another subordinate
COnSLmctlon may not be resolved into the coordinate form.

SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE

3U3. A compound sentence consists of two or more simple sen-
tences, grammatically independent of one another and generally
united by a codrdinating conjunction. Thus, r^ & vartpoMf impnai^o Stk
rro rt&iau | kui | TiaaaifiipvTp c'lriTo but on the next day they proceeded
through the plain and Tusaphemes kept following them X. A. 3. 4. 18.

a. Abbreviated compound sentences, i.e. sentences containing a compound
mbject with a single verbal predicate or a single subject with a compound verbfcl
predicate, are trent«d in this book as expanded simple sentences (J»23, 1)24).

2U3. Greek has, amon^ others, the following coordinating con-
junctions, the uses of which in coiHiecting spntieiiees, clauses, phrases,
and single words are described under I'artic.les.

A. Copulative conjunctions : t{ (enclitic), ku and, rl . t^ ri . .

484 SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE [1164

Koi, ml . . . Koi both . , . aTtd, oi&i (jtr^t) dnd not, nor, ofre . . ■ ovn
(/tijTt . . . liiJTt) neither . . . nor.

B. AdTersative conjunctions ; lEAAd but, Bi (postpositive, often with
fxiv in the preceding clause) but, and, drop but, yet, however, jiiyta
(postpositive) however, yet, koItoi and yet.

C. Disjunctive conjunctions : ■)} or, yj . . . ij eUJier . . . or, Mt . . .
tin (without a verb) either . . . or.

D. Inferential conjunctions: Spa then, accordingly, oSv thereforf,
then, yw (in the poetic and enclitic forms wv and vuv) then, therefon,
Toivw now, then, raiyip (poetic), rwydprot, roiyapovf ao then, therefore.

E. Causal conjunction : yip for.

2164. Compound sentences are divided into Copulative, Adversa-
tive, Disjunctive, Inferential, and Causal sentences.

ASYNDETON

3169. Two or more sentences (or words) independent in form and
Ehought, but juxtaposed, i.e. coordinated without any connective, are
asynd^ie (from AaivStTov nof bound together), and such absence of con-
nectives is called axyndeion.

a. The abBeuce of coniiectiveB in a language so rich In raeaas of coordination
as is Greek ia more striking tUan in other languages. Graramatieal asyndetoa
cannot always be separated from rhetorical asyndeton. Grammatical asyndeloa
Ih Uie absence of a conjunction where a coDoective might have been used witb-
ODt marked liiBuence on the character of the thongbt ; as especially in explao*-
torj sentences (often after a preparatory word, usually a demonstrative) which
take up the matter just Introduced ; also where, in place of a ctAijunctioii. a
resumptive word, such as vErot, Toieth-ot, Tooaurat, iimiBa, dvtu, etc. , fa employed.
Rhetorical asyndeton is the absence of a conjunction where the following
sentence contains a distinct advance in the thou|;ht and not a mere fnnnaj
explanation appended to the foreguiiig sentence. Rhetorical osyndeluii gentrallj
expresses emotion of some sort, acid is the mark of livelinesa, rapidity, passion,
or impressivenesa, of thought, each idea being set forth separately and distinctly.
Thus, otx iiri^^t: tin <i)iit; ait itdSaproi; b6 avuo^rriji \ u he not irafitoiuf
is he not brutalf i» he not impuref it he not a pettifoggerf D. 25. 63.

2166. Asyndeton is fi-equent in rapid and lively descriptions.

evii&a\irra rai iarliat ^uAiDrro, ifiix^'^^i dv/icTfinf, iwidrjaicot iaterloelriHif
their shields, they shuvd, they fnught, they aleie, they were slain X. H. 4. 3. If ■
rfioamSrrtt indx'rrii, iiiSour iuiBuvrra, fraigv Arafopro falling upon them, then
fought ; pushed (and) teere piighed ; atrueH&nd) were struck S. C. 7. 1.38. Also
with anaphora (2187 c), as in Ix«" "■iXii-, Ixm rpi^pM. tx«! xfi^tar^ txat iwipat
Tovo^ovi you have a city, you have trirtmet, you haoc money, yon have so
tnany nwn X. A. 7. 1. 21. Cp. T. 7. 71, D. 10. 7fi, 19. 316, P. S. 197 d.

2167. Asyndeton also appears when the unconnected sentence
« the m^n contents, or ejcpresees the result, of the preceding.

1169] PARATAXIS 485

Thus, rdrr txtn \6yar jfott haee the whole itory A. Ag. 588, djc^iAan, iupitart,
tti6r9art, (x"'' !i"cff(r( you Itave heard, you have seen, pou have snjferrd, j/ou
have the evidetire; pronounce your judgment L. 12. 100, ^vXairp iUttoi »p* rSy
TuXur irriu&iirBa - lim fip ill reray/xini. oiK iy ii4\\ar tivi, f^ i EC^t, iW
Utm however, we ghalt meet with a guard in front of the gatfg, for one it always
tiatloned there. We must not delay, but advance, said Cgrue X. C. 7. b. 2S.
ThJB U often the case vrhea a dernonBtntive takes up the foregoing thought (as
n«f( Tavra X. A. 1.3.20) or Continues Uie narrative, as in dioijraa't rtUt o-rparir-
Tsii TsSra »o{( ri iiT(Ari«,ia aonyaytir 4. 4. 19 (cp. 2061).

b. Expresses a reason or explains the preceding. Thus, iiitpbr 3* vrroi' Xax^r
tJttr ftnp ' frtofft a^ip . . . aaiTTbi rtatir i:t\. uA«n he had tnatehed a little
sleep, he taw a vision; a bolt of lightning seemed to him to fall, etc. X. A. 3. 1.
11. ItoS rpit etxoui ■ Tit irt KaS/itlaiy \r(^T taXtt come home ; all the Cadmean folk
rail* thee S. O.C. T41. Here 74^1 oripa might have been usad. So often after
1 preparatory word (often a demonstrative) ; as rairhy i-fi iu\ Sttti rovr tpa koI
Ttpl rijy i^vxijy rlyai • fvSijXa rdrra iariv iy t-q ^iJXV i^tiHy yvunnSjJ tou irtii^Toi
irX. note it teems to me that Ihit is the same with regard to the soul too ; every-
thing in the toul is open to vieiv ahen a man is stripped of his body I*. G. 524 d,
iyl ri^fifi rpoixovaty 61 Ir-wilt ^^Sc ■ ^vytty aifToi% iff^a\iirTtp6v tvriy 4 4/^*' i^ one
point alone has the cavalry the advantage of us : it is st^er for them to run away
Chan for us X. A. 3. 2. 16, and ao when Acrrip is followed by oCru koJ (P. R.
657 c). Also when lUy yt . . . 54 ta.'ko up what precedes, as SpunSi 71 ZjXair
nuoatnii lal TinoKpdrTis ■ i fUr yi . . . & Si D. 24. 106. FurthertHOre after TH^iit-
fxor 3^ (904), as T. 2. 50.

c. Repeats a significant word or phrase of the eaiiier senteDce (anaphora).

Thus, mil h-ifi toKti raOra, AraTttydra T^r X'')"' ' ■i'^nivi' Srairii and let him
u;ho approves fAii, hold up his hand; they all held up their hands X. A. 3. 2. 33.
In poetry a thought is often repeated in a different form b; means of a juxta-
posed sentence (3.Tr.l082).

d. Sets forth a contrast in thought to the preceding. This is commoner in
poetry than in prose. Thus, fiAXan-a tuDtb - rur rpoKiiiUruiy ri xp^) 'pifftty
this lies in the future ; the present must be thy care S. Ant. 1334.

e. Introduces a new thought or indicates a change to a nen form of exprcA-
sion. Thus, (UX' Irfor, t^ni. rpHrby /u broitrfiaaTi a fktytrt but We must pro-
ceed, said he. ^rst recall to my mind what j/ou were saying P. Ph, 91 c.

1 Is introduced by a word stressed by einotion, as raDra D.3.32, fYii4,29.
On juxtaposition of participles, see 2147.

COORDINATION IN PLACE OF SUBORDINATION — PARATAXIS
216B. The terra parataxis (irapdraiK arranging side by side), aa
here employed, is restricted to the arrangement of two independent
sentences aide b; side, though one is in thought subordinate to the
other.

1 general, aa irirafit

Z169. In many cases pan^taxis is a common form of expression

486 SYNTAX OF TEIE COMPOUND SKNTENCE [1.70

not on\j Id the Earlier language of Homer, but also in Attic prose

and pwe try-
So frequent!]' in Attic prose with cnf, ri . . , tal, l/ia . . . ica£, (AHt . . . ni,
and witb St meaning for, I'hiu, fflq li ^r i>fii , . .naioi KoplrftM ■wp6iija.t ttfti-
em it toai already lale and (tor ahen) the CoriiUhiant Harted to ruio tuten
T. 1. 50, xol '4^1 Ti f f rtpi wX-^Somrar iytpar tat Ipxirrat . , . i^f'i'"* 1'"' *t mu
alreatlji about tht time when the market-place fills and (= when) heratda arrived
X. A. 2. 1. 7, tal iim tavr' (Xry* nol dT]jei and a« mon Oj he eaid lllU, he drparttd
X. II. 7. I. 2S, iwlirtavBi fiim rOr 'EXXiiiwii roOt dyaffeif ttSfiai rifiiv- cijf^^rfTi U
. . . rap b/itr cTpaTijyiilit iyaBodt (_iraKtiiUiwt) you alone amoa^ the Omii
knoa hna to honour men 0/ merit; for you Kill find ttatuet of bravt general*
set up ainniig yiiu Lye. ^1. Cp. irxifaaSt Hi T. 1. 143.

c Temporal cnnjuiictiona, m iiAta, are rarely lued to introduce Bueh cImhg*,
which oft«ii iailicau a sudden or decieive occurrence or simultaneous Action.

b. Thucyilides is especially fond ol xal or ri to coordinate two ideas, one of
which Is suborUinute to tUe other.

2170. Parataxis often otcuts when a thoDght Datorally sabordlnate la mida
independent for the sake of eiiipliasle or llTellness. Such rhetorical paiataili
occurs chiefly in the orators and in I'iiiilsr. So especially when lUr and 6i in
used to cotirdinate two contraatod clftuses, the former of which Is logically gnb.
ordinate and inserted to heighten the force of tlie latter. Here English oset
vhereaa, ahlle. Thus, alaxpSr Ivn, tl h^ 1^' ri l/tya t3» irtp bp^t rintr ivt-
ptiva, IptU a laiSi rein \iywt airOr iWievSt it i» t shame that, wA«rea* / hart
nndergane the toll of exertions in your caute, pou witt not etdure even their
recital l>. 18. 100.

2171. There exist many traces in Greek of the use of the older
coordination in place of which some form of subordination wu
adopted, either entirely or in part, in the later language.

a. Thus several relative pronouns and adverbs were orlgln^ly demonttratiTC,
and Bs such pointed either to the earlier or the later daiue. So 6, 4, ri (110S,
cp. IIU): T(iix«i f iit'ip'^, Td Dl wSpt xiiXKni 'A/>i)i (H 14(1) meant originsll;
he ttrtpped htm of hit arms ; these briuen Ares had given him, r/wi go long is
properly demonstrative, but has acquired a relative function In itol rjwi ^rrl
Koipit, itrAifftrtt rUr irpiynA-rur and While there ft time, tike our potieg is
hand T). 1.20.

3172. Homer often places two thous(hiA in juxtapneirion without any Rgacd
for logical connection. This is esiiecially coinmon with m, ri, nU, ofirVi '^^U-
Thns, ToXAf )' 6pviia,ySfit tw nbr^ iripvv -iii tupwr, Ani rf v^tait (for ali) vtrti

BkuXtr a)id there It loud clamour around him of men and of dogi, aitd M«ep it
gone from them K 1S.3,

a. So also in clauses preceded by a reiaUve word ; as dn i rmSt lippatm
. . ., it S' 'K\fni BaXdpom . . . ^\u0ir tehile he (mu poodertng on thia, (hat)
mien rame forth from her chamber S 120, ft « Bteit irirtl$tiTai, t«iXa t" (cXmt
aimv vihnever obeys the gads, (and) him Ihey hear A 218.

b. This use appears even in Attic prose ; as otxtSvi K tr i>4 rait i^mr •*

Jito] SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE 487

K)4Xt, KdKurai Si (fOT 4 icaXtirat) Airipa thej/ dwell in om of the island* that
it Mt large, and alythicb)U called LlpaTaT.S.m. Cp.tiao^Oai.

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

2173. A complex sentence consists of a principal sentence and
one or more subordinate, or dependent, senteiicea. The principal
sentence, as each subordinate sentence, has its own subject and
predicate. The principal sentence of a complex sentRuce is called
the principal clause, the subordinate sentence is called the subordi-
nate clause. The principal clause may precede or follow the sub-
unlinato clause.

aT*. The principal clause may have any form of the simple sen-
»«nce,

a. Parenthetes belonging to the thought of the entire eeiilence, bat atandiug
In no close grammaiical relation to it, count as principal clauses. So ol/iot,
fwA, #Wi ^* i ^Soi ^>' ^' certainly (2585), tf l^Si knoa well, ahaSiiai at I
baeteh thee ; rSn (rio-or) itntU ; and xut otei ; in the comic poela and Euripide*,
ecc Some of thew expressions are almost adverbial.

3175. The subordinate clause is always introduced by a subor-
dinating conjunction, as (i if, iirtl since ov Kheji, on that, toit until, ete.

2176. A finite mood in a subordinate clause mav be influenced by
the tense of the principal clause. If the verb of the principal dausa
stands in a secondary tense, the verb of the subordinate clause is
often optative instead of indicative or subjunctive, &a it would have
be«n after a primary tense. Dependence of mood after a secondary
tense is never indicated by the subjunctive.

2177. Elach tense in a subordinate clause denotes stage of action ;
the fime is only relative to that of the leading verb. A subordinate
clause may be marked by change of person in verb and pronoun.

3178. A subordinate clause in English may be expressed in Greek
by a predicate adjective or substantive. Cp. 11G9, 2G47.

2179. A subordinate clause may be coordinate in structure.

4rtt f ijaeiru Aaptlot jcal vriiwrtut rcXnirf)* Tof j91aii, ipoiXtri ol rii raitt
woptirKi but when Dariui was ill and mtpected that Kla tad woe near, he vriihed
hit two Moiu to bf by him X. A. 1. 1. 1.

a. So a relative clause, though properly subordinate, may be equivalent to a

codldloatlng clause: tl S' tiitU fXXo n yriifirSt, S >l4 '/'h'ti, rtr atarS' alh^r
^vx^' l(*"i ^ot if yov decide othermiiir. — and mof thie nevfreome to pan I —
what do yoK think aitl be herfiellagif D. 28. 21. In such casea St is equivalent
lo col a(rM, sCrsf 14, oCrot yip.

2180. A clause dependent upon the principal clause may itself be
followed by a clause dependent upon itself (a sub-dependent clause).

488 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [3181

al )* fXryar (p^ncipal clsuw) Sn vtpl a-woniOt firiMtr itSfnt (dependent cUum)
otriHi luaitl Ivorrai . . . i-rayyti\at (Hub-dependent clause) and Uuj/ laid ihnt
theg had come wlC\ regard to a truce and loere men vsho were con^etent to
. . . T^ort X. A. 2. 3. 4.

3181. A verb oommon to two clauaea is generally placed in one
clause and omitted iioia the other (so especially in compar&tdve and
relative clauses).

*"/> ('^f) ^^ Pf>.Tuir (kB. lniii\tiTat) J) iutfi ii!i.!ir airSit i^rt|lt'>^oi|^^$a for-
tune, lohtch aiwas/t earea belter for w> than we for ourtelvet 1). 4. 12. Also aa in
English : * Ti W /lAXrrf (rpiaatm'), , . . rMii . . . r/AirirtTt bat vihatever jfnn

intend, doit at once T. 7. 15. In comparative clauses with otx S)vwtp (or in)
the main and the subordinaM clause are sometimes compressed, the predicate
of the clause with a6x being supplied from the &airtp clause, which is made
Independent ; aa oix (oUt* t,r tytyrtrt) Startp rvr -raOTwr aiSit flyrtriu Tifi
airir U woald not be a» now, \ehen none of thete thing* Is done for Aim P. S.
180 o.

ANTICrPATION (OR PBOLBPSIS)

3162. The subject of tlie dependent clause is often actioipated
and made the object of theyerb of the principal clause. This trans-
ference, which gives a more prominent place to the subject of the
subordinate clause, is called anticipation ov prolepsis (n-poX^K taking
before).

SUeixa S" atriir /ii) ti ^ovXtiaji viixi but I fear UH »he na^ devise something
vntoxoard E. Med. 37, b'« "irj* Sri fUtet Ix"' ^oD llipaitou vrptTtiiuiTiit he kntK
that he held the centre of the Feriian arm]/ X.A.I. 8. 21, trr^JXen a^ra, hM
dft AftpiroSa SiaTtXaur he took Care that they should alvfoyi coiilinue to be ^anti
X. C. g. 1. 44. Note ip^t rbw tirpAxtiar ut i)Sii pint thou aeeat how sweet i» tke
luxurious life E.fr. 1062. 3.

a. Anticipation Is especially common after verbs of saying, seeing, hearing.
knowing, fearing, effecting.

b. When a subordinate clause deflues a verbal Idea consisting of a verb and
a substantive. Its subject may pass into the principal clause as a geaitive depend-
ing on the Bubstantive of that clause : IjXet Si imi tsTi 'ABifrafaii tiaot ii A-rniJa
Tu TJXcup ^t A^inasi. and there Came straightmay to the Athenian* alto the
r^ort that the eitie* ?iad revolted T. 1.01 ( = J!ri nl xj\«t d^Hrairi).

C. The subject of the dependent clause may be put first in its own clan'tr :
ttiXtifiiririier tlxttr, Artptia rl wot ivrlw let u* try to say what eawrage it P. Laoli.
190 d.

i. The object of the subordinate clanse may be anticipated and made iln'
object of the principal clause. Thus, tipiiri i iaptiat ri)' rix"l' <' Arfffrcurt
Dartu* atked if he understood the art Hdt. 3. 130.

«. A still freer use is seen In tSaiim^r airbt i Atvartptt in koKA ri Hwip»
«fq Ljfiander marvelled at the beauty of Ma trees (for tA Sitipa o^sS wi xt\ )
X. O. 4. ai.

ASSIMILATION OF MOODS

ASSIMILATION OF HOODS

2183. The mood of a subordiuate elauBe which is intimately con-
nected with the thought of the clause on which it depends, ia often
assimilated to the mood of that clause. Sitch subordinate clauses
may be simply dependent or aub.dependent (2180).

a. This idiom Is moat marked in Unreal and Less Virid Future conditions
where the mood ot the protasis is the same u that of the principal clsase. It
is also very conimoii when a past indicative or an optative aMracta t^emood of a
subordinate clause introduced by a relative word referring to indetlnlt« persons
or things or to an indefinite time or place. But subordinate clauses standing in
a less close relation to the main clause, bccnuse they do not continue the same
mental attitude but present a new shade of thought, retain their mood unassiml-
IsEed ; e.ff. a relative clause, or a temporal clause expressing purpose, alter an
unreal condition may stand in the optative (la 4. 11, P. R. 000 e). On the other
hand, there are many cases where the writer may, or may not, adopt modal
assimilation without any great difference ot meaning. The following sections
give the chief occurrences of mood-assimilation apart from tbat found in Unreal
and I«sn Vivid Future condlUons (2302, 2329) :

2184. An indicative referring simply to the present or past
remains unassimilated.

ivrtf^tai iiit TaOro in Pav\iiie9tt may Ikls retull ai we Aeaire T. fl. 20, rUifif 8*
i T< ri^in lUWti ffu»(r«» 6W may that prevail wfticA ia litfly Co be for Ihf: com-
nion teeal n.4.dl, iraiir iiarpi^aiiai a Hoiuu, 4}{u when I thall have transacted
tehat I want, I will return X. A. 2. 3. 29.

2185. Aaalmilation to the Indicative. — The subordinate clause takes
a past tense of the indicHtive in dependence on a past tense of the
indicative (or its equivalent) denoting unreality.

a. Conditional relative clauses : il nir yip 4' I"' Xii^^ora, h-tiaiviiair it
XfittliiTait So-a l>«XXoF itTflatir for if I had money, I ihould have aattaed my
prnalts at the full turn that I ifiis likely to pay 1'. A. 38 b, «I . . . Kartiiaprtpovr
t fii) ffo^ui iS^ iictiS Si ^Tiffrifiiir, Semi Sr (^i) rdirx"r irw' fti^S if I brouglU in
anetiitmee against Mm maUprs which Hid not knmv certainly but had learned
6y hearsay, he would hate fald that he was Buffering a grave injuatice at my
handa Ant. 6. T4.

b. Temporal cUuses: ait Kr twav6/r^r . . ., fan drtrttpiBiir r^i va^lat Tai/-
Tifvt I would not haue. ceaae<lantil I had made trial of this wiadom P. Crat..TOSc,
^XP^- ■ ■ ■ /**! 'pirtpOT rtpl rSw ifio'Koycviiirvr vvii^ovXeieir, »plr rtpJ riBip i/t^i-
r^^eoiUnir ^jiSt /SiSof ar they ought not to have given advice concerning the mnt-
tert of common agreement before they instructed v* on the matten in ditpiite
L 4. 19.

G. Final clauBBM: here the principal clause is an unfulfilled wish, an unful-
filled apodosis, or a (juestion with »i; ami the indicative in the final clause
denotes that the purpoiw teat not or cannot be attained, and caimot be reached
by the will of the speaker. Thus, <I Tip £«cXo> slol n tlmi o! rsXXoI ri ptyvrTu

490 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE t»iW

tati ipyiitaBKi, Im atU Tt j)'"' ">' iya6i, ri, /Uyiffrti viould that the ntamt wrre
able to Kurk the greatest evil in order that thej/ might be able (u they &re tuit) (o
work alio the greatett good P.Cr. 44d, ifiouXinrir Sr Zl/iMia r^r ah-^v yri/air
ilioi Ixei' In . . . ^fSlat lyy^t ri Skua / thouid have liked Simon to be of the
same opinion ai myself in order that gou might eaiilf/ have rendered ajittt verdict
L. ^i. 21, lin Ti irixupa tJti Xa|3(?t, iit UTif ei iffoAXtrn iSiraro OairaT&r I ought tO
hate taken leeuritf at the time in order that he eould not have deeeired va even if
he wished X. A.T. 8. 23, tI S^t' eiitppi-f'' ^^uvrAtT^^S' drl rirpai, tw-nrHw rdrrmt
rirvf dngXXdTiiri why indeed did I not hurl mytelf from thii rock, that I might
have been freed from all these toUtf A,l'r.747.

N. 1. — In this (pos^ Homeric) construction, Im is the regulftr conjnncUoD in
proae ; wi and Scan are rare, dr IsTer; rarely added and ia siupected (l8.ll. ^
lM,.»69e).

N. 2. — Assimilation does not take place nhen the final clause is the eneniial
thing and sets forth a real future purpose of tlie agent of the leading *erh, or dots
not slioiT whether or not the purpose was realized. This occurs eapeciaJlj ttfter
!>« = eo consOio ut, rarely afur iwut (X.A.T. 0.16) ; after ilit only In poetry and
Xenoplion. Ttie subjunctive or optative is used when the purpose of the agent,
and not the non-fnlfllment of the action, is emphasized. 1'hus, nlrot xf^* '<
. , . J( TtOrer /lij ypdiptii J) iteiror \6iiii, o6x, tii 6 Po6\tt ad TA-^ai, rim ri
rpiyiiara rurrapiiai you ought either not to have proposed this law or to have
repealed the other; not to have thrown everything into ronfitsion to aeeompli*h
your desire D.24. a.

d. Causal clauses (rarely, as D.60.67). Modal aaBlmllation never takes
place in indirect queations or in clauses dependent on a verb of fearing,

2IB6. AsaimiUtloii to the Optative. — When an optative of the

principal dauae refers to future time (potential optative and optative
of wiali), the aubonliiiate clause takes the optative by assimilatjon
in the following cases.

a. Conditional relative clauBes (regularly); rOi y^ i" (1832) tii, d 71 fii)
4viirTaiTo, raura ao^i ch) ; for hotc coiild any one be wise in that which hs does

not know f X. M. 4. 6. 7, rh iilatlv 6imT dr A^' si ttStli, KaMn re ml iyadit nfu-
{6iiMm ; who eould hale one by whom he knew that he was regarded as both
beautiful and good f X. S. 8. 17. Ipiot m f^r Itaaro, tlStlr, rixni' would that
every man would practise the craft that he uitderstond At. Vesp. 1431, tIi ir . . .
iMoi (1S32), Sarit Siayytl\tii tiIh etau iiud would that some one would come lo
report within my tale of woe E. Ilel. 435.

N. 1. — If the relative has a definite antecedent, assimilation does not take
place ; but not all relative clauses with an indefinite antecedent are aaaimilated.
Cp. Orrtfi hr i/iat ItmtTBt alirxvretl-ii Tilt Tiiti \iTcit llr it T^xH '»rV nUfuf OS

each one of f/ou would be ashamed lo lease the post to which he mag be i^g»oinled
in war Aes. 8. 7,

N. 2. — A relative clause depending on an infinitive rarely lakes the nptativp :

dXAi TsD )iir airit \iyttt a lit) i-o^uii tltttn tl^to-ftii itl one thould abstain /pum
saying oneself what one does iiiH know for eerUtin X. C, 1.8. 18, (See 2673.')

b. Temporal clauses (regularly) : rtBial-^r, Srt im iai£in raSra iUXm maf I

»iM] ASSIMILATION OF MOODS 491

dtt wActt theae thingt no longer delight ne HimnermnB 1.2, i /lir ficAr tttrZi
^7w a* brirt (SotfXoiro he who ttarvet of his owh free viiU eaa eat uAeneser he

liiAes X. U. 2. 1. 18, it Hi win irrovtiioi ^yitr, ttmnii A> Sri rapA roll yvra^lr
frrii, fui rapartltBiiu roCrer itrX. Aut ^ he mu very de»lroua of toting, I teoold
MI htm that " A« wai with the women " until I had tortured him, etc. X. C. 1.
3. 11, SKmo itifiiia, wfAt iideoiiu perish not j/et . . . until 1 learn 8. Fh. 901.
Bat tt* ftr dv^XA^u rplr ir xarriwi^it 4 iyopa \u6S I thall not be leaving
mntQ the gathering in the market-place is g«ite dispersed X 0. 12. 1.

C. final and object claasn (rarel; In prose, but occaslonitll; alter an opta-
tive at wish in poetry) : wtpifiuir (it) /t^ rpiau b/iHr tint. In, (f rvu KOifiit till,
twtfo.Miir I will trg to keep not far away from j/ou, in order that, if th&-e thould
be any oeeatlan, I may lAotc myielf X. C. 2. 4. 17 (and flve other CBBeH in Xen.);
IMh tritt 7/nHTD r£p3' 4iiol XvT4put mag she Come to prove my liberator f^om
thit affliction A, Enm. 297. Ordinarily the Babjonctive or future IndlcatlTo i«

retained, as iKroliiT tr th ri uXola i)ifiaivti' i Kipoi if/ur liiiq n^i ii/iSt . . . nTO-
lAvg IskouM hesitate to embark on theveiiels which Cyrat might give tu letthe
tint Ht X. A. 1. 8. lT,T(0nJ7i', )lin)> Itnaiit r^t ijurovt^i, In fij) iwedSi /Uni
nrttyiharrm let me die, when Ihave puniehed him who haa done me wrong, that
Itnay not remain here a laughing-ttoek P. A. 28 d.

d. Indirect qnest ions, when the direct question wu a deliberative subjunctive:
ttt ir fxB" 'ff^Ai^' > ri xpifo (Favrf if you thould eteape, you would not know
what to do wUhgourtelf P. Cr. 4eb (;= rl xput>Mir)- But when a direct question
or a direct quotation stood in the Indicative, that mood 1b retained, as <l dn-
IttxMi) rlra* xp^ IrytirSai roO rXoM-foir (f it should be settled who must lead the
tquare X.A.a2.3S.

e. Very TBRly In relative clauses of purpose (P. R. 678 e possibly) ; alter bm
(X. C. 6. 5. SO), and In dependent statements with Sn or in (X. C. 3. 1. 28).

f. Assimilation and noD-BssimUation may occur in the same sentence (E.
Baccb. 1384fi.)

9187. An optative referring to generai past time in a general anp-
positioQ usually assimilates the mood of a conditional relative or
temporal clause depending on that optative.

txatpir *r*r« rdxurra ruxirrat fir liairra druri/irBi httt he toot uont to rejoice
whenever he dismissed without delay hit petltionert with their TequeHs granted
(IlL obtaining what they wanted) X. Ag. 9. 2. But tlie Indicative may remain
nnassimilated, as iniMi 8i lal trttii Ar^i ntdi tSoi Tviodrit n mi'tiaarrat i airbt
Ifiogfirro waitir and he was wont to honour with an invitation any whom he saw
praettting anything that he himself wished them to do X. C. 2. 1. 30.

So when the optative relera to past time through dependence on a verb of

paat time, as rpoatiaKut roit ^fX«i>t ltTiivS»*ti)\arfUie ui IijXaJij gvi ri^ summoning
hUfMendt he used to carry on a eertout convereatton with them in order to thow
whom he honoured X, A, 1. Q.28 (here ri/i^q would be possible).

Utlon to the Snbjnnctlve. — Conditional relative clanaea
and temporal clauses refetrine to future or general present time, if
dependent on a subjunctive, taKe the subjunctive.

a. In refeienoe to future time : rwr T/mrritdTtir roit pmi\tvoiUravi (^r^Aii

492 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [iil«

(•r), U' it Jfilton taxi, rcErc rpdrrirru m^n of ciianiel mutt guide evtntt in
order thai lolitit Ihty retol-ae thatl be aixompluheil U.4.3D.

b. In refereiict! to general preaeiit time i oil', iwuSir £> ir rpiiirti ripan
yirjirai, rif wpadliTji gii/ipa6\ifi rrpL rHi Xoixflf In xpi^ai noT whrn he ha* beeoiar.
matter of what he purchasee, doet he ana longer en^loj/ the traitor to advite him
conceTHing hi» plam for the fvlvre D. 18. 47. But tbe indicative nur occor
(D. 22.22).

CLASSES OF SUBOBDINATfi CLAueES

2189. Subordinate clauses are of three classes:

1. Substantival clauses : in wbicb the subordinate clause plays the
part of a substantive and is either the subject or the object: SqAor
qi- I ori iyyvt wov /SooiAtw xjv it vxis plain that the king was aometdun
hard by X. A. 2. 'A. 6, ovk uttc | o tl irouiTt you do not know what you
aye doin^ 1,5.16.

2. Adjectival (attributive) clauses: in which the subordinate
clause plays the pail; of an adjective, and contains a relative whose
antecedent (expressed or implied) stands in the principal clause;
kiyt Hj r^f iirurToX.iiv \ ifv lirifujit ^iXimro^ come read the letter which
Philip sent D. 18. 39 (= i^v Wo <I>iX.V>rcni Trtfi^dcumf).

3. Adverbial clauses : in which the suboi-dinate clause plays the
part o£ an adverb or adverbial expression modifying the principal
clause in like.manner as an adverb modifies a verb.

upavyilT woWiir iwnUew caXeCrrei dXX^Xeut, &rT( taX T<n)c iroXtidam Amtnr thrf
made a loud noise by calling each other so that even the enrmg heard them X. A.
2.2.17 (here Arre . . . dtaiito may be rei::anled as having the furce of an ad-
verb: and in a manner audible even to the enemy); irwt ftr aOr ipBOi Siti^atTt
rtpl mtrutf ; ti ToiroM iAveri rir roiutiiurer Bpica' Jtw^iovofi^ivn lanrYap^ru irX.
hoto then ■aould you judi/e correctly abiijtt ihemf If you perTnlt(t.e. by permits
ting) thtm to taake their accugationt after having tworn Oie euaomarg oath, etc.
Ant. fi. 90. Cp. 1005 end.

2190. Accordingly all complex sentences may be classified as Sub-
stantival sentences, Adjectival sentences, and Adverbial sentenc*^.
This division is, in general, the basis of the treatment of complex
sentences in this book, exwpt when, for convenience, closely con-
nected constructions are treated together ; as in the case of (adverb-
ial) pure final clauses and (substantival) object clauses after verlts
of effnrt and ai fearing.

a. Some BeTitences may be daaned both aa subetantival and adverbial, aa
claiiHes with ^r( and trot. An adverbial or adjectival clause may aasame a
eubeMntival character (2247, 2488).

Complex sentences are considered in the following order: Ad-
verbial, Adjectival, Substantival.

iv,Goog[c

PURPOSE CLAUSES

ADVERBIAL COMPLEX SENTENCES (2193-2467)

ZISL In an adverbial complex sentence the subordinate clause
ileiiotes some one of the following adverbial relations: purpose
lL*19;i), cause (2240), I'esult (2249), conditiou (21^80), concession
l^l';«>0), time (2^83), comparison (2462).

3192. An adverbial sentence is inttoduced by a relative conjnno
tioD deaoting purjxise, cause, result, etc.

PURPCSE CLAUSES (FINAL CLAUSES)

2193. Final clauses denote purpose and are introduced by iva,
amai, its in order thnt, that (Lat. ul) ; negative ino /*ij, oimn /iij, in fi.^,
and ^if alone, lent (Lat. ne).

a. A\»o by <^p», strictly while, viitil, in Epic and Lyric ; and I«t in Epic
(2118). Ih ia the chief floal conjunction in Arislophanea. HurodotiiH, Plato,
and the oratora. It is the oniy purely flnal conjunction in tliat It does not limit
ihe idea of purpose by the idea of time (lilia t^ipa and fut), or of manner (lilie
owitt and wt); and therefore never takes ir {nit'), since the purpose is regarded
an free from all coiiditioiiH (2201 b). &vut is the chief finnl conjunction in
ThucydideB, and in Xenophon (slightly more common than Tn). ^ often shows
the original meaning in which wig, hme, at (cp. 2578, 2i)89). It la rare in prose,
txcept in Xenophon, and does not occur on inscriptions ; rare in Aristophanes,
but common in tragedy, eHpeclaliy in Euripides. jiVj is very rare in prose, except
in Xenophon and Plato (|ii| i>i is very rare in Homer and in Attic: X. M. 2. 2. U).

b. In onUr that no une ia In (etc.) (iiiJclt or fii} rit, fn order that . . . never
is Ira (etc.) ii^troTt Or /tij wort, and in order that . . . not ia )niif after >nf,

2194. Final clauees were developed from original coordination.

Mrrt fU Urn Tdxurta ' w6\at'A(Sao vtp^u bury me with ati speed; let me
pa»» the gatee of Hades 'I' 71, where ne have a sentence of will added without
any connective ; and (negative) driirrixe >tit ti n>1i<rji 'Hpti di-part lest Hera
•ihterre aught A 522 (originally let Hera not ohierve anything, 1K02). Even la
Attic, where subordination is regular, the original fonn of coi'irdi nation can be
I* theoretically) restored, as in gal nt rpdt . . . 0iCit ItraC/uu ii.ii rpoSoin i^^St yirji
ami I entreat thee bg the gods \ do not forsake us S. Aj, 588. We can no longer
trace lite original coordination with Tm and ui.

2199. A final clause stands in apposition to rovrov iviKa m- h-a roOro
expressed or understood. Thus, iKKkrinidv tovtou iviita tuvrrfayov oirius

vwotivtjtni J have convent^ ail aaseiiMy for this reason that I may remind
you T. 2. 60. Here rovrm' o^ica might be omitted.

3196. The verb of a final clause stands in the subjunctive after
an introductory primary tense, in the optative (sometimes in the
subjunctive, 2197) after a secondary tense.

ypa^io wa iK/taSgt I write (pa this account) that you maij leam.

■ oOJ^Ic

494 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [iih

ypiAui (w fiij iK/ta^fit I terite (on this accouiit) that ymt may not
kam.

lypa'Inx iva iKpaSmt (or IxfiaBgi) I wrote (on this account) that you
might learn.

typaipa iiu /i^ ixna$oK (or iKfiABrji) I wrole (on this account) that
you might not Learn.

icarifuK fn not irtpl rou ^oXiuaii/uBa remain b'ltind lh<it ae man MMidcr
goar case alfO X.A.6.B.28, p<uri\tdi alptir^i o6x Ira iavrav «iiX5i twi^Xi^TMi,
dhX' t« iml oi i\itieroi ill' airir t6 wpATTuai a king is eknten. not thai lie HMJI COM
for hii oicn inlereit hutsever nobly, but titat those ahii rhoo»e him tuny jimprt
tiirouyh hiin X. M. 3.2, 3, ■wapanaXtti larpoh Atut fijf drsfirir yu call in phyii-
eiant in order thai he mag not die X. M.2. 10. 2, #i)Xaicat fvitwiiirti (hist, prvd^
1883) . . . Swut ir6 rflr BvaxupiuiT ^luMrrairr airir he lent guards along in
order that thry might guard him from the rough parte of the rjtunlri X. C.
1.4.7, Koi i/ia toBt' (ixtlf di^ffTij liii ^i| /lAXoiTo i\ki rfpalmiTo r4 )faiT» nud
leiCh thete wordi on hit lipg he ttnod up in order that what Kot ueeiffttl might mit
bt delayed hut be done at once X.A. ;). 1. 47, /lii artOSt rXsuretp fi^ raxit »*««
y4wt haste not to be rich leit thou toon become poor Men. Sent. 368. For tlu:
optative after an opUtive, see 2180 c.

3197. After a secondary tense, the subjunctive may be used in
place of the optative.

a. In the narration of post events, the subjunctive sets forth a peraon's prp-
Tlooa purpose in the form in whlcb lie conceived bis purpose. Thus (tA rX»ift)
'Apptniii&t . . . Karimwrtr tm fiii KOpat Iio^g Abroeomat hnrned the boat* in
order that Gyrus might (may) not erott X. A. 1.4.18. Here the tbougbt of A.
was ■ I irill bum the boats that Cyme mny not cross ' {Im fi4 '"^p)! and la given
in a kind of quotation.

N. — Tbucydldee and Herodotus prefer this vivid subjunctive; tbe poet*,
nato, and Xenopbon, the optative. In Demosthenes, the subjunctive and opta-
tive are equally common.

b. When tbe purpose (or its effect) Is represented as still continnlng in tbe
present. See the example in 2105, Tliia use is closely connected with a.

c. After li oi, rl oSv oi, and tbe aorist indicative : r( oSi oAx' r^ t'^r rttxt
#uXu£ ixvpA iTm-fyianer t-wm it (2201) am rS p kt\. ; why then do tet not make
your aalla itrong by a garrixon that they may be mfe fur yiiu, etc. ? X. C, 6. 4, 37,
Here the sentence with /rantffnfKr is practically equivalent to one with th^vh^**-

2198, The alternative construction of final clauses with subjunctive or opta-
tive is that of implicit indirect di«;ourse (2322). Tbe subjunctive la always
possible instead of the optativt. Observe that the subjunctive for the optativ*

is relatively post, since the leading verb is post,

3199, After a secondary tense both subjunctive and optative may
be used in the same sentence.

mi« at Kvptr$iet . . . ir\iipout Swim nu;uix'a< T« iraTtifiittiri . , ., ■■! r«(
iXiiiJat ofrrup fljirof at ii, r% TSanwiinv 'AftjiXMbi ictMvtr iroipir the CoriMtkiant

mm] purpose clauses 495

maniied . . . ikipi both to try a naval battle and that the Athentaiu at Navpaetut
might be lesa able to preeeiU their Irantportf firom putUiiff out to »ea T. 7. 17.

a. In some casea, eapeclBll? when tiie eubjuactire precedes, the subjunctive
may ezpresB the iramedlate purpose, the realization of which Is expected j while
Iht optative ezpresses tbe le«a Immediate purpose conceived as a coDBequeuce of
the action of tbe subjunctive or as a mere posubiUty.

2900. The optative is very rare after a primary tense except when
that tense implies a reference to the past as well as to the present.

alxcrT<u twa iiij SoUr ilcqr the]/ have gone away that they might not s^ffer pua-
tthtnent Ii. 20. 21. Here sfxorru is practically equivalent to tipuyor, and the
optative low* shows that the purpose waa conceived in tbe past. On the opta-
tive (wHhoot Sr) by aufmilation after an optative, see 2180 o.

2301. mrtfK witb the subjunctive sometimes takes &v in positive
clauses.

Toirr uiri rvr tlSacx't Aran Ar itnASu tell me itnv) this very thing, (Aot / may
team S. 0. C. 576, Hm ii/iit Brut ir ilSw/ur you villi guide ut in order that ve
magknovX.C.b.2.2].

a. At and S^f» with ir or W occur in poetry, especially in Hnmer. ■« ir
(flrat in Aeschylus) is very tare la Attic prose, but occurs eight times in Xeiio-
phon ; as in i' if iiABjst . . ., irriiaivviir but thai \/oii may learn, hear me In turn
X. A. 2. G. IS. This use must not be confused with ut ir in conditional relative
clausea (S6d6). — Snt L* is more common than aimple Arwt in Aristophanes and
Plato, far less common In Xenophon. It is regular in oCQcial and legal laagnage.
— Ii« Kv is not flnal, but local (leherever, 2507). The original meaning of Ira
waa local and denoted tbe end to be reached.

b. ir (^Kf) does not appreciably affect the meaning. Orl^naliy these particles
seem to have had a limiting and conditional force (1T62) : in ii in whatever
way, that to (cp. go ^ in order that $o) as in >' Teach me to die that so I may
Rifle glorious at the awful day '* (Bishop Ken), and op. i^ with Sry rpiwif in
Itf^ijF tA UvSuAr fiarrtiot. Jri fi^Boifi' Srifi Tp6rtfi rarpl Slxat Afol^irjw I cam€ tO the
PfthioH a&rfne that I might learn in irhal teas I might avenge my father S. El.
33. With Arwt ir cp. Ur tui. Botli trut and <jt were originally relative adverbs
denoting manner (Aou, cp. 2578), but when they became conjunctions (in order
that), their limitation by dr ceaaed to be felL

2302. at £v and oxwt &■ with the optative occur very rarely in
Attic prose (in Xenophon eBpecially), and more frequently aft«r
secondary than after primary tenses.

Uim x/^t/wa 'ArraXuMii Arm tr rXijpuBiwrat raurijcoO . . . of ri'A^Huoi . • .
f(2XX«r r^t I'^nif rpoai4<nrTa he gave money toAntatcidtu in order that, if a
fleet leere manned, the Athenlam might be more dispoted to peace X. H. 4. 8. 10.
art ir flnal most be distinguished from in ir consecutive (2276).

M. Homerhas a few oases of Jit tf v (■/) and A^p' <'(«/); Im n> onoe (fi 166).
Hdt. baa At ir, Satt ir rarely.

b. After primary t«nses tbe optative wit^ tr Is certainly, after secondary
unaea probably, potential. Its oombinallon with the final coniuuctlon produces

496 SYNTAX OP THE COMPLEX SENTENCE 1**^

a coDdltlonBl Tel&tive claoM in which the relative and inUrrc^tlve force of frwt
and i^ comee to lighL With Arwi dr the Bull force is stronger than with In in.
In tbe example quoted above, T\i)puMrrM nvrmG repreaents llie protasia (<U
ravrttAr i-XTpuAcIq) tO Itr TpmrMiHrra.

2203. The future indicative is used, especially in poetrr, after
^uf (rarely after ui^, o^ipa, and fi^ in the same sense as tne snb-
junotive, _ -

atti >t' tr i\ya rpi^rrai -i) Srtn /laxoGrroi nor are they matntalHrd for any
Other tintle purpoK than for fighting (lit. hme they shall fight) X. C. 2. 1. 21,

eiySS', Swart itii vriatral (fut.) rif , , . -fXiij-j-ijt x^P*' " vdfT drori't'^V (■"'']-)
Tilt keep siUnee, Ust tome one hear and report all thU for the take of talk
A. Cb. 265. In prose the future occurs with Srui in Xenoj^on and Andocidea.
Iliia luage is an exten^on of that after verbs of effort (2211).

22(M. The principal clause is sometimes omitted.

Ir it To^ar tp^ainat to begin with thii D. 21. 43. trm ri, oiiginallf to vhat
end (cp. MO), and lit r( are also used colloquial!; ; Int rl rowra fJytn ; mkg do
you my thit f P. A. 20 d.

2205. By assimilation of mood, final clauses may take a past
tense of tiie Indicative without av (2185 c) or the optative without
Jv (218tjc.)

2306. Equivalents of a Final Clause. — The common methods of
expressing purpose may be illustrated by the translations (in Attic)
of they sent a herald to armoance :

Itrtfoliav KjjpvKa tva (oTtut) imyyiXXolTO (2196).

trtfofiav K^pvKa oaTK (os) AirayycXeiTai (2554).

iiniu^v KqpuKo. i.irayyti.mnTa (2065), tSrayycUm^ti (rare, 2065).

tmiupav K^pvKO OK iirayyiXcnVTa (2086 c).

tniuliav inJpuKa imiyytXXtiv (rare in prose, 2009).

htif^v Ktipvnarmi dmiyy^XXov (2032 e, often in Thucydidea).

hnfu^v KifpvKa inrip (brata) rov JarayyiXXtiv (2032 g).

For wore denoting an intended result, see 2267.

OBJECT CLAUSES
2207. Two types of object (substantival) clauses are closely con-
nected in construction with final clauses.

1, Object clauses after verbs of effort.

2. Object clausea after verbs ot fearing.

Both stand iu apposition to a demonstrative expressed or implied.

oitira ill roCro iitixararBai, trm dra^trrai rir woiOr Mnrar no maa OWfflU
to contrive (tAIs) Anu he shall escape dentA at any eott P. A. 39a, m^b'S*'!'
Siut ri irQiiii . . . toiut' to contrive Aots he might bring honte the body Hdt.2.
121 Y, o^i toItto t^poOiiat, ftj) . . . oA 3iin|dut ii)Xl3ff(U Ttpl ruti' xpSy/timr I am

mm] object clauses with verbs of effort 497

a/rvUi cf ikU Mry thing, namely, that I moir not be able to iHofce the ca*e plain

D.n.i, t^afitrro . . . /lii ei tttatTt . . . i^\Btir he KOt qftvid that he eould
BOfcicapeX.A.3. 1. 12.

2aoa Connection of Final with Object CUnaeo. — (1) Pinal olatiBes
proper denote a purpose to accompliBti or avert a result, which puT'
pose is set forth in a definite action. (2) Object clauses after verbs
of effort consider means to accomplish or avert a result; the action
of the subordinate clause is the object pvrpoaed. Such clauses are
incomplete final cUuses, because, though the purpose ia expressed,
the action taken to effect the purpose is not expressed. (3) Object
clauses after verbs of fnarivg deprecate an undesired result or express
fear that a desired result may not be accomplished. According to
the form of expression employed, the construction of these three
kinds of clauses may differ in varying; degree or be identical. Thus
compare these usages of Attic prose :

(1) wnftaxaXfi lirpov orat^ pij i.iro6a.vg (common)
TapaKaAci larpov owiav foj iraOaviiTai. (occasionally)
To^MucoAci Idrpov ixij &tro$a.vg (rare)

he tummnns a phi/mcian in order that be mat/ not die.

(2) iieiiMXtZrai Sirais /ii/ Airo&aytiTai (common)
iwi/uXtiToi on-wf juq ivoOdvt] (occasionally)

he takes care that he shall not die.
Spa iiij Artifiavgt (occasionally) see to it that you do not die.

(3) ^ofianu /n} irofiavg (common)
^j9c(Tiu Snoi /ai diro^i'i] (occasionally)
^^UToi onoi lo) inxSaviirm (occasionally)

he ia afraid lest he die.

OBJECT CLAUSES AFTBR V&KBS OP EFFORT

2309. Object clanses after verbs of effort are introduced by Swmt,
larely by ws (Herodotus, Xenophon), scarcely ever by *ra. The negBr
tive IS /17.

3210. Verbs of effort inclnde verbs denoting to taJce care or pains,
to striae.

hnjuXaSjMU, fAa fm, (mXitA, ^povpA, Tp^vvLa* Vfjt, povXrfofiu, )ii|Xii*A|>ai|
va^annAtoiUH, wpa#»|u<ti«L, Tpttrra, wdvra ni'A (ireia{i|iai), rvavUt*, etc.

a. The same coiiBtnictioii fotlons certain verba of nill signifying to atk, cont-
rndBd, entreaty exhort, and forbid, aad whicb cammonly take the Inflniliva

(«1tA, S<0|i«i, nfmftMtM, Urrrfa, But- or «ttfamXtio|ut, iMO-ftfAti, etc.).

b. Some verba take, by anslogf' but in negntiie claoseB ODly, the conBtmo-
tiim either of verba of ^ort or of verbs ot fearing. Theae verbs signify to tee to
a thing: ipA, o-mvA (.cftiMu), faini|(A^i|*, ritMrrfev lo^ vi|pA; to be on 0)m'i
fnard : ««]UiP*9|Mt, 4povrlt«, H^'^ (->i^)- See 2320.

.OOglf

498 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [uti

Thwe verbs ma; take fi4 with the infinitive. liXafioSiiai and ^ttUrro/iai take
the infiuitive when the; meaii to guard againtt doing mmnhing.

2211. Object clauses after verbs of effort take the future indica-
tive with 6ir<u; after primary and seoondary tenses (rarely the opta-
tive after secondary tenses, 2212).

jTi/uXovpit iirat ravTa )r«)Jff« / tijee tare that he shall do this.

iwiiu>jmiiai SiroK pi/ ravra rot-^i I take care that he sliall not do Ihit.

imfuXoviiigv ^ut ravra rMi^« (irotTow) / took care that he should do
this.

lTr<iM\ount)v ovioi ft^ ravra vm^act (ntx^trot) / took care thai he dtOllld
not do this.

tt ii'i-fK'ii ivrl iiixi'Sai, rtSh-o ItT rapanaviraaSai trut art cpctrifra iiMX'^l'*^
(^f( is necessary to fight, vse ma^ prepare to fight bravely X. A. 4. S. 10, IrpSntf
twui TH Poii9tia 4f<i then vere faanaging (this, that) hom lome reiu/orcmesti
tAouId eoTiM T. 3. 4, tKorttfSt t«vto, Stwi ii>i M-rout ipuDmr /iirow , . . dXU icJ
l/iyov ri Stufitir IfeuiTir see to this, that they not oaJy mate speeches but also art
able to thovi »nme proof D. 2. 12, VKtwrh^ im Sbui dm , . . Athi wi dr^oU-
rriiTd iriiur (774) jcbI Arut ri /vir^Jfia t(<iiur it teems to me that vsr miut rnit-
sider Aou ur* ihaiX depart in the greatest security and how toR ihall procure our
provisions X. A. 1. 3. II. In itX ai iwvn itliiit it is needful that thov prove
8, AJ. 65a there is a confuBlon between Sii S(i£« and the constructloa of 2218.

3312 After secondary tenses the future optative occasionally
occurs.

irtiifktTo Sritt li-ifre ialrm inirc Irorof Tart looirro he took care that Ihtf
should neeer be without food or drink X. C. 8. 1. 43.

a. The future optative occurs especially in Xeiiophon, and repreaenia a
thoo^C that yiis originally expressed b; the future Indicative. Here the indica-
tive would present the thought vividly, I.e. aa it was conceived In the mind of
Uie HUbject.

2213. omt and Sriot ^ with the future indicative may be used
without any principal clause, to denote an urgent exhortation or a
warning. Originally the orm clause depended on <r«orci (»«»««),
fya (ipart) see to it; but the ellipsis was gradually foi^tten and the
construction used independently.

ftrwf alu IttaBt irSpn <{ui t^i i\tv6tpla] 4' ir/jcri)(r0t be nun worthy of thefiv
dam which you possess X. A. 1.7.3, Srui Si Ttura ii.>i Siti(ta luiUra but don't ttU
anybody thle Ar. Nub. 824, and very often ia Ar. This use is alio preceded bj
lyt (X.S.4.2D). The third petson la very »re (L. 1.21).

3214. Verbs of effort sometimes have the construction of iinal
clauses, and take, though less often, airu; -with the present or second
aoriat subjunctive or optative (cp. 2196). The subjunctlTe may be
used after secondary tenses.

iTpitatr . . . Srut wiXt/iot yfrfm he tried to bring it about lAot war Aosid

ai9] OBJECT CLAUSES WITH VERBS OF EFFORT 499

ht oceattontd T. 1. &7, Bpi . . , Srat fi^ a-api Sifat iitoXayyi ■«« to it that it doa
Kot prove that jfou aeqwUtce in v>kat pou do not really think P.Cr.49c, tb ^vKi-
(ciff Jrwt nil . . . StaTinit tvprfrt ; will yoa not be on your guard let! yow find
aoMtterf ]).6.25. Future and sub; uncti re occur togelber la X. A.4. 0. 10. In
Xenophon alone U the subjunctive (and optative) more comiiion than tbe future.

1. Tbe object desired by the subject of a Terb of effort is liere expressed by
the wnie construction as is the purpose in tbe mind of tbe subject of a final
ctuue.

2213. Sy is sometimes added to Sn-wf with the Bubjunctive to
denote that the purpose is dependent on certain circumstanceB.

triti 4» , , . ol ^TfiaTiwriu wpl rtS rrpartitiSai |38iiX»iiun-i«, roiroii nifiiaoiuu
l*iiid\i9Siu I will endeavour to tnal'e it my care Ihat thu soldl'-r> dillhfrnle about
(onlinuing the war X. C, 6, h. 18, iiijxurTiTiow 5rm ir Sia^iiyji plaim mutt be made
for his etijape .P.G.48I a (the same pattRtigs has tviat with tlie subjunctive and
the fnture). In Attic this ubb occuib in AriHlophnnca, .Kenophon, and Plato.

2216. wt and ui it with subjunctive and optative and Drwt Ar with the opta-
tive occur in Xenophon, wt it and irm it wltb the optative being used after
primary and secondary tenses. Hdt. bas 8ki.ii dv after secondary tenses. The
optative with in it and Arwt It is potential.

2217. After veriM meaning to eanaider, plan, and trj/ Swm or ut with the
nibjunctlvD (with or without ni) or optative is used by Homer, who does not
employ tbe future indicative in object cIruscs denntinj; a purpose. Thus, ippi-
{irtmi . . . Hntui M liv^njfini . . . jtrffpji rnnsider h'lW tho» mayeft Mlay the
ruitort a 205, itilpi Srat mr H) irj]r rurptia yalar trijai try that thou mayeil
f'nae to thy native land i 645. Here II»iui with the future indicative would
be the normal Attic usage.

2218. Verba of will or desire Bigiiifying to onAr, command, entreat,
exhort, and forbid, which uanally have an infinitive as their object,
may take os-uc {Srnn m) with the future indicative (or optative) or
the Bubjanctive (or optative). The on-ut clause states botn the com-
mand, etc and the purpoBe in giving it. Between ttjke care to do
thia and J hid you take care to do this the connection ia close. Cp.
impero, potlvlo with ul (tie).

SuufXnSBrrai Srut TiituirfyrcTtt they urg' him to take menge P. R.640e, It^r*-
fai S' bfiair Swat . . . iimjr ^^ ly he will entreat you that he may not »vftr p«ji-
i'hment Ant. 1.28, rapayyiWoMir Srat it (2215) r^St Tp ii/Jpf ti\iut^ti thty .

!i/cc order! (lo the end) that he die to-day P. Hli. ftHe, haxtSaiiattui' iiitrro t4
•i-^^iaii ffrtn lurvrrfa^iTi they begged Vie I^r.edaemoniana that the decree might
^ changed Ar. Ach. 636, iw^iptvtt 9rvt nil raUrt ixoKptniiiyir you forbade me to
give tAU antteer P.R.3-$ea.

2219. Dawes' Canon. — The rule fonnn1at«d by Dawes and afterwards
eit«nded (that the;lrst norlst snbjunctive active and middle after Svwt. Sw^t iri,
and otf fi4 is incorrBCt and ^ould be amended) is applicable only in the ease of
virbs of ^ort. After tfaeae verbs the future is far more common than sutijunc-
tive or optative (except In Xeuopbon), and some scbolais would emend tbe

500 STNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [mm

othnding slgmatio eabjunctives where they occur tn the same Mntence wilb
Moond BorfatB (as And. 8. 14) or even where the fatui« has a widely diSbrent
form (IB itv>JuvttTiu, Bnbj. hrXtia^, cp. X. A. 5. 6. 21).

VSRBS OP CAUTION

2220. Verbs of caution (2210 b, 2224 a) have, in negative claoses,
the construction either of

«. Verba of ^ort, and take Srut >iif with the fntnre indicative :

cdXn^^fUHM ihrut /lij , . , ofx-fffsfuu takinff Care thnt I do not dfpori P. Hk.
91 c, Spi iKUt ii.il (Tcv drvrr-fffoiTat beware le»t then revolt from thee HdL 3. 36.

b. Verbs ol fearing, and take /ti (fii) at) or frwt /ui (2230} with the eubjano-
tlve (or optative) %

ifiirt liti riSuiMt take care leMvie suffer X..C. 4. 1.15, imMmv twut fi4 . ..tit
rtinrrltr IKtjiJ be on your guar^ lest jwu ccme to the oppottte X. M. 3.6.1B.
iwawTtioiuT . . . b/iai /ili oi mint dn^^i we tv^iect that jntu will not prove
impartial T.S.53, InrorTtiaas itiiriir evyitTipa\iy<n,^ptTa ict\. tutpectHig Otot h*
meant hit daughter, he asked, etc. X. C. 5. 2. 9. So with a past Indicative (2238).

OBJECT CLAUSES WITH VERBS OF FEABIKG

2221. Object clauses after yerbs of fear and caution are intro-
duced hy fii; that, lest (Lat. ne), foi oC thai . . . not, lest . . . not (Lat
ut = ne non).

a- Mif clausee denote a fear that something mag or might happen ; ^^ t^
clauseB denote a fear that something may not or might not happen. Obsem
that the verb is negatived by oi and not by /ii), which eipresBea an apprehendon
that the result will take place, /lii is Hometimes, for convenience, tiwislaled by
vAether; hut it is not an Indirect interrogativB in such casea.

2222. The constniction of )t^ after verbs ol fearing has been developed from
an earlier cuilrdinate construction In which /ti) was not a conjunction (that, lest)
bnt a prohibitive particle. Thus, StlSw ^i{ n vi^irtr (A 470) I fear lest he man
tuffer aught was developed from / fear + nin|t he not suffer aught (1802) ;
^Xai4 Jl' rtt . . . Uni, ii^ XixBi f^^A^vrt ti\tr (6 &2I) but M there be a
guard, lest an ambugh enter the eitg, where the clause ii4 — tUthSfci meant origi-
nally nia|r an ambush not enter. Here iti expreues the desire to avert Bom«-
tfaing (negative desire).

a. When a4 b^d twcome a pure conjunction of subordination. It was uwd
even with the indicative and with tlie optative vritb dr. Some scholara regard
fi4 with the indicative as standing for ipa ni (hence an indirect interrogative).
Observe that the character of fii[ after verbs of fearing is different from thai in
final clauses, though the construction is the same in both cases.

2223. For the use of the subjunctive, without a verb of fearing, witta /ii),
see 1801, IS02; with /(4 of see 1801, with nd fii) see 1804.

2324. Verbs and expressions of fear are : ^peS|uu, SAoina or Blt««, TSfffi,
TpA and *^[Ka (mostly poetical) ; Stivit •^l^ Stiwlv lim, tfa* trrt, ^ap^ii
^l|u, ^ptpif im, etc.

t«»] OBJECT CLAUSES WITH VERBS OF FEARING 501

a It Ib not kctoal fear thi.t is eipreaaed bnt only a;ipr«&ensJon,
ataietg, *upie<on, eU. These are the verbs and expressions of naufion : ixvA,
Ue|iA, dnvrA, AnrT(S*lxw(ira()/K<^).iin>TTti(^l*Ol)|Mft|>ni, atv^'nitai (nr«),
i((*It*d« b~n, vpovSoRlS ivrC Here belong kIho, by analogy, ipA, oncMrA,
tnoA, rtXapa^fuu, ^povrita, ^nU-mt (^-ofuu), which admit also the conBtructloQ
of rerba of effurt (2210 b).

I. FEAR RELATING TO THE FUTURE

2225. Object clauses after verbs of fear and ^xuiion take the
3iil>jmii!tire after primary tenses, the optative (or subjunctive, 2226)
after secondary tenses.

^^aufioM. ^yf fivr[Tax I fear it may happen.

i^ofimfua //.ii ov yanfTta I fear it may not happen.

i^poifLTpi /oj yn-ocTo (or ytimrai) I feared it might happen,

i^paiii.ifviiiicA yt'voiTo (regularly yirrirai) I feared it might not happen.

Silouca fti) . . . triXaBii/itea T^t attalt iSou lam afraid leet toe may forget the
vifiy home X. A. 3. 2. 25, i/xPtiTot itii . . . ri Itrxnra riBji he it afralii le»t h»

Buffer the severest punishment X. C. 3. 1. 22, ipporrtlu ;ii) KpdTurTor n fioi aiyar I ant
thlakiHg that it mas prove (2228) best for me to he lilent X. M. 4. 2. SQ, IScirat
>1 'EXXqpR nil rpoadyour rpit ri xlpai lat . , . adrodt laracA^ciar Oie Greeka were
trized teUh fear tett they might adsance against their fiank and cvt them doun
X. A. 1. 10. 9, USiiHr fiJ| ad fiifiaun ^rt toe fear yuu are not to be depended on
T.3. 67, o6 roih-a iitQita, ^ii out tx" « ri lu itdaTV rur <pl\ur . . . dWi /i4 oix
Ix" ln^roit aU j3 / am afraid not that I may not have enough (lit. anything') to
give to each of nqr fi-lendt, but that I may not have enough friends on vihom to
bettov my gifts X. A. 1. 7. 7.

a. The Borist is ver; common after >iif. After secondary tenaca Horn, usually
bw Uie optative.

b. nil *t with tbe optative is rare and suspicious (X. A. 3. 5. 3).

3226. After secondaiy tenses, the subjunctive presents tbe fear
vividly, i.e. as it waa conceived by the subject. Cp. 2197.

i^Padrra >iif ri rd^ they feared lest the might (.may) meet with some accident

X. S, 2, 11, ifofiiBriirar /ii, lal irt a^it i aTparii x^l^V they became fearful that
the army might (jntty) advance against themselves too T. 2. 101, So when tbe
(ear extends up to tbe present time : i^mP^r . . . koI rir TtSiipiptiitiu ^i) rati
tttw' dyrrttirttfl in I teas struck with fear and even novi I am in a lOate of agito-
llon tett Slime of you may disregard me Aes.2. 4. Tbe vivid use of subjonctlva
is common In tbe historians, especially Thucydidea.

2237. The optative after a primary tense is rare and suspected
(1 245, HdL 7. 103, 8. Aj. 279).

2238. Tbe subjunctive and optative after fi^ (or Siriut fi-q) may
denote what may prove to be wa object of fear (future ascertainment).

UhoM fi4 ifTor i 1 an afraid lest it prove to be bett S. Ant. 1114, Itaaar
f>4 X^rra rii . . . i/fur iitrtmitn thty feared led some madness might prove to

602 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [>»«

haee fallen vponutK. A. 6.7.26. The aorlst rabjuneUsB refera to the part ia
StlSoiM . . . /t4 «-( rttptlrf J ftar it may prove Chat lAe beguiled thee A 6&5 ; cp.
KOO, >316, m40I (after AfiS).

2229. The future is rare with verbs of fiaring after ^nj.

^PtBfiM ii pet Tiiai j^Sarai i)J(»«rt i^ifiraHi' irarrlai and / appmhetid that Wf
iUmU find tome ptea»ure» oppoiite to otlier pleaiurei P. I'hil. 13 a. So with ttrle
of cauf ion .- SpA iti) raWOr iniartf i/nSr x><P>>r Jt^ffn «ee f<i il fett eocA one of
ui may Aore ne«c( of many Aan(2« X. C, i. 1. 18.

a. The futare optative Heema not to occur except In X.K6.4. 27, X.H.
1.2. T, P. Eath. 16d.

3230. owoK fxri witli the subjunctive or optMive is sometimes used
instead of jx^ after verbs of fear and caution to imply fear ttiat some-
thiog iDili tkappen.

ei^Pti . . . Swiin ft4 dfiffiD* vpSyiia riryx^'Bt wpirrair; are yoH not afraid
that you may chance to be doing an unAoiy detd t I', Kuth. 4 e, iiiim y ir {tpi-
^ai/u rir irtpa), tl it>i tpofiiluv' Srus itlj ir airi' nt rpimiTo I ahotdd gladlf ktrp
the man if I did not fear lest he might turn againtt ni« X.M.S.Q.S; Bee aUo
2220 b.

2231. DiruK ;i^ with the future indicative (as after verbs of effort)
is sometimes used instead of ft^ with the subjunctive.

SiSeiKa SxiiB /i^i , . . d«i7Jti| 7en}iriTa( (o. (. yinrrai) 7 ftar test a Itecettitg mqr
arise D. 9. T6. The future optative occurs once (1. 17.22}. Oti fii) or ttm i^t
with Terbs of caution. Bee 2*^20 a.

2232. The potential optative with i,v is rarely uaed after ^i^.
iiSi&Ttt liii (iiTa\v0c(i) ir (Mn. taraXaStlitirar) A Hj/un fearful lest the penpli

ahould he put down L. H. 51. The pol«tiUal use Ib most evident when an opta-
tive occura In the protasia ; d ti nm ^o^Drriu iij) furafa Sr yimro avn) ^ nra-
rnui), ti -iriXt^t iytpStl'^, ititniaiTiii Sri trX. if some are q/Vafd that thit candlliin
of things ntag prove vain, if war should arite, let them (him) consider that, et«.
X. VBCt.4.41.

It. PBAR RBLATtNO TO THE PRESENT OR PAST

2333. Pear that something actually ia or was is expressed by ^
witli the indicative (negative ^^ ov).

mama . , , /iJ| r\trr^* "" I fear that you need a heating Ar. I'tub.lSS, i\\'
1^ all raltur IKcytr but have a care that he aainot ipealclng (njf*t P. Th. 1 4Sb,
^Q^iiitSa, n^ i/i^Tipur ifia. injapr^Katity we are (ffraid that We have failed of Imlh
objects at once T.3. K], Apart iLii ait iiiol . . . rpor^"' Xiyoii taCmt have a Care test
it does not rest with me to give an account And. 1. 103.

a. Contrast i/>opiiuiini nil dX^Wi ianr t fear that it it (rue Wilb ^•^•^at n^
dXiMf i I fear it may prove true (2228).

b. The anriBt occura in Homer : Btllu /tii tif rirra tea Huupria «I»f* //iW
thai all the goddess said was true t 300.

M40] OBJECT CLAUSES WITH VERBS OP FEARING

OTHER CONSTRUCTIONS WITH VERBS OP PBARINQ

2334. In IndiiMt QnMtioos. — Here the Ideas of tear and daubt are Joined.
Tbus, ^0ot tl nlvH Sirmmr /M' (direct wtlfi* ; tOlO) / have mjf dovbu ttltethtr
I iluitl (.can) pertuade my miiirett E. Med. 181, r^r Stir I' Srait XdA^ J/Jouia
(direct »fii XdAii ; 1806) lamfrarful hov> I»hall excape the notice of the godiett
E. I. T. 996, S/Saua 6 ti drdE^ooDfui. / an) afraid inhal to antieer P. Tli. 196 c.

333S. In Indirect DUcourse with ui (rarely fawt) that. — Verba of fearing
may have the cooBtructlon of verlia of thinking and be followed by a dependent
statement. This occurs regalnily only when the expression of fear is netcatived.
Thus, d'Jp^ M xj ftrrarpi fij) ^o^oO Af dxo(H}»tii do not fear that vo" wW be at a
lot* for a huifiaad for yotir daughter X. C. 6. 2. 1'2. Here /ii[ or 3rwt /») would
be TCKiilar. WlLb in Lhe idea Is /ear, thinking that.

2236. r. Ith (n (^) CanMl. —h^fittra Ihi iwi AAt . . . ri Smp lUiat siW-y
etru Ae UNU afraid heeaute the dr&im teemed to him to be fiom Zetu X. A.
S. 1. 12.

2237. WHbaCaouIPaTticiple. — olfrf T«,rd(^jri>\» . . . rpoiiloh ^^4hi
nor W(M A« »«rn)ted ol having bttraged the Acropolis Lye. 17,

2338. With the InflnitiTe. ~ Verbs of fearing often talce an object inflnU
life (present, future or auriatj nith nr without the article ; and with or without
fi4 (2741). Thiu, ^fJitiTFrat dSiinrr he will be afraid to injure X. C. 8. 7. 16, ai
^paiiuea /Xcur<r<^«r0iu vie are nut afraid that \te shall be beaten T.6. 106 (the
future infinitive is less common than it^ wiih the subjunctive), ^tiXarrJiuxt ri
\Srijaal Tin 1= (lij XwrV") taking cure to offend llo one B. 18.268, J^uXifarB >i(l
IritfTM yetiaiai he took precaiitioiie not to become an object of diatruit X. Ag. 8. 6.

a. With the articular inflnitJfe, ifie^Siuu, etc. means simply I fear; with the
inHnltive without the article, ipapoi/tM commonly has the force of heeilate, feel
repugnance, etc. Cp. <pap«SiMi iAini* and ^opaviuu liii iiittir ; / fear te do
mrong (and do not do it); ^^Ziim ri iSmtt I fear wrong-doing (in general,
by myself or by another), like #«^oOfuu ri)* dluclar.

2339. With fa-n of Besnlt (after a verb of caution). — fir ttt fXBtiur iw
a^oit rplr ^vKifairOai Hart fij) X^^ff^Kii if then VK mooe againtt them h^ore
they take precavHont [to as) not to be caught X.A.T.3.36.

CAUSAL CLAUSES

2240. Causal clauses are intrcxliiced by Sri, Sun-i, Stomp because,
i-rti, iwaS^, art, bicoTt since, tut as, aince, becaute. Tbe negative is ov.

a. Also by poetic oSfnta (= oC Ima) and AtsixKa (= Stbv lutta) benavte,
((n rinM (poetic and Ionic; also temporal), and by &nw*fnc« (HdL. 1, 68, X.C.
8. 4.31, I. 4. lee). Homer has t or & n because,

b. it frequently denotes a reason imagined to l>e trae by tbe principal sub-
ject and treated by him as a fact (2211). tn ofleii follows jii T»i>ro, Sut
rMc< i* Tt^av, ratrif. EiAn stands for Sid rv/ro, Sri. tn and irdn usually
mean wftrn (cp. cum); as causal conjunctions they are rare, as arc ralmwraSr

504 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE \v^l

avrui (x« tittee then thU it the eait, D. 1. 1, x"^**''' • ■ ■ ri vapim hwir Mfir
rrpaTiffur rouitrur sTtpiiitia the present Uate of Kfffairt ie dlfflaiU Mince m an
deprived of such generals X. A. 3. 2. i. Causal 5t«, leinpoml 9rc rarely, cm
begin a BCDlence. When tliey approiicli the uieanlng if, Ire and iwiri uke pi).
In Attic proaa liiBcriptionB iwtl Ib rare, ScAri does not occur, and At frtn 1>
generallj used for iiirtp.

2241. Causal clauses denoting a fact regulaxly take the indicative
after primary and secondary tenses.

^(1 U bfuit oi fiodXarSi aunroptitiiBiu, driyini Si) I"' 4 W< t/mIAitb rj Kifm
^\(f xpffi^'^ TT^- ^'^ since yon do not viiah to continue the march aith me, I
ffiwt either retain the friendship of Cgrwi bg renouncing gou, etc X. A. 1. 3.5.
9 f tf^Xuaai 4itai ut roit nit ^fXavt . . . tt Towtr turiiuBa . . ., nMt raOf sbtm
fx" Aut "s to that mhich hat excited your envy of us, our tupprmd ahilitg (ML
because, as you think, vie are able) to benefit our friends, nnC even it this to X. KL
6.12, ^i>7xaK Y^ i^ ii;id{i)f iniptviiierot ItAri irh-pvTB for he happened (0 bt
riding on a leagon fn-m the fad that he had been vmundtd £. A. 2. 3. 14.

2242. But causal clauses denoting an alleged or reported reason
(implied indirect discourse, 2622) take the optative after secoadaiy
tenses.

(at 'AAtnit'oi) Tit IIi^iXA /xdn^* 5rt aTpaTtriit &r nlr trftiyat the Athenians
reviled Pericles on the ground that, though he leat gp.neral, he did not lead the*
out T.2.2I, (tx* X^dv . . . in AaiitSrii^noi iii To6r» noXi/iiirtiar aOriMi fri ah
MiXifiraur iter 'A-y^'Xlou f\8itr tw' aArit Pelopldas teas able to sag that the Lart-
daemoniaa* had made wvr upon them (the Thebans) for the reason that (Atji
had not been willing to niEircA against him (tbe King of Peiala) with AgetUat
X.H.7.1.34.

2243. Cause may be expressed also by-tlie unreal indicatiTe with
Sf or the potential optative with Sv.

irtl Sid y' tjiit airaii TdXoi ir iroXii^tirt linee gou would long ago hooe prr-
ithed had it depended or goursehtet D. IS. 46, Sitiuu. aOv i-bv TapafHiru Ifiur- wt

tyA »iS ti irii liSior itoiaaiiu -i) sgv aecordinglg I beg gou to itag with m;
because there it no nn« (in my opinion) to uAont / thoiUd more glaUg Ittle*
than to gou F. I't. .135 d.

2244. iwil maj intrckluce a coordinate command (impecatlv* S. Bl 3£3.
potential optative, P.G.474b), with (S.O.T.MI), at quettiow (8.O.T.390).
Cp. the use of Sart, 22T5, Bometimea, with the indicative, irtl has the totet ol
atthoui/h (P. S. 187 a), — Acauaal clause may have the value of ^i^ with %oOM-
dinaw main clause. Bo often in tragedy with in In antaert^S. Aj,30; ep.X.C.
4. 2.S5). — A clause with 5rc, apparently introducing a cooiequence, mar ^*e
the reaeon for a preceding question (A 32).

2245. Cause may also be expressed by a relative clause (2665), by
a participle (2064, 208S, 2086), by ra or &i ro with the in6mtive
(2033,2034 b).

2246. tl or tfrcp, when it expresaes the real opinion of the wrltar or aptakti.

U4S] CAUSAL CLAUSBS 505

mky baro a caiual force, m iyii . . . IfSontu iii> i^ b/tur rliuiittroi, dwp itSpuw&t
fC/u I om pltated at being honoured by j/ou, tlne« (lit. ^ indeed) t am a man
X.A. 0.1.26.

2247. Many verbs of emotion state the cause more delicately
with tl(iiv) ifas& mere suppoBition than by ori. The negative Is ^ij
or oi-

a. So wfdi iY**""^ <"n indigtutnt, kyinuu am content, t,ia%f6y iim it i» a
ikante, •tgrx'roiMi ma (uhamfcl, &](,h]iu take hard, SctvAv Jim if ia a nhnme,
tnrir Tawftfuu am indignant, 4aw|i^a am aitoalthed, iiiip4'pii blame, ^to*a
am^ealoit*, eic The ^clause Is usually indicfitive, eomelimes au unreal iiidicn-
tive, % •ubjunoCiTe, or a potential optative. Tbus, Saviii^ <( //.ii ^tie^irtTt tiiXr
•^roJi / am nrpriied if you will not help yourteUet X. H. 2. .?. .'>3, d7a>uT^ </
a^Mrt 1 mw M ''^i *'' 'W ('"Ir / dm griened that I am thus unnble to say what
Imean P. Lach. 194 a, Jcoiv maiiiem tl rotit iTi,paa\i6orTnt ftfiOr r^ rX^^i lii)
rfrorrat fixfjffnant lAot thej/ eoHld not digeover those uiho uvre plotting against
their eommoju T. 0.60, irarar iw ttii, tl n-rfiir lUr ifiaa \4yawtat airtl ^oart riir
inirvtdir TUf ftiywr . . . , ifieO 91 \tyarTat iri\i\iirSt, Ktd nl} yereuinp )iir tplatun
wtfl rsO TpiyimToi 1j\a ir, yrtarirot Si i\^x"' d'o^i'fn'at if 'would be abaurd if,
lahen Isng nothing, yoa ihotU okI Ihe name of what he has done, bjit lahen I do
^itak, you forget it; and absurd if, while he ehould have been condemned when
no invettigalion toai inUUuted eoneerning the matter, he should yet get off now
vihen the proof hat been given Aes. t.85 (cp. 21)04 b), /ili Svi/iA^rt i' it n ^Jtw-
fuu UvH^ do not be nirprited if I seem to say something I. Ep.O. 7, r/pai Xtyat, tl
. . . oit if Siroirro KaSiTr it is a marvel you are telling if they could be un-
ieteetedr.Ken.aiA.

b. After a past tense we Lave either the fonn of direct discourae or the opta-
tive, as in indirect discourse. Thus, teaf/iator rf n Ifei th x^)VM'tfai rv Myv
utraS T kept wondeiing if any one could deal with his theory P. Ph. 95 a, ^<rr(i>
. . . an )*i>4i> «[lf «[ i liir . . . E»»*Ifil IrtBKpiiiiiurot avriin . , . peyaKlif'iix'" 7'tO'To he
added that it was a shame if a man who played ihe role of Xaiithlas should
prtne.himself so noble minded Aes. 2. 157, ifKTipet tl iXiiaotrro they pitied them
in ease they should be captured X. A. 1.4.7 (cp. 2622 a). SoinetimeB the con-
stmction used after a primaiy tense is retained after a secondar; tense (X. C.
4.3.3).

2248. These verbs admit also the construction with on.

^1) BavfidltTi 5ti xo^""" •P^p" do not be surprised that I take it hard X. A.
l.S. 3, OaiiiatOT tri Kipot aOrt S.\\or iriltirtt . . . o6rt airrit 0riiraira (implied
indirect diftcouise) they were surprised that Cyrus neither sent some one else nor
appeared himself 2. 1. 2, fftontr AyarCirTH tri ri riiiurra tierurd/uBt we have
reached here, content that we have saved our live* 5. 5. 13. The construction
with Arl TV and the Infinitive (2D331i) also occura: (SunpdrioO tSaviAdltTo
trl ri . . . iix6\tn f9' Socrates was admired because he lived contentedly
X.H.t.8.2.

a, fri after verba of emotion really means that, not because.

,ooglc

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

RESULT CLAUSES (CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES)

2249. A clause of result denotes a consequence of what is stated
in the principal clause.

32S0. Result clauses are introduced b^ the relative word ion
(rarely by is) as, thai, so that. In the principal clause the demon-
strative words oorus thnu, roumrin siich, twoGtw SO great, are often
expressed, laan is from oi; and the connective ri, which has lost its
meaning.

a. To a clftUHe with ovren, etc. Herodotus Bomelimes- adds a clause eilhet
with ri or without a connective, where Attic would employ Orn ; cp. S. 18.

2251. There are two main forms of result clauses : aart with the
infinitive and Zirrt with a Unite verb. With the infinitive, the nega-
tive is generally /i-Q ; with a finite verb, of. On the use in indirect
discourse and on irregulaiities, see 2759.

2252. Consecutive in occure almoat always with the inSnttlTe (cbleDj in
Herodotus, Xenopbon, Aeschylus, and Sophocles) ; with a finite verb occwion-
ally In Herodotus and Xenophon. With the infinitive, the orators and llia-
cydidBB (except T. 34) have Aart.

2293. Consecutive Oar* (ut) with a finite verb doe« not occur in Homer,
who uBGs coSrdinntiuD instead (cp. if in A 10). Two cases of Si n occur with
the Influitive (I 42 ; ^21 may mean and to'), where the infinitive might stand
alone, since Homer uses the infinitive to denote an intended or possible result.

2254. A clause with cucm and the infinitive is merely added to the
clause containing the main thought in order to explain it. The con-
sequence is stated without any distinction of time and only with
difference of stage of action.

a. Since the Infinitive ezprceses merely the abstract verbal Idea, Ita use with
bvTt (as with T/ilr) outside of indirect discourse cannot ezpllcttly denote a fact.
By lis datival nature (1069), the Iiiflnitire is simply a complement to, or expla-
nation of, the governing word, ivrt Is one of the means to reinforce this explana-
tory office of the inflnllJve. The origin of lis use is suggested by the compariton
with Scai ivfflflent for, oFsi capable of (200S) and the infinitive, which was not
orif^iaally dependent on these words.

2255. A clause with bxrrc and a finite verb contains the main
thought, and is often ao loosely connected with the leading verb as to
be practically indepetident and coordinate, uxrre may thus be simply
introductory and take any const ruction found in an independent sen-
tence. The consequence expresses distinctions of time and stage
of action.

22SG. Besult may also be expressed by relative clauses (2566).

RESULT CLAUSES

2257. A clause of result with utrrt statiog that something actually
occurred a« a fact must be expressed by the indicative.

2258. A clause of result with iiirT€ stating that something may
occur in consequence of an intention, tendency, capacity, and in gen-
eral in consequence of the nature of an object or action, is regiilarly
expressed by the infinitive. When a consequence is stated without
affirming or denying its actual occurrence, the infinitive ia in place.
The infinitive may therefore denote a fact, but does not explicitly
state this to be the case ; and is, in general, permissible in all cases
where the att^nment of the result is expected, natural, or possible,
and its actual occurrence is not emphasized ; as it ia emphasized by
the indicative.

a. AttTt with llie Infliilltvs doea not Blat« a particular fact The Infinitive U
preferred in cUueea containing or Implying a negative. Hart with the indicative
i« preferred alter tit Tsfra ^m and like phrases when affirmative (cp. S26u, 'iSM,
2274).

2259. This difference may be illustrated by examples.

Ix" Tpt^piit boTi fKilr t4 titlm^r rXoisr I hate trtrtmtt («> a») to eitlrh their vei-
kIX. A. 1.4.8 (Arrt (IXa* would mean «o tAirf I raught with an eHenliallr differ-
ent meaning), rirrat oirru SiariStU bart airlt tlm ^(Xovt trfatlng all in tuek a
matmer that they »hoiil4 be his friend* X. A. 1. 1. b (an Int^'nded rMult, S267),
arrit jidHyiu ^' titH* iii aiti itlrmr r^u i* ■'i iiiairrou x<iy>f / am treated hf fOU
in tveh a manner that I cannot even tup in my own country X. H. 4. 1.83 (a
^t), do-Ti ripoiat fij) tlnu TOpi ripyor, AWi Si' aArur )iiirur Biiimr MO that it
tnw tmpoKthle to pae* by the tide of a toieer, but the guards teent through the
wtidiUe of them T.3.21, Kpavyiir reWi/r iirolauncaXaSrrrt cLXXflXovi Aarr tat roit
roXf^ilaui diDiitir ' Svrt ol /lir ^yy^ara tu> raXt/ilur tat l^iiytr they made a loud
noi$e try calling each other to that rren the enemy could hear; conaequently thote
of the enemy who were nearest actually fled X. A. 2.2. IT. Here the fact tlutt
Bome of the enemy Sed Is proof that tliey actually lieard the cries ; but the
Qreek states merely that the noise was loud enough to be heard. Had the
clause AffTf . . . f^uyar not been added, we could only have inferred that
the nolae was heard.

ware (llAREn:,Y &?) WITH THE INFINITIVE

2260. The infinitive with &rrt denotes an anticipated or possible
result; but the actual occurrence of the result is not stated, and is to
be inferred only. The negative is jiij, but oi is used when the &nt
clause depends on a clause itself subordinate to a verb of saying or
thinking (2269). Cp. 2759.

mS SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [mCi

«. &tTi with the iiiliniiive means ae to, to as to; but with a rabjeet aecct-
Hiry [n English it must often be tranalated by «o that.

3261. The iiiflnitive with Orrt is ubukII; preaent or aorist, nvely perfect
(e g. n. IB. 257). The ruture is common only in indirect discouTse (D. 19. 72).

2262. (MTTc (ok) with the infiiiitivfl ia used when its clause serres
only to explain the principal clause. Thus,

2263. (I) After expressions denoting ab&Uy, capacity, or to ^ed
aomellthig.

TsXXd wpiyiuiTa waptTx»' si $ipfi»pOi . . , i\a^pai yip ftrs*, ion icol ^yyMer
^)tiytyTti iwoiptiytir tht barbaiiajti Caused great annoyance ; for they vxrt M
nimble that Ikeg contd rtcape even Ihovgh they made off after th^ had ap-
proached qnite near X.A. 4. 2. 27, i Torofi^t nwoLPrat ^ifci liri /t-^it rd Sipm
inrtpix'i' the river of tuch a depth that the tpeari aiuld not even prtjjttt
above the surface 3, 5. 7 (on ToroGrm Sm etc. see 2003), ravai^Tir* upauy^r , . .
iroliiaa.' Sivrt . . . rail rofiipx"" 'XW'* thfy made luch an uproar a* to bring
the taxiareha D. 54. fi.

a. The idea ot efffUng mny be unexpreased : (KXAip^oi) P^anrtr twX to*>
tiimrat &rr' inlntn iumX^x^^ Clearrhui advanced agaiiut the foldttrt of
Menon to {I.e. by so di>Uig lie bruuglit li about) that they were thoroughly frigkt-
ened X.A. 1.5. 18; cp. 2207. Several verbs of effecting take fivr* when Uie
result is intended and where the simple infinitive is common (2207 b).

3264. (II) After a comparative with ^ than.

irBerTO airhr /Xdrrw tx^"" Siraiur 4 Airrc Tsdt ^IXnvi ii^\ar they perceiztd
that he poitessed loo little power to benefit hisfrieniU X. H.4.6. 23, ol duamcrti
PpaX^Ttpa iii6iiTi{l>r 4 wi '{'(xwAit rur •nptyiarrf Hr the javelin throaera hiwled
their javelins too short a diiitance to reach the stingers X.A. 3. 3.7. After a com-
parative, ut is as common as Offrc,

a. Hart msy here be omitted : tpttacot' 4 ^pta ttud eeii* too great to bt
tndvred K, llecllOT.

b. On pciKltive adjectives with a compaTative force, see 106S.

3265. (Ill) After a princi])al clause that is negatived.

sfiit Ix'/"' ifiyipmr dirrc dyopdftir ri, IriT-^Sna we have no money (so O*) to
buji proviaionn X. A, 7.3. &, aiBtU nirrr' tit TiiaavT dnuiclii d^lnrro drrr twsw-
ri> Ti ToX^Q"!" roit'' no one ever reached tvch a degree of shamelessness as to
dare to do anything of the tort 1). 21. Gi (cp. 2268 a). Here are Included qnea-
tionx expecting tiie answer no : rit oin-ut /vrl Stirit \iyur Acrt at niffu ; who fl
so eloquent as to persuade yonf X. A. 2. S. 15. After negative (as after com-
parative, 2261) clauses, the inHnlilve is used, since there would be no leaaon
for the 6art clause if the actinn of the principal clause did not take place. But
the indicative occurs occasionally (L. 13. 18, AnL 5. 43).

2266. (IV) After a principal clause that expresses a coodition.

(I *t)| th Todra iiarlai d*pi«4jii)^ Sirrt Iwidv^tir . . . raWaU fiix"^^ if ' ""^ ***
renchfd s«eh a degree of madiiett at to desire to contend with many L. 8. 28 (cp.

2268 a).

MTo] BESULT CLAUSES 509

~ ~o expres
Qf effecting, as wotm, Siarpirrofuu, etc.

rfir wowSffir So-rt iinrv ^4 SiSAhi (ft«jr UK etiery effort (to at) to avoid being
pu»Med P. G.4T9C, Stfeipat . . . irniirrm in fij) AwTnrSiu r^t tipfp^ ri vSvfi
lAei ititehed tlie tkint to that the water thould not touch the hay X. A. 1. 6. 10.

■. The tiifinit[ve here expresses only the lesult, while the idea of purpoee
cornea on]; from the general seiiae and especially from the meaning of the lead-
ing TOrb. tra /t^ in the above examples vonld express only purpose.

b. A clause of Intended result la often used where Arut might occur fn an
object clause alt«r a verb of ^orf (221 1); as itrtx^'ai lifiitBiitr Oct h rlt rarvi
riMf dwaXXdju liiw* IM Will find meant (go at) to fret thrt entlfely from thtie
trowMe* A. Eom. 82. The In&iitive alone, denoting purpose, ia here more usual.

2a6& CVI) To state a condition or a proviso (on condition that,
provided that).

nXXi iiir tr xpil^ar tSutt tiXitrtS^i Orr fx'" 'tlptir FhUitiideg aovld have
given a large Mini on condition of hit holding Oreut D. 18.6t, iwJvx'oi'"' ^"'
itw\mr the^ gone their promiat on the condition thai thev thovM sail out X. A.
6. 6. 26. On condition that is commonly ezpreoed by ii> if or /^' ^n (227Q)
witb or wlttaoal a preceding ^t n^if.

226ft A result claose with ucn-c and the indicative, dependent
on an iofioitire in indirect discourse, and itself quoted, takes
the infinitive, and usually retains the negative of the direct
form.

I^aaaw T«*t rrparniTai tit toOto rpvif^ fkBttt &ar' ait 46i\uw rfrtir, tl lil) dvfc-
r^iiai rfv (A«y »aid tliat the toldiera reached «ucA a degree of daintlnest as to he
nntetlUng to drink wine unlea it had a etroag bouquet X. H. C. 2. 0 (direct :
AaT« ofo ^\ar rlxir, with ti retained In indirect discourse). See also 2270 b.

So even when the principal verb takes Sri, as ^rmtg-dru Brt ovtui ^jq i-Art

wipfit T^t 4^''>i 4' A'"'' ■ ' ■ ^' '' vaXXy vartpow reXtvr^oi rif filar let hitn

eoHttder that he Koe then to far adtaneed in pears that he would have died mvn
ttfteneards X. H. 4. 8. 1.

a. The tutnre inflnittve bere represents the future Indicative : ofn-ai inat tit

Tsrwrar tbtfitUt liti) wptpip-^tirat bvrt loJ rnvra irawfiv9i)tntrBiu he thinks that
fon have alreadg reached tueh a degree of timpiicity at to alioio yonrtelvei to be
permaded even of Ihit Aes.3.2.W. Outside of indirect discourse, the future
ioflnlUve with drr* Is rare (-rtr^t^Sai D.Vi.i,thiveat D.29.6).

b. Arr* with the optative in Indirect discourse is very rare (X. H. 3. 6. 23,
L 17. 11).

2270. 3r with the infinitive expressing poseibilitt/, and represent-
ing either a potential indicative or a potential optative, occasionally

foUoWH mrrt (ui«).

L Not in indirect dlsoonrse : raf fioi ol Sail ovrm h reJt Itpdit iai/iatnui Orri nl
tSuiriir ir yr^ru ( = Hiiirijf tym tr or ynlti it) Sri Tfli iiarapxHt ivixt'Sa.i /u Btt
and the god* declared to me to clearly in the tacrificet thnt even a common man
eovld undtrtand that / nu«e keep aloof from tovereigntg X, A. 0.1. Si, it rf

510 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [M71

dff^aXr; ifSir fir«^ui ut nrfitr hr In auAr roAfir (= oUir Iw tri xi8onu') I Aall
inon be aafe from offering any further evU X.C. 8. 7. 27. The difference in
meaning 1h very slight between tlie couBtniction witli the potential optative and
that with liie infinitive with it reprcBenting the putentlol optative.

N. — Rarely in other cases. Thus, tA tl iwrht avrui Itaitra &tTt . . ,
4ii7Til ar ft Hup fiixpir r^ii aArovi ^trTtit (_:= (ppirTot, 2304) but thtir Inter-
nal pnrti were inflamed to turh a dtgree that theg icoald hate been moil glad
to throw themielves into cold water (hod thej/ (teen permitted) T. 2. 4S.

b. In indirect diBCOurae : up' gSr Sate2 rif fi>ii}v dXi^ii/xin otn-ui 'x'" XFtl'^^'"
SltUtiiiat OoTi rapaXiwtir (= TafiAiTtr) St ri ruit raiD^uv ; dott it teem tO an)
one 0/ yoK that Nicndemnt ao debited money that he would have negleettd an)
agreement 'if the tort ? Is. 3. 37.

2271. <oTTc is often used with the infinitive when the infinitive
without aart is regular or more coniiiion.

a. So with many verbs, eapecially of will or desire. Thus, twtirm* roOt 'A*»-
■afotit iiSTt itayarittt in IWkao HivfTfylatit they premiiled upon the Alheniaiu (h)
at) to withdraw the Metteniant from Pylut T. 6. 35, Sute/rrti . , , iKirruir lilt
&fTt fifitxlvaaBat t4» rb\tiar having begged each privately (to at) to vote for the
war 1. Ill), fwaltiva fiorc i6iat Toirif tov rpb% Ipi roMiuv raiaaaBai I brought It
about to that it teemed bett tn him to detitt from warring affaintt me X. A. I.6.S.

N. — Such verbs are: dWxaMOi, S^n^cat aek, aiarpdrrofutc, a>M*jcH, ainiu.
Siraiiai, <MXu, tlpyv, ^Xrlia rinl (x^m, irayy4\\»/tai, tralpv, fxw am ahir,
Uafarbt Tl Tin Ixnirai, a ptiraae witll tafflrraiiat, ivyx'i'P^t Ti^ailtv/it, tcMw
(and Tiipe.irKivd{ti = TCjfv), ri^vta, reiv, wpcSviavfuu, wptrpiwofiat, ^vidrroitai
(2230), ^ir^{)i|uu.

b. Wlien the infinitive lit the subject : rdni yip /lat ittf\.i)irir Oirrc tlt4rtufor it

eoneemed i»e exceedingly to know X. C. 6. 3. 19.

K. — So nitti r^Ti, 7(7rtTiii, etc., Ii(ar when It wat decreed, avri^ (Tbuc),
irui^riirTt, irvr^MtM (Hdt.), r/XKniicci. Cp. 1985.

c. With adjectives, especially such aa are positive in form but faave a com-
parative force and denote a deficiericy or the like 0063) ; as iiutit yip fn t^
brrt rav»\>rtt rpiyiia iuMv6ai for we are ttilt too young to decide to ituportaiU a
matter P. Fr. 314 b. So wilh iiitirii,, 6\lyi,i, i'uxpi', 7'pw' i )Uid with InrAt, iti-
nrot (and with Sirmrfiu).

2272. On tho absolute infiDitive with in (leas often with wrrt)
see 2012.

Sxrre (w?) -WITH A FINITE VERB
2373. Any form used in simple sent«ncea may follow atrrt (rarely
bk) with a fiaite verb, wrc has no effect on the mood of a finite
verb.

a, in Is fonnd especially In Xenophon,

2274. (wrrc M that with the indicative states the actual result of
the action of the leading verb. This is especially common in narra-
tive statements with the aorist tense. The negative is «£.

ai78] RESULT CLAUSES fill

inrimi x^' ^'^fot Ovrt irftptnfit tat t4 JhrXn lal T»4» d»(pt4»ovt ait

(m»Mtu« amount of trune /tit $o that it hurltd bulk the armi and thf m«it X. A.

4.4. tl, cfi TotrovTot uflfitaii ti\Bot But tueunm Ifiat (Kaiietmirir Ihfg reached lUCA
a pitch of iMoience that then permaded you to expel him I. l(i. tl (cp. 2268 a),
>vru 0iai^ tl . . . Star oi iiratax jktX. are yiiv m itupid that j/(iu art not able,
etc. I). 18. 120 (of a definite fuct ; with ;ij) SirarSm ilie meniiing would be to
ttupid at not to be able, expreasing a cliaracttriBtlc), So after tlie locution
TOffoCrou B4u, BS TOffo6T«v iiia rifil tHh ixit rpot^ieApTut litavif elrai \^iiw, ^rt

iitcua jctX. 1 am 10 Jar from able to speak about that wnich duet not refer to

my eiue that I fear, elc. L.1T.1. ii lh very rare : io)ii{i,i otrrat tx'ir uf irotri)-

ttrrmi afrrnC oi tAXmi I coMider that U it the COM that the eilitt lo/II revolt from
Mm X. H.a. l.U.

a. So when &vti lntn>ducmg an independent sentence practically has the
force of tit, rolrvf, Tmiapiiv* and so therefore, conteguently. Tliiia koI <ti iiir
T^r iartpati* ab\ i/tir- £iflf ol'EXXitm ifipimlof and on'tAe next day he did not
cunte ; eontequently the Oretkt were ataioua X. A. 2. 3. 26. Cp. 2276. Tbia um
appears Bometimea with the infinitive : bar i/ii i/iavrir impurit and 90 I kept
atkiag myself P. A. 22 e.

2279. With an imperative, a hortatory or prohibitory Bubjitnc-
tive, or an interrogative verb, a clause with uart is coordinate rather
than subordinate, and wrrt has the force of xai oi^iuf.

Airrr Bippti and DO he iiil afraid X. C. 1. 3. 16, buTt , . . ^J) tavitiaTjt and to
do ii'it trondfr r.l'hae.274a, &«■" wiStr Iriirir; and ko how do they knowf
I). i9. 47.

2276. Sore (£n) occurs rare]y with the participle (instead of the
infinitive) by attraction to a preceding participle (And. 4. 20, X. 0. 7.
6.46, D. 10. 40, 58. 23).

2277. irre (is) may be used with a past tense of the indicative
with dy (potential indicative and unreal indicative).

Totovrir Tl iw<U-<)Vtr in rSi Ar (yru tri t^u^r^ ifisuiri the made a movement to
that every one eoitUi recognize that the heard the mualc aith pleature X. S. 9. 3,
Kart^airrro irdrra aiT66tr AirTe odi &r f\a8tr ath-A* ipiiiiiunt i KX/oir r^ ffTparf
ererylhing wot clearly visible from it, to that Clean could not ha^ie etcaped hit
notice in tettinff nut leith hit fvree T.e.6.

2278. utrrt (uw) is used rarely with the optative without Sv (by
BKsiinilstioii to a preceding optative) and with the potttntial optative
with or.

tf Tit rifp •YvmlKa riir ail* OVTW Sipawtiveur Sere #<X«I» atrlfr ii&Wtr roi'^rwitr
iaurhr 4 '* "T^' ^ *ome one thould pay lurh attention to your wife at to makt
her love him better than yourtelf X.C.&.Q. 30 (cp. 2200), rixrotm SiU tUtu rtrit
iiia% itrai Hvti /uffiffcliji 4* JutaiAr-dr' drSpiliTur yon are to far uiueorthy of com-
passion that fou wiinld be deleited moH juttly of all men D.87.49, dii iv X.Ag.
6.7,X.C.7.ij.37,1.5.«i.

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [«»

CLAUSES WITH Uf ^ AND i^ $Tf tNTRODUCINQ A PR0VT80

2379. J^'uand Itji' ^rt on condition that, for thx purpose o/takeths
infinitive or (less often) the future indicative, and may be introduced,
in the piincipal clause, by the demonstrative im rovnf. Negative fuj.

olpeBirra i^' tfrt svfip^'f'^^ tifiaut having bten chnten for Hu pHTpoat of omr
piling lava X. H. 2. 3. 11, lifurar iroStirtir (toAi kjc/hAt) ^' ^ ^4 xaUtr ni
aUHs the barbarlanH taid thry would turrender the dead on condltioft that he
aouM not burn their house* X. A. i. 2. 10, i^ii/r n, 'rl rs^y /i^rroi, ^' yn
fitlK^i , . . ^iXofTo^ir we reUate you, on Ait eondStion Aoweeer, (Aot irow ho
longer aeafcA a^<r tolsdoTn I'. A. 2S c Future indicBtive : iutfptiaar if! yrt
ifloBir in IlcXararniiriu viAittmSm (al »ii)t^>T( ^i^i^orru ofrQi (ft^ DMUfe aa
agreement on condition ihal thi-y thowld depart from the Peloponnenu under a
truce and never set foot on it again T. I. 103,

a. Tbeae constructiona da not occur in Homer. The future indicative la used
by Herodotus and Tbucydides on the analogy of relative clausea equivalent to
consecutive olauseB. These authors also uae Irl rouiBt tot Irl rokif,

CONDITIONAL CLAUSES

2280. A condition is a supposition on which a statement is based.
A conditional sentence commonly consists of two clauses :

The protasis ; the conditional, or subordinate, clause, expressing a
supposed or assumed case ((/*).

The apodosis : the conclusion, or principal clause, expressing what
follows if the condition is realized. The truth or fulfilment of the
conclusion depends on the truth or fulfilment of the conditional
clause.

a. The protasis has Ita name from wpirMii, tit. Ktretching forward, that wMeA
i* pvt foraard (In logic, a premise) ; the apodosis, from drUoa-if, lit. giving
back, return; I.e. the returning or antteering clause.

a2BL The protasis usually precedes, but may follow, the apodosis.

2282. The protasis is introduced by tt if.

a. Homer has also at, which is an Aeollc (and Doric) form.

2283. With the subjunctive mood, cl commonly takes Sm (Epie a
K< or ci Kcv, not lav).

a. There are three forme, Mv, {{v, 4v. Hr Is the ordinary fonn In Au'e
prose and inscriptions ; Ifr appears In Ionic and in the older AtUo wriiera (Ui»
tragic poets and Thueydldes) ; ir, geaerally in the later wriiers (someUmea tiv
gether with Hr), very rarely In Attic inscriptions. In Plato Jv is commoner
than Mr. Xenopbon has all three forms.

b. 4* is from tl 4 ir, it from 4 (anotlier form of tf) + tr. Tbe Mymidogy
of Mr la uncertain i either from 4 -(- Ir or from <f -t- iiL

i,,Coog[c

iisg] CONDITIONAL CLAUSES 513

aaM. The particle Sy is used in the apodosis ; (1) with the opta-
tive, to denote possibility (cp. 1824) ; (2) with the past tenses of the
indicative, to denote either the uoo-fulfalment of the condition (1786)
or, occasionally, repetition (1790).

2385. The apodosis may be introduced by Si or dXAji, less often by
avrap. See under Particles, tvv Siaa it is, aa it wtw corrects a sup-
position contrary to fact. The apodosis sometimes has rorc, rorc
&^ ovTOK (Horn. T^ comparable to Eng. tkeii, in tltat case in the con-
clusion of conditional sentences.

3286. The negative of the protasis is luj because the subordinate
clause expresses something that is cmtceived or imagined, fi^ nega^
tives the conditional clause as a wfiole. On ou adherescent in prota-
sis, see 2698.

The negatiTe of the apodosis is ot, in case the principal clanse
states the conclusion as a fact on the supposition that the protasis
is true ; foj, when the construction requires tiiat negative (2GS9).

2287. Tbe IndicatlTe, subjnnctiTe, and optotlre moods, and the participle
may stand in protasis Hud apodosis. The imperative and infinitive may be tMed
in the apodosis. The future optative is not used In conditional sentences except
in indirect discourse. The tenses in conditional senteacee, except unreal condi-
tions, liave the same force as in simple sentences.

22aa Instead of a formal conditional sentence the two members
may be simply coordinated, the protasis having the form of an
independent clause.

v/tiKfir XajU TOfidttiy/u^ tal wirra (Cr<i d ^«tXo((ai tatt Ofl ituiffni^kant

exnmple, and you will know what I mean P. Th. IM d, wpirTirti n tQh ti^t
iatodrruw rvfi^pttr- Sifivm Alaxtwv lotnetMng it going on {of a kind) that
tn-mM to be to four advaatage. Aetehlnt* u dumb. D. IB, IDS, Cp. "Take
with yon this great troth, and yon have the key to Paul's writings " (Channing) ;
*> Petition me, peih^n I may forgive " (Dijden). Cp. 1839.

Cl-ASSIPICATION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
A. CLASSIFTCATION ACCORDING TO FORM

2289. Conditional sentences may be classified according to /orm
or fuHCtioa (i.e. with reference to their meaning). Classified
ftccordiog to form, all conditional sentences may be arranged with
regard to the form of the protasis or of the apodosis.
Protasis: tl with the indicative.

Mr (rarely d) with the subjunctive.
tl with the optative.
Apodosis : with tr, denoting what would (nhould) be or have been.

without ir, not denoting what would {ehould) be or Aow btta,
saasK amxtt. —33 i

oogic

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [uft

B. CLA8SIPICATI0N ACOOHDINQ TO rnNCTIOK

229a Greek possesses a great variety of ways to join protasis
and apodosis, but certain types, as in English, are more common
than others and have clear and distinct meanings. In the case of
some of the less usual types the exact shade of difference cannot be
accurately known to us; as indeed to the Greeks themselvefl they
were often used with no essential difference from the conventionsl
types. In the following classification only the ordinary forms are
givfiD.

ACCORDINQ TO TIMB

22SL. This is the only fimotioual distinction that characterizes all
conditional sentences. Here are included also 2292, 2295, 2296.

Protasis: a primary tense of the indicative.
Apodosis : any form of the simple sentence.
«t ravra *oUit, naXiat ntuts ^^U do thui, yov do wdt.

Protasis ; a secondary tense of the indicative.
Apodosis: any form of the simple sentence.

tl ravri l-woaK, KoAwt (iroici! if f/'iH vere doing thig, you mere doing
toett, d ravra tmi^aai, xoXut iwoitiTiit if you did thia, gOU did toeU.

3. Future

a. Protasis: Jdv with the subjunctive.
Apodosis: any form expressing future time.

tav ravra ww^t (roii^j^t), koAue mtigfftK if you do thia, J/OU wiU do
KfU.

b. Protasis : et with the future indicative.
Apodosis : any form expressing future time.

cl rauni voegtrtit, muru if you do this, you will suffer for it.
C. Protasis : d with the optative.

Apodosis: cEv with the optative.
(I ravra womtj^ {miyfatuK), KaXSn i.v muti^ (vnt^mias) if you sAotlU
(((■ere In) do thia, you would do well.

According to FulfUment or Noji-fidfUment

i,vGoog[c

CONDITIONAL CLAUSES

Protasis : <I with the imperfect indicative.
Apodosia : iv with the imperfect indicative.

*t ravra iwouK, naX't &v liraitK ifynn were (now) doing this, gou would
be doingtoell; if you had been doing Ihit, youtoouldhave been doing weU.

2. Put

Protasis : <{ with the aorist indicative.

Apodosis: Sv with the aoriet indicative.

tl TavriL Ivotrfowi, KoAuf Ac ivotT/triK- if you tuifl done thi», you tooubi
have done rcell.

N. — Greek hu no special forms to show that &□ action ti or wom fulfilled,
however oleurly this may be Implied by the context. Any form of coodlUrinal
aentenoe In wblch tbe apodosia does Dot express a rule of action may refer to an
impoMlbUlty.

According to Particular or General Conditions

2293. A particnlar conditioD refers to a definite act or to several
definite acts occairing at a definite time or at definite times.

2294. A general condition refers toau; one of a series of acta
thaA may occur or may have occurred at any time.

2295. General conditions are distinguished from particular con-
ditions only in present and past time, and then only when there is no
implication as to the fulfilment of the ai^tion. General conditions
have no obligatory form, as any form of condition may refer to a rule
of action or to a particnlar act; but there are two common ty[>es of
construction :

I. PrtMent
Protasis: Jav with the subjunctive.
Apodosis : present indicative.

Jof fwra xMgt (»«'j<Tp). <^ irtuya if ever you do this, I always
praise you.

Protasis : d with the optative.
Apodosis; imperfect indicative.

d nuira vomV (vM^tuK), <ri iwgvmtf if ever you did this, I always
prataedyou.

2298. But equally possible, though less common, are :
ci Tovra waUt%, ai irauA and tt Tovra Iroitu, <ri i-rnvovr.

.oogic

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

[M97

TABLE OF CONDITIONAL FORMS
2297. In this Grainmar the ordinary types of conditional sen-
tences are classified primarily according to time. Ths Homeric and
other more usual ranations from the ordinary forms are mentioned
under each olass, the less usual Attic variations are mentioned in
2356 ff. The following table shows the common usage :

Tm

Fou

P««„»

a™™-

Simpl*

it with pteaent or perfect

present or perfect indic-

IndickUve

Pmwjtt

Unreal

«t wiUi Imperfect indicative

&*

Qenenl

tiw wUh eubjancUTe

pteseut Indicative or
equivalent

Simple

it with ImperfecL aorlBt, or

imperfect, aoriet, or pla-

perfeet indicative

Unreal

i( with &oriat or imperfect

aorist or imperfect indic-

ative with &v

General.

it with optative

equivalent

MoroVlTld

Ar with BDbjuactive

ful. indie or equlvalcDt

Fdtdbb

it with future indicative

LeMVMd

i( with optative

iv with optative

PRESENT AND PAST CONDITIONS

First Form of Conditions

SIMPLE PRESENT AND PAST CONDITIONS

329a Simple present or past conditions simply ttaie a supposition

with no inipfication aa to its reality or probability. The prota-sis

has the indicative, the apodosis has commonly the iiidicatiye, but

also any other form of the simple sentence appropriate to tbe

thought.

d ravra vouit, mAut xow"? tfijou do this, j/oh do u-ell.
ti ravra is-otV™*. toAius iWijous if yott did this, you did wkU.
«. This form of condition correapondH to the logical fomiulft \f thlt i» an.
(fcen that it to; 1/ thit it nut »«. then that it not *o ; if A = B, thrn C= It.
Tlie truth of the concluwon depends *olely on tbe Imtb oi tbe condition, which

»3oo] CONDITIONAL CLAUSES 517

ia not Implied in aii7 w»7. In tbeae conditions something is suppoeed to be trae
oulf in order to draw the oonsequeacse that something else is true.

b. The conditional douse may eipreas what the writer knows is physically
impoalble. Even when the supposition U true according to the real opinimi
of the writer, this form of condition is employed. In such caaee itrtp is nfu^ii
used for n. Both tl and tlrtp BometiineB have a causal force (2246) ; cp. »l
quidem and quia.

c The simple condition is parttcolaroTgenerd. When the protasis has (f m
and the apodosia a present indicative, the simple condition has a double mean-
itig referring both to an individual case and to a rule of action. When a present
genera] condition is distinctly ezpreesed, Jli> with the subjunctive is used (2331.)

2299. There are many possible combinations of present and past
conditions with different forms of the protasis and apoilosis. Protasis
and apodosis may be in different tenses, and present and future way
l>e combined.

2300. The apodosis may be the simple indicative or any otiier
form of the simple sentence appropriate to the thought.

a. Simple IndicatiTe : tl raiV' fx« ""Xut, fatra alrTcpHi if thU it excellrnt,
that 1* diagrae^vt Aes. 3. 18B, tl /lir ('AaicXiptUtt) etaO Ijr, oiic Ijr alaxportpS'ii-
ti f <tUxP**'P^'< oitlir fctO ff Agflfptva VMU the son of a god, he leat not covft-
ont; if A« too* eovetout, he tmu not the ton of a god P. R. 40B c, *r ri n lUs

. , . iyittra triKMirar roit'EXXigo'i, rirrur , , . lAtrtax't"' and if any other doil-
S/fT befell the Qrtek*, lee took our ahare in all T. 3. 64, 1j icaUr . . . Tix"ll" 'fa
timiirai, ttwtp x^m^tu In truth you do possett a noble art. If indeed you da
poaen it P. Pr. S19a, (frcfi yt Aiiptlov . . . ^rt wtut .... oit ii^xtl mih' iyi>
Xit^Bfioi if indeed hetaa eon of Dariws, I thall not gain thi» without a buttle
X.A. l.T. 9, KUapxn it rapi radt Sptovi f\ve rat erBrtit, riir tl/ajt fxn Owrain-
tng that Clearehut broke the truce contrary to hi* oath, he has his detrrts
2. 5.41, tl M Sio l( irit i-yam yriintaeor, gdc ^ilr oTriof but if two trials have

been made out of one, 1 am not responsible Ant. 5. B6.

b. IndicBtive with b (unreal indicative, 1T86) : lalrn rbrt . , . rir 'treptlSiir,
tfrtp iiAi)#$ /uu rSr cariri'of'i fu\Xat it tlt^iiit 4 'rirS' iilutir and yet, ^f indred
hie present charge against me is true, h« vmuld have had more reason for
proieevting Hyperidei than he note ha* for proeeculing my client D. IS. 223
(here iw tSluttw implies tl iSlumr, 2308). So also an unreal indicative without

At, 1774: toOto, tl tal rdUa rdrr' dTSffrtpoOrtr . . . iroioSrai t/hw^m* even if
thry tteal everything else, they should have restored this D. 27. ST. In the above
examples each clause has its proper force.

c. SobjnnctiTe of exhortation or prohibition (cp. tlie indicative 9(i or xp4

with the infinitive, 1807): M» ii iw\lwinur twat4\$u)iiit, tl vm 49a;i/iv inTlr

liot let US return to the point whence loe digressed, if it is agreeable to you

P. Ph. 76 b, it fiin tsTt fu TDiai>Tor . . . lafii ^t^r iiiirx^^ if you knoK that I
<M> nKA a man . . . do not eren endure the sound of my voice D. 18. 10.

d. Optative of wish (cp. the indicative ^Xi-lfb) : KiKiar di-eXalHitr, Earfldr tl
M ^Xd may I perish most vilely, if Ida not love Xanthiat Ar. Ran.679.

%. PotontUl optatlTe; hu/iiftHft 1> tl otrtfa / shovii be surprised if you

.o..|c

518 SYNTAX OP THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [.301

tnow P. Ft. 812 c. The potenUol optatiTe (or Indicative with Sr, abore b) some-
times suggaUs !Ui Inference (cp. the indicative JI«hi and iuf . with it). "ThM, d
litr yip toDto \t-iavsif, biuiKritliir tr l7w7< bD larit roi^it (f>«( ^^^Tl*p /Of V "^
mean tAb, Zmiut odntif (It seems to me that I must admit) that I am an orat»r,
bvi not after their ttule P. A. 17 b (cp, ToSri yi «uu Snni nMr tfioi, rf ru
oUi T ctq rultriti* drtf^i^Dui (A<* leetiu to me a fine thing, if any ant shoMU be
able to train men 19 e), tl yifi o(toi dpfuk ji-^irrqcrar, £(ictt i* 06 xf^' 'm*'"
/or if they aere right In revolttnff, yon naut be wrong in holding jfottr Mt^^

T. 3. 40 (cp. eix ipa xp>l *(«• ipx'")-

f. Imperative (cp. the indicative nXnSw order, iTxytpiii* forbid): if ni
irrAtyii, Xeytra if any one object*, let him apeak X. A. 7. 3. 14.

3301. If the protasis expresses a present intention or necessity, the
future indicative may be used.

tl M Kai tQ itytiiim witTt6geiuf ir ftv KSpof Sitif, rl niKtti mU rk ixp* i/iir
mX«^u- KBper wpatLaroXaptU ; but if Vie are going Ui tnut any guide that Cjfna
may give «>. what hinder* our alio ordering Cyrut to oeeupg the helghl* in
a^anee in our behalf f X. A. 1. 3, 16, alpt wX^xTpor, tl lutxtt raiee jfour apitrif
you mean {are going) to fight At. Av. 750. The future here has a modal foroe
■ud eiproooM sometbhig besides futurity ; hence it is equivalent to tUXXta
liaxiiftui (1059), but not to Air MxD (3823) or to «t>iax(r (a threat, SSSS), both
of wliicb refer to future time. The perii^nsia with /iAX« and the pnaeot <r
fotore Infinitive U more common in prow. -

Secoitd I^hrm of Conditions
PHE8ENT AND PAST UNREAL CONDITIONS

2302. In present and past unreal ponditiona the protnsis impli«e
that the supposition cannot or conld not he realized because ctmtiar;
to a known fact. The apodosie states what would be or tooutd have
been the result if the condition toere or had been realized.

2303. The protasis has d with the imperfect, aorist, or plnperfect
indicative ; the apodosis has £v with these past tenses. The protasis
and apodosis may have different tenses. Unreal conditions are
either particular or general.

2304. The Imperfect refers to present time or (sometimes) to a
continued or habitual past act or state. The imperfect may be con-
ative.

cl mvra IvoUk, KoX'TIt Ay 'W(k if you vjere (now) doing thia, yon
woidd be doing well, or if you had been doing this, yon vxndd have been
doing loell.

The implied opposite is a present (AAA* oi xmcTs btU you are not
dotno IAm) or an imperfect (dAA' ovk ivouK but yon toere not doing this).

The imperfect of past time emphasizes the continuance of the
action.

t, Google

»3M] CONDITIONAL CLAUSES 519

Z30S. The Miltt refers to a simple occurrenoe in the past.

d Totrm iroajaat, iniXai; jv Jiroti;<Taf t/ ^U Add done this, you would
kave done vkU.

The implied opposite is an aorist (JAX* ofnt irwtfmn bvt you did not
do thii).

2306. The (rare) pluperfect refers to an act completed in past or
present time or to the state following on such completion.

d ravTu inwoi^K^, itiXat Ay ivtrouJK^ if yoH had JinitJied doing
thi* (now or on any past occasion), you toould have done well.

The implied opposite is a perfect (iXX' oi irtiroiifKat but yoii have
DM done this) or'a pluperfect (i\k' ovk irtirM^icqi but you had not done
this).

«. The ploperfeot is used only when stress is laid on the completion ot the
■et or on the oontinuance of the result of the act, and generally refers to preeent
tliDfl. In reference to past time, the aorist is geuerally used Instead ot tlie
plnperfecL

2307. In reference to patt time, the Imperfect or aorist ts naed according m
either tense would be noed in an afflrmatlve sentence not conditional. The pin-
perfect is commonly used whau the perfect would hsTe been used of present time.

3308. In the form of the protasis and the apodosis of unreal conditions
there is nothing that denotes unrealitjr, but, in the combination, the unreality of
the protasis is always, and that ot the apodusls geoentlly, Implied. The past
tenies ot the indicative are naed in unreal condltioos referring to preeent time,
because the speslcer's thought goes back to the past, when the realization ot the
condition was still possible, though at the time of speahing tlut reallEation is
Impoarible.

2309. Same Tenses in Protasis and Apodoeis. — a. Imperfect ot present

time: raSrra 3i ait >r iSinrra rtuir, tt nil tal Sialrs fitrplf Ixp&rro but Mey

miuld not tit at/le to do thtg, if thej/ teere not alto following a temperate diet
X.C.I. 2. 16.

b. Imperfect of psst time : oix it air riirur . . . irpirtt, tt n^ ri nl mrrmAr
tlx'r aeeordlnply he vmatd not havt ruled over lilands. if he had not poatemed
alio some naeat force T. 1. fl. Present and past combined : tt ^4 rh' twinvr,
lit it O0K titfiuriiair (T / And not lotted then, / thould not be rrjoiting novi
Philemon 163.

C. Aorist of past time : ait ftr iwahivtr 'kyaaiit Tai>ra, it n^ tyA atrbr
it4\mra Affotiai voiild not have donethlf, if I had not ordered him X.A.Q.8.16.

2310. I>Ubreirt Tenses in Protasis and Apodosis.—s. Imperfect and Aorist :

tl flit Tp6a9tr irwitTifi^r, sM* ir frunriiaXsi>Ari'd <rai if I had knovm this btfore, I
loould not even have accompanied ynu X. A. 7. 7. 11.

N. — With an imperfect of present time in the protasis, ciror Iv, irttpiri/i^r
tt and like rerbs, denote an act in present time (/ thould at once lan). Thus,
(t h4 Ttt-rijp ^ff, thou it tr ait d) ^parttr if thou teert not my f<Uhtr, I tooulit
My (would hare said) thou uojt unuiiae 8. Ant. 766, Often In Plato, as tt yir

620 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTEKCE [9311

•0' ri tu ^tpiirii rt rOr rCr Si), tlrer ir ktX. (f nou foti vitrt asking me any om
<)f the qwMtioiu vith vihifJi vie are now dealing, I rtoufd soy etc, P. Euth. 12 d,
op.P.(}. 514d, X.A. T.6.28.

b. Impcrfoct sad Pluparfsct 1 mt rlXV A* Ararr* (UaXeMwt roirraii hri-rfiiicre,
tt rii ^(IBrrJ /ui anil eterj/thitig else would have been rffeeted contUte-Mlg loilA
what I have taid, if my advice had been followed D, 19. 173.

c Aoiiit And Imperfect : il lii) tialt ^9m, twopeu6iitSt ir twl ffariXda if yiw
had not come, im thould now be marching aifaimtUu king X. A. 2, 1.4.

d. AOfilt and Plaper&ct : tl tyi riXai trrxtipw rpkmtr rk raUruA Tftr-

iiMTn, T^Xoi ftr di-aXdXii ^f I had long ago ettayed to meddle with polUiet, I
thould long ago have perished P. A. SI d, tl fda ^^^i /urirtrtr, ttrtptipt^ iw
if one vote had been tran^erred to the other side, he would haw been transported
across the borders (and now be in exile) Aes. 3. 252.

a. Pluperfect and Imperfect : 4 r6\ii IM/ifiartr ir afnir, tl n ^Bfinrra the
Slate would inflict punishment, if it had been wronged Ant. 8. 10.

t. Plaperfect and Aodat: ei* ir wapf/aira, tl l\t\iniir I should not hare

staged, if Ihad been free Ant. G. 13.

2311. Homeric Conetnictiona. —In Homer the Imperfect In unreal condi-
tiona lefera onlj to past time. The apodosia may have c/ or Ir with tlie opt«live.

K> The present unreal condition with tl with the optative in the protasia »nd
ir wltb the optative In the apodoala (in/oi-m like a less Tirid fatnre coDdition
in Attic} 1h Tery rare {* 274). In B BO, R 220 we have a combination of » past
protasia (Imperfect or aorlst indicstive) with present apodosia (with K4r and
the optative).

!>. Fast nnreal conditions have, in tiie protasis, the imperfect or aorisl Indic-
ative ; In the apodosia, either ilie Imperfect or aorlst indicative with tr or ii4 or the
aorlst or present optative with ti. Thiu, inl ri ttr (•$' IriXoira . . . A.lrttm%, li
pii if 6^1) riifit . , . ' k^paStrii and here Aeneas had perished, if Aphrodite Mad
not gvickly ohaemed him E 311.

2312. Unreal conditions with ir and the optative in apodosls (cp. 2311) in
Attic are iKie and some are suspected. Either the common reading is at lati:*.
(X. U. 3. 6. 6), or we have a simple condition with a potential optative (2300 e),
aa In And. 1. 67, L. f>. 39, I. 4. 102. In tl ,iir rotrur T»ffr" /rex'!^"' Mytir ....
oixtaS' Iff-Tii d6k ir rdiridf Ariri^Vd/ fui if now I mere attempting to saff fAm.
there would be no orte who ^eould not censure meviith good reason (D.ie.2««J
the implied conclusion is oit ir ffr Do-Tit htK

a. The optative In protasia and apodosia occnr in E. Med. 668 (present unreal V
HdL vaee the potential optativQ occasionallj {e.g. 7. 214) where English uses a
past e^ressioD,

UNRSAL CONDITIONS —APODOSIS WITHOtJT iv

2313. avinay be omitted in the apodoais of an unreal condition
when the apodoais consists of an imperfect indicative denoting un-
fulfilled obligation, possibility, or propriety. Such are the imper-
sonal expressions IBet, }(/>^v, i&jtr, ciccK ^v, itaXiiv ^v, etc., with the
infinitiTe, the action of which is (usually) not realized.

1316] CONDITIONAL CLAUSES 521

draSm two£u,tSu(ii^y)ainS<f^aiTor if he were doing this (as he ie
not), one ought to {migid) blame kim.

tt ravra iiroafatf ?Sh ('i^v) oirtoinurAu (or ofriatrAu) avriv if he
had done this (as he did not), one ought to {might) luiva blamed
him.

m. Here n« and iiHr are auxiliaiies and the emphaslB falls on the inflnitive.
Hie Impeisonal verb has the effect, of a modifying adverb denoting obligation,
poeaibili^, or propriety : thus titi oiTiarBat ah-iv la virtually equivalent to auroiwt
ft* griAro, and titii 1)r atriicaadiu airiw to fla^rui ir pridAj he woutd proptrlff

ham been biioaed.

b. f5(i, xpv', etc., may be used In simple sentences (1771 ff.) without any
protasis either expreBsed or implied. But a protasis may often be mi^Iied tn
tbonght.

2314. The present infitiitive generally espresaes what towild nece»-
aarilif, possibly, or properly be done now. The aorist, and sometimes
the present, infinitive expresses what toottid necessarily, possibly, or
properly have been done in the past.

a. Praseot Inflnltire of present time : xp^r J^ou, rfrt nrit airSn wpt^pirtpoi

ytrilirrot lywaaar In rimi aBau aArott iyilt kokSf xiJitot^ ti Jii«3ofiV«wa, nr\ oiroij
dpofialnimLt l/mS tanrtiifif </ »ome of Aem on grotning older had perceivfd that
I ever gave them anj/ bad eountel wAen they toere j/oung, then ought of eouru
now to riie tip in pcrton ajtd acritte me P. A. 33 d.

b. Present InflaitlTe of past time: (t nra (rpaUa^ tBlBov, tltit 4' koI r^r
5e«turaT irb rUr rapayewiirdai ^ocrcirrur /ui/irupt(ir0(» if ht had given ang dowry,

that whieh vai actuallg delivered teould natumlly have been attetted bp thote who
claimed to have beenpresent la. 8. 2fi.

C. Aorist infinitive ot past time : tl i^aSKrra Sitaut ttnu wtpl rait raiS«. I(^r

■fry /uaBOm Tit altar If he had teiehed to btjugt ia regard to the eKildren,

A« might properly have let the houie L. 82. 2S.

2315. With Ibe same impersonal eipreBSions, ir ts regularly need when the
obligatiun, poasEhility, or propriety, and not the action of the verb dependent on
tSti, eU;., is dpnied. Ilere the main force ot the apodosis falls on the neceaiity,
pueslbilily, or propriety of the act.

il mSra troltt, ISci (/f^r) ir alTiafBai ah- j' if he Were doing thit (uhe is not),
ft would be neceisary (pottlMf') to blame him; but, as the case now stands, il is
not neeeasary (possible). Thus, tl /tlr ^rurrii^upa aa^Ctt frt 4f(i rXoui , , . Sfwr
Utad, oiSir irISa ir /iiWu X/yfir if we knew for Certain that he would return
with a tnjflcifnt number of vtneU, there would be no nefd to tag what I am

going to tay (but there Is need) X. A. Ti. 1. 10, rain-a tt iiit Si' iaBirtiar iria-xeit'i
0riprftir ir ^r iriyxii r^r Ti^xf' V we had enffered this beeanae of our Weai-

neu, we shoutd have (necessity would compel us) to rest content with owf
lot L. 33. 4.

2316. With dr, it is implied that the obligation does (or did) not exist;
without ir, it is implied that the action of the dependent inlliiitlve la (or was)

1= Coo^^lc

522 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [ijij

Dot realized. Thua the first senteDce In 2-116. without d>, would mean : if ht
vxre doing thi* (an be iu not), one ought to blame him; but, ss Uie case now
stands, one does not blame hltn.

2317. IffovXofnjv, or fjSouAoftijK iv, with the infinitive maj stand in
the apodoaia. Cp. 1782, 1789.

2310. Av 13 regularly omitted in an apodoais fonaed by the imper-
fect of |iiXX« and the infinitive (usually future) to denote an unful-
filled prist intention or expectation (cp. the Lat future parttcipla
with ej-am or fui). Cp. 18!)5 a, 1960.

. . . Ittwti ill sooth I was like to have perished in my halls bf the evil fate of
Agamemnoa, hadst tkoK nut spoken rSg^l (jwriturus eram, nitidixiMe*).

2319. S.V may be omitted with the aoriat of nvSirrin run a riak

when the emphasis falls on the dependent infinitive.

tl iiii Spi)Uf tii\n ify^i-tiiiitr lit &t\ipo6!, imrSurtiaaiar iw9\fvtai if we had net
eKaped teith diJUcuUij to Delphi by taking to our hee.la, we ran the ritk of perish-
ing C = UK should probably have perished ; ir irwMiitSa) Aes. 3. 123. Contmt
tl iidrrci t6ti tXeIoui iriinX/7i7ira>, imwiirre^fr tr Sui^Safif)wai wti.li roG rrpardl^MTn
if they had m'liCered In larger force at thi» time, a large part of the troopa wmiM
have been in danger of being destroyed X. A. 4. 1. 11.

2320. Some expressions containing a secondary tense of the
indicative without 3y, and not followed by a dei>endent infinitive,

are virtually equivalent to the apodosls of an unreal condition.

r<i6T(f )■ tl itli aiio^iywr t oDroi tpoiXtTB, oMciu? i^atf '»ox<" ?' 6mI if thry
had not acknowledged to him \ohal he wished, he would have been (liL too*) lia-
ble to no penalty L. 7. 87.

a. Imperfects (not impersonal) without it are often emended, as i^x^'il'V
lUrrat (some editors (i/irac), tl irrb Tt\tiiiav ft itrot <ti|TonS#5» I shoMid, hov-
ever, be aehamed, if I had been deceived by any one who wasaa enemy X. A.T.6.
21. Cp. " Tybalt's death was wrie enoufh, if it bad ended there " (Sh»keqp.).
Cases like 1895 a do not belong liere.

FUTURE CONDITIONS

2321. Future conditions set forth suppositions the fulfilment of
which is still undecided. Tliere are two main forpiB of future cod-
ditions ;

More Vivid Future conditions.

Less Vivid Future conditions,

A variety of the fir^^t class is the Emotional Future (2328).

Future conditions may be particular or general {2293, 2294).

2322. The dWerpnce bptwpen the More Vivid Future and the Lett Vivid
Future, like the difference between if I {shall) do this and if I should do thit,
depends on the mental attitnde of the epe^cer. Wltit the Ti*id Fuum the

13*4] CONDITIONAL CLAUSES 623

speaker sets fonh n thought m prominent and distinct In bis nilnd : and Tur aay
one or mure of various reasons. 'I'huB, he may (and generally does) regard tlio
coQcluaion as more likely to be realized ; but even an impossible (2;<£2 c) or
dreaded reiiult may be expressed by thia form if Lbe speaker cbooaes to picture
tbe result vividly and distinciiy. The More Vivid Future is thus used whenever
the speaker clearly desires to be graphic, iuipressiTe, emphatic, and to anticipate
a future result with the distinctness of the preseciU

The Less Vivid Future deals with suppoBilions less distinctly conceived and
of lev immediate concern to the speaker, mere aasumed or imaginary cases.
This is * favourite construction in Greek, and is often UNed in stating supposi-
tions that are merely possible and often Impossible ; but the forui of the condi-
tion Itself does not imply an expectation ot the speaker that the conclusion may
powf&Ijf be realized. The difference between the two forms, therefore, in not an
inherent difference between prohable realization in the one case and poanOAe
realization in the other. The same tlionght may often t>e expressed In either
form without any easential difference in meaning. Tlie only difference is, there-
fore, often that of temperament, tone, or style.

a. Mr with the subjunctive and tl with the optative are rarely used in anc-
cenWe Mntences. In most such cases the difference lies merely in the degree
of distinctness and emphasis of the expression used ; but where tlie spraker
wishe* to show that the conclusion is expected or desired, be uses Mr with the
■nbjuncUve rather than the other form. Thus, tt oVr ISeitr lal tif taSiwtp roit
roXkoit tf lUirijiifiplf /it) Sia\tyii /if limit, dWi n>irr(i{)»7iit Kal ti)\auiUmis A^' aiVriSr
tl ifiytar T^ Jiarofat, Sitalui it KaTa-ft\iftr ■ . . . iar If ipfio-i SioKryouinivi . , .,
rix *' *"'' 47wWrT« If now they ihnuM sft that irf. Ilka the many, are wt
anieerKing at noon-day hut sliimbfring and cliariaed by them bfcanse of lite in-
dolence of our Ihiivghts, they would rightly laugh at us ; but if they tee n» eon-
veriinif, they will, perhaps, out of admiralton miike us gifts V. Pbae. 25U a.

b. Cases of both forms in successive sentences are I 135, IIdt.8.21, 9, 4A;
P. Cr. 61 d. Ph. 106 b, Fhae. 260 n, Pr. 330 c-PM a, 0. 4. 1 1. IS. 147 -H8. In D. 18.
ITS both the desired and tbe undesired alternative have Mr nith the subjunctive.

c. Impowlbitities may be expresned by Mr with the subjunctive. Thus, rf
oSr, tw dwucir oi r6iioi; what, then, if the taws say f P. Or. 60c; cp. P. lilu. 29U b,
R. fllO a, S12 b (opt. in 8G9 c, 360 b), Ar. Aves 1042, E. Ot. 1693, Phoen. 1210.
Op. 282Bft.

Tliird Form of Conditiona
MORE VIVID FUTURE CONDITIONS

3323. More virid future conditions have in the protasis tav (Ij*, &v)
with the subjunctive ; in the apodoais, the future indicative or any
other form referring to future time.

law T-iUTo iroejs [irovqtrgi), KoAuif 7roi)Jtr(is if yOH do thia, yott Kill do
tcell.

624 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [3315

Modem English enbsUtales the present for the more exact, future in oidfnarj
future conditions of this class ; and often uses tliall in the protasiii with ftn emo-
tional force, Tbe Englisb present suhjiinctive, although somewhat rarely used in
the modem language, corresponds more nearly to the Greek subjunctive ("if she
be there, he shall not need " : Beaumont and Fletcher). — Since i/you do Ikit maj
be expressed in Greek by iar raiSra roif i ur tl raOra roil^cit (2^28), and by tl

ToDra null (U2HS), the diSerfnce In meaning is made clear only by the apodoais.
The form iir raiha vaipt in vivid future conditions must be distinguished from
the same form In present general conditions {(f ewr yiu do thit, 2337). iir
raCrd ir« Boti, Tolci raay be particular or general ; if (or ff ever) thU teems pood
to j/on, do it.

2325. The present subjunctive views an act as continuing (not completed);
the aorist subjunctive as simply occurring (completed). Neitlier tense has any
time of itaelf. The aorist subjunctive may mark the action of tlie protasis as
completed before the action of the principal clause (cp. the Lat. future perfect).
Ingraastve aorists (1924) retain their force in the subjunctive.

2326. The apodosis of the more vivid future condition is the
future indicative or any other form of the simple sentence that refers
to future time.

a. FntuM IndicatlTe ; 4ar fFV^ xaXiSi, (^rrtii if jfou arek ieelt, yon t/kall
find v. G. 503 d, tit J* (x"*"' XP^f«*'i 'fow ^i^owt if tee have monrg, vie shntl
havefrfendt Men. Sent. 186, xd/"'7*fr»o/uii, ^«» dmntijT* J ehall be grtOffnl _ ifj/ou
listen F. Pr. 310 a, it a^f iiSifi ip-ytipusr tal rtiS^t a&rii; vai4"> 'i' vi ro^r if

you give htm money and persuade htm, he will make you too wife SIO d, Qr 7^

raCro Xipuiitr, ai Svrifartai lUntir fur if vie take this, they Kill not be able 10
remain X. A.3.4.41, iir KitXtv twl r^t wipufitfitlai \t)^9i S60 rvxirra aiiiuia, 4
^1 tA ff^fifia triievyniitirTi t66t7a ifrii xtatiTot tm KiKkm If any tao point* be
tateniu the drcHm/erenee of a etrele, the ttralght line vihieh joins them shall fall
teithin the circle Euctid 3. 2.

b. Primary Tenses of the tudlcalive other than the future, Preaent (1870) :
4* Mrgi ti, iraif Jtf iii4t6yti ii^r if thou art slain, yon bog escnpes death
K. And.Sai, SISuw' itiir trtlntir JavrAr. j}» HBt 'ftveBg \iyuw freely he offers
himself to death. If he liet In ipeaking thus (iliiMi = lie says that he is
r«ady) S. Pliil 1342. Aorist ; see 1II3I. and cp. tl ^i, k' bWi ^mr TpA^, wO^w
ifufii/iix'-'ni'i, fiXfTo i^y iioi rio-Toi (/* / tarry here and vmge viar abunt the ritg of
the Trojans, my return home is lost for me I 413. Perfect 1 see IBM. I'p. '■ if
I shall have an answer no directlier, I acD gone"; Benuinont and Fletcher.

c. Subjunctive of exhortation, prohibition, or dpliberalion, and wifh hi} ((ij of)
of doubtful assertion (1801), Tliiis,/ii|a' trri lifH/au, Il>v, Vw^S rtiirtfn rpiA-
nirra irCir. tpuuai, Axiaon Tu^cf; Frpn if lam buying nomftfiilig. said he. am I nut
to ask ' vthnt do ^nu s'll it for f ' if the seller is nailer tliittfi years I'fagef X. M. 1. 2,
30, nif ^aimiiuSa dJiia aOrit ipyajliixtTW, lit) oi tif iroKoyltttSai ktX and ifVM
appear to do this uttjvstly, I rather think it may nvt be necessary to take notice,
etc. P. Cr. 4a d.

i. Optatlre of wish, or potential optative with ir ('something maf happen^
tiial«ad of ' somethini; alll happen '). Thus, 4r rt n>u Xmtou rar' d^\w/iai xf't'ow.

13K] CONDITIONAL CLAUSES 526

., . nUur' irokeliait if ever in the future I take thfm ateag flvm fOH, maj/ 1 per-

Mmoit n'leltr/ At. RfUl.580, Jaf (arA |i/pol ^vUrrufuv . . ., ^Tntr tr Siraim

4fu> fnpir al toX/>um if we keep guard bjf turnt, the eitemg will (_Kovld) be (en
oihtoAarrjf mX.A.5.1. 9. S«e also 23fi6 a.

e. ImpeiatlTa, or iDflnMre for the imperoUve (2013) ; 4)t rdXivat ol^^^t,
PV^i 4(rT( ItOpt dxv ArXur (Tpoti chooM uar, do not eome here again without

touranu X.C.a2.13, ri S\ Ar rt (xgt ^riir ro$tr ijifittr, impiaeiu mi iftal

fwraSii&rcu but if gou can find aiiglhing b^ler from aiij/ quarter, try to com-
nunfcate it to me tuo V. CraC. 426 b.

2327. Homeric Conatnictlaiia.— a. el alone without nt or dr with the tub-
janctive with no appreciable difference frora «f w (*») : rf xtp yif t* BaTo-
n-irp, 00 ir' . . . ic\a,6aBiuu far i/he slay thee, Ithall not beteail thee X 80. Thia
constructioa occurs iu lyric and dramatic poetry, and In Ildt. , as iwrdXura tSp'
ty<i, a tov attinida irretcked indeed ihall I be, if I am deprived of thee 8. 0. C.
1143. la AtUc prose it is verjp rare and euepecUd (T.6.31).

b. Sabjunctive with id in both protasis and apodoais (the anticipatory sub-
jqdcUtb, 1810) ; (lit n nil Siijtair, iyA St xn a^bt fXufuu and ^ he do not give
her up, (Aen uill / leise her myielf A 824.

C. <I (of) (I with the future in protasie (rare) : rot . . . Uniin trrrrat, tl c'
'ixi^vn . . . traipar . , . Kim iijchvavm it teUl be a r^>roafh unlii thee, if the
dogtdrag the enmpanion of Aehillet F56T. Some read here the aubjupctive.

2328. Emotional Future Condltlona. — When the protasis expresses
strong feeling, the future indicative with d is commonly used instead
of iaw with the subjunctive, and may often be rendered by 3Aa/{.
The protasis commonly suggests something undeaired, or feared, or
iateoded independently of the speaker's will ; the apodosia oommonly
(■onveyB a threat, a warning, or an earnest appeal to the feelings.
The apodoais is generally expressed by the future indicative, but
Other forms of 2326 are possible.

tl Toura X/fiif, ix^ofti fli' it iiuv if thou apeakest thu», (htm wilt he hated by
hmS. Ant. 03, iliiii KoMffit 'yXiSvirar, fvTH roi xajid if you Won't hold your tongue,
there' t tronble inetorefor pou E. frag. 6, dT«r(i><;t 7dp, d fie 7% Ifu pa^ii fur
thou wilt Klay me if thou shalt thrutt me out of the laj\d E. Phoen. IH-^il, il &S(
^TfiaTtvtrifiiSa, «6 ivin)<r6iiiOa iiAx*"^" if we keep the field thut, we ihall not be
able to fight X. C.6. 1. 13, J^i^aret Sr ytniniir (potential Optative), ti ^uyit
iSltirt KaTOfT^eiuu I ghould become most wretched, were / to be driven unjustly
intoexile L.T.41.

a. When el with Che future indlcatiTe is directly contrasted with Mr with the
sabjonctive, the former usually presents the unfavourable, the latter the favour-
able, alt«matiTe. Thus,

4r M* yhp i6f\uim iraBriratr &rtp rQr Saalur, (Moci/i^rofur . . ,, tl Si ^Pt-
<rjfM0a ToOt mritnaiii, tit roXXat rapaxiit tar ttf Tiff efur 4^f n^rvta if we are («AaII

be) v)Ulinf> to die for the take of juttiee, we thalt gain renown; but if we are
going to fear dangen, we thtill bring ourtehet into great confiiglon I- 6. 107.
Cp. X. C. 4. 1. 16, Ar. Nub, 58«-6fll, L. 27. 7, I. 12. 237, 16. 130, 17. 9, D. 8. 17,
18.170, 27.20-22. Both conetructlona are nuely oaed In sooceaaive claoaes with-

526 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [»3»«

out any essential difference (X.Ap.6). tir with the subjunctlTe, when used Id
threats or warnings, is a milder form of atAiement than «l with the fuiQie (Hdt.
l.Tl). An unfavoimble alternatlre may thus be expressed bj Mr with tbemb-
Junctive (A135-137, H(lt.3.3tt. Ae«.3.264).

b. d wiLh the future indicative may have a modal force like that of Sit or
fiAXu (am (o, mutt) with the iJiflnitive : ffaptitt (dtp), tC riKw^r JotEw hard It
fiUe, if I muft »Uty my child A. Ag. 208. The future of present tnteation (2301 )
is difiereaL

Fourtk Form of CondiiioM

LESS VltID FUTURE CONDITIONS

2329. Less vivid future conditions (s/ioiiW . . . vx>uid conditions)
have in the protasis tl with the optative, iu the apodosis av with the
optative,

tl rovTa votoaji, koAiSs fiv irotot'i^s or tl ravra. TMiTtTcuts, icaAu« &v irocijcrciai
if you should do Ihia, you would do well.

(fift •popitrlit d6k ir, il wpirmit (bXwi thou woiildst be unendura^ ahovld^
(Aou be pro^terout A. Pr. 979, <i If irayiiaior tin iSncttr 4 lUinifffai, it^t/iitr ir
itaWor itiairetu I) iSiKtIr but if it thoiild be necessam la do viroim or he
mronyed, I should prefer to be wronged than to do wrong P, G. 469c, Jn*i
Sv <ti]v tlpyaaiUmi, . . . el Xlroi/u r^r rdfir I ihuuld be in the *iale of haviitg
commiaeda dreadful deed, if I were to desert mypoM 1*. A.28d.

a. Anyttting pliysically impossible may be represented aa Eupposable, hence
this construction may be used of what Ih contrary to fact. Thus, ^ah) f Atif
eanO^dy' il tputiit Mpoi the dead utould ipeak if gifted with a mice 8.BL&18.
Cp. A.Ag. 87, F. Fr. 381 a, Eu. 209d, and see 2311 a, 2322c.

3330. Conditional aentences of tbls class arose partly from optatives of
wish (1614, 1815), partly from potential optativea (1B24). Cp. tW fii 4|9<iMfu
. . . TV at Tdx drTi}irc« ii^x^* ■ ■ ■ 'EiiTwp vsovld that I were thut young . . . t«
that case Hector would soon find hie combat H 157 ; see also f 193.

2331. The present optative views an action as continuing (not completed) ;
tlie aorist optative, as simply occurring (completed). (The future optative U
never used except to represent a future Indicative in indirect discourse.) The
perfect (rare) denotes completion with resulting state. In fldt.7.214 it is used
vaguely of the pael : tiitlii iiir yip ir . , , rairiir riit iTpatbr 'Or^rjit, tl rj x^P9

ToXXd iw'Xii«ii *'■•> for Onetee might know of this path . . . \f he had betn «d«U
acquainted tctih the country.

2333. English leould is equivocal, being used either In the translaUon id <*
with the optative or of it with the past indicative (2302). Thus, cp. tt tIi r<
lipera . . ., rlir irtnptMa; if any one had aeked you . . ., what would you have
replied t with tl oEr Tit 4|iwt . . . Ifiaitt . . ., ri ir air^ dTSK/iinl/utfa ; if (AeM
some one should (irere to) aek ut . . ., what would {should) we rqdy to Ua« r
I*. I'r. 311 b, d. // / were may be used to translate biith tl with the optative knd
tl with the past indicative. English shows examples of were io the protania

133S] CONDITIONAL CLAUSES 527

followed bjr would, ihalt, wOt, is (wu, eta.). Were ocean alao in apodosig
("ihoold be be routed out of sleep to-Dight, it were nut well " : Shelley).
3333. The apodosis has tbe optative without av in wishes.

tl iiir iniiifice\*6»uu A ^Arirrd itai Sont, roXXd ^i cat iyaSi yiniTo }f I ihould
ffiee the advice that teemt beit to me, may maag hieaaiags fall to mg lot X. A.
5.U.4.

On the optative with <t followed by other forms of the apodosis,
see 2359.

2334. Homeric Conrtmctions. — a. In the proU^, cf ti (d it) nil!) the
opUtive with the same force aa tl alone. This use ia eicluaively Homeric.
Thoa, od /lir yap ri cui^cpor S\Xo rdOoifu, ntS' et ttr toS rarpij iroijiBi^titoa
irii*ei>H» for I wttld nut fMffer angthtng worse, not even if 1 should learn of my
falAtr's death T 3^1. Uii tl &w in AtUc, see 2363.

b. In tbe apoduaiH, a primary tense of the Indicative : the present (ir 62), the
future (I SB8), tbe future with W (fi 315 : but this may be tbe aoHat sub-
JuncUve).

c In the apodoela, the hortatoiy stibjuuctlve ('1'8D3), the subjunctive with
fa or ri (A 386).

d. In the apodoets, the optative without if not In a wish, but with tbe i<ame
foroe as the optative with ir. See T 321 In a.

«. For ni with the optative in the apodosis where we should expect, in
Homeric and Attic Greek, a past indicative with ir (ri) In an unreal condition,
we 2311 b.

GENERAL CONDITIONS

3335. General conditions refer indefinitely to any ant or series
of acta that are supposed to occur or to have occurred at any time ;
and without any implication as to fulfilment.

The if clause has the force of if ever (wkenever), the conclusion
expresses a repeated or habitual action or a general truth.

3336. Any simple or unreal condition of present or past time, or
any future condition, may refer to a customary or frequently re-
[>eated act or to a general truth. But for the present and past only
(when nothing is implied as to fulfilment) there are two forms of
expression : either a special kind of conditional sentence or (less fre-
quently) the simple condition, as regularly in English and in Latin :

Protasis : tiv (= Hr irort) with the subjunctive ; apodosis:
the present indicative (2337).

Protasis: ri (= uxort) with the present indicative; apodo-
sis : the present indicative (2298 c, 2^12).

Protasis: tl with the optative; apodosis: the imperfect
indicative (2340).

Protasis: ci with the imperfect; apodosis; the imi>erfect
{2298 c, 2342).

I;,C.00J^[C

6^8 SYNTAX OP TBE COMPLEX SENTENCE [1337

A. By wuoa of the put tkpodoaie, the oputire in the protaais refers to the
pMt. Only In this use (lUkd when the optative io indirect dlKOuise represeuia %
■pux indicative) does the optative refer dtstincUy to the past.

b. The present anbjnnctive and optative view the action aa continuing (not
completed) ; (he aorist Bubjunctlve and optative, an simply occnrring (com-
pleted). Ilie tenses of Ibe prota^ have no time of themselves, but usnally
the action of the present ts relatively contemporaneous with, the action of the
aorist relatively antecedent to, IJie action of the main verb.

c. The indicative forme in the protasis are more common In temporal and
relative sentences. Observe that It is the character of the upoiotU alone whic^
distinguishes the special liiud of general condition from the two lonns of future
conditions.

Wifih Form, of Conditions

PRESENT OENBKAL CONDITIONS

2337. Present general conditions have, in the protasis, tSar (^i-, ov)
with the fiubjiiii<!tive; in the apodosis, the present indicative or an
equivalent, ihv raOm rotgt (iroiij^), tri Imuvm if ever you do this, I
always praise you. The conclusion holds true of any time or of all
time.

•fr I' iyyis fUp Mmrai, oMdi jSo^Xn-oi Bri^ttir bvt if death drawt near, no
on« tvisAe* Co die E. Ale. 671, yt\f 4' i nH/m, nir n ^1) 7cX«at i the/ool taught
nan if tkert it iwtliiTig to lavgh at Men. SenUlGS, far laaittaa Tpoariei, TiS>*
ivrlw tfa if eqvali be added to equali, the teholea art equal Euclid, Ax. 2.

3338. The gnomic aorist ii equivalent to the present IndicaUve in apodoeia

fr ti ra reCrvt ri rapafialr^, fiiiilir aireii twiSaat but if anf one ever fraio-

grauet ann one of tke*e regulations, Iheg always impose punieKment upon tkeit
(Aim) X. 0.1.2.2.

3339. Homer and I^adar prefer d to Mr or rf n (A 81 ) ; and this il is some-
times found in Attic poetry (S. Ant. TIO). in is more often absent in general
oonditiona ttian in vivid future conditions.

Sixth Form of Conditions
PAST GENERAL CONDITIONS

3340. Past general conditions have, in the protasis, cf with the
optative; in the apodosis, the impei-fect indicative or an equivalent
tl ■narm wtnoiift (votijaciat), oi i'wijvinn' if ever you did tMs, I always
praised you.

et woi Ti ifKfTi ppvrdr, SttilSav if ever he taa anything to eat am/where, he
always dtitribuUd ft X. A. 4. 6. 8, (( Si tIj nt d)T«(»o(, liBAi . . . iTi6rf,at bvt
if any one eeen wade ait olyeetion, he wo* promptly pvt to death T. 8. 6fi, tl iiir
ivt»ut tl 'AhrrauH, ^axi^uf, (1 f iraxupiilft, twinttrrB if the Mhenian* od-
vaneed, theg retreated; if they retired, they fell upon them T.TO, Mfd f tin
■aMr TpdrroMr, roftrrmre I' tt rii rufi^iya rufifiairti he honotmd them if evpi

1= Coo^^lc

»343l CONDITIONAL CLAUSES 62&

tiuv perfenaed tome noble action, aad ilood bg Uieoi in ttmei ofmi^ortune (IIL
if anjf mitfortune befell) X. Ag.7.3.

a. Tbe optative Is here sometimes caJled the iterative optative. Tbia mood
baa however no iterative force in itself, the idea of repetition being derived solely
fnim the context. In Homer the iterative optative after rl (found only 11 768) la
an extension of the iterative optative in temporal clausea where this use origl-

2341. The iteiatire imperfect or aorist with it (1804, IflSS) : tl ti nt airQ
rtpl Tou dmX^TM . . ., iwl rJjtp iw6$tviy trarijytr arriyra t4» \6rie* t/ever anji
one ojyposfd Mm on ang maltrr, he would always bring the entire diseutsion
back (u the main point X. M. 4. 0. 13, tl nt airv Sonlv . . . §\ajn6ii*, hinyi-
/am rir twir^Stier tMoivt* Ar if ever any One teemed to be lagging, he leovld
always plek oiif the likely man aud ttrike him X. A. 2.3. II. These cases ara
not to be confused with the apodoaes of unreal conditions.

INDTCATIVR FOltM OK GKNEItAL CONDITIONS

2342. Present: protasis, d with the present; apodosis, the present.
Past: protasis, v. with the imperfect; apodosis, the imperfect.

The protasis usually has ri Ttt, tt n (cp. fa-rit, S n) with the indicative, as rf
Tii S6o 4 iR>' ri rtittaot ^/lipat Xo^f^oi, iiAriuds tvTir if ever any one conntt vpon
tiru or even perchance on more day*, he it rath S.Tr. 644, i^vOipui Si . . .
wv^lrtOo/ur . , ., oi ii ipy<it rtr rf\at, ll taS' ilSor^r ti ipf, Ixorrcf we are
Uihrant in our public life, not being angry nt our neighbour \f he act* at he
libea T. 2. 37, t4 iiir iyiiyiifa, tt ti Ijyo: iimpoi^mi ^AXaxai taBtiTTairat taking
o'lt the eargoft, if the veSHels carrird anything, they appointed guard* X. A.
a. [. lA. tt Til TI iriipilrri, dniplimrTo if ever anybody a»ked any question* [for
nililitlonal informalion) they antvrred '['. 7. 10, iiOen oiK tt tii (aiwi rdsj^wv
^iLbrtro, iW (I Tit ttt/ryiTaiuftot ix^f'rot tfiaimra (2.140) he. hated not the man
fh/i, on tuffering ill, retaliated, but him who teemed ttngratefiil though he had
rfeieed kindnete X.Ag.ll.S.

2343. The same period may show different forms of conditional
sentences according to the exigency of the thought.

ra(>r4 Tolwtin Toifr' It ireiTiat ♦iXiirirot, (f Ti^a ninaiv eJSt Slnir Sirra, Kat rSr, Ir
ZSg, ToiV' thit rery »ame thing then Philip Kould have done, if he had teen
nay one of these men being pitninhed; and uiill do tn now, if he teet U
l>. 19. im, ll o»t triBuMtU tiSaxi,u7r . . ., rttfiCi tariirrifafeiu in ^uiXvra ri
rlSinu i. pei\*t TpiTTtir- iar yip rtiT(f Sitrtytit rffli- aXXuv Arixtipii ri t^
r6\ran rpirTtir, oil Ar Baviidraiiu tl rdrv ^fSlui rixou &r iMtKluU if rt«n yotl
liesire to enjoy an honourable fame . . . , trg to acquire a* far a* potsihle
fhf knowledge of whnt y/iu aish to do ; for if, differing in tht* regard from other
rtfit, yitu attempt to deal teith affairs of *tate, I should not be mrprited if you
'eere tn attain the object of your ambition vnth great eatt X. M.S. 6, 18.

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

IfODlPlCATIONS OP THE PROTASIS

3344. SntMtitntiona for the Protasis. — For the protasis vith «!
there may be substituted a participle, often iu the f^nitive absolute
(2067, 2070), an adverb, a prepositional phrase, a relative clause
(2500), or some other single word or phrase. The present partieiple
repi-esents the imperfect, aa the perfect represents the pluperfect

rutl^ratlnittttrrt {= ti SUi) iarlr) i Z(itoiiiiiii\u\frTirra.Ttp^ airroS Utit;
Aote, pray, if there iM diiy jmtice, has Zeut not perished (I'nre lie bound hit birit
fntherf At. Nub. 904, d« jip 1i> *uh iiiiou 0<wri' rofro woL^arta (= ti Irati^a)
for of course life had not been toorth lining if I had done this D.21. 120, ei tif
ir i^Xiiftj irptid^r «al ^1) itarpix'-' (— 'i ^irpi^tr nai ^1, iifrptxi) for he tcxuM
not haie been hit if he had been keeping guiel and TWt running aerot» Anu S.fi. ■'>,
iiialui ir irtBaror I Should justlg (f.e. if I had met with my dexcru) havf btm
put to death D. 18. 209, iital Si iptoOr it ^3ii«t rlmi for my$elf (i.e. if I h»d to
decide) It leonld teem to be mfflrieat T. 2. ^I'l, 3id yi tiiit ulrafrt (= tl t/uU airet
liiim IJTt) vdXsi it i-re\ii\tiTt if j/ou had been Irft to gaurulvrt, yna icoufd harr.
perished long ago D. 18. 49, 6>^Biuu lif) /laBuir (= iar il)i iiASa) Ithall beuadotv if
I don't learn Ar.Nub.TII2, riKdrrtt (=(' vi'vc) l^r 'iiiiia Av naTucdmii,
il-n-^etrrwr ( = tl irT-nOfif) aUtlt Iv Xd^fffJij ghould thfg be victorious theg lemild
kill no one, but if defeated no one would be left X. A. S. 1. 2, euru ( =tl o^tm fxPuO
yip rpit tA ^i^rai toii inwrtoit ti^vx&"rroi Ar lUr for thus they Viould be fli'iit
eoumgeous in regard to atlaciing the enemy t.i.'W, tUf it StKoltn it ■aicar
riaoi^ T( nor should I justly come to any trouble S. Ant. 240.

a. Sometimes the protasis has to be supplied fmra what precedes (example in
1625) ; or from a mnin clause with i\\d, wlitcli follows : aiSi ttr a^it iirin^trtt
c^fia ^\aira,r' dXX' "H^aiUTOi tpUTD (= tl fii) tfono) nOT would he himrelf kart
escaped black fate; but Hephaestus guarded him E 2.3 (cp. X. A. 3. 2. 24-2^1).

234S. Verb of tlie Protasis Omitted. — The verb of the protasis is
usnally omitted when the apodosis has tlie same verb. The protasis
is often introduced by d rts, d iron, t'^np (irori),

<r Tit col i\\at irip, xal KGpoi Iftit iim SayiiAiiaiax if any other man (la wonby
to be admired), Cyrus, too, is worthy to be admired X. C. 5. 1. (I, ^q/il Sttw . . ,
rif ra\iitif rptirixiir, ttntp rori (liti), inl ivt I say that UK fnu«t NOV, if ever,
t^ly riursrlvea to the tear D. 1. 6.

3346. So with certain special pbrasea:

a. tl f.'fi (if not) except : »6 yip . . . ipdiu'il itii StdytviTo^tm itfipiiwovif'T
nedo not see any except a fern men yonder K. A. 4. 7.6, oiyiip ir -wari 4(^ipor t^-'^
ri luriaipa T|id7uars, tl /iii Kptiiitat rl rbiiiia for I euuld never hare diacovtr- if

aright things eelesttal, except by siupetiding the intellect Ar. Nab. 229. 8a iaw
lai D. M. 46 (in a decree).

b. *( f,\ *t iif not if, unless if) except if: irpAx^ " i>^>*' <>'' ""^ («0*' ^'^
X«7av, ft /i4 ^ Tl 'P^' '"")' v4pioiK»vt Toit aUr&r JKarrwi and nothing nofcW'rfA t

^jo] CONDITIONAL CLAUSES 531

wi done on thtir part except it might tie (tit. exi-fpt If thmvMinnejiomething
Octweneadi of them aadhU neighboura T. 1. IT. Here tl ^i) is adverbial.

C tl piitiA (if not on aeeounf'f) except fur: {ei) Uii^Tiiiii' ■ ■ . iltripipa-
*0» i^a.\tlr if-^4,ltarTtt, tal tt *ii) A.d t4c rpiranit, itirwH ir ; did they not
tott to Ovrmo MUtiade* into the pit, and except fnr the prytan would he not have
. bten Ihromn there f f. G. bUS e. Wiih ti nh Jul llie tllipais (which was not con-
Kiousto the Ureeka) ia to be supplied by the negatived predicate of the inilia
clause (here oin iriTtaey).

d. d SI (1^ {hut if not = ai mintu, tin allter) othenelte. In alternatives. Intro-
duces a auppositioQ opposed to sotuctbing just said: ii^Tn Til Tur KaXxijIoWwr
KfiiiaTa • tt Si nij, vo\tn-tiirtir (^ij airoU he demanded back the property of the
C''i!fh''d<iniana ; othi-ne{ae {f e. if they should not restore it; cl (iJ) irtStter) he
Mid that he should make wxir upon them X. II. 1. 3. 3.

N. 1. — tt St iL-i often occurs even where the preceding clause is negative and
woeipcctiiJAaaBJjiroiViJi'-orTa- tt !i ii>i . . . ahiat tiui do not do this ; but
if gim do, you will have the blame X. A. 7. 1.8. Conversely il H, where we
tripect tl a Ml}, as ft nit ^uXtttu, efiru ■ tt S', 3 ri PoiXtrat, rai^a miiWa if he
Wishes, let him boil me ; otherwise, let him do tehaterer he wUhes F. Eu. 28o c.

K. 2. — tl Si liii U used where (after a preceding W») we eipect iaw Si /i-^, na

tor li/r Tl t^nr SotS dXijWi \i-feir, ivro)ia\oyiraTt ■ tl Si /tii, imTtlitTe if I teem
to jou to xpeat the truth, agree lelth me ; otherwise, oppose tne P. I'h. 01 c.

N. 3. — The verbof theapodoeitinf the flratof the alternatives is often omitlcd:
iiw lAir itiir welSirriu (aril. icaXiItt ff«) ' ilSi ii*i . . , tmtoimir dwiiXaif ifhewlll-
injlg nbeya (it will be reell) ; otherwise they straighten him h'j threats P. I'r, Sio d.
2347. On ut tl !n comparative conilitlonal clauses see 2481.
2318. In the IlomerJc tt S' iyt come nmo, wi'Il t tl pnihably liaa the force of
an interjection al or demnnslr.itivp ailvcrb (t;p. T,at. eia age). Tiiua, tl f Syt r«
u^Xp SBTititifoiiai come now ! I will nod assent to thee icilh my head A 621.

2349. Omission of the Protasis. — The potpnHal optative, and the
itidicative, with & stand in imlcppiident Bont^cnces ; in ninny cases a
protasis may be snpplied eilher from the coiitfxt or generally; in
other casps there was probably no conscious ellipsis at all; and in
others there was certainly no elli[isi3. Cp. 17Sr>, IS-.'i,

raS S^' ir tUr at f/iw; where, pray (should I inquire) would the strangers
he found to bef S. El. 14!iO, dpi^itiv Si Yfid^iii . . . ott hw itutd^^iir inpifiCit but
to give the number accurately I should not be able (if I were trying) T. 6.
tV*. Siirif o9r 9* 4'iOraafai it had been terrible to break my word (it it bad been
pussible) D. 19. 172.

HODlPtCATIONS OP THE APODOSIS

3390. The apodosis may Ije expres.sed in a participle or infinitive
with or without oi- as the <-on struct ion may require ; cp. 1846, 1848.

alrtl a&ri* tti Siax^"'" t'>vt^ tai rpiwr uiriur iua0ir, iii nrrtn rtpiyn^ntroi
{ = rtpiyti^tliV') 1* rUr irrtftiuuinait he asiM hint fnr pn>i for two IhouKind
mercenarieB and for three mouths, stating that thus he would get the better ofhii

582 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [aasi

aivertariet X.A.I. 1. 10. (Her* avrtn repreaento the prntasiB, 2344.) a<ii»Ai
imirirrci Sii ri iiii itofx^^iu Ar ''*!' ititXiifftay uo one ipolte in oppofitiiia
freeotue Utt attembly would not have tuffereii it (= il irriint, o6k ir ^rfrxm 4
iKK\vrla) X.H. 1.4.20, (/ (Try^) riptiri wpoiyiroiTo, »f(J^»Tn Ariaar ir Ix'"
HiXm-irr^ar Ihej/ Chonglu that, if Tegea too should noma mtr to them, they would
have the ahole of the Pelopvnneae T. b. »i. See 2616.

2391. Verb of tlie Apodoaia Omitted. — The verb of the apodosis is ofUD
omitted, and especially wben the protaais has the same verb (cp. 234S). Here ■
potentialoptatiTe with Aria represented bfli' alone (1T64 a, 1766 a). ThtLB,(ljit

Ttf ra^iirtpii rou ifialiir tlrai, Toirrqi ty (•paliit tlrtu) if I tJiOTiid toy that tn (IR$
rtBpMf I am viiser than any one, (/ sftouW eay) in tAis P. A. 2Q b. Also in other
oaaes, as rl J^' it (X^m ), (rifior tl riBiHa Sux^rovt ippirruliui ; toAdt then V>Ould
(yoK aaji), ^ yos aho^dd hear another excogitation of Soeratetf Ar. Nub. l&L
On firrf^ tf, Ooxip ftr (/, ut e/, see 1706 a, 2178, 24B4.

23S2. Omisalon of tlw Apodoeia. — a. Wben the conclusion \a it it wtU
(■nXOi lx<i) or the like, It is oft«n omitted. So often when the second of atur-
native opposing sappoejtions is eicpreesed by tl Si ttii (2348 d, h. 3). Cp. " yet
DOW, if thou wilt forgive this sin, — : and it not, blot me . . . out of thy book ''
(Exodus 32. 32).

b. When we should introduce tbe conclusion by jtnoto Uuit or / tell gov ; ti

col alti la iXiKavrri ti A-ytirtai, ttrt fiiator oM^H tvrt f^nXXev if yott poMibhf

tktnk that I toot taktn for lome turong-doing, know that / neither MrarJt Ror
e X. A. 6. 6. 27. Here tbe apodosis might be introduced by entiiaatt.

c. Some^mes when the protasis is merely parenthetical : i xfiovit, ti pe6>Mo

riXi)^ tj-fur, f(T«r( rir iitbr raTla it trdi the gold — wouldtt thou 0*bf tell
the trvth — that gleiv my child E. Hec 1206.

d. In passionate speech for rhetorical effect (apoelopfels, 3015) : rf infi ■yip
/ Wftuffw 'OXi^wioi ddTfpmrijT-Jjt if iJ^uroTu^tXffiu' 6 yitp waM ^prvrit itrtr for
if iTideed (Ae Olympian lord if the lij/htning leitt to thrust ue out from our habi-
tation!, thrust us he will ; for he ix by far the moet poteerful A 581.

e. There is properly no omission of an apodosis after clauses with tl, tl yip.
Me, etc., in viishei (see 1816). In such clauses it ia often potaible to find an
iq>odosis in an appended dual clause : rorarar tt iiJ rit 0(i3r crfiiiu. turAro^wr tra
viTuy )ii\u If only some one of the (lodt mrre to make me winged to that I might
come to the city of tiotn rivers ! E. Supp. 621.

PROTASIS AND APODOSIS COUBINED

2353. <( and &v both in Protasis. — The potential optative with aw
or the unreal indicative with av, standing as the apodosis in the con-
ditional clause with «i, is the apodosis of another protasis expressed
or understood.

a. Potential Optativa. — dXXi ftJfr *r -ye iltiH SoEXor inpar^ JcfoC^icff' ir, rut

atr dfioi' afrrif yt ^uXd£off#ai ratavrar ytrtit9a,i : and yet indeed if vie vmuli not
accept even a ulnve. rcho teas int>"iapern>'. h"'n is it not right for a man (tb9
■naater) to guard against becoming so himself f X. M. 1- 6' 3. Here S<{a((uh ia

ilH] CONDlTiONAL CLAUS£:S 538

the protasia wtth il ; uid aIbo, with tr, the apodoais to an imdergtood protaila
(t.ff. if we Bhottld think of so doing). The verb of the proUds may be con-
tained in a participle, aeil Si ^qldt ir bn^r ^iiiata {^r irvrrtpeiiurQt r^f rtrpl-
J«, TpDriiMi ktK l>ut if no ont of you shoald think life worth having if ht
vtrt to bt dtptivtd of hi* eountrj), it is right, etc. 1. 0. 26. Such clanaes form
aimple preaeut coDdlliona (f/ It l» true that v>e would accept, etc.)- The verb
following the compreaaed condition stands usually In the preaent, at times in the
future, indicative. X. C. G. 3. 55 : Sauniieiiu hw . . . tl iw i^^Xijirm ia an exception,
b. Unieal IndicatlTe. — «( ralrw to&to Urxupir fl* a» T<i*Tv Ttt/i^iHtt . . ., xiiiai
it'itBa r(icfn)pu>» If then this would have been itrong evidencefor him {if ht had
6"n abte to bring tt/onrard), (ft it be nidence for me too D. 4B. 58. Thla is a
present condition (}fU fi true that this would, etc.) except In bo far aa the nnez>
preaaed protaaia refers to the past. Snch conditions may alao be paaL

N. 1. — The real prolasie la: if It it (or tooi) the eate that toviething eovld
Kots (or herettfler) be (or could have been), ft follow* that.

N. 2. — Id some of these cases, tl has almost the foTCe of twtt linet (D. 4S. 68).
23S4. <(, tit, on tlM cbance tluL — ttat tiv ma^ set forth the motive
for the action or feeling expresBed by the apodosis, and with the
force of on the chance that, in case that, in the hope that, if kaplt/.

After primary tenses in the apodosia, we hare tl nith the Indicative or Hr
(rut) wilii the subjunctive ; after secondary tanaea, d with the optative or, ocok-
sionally, Ur (riii) with the Bubjanctive. Homer haa sometlmea the optative
after primary tennes. The reference is to the future aa in flnal clauaea.

The protasis here depends, not on the apodosla proper, but on the idea of por-
poae or dealre suggested by the thought. The accomplishment of the purpose may
be deaired or not desired, and by the subject either of theapodoaia or of the protasis.
rSr oCt' iyx'h ifp-^iiiai, at n rixv/u but now 1 will make trial with my
^>ear on the ehanet (in the hope) that I may hit thee E 270, inovaar tal iiiaS, Mr
ffw fri rairi teKg Uaten to me tiio vn the chance (in the hopt) thai you moir ttttl
have the tame opinion P. R. 358 b, ra^ui/uxu h tj}v 'Kaiir in paaMi, tl rm
Ttlvtiar adrAr going into Aaia Co the king in the hope that somehow then might
persuade him T. 2. f17, xpii r^r irJXo, <1 iwifbniBBitr, ix<ipour they advanced toward
the city on the chance that tbejf (the cltlEens) sAou'd make a lally 0. 100.

N. — Tfaia nseis tobe distingnished from that of tl ipa ifperchattee, *J/ii) ipa
unleat perehanee (often Ironical).

a. Thia construction should be diaUngutahed from cases like tripouXtimmr
. . . t^\Stiw . . ., 4' Simtrai ^lAeaaBiu they planned to get out, if theg might
make their way by force T. 3. 20, where we have Implied indirect diacoorae
(fiftitufitr, 4* Bvni)uBa PiiraaSai).

b. Homer oaea tbla construction as an object clause in dependence on bBo,
tUar, or on a verb of sailing. Tbns rlt )' oU', tt tir ol rir laliien K/iin ifimt
Titfinriir: who knows if, perchance, with God's help I may rouse his spirit bvper-
ruation t 0 403 (i.e. the chances of rousing his spirit. If haply I may), irlrrtt,
tt rut . . . 6wmpinp6yiiiiu XifvpSir tell me if haply I shall (might) eteape
Charybdis n 112. Hen the apodoais is entirely auppreeaed. Obaerve that tbla
cimatTUction ia not an Indiroot qaaation.

ii.X>^lc

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

LESS CSDAL COMBINATIONS OF COMPLETE PROTASIS AND
Al-ODOSrS

2355. In addition W the ordinary forma of corrcBpondenoe bptvfeen prntAsti
and apoilosis (2297), Greek show^ many otlicr combiiiatioiia expressing diuinet
shades of feeling. Mont of tliesa combiiisilons, iLoiigh leas frequent tbon (lie
ordinary fornig. are no less "regular." Shift of mental attitude is a known
fact of all Hpeecli, though the relatioii of cause to effect must not be obscureiL A
speaker or writrr, hiiviiig liegan Ilia sentciice with a protasis of one type, ni»T
aJter tlie couiiw! uf liis tlioughl : wllb Uie result Ihat he may conclu<le with am apoil-
o«U of another form, in siitne cases even with au apodoaia " uiiBymineirical "
with the protaata and logically dependent upon a protaais ttiat is only sujq;egtrd
by the form actually adopted. Siiicu eitlicr prolaHia or apodiiais way c1iO(«e the
form of eipreaaion best auiti'd to the uieaning, the student aliould beware of
thinking that conditional sentences invariably follow a conventional pattern,
departure from which is to he counted as violation of rule. Some combinaiiona
are less usual than otheni i uioat of the niore coinmon variations from the ordinary
type have been nientioiieil under the appropriate sei'timia, and are btre aumuiai-
riied (23W-23S8). Special casea are considered in i;f;;»-2:!ilj.

2356. The optative with av (the potential optative) may be used
as the apodosis of

tl with the Indicative in Simple Present a:nl Past ci>ndicions (2'iOO c),

tl with the past Indicative in Unr(?:»l coiidlliona in Homer (rarely in Attic, 8.112),

(/ with the future iiniicatlve in Emotional Future conditions (2:W8),

(( with tlie optative in Less Vivid Future conditions (2.12i)). In I'resent ccm-

dilions (2^5^) : il Xiyaifi,^ it tiippiisiug f miuld tag, wherciia «( U-roi/u means

tnppmtiig I $k<nitd tay.

iin with the Huhjunctive in More Vivid Future condiUons (3326 d).

a. When the protasis is a future Indiuative or a subjunctive, the optHtive witb

ir sometimes seems to be merely » tnihl future and t'l have no potential fi>rre.

TblLS, f r oEv ^^1 ^401 rir tiiiKor Tovror Uyov, i>6k Ar iwjSaitir oM' ir 6^Mr oMiri

if then you hnrn this vnjutt Tenn'in fur me, I will nut pay even ait obol lit OHf-

bodg At. Nub, no.

2357. The subjunctive of pxliortation, prohibition, or deliberation.
the optative of wish, ami the inipcrative, may [m used as the apodosis of

tl with the indicaUve fu Simple Present and Post conditions (2300 c, d, f).
ft Vfilh the future indicative In Einc.tiim:il Future condUinns (i.'iae),
Mr with the subjunctive In More Vivid Future conditions (2328 c-e),

2358. The tinrpnl indicative with or without ay may be used as tlii*
apodosis of

a. (( with the indlrailve In Simple Present and Past conditions (2300b). S-^
after tl with the future denoting present int«ntion or necessity that soiriL-tliii'ii
bIihII be done (2301), as tt yip yvraim tit tM' fCmw'ii' Spiveut . . ., tafii' sMti

■Jfa] CONDITIONAL CLAUSES 685

•inA Ijr Iw iXUrai rirat for if teonten are to rracA thit heigitt of Mdneu, U
wun/d be u mitMnfffor them to deHroy their hufbands E. Or. 560.
b. tt with the past indio&UTe Id I'reiieut anil Past Unreal conditiooa (2302).

tt' loiiA the Optative, Apodosi'a a primary tense of tlie Indicative, etc

33S9. (I with the optative (instead of iiv with the subjunctive^ is
not infrequent in the protasis with a primary teuse of tlie indicative,
» subjunctive, or an imperative, in the apodosis. The reference is
usiiallT either to general present time (with 'tlie present iniiicative),
or to future time. When the apodosis contains a present indicative
it frequently precedes the protasis.

». Compare the analocnus wsafie In Enplish commonly wiih thnnli, would:
"There is some soul of KoiKlni'es Ui tbiiigs tvil, would men observingly dislil It"
(Rhakexpeare). "If you ulimild die, my death aliall folloir ynun" (I>ryden).
"I gliall scarcely figure In history, i( umlcr my guidanco such visitntiona aliould
accrae" (Disraeli). "If be should kill then . . „ he baa nothinR t<i lowi'*
(Sedlev). " But if an happy soil should be withheld . . . think it not beneath
thy toil" (Philipe).

2360. Pr«Mitt Indicative. —«. In general statements and maxbns. Ilie
apodosis is somelimeH introduced by a verb rei|Uiring tlie infinitive.

Ani/iiir yip aa^piniiT iJr ierir, tt p,^ iSmoirre, iitux^i'^' fof it it the p<trt of
prudrnt tafn to remain quiet if they ahnutdnot he wronged T. 1. 1'iO, tt ri riryx^'*'
luj*, eh tiniar' eSwov ^urii i;ifiXi<l'at yXvxi (,t<mt} if a«y ill betide. Hit meeet to
look Into the face of a loyal friend E. Ion 731, rl Sit caX^t TvnucAt, tt ftj) rai
*i)irat xp^™ IxDi i what boou the beauty of a woman if the have not a mini
thititeha^tef E.fr.212.

b. The present Indicative sometimes baa the force of an emphatic future.

Tlius, rirr' fx'^% '' " Toiriar luiip' iipUairo taXur thou haul all things, should

the jinrtlun of these honours come to thee Pindar, Istlim,4 (!i). 14. I'reaont and
future occur together in Ant.i.o. 4.

C Other examples of the present ; Ilom. IftlFl, a414, c484, iiGl, 0136, tSf);
IbwiKlOii-dre ((fuO; Find. I'yUi. 1.81, 8.13, lBthm.2.33; BaccliyliileBS. 1S7 ;
n.ll.1.3-.!; R. Ant. 10;!2, O. T. 24!) ; K. IIi'c. T8<1, fr. 212. 2S3 (i-.l.) ; T. 2. .tfi, 3. 9,
4. 511, a. »! ; X. C. 1. 0. 43, H. (1. 3, 5, 6. 5. 'i2, O, 1, 4, 1. 5 ; P. A. in e, Cr. 46 b,
Pr. 31(lc, .120 a, b, L. 027 c; laocr. 14.39; D. 18.21, 20.54, 20. IM, 24.36;
Aniipiianes fr. 324.

2361. Fntnre Indlcatire. — tt rilMouda', rtfn lui x^ptfl should I taee thee,
>fiU thou lie grateful to mef E. frag. 12!>, t( ti} tXi}9(i rtpiytriiiitTM il toi^oi-
iur A ixttm rpaSTiTTowrir ; what profit Will there be for the people, if we ehould
•I; what t)iry enjoinf L. 34. C.

a. Other eTamples : Hom.ISSS, K222, TlOO (B48R. pMO, <>■ (tO with fut.
nriiubj.); Pind.tH. 18. 105 ; S. (). T. Sol ; Ant. 4. a. 4 ; T. 1.121 ; P. MenoSOd, Ph.
ill a. L. 6fl8c; Isocr. 2. 45, 0. (IB; Aristutle. Nic. Eth. 10(16 b. 6, llOOb. 4;
I.uriSn, Timon li).

2362. Perfect bidlcatlve (very rare). — «!.. . iiSiititr in tl 9»d Srtrret rt'

uogic

586 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE l*fii

TotMOnf Mrara* iiyaOrrct Uiaif thai, ri /iSWor ^A lu/iM^xa , , , rl vox' Jnirrt
triar ; ^ ht «AouId prime that all the god» eonflder eveh a death tinhut, Aow toM
Iltamid anfthing more of the natare of pMg f P. EuLh.Oo.

2363. SnbJDDctlTe (very rare). — tl Si peit^ti yt, ml Hjr ^mirfr dm rvf-
XvfV"^'' trivT^intf taO /lAXarroi frerOcu but if yoa villi, let us agree that nuutie
tooiea knowledge of the futvre P. Chum. 173c. Cp. X. 0. 6. 10 1 A 38S (df Willi
Kibj.), *893, a388(?).

2364. Imper&tlTe. — rfrif Tdacro^H^vM. . ., inty^itFTuifanyoiietnim-
greuee these i^^june^ione, let him be aeeureed AeB.S. 110 (quoted from an uicient

impntcftlion), ri iiir Sii i^Sptor, tt >i4 ru trlaTaiTo airf Xf'^'o'i ovrv riffit
tan/BrlrSiii Hart laiSi xrii^ra thai 6u( (M reponte )non«jr (Aen, (f a man doet itol |
knou) how to um it, let him remote it so far from hU coneideration at tu4 to b« '
regarded even <u propeHg X. 0. 1. 14. Cp. P. Hipp. M.2B7 e, L. 642 a.

3365. An unreal indioative in conjuaction with d and the optative
is Tery rare.

tl/iiwyifi tit 7uH7ica fu^powiaHp&r ff^ei luffeliut, SwitX<i)t it ))i> ^Mt (for Ar iff)

for^weehould draw the saord upon a purer leoman, foul were the murder E.
Or. 1133. Cp. L. 10. S, X. C. 2. 1. Q (uzt doubtful) and X. Veo. 12. 22, P. Ak. 1,
nie, Lyo.66.

TWO OR IfORB PROTABES OR AP0D08BS IN ONB 3KNTEHCB

2366. A conditional sentence may have several protases and one
apodosie or one protasis and several apodoses. Two such protases
or apodoses are oodrdinate or one of the two is subordinate to
the other.

2367. Two coOidiuftted protases with a aiogle apodods, or two coSrdinated
apodoaen with a single protaHis, may refer to the same time or to diSerent timra.

«( tt h^t' l<m (ti piXTiBi') fi^' Ijr /iijr' S» drill (x" >"?!''' l"}SiTU lal riiittpnt,
rl rtr rf^i/Sai'Xar ^X/^t Toufv; but if there neither it nor toat anj/ belter plan, and
if yet even to-daji no one can mggett any, what viatU the duty of the ttateaman to

dof D. 18. 190, ml 7^ a> rai irtpifiuit ttti, tl mri /lit rwr 'OXuttflouf rpeSi-rtiw *-oUl
xal ith' i^ti^laairBt, rail tl rap' b/ur a^elt dJurntirTaf /if) coXiferTM ^olroitBt and

in fact it would be actually monttmui if, whereat you have pamed man^ ttvtre
votei against Che betrayers of the Olnnthiani, you appear not to punish th« vrong-
doeri in your midst 1>. 10. 207, tl iyi irtxtlnva rpirrtit t4 ToXirurA wptrt^ara,
rdXcu ftr dnXi/iXir i™' o^' ■' N"* c^i^X^iir 'ittr ojlr' ar iiuuirbr if t had tried to
engage in politirs, t should have long ago perished and benefited neither pou nor
mgtOf at all P. A. 81 a.

2366. When two or more protases are not coordinated tn the same sentence,
one is of chief Importance and any other protasis is subordinate to ft. Such pro-
taaea may follow each other or one may be added after the apodoels ; and ma'
■how the same or a different modal form.

4i(l»Siar, tl lUt TIM Sp&Tt «-MTt|)i[a» iiiur (^ifaiiinfn), iar SiaKopTtpHiitw roX>|iyurrtf.
SiSi^ai mI lirfi ktX. if you see any safety for us (f toe persist in making mar. »"
brp that you will it\form u$ too what It la Z. H. 7.4.8 (here iit Sttm^rrtpi^ru"

a37«] CONCESSIVE CLAUSES 687

depends on tl i^ri) ; iar Si ifSia rpit XCrqpd (Wgi), ikt /lir rMtrnpil h^p^dXXif
roi frrl rwr ^'^'f Mr Tt ri 'd^ ^' t"' '^AM' ^' *'' '''> *ippit ^t >'<3r 'yT^i
mfnir r^r 'poftr rpdrr^v <r j ar ro&r' iry ■ <ar tj rA ^^^a iri T&r irMfiQr, tt
wpim-iabut if youvxigh ^amte* againtt paina, if an the oneltatidtehat U pain-
ful i* exceeded fiy what it pUaturable ^whether the near bf tA« dtttaat or Ae dis-
tant by the near), you mutt adopt that eourte (if action itt uihieh thia U the eate;
f^on tite other hand the pleoMuraMe {U txceeded) by the painful, the former mvit
not be adopted V. Pr. S56 b (bare to iar i^i/a Itrrit are mibordinated iii lUr and
iir S4, KDd ta iai /Ut are aubordlnated iir rt . . . Ian n) ; tl Si at i)piiait if ifixn'
tI ivTi laXJr T( lol ^xP^'i *' fo' '"P 'Or dnn/ilKii, ap' ait ar dpffOt dTCi^npttfa ;

but if I had fuked you at the Hart what beauty and uglineu U — if you hud
anatpered me ai you have note done, would you not have antwered me rightly T

P. Hipp. M. 280 c ; lit iiii wiXtiioi alp^St, laitiri ^hti SiSpo Ahu SrXitt, tl cu^ipe-

wtirt if you chooae war, come no mure hither without armt if you are wtae X. C.

3. 9. 13, (i luri &))^alur ii/un iyuntOiifrou ouTin ttiiapro rpi(iu, t( xp9' rpevtotaw
tl nli rairan trx't"* vv/i/iix'"" •'^^^ *t\lrrtf rpwr40trro ; if it wa» decreed by
fate that we thould fare thutwtth the Thehaiu fighting on our tide, what ought
tee to have expected if we had not even tecured tkm at alliet but they had joined
Philip T D. 18. 106.

■. A eecnnd protasia may be added to tbe flnt protaeia to explain or define
it. ThuB, Kol ad raCro X/foir fpXBf" •>>* 'a'^ 1^' A^rrovi tdX^ ij x<'p**<>' fx"*
3/itft avfifia\rr • tl yi^ raDra \iyoifu, AY^rlXadr r* Ar >iu ioK& i^pom dwo^alitti'
Mai iiiaitrir fuipat, tl triuniliir rit ircpt rUr /uyiirTur ring mriurrOomi and 1 am not

going to tay that he made the engagement in apite of having much fewer and
inferior troopa ; for if I ttiould maintain thit, t think that I should be proving
Ageailaus aenteUu and myielf a fool, if 1 thould praise the man whe rathly
inatrt danger when t&s grtateU interesia are at ttakt S. Ag. 2. 7.

CONCESSIVE CU^USES

3369. Concessive clauses are commonl; formed by xot in coDJunc-
tioQ with the tl or Hv of conditional clausea : ko! ti («I), nu i&y (kSv)
even if, d xai, iay nu oithough.

2370. Such concessive clauses are conditional, but indicate that the
condition which they introduce may be granted without destroying
the conclusion. The apodosis of concessive clauses thus has an
adversative meaning, i.e. it states what is regarded as true notwittt-
atanding {ofuo^) what is assumed in the protasis.

3371. Concessive clauses have the construction of conditional
clauses. The protasis, if negative, takes fii}.

3372. Ml ■[ (ei-en if) dauaea. — mu u commonly implies that the
conclusion must be true or must take place even in the extreme,
scarcely conceivable, case which these words introduce (even Buppoa-
ing that, even in the case thai). In such cases the speaker does not
grant that the alleged condition really exists. On xar tl see 1766 b.

Ktl /til T^«0a, nlpyar ttr' Ipyarr^r even if I have no confidence, yet the

588 SYNTAX OP THE COMPLEX SENTENCE £1373

dtad mtut b« done A. Cb. 396, koI 4ir >i4 4f"'' rBpamXnni^iffc, (4 riXti) Lntdi
triiuMirtTM and even if tee do not um exborlatiotu, the city will take nffidtM
cart F. Menex. 248d, -)wX$ j' 0 fi^t, (Jr ti ;ij) -ft\e~i»f p fAe /ool InuirA* ntn ij
Ihtn ia TUtthing Ut laugh at Mhii. Sent. lOS, HDvoTt ^oriXfAi raXXoit ^r ^yt^ira
ir ialii . . ., lai (1 o-df rcflfiirraii ^stlXaipro dri^Hi (A« JtinfT tMuM ffivt DKtRf
gutdet to the 3t]/gian» even lupposing thfj/ ahavld want to depart witA fuur-hom
eharioit X. A. 3. 2. 24.

2373. The tal of ksI tl ma; mean simply and, as nf rd)' cbrroi Kpivr and
if Creon harna this S. Ant. 220.

2374. Some scholars hold that the difference between xal tl and <i (of ia thai
(ol tl concedes a euppoaition and is used of an assuuied [act, wbile tl koI concedes
a tact and is used of an actual facl. Dut this distinction cannot be supported,
col <l sometimes differs frotn tl col only in being luore emphatic. When an
actual fact ia referre*to, we expect tl tal ; but lai il aorneliiiies occurs, as Ivm
Toi, III (IXirorTa fil) 'tMduv, 8ar6yT' ar aliui^tiar prrhapn, Ihoiii/li they did not txiit
flint when alive, they will lamtnl kirn now that he is thud S. Aj. 062, cpL
weurriot, ml iiriitt IjSi allhr'ugh it it in no wise gweet, I must ohry S. O.T. ISIS.

2375. A Kol (altlioutjh) clauses. — d mii c^oininoiily admits that a con-
dition exists (granting tJutt), but does not regard it as a hindrance.
The condition, though it exists, is a matu-r of no moment ao far as
the statement in the prim^ijiat chtuse is concerned.

tl Kal TUpatKit king thnu-jh thin art R. O. T. 40S, wi\,r lUr, tl cat >ij) ^XAmi,
^ponli S' S/an otf rieifi aintoTir Iti'in'jh thin rawt vol tee, titott yet dott feel irUk
•what a plague our eily it afflict-d S. (>. T, HOi, tl nal rif aiutpirtpoir )»iwi (Imu
although it seems too univiportanl to tome P. Loch. 182 c.

2376. The verh Is omitted in ft «al ytXeiiTtptf tlwl* though the expreuiou he
ridiculuHt F. A.SOc (cp. 1H4).

2377. The isl of tl kiU may go closely willi a following word. Hero tbe
meaning ia either alto or indeed; as i' taX iuriati yi if Ihou ihalt alto be able
(beeides having tbe will) S. Ant. tM), Sfir6r 7' rlrai, tl ical (ii Baw-ir a ttrange
thing triilg host thou uUerfd, if, Ihnugh ttain, thou indeed tiettl S. Aj. 1127,
Where Irajectinn ia assunii'd (cf >i4 xal for tl nl /14) the (oi ia Intensive, as tl ji4
nl rCir . . . dXU if not already . . . at least T. 2. II. 0. tl ni) ml tU/Anw unlet*
he hat aauallt done it 6. 60. 3.

S376. tl (_iar) aU not infreiiueutly meana even (f lu prose as well as poatry.

(IXcTO uaXXe* ffUHiS/rai bfiSt, If', ti nal pei^otre taxit tlrat, fi^ ffh) aArf he pre-
ferred rnther thtU you thould know of it, ia order that, even if he tkovld tcitk
to be bate, it might not be poanbte L. 20. 23, dU' tl lal iit/Slr rairttt bwtt^X"
iliur, o«' At xoXnrAr iart yam rtpi aiVrir ithrtpai TJXtjfli) Xiyemrir but even if I
had none of thete pointt to reljf on, even *o it It not difficult to find out tekifk
telU the truth Jy.i\Ab. Cp. hUo Ant. 6. 27, And. 1. 21, L. 31.20; la. 11. 2:t. D.
16. 24, Aea. S. 211. tl xal for ml tl is especially cnmmnn in laocrMea, who does
not umkbI floral except in 21. 11. Deinostheneslanut fond of ml t^ and often
anbmitutes i£> (f for It (m. 2B2. 24. 109,46. 12). Cp. 1766 b.

3379. tl (Mr) aometlmea haa a oonceaaiTe force (X. Eq. 1. 17), ifnp (Hitrtp^

1= Coo^^lc

TEMPORAL CLAUSES

2360. irel, uaiuJly with a following 7/, la eometlmes Uaualated although,
where a epealcur is utricily giTing tbe raasoo (or bis Btaiemeat of k fact (or for
■omethiDg in tbat Btatement) onU not fur tbti fact iteulf. Here there la a
thought in tbe apeaker'a tnlnd which Is mippKiwisU. TIiuh, aiaxSnUMV" " tyi-n'

TojrTo iiiit\ayiir, iwtt vsAXof 7^ ^ici ruir irdpiirwr /uF mj/ jtirt I should 6e aahamtd
to acknitteltdge (hit (ai)d I say tliis for myself) »l/ii:t Chtre are many men who do
oaarHit f. Pr.iUtc.

2381. Negative concessive clauses haye MX (p-r^') cl of ^ov wA even
if. lien not (ov-, /i^) belongs to the leading clause, vhile etvn (-ii,
cp. Koi) belongs to the dependent clause. The negative is frequently
repeated in the leading chtuse.

ouS' e( viwTtt f\Saitf Uipttu, lA-^Sei oiix irep^aXoijif P ' «» rwlt wAt/ilovt nen ff
all the Pertlaiia shoaid enmi; ve nhoiild not exceed Che enrmy in numbers X. C.
2. I. X, M BofRifiifffrfTt, laii' iir SSfar n b/ijr iiifa \i-,ttw do nut raitt a dislHrbance,
trrn If I teem to yon tu be tpeakiiig pmumptwiugly F. A.20e. Cp. 2SS8.

2383. The idea of eimcesaion or opposition is often expressed by
the participle alone (206G) or by the participle with Koirtp or koi raXm
(20Xi). The negative is ov. In negative concessive sentences we
tind also the pai-ticiple with ovii (/HjSi), truS* (/iijS<) rep.

oiSi rrrorSAi naicOt ix^pir rlial fiai rajrar iiui>jiyS not even though I hitM been
ai-treatfd do I admit that he fs mg tnfmy Ti. SI. 206. yuraiict rrlBtu /irfii riXnf^

vXiiuv litten Co a woman, even if thou diitl not hear the truth G. fr.44IX

TEMPORAL CUiUSES
2383. Temporal clauses are introtluced by conjunctions or relative
expressions having the force of cuu junctions

A. Denoting time usually tke sume as that of the principal verb :
oTt, oroTt, ^vixa, mrrfviKsx Kken ; o<TaKi% OS ojten as; ew, >uxf>* {'"ai'ety

axpi), oaoi' )(f>6vov no long as; iaxt, iv if (raiely iv mry and lart) while.

N. t. — !■• means jo long as in reference to actions that are co^xtenBive;
while, in reference to actions not co^ztenBive.

N. 2. — JivCko, Awipiica bave tbe force of ahat time, at the motaentvhen, mhen,
(rarelj tchUe), and ore mora precise than Sri.

N. 3. — Poetic or Ionic are iSn (= tri) taken, Ijiiet (only with the indica-
tive) ichen, («n when (Jxit in Hdt. of antecedent action), t^pa so lonir at.
Horn, has tbt (I.e. fat) or ttui for lat.

N.4. — lo-ril8useil(rarely)In1yric, Sophocles, Euripides, Herodotus, Xenophon.

B. Denoting time usually prior to that of the principal verb:
twti, irtiS^ after, ajier that (less exactly w^n) ; itr^i. rpmrav, in (or

liti) Tax*"*^ iTraSif ra;(itrra (rarely awaii raxvrra) as soon oa, t( oS
(rarely J£ tuv), J{ aT(nj,<t<^' of stnce,ei;er since; in when, aa soon aa,»inoe.
N. — imtim after Is very conunon In Herodotus.

540 SYNTAX OP THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [:

G. Denoting time subseqiient to tbat of the principal verb :
%i>c, ioTt, liixpi, /''ijfpi ov (rarely &xfi^), ixp*' "" u"''^- followed h
finite verb.

N. — Homer has aUo&fpa (alia final), |[*&T<(iiO.*(i'i('")- HflrodoUuhuii
(, tmt oi, h ol until, inein with the optnLive in Homer after a past Uiue of i
verb of wtUing or expecting meana for the time when (H 414). Ira (firet
in Keaiod) is rare in lyric, tragedy, Rerodotiia, and Plato, very common in
Xenophon. ^^pi is avoided by the orators. — iUxim and ixp* take tbe articular
infinitive in DemosChenea. — tW for (wt tsrare (2171).

3384. Demonstrative adverbs in the principal clause often corre-
spond to ttie relative conjunctions, as ore . . . rorc, iv^ . . . JyTOvr^, ««t
. . . rcuK (jtijgK rovroti). So also iwA . . , rorc, in (ore) . . . ^vravAi, etc.

2385. Some temporal conjunctions also denote muse .-

Sw, Atotc, ivti, tin (poet.), irti&j since, whereas, is because, at
means also as, as to, rarely, in prose, in order that, {uf in Homer has
in part become a tinal conjunction (2419) ; for the Attic use, see 241^0.

3386. A temporal sentence and a conditional sentence may occur
in close conjunction without marked difference of signification.

Sraw Si rociimair, iyttti ytr6/itK>i aif^rrai' Ur Ti ni £XXq auiufiepi nnv-
Xo/i^i^ atroit, ri intrrla 4riytyii6)uiia Mint"" vihettevtr ikey fall Ul, they an
tmedby regalniiig tiieir htiillh ; and if ever any other calamity overtake* thetm^tk*
reeertol lo prosperity that follovst it to their betKfit Ant. 2.^. 1.

3387. A temporal conjunction is often used in Greek where Eng-
lish employs a conditional or a concessive conjunction.

oin dr f7w7( Kpeitorei tssar Ixatniir, . , . Ire /i^ airht ye nXiAii I ioould Nil
Aran nearer to Cronuj' son uniew (lit. when not) he should himself bid mr. X 248.

2388. The time denoted by a temporal clause is not always solely
contemporaneous, antecedent, or subsequent to that of the principal
clause, but may overlap with the time of the principal clause (before
and at the same time, at the same time and after, until and after).

^(t ti ifrfftrti A£ptu>i col iriirTtut reXno-flv tov 0iau, i^iXrra rib wnttt wapawat
tehen Darius teas ill and suspected thot his life vxis coming to an rnd. he laishrd
his tmo sons to be viiih him X. A. 1. 1. 1 (here the siiuaiion set forib by 4vMhi
and ^i^Tive occurred both before and after the time indicated in ^^o^Xcrn),
TauSTa iwelti tut SuSlSoa rdrra S t\aPt npia he kept doing thus Until he saw that
(and so long as) he toaa distrtbuting all the meat he had received X. C. 1. ». 7 (the
imperfect is rare with tmt or wpin un(il)i * *' *» " r^J i-apim rpit ri /airititTa
driWirro tal irtliiai i)r rplr itrXilr x/dttvSai he both defended himself then ami
there against the charges and offered to he tried before he sailed T,6. 28.

a. Conjunctions of nnlecadent action oaually take the aorist, rarely tlie imper-
fect Bzoepl when tbat teue repreaenla overlapping aotloD, as in T. A. 7S. 3. Cp>
T.l. t8.fi with 1.6.1.

iv,Goog[c

939S] TEMPORAL CLAUSES 541

b. A Terb of aorlsttc action la lued i in the temporal claose when compleU
priority, in the main cUoae when complete BubHequence, ia to be clearly marked.

3389. Clauses introduced by relative adverbs (or conjunctions) of
time, have, in general, the same constructions as clauses introduced
by relative pronouns (S40, 2493 ff.) and by relative adTerbs of place
and manner. Temporal clauses are treated separately for the sake

a. Temporal clauses introduced by a word meaning vtOO differ from oidl-
naiy conditional relatives in some respects, as in the use ol the optative in
Implied indirect discoiuse (S408, 24:20); and in the freqnency of the absence
otir(2iQ2).

b. Strictly irt, IrBa, in, etc., are ixtbordtnating eof^nctfon* when the clause
iotrodnced by tbem fixes the time, place, or manner of the main clause ; but are
rtiative adveria when they serve only to define the antecedent and introduce a
olaose merely supplementary to the main clause.

2390. Temporal clauses are either definite or itidefinite.

2391. A temporal clause is definite when the action occurs at a
definite point of time (negative oi, except when the special con-
struction requires ii^. D^nite temporal clauses usually refer to
the present or to the past.

2392. A temporal clause is indefinite when the action (1) occurs
in the indefinite future, (2) recurs an indefinite number of times,
(3) continues for an indefinite period. The same clause may have
more than one of these meanings. (3) is rare. The negative is /u}.
Indefinite temporal clauses refer either to the future or to genial
present or past time.

2393. The same temporal conjunction may refer either to definite
or to indefinite time ; sometimes with a difference of meaning.

339*. When the time is definite, the indicative is used ; when in-
definite, the subjunctive with tCv, the optative, or (rarely) the in-
dicative.

Temporal conjunctions with the subjunctive take S,v. (For excep-
tions, see 2402, :^12, 2444 b.) jv is not used with the optative except
when the optative is potential, 2406, 2421 (cp. 2462).

INDICATIVE TEUPOBAL CLAUSES REPBBBING TO PBKSBNT OB
PAST TIME

2395. Present or past temporal clauses take the indicative when
the action is marked as a fact and refers to a definite occasion
(negative oS). The principal clause commonly has the indicative,
but may take any form of the simple sentence.

A. Temporal clauses denoting the same time as that of the
principal verb (2383 A).

542 STNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [139C

In Tai>ra 4'> rx<Mr iiirai Ijtar w6icTtt ft tOdi about midntffht fo&«s tliU woi
takttig plaet X. A. 8. 1. 33, cp. 1. 1. I, cll«d In l!dB8, 4rlm J« JtlXi tytytn, itdwn
mnoinit buCalun U Wat gf.Utiig to be ctfltrnoon, aclowd of dvM appeared l.tl-S,
litjUi* irb rav trav ^gDrre, rpofftiuin tlrtiuBa a* long a* thejf led on equal lervu
me foUowid aiUingls T.3.10, hrir x/ii»> iiiaei[rro . . .dfi^lrtir wtpl tA ^p»£^>
alntBiUir, , , . ir^r ri-roifi <u long at he tea* employed wilA reguUittoni aboM
the /ortrett, thejf kept bringing horset X. C. &. 3. 21>, ir if iirXllnrrt, 4«» . . . «I
rjcM-of tthtJe thejf were arming, the scouti came X. A. 3. 2. 16, ttn ivrl ttifit,
drTl^dJ9c«'Sc rutc rpiyiiATwr ' while there i* opporttmftjr, take our public poUeg in
hand' D. 1. 20.

K. fi/finrfui, elio, ixaiit often take Sri wA«n luBtead ot Kri (Aat, Thmi,
liifiniiai irt iyi rpii at ii\f»it I remviHber vi)ien {that) I eavte to jfos X.C. 1.6.12.
itUt {itni iiiuit In poetry) boa s aimiUr use. aI5a Sre, ittiti tri are protMbl; doe
to the Einalogy of /tiiinttun Srt, originallj / retnember (the moment) when.

B. Temporal clauses denotii^ time prior to that of the principal
verb (2383 B).

^1 1' amSiw, i^frrytt^ "mi ^IXwt r^» tplmr tbO 'Opirri ut lyiwrro bU aflrr
he cane out, he announced to hit friends hote the trial of Orontaa hail reeulted
X. A. 1. 6, 5 (obserre that the aoriet, and not the pluperfect, is commonly oied to
denote time previous to that of the main verb ; cp. IMS), treiSii il frtXetnitt
AipciDi . . ., Tiffim^pnrt SmfiiXSti rbr KOpor nfteT Darine died Tlfgaphrran
caluinniateA OgrUM 1. 1.3, At rdxurra fwt Ar^^Mr, ittorro at toon at dagliykt
indietinetlv appeared, they tacHficed 4, 3. e, H of ^Oat drai >pMrr*utrs<, U
TB^gu bii&t i^trrirtittr ever tince Philip pretended to be frtendif, from that
time on he had deceived you D.23. 103. (Un eter linee eipTeased by tbe dative
of the participle, see 1408.)

C. Temporal clauses denoting time auiaegueni to that of the
principal verb (2383 C).

l/uirar tut i^arrt tl rrpa-Ttnoi they toatted Until tht gfHerali arrived X. H.
1.1.29, XotSopgiii'i rArXwri)pfaar(m 4i>d7J<atfit> . . . rapt^rBti theg kept reviling
Soteridat until they forced him to march on X. A.3.4.4S, xal rain-a iwoiatir ^xM
vtirot tyirtra and theg kept diiing thiK until darkneft came on 4.2.1, t«^
'EXXirnt irtXivaro JouXiIat Oct' iXeufffpout cltai ^W^/m aG wii\ir a-dral aiToAl
rardovXiitfaiTo the relented the Greeki from slavery ao at to be free uidU thrf
entlaved themaflvee P. Menex. 21& a.

2396. When the principal verb is a past indicative with «[v and
denotes non-fulfilment, a t«niporat clause haa, by assimilation of
mood, a past tense of the indicative denoting non-fultilinenL

iwiitW i^atmra Tavra ir(iratT|ci!'f . . ., oipaXaYcir' ftr 1^ mmryopii rait Ipyoit
aArau if it appeared that he had rtrr done tki», kit form of aeexuuitiiin would taltf
with hit acta D. 18, 14 (here whenever would make the condition ambiguous).
^^aa-dn^r Ar iiixP^ at atttiitt iiiat they miuld have kept quealionlng them uitder
torture at long at they pleated 6.1. i't, out ir ifau6iiiir . . . lot drnrtipdArr r^
racial TBimxrf / Would not eeaie until I had made triai of thit witdom I'. Cnt.
SMc. See 2166 b.

TEMPORAL CLAUSES 643

iniy when the temporal relation is

•al tt teAeti [if) I do not knovi what juidice
whether Uitoritniita virtue V. K. 3(A c.

TEMPORAL CLAUSES REFERRING TO THE FUTDBE
239a The future indicative is larely used in temporal clauses ; and
wlien used refbrs to definite tiiue.

rvruaSra . . . trt eiS' S Ti xfi^ *ouI> Iftr* at that time, (often you loUl not

be tU>le to do even what i* neeettarj/ D. 19. 262.

a. 'I'be future U rare because Uiat uitiBe di)eB not usually make clear the
diSennce between action continuing and action dimply occurrini; in (lie future,
Srt wltb the future indicative tias tlios i>evii aliucMt entinsly displaced by 6rar
with the sabjunctiv?.

b. For the future with ti in I 316 the subjunctive fs probably correct.
2399. Temporal clauses referring indefinitely to tlie futui-e take

either the Bubjunctive with av or the optative without av.

a. The addition of it produces the foniia &tw, iwirnr; Ml*, hHjc (Uith
nre in Attic), 4mEct*. lat &*, |iixpt &v. br' &v mean ai lung a* or until, at
whfn Rcarcety ever takes 1> (for utA>uAi7efwi If 1h read In S. Aj. 1117, 1'h. 13:10).

b. Tlie temporal conjanctiDiia bavi! liere, in general, the game conglractlons
U conditional Mf or <(, Thus Awiraw = Ur rort, jrh-i = tl mrrt.

3400. The preaenl marks the action as continuing (uoC complEtid), the
aorist marks the action a« simply occurring (completed). The present usuntly
sets forth an action contemporaneous with that of the leading verb ; the aonst,
■n action antecedent to that of the leading verb.

a. The present may denote time antecedent when the verb has no aorist, and
in the case of some other verbs : Thus, (i riXi mi) ti Xur^tt ItairTor, twatir
Tapi tlie war which will t^ict every one mh^n it romee I). fl. 36, iwulir iKotj)
. . . iripoui Kplnrrat, r( cai TDiitiri; ; when he hearg that thry are protecutlltff
other men, what should Af then do f 10. VS&.

FUTURE TEMPORAL CLAUSES WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE

2401. Temporal .claiisfs referriiif; to the future take the subjunc-
tive with ay in sentences lorresin'iiding to more vivid future condi-
tions. The priiicijul clause has thp future indicative or any form
of the vKib referring to the future except tUe simple optative. The
negative is /iij,

(Wiia 8' ir Tit t^i iSiK^, ijitU irwip ii^d* ;i«;(otfu(9a hut vhen any one Wrongs
pnu. w will fight in yonr d'/enre X.C.4. 4. 11, Jrar^ljoW™, rrwa6a»tuu when
my elrengtk fails, I shall cease ». AuL 81, iwtiSir irarr' dmiSffir", tfitmri when
you have heard everything, decide D.4. 14, iiuA . . . Saai, twit rix'^ra ap<rr^
au/ur, Urat in my judfpaeM tw mtut go as soon at tee have brtaifaaledli.A.i.

I;.ClK>^Ic

644 SrNTAX OP THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [mm

6. 9, ittxpi f &* ijA <!«'■ «i arorSai fuwirridr but urttil I return, let Ihe 4trmi*tice
eontlnut 2. 3. 24, X/{w . , , tut ir dnfoir ^D^Xirvfc / teill »ptak to long at yon

telshto lltteii D. 21, ISO, tre/niUrm tirr' iw iyii IXBu viaU vntill come X. A.5. 1.4,
ui) ira/itlnaiur tvt Aw rXtfain 4^^' yi'iiwrai let u> not looil until the Ptiemj OHf-
nutnbers ue X. C. 3. 3. 40, tin iraitireutw (preaeiit u empLalic future) fvt Ar q
iflitTipa >:<^pB iBKUTiii ue do HOt tpoit until our land tkall be ravaged 3. 3. Itt.
The present sabjuactive Is rare wiLh fuf Hn((I, and marks overUpping ftcUoa
■'here = (Wf Ar fSanir KOKou/itnir).

2402. Tbe aubJuncUve without dv (</) Is sometimes found in poetry And in
Eerodotus ; in Attic prose only with fUxpi, l^XP* '^ until (and uplr, 2444 b).
Thus, ipoiXtutar Snr/i«i airoiit ^uXilirvnv lUxfi' oB ri fuu^btftr fAry decCded (a
{rword them in /etlers until tht]/ ihould reach some agreement T. 4. 4t. The
omiaaion of I* la more common aft«r temporal conjunctions than after tl (2327 ■)
and in wrilera later ttiui Homer leads an archaic colouring U> the style.

2403. The principal clause may be a potential optative, which is at timn
nearlj equivalent to the future : iyii St rainit itti rlit ttp^^rt|r, lui a> cli 'AAininr
fjlrirra^, oUfwor' if iruiifiau\iiraiiu ratiraicSai t^ w6\ti so long as a aiugle
Athenian U l^, I never would recommend the city to mate peace D. 19. 14,

FUTURE TKMPORAL CLAUSES WITH THE OPTATIVE

3404. Temporal clauses referring to the future in sentences corre-
spoading to less vivid future conditions usually take the optative
without Sy. An optative referring to the future stands in the princi-
pal clause (2186b). The negative is ^17.

TtBnljir, Srt >im ^qiiri roin-B /iA« maj/ I die, uAen I ihalt no longer care for
thete delights Mimnermus 1. 2, riirur ^dyoi ir ir6Tt ^tiXsiTa when hungrf he
would eat whenever he wished X. ii. 2. 1. IS, tl SI pti\eie t^h ^ilXur nri rpoTpt^FK-

vAai, h-^i iwoSriiuyliij, ivi)iiijiaBai rur ruf, ri it wmoliii ; should you desire to
induce one 0/ j/our friends to care for gour interests when fou were away from
hOTtUt whM would you dof 2. 8.12, SiotrS y' irairoS iiimw,tut dr/Xfoit he teoutd
beg him to remain uaCU you thould depart X. C. &. 3. 13 (here the temporal
clause depends on lUmr, Itself dependent on Umtb ir).

2405. The optative with it (n/) in Homer, where Attic would haT« the
simple optative, Is potential or virtually equivalent to a future. Thus, BilTlca
yip lac nrarrrJivKv 'A^iXXciti . . ., iriir ybiiv i( tpow tt^r for let Achilles stay me
forthwith, when I have satisfied my desire for lamentation f) 227. Cp. I 304,
S 222, (ui n p 7S (potential), rit S n O TO (elsewhere this expression always
takes the subjunctive in Homer).

2406. The potential optative or indicative (with Sy) having its
proper force may appear in temporal clauses (cp. 2353).

^uXdfof . . . rSr x'*l*<^'' '"X^V'i itl*' '' 4^>> Mi) turaiiuB' inia' i^Kir0mi

by watching for winter to set in ks begiTis his operations isftea we are unabU (he
ibiDks) to reach the spot D. 4. 31. Cp. 2406.

2407. The principal clause rarely has the prearat or fattue isdica-

I;.ClK>^Ic

M»] TEMPORAL CLAUSES 645

tivfl, when the temporal clauee baa the optative without Sy (cp. 2360,
2361, 2673 b, c).

^pointffnrt jci roU^i Tpii roii toXi) rXifaui . . ., ^iT« jcaipii tapariaoi token
Ike eritieat moin«nl arrivet, he must have great judgment to cope with force*
much mora numerout than hiR own X. Hipp. 7. 4, air6 at icutiTui . . . rQai
inrp^ai, 9t( )tii a^ii yt K/nrlwr iii^\ai aWdiutr iaXbr rlftaai hard vfill it be /or
hinttojire the thipt unleu (when . . . noi) Kronion hitaaelfhurl upon the thipt
a blaxing brand N 317.

a. Homer tuu it {%f) with the Bubjunctlve ; as oiK dr m xt^^'fti "ISapit . . .,
fr' ir nvlvo-i fvydqi Ihjf ettharn wUl not avail tbte tehen thou growUett In tA«
duM r66.

2408. After a aecosdary tense introducing indirect discouree (real
or implied) l^e optative may represent the subjunctive with 3» as
the form in which the thought was conceived.

roftrfyiOta,*, t*tJiil JnrntffiiMi' . . . irdmn irawmitaBat ml frerAu ^ri*' i-r rit

rofa-fYiWt they imuad ordert that, when thtu had tupped, all thould rttt omA
folltne ieA«R anj/ one ihould give the command (= fr«8ir St^Tr^ial|Tt . . ,
imrwicrih) X. A. 3. &. 18, ^ificini nXi^arrtf Irrr ^uXcAroirro, iBtawro order-
iitg them to wait until they had taken eountel, they proceeded to sacrifice (= Ari-
litiraTt tar' Sr ^iiKiugiintda) 5. 6.2, fanfir aiiaii . . . rpoiVrcu . . ., fui &ifi^
rviifit^tar they resolved to keep adeafieing UHtit they ihouldJoinG]/rva(_=wpBtt-
^tw lut A* ^Ir/^uJCkVur) 2. 1. 2.

TEMPORAL CLAIJ8E8 IN GENERIC SENTENCES

2409. If the leading verb denotes a repeated or cnstomary action
or a general truth, a temporal clause takes the subjunctive witti iy
after primary tenses, the optative after secondary tenses. The nega-
tive is fiij. Cp. 2336.

S- A prMeut tense denotee action continuing (not completed) and la of the
same time aa tbal o( the leading verb ; an aorist tense denotes action simply
occurring (completed) and time osually antecedent to that of the leading verb
when the action of the dependent clauae takes place before the action of the
maiD elaoae. In cUnaea of contemporaneoua action the aoiist denntes the same
time as that of the main verb ; In clausea of anbaequent action, time later than
that of the main veib.

b. <^ ia nre In tbeae temporal ctaoaea (Hdt. 1. IT, 4. 172 ; Aim with the
optative occara in 1. 17, 1. OS).

c. Op Homeric aimllM with in he, iLt tt^t, see 2486.

a4UK In temporal sentences of indefinite frequency the temporal
clause has the subjunctive with 3y when the principal clause has
the present indicative, or any other tense denoting a present cus-
tomary or repeated action or a general truth. Cp. 2337.

ftturituBa xirrtt irini ifyi(<iiitem ae are all mad whenever we are angry
PbU«mon 184, *ar( Tit, H, Jror yinpat, i^ dTor^'rti itt a kind of voice which.

646 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [1411 ,

whenever U eomta, alw(i\i» deter* m« P. A. 31 d, Srav rntftp ru a^it, x" *^
«urATrtTai vhenever a man U eager kimeelf, Ovd too vorka with him A. Pen.

742, (in 1* nffitrai rb atd^t . . ., XP^ '"^ rafiriji- (ol icu^fpnjrii* . , , wptMimt
ttpoi . , ., irciSir S' ^ SdXaTTo irfprx^t ^uiroioi ^ awoi/S-^ at long a* the ttstti
remaCru in t^ety, bulk sailor and pilot thfiulit exert themtelves; bat tehen Itir
tea hat overiehelmed it, their effort* are frullleaa I). 9. 09, iroiaCtitr Tau6' Itiaj<i6'
. . . luf ttv aWir iiifidXuiur ti i[ai:6r we do this on each occaaion antil we plunjr
him into mU/ortane At. Nub. 1468.

2411. The verb of the main daiue tosj eland in the puticiple, or in other
tenses Clian tha present indic&tive: iralrtp ru> irSpiiwar, ft if iiit Af mXiitiii.
riy rapirra (r4Xt/io») itl /liyurTOf KplrSrriiir although men alwal/l consider lAf
present tear the greatest so long attheg are engaged in tt T. 1.21, Srar S it^^
Ttttrn i-'apaS^), taraXiXuiit riff afirii airoB Sumorda* but whenever he nrrenilm
Oiete rights to anuther, he desirous once and for all hit own sovereignly Aes.
3. 23S, ToX^^uoi . . . IISti Srar . . . taraSouX-iiruirTal rini, toXXihW til ^XtIhi
itiiyicaaar ilm enemies ere now have forced improBetnent upon those uhom rtfj
have entlaved X. O. I. 23 (Cp. 2S3B), iraXX^liiii ieainaaa ttji riXuqi t<S« XryAmo
iwip tiirw, iXJiip Srar irdop-^SQ <rrX. / hare often mamelled at the rffTontrrf '
of the speakers in hCa behalf, except uAen(ecer) I consider, etc. L. 12.41.

3412. ir (W) is frequently omitted in Homer, and ocoa-sionally In lyric «nl ;
dramatic poetry and in Herodotus, e.g. frtl J' d/iipTjj, <iTiot o*k/t' (rr' irv
ipouhas bvt lehenever a man commits an error, that man ia no lonyer hredlea
8. Ant. 1025. |

2413. The present Indicative fs very rarely used Instead ot the Hubjanctiv« j
with iw in temporal clauses of indefinite frequency. TIuls, rtpl rat dXXw* rur I

iivtoirrwr, Srt (9tbv conj.) iud^rriu, Sfi rapd r&r tariiyipvr wuBiaBm vili I
regard to other malefactnrs, one hat to learn during thrir trial (lit. when Ihr;
are tried) fnim the aecusert L.22.22. Cp. 23J2.

2414. In temporal sentences of indefinite frequency the tenipoi:iI
clause ha.s the optative when the principal clause has the imperfK-t
or any other tense denoting a past customary or repeated actiuo.

J^iptiier drA rrrou irirf yii)itiaai piii\oiTa iauT6r he leai umnt to hunt on horie-

back, whenever he loanted to eiercise himsflf X. A. 1. 2. T, brirt SipA tt^ ipi^nt.
Mp*Ht oAraiit IsTt i/i^iyoUr ri whenever it xnaa breakfast time, he tued In (Mi:
until they had enten something X. C, 8. 1. 44, rtpu/tiniur itiarare Ivt imx*"-i
Ti itapwT^ipiow irtiSii Si imxSflr), tliri)itr we used to wall al'OUt on each •■cr-i~

lion until the priton was cpened ; bvt vihen{ever') it teas opened, we tued lo gi^
P. Ph. 69 d. Observe thait dHij(0(fif marks a repeated pas e action (untfl it ii
regviarly opened) and represents the tlioiight of the subject (unlfl it tkould t-
opened, ot. 2420 ; i.e. direct = tut it itoix^i).

2415. The optative is rare after a primary tense, and ncciira only irlien tbi'
tense includes a reference to tha past (w 2J4; cp. 'iol3). — Srt «v with the optr
live occurs once (1 025).

2416. OtbertensesthaDtheimperteotiD theprincipalclaiue: dXX*Ir«t% .

i,,Coog[c

S4ii] TEMPORAL CLAUSES 647

lintEcMr'OiuirireAt, rrimtr, frrol ti tStatt kt\. (cp. 495) but whenwtr OdHMeH*
aniK, he always kept hit pontUon and looked down r 215, iv&rc t/wit^X/^k^ rimt
Twr ir rail riittiw, tl*tr it ktX. vhtnever he iooked toward anir of Vtt m«n Jn tAfl
rants, he would aa^, etc. X. C. 7. 1. 10. Cp. 2;Ml.

2417. Tba indicative (cp. 2342) ia rare In tempoml olaoses of past in-
definite frequency, aa lol pSov not txiptuor drire ol ro\iiAioi airtit C^erAu
liuWor thej/ both gang and danced whenever the enmt]/ mere likely to look at
them X. A. 4. 7. 10. So with ^dnit reterring to particular events of repeated
occurrence, as iaiut iMxopiJyiiM . . . mfnjM at often at he hat been ehoregut,
he hat gained a vletorg X. M. 3. 4. 3.

TEMPORAL CLAUSES OBNOTINO PURPOSE

2tl8. Temporal conjunctions denoting limit as to duration (so long
aa, tchile) oi limit as to teruiinatioa (urUil, till) may imply purpose.

a. So fut till, againtt the time lehen, in order that, vplw before, in order that
not. lE^pa (poet.) is usually final (in order that) ratUer tlian temporal (>o long
aa, vihile, till, up to the lime that). Sometimes iu p<«t-Homeric Qreek Itn tmd
the subjunctive (with or witbont if) has a Icucli of purpose.

2419. In tbe Odyaaey Im, usually with the aoriat opuilive after a secoodaiy
tense, is almoBt a final conjunction. Thus, i^at . . . fXoiot dur xi^Xiio-air*
tlie gave olive oil that (against the time when') the might anoita hertcif
{-TO. So « 799, 1 386, r 307. In i 376 the present optaUve expreaacB duraUve
action (BtpiiairoiTo gradvallg get hot).

2420. After a aecondar; tense tan with the aorUt optative sometimes In
Attic prose implies an expectation, hope, or pmtpote on the part of the subject
of ilie main verb that the action of the temporal clause may be attained. Since
such optatives are due to the principle of indirect discourae, Uie aubjUDCtlve with
dr, denoting mere futurity, might have been used instead.

arorSat hroiiaarro tut iwayyt\9tlTi ri XtjfS'TB they made a truce (which they
bo[>ed would last) until Che termi thoald be announced X. H. 3. 2. aO (here we
might have had Im Iv irayyiMi), ri. IXXa x^P'" '^X"' l^-arret tm ir^iai tAmni.
]r*i4»iar { = Ar woiiiauat) rk tlpiiiiira Chry retained the other places, fvailing until
thry (the Lacedaemoniana) on their part ihould have performed for them (tha
Athenians) vihat had been agreed on T. !i, 35. Compare Iwt ir raura SiavpUvr-
rat ^uXdjHr' - ■ ■ jrarAiTc he left a garrison (lo remain there) until Iheg ehotild
!"ttle these mntlers X. H. 6. 3. 25 (here fui iiarpd^aivra might have been used).
Other examples are L. 13.25, Is.1. 10,7.8 (tunoH?), X.H. 4.4.6, D.2T.6,29.43
(t/mi), 33, 8 ; cp. also Ar. Eq. 133. Present optative in T. S, 102, X. H. 5. 4. 37.

2421. tut St with the optative occurs mrety whfre it might be thought that
tlie simple optative or If with the Bubjunciive should be used. Many editors
emend, but tr may generally be defended aa potential, expressing the conviction
rif the agent. Thus, tfXtaet irSpa% cfinwi- re&Tovt ii hniU>,tia9a.t riji riXeui, fuf
a* ol riiim TtOtitr j/oa elected twenty Tn^-B whfwa dnty it should be to care for
the State until tuf.h a time aa in all probabilitv the lawt would he wade And.
1 1*1. Cp. S. Tr.687, L17, 16, P.Ph.lt/ld. So Sra* A. Fers. 460, wplrit X.SL
2.3.48,2.4.1a

lOglc

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

BUUHAUY OP THE COKSTRUCTIONB OF &K AND OP OTBKB
WORDS MEANING BOTH SO LOKO AS A.TSO UlfTlL

l«t 80 long as, vihiU
Temporal Limit an to Duration (during the time vihxtC)

2422. Indicative, %Then the action of the temporal clause denotes
definite duration ia the pfesent or past. The present often connotes
cause (white, now that, because). The imperfect is used of past action:
the main clause has the imperfect usually, but the aorist occurs
(T.5.60).

3433. Subjunctive (present) with cIi', when the action lies in the

0. Future, and the Terb ol the main clause la future indlcatlTe or ui
equivalent form.

b. Present, and the verb of the main clause Btat«a a preeeut ouatomarj or
repeated aetlon or a geneiai truth.

2424. The present optative (of future time) ta very rare : in dependence oo
■ past tenae (X. H. 6. 4. 37, Arlatotle, Athen. Pol. 28 end) ; by r^uiH MsimiU-
tlon (2iee b) in a !«■ vivid condition (P. Th. 155 a).

(m until, tilt
Temporai Limit as to Termination {up to the time toheti)

2425. Indicative, of a deiinite present or past action. The present
connotes cause. The aorist is normally used of past action ; the main
Terb is usually imperfect, but the aonst occurs (1.17.12).

a. 01 a future action the future ia very rare ; X. C. 7. 6. 39 (^ I Hdt. 9. fi8).

3426. Subjunctive with av, when the action lies in the

a. Future, and the main ciauae contains a verb raferrlng to the futon
(except the optative without it). The tenae la nanalir the aorist : the preMent
marks overlapping.

b. Prefwnt, and the verb of the main clanae atat«8 a pieaent oustomar; or
repeated action or a general tmth.

3427. Optative (usually aorist), when the action lies in the

a. Future, and dependa on an optative with dr.

b. Past, and dependa on a secoDdary tense expreesing or fnnplying Indirect
diaconrse. Here the opt«Uve repreieoU ir with the subjunctive aft«r k primary

C. Past, and the verb of the main clause atatee a p«st customary or rapsKted

N. — The present optative tn b la rare; the tntnie optative oocnia only In
X. H. 4. 4. 9, where some read the aorist.

2488- Conjunctions meaning until may have, as an Implied or e

1434] TEMPORAL CLAUSES {irpiv CLADSBS) U9

intecedent, pJxp* roirmi up to the time. Thus, lUxi^ to^ou ASaSinit #IXm
i}r*|idiiT«, (« rpoMwni 'OXurtfoi' Lotthentt vxu called a fiiend (up to tA« Unw

wAttt) until A« betrat/ed OlynChtu D. 18. 48.

3429, WithconjunctionBmeaningiintd, nheii the princip^ cl&uae U (URnHa-
(ir«. It ia implied tbat the action of the verb ol the principal cliiuse contluuea
iiiili^ up to the time when the action of the verb of the until clause takes place.
Thus, b the passage cited in 2428, it is implied that Lastbenaa ceaeed to be
called a friend after he had betrayed Olyntbns.

a. Wben the principal clause is negative, it Is 1mplied\h&t the action of the
cerb of the principal clause does not take place until the action of the tinlfl

clanse takes place ; ttelnat ryr^cpov twaivarro fiat rifr viXir i^f ffrdrtii KaT<«Ttrffai'
Ihff did not etop until thej/ divided the city into fartioitt L. 26, 2G. In sentencsa
like Ui ti,i) wptfUrtir Iwi if iwiarSivit we muit not watt until they are upon ut
(1.4. 165), by reason of the meaning of vcpi^Hit the action of the principal clause
cease* before the actlna ot the until clause takes place.

GENERAL RULE FOR trftv BEFORE, UNTIL

2430. wpiv is construed like other con j unctions meaning until
except that it takes the infinitive as well as the indicative, subjunc-
tive, and optative.

2431. After an affirmative clause vpiv usually takes the infinitive
and means before.

2432. After a negative clause wpiV means vniil, and usually takes
the indicative (of definite time), the subjunctive of optative (of
indefinite time).

a. The sabjunctlve or optative Is never used with wplr unless the principal
clause is negative.

b. When the principal clause Is negative, wptr Is construed like fwt and other
words tor until (oi rplr t= fui).

2433. When the principal clause is affirmative, the clause nitb wptr almply
adds a closer definition of the time. When the principal clause Is negative,
tpir defines the time as before, but the closer definition servea also as a eondl-
tfon that must be realized, before the action of the principal clause can be
realized. Thus, nij da-AArr* wplt ir ixoiirirrt do not go away until you hear
X, A. 6. 7. 12 (i.e. ielthout hearing = iii /lii dimtfo-^e). Cp. aCrt yip tlpi/inir Mr
'( 3ePoii^ liya.yii*, J)t >iJj Jcoii^ toTi Pappipaa ToXi/iiJo-ujui', oSS' diwnQffat r»4i

EXAifmi, TTplw hf * , • roil Kiriitoht rp^i roi^ 1t^ab^ woiiftrili/irSa neither is itpo^
lil'le to make a lotting peace uni'ss tee tear (n common against the barbariani,
«ir can the Greek* attain unanimity of sentiment untH we encounter our periU
in the front of the tame enemiet 1. 4. 178.

2434. rplr is used with the aorlst or (less often) with the imperfect indicft-
tire only when wplt Is equivalent to tut until ; but, when the verb of the main
clanse ia negatived, rplr may be translated by bifore or until. When rplr must
be rendered by btfore, it takee the infinitive.

.oog[c

550 STNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [»«s

Talks hnlwir w/Af Swu^rtri ilAnrra I xea» doing thU until Sorrattt arrtnd (nii«

even In poetry ; cp. 8441 e).

oi ToDra irnfoui' rplr ^uKpir^t i^tntro I W<W not doing thU Utttfl (or btforr)

Socratu arrived.

rotrrs ^gfour rplr Zuupdriir i^u^tai (not ZuKpdriit diffjctra) I tBOt dotag ttti

btfore Soeratet arrived.

2433. It Ifl correct to Bay ai Toiiia-ii) toG™ rplt it n\f6vgt, weiiifit (or ai
Toiijo-u) TouTo rplr Ke\^ai, but JncorreGl to say ■■di)(»-u tvvto wpl* 4r ttXriajit.

2436. The action of an infinitive introduced by wplr bffore may or may nnt
(according to the aenae) actually lake plaue at some time lattr than the at^lii'ii
of the leading verb. The clause wiLh rpir si^'iiififs merely tliat the action ot th»
inflnilive had not la1<en place at the time of the leading vurb.

2437. The clause with rp(v may precede or follow the correlat<Ml
clause. Cp. 2455.

2438. rplf la originally a comparative adverb meaning before, I.e.
or formerly/ ; and seems to be connected with wpi, rpirtpiit before. Tbe ailvcrUii)
force survives In Attic only after the article, sa ir raU rpln iM-fait ta tlu f-rt-
going stalf.menta T. 2. 112. Tiie adverbial and original use appears also m llomrr
wherever *pir occun with tlie indicative, the anticipatory (futural) subjmir'tin !
(1810), or the OptatiVK with Ki. Thus, r^r i' iyii ai Miu ■ rpir fur col yvm \
trticir but Iter I will not release; sooner ehall old age come upon hrr A'-i^. \
oM^ fur dnrriiffdt ' rplt Kal KaiAr iWo wiSTiaBii nor tkiilt thou reealt him til l!f': |
sooner {before Ikie) C/iuu ailt suffer yel another afflictioa (IS-'il. — Prom l)i.« ;
early cottrdinatlon woh developed the conetnictioii of the cunjjtticlion rplr with ,
tiie finite niooda ; but hi general only after Homer, wlio never uses the indica- .
tive, B:id the optative oniy once (* 5S0), with rplr. The required Henne «if I
f;iveu by Im or rplr y' Srt Si}. A finite mood wa.i lint used of the future. a:il |
after negative clauses (oiS rpiTtpor rplr like vi rpinpor (wt)- — Homer commons ;
uavs the infinitive with rplr uieanlng before and until. Here the infinitive (,>* i
with fiff-Ti) simply states the abstract verbal notion, and thus has no refireinc ■
to difterences ot time or mood ; rplr being used altnoet like rpi brfnre ns «^'
litir = rpi ToB Itclr before feeing (first in Xenoplion). This early uh* with Ih-
inflnltlve was, with some restrictions, retained in Attic, where tiie Infinitive u >; !
sometimes be used instead of the finite verb, rplr came more and more in tak'' i
the subjunctive with Sv and Xia assume conditional relations (cp. -HXi) ; wbilf <
the use with the infinitive was more and more confined to cases where the le:i'i-
ing verb was affirmative.

2439. The comparative idea In rplr explains lis nepitlve force : an eveni \
happened before another event It, i.e. A occurred when B had not get (o(«i>'
occurred. Because of Its negative force rplr coiiiniiirily tAkes the aorlst in a'.'
the moods. The aoriat has an affinity for the negative becnusR It marks aim] '
and total negation tif an action regarded in Ite mere OL'curr^nce ; nberpas tin'
iraperfect with a negative denotes resistance or refusal (ItiBU) in respact of ^a^i
action regarded as continuing. Wlien rplr takes the present in any inooil tlir .
actions of the correlated clauses usually overly. The preaent occurs chi< Sy
in the prose writers of the fourth centary.

I;,C.00J^[C

144*3 TEMPORAL CLAUSES (vptv CLAUSES) 661

34i0. irporcpoi' OF rpoirOtv ms^ be used in the principal clauae as a
forerunner of rpiy. Examplea in 2441, 2444, 2445.

a. Homer hns rpir , , . •wplr B348. Attic has aIho ^Mrw . . . •wpli, u
ip^rarrti r\t6<rarrtt rplr r^r ^vu^pir Xfoui alvBisBai lAfy will JHCCCed in ItUlt-
ing W<ir voyage be/ore the CMaiu hear oj (A* dUatter T. 8. 12.

wpb WITH THE INDICATIVE

2441. jrpiV in Attic prose takes the indicative of a definite past
action when the veib (if the principal clause is negative or implies a
negative, rarely when it is affirmative.

•ft-e rirt Kipifi «mi IffoXt rptr 1) yvrli atrbr frttvi nor Wit hf, wllltng then to
eniT inta relation* with Cymt until hta wife ptrtuaded him .\. A. I.2.2<1, efl
Tp6Ttpfr traHrarro rplr rit t» nrip' it toB aTpa.Toir4Sott ptrrriiBJiarTt koX tSt
pi\ar aJTou TW>f /lit (Lv^rrtirav, Teit 1' it rfji iri\tm 4i4pa\or thrg did not gtiip
tintil they »fnt fi>r hit /nthrr from the rnmp, pnt same of fti> frieiidi) tn death
aart expelled itthfmfnm the city 1.10.8, o6 rpdaStr traHaarro rpir titTe\iipinKrar
Tdr'OXoupor they did nut case fhim hosttlitien uiUii they had ruptured Olitmt bg
riege X. 11. 7. 4. 16, oM' ^ . . . i^fiwar riJrTtp6r Ti t««v ii airtr . . . rplr ft Si,
. . . iriip 'Apy[\u>j ^qrvrfrt ylyrtTat (hiswrical present = norlst) not reen under
theae firrumslanrj-g did they think it Tight to lake ony severe maaiirea affain$t
him, until JInatly a man of Argilvt turned infomirr T. 1. \A-i.

B. Tlie iPiise in the rplr clause ia umially the aorist (the tense of npfntlon,
:il3fl, andof prior Hcllf>n);rftrely the imperfect (of coniemporancous, overlapping
acliim}, as D.9. 61. The historical preat^nt is also used as an equivalent of the
a'lrixt. The principal clause usually has a secoiidary tense of the tndicatlie.
rplr with the IndiuflUve it not common llnt[l flerodotuH and the Attic writers.

b 'I'lie vi-rb of the principal clause mijy be rlrtanllij nepative, br toiIt . , .
'A^™foi>i Xaffldmnfi rpir Sit '3 AiJXv ^'X"' they esraptd the nolift of thf Athe-
nians (i.e. oix iparrat) ttiitll they renehed Deloi T. .t. 28. Cp.T.3. lOt, X. A.
3. ■'i. 33. Obnerve tliat o6 raioiiai (2411) iH not regarded as virtually atflrmative.

C. The rerb of the principal clause is affirmative in proia only in T. T. 39,
7. 71, Aes. 1. M. In all of these crises the leadini; verb is an imperfect, which
■■itiphasizes the cohtlnnation of tlie action up U> the point of lime expreaaed by
tiie rplr claUHC.

d. The use in Hemrloiiii is the same as in Atilc prose. Homer has the
indicative (after afBnnnlive or negative clauses) only with rplr y' Sre until. In
the drama rplr with the Indicative is rare. Earipides uses it only after afflrma-
'.ive clauees. When rplr U = (wt It often takes Si).

3442. A irpiV clause, depending on a past tense denoting non-ful-
Bltnent, itself denotes non-fulfilment and takes a past indicative hy
assimilation (2185 h).

XP^' rotnir AirrlrTtr >i)) rp&rtptr TtBfrai rir /nuroCI ripar rplr TOUTQr Aivr

Leptiaea ought not then to hare propoted hit otrn law until (Jtefore) he bad
-epealed thi* D.20.«J. Cp. 2455 b.

,oog[c

SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

trpCv -WITH THE anBJtJNCTIVB

3443. irpiv with the subjunctive and 3» refers to the future or to ,
general present time. |

2444. (I) Ttplv takes the subjunctive with 3» to denote a future
action anticipated by the subject of the leading verb. The principal
clause is negative, and contains any verb referring to the future
except the simple optative.

ai rptrefKir KaxHr -raiftmu al rAXeti tfAr ht tr airaXt «1 ^Xivo^ IpfxriP
StaUn mil mil cease from evil until philotophert hteome rulert in lArm K B,
487 e, M irixe^rt Tplw ir iiaivtrtf do not go aieaj/ until tfou hear (shall hav.
heard) X. A.5. 7. 12, of ;(p4c' MMt iriMiir rflr it iH Slmit 1 niirt notdfparf '
h«nee vntil I have tvffired punishment 5. T. 5, m<I<I'" ^IXa* raiai wplr At tdrritji
rut Kixpv^ 'oil rpivpai' qkfXtit make no one your friend utUtl yoH hatt
inquired how hehm treated hit former friendt 1.1.24, ^i) tot' trairl^fttpiw Ir
(Ugi itipa au<ln)riut never proite a man until you have come to know Aim (Cdl
'Itieognis B03. Observe tbat the laM two eianiples contain t, general truth.

a. The Horiat subjunctive is usual (the tense of negation, 2431?, »nd of action
prior to that of the principal clause); much leas common is the present flubjanc-
tive (usually of contemporaneous, overlapping action) as X.C. 2.2.8 (2440).

b. Homer does not use tt or it in this construction since i-plr is here adrtr-
YM and its clause Is simply coordinated. Bat Horn, has wplt 7' St> <t. Tlw
subjunctive without it occurs occasionally as an archaism in Hdt and the
dramatic poets. In Attic prose especially in Thuc (e.f. 6. 10, 29,88) ; but It
is often inserted by editors.

c. Theleadlng verb is rarely the optative with di>(aa a form' of future expres-
sion) : niK ir iw4\eoitu Tplt r^rriwiait ii dyvpa Xu0g (cp. b) / will not go aiMt
until the market i» entirely owr X.0. 12. 1.

2445. (II) After a negative clause of present time that expresses
a customary or repeated action or a general tnith, vplv takes the
subjunctive with 5.v.

at rpirtfnr iraAirrat ■Kptr At wtiffuaii atit i)Alinr?ar they do not eetue to endure
until they have vmn over thoie tehom they have uronged P. Vh. 114 b.

a. The leadicig verb may stand in another tense than the present indicative.

as «M>Il rilircTt iwiStTO (empiric aorist, 1930) rpdrtpnr Hnuv nraXdrci wfir 1>
p^ftr rwr SiKaariipliiir Irxicv no one hoe ever attempted the enbvereinit of the
people until he became sJiperior to the court* of justice Aes. 3. 235.

2446. After a secondary tense in actual or implied indirect dis-
course, irpiv with the subjunctive and Sy is common instead of tfa«
optative without ay (2449).

tlwt itiiSita rUt twivBtr riHwAii rplt it i Tp6a9tt ^T^th / ordered that manr
in the rear ihould move vntil the one before him led the way X. C. 2. 2.8 (hen
wflr iffi^'' is possible).

1(53] TEMPORAL CLAUSES (trp& CLAUSES) 558

M47. The principal olause may be affirmative in form, but Ttrto-
ally negative.

ml«xf^' (= «d KoUtOT oi lilr) S' ^y^B/uu rp&rtpft rairaaffcu irplr ir l/uh wipl
■(ruv I ri Ir poiXtirSt ftt^lgifvBt I consider it batr. (f.«. 1 do not consider <t to

bt faononnble) to Mop wttU yon have voted what you vHah L. 22. 4. Ct. Thoc.
e. 38, D. 38. S4, E. BenoL 179.

Vp6> WITH THE OPTATIVE

3Ma rpu- with the optative is used only in indirect diacourse oi
by assimilation to another optative.

2449. (I) The optative without ay follows wpCv to denote an action
anticipated in the paat when the principal clause is negative and its
verb is in a secondary tense. The optative is here in indirect dis-
course (actual or implied) and represents ar with the subjunctive,
which is often retained (2446). Cp. 2420.

drrniftvt ti-iiS4ra piWtir irpIr Kupai Jfw-XqirftJii ffi/pSr he forbade any one to
ihoot imtU Cynu should Juive had his fill o/ hunting X. C. 1. 4. 14 ( = /i^di
fiaXkirti rplf li Ku^t /^rX^ffg), ol 'HXctat . . . hiieaw (airroit) /ili rouurSat
f^Xt' 'f^' ^ 0?^<u« TapayimwT^ the Eleans ptrswidrd thrvt not to engage
in baUie vMtl the Thtbans should have eonte up X.H.6.6.19 (=^4 »uirc
^X1>' ^P'' 1' rapayinvrrai').

m. In tDdlrectdlKonrse the Inflnltive is preferred (2466 d).

3430. (II) By assimilation of mood, Tpt'v may take the optative
when the negative principal clause has the optative. Cp. 2186 b.

tl tXtoi TU otrtr . . . ral fi4 ixlq vplc 4(\jic4ni(r h ri rei ^Xlav ^Si crX. if
OfM should drag htm and not let him go until he had dragged him out into the
tunliffht, etc. P. R. 616 e.

3491. The optative with wpiv in clauses of customary or repeated
action seems not to be used.

3453. vptF if with the optative is rare and siupected (cp. 2421). '

vpilt WITH THE INFINITIVB

au3. irptV takes the infinitive in Attic especially when the princi-
pal clause is affirmative. The infinitive must be used, even with
negativ^e clauses, when wpiv must mean only before (and not until).

«. The Infinitive ii obUgtttoiy In Attic wbeu tbe aotlon of the wplt cUose
does not take place or is not (o lake place (cp. 6m ;») with the tnfinltive}.

b. The Inflnitive takee the aoausKtive when its subject ii different from th»t
of tbe principal claiue.

e. The nsnal tense is the aorist, the tense of n^itlon (S43B) and of the
■impte oconrrence of the action. Less frequent Is the present (chleflj' In Xeno-
pbon), of BoUon conUnulDg, repealed, or sttempt«d (b^ors undertaking to.

554 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [mm

b^ore pToeteding to). The perfect, of action corapleud with perauiaeiit imdH,

ol Kdl Tplt tiii tirtlr irieBr tli6Tn wha knoK even before I tay anything it all
D. 18. 60, (TiiffjTt iiir cal rfU i/ii \iytii yvu know at viell as I do even brfvrt
I pTOCerd to get forth in AHail the matUr of my jpeecft Aes. 1. 116, drrrpdrarro
it rjjF ri\iv rpir Inrtpftalrtir Ihey tvratd back to the city before they attempted to
tcale the wall T. 3. 24.

2454. When tlie principal clause is affirmative, vptv before regu-
larly takes the infinitive.

^irl tA ifptr itaPalrtt Xitptirtipoi rplr Ttrat nlirBirStu rSf ToXcpJwr ChiHsnphu*
asrended the height before any of the eaemy perceived htm X. A. 4. 1. T, rplr
(araXvirai ri rTpirtuiia rpin ifn^Tar ^ariXiAf i^nj b^ore the army h Uted for
brealfast, the king tipp'-nrfd 1. 10. 19, niiefiit, »pii> it Ityi^ airJi tlm, xpbt Ti»
ifiX'*^"- ^^' ii'"^', iti\(i>e ict\. l!t. bcfiire he himself arrived at Tegea, tending (o
(Ae commander of the tnfrcenaries, he gave ordert, etc. X. H. 5. 4. 37 (a^Ai, bj
aitraction to the subject of wiivfiiij).

2455. When the main clause is negative, irpiv oometimea takes the
infinitive in Attic, and generally means before, rarely un(i7. When
before and after are contrasted, until is out of plaoe, and the wpir
clause often precedes.

A. In reference to present or past time: rplr Sa'A^fior {\9ili' idar li/iipir tit
iX'iptvrtt before the came to Aphobue the reai not a widow a tingle dag U. 30. Si,
rplr pir roflro rpttfoi AnBupirij* AJt^Xar l/i iroW tihi tT6yx"°'i "* " "^ before
Leocrates did th!», it wot vneertain what tort of men they were; bitt now, etc
IjJO. 136, -rpir irdyt^eai pt ill rtir Alrsr . . . oMiJi DTiitfoT* pt before I proceeded
to let sail for Aenue no one accuied me Ant. 6. 26.

b. In reference lo &ctton unrulfllled; etn (\iyoiis) «f th iriSti(*r tiiratt rplr
(pi iaCKexSfinu rtpl abr&r, ait (vrir 9irwt tit ftr . . . AwiiiXiit rfAt ri titrit^tr
and if any one had ghown these wordt to them before I discutted them, U is
inevitable that they leould have been discontented with you 1. 12. 260.

C. In reference to future time: a6x Mr t' ivTlr ataSiaStu rplr locubt niat
raStir far' afruli' it it not postible lo perceive this before some tvffer injury at
their handt 1.20.14, tai lun /ili Sopvp^iffTi pv^'ti rplr iKaOriu and If t no one raise a
dirtiirljaitce before he /tears D.6. 16 (cp. Arui/ii) fopvpifiu pifitU rplr tr ira-rrm,
ttwu a. 13, U).

N. — WithverlMof/earini;, the poiltlvebeing the thing dreade<l ; axSfSotxa p.^
rplr ririM lirtppi\ii pt fvP" 'P^' T^r x<V^'<*r rpaaiittr Spar I fear Irst nid age
vverrome me with Us troubles before I live to behold thy gracious beauty E. fr. 4-kt.

d. Infinitive instead of the optAtive after a leading verb in a secondary

tenne : ti^nuor uiija^idi irrrptrtcSiu rpir ipffaXttr tit ri/r rUr Aacifu/iorfur
Xuipa' they entrrnlpd them bg no means to turn aside until Ihey should inrade
the terrili-ry of the Lacedaemonians X. H. 0. 6. 23 (here ttie optative might Eland
in iu<lirect ditcourae to repreiient the Bubjunctlve with dr), oOt' a^it ran rM>
ISpSwai Stirrar ^ptiTo neither voi ht ever acuttomed to take hit tupper until he
got into a sweat by exercise X. C. 8. 1. 36 (for ttp^iu, see 2461).

e. InfloitivB after an opuUve with ir In a principal clause : tf rlt tim ntx*^'

>4»3] ' CLAUSES OF CUMPAKIlSON 556

(XM iroit t-dSt« . . q odt ir woTi \iyuf dffflroi rt raioffrar *'(>lv Art rAai A0<ir!
if ever ang lawgiver lAouId Aaec anp j>rnn fur this, wiuld h« ever be Vieary of
diMCUaalng ^uth a tehttM vnlll he reached the end f V. L, 709 e. Hero tlie Bub-
juncUTe with 0* !■ permitted.

2456. Tbe lyric poels and Herodotua nse rplt with the Inflnitlve as it is used
in Attic prose and poetry. Homer lias the inQiiilive alter affiruiatlve or negative
eUoMfl alike (p^ore and vnttl), and often wliere a finite verb would be used in
Attic ; aa railr U n^Saiaw rpir fXBtlr vlai 'Axaiflv h« daeU in Pedaeon before the
MMU qf lAe Achamtu came N 172, oil /i' drirrp^cit rpli X'^^'V luixiaaaSai
(= Attic Ir MX^s) t^u (AoU not diaeuade me vntU tAou hoM fought wUh
the spear T 267 j often in correepondence with the adverbial Tplv, aa oiSi m
(iXij rplr wiirir, rplr Xei^oi «or dtirtt any man (tooner) diink 1>tfore he had
offered a libation H 4W.

2437. {j vpl* Man before, with a past tense suppreeeed after 4, occurs flret
inXeuophon (.C.i>.2.3«, 7.6.77),

wf4Ttpa* ^ vp4<rtn <|, 'Vplv (j, vipet

2458. vpdnpo* Ij ennner thin, before U used i-Rpeciall; In HerodiUus and
Thneyiiidea. (a) With tliu iiidiraiUve : o> rpinfur irtSortLr 1) aini Iv cUcit
ch-siT , . . 4vti^'Vi* th'g did nolaKceumb before thryiofre ni)tTthrrrn<nhy thtm-
trlvet T. 2. Oo. (b) With tlie infiiillWe : rai f AWai a-iXfii (^ir Uiictlt. a! Jt
'A^rofovt rpjripiiv 4 dTDo-T^fsi di^Xauv he »aid tlie other Stateawerewronij.iahii-h,
before the}/ revolted, useil tii pay money iiUn the treasury of the Athentam'V.'iAb.
(c) With the aubjUDctive (without it) ramly (T. 7. Oi). Chielly In Udt.

2459. So wftvt*^ <i tooner than, brfnre : IrcuplnrD . . . Si-i wpiaBtr ar d*^
difou* 4 t4 BitXb ro/wlaliia'ar A« antieered that they leould die before (sooner than
that) theg would Murrrnder their arnu X. A. 2. 1. 10. Smpo* ^ later than taltes,
by analogy, tbe Infinitive once in Thuc. (Q. 4).

2460. wpl* f{ Moner than, brfore with the iiiUnltive ocean in Homer (only
B 2S8, X 260) and lldt. (2. 2) ; and in lldt. also with the IndicaUve (fl. 45)
and subjanctive (7. 10 q, without tr). trplr f is rare and suspected in Attic
(X. C. 1. 4. 23) ; but is common in late Greek.

2461. «Apot b^ore in Uomer Ukea the Infinitive (Z 348).

CLAUSES OF COMPARISON

2462. Clauses of comparison (as clauses) measure an act or state
qualitatively or quantitatively with reference to an act or state in the
leading clause.

a. Comparative clauites with ^ than are used In disjunctive coordinated sen-
tences. See under Harticles (286:)).

2463. Comparative clauses of quality or manner are introduced by
£k o*i iatrmp, naSdjrtp just as, ottok, ^, oTnj, ^mp OS. The principn.i
clause may contain a demonstrative adverb (aurut, S&i so), iuutc/j
may be correlated with 6 auT«$.

666 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [mM

in, etc., are here propedj conjunctive relative adverbs of maniiBT, aome oaea
of whieb fall under conditional relative clauses.

a. Other comparative conjunctive adverbs are Am <u (poetic and Ionic),
ifin, ttra <u, Kite at (Epic). DemouBtrattve adverbs In Epic are £f, r^, rolvt,

b. On other uses of in, etc., see under Particles (2990 ff.) . On in, Arwtp iriUi
a participle, see 2080, 2087.

2464. The verb of the comparative claose Is commoni; omitted if it Is Uw
same as the verb of tbe leading clause. Tbiis, ikr nl ivrh*^ 'Ovrcp iiial if it
Menu good alto to you at {it ttemt) to m« P. Ph. 100 c

3465. The subject of a comparative clause with liii or Sur'wtp, the verb lA
which is omitted, la oft«n attracted Into tbe caee (usually the accusative) of the
other member of the Oompaiifion. Thus, aitaiiav yi/i tara ' Kyipvror 'AAfiuv
tlrci btwtp BpaatpoaXar it it in no vtite postible /or Agoratut tn be an Athenian
at Thratybulus Is (= epaaip<iv\<it 'Af^raiti iari) L. 13. 72. Attraction into the
dative is leas common : Kipt^ jjicrs . . . Sartp firdXnn ytmlip dnucXdjtm kt
vnt delighted vUh Oyrut, toAo tet vp aery like a young and noble dng (= vriXof
ytrniol dnnUfkO ^- '^- t- *■ <&•

a. Usually, however, we have the nominative with the verb omitted : rAni-

a/iai at paWtr ireearar ir i\ff8ai Ij {^r Offi-ip tyii I am pertuaded that fan
would prefer to die rather than live at /live X. M. 1. 0. 1.

2466. Comparative clanses of quality are often fused with the leading olaose
by the omiMloii of Uie preposition fn the correlated member of the comparlMn,
bnt only when &i precedes. Cp. 1078.

2467. The antecedent clause may contain a wldi : avrw (At) . . . In (whidi
may be omitted); as evru nn^ai^U t' iyii nt n^[))f^i)r ro^it, in (fi8i ^n^tptfot
(Iku Stirat J*twAt . . . rfii^DUf i)tl<M'' inytOa' ivwt at turely at I tttought it
proper (o let you Jlrtt tatte thtt comedy beeaute J thought you teere eltMr
tpeelatort, to surely may I vin and be accounted a matter Ar.Nab.6S0. Cp^
N826, Ar. Tbesm.MS.

346a Comparative clauses of quantity or degree are introduced
by oir<f, Mroy in proportion as. The principal clause usually coutains
the correapoading demonstratives rwrovnf, rocrovrov (rotr^ nicror are
usually poetic).

a. Oreek, like Latin, nsM the adjective relative piononn 8rai (guantua'i In
the subordinate clause in correlation to rtaouroi agreeing with a substantive.
Here English uses the conjunctive adverb at. So with mtSrn , . . oTm. —
nvairif, ToffoiJTo* may be followed by 4i, OeTt,

2469. Toca\h-or . . . itar or Soar . . . nrraDraF denotes that the action of the
main clause takes place in the «ame dei^e as the action of tbe subordinate
clatue. t€if . . . rmro^v with a oonpanitlfe or superlative adjective or adverb
is equivalent to the more . . . the more, the tat . . . the tett.

3470. The demonstrative antecedent may be omitted, especially when lia
olause precedes : *al xa^fviinpoi tvorrai Sry rtiirtppl ttvir and they wOt Ire |A«
Mort tetere the younger th»y are F.A.89d.

>47«] CLAUSES OF COMPARISON 557

2471. One member ma; contain a compftrnttTS, the other a superl&tiTe ; h
taif yip (roi/iirar' Bfrry (r^l X*7v) SoKoS/itr jyi^Sai, Tovairif fiSWor dritfraGtfi
vdmi a&rf for the more vx are thought to txcti all ot\en in aMlttjf to ^eak, to
mucA the more do all diilrugt it D.2. 12.

2472. Sov (Svo') "JAj be used wlthoat & compaTRtire or taperUUve when
the correlative clause hu a comparative or BnperlaUve with or without rstfo^y
(rH'iwrav}, Thila, fiirvep ir (wriiu, ovrw lal ir dvl^piiiraii rifflf /77l-y>*r(U, &ry
Ir fn-Xcs ri i^rra Ifxwri, TOffoitTV ippivripBit timi at <t {« fn (A« natUK O/

Jboraet, «o it U in the aue of eerialn men: in to far at thtg have thtir leanu
tatitfled, the more they are ieanton X.Hi. 10.2. t^if may etuid for the Ic^cal
$ri in -revBirif "Zipur ntlut iyditTB, Saif Ztfpu f^trvo* he proved htfoetlfa greater
couard than the Syrians all the more because thegjied X. C. 0. 2. 19.

2473. Tha correlated clauaea majr be fused when both Svy (Jb-ar) and TOffetfry
(TomOror) are omitted and the predlcaK of the subordinate clause is a compara-
tive or superlative with a form of tlnu. Thus, Mttaripou y^ oBn rsrMrar^t
ah-oti otorrat -xpfittBai for the vtnre indigent theg are so much Vie more *Hbmi*-
tive do (Aetr expect to fbid them X. Hi. 6. 4 (= ijip irit4rrtpal ilti, -raaatrif
TawatoripOii).

EXAHPLES OF COMPARATIVE CLAUSES

2474. The moods in comparative elaiiaea are used with the same
meaning as in conditional clauses or other conditional relative clauses.

2475. Indlcativ«: in assertions and statements of fact: tpia* Sithi ief\tit
do a* thou viill A 37, wt H xp^ r^' eiriai fpiuTrtr, e^ruf ^id^TWi rpovtr^TTor
but at fat tuttal>lt to their property, to they gave directiont to taeh I. 7. 44,
toTir yip ovTwt Srwtp tWat irrirti for it it 10 even at he tayt S. Tr. 4T6, tear ol
■ari rh a^iia ifltrai i'TOitapalramiL, rwroGror aCforrai ol iri|>l td^ Xiyavt Iw^piai

in proportion as the pleaturfs of the hody v>ane the appetite for phUotophieal

conversation increatet V. R. 328 d, ijKtr a^u* nTpariar Sntu xXefarijF iSiTmra he
came ailh an army at large as possible T. 7. 21 (cp. 1087).

a. With Sr and the potential or unreal indicative: (tffTi)J))<rarrn . . . eirrer
4 w> Tit A( yrro jumping in quicker than (<m) one could think X. A. 1. G. 8,
bantp atr, el (tXiffi^ Ijr ravra i pav (anrrjpvtfar, ipol ir upyl[tirSt , . ,, avrat Hi&
rrX, for just as you would he angry viith me if their accusations against nte aere
truf, to I beg. etc And. 1. 24.

2476. 8BbjnacUTewitli&«. —a. Of future time, as dXX' d'yrf', <U ir iyi
ttwst, ruBiiptta but come, at I shall direct, let ui obey B 189, Srwi 7^ Ar rait
aX>«irt ir^i nurir JiaSi', ouru lal ai rpii iKtlmut l(tii for as you dispose Others
titwards yourself, so ynu too will fefl tnxnards Ihem I. 2. 28, t«i ah-ali intxivSu
naMrifi ir rir 'A.97iraiot ironTttr^ let him be subject to the same penalties just as
if htkaUtiveAthenianTi.'iZ.W, ivrait dpyvptioit SnifTtp ir rXcbui tpyitumi,
ritiif -rXtlora riyaSi tif/iaawri in silver mines the larger the nKmber who eoOper-
atf., to much the more abundant feill be the riches they find X. Teot. 4. 32,
«A(evr tcip It Ttt lultu iyaSi iraSiir /tii iraSiSi x^P", roiroih-ip dStn^Ttpot Ar di/ i

then via helMtht more unjust in proportion to the greatness of tha bentfflU he

558 SYNTAX OP THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [m77

koj Ttfeived and for which ha doet not return proper gratitnAe t X. M. 2.3.3

(cp.ajiBd).

b. Ot present time, aa In f^pnerel conditions : ri iiit Tip 'fp^>, *>f A> A iaipmr
Pov\7,ei, ndrrwr ylyrrri^ /or the end of all evenU happeiu tu OodwUU U. I&fti,
Tso-gih-^ XoKiriirtpo' dioitir rut '\tyoijJr<iir, Icr^i ■'f/i it a^wr rii duptfiirriftr
iitrifTi Tataiiapriat it u lAe more dijjl<:utt foT them to pay httd to what (t told
in pmpoTtion to the precision mith uihich their trrori are Krutinited L II. 3.

2477. Optatire. —a. With it (pot^atiai) -. hn mltu rdialntw liiym i in t$
Ury Tii it ftwBi their deed» are loo great for any one lo tell in vaordt B. 6. 11,
a^r^p tt^ol ^itt if dfi(^«CTi kukui Anoittp irwb Tiir butripur walBwr, ovru fL^
TiiiT<f trlTprwt rtpi rofi rarpii ^XaA'^q^xtr just OS VOn yotinriref uwulfi nol think
it right to be ill spoken of hy your children, even to do not permit kim either U)
utter slanders about his father D. 40. 46.

b. With 4r, aa in less vivid future conditioiw; Svif Si rpivPiTtpoi ylywonii,
fuXXor del dardftoiTD Av (x^^fu"'"} 'Ae older he grow*, the more he would alwajri
respfct wealth 1'. R. 54Db.

C. Tlie i>plfttive without dv In indirect discourse may represent it with tlw
subjunctive of direct discourse ; as roidiat, Beif /itr SirTar fkBai, ToaoOri^ iwnpa-

^aaCSti fTfiirevim in the hellef that, the more quickly he advanced, the tttiire
unprepared for battle would the king be, trhtle the rlowirr he tdvnaaei, the greater
would be the army that wot eolUeting for the king X. A. 1. 5. 9 (direct = Srif Ar

ffaTTOr l\8ai . . . ^laxsiifiai, Saip it fX"^- f^^" Toaoirif rUor avnytipctai).

a. Witliont ir, of piuft time, as in gi-neral conditions. Thus, JunriSwo* in
tiajrTir ri iv^i^slroi they put the Stones together at tnch Aoppennl to fit T. 4. 4. —
ALw a.fter a present tense : itt^ KpititJo* ^r, Srwi Sirairt rii 'tl* beet to live at
haxard, as one map S. O. T. D79 (cp. 2673).

2476. irmp (( (uxrircpci), imp &* il (oKnetpavti') jjist OS if (^^juat at
would be the case, if) form a corabinution of a comparison and a con-
dition, and are used with the indicative imperfect (of past time) or
aorist or with the optative {commonly when r« ia the subject).
tatnrtp {av) here represents the suppressed apodosis to the condition
with (I. lu some cases the ellipsis may easilj be supplied, but it
was usually unconscious.

a. Wlien Hawtp it has Its own vprb It is nsed like for inttaiue, aa firrcp Ar
(ITdBiL), il tIi iu IpaiTo . . ., cfvaiH* Av for initaiiee, if ang one were to oat
m«, / ekvuld say V, G. 451 a.

b. Witb dffrep il, &irwtp ir il Cp. Koeiirtp it, KaSimtp tr tl.

2479. aoirtp <1 : BtMn&iU H at . . . iWiepaur iriXir lupiir X^ura*, Oattf
tl rapttrirut but I marvel that of a city epeaking another tongue thcv doat aa
truly tell as (thou aouldst teli) if thou hadtt aluiags been dweiling therein A.
Ag. 1201.

2480. fio^np &v it is more common than Otrip tl. Thus, rpit itiram rail
wpoy6nus roAt ifiurfpovi rtiu^aXirrci Ajuiui liiipSAp^aw, &<rrtp ir ^Sie^9dp^rar~) «I
rpii iirarrai iySpiirtat ira\iiiiti!aw in contending agaiuft OUT miMItora alf"''

they icere deetroged a* completely as if they had waged war againet all ma»i:t»'t

«4t4] CLAUSES OF COMPARISON 559

1. 4. 69, luaui yip fiw lomSvi rirxvr Arwifi (if rit tiax") 'I ^t' <r(iXXi irSlur
nHiwvTt iiaririM-n for they item to itte to be in the tame Mndilion a» if any one
for all Mt eating uer« never to be filled X. S. i. 'AT, ^riiero airbr &rwep ir
(ilffFiifiiiTo) tl Til . . . TriXtti ^iXwr irrdfaiTo he greeted him at one letiald do
uiho had long loved him X. C. 1. 8. 2.

a. With a participle &aTip it il \b sometlmeH used with much tbe same force
■a A»wtp, the tl being added b; a confualon of constructions. TIiuh, &i!rtp it tl
nJ naraKXvrpir yfyc^^i" ti3f rpay/iArar ifyoifuroi as If sov believed that there
had been alto a retolutlon in politics D. 16. 214: lit, at (jou would tbiiik) ifyov
believed (for a^ttp iw 47ih)(u>« or Sniwip ir tl iff'"'^')- Cp. 1766 a. Slmliarly
A*ictp tl bas virtually the force of Oartp alone (2087).

SIMILES AND C

2481. nt, OK tl, an tt Tt tM if, itf irt, in oiroTt as when are often
used in poetry in BiinileB anil compai'iBOnB.

a. The present and aortBt indicative and subjunctive (oBually witbout Ir) are
regularly used. The optative occurs only wltb in tl or in tt rt. Tbe verb of the
apudueiB may sometimes be supplied from tbe main clause, and tbe sen^e may
be itatiaHed in other cases by supplying as happent, ag ie the ease ; but as I'arly
as Homer the ellipsis was probably unconscious, as It is in Kiiglisha« (f, a» terhea.
Hence wt tl, in fri are scarcely to be distinguished from ui.

b, 'i'he tense of the main clituse may be priinaiy or secondary withoal InBu-
ftnce on tbe conBtrucIion. Cp. 1035 and lOZH a.

2«82. MI (fit Tl) is followed by the indicative present (less often aorist) or
by Uie subjunctive. Thus, ut U i-arjip oE waiSAi iiiptrai iatitt taUir . . . , in
'Ax'Xi^ iripoio iibprra ivric Koiuir and (is a father VMlileth when he buriii-Ch thr
bone* of hit ton, so Achillea wailed a> he burned the Eiunes of his cvntraile * 'Ctl.

3483. in la cotnmon In Homer with the aubjunctire (without t.r) depending
on tbe verb of the introductory claiiae, which Is usuaily past Tbe ainille may
begin with wi or with a demonstrative (»1 or rtH) after which &t rt is placed.
Tbua, HI M \htr ^^Xou'ir diri)fuiiTawir JrcXDiir , . . (aid ^poi4air iropoirj), &i fiiv
Of>4iiuti iiipat iri^xtra TuS/ni Mt and at a lion, coming oH Jtockt leithiiut n
thepherd, with evil purpotejeapt upon Ihem, to the ion of Tydeut attaekrd the
men of Thrace K 486, ol S\ &t r' a/^inriat . . . Trtrp^ ip' ^i^XS tAtyiXa iMtO'Ti
liiiX'"rai, In bI (((X^Torrci tr' iiXXi)Xaiffir jpomrar and thff), like vultures leko
ctnteiid nilh loud tcreamt on a l"fly cliff, eeen to they rushed screaming against
each other tl ii9. After the subjunctive with in or in Srt an independent indic-
ative may follow (M 107, n 29U).

3484. at <t, commonly At •! ti, in Homer is used rarely with the indicative
and Hubjunctivp, more frequently with the optative ; but u.sually witbniit any
tinitA verb. Thus, Uol IworS' ui tt rt ptri rrlXor fawtro ^^Xa the soldiers flA-
I'lierd at theep foUow after the ram M 492 (the only occurrence in llotnrr of the
iiiilieative), tal p* <l>l\tiir' in it re -rariip tr waiSa ^iX^rir and he lo:crd ffiC 41 a
father lonelh hit son I 481 (the only occurrence in Homer o( tiie subjunctive),
Otiifst t' dpt r^trt 9vpit Sn liter, wt tl warpit' Imfara ami their feeling scfDMiI to
^ (U (It would be) (T tA«jr had come to their own countrv k 41(1 (the optative

660 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [Ms

occara only after & past tense, except A 389, a negative present) ; ri Bi ti
ttat Xo^r/irhir iit it rt wvpii rAai ami hii t^esftaghed like gleamijigjlrt T SOS.

2485. Attic poetry does not uae the Epic and Lyric in cf re for wt (Jl In
Attic cbtd (wrtl) is practically equivalent lo it as, like; thoB, iWeSrtinl^y
atSS, uAthip uwel rii vivrd but at any rale I ^eak in good-rotll at leatt a» tome
faUh/ul Titoeber 8. El. 234.

3486. At tn, it irin are used with the Indicative (present or aorist) or the
aabjunctive (as in general conditions). With the anhjunctive it is generally
absent in Homer; but in V Jlr' in (never xit) occurs. Tha clause with in Srt, bt
irArf generally precedes tbe mt^n clause, iri Iri without appreciable difFerencs
from in In 'Spi^iAr, Spaa* in Ar* wiari*, tirrn OUXilif 'yuniia having given
to the ton of Oeelei Sriphjfie to wife, at a ture pledge Find. Nem. 9. 16.

24B7. A relative pronoun refenlag to a aubetandve accompanied by At, Am
at often takes the subjunctive (without d>}. Thtis, i t' it Kartgrt xf*^ rietr
aTrnpaf &i, 1) ^ r' h Aaiuii fXtoi /leyiMie ve^Artr X<li| and he fill to the ffrouud
amid the dutt like a poplar that hat grown up tmooth in the lowland of a great
manh A 48S.

ADJECTIVE CLAUSES (RELATIVE CLAUSES: 2488-2673)
2468. Relative clauses correspond to attributive 'adjectives (or

Earticiples), since like adjectives they serve to define substantiTea.
like adjectives, too, the; often have the value of substantives and
stand in any case.

tr lifi 0rat ^\oOrtr (= i Beo^iXiif), ArtirjrKtt rht for tehom Ike godt tovt,
diet young Men. Sent. 426, Ij tlyu 1^6' of fi' f^wrat ; (= riSv im ifiuvirrur') an /
to etabrace htm who begat nu f E. Ion 560, vdr roTt Otirtupoii oIi i rari/p tuT4-
Xiro ( ^ To?i bwi Tou rarpii naraXtt^BtU-i') with the treoiurtt which my father l^
X. C. 8. 1. S3, it a^art «Ii triiia^at ( := ^f aAralt TaH Ti/iait) in the verg honour*
which VOK received D. 19.238, &r tXafitt twain /irriSuar U Aartd with all tBhat
U received 1. 4. 20.

2489. Relative clauses are introduced by relative pronouns or by
relative adverbs of lime, place, or manner (cp. 340, 346), and refer to
an antecedent expressed or implied in the main clause.

a. Temponl clauaes, which are like relative clansee In many reapecta, have
been traated In 2389 ft. On relatives used as indirect Interrogatlvea and as
exclamations, see 2668 fl. , 2686 S.

2490. Many relative clauses are equivalent to co6rdinate clauses
(e.g. 2553). In such cases the relative has the force of a demonstra-
tive or personal pronoun with a connective (koi, dAAiJ, ii, jap, oCr, ^w,
etc.). Thus, »M« tXv if ivoxP^ tii; ttj ypaifig; os f = cwtw yap) . . ■
4tatipit 9r $tpatnMO¥ roiit StoiK kow then could he be atibjed to ti«
indictment f For he manifettly worshipped the gods X.M.I. 2. 64.
Greek often uses here the demosjitrative (contrast ravra Si «I*w with
quae cum dixitaet).

iv,Goog[c

»49t] adjective clauses (RELATIVE CLAUSES) 561

2491. A relative must often be resolved into a coDJunctioQ and a
pronoun (2555).

2492. A truly subordinate relative clause may precede the main
clause or be incorporated into it (2636). The relative clause is often
made emphatic by placing after it the main clause with the demon-
strative antecedent. Thus, o n fiavXtnu, rtmro irouiVw whatever ?ie
wants, thai let him do F. Eu. 285 e.

2493. &! who and the other simple relatives (e.g. oTot, S<m) refer to
a particular and individual person or thing.

4r TH ir rf ^Tparij! Stfo^^f 'AAfHiuif, Si oCrt irTparifTii a^^rt m-paTuirjii 6r
farttnaMittt there wat in the arms one Xenophon, an Athenian, viho accont-
paaied it Aimgh ht wa* neither general nor loldier X. A. 8. 1. 4.

a. On the relation of the ralatiTe fi to the demonstrative tt, see tllS, 1114.

b. St is often uaed tnatead of Sant (or eloi) especUlly with it or m4. Cp. 2508.
ft whoever with the indicative generally adds (in prose) S^ vvrt, H) rtr rf» (389 e) .

2494. S (sometimes S) at the beginning of a sentence may have
the force of aa to whcU (cp. quod), suggesting the matter to which it
pertains.

t S' it^\u<riii 4/iat, in to^ /liw ^CXevt . . . (f *-<ic*ir Sirnf^a . . ., otSi raSP
avrio Ix" <" to what txeUed your rary of uj — that we are able to benefit ovr
friend* — not even it this at you tuppote X. Hi. 0. IS. The poatponed ante-
c«<It?nt ma; be omitted (X. A. 6. 1. 29).

a. An Introductory relative clause with 5 may ataud in apposition to an enUre
clause thai follovs. Thus, t rirrur So.\iitaaTliTo.Tot, 'LutpiTii nfSiorra oiStlt
irtiroTt iiipaiuy drSpiiwair ahat it rnott iBonderful, no one lehaitoever ever taw
Snemtea drunk P. S. 220 a. (So with an infinitive, 1. 14. 18.) The main cUiue,
fiiUowing Buch a relative clause, may be introduced by Jrt or yip. Thus, i fUr
-rdvTiar BaviuaT&raTer (tmOfrcii, irt tr ftcwror Hr tr^i^raiHw ir6Waifi r^i ifiix^''

tr/tat It moft wonderful of all to hear, (that) each one of the things we ^proved
ruint Ou toul P. R. 401 b. Cp. OM, 096.

3495. S«>np the tame aa (qui guidem) is especially definite and de-
notes identity (338 c). It yt {quippe qui) is causal (2555 a).

2496. 6m* wJioever and the other compound relatives (e.g, otouk,
inrocrtK) denote a person or thing in general, or mark the cfasa, char-
acter, quaiity, or capacity of a pereon (less often of a thing).

/MMKipiot jsTii airlar tal roBr Ix" Aoppy it the (nan V)ho potteetei propert]/ and
serine Hen. Sent. 340.

». After a negative expressed or implied, Itru (not St) is used because of its
general meaning. So at* firnr letii, rtt ttrtr Jrrifj oMcIt tvTu Ami (rarely
tCris ivrtr St), irii Sttu (pinral OBttally tirrti Svoi). Cp. 2667.

b. H S'T'o 1b common for /{ ot ttnee. In Ionic (and Thuc. 6. 3) &mt is used
)f a definite object. Cp. HdL 1. 7, 2. 99.

2497. oto« of mch tort as to, proper for, and tro* of such amount at

562 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [t«l

to, enovgh fir, denote result and commonly take the infinitive (pegh- I
tive ^y).

to be boA a HobU thing and able to aimmaiid man 1*. Prot ^152 c, Inr pArrr
ftiaaaBni iairrf laToXurir Itovtnff himtelf oiilg enough to taile X. A.t.Z.ti.
So oUt T( able to (for ToiserDi al6t n) ; thus, rn^vXtiar tiol r' tabiiMla VM tttaU
b* ablt to jfive counsel P. G. 4&S d.

a. On cUuMS with obt or San foUowlDg a main claoae after which w« «up-
pl7 a verb of refitetion, see 2ltST.

h. Itm Is lued elliptically in Aroi ^/i^/xu (Irq/i/fwi) daily, Ira fr^ jrcartir. i

3498. Local clauses are introduced by the relative adverbs ov,
iwou, Ma, 1X1 (usually poetic, but sometimes in Plato) where, ol,
Akk, iiSa wkither, Sfitv, aro$tv, itSiv whence, n, org tofti'cA way, where, I
whitlier. oOi &nd broSi where are Epic and Lyric, ^^(i toAere is Epic.
Jy0a and Mtv are also demonstratives (there, tJumce).

2499. With names ol things the relative adverba Mo, i, Sttv, •!. •) are
often uwd InsUad of the reiatife pronouns preceded by ir, <(>, t^. Thus, rX^fflar
-f r j ffTa9;ii( fffa (= <lt ir) (|mXX( naraXAnr lAe gtopplHg-ploer wni near KAm
Ae (nt«n<fed to ffloJte a Aall X.A. I.e. 1, ir t^ araSMV ■ ■ ■ W«r( = 4ot) vpfiwr*
a< tA« ttopping-place whence they *et out 2. 1. 3. A reUtiva adverb may also ,
refer to a personal antecedent, as nnTaPairar tpit rate AXXavi r>«a rd trXa f«im
to duMtui to the othera where the armed force ana , stationed X. A. 4. S. SO.

2S0a On comparative clauses of mauuer iotroduced by Ac, intp '
etc., see 2463 ff.

CONCORD OF RELATIVE PRONOtTNS
2SQI. A relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in gend<>r,
number, and person ; its case is determined by the construction oI
the clause in which it stands.

dtnft ItTiw i iwiip Jt 4X0( Ihit U the man teho came, nvrq frrlr 4 V^ 4^ '}V
raOfifr thit ii the uofflan lehom we tcere looting for, Xaflir roit irr4ta at V**
aiT$ taking the caralrj/ which he had, Ix"' ''^^ WXfrit £r ifTpar-^n haring
the hoplUei which he commanded, rpiwr Bvpwr otrQr, It ISa p* titXfitir tA^re
being three doors through lehich I had to go.

a. If the main clause as a whole is regarded aa the antecedent, the relative
stands In tiie neuter singular with or without a damonstratlve. Thus, s-XcF* ^1

TtKn&Orta riirji r j rrparif, i^' Srtp ^dXiirra iw^ii^Sifirar to saii for Selinum teilh
all their force, for vihich purpose especiallv thef had been sent T. 6. 47.

b. The person of the verb In a relative clauae, In which the relative pronoun
is the subject, is regularly determined by the person of the antecedent pronoun
expressed or Implied. Thus, oU olf Hvth Srfpvutt yryir^iiM I do not know tehal
tort of a person I have become X, C. 1. 4. 12, juit tltiA 71 ro\6 futf^r 4 (ym-/^
T-^i i/t^, oI 7( altlf x^o-tff 70 Tf tal oipar^ and your habitation is much larger
than mine itnce trou occupy boUi heaven and earth at a habitollolt 6. 2. 15. Tbc
third person rarely (allows a vocative (P 248).

I z:-:l,vG00glc

«5053 THE ANTECEDENT OP RELATIVE CLAUSES 668

2502. Variations from the law of agreement are, in general, tbe
same as in the case of other pronouns (926).

a. The construction ncoording to eeaae (S60, 1013) often occais, aa ^\or
M>a(, tr V/jror oAti) n>v dear child, whom I myself bore X S7 ; bo nith collective
nouns, as ri Jifarrs r\-^6ti, alrtp tmiaovfi what u approved bg the multitude,
who will judge F. I'hae. 260 a.

b- A relative in the plur&l may follow a singular antecedent denoting a whole
claas : f^avpaira<it ir^p, ovt . , . iratriT ri rXQAii a man who layt up a store, the
class of men which the multitude appronet P. R. 561 a. This coDBtraction la
len common In prose than in poetry ; as 9 luiXa rtt Btbi Irtow, ot oiparir tApbr
Ix"^" in truth there it within some on« of the godt who oceupy the iMde Araom
r40.

c. A relative In tlie singular having a collective force may have its antece-
dent in the plural ; as TtOravt iiamit, it Kt iiitr nviir Kotir wni to commend
thone who voluntarily do nothing evil F. Pr. S4'> d, ^tn iyTvyxiroi4r , . .
wirrat tuTtirar they *leu> all vihom they met X. A. 2. 5. 32. Here It with the in<
dicative Is r&re.

d. The relative may stand in the neuter, in agreement with the uotJun im>
plied Id the antecedent rather than with the antecedent itself ; as SiA r^r

>X»h{1Sf, i rata ^iait iiiineiw iriiiiKtw in iyaSir /ur lAe late of projit, a thing
which every nature it indined to purtue at a good P. li. Slil) c.

e. The relative may i^ee in gender and number, not with the antecedent
bnt with a following predicate noun. ^ Thin is common with verbs of naming ;
as X^vH M^r <'<"' '* iii^roit iiiiHi; at t\-rl!ai in/idfaiur; avuredly there are
propotitioTtt in earh of vn which we call hopet t P. Pliil, 40a, ilrtt In . . .
Jio-yry/nrrai TfJirrcur ri Slicaui tal rat dSUut dirfx^fwt, Ifftp noid^i xiMtUn^r

iiie\iTii* draXrylat rlroi he tatd that he had continued to do what mat jvit and
to rrfratn from what wae unjust, which he thought wai the best practice for hit
defence X. M. 4. 8. 4.

f. A relative may agree with a predicate noun when it follows that noun im-
mediately and not its own substantive: jcnl jliq It it0piiwaii Tuit ei *a\6r, I
nirra iiiUpaiit Ti itipiirita ; and juttke among men, how it not that tomething
beautffia, which civili^iet all human things f P. L. 93T d.

THB ANTECEDENT OP BELATIVE CLAUSES

2503. The demonstrative antecedents of the relative pronouns
are commonly : oJjtos . . . ot, rouRrros . . . slot, nxrourot > . ocrot,
r^XiKwrot • • ■ ^Kucoi, etc.

A. Tbe antecedent of If Is often rouGrot (1240). The antecedent of Si, Strip,
oIm, ntay b« S/uiun, rapair\'iru», fffoi.

2504. On comparative clauses of degree with roirovry . . . Str^ etc.,
see 2468 ff.

2505. Definite and Indefinite Antecedent — The antecedent of a
relative pronoun or adverb may be definite or indefinite.

564 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [ijo*

k. A d^nUe uitecodent refers to a deBnEte or p&rtlcutar person, thing, time,
place, or manner. When the aittacedent la detlnlt«, tbe relative cUu«e take*
any form that occuta In an independent Bentence (1)21) ; nltb «t aa the negaU?e,
unless the particular conatraotlon reqaires ni.

b. An Ind^niCe antecedent refers to an indefinite person, tiling, time, place,
or manner. When the antecedent is Indefinite, tbe relative clause commonly
baa a. conditional force, and. If negative, takes fiif like the protasis of a comli-

2906. In general vhea tbe relative claase has tbe indicatiTe, the
antecedent is either definite (negative oi) or indefinite (negativB ^).
When the relative clause has the subjunctive with av or the optative
(not in a wish), tbe antecedent is indefinite (negative ivq).

DBFintB : Tutfra 1 poit^rai rpdrrci ht doet vshat he uanti (i.e. the partknlar
thing lie vuita to do). Negative raSra i ai pa6\rTai wpirTu,

iRDBFmTB : raSra Stiiu fittXem irfirrTti He doei whatever He want* (Is. if
he wants t« do anything, be does It) ; n^ative toOt* drtm fij) ptCXtTot vpirrti.
So TBvra Irtin ir ptiXTTrai rpdrrn uAalecer lie wantt to do, that He always dw*.
rairrii Arm pa6\MTB lirpam i^atever he wanted to do, that he always did, ravr*
Snra &w paiXip" 'pdfM whatever he wantt to do, that he will do, raOra Arm
paiXeiTo, vpdrrM Ac whateoer he might want to do, that he wotild (will) do. In
the last four sentences tbe negative of tbe relative clause ia /»).

2S07. When tbe verb of the relative clause stands in the indica-
tive, the distinction between a definite and indefinite antecedent is
commonly clear only in negative sentences.

i /4 oTia otSi efeiMi M4rtu v>hatever I do not know ( = tf rtra m4 Ma) I dn
not even think I know F. A. 21 d. Here A six olSa would mean tht partienhir
thing* I am ignorant of, and would have no conditional force whatever. So in
nbt aW • lit' ell yip m4 ^/»ru flyir 4iA0 I do not know; for I am xeont to 'x
eUeat in mattere which I do not undentand S, 0, T. 56S.

2308. When tbe antecedent is definite, tbe simple relatives (o:,
oCot, mroc, etc.) are used; vhen indefinite, tbe compound relatives
(Stmt, orouK, iwmrot, etc) are used, but the simple relatives are
often employed instead. When the antecedent is indefinite, St usu-
ally has the subjunctive with Sy qf the optative; while mms is pre-
ferred to OE if the verb is indicative (2569).

as09. Omission of the Antecedent to a Relative. — The demonstrative
pronoun antecedent to a relative is often omitted : either when it i^
in tbe same case as tbe relative, or in a different case from the rel^
tive. The omission occurs when the antecedent expresses the gen-
eral idea of person or thing, and often when the relative clause
precedes.

iyi) Si ical (dCtoi) Sr tparS iittaOfier but I and those toAom / Command tril!
remain X. C.6. 1. 26, iraUt ri erirxnr ott (for rotfrott off) ifipiw rt {^v ^^t d^ih
U taeet to those to whom life brlnffi eontumeljr Hen. 8«it. S91, Xiym riwri

1514] THE ANTECEDENT OF RELATIVE CLAUSES 565

ttr^lptir <#' truw (for (l:ri rovo^wr Ira,) tKoarn f j(« I MV llKtt all mutt eontrlb'
vUaeeording to theabiliCn o/eaeh(Jrom §ueh maiiu a* each man hat) D. 2.SI.
2510. In geuenil alatemeata In tbe BubjimctiTS with dr or the IndlutWe,
tbe relative, leferriDg to a person, is often without an antecedent and has tlie
force of d T». In such oasee tbe mun clause contains a subetanUve or a neater
adjectiTe with irrl (which is commonly omitted), and tbe relative is the sabjeot
of the Mntence or in apposition to it.

auii^pa l\ li ir rixv lac^i yuraueit it is a calamitg If a man gets a bad wife
E. fr, 1056, Kol TtvTO tttltor r^i dXijAfat xaxir, ifra rii iti) rpwirta ninyrtM Koxd
and thU is a mUforivne exceeding the reality, if a man tneurt the blame for evili
that an aot hla doing E. Hel. 271, Jfrni . . . wpit StUr nuwQrai, ^api if a man
m^ffen iU-aMoge fl-om the god», it ia grievout K. HeL 267.

a. The antecedent may be a genitive of quality (1S20), Thus, Aripar irrl
.... olrim i9i\ev*t 8i' iwiopiiiii . , . wpirrurTiU it the eharacterittie of men
uithout retoureet to tciiA (lit. loAo vtsh) to occompliMh their purpote* bg
prTjiirg 2. A. 2. 5. 21 (here iSiknw alooe might be expected, bat atrirtt IBfKfivi
follows as If irapel tiaiw had preceded), roEro i^oCfioi nfys rti/iiipior SpxorrM
iprrit rfrcu if Ar (= Uw rin or ah-if) Mrrti hurriu I regard thit as striking

tatlmong to the merit of a ruler if men follow one (ftim) of thtir own f^ee wdt
X. O.*. 19.

2311. llie antecedent of a neuter relative is often omitted, leaving the rela-
tive with the force of a conjunction. So ^ oE and d^' sE tinee, it ^ while, tit I
till, fUxfi (Axpt) ei KntU. d)4' &r and ^ &* becauw (cp. swna, beairtKo), i^'
^t on condition that (2279).

2312. A demonstrative adverb may lie suppreeeed: 1{h bii&t trit, (for /nFri
ttia) tA rpSyiia iyffrrt I will bring you to the spot where the affair took place
X.C.S.4.21, droKXilcrrn Un ItoT iaWir SStr) £r ri Xa^iv ^ ihvtting them Otit

from pUoea whence it mav be poitible to take anything X. M. 2. 1. 18.

3313. Imv tmc, ilo-l* A — Tlie antecedent is omitted in the phrases
itrriv &rr« (rarely 5s) there is some (me toho, somebody, plural tiaiv ot
8ome (lesa often timy oOi ^ay of (of the past).

fa-Tir fSr Irrit Paiitrai inrb rur rvrirrvw pXdrTtaBa* ; tt there then any OM
who wiahetto be harmed byhi» cotnpaniontf P. A.25d, ntrt-.tertr ah-' (orot Srif
/yur ncaroXi^H rit ifiif elmr there neither it nor wiU tAer« be any one to whom J
may leave my property X. C. 6. 4. 3D, tUl H koX o\ . . . ^ttymmir tome hoiBes
too run mean X. £q. 3. 4, tWl J' ah-St ttt oM' &* rarrira^i tio^Trc and tome
of £&«m you uKtuU not be able even to eroM at alt X. A. 2. 6. 18, 4'^' ^* «1
ml ■wGp rpoai^for and tome brought Jtrebrandt too 6. 2. 14, fffnr Srif . . . rXtUt
trtrptwa 9 vg Tvmxf ; it there antr on« to whom yoM entrvU more than to
your vtifef X. 0. 8. 12, frnv til lol frih'X'"*' "^ ttifAtM* jtal yfpptir tome hit
both the cuirattet and wicker-ihieldt X.C. 2. 3. 18. fmr at is not an example
of 961, bat due to the analogy of larir Sn {hhrt), Ivnr oC, etc.

2914. The oblique cases of dmr oT there are those toho = some
(iitoty are regularly formed by tanv m, hrrw ots, larw oh (or aStmvai),
tFhich are used also of the past and future.

uogic

566 SYNTAX OP THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [ajis

r\i,r'liirtir . . . kcU Irrir Sr iWur Hrur exeejil the Innians UnA tomt Othrr
natUmi T. 3.92, a^ful (<rri rof" olf itxyiyjH yrml dn-vghU avwng totue 1. 3H,
IffTi iiiw ovt airOt (sr'/SaXof tome of them theg struck duvitt X. H. 2. 4. 0, tam I
ical ToXiafiBTa *IXt» he captured also aome (owns T. 1.6fi,

B. Xenoplioa also uses fr o1; tliilS, twi' ij ToXcfiiuf j)* on hori-drjovt d>'^>a«ai'
tA«re were some of the eitemji whom they reHtirfd under a truce X. H. 7.5. 17.

2515. Here belong certain idiomatic phrases due to the omission
of the antecedent; Imv oJ (frnv) somewhere, aometimeB, bmv j in
gome way, Imv &n and ivurrt (= Ivi ort, cp. 175 b) sometimet, b-rn- frnx
someAow (in queations = ts i( possible that f), oin Umr Swi m rio way,
it M not possible that (lit. t^re is not how).

toTi i' ol viyii Uyoo tptlatuiw y/mit' ir but sometimes stlenet mag prtne betifr
than speech E. Or. 638. IrTti Sri nl oTt (2614) piXrict rifrdFoi 4 jfr •onutiixr*
and /or «oni« people it is better to die than to live P. Pli. 02 a, ode (v0' Arm . . .
at ^fidi fri Xdfei if is not possible that he should elude us again A. Vesp. 21 J.
edit iBTiw irait tix trif^rrrai 4;u> it " "»( possibU that he toill not attack ua
X.A.2.4. 3.

2516. oMirotov (with tbe Inf.) there is nothing like etanda for »Mir im
T<Ho[>rar, oljr /^Ti. Thus, «l(Mr «foi' Tft aMr Ipenar there is nothing like qhf*-
tfoninp Aim P.O. 447 c.

2517. ReUtlre not repeated. — If two or more relative clauses
referring to the same antecedent are connected by a copulative coii-
junction and the second relative would have to stand ia a different
case from the first, it is either omitted or its place is taken b; aCro^
(less frequently by outoc or ckmivk) or a personal pronoun. Heiv,
instead of a repeated relative, we have an independent sentence
coordinated with the relative clause.

'KpiaiOt, at iyuU ^Siiiaiur fia^OJa xaBirTirat, sal (if) iSiinaiur ia) (rap^ •it
i\ipaiitr nari . , . ^fiai tasSt roiiir TiipaToi Ariaeus, whom Ke wished l<i »ft
up at king, and to whom loe gave, and from whom we received pledges, isattemn-
ing to itijure us X. A. 8. 2. 6, roC 14) iKtTr6t taut i iriip St avrtfHipik ^lur jml iri fun
/idXa iSiait BaviiAiar atrir ; where, pray, is that man who used to hunt tOilA Kit
and whom yoa seemed to me to admire greatly t X. C. 'i. I. 38, lal rSr rl xpl
ipar ; Svrit ip^rUt Stott ixSaipo/iat, luae? St it' 'EXXiirui BTpvrii and now wAiit
mast Idof Since I (lit. T who) am manifestly hateful to the gods, and the ai-Ni*
of the Greeks hates me S. Aj.457. Cp."Wboeef&n U la HIb btnd, and He shail
thoroughly pui^ His floor."

a. Tbe relatWe is BomeUmes repeated u In Eugllsh (X. A. 1. 7.&,X. 2.
48.2,41.1).

2918. If the demonstrative would have to lUiid In the nominative, it is com-
monly omitted unless the demands of emphasis require its presence : (T^^mt,')
« txirriitiAt iiir roXXdnit rpoatiiroiur SA rb (Sot. Sforrat tt drj^rot XXXau artd
which Wf have often failed sciences beeause it is usual to do so, but they rv^vir;
aaoOfr name H, K. 63-3 d (here a&r<u, not at, is the nibject).

1S23] THE ANTECEDENT OF RELATIVE CLAUSES 667

3S19. Prepodtltm not repeated. — A prepmition goveming a rela-
tive pTODOun is usually omitted if it stauds in the same case as
the preceding noun or pronoun before which the prepoeltion has
already been nsed. See 1671,

2530. Verb omitted. — Theverbof a relative clause is often omitted
when it belongs also to tbe main clause.

^fXsvt roittfoua' Dump sr w6aii riStr (rB/d{^ ^IXouf) reg<^inff ai/Hendt tAoH
whom Otg hagband «0 regards E. Med. 1153. Or the verb ot the main clause
may be umitved : ri yip IXXa {trola) Scartp jcal biuit ^o(tirt for the rat he
did just mhat fou too wen doing X, C.4. 1, 3.

3521. Transitioti from a relative to an independent clause some-
tioies occurs.

(ixA^O 'h oi ZitfNu AoAi triiu[i>r col dSutir »6k ((wr, titi rat wtpirrtpdi filh

ahick the Sfriant regard at godt and which thtf will not permit to bt It^ured,
nor do they permit thedoveeto be fnjnred X. A. 1.4.0.

3522. Attraction. — A relative pronoun is often attracted from its
proper case into the case of its antecedent, especially from the
accusative into the genitive or dative. A demonstrative pronoun
to whose case the relative is attracted, is usually omitted if unem-
phatic. Gp. " Vengeance is his, or whose he sole appoints :" Milton.

*. Qtaitin. — S(uK Tfjt iktvetpldi fli (for ^r) jr/iTijo-fc tBorthy tif the free-
dom leKteh you poteess X. A. 1. T. 3, rp6 twt nicav £>> (for a) alia instead of
the evQ* which I knoa P. A. 2fi b, i^' Sir (for taOrai b) tart from what you
know T>. IB. 21fl, H4JW' tear (tor Siroi>i) tiipim . . . i tut, Tdn-ot tiWurm
my s;randfather U the knndgomett of all (Ae Medes I have seen X. C. 1. A. 2,
>ij) iiroiti/jrur oTur Jel fftuUuir (for rmairwr tta St! trwrniJaSv) jf the foundations
teere not at they ought to be X. Eq. 1. 2.

b. Dative. — *<i|9oiHii» aw rf iiytiiin if (for *f) Soiij frtrBai I ghottld fear
to follow (Ae leader whom he might give X. A. 1. 3. IT, IrairH at ip' oti (ior ^1
To^aif d) X^dt I (WiRTneitd you for loAaf you toy 3. 1. 4.'i, oli (fnr T«i(T<ut i)
it*rux*™«"' '' AriiTpoit ei iitrplwt hlxfi^rro theg had not used vith moderation
the fvixei* they gained at Leuctra D. 18. 18.

2523. A relative in tJie nominative or daUve is very rarely attracted. Thui,

PKdvriirSai d^' £r (for dwi iKitrur i) ^plt raptVKt6arTai to be harmed by what
ha* hern prejxirrd by u* T. 7. BJ, iUyin &» (tor raArur oTt) iyi irrrrix^ta a fene
of thi.se vshom I haite met with V. R. 631 o.

2524. The pronouns aiibject to attraction are St, otot, taat, but not Sartt
(except In 26.34). Attraction is not necetfary, and tahea place only (but not
always} when the relative clause Is eaienlial to complete the meaning of the
antecedent When the relative clause is added merely as a remark, attraction
does not t«ke place. An attracted relative clauae virtually has the force of an
attributive adjective.

3S33. PredicaiA nouns follow the case of the relative attracted to an ante-
cedent expressed or omitted (2631 b).

6B8 SYNTAX OP THE COMPLEX SENTENCE JijaS

2526. An omitted antecedent to whlob the relUlfe hu been attracted mif
afterirerd be supplied in the main cIaum. Thus, d^' fir (for dri ta&ri^w ■) . . .
■wpovatTti rat Santlirraii, irh raimr liAftt from what h» b«g» and borrotot, JroK

that he Hvea D. 8. 26.

2527. Before Po«X«, irbich irtth the relative la treated almost lilce one void
(cp. guivii^, attraction to variouB oaaM from the accuaaclve is rare. Thus, •!■
nJiTwr ti (for tr) pa6\ti dpyarToi sucA deedt at any on« you pleaie of thete hat
Oone F. G. 617 a ; cp. P. Crat «2 a, Phil. 43 d.

2528. Attraction takes place also In the case of relative adverin ; as Sunfl-
torro SOtii (for JniVir oT) iwtiiBtrro raiSat thqf wnvq/td tiuir ehUArtn jVoDt titt
placet where (wAUAer) Ihev had deponted Aent T. 1.89.

2529. Case of the Relative with Omitted Antecedent. — When the
antecedent is omitted the relative either retaiua its own case or is
attracted.

2530. When the omitted antecedent Is nomlQatlTe or accnsative, tlie reli-
tive retains Its own case. Tbos, alt fiiXirra rd iropirra ipal (oCtw) ^ciora rw>
iWoTplvr iptyarrai thoM who art bett tatUfied with what tAey ftooe, covet IraM
what it theirnetghbour't X. 8.4, 42, crvyQmtfli i^lKtlrvH) |t' IrwrvAaOaf
her who bore me B. AJc. 338.

2931. When the omitted anteoedent is genidve or dative, the relative (if
standing In a dlSeient case) is usually attracted Into the genitive or dative.
But a relative In the nominative masculine or feminine (sometimes in the
neuter), or a relative depending on a preposition, retains its own case.

4. Genitive; £r (for rodruv nli) irTuyx^ru to\i fiiXurra iy^iiai ri of thou

whom I mtet witli, I admire pov bg far the tnott P. Pr.381 e, iuXoit Si wai H
&f (for ix Toirvr d) fgi you lAoio it alto bg the life yOK I«ad D. 18. 166.
But tlSirai rifr Siraiuw (ro^wr) iip' ttn tr laca to diteover tht trength ot
those againtt whom Ouiy are to proceed X. A. 6. 1. 8. Cp. E. Ion 500 (in 24e«)

where ot — rolSTKr of.

b. Dative : toSto S' Sii»i6r irra <} (tar retrif S) rOr Bii iXiyere Ait U lite Itol
which wot taid jutt now P.Pb.69a, imUrtiitr oti (foTretfroii d) ipoKtrfimut
Iinl«t aSffiv 4 ol; do we abide by what we agreed wat juhl, or notf F. Cr. 60a.

Bat Std tA ArayKatar airoii tlmi Sia^iytffOiii (roi^rati) wofi^ £t \Afiotef rbw luffHr

became it it necesiorji for them to ffive lettont to those from whom thef exptti
to receive their fee S..li.\. 2. S.

2S32. The relativea tAot, ovos, ^toKot, Sotk &^, &arurav¥ (and some
others) and a following nominative vritii the copula may be attracted
to the case of the antecedent. Thus, jfopt^oiuiMK roiovrf Sr^ oloc trir
d ahtnoing favour to such a man as you are is commonly condensed to
XiifitCoiMvoi oZf trot i)&>i' (X. M. 2. 9. 3). Here the whole relative clause
(with copula omitted) is attracted. The antecedent, if ezpressed, is
often incorporated (2536) in the relative olause.

Tpbi irSptit TsXfiitpoh abut lot 'AfqMfovt (for ofw mt 'AAiraibf «lvi) to ftoM an
tueh at the Athenians T. 7.21, iwlimi 'Ayfiiirat . . . nl dXXs Sra f#n| nawul
he called out the Agrianes and all the other Paeonlan tribet 2. 90, x*v*^>m 6mi

>S3S] THE ANTECEDENT OF RELATIVE CLAUSES 669

oIni Wv«i when the vieathtr U $ueh a$ vox 4t*cra>e X. A. 6. 8. 8, drAofof'tr tliU.

. . . Sreu Sfr M^arrot (for ird<(iiirT6i Tint Sara Hi fv) IA« htnae bunt fHto
JUtmtt, tonte one or other hoeing sftiton firt 6. S. 24.

a. oln is often attracted i*ith superlativea : Arrof vdYov obv icirordraK (fon
ri)i«fTou M% tsTi StiriraTBT) viA«n lA< froil uos fremendoM F. B. 220 b. Cp. 1087.

b. The article maj appear in tli[e construction wiUi oToi and i^Mcoi, the rela-
live clanEs being treated like a BntetantiTe : roit al«i 4/u' to lucA as vie are %.
H, 2. 3. 26.

c. The nibject of tbe reiatjve olauae Tarely stands In the nominative, not
being attracted along with olm. Thus, nnifietn »U\mtf v6 raacait just like yov
Aes. 2. 151. This occurs only when the number of Oke subject Is different from
tbat of the attnu:t«d rehitive. When the article precedes, as in Z6\ur l/iirn rait
obi strof ivdpiinui Solon detested men like him (D, 19. 264), editors generally
read rai>i abut olrvt,

3533. Invene Attraction. — An ajitecedent nomloatiTe or (oftener)
accusative may be attracted to the case of the relative. The
attracted antecedent is often prefixed for emphaxis to the relative
clause, which thua separates it from the verb it governs or by which
it is goveraed. Gp. urbem quam atatvo vestra est, and " Him (= he
whom) I accuse, By this, the city ports hath enter'd " (Shakespeare),
where the antecedent is attracted into the case of the (omitted)
relative.

riglt ({or a(Sf) S' Irvv <l*'pii ■ ■ ■ x^P"^' '><'' t^e vomen vihom thou teett
are coming S.Tr. 263, vaXirclir (for roXinla) sISv tlrai xF^ rapi fidtwi 4^r
iVTiw we alone have an ideal eonetitution (lit. lucA a» ought to be) I. 6.48,

t\tyor Ari AimtSaitiirun Sr iiarrat wirrur (for rdrra) wrrpiy&rtj tltr the]/ laid
that the Laeedaemoniang had gaintd all they aaked /or X. H. 1.4. 2.

•. The main clause may contain a resumptive demonstrative pronoun ; as
rAr dttpa raSror, ft rdXat i>iTcU . . . , otrii icrtr itMIt thit man uAom you hace
long been tearehing for, this man is here S.O. T.448.

b. The rare cases of tbe InverHa attraction of the dative are suspected or
admit anotlier explanaUon (E. Med. 12, S. El. 063, X. Hi. 7. 2).

C. So with adverbs ; col AXXmc (for i\\o8i) Srw ftr d^Isp iyar^tugl » and
elset^ere, wherever yoti go, theg will love irou P. Or. 46 c

253t. oMtU >mt ofi every one (lit. nobody viho not) for ovScii itrrar
oirrtf o6, commonly shows inverse attraction, is treated like a single
pronoun, and inflected ou&voi ortm ov, oi&cn or^ oil, odiim ovTiva ov.

oMcrit frsv o(>xl d\ayiiTipor than tehith there is nothing more irrallontU
P. Chann. 175 c, ovacrt Sry o6k irotplriiitrot replying to every one P. Hen. TO c,
rtpl Ar ofS^ra xtrSawtw trtir' olrx &riiiiara.r ol wpiyarai for which our anrestors
vndeneent every danger D. 16. 200.

*. Cp. titaiiiir 'EXXnniur rSr ot ro\\6r /i/fu h!a power Was fflucA greater
than any SeUenie power HdL 7. 146 (= oMd^ irn tSv), aUa/tUt ui ai ^rofuv
tt can in »o wUe be Mat tee should toy no P. Pol. S06 b.

2535. Srot preceded by aa Adjectin. — Here the subject of the relative
clanae la idenlical with that of tbe umId clause, and is omitted together with the

570 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [is3«

copulft: xfiil"*'^^ FKap4 favfiaari lea (for Baniiaarir fartr Sra) Ke rtoetBed ft
wonderful amount of moneg P. Hipp. H. 2B2c, fieri Itpwrai ^aviutareS bw (tor
Suviia^TiftfTii'iitS'ifov) lelth an aUoniahiag amoant of noeat P.R.S60d. So

Bavnaelat iit (for StuiiHurrir imr wt) P. Pli.9'J a.

2S3G. Incorporation. — The antecedent taken up into the relative

clause is said to be incorpoi'ated. The relative and antecedent then
stand in the same case, the relative agreeing adjectively with its
antecedent. If the antecedent is a substantive, it often stands at
the end of the relative clause, and cuminonly has no article. An
antecedent in the nominative or accusative is more frequently incor-
porated than one in the genitive or dative,

2337, A nominalive, accusative, or vocative antecedent, when mcotpor»ted,

usually conforms to the case of the relative.

it U-r,,, 4>r vA wpittpor fkrytt iptf^r, iX-nS^t (for firro i, dprrl) i\ij9ii,, fi.) ^(ke
vCHtie rehifh you were speaking of brfure, U real P. G. 603 c, ih St <)r difitairrt
tiiuTlii iityi\^ J)» (for i) jtiifLij tit 1)r) Ute village at whifh they arrived wat large
X. A. 4. 4.2, kXM; fifu, 4 xB'{*t »«*» <(>■"*" (for 9<At » or ^ Stln) hear me thou tkat
earnest yesterday in thy godhead p 2S2.

a. An accusative antecedent Ib Incorporstad In tbe accusative when the verb
ol tbe relative clause takes the accoMtive. Thus, <i6k ArtipirTtTe Ifr dxt yni)air
(for TJ)« 7>'(ii^'7' V) he did not conceal the opinion he had X.M.4. 4. 1, fiirl' . . .
i^fKil^Bt biuaii airCii' 4> i>A rarrAt del rov XP^""' Sii" tim-iiaBt idX^^ (foT TJ)r
■aXJ)' Sifa' 4') <^ not derive yourselves of the fair f ante tehich you have enfoytd
throughout all time D. 20. 142.

b. An accusative antecedent may he incorporated as nominative, genitive,
or dative, e.g. rf nra ijudj . . . JtaTaretudfOrra Jjt (pX"' X^l>*' (^"r r^r X'^l'^' 4'

'^X'O if *^*'' As tats any one improving the district which he governed X. A.
1.9.19.

253S. A genitive or dative antecedent, when Incorporated, nsnaUr kUrscts
the relative to its own case.

T<pl I' ol wpiripor . , . ftfijn rj^u SitKBiir (lot raO w6^v Jtr) dealing in detail
teith the lam which he formerly passed D. 24. 01, irap*6tro riir i tlxi ivrdfimi (for
iriw ri Svri/ui 4r) he advancd with what force he had X. H. 4. 1. 23. Even
when the antecedent is omitted, the attraction takes place : wpit <f tlx' vvrfXtyt
. . , {rrpdreviui (for rpbt roirip ry irrpaTeiifUiTi t) he was Collecting an omiy ■■
addition to that which he had X. H. 4. 1. 41.

a. But a genitive or dative antecedent, when incorporated, is attracted into
the case of a nominative relative. Tbua, ir JmcvTqplott cal Sirsi AXXat i^fMAaiM
fOWoyai (sc. elft) iit courts and all the other public assemblies I'. Phae. 361 a
(for TDffoih-ofT AXXoif ffi/XX^oiT, &70I STifiiffioi ttei).

b. When an antecedent in the genitive or dative is incorp'^rated, the place of
the antecedent is usually token by a demonstrative pronoun in the genitive or
dative. llius, viSt n Tdr xip ninmcu, Saa Si) rdSo/ur jrud nor do you r\
all the evils we suffered ♦ 441,

THE ANTECEDENT OF KELATIVE CLAUSES

OTHER PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE CLAUSES

2539. AppoititireE to the antecedent uiay be drawn iiitu the relative clause
as the neareet construction or tor tlie sake of emph^ls. Thus, tbfiati. Toit . . .
iicarrdt, aX*tp lol X^orriu imt Siidtdi', Jflrut re tai "?aii^n9>n irr\. he will
jlnd the Judgei, laho are said to pronounce judgraeia there, Miiioa and
llhadamanthyt, etc. P. A. 41 a.

2540. A BobstantfTe, usually with the article, Is often taken over into tlie
relative clause, to eipltdn, by a necessary addition, tlie idea cnnveyed by that
clause ; and stands tn tlie same case as the relative. Thus, (J /latSdrtu 6 poitjinai
X/rnr rA (ISot if you underataiul the clan I wish to deaarihf, P. It. 477 c, oSre
a&Ttl «(rri tin ipniur i^fur t<utt\iTtaf ilrat. ti>i)i ipiXniaii neither uargelvrn nor tlie

guardians vKom tee aay vie mu»t instruct 402 c.

2541. The antecedent may be reserved for the main clause, which follows the
relative clause. Thus, tag o'ut iiir irix^'< «i' l">x^ ttfu toU rjiuif I am not
subject to the Ioum in virtue of which I was arrested Ant. 5. 8j.

3542. An attributive adjective, or an attributive genitive belonging; to a
substantive standing In the main clause, may be placed either in the relative
clause (if either is emphatic) or In the main clause. Two adjectives uiay be
divided between the two clauses. The substantives may recnaiii in the eiain
clause or be tranaterred to the relative clause. Thus, tA reix'"''" ' (•■ "^riPi r«r
Zupitaclur alpoHat they captured the fort of the Syracuaans which was there
T. 7. 43, dr lyii (ffcXof toiItv raiiTT,* flT.i (fii ptylirTri wlimt BoSmi ••} which I wa*
willing to offer to the plaintiff Cie assurance that itaa nuist solemn D. ri2. 12,
iwiSt^ai . . . T^* Siiataip flrij iffrli- dioXn'S to *how what the fair line Of defence
is 19. 203, Ifpifii' St lidxv ■ • . tyxth"" M<"p3', " ''x"' Tiinetlxfiwt and the
bailie brittled with the long spears, the fUsh-piercing spears, which they grasped
S339.

a. Froin the transference of superlatives to the relative clause arise such
exprestions as Ihayor niiMxoi" Ariiroui rXtlgToat iiuriimi' (1087). Similarly
in rdxM'TA (sciL tiranai or the like) as soon as, as soon at possible, irtl (Src)
T^X'^ra, a» soon as.

2543. A participial or aabordinate ckuse depending on a fallowing main
claose may be joined to a preceding clause containing the antecedent of the
relative. Thus, tifni citw dxpoi t tt u4 rit vpetaTaXi^oiTo, ij^raror f^wftu
wapti^ir he said that there was a height which leoiilil be impossible tn pass,
unless it was seized in aduance X. A. 4. 1. 25. The case of the reliitive may bu not
that required by lis own verb, but that of an orahled pronoun dependent on a
participle or a subordinate verb inserted in the relative clause. Thus, jtora-
^onSiPBIiai Ttfjot . . . t wort ' Ltaprarts -rnx^rdiuroi toirv iaaaritgiif ixpSlrrt
(fur 4 txP""' Tttxirditfrvi avrA) they ai-i2ed a fortress which the Acarnanians
once built and used as a common place of judgment T. 3. 105.

2944. When the relative clause contains a verb of naming, the main clause
'» fused with the relative clause. Thus, tr8a laXirrai ' Kpriiuiot Tijunt (for
It6a riiun&i icTi, t (BXtlTai ' JipriiuSot) where there is a precinct of Artemis
Simon ides 107.

SYNTAX OP THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [1545

VSB OF THE HOODS IN BBLATIVB CLAUSES

s of the moods Id relative clauses ar« as

0. The present and put tenaes of the indicative wlthont dr eipreas a fact or
tlie asBumptiOD of a fact. The future iadlcative la used to denote purpose,
present intenlioo, or an intended result.

b. The Indicative with Sr denotes unreality.

c. The tinbjuDClive with it expresses a posstbie or supposed fact in futon
time or a generality in present time. The subjnnclive nithont dr Is used In
Indirect queationB (180G b).

d. The opUtive without Sr expresses a wish, a poeeibiiity leas dlatincUj con-
ceived, or a generality in past time.

e. The optative with S* Is potential, and is used either in conditional relaUve
clauses with an optative In the main clause, or alone, as itT Itrir tX-rU, f iiirf
(Tuettiur ir there is on« hope by which alone tee may be »aved E. Bel. 816.

f. The imperative occurs in relative clauses (1842, 2553).

{. The infinitive occnis in relative clanses in indirect disconrae (2631).

THE USE OP THE HOODS IN CERTAIN RELATIVE CLAUSES

2546. An extension of the deliberative aabjunctive not infreqaently occnis
In relative clauses after such expressions asadx lx<a, oAkItti, etc, which usually
denote baffled will, the existenoe of an obstacle to carrying ont an aet desired
by the speaker or some one else. The subjunctive is much less common after
the positive Ix" I have tkt meant. The pronoun or adverb Introducing such
clause is an interrogative that has taken on the function of a relative.

2947. The subjunctive here follows primary teases ; the optative follows
secondary tenses.

M- 96 TQVT9 j^AaiH fiJJ oin fx^ ^ ^' ^'^ tidiTTtf rQr 0fXwF , » ., dXXi /tif oCn tx'*
Ijrarsdt att SO I do not fear thai Iihall not have Bomethirt{i to give to each of my
friendi, but that I thall not have enough friendt to five to X. A. 1. 7. 7, mix
liovfit Uttroi h-01 ^6n»vir Cheg wUt not have any place vihilher to taca^e 2. 4. 20.
oOk^t' tiffin tXrlStt Srci Tpawiiuwtt Biraror . . , ^iyw I have no longer any Aop«*
to which I man turn and e*etg>e tUath E. Or. 722, {{<t S ti Uto he will be able to
say lomething L. il. 42.

b. oiSira 7!^ 'txor Jbrii , , . rat 4iii.t iwtrroXai riii^tti for I had HO Oltm to

bring my letter E. I. T. 688.

e. Attic never, or nrely, has the po*itlve forma Ix" > vi it, Ivnw h Ar
(K 170), riiiww itra Ar, with the potential optative,

2548. The subjunctive with lU in Homer does not Involve wBl in oAc Vrf*

aim ir^p . , oiSi yirjiTai, h tir toi^Kwr . , , it yiuar bnrrcu that man tlvet nnt
nor u!iU ever be born who shall come to the land of the PhaeofAana f 203 ; cp.
S 750, 4*345. <|> 103 involves a diflerent aspect of un'tl from that In S647&.

2549. ThP deliberative future (1916) occurs In relative clanses; as fa-Ht
iioKniiuV H tiitom ott fx" I do not know how we are to go home S. O. C. 1742.

15S3] ORDINARY RELATIVE CLAUSES 578

The deliberatlTe BubjtmctiTs ia more common ; as oi* txu 3 n xp^"!'*' '"'^'
X^YHi / am not able to deal vrilh your argwneta F. Eu. 287 o.

3990. Id a few cases the future is used like the subjonctlTes of 2517 a ; and
may be explained as a dependent deliberative future. Thus, ei yip nt ipitat
fffriF, ««' ftroi r\lvr t^titwiiKiitti tipSai for (A«re ia no harbour, nor it there any
place to ahieh a man may voyage and sell hit wares at a proflt S. Ph. 303,
airrir yip Jt Stt xpaii-qSim Srifi rpiwif r^cl' iiKUK\ur8iira rixv/or thou thy»^

hatt need of forethought tcftereby thou shdtt extrleate thytelf from thU trouble
A. Pr. 86.

2551. ofct tmr tt (&nti Svnv, m%) are used with the future indicative to
introduce etalementx as regards the future. Thus, od yip nt Irrtw tt ripoiB'
alp^trai t^» ffjjr ixpttat Siraittr irr' EipviiBtuf there it no one tcho will prefer thy
feeble power rather than Eurystheue E. Ileracl. GT, o6k lirB' Sruij ii/rti ci Stip'
AMn-a pr thou Wilt in no wite (lit it i» not possible hom thou shall) see me eom~
ing here S. Ant. 829. The indicative present or aorlst is also used in statements
as regards the present or past. Alt tbese indicatives may be dependent deliber-
atives. Cp. 2667.

3S92. The optative wlthont Sr (probably potential) occurs in Attic poetry
after oix (mr Jo-Tii (drun, teai} and tile interrogative rff iarin h (iarit) and
frff* Srm. Thus, oir IrTir Irrii rX-fir i)UiO Kelpiuri ni there is no one except myse^
mho could cut it A. Ch. 172, ett UB' Srun \iiiupi ri ^(uS^ raXd / could not (lit.
there t* no xnay how I could) call falie tidings fair A. Ag. 020, rli riiri' . . .
SiiiitATw Ix" Kpdm, Arrti {tretit 8/^ito ; who has authority in this hotue that
might receive guetttf Ar. Thesm. B71, hr' oOr Jh-ut 'AXinro-T-ii tt yffpat itdiat ; U
there a way by wAfcft Aleettlt might reach old age? E. Ale. 62. The potential
optative loJtASroecQTs after these expressions (E.AIc.BO, S. O. C. 1168, P. Lach.
1B4 c). Attic does not ose the optative with ir after the positive form tmr

CLASSES OP BEXATIVE CLAUSES

3S53. Ordliuiy Retire CUtiaea define more exactly a definite ants'
cedent, and show the mood and the negative of simple sentences.

Indicative : raih' /crlr A iyi Siopai this is what I want X. A. 7. 2. .14, iS S6at5.uL
yiw^ ffporSr, sit ^)| ^rpio» o/iir alas, ill-sCarred races of men, whose destiny is
beyond due measure S. Ph. ITS, S9tr oi* ^ifra paff^tge* wtpl airCir, imOBtr
ffiaf rol fy^ vpCrrtt wttpAaaiuu SiSiirntr I will first try to inform you (lit.) /rom
the source from whitA you will tnost easily learn about them n. 27. 3, wap' ini
i^Mnbiittot oi rttrtrat irtp ir IraStr iWifi rv rvyytriptr^t r&r vo^arHr in eom-

ing to me he will not meet with the treatment he leould have suffered had he con-
Kortfd with any other of the sophists P. Pr. .^ISil.

SnbjanCtive : 'Xnrrot Me wa/jKoWfero, if ptraidptr rflt ^Vk"" AnytUS has

tttlten hia seiti here (lit.) to whom let ut give a share in the investigation P. Men.
8t»e, «X*«* WwSKiia . . . M'irTip 5' ir attaa ■ 1)r ri p.i) Stiajii hearing that our
mother is in the house, (lit.) of whom have thou no fear S. El. 1309.

674 SVNTAX OF TH£ COMPLEX SENTENCb [isM

OptaUro: abiiaiti'iiiwrtuivrawttSttr.iiUTtdtix^P^'ittoi^fi*"^' Itkint
tee thvnld endure mch things <u 1 pray the god* maj/ ii^M upon oitr enemia
X, A. 3. 2. 3, Sipara Ixi"tu . . . Saa. itlip in ^ipoi ii6\a having tpeart, mmA a* a
man could airry wiA difficulty 5. 4. 25, Sffytiiat f irrtOdtr IStr , . . /yik rix"^'
ir fiidtnifu / wilt bcffin at (Jrum) that point ishere I can moMl quieklg i^^fo^m joii

D. 29. 5. The poteatial optative nilhuul dr is very nxe (2652).

ImperatlTg : TXdriri> ^pdiTu, Ify t-rrpd^Kv ti iir^iurir SArnf ^ptrOr I teOl tfit
thu vxiHdrring, vhCcK do thuu inscribe in (Ae tablett of lAtf meiaorif A. Pr. 7H&
Ua sleS' i SpoiiBt, see 184:^ a.

A. (Pnlinary relatiVB cUiuipb are explftnatory, and (Id aeiue) an eqalnJeDt lo
independent coilrdinaied claii.'ws. See 2400.

b. Ilniiier has xi or ir with the future : irap IimI yt cal AXXoi, at u4 pi t(«i^
raiwi I hane othen bg mg tide who will hoiumr me A 176.

2SS4. Relative Clauses of Puipoae (Final Relatire daiiaes) regularly

take the future indicative, even, after past tenses (negative ^1.
The autecedent of final relative clauses is usually indefinite, m is
commoner than otrm. (The construction vitli the future participle
is more frequent : 2065).

^f(J til Self 4^aT . . . irpafl€iat •wiitrttr, 4 Toil fiiw SiSii{« raDrB, rebi U rop*-
(vvei 7 sny that we miiat send an embastg, which viilt inform aome uf Qom oni
intiteothm I). 2. 11, ■wtp^mir' fern iTTi/iarci send some one who ieOl amtOMMK

E. I. T. 1-J09, fio{( ry f 4^V rpiiKarra ArSfiai i\ie8tu, at roAt rar^vf tS/uKn riri-
ypi'l/ttiai, KoS'' o'ui TayjTtiaatiai the people voted to choose thirty men who aAoaU
eodi/i/ the ancestral laws by which they were lo conduct the government X. H.2.3.S.
So JD local clauses : (ptn/'u rii' I7xm . . . Itta iiij rtt Jf irai I will hide thi» nsori
where no one shall see it S. Aj. 669.

a. After a secondary tense the tutme optative ocean rarely : at it rpiinrrt
■iptSiitar iiir iwcl rdxuiTa t4 /lanpi rtlxv ■ ■ • nBupiOii ■ ttlptSirra 8' i^' ifrt {iiyyr^
V-oi r6iioiii, icafl' ofcrTiimt To)iiTtiiraivTt »tX. the thirty were chosen as 9oon as $ke
long walls were destroyed; and haring bfn chosen /ur the purpose of corlififing
the taiBs, according to which they were to conduct the government, etc. X. U.±.
3. 11. In local clauses : S. O. I'. TOO.

b. A past purpose may be eipreneed by tiuWar sad the InHnlUve. ThUE,
raOapx" wpoatra^ar 'iXnIiif. St l/uWtt ^rirXfJmSai tVy anointed Aleidat Of

admiral who was to salt in ommand T, 8, Ifl.

C. ilomer lUeB the subjunctive (with si, except r 287) atter primar; t«iiMa,
the optative nfter HFCoiidary tenses. Thus, /uimt 4>sttrTai, ft tir tm rfvfvu
iSir a sfer will aime to tell Ihre Ihr way « 638, a7T«Xo>p ^car St i,-ryt{\tiM yvTmimi
they sent a messengi-r to tell thi- Tfinman o458. The future also oocun ({ S3S).
The present or aorist itputive is rare in Attic (S.Tr.flOS, Ph. 281).

29SS. Relative Clansea of Canae take the indicative (negatavfl oQ.
OS is more common than oaris-

BaviiarTir rxti'i, Jt f = Sri ai) 4(u> . . . odNr Siitn yon do a stras^ tkbtf
In giving n« nothing X. H. 2. 7. 13, Aofl? Si lU^-popuu, Sam ft' iwifi^ Ifjtr
i.toviiirtT9r roit /lir Mytu i/ll^patv arrX. / blome Loxiot, who after Autttaf aM t»

aus] RELATIVE CLAUSES OF RESULT 575

a detd mott itmkallovied, cheered me wiA vordi, etc E, Or. 2SG. So vben the
reUtive is k dependeat exclamation (oloi = Sri rMguT-oi, etc., 2687).

a. 71 is otten added to Dt or Jrrif.

b. M<i I* osed when there is alao an Idea of characteristic (0/ such a tort)
or condition (perhaps to avoid a baraher form of atatement). Cp. 2T0u g.

3556. Relative Claneea of Result (Consecutive RelatiTe Oauses)
cflQ^y take the indicative (for otos, SirtK vitk the infinitiTe see 2497).
The negative is ai when the relative clause approsimateH dxTre (ofi)
with the indicative, as is generally the case when the main clause is
negadve, expressed or implied. Here Sirm is commoner than St.
The ne^tive is fii} when toe relative clause expresses an intended
(2557) or antieipated (2558) result, where &rrt fi^ with the infinitive
would be leas preoiBe.

rlt ovTto iiaXrrrat torn oi ^Xttu rol ^IXn <Inu ; uAo f« to mad Mat he doel
not tetoA to be a friend to yon t X. A. 2. 6. 12, aiiit lip ourv ppaxii Sr\oii iKirtpoi
tlx«r I? oAt t^Kroim dXX-fXwt for each $tde did not have weapon* to ihort that
the^ eoold not reach each other X. H. 7. 5. 17.

a. The indicative with Sr and the optativB with dr are rare. Thiu, rlt i' 4r
avTEtfi . ■ • iiivaB^wtuet, tcTU iSvriSii it iTOKTor airrir Imnutrat IStir; who teat
such a hater of Athent that he could endure to see himaelf not at his post t Lye.
Sfl, rfi avToi tvx"P^< tl . . . fitrfii SSrair' it iiaxif^rot aTparritaSai who it 10
vigitrous that he could carrg on war tehile battling with cold f X. C. Q. 1. 16. A
potential opuuive with It tollons a potential optative In P. R. 360 b.

3557. The indicative is normal in consecutive lehitive clauses
introduced by ouk i<mv Soris (oi), ov&it iunv orrrtt (pi), ovk tarty omit
(qv), dirlv o*, ioTtv oTs, etc.

oAr frrtr oiStU Sirrii o6x sfrrtt ifii\tT there is no one who does not love himaelf
Hen. Sent. 407, oAi fa-riv Jlrut 4|S)|i' ir^fp rdXif offtf in noway canst thoti Teg<An
thy youth E. Heracl. 707. See 2661.

a. The Indicative with ir and the optative ivith iv alao occnr. Thus, oi yiLf
Ijr 6 Tl it tuMtiTt for there was nothing that you could have done D. 18. 43, Sr

bOk tarir Hara olit iU naTa^por^iriitr whom every one would demise 1. 8. 62.

b. On tbe subjunctive and optative without i; see 2540, 2647, 2562.
SSSa The future indicative is often used to express an intended

result (negative ^^).

iriiTTow irl reiaOrmii Urv fir KpaT^rit /if) tuTarx-^rti tii it is temelets lO
attack men of such a kind that we ehall not hold them in subjection if we con-
ijurr themT.O.W, alrriiiSi Toiaih-' . . . inrmrxlioorroi, <J ci» ^ijS' ar ArioDr jj jcinjft^-
aTorroi these men shall make promises in consequence of which the Atlienians
fciJl not bater themselves under any circunutances (lit. even if anything occurs)
D. la 324.

ass&. The future indicative is especially common when the main
clause contains an idea of ability, capacity, or characteristic, and the
relative clause denotes what is to be expected of the subject.

676

SYNTAX OF TH£ COMPLEX SENTENCE

[»5"

iKanl itiur . . , £(uV wiiniiat FaOf re iral ItripM afTuvf vuwuxw'n'af re taX
tilt iSir trfifumii (cp. flim vottfix"^'"^ Vie are able to tend fov lAf/M and
uten aho will fight with fon and direct povr joarnea X. A. 6. 4, 10, oBrt r\iU
lari ri itifarra oJFri rrirgi {i Bft^ifitBa lUrorra vie have neither »hip« to cantfl
118 oioair nor provuiotu to /ted tu uAile toe rnnain 0. 6. !i(), Strral tum asru
a^«r JnSrd he need* »ome one to Improve Mm P. Eu. 306 d, (tin) V44vf«
rinf^ot TMoikg it' ot 4>wM» iroXaurroi a bill had to be paued of tKch a characler
(u to detlToy the I^UK.iam D. 19. 43.

2560. Condltloiul Relative CUiuea may be resolved into if clauses,
ot (octtk) corresponding to ei tk and St (mmt) 3» to iar nt- The
n^iative is ^^.

a. Tbe uiteoedeiit of condlttoos] relaUve clauses Is iDdefinite (2505 b).

b. Sacb relative clanseB, like t«mponl clausea, correspond in form to tbe
protaaaa of ordinary conditional sentences. Conditional relative eentenca
show, in general, the same Babstilatlons permitted in tbe corresponding ooo-
dlUooal sentences, tt Ir Is always generic, Mr may be parUcular in proae.

2561. The correspondenoe in construction between the common
forms of conditional, temporal, and conditional relative, sentences
is ahovn by the following table:

Fment

Simple :
Unreal:
General:

if C»r,, 0 r,
«rT.(»r«»r4

«r.)

fxv

Fast

Simple :
Unieali
Geneml:

iT C*T., S) T<
iT t*T«. fl) r<
el CBr«, •) T.

lx«

More Vivid 1
LeM Vivid :

M,r.CBr«r<.,
«r (fa., «) r.

It. a.

ix»

N. — Eng

Ilsb cannot alwayi

i, without obsonrlty, n

se a relative to trandat« At*

or S ri witb an unreal indicative ; In sncli cases when(eeer) or uAalever ate beat
rendered by ifevtr. Op. 2396.

PRESENT AND PAST CONDITIONAL RELATIVE CLAC8E8
Fi'tM Form

8IHPLB PRKSBHT AHD PAST CONDITIONAL KBLATIVBB

2SC2. Simple present and past conditional relative clauses have
the present or past indicative. The main clause has the indicative
or any other form of the simple sentence (cp. 2298, 2300).

»i 7V ' rfirravtir ol Sttaioi, dXX' i (= rf rin) n^ rplTTOvn, Tavrx \tyta fir
It le not what the juMt do, but what thtg do not do, that yav teep telling iw

*s6i] CONDITIONAL RELATlV£ CLAUt^ES 577

X. M. 4.4. 11, riir'E\\-tn,rc1(=aTirii)iiiitTvx"*' TnU Ti(anr trrn til r«
Tiftit tStoT those of (Ae Qreela viho happened not to be In rank ran into their
ranka X. A. 3. 2. 14, Jti/^aXXc* airir S ri iBirart, hi tlandtred hln all he eould
6. 1.32, irSpat tOw 'A^nfur iwiin-nnir SaM iti) t^irtwnf they killed all Of the
Athertiam who had not escaped by suiimming T. 2. 90, t Si 7c /t-itiir jcacif tm*?
ttS' Sr Tim till 'iikbS alriar-, and that which produces HO evtl cannot be the catise
0/ any evil eUherf P. R. 379 b, i n^ rpoir^ta »i^t' ixavt niiB' Ipi neither hear
nor behold that vshtch beseems thee nut Men. Sent. 39, Srrtt f^i iriSiiuT, rtipirffw
n*ar Whoever longs to live, let htm Urlve to conquer X. A. 3. 2. 38.

A. Since tbe antecedent of theM claufiea Ib lodeGnite, simple present condi-
tional relUive clauses with tbe presenC Indicative in tbe main cUuse often have
the Talue of general conditions. Bat general clauses with St {ni) usually take
the HUbjunctive or t^tative (2567, 2G68), and those with flrm (^ti)) the indio-
alite (2669).

3563. If the relative clause expresses a present irUmtwn or neces-
aitt/, tbe future indicative may be used.

/r To&rif «K(ASirAu (1960) Mm iKiarif xi rpifiiart, if t'-i ra a^it rapiarat
each thought that progreaa leas surely impeded in any undtrtaking in which he
was not going to take part in person i= tr ratrif miiXvrai 4I ftir wap4T»iiat)
T. 2. 8. Cp. P. Tb. 186 c. More common is iiAXtt with the present or future
infinitive ; (Xai70' S ri . . . frdri nimtrftr t/ilr ^X« mag you adopt whatevtr
course ts likely to be of advantage to you all D. 3. 86.

a.. Elsewhere tbe tutnre indicative is not regular in conditional relative
sentences.

Second Form.

PRBSBNT AND PAST UNREAL CONDITIONAI. RELATIVES

256*. Present and past unreal coDditional relative clauses have a
seoondary tense of the indicative. The main clause has a seeondary
tense n:ith Sy (cp. 2303).

oOrt fiip ft* ah'ol hitxt^^ittr wpirrnr i (=:«f Tin) fiii ttrtrriiitfa ktX. for (if
tliat were so) neither should im ourselves be undertaking (as we are) to do what
ton did not understand, etc. V. Charm. 171 e, ol raijci b/iar, Sm (= tl nrtt)
iwBAS* lint, ^ri ro^uf ftr £/SpljtrTo (If that Were so) your children, as many of
thfm as viere present (but none were present), would be insulted bg these men
Jj. 12. 98, bwinpa roOrtir iroliftttr, aiStiii Iv iJttoc tXoiVim Iftar whichever ttf
thiCac things he had done, they would be no teat rich than any one 32. 23.

FDTXTRB CONDITIONAL RELATIVE CLAUSES
Third Form

HORE VIVID FUTURE CONDITIONAL RELATIVES

3S69. Conditional relative clauses that vividly anticipate tbe
realization of a future event take tbe subjunctive with jv. The
n>£kii> clause has the future indicative or auy other form referring to
:he future.

iv,Goog[c

678 SYNTAX OP THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [i-jee

ry inipl St Ar { = Mv riro) fXifffSr rtlaoiiai I mill obeg V!hat€Wr man gou mTj
eAoose X. A. 1. S. 15, oh (for a) ir al dXXoi <^d{bimu, TS^oii iru XP^^D toft'it-
mer olAera acquire by labour, that you nhaU eiijiig X. M. 'J. 1. 25, irfipdjFa^uii i n
it S6miuu tuat i-faBir reuir I wiil fry fu do gnu all thf f/'Hi'l I e-tn X.A.tt. I.Si,
Jlret At fXAj, X^erret ifuB inpoiaorrai. d rfai lehtreVfr I go the J/ouny men Will
litUn to my gpealelnff F. A. 3T d, iw6iipiiiu S ti ir vi ipurQ anrteer whatrwr I
atlc you I.. 12. 24, fviiBt iwg ir th ifi^iu foll'rw vhert any one may Wad ym
T.2. 11, iiS» (=«»!«) h^tlirw,r«e<iiitBa.leiuiallabeyai'IshaUbid BISW.

Folenlial optative : Skit' in^iyaa hr ffrir' Ar ^liXo Hini' lo that you can get i^
in any suit you pUatt Ar.Niib. 1161.

a. The future indicative is scarcely aver used in a conditional relative clause
of thlB sort (T. 1. 22 Sirot ^uXitiramu ; cp. tS13).

b. Homer baa some caaea of the aubjunctlve nithoat k/ or Ar (e^. If 2S4].
Homer sometimea uaea the future with %t or dv in the luaiu clause : i H utr nx«-
%iierTm, Sr lur tkwfuu and he toill be w>Tolh to whom I shall come A 139.

Fourth Foi-m

LBS8 VIVID FUTURE CONDITIONAL RELATIVES

2566. CoDdltional relative clauses tliat set forth less vividly the
Tealization of a future event take the optative. The main clause
has the optative with Av.

iKtoitit it tit tA wXoia inPalntt a { = tt Ttra) it/ut KOpos iol^ I should hrsit-il-
to embark in the vetseU Chat Cyrvs might give us X. A. 1.3. 17, I Si nil Ayari^ ,,
■M' it ^i\bJ nor could he lone what he does not detlre P. Lya. 216 b.

a. The uiain clause baa Che optative without Sr in wishes: S&pa Oeatfxo^
Srri iiiaitr may he keep the gifts of the gods whntever they may give a 142.

b. Huuier sometimes uses ti or Sr in the relative clauw (# IttlJ.

GENERAL CONDITIONAL RELATIVE CLAUSES

Fifih Form

PRESENT OSNSRAI. CONDITIONAL RELATIVES

aser. Present general conditional relative clauses have 3r with
the subjunctive. The main clause haa the present indicative or au
equivalent.

r^oi !' iw6\\v9' Sm^ (^ifrim) Sr ^nXy tf<ii 'he diflh young, tehnme'era g-xi
doth love' StOb. Flor. 120. 13, on (= if nrat) 1' 41^ 0i\giurStrui fxon-Bt t.x.1
Toil «X#>iiiii;i, Tiit^ tehomever he sees zealous of danger fn the face of tAe enemy,
these he honours S. H. 0. 1. 6, taiuOvl rt iwiBer Sr ^Xuproi, itStSii^l n </i out
iv iSfXiott thev both get a wife from mhateiter fumily Ihey please and give tl»fir
daughter! in marriage to vihomsiiever they choose P. R. Ol.'id, warplt yi^ ioTi
voir' Ir' ir Tpdrrn Tit it for every land i> a man's own country wA«re*oeeer Ac
fare* aell Ar. Plut. 1151.

a. Gnomic aorlst in the main rlaii^t; : Jti h tmU twtwtlttrrat, MXa r' ttXvt*
atrroi) whoever obeys the gods, him Ihey most do hear A 218.

as?o] CONDITIONAL RELATIVE CLAUSES 579

b. The aabjnnctiTe without It (xi) is nsaal In Homer and occure occagionaHj
in AUic and lyric poetry. Thus, duSpiiwovi i^pf ml rtrvrat St nt iiid^^ he
tnjicftes oeer men and p«nUhe» whoever triintgre.s*et » !iU, tHi Si rtipcrdr

MWra \uwoOa' at ^aruo' aiSalpeTai but thOK griffs pain Che fflo8( which are
sfi-.n to be self-aought S. O. T. 1231. Cases of tlie sort appear in Udt., but are
very rare in Attic prose, e.g. T. 4. 18. Tlje subjunctive wlihout it {ti) is much
commoner in Homer than in the correspond in g clauses with el (2.')31)).

c. The apixlOBia here usually expreHses a fteneral truth, less often tterative
action. In 2666 the apodosis refers to iterative actiou, usually on the part of
designatad individuals.

Sixth Form,

PAST GENERAL CONDITIONAI, RELATIVES

2S6& Past general conditional relative clauses have the optative.
The main clauae has the imperfect or an equivalent.

(Ul rpAi ^ (= el »p6i Tin) tti) Ipyf, toSto IrpaTrer tohatevfT Wnrk he V)IU
engaged In, that he alwagt performed X. H. 4. 8. 2'2, IrpArTer a I6ftfw aOr^ he
Alw^ya did whatever he pleaeedlXI&.'i^, riirrat . .. Ivout \dpoiir SiN>6eifi<>r theg
jtiied to dettroj/ at mang a* they captured T. 2. 67, ^flijpi Brou rep friTvyx^""*
Oijpioti he u»ed to hunt wherever then fell in with targe game X. C. 3. 3. 5,
irtitpayor . . . Urreiaviiiu wdrrat Irif irrayxii"'!" ^4 ^ie6ynr they acreamed out,
entreating all they met not tofiet X. C. 3. 3. 87.

^ An iteraUve tenee with ir in the main clause: Srg ^Xw ipiaTawauiff9ai
ri VTfiArrvita . . ., twariftayer it ri nipat, -when Che tquadron tAM abortt to Utile
breakfaet, he would draw back Che wing X. II. <I. 2. 26.

INDICATIVE FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONAL RELATIVE CLAUSES

3569. The present indicative instead of the subjiinclive with civ
occurs in general conditional relative clauses (cp. 2342^. This occurs
chiefly after otmt, which is itself sufficiently general in meaning.

otrim Wfiit rat iuii4apa.j yrditij) f/KurTa \urolrrai, fpytf tl iid\iaTa irr^xi""
tfioae toAo in feeling are least depresseii at miiforttmes, in action resitl Chem mott
X. 2,64, IcTti >' irl iitylnToit t4 irlipSoror \aiifiiini, 6pSwf pouXeitTai he Coun~
a^lM wisely who incurt envy in a great cause 2.64, Sunt St xXoCror J} et-,iiit%at
tl^tSiir -famt TQttipdr, liUpii lirrit whoever Jixes his gaze on wealth or noble
ItTt^age and weds a wicked woman, is a fof.l E. El. 1097, i t, laUv <t,lU> itl
tahtUtoever is fair is dear fnreuer E. Bacch. 8^*1.

*. Cnses of the imperfect instead of the optative are tare and generally 111

supported : Arou ^tn rf)v -raTpita. n ii^\/iBeir, o6 tinir iHpiirv whenever he
thought thM he could benefit his country in any respect, he did not ahnnk from
!o« X.Ag.7.1. Cp.X.A. 1.1.5, l.a.27.

3570. The Indkative is generally used In parenthetical or appended relnlive
;li&aaes with lam (Srrii .vorf). Thus, touXcAifHr flwii, Jl rt wvr' tlvir «1 VmI im
terve the god*, whatever those gods are E. Or. (18.

.oogic

580 SYNTAX OF THE COMITEX SENTENCE [»sti

a. The Bubjunctire with Ac la also used when the referenoe h to futore tiiDi
or to general present time. Cp. Aee. 1. 127, D. 4. ST.

LE88 USUAL FORMS OP" CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES

2571. The pot«Dtial optatire with ir in the main clause with tbe fndicaUTe
(25A2) or sabjunctive (2606) In the relative clause.

2572. Indicative vrith Sr or potential optative with it In tbe relattve clauae.

Brrti' Ar tfutt tit rB*ri(» T>)r rdfi* Koj-fffT^o-arf . . •, •troi . . . r5» Erw 4»
aTrui ilr taiiSr iauwwtp taX oErsf whomsoevtr fou might have appointed to tki$
post, suck a one would have been the eaute of at many evils as ihUmam hat been

D. 1U.2Q, Tai S' Iw'' 'JWvpUvt . . . kilL Srei. Tit it ftrotrapaXttwurrpaTtlmt lomil
his expeditions againit the Illj/rtans and many others (lit. tehithenoever) one
might speak of D. 1. 13. Cp. X. Ag. 2. 24.

2573. The uptative In the relative clause with the present or future Indica-
tive or the imperative In the main clause (cp. 2860). With the preaent this ocean
especial]; In general statements and maxims. The main clause is often intro-
duced by a verb requiring the Infinitive.

dXX' iw i-AXtf rr-^tit, roOSi xp^ cXtor but vhomever the State mCuht appoint,
him tee must obeg S. Ant. 660, rvG /lir a^ir \tytiw, i m4 ra^ut tlMii, ttpytrta
Set one should refrain from taging oneself ahat one does not know for certain
X.C.I. 0.18.

a. The present Indicative sometimes may have the force of an emphatic
future (f 2Se). Sometimes the optative Indicates a case that is not likelj t<>
occur ; as i\\<f niuaarn, iru raiaBrd yt ^foi you ore ready to be arotk teith

another, snppoiing any one do tveh thingt * 494.

b. Other examples of the present ; Homer P 631 (doubtful) ; Theognia 6811 ;
Aes. Pr. 838 ; Soph, 0. T. S15, 979 ; Lys. 12. 8* ; Xen. C. 2. 4. 10, 7. 5. 56, H.
3. 4. 18, 7.3. 7; Plato Charm. 184a, Eu. 292 e (doubtful), L.927C Temporal:
8. Tr. 92, P. R. 332 a.

c. The future indicative occurs tn t 610 (temporal S817); theperfect indica-
tive iu A 262 and w 264 (temporal) ; the aorist imperaUve in X. C. 1. 4. 14.

DEPENDENT SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES (2674-2636)

2574. A subordinate clause may pla; tbe part of a aubstantiTe in
relation to the main clause. Such clauses are generally tbe object,
sometimes the subject, of the verb of the mtun ^ause.

tiriv Sti oi riXifiev rMi}rituni Hxaitr he said that theg had not eom« to tm^y
war X. A. 6. 6. 24, trpiffer Swwt Tti poljStM 4f<i they were managing hoto •»»;
reinforcfmenti ehnuld eiime T.3. 4, J/Sous nil . . . iri\iLBii,u«a riH olirmtt At»i
I am afraid lest we taay fnrget the trap home X. A, S. 2. 25 ; ixtrra fri . . .
IIwXiK taor od raptli) it Wit »aid fAat Fnlat had all but arrivfd 7. 2. 6.

2575. There are four inain divisions of substantive clauses.

1. Dependent Statements: subordinate clauses stating that sonif^
thing is; as Xryu i^ ooSiv lariv J&marrtpav ^V^t fte says that nolMit-y
M more unjust than talk about a man's character Aes. 1. 125.

as77] DEPENDENT SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES 581

2. Dependent ClatiBes of will or desire: subordiDate clauses denot-
ing that something shovld be or shouid be d<me. These clauses have
been treated under the following divisions :

a. Dependent clEtuaea after verbs of ejfort (2209).

b. Dependent clauses after verbs at fearing (2221).

N. — On dependent volontative clauses nich the accusative and Infinitive (In-
direct petition), see IWl f(.

3. Dep«id«it Questions: subordioate clauses asking a question;
both parts of the sentence together forming a statement; as -^porrav
o n tirri ro rpaypa I asked tvhat the matter waa X. A. 5. 7. 23.

4. Dependent EzclanutlonB ; subordinate clauses setting forth an
exclamation; both parts of the sentence together forming a state-
ment; as SmBtiiittvot airwv otrrfV fiiv )(aipav xal otav i)(oitv observing koto
ffreat the ejient of their territory was and how exceilent its guaiity
X. A, 3. 1.19.

DEPENDENT STATEMENTS

2576. Dependent statements, or subordinate clauses stating that
something is, are expressed in various ways:

1. By on infinitive, with or without an accusative (explained In 1972 f(.,
20IQS.). Thus, Miiltwyiip b^^it itu>l tin, fol rar^fJa lal 4>l\nut for I think that
yi>u are both fathtrland and fyuads to me X. C. 1.3.6, oTfioi Mini I think that I
know 1*. Pr.312c.

2. By a participle, with or without an accusative (explained in 2100 9.).
Thus, oi yV V^co' atriii rtSnttirn for thty did not knoa that he aai dead
X. A.I. iO.ie, lUumnai iti>6vit I remember that I heard X.C.I. 6.6.

3. By Sri or in (and some other conjunctions) with the indicative or optative.
On this form of dependent statement see 257T S., and under Indirect Dlsconrse.

M. In any form of substantive clause the subject of the subordinate verb may
be made the object of the principal verb (2182).

b, A clause with hi (it) may precede the principal clause. Cp. 2686.

DEPENDENT STATElfBNTS INTRODUCED BY tn OR A(

2577. The conjunctions on or in thai introduce dependent state-
ments in the indicative and optative

After verbs of saying, knowing, perceiving, showing, etc.

After verbs of emiotion (rejoicing, grienug, wondering), etc

Or such dependent statements contain an explanation of the main

;lause or of a word in that clause, no special verb introducing the

;oa j u notion.

ToirTO Ifur traiTttt rQr itSpH* rUr rtrt rKviax^imn', irt rtr . . . ^^r
\if\virat rUt 'BXXjf™* U (» right to praiee this in the men mho engaged in the
aa-Jfffht of (fto»e days, (namely) that then dispelled the fear felt b]/ the Greeks
'. Meoex. 241 U

582 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [jstB

257S. Tlie conjunctions introducing dependent etatemeDts are £r
(Homerio also om, a and art), in, Sufri, oa-wt (rarely), ovytxa and oBoi-
vtKa (both poetic).

a. tn meaning (A<i< wfts originally, like Hom, o, perhaps an accusative of tbe
inner object (cognate) : ipQ t natii lit, I lee irh'il sickness you are sick (= <r
niatr nffcii). But by tl)e time of Homer botli a and ort bad become men: fomul
conjunclionH. lloiii. art Chat seems to be a weakened art tthen ; but this is
disputed.

b. Bi*Ti original] J = Sil toCto, Sn on aeeount of this, that = hecautr (as T. t
52) ; then = in thai in )ldt. and in Attic after Isocrates, who uses Siiri for in
to avoid liluluB.

c. At strictly an old ablative of oi (2080) meaning hots, fii irhiil truy, u
in exclamatory clauses and indirect queBtUins. Tlie meaning hote (cp. koic thitt)
may be seen In sISa yiip Ht )mh 6SiiSuirTat (Xurdi ^rnH(7aioi /or I knnte Aoio (Ih'il)
the/amrd earthshatfr h<a been teroth agaimt me i 423, and also in Attic (Ami.
8.14; 1.2.3,8.10, 10.11,10. IGi Ae8.2.30; D. 24. 130). The development uf
At Aow to an that f»llowetl from the use uf wt alter verbs signifying to ttr, prr-
ceiee, know, and the Wxv, Cp. "he aayed hoiv there was a knight."

d. Siiwt (21)i:0) that is common in Herodotus (bkwi), rare In Attic, mint
used In poetry and Xeiuiphon. From its original use tn indirect queetions brut
ftoie gradually acc|ulred tlic meaning that. Thus, iX\' Srut liir . . . iyi Sxtt/iMi
bjiit Tpi^air, nT/i' iirorotiTt do not evea enterlata the thought that I am ansuyrd
at maintiiining you X.C.;i. 3.20.

e. ovnica = oS Irtra, fnr toOtou f kcb, S, properly caosal : on account of (it
reganlt) this, that, and then - that, even in Homer (Odj/xiu'if and .\ 31) ai -1
liiler In poetry. Tims, ^fdrr'^X' . . . iSkk' OlSlnvt rouvr' Irti^* roiffl t«i
BvroO yipa announce that Oedipus hat dutr3>uted such honours to hit M'U
8. O. C. 1303.

f. Mo^inita = Sroir tttta, for ro^ov trnia, 9ti ; and then = that. It is fi>iii:i!
only in tragedy, as l7yAXe . . . iSoirtta rMnii' 'Opta-tiit report that Oretle* it
df/ld S.EU47.

2S79. Rome verba of laylnff are followed either by ffri or fa or liy an

InHnitive (20IT). lii most cases the choice In optional wilh the writer. ASmi-
atlve clauses usually take the infinitive or Sri; but in ie apparently prpfirrtvil
to Jfri when a writer wishes to uiark a statement as an opinion, a pretext, ws
untrue, and so when the main clause Is negative, or when the subordinate ciniit
is uegaUve (or both are negative). Thus, w^i/faiwiip ol itttrj! irepurn , . . in >
'H^oiffToi x"^"*n the local Mirf it that Hfpharttut it toorZiny at hit/orgr T.
S.SB, Bia^\u>t ^iroin ill eiSit i\^Bit it tif ixovmr tlatidfroutlf atbtriiug tkm :
OR the teore that their IntrtUinns were not ttneert (i. 45, roXXdm iS^iimta ns.
Tori Uybii 'A^wlout twtitar el 'yiM^dfUHU ZuKpJrqr tin I{iai dq taniroti I Katr I
ojten vtonilered icilh mhal pnsnible aryumentt the. arrntert of Soeratt* »uerer'l,4
in fonvinring the Athenians that he deserved death X, M. 1. 1. I, at tovto U^.
it oiStiroTi nal AdrTon In fiaply Uim I dn not tag ((Af*) that it i* ttot m'
necemary to attack tiie enemy uftA a still smaller detachment \. C. 6. 4. 80. ir.
may be uned of an untrue statement designed to create belief (S. El. 43).

asM] DEPENDENT STATEMENTS WITH Jr* (w?) 68S

a. Dependent atatemenu In the optallve In Indirect diwonrse after Terbs of
mying are cbieflj post- Homeric.

2580. Verbs of thinking almost always take the InSnilive (201B) but itt
occurs; as with to^fw T.3.88 (2671*), Airffu 6.9, ofo^iai X. fl. 8.3, 12, fcroXiyi.
jSdw X.C.8,8.40. *Ti ia very rare (with otoniai in I'. I'll. 87 c). Xn'i'JM' (S^O
is B verb of laying.

K. lioprupa with Sti (lit) eipresaea reality ; with Ihe infinitive It denotes
uij certainty.

2581. Verba of Intellectuat perception usually take Sti (£;) ; less often the
participle, wlilcli is niirtiial after verbs of pliysical perueptioii. A verb of physi-
cal perception, if followed by 9ri (ui), virtually becuiues a verb of intellectual
[>erc«ption.

2582. Many verbs take Sri (in) or the participle either in indirect discourse
or not in indirect dUcourxe (210(1-211.)). Here the cuiistrnction with the Unite
verb ia lew dependent tlinn tliat with the participle ; but the meaning is essen-
tiallj the same In Attic. Many verbs take hi {in), the Infinitive, or the parti-
ciple, often without great difference in meaning in Attic (2123-2146).

2583. Sri (ut), when eepamted from Its clause by another clause, may be
repi^ated. Thus, iMytr Sri, tl fiij MTopiJirowBi . . . , 5ti JtaraiaWK . . . toi
iw^i he »aid thai, if Uvy did nut deecend, he teould burn their viUagea to (Ae
ground X.A. 7. 4.5.

3384. The peraonal &t|X^ tljii ftn, XavMva tri. eto. are nften used instead of
tlie impeiBonal J^Ut iartr jri. XaFtidHi Sn, eU\ Thiin, Srt ronifi6TaTQl tlffir oiSi
ri \a.i0dK>mrir not eeen you /nil to perceire that they are the very worH X. O. 1. 18.

2S83. MiKov (n (JiiXorin) tvidentiy, oVi' &n (d oIE* Eri) surely, A tTtitn
br anuvd are so often used parenthetically and elliptically as to become mere
formal eipressione requiring no verb. Jri here loses all conjunctive foree. Thus,
tX" ") vi'Tuwt i^Xar Arc rtirtur wlpt the Cage then itandt clearly thus ahout tfiese
mittert V, G.487 d, oBt' ir bprit of!' ffri iiraiirntff* nor aBKuredty aould you kavt
faxed D. 6. 20, lal wdrrur all' Iri 4niaiwruir y' ir (for kbI oti' Sri Tirrtt ^i(<rsi'r
7* 4^> and all assuredly tcontd say {>. 1.

a. Flato {Sophinten and Leges) uses J^Xoi' {IffTlr") wt for J^Xor Sri.

2386. 9ri (and by analopy in) are often attached loosely to the main clause
with the meaning as a pru"/ {in support) of the fart that. Thus, Jri )' o'vrw toSt'
/X". ><*y *™ Ti T-o5 KoXXurWwui V**"rMn 1» a pronf o/ the fact that litis is so,
rt'id me the bill of Callistheneii D. 18. 37.

3387. Verbs of emotion (to rejoice, grieve, be angry, wonder, etc.) take Sri
{in) with a finite verb (negative oi). but more commonly the participle (2100)
when the subji'ct [a not changt:d.

a. Horn, prefers 9ri, ui to the participle or infinitive.

b. The accusative and infinitive with verbs of emotion are rare ; as with Savfiifu
E. Ale 1130. (Sau/uifui may bo followed by a dependent question j D. 37.44).

c. On verba of emotion with tl instead of Sti, in (negative, generally ftif), see
if247. On the use in dependent exclamationa, see 2687.

2588. |i^|in||iai. olSa, imoim and like verbs, ma; take irt loatead of dri
(-239&A.i(.>- Cp.,l» [lomer, 4 396, *- 424.

uogic

SYMTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [1589

IlTDtBECT DISCOUBSE

2089. The words of thoughts of a person may be quoted in direct
or indirect form after verbs, or other expresBions, of mj/ing 01 thttikaig.

a. In reporting; a speech, In msking a qaoUUon, or ia dialogue, » verb □(
laying is often repealed (P.Pr.SlOb, 346 0, X. A. 7.6.6-6). 80 also in sacb
' cases as nirStia tlwn, dWi Sippti, l^i,, a Kipt X C. 7. 3. 13.

3590. (I) Direct Discourse (OraUo Recta). — In a direct qnotalioii
the words or thoughts quoted are given at first hand in the exact
form used by the original speaker or thinker.

MrYap4n (Te/iror ^1 roit grpar^oit tQw 'EW'^wttf ntpvio, Awatipnot Si i t^pni
rpil airobi t}teyt rdii ■ " Hryop^ Utoiwi ' ' iliiMt, Artptt rinfiaxoi, oi Svpsral <^fr
rji> TItpaiiiir ti-TDf U«irft» ^wfrei ' " the Megariana itnt a herald to tht gemrali
0/ the Greeks, and on hit arrival the herald spoke as foUoxes .■ " The Mtgarititi
sag : ' ue, oh allies, are not able to lustaiit the attack 0/ the Persian cavalry bf
ourselves'" Ildt. 9. 21 1 and often in HdL (cp. 3. 40,8. 122, 6.24, T. 160, a 140}.

a. Direct qnotatlon may, in prose, be introduced tij Sri, which hu the valDs
of quotation marks. Thus, ol Bt ctvor fri Uanl iriur but theg said ithat) " tc*
arereadg" X.A.6.4.10. 80 usnally when the finite verb la omitted ; aa inti*-
Rtro trtcS he atttioered {that) " no " 1. 0. 7. The use of direct speech Introdoctd
by Bri is, in general, that of familiar style. The flrat example is Hdt. 2. IIGl In
for ffri is very rare (Dinarchos 1.12,1.102). Cp. " the emperor sends thee thit
word that, if thou lore thy sons, let Marcos . . . , or any one of yon, chop oA
your hand " Shakesp. TU. Andr. S. 1. 161.

3991. (II) Indirect Dlsconrae (Oiatio Obliqua). In an indtreet
quotation the words or thoughts are given at second hand with certain
modifications to indicate that the words or thoughts are reported.

a. The original form may be preserved eic^t that there is » change fnm
the firal or second person to the third person : so rirr' mxti Mfuimi H 3I*1
reporting rirr' iei\u Si/unu H S&t. In sucb cases there is i

b. The narrator may report in dependent form the words or thoogfats of a
person from the point of view ot that person. This is the common font) ol
indirect discourse.

c. The narrator may report in dependent form the words or tboogfata of a
person from bis own point ot view. See 2624.

3993. The constructions of indirect discourse are regulated by the
character of the leading verb or expression.

a. Verba of MOflttg take either Sri or uf and a finite verb or the Inflnitin
(2017, 2670).

b. Host verba of thinking and believing Cake the infinitive (2018, cp. 2680).
e. Most verba of knowing, perceiving, hearing, thmetng take tiw pwtici(^

(2106, 2110), but admit the constnictlon with Jki or in. Some ara foUowed bf
the influldve (2123 C).

•So4] INDIRECT DISCOUBSE

2593. Indirect diBcourse is said to be implied in subordinate clauses
dependent on verba which involve an idea of saying or thinking (2622).

3SM. A speaker may state his own words or thoughts in the
form of indirect discourse. Cp, 2614, 2615, etc.

299S. Clauses standing in indirect discourse are substantive
clauses, and usually object of the leading verb; its subject, when that
verb is passive or intransitive. The infinitive in substantive clauses
after verbs of »a^ng and thinking retains the time of the correspond-
ing finite verb of direct discourse.

2S96. Indirect questions (2677) have the constructions of indirect
discourse.

OBNllGAL FBINCIFLE3 OF INDIRECT DISCOUBSE

3S97. Simple and compound sentences, and principal clauses of
complex sentences, introduced by an or wt are treated as follows :

259B. (I) After primary tenses, the original mood and tense are
retained, except that the person of the verb may be changed.

2399. (11^ After secondary tenses, primary tenses of the indicative
and all subjunctives may be changed to the same tense of the opta-
tive; but an indicative denoting uuceality (with or without &v) is re-
tained. Imperfects and pluperfects are generally retained (2623 b).

2600. The verb of simple and compound sentences, and of principal
clauses of complex sentences, when introduced by a verb taking the
infinitive or participle, passes into the infinitive or participle in the
corresponding tense. &v is kept, if it was used in the direct form.

3601. Subordinate clauses of complex sentences introduced by
&Tt, or 4t are treated as follows :

2602. (I) Subordinate clauses of asentence introduced byaleading
verb in a primary tense, must remain unchanged in mood and tense.

2603. (II) If subordinate clauses are introduced by a leading verb
in a secondary tense, all primary tenses of the indicative and alt sub-
junctives (with or without iv) may be changed to the corresponding
tenses of the optative without Sy. All secondary tenses of the in-
dicative (with or without iv) remain unchanged.

2604. Verbs standing in subordinate clauses of sentences intro-
duced \n a leading verb requiring the participle or the infinitive,
follow ^e rules of 2602, 2603.

586 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [jfiftj

2603. The principal and subordinate clauses of the direct form
rebaiD the names prijicipai and subordinate in indirect discourse
though the whole clause in which they stand itself depends on the
verb introducing the indirect diseourae (the leading verb).

2606. The change from direct to indirect discourse is almost
always a change of vwod, not of tense. The time of a participle
introducing indirect discourse is determined hy that of the leading
verb. The person of the verb is often chauged.

2607. Sv of the direct form is retained in indirect discourse except
when a dependent subjunctive with Av becomes optative after a
secondary tense. Here liv, Srav, imSAi', tatt Sv, etc., become d, art,
Jt«Si7, !ciif , etc.

2608. The same negative (ou or n^ used in the direct discourse is
commonly kept in the indirect form. But in some cases with the
infinitive and participle /iij takes the place of oi, (2723 &., 2730, 2737).

2609. No verb ever becomes subjunctive by reason of indirect dis-
course. The subjunctive (with or without cEi') may, after a secondary
tense, become optative without av,

2610. No verb can be changed to the optative in indirect dis-
course except after a secondary tense, and since, even after a
secondary tense, indicatives or subjunctives may be retained for
vividness, no verb must become optative by reason of indirect dis-
course.

2611. All optatives with or without av in the direct form are re-
tained (with or without civ) in ijidirect discourse introduced by on
or is. After verbs requiring the participle or infinitive, such op(a-
tives in principal clauses become participles or infinitives (wither
without av), but remain unchanged in subordinate clauses.

a. The optative in indirect discourse may repreaent either the indicative or
the subjunctive after a secondary teiise.

b. A present optative in indirect discourse may represent (1) the present
indicative; (2) the imperfect (2(123 b) Indicative; (8) the present snbjunctivs
with or without <»i (4) the present optative.

2612. The imperative is commonly replaced in indirect discourse
by a periphrasis with ^■j^u. Cp. 2(J33 b.

2613. The retention of the mood of direct discourse, where either
the direct or indirect form is possilile, lies solely in the option of the
writer or speaker. The vivid form reproduces the time and situation
in which the quoted woi-da were used. The vivid form is preferred
by some writers, as Thueydides ; the indirect form by others, as the
orators, Plato, and Xenophon.

INDIRECT DISCOURSE

SIUPLB 8BKTBNCES IK INUtBBCT DISC0UB8&
1. Indicative and Optative after in or Ai

2614. After primary tenses, the verb of the direct form lemuns
unchanged iu mood aod tense.

\iya a' iif iflpu-r/i tl/u he «ajfi that I am an iiuolent prrton L. 24. IS
(= ii^rr^fl (I), iW iTKitir xM toBto iiit, ^umix' Bri fifAiitt but xeemxfU remmi-
brr on Iht vne hand thai we teere born leomen S. Ant. 01, oW Sri oM' it Toffri
full iidii4>ou I know (hot you aiiulil mt blame mr. ereit Jiir this X. 0. 2. 16,
i-ritftnTo Irt oWt it To&rat elroi he replieit that he leuultl say nothing of Ihi*
X. A.6.fl.37 {=^ if tlToi^).

2615. After secoudar; tenses, an indicative without av usually
beiuines optative, but uay be retained unchanged. An indicative
with ai' and an optative with Sv are retained.

a. Optative for Indicative. —f7>i^»t Sti ttrit i ^ifSni tfq th«f rtcognixtd
thnt their fear toon gri.uniliess X. A. 2. 2. 21 (= irrl), ftfjai- fc-i ri^fat »*«» i
'Irtar fiariXtCn they taid that the king of the Indiam had K«Ht Mem X. C. 2. 4. 7
(_ = trtit4'tr flu&l), ihTAftj Sti i^TriHiiwi titr ai AattSauiifMi . . . jtal ndrat^pof
ridiolir il uKi> rrporfed that the LaredaemoitiaiiB had been defeated and that
Pflsander wax dead X. H. 4. 3. 10 (= ip--ry)iitm tlat and rWnfn).

N. — The fiTEt example of the optative in indirect disconrse Is later Iban
Homer {Hymn to Aphrodite 214). Aeochylus has four ca«ea. See 2624 c.

b. Direct Form Retained. — Sifj^-Bt \iiy«t Sri Suiai atraii KGpot a report spread
that Cyrus wa* pursuing them X. A. 1.4. T, itotpiriiHnt Sti ri/t^»uvi wpiaptit,
tM6t dT-iyxXsfar they aithdrew immediately on annaering that (Aev would ttnd
envoys T. 1, 00 (= wi^a^t). See also 2623, 2626.

2. Infinitive and Partidpte

2616. The infinitive and participle are used in indirect discourse
tu represent the finite verb of direct discourse.

briirTivor twl ffairMa Unu theg suspected that they teere to go against the king
X. A. 6. 1.8 (=ltur), f^^ ^ iCtiw .\aKeSainorlaut 1) adroS drotrertir he Said that he
iriiulil rilher bring the Laeedofmonlans or kill them on the spot T 4. 28 (= afw,
iroKTtwCi), d yip iStnr airir rtSrtiK&ra for they did not know Ihnl he Was dead
X. A. 1. 10. la {= Bt( rlBniKt).

For eitamples at Uie inAultive, see 1640, 1846, 1849, 1807, 2022 ; lor esam-
plea of tlie paniciple, eee I84S, 1648, 1874. 2100, 2112 b.

COMPLEX SENTENCES TN TNIHRECT DrSCOL'RSE

3617. When a complex sentence passes into indirect disconrse, its
princi|>al verb is treated like the verb of a simple sentence and stands
eitl)f r in a Unite mood (after on or uf) or in the infinitive or in the
participle. ^

688 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [aStl

36ia After primary tenses, all subordioate verbs retain the
original mood and tense.

X^viwif in, iriiiiw rii draSAi &r TiXiVT^fh luyi^tli' lUlficiP jcal Tiller Ixo Out
tag tlitU, isAen a good man dies, he enjoy* great eiteem and honour P. CrM. 3GS
b, rpoKiyu Sri, ^Arip' at draiplnrT-u, ^feXryxA^irai / tell yott in advance that,
tohlehever annner he makes, he wdl be confuted P. EiLSiTSe, r^xUdTfia ro^
■aTOffTitvari, tt At A^i^r^ai ^ardrti {^u"''"''^'''"" Ifii" plain marning Aat kAo-
ever moltt thall be puntehed with death T. 3. 40 (_= 9ri i^jiuiiarru).

2619. After secondary teDses, all subordinate verbs in the present,
future, or perfect indicative, and all subjunctives, are usually
changed to the corresponding tenses of the optative, or they are
retained. Subjunctives with 3y lose cEv on paesii^ into the optative.

a. Optctlre for IndlCAtive and Indlcatlra Retained. — •?» ... An Sttpa Atk
. . . tr tlp^t S/ai he said that ht was bringing a man whom it too* neeetart to

lockup X.H.6.4.S (= S7W, 3(?), KCpoi . . . t^ K>^pxV ipmj'" ri vrpdra^a
tari niaer ri rwr raXeu^ur, Sri laT pan\edt (Tit Oyrua thoiUed to Clearehvl to
lead hUtro<^ai;aintt the enemy' » centre became the king V!iu there X. A. 1.6. 13
(= iffTf), tt ti «(Unu (^oo-av Srt rafiiaMrrcfor they «atd that they knetp toelt that
theg WOVid come X.H.6.5.19 (=fofur Jh-i wapiatrrai), f\tytr Sri Froifm ilii
^tirSm oArmt . . . diri AArs . . ., (rftt rohXd tiyaSi X^^'iHrra he Maid that he

»a» ready to be their leader to the Delta, where they would obtain an abandawict
of good thlngt X. A. 7. 1. 33 (= trmiiit tliu, X4f tir^i), l\tyor An . . , Utouf
^/litai Ixon-et, at airoii, iir rrofSal yimtrtu, Ifyurir trStr Efotwi t& /virftoa

they said that they had come with guides who would lead than, should a truce he
made, to a place where they would get their supplies 2. 3. 6 (^= tteittr. v/ut, liert),
AyaT^tir ft l^cuFKcr, if ri aStia aiivu he said I might think myself well off if I
laved my life L. 12. II (= iriaxitata, ti fiiviu).

S. — Except fn the future tbe chuige to the optative of the indicaUve after d

bran; asrpor^XAir X^wrSri . . . frui/iii lifu, cT Tii<a|3aAHTa (= ^Xii), ra^.
toSnu pairafltiir I Went and said that I was ready to give vp the alavea to be tor-
tured, if he vAshed any ons of then L. T. 34, iha 9ti A/ftrrar tiir ofi iwaitoi^,
tt raDra rtraiiiKtiit clif he said that he did not commend Dezi}g>HS, ^f he had dont
this X. A. S. S. 25 (^ tntrQ, ,t rirol^a).

b. Optative for Subjunctive and Sabjnnctlre R«taln»d. —thtr Sri AlfHtfMrs,
*t nil aturifitar he said CAaE Ae would smart for tt unless hektpt quiet X. H.2. ^
66 (= ofjtiifn, iaiiiii vkijtVijOi o4ii**«ff«»H»«u, /a»(Mjrit nfrroilr x^^uira Sdl^ tkef

r^sed to go unless a largess were given them X. A. 1.4. 12 (= oAi tu<r),i[rtr Rri

^irfferrflai ^XXour tirf, irirt di-dTOi ri vrpdrtiitM he said that they intei»ded to
attack him when he led his forces away X.C.T.6.2 (= iifiAmm, nt, iwirmr
AirdYII<)i ''"^ Itthui ii!i\t\n ^vXirTtii liinrrat t<h)i iTaYirraf tut l.r rii n|fial>f
Ke ordered that those who brovght the horses should guard than and watt uHtU
orders were given 4. 5. 86, &iiBVtw 'AyiiaiXAif, tl r-rtlaiiiTo fwt l\tour ovi rf/^im
r/Ai ftaaitJa. iy-i(\Dvt, tiaTpi^9at ktX, he swore to Agesilaus that, if ht tsomld
nake a tmce until the messengers whom he would send to the king should arrfcv,
he would bring it about that, «a. X Age«.l. 10 (= <» (rrrirgt ftn i* fXlwrv ait

a»»] INDIRECT DISCOURSE 689

2630. Subordinate verbs in the imperfect, aorist (but see 2623 e,
N. 3), or pluperfeut indicative, aud all optatives, remain unohaiiged.

iwiTTtTkai. Si v^l^tr aArori rofri i^6poui , , , ilriir iit Sir fiir TpbeBtr iwtievt
tJn^rrit aimit ict\. they reported that the ephort enioined them to toy that they
blavted them for what theg had done before X. H. 3. 2. 6 (= Aro«Ix«, luit^ituBa

IfiTr), fXri{)>i' Toiti ZinXoitt Tai>Tii, ovt iirrtriii'l'ar, ixain-^rrOai theg eijiected that

the Sieela whom they had sent for taoMid meet tA«in AereT.T.80, tlmlTitl<Saii,r
Wt 'Kiymrt, tl inipovt Mpti he taCd that he would enter {jito neffottaliotis \f he
sAouId receive ho»taget X. H. 3. 1. 20 (nSoiA' i', il Mpotiu). See 2623 n, 262&.

2621. The following table shows where, after (f«v on or iijr^ the
optative (and infinitive after I'M may be substituted for the indioa-
tive or subjunctive iu couditional eentences in indirect discourse.

DiBBCT INDIRBCT

ttrtr Art f^

J n lyaii SiSw^ d rt l)pt, StSotrj (SiSovat)

«r rt a}(€V, iSiSovw ^ rt ttxp; ISiSini (Si&wai)

tl Tl loTfoii, tSaiKOi u Tt hr)(tv, Soijj* (Sotwoi)

4av Tl ixu, Saiaio u Tt ijfot, Sucrot (Sioiniv)

d! Ti ifw, BoKria tl n 2;o(, Suirot (fiuocir)

iiv Tt !;(u>, &'&iifU tl n l)(pi, ScSoii; (SiSoMu)

* The combination of aoriat Indicative and aorist optative Ig unosnai.

In the following sentences there is no change of mood after on:
(Z n et)(Ov, ti&ovv Sn cT ri <t;i(n', JStSou S,v (Si&n*iu 3y)

et n iir}(pv, fSuKa i.v (( rt itr}(fv, ihuKtv Sy (SoOmu cEv)

e£ T( Ixptfit, 81&K17V cb* n rt ^^ &S011} oif (8t$ovat cEv)

Temporal and relative sentences (cp. 2G61) are converted in tlie same way.
For an infinidve representing an imperative in ttie iqxNioBia, see 2683 c.

IMPLIED INDIRECT DISCOURSE
3622. Indirect discourse is implied in the case of any subordinate
clause, which, though not depending formally on a verb of saying or
thinking, contains the past thought of another person and not a etate-
ment of the writer or speaker. Implied indirect discourse appears
only after secondary tenses, and in various kinds of dependent
clauses.

a. Conditional claoses, the conduaion being Implied in the leading verb.
1*b>is, after a verb of emotion, ol 3' iftrlpor tl iXtiffotira utherepftied them iftheg
aAouM be eaptvred X, A. 1. 4. T. The original form was ' we pit; them thinking
wbat they will safTer tl IXtifferrat \fthey thall be captured.'' In other tl clauses,
a.s rd xjr^/iaTa r^ J^MV H'-"'*, 't Twi TiXruT^irfiH irait he gave hia propertg to
t/*e people in ease he died ehildleet And. 4. 16 (i.e. that the people might have
ft., in case he should die: direct itr reXiur^u, and here iir T«\fvnf«^ might
taave been used).

690 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE [afaj

b. Temporal clauses implying purpose, erpectation, or tlie libe (cp. 2420).
Thus, rworSat twot^rartB, Im AnyytXSilii li Xtx^"*" tAey madt a truce (n'hkb
they agreed should continue) until what had been »aid shoiUd havt bftn rrporud
X. U. 3.2. 20 (fwt ar i-wnTit>S% would be the direct form). Cp. tvn 3' ftr Tavri
IiarfNt^wrru, ^tihaKii* . . . taHXtut he If/t behind a guard (which he intended
ebould remain) uMU they should tetlle these malter» 6. 3. 2G.

c. Causal clauses. See 2242.

d. Ordinary relative clauses. Thus, itprn raljn, rir EMSn TitM he atted
for the child which Evctdna had borne Fladar, OL 6. 49. Here reUUve and inter-
rogative are not sharply distinguistied.

0. Clauses depending on an infinitive especially when introduced by a verb of
miti or desire, e.g. command, advim, plan, aek, wish (1091, 1993). Here tlie
inflnitive expressing command, warning, wish, is not itself In Indirect disconme.
The negative is /iif. Thus, li^jcniipTai (historical present) ^t ZirdXrirr . , . ^w-
Miuroi rtarai airir, tl Simirro, . . . arpaTiSirM trt rijr HoTtlSata' they came lo
Sitalces iMth the detire of persuading him (if they could) to make an expeditiiin
againft Potidaea T. 2.67 (=iir Suni^a), cp. 2633 a.

f . Clansea of purpose aind object clauses after verba of ^ort admit Qte alter-
native oonstructions of Indirect discourse.

KEMAEK8 ON THE CONSTRUCTIONS OP INDIRECT DISCOURSE

2623. Past Tensea In Indirect Discourse. — The following rules gov-
ern past tenses in indireot discourse.

a. The potential Indicative with it, the indicative in a conditJon denoting
unreality with it or without tr (as ixp^', '*", etc.), always remain nncbanged
in order to prevent confnsion with the optative of the direct form.

iwi\oytBrT» iit tin Sr wort aura //.wpei Ijirar . , . ti {Stfaw they pleaded that they
never would have beenio foolish, if they had knoinn X. H. 5.4. 22 (^oi« ArjJ^r.
tl nVjMt), (fXf7(v) 9ri KpeiTTur Ijr avrif rbrt imSarttr he Mid that it would hate

been better for him to die then L. 10. 26 (= Kptttrow J}f /u.)-

b. The Imperfectandplnperfectinslmplesentencesusually remain unchanged
after second^ tenses to prevent ambiguity ; but when there is no doubt that a
past tense stood in the direct form, the imperfect pasies into the present optative.
the pluperfect into the perfect optative. In subordinate clauses both tenses are
retained unaltered.

4>atiB(v Ari roXXiiicii Tpit rbr '\tShr ol XaXia^M 4wi>pt6am he heard that the
Chaldaeane often went to the Indian king X. C. 3. 2. 27, (Ix« 74(> \iyti* mai 8ti
(iJXK rffir 'EXXiimf p<ui\tT vurt/idxtyrra ir nXaratait, Kol trt iffrtpor DMmiiroT«
arpaTtiratrro (cp. c) 'rl ^oo-iX/a for he tpdi able to say both that alone of thf
Greeks they had fought on the side of the king at Plataea and that later thev h'ld
never at any time taken the field against the king X. H. 7. 1.34 (= irvM^x^fuAi.
JrTpnTtvai/iita'), Td irfrpartiUra SiYrjoSrro, Sri ofrrol /lir . . . irXietiK rJ)p Si
iralptirir Tfir tauiyiir rpBaTiimtt they related what had occurred to the rffrtt
\hm they were themtelves sailing asaiiist the enemy and that they had girrn
orden for the rescue of the men on the wrecks X. H. 1. 7. 5 (= iw\*>»ur,

rpartrifaiier^.

aSsi] INDIRECT DISCOURSE 691

N. — The clumge to tfae optative Is not nwde wlien the lime o( the action o(
imperfect (and pluperfect) is earlier than that of a coi)nlmat«d verb in the uina

quoted sentence ; as fXr7^r t* iiti ^tXa^ifnuof ^f xai ritr Zd/i^ rpi^ot KartlTOt he
laid that he both had heen a lovfr uf Alhem arui that (afternards) he Tea» the
firit to tell mhat had happened at Samut Ar. Vesp. 282.

C. The aorist indicative without Ir in a simple Benlcnce or in a principal
clause may t>e changed to the aorist optative after a secondary tense ; but In
subordinate clauses (except those denoting cause, N. 11} it remains unchanged lo
avoid ambiguity with the aorist optative, which usually repreaents the aorist
subjunctive.

irrtpitiiair airf Sri . , , 06 Xd^oi/u f atuuered him that I did not taie
D.60.38 (sDdilXa^v), rD?iUl«ixp4(r«r^a<f^i|< A ^"T^P nW '<»">' he aaid
that he nould tu« hie otcn monry that hie father had given him X.H,1.C.S

(= XP*""*™! "«««>■)■

N. 1. — The retention of the aorist Indicative Is here the essentia] point o( dif-
ference between subordinate clauses and principal clauses or simple at

N. 2. — In a subordinate clause the time of the aorist usually e
action prior to that of the loading verb.

N. 8. — In causal clauses with Sri or ut a dependent aorist Indicative may
become aorist optative ; as tlx' yip \fyar . . . iai AaicfSa.iiiiiiai iitk toDts roXcui^
veiar a^wi, iri ii6k iOtX'^raitr fur' 'Ay^iXiIdv i\8tir ir' airir for he XBOt able Ut
eay that the Lar^edaemoniaoM had gone lo tear with them (the Thebans) for the
reason that they (the '['liebanit) liad not btea teilltHg t-i atlafk him (the I'eratan
king) In eomjianj/ with Agesilavt X. H. 7. 1. 34 (direct hnXiiaiaar iiiur, In
oCk 40(X4va^>)' Rarely in temporal clauses with ^rl (X. C. 5.3. 26).

2634. Inserted Statement of Fact. — When the present or perfect
indicative would have stood in the direct discourse, a past tense of
historical narration is often used as a statement of fact by the writer
from his own point of view, though the rest of ttie sentence may be
f;iven in indirect discourse after a secondary tense from the point
of view of the subject of the leading verb.

iSri Sti o*x olir t Hh alT% m6t)rat the tiww that it WO* not pouit>l*for her to
be eaeed Ant. 1.8 {= oix ot6t t' inTl J^ul ffuf^ni. With 4> the sentence virtu-
ally tuts the force of 0^ Mr t fr rru^m Eol itei the rould not be taved and
she knem it). So l\tyor ot KoXiit riir'EWiSa iXrudtpavr atT6r, tl irSpat Si(ifi6iipir
thry said thai he was not freeing Orerce in the right aay if he pat men to death
T. it. 32 ( = /XtulhfMit, ita^Btipttt), T-oi^t ^oydSaj itiXivte c6w atr^ UTpnTtiicBai,
brovx^f"" *^<>>>> •' ■dXwt xarawpiftiiy i^i' i iaTpariHert, ttt) -rpitStit raiceftai
rpit adroh •MTayd-fti ttKalh he vryrd the exileii to make the exneditinn with him,
priimising thrm that, if he nhoutd svrceed in aeen-mjilishing the purposes of his
campaign, he would not eeate until he had brought tlifm bark to their homes
X. A. t. 2. 2 (= 4> narnr/Mlfu iip' i rrpaTtioiiai, ai raiaapju wplr ar tartyiyu'),
irafurir iHlXuatw Sri aix iXifB^ TaSra ^P he shovfed bf his death that thf
tens not trat L. 10. 6'2 (= tsrl'), t^ (trai xap' iaurif Sirai' /11) ^r dnfXu^rar h»
said that he had in his pouessiim all that had not been erpended H. 48. id
( = wop' i/iat iara tirtr >ij| tarir ii^\wiUiivii), ir ToXXp Hi iraplf 9'" ^ 'EXXqMf,

592 SZltTAX Ot' TUB COMPLEX SliNTfiNCE [*tes

hrattiitrat /lir tfri ^t rait 0a#iUH> Mpoit fffar the Oreeke were oMOrdfa^ir fn
great perptexttv on r^fieeting that then were at IA« Mn^'a gates X. A. 3. 1. 2 (te.
they were there In fact and they knew it).

«. The Qse of past tenses of hiatorical Duration Instead of present tenses of
direct discourse occurs, [□ aimple sentences, especially after verbs of kttowing,
perceiving, eliowing, and verbs uf emotion (rarely after verba of toying w- fri).

b. Such Inserted statements of fact are often difficalt to dlatingoioh tnaa
indicatives in indirect discouree ; and tbe two forms of expressiiHi may occur In
the same RentAnce (X. C. 4. 2. 36-30). The common explanation of the ase of
the imperfect and pluperfect lor the present and perfect ta Uiat Qieek had the
•ame assunilation of tense as English.

c. Except In indirect qaeations, the imitative of Indirect discoarse Is nnknown
to Homer, (tiwtir in l\6oi w 237 may be considered as interrogatlre.) After
primary or secondary tenses Homer employs. In the dependent clause, tbe same
psst t«nse that would have been used in an Independent clause, from the point
of view of the speaker, and not the tense which would have been need In direct
disconiHe from the point of view of the subject of tbe main clause. Thus, "ttynt-
ffnp S (= 9ti) S4 taxi li^iStra I itneiD that he Was planning evil y 106 {i.e nut
ifciSrra nl iylynMicet he Wat planning eeH and I kneie it). In Attic we shoold
commonly have /i^Seru or ii-iSMre. After secondary tenses tbe future is usually
expressed in Homer by lutWoF and tbe Infinitive, as oMi ri iSii, t olt wtlrtwii
tlitiAtr nor did fie know thlt, that the had no thought ta eampty y 146.

d. That this use of statements of fact standing outside indirect discoarse is
optional only. Is seen from a comparison of the flmt example in 2624 with coXdt
yip itnr tin iyA rairii ipirirrit tt/u for he knew full well lAa( / am fint-rate in
this line Ar. Yesp. 63A and with ^Sti airir hi iJaor tx" t»8 II<fwiicoS m-pa-
tti/ioTot he knew that he held the centre of the Feriiaa arm]/ X. A. 1. 8. 21.

2625. Ad optative with or without 3y ia regularly letaioed after
irt (As).

Mljormt in . . . ffunvrpaTfiorTa Srtt ity^"'' they thowei that Meir aiwat*
/Mowed them in their eampaigni wherever theg led X. H. 5. 2. 8 (=»«>»-

VTpaTtuiiuBa, Sr« if-ioiaSt, cp. 2568), ArixplraTii . . . 9ti rpiafftf af ArtSdrauw 4
tA Sr\a rofiaiotifnar he replied that they would tooner die than mrrender their
armt X.A.2.1.10 {=aw iro8i*ot/ur,rapaBotiur),

3626. In some cases the optative with ir in tempotal and relative aentenccb
is used to represent the subjunctive with it ; but many scholan expel tr.

TOp^TTtiXsii a^oU ni) vpirtpor irvrlBtaBai vp\r it T&r a^rrfpur # rfci Ttt %
rpoifleiij they gate ordert lo them that they should not attaek before tome one of
their number had either fallen or been wounded X. H. 2. 4. 18. Cp. 2421,

2627. An optative occasioned by indirect discourBe may stand
after a primary t^nse when it is implied that the thought quoted has
been expressed in the past.

Xiyti i Uyot Sti NiMrrJXt^t Hiarapa tpairo the story goes that Neoptotemm^
asked Nestor P. mpp.M. 2m b. This may be expressed by X^n-wdnTrffrt. Cp..
\iyrrai tlritr Dri poi\iKT>) U U reported that he said that he Wished X. C. 1.4. 25.

••jtj UrDTBECT DiSCOUftSfc 698

A. The hiBtorioal present is a secondary Wnse : ol Si nii^rrtt >Jymiai Kllp^
Sti pursier r«^ 'hcnplaat and thoie who had been tetU told Gyro* that cA«y hated
theAiMgriaiu X.C.4.2.4.

2628. Indirect discourse may be introduced by on (5k) and then
pass into the infinitive as if the introductory verb bad required the
lotinitive.

4 ti iwlxpttnTB Sti ffoi\iHTa /lit trawra rf mrpl xapitta^ai, itarra lA^yrai rA>
ralSa xoXnrir ttrat rouJ^ir (= n>/ii[oi) /araXnttf ehe annofred thai she viithrd
to do everything to oblifft her father, but that the considered it vnkind to leave the
child behind againet bis inclinalioa X. C. 1. S. 13.

a. It is unusual to hare tbe infialtlTS flrat, and then Sri (T. fi. 8G).

b. Oae and the same clause may even begin with in {iii) and then (aome-
timea after a parenthesis) be continued by an Infinitive, leas ofi«ii by a p&rtlclple.
Thus, diotfwSri (omitted In one Mb.) Kal rutHpf^^t ■"rat rStralSuwitei ytriaeat
sAtdO / hear too that some of hit iotu became your companioru fn the ehate
S. C. 2,4. 15, Continuation with a participle in T. 4. 37.

2639. An optative dependent on on (uk) may be followed, in a
parenthetical or appended clause (often introduced by y6p or oSr),
by an independent optative, whicb is used as if it itself directly de-
pended on on (a>t).

tXtyer roXXal ... Sti rarrit Afin X^( Z(ljtfi|f - X"**^' V^ '''l '°' o"^' attaSt
ixowXtir T^ Tavra pouXoiUnf ivrarir tfii urtk. many »aid that What Seuthe» Mid
teat 0/ much value; for it aas tetnter and neither viai it possible for any one
who to derired to tail home, etc. X, A. 7. 3. 13 (here we might liave had x>M'^i«
tVcI™ by 2628).

a. Such an independent optative may also follow an inllaitive in indirect
disconne (L. 13.78), an indicative after (ri (Is. 8.22), or a participle (Is. 9.6),
Aft«r BJi optative in Indirect discourse the appended clauBs may contain an in-
dicative (X.A.6.2.10, 1.17,21).

2630. An infinitive in indirect discourse may follow a sentence
whicb merely involves tbe idea of indirect statement.

i Si airadt tl% AanSBl^ra UiXtutr Ural ■ od Y^P '^i" xtpuit airtt he recommendtd
them to go to Laeedaemoa; for (be said that) he leas not himself empowered to
act X, H.2.2.12.

2631. In subordinate temporal and relative clauses the infinitive
is often used for the indicative or optative by attraction to an infini-
tive standing in the principal clause after a verb of saying. In
some cases l^ may be mentally inserted.

f^q . . . ^(iS^ ii yirfaBai irl ri oltlf rj 'AYiduni, ^^tlf^^I^rt|^ nraXafi^dHii
ri/r eipat he taid that, v>hen he arrived at the houie of Agathon, he found the
door open P. S. 174d (_= iwtiS^ tyiAuvy, mTa\<iiipirv). See also the sentence
qaoted in 1228 b, end. So dEtoi SI IXryer Sri ToXXoilt ^f^ 'Apiaiot tlrai lUpcat
iaitroO fitXrUin, oh oit it inaaxi'Sai airtO Paai\tityTOt and thty taid that Artaent
laid that there were many Peraiant betttr than hintxelf, foAo would not anditiV

594 SYNTAX OF THE COMPLEX SENTENCE li6p

hit Mng king X. A. 2. 2. 1 ( = roXXof thi tiiairroS ^\Tiain, at oiic ir dyi^x^'"
ijiav )9.). Here the relative is equivalent, in Benae, to lal roiTinn. Tlie infiniiiM
occurs even in duuaes wiUi il (T. 4. US, aiid often la HJi.), and with a>in
(Hdt.3.66).

a. The infinitive is rare in such relative clauses ns iiapliami ffs^wi it Jt
titlrai irwTinimt thtig matt a dear diBlltietion in cases ahere it in pertniod
to kill D.23.T4.

2633. For the sake of variation, a mood of the direct form may
be used in the same sentence with a mood of the indirect. The main
verb may be kept in the direct form, while the subordinate verb
becomes optative, or, less often, the subordinate verb may be retaiued
in the direct form though the main verb becomes optative.

otr-Di fXryov Srt KDpot /itr rtfrriKiw, 'A/Haibt U Tt^uyiij , . . tlti these laid tAot
Cj/rvswas dead but that Ariaevs had Jled X. A. 2. 1.3 (here we might have bnd
TtBr^toi or Ti<t>tir,r), al ti irttptrarro Bn duc irraOea itij, iW iwix't Brar tom-
viyyil* tnd then replied that he vm» not there bat vias a parasang diglant

4. 6. 10 (bere we might have Arrf or dir^oi), iS6*ii a^Xe* iltat Bn oip^jvmu
airin cT rti ^i^ir^Ifm il seemed to be clear that Utey would elect htm \f any one
»ho\ddpvi U to vote X. A. 6. 1. 26 (here we might have aJpT(»«»TO or lir friiHt*'-
{V}t l^fi . . . Sti lUjtfTor (fit fif^Stir Bsiitt iti iftpydftaSat Iciutb you said tiiot
il leas essential to learn hoa il is necessarg to conduct each process X. 0, 15. 2
(here itrl or llioi might have been used), irapi}77«\ar, ^iilj) Itirr^aur, . . .
ira*a,6tcSai gal l-wirScu, i/wlK' tr rii xapayyi\\-ji the]/ gave orders that, when thrf
had supped, they thovld rest and follovi when any one gave the command X. A.

5. 6. IB (here we might have had tirtiSir Burriruei or -lirlia rapayyflOM).
Other examples 2619. SabloncUve (in some Msa.), then optative: X A.7.T. 67.

2€33. The idea conveyed by an imperative or a hortatory (or even
deliberative) subjunctive of direct discourse may be set forth in the
infinitive by a statement as to what ougJd to be.

a. Id an infiniUTe dependent on a verb of wBl or desire (sQch as att, oom-
ffldmi, advtie, forbid, etc 1902) which does not properly take the conatniction of
indirect discourse.

(ft Si Hj the (19dT) . . . sTfiar'ntit n>r iMrSai iXXoui and some one urged
that they choose other generals X.. A. 1. 3. 14 (cp. tXarSi or IXufuw'), irrtifnt
iijfiira fidWtir he forbade any one to shoot X. C. 1. 4. 14 (cp. ii.T,StU fiaUUr^).

N. — Here ma; be placed the infinitive after in'Oitai, niil^, otoiiai in the
•enae of ioiiS I think it proper (or necessary) ; as yorra irtirax they thoigkt
that they ehould retire X.H.4,T.4 (cp. drCu^r).

b. In an infinitive dependnnt on l#ir XPV'^> (!<<')> ^^ 1^ ■ • ■ XfiV"' tXii*
irl Zvpimiaat he said thnt they ought to sail to Syraease T. 4. 69.

C. In the aimple infinitive, as rsi /lir huTToXat . . . drfriuffnr, ir alt voXXtfi
iKKuryerifiaii4JmtKt^S,\iuj>r^nrpit XaKtSaiiioriaviai-nyrtiMiitiT t ti ^riXarru . ..
iZ oSr rt ^dXorrai g-a^i \tytiT. rlieiiu iitri Tou Ripaov trSpai in airii tluy Trad
the ditpatehn, in which of much hesidfn therein written to the Laeedaemnniaiu
the substance wo* that the Wiug did not understand what they wanted ; if therrfi/rt

a635] INDIRECT DISCOURSE 595

thfi/ vtUihtd to make explicit staiementa, let tkrm seiut mrn to him in coinpan|r
mtththe Pertian T.160, Cp. T. 1.27,1 /irfK.» = ^t^™.

2634. Long sentences (and even some short complex sentences),
or a series of sentences, in indirect discourse depending on & single
verb of saying or thinking, aie uncongenial to the animated character
of Greek, which resists the formal re^laiity of Latin. Some long
speeches in indirect discourse do, however, appear, e.g. Andoc, 1, 38-
42, Thuc. 6. 49, Xen. C. 8. 1. 10-11, Plato R. 614 b {the entire Sympo-
m'nm is given in reported form). To effect variety and to ensure
clearness by relieving the strain on the leading verb, Greek has vari-
ous devices.

■. »*, (rX(Ji, rf«», Jlprro) ]8repeated,«.[7. T.7.48,

b. The indirect form la abandoned for tlie direct form, e.g. X. A. 1. 3. 14, 1.
0. 2.5. 4. 8. 10 ; often with a change, or repetition, of the verb of saying (X, A.
6.6.37, X.H.2.1.26).

c 1^ xpQh< (<«') cr iniXivai la inaerted or repeated (T. S. 49. 4).

N. 1. — Trtuuitlon from direct to Indirect discourse Is rare (X. A. 7. 1.39,
CP.X.C. 8.2.26). -

N. 2. — An interrogaUve clause alwaja depends Immediate!; on the Introduo
tory verb, hence such olausea do not occur in the course of a long aeuWnoe in
indirect dlacouise.

2639. EXAMPLES OP INDIRECT DISCOURSE

t^il -fip tlnii /lit inSpiriiSii' ol ^i For Dioclides said that he had a

\ai/plif, Ittr St toniaarSiu irofapit. xlave at Lauriiim, and that he had to

dnuTTSi ii Tp^ ^tarStti r^f &fiat paSi- fetch a pai/mfnt due him. Jiiiing early

{tin- elm Si raraiXriKi'. iril Si rufi he, millook the time and let out, and

tS rpowiXaiar toC Aiardrou lit, ipa th a» a f II m n Wh n h lea

drfpiSxcunroXXDiVi diri td3 'ihJffou MTci by h gatrioay f h Sa uarg /

ftaiworrat til rijr ipx^nTpir ■ Stlait S D nj/ ha odff f nen m

airroOi, tlct\Bi>7 iwb Ti)» Jit.ar ^oS^f* g d f m h Od n n k

affat /irraid toD nlorot rat t^i ffTii\>j h si a ad h ugh fa f h m

tip' S i aTpatTjyii iimr i xaXjtoui. ipa he b k h f n h h ad

Si ArOpiiirotis rAr /Ur ipiS/iir >uiXiirTa »a do n b( w n h d ll

TfHsiorlaLrf, IfTinu li tiaXif dr4 wirr b k n h h B a

<ai «» irSpa,, rait Si dcd tlfiH,i> sands U sav> ab k h d d
opurr Si airdv rpii Tfjc irtXiJnjv ri rp6- a d ng udnu n

»-o*»-a Tui' •■XeJffTHu' -Ji7niff««>'. talupCi- g upl f ff h s ng ujjb /

■iorpir,tli.rhpt's, ToCS" WiS^oUiirlnaTat tvufnty. On aieing tlifm in (At moon

rpS-yixa, ol^ai, Swut in intlrif efij SrTin. light he recognitfd the fares of moirt.

fiai'XoiTo 'ABt)ralur ^rai T&r irSpUr la Ihe flnit plarr, gentlemen. He has

Ta^urtlriii,StTiHiSi ni) po6\oiTo.\iytir rouroclerl this in'jul ertraordinarg lalf,

iri oit ii: tSiir Si raCr' 1-^ ixi Aaipior in iinh-r, is I Mieve. that it might

Uwa^, ml rg i/artpaUt iimiar Sti ol be in hin imirer to include among these

'Bpftal tUr wtpiatoiiniroi ■ yrHmt oSf men any Athenian h» wished, or to

596 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES [sSjo

witii SriToirarttii rUr iwSp^fTilpyop. exxhide any h« did not wUh. On *rt-

4icuv Si tit iaru j^^di r( ^Sir ■ipifiU- ing Chii he xaid he went to Lauriitvi.

torn KaTdKa/ifiirtir jcal /iifm-pa KtKtipu- and OH the dag (^fter heard OicU llv

tlUwa iKarir /irSt. — Andocldea 1.38. ttatues of Hermrs had been mtUilal"i

So he knew foTthwUh that it was th'

vmrk of these men. On hi* return (u

the eity he found that eomnfnifiN-

tra of Inguirjf had already been qp-

pointed and th/it a hujidred mina* Itad

been offered a> a reward,

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES (QUESTIONS)

2636. Questions are either direct (independent) or indirect (depend-
ent). Thus, Ti's iA(£e TxiOra; wJio said thUl ipatrw oorts lkf$e mvm /
ask who said this.

2637. Questions may have the assertive form -with the interroga-
tion expressed simply by the tone of the voice, or may be introduced
by an interrogative pronoun, adjective, adverb, or particle.

a. A quMlJoQ gains In aclmatioa &nd has its emphatic 'part clearly roark(4
If the Interrogative word is placed late in the sentence. Thus, i!fn St nXiii
ai Ti l/iar^t lurixorra ; you call pleasant, do you not, that which parttcipatet r'n
pleature t P. Pr. 361 d, ri ir(i>^> t\e-itt rirtpar iiti 4 ^"ip^' *!«' j did gov »aj
that to be hungry wot pleaiant or painful f P. G. 496 c.

2638. Yas and No Queationa (or sentence-questions) are asked by
the verb (whether a givec thing is ot is done^. Such questions are
oommoQly introduced by an interrogative particle. Pranotm-queathnu
(or word-questions) are asked by an interrogative pronoun, adjective,
or adverb (who, what, where, when, hotv).

a. A sentenoe^queatlon nay follow a word-question ; as rl SoniViF b/ur, i

itSptt ; ipi f i/ielut binr vc/it Tdf iliteiiTur yiyniHrirtir kt\. ; what do you lAfaJt

of your aJiceatora, gentlemen of the jury f Do they item to entertain the aame wii-
Hmentt with yourieltet about wrong-doenf Lye. US.

2639. Deliberative QneationB ask what Is to be done or what was to be doae.
Qaestions asking what i$ to be done in the present or future are expreeaed by tbe
dellberalivB aubjunctiTs (negative m4i 1S06), hy 3ti or xy) ^n<l the infinitive, by
the verbal in -riar with irri (1808) or by the deliberative future (1918). Qim«.
tions asking what tma to be done are expressed by xp^' CxP^') or ISn with the
InAnitive, or by the verbal in -r^v with fr. In direct questions the optative b
not used to denote what was to be done.

2640. Rhetorical Questions are questions asked (or effect uid not for infor-
mation, since the speaker knows the answer In advance and either does not wait
for, or Mmself glvex, the answer. Thus, d\X' o^fffn tbvtb' viStr; btit thft It
not so. Uouiean It be f D. 18.47, tI sir atrior tJnu traXaiipirti i iyi b^r ipA
what then do I regard as the erplanation f I wilt tell you P. A. 40 b. Such que*
lions are often introduced by /u} (2661 b). Other examples 26SS a, 2641.

iM] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES 5dT

^ Rheloricftl qaestiotui aw&ken attention and exprew vuions shftdea o( ttao-
tion ; aad ore often used in paasing to a new subject. Sucb questions are very
tare in LijrsiaH, somewhat frequent In Plato, common in Isaeaa, highly developed
ill DemOBtbeueH. The rhetorical question is much more favonred in Greek than
inEDgliBh.

DIRECT (independent) QUESTIONS

2641. Any form of statement (2153) may be used as a direct

question. The interrogative meaning may be indicated' only by the

context, or it may be expressed by placing an emphatic word first or

by the use of certain particles (2650, 2651).

iyi oC ^Tim i laaynof P. G. 446e, oA yhp i.vttfiiri,ii.y,t Sri tl^ ^ naWUrTii ; for
dill I not aTtmoer thai it teat the noblest art ? 418 e, 'BXXijKf Irra ffappdpon lait-
\t^aiur; ihall we, vsho are Grteka, be tabject to barharianM f E. fr, 719, iiyaifuBi
TiTArMfBTO'cInii do lire regard death lu anything f F. Ph. Mc. Cp. 1S3I, 1SS2.

2643. Queationa nhlch ::annot be answered b; j/et or no are introduced by
intem^atire pronouns, adjectives or adverbs (340, 340), usually without any
interrogative particle, and may have any forcu of the simple sentence.

tI etn ttXtiu Toiflffoi ; what then do I vrge you to dof X. A. 1, 4. 14, rifor , . .
iwtiTTitirSirSiTirrpiTtuiia; bote far dittaiit from here is tkt army f X. C. 6. S. 10,
ruiclrai; what (iil. hote) did you Bay t P. G. W d, rl it a.irf tl-wa; what would
g'ju have laid to him T P. JI.Z37 c.

2643. An interrogatlTe pronoun or adverb often depends on a participle and
not on tbe main verb ol the sentence. Thus, rl air roii^arroi KaTtxnporar^ari
ToC BMrSfMi>; for what act then did you condemn Evanderf I). 21 A16, ('OXiii«ut()
■t rl riraiTtiiiroi rnVrnti 'tiXJrirai' rwi a^y xp^r^" i /<"' whom what has mi^
done and how do they treat himf 23. 107. Cp. 2147 d. On rl irii0>ir see 2064 a.

2644. A subordinate clause introduced by a conjunction or a relative pro-
noun may suddenly change into a direct pronoun-question, though the constroc-
tioD of the clause remains unaltered. Thus, twnH) vcpl rlnt 'A^igtaibi SiBHuCn-oi
fioi/Xeiwev, iriar<urai •itt/ifi<ni\t6ur; when the Atheniatit art intending to deliber-
aU 0'^ about whalf) do you get up to give them advieet F. Ale. I. 106 c, r6f i
X^ Tpittrt ; irtiStr rl yirtjrat ; when Will you do what yov ought to dof in what
tvenif (lit. when what shall have happened f) D.4, 10.

a. Here belong the elliptical phrases Iva rl, iitrl (»cW. yfrtrrai, 048), In it
(m-il.ylytrai). Thus, In rl raOra \fytit; why (lit. that what sliaii happen?)
do you gay Ihisf P. A.26i,lTi gal Toxh' air^ wpoeB-i^rrt; StltI; will you givt
him tAb distinction loo in addition f for whia reason? U. 23. 214.

3645. Two questions may be condensed into one in an iuierrogatlve sentenoa
by placing an interrogative between the article and its noun. Thus, iyii tir rir
h wcIaj irAXruT ffrpanjyhw rpoaioKH raOrs itpAfytvi am I waiting for a general to
do t/iCa r From what city t X. A. 3, 1. 14,

2646- Two or more interrogative pronouns, without a connective, may occur
in the same sentence (question within a question). Thus, drd rairtiw tit rlrat

airiAt iari ytr^trai <partp6rfrom thi* It Will become Clear who is chargeable witk

698 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES [2647

wAoC D. 18. TS, iwtMr Tit riva 0i\i, winpot aoT/pau ^[Xbi -)FiY>«rai ; tcArnm'r
one per«on lovet another, which one l» the lover of whichf P. Lys. 212 a.

2647. With aBubatantlTaftnd the article or with ademonstraUve pronoun lu
iDterrogatire pronoun may be uaed u a predicate adjective. Here the hiicr-
rogatire aeatence Is equivalent to au interrvgative clause with a dependeat (rel-
ative) dame (cp. lieu).

retbr Tbt iiSSar ftivei ; what ft the word that thov hast uttered f A 652 (liL tkt
word being whatf In fuller form = rsrii itrir i fivfoi ir lurn ;), rlt 6 rMbt
atroitUrroi whttt ii thit longiitg that hat come upon them f S.Vti.0Ol, svr««
rlt . . . uptBtT; itiAo i* (Ail man who holds saayf S.U.C.68, tIkii toObS' tUapw;
who are theee I leef G. Or. 1S4T, itd o'a^lar nvd toCtd tA fliofw Itxn'^'- rolar i^
ffo^far TuArtif ; thavka to a kind of viiadom I obtained (AiJt name. ( 7^nJt< tu)
thit wiadom being whatf (that U, loAat is lAii viigdomf) P. A. 20d.

2648. rlt, rl, roioT referring to something mentioned before may take the
article ; as A. rdirxei Si Baufwjrr6r, B. ri rl; A, A strange thing ia happening
tohim. B. {The) whatf Ar.Pax69rt, A. rO, Si, itiin ^1,, . . . iu>i^e» Kftm^.
B. ri woia ; A. Now at last xee are able to decide those matters. B. (7^) what
maitersf P. Phae.277a.

2649. rlt, Tsbt as adjective pronouns, and rut etc., when followed by oi, have
the force of an affirmative assertion. Thus, vcfout Xiytin otx irtfKiirt^ur ; what
argument* did we not expend f 1.6.61 (=T(tiTai), rl latir otxl ; = ^S' Kot&t in
SUT d.

QUBBTI0N8 INTRODUCED BY INTKRROOATIVS PARTICLES

2650. ^ and ipa introduce questions asking merely for informa-
tion and imply nothing as to the answer expected (neither yea nor wo).

1j rterriitr OlSlrou war^ip ; Is Oedipus' father really deai f S. O. T. M-3, J) yjym
(deUb.SUbj.)i shall I tell you f X.C.8.4.10, f koI Dtim rSinri^Mlur faBa; vere
Dou really one of the rich men when you were at homef 8.3.3(1.

i.fi' ilidiiArru; am I a prophet? S.Ant. 1212, Ip' 'OSuaatun kK6v, out U &«
that I am listening to Odysseus f 8. 1'ii. 976, ipa McX4fff»> ar 4fur IioXcx'vh' i
will he really be willing to talk with usf P. G. 447 b.

a. spa is from i) + ipa. 4 is cliie9; poetic. I^Ioiner uses Ij, not ipa. Botb
particles denote interest on the part of tlie questioner (often ^realtff aurtlyf).

2651. oi, ap' oi, oixovv expect the answer yes (nonne), ^ij, apa fi-7,
fiMv (= fi-i] otv) expect the answer no (num).

a. aix o'vruit l\n" I did you not say sr> f P. H.. 33i h (i.e. • I think you did.
did you 1101?'), op' aix IpaitriSr; fa not this insolfnce f S.O.C.88.1,o£i<wr . . .
«t m iatolri 0ov\e6treai ; do Ihey not then teein to yon to plan well t X. C. 7. 1. 8.
oKmCr Hi expects the answer no.

b. It'll Ti Kiirepo- irriWtii; no finii news, I hope? P, Pr.310h, opn ^i,
olcX'"*""" ; surely tpe are not ashamed, are we? (nr ran it be that toe «Aou?tl
heoAamedt) X. 0.4. 4. hIj d«.pi«,Maii am / no( (oannoer? P. R. 337b, ^i,. -ri
« UiHiT surely he has not wronged you. has he f (or can (( be that, eu:. )
P. Pr.SlOd. p^rab expects the answer jres.

«657] INTEEROGATIVE BKNTENXES 599

c. liSrr 1b confined to ActJc. Since the fact of Eta oomposiUoQ wu Imt, we
find (tiStoSf (A.Ch, 17T) andftirjiii (1*. LyH.aoSe).

d. o6 after ^4 or ifia fit) belongs to a single word, not to the wnl^nce
(I*. HeD. 8tic, Ly8.21^d). Un /i^ or a4 o^ with tbe subjunctive in half-qaes-
tiuna, see 1801.

«. apa placed before oi or ^i) gives greater diatinctneaa to the question, ai
queallons aek conceroijig factji ; (ii} questiime imply uncertainty or even appre-
hension, but Bomellmes are a^ked merely for eSucL

t of wov; tB tI tov ; 06 t-^ ; ai !i) tm niean tureiy it ia not to f Here tbe
negative belongs to ttie sentence.

2632. &XXo T\ i} ; is it anything pint than f and &XXo ti 1 Is it not f are used
as direct interrogatives. Thus, lX\o n 4 oiSir nuiXwi ^aptint ; thr.re'» nothing to
hinder out patting, is there f (lit. ia there angtkinri eUe the case than this that
nothing prirveatg, etc.) X. A. i. 7. 6, iWe n ^iXtiroi iiri fciSr ; (» ii not loved by
the godtt V. Euth. lOd. Cp. ri 74p «XXe fl n-aswlffdi iviiti^m itrX.; /r.r wAirf
other risk mill i/ou ran than that of shnioliig, etc P ( = /(jr trAatefsB i«if/ you do
than that you will very likely vhow f) X. M. a. 3. IT.

2653. ttra and lirivTa (more emphatic nfira, xiwtira) introduce questions
eipressing surprise, Indignation, irony, etc. ; and often indicate a contrast
between what a person has or has not done auci what Is or was to be expected of
him. Thus, tha r At 0^ tteit tw-^tipit /it j then why did you not rouse me at
onr.et P.Cr.43b.

2654. iM<& (&XX* Ij) introduces a question opposed to an expressed or Implied
thought of the speaker (especially an objection). Thus, nrcvr rl «-( lol tw'ti lut

nix 'SUovf IratBr; dW ikr-iroiir; dXU rtpl raiSiK^t ^lax^fKioi ; dXU lufiur
irapifntaa ; did I aslc antjthiag of you and strike you when you viould not give
it to mf.t Or Hid I demand anything hack f Or aas I quarreling about an offject
of afferiU-a ? Or jeas I the worse for liquor and did 1 treat you with drunken
vinlenre f X. A. .'>. 8. 4, dXX' 4, ri \ty6/uiior, taririr iofrriji l^n/itr ; but have Vie
arrifed, at the pnieerb says, late for a featt f P.G. 447 a. Cp. 2786,

2655. SJ sometimes introducPs a suppressed thought, as an objection. Thus,
tiwi (ui. ei Si ii) ri rift riXir iptlr ifaSbr irtriifijjcai ; tell me, (fiat) vihat good,

pray, have you done the Slate f ]>. 6. 70.

DIRECT ALTERNATIVE QUESTIONS

2656. Direct alternative questions are usually introduced by
vcrepav (■nvrtpa.) . . yj u-hether , . or (Lat. utritm . . . an).

w6TtpBr S4Spiif 1l ot; hat he done it or not f 71,2.1.79. wiripiwii tu, hltxln/,
r^t *'iX<ut ixSpitfliiiir elnu ^^; shall I say, AeiKhlnes, that you are the. enemy of
the State or mine? 18. 124 (nt ^J = *«, 18()5c), wirepa S' vyet . . . iiuintw
ilrm air rip ir^ iya$f ras Tlfioiplit roidvBai f) sir r% trp ilidf ; dn you think that
it i> better to inflict the proper punishropnlt in your own tntfrett or to your own
lonf X.C..1. 1.15.

36S7. If often stands ainne without wirepai (as an williont utrum). Thus,
rXvf rj)« tf/ninr' 4 «v ; did he break the peace or not f U. 16. 71, 4* x^if/iara reXXA

600 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES [»asl

'xPi '?' irXouTttr 4 ■'''T*'' T««f ; ^he kaa great iwnltA, do you let Mm kerp et
being rich or do you makf Mm poor t X, C. 3. 1. 12. So when tha flrat questruii
ezpreasea ancertalnty on the part of the queationer ; as dXXA rlt «« Siiff'''" '■
4 ah-ii ZuKpilriri j but vsho told yon the afory f (was It some one else) or vxt> U
SoeraUi Mmielf ? P. S. 1 73 a. Cp. 28tl0.

269S. An altematlve question may follow upon a simple direct (or indireci)

question. Thus, r6Str r\t»' iypi Ki\iti9a ; Ij r> tari rp^ftr f ^^iJIwi aXdXi)>A ;
uAence do ye mif over the watery ways f Or it it perchanet on sotne enterpnst
or l>y tcay o/raeh adeenture that ye rove f i 252. Cp.E 8S (cited in 2660).

3659. irircpgr (wirifHi) may Htand alone when the second member of the
question Is implicit in another sentence. Thus, irro^arc ii idtnetra, r(ra rpi^a-
crtp tx^""^^ ^' rpofftotfiida taidom If irpiHrBrv ytwiadoA. rttrtpor Sn ipxo/trr r ' ' >
dW Srt tiiatiioriaTtfioi SoKodiitr rir ^ wptyrtpat elrai ; and Consider this too : whnt
pretence ahovld tee have for alloviing ovraelves to beeomt leM deierving than km-
toforel I* it betauae v>e are ruiera t Or is it becante we seem to be more pros-
perous than before f X. C. T. 5. 83.

2660. rln-tpor (rirtpa) was originally the matei ot Tirtpot wMeh of the tW"f
placed in front of a double question and later made a part of the first question.
Thus, iparQ r6Ttpor 0iXci 1) luvti at I ask mhlch of the two (Is true) : dot* he
love or does he hate you? Cp. TuMS'^r S' ait iw 7»(qi roTipoiai iirrtli), Ifi /trri
Tfn&wffir AfiiMoi 4 Itrr' 'Axawii you Could not tell on ichtch itde T)/didet teat,
tehelher he consorted with Trojans or Viith Aehaeans E 85, r(«i taTipfar, wbrtfi
'BXX^Hi, nix'i'i < "■■>" *i^ • "Ac began the battle — was it the Greeks or my tout
A. Pere. 361, cp. X. C. 1. 3. 2.

2661. 4 (*i^) ■ ■ ■ h Cp). or 9 (^) alone, occnn in Homer, who does not

use rirtpor. Thoa, Ij ^ n IS/ur hi ^pfffff, %t cal oitl ; do we knov) augM fa

heart, or do we not f S 632, ^titoiuu 1, frufuv iptu ; shall I speak falsehood or ih'
truth f K 634.

a. All the ancient grammartanB attest the accentantlon of these particle* a>
given above. Modern editors often adopt other aecentJi. iff and f c are deriTeil
from 'i-fi and il-ft (whence 4 and 4). With this enclitic fl, cp. Lat. -m.

MOODS IN DIRBCT QU88TIONS

3663. The luoods used in direct questions are the same as those
used in statements.

L Indicative (examples in 2642) : aometimea In a past tease with iw, as rSt ti
rirra ipi>^ur it roil riipiryovi; but vihg should all men enoy despotic ntltrsF

X. Hi. 1.9, iI Tif Ita wifuiw . . , iiaXtl^euw . . . , np' tiK it irftrtlrxiT' a^iriw; if any

one sAouEd cancel a single late . . ., would you not have ptit him to deatkf l.yc.
66. On Tf o6 or ri elr at with the aorisl, see 1936.

b. SubjunUlee : in deliberaUre questions (268Q). On the antlolpaUiry sub-
Janctlre in t( riidu, see 1811.

c. ppfaiive (poi«ntial),asTff #fidn(»d>i uAoeanMIf B. I.T.6TT. With-
otttlrthisoptativeisnure.UTliXfrM; tsAocantei;? A.Ch.B96. Cp, 10X1 a.

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES

INDIEBCT (dBPEHDENT) QUESTIONS

2663. Indiieot questions are intToduced by interrogative pro*
nouns, adjectives, and adverbs, indefinite relative pronouns and ad-
verbs (340, 346), or by certain interrogative particles (2671, 2676).

3664. The interrogatives of the direct question may be retained
io an indirect question. But it is more common to use the indefinite
relatives which (in interrogative sentences) aie employed only in
indirect questions.

^tirvt airtit rlnti tlm Ihej/ atked them tehn Ihey xnere X. A. 4.G. 10 (^rfm
trrd;), ipiirur 6 n iarl tJ rpayiia I Oaked whnt the matter Tea* 6.7.23 (= t(
'"• ;X 4P'>'Ta sh-jr rSaor xpturio' Ix" ^^ (Mked him hov> much monej) he had
7. 8. 1 (= xrfffBrlxnii), iJpiiTMi.a4T4»T4 tTpdrtu/ia 6w6iroii tit) they aiked him hoiB
large (A« armj/ waa 4. 4. 17 (_ = riiror tinl;), iropwr loi TpiwQira irl Xi^. riri
Kora^tiytt being in doabt whither he should tarn, he fled to a Mil X. C. 3. 1 . 4
(=■■« Tpiirtiifiati), ^iii S#oMtli5iroi aTpaTtitiixii* but no one knew where theg
vitre going to march T. &. 54 (=ra?irTpaTt6aiur]).

2665. The nae of the direct interrogatiTes is a relic of origlrial juxtapoejtion,
e.g. tlwt fui, roUt ri n»i(fcit tMfitian clraL ; tell me, What »ort of a thing do pou
think holinese it r X. M.4.e. 2. The interrogative force of the indefinite rela-
tives is derived, not from any interrogative idea in these words, bat from tbe
connection in vbich they stand.

2666. An indirect interrogaUve is often used in the same sentence after a
direct interrogative. Thus, eit oMa olfr' iwi rolou it Tix*" '^' S*"" *' ■"'
^MSyw* ito^Oyoi oBt' th wator it mires droipaii) cSS' Sriin it tit 'x"!**' X^P^'

irorral^ I Ao not know With whaZ twiftnesa of foot nor by fleeing to what quar-
ter a man might escape nor into ui?iat darkaeit he might run awaj/ nor how he
cnuld leithdraw into any ttronghold X. A.2, 5. 7. The direct form precedes less
often, aaaiyip abrBinpal aoulnceuir tipiiar 4 vdior JtJnuov \iytii for I do not per-
cfiee tehat you mean bj/ ' conformable to law ' or what j/ou mean by 'jatt ' X. M.
4.4.ia

2667. Two interrogativea mftf occur in the same sentence without a con-
nective i as vOt tlitr iraia irofoH Bvrari mxruKir ; hoa doea he know what letters

are able to unite wilh whatf P. Soph. 25S a. Cp. 2646.

266S. Afterverbaof aayfnif, itnatefnj7, ateing, making known, perceiving, etc.
(but not after verbs of atking) tbe simple relatives are found where the indefl'
nite relatives (or the interrogatives) might stand in an indirect qneHtion. Where
St is so used, it has the force of ttot (cp. qualia in such questions) ; and rarely
follows a negative clause, because verta denoting lack of knowledge are allied in
meaning to verba of atking. The usual forms are e.g. olSd it it tl and oi* oIM
ft Srm tl. But WB find olSi at larittl and oit atti at «i tl. ThttS, tiicwti . . . tlxAr
ff 4r Ae tends . . . telling who he wot X. C. 6. 1. 46 (here ^r represents the point
of view o( the terfter), MXtmi . . . icilfai flt rft) he ordtred him to Acpluin who
he Wit D,62. 1, |t4roT( inliii It (I mavett thou nener come to know who thou

.;lc

602 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES [iMg

art S. 0. T. 1066, V$' 4>i^<> '*''> I'V^' ; <fo vou tee hoa many there are of lat
1'.H.827 c. So with the adverbs lr»a, oD, f, in, SBtn ae t^c Mir f^paftr g ifir
he told witere the road uku X. A. 4. 6, 34. In some cases these senteooes m&y be
Qxclanutor; (208S).

A. That the simple relatiTes are never thus used after rerbe of cuking indi-
cates that such clauses are not true indirect questions (as in Iiatin), and that
the pronouns have their value as relativei'. But some scholars allow an iDdireci
question after all these words except St ; and others admit no such limitatirm.

b. Onlf In late Greek are the pronouns or adverbs of the indirect form used
In direct questions.

C. Arwt is used occasionally (often in poetry) in the sense of in. Thnx, fiit
pat ^pd^' Srait o6ic tt naxii tell me not that (lit. hov) thou art not vile S. O. T. bti.

d. The context must sometimes determine whether a sentence ia an indirect
question or a relative clause. Thus, without the context, oii cl:i(af Sni irovnat
(X. H. 3. 5. 10) might mean thej/ did not know to wAom (= j^yriouF w/At rlnt) to
revolt or Ibey had no allies to xphofa ( = rpit avi) to revolt. But the present or
aoriat optative in relative final clauses ia rare ; cp. 2564 c.

2669. An indirect question may depend (especially in poetry) on an ido
involved in the principal verb ; or may depend on a verb to be supplied. ThuEi
AffTe /i' iiStmt tI 4>]fi to that I am in tranail to know thy meaning S. Aj. TM, Art-
rfpm oBw tot . . . ipiatti la vihatever way it pleates yoit (>eil. I/Hbii at ixaiiaitu)
F. R. 348 b.

2670. The indetlnite relative Is commonly used when a question is repeated
by the respondent before his reply. Here yoa ask f ia supplied in thongbi.
"nius, A. dXXdt rliydpcl; B. JliTTit i waMrtii xpv'tIis A. But who are yoa, prij/t
B, Who am I f an honeet burghpr At. A<;ii.5IH,wi^t Sii; ipitiru lyii. h-wi; ^o
how are j/ouf I will say ; Hoa am If he will tag Hippocrates 1,292 c

2671. Simple indirect questions are introduced by d vihetker, less
often by ipo,

ipvr^TTtt tl Xn^'^a' *'"<' aiking uAetAer thvy are jiiratet T. 1. 6, roiira* oUV
tl fSf Kuptl ; dost thou know whether he U alive i S. Ph. 444, liptTo sMr *l ^XqMf
he aaked him tekether he had been atnck X. C. 8. 3. 30 (= t^ijeipi), ^j^ ti
Ttlttu Siarotrar i)i-iw I am a/raid (about the question) viA«tA«r /can persuade mjr
mislrett E, Med. 184 (2234), ISapxy ap' aiiruaX ylytrTai irdrra let ui aee whtther
everything it th-at produced P. Pb. 70 d. With the deliberative subjunctive :
irartfaiiinu Krirffi^wrroi tl naX^ffj hiyioaBinir whtn Ctetiphon was atking if ht
was to call DemotChenea Aea. S. 20i (=:(aUrru;),

a. (/ has an affirmative force (whether) or a negative force (whrther . . ,
not). The latter is seen e.g. after verbs expressing uncertainty or doabt, as
after aix olja. Thus, tt iiir ii] jliaio rsi^iru, ait elSa I don't know Vlhether 1
shall do whai is right X. A. 1.3. 6 (i.e. I may possibly not do what is lif^f).
The assumption is affirmative In ri /triiimTii . . . o6k oIJ' tl Xpurdfrgi roirv^ ti
I don't know whether J must »ot give the cvps to Chryaanta* here X. C. 8. 4. 16
(i.e. I think I shall give tliem).

b. The Interrogative use of ti is derived from the conditional meaning if, is

INTERROGATIVE SESTENCES 608

e vihtther thou will *am m« A S8
I save me, Lell me so ').

2672. idr rarely, If ever, means lehethrr, even after verbs of rxamtntng, con-
titlering {nKorH ittrfid/t^K, taanpii), where iu use is bent explained by 2364.
In form Bucii conditional sentences often approach closely lo indirect qneMlons.
Thus, cp. athf'iLi . . . ia.t ipa nal rol vurSarp itf/i iial riiniidfr i/(in CBM that,
on the chance that) you loo agree with me (I', I'll. 04 u) with m^wtft tl ipt
ravTs . . . rcroi^tiiTir el ftip^apoi eontidrr vihrther the barhariant have (Dot)
done this XA. 3.2. 22. Cp, dnjudn^nrireiu iir iXiiB^ Kiyu to recall to your
recollection if I gpeak the truth And. 1 . 37.

m. Scime bcIjoUts inalDtain that, In Greek, if nas at an eatly period confused
witb lehether in such sentences as ttiu 7^ ii Zvdprirr . . . riaror mwifunf
Torpit <pl\au, Ijr rov duoto-w strictly for I viU go to Sparl'i to inquire about At
return of my dear father, in the hope that I may hear of it p Sia. When the con-
ditional clause naa attached to irtM^ium, 4> ac'iuired (it U clnlmed) the force cf
tahelher. Cp. vx"o riuatiUKt . . . tt (v.l. if) ran fr' tli)i he had gone to inquire
tehrthfryou meretlill living * 415. Cp. German ob, once meaning iT, note tchether.

2673. Homer has 1j». it m, of k* with the subjunctire after verbs of knoalng.,
teeing, saying (but not after verbs of asking). Such caHea belong under 2364 b.

2674. ^1} is sometimes translated by whether after verba of fear and caution ,'
but such dependent clauses nlth /14 are not indirect questions (2221 a). After
verba of s^ing, eoatidering and the like (i^u, hroai)ia.t, ir^iiauiuu, atorli) ;i4
is properly a conjanction and not the interrogative particle. In such clauses
tliere is an idea of purpose or desire to prevent something or a notion of fear
that something is or mag be done. Thus, ^fwrriftd /lii ipdrurToi g fwi elySr I am
foiaidering whether it it not best for me to be ait'nt X. M. 4. 2.39, ipOiur n^i
SUlii ttiral ri \iynr let US See whether Nieias is if the opinion that he it taying
tomelhing important P. Lach, 196 c. That /t^i does not properly mean wftetAer
not (indirect qnestion) is clear from the fact that, in these clauses, it is not used
of Bomething that is hi^)ed for. Cp. 2670 b.

INDIRBCT ALTBRNATtve QUESTIONS

2675. Indirect alternative qvieationa are iiiti-utluced by the parti-
cles signifying ichelhei
ctre, cl . . . ij, cl . . . <

A. «4Tip«v (r^Tfpa) . . . ff. Thus, Siripiiri rir KGpor Torpor |9o£\»TO fiirta 4
irUreu she asked Cyrus whether h« wanted to stay or go away X.C.I. 3.16,
Sav/idtU'virtpa. wt KparHr ^offtXcilt alrtt ri JhrXa 4 ^ ''^ ^>X£dr SSpa I tconder
whether the king asks for our arms at a conqueror or as gifts on the plea of
fiiendthip X. A. 2. I. 10.

N. — r&Ttfer . . , H may denote tbat the second alternative is more impor-
tant tbttn the Brst. wirtper is omitted when tlie Introductory clause contains
theadjec^ve n^epoi (X.C.I. 3.2),

b. (In . . . An gives equal value to each alternative. Thus, t^v *ici<l'i»
rtKifuea are it^\liir ttr* pXd^qr rapixe< tet us make (Ae inquiry whether it pro-
duces 6en<|U or tt^ury P. Pbae. 237 d.

604 KTERROGATIVE SENTENCES [aM

N. 1. ^In Homer tfrc . . . iht (ifn . . . drt) almost alwkya reUiiu die
meaning e£tA«r . . . or (A 66).

N. 2. — The flret an is rarely omitted in proRp, ns r6\ii ttrt atural t<ki a
Slate or eertatn indtvidvaU P. L. 884 a; more (jflen in poetry, aa UydwivcTt'
tfiyBUFLt by KonU or deeii$ 8.0.T,617.

c. it ... ^ indicates tliat the aecond altematiTe Is preferable or more
probable. TliUB, i^fx^i d aAT-aif rari drJ^m rwiriaira toit loOai ul driowtr, f
Ell Ta?i IXXoij laaiyrt trrarSal he asked whether he vxu making a truce merell

with the individual men who toere coming and going or whether the truce would
be Kith the rest ai aell X.A. 2. 3.7.

d. )t . . . )tr« ia like tlrt . . . tin. Thos, il S' It' UtIw f/^ux<>i 7vr4 (Tt'
oBr aXu\(«, lit^nai peuXalfuS' tr we ghoiM like to know whether the tadg i» itlU
alive or dead E. Ale. 140.

e. ^ Ci|l) . . , )i (4i) occura in Homer, as 8«p' ii tlSH Iji riaw iixBtrm If «1
rarpinbt iam {<i»i that I may know icell whether thoa art tiewlj/ a visilor or
art aetually art ancettral guest-friend a, 175. Cp. 2061. 1^ . . . 4i Is doubtful in
Attic.

THE NSQATIVES IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS

2676. The negative of the direcb form is usually preserved in
indirect questions.

ttaoiuu . , . wiripor i tx"' ^^^ '^ tMal^tur 4<rrlr 4 tiSaiiiar Z fhall knoa
whether its possessor is happy or not V. H. 3a4 c, oiic oU' foui ipd 7-o5to col M *"
I know not how Inmto say this and not to say it E.I. A. 643 (=iSi^Ji ♦£;)■

«. Indirect single questions introduced b; Interrogative pronotuis, adjectivM,
and adverbs, uauallj have oi.

b. fiii appeaiB after verbs of seeing, considering and the like (<riM«'^ ipS,
irroQvftai, irSuimafuu) when there is an idea of purpose or dealre to preveDt aome-
tliing. Tliua, Apart . . . irif Tpjiry Kd\XtirTa ditiiwtiaSt ah'oiit col /ti/Tf Kars^parf-
(TaiTit iipapKTiH \i]il>B-^ta8t iirX. consider how you may best defend yovrtelves and
may neither be canght off your guard through eoidempt, eto. T. 6. S3. So also
with the potential optative with dv ; asr( oit oi SKairBBiitr rdt ar OibrUt fi)| iiaiia^
riroifur; mhy then do we not consider how xce may avoid mistaking them f X.M.
3. 1.10. Indirect questions wlih >ti) thus belong under >ii) with verbs of fear and
apprehension, where «i4 ^ the negative of the will. Cp. 26T4.

c Indirect questions introduced by ti have oi or fi)(. Thua, Jf/wro rii. t^par
tl aix adrxitivii^e he asked the people whether they were not ashamed Aes. 1.84,
ttptri in ... il III) iJiLini)uLt he asked nte whether I did not remember 2. 36.

d. In relative clauses joined by lafand standing in an indirect question (what
. . . and what not}, *i4 must be used when the verb is to be supplied with the
second clause ; but when the verb is repeated, either ii'i,oi oi if the antecedent
isdednlte, may be used. Thus, dioryifriiami/air a rt fliinn-ai col a /t^ they distin~

guish betitieen what they can do and what they cannot X. M. 4, 2. 25, oIvAa . . .
iriffoi Tf ipfaupol IkhwI iliri tal iifa-oi »i)S tlait you know how many garrisons are
adrantageoiisly situated and how many are not 3. 0, 10. The antecedent U
definite in ATriSti^tf oiq xf*^ S^fitjyoptif tal attt oi Sfi \^tiv fp r^ S^ffup he sho^P^l
who must speak in the assembly and who muitnot ^eak b^ore the people Aes. 1. 27.

a«77] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES 605

fl. Afl Qie second member of an aJternatiTe qaeatlon Introduced by d, or not
ti either 4 <>' or 4 m4- Thus, atowaiitr tl i/ur wpixti 1) eS let vt consider
whether U ia proper for u» or not V. K. 451 d, rGr t^Set I \iy«t ■ il Si i.\rfii, i
fi4i rnpiffa/iM iiaBiit nuvi I have madt out lehat you mean ; and I mill fry to make
out whether it i» true or not 8S0 a.

I. A shift from /di to oA in sequent alt«mSitive Indirect questions appents to
be due to the desire to altoln variety. Thus, ofi Sti hiSt ix raw roC naTiftipov
Myur To^ ri)iinn jHTO/iarAf Kir, tt laXOt tiuw wirriu <} ^i), dXX' ix Ti3^ riii»>' ''o^

not ttartfrom the pleat of the acriuer to leant whrlheryovr latoa have been estab-
lished vrett or not, but j/oa miut start from the lawr to learn whether his ptras set
forth tile ease fairly and legally or not AnL 5. 14. Cp. Ant. 6. 2, In. 8. t), D. 20.
83. Some Kholare bold tbat a£ here lays stress on a negatirs fact or on some-
thing conceived as a negnlive fact, and that n^ puts the question ahetiacUj as a
mere conception.

HOODS IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS

2677, The moods and tenses of indirect queetdons follow the same
mlea aa govern olauses ia indirect diacourse. The person may be
changed.

After primary tenses, the mood and tense of the direct queatioa
are retained (indicative, past indicative with in, dehberative sub-
junctive, potential optative with Sv).

After secondary tenses, the mood and tense of the direct form
may be retained or the optative may be used instead. The latter
is more common. But a past indicative with ■!>■ always remains
unchanged.

a. DlTKt Poim Betained. — roWitu timirii rl Siafpipu fuaat i/mea he often
eonttdered ini^at respect tgnoranre differed from madness X. M. 1.2.60, •^roptire
TI iro(it«'(i As was uncertain tehat to do X. A. 7. 3, 29 (= ri imi^iru, deliberative
future, 1916], 4ptu>,i6arro cTri taraicaiffuirir . . . itrt n tWo xfi^""^' <A<V deli^^-
trated whether they should bum them or dispose of them in some other manner
T.2,4(=<«Ta«ul(rwM", xPT"4*«ft»i)i flpiirifffi . . . loC oi- tSot np6(int he asked
%ehere he could see Proxenus X. A. 2. 4, IG ( = tdC ar aoi/u ;).

b. Optative ; tlpern tt rit 4^6 rf<r ro^tirtpot he asked whether any one was wiser
than I P. A. 21 a(= Arrf ;), i ti St xon(ffDi oJ a«o-ijfi^« he did not announce pufr-
ticly what he was going to do X. A. 2. 1. 23 C=t( m-oiVu;), rir fcii" tw-npilmar tl
rapaSoirr Ko^rtflnii ri/r iriXtr they questioned the god whether th^ should surren-
der the city to the Corinthians T. 1.26 (=ira^u^>!)' Here r^pataUr might
represent the aorist indicative, but that tense is usually retained to avoid con-
fusion (exceptionally iJpifrrS ti iriBoat X. C. 2. 3. 10 ; cp. X. A. B. 3. 26, D. 60.
65). An imperfect relatively anterior to the time of the main verb is retained
in D. 30.19.

C. A dubltatjve subjunctive In an indirect question, when dependent on an
optative, may be attracted into tlie optative ; as IVrit . . . Sri o6k Iv fxeit
)it\eii*lri XPV^ aauri} you were saying that if you went out you would not know
what to do with yowBtlf P. Cr. Kt i_=Tl xi>uv«u 'fuvTy;).

606 EXCLAMATORY SENTENCES [9678

d. Homer hu tlie opUtlTe tor tbe Indicative due to Indirect disconnie only in
iodirect qnestionB ; ae ttporro r(t a-q ical itidtr t\8<n they atked who he wu and
whence he had come /> SOB. See 2624 c.

3678. After a Becond«7 tenae tbe mood of a direct question may be
ret^ned (usnallj for Ttvidnesa) In the same sentence wltli tile mood of
on indirect question (op. 263-i). Thus, iliaitt ^aar Bav/iiltir Swot rtrri Tptinrrai
oi'EWqrct r«X rl ir ty Ixoitr they teemed to 6e wondering lo what direction the
Oreek$ would turn and what thfy had In mind X, A. 8. 6. 13, llptTQ t rt dviitiin
Kol i-wiaai alrrSif rtinirtt he atked what it wof that he wa* attottUhed at and ham
many 0/ them were dead T.S. 113 ( = Ti Aiu/idr«i, irio-m rrf™rir;)-

I.. In some cases tbere is no apparent reason (apart from desire for variety)
lor tills use of the Indicative and optative in tbe same sentence. Sometimes the
Indicative may ask for a statement of fact, the optative request au opinion of the
person questioned.

2679. Parallel to 2624 are coses like iSti Srav Ijckts 4 ^urreX^ As knew
where the letter had been put X.C.2.2.9.

ANSWEB8 TO TES AND IfO QUESTIONS
aeeo. Tea and No questions may be answered in vajjoos ways, e.^. .-

a. By repeating the verb or another emphatic word with or without one or
mora confirmative advertis. Thus, ^tf' '<> ii^i*<i> 'aXfriiv tlm, it ri twainU, 4
tr tyii \ ^id yip ett do you aeitrt that the eiliten whom you approve U brttrr
than the one I approve t Jdo sag/ «> X. M. 4. 6. U, al^tf' tir i \ify,i v<u . . . 9i\a;
ait alia doet thou know lehat I fain would tell thee f No. E. Hec. 099.

b. By ^li, l'7iO'>i ■>■)■ '7''t o^ f'yy't sometimes with H) Ala or /lA Ata,

C Tee may be expressed by rat, vnl /ti rit &la, iiiXiam, ipiiijJ, rin ft, rdrv
flit aSr, (i ft, (irri ratha, limr o^rwt, dXififi X^cit, dXijMsTaTa, 6pSut 71, ta/uii, etc.

JNo may be expressed by oP, ow Ivnr, od 3^a, ai fiA Ain, aUa/iut, 06 ip^nu, fii
yip, ftTa, ^tisri. yt, etc.

d. In the f<am of a question: W ^ijv; rlyAp; dXU rl; ruif ; wittr; rSn yipo(;

EXCUMATORY SENTENCES

2681. Direct (independent) exclamatory sentences with a verb
expressed (or easily supplied) are formed

2682. (I) By the relative pronouns olw, Sa^, or by the relative
adverb Ak in esclamations of wonder. The sentences introduced by
these words are commonly associated with vocatives or iuteijectdoos.
Cp. 340.

atarouti, S Iraipt what mre you about, myfiiertdt P.Euth. l^c, <} ^CKet . . . ,
•tit* Tfirwu<\i)r 0ttl Ifyayot it riSt iul;ia friende. Buck eport the godt have brvuifht
into thte haute t 0-37, Sai)r Ix^t riir Sim/ur how great your poteer it f Ar.PI.7-t8,
A rdwrt. Sea rpiy/tara txtit oh grandfather, how much trouble, yon have ! X. C
1.3. 4, iS ^IXrud' AIuo', Ai '' (irifui^i TaTiffi, oh dearrat Hnetnon, how thy fatkrr
intulu thee I S. Ant ST2, in do-riui 6 itffpuwat houi charming the man u .'
P. Ph. lied.

issel EXCLAMATORY SENTENCES 607

a. ExclMoatory in ma; be tiie relative in; bnt If ft U the demoratntlTS in,
It meaoa properly nnt hoie but to. Op. 299S.

b. Double otot (eiclai nation within an pzclamntion) marks a atroDg contnK
(cp. 2646) in direct and indirect exclamations. Thus, ota irpii ofur iripOp
rivx" what I tvffer and at the handu of %ehat men / S. Anu M2, dri e&t . . ,
aix^OMrn roS rpiirav it sSr Tt\turi)t tal raxurhTifTa i^itart from %ehal botattng

at fine thrj/ had come to what a humiliating end T.7.75. iS'iple obt In Qorglu^
Helen 10.

c. Cp. 2617 for each Bentencee aa olai'lx'''^' ''')>'' (#wrat vikat a viper U
thU tBomaa uihom fAou Afiit begnttta ! E. Ion 1262.

d. «l|i' ■■ ^ common In eipre'^lons of imjialience, anger, pity, grief, or fear;
aa oC^' Ht ■srs'ytXf I ah lae, hi'W j/itu mock me I Ar. Nub. 1*2.18, oT^' wi (owni iifik
TJ)' Slit)* iitlr ah me., hnw thou teemrtt all too 'ate to *fe the right I 8. Ant. 1270,
tltC in tiioita ah me. how I fear I Ar, Fax 173.

2683. (II) By the infinitive (2015, 2036).

2684. Direct exclamationa without a verb may be expressed by
the vocative or uumiDative (1288) or by the genitive of cause (1407).

2685. Indirect (dependent) exclamations form subordinate clauBes
in sentences which, taken as a whole, are statements (2575. 4). Th^
are introduced by otos, ovtn, otm, us, oT, mu The negative is oii. It
is often dif&cnlt to distinguish between indirect exclamations and
indirect questions introduced by olos or ooof. But observe that
dependent exclamations are not introduced by the direct interroga-
tives miiK, voaoi, Twt, etc., noT by the indefinite relatives nroibt,
oa-MTOE, ixiov, etc., both of which classes of words may stand in
indirect questions.

a. jroMf In L. 80. 4 and Awirn In P. 0. 522 a are aospected,
b- The Introductory verb Is aometimea omitted ; aa ^ lu'^P'I'TaTat, W traiUu-
ttr oh the raecal I (la tlilnli) where he cr^ in I Ar, Veap. 188,

26a6L Dependent exclamatory clauses follow, as regards mood
and tense, the same rules as govern indirect questions (2677). An
original indicative remains unchanged after primary tenses of verbs
followed by a finite mood, but may become optative aft«r secondary
tenses on the principle of indirect discourse.

a. Indicative : etat Iripa \iytit ir nwSirtf ctm wtiat a noble man lr°'> "'If is
in danger ! V, Th. 142 b, axlnrtt . . . ti' j|hi toD etoS ^arrtitAara judge to vihat
the oraclet of the god have come R. O. T. 053 (cp. H Star iiamCiAara, fr' irri 946),
Tit o6k oWir 4i atvr aaiiifwpiir lit 5irt)r lUaifiorlir KariirTtfaar ; mho does not know
into tehat good forluue theg came and after what mffertiig^ t 1.6. 42, tw^vtmiuMm
6aanc\av<i . . . rtrdrrAXarro reflecting on hoie long a voyage they Were on the
point of being gent T. 6.30, imYiBirrit old rt rirxovtir Irri r Ht 'Arirvplut isl
thi wSw Tiffmfi) i Apx»' a^S>r reflecting what they loere aiiffeTing at the handt of
the AmfriaoM and that their ruler was now dead X. C. 4. 2. 3.

b. Optative : AwStiiMtni airHr itiir uit x<^' "I ^^' fx^'<' obfeTving Aou

grtat the extent of their eountrg wot and how exeMtjU it* qualitf X. A. 3. 1. 10^

NEGATIVE SENTENCES [»«T

I 1. S. 13.

2687. Verbs and other words of emotion (praiae, blame, wonder, etc) sad
the expreasioQ of its lesnlts are often followed by a dependent eKclamatory elaose
with »tot, Seti, &t, etc Here a causal sentence would hare tri rMsCroi, >rt rad-ov-
rot, Sti «vrwt. English generally Introduces such clauses by eoiutdertng, think-
ing, upon the reflection hov), eU. Thus, rw ir' nl rSr ilta iwortttiiuw, twa n' fo^ai
Ihfrefore I tMnk now thoit thalt in turn alone fur all thou hatt done unto mr
♦ 399, ir^k^atr . . . rJjp ifiaureu r^XV' *''"' ^'ip*' iraipou iartpifiiiwe^ tti/w I beiBiiiled
my fate eotigidering tchat a eovipanii/n I had loft (direct — obv AripAt trtlpav
(Brroi) irrtpijitai) P. Fh. 117 C, /idKop H Xrpr^iaiii, slVrJi t' l^t wi rs^Ai x"^'
rir Mr rpiiptti oh happy Streptiadea, hom mise yon are yourtelf and what a ion
you havr ! At. Nub. 1206, ri 7^^t liimuait iawr rata* v^lait atrmr they rehearft
hoto many evili old age oecationi them P. R.S29b, cdJal^iuv /ui iriip t^mlttra
. , . iit iSr^t *al itnalut iTi\i6Ta the man eeemtd to metol>e happy Mofeariealf

and nobly did he die P. Ph. 68 e, f),XiJ yt rflt eirvxlat rir rpicfivr, ol iitr/tTi,
inpiir rpirwr I envy the old fellov) hit fortune, how (lit. whither) he hai
changed hit arid waye Ar. Vwp. 1451.

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

3688. The simple negative particles are o£ and fi-j. oS is the

negative of fact and statement, and contradicts or denies ; ft^ is the

negative of the will and thought, and rejects or deprecates. The
difference between the simple negatives holds true also of their
compounds ourt p-'ffrti oi^* l^''fi'i oi&ui inj&eCi, etc.

a. Tik aiK Srra is that which doe* not exist Independently of any opinion of
the writer: ri oi* Srra \Byoroirir to fabricate what doe* not actuaJly ed*!
And. 3. 36. ri /ill Sura is that which is regarded bb not exitting, that which is
dependent on the opinion of the writer, the whole sum of things that are out-
side ot actual knowledge : rh pij Hrra o(Tt dparm sl^ ylniciirTai that uAick doa
not exial it neither teen nor known Hippocrates, de arte g 2 ; cp. r6 fi^ it
P.B.47eb.

b. The rarer o^t (oi-xl) denies with greater emphasis than ot. The form
(HIK^L no longer h due to the analogy of oAt-^i.

2689. /ii) as the negative of will and thought la used in varions expreanont
Inrolvlng emotion, as commands, prohibitions, wishes, hopes, prayera, petitions,
promises, oatbs, saseverations, and the like ; in expressions marking condition,
purpose, effort, apprehension, cautious assertion, surmise, Mid fear j In setting
forth ideality, mere conceptions, abstractions as opposed to reality or lo defi-
nite facta ; in marking ideas as general and typical ; when a person or thing
is to he characterized as conceived of rather than real. — f>4 Ib used not merely
when the above notions are apparent but also when they are latent. Greek
often conceives of a situation as marked by feeling where English regards it u
one ot fact ; and hence uses p,^ where we should expect of.

a. M corresponds to the Sanskrit prohibitive particle ma, which in the Rig
Veda la nsed with the Independent indicative of an augmentleoa aoriat or impec-

afigo] NEGATIVE SENTENCES 609

feet which has the torce of the BnbjunctiTe ; rerelj witb the optative. In later
Sanskrit md was used with the aubjuDctive, optatiTe, and imperatlTe.

b. ^4 was originally used only in independent clauses ; but later was employed
in subordinate clauses, and witb dependent inUniiives and participles. On the
origin of fi^ as a conjunction, see 2222, In Homer /i^ is used especially witb tbe
subjunctive, optative, and imperatiTe (i.e. in commands and wishes) ; rarely
with the indicative (in ;ilj &^\\or, In oaths, In questions, atter verbs of fearing
referring to a past event) ; with tbe infinitive when used for tbe imperative after
a verb of gaying, etc. when the InSniUve expresses a command or a wish, and
when B. dependent JnftnlLlva Is used In an oalh ; with tbe participle only in cod-
necQoa with a command (Z 48) or a wish {t 684).

c. In later Greek (Polybius, Lncian, I)io Chrysostomus, etc.) it^ has en-
croached on ofi, generally by extension of usages occurring rarely in the classical
language. Thus Lucian has ^4 ^t^' causal ut, Sn, ti&ri, irtl ; in relative clauses
(sometimes oiifw tarir tn fi4) ; witb participles of cause (even irt /i4) or of
concession ; with participles without the article following an adjective ; with
tbe infinitlre after verbs of aaylny and thinking. Ari iiii appears In indirect dis-
couTse (complete or partial) where the classical language would use the inflnitive
or Sri with tbe optative or ut wltli the participle ; so after verba of taying and
AiiMng, after verbs of emotion, and even after verbs of knowing.

POSITION OF oi) ASD puj

3690. o£ and ifj are generally placed before the word they nega-
tive; but may follov, when emphasis is laid on a particular woid,
as in contrasts.

fa-aUfSn Si iitiStlf but let no om mppo»e T. 6. S4, oI St irrpar^al ^^o> lUr
oil, o-uptjcdXtinv SI and the generalt did not lead them out, but called them
Uigether X. A. 8. 4. 20, fiJ««ixoi iyrrdiuBa o6k Iwl itoroSovXiiffe. rdf 'EXXiJiu^
'A0iiHl«t, dXX' ^' f\t\iStpjMti Ari TDv Hijiou Tsri 'EUigfftr Vie became alliex, not
to the Atheniant, for the purpoie of enilaving the Oreekt, but to the Orefkg for
the purpoae of freeing them from the Mede T.3.10, i^l^t^a^Ta iiit iiii peri»hindeed
— may he not E. Hed. 83.

*. A contrast must be supplied in thought when the negative precedes the
article, a relative, a conjunction, or a preposition. Thus, il it rtpt ^nHr
ynitiat* M Ti titira but if you past upon u( a sentence that Is utijuxt T. 3. 67,
To},tiietw ti M rpit iiutiar imrapturtei^w d3i)>oT<n una6Ie to carry on a war
against a power dissimilar in character to their ottin 1. 141, ifwrDiiuBa rait
weXiiiSmrt eiii i/i /isicpdv toe shall shortly (lit. in no long time) punish the enemy
Z. C. 6. 4. 21, oi nrd irAofiov disorderly B 214.

b. The order of the parts of a negative compound may be reveraed for strong
empbasU ; as Xt' a6i,&r{ = oiicfrt &•) 3. Tr. 181, /da, »*« (= oMefJo.) HdL 8. lift

c The negative may be placed In front of an infinitive when English trans-
fers it to another verb in the sentence ; as *( pouXi^irf" ^lu't fi) wpeirTOictaBv
TtiKiiUir m^rir iiiiXr if tee wish to assume that he is not waging war with ut
D.8.&S, iiiiai oM' /ntvXir^wu trirpirttt yoii do not permit Ut even to take *gt
our quartert X. A. 7. T. 8 (_— ain trtrphna = jtwXAni).

iv,Goog[c

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

•* AOHBRBSCENT

a6SL 06 adherescent (or priTative) placed before a verb (or other
single word) not merely negatives the meaning of the simple verb
bnt gives it an opposite meaning, the two expressing a single negative
idea; as oS if^fu Ideny, I re fuse (not laaynot). ou ^i^fu is preferred
to ^iiX oi as nego is preferred to oto non.

3692. Adherescent ov is especially common with verbs of »aying
or thinking, but occurs also with many verbs of will or detire. In
such caaes oi goes closely with the leading verb, forming a qtuui-
compound ; whereas it belongs in sense to a following infinitive if an
infinitive depends on the leading verb. In Latin actual composition
has taken place in nego, neacio, neipieo, nolo.

otK 1^ Uroi he refveed to go X. A. t. 8. B, dB ^iaiw Jnt iW^r Uir theg tat
Mot there u no other road 4.1.21 (cp. ^tfoBi yes or no f P. A. 27 d), Wm
S' eit iftre Sitr X/>etr i viho wtre Ihote whom he thought ought not to ^prak t
Am. 1. as, 1 e6t iin i„iit . . . wmilr what yoa forbid u» to da X. C. 1. S. 10,
ovx ifiai ■ . . ^ittyittTa TiiuapMioi he tald that St wot not right to avenge hinutif
on an exile T. 1. 186.

a. So with dB ^iifu and 06 ^drm deny, refute ( = Iro/ml'^uu), oAc ob^iBi, ni
■Vfiffu, ai Jdicu), gdic #i3 and ai ntXtiu forbid (veto), oAjt dfifl regard oi tintwirdty,
do not expect that, refuK, oix urirxmSiiai refute, ei rpoirwauidiiai diMintvIo, •*
irii/i^DirXntw ditmiode, adttiae not to, oix iSiXu am unviilling, •>£■ iraifti ditapprott.
Tbis anociatlon often peraiats in puticlples, as oAk twr, aix MfKu*. Homer bH
off ipTiitt, ^iit of, and sB ^iiiu ni-

2693. at witb tbe principal verb may be equivalent in sense to ^■i with a de-
pendent Inflnitive ; aa ai vu/tfiavXiiur Sipfji fTparttt^Bai irl t4> 'EXXdSa adeUIng
Xerxet not U> march agaUM Greece { = avi^iAtiv* n^i rTparritrBai) Rdt. T.M.

2694. Analogous to this use with verbs is the nse of oi with
adjectives and adverbs.

o6t 6\lyoi =*-aUi}I, oil* i%ix"''''at = lilyurrot, a6x frrsr = itSWar, oix fmr* =
luiXiffTB, oi KaKCn basely, oin d^anft famoMt, gdc tUbrtit unreatonablf, at rtti
^paxiut on important mattert (op. 2^ a), regularly oi rim not at alt, aa oA
rdrv xoXnrJ' eatg.

2693. The origin of adherescent of is to be found partly In the unwflltntmess
of tbe early language to use the negative particie with the Infinitive, partly in
the preference for a negative rather tban a poxltive assertion, and to tbe disin-
clination to malte a strong positive aCatement (litotes, aa in some oI tbe casKi
of 2094), and partly in the abaenc« of negative coinpoands, the development of
which in adjectives and participles (2071 a) was in turn restricted by the use of
adherescent oi,

369& Adherescent ov is often found in a protasis with d aod in
other coDStructiOQB where we expect ji^

I z::lv,G00g[c

3698] NEGATIVE SENTENCES 611

tl S^ AroaTflwai'A6ii foluroSt ^\iiraiin' . ■ ., tix ifiumJiitt buti/tee rtfiltedto
revolt from (Ac Athtniaia, wt were not doing virong T. 3. 66, tl at* ifi if tha*
forbtddett S. A j. 11.11 ( = if iQiXfeiO . <' M npSftnr tix ^(S^rro, feiMq^ar tr
if it had not been that Ihey did not receive Proxenut, Uteg would have been laved

D. 19. 74, tl niw at roXXol Ijaai if theg were few L. la 62 (emended by some to
tSr ixV)- Av o4 ia rare, as Mr n ai 4>qr( iii re ^^n both ^ you deny H and if
toaadmUU P.A.26b(cp. L. 13. 78, D. 26.24).

2697. But ni often does not yield tooi,aairr' iyii «i3 tr rt fi4 #u boOt if I
tutent and if I do not D. 21. 206, ohoM' Srat 4>ii toSto ml /lii ^A I know not Aoto
/ aAall •ay tJUa and not tag it E. I. A. fl43, iir ^ii . . . tart D. 10. 12, and in
many caMS where ^4 goee closely with tbe following word, m li aiBov Kpl»ir ml
fi4 A^tptiTB if he were granting a trial and not talcing it amtg D. 23. 91.

ov AFTER €1 (idv)
3696. ov is sometimes fouod in clauses iotroduced by ci (tav).

a. When oAisadfaerwcent (Stl96).

b. Wben there is &d empliatic aissertion of fact or probability, ss where a
direct statement is quoted. Thus, it Si oUir inidpTtrral iwi if {ael Iiave shown)
mo error hat been committed bg me And. 1, 33, tl, &t >Gi> ^^o-n, ai waptaixiiura
if, OM he will pretenUy aeaert, he had not made preparattoM D. 54. 29. Cp. X. A.
1. 7. IB, quoted in 2790.

c. Wben tl (iir) ia used instead of tri that (becatae') after verbs of emotion

(2247). Thus, nil Savitdirjit tl roXXd rwr tlpTiiUrar oi rpirti rw do not be tur-
prieed If tnueh of vih<U has been said does not ajiplji to you 1. 1. 44. Here /i4 is
povtble.

0. When tl (<ar) approaches the Idea of ^il niux (cp. 2246, 2298 b). Sn tl
TotfSt . . . oi rripytt rar^p If (_»inee) their father hai ceased to Ioo« tAew children

E. Hod. 88 (often explained as oi) adiierescent). Here m4 ^ possible.

e. When a single tl introduces a bimembered protasis ae a tehnle, the iii>
clause and the Si clause of that protasis may have ot. Such bimembered prot-
ases oftrn depend on a preceding apodosia introduced by alvxpi; traror, Btirir,
iau/iarrir irri (av ilt|) and like expressions of emotion (c). Thus, (It' o6k altxP^
. . .tlrb iiii 'kfntlati rX^Sot ait iifiapifi^ rJ)r AnnSai/uWuii' ipx^* • ■ ■ • tiuU Si Srra
' A$iltaiiH fiippaper irBpurar ^piirtaet i U It not then ditgraetful, ifXI. Is true that
whereat the Argive common* did nnt fear the empire of the Lacedaemontant,
yoa, who are Atheniane, are going to be afraid of a ftarftorian f D. 15. 2-1, als\iAw
yip, if iotJjp iiiriitTXtf^piyaj. S S' 4..^^' Ir' ei Suriif trot trartir for it ie disgrace-
ful that, whereas the father destroyed the Phrygians, the other (the eon) is not
going to be able to destroy one foe E. F.I. 3.10, Stiwir ar iTi), tl ol iiir itaiuwr (i/ir
fia;(01 #rl SovXtlf rg a^ur (^[fl^Mara) ^iparrti oi* drf|»D(ri>, iititit Si iwl T^ . . .
oAral r<f{trSiu oiii ipa iarar^vnuc i( teoalii he strange if, whereas their alllet
toiU not fail to pay tribute for their own enslavement, we on the other hand wilt
not expend it for the purpose of saving ovrselnes T. 1. 121.

N. I. — The second member of such protases hasod if the verb stands In the
indioaliTe, but /i^ (in classical Qreek) i^ the rerb la In the optative. In Au. 8<
lfi7 at xantrxnfu la due to indirect diacoorse.

612 NEGATIVE SENTENCES [aflgj

IT. 2. — In •nch Benteocea tl may (1) have a condldonal foice in boUi cUmm,
M T^SO. 16, 31.24 ; (2} have a. conditional force in tbe weoDd member, but tlie
force of iril In tbe Srst member, as L. 20. 86, 1b. 14. fi2 ; (3) bare tbe force ol
irti in the Qrat member, and that of Sri ia Uie second member, )u D. S. 65, Aee. i.
242 ; (4) have the force of Ori in both membera, as T. 1. 36, I. 121, X. C. T. 6. M.

f. A bimembered clause introduced by it may cont^o a negative iJaiue wiili
oi directly opposed to a positive clause ; tAtl Si ry /^"i raii S' otf D. 23. 123.

2. tt ahetiter in tdmple and alternative indirect questions lakes eithec W m-
/.I) (2676 c e).

2699, Homer has *( and tbe indicative with ni (12 Umes) when tbe subordi-
nate clause precedes the main clause ; but usually tl ^4, when tbe snbordinate

clause follows. Thus, il ti ian oi rtUrouri ^Hr iruiKi' dfUH^if". Mvofiai *ti 'XlUa
but if they will not pay a fitting cvmpeniatton for the aUUe, I will go down M
Sadet n 882, Ma a* ' hpytlnunr Irrip/iapa rbarot trixBTi-, (i fii) 'A9ij«i^r'HM i»4i
fiEdgf ftiv» then in that com the return of the Argivet had been a<xon^ithfd
ajalnit fate, if Hera had not tpoken a word to Athena B 156.

a. Ttie Homeric ti oi with the Indicative lias been explained either as a reten-
tion of tbe original use, >ii} with that mood being an eitenaion through the anal-
ogy of the HubjuDctive and optative ; or because oi went with tlie predicate,
whereas M ^^ closely attached to tl.

3700. Homer has tl oi (adherescent) with the subjunctive in «t S' ar . . . ofc
WXuiriv r 289, tl ti r' . . . oin tlOffir T 139.

2701. Herodotns has a few canes of tl oi with tbe indloaUve, as 6. fl ; fr •<
with the BubjuncUve is doubtful (6. 133).

GENERAL RULTl FOB fi^
3702. /ii} stands

1. With the impemtive.

2. In clauses with tl, iiv (exceptions, 269S).

3. With the subjunctive, except after fuj lest, when oA is

used.

4. With the optative, except after fi» Ust, or when the

optative has Sn or is in indirect discourse.
6. With the infinitive, except in indirect discourse.
6. With participles when they have a conditional or

general force.

oA AND ff^ WITH THE INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVB
SIMPLE 8ENTSNCS8 AND INDEPENDENT CLAU8BB

2703. Statements (2153) expressed by aimple sentences and ind»
pendent clauses take ou. Direct questions take either ou or ^ (2651).
The independent future indicative has fi-q only in questions.

2704. In teiahea >(^ is used witb the indicative (1780-1781) or tlie
optative (1814, cp. 2166).

I . f, Google

1705] NEGATIVE SENTEhXES 618

aSt at fi^nr' tOijtir would tkat I had never leen thee aO.T.lSlS, |ii)rDr'
fi^Xov Xiniv TJif ^rSpot Would that I had never luft Sa/ru* S. Fh 960.

till t>fvi may I not live Ar. Eq. 833, dnilfri oCr' tiitl /ii^e yol^r I neither
am nor may I hetome »hamele»* i),S.68, dSt' ar Svnf/iijr /ii^' irufTal/i'qr Myar
neither could I tell nor may I be capable o/ telling S. AdL 683.

tt. That £^Xar takes fii}, not q6, ahona that it has lost to a certain extent ita
verbal nature. In late Greek it even became a particle like tfSc

b- Indirect expresHiona of wishing with wHt Sn and the optative (1882), /Sov-
Xoffiqr tr (162T], ifii,v\iiii,r (_it) with the Inflitltive, take e6 (17B2, 1780).

c The nse is the same in dependent clauaee ; aa h«(Jj} S' ■ /i^tdt' Ji^Xt
(f-u/i^^Hi) rvri^ii ttut When that happened toAfcA / would had never happened
D. 18. 820.

SUBORDINATE CLAUSES IN THK INDICATIVE OR OPTATIVE

2705. In subordinate clauaes /ii; or oi ia used.

«. Final clanaea have fti^i aa ^(\ai /jSo^Xero trni toii lUyiaTa ivrafUmt, tra
iSucSir u4 Siiolv 3lin)r he viiahfd to be on friendly termt tnith men in power fn
opi/t that he might not pay the penalty for hia wrong-doing X. A. 2. 6. 21, IS«
Tit i'4x"P'^ riri \a^ir, in ^7)J' tl ipa6\rrt iSinro ffararnr quoted in 21Bfi C.

b. Object clauses with Srvt after verbs of efort have itii, as ^pirrij'' h'wf
iiijAjF iwAiut rijt Tt>i4i raOrris rpi^nt ue to it that you do nothing unworthy of
thin honour 1.2. 37, tw^ttrra Sru! itiiri Sairoi «i)r« iraret tot« Imrro he took
care that they ihouM never be without food or drink X. C. 8. 1. 43.

C. Conditional clatUBS regularly have ii-//. Thus, tl /iJ; u^it 1j\erT<, hoptviiuea
if i-icl pmiAtSk if you had not come, we should be marching agalml the king
.X. A. 2. 1.4, oil trtMriTo a&rat, tl ii-// rt iraitaair tti) he never l^ hiia unlet*
there was gome necexity for U X. M. 4. 2. 40. So in concessive clauses (2S00).
Un ei adhereaceat in conditional clauses see 2896.

d. Kolative Clanses, it conditional, have ot with a definite antecedent, ^4 with
an indefinite antecedent (2505). fiij is thus used when tlie case in qnestlon la
typical of a class (ti^ 'generic'). Thus, rpoir^iialroiiair irt xM 'ottirtat t aix/ri
Ihfy eignify beforehand what one mnst do and what not X. C. 1. 8. 40, 1 /ij) olia
oiii ofd/iai elSiroi what 1 do not knom, I do not even think I know P. A. 21 d.

N. 1. — Homer bas ti (&roO ot wiUk the indicative (lo) BS01).

N. 2. — at is r^ular In relative clauses when an opposition is expressed
(T. 1. 11.2), and when a negative clause precedes; aa oin tmr irrti (6wut) ti,
oittii &rr<i <)6, etc. (X. C. 1. 4. 25, X. A. 2. 4. 3).

e. The ezpression TdioOrat, tt (Imt, etc.), when preceded by a negative,
lakes o6 ; aa Ta/iuiar ftriStrl tJnu /iiiiir Toiourar, f Ji I vi rat i ^ii\iiHm tfvttst ft
is necessary that no one shall have (sucA) a storehouse that anybody who please*
may not enter it P. R. 41t< d. But even when no negative precedes, we have
a6, when the relative clause makes an assertion or defines attributively ; as
riryypa^i rur "Myur . . . roaihot, oltt oMtIt dXXof yiytn such a writer of
fpeechta aa no one had been 1. 15. 35. When the an(«cedent is general or is
Cli<>ii^bt of In respect of its character we have ni i as ^uXifPeli rtnOror ^inj/wur
■araXiTtir, 8 M T^t irBpurlr^ ifiiviJii iarir wishing tn leave behind htm mek <t
memorial ai would mtpas* human nature L 4. 60 ; op. 2706 g.

ii.X>^lc

614 NEGATIVE SENTENCES [kToA

t ReUtiTe cUOMi of pnipOM taks n^, aa BaXdrrter itft^ar', fi4k (14**^'
tUH'trS' Iti ea*t me out info tAe sea uA«re ye maj/ never tee me more S.O.T.
1411, tpAif/av' iavT^r, tr9a /i^ Tii tUlBu hiding hei-Mlf where no one miglU **t
her 8. 'Ft. 903.

g. CUoses with a relative pronoun referring U> an antecedent thou^t ol in
respect of its character (of aveh a tort) take /tii. The nse of ni cliai«cl«nriie
comes from the geiiprio meaning of /«}, i.e. Uie antecedent la not r^ardnl
^mply as a peiaon who does Bomething but aa a penon of such a nalnrt at, oik
toAo ti/p(Jlea a cliut. In such cases Is ii-i may refer to a definite peraoa or ihtng.
So eapeclaU; io relative clauses of cause and result, nhich ordinarily take at.
Thus, Ta\alwupaj ipa Ttc ffO yt ir0purm cT . • . , if ^4ri 9tol nrptfoi tiMt /&^f
Ufi a wretched being art thov then, mho hmt neither aneeatral god* ttor skrifK*
P. Eu. 30i b, f ii^braffSc Toiaih-B i^ Sir laiH-ratt t)ur ^wrafuXi^fi pau aucA a Bute
that you wlU never repent of it And.it. 41, toioDtb \fytir , . , , ttt ii^fcif ir
MfMrffo-at to ute language at trhirh no one could feel juul fyMnlmenl D. 21. 181,
i . . . laiSir a* i/iitikt the man who would not lake an oath 64. 40. Sopbocle*
1b especially fond of tlie generic fn}.

h. Conaecntire clauses (and conaecative relative clauses] with Sirr* take wt
with the Indicative and optative. Thus, (Aaiuiatuinot) <'■ roOr' drX^orfu iXfft
*»t' fliic ii^pttvn airo?! *x«" '^I' •""■* ffl' ipxi' ^^ lAcedaemontana fieraw ,
to intattate In their dfsirei that Otey were not tatted with th*tr empire on Ote

land 1. 12. 103, Arr' oOk Av a^it yroipltraiii' ftr iltriSiir to that J sAowId nul
reeognixe him, if I were to see him E. Or. 37S. On roulIrM li a6 see 2706 e. I

1. Oaths and firnlpslnffons in the Indicative with /ii) express a solemn deniil
or refusal, or repudiati; a charge. Thus, trrui rOr Ziit ... ^4 iiiw thi iTrafii
iriip 4reix'i<"^^< dXXoi let Zfui now know (i.e. I swear hy Zeus) that an otttr
tnan lAa/I mount these horses K329, Mr^r'A^^^r^r . . . fii) 'yi1 '' ^^vw K<r I
.^ihrodite, far be it from me that I sAould r^eate fou At. Eecl. 090. CpL 2716. |

H^ WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND IMPERATIVE

2706. The aubjuQCtive is a mood of wilt, and therefore takes ^

2707. Independent clansei take ni : the hortatory subjunctive (17&7), the
proUblUve subjunctive (1800), the deliberative snbjuncUve (1805), the Babjuitc-
tlve of doubtful assertion (1801).

a. The anticipatory subjunctive in Romer takes of (1BI0, cp.lBlS).

270B. Dependent dansea take n^ : final clauses, as tamt iiat Karsicunu rtii
dfiifai . . . Tin ^J) rik ^£77 iip-dt cTfarifi^ it teems to me ndvitable to bmrn tlf \
wagons that our baggage-train may not be our general X. A. .'!. 2. 27. Objtvi
clauses nfter verbs of ^"rt, as ot ^vkittef 61cm h4 . . . itarlmir n^wr* ; Kit'
you not be on your guard lest you find a matter f 1>. 0. 26. Bo in eondttional
clauses with Mr, in conditional relative clauses and in relative claoaf refer-
ring to indefinite time, place, and manner.

a. After ftii leet, <>6 Is used (2221).

2709. The imperative is a mood of wUl and therefore takes f^ in
prohibitions (1&40).

a. Hie future tDdioUlve after intem^liveaA has an Imperadva aeuM (I9ie.

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

NEGATIVES OF INDIRECT DISCOURSE

2710. The negatives of diiect discourae are retained in indirect
discourse introduced by Sri or in.

tiKft^S^rat xfi^ ^' oittlt iartr irSpiirur <^t!«n otfri SyiyapxtKi* oOrt SifiuiiipaTiic6t
It mtut be borne in mind lliat no mon 6^ nature ia digpoaed either to vligwrchy or
to demiKTocg L. 25. ti.

elxf . . . iriiit rcpl i-oXircfdi biur tarat dXXd rtpl auTHp&%, tl nil rott^att' i
O^ipaiitrtp Kt\t6oi he said that the 7'ifsfjnu teiiutd not be abont your ednnli'lntion
bat about j/our aa/ety, if you did not acei^ the pmpi<tSliiin» nj Thnamenea
L.12.74.

a. Id wpotTrir ut ufittit tir^airo if r^t rdfcwi he gave ord-'re that no one
thoald move from Ai'a position X. H. 2. 1. 22 nyfitli is due to tlie fact that the
Duin verb denotea a comiiisiid.

On the negative in indirect discourse with the infinitive see 2722,
2737,2738; with the participle, 2729, 2737, 2738; and in indirect
questions, 2676.

OV AND /*!) WITH THE INFINITIVE

2711. The inBnitive not in indirect discourse has fi-^; the infini-
tive in indirect discourse ha:S ai, but soinctiiuea fiij. The articular
infinitive baa >iij. On the use with ^Jj oS see 2742 ff.

E. The ordinary negative of che Inliciitive la nil, which could be bo used Rlnce
the influitive was employed as early aa Homer In an imperaLlve sense. »i with
the Infinitive In indirect dUcuurse is probably due to the analogy of ei wltli the
indicative and optative in clauses of Indirect discourse introduced by flri (in).
ot became the natural negative of indirect discourae aa eoou as the infinitive
came to represent the indicative or optative.

2712. i»i fs Qsed with the articular infinitive.

rapHv-ytM rod ^4 biiAt Uiiait a naming not to injure you I<, 27. 6, bwip roi
M tA niifbiitm woi^rai in order to avoid doing what teat commanded 1). 16.
201. On Ti (toS) id, oi, see 2744. 9. 10, 2T49 b, d.

«< AND fkli WITH THS INPtNITIVB NOT IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE

2713. f«i is the regular negative alter all verbs, adjectives, a'lverba, and sub-
Btantivea, which take an inflnitive not in indirect discourse. TIuih, after verbs
and other words denoting abf Iff j(, filneee, ueremity (and tlieir opposltes). Cp.
2000-2007.

efKil va^r irtpa itii \iiptir i( it proper for a ni»e man not to talk idly
P. Th. 162 b, Tot iiialit x*P*to( (i^ irrtiiMrai atrxpi' it U diagraceful not to
repair Itkt aenleet T. 3. B-f.

3714. xM (XP^) ^Xf^y takes either p^ or ov.

X^ ^4 ■ara^poHir rov rX^fevt one mutt not deipiK the muttllttde 1. 5. 79,
X^p a< '' Afw^lmv thou oughtat not to do virong E. Hipp. Ml, x^ t' ahvr'

616 NEGATIVE SENTENCES [a7"S

tlT4tr uUif' tkfiior pfrar ft i« not riglU eoer to call any ion of VM* ^Ofpi
E. And. 100.

«. Fororiglii&l eil x>>4 vm salntitnted (for emphasU) xf^ <>'• *rhera the «f
vM stm taken with xf>4 ; ultimatel; oA was felt to belong with the inSniUTe and
hence came to be sepai«t«d from xF^-

b. 3fi takes ;(4, as fi4 ^(kIf StI a^mii tAep mud tm( /ear T. 1. 120. otta
may be uaed for Stl ^i) (2608). In Itl aix i«'X& tlwtU one mint not tpeak ra a
ffentral wag 1. 16. 117 tAx !■ adhereecent. Note oI|mi Jtir ad, f^it(d xp4><>* ^

S713. li-i [fl oaed with the InflnltlTe In wishes and prohibitions. Thus, M
roXrru, /flf fH louXiiai Tux<'' !<« ffods o/ tnj/ eountty, may bondage not be my lot
A. Sept. 263, oft M vtXijtir do not approatJi these A. Fr. T12.

2716. fcf ia used with the inflnitive in oaths and protestations. Thna,
tirru wOr rM< '^aia . . . li^ rt roi alVr^ r^/ui itaitbt fiav\xuffifuw dXXs let eOFtk note
knoiB this (i.e. I swear by earth) that I will not deviae any harmfiU miacbirf U
thine own hurt « 187. Cp.2T06i.

271 T. fi4 is used witii the infinitive of purpose (cp. 2710) or resoll (2SflO).
C^. 2760. On /«' 4! fii) see 227S ; on Hm oi see 2200.

2718. fiif ia used when the Infinitive stands in appotltion (1987), and bence
is like ri i4 with the inflniUve. Thus, TeOra It ivTu &r ^/u, iatt4m tr if
^pa-xoripoi-i 'foC 'r^ ch-A iWil* this it OM of the thingi I maintain — tAot no ont
can tag the name thing* in fewer words tAan / can P. G. 440 c Cp. A. Pr. 17^
481, 436, P. R. 4»7 b. Such cases are not to be confused with ni ftfler verbs of
aweMTotion or beU^ (2725).

2719. fiif is used with t^ Infinitive introduced by verbs of viiU or derin
(1901} or tiy verba expressing activity to the end that something thall or shall
not be done ; ba TJ)r Stptvpar ifi«6}>erTo ^1) wptiireai they tei^ed not to ffipt up
Corc^ra T. 1.44, ^uhar)|r dxt ^1^' iinr\itw . . . ioiUkx ^1^' iarXtU he iKft

guard agatnU any one either tailing otU or in T. 2. BO.

3720. Verba of eommanding and ezAortfn^ (hXi^, Uyw, PaS), otkiag
(aJr^, d{iu), adeiting (ffUf^uXttfw), and other verba of wltl or denre of like
meaning, take /»(.

tKflixut . . . n^ ifieeit»ir he ordered him not to provoke his mrath P. B.
SOS e, l\tyiir airoii ^1) tSmdw they told them not to cominit iiyuatiee T. 2.5,
ifUar dXXfj^if ni, Bttr they shoHted to eae.h other not to run X. A. 1. 8. 10, i
Ittrtvt nil KTtTm tit besought them not to kill liim L. 1. 26, ru^pov\tii ••>...
u4 i^atptiaeai i it iyt / advtu you not to take awag what you may have gtetn
X. C. 4. 6. 82. I

3721. oi is used after verbs of will or desire only when it is attached to tbe
leading verb or to some particular word ; when it marks a contrast inserted
parenthetically ; where a compound negative takes up ti uaed with the leadiufc
verb 1 and when oMtli may be resolved into oi and tIi, oi going with the liwrting
verb. Examples in 2788.

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

•i AND f,1^ WITH THE INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT DI8COUR8B

3733. Verba of aaying and thinking take ou vith the infiDitire in
indirect discourse. Here tA is retained from the direct discourse.

i (iird7ic])) ^Oiit* oiiina. StUr aCrt /idxtrffai ri iBr otrt /lax'^Sal wort vie

dt-clart that no one of the godt either now eonttnd* with neett»it)i, or tver tntU

1'. L. 8l8e (= oM*li . . . liixtrai , . , iiax'iTiu'), U^omi ode cIhu airtreiiM tay-

< II jj that thet teere not Independent T. 1.67, (=oliit iaiitr),iiliiai yip it tin 4x«*>*-
rrwt lut tx'"' fof i think it would not be unattended with gratUvde to me
X. A.2.3. 18 (—aiKiwlxei'), ATifran-e 4;Mii oA *t|>iif crAii theg thought that ae
Mould not view a wiA indifferenee T. 1. 39 (s ad wtptt^otrai.), iiui, ti SoKovair
tim td ri oXtiow aJTiairftti but thete penon» teem to m« nol to AfaiiM the real

eaitte P. R. 829 b, iriiuetmiK i.t i6Kur»a,i iiimtw rdj ro\uiiiKoSyTai he thovghtthe

be$tegen would nol he able to hold their poiUion X. A. 7. 4. 22 (= odjc ir

2733. Verba of aaying and thinking take /iij in emphatic dedara-
tions and ezpresBions of thought which InTolve a wish that the
utterance may hold good. So with iftrnii, Acyw, ^ymiuu, voniCn, olpu.
Cp. 2725.

^a/i|v y ittytrft lailwl ;u)3i(i[Dr itrw rolSfwrir *api roS >i4 iptticorToi bvtfor my
part I would maintain that no one get* any edvaUion from a teacher who U not
pUaning X. M, 1, 2. 3B, wirrn tpaOai . , . luiiit elnu xipia^iiTipar iprr^i all will
eaf that nothing it wore profitable than bravery X. C. 7. 1. 18, tIt J' ir iuBpiinrMr
etvf iiir raiiai ^airo dvru, 0cdA> H fii} ) viho in the world would think that they
teere the tone of godt and not godef P. A. 27 d, dij'"' - - • roidaarrn ixM S,* In
. . . Uaivt ytiJrlai cwXiwai rir ^1 tJ)* ei\aerar Ttix"l^» they departed In the
hrlirf ihat they would no longer prove able to prevent the building of AewOllto
the tea T.6. 102.

«. Cp. P.Th.l66a(«.|/<0, T. 1.139, 6.40, P.R. 8468 (X#v«), XM.1.2.41,
D. 64. 44 (oTfuu), X. C. 7. E. 50 (raiUfw), P. Soph. 230o (tta>«D{!fuc).

b. Casea wbere the InflnltiTe is Id apposition, or depends on an imperatiTe,
or occurs after a condilion, do not belong here,

2724. ^4 with the iDflnitlTS is often fonnd after rerbs denoting an oracular
response or a jadicial deciaion actoal or implied. Cp, 2725. Thoe, drnXir 4
QM1£ p.ifitm ca^iirtpQt dm the Pythian prophetee* made anMoer that no one wa*
toiler P. A. 21a (in direct diacoarse oMcIt ae^iirtpit tan). So after Kptiiai, as
fxpite nil 'AplaTuroi dm A^iutptfror niSs the Pythian propheteBB gave deeiaiot:
that Demarelue leat not the son of ArUton Hdt. S. SO, KinptrBt . , . iiiwot rur wdr-
rM» Mijterit ar tipSoui ri KMrh SUaia tuv 'EXXi)*"' rpeivBai you are adjudged to
!i«! lAe only peig}le who would not betray for lucre the common right* qf the GreeJc*
O. ». 10. So KamyiytivKti *ii} T. 7, 61, X. C, 8. 1. 86,

2725. fuif is often used with verbs and other expressions of anev-
rration and belief, after which we might expect ou with the infinitive
n indirect discourse. Such verbs are those sif^ifying to hope,
•xpect, promiK, put trutt iit, be pentiaded, agree, teetify, swear, eto.

618 NEGATIVE SENTENCES {-ipa

The use of fi^ iDdicates strong assurance, confidence, and resolve;
and generally in regard to the future. Cp. 2723.

Ai-lt i|i2t ^j) iipa^ni there la hope that you will not b» tfen X. C. S. 4. iZ.
trirx—f)"^ itnUi' xo'^*^' ■^ro^f nla-nrdu theg pronUaed tiMt theg tAoKltf nftr
no AailH X. H. 4. 4. 6, rurrRiu ... ^4 ^t^eir >ic ra^ai rat d7a0B( iXrli^i I tnul
(A(K tA«se t'ood /topM ui'i; not deceice me X, C, 1.6.13, *u;,iifu fa-wi trttat^n
'Atfqiatiii Sbntpdriff ripl 0(ai)[ ^1} (rw^psHir / UOnd«r Aou (A« .i4tA«n{a)u Wrre p«r-
maied that Soeratea did not hold temperate opinion* regarding the goda X. M.
1. 1. 20, ijuoXoY'' fi) lan-timi oi imKpaXtylat he acknowledget that he Minnol Hate
a long tpeech V. Pr. 330 b, o^h iaotav naTattaprvpii idj i( inltm ytytr^tm kt
pTwet by hit oun teatitnoTiy that he U n«t hi* mn D.IO. 47, 6iiaaer % ^^r pi
tint oi ulAi A>t\e* furtl^ -rtitrBiu wiirort he etoore that he had no other to» aul
that none other had ever been born to him And. 1. 136, fijuw . . . K^r tlf^timt
ht tieore that he hid 'aid nothing D. 21. 119, dimSiuu fii^or'. , . dXc^^vn* luAr
HlMp I will svienr that I ailt never ward of the evU day * 373. Cp. Ar. Veqi.
1047, 1381, And. 1.00, Lye. 16. Witb Vv/w the inflnltiTB may ztder to Uw
present, past, or future.

3736. Sack verbs are hope iXv(t« ; expect Uiritw, Tpe«-SwtA, SmcA. oUiiw,

•vyxop') i pledge lyfuAfiAi ; put trust in «ia-rti« ; am pertaadai wtrntiMfrnt;
teetij)/ |iAprvpA ; rejiudi'ite &ralyofM\ ; (Areoten 1*hU, etc.

K. fi4 la regaUr aiter verba of promising; common aft«r Terba of kop^nf and
tteearing. With I^nifu, rMrt^, wiiSo/iai, iiaptofia, etc there la an IdeA of d^>re-
eatioit.

3727. Irto-ni^uu and oIEci nsuall; tahe hi) when they denote coDfldent belief
(= J warrant from what I know ; cp. TiffT«(w /cf, ^Wv^t fii)). Thoa, fffrriM*
fi4 rou TiJ3' dyXdir/iB rXJ)i> lefwu ;uiX«r J OMiire you this fair offering hat Ml
come from any one eave from him S. El. 908 (cp. Ant. 1092). In rM-*»rte 7'
Ma/i^t n' aw r6iiayii.fr' i\\a ripaai /aiSir so muCh at leott I knoW — that malhiT
ttekneaa nor aught else can undo me (S. O. T. 1466) the inflniti« may be appo-
dtlonal (2T1S). CaBBBOtrB0i »i4 (he aeeta-ed = I aseure you") du^ faan /ti hj
reaaon of the Imperative (2737 a). So S. Ph. 1329.

OV AND fi^ WITH TEE PARTICIPLB

273a The participle has ov when it states a fact, fnj when it states
a condition. On ^^ due to the force of the leading verb, see 2737.

06 rtsTtitir since (a*, wA^n, elc.) he doe* not believe, n^ riartdttw if ht 4ot»
not believe, iriPn iwl rh Spy) oMi>>it cuXtomt ht u<nf up on Ae moitntaint ai*ct
no one hindered him X. A. 1. 2. 22, «k ar Itmo ^4 la^Aw ttiatiiartiw tkoM rantt
ttot be happy if thou haet not totted E. fr. 401, in i/lt ri {lit nil f$tl•^tr^% rft Wxfi
Aou iKeet ia life if fortune it not rnniovt Hen. Sent. 663.

a. ;i4 with the articular participle is the alirldged equlTalent of a condiUooal
reUtlTe sentence. Thus, in i tij) ra!>Ta ra^ar djuif im, i ni rMSc ia virtually
the generic St av >i4 rttv or Stru fi^ rent compreaaed into a noon.

2729. »i ia osed with a auppleroentary partlolple (in indirvot dlaeoorae) in

•TSSl NEGATIVE SENTENCES 619

•gteemmtt with a noun (or pronoim, expremed or unexprened) depending on a
*erb of knotntng, thtneing, weemg, perfriviag, elo. (2106-2115) ; wid aleo with
•ncti ntpplement&r; participles (not in indirect discourae) after Terbs ot entDtiott
(;flO0), etc. In most such cases 9ri oi might have been ased.

oilira yip sTia /uaeBrra ToAi ^oitoi/rTai for I know of no ont vho dMikei
hit admlren X. M. 2. 6. 3S, ipatrpir rS4Tir iroliirar odr Itlf ro^t^Orrei tlifg made
it dear to nil that they vtrre not xnaging xnar for Uttir own interests Lyo. 60,
ifi^t rain Tprnfiiir/povf ei) , . , iriirrai thfy ttt that their elders do not depart
X. C. 1. 2. 8, aMtli itifrtV (tfiu . . . oiiif i\\ti>t,8ir no one viill ever find that any-
thing has been I'ft unilone I). 18. 246 ; Kdpif HSrro ai ivniUmf vlyir he rejoiced

that Oynu teat unable to remain filent X. C. 1, 4. 15.

2730. iwlmfot ajid otSa denoting contldent belief ma; take fii) tor «'.
Thus, ffodn ^ttti at itil irc^Dcira Toiaiha ^wrtir njrd well do T knote that bn
nature tho* art not adapted to utter such guile S. Pb. 79 ; cp. S. 0. C. 656, T. 1.
76, 2. 17. Thw use of fiii is aoali^ous to that with the inflnlUre (2T27).

2731. fi4 ts Qsed when the reason for an action is reftarded as the condition
nikler which It takes phice ; ss oi toO T\A>nf iiJr mpiVKiiuKi x^P" (xi»"''tr thry
art not grateful at not being deprived of the greater part of their rights T. 1. 77
r=,l^ar,pia«,^o).

2732. The participle with ■■, Arnp, Sirt, olo*. ola. (208&-20ST) has oi; as
ttopefittre in od rwija-arrn Toura ynu madf a diaturbaace by woy of declaring that
yov did not intend to d-i this L. 12. 73. The use of od sliows tliat there la jiotb-
ing conditional in the use of in though it is ofl^n traniilated by ai (f. »i4 occuib
only after an imperative or a conditional word (2T3T).

2733. Participles ot opposition or concesalon (2083) take oi] aa wtl9»u
yvpcutjt Kolrep oi vrtfrfat S/uti hearken to uomen albeit thov likest it not
A. Sept 712.

2734. The participle with the article ha^ au when a definite per-
son or thing is meant, but ^^ when the idea is indefinite and vir-
tually conditional (whoever, whatever') ; and when a person or thing
is to be characterized {of such a sort, one who ; 2705 g). Cp. ^052,

si oil trra the dead T. 2. 44, el eiii i9i\arTa the particular ;ii>riion( (or party)
■who are unwilling Ant. 6. 26, el o6 poii\introi raura o^^uf tx'f the party of
opposition And. 1.9; el ii.ii itirinint any uiho arc unable X. A. 4. 6.11 (^oItihi
jiil SArttrrai or Scei S* )iii Uptarrai), i /til tapelt tripwrat »i mtitiicTai he who gets

no flogging gets no training Men. Sent. 4'22, i fi^ X^wr i i^pntti the man who
tloetnot say what he thinks D. 18.282, i p,tiSir iSMureitiwAt tttrai tifnoii he tehD
^oes no wrong needs no law Antipb. 288.

OV AND fX,-^ WITH SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES USED
SUBSTANTIVELY

2735. o£ and /i^ are used with substantives and substantivized
adjectives with the same difference as with participles. Here the
generic ^^ is much more common than □£.

4 rwr yi^vp>3r . . . oi StiXiwd the non-destruUton of the bridges T. 1. 1S7,

620 NEGATIVE SENTENCES [>73*

kstA t4' Tflr xtapUtr dXXifXati o^ iwOoau hecafae of their non-tvrrtndtr ttf Iht
plaCf to each other 6.35 (= jri sdi iwieoaar), tii TiiP rHw KopireUiw tin^ti
iranytayit because the Corirdhlam no longer tailed out agaltut tAem T. 91.
Cp. nan-refrardanee (Shakesp.), aonrettdeneei (HUiod). So even with coDcrrU
nouae ; ol edx' ><>OXoi £. fr. 831.

4 /lit iitwtifiia lack of experience Ar. Y.ix\. 115, J /li) larpit Ae icAo i* no( n
p^*fcfa» (fA« non-pAytfcfau) P. G. 469 b, ol /iJ) rXatowt teAoever ar« Mnl riri
((Ae noii-HcA) F. R. 330 a, oit iarir ir toii m4 naXo't ^X«t;ta<ri» oM' Aa-ft <■
tehemetthaC are untofM there i» no place even for hope S. Tr. T25.

a. The use of the negative here oompenanteB for the absence of negative oom*
pounds. Cp. ol otK iraytatai riatii unnectitarj/ potaliont X. R. L. 6. 4.

3736. oiiBtit,oiiiv denote that vhich is actuailynon-ezistentorof no
account ; /ii;&(c, tnjBiv denote that which ia merely thought of as non-
existent or of no account. Both are used as the opposite of ri« or n
(c&at) to be aomebody (something, op. 1269V The neuter forms are
often used of persons ; to fi^iv (indeclinable) is used of persons and
thinffs.

iS rvF iiir oUtlt, aSpior 3* inrfpiityat oh tAou wAo art ROW O nobodff (an actual
fact), but to-morrow exceeding great Ar. Eq. 168, Srrn oittm hetng noboiiet
E, And. 700, ai yip 4{(du roAt /aflfnt for ht teal not woitt to eeteent (tbrae
whom he regarded aa) nobodiet S. Aj. 1114, ri laiiit tit oitir f4ra tcAot itai
thought to be nothing now inelinet (shows Itself) to be actaallf Kolhiag
E. fr. 532, fr' oitir im rsO fuji^r dfijarigf vrip tcAen though naught tltj/trlf
(a fact) thou Aa>( stood up for hint who it at naught 8. Aj. 1231. So ri Mir
zero, actoally nothing, ri ufiiir abstract nonentity.

a. The construction may Influence the choice between aiSth and ix^ttlt ; it
iit ioKirl Ti clvoi ii-iSir Irrti, 6m»l[ert airoit rebltte them if thtg think IA<jr

are tomething when ia reality lliejf are nothing ¥. A. 41 e. Cp. ST87 b.
AFPABGNT EXCHANGB OF Ol) AND ft^
2737. Where n^ is used when we expect «v the negative expres-
sion usually depends on a verb that either has /uj or would have it,
if negatived.

a. After imperatlvea. Thus, tfd^' hBi (i4 fit turwiaarri at know well that I
$haH notfaan upon thee R. Ileracl. OSS, >6iuit itifiit iTwi rir iwepuTlrww fiipf*
dm consider nothing in human life to be teevre 1. 1.42 ( = /i4 *^ff n ittV},

in oSr fij) iiinr Kptrarrtt, AWi col 9tapoiiUH>i, outu rj^i ^^^r ^pert eail fO*r
ballott then in the belief not only that you are pataing judgment bta aito
that the ejitt of the world are upon gou Aes. 3. 347 (cp. 2732). See alu
2088 b.

b. After conditional erpreMions. Tbtis, tl {4 ni . . . miiitn ti ^ ln>M
tt^tai but if any one thinkt some point ha* not been mfielenOf mentionri
And. 1. 70, XArtT* Si »iti rat Aamiai^uflur irrtrSit Six^"" (='■•' Mxt^^'
iliSt ii^Srrtatit Srrat (umiixx" and by rtcHving ut, mho are atUet of nrilhrr.

>T3«] NEGATIVE SENTENCES 621

tOTt MtU not be violating the tretUji nlth the Laeedaemoniaru either T.l.SS.
Cp. 2736 a.

c. Other CMes ; ttXtitt ^inu iwl Tail roTonov iiii iiofidrrat He ordered them to
rematR bf the river teilhout crossing X. A. 4.8. 28 (here fuim, U negatiTed,
would take /ii}, 2720), buivx"" 'Ip'i'V' 'wi^co /i^re S/nipa Soil /i-^t ri rtlxi
laStXiir he promised that he leould bring peace about viilhoia giving hottagea
or dettroj/ing the xealle L. 12.66 (here Ti»i(ff«i>, li negatlTed, would lake nil,
2725).

N. — Bot oi may aasert lUeU even under the above oircumatancea ; »a nii Syt
'i Xph "t" don't do what it really vsrong P. Eu. 307 b, 4 i^irri )it 1^ nt) d^lrrr
wf iiaS oit ftr raiijirarrBt tWa either acgitit me or do not acqvit me in the know-
ledge that I should not act otheraite P. A. 80 b (cp. 2782), il i«>il{*it odx
!>*;{«. Tiir SlK^r if thou thinkest not to suffer the penaity S.O. T. 661 i = o6x
v^{w), tl yruKitiiaiiitSa (urtXBirra /Uw, iiiipfir0iu Si oi (aome Mm.) ToXudrra if
we shall be Jtnoion to have come together, and yet not to have the courage to
avenge ourtelvre T. 1. 124 (it, would be said of them ; {ur^Xfor it4t, Aiitttceai 11
o6k trlXiiur, a contrast, Cp. 2600).

d. On >«) in queationB where we might ezpeist at), see 2676 b.
2730. ou is sometimes used vhere we expect /i^.

a. Wbere oi stands in a clause introduced b; tt or other words after whldi
^4 might be expected (2098). Thos, S^pa md oin lef\itr ni ira-ytal'g woKaiU!»i
that every one mutt of neeettiCg fight even thovgh he teould not A 800 (cp.
2092 a).

b. Where at goes Btriotly with the leading verb though il stands with the
infinitive. Thus, ^ouXoUt' *' *' »*« «I«> TiJi / wavld fain it were not w) (/
ahoHld not wish that this were so') E. Med. 73, iftiiiiartr oi) xb/>u<V0iii . . . i\\i
Smdireir Kari raiii riiwst he has sworn, not that he will shdw favour, but tliat he
will judge according to the laws P. A. 86 c (some explain this as the ad of direct
dificoutse).

c Wliere o6 in a contiMt goes olasely with a following word or words, or
stands in a partial parenthesis. Thus, nXt^v oit iv rg tttXiitlt iW it ry
^firpifi rtir irippniiir ylittaa^i (he has violated the law) in demanding that Ike
proclamation be made not in the Ataembly but in the theatre Aes. 3. 201,
itia\oyoli]t it tyayt ei tari ro^ouf dm ^^rui^ / thould acknowledge that I am
an orator, but not after their style P. A. 17 b, b/iii pOr iinHrrn 06 {u/ifiax^', i^Ai
(unSuatr demanding that you should be, not their alliee, but their partner* in
wrong-doing T. 1. 3(1.

d. When a compound negative with the infinitive repeats oi used with the
leading verb. Thus, {i •61M1) oiit i^ tlaiitu, ol ar p 1 TtrtXnT^Kiit, aUtiiia*
•fvpalta. the taie doet not permit any women to enter where the dead may be
D- 43. «3.

e. When oMcIi may be recolved into oi and rlt, oi going with the leading
verb. Thus, oiSrrbt (=00 riMi) iiiapTitr . . . StuaiSi iimr there is nothing A«
deserve* to miss Ant. 4. a. 6 (=he does not deserve to mias anything), itfiS tyi
&r htuiiiinajT* wapafi^nu oMir I ask that you do not breot any of the con-
dition* to which you hme mom X. 11.2.4.42 (=«£ic iftfl , . , ra^a^nu n).
Cp. 8. Ri. 88.

,= Cooiik

622 NEGATIVE SENTENCES [*73g

flig AND fit} ov WITH THE INFINITIVE
REDUNDANT OR SYMPATHETIC NEGATIVE

X With the Injinitioe depending on Verba of Negative Meaning

3739. Verbs and expressions of negative meaniug, such as deny,
refuse, hinder, forbid, aooid, often take the infinitive with, a redundant
fti} to confirm the negative idea of the leading verb.

With liiiH compare : " Firat lie denied joa had in hin) no rigbt " (Shakesp,,
Com. of Er. 4.2.7) ; and " Lapluie ... empfiche qu'oii neae iiroiiitiie " (Kacine),
*' Verbol ihiieit Jbhue, daaa ale Ntemaod sagen sollteii " (St. Mark 9. 9),

Karapry ^i) SrSpatimi riSt ; dogl thou deng that thou hast done this t S. Ant.
442, drsifuXCiriuToAT'EXXiirat »i<) iXBtii' to hinder the Greeks from coming X. A.
6.4.34, ic^iivKa Tpoirtufi' a&roii , . . irtpoOrra iiij wXtiP they sent a henUd to for-
bid them to sail TA.-29,ti\iiP^taeeiiiiwo\\iirirarrlor\iyeir you will beiBOTt o/
yienking in public P. Ku.304 a, iriaxorra n1) irl t^» itaripur y^r aTpartvnt
they abstained from marching upon each other's territory T. 5.2f).

3740. The redundant n^ la oHed after &|i^(Mym atid d|l^^1|Tw dilute,
Ayarltf^ML retract an opinion, i.mXt<im apeak against, i^wayvpiim Mid Awonii
forbid, iinrrA doubt, AvoY>i>^vNia abandon an intentUm, i.wom.fArn^ai. con-
ceal, AvaXtfii acquit, A-irocmpA deprive, Airwrrpf^i* divert, &vax»f><rn>*A and i-w-
i)n|^l{^aL note against, ipvoQiuu (and compounds, and 4vafvdt ■((». Iiafn6t
tifi) deny, Eia|>Axo|Uu r^fVae. <tpY» atid l|Mn>Eii* «I|ii prenent, Jvan-tofiiuu opposr,
«^aPo9|uu beware nf Ixa i^nd ^^^X* prevent, i.vri^a, Av^o^uu, Wx<*, mT^*
{Attain from, KuXdv (and compounds) hinder, |MTapouX)4oriat alttrr onr's ptans.
(UTafif vAkh change one's mind, fitvov vap^v make heititale, ^^y" (^'■<' com-
pounds) escape, avoid, disclaim, ^v\&TTO|>ai guard against, em.

2741, Also after the following verbs : diravEA forbid, Anixl**^ dfprrciyr,
iwoSout resolve nnt, AirpocGdiciiTit )[|u do not expect, i^atpoiyat prevent.
i^'ni" "CQuit, MSaiKa and ^pafi|uiL /r*iir. Iptfxit hinder, KaroSit lack, luraSomC
|LM change one}s mind, iraioi put an end to, |Mo|mu and o-^Is savt from,
*MKTpJx" esrap^/rom, ^U^w. giee up, etc.

2743. When a verb of denying, refusing, hindering, forbidding, etc.,
18 itself negatived, either directly or by appearing in a question
expecting a negative answer, the infinitive has laj oii. Here both
the introductory clause and the dependent clause have virtually an
affirmative sense.

otSiU iriiiraT' irretrtu fiif oi laXOt '>:<■' "Aroiii (toi>t vjfuvt) no one eon- de»ied
that thev (Ihe laws) vrere exirelUnt 1>. ^-l. 24, rim old iT<ifir^ta9ai iiif oOx' ■«>
airir twIaTa^SaiTi tUma ; Who, think you, vnll denj/ that he too undarsiaHda vhal
is just f P.G.4Q1 c (=D(S(ti i■wapritltTlll^). Butfi^ aiia not used after tt ^/u.
t6K m, Bit m\-j (2002 a).

A. fijj ai wLtb the inflnttiTe here, and elsewhere, is used nnlj when the intro-
dactor; word or nords has an actual or a virtual negative. Since, fo d^io^ui >i4
tbEtq SttSaai I deny that I did this, fi4 conflrme the negative idea in d^MC^oi, ju

■744] NEGATIVE SENTENCES 62S

in tiK iffoBuM Ml »6 tbOtb ipiaat I do not deny that 1 did this, oi alter tbe strength-
■^ing ^f codHtiiis the at preSxed to the leading verb. Cp. " Je ne ale paa que
je ne tola in&Diment flattS" (Voltaire), la the fint seiiteuce ^i) lepeata the
■ negative result ' of ipnoSiiai (single Eympathetic negaiive, uii trans laiable) ; In
tbe second Benteuce ai la repealed with the Infinitive to sniu up the effect of eix
ipwtSiiai (double Byinpatbetic negative ; both untranslatable). After verbe nega-
tive in meaning (deny, etc.) fi4 and /li) 06 cannot be tran3)al«d in modern English
(see 2730). After verbs not negative in character but preceded by a negative,
and afUir virtually negative expresaions, /ii) or |tj) tt has a negative force (2746,
2746).

b. M "^ ^i<^ ^c infinitive regalarly indicates a certain preaeure of interest on
the part of the person involved.

2743. After dent/, apeak against, doubt, etc., followed by Sk or Sn,
a redundant ov is often inserted. Thus, ok piv oix oAi;^ ravr' iarCv,
ovx *£<^ ivTiXiytiv that this ia true you tmll not be able to deny D. 8. 31.

a. Here the ^ clause ia an internal accusative (accusative uE content) after
irriMytir. Originally the meaning seems to liave been ' you will not be able to
deny in this way — this is not true' where afianot redundant.

2744. Summary of Construcliona after Verbs of Hindering, etc.
After verbs signifying (or suggesting) to hinder and the lilie, the InSnllive

admits the article t6 or raS (tbe ablativai genitive, 1302). Hence ne have a
variety of coiiatructions, whicli are here classed under formal types. The simple
intiniilve ia uiore closely connected witli Uie leading verb than the InSnitive with
ri fi4 I'T ri fii) ad, which often denotes the result (cp. ^71 >ii}) of llie aclinn of
the leading verb and is either an accusative of respect or a, simple objtct infini-
tive. The genitive of the infinitive is very rare with tai\iu and It8 conipounda.
a. Some scholars regard the Infinitive with the negative as an internal accusa-
tive, not as a simple object infinitive ; and the infinitive wlttiout the negative as
an eztemai accusative.

1. *tpYii \u fi)| Ypd^v (the usual construction ; eiamplea 2739).

2. iCpvu (u YP^^i*^* (less common). Since the redundant fii} is not oUigatory,
we have the simple infinitive aa object (19B9), aa tl Tovr6 rtt cffT" ip^' t"" if
$ome Kcruple prevfTiti uHfrom doing thiM P. Soph. 242 a, tr Sunir ippHr^iii}' whom
I laved from death F. Ale. II, ol Bi^o ■litiSi ipmt kuX^uifi tdXi/iIoui dm dXX^Xsii
the ontAs ncorn ia the name of thf gods prevent our beiny eiiemie» to each other
X. A. 2. e. 7, and so usually with luXAu (c]). 2744. 7).

3. iIpY*^ I" ** (''I TP*4«" (rather common ; cp, 1) : tlpyar ri itii . . . tatmrfi-
ytir they prevented them from doing damiij/e T. 3. 1, olol rt Ijavi cot^x*'" tS itti
SaKptttr thrif terre able to restrain their wefplng P. i'li. 117 c.

4. ilff^ f ^ yp^^'" (not uncnminnn ; cp. 2) : iriax" ri lifiiin t<iU 'Atifnlnt
iwixnpt^r they refrained from immediittelg attacking the Alheniatu T. 7. 33,
foTir rtf, ft ct (wAdrtt ri Spar there 11 iinM one leko toill prevent thee from the
deed S. Ph. 1241.

6. <tp^ |u Tvfi |i)| tf&^r, witb the ablatival genitive, 1302 (not so common

M S) : rSf 7dp dtfiit lit inSpat f((i toG /i4 KaralSm for each elciii'bag will pr*"

1= Coo^^lc

634 NEGATIVE SENTENCES [174S

veia too Mtn from tinkittg X. A. 3.6. 11. Other cm« are: Hdt.I.BO, T. l.TII,
X.C.2.*.18, 2.*. 23, 3.3.31, 1.7.17, 12.80, 16.1*2, P. L. 637 c, 833 b, D.M.
149, 33.26. ObBerre that this idiom doea not have the loKical meaning 'fioin
not,' which wo should expect. Some write ri /14 or /i^ alone.

0. tfpYti |u ToS yfii^T (not common, and very rare with tuXtt, aa X. A. 1.
6.2) : Toii Si Spirrrtitir StTfiatt drtlpyvvri-, do (A«v pmeiU their slaves /)«m rta-

ntng avag bg fetter* f X 11,2, 1. IS, irttxaiaiToSSaicptarwedMMedfiomtBetp-
tng P. Ph. 117 e(cp. 8).

7. «tic rifiyM )u YP'^"' (B'>t i'B'7 conunon, but more often with ot •nMni
cp. 2} ; otti StatukioiMi rottir Sr in triSinit ; nor Will tluj/ prevent gov frim
doltig what you detiref P. L7S.2O7 e, t1 cuXAn {=:»itit i.) ul ri itpm 4fur
aXttnr EEpot r^iEaTaXa^ri> ; what hiitderi our ordering LVrua to take oIm tit
A«(£rAf« in advamx for utf X. A. 1. 3. Ifl, raSri ruti oit <fop»C»Tat rpirrar ttr-

tain people do not deny that thej/are doing these things Aea.3.260.

8. aix tIpY*!' p« |i^ a* Ypd4<i* (the re^Ur construction) : odn (U^tr^^w A
o^t al eaijitin-tpot •^ i/ii I do not dispute that you are wiser than I P. Hipp. Mlnw
869 d, oiiir tBirare irrix.'" f4 oi x^C^'^" ^ <""' "^ "'''' ^ retM ffrttnlisg
the favour X. C. 1.4.2, rU^iroJi^F ( = aUJr//«r(iJiii') /i^o^t . . . ipfnl^iUtort in-
SartiP ; uAol Afnden our being put to death Ignominiousljf t X. A. S. 1. 13, t1
a^ra iii>Aat /i4 06 ityutivimr ri rir; ahg pray dott thofi hetitate to depart tkt
iehole r A. Pr. 627.

S. o«K itpYn |u Ti |i)| ypi^v (since occasionally Qte sympalLetic of is not
added ; cp. 8) : ical ifniiii Spofai nine irapmHiuu ri n^ (_tp3irai) I both astent thai
I did the deed and do not deny that I did it 8. Ant. 448, rit . . . ami dnXtl*^ rt
n't am ia\ov9ilt ; who failed to follow you f X. C. 6. 1. 26.

10. oiK ■tpV«' |U tA |i)| oi YP^^" (very common ; cp. S) : oit iramiitofiai fi
H^aiytyuttir rir Inlll not refuse to declare all A. Tr. 786, Tiuirolpuiioixi¥^»
(Ihi Ti ifiia Xfrv" oiStlt d^i0ur^ir"> "o argunietU diipMee that tweet tktufw art
tweet P.Phil. 13 a.

Very unusual constructions are

11. oAk ripY" ri YP^" (<>'< "' ipfli"!' rlt Ipiw I taUt not rff\ue the irei
S.^.118).

12. ni/K (IpY*^ l^'l tf^^'-^ {'^' itt^ffi-irtift M rx*!* neither did he denf thai
As Add the money D. 27. 16).

1 3. oiK dpYu TDfi lull oft YpA^* (once only : E. Hipp. 4B, where rt ^ ai »

On the negative after mrrt, see 2759.

//. foi ov Kith the Infinitive depending tm Ifegaiived Verbt

2749. Any infinitive that would take laj, takes ;i^ oi (with a
negative force), if dependent on a negatived verb. Here ov is the
sympathetic negative and is untranslatable.

ait S.r wifoln^r fij) oi tH' itcitaStir ffa^A / cannot consent not to Itam AS*
exactly as it is &. O. T. 1066.

2746. /til ov with the infinitive thus often follows verbs and other

»7So] NEGATIVE SENTENCES 626

expressions formed by oJ (or a-privative) with a positive word and
denoting what is impossihk, improbable, wrorm, aenseleiia, and the
like.

aM(tf slit t' iaHr iWtn \iyur *t)) ai taTay4\arTat tJm no OtM by tpeaking
oMenirite can avoid being ridicnloua V. G. MO a. iw4ax"' {^f^"" i" *^ Seiir
m ar «i4 od poifBtiT Imaiaatrv j/ou promiteA hi make the inquiry on the grmaid
that it would not be right for j/o« not to aeiiU juHiee. P. R. 427 e, vin itiipor
inaeiiiu ilraf irw ^j) oi sal rnrrg xa/>fi^'<u / think it U utterly wn*elM« for me

not to trront you thU favour alio P. S. 218 c.

27t7. Such eipressions are, e.g. oix fciAi f tl/it, eix »'*'' *■' '"''i "^X !«»>*<
((^, oh (rri, iSdnarij (t/u, oA Jftatii /vti, oix i"^' tan, od irptwAeicIa Arrf,
fXiT^r ^Ti, oAc dHrriv tari, Svotd /o-n, And many others.

374B. Some expressions denoting repugnance to tlie moral sense inTolve a
nptntive Idea, and may have the same construcilon. Thus, brrt w&ti-r alax^'V
■Iw fif) oi vv^tvSifiif to that all leere athamed not (I.e. felt it was not right)
(Q eo^ierate tealoualg X.A.2.8.11. So with ofrxc^r Am ( = •>£ loXi* frrt),
hirir tan.

2749. Instead of n^ oi we find also ^4, ri lii, rod idi, ri fd) ai (but not roO

fit Bfl).

a. p.i\ (nrelf ; cp. 2744. 1): l\tyor Sri ... oi Sunto-oim ftj) wtiBtrBai roTi
Biifiaioit tAey Mid that tAep could not help submitling to the Thebaiie X. H. 6.
1, 1, aUxpir . . . 7l7»CTai i)!* yt pi] iefktiw it ie dUgracefnl for me at leatt not to
6e viillinff P. G. 468 d.

b. ri )i4 (cp. 2744. 8) : f^q . . . 0^;^ ol'' t' iIku tA »(<) imrrttnU pi Ae Mftl A
u>a« Nolpoaible not to condemn nie to death P. A. 29 c.

C. -ni f,^^ (cp, 2744. I>) : 4 dnpfa ToD ^1} Vvx^l*'" "ke inaMlltj/ to r«K
T. 2, 48.

d. -ri |i4| oA (cp. 2744. 10) : oi lUrroi fruSi yt rt M eiptfa.'Knpi.'ypiaw . , , elm
Ae could not, howeeer, jiereuade them that he imi not a man who entertained
graitd ietigna X. H. 5. 2.!i6, IXofoii rft ^fr ai rtprtir fixv it f* (rrotlonol not to
noire a tteo-foli divMon P. Soph. 219 e.

^^ ou WITH THB PABTICIPLB DEPENDING ON NEGATIVED
VEKBS

2750. pi) ov, instead of ^ij, is sometimes found with the participle
after expressions preceded by ov or involving a negative, and usually
when such expressions denote impossibility or moral repugnance.
fi.^ oJ hete denotes an exception, and has the force of except, vnlea*
Cep. «V^, 2346 a).

oi* ipa bnlr ipOiow ry iptKaim oiSir p^f fix irrutiKaOw nothing then it beloved
bjf a lover except it love in return P. Lys. 212 d, tvsiKytifot yif ir ((qr Tolayti p^
bA KBTourr^r ISpir for I ahould prove hard of heart, did I not ptty tueh a n^plf-
cation at thit S.O. T. U (SvaiXy^tt^ oin atm-lppiow, pi) tt KaroticTlpiM' = tl pi
taroirrtpoiiH).

assKsaRAH. — 40 ,

.OOglf

NEGATIVE SENTENCES

Il4 AND liil oil WITH THB SITBJUNemVE AND rNMCATITE

2731. Tbe use of /i^ and p.^ ov with the subjunctive is different
from that with the infjiitive.

a. In doabtfal assertions (180I-I802) eipreaaing anxUty, tiapicion, mrmite,
pij ia used of that wliich may be true, fii) oi of that nhlch nuy not be true.

b. After verba olfear and caution, where ;iii means lest, /i^ odmeAiia t«(t wit,
that not (2221, 2226). i

2752. p.^ and (iij ou are used with the indicative in doubtful asser- ■
tioDS (1772). In questions with ^^ ml the ai belongs to a single
word (2651 d).

On Srui ii4, hm iti) o6 with the future, see 1920, 1921, 2203.

REDUNDANT OV WITH irXljC, ETC.

2753. Eedundant tm appeara after the negative words »AiJf, x»>(»'»i
txTM, ovcu except, without, and after vplv (and p£X>uov rj usually) toe-
ceded by a negative, which may be involved in a question.

nrr <!^ ^oJMTat (4 niiii) . . . rXAiutf'a warrcix^' v^^' odv tit 'A^mi bM how II
teemt that tht gkip a aailitig everi/uihtre accept to Atheta D. 66. 28, rptr i' Mir
ipsai flSirai, ri aoi r\iar Xuirouuirj) y4MHt' drr b^Ore Ihou kriowtet tlie /act*, what
can aorrovi avail thee t E. Hel. 322, eu i' fiTTt tfri of vtpl rdf iiiHr Ulur iiSSiai
riiiupiietir0t Ua\vn.\ii ^ o6x 6vip b/iwr t^C^r but be atmred that l/OU uHll ptiniA
Foljfclei rather for yovr ovm good than for my prieale intereitt D. 60. 06. Cp.
" j'lroi vouB voir avant que tous ne preniez aucona rteolutiou," " le bon Diea
est cent fois meilleur qu'on tu le dlt."

oi fi^

3754. ou p^, and the compounds of each, are used in emphatic neg-
ative predictions and prohibitions.

a, nt liil marks Btrong personal interest on the part of the speaker. In its
original use it ma; have belonged to cnlloquUl speech and as such we find it in
comedy ; but In tragedy it Js often used in stately language, at (u) is rare in tbe
oretors.

2755. (I) In negative predictious to denote a strong denial.

a. With the (flret or second) aorist HubjunctiTe, less often with the preseni
■ubjunctivB (1804). Tims, fr nff,aa,uy, oi ^^ rare itur IleXoirgrr^iriM Up*\um
it T^r x<ip3' ifve are victorinua, the Peloponneaiaat will never invade four trr-
Titory T. 4. S5, oUtli (iqn^i lulrg Tur roXc^ui not one of the enemy mill ttawl
his ground any longer X. A. i. 8. IS. Dllri m<> ^iyvr* fou ihall tuH acape
(a threM) E. Hec. 1029, oi n^ iru Birarriu dn-^nr ol nMimti yoHT eKetmie* will
not be able to iHthatand you X. Hif 1 1. 15.

b. With the future indicative (first and third person). Hius, a< roi ^i^ w^-
foiLti TOTt nvser vim IfoOow thee S. BL 10^, oi pHi ivt^rrmi KSpot eipitr Oynt

a»S] NEGATIVB S£NT£NC£S 627

nUI not be aMe to find X. C. 8. 1 . 6. In indirect dlMoune, the future optative
or Infinitive ; as ieiawuitr . , ,iit o6 idi nort xipvaitr he propheiied that they nevtt
would dtttroy S.Pb.Sll, clvo . , . oin^rorta itpdifir iriXic he declared that
the ettf would never prorper E. Pboeii. 1G90.

3756. (II)' 111 strong prohibitions (cp. 1919).

a. With the future indicBtive (second person singular). Thus, oS /il) icarop^
m don't come doinn Ar. Veap. 3t)T.

b. With the aoriflt aubiunctive rarely (I8O0 «.). Tliia ci *.* Mp^avi dou't
talk twaddle Ar. Nub, 367. Many editors change the aorlst eabjunctive to the
fntnre indicative.

2757. There are two caaeu in which ov p.^ is not used ia conjunc-
tion, but where eaeh UBgative has its own verb.

a. A positive command in tlie future indicative (Becond person) may be
joined by dXXd or j^ to a probiblllon introduced by at ^i). Thus, oi iit\ XaX;ir»i
dXX' ioKovBiiaiit i,tal don't prattle but foUoa me Ar. Nub. 605, at) ft4 Ivriuriii
Iffti TOtf ^fXoit, Ts^ci ti ei/ioS do not be angry with thy fnenda, but ceaee thy
arath E.Med. 1161. (In E. Bacch. 343 Si with the future is followed by /iiiSi
with the future.) In such sentencea the force of oi continues into the dXXi or
Si clause. Such sentences are generally printed aa questiona.

b, A poeilive conimaud with ti and the future Indicative (second person) ma;
be followed by the future in a prohibition introduced by litiSi or ml idi. Here
the clause wiUi vi hae the form of a question expecting the answer ye>, while the
whole sentence haa the fDrm of a question expecting the answer no. Tbua, ei
ffty' ii^fii ii-tSi StAlar ipt! ; leltt thou not keep tilence and not teln/or Ihyiel/the
reputation of cowardice t (= keep silence and do not gel the reputation of being a
(Mioard) 8. A]. 7G, oiaSr jtoXeii airit lal ^li d^ifffni ; Kill ynu not call him and
(ic/H (OB not) teTid him awayf {=:cfill him and don't tend him aieay) P.S.
175 a. Here of ia to he taken also with the following clauae. Some scholars
^lake the question in the second clause independent of oil.

2758. The origin of the use of ei ^^ is obaoure and disputed. See Kvifiala
Zelltchrift fUr Ogterreichitehe Oymnamen 1BG6, p. T6G ; Goodwin Moods and
Tentet 389 ; Gildarsieeve American Journal of Fhilology S. 302, 28. 137 ; Jebb
on Sophocles /^ 76 (appendix) ; Chambers Glaasical RrvieV) 10. 160, 11.109;
Wharton o.c 10. 289 ; Wbitelaw o.e. 10. 280, le. 277 ; Sonnensctiein o.e. 16.
166 ; KUhtier-Gerth Srammaak der grieehtsehen Spraehe 2. 5 6U. 8.

NEGATIVB8 WITH &»rre AND THE INFINITIVE

2759. nwT< with the /nfinitive shows the following uses of the
ne^tives.

a. f.1[ in ordinary result clauses Including such as express an intended result ;
aa rar woiaiviw Hrrr aftijy ^i^ iijiym (117*' dimXXiTTweai lou luyifrav tanoS they

vte every effort (so ot) to avoid being punished and released from the great-
erto/evHt P.O. 470c

b. ^4 eympathetic, after verbs of hindering ; aa irixiiuiKit Hare /li) infiiiAnr
r^roMngfrom attacking T. 1. 40 (cp.2744.1>

028 NEGATIVE SENTENCES [sTtfo

H. — After verba of hindering &m ia nrely used for Aot<*i4 (cp.ST44.2) ;

flpv* fA« ramne fn front aftht walla prevented them fl-om reaclUmg the thort eul
to at Ptlieniata X.H.7.2.I3. Cp.P.Eu. 305d.

c ofi, when the UtiTt clause depends on a clauae iUell subordinate to a verb
of taging or t/iinJdng (2260).

d. p,4| at after a negatived verb of hindering (cp. 2744. 8) ; aa olFrc r^ni
El^iiJJidJiii tartxitr Sar/iirerat . . . firn fii) oi) SuurniJaf^iwt T<fr iTTpaTiiti neifAfr

will £utvA(ade>{)eabJ«(o j)r«ven((A«^ejVoni('einf seaOered Hdt.6.67. Abu
vrben tbe Sim clause depends on s nef^tlved verb (2746) ; as irtlraiiai yif ei
TOffsvrat oiSir Hrrt n^ oi cctXitfi Bariir for Iviill rafftr nothing to mveh aa nut to

die nobly 8. Ant. 97.

e. ai jiVj (cp. 2TM a) ; tw ovrui irmBitfnua iliaOirai ArTt . . . a£ ^l^ rov iri-
\n^Q I have eotuxived mteh a deaire to hear that I ihail not fall Mkind yoH
P.Phae.227d.

ACCUMULATtON OP MEGATIVES

3760. If in the eame clause a simple negative («! or ft^ with a verb
followB ft negative, each of the two negatives keeps its own force
if they belong to different words or espreasions. If they belong to
the same word or expression, they ma^ke an affirmative.

o( Si& Ti uti dmirfiviv oix Ipakon aiT6r it toaa not beeaute thejf did not tArm?
that th«V <'<<' "ot hit him Ant. 5. S. 6, iC m ni .ritr A4>tijrpa Siraiuu n^ ytiii bf
Demeter I am not able to help lavghing Ar. Ban. 42, oMtli oit Iwa^x^ " "" "'"
too* not suffering eomething (i.e. everybody suffered) X.S. 1.8 (oUcli Srra •*
= m»r]lbod]/ ia. commonly used loioiStli oi)), aMi riw ^p/iiuir' ^rnint six ipt ni-r
doet he not ate I^ormio (i.e. he sees him very well) D.33.40, oiS' et m S\\st
vo^it {isTif) 9i iiAaatiptl nor if there ia any other man uAo ia viae, di-e*
he love Witdom P. S. 204a,oM^ yi i lilf roynpit oit at -jimTa S^ho*!? XPV^
nor can the man who ia baae in private prove him*e^f noble in a public eapatipf
Aes. 3. 78.

37fil. If in the same clause one or more cumpotrnd negatives fol-
low a negative with the same verb, the compound negative simply
confirms the first negative.

sMilt oiSir tmI? Hpiati no one will do anything becauae of uant Ar. Ecel.
606, (iJl *)pu/9i}ffij fdyJed let no one raiae an uproar 1^.5.16, khI o^r tridtrt »i»d%
tiiaiiietf otrt rpit rljr yi^vpar oMclt ti\9f and neither did any one make aa
attack ftom any quarter nor did any one come to the bridge X. A. 2. 4. 23, t*«tw«

them (the gods) in fear never do or intend anything either imptoua or •iflAufj)
X.C.8.7.22. Soo* . . . amnon . . . ne . . guldem, <,i ^iit oiSi (276Sy. <aii
roXXoS 8(1, aft«r a negative, means far from it. Cp. " no sonne, were he never
■o old of years, might not marry " (Ascliiuii's SchiileniaRttT), " We may noi,
nor vriU we not suffer t1iis " (Marlowe).

a. In o~u< Y^ oiH llie first negative belungs to the whole sentence, while Utt.-

1783] NEGATIVE SKNTKNCES 629

Mcond limits a particular part. Thua, aUi yip oiH roSro f^tiraro for he did
Kol dM«i«e Me even in thlt X. C. 7. 2. 20 (cp. utque enim , . . ne , . quidem).
CP.E3-2, #32. So oiti^roiSi DTDS, (661.

2762. The negative of one clause ia often repeated in the same
or in another clause either for emphasis or because of lax structure.

ti oAr, ^(ijj) Ty<!( iffeiXioirai ittpar, jpoosi riS' tpyoi oix frXi)T loAo did not,
after j/oh had planned hit death, dan tn do this deed A. Ag. 1634. Tbe repe-
liiion is rhetorical when the negative is repeated directly, as ei viuapii, 06%, AyAr
H( not tri/ling, iM thit ttrvggle, no in trath S. U. C. 6BT.

SOME NEGATIVE PHRASES

2763. |i}| &ri, a^ Snt, rare); vix ^^ ^"^ ^h Srai, not to epeak of, to nqr noth-
ing of, not only, not only not, so far from (Lat. taiitum aberat vt) are idiomatic
phra«efi probably due to an (early, and later often uncouscious) elUpala of a verb
ottayiaff. Th\M,oiMyw (or.** <>ifi) ax«.,*.1, rfru (X^t* or rfrm) Br' /*> (w«0
MM Mjr that, let me not aay that, do not say that, n^i iri, etc. are otten used
when tbeee verbal forms cannot be supplied by reason of the form of Che aenCence.

a. ofx ^ (o^X i*M. V-h ^) ■ ' ' A^U (koI) not onlf . . . biU (alto').

Thos, 0^ >ri nines A S-pirwr it ^iruxJ? if r. dXXi col ol ^fXai aJroD not only WO*
CtHo in peace, but hie frlendt also X.M.2.d.B, tliiai ar ni, SrilSiiiTiirTiid, d\\)t
Tit fiiyar fiuviXta tiptir rr\. I think that not merely any private perton but tht
Oreal King vsould find, iia. F.A.40d.

b. o4x &<rM (rarely six ^^) or |il| Sn . . . dXXA (xal) 1b Bbona by the con-
tort to mean not only not (_so far from) . . . but (aI«o). Thua, aix *•<« X^fi*'
■Arsit fx<"i AXXik ^(urPiiirat ffaiTir laTi toiituA roXirciti not onlj/ are yoU not

graltful to them, but you let yourself out for hire oi apitblie man lo their pr^tt-
diee D. 18.. 131 ; nl, Sti P. R. 681 e.

C a^x ^"M (rarely o^x ^^) or |),4| (rt (|i4| Si»t) . . . dXX' oiU (|U|&0 ^^
iXX'o< ifiif) ia ahown by the context to mean no! only nnt (»o /ar ^m) . . .
but not even. Thus, oix Sritt r^j mMvQt iXnetplit ittTixi»f', liXX' aMJ BouXtUt
Herplii Tvx*" 4{"^1'»' f)' on'V do ine not ehare in the general freedom, but
we were not thought uiorthi/ of obtaining even a moderate eervitude 1.14.6,
w^JfiM iavrir *i)| Srt IIXoj-»i^i tlrai, iW oiS' iXtifftpar he coniidere himtelf not

only not a FlMaean but not even a free man L. 23. 12.

N. When a negative precedes, the meaning may be not only . . . but not

men ; as r^f oitlif . . . oMtrt it /14 Ihi rpoin Jtofifii ^XX' oil' fXarrtf r^t i(lm

Xa^dr you teould offer your house to no one not only gratti, but not even
for a lotver price than it iM worth X.H.1,0.11.

d. (lit ^ ('^^ often a4x dwi) in the aecond of two balanced clansea, after
an eipreased or Implied negative in the first clause, means much leas (Lat.

nedum); a»a6ii T\etr, utiSri impilffgai ToAi AvSpBt ivrarirltf it wa* not potttble
even to »fil, much lees to rescue the man (i.e. to Bay nothing of rescuing') X. H.
2.3. S6. Tlie preceding negative may be contained in a quution or be otherwise
implicit. Tbus, toutt am ^3ar tlm ouru raxi l^Btxt . . . irtolnrfi&yna, nil irt
rtroSror crX, ; doM (f appear to ifoa to 6e easy to Uam to quickly any eubject vhat-
ever, much let* a tut^eet of so great importance t P. Crat. 427 e ; cp. D. 64, 17.

680 NEGATIVE SENTENCES [ajti

Tbe taie «tx ^ '" '■^'^ second membET meum thouffh (P. Pr. S80d).

ft. |t4 *! Y*i '" t^B orators Instead of >ijr Srt, after a negMive mewia mucA la*,
•Iter a podtive much more. Cp. D. 19. 1ST, 6. 27.

2764. o4 fi*ot . . . &XXd koI (negaUTe dX\' sM') >k)( only . . . but altc
(Lit. noM •alum . . . ltd eliant). ksI may be omitted : UEually when the dXU
clause either iacludes the flnt claiue or la atron^y eoDtrast^d with iL Thm,

l^rtgr i}^Iwat oi tii'^' ^oOXeti, d\U tA a^i Bi/nvi re coJ x<t>'^'i" 1"" P'"* <"■ '
eloojt tAot i» not merely viretthed but it tht tame both tmnmer and leialtt
alike X.M.1.0.ai cp. D. 18.20.

3765. S n ^i{, tmr ^1\ except, unI«M. S ri (gometimee irritten trt) ft^, and
Ir«* flit, too. >i^ are used, wilhont any Terb, U> Umll a preceding aaaeitioo
(ep. t( >ii) 2310 a).

oA Y^ 4' ■P^'^i J ri »)) ;iia J* a^p rg dicpor jXn /or tA«r« wu HO tpring, exoept
one on the aeropoltt ittelf T. 4. 26, rtWovea, tt in roirar i^t dMx<*l>*'>. 'r*' A
iwiyicTi ainoXt -xjiiiaBai phlloiophy permtadtng the aoul to trilAdmto from (AfH,
except aofar ax the hat to make use of them F. Ph. 83 a, t4> f^t 'ipd-ravr ba >i4
fffwijrrct toXA <k twv JirXwv lArv ""^^e nia«f«ri o/(Ae coiififrf, *o/ar lU tAqr could
be teilAout advancing far from their camp T. 1. Ill (fc-a ipaTni Mdmtrs).

2766. ]id*a*ol (lit. an^v n'>Oi t^^* °^ (of tiine) olnuut, oil but (Lat. AiiUBa

non]. TbUB, iiirarai iuarire^r I teat almost torn in pieeet D. 6. 6, tri/iitt

SvDf ait ^Sq Ix*" ^4' rlXtr Ae tJiovght that he already tnu all but in pouentou
of the elty X. H.O. 2. 16.

3767. o4 |i1|v 4XU, oi pirrai UU nevertheleu, notieUhtKMdlnf, cp. LaL
uerum lanen ; Uke colloquial oi yip 4XU hae about tbe force of nay, for imdrr4,
cp. Lat. non entm . . . ted. These elliptical phrases reqaire a verb or aome other
word to be HUppUed from the context or general run of tbe tbought ; bnt tliey
often resist strict analyais since the contrasted Ideft is too yagus to be anpplied.

Thus, i Irrot . . . lUKfoO liieitow Herpaxii^ia" ' o' fi^' i^irrpnx^^"") ll^^U H4-

fuinri KOpn the horte wot Within a little of throwing htm alto over tt* Head ; (not
that it did throw him however, but =) nnertheleii Cyntt ktpt kU teat X. C. 1. i. S,
itl /tit otr si S' iiiifTtpci rp^HH nal Aattiai/iiwiai ^(XoT^un tpit dXX^hon «Ix*'>
ot idfr (tcit. wtpl naar) dXXd wpt mWlarur , . . ^iXavlc^ar whUe Our aneettan
and the Lacedaemonian* wiere eontintiallji fealou* of each other (not indeed about
base objects but = ) nevertheless thry were rival* abotU the nobletl objetU L 4. 66.
K*l 7dp dr i^uT avrti y' tinu fkoyon ■ oi iiirrin (icU. l\Byir trriw) CV trwt fv' I

TWO XiTfOf and (n fact put thus it would teem to be unreaaonaNe ; (It ie miot low- |
mer unieamnable but = ) nevenheUts ptrhapi it ha* tone lente P. Ph. 63 b. «i4
tK^rl It' , &6fKip', Du yif iW tx" kbkAi don'I mock me, brother; nag, for reaUj
lam in a bad way Ar. Ran, 68 (lit. for it is not ho but. Le. ft Is noi a caae IM
mocking, but). In these phrases dXXi seems to abow tnux* of its origlaal fone
of otheFwite (2776).

3766. of f.if»oWnor (^fet) again, not however that aontKpoodB to tinted-
tlve itt niiw iiiitiH) dXXd. Thus, oi itiii aitt fiappifout rf^" "^ again hat ht
apokrn of barbarian* T. 1. 3, oi nat aM' 'AxiXttff no, nor tmn AehHU* B "M.
tiiiiiroai inureiiTui s^oAi ntj6ui '■oit . . . (uiiftixo<^ *ll^' *^' p>tiTTir ttl
however that I bid you tamely permit them to infure our alHet T. 1. 82.

■7741

PARTICLES

3766. Under the head of particles are included sentence adverbs
(1094) and conjunctions. Many senteuce adverbs remained such,
some sank to mere enclitics, others became pure conjunctions, while
still others fluctuated in function, being now adverbial, now con-
junctional, as Kot even and and, ovSt not even and nor, yap in fad and
for, rpiy sooner and until or before.

2770. Conjunctions are either coordinating or subordinating. The
coordinating conjunctions with their several varieties are given in
2163. The subordinating conjunctions are
Causal: ln■^ Stori, Simrtp, Int, ira^, on, Inran, &t (2240).
Comparative : in, wmtp, naBdirtp, oinvt, ^, mrn, ^rtp (2463 ; cp. 2481).
Concessive: mu d (xd), koi iov (idy}, d koi, lav nu (23GS),
Conditional : «, Hv, ^y, 5y (2283).
Consecutive: uirrc, &c (2250).
Declarative : »», Scon, oSyam, Sffauytm, in (2578).
Final: ira, mriK, in, fo), etc. (2193; cp. 2209, 2221).
Local : o*, otov, ot, otm, &da, o^, ImoSiv, ^, 01171, eta (2498).
Temporal : Srt, &tr6Ti, l/viiui, lird, i-mi&^,, &K, liixpi, tart, tak, vpiy, flto.
(2383).

Some conjunotlons belong to more than one class.

2771. Greek baa an extraordinary number of lentenca adverbs (or partJcki
In the narrow senu) having a logical or emotional (rhelortcal) value. Either
alone or in combination these sentence adverbs give a diatinctnest to the
relallooa between Ideas wiilcli Is foreign to ottier languages, and often resist
tranaiation by separate words, which In English are frefjuently over emphatic
and cumt»er8omB in comparison to the light and delicate nature of the Greek
origlnalB (e.jT. Spa, 7^, nt). I1ie force ot sach words is frequently beet rendered
by paose, stms, or alterations of pitch. To catch the subtle and elasive mean>
Ing of these often apparently insignificant elements of speech challenges the
utmost vigilance and skill of the student.

2772. The particles show different degrees of independence as regards theli
position. Many are completely independent and may occupy any place in the
sentence ; some may occur only nt Che beginning (prfpoiiliBt particles, as drdj)))
otiient Hnd their place only after one or more words at the beginning {poUpott-
tivf. particteo. as yAp, H) ; and some are attached closely to a preceding word m
even form compounds with that word wherever it may occur (7/, ri).

2773- Some verbal forms have virtually become particles, e.g. iyt used wltb
the second person plural, 6pft used of several persons, parenthetic olfiai, I^Asi
&Ti, eS bIA> Sri, it Cae' »ri (2586).

2774. As r^fcards their meaning, particles may be arranged In claases, t.g
advertative, (t^rnMi((«e, aitevtrattee, conrmive, coninnative, eonfunctive, lt\fer

632 PARTICLES: &\\d [am

etUial, liUemim, InUTrogaUte, limitative, neffOUve, etc. TheM olaaaaa cumM
alwajB be abarpty distiiigaiehed : some particles fall under two or luon cluaes.
Many particlea, which serve to set fortb the logical relation betweea olatues, bad
originally only an Intensive or confirmatory force lUat was conflned to their own
olauM. The fallowing sections deal only with the commoner uses of the mam
noieworthy paitlclea.

dX.X&

2T75. 4XX^ a strongly adversatire conjimotioii (stronger than Si),
connects sentences and clauses, and corresponds pretty closely to
but; at times iXXa need not or caonot be translated (2781 b). Is
form (but with changed accent) dXAa was originally the same word
as the accusative neuter plural 3X\a other thi'itgs used adverbially s
on the other hand. iXka marks opposition, contrast, protest, dif-
ference, objection, or limitation ; and is thus used both irbere
one notion entirely excludes another and where two notions are not
mutually exclusive. iXtid is often freely repeated in succeesire
clauses.

2776. The Antecedent Stttement Is KegatlTe. —In its almpleat nse IXM
introduces a positive Htatement after a negative clause. Tbus, aiic irtpii Ipm
Tterii, iX\' flpiwT irii/i Ma oath iM not the warrant of a man, but (As man 1* war-
rant of his oath A. fr, 394, oi yip ipau-rS ^^^^ ''fV <^ dnwrir , , . trpariw^r for

they eame on, not with shouit, but with at tittle noitt aapostlbh Z. A. 1. 8. II.

a. After a question implying a negative answer or a question to b« refnted
dXXd may have the force of (nny) rather, on Che eontrarg. Thus, rt Iif « Umi
, . , ; iWi iWaut riiafiar tehaCt the need of your going T Nay rather mttd otk-
ert X. A. 4. e. 19. Here iW ni (m)}) has the force of and wA raOur (2781 b) ;
as rf itl iiiffa^flr \iyt' npl toijtsu, iW efix' rpon-riTr tri ouru rorfrnt ,■ toky it it

necMMtry to propose a dimutiion, about lAtt and not rather anitouttee that yom
will have U sot X.C.2.2. 19.

2777. After a negative clause, or s question Implying a negative answer,
dXXit, or more commonly the colloquial d\X' If, may mean except, ibe combinatioci
being equivalent either to d\Xd or to 4< In the preceding clause a fonti of dXXM

or frtpsi is often expressed. Thus, (rai«-t nr oh-ii dW iyii no one snots him

except myself S. O. T. 1331, tiiiw iBf\orTn ^uKiv dW 4 rin rXaCroF wisking to

praite nothing except weaUh P. R. 3S0 c (here dXX' Ij Is detacbed from •U/r),
rira dWir txaovi \i7oi' ^ifiovvrit iiul iXk' -i) riv ipBir kt\, ; vihat other rtOKUt
have theg for lupportinf/ me except the true reaxon, etc ? F. A. 34 b.

a. Distinguish the use of dXX' 4 except { = ti ^4) fn ri yaSo rruitltr trtftt ^-

MToi, dXX' 4 ci KaSopH the device at ang rate appear* different, vnleea I caa't me
At. Eq. 063.

277a. otSh dU' 1, nothing but Is also used elllptlcallr, ^>paTentlT by an
original suppression of a form of roiu or ylyroiai ; in effect, howover, the phiasa
has acquired a purely adverbial sense (merely). Thus, iie^9ipiuta . . . ^' iAfir
oiSir dXX' 4 ^ncfjtif )uH/i/mr We have been ruined by men who are obte (to do)
nothing except JcmIm (i.e. able merely to deceive) L8. 36.

; Google

i7«3] PARTICLES: &\\d 688

a. With the abore nse compare oiVkr kXXo <) aoAtng elie than, need witliont,
M)d witb, ellipse ; tm «l »d|>iai IwTtit eiltr i\\o 4 >u)fiio( tUrir iB^purai jrour ten
(Aotuand horte are nothing more (flsf) than ttn thovtaiui men X.A. ^2. 18,

ttiir IXXo 4 riXiv TJ)t ^irrsu irdXtirur ficaffrai doilJg ItOfAfn; elt« than tacK
abandoning Mt own city T. 2. 16. So also oibir IXXo . . . «| 1). S. 27. Cp. &\X*
oUivli, as in dXXo oiStrli it 7^1 inuiiAxoor the}/ did nnfAi'n^ eite than conduct
(= (Aey practically conducted) a lea-fight from the land 'I'. 4. 14. Cp. 946, 2662.

2779. Tbe orfgin of dXX' <( is disputed, some scholitrB regarding dXX' kb dXXi
(origiDBlly fXXa, 2775), nbile others dsrive 4XX' directly from SXXo, wliicli ia
thought to have lost lis foi«a sad consequently iu accent. In some passages the
Mm. do not distinguish between dXV sod dXX' ; and iW 1j and iXXo ^ differ only
altghtly in meaning. In some of the above esses dxx' has an adjec^val force, in
some it hovels between an adjective and a conjunction, and In othera it oiearly
baa become a conjunction.

2780. After a comparative (^SXXav, ri it\(iiy') in a negative clause i\\i hu
the force of al. Thus, nl tmr i ri\fiuit oix S*\ur ri r\iar i\\k Sardnit and
war 1> Hot BO much (lit. more) a matter of arms at (but rather) of money T. 1.
S-^. Here the clause with dXXd la more emphatic than if 4 had been used, Cp,
" there needed no more but to advance one step " : Steele.

2781. The Antecedent Statement is AffinnstiTe. — dXXa is sometimes found
after an atSrmative statement.

a. The antecedent clause often has a concessive force, and frequently takes

fi^r(2900). Thwa^T^itinaiffiiii.niiuultioictttaK^txiir- dUi ri tUym Xn-el

lit the part where we areieemi to me to be well dlipoted, but the tiiingt eaute me
Bn«a#<ne«s X. C. 7. 1. 16.

b. dXX' ti (>»}) after an affirmative statement often has Ibe force of and not,
and not rather, instead 0/ (sometimes with a touch of irony). Thus, iaiBir dXX'
oiK irdtrit iprirffti the uk» Carried off from there and not (or simply not) from
here P. Pbae. 220 d, f/ttl Afryliorrai dXX' odx aineit they are angrg with me inetead
of (OT and not rather tnith) themselvei P. A. 23 c. In such cases xal of (jKi) wonld
not repudiate the opposition.

2782. iXXi. in Apodosis. — After a concession or a condition expressed or
implied, the apodosis may be emphaticaUy Introduced by &XX&, dXU . . . y*,
iXX' otv 1* itill, vet, at leatt. Thus, il auim fouXor, dXX' i n3i t\t6etpot If the
body U enelaved, the mind at least it free A. fr. 864, tl J' ir tSsi toAtoh ^rifitte»,
dXXA rb -fi r« rup KpttTTm KopwoS iara but if we thould be baffled In all these
pninta. Hilt, a* they lav, ffre is etronger than the fruU of the Held X. A. 2. 6. 10.
So also in claoses other than conditional ; as dXX' irti . . , waripa rirS' i/ii* ofir
■tWrXar', , . . dXX' ii/i . . , olrrtpart but since ge did not bear with my father,
pity me at least S. 0. C. 241.

37S3. UU attscliad to Single Words. — dX\d, attached to a single word in
«n adverbial sense, may stand in the interior of the sentence (not in Hom.).
Thiu, AUAvW nolo at least, as In rl S^t' dr dXAd rSr a' Ir* i^XOtft' iyii, how
pray, can I tens thee even now f ». Ant. 563. So with 7/, as At* otr dXXd rSn y'
'ri . . . MeXlirvrr if therefore you still desire eren now D. 3. 33 (and often In D.}.
Here 4XXA rOr implies tl iti\ wpSrtpiif. dXXd Komellmes apparently implies n n^

.„H>,|C

684 PARTICLES: iWd [17S4

ri dXXo or <2 M dXXwi, eM., as Uy' dXU rotn-o taf thU at UoH (xqr 6Nt (U») S.
El. 416.

2784. iXki oppoaing Wbol6 Senteacea. — iWi well, vxll but, nay bat, ko«-

teer is oft«n used, eapecUlly at the beginning of a speech, In opposition either 10
Bomething aaid (or supposed to be meant) by another, or to a latent feeling in the
mind o[ tlie writer or speaiker himself. Thus, dXXi rpHrer iiin /mrrf^mfjw . . .
< T*\MvTator hot' tiicd tJrt toell, I Will first allude to the charge against ne Kkirk
he mentioned last X. H. 2. 3. S&, iXV £^Xc /iir KCpai rij*- irtl U rrrdu^niitt
crX, toell, / would that Cyrus teere alivt; but sinr« he it dead, etc X. A. 2. 1, 4.
Ott«n of remonstrance or protest, sh dXX' d^i^xi^"' f)0^< " ^ impossible E. K1.
620. dXXd is also eapeelally common when a previous train of Lhougbt or lemark
is impatiently interrupted, as dXXl raiha iiiw tI 811 \iynr ; but what is the need
ofrecoutUtng thisf S. Ph. 11. Similarly in

a. Replies (often in quick, abrupt, or decisive answers) ; ^ptro Sna^ ri tt*-
Bijlta' b f drcifilriiro ' Zedi tiiniip ml rtii)' i tt Kvpoi dmOa-ii 'A.XX1I J^a/ial t<, I^,

not Tovro fo-Tu A« iisit«d what the watchword wae; aud he replied: " Zevt the.
saviour and Victorg ;" and Cyras, on hearing this, said, " Well, laccrpt it and
to let tt be" X.A.I. 8. IT.

b. Assent, with an adversative sense implied (cp. oh, well') : dXX* «I foni,
XupHiMii well, if it pleasei thee, let ut be going S. Ph. 646.

C. Appeals, eiiiiirtaliooB, proposals, and commands : dXX' laiar but let lis go
P. Pr. 311 a, dXX' i/iol wtiSati tal ^j) dXXui rnki nay, take mg advice and don't
refute P. Cr.4& a. The tone here Is often impatient.

a. Wishes and imprecations : dXX' t^vxafi)! well, mjf blettingt on thet f S. O.
T. UTS.

a. Qaestioiis, to mark surprise : rHi ilrttt ; dXX' 4 nal veipii XA^tfu fir ; what
dott tho^ mean f can it really be that thou art eubtle too and without my tnowimg
Ur K. Ale. &B.

27SS. dXhd is often used when a speaker introduces a auppomd ob]«etiot]
(either in iils owu name or in that of his opponent), Ht]d immediately anawen
it ; aa dXX4 rii riw AJs iKctr' ir Igui eFiriM wpij raura. tT\. but, by Ze«a, he might
perhapt taj/ in reply to thtt, etc. D.20. 3. dXXd may here put the siippotKd
objection and also give the answer. Thus, tI yip cat ^v\6iiiinii iirrnriiartrf 1>
aireit iw Tgiirv rf coipy ; hrl r^r ilpitrt)¥ ; dXX' irrtpx" inairir ■ iW tirl rir ri\t-
fiet ; aw a^ol wtpl tQi dp^nji tpouXtitaSt for with what possible dettre would yea
have been sending them at thai Juncture f With a view to peace T Why (l,iiti
peace was open to all. ICilA a view to warf Why (but) you were yourteltrt
deliberating about peace D. 1B.24, Cp. French matt introducing a reply to a
question.

a. So in rapid dialogue objections may take the form of qnesUona, In wbicb
each dXXi after the first may be rendered by or. Cp. 2064.

2786. iXX& with other Paitlclea. — For example 1
UX& Y^ 2S18 : on o« Ydfi dXXi, see 2767.
AXU . , . Y* but at any rate.
tXXi. yi TBI (to£ Tfi) yst at leatt, yet bt nm.
UXd S^i wai (A«n.

i,vGooglc

J79oJ PARTICLES: &pa 635

iXX'Vj; lehyhoaf canitreaUvbethiitfv>hat,iianttbetruet Here dXXd marks

surprise, while f iiaks Lbe question.
UlXA lifirroi nay, but; aell, hoieever; ytt truXt. On ni (UvroidXX^ see 276T.
UXd |i^v >M|(, tut; hut then; but surely. Often to Inlroduce an objection, to

reject &n nltembtlTe, often merely to Introduce a new idea or to resume an

interrupted thought. On oi ^4|v dXXd, see 2T6T.
iXX' t|HM Auf still. Often without a verb, to Introduce the reply to an objection.
IXX' o4M Is BometlmeBUsedelliptlcally, aaln trip . , . Arah-sidr^YviiXtrpit t^f

iW oMi )utpir nay, tkerr, is not even ever so little (not only not a great deal

but not even a little) eoncerniag lehitJi he reported to you D. 16.37. HA,'

oiSi |u* Sfi is often used to reject an alternative.
UX' oir (yt) but (Aen, well then, well at any rale; stronger than f elr.

Kpa

2787. S^ (Epic ifXL and enclitic Sp before a consonant, ^ usually
alter monosyllables; all postpositive), a connective, confirmatory,
and iaferentiaJ pai'ticle marking the immediate connection and
succession of events and thoughts; the natural, direct, and expected
consequence of a. pi'evious statement of the exiatiug situation, or of
the realization of experience of some sort; and agreement of variouB
kinds, as between assertinn and reality, cause and result, premise
and coucluBton, explanation and what was to be explained.

a. ipa marks a consequence drawn from the connection of thought, and
expreMes linpreaslou or feeling; the stronger oSr marks a consequence di&wn
from facta (a positive conclusion).

2788. The etymology of ipa, and hence lis original meaning. Is obecate.
Some derive it from tiie root dp, seen In ip-ap-itKw fit, join, ifiri fatt; and
thus regard the proper sense as fittingly, aecurdingly. Others think the earliest
meaning was truly, fonooih and connect Apa with a lost adj. dplt, surviving in
d^-irraf, ipl-tniTBt. On this interpretation Apa wonld originally assert the truth
of its otea clause. Apa is found also in apa and yip.

2789. Apa is nsed in Homer much more freely than in Attic, and often so as
to defy exact transiatlon. In general ipa in Epic marks immediate connection
and succession, a natural consequence of something already said or done ; gives
an explanation of an antecedent statement ; or is used in recapitulations and
transitions. Thus, a6Ti.p iwtl ^' ^ipitr . . . , p^ ^ tittr tit dyop'ir but when they
wrre eolleeted, then he atnrted to go tn the assembly ^ 9, & titiiiB', ol i' ipa rirrtt
dc^r tyirorro ffiurp thus he spake, and all accordingly became hushed in lUence
B 92, irrrar iJ vi/itt Imiit HuradXigt, iv /la (rv^iirfit a^it inrfyraTo and MesauUus
dittrtbuled food to them, a slave whom (and this was the reason for his so doing)
the twtnelterd had acquired i 44f), At ip' t^iirtirtr xol dri h riiar Iff^mr thus then
he apake and put the bout from him ^ 163. So also in the later lan^cnage ; aa
IpwT'^ntt Si airiw rift iiMfrpit . . . ixtuptraro ipa i SPpot on hit mother's question-
inff him Cyrus natvrally replied X. C. 1. 3. 2.

2790. In Attlo, and in part also In Homer, ipa marks an Inference (conM-

68« PARTICLES: Spa [sW

quently, to then, there/ore, it neemi', after all, o/eourte, etc.). Tbna, tlwtw atry
tri ^affiXrti »S /lax'trai Sfna i)iupi>r- KDpos t' ilrtf tix ipa In iiaxtiTmt, tl it
Toitraii ti iMX'trai ra.U rtiUfai-t tba seer sold to him that the ktng leouM not JlyU
vUhitt Itn day*. And Cyrun anmetind: " Well then if he doe» not fight mtiu»
that time he wiU net fight o( oii " X. A. I. 7. 18, tiStU loTeO iriSi^t, iXiA xn^w
TeraS .... rdrrn li^i dpa rSr iyaBar ^iM/ioDi-ir no on« dtairtu drink meTal;,
hut good drink, since of course everybodg deiirea good thinge P. R. 438 ».

2791. ipa Is often u«ed of direct logic&l couclusloni in conductjiig an «^n-

ment (especl&lly in Plato) ; M rl oJr itpi f ux^ \tytiitt ; ipAr^r 4 d^rar clrai ;
vbX il>i'r6w, iiSii Ipa ; ml. iiatlrripor Apa ^vxi) ffiii^arit fenv ry diSif, ri ti ry
6pSrf vihat then do tee nag aboiU the eoiil t That U It vUWle or InrufMe / JVof
vitible. Then it if innitible f Ye». Connegueatly tout hai a etoter raamMoiwe
to the imittbte than the boily, and the latter to llie vitibie P. rb. 7U b.

2792. In the nrgument ex contrario Wt forth in clansee with lUr and IV, l^a,
Mually meaning in tooth, is comroonl; placed with the second clauae (P. Ph.
80 d, R.446b), occasionally with tbe first (P.Cr,4e d, L.840b), or with both
(P.Ph.97a,R.000c).

2793. In direct qnestions ipa adds livelinesa, while U the same time It nuuln
connectitn or conseqiieDce. So rlt ipa who then f tSi tpa how then T In t/ar*-
tlODB of anxiety ipa marks increase of feeling. Thoi, rl fi' ipa tI >i' AVaut; wAy
then, why dott thou dettroy rae f S. Ant. 1286.

2794. ipa occun In queaUona in which the odmlBBlbllity of one opinion is
interred from the rejection of another. Thus, *lri im, l^ni, S QeoSirf, f«ri m
iypit ; »tK Ifiaty', f^i). iW ipa oltla wpoaitaui f x<"wo ; ' tell me,' taid he, ■ The-
odote, have you an eetatef ' Not liTideed,' eald Ae. 'fivt perhap* the» jkw
have a houte that bringeinan Income f X. H.3. 11.4. Snch qaestiona nre often
Ironical (P. A. 26 a).

3795. dpa is often used to Indicate new peroeplion, or Barprlae genuine or
affected ; as when the tnitli la just realized after a previous emmeans opinion
and one Qods oneself nndeceived either agreeably or disagreeably. So, espe-
cially with the Imperfect Of tlmt, ipa means after all, it teenu, wAy (Am, m
then, sure enough. See 1902.

2796. tl tfia. A* &pa if really, if after all, if indeed, are commonly iMed nf
tiiat wlilch is improbable or unde^rable ; it (A*) |i4| &pa unleat perh^M (ntn*
forte, niai vero) is often Ironical. Thus, il ipa liyonr it bEtdi t\eyar if inirrd
U did tote place as they said D. 66. 28, »1 ^i^c il xal roih-' ipa Sti fi' riniW amd fri
if I mutt after all eay this too IB. 317, raXXijui rolj 'A^nlati wapim, fr <^
nri Kari y^r ^iw0ukrt . . . rati rSMrl rpii Snrrai iweieraaBai he often eojautlted
the Athenians, if after all they should ever be hard preeted on the la»d tUe, to
fight lAe world vith their fleet T. 1. 93, rSt it otr i rauOToi irlip SiM^Mfn r*i%
pievt ; ft fiJ) ipa 4 rqi dptr^i iripJXtta Sta^Sapi tarir how then eould meh « DM*
corrupt the young f unlets prrehanct the study of tirtue is oomtpUon X. M. 1.2.8-

2797. tl ila,) Ipa Is common after .rnriS, etc. See 9072.

3790. ipa Is often nsed, especially with in. to introduce th« a
otben which. In the Tiew of the apeaker. Is Cusualiy) to be rejected. Tbus, ij

ilos] PARTICLES: (tpa, indp, aS 687

aMr jpcir ^ Ip' iyi rirrvr !it Kar-YYopH mnifii yiyora I hear that he t* goiny to
My that Ifortooth (or if you pleate') havt been a partner in all thai t denouneed
D. 10. 202.

2799 Attic hu, In bimembnl claiues, rfn Spa . . . «tn or «fn . . . rfn &pa,
u tfr' dXi)Alj (fr' Sp' olr iiiriir Khether trulj/ or after all, (t may be,/aUeli/ S. Pli.
3W. Horn, hu alao » Hlmllar use with «St« . . . offri, and j) . . . i). Horn, baa
ifia. . . Apa(* 8ST).

aaoiX £ps, a confirmative partinle from i} + ctpa, is used in lyric and
drunatic poetry in the sense of Spa. Spa is postpositive, except in
New Comedy,

air ap» Tttpyor, adiE ifiir axXiffttai it ihall then be Called thjf Work, not mine
S. Aj. 1368. Often with rJi, m rlt Up' 4iioZ yir»ir' ir ie\iiirrtpn; v>ho then eouUl
be more wretched than I amf Trag. fr.aso. On interrogaUvB ipa, aee S6G0,
2061. Epic ^ ^ U both conflrmatorj aud intern^atiTe.

dT&p

2801. .AT4f (prepositive; Horn, also avrap from a^ + ip) OBually
poetical, but found in Xenophon and Plato, is an adversative con-
janction commoiily used to introduce a strong or surprising contrast
(but, but yet, however) ; sometimes to introduce a slight coDtraat (and,
and then), but one stronger than that marked by Si, trap is common
as a correlative to piv. It is often found in lively questions to intro-
iluce an objection ; in rapid transitions ; and sometimes it serves to
introduce the apodosis of a conditional sentence, dn^ was largely
displaced by the stronger <UAa.

ci

3003, si (postpositive), an adversative particle meaning on ihe
other hand, on the coTdrary (properly again). In Horn, it serves as
a correlative to piy or $ roi, and to introduce the apodosis of condi-
tional or relative clauses.

aJ) is often used with perHoiul pronouns, as dXXft ai aX . . . \iyt but do yov in
turn tell ut X.S.S. 5; and is often added to W, us ol'EXXqMi lri<rii ... ol 3' of
fidpfia^t ti* iSixorro the Oreekt came on, tmt the barbarians un their part did
not wait to receive them X. A. 1. 10. 11. Connected in meaning are Ibe deriva-
tives a,trt (poetic) and oiSi*.

•ydp
jam y*f (postpositive^ in fad, indeed, and for, a confirmatory
adverb and a causal conjunction. As a conjunction, yap usually
sti^ads after the fji-^t word in its clause ; as an adverb, its position is

6S8 PARTICLES: 'fdp C>«iH

freer, yip is especially common io sentences whicli offer a reason
for, or an explanation of, a preceding or following statement. It
may be used in successive clauses.

& yif b from t' + A^ (= '^}i 1* originally 0riDg proniineoce eJtber U> the
word it followed or to Lh« whole clause, wbile Ap« uarked ibis prominence m
due to Mmething previously expressed or latent in the context. The compounJ
•fif originally emphasized a thought either as the result ol existing circuiu-
Uances or as a patent and well known fact In inoet uses of tlie word, bowevi-r.
tlie force of Its component parts cannot be distinguished; nor Is it clear in many
CMM whether y4p is a conjunction or an adverb marklnc asaarance.

2804. Adverbial fip appears In questions, answers, and wishes ; and iq
many other cases where recourse Is bad to conscious or unconscloiu ellipse by
those scholars who bold that 7dp is always a conjunction. BlIipM is sometiinE-:!
natural and easy, but often clumsy and srtiflciaL Though we find in paia11i-l
use both incomplete and complete clansea with Tip, it is Improbable that the
Greelca were conscious of the need of any supplement to explain the thonelit.
In many uses yip has become formulaic, serving only to show the natural agree-
ment with the existing situation.

3809. In questions, liip asks for conflrmatlon of a preceding statement, or
expresses assent or dissent ; asks whether an act before mentioned waa not rn-
•onable ; asks a question prompted by some form of emotion ; and serfes to indi-
cate transition, etc.

«. In questions yip often marks surprise or indignation, and may frequenit;
be translated by u)h<U, loAjr, then, naily, suTely. Thus, rairrt \fytii iri rrparm"
rruxii Hr ; iyi yip il/u rrwxii \ do you, beggar that you (ire, addrftt yoirr ^h-
erol thiuf vahal! I a beggar f Ar. Ach.fi&S, 4 fp yip irtip; U the man rraVi
alive t S. El. 1221, or«i yip rai fia;((F<rAu , . . rir iiik^r ; do you really think thttt
four brother i* gotng to fight f X. A. 1.7.9. Sarliyipi who then, vAy teko f

b. Brief Interrogative focmulae oshiug for confirmation of a preceding stal».

ri ytf ; w&ot Men, Aoto then, hotc else f ri yip also serves as a formula of tran«-

tion (nour, nell Ihea, now what , . ., /urthermort).
liyif; ilttnoClQf surely this is go f (cp. n' eat ce pas). Often of aarprisc.
•t yif; is U not sof often In indignant questions; when not standing alont.

■ahj/ not f
wAt 1^^,- ■xiAm ifip; Imply that something is Impomlble (often of enrprin').

Cp. T& yip at ; In negative rhetorical questions,
2806. Iq answers yif marks assent, assurance, sometimes dissent. Tbu<.
fetriv yt taiwltayua toO roafiiiBTti, i(i><ii> yip aiSi ^trrbt dread indeed i* the tuf-
den ofikt disease. Age dread indeed and heyond all words S. Ph. 766, j^Xa^i^i
tlr Ttpl ipi ISixat ytytr^tiv ; fl yip dnl7Kij do you then confet* that fon km*
proved yourself unjust toward me f In truth I must indeed X. A. l.fl. 8, ^^' >■
lurTip€t ri waiila iiltt/iaTtSrTui . . . M yip, 1^ nor let tnotheri frighten IhriT
ehUdren. No indeed, taid h» P. R. SBl e, «ijt rdi' bBp ) a >ij) ^Mra -yi^ •« fit:
X^eir dost thou then content to thtt f No, for I am not wont to utter word* / d» ,
not mean S.O. T. 1620.

L:,.i,-z:-:l,vG00glc

iBii] PARTICLES: 7<^ 639

ft. yip is common in brief answers, as after ei, Su, lorn, tlxit, \iyti, ^t"'\6y^
roi. So la the rlietoric&t qaestions rut Tdfi ; ■-£17^1] adj used u anawen.

2S07. In wishes : ilyip. . . O it<mf a^i would that it d^ended on that
P.Pr.310d, iiJc^tTd/) i(6\»iii oh that you might perUh mretehedls E. Cyc.^ei.
Here yip uiarka the agreement of Che wish wiUi Uie exiBUug siliuttion.

2808. Ezplaiutoij (or prefatory) 7^ has the force ot notn, namelj/, that fi,
for example; but uauAlly is not to be translated, and eapeciall; when the pre-
ceding sentence contains a verb of Maying, thawing, etc. Il usually Introduces,
as an explanation, the details of that wliich was promiBed in an incomplete or
general Htatemeat ; sometimeB, without any such statement, it introduces a new
facL Whether this 71!^ is an adverb or a conjunction Is uncertain. Thus, iattt
ralrvr fW' X'V*^"''?*' •'"» laSor tfut \iytir. Ifr ydp rort jcxX. / tAttli H witl be
tnore interesting to tell j/nu a tnyth. Once vpon a time there lotis, etc. P. Pr.
320c, BVTw yip iricoTftTc look at it in thia tight L.19.84 (at the beginning of a
new point in Uie discussion).

2809. F.ipUnatory yip often introduces a clause in apposition to a preceding
demonstrative, to xuch eipreasions as TtK/t/ipar tl or iiaprtpior SI novi the proof
it tblt, i7i\or it (ioTtr) it it clear, ri 5i lUyurror but, what it of the greatest
importance, or to rtlative clauses (EIOS). Thus, wt e' fn n^xXif Bappii, tal rit*

icarariirtf'of - tl pir yip (explaining riSf) raktium raU fiir f\iTTewtt ttm rBn 4 rplr
^Ttfi^rtu i^' ipur and that ynu mav be Uill mure encouraged, contider thitfact
too. The enemy (^namely) are mueh fewer nam than then v"*' before they were
beaten by ut X. C.S.-i. ;J(t, imi,aupt' Hi »! rpSe, wt toXXI) i\tli ianr l^sMv
a^i dm. tvotr yip SArtpiy tirrir ri rtdntfm irX. let uteoiurider the matter also in
thit way and we shall see that there is abundant reason to hope that il it a good ;
aoiB death muel be one of two things, etc. P. A. 40 c, papripMr S( ■ AiiXou 7^^
toBaipo/iinp rrX. and thit it a proof of it : noto when Delos wot being purified,
etc. T. 1. 8, J Jlj rdrrwr (TxerXii^aTor- awt yip lip,ci>>irr^aiiiMr t,* TronipvriTeiit tlrtt
Tur TsXiTur, Toirovt Tvirmiravi ^^Xaist ^To^/uda t^i TuXirtfaf (trai bvt the mott
abominable of all it thit: we contider the moat truttieorthy gaardiant of the
Stal« to b^ thoie tnen whom we should agree were the wortt citizent I. 8. 5S.

2810. Causal Y^ Is a conjunction: /or (^nam, enim). It serves to Introduce a
cause of, or a reason for, an action before mentioned ; to justify a preceding ntter-
ance ; to confirm the truth of a previous statement. Causal yip often refers to
a thought implied in what has preceded. Thus, Xfirr/a a yiynivtui- liinttpoi yip
(causal) tliu nil r^f x<il^* 'r^' na^Xa7Jrur lal t4( iuniiitut. Ix" yip (eiptano-
lory) ift^tpa, »1 rtifa jciiXXi(rTB xal Dpi) ^itXtrara / must lell what I know,
for I am acquainted with the country of the Paphlagoniani anil itt rrtources;
HOW the country hat very fertile plaint and very lofty mountains X. A. G.tt. 6,
l«i, 3tf»TTjw ■ ToiJTo yip »' tx" P^"' 'povv-wtit alas, iU-fated one I for by this name
atone can I addrett thee P.O. T. 1071, i-naTH)6p.Tif Si irri rUt Aaifiai/uriw** ei
■yip it lit iTt/irew irdXir rpii b)iai but I was trusted by the Lacedaemoniant ; for
fntherwise, f.e. li/iJ) trlamur) they would not hare sent me back to you P. A. 30 c.

2811. Anticipatoiy y^ statea the cause, justifies the utterance, or gives the
explanation, of something set forth In the main clause which follows. The mnln
clause nstiBllj cont^ns an inferential word, a demonstrative pointing backward,

640 PARTICLES: ydp [rti.

or col, t4, dXU i or stands without a connectiTe. AoUcIpatoi; yif nuty often
be rendered by $inee, but Is often omitted in tranal&tion. Thus, In Ttlntr dn^
ran koI rdS*. ^rl \ilir -rip u^wr /Kwaptitrarral tiki, ol^ioi nr ^^Xrio-ror <lnu trK
liMtn therefore to this proposal also. Some of you will be going out to plunder-
Xote ItU my opinion that it is hest, etc. X. A. S. 1. 8, iatXBiir Si t^t raxlrr**,
ir yifi ol roTi *tt tiaimit . , ., raSrot inriiati and tehftt he Aid come in itraifht-
aay, he tent out hit eon, for he had one only son lldt. I. 1 IS, d ^Aai, o6 yif t
ttium Srti Ifiipoi oW jrg ^lit . . . dX^d ^/mfiiwSa kt^, /riendi, >inc« to« do iwl
itiH>uwA«re is the place of darkness nor of the daurn, let iis consider, etc c 100, d
#(Xriir(, arotSal ^dp (firl roi ^vy, lUrftiatr tip-firtit rl ^ ny dear fellow, *ine*
yov alone have got a truce, measure me out a bit of peace At. Ach. 102.

a. In ttiis conatriiction yifl may tie an adverb, not a conjanctlon. Caae« of
explanatory ydp (2808) and of parenthetical yip (281S), especially after roca-
U*e8, may fall under 2811.

2812. The clause with ydp since is often Inserted parenthetically in tlie
clause which it Is Intended to explain ; aai St {Kptroirgt yip ff»i tat wj ^4^) li*

tp<t SmyiyricKitr rj}' Poi/w norifa, ptl^un but, since they decide bf iihoiUa and tud
by ballot, he said lie conld not decide which side shouted the louder T. 1.87.

2813. K(U -fiif has in general two distinct meanings according as y6f is an
adverb or a conjunction. As «1 yip has become a fonuals, it is often uncenain
which of the two words is the adverb, which tlie conjunction.

2814. (I) KtX -fif and in fact, and indeed, tal being a conjanctiiin, and yif
an adverb. Here the clause in wliicb nal yip stands is added as a new uid im-
portant thought i where ydp alone would state the reason or the explanation witli
less independence and with slighter emphasis. The negative is oUi yip. Thus

KS^oi S' SpSit raiVi 'EXXijnii piiulrTat r& lof' atrroin . , . trtpj^tira t n raiVi
Paffi\iii. tal yip iSu airii Sn lUatr Ix" reZ Xitpautou erpartipa-tBt on *eei»J
the Greeks victorious over the troops apposed to them, Cyrus watched to ste tckiu
the king vould do ; and in fact he knew that he commanded the centre of tht
Persian force X. A. 1.8.21 (cp. 1.1.6, 2.6.6,2.6.2). So often in afiBnuatiVf
responses ; ^ otn dyarifffiit rortrwr Tvyxiivr ; fyili pit yip it iymri^iit. ml 7d^
*)f<4, 1^ or will you not be content if you obtain this t For my part I thalt be.
And so shall I, he said P. K. 4T3 b.

a. Ml Y^p Kot ond even is tal -ydp and in fad reinforced by koI. Tbns, lal
■yip ml dSiia i^cUnrri) aimU and in fact it looked to them as if there vxu perfect
safety in ao doing T. 4. 108. The negative is sitt yip oKt (2938).

2815. (11) Hal fif for even, for also. Here icaf Is an adverb affecting ■
single word, several words, or the whole sentence, and yip is a conjnnctioa.
The negative ia oiii yip. Thus, nol yip atroi for these too H. A. 22 c, nl yV
ilStaipAm eiy^iptvSa. for even wronged as I am I'll hetp silent fl.Med.S14, nu
yip pint 470^' ^' SimrBai rtlBtir for, though quite unaided, he would tMint
tiiat he was able to persuade X. M. 1. 2, 11.

a. Knl yif . . , ml for both ■ . . and: here laJ Is correlated with a aMoid
cat { as col ydp vyiAlnount ol rd fiiiiara tu /x^rrtt «al Irx^*"* for thote mAo Any

their bodies in good condition are both heitithy and Strong X. M. 3. U,A.

.oogic

3«it] PARTICLES: fdp 641

3B16. UU fif occnra both In conjunction and separated by one oi MTenl
irords, wbich are generally emphatic.

2817. First Foim (often but sfnee, (iuM however) : here there are two
predicates. In proee separation U the rule. Thua, dXX', 06 yip (nil), Sitat rt
^ap« but liitee he could not pertuade her, he gave her the manlU Hdt. 9. 100,

iX\' ttPit yitp Kmi iXXoi Tmiri iiSuiiaOrrai, . . ■ M ira/iiruntr IXXow ^' 4fi£f iiiMr

itX. iiRM hoieever othert too perhapt ealtrtain the same opinion, let um not watt
for othert to come to ui, etc. X A. 3. 1.24. In poetr; Che words are generally not
separated. Thus, iWi yip Kpiorra \tiiriru ririt . . . rpit Si/iovj iTTttxorrm,
nttu rota . . . yitvt tittee hoteever J lee Creon yonder coming to the palace, I
tnll ceate my lamentation* E. Phoen. 130T. Here Ihe clause coordinated by the
conjunction yip is parenthetical and gives, by anCidpaiion, the reason for tlie
dUi clanM. Cp. dXX' iril t 137, and Bhakesp. Sonnet 64 : '■ but, for their virtas
only is their show. They live unwoo'd." — The first form is found chiefly in
Homer, Pindar, Herodotus, and in the drama.

3818. Second Form (usually but indeed, but in fact, but the truth U, but be
that <H it mag). Here therOi is a single predicate. Thus, col atx ^ tri/U^r
)Jyu . . . d\U 7ip inoi Toih-wf . . . odiir pinvTi and I do not speojfc in dUparage-
tnent ; but the truth it I have nothing to do in'tA thete mattert P. A. 19 c, dXXi
yiyni&iae yip . . . StijitX. but indeed I know that, Wi. X.C, 2. 1.13, iW tW»p&
yip rirlt . . . UvXiSrir Spi/uf trrtlxarTA bat indeed I ue Pyladet yonder coming
at fuU tpeed E. Or. 726, iW ti yip Irn ri/upar^ icpiwTtir but indeed It (* Itnpos-

§lble to hide what lie* open S. 0, C. T&5.

«. Id ibis nse yip may have preseired, or regained, its primltJTe adTerbtal
(eonflrmatory) force. Many scholars, however, claim that there was a consciotu
or nnconsciooa ellipHe, after iWi, of an idea pertinent to the BituaCion ; and thna
regard this form as logically equivalent to the form in which 7d|] ta a causal con*
Joiicttoti. In actual use dXXd yip was clearly a formula used without any con-
n omitted Idea.

2819. iWi yip has a great variety of usee, most of which may be classed m
follows :

«. In statements of direct opposition : col raSri v« toX>«S in XfXqMmt, iXXA
yifi lAiiai t ipTtiiitl<^iiir8aroiiir,TiiST9raitli and you are far from forgetting thi*,
but in /act I think you are doing that which you just denied you were doing P.
Charm. 166 c.

N, This use is post-Homeric, rare in the drama, common In the orators and
Plato. It Ib especially frequent in putting and setting aside an objection sup-
poaed to be raised by an opponent (hyp<^hora'). Cp. b.

b. In real and ofmimed objections (cp, at enim) : tal dXi|^ yt t\ry<ir, d
Ztiicp»Tn. tnit. iWi yip, S YABi^put, koI dXXd wt\\i ^pi ilm So-u yet, and I
Maid what tea* true, Socrnte*. Perhapt, but in fact, Stithyphron, you *ay that
manp other thing* too are holy P. Eutb.Od, dXXd yip, i^-^tt nt, ai fifSicr dd
\ar0drtir Kanir Srra yet, btit *nnte one teill *ay that it t* not ea*y alaaya to con-
erat the /act that one U tctcked P. R. 3AS c.

c. In traDsiilonB. — (1) At the close of the discussion of an argument, where
the force of dXXd la like that of and yrt or emphatic buL Thus, dXXA yip, A

«>I£K OlAM. — 41

,H>,|C

642 t>ARTlCLGS: 7^ [ita

f3au\4i ravra /lit MiSi ait all* 6 n S«r X^it Eiu(, SenaUtn, I do not knmt «Af
/ thuvld diteuts Ihese mattera htre L. T. 42, dXXi 71^1 4<l<r ^i* A'l'nu biU U a
alreadg tiftie to depart Y. A. ii a.

(2) To reatnin die expreBsion of emotion ; aa dXX' Arai yip 4rr' /^, #!>»
tut no, /ant «iIcR(/ur A« u m^ itfRfr E. ECl. 1246.

(S) When the approach of a new acwr ib announced. Cp. 2817, S8I8.

3820. Othw Combmatlona. — ifdp &|>a/or «ur« ruoufrA.

^4p 6^ for 0/ eovrst, for indeed, for j/ou must knoie, u ^aiJr yitp Uj for tf
eouree we say 10.

Y&p Mj miti for I preeume, for doubtlet*.

ydp oi* often of tianh ttsaent, as oi yip oSr certatnlf not, X^w yip oBf err-
taintjf, I do taji to; leM often to explain (foreertainlf); hJ 7!^ a0r (not yerj
oommon) la atronger than cal ydp.

yif «ov /or I tuppote.

Tfif Toi /or turelg, for mark gov ; sonietlmeB nal yip rw.

2821. yi (postpositire and enclitic) is aa intensire and restrictive
particle with the force of of lea^, at any rate, even, certainly, indeed;
but often to be rendered by intonation, yi may indicate assent, con-
cession, banter, scorn, deprecation, irony, etc. ft emphasizes single
words or whole phrases or clauses.

a. Single words. So oft«n with pronanns, Mf7<«X /all«a«( (ezcladiiig oth-
era), l/ii yt cp. mi-ch, S yt even he (Horn.), abrii yt, and vrllh a repeaMd prT>~
noun (S. Fh.llT). Other words, aa i n ^Xii 71 akatever f on iik» Ar. Ran. 3.
rX^flfi 7f oix Anp^aXsl^tf' ar to^i roXi/iiou in Humbert at leaat we thould not
attrpaes the eu«ntv X.C.2. 1.8.

b. With phnues or clauaea. Thea, At /i4 li' irifur, rsO fcoB 7* wporrir'^r, aLmf
i^i lit that he may not tAus tend me aviaj/ in diehonouT — teho am the trnpfliant
of the god R. O. C. 1276, drtfpifrrout rtnwSor, 9x07' twlapnr iitbrrt jt whopaawk
men who noear faleely V 279.

2822. yi maj be uaed twice In the same sentence. Thus, hrel y'' ipnanf
Itari ToTt 7( aii^poiiiT xince indeed that which evfflcee their nanti it enough for
thewite E.Fhoen.64G. Cp. Hdt.1. 187, Ar. Ve8p.l507.

2823. 7^ stands between article and noun, u of 7' ftrfpMrw (after a pi«poal-
tlon, aa Iwyt ry ipartpi); between noon and adJectlTe, or after the adJectlTc aa
ir^P ye aa<p6t. Or iriip ai>^6t yt ; after a poBMSBiTe pronoun, as tiiit y N^t ; alter
Itin, Si. Ti, a^&Titi yt i\ti^ Xiyu. When yi Influences a whole clauae It atands
ss near aa poaaible to the introdnctorjr conjunction ; as <t 7«, ipA ye,

2824. yd In contrasts and alternatives ; aa ri t' ti \fyea yt (alaxpi), tpft U
II* (Aoa dott not indeed say, bat do shnmefnl thingt Co Die B. And. 280, fni tpt^
7* 4 <partp&t either tecrrtly or openly T. 0. 84, 4 «'»^1 4 lifu" 4 'r*p"rit ti or wiar
or held in honour aye or old P. Hipp. M. 301 a (here yl Indicates a change in aa
alternative series ; cp. aire . . . aSri . , tM yt and xai . . . ye 3889).

lajo] PARTICLES: tovv 643

2825. yi In replies ud comments (ytt, imII). Tfaoi, ioait rnputattU ; San
y, Ainf, rdxwra doe* it Mem bett to you that I ihovld gite wajf f Aye, faf lord,
and wtth all tpeed S. Ant. 1103. Here Ktd . . . yt in common, aa nU oiti^ yt
iriritt re«, and no tooHder P. Tb. 143 b.

2826. (t Y* (nrely tmi v«) has & cauBal force, much like qui guidem,

giippe quL Thus, irora Mytti . . . byt mXt^ii iiii wriirtpor trra Ka0TI>b9ai

yon are linking abtuTdl}/ In bidding me who arn the younger take prectdtnee
X. M. 2. 3. 15. So with other relatlvea, aa slot, tcoi, Oirwtp.

2827. y4 Bomelimes marks an ellipse (8. Ph. 1409). When the verb of the
apodostB is omiUed, the prousis often has "r^ (so usually in Aristophanes, t,g
Sab. 867).

3838. When 7/ is followed by other parUoles, It belongs with the empba>
■iied word, and the other panMea retain their original force ; as rait y jtirToi
AyaSatt yef the brave nl leatt X. A. 1. 9. 14. So y Bi}, y iiir ii), 7^ tw (often
naed like YoGr in glTing a reuon for a belief), 7^ rot Hi. With tlie Imperative,
yt ia rare except when it la followed bj another particle, aa ifa yt infir
8. O. C. 687.

3829. After <rther Particles. — For example :
U t*: here yi nanall; does not empbaaise 1^ bat either a ainglp word or the
whole ctanse ; as ^itt* ti yt ot^uu wirra xoafria bvt toe at leaet, in my opinion,
thotUd adopt every mean* X. A. 8. 1. S6. ij , . . y< la often used when two
tblnga are compared, In order to show that one la more important than the
other.
nmX . , . 1* Bometimea means yet, and and sometimes 7^ emphasizes the lulersen<
ing word. Thus, niUt y SaDfia ye*, and no wonder S. O. T. 1132, ical rrlffm
y oMdt jcT^ot and offootttept there fa no $ovnd S. Ph. 20. nl . . . 71 often
emjdtaaizce one Item In a series, and especially the last item. Here ical . . .
yt rpn (lol wfh 70 and beiida is oommon. Cp, P. O. 460 d, 4A9 b.
pht ft lends force to a contrast (P. S, 180 d) ; sometimes It has tiie force of that
U to *ay, for example (T.e.86).
Frequent comWnationa are 4XX' a^t . , . yt, firm. ... ft, yif ■ ■ . Y*i •txetv

3030. Y»«* (postpoaitive ; first in Aesch7lQS) Ja a restrictiTe par-
ticle from yi + oSv. Its meaning varies aooording to the prominence
of the yi or ow ; often certainly, at any rate (at aU eventii, ai least), ymv
commonly confirms a previous general assertion hy giving a special
instance of its truth (the special instance may be a seeming excep-
tion), ydw is thus used in bringing forward a reason, which, while
not absolutely conclusive, is the most probable explanation of a
previous statement.

tri iri^ oSrw ■•ctai^t tlvt rir 6#' ^fUSr i/TTtiittiiww ■ ffituyor yiiBi- rpit iKtlnn
nraXirifn 4f>aT for they are evea more eoirariaa than thoie \eho were beaten by
at, M any rate they denerted •*» sud *ougAt refvge viith th«m X. A. 8. 8. 17.

.OOglf

644 PARTICLES: S^ [9^1

2S31. yoBr nutf emphMlze n pronoan ; u rpit YoCr f^wS B. A}. 697, ri -/m
*A 8. EL 1400.

2832. Id answen yaSt means wttt, at letut ; get certainly; as «I«lt 7*ii
I. C. 6. 3. U.

2833. Yo" Bjtda the proof of an assertion In one of several possible bets or
occurreaoea ; yip gives the reason in general, but gives no paiticalar instance 1
I* atr has an advenative force : ' be that as it may, gtt at a«]/ rate,*

ii

3834. U (postpoaitive) was originally ao adverb with a force not
imlike that of on the other hand, on the contrary; later it became a
DoninDction commonly represented by but or and, which ai-e, however,
mere makeshifts of translation. 8( serves to mark that something is
different from what precedes, but ooly to offset it, not to exclude o^
contradict it; it denotes only a sligot contrast, and ia therefore
weaker than dXAo, but stronger than koi. St is adversative and copu-
lative ; but the two uses are not always clearly to be distinguished.

2835. Adveisative U often marks a silent contrast, as at the beginning ol
speeches {iy& Si ovru -nynisttd X. A. 4. 6. 10) ; in questions which imply oppo^
tlon lo something juatsaid (SO. C. 57); In answers (S. O. T. 379); inobjectiooi
or corrections (S. AnL 517) ; in ri Si, ri Si oa the eonlmry, tehereat reallf,
where a true opinion is opposed to afslse one; similarly in rOr 8^ but in/acL bat
a» the ea*e Hand*. When Jl^ is balanced by /lir (30M) it is antithetical aihct
than adveisative.

a. 1/ after a pronoun following a vocative produces a pause ; as Mt^ »l I'
tyuyt wi/ut fci> ah Niabf, thee I regard a* divine S. El. 160.

b. 3' Instead of dXXd la rare except In Ibe poeu and Thacydidea. Ttma,

rfiaiiitrig'Bi 71 Torra ^qjcrl reBpyar, *pv^ H Kt06t make JlaoWK UlU plan to ao
one, but hide a in secret S. Ant. 86, oin twl nmji, hr' it^uStpiiaa Si rUr 'EXXfrwr
ro^XiiXvtfa I have come, not to harm, but to liberate, the Qreekt T. 4. 8A.
Sometlmea 06 pir precedes when Si is used like dXXd (T. 1. 50).

C But Aol Is dXX' oi or <A pimi, not o( St, in order hi avoid Confusion with
oMi nor, not even. Bui afi and Si msy be separated, ss oi pavXa/iirur Si . . .
wperxupiit btU Mince they did not reixh to surrender X. H, 1.8. 13.

3836. CopoUtlre U marks transition, and is the ordinary particle used in
connecting successive clauses or sentences which add aoniething new or differ-
ent, but not opposed, to what precedes, and are not joined by otlier particles,
■ocli as yip or oCr.

Copnlalive Si ia common in marking continuation, especially when sometbitig
subordinate is added. Thus, when a new phase of a narrative is developed (X. A.
1.2. 7-8) ; where attention is called to a new point or person (as in t1 V l«TirO ;
when an interrupted speech or narrative Is resumed (X. C. 1. S. 41, 8. Tr. SSI'':
where a second relationahip is added {p-^rmp Pan\itn, ^avfXfui f iidi tts MMA«r
of the King, and my Queen A. Pere. 1G1. 'HiiH . . . Mfrtalut drmcUF, nXtftUr
it «(iffa^be seized Eion, a colony of Mende, and which hod been Ao(UI«T.4. 7) :

3838] PARTICLKS: 8i 645

when U has a force like thnt uf yip (X. C. 0. 3. 10) ; tuid in ml ... N and

aUo (Epic ml t4), 2mi.

2837. Apodotic EJ.^The bepDtiing of the principal clause (apodoaiB) of
condiUona) atid coiic«H8iTO aentences U often marked by ». Apodotic >^ ii
found also in the principal clause of causal, temporal, oompanuiTe, and TelaUve
senteDCW ; and regularly gives greater emphasis to the main clause, which la thus
distinctly set off against the subordinate clause. Apodotic it is very common in
Homer and Herodotus, not rare in Attic poetry, but Infrequent in Attic prose,
where it is used especially after an emphatic personal or demonstrative pronoun
or when a participle represents the antecedent clause. Thus, din i TaOff Apiuurt
. . ., ^\8* S' 'AS^rq while he wot revolving these things, then eame Athene A
108, tl afr iyA /iti iiyiiUKu fifrt ri km /l^ti ri jficaia, ifuh St tiSittri fit aecord-
tnglg if I have no knowledge ett/ier of tehat is holy or lehat is juU, do fou then
titMruet me X. H. 4. 1. SS, trtl rolrur at tAnuial trt riletir n^ Jii««nt, ad It aSt
voliro-er ifnee therefore I am not able to persuade you not to scpoie 11, do yov
then do at folloaa Hdt 1. IIS, 4iii9nAlar , . . Sawtp bI jrXtrai ovr* St nol ol
vcXrurraf as the hoplUet SO also thepeltasts sleep X. C. 8. 6. 12, twiiSii Si i^mt-
/•flim /tixv i'P^rtiimr . . ., ^-alKimu S' tiS' twraSSa wiajj t^ ivrd/ui xfl^^l'i""
but tchen on their arrival they had conquered in battle, not even then did lAa^
appear lokave made use of their entire force T. 1. 11, col iroT< jtrot wiyeu . . .
airot S' tr rnfrgii iUti and once leheu there was afroat he went out in the midtt
of this P. S. 220 b.

a. Apodotic 3^ often resumes a M In the subordinate clause and carries on the
opposition expressed by that clause ; as ti i« ^6\ts9t . . . i*\rii)Mroi iwti ir
po6\ii»9t taToaxiit . . ., rXoEa S' liiir wiptrrir but If you tcish to teleel some
pltwM toherever you please anil take potseteion of it, you have thipi at eomtaaud
X. A. 6. 0.20, 1 S' Blffxt-^' ^f"'* l-fp" ■ ■ -, raOra it mtA x<il>»r /^x- but the

cenDB which cause us t&ame, tAese remain in force I. i. 170.

b. The use ol apodotic S* should not be regarded as a survival of original
coSrdinalion,

2S38. U without fi». — A clause with S4 often has no correlative particle in
the clause with which it )s contrasted. Here ^r is not used because the opposi-
tion in the first clause was too weak, or because the speaker did not Intend to
announce a following contrast or did not think be was going to ukc a contrasted
d4 clause. Sometimes the entire first clause may have to be supplied in thought
from the geneml connection or from what has gone before. Si without iitt in
Buch cases is common In poetry, but not rare In prose, even in brief antitheses,
as i ritrtt iii -tKlxarTtu UyciF, dffvt S' eM«lt il'rtU Setirtrrai exploits vshieh
^vergbody eontlnuotly desires to recount, but tohich no one hat been able to set
Jorth adequaielg D. 0. 11. See also 2335.

a. When a relative construction passes over Into a construction with a per-
aonal or demonstrative pronoun, the relative clause luually has no *i/r. Cp.
Sopb. AJ. 457, quoted in 2517.

b. at U, when opposed to a larger number of persons or things, Is often used
'Witbont oi /tit, as rpotXii^iMTtt tui xi^^'i •! >' ^1 f^^ having gone for fodder,
4ind some for fuel X. 0.6.3.9.

d4d PARTICLES: &} t**M

2839. U with othorPartlclea.— For example:

V &fk, wblch BometimM followB M^r.

V si and t|u»t U mark stronger oppoalUon tban U alone.

St Mj &«t then, but Hint, *etll but U otWD used In pMdng to a new poiuL In
AriBto[dianM Uiia collocation la oaed almost always in qntrtons.

3840. GVj (postpositive except in Horn. 8^ yap and poetic S^ ron|
marks something as immediately present and dear to the mind, ana
gives greater precision, positiveness, and exactness. It sets forth
what is obvious, acknowledged, and natural, and often corresponds
to voilH. ^ is used with single words (especiall; adjectives, adverbs,
pronouns, and conjunctions) or, as a sentence adverb, with whole
■clauses. SiJ usually stands after the word it emphasizes, though it
may be separated from it by one or more other words.

2841. S^ of what 1b Obvlotu and Natuial. — Thus, trri Si) you tntne of
count, Sn ii it is manifestly necetmry. Bo o£x elrui lx« ; tx" '4 i* "Ol thlt tot
Of coune it it P. A. 27 0, nr S' ipirt ti but now you certalnlf tte X. C.3.!.1!.
Haptoarti iiir Sii 4 *i4tw ^4^X< ''V K'pv Farytatlt, hli mother, natMniBf tup-
porUd Gyrut X. A. 1. 1. 4.

2842. Ironical S4|. — Tbua, 2«^drirt i <r<>^ ti Soerate* the wtte fonootk
P. A. 27 a; olten At Uj, bs te 14 o-^ /uk riparm ' kpytluf tc-g tltat fou/onoiilh
thould be the lord and matter of the Argivee I A. Ag. IflSS.

2843. Intenaive ><( emphasizes, and makes definite, adjectlvea, adrnbi.
pronouns, and other words. Tbua, Irarrn Si) abtolutely all, tpimrr** H Ih*
very beet, nim Itf quite alone, SMyoi i^ very fete; ovrw j^ Jutt m, Strtf H
exactly as, raXUicii J4 very often, S^)ia H quite plain, *G* ti juH note, now at
once; iiatnit J4 thit (and no other), St Jif who indeed. Witb indefinite pto-
nouns 14 increases the indeQniteness (339 e) ; as Ifra !■# uAoever at alL Wiih
otber words ; tl tii if indeed, ei it| no indeed, Xra Sij that in truth.

a. With Imperatives and in questions i^ adds urgeno; ; as Amvt 94 praf
JiitenlrlHii why,pTayf

2844. 44 may Introdnce emphatically the ccmcloaioD ol a temporal sentence
or ol a narratiTB on passing to a new topic ; as frraCAi 14, rirt 14 the» iMdeei.
then and not till then then it teas that. Cp. X. A. 1. 10. 1.

3843. Temporal Wf otten, especially with col, approximates in meaning to
Vv alr'ady. ThuB, i it SarAt utiMn tiru I4 Y^i but he i* dead and already it
hidden beneath the earth S. O. T. KflT, irlm . . . 9iipifv ml ti) S6b itt^t trim
you have hunted (already} for tu>o dayt X. C.2. 4.17, ical tii \iyt ri well / will
telJ thee (wlthont further ado) S. Ant. 245. So also tn rAn 14, ri>* S4.— 01
succession, 44 means next. — Poetic Ealri (S^ aSrt) means now offoitt.

2846. ConsecntiTe and BeanrnptiTe U| Is used to set forth an Inforoice,
draw a conclnslon, denote a consequence, and mark a transition (fi4r <4 . , .
80' Here )4 Is a sentence adverb: accordinffly, then, of eourte, dearly, yea

aasa] PABTICLES : Bal, ^0tv, Stfrov, ^ra, Srt 647

W«, 1 Mf. Thoa, fX<7or ffrt urUour >«iitw^ voXM tu^ ^nrrs, itixtt t*i raU
npomrf^* '^ da^aXJt clfw JicrirqfoDr tA«v Mid thai they had Men manpjlfvi
nilblfl fa tAfl nf^JU ,- aeeordittglg il Mtmai to the generalt to be uiuaft to ancanip
apart X. A. 4.4. 10, ttpaitMi pit S^ ovrtn tlrtr- iAarawra Si col IXXei waOijil
Pheraitlai then ipake thvi ; and mang othm also riiM to speak X. C. 2. 8. 16.

2S47. kqX Uf : (a) Jntroducea a climax, as ral «j) t6 lUyurror and above alt,
•ehM itlhtinain thtngP.AAl b. (b) Inrepllw = uvll; as ^X^or miTu - jhI 8^
0\^tt loot dovm I Well, I am looking Ar. At. 175. This la aktn to the tem-
poral uae. (c) In aaaumptlons = auppoae ( ITTl). On nl a^ ml ie« S890.

Sol, B^Ocv, firjirov, MJTa

2846. Sol is used tn oolloqaial Attic after interrogatJve worda to ezpMoa
wonder, indignation, etc. Tbus, ri Sal ; rUt ia( ; rehal then f how to f

3849. Mfit9 truly, fortooth, 1h oommonly used of apparent or pretSnded
Iruth, and moetly witb an ironical tone. Thus, iiapTiivjire.t SfjStr in roil' Srra
IK thou Katt mocked me fortooth at thoitgh I were a child A. Fr. 060.

2830. E^jvov probably, Ipreevme, Iihould hope, (foubtZess, you will admit,
in stronger than to6 perhapt, I euppoie. Siiwau often has a touch of irony or
doabt in stating a case that would seem to be certain ; as l(rrt ifrou IStr fXwt
dr^X<* yo" ^now, / premme, uA«r« the lun riue X. A. 6. 7. 6. In questions
Hw«u expecU the answer yeg. oi S-ljrou ctrtainlj/ not and it tt not tot (with

2891. Wr* atiuredly, really, in truth, is rare outside ot Attic It occurs :

(a) III answers, often when a word is repeated with assent; ae yiynitKtS' Ifmi
fra tafr 4i' 4 yurli ; yiyriiricoiitr j^ra do you know who thlt aoman it f Te»
Indeed toe do Ar.Thesm. 006', ai S^rs tnrely not. In strong or Indignant denial,

(b) in qnestEons, to mark an inference or consequence, as rCtt I^b; how in
truth? tI t^a; what thenf lal J^ra iT6\,iai; and didtl thou really daret 8.
Ant. 449- (c) In wishes and deprecations (stronger then Ji|), as UKira SfJTt.
only look P. G. 462 b, fii) SrJTa, Sv/ii, fii) iri y' ipyinTi Tilt no indeed, my heart,
do not thit deed E. Med. 1056.

(Itc

2852. An (from tl + ri), a diBJUDctive particle, generally doubled :
dr* . . . «Ik whether . . . or (2676), if ... or («ue . . . tiue), giv-
ing equa) value to each supposition.

a. With the BubJQnctiTe we And Mr n «> rt, dr re}. Horn, has efr* . . .
tfri. bat not Ijr tt . . . fr re, with the subjunctive. In the same sense Hoin.
ban 4 ... 4 And jfre . . . frt with the sobjanctive.

3853. There aie various forms ot tire daoaea :

a. Both «fr( olauses may have the same flnit« verb In common, which verb
!• wMl CHiIy ODoe ; as rfri fftiytrft waXeiutr iiiur art ^Ihoi ttwai whether you Wieh
to wage loar upon tt* or to 6« ourJHendt X. C. 3.-2. 13.

.oog[c

648 PARTICLES: if [*tM

b. B«cb Hn danw has Ita own verb and its own main oUnae ; a* ^irflUwf #f,

•Tr* irdrrai o/rijl, K^vana rt airir xpfl'^" ' >'' &' ^'^Vi (f'* ' " t"^ ^ 16a . . .
alrif , rofrovf dficCvi ro^vj^iir g-oi ^sin-vAi tit i/ifa-ir the army reqwu Mot, (Tiwi
(MCUM all, fou patt tentenet on them and treat them as you may think bett ; or.
if yon aocvtt one or turn, they think it right thai thete men lAouid turrwnder
Aemtelvet to you for Judgment X. A. 0. 9. SO.

C One mMn clauae reterB to both cfrt cUuEea ; as i ir/nSit ir^p . . . tMmlfmr
ivri . . , ii.r T( /i^ai col Jirxupit, Mr re aiUKpit ml do-fcr^i i the ffOOd atOH (l

happy whether he i* large and Hrong or tmall and aeak P. L. 600 e.

d. I4e<tber ttrt clause baa a verb, nhicb U to be supplied from the main
clause ; as Xtyann, ttr' i\rfih ffr' 4/>' 00* iiAtyiii {t\ryor) $a:ylng, V^ther trvlif

or after all, U way be, faltely 8. Ph. .^6.

e. One tfrt clause baa its own verb, while the other geta ila verb from ibe
m^D clanse (lare) ; aa ifial ri . . . ^afrjr . . , xpt)TiiifStU, rfri'Tap' EdM^^m
hrttn^vt 7fir6^»oi (jf^fiifirfu^tii), Art koI iXKif Tir fxaCffa rtiXoi tfv /jvOrn AfX^in

you teern to me to vtter propheclet, whether ynv were in^lred by Eulhyphron or
whether »om« other mtae hat long been preient in you im'thout your knoKimy U
P.Ci»Li28c.

26S4. Vailatlona : tin . . . <| (common) : ttrt AmISi f t» SWm rinm f^/H^f
4 Ipii^tt Fr\. vihetiter Lytiaa or anybody tlie whoever wrote or wilt wrttt, etc.
P.Pha«.27Td. ^. . . il-n: ont; in poetry (S.Aj. ITS), if n . . . <(U: when
the second member is more important (P. L. 962 c). On it . . . fl-n sevSSTbd.
On dn for ifrc . . . tfrt see 2S7S b, N. 2.

2835. art may be strengthened by ipa, t^, xal, or oSr. air la niually plaod
after the flnt tfrc ; like coi, it may stand after the second also. Wlien ■■!
Stands only after tike second art, its clause Is weaker than the first (D. 16.ST).

2BS6. DlBjnnctlTe 4| (Epic i^*) or (tiW, ant) ; and repeated : $ . . . ^
eAA«r . . . or (net . . . vel, aut . . . avt) to connect the two mem-
bera more closely.

dTuMf 4 »nj> good or bad X.A.l.fi.11, 4 ti 4 •«>«' »(il« or iu>a<Nir P. A.
17 b. 4 with the subjunctive is often used when a speaker cortecta hlmwlf ;
as wOr S' al rplrat lj\6i roBtr irvr-^p, 1j itipor itwtt ; and now, again, thr third hor
come, the dttiverer — or shall I call it a deed of death f A. Ch.lOT4. On 4 in
questions, see 3667, 267G.

3637. Between ascending numbers f has the furc« of Eng. to, as f ■ f{ 4
trrh inipait intixto seven dags X. C.6.3.3B.

3SS8. V** ^^7 ^ "sed instead of ilie flrst 4 when tlie first member, as i*
commonly the case, containfi the inorn prubablv clioice. In English the order i*
often inverted. Thus, Ijroi nXteiva rcLtSAi 4 rixs ripa she eomts either by
chanee or becauie she has hfard abnut her son S. Ant. 1188. ifrot may be fol-
lowed b; 4 several times. J|tm . . . ^i Is more emphatic, as 4rM xpt^ yt 4 <
^rapiii either secretly or openly T,6..'J4. |

2859. 4 often indicates that a given result will follow in case the action nf

a«65] PARTICLES: j) 649

the pnriouB clftiue Is not realized : or elte (cp. il it u-^, 2846 d). Urns, twm
. . . {*uii ff^ hrt*tiir€Tt, tiui luX'^tt ■ 4 laintri tut KPpor *oidiVT* U sAoil be my
eonetrn thai you commend me ; or else my name is no longer Cvnts X. A. 1. i. 16.
2860. If oficD does not introduce an alternative to » previous queetlon, but
substitutes instead another question which is more specific and intended to antjd-
pate the answer to the first (or rather, or preeieely). Thus, Wr* li^if* 'Wf M ♦&«
Sta^titfieir roii Huripoui ; J) 4fl*.D» Ji| on . . . tfeoit iiJiiffMiii ^Jf »/il{lK» ovt ii wHKa

roiiiiti ; Ull u« hote you mean tAnl 1 corrupt the young t Or rather clearly you
ni«ait that (I corrupt them) by tr.aching them not to ackaoteledge tht godi vikieh
the State acknowledges T P. A. 2fl b,

38C1. 4 often introduces an argument ex contrarlo (D. 81. 14).

2862. {) Na( is often used where ff would suffice (op. 2888 a) ; as ( Unt 4 ml
ru ro; Iti;i either an alien or a citizen if sou vrill (or a* «>ell) D. 20. 123.

2863. CompEuatlTe 4 than is used to mark difference. It stands
after comparatives where the genitive or a preposition (1069 ff.) is
not used, and after words indicating difierence or diversity or having
a comparative force, e.g., SXXat or frtpot other, SXXoi otherwix, fito^
pot different, Siaifiipeiv to be different, imrruK contrary, StirXatnot twice
aa rauch, irpLy sooner.

<XXa 4 t4 yt6iim thinge different from what occurred X. C. 3. 1. 9, axXo oitir

4 in 74t fnviiAxout T. 4. 14 {2778 aj , rg ivrrpalf Si'i /u iwoBtirmr 4 J «» IXSu rb
■-Xoii>i> / mu$t die the day after {Uiat on lohkh) tAe ehip arrivet P. Cr. 44 a (here
Jf or B might be omitted), ritarrla . . . fl roii ntnf rowOat differently fTom the
way thry treat dogs X. A. 5. 8.24, rir fl/uffuip airar J) rpirStr half a» much corn
atb^ore X.H.S.aai.

a. Alter rl or a negative, jf may be used without IXXoi, as rl toiSr 4 tAuxetf-
liMfoti doing what else except feoMting f P. Cr.63e, tin laiitra rapiinu 4 roii
^IXout As said thai they ghoiiUl let no one paw except his friends X. C. 7, 6. 41.

b. Often after verbs of wilUny, choosing, etc. ; as SinaTor lur' fKaiBtp&t akpoi-
>um 4 ^'o' *KTd Sou\clai preferring death with freedom rather than life teith
Mervitude L. 2. 62. Here we mi^ht have >iaXXor 4, which is usually not separated,
and especially when ^wXXov belongs to the whole sentence.

C. If two clauses connected by 4 Ijave the same verb it may be omitted in the
clause foilowEng 1j ; ss Irparrtt iWaJat 4 <>' roXXsl (^wpiTTOvirt) yoJt behaved dfffer-
entlg from the rest P. A. 20 0.

d. On 4 Oart (c^i). °r <f alone, than so as to, see 2264.

2864, AMever«tlve )i (prepositive) in truth, in aoolk, verity, upon my
honour, etc. ; as ^ koXuis Xiyim I'. G. 447 c.

2863. 4 is usually associated with uther particles.
If yip when used alone In dialogue =is it not so T Cp. n'est ce pas, nickt

teahrt Elsewhere it often has the force of am I to understand that aaked

with surprise. Thus, 4 yip iwlf Bdrrtir a^', ir6ppirror ri\ti; what, dost

6S0 PARTICLES: ^ (AND lU) [tMt

Iho* <N truth intend to bvry hint, when it U forbUtiUn to tht eOUaM t &.
Ant. 44.

^ H\ ezpresses lire); BiiTprute.

)| Kot la Found In animated queetlons. Here tal goes closely with 4.

^ 114)* (Hom. f fi^r, f fidr) prefacM atrong sMeieratloiis, tbniats, and OAtha, in
direct and Indirect diacouree. Thna, 4 /ijiv ^li (ra«jr n muih-of fit trwIA Mf«
Viatfim txp'.rifnce P. A. 22 a, S/uniiu Btoit . , . f /ij)r /uynMiSm^urra nXnvu
d^\/(r0si Tit iti/ia li^Tt SWat b/iSt fiifiina I neear b]) the godt upon my hon-
our nettlifr did Xenophon nor any one elie among fou bid mt reactit the dmh
X.A.fl.6.17.

Here tbe sh&de at doabt indicated b;

2866. InterTogatlTe Ij (2650) is probably the same as asseverative 9-

r[U (and IBe)

2867. Ifit and (Epic, ^ric, tragic) ; also in conjunctioD with n
urn, or S(. iipJv . . . ^ (Epic) is used liko r) . . . n, mu . . . naL

lU and (Epic, raie in tragedy) is used where ^Si does not suit tbe

metre.

2868. Ka( is both a copulative conjunction (and) connecting words,
clauses, or sentences} and an adverb meaning qIm, evert.

ConJvTifttonal xai

2869. CopulatiTe caf often baa an int«nBiTe or heigbtening force ; aa wbett
It joins a part and the whole, tbe univeisal and the particular. Thus, ir 'AtfqioiM
Kot TaTt'EUijri Ar. Nub. 413, iS Znlcol Seal Ar. PI. 1 («n>l jcbI Ziit the god* awl
above all Zem), irTaO$a tiiamr ^iiipit rpttt nal 4k Uirur X. A. 1. 2. 6. On ol
Ta«ra, see 947, 2083.

a. Here ml often = namtlj/, /or acample, and 10 where an antecedent atate-
ment la explained either by another word or by an example. Cp. X, A. 1. 9. 14,
4.1. IB, 6. 2.0,6.8.8.

3870. The heightening force la also aeen where tal witb oorreotiTe force im;
be rendered by or; often to aet forth a climax and not an alternative. Tfaoa,
co^ii 6\l-ftv T(>^ d£fd ibI aU(>4i wisdorn worth little or nothing P. A. 23»,
liax^iperoiol . , . irii wirrt /irat Jtoi If taord-rMtlere vKTth five or ttx fninoM eacM
D.27.S, rpKoOvi ti jtoI i-wmOai wt\t)uii bvt war if we advaaee or retire X. A. 8, 1.
21, KallUiua titita right or wrong Ar. 'Sah. 90, nit (yirot), lul ^i| tit tkf »o»,or
if not thine 8.O. C. 1328.

2S71. ml often baa an adTeraatlTe force ; m where It }(dnB a negatiTe (0 «b
affirmative clsuae. Here ml 06 (^4) ia almost = but not, as in i/i' ^(■^•rivtrwa
Ml edx Ivuit thej/ elected me and (= but) not you D. 18. 268. So also wbera c«

•*nl PARTICLES: xaC 651

1b like KtiriHatidTftt; »^^xa^ptl^btal• tat c' iair iyii Mru /are thee well ; OTid
yel / leave thee untoiVKnyiy Ar. Eq. 1250. To connect negative clauses otH !■

2872. In qDesUoTiB, Kal befort an iateirogatlve ezpreaslon tnarka on objection
occaainned by surprise or indignation ; as lal t(i tarArrut JfXSer Vf 'AiS«v idXir ;
and, prny, wAu of the dead hoM come back/ram Hadet f G. H. F. 207. So irol irdi ;
prag, how cotnei it that t Cp. Eng. and when a apeakei ia stopped b; an abrupt

a. After an interrogative expression adverbial loi aatu for further information
concerning a statement osauined to be trae. Thas, ralou xpbrav Si xal rtripe^ai
wi\i$ ; but leken wsa the cUy captured f A. Ag. 278. Cp. 2SS4.

7B13. In imperative sentences lal often means and note, jutf. Thus, lat /i«
Ariyruei ri ^it#ur;ui and noui read me the bill L. 13, 36, nal /let iWiptnu JvMt
anMwrr me P. A. 26 a.

2874. ml may mark a resnU (P. Th. IM c, quoted in 2288).

2875. After ezpreaaiana of eameneit and likenttt *al baa the force of at (Lat.
ae). Thua, i airit bfur rritXai iarl tal iiiit* your expedition it the tame ai owt
X. A. 2. 2. 10, a^x Afului ml rpir not the MDM a» btfore T. 7. 28, r^a ■■! Ik^u
lAe some oa mpplianU 3. U, rah-i coJ tht tame at X. C. 1. a 18. This uae ia
commoner in prose than poetry.

2876. In ezpreasions denoting coincidence of time mi oftan has the force of
vthen. 8o Ifis . . . m( (2169), <iSi| ■ . . »( X. A. 2. 1.7, oftrw . . . aat P.
Bo. STT b, alii t^tiyr . . . ital (tMit) / had not got the ttart . . . when 1. 19.
SS, D. 43. 80. Cp. Ksl . . . Kol in inl HmfJir koI ^/Jt JftX^A* i evpuf^t . . . (?t«i
avpi^iair oi toon at ae arrived th« doorkeeper came out and told u* to wait P.
Ph. Me.

38T7. KvX . , , KoI both , . . and, not only . . . btit also, at ... to, at
■DeU at ... at alto, sometimes whether . . . or, emphasizes each memtier
•eporMely, and forma a 1«aa close combination than ri ml. Tbna, h1 riri lol
t^r not oniy then but alto now. So ri/iit iarfon ical fOn-i nl Tt\tuT^am honourt
mwal he paid him both when living and after death P. R. 414 a, vd ml SUopnat
■cod )SX#™i than both hatt tight and (yet) dott not tee 8. O. T. 41S, lirtiirdn^t
Tp6t TaSfT<L nl ri war ^piau a* Iwa» tent for Alt purpose to I will tell thee all
S. Gl. 880, Toftitir iwiyini, nr n>xu lAr /i^ t^v Imntt dare whether I tueeeed
or fail E. Hec. 751.

2878. Tn a series of more than tvo ideas rat la nsed before each, where
English wonld ose nnd only before the last. Thus, aiirrvyxi"'"" '^V «'
^a/ipdmorir airtr ted Tvraua ml irallat Kot T«it Twrvn col itirra ri irra they fell

upon him and teixtd him, hi* wife, hit children, hit hortrt, and all hit pottet-
•foM X. A. 7. 8.22.

2879. AdJecUves of quantity, as «X«t and iXlfOt tn the plural, are tunally
j<dned to an adjective In the same construction by n( or rt tat (also hj ri or ri
. . . T< in poetry). Thoa, xoXXi tat Sari D. 37. 57 (Stiii *ai xoXM 37. 67),
rAXd n tai Snni X. A. S. 6. 6. In «>XX<k tal ^rydXa iyaSi (X. C. 1. 6. S), th«
*ab«UnUve ia qnallfled by two adjectives ; whereas In Bns;1iab the second adjec-

652 PARTICLES: xaC [Ufc

tive is taken wilh the subaUntive and treated as a. unit modined by the firet
adjective (_many yood-lhingt).

a. nXXal koI &Um meaiisniaH^oCArrt iif«o (vrith Kai adverbial). Pornan|r
alher* v»e find &\\<n rii\Ml (very common) or voWal 4\X«.

3880. Some combinations of conjuiicLional teal are :

Ksl . . . )Un«k and huvsever, and of conrge (in taX lUrroi tal the first «( mkj be

adverbial : yes indeed aad).
Kol . . . Tolrvv and . . . /Urthtr, in connecting a thonght with the precedii^.

AdverbicU xai

3881. AdTcrblot ital alto, tven (Lat. etiam) iafiuencee single words or whole
clauses. Adverbial not stresses an important idea ; usaally ilie idea set forth is
the word that follows, but sometimes also a preceding word when tliat word atawb
first In 1(8 clause. lol often serves to increase or diminish the force of par-
ticular words ; sometimes it gives a tone of modesty.

2883. With single words : a. Jifra then too, xal iyii I nn my part, rir 1
icifiir 7/«i offspring from thee or me either S. El. 966, ^v\6ium H ad efrJi
Xofirpir Tt irM^vai denirout of liiioself too doing something illuttriotu X. C.
6. 4. 10.

b. KtU rplt even before, koI inlii late though it be, nal oWut even to, koJ fri
lal ySr and now too, and ttitl eten now, i/rti sal Xiytir Iftar eeen to toy if.
raXXJ) luivli tat rou tnx'ip^MaTat the very attempt it utter folly P.Pr.31Ia.
On leaf though witli a participle, see 2083.

c. Often with adverbs of intensity, as ntl ii4\ii exceedingly, eertatkty, lai
tipra very greatly, kbX rdm abtolutely. With comparatives and superiatives : ni
fiSXXar yet more, col /lupAraro* altvgeOter the mott foolifh thing X. A. 3. S. 2S.

2883. With a whole phrase or clause ; as d/i^ yip a^i mil itarairrafiiT
ma; tehat, dott thou Indeed intend to put them both to death f S. Ant, 770.
Other examples In 2B86-2887.

2884. When n( stresses a verb in interrogative and conditional sentences It
■ is often to be tendered by an emphatic amlliary, often by at all. Thus, «aXXd-

m ictr^iiair r[ ml paiXtaSt I have often atked tnytelf tA« quettion toAot yon
cu want T. a. 88, rl lal xp^ rpoaSoxat ; nkat OH earth is one to expect f D. 4. 40,

rf tip Iw Tif Kai raws IKKo \ for uhn( el»i COnld one do ? P. Ph. 61 e, tt iri tii
piieor MytimaUr if it it teell to tell a fable at all P.Ph.IlOb. Cp. 28TSa.

a. In affirmative independent clauses or ^ntencea caf often has an emphans
which is difGcult to render ; as A tlrSSmt pur il) val i6iatr Sv itiiit tJrai (Ac dan-
ger must note indeed seem to be dreadful P. Ph. 107 c.

2B85. Ka( of Balanced Contrast — In order to mark the connection of
thought between antecedent and consequent, cat also, too, is often placed in
the subordinate clause or in the main clause or In both.

a. Greek has thus the following modes of ezpresaion where a compMison is
instituted between the parts of such bimembrai sentences: "What Jdo, that
yon also do" (as In English) of " What I alto ( = I on my part) do, that yon
do" or " What I alto do, that you also do." In the subonlinate danse m
seems superfluous to English idiom.

i,vGooglc

iSgi] PARTICLKS: xal 653

2886. Kaf of baknc«d contrast occurs frequently when the enbordinate
d&uae. MtH forth something corresponding to, or deducible from, the main
clBiue ; and when an antithetU is to be emphasized. It Is found especiallf in
rel>live, causal, and final clauses, and has the effect of putting such subordinate
cUoBEB on a plane with the main clause. A relative word often adds -wtf oi is
followed b; 94. Thus, ri ti t^i riXtoti trpArTot, Strip Imictr ral Zwupdrtt rpeir-
^\Btr they devoted tittmtelmt to thote affairs of ilaU on account of whiek Iheg
fiad in fact amoeiated leith Socrates X. M. 1.2.47, vol iipir ra^i Jomi trip nil
^oo'iXcr we hold exaetlg the tamx vieiet aa the king X.A.2. 1.22, frctj^ «al 4
vjXii iaiMii . . . i^t^ xiial rtarriplaw ytrivSai tinee the cfly hat been saved I beg
that tafely be granted to lae at vietl And. 1. 143, (fia^r lol tyi 6mp inl ol
SWm J (on uij part) learned jutt as the rett did too P. Ale. 110 d, TMiwpJa y^
oiK tinixti tucaiMt Srt jial (UtMirat for Vengeance it not suceet^l tn aeeordante
wttk jmtiee, beeaute it is taken upon a wrong T, 4. 62.

288T. In final clauses I'm tal is common, and sometimes, like Eng. iusl,
serve* to show thai the fact answers to the expectation, or the effect to the
oauae (or vice versa). Thus, ^i\ti ofi* frtrffai Fm ml livi raAi Itrat oh-Wtj
do 90a wish to go along then jutt to tee thote who are there f V. Lys. 204 a,
ipfofuu ti irb tilt larpH^f \fyiii* Ira fai rptirptiutur r^t rix"!* Twill begin ffil>
speech vilh medicine in order that tee may do hont/ur to our art P, 8. ISltb.

288fl. Kal of balanced contrast appears also in coordinate eiaOBes ; is ffJIir
7V fyirf Kol itiXeXioii ^rtouffo . . , (fii) St cat dWur nriir for I have ere now

heard FhUolaut . . . and ere wow certain others beiidea him P. Ph. 81 e, nard

roXXA pir lat JXXtt, six IIihttb St (Ctl tari raDra OS in many Other rttpectS alio
and not least {too) In fA[« Aes. 1. 108, brS tH* rJrraDfia Sunfi,<rur ... sal rpli
bwtcxtiiiitut ntd rSr 3* npiTTburut by those who had promised to manage things
there before and are now alto doing them D, 7. 6. The negative of ■■! . . . tai
. . . UiBoiOi . . . aiSi . . . Si.

a. So in disjunctive phrases or clauses. Thus, itrt 3il ri twi^tiipt Art lal
ai>ry iWa ri . . . Sb^ar either because of the exdamalion or also because tome
other thought occurred to Aim T. 5. 60 ] and so J) itoi 2862. Cp. iJv^" 'H*' n
fiiXXar ihrt rut AXAwr jj tal Irt' ipeO he UK(« not searched for bj/ the olhen more
than he teas by me (on my part) Ant. 6. 23.

3889. SimiUrlj tba caf of <( nt kbI &XXot is superfluous ; as ttrtp n nl
AXXo nsl ToiJTo /Aafriri' if any Other thing is Uarnable, this is too X. S. 2. 8.

But Kal is usually omitted in the main clause ; as hrltrrarai 3' t( rtf lal dXXai he

knows at teell as anybody else X. A. 1. 4. 15. So Oi m nl SXXoi at also ang
other X. A.2.6. B.

2890. Kal M) nal and especially, and in particular, and what is more, lays
streas on a particular instance or application of a general Btatement. Here the
itecond Kal empbasizes ilie following word, cal Sij lal la usually attached to a
preceding ri or ■»!. Thus, ■■! Jij Mi t&ti rptpah-tpot avrt\tTiptw and on that
f special occasion toe came together somewhat earlier than usual P. Ph. 69 <1, it
SXXoif re reXXsit inl a^ cal iy tsii nipfimatt in the case ofmanf others and par-
tieulaHy in that of the sick X.C. 1.6.21.

2891. KtX . . . U and . . . also, and . . . moreover. Sen: cof emptut-

sizes the importwat fnterranliiK word or words, wblle N eooiiMtB. Urns, id
0^ 8' ir Tairm U7M otut / comt thee alto among thete A. Pr. 973. Aitd otto
not ia Mi . , . S4. Horn, has tal Bi and /itrther, and «v«m CH 113), not ml...
If. xai . , . M (for tO is different (8. Ant 432).

Kadrcp

2892. Mhry anadvgfc ii ffiiiiiiK& With putio^lw (2083). As a
conjunctioD (op. otKHuman) wltiumt a miiii «I«ue it is very rare
(P.S.2190).

KafTH

2893. mUtm (kcU + toi}, not in Homer, means and yet, aUhou^
rarely and so then. Here rot marks something worthy of ncAe,
which ia commonly opposed to what prcMdes, k<u'i-m IS u^ed in
making a correction (sometimes in tlie form of a question), in pass-
ing to a new idea, and in the statement of a conclusion. The com-
mon KOLToi . . . yt is stronger than kcu'toi.

koItoi atSir Sri oix d\i)M( tlptiKa Hr wpotiwtr and get there U notkinff untmt
in what I taid bf/ore P,Euth,3o,

a. A sentence preceding xalm is often related by a clause Introduoed b;
iXXd (dW 8;u*t), », orio;* ». Cp. F. Fh.T7a,Chann.l7Sc. A.40b, G.4e»c.

b. jcofTM is rarely, if ever, used with the participle in classical Greelc It is
best attMled in P. R. 611 d ; emendation is resorted to in L. 31. A4, Ar. GcoL IfiS.

2894. |iA assererative (cp. ^^v, niv asseverative) with the accusa-
tive of the divinity or thing by which one swears. In negative sen-
tences we have oi pia or pa alone with the accusative ; in affirmative
sentences, vai fia, but more commonly vij. The omission of the accu-
sative may sometimes be due to indecision or to indifference and
not always to scmpulouaness (1596 c). pi means properly in tnUh,
verily; but apparently governs the accusative after the ellipse of
such verbs as Icall to witnesa.

2895. |dv was originally an asseverative, emphatic particle (surely,
certainly, indeed) and a weaker form of /i^v. Cp. Epic $ fiiv, mu /tc»,
ou liiv in asseverations and protestations. Assevemtive niv survived
as fuv solilariuM and in combination with other particles. Anti-
thetical (concessive) fxiv owes its origin to the fact that, as emphasis
may indicate a contrast, the clause in which /icv stood was felt as
preliminary to an adversative member of the sentence. Through
association with this adversative member fUw gradually lost its primi-
tive asseverative force.

L, z::lv,G00g[c

•9»i] PAKTICLES: ^ 665

2896. itif tolitarium ocean when » cUuee with lUr ]a not followed bj a
claiue wltb ti. This is eapeciftlly common wlien the anticbetictl clause la to
be sapplled -In thought, m when /Ut emphasizeg) a statement made by a penon
with reference to himself m opposed to otheTs (often with a tone of arrogsaoe
or of credulltf). Here any possible opposition or difference of opinion, bow-
ever justifiable, is left uneipressed. Thus, iyii lUr aix Ma, I for my part do
not knov (thoogb others majf) X. C. 1. 4. 12, irdrXmsat, At ^r rgii rXtfffTMi
iSbtaut, ^XsTl^^n-n they tailed ateaj/ since they to«re Jealavt as it teemed to
the rnqjority at least X. A. 1. 4. 7. 8o In sack pbnsee as SokH nit, In^^i^i i^r,

2B91. Sometimes lUt soUtartum merely emphasizes a word in its clause and
does not Imply a contrast. Thus, J/ul iiir olvria riSi this must be borne by me
on mjf part 8. 0. C. 1860.

2896. /tir loHtorium la commoueit alter personal pronouns ; hut occurs alao
after demonatratlTe pronouns (L. 25. IS), after relativea (Aes. 3. 809), after
mbstantiTes without the article (D.9. 16), or after the article and before Its
sabstantlTe (L.29.1), after adjecUvei (L. 1.37), after adverbs (L. 12.91), after
verbs (D. 1S.231). In questions /i^r alone i« rare (P. Hen. 82 b).

2899. In combination with other particles, especially B4 and at)*, asseveratl*e
/i^ either has a simple confirmatory force or ts used adversfitlvely. The follow-
ing cases must be distinguished from those in which lUt is correlative to 9/.

2900. (Ur Hi erpreases positive certainty, especially In conclusions. It is
oommon in summing up and In tranHiCions, and is used either alone or with other
p«rtlcles (Bometlmea it is followed by i\\d or Si). Thus, ravra itir Bit rgtaPra
■omHcA/or tAat A. Fr.&OO. SoalBO,«.|r. iXltA ^ b^ but certainly in fact (_i\\'
oMt iiir h) in rejecting an alternative) ; *\ fk» U{ if indrtd in truth ; nal (h* U^
and in Irvth, and in fact (often In tranaltlons) ; of ^* S<( certainty not at all,
aor]/et, in truIA (often used adveraatlvely).

2901. iilv o(* lit. certainly in fact, iiir being a weaker fonn of ixi): iiir «tv
has two common Dses, according as the particles have a compound force, or each
baa Its own force.

a. Tbe COtnpaund force of i^t sPr Is seen in atBrmations ; as In replies : rim
(jiAXiara) fiir atr yes, hy all meant; certainly, by all meant; aye tntly,a /lir aBr
olJta nay, / am svre of it, ai /lir ott indeeA not, ip' oi riit ^r ri SMpat l^' Ihrtp
4'Y*' 4m>i i TSLTTa litr oBr ah-t iin't this the tree to loAicA you were bringing vi t
To be sure this U it ¥. Phae. 231) a.

b. The compound force appears also when iiir ulr indicates a correction ; nay
rather (imo vera) ; as \iy rt ■ «■* >rf» •(» >uw X/ye do you say, Nay, rather you
Ar. Eq. 18, irvwet ri irOrnot, 6 ZiiKparn. /rapyit fiJr ttr the dream (i Strange,

Socrates, Nay rather, it was ditlinet P. Cr. 44 b.

c Bach particle has its own force especially where fijfolr indicates a transition
to a new subject. Here iidr polnU forward to an antithesis to follow and indi-
cated by ti, i\Si, iiirrai. While oSr (Inferential) connects with what precedes.
Here so then, therefore may be used in tranfllatlon. Thus, KKiapx''' f** ■>''
raa^^n etn. Turfa<p4prTit U M* irTiiutpdii twh then mere Che word* of Clear-
tkut; and on the other hand Ttitaphernei answered a* follovt X. A. 2. G. 15

666 PARTICLES: /tip ]»tM

Somelimea m^i iBt (like Igttur) shows Ibat a niibject announced in genersl t«niu
is now to be treaUd in deUil (P. I'b. TO c).

2902. Common coUocatlonH are &UA fUv (dXXik . . . nit) bnt for <t /net,
lk fiv, ^ (liv, nl pir.

2903. Antithetical (conoeBBive) /Jr diBtlngiiislies the word or clause in
which it itands from a foiiowing word or ttause uiarlled uauailj b; U or b;
other particiea denoting conCiuit, such as iWi, irifi, itimt, /i4' ; ■"d eren by
Oopulatlre ri, nt (Hom. i/ii). (lir never connects words, clauses, or sentences.

3904. )U* . . , U serves to mark stronger or weaker contrssls of various
Unds, and !s sometimes to be rendered by on thr. one hand . . . un Iht otiitr AancI,
indeed . . . but ; but Is often to be left untianslsted. The /iir clause haa a con-
cessive force when It isjogicall; subordinate (irftfle, though, mhereaa, cp. SITO). !
Thus, 4 W' ^"X^ raXvxpiti' iim, ri Si irS/iii iafii4irTifior nol 6\tyoxi>iyniiTtpoi Iht
§oul Itut* for a long time, the bodg it weaker and lasts for a shorter time V. Ph.
87 d, (oJ rpiaOiw /lir Hf TvWal ifiuir ^PX"' f^' ovAerAi, ^px'tp ii • wvw Si nrc-
ffMiWfii ouTU rirTM ol xeip6rTtt urn HpX'^' »' f'' r\niruw, si Si fwutrwr and
vihereat in/act manf of u> hitherto commanded no one, but were tubjeet U) tSe
coramaiid of oUitrs, now hovievrr all of you v:ho are present art so placed Utat
you havt cotntnand, lonie over more, others over ftvitr X. C. 8. 1. 4.

a. So UX»rt fir . . . UXon tl, K^ia yXr . . . A^un U at once . . . and, partlf
, . , portly, Ma |Uv . . . Ma hi, IvraOfla |jkiv . . . kiA U, nrpOror |i^ . . . Inin Si
(or tMTa alone). On I fir ... iU ate HOT. Instead of i (cJ) ii we find
t.g. iWn Si, (riai Si, tart f al. So Toi'Ta iiir . . . toPt' SXXo (or oMii). — lUt
may stand with a participle, Si with a finite verb, in an antithetical sentence
Example In 2ii7c.

b. (/, oi (/i4) BtaDding before iitr . . . Si exercise their force on both opposed

2905. When several v.erbs referring to the same person or thing are con-
trasted, or when several attribulee are contrasted, the first has lU*, the othera U.
Cp. Lye. 6, X. A. 3. 1. 19. But lU' is sometimes omitted.

2906. inlt ... I^ is osed in successive clauses which contain either the same
word (anopftora) or a synonymous word ; as t^i Si rdrtipi pit fc«f, wirtipi H
AtVpiireit Toil dYaAiii quoted in 1I6!I, ^\St pit ko.1 iri tqi 'E^uOpnlit i.-m\li,
d#t«wrTe « kbI rarraxiitr news rnme frr.m the district of Brythrae itatlf om.I
arrived also from all quarters T. 3. .'t:<. Hut /lir is sometimes omitted, as a-r^rv
v' S7wr, rri)iriii il' ipaurir I mil hrinij thee and stablith thee, and Ivnll stabliak

mgieif 8. 0. C. 1342.

2907. If more ttian two clauses are contnwted, only the first clause has ^r.
while each of the following clauses has J^ (X, A. 1. 3. 14, X. C. 4. 2. 28).

2908. A contrast Indicated by pir and Si may stand inside another contntst
indicated in the same wanner, as o iiirir^ip roiaDra ^rrcrodjH, nuavra Si X^-/n •

tuQr ti fi T^ukoi, d KXiapX'^ i'i^rai ymipiir S ri roi Soxit the man ha* actfd

thut, and ^eak* Ihui ; but do s/ou, Clearchua, bt the first to mate knoton wAot
you think best X. A. 1. 0. 9.

3909. Two relative (or couditiooal) daoMs each with /Ur ma^ b« followed

aart] PARTICLES; fjJv 657

by two demonsCratlvG clauses each with ti ; but the weond Si [s usuftlly omitted,
And tbece ftre other variations. Tbus, iw6<roi iiir . . . otret itin . . . iwiaoi li
. . . TttronipS X.A. 3. 1.48, cp. X. O. 4. 7, P. A- 28 e-

2911. A shift in the construction ma; cause it to be omitted (S. Ant. 1190).

2912. itJii after an emphatic demanHtratlTe ma; resume liir of the antecedent
clMue (D. 2. 18).

2913. fLlc . . . n (and even nl) is aaed where, the second clause is merel;
a<fi:{«d instead of being coOrdiziated by means of H. Thu», rax^ Mi' owoi tin
rtpiyirfr&iaS» dSpiot tc ry Apxowrt iri/uroi Arvw6ffraTti Jlfun tee hnve guickly
rtae/itd the plae/» to vihich xor had to go, and hy following our leader in a coto-
pact bodji VM have been invincible X. C. B. 1 , 8.

3914. Position of yir (and U). ~ iiir and 3/ are commonly placed next to the
VTords the; contrast, and take precedence over other postpcsitive particles. But
when two words belong closely together, /iJii and U are placed between. Thus,
when noans with the article are contrasted, /itr and 8^ stand after [he article ;
if the nonas depend on prepositions lUr and U stand after the preposition and
before the article.

«. But this rule may be neglected in order to emphasize the preceding word,

ftm ri iiir ^rBpilrtira Tap/rrn, ri j(ufiji>ia Si irianraSrTtt aegUeting human affatn,
but MpeaUatiiiff on things divine X. M.I.I. 12, iri ri (rnrniAi' ^r in the
darkneai T. S. 22.

b. If the Doun has no article and is governed by a preposition, Si nsoally
takes the third place.

c. Footponement ol 3^ (and some other postpositive parUcles) to the fourth
place Is only njjparant after an Introductory vocative, which is not regarded as
forming an integral part of the sentence.

291S. Iiir and Si are sometimes referred to the entire clause or to the predi-
cate and not to the words that are opposed to each other. This arrangement is
often adopted to preserve the symmetry of the juxtaposed clause, /lir and Si
are thus often placed after personal or demonstrative pronouns. Thus, tXryt
fiir It rS TsU , Toil Si fimiijiiiirott i^r ixoitir Socrates for the most part aas wont
to tali, while any who chose could listen X. M. I. 1. 10, i-wi Ar roXXol /lir twi-
fft/tovT ri/parrttr . . . \ rSt Si rdrrn ^fiJXour ir roi)f Topdrroui ; uAjr ihould man]/
df^re to possets demotic power t why should everybody envy despotic rulers f
X. HL 1. 9 (for rdrrn Si rOi Itt^ur Sr). Cp. ir vi' Ttiirsit . . . it ialtott U
Lyc. 140, rtpl avTur /lir . . . rtfA Si rur lnrwoTUr L. T. 35, etc.

m. The transpofllUon is often designed to produce a chiastic (3020) order, as
traBe fiir aiSir, roKSA Si lail iriiui* vot^vw he tuffered no lost, but thought that
he had done a great deal of damage X. A.3. 4. 3 (her« oiSiw and rsXXi are
brongiit ok«e together) .

3916. In poetrjr iiir and Si often have a freer position than In prose. I' may
r>ften come third when an emphatic word is placed before it, and even fourth.

PARTICLES: fiAnvt, jwfv [ait?

2917. (U»Toi (postpositive) from jiiV {=i/i.^, 2895) +to4 is an
assererative and adversative particle.

2918. AsBeverative /i^rrsi eereainlj/, titrely, of cortne, in tnU\ is rarj com-
mon In replies, where it ezpreues poaitive, eager, or reflecLive assent. Often
with rii (M) ai". 'rhiw, fyJ ; •ri fUrrat If ctrtainlu, you Ax. Eq. 166, tI 7il<t,
f^^, . . . iiiiitrisa* itttra . . .; reX jiit Ala . . . lUiirv/iai itirrat roiaura itaAaat am
wtU then, taid he, do j/ou recall thote naUers ; Ye», by Zeui, certainly I da
recall that I heard things to (hat effect from you X. C. 1. 6. 6, iXtfiSmira liirrm
Xfynt weii, Certainly you say what i» very true r. Soph. 246 b.

tiirrct ma; strengthen asseverations or emphasise questiona ; as dutu ft/rm xp^
\iyttr in truth we muH tpeak thut P. Th. 187 b ; otten with demonstntive pro-
nouna, aa H rovro /Urroi rj) Ala afrrourir xiSoB oh, by Zeut do oblige them in thi*
Ar.ATBBeei.

a. Assevenitive fi/mi In combinations, e.g. :
AXXl pirrM but surely, but tn fact (in i\\i . . . ittrroi, /lirroi Tefers to tlie pre-
ceding word).
imI , . . iiivTot and ...indeed, and . . . in fact, and moreoner, as ^lyjitifpirartt

Ijr icai rpit Tit S^pii lUrroi ^i\aEir3ui>AraTai A« VKU very fond of huntiitg and
moreover exceedingly fond of danger X. A. 1. 9. fl,
•4 |jUrm no indeed (also adversatiTe: yet not).

2919. Advenativa iidtrot hoviever, yet often inarlui a contiaat or a transi-
Uon ; as d^fi^r n, iwl nirif lUrm me let you go, on this condition htnetter
P. A. 29 c. iiirrn yt Is Btronger. |ilr . . . |U>-rm Is mnch stronger than iiir ...ti,
as ^iXwrVv ^r lotiat . . . leSi iiirtM irji|ret Sm you resemhle a phUotopher^
hnowhoweertluityouareafool'^.Ki.l.lZ. On oi iUttm AXXi (it) aeeS76T.

293IX ^4* (postpositive): (1) asseverative, in truth, surely; (2) ad-
versative, especially after a negative, yet, hofoeoer. The forms itrf
(Horn,, Att.), fiav (Horn., Lesb., Dor., lyrio parts of tragedy), fti*
truly (Horn., Att.) and fiA in oaths are all connected, /utt emphasizes

either a whole statement or a single word.

&ie 7lp liepia, tal nfir TtrtiiiriUror lirrai for thus I will declare, and vtrHy it
shall be accomplished * 410 ; naXir /ilv i, dX^Sc.a . . ., loin »ii)t ot ^Iisr vc»<i>

truth is a fine thing, yet it does not seem an easy thing to persuade P. I»6tt$ e.

tt S' iit n^r come now, on then k 802, ailir /li/r icu\6a but nothing hindera V.

Phae.368e.

2921. Comblnatlona of |i^r :

&\X4|>V ( >■• V<) but surely ; but yet ; nay, indeed ; vmiII, in tmtk. Often nanl
to add BOmething of greater importance, or la tisnsltiona when a new Idea u
opposed to the foregoing. iWi it-tr is often separated by a negatln.

4 ii^v verity, verily. Ottea to introduce an oatb or a tbreat.

igaS] PARTICLES: vuv, vviit, v6v, vim, vv 659

ml y.ifr and verilg Or and yet according to tlie context siiJ ^i^f frcquentl;
introduceB ft new fact ur tliougbt ftod hence often denotcH transition, Home-
limea oppoailion ^fitrther, homever, and yet). In tragedy this fonnula is used
to mark the beginning of a new scene, as when the amTal of a uencoiner >»
tbuB Bignallzed (_b«t here comes) ; as tal fijjr trai SSt and lo I here u the king
S, 0. C. 649. In replies, tal i^-^y usually confirms the last remark, accedea to
a reqaest, or denotes hearty assent ; sometimes there is an adTersative Bense
(and yet; and (j/et) surelg ; oh, but). In enumerattoni, cat ^i}r adds a new
fact (and beaidex).

xaL )l4|i> ... 71 In transitions or enamerations marks something of still greater
importance ; but it is not ho strong as jcoJ fiii i^. Here yi einphasIzcB the
word or wonls with which !t is immediately connected. In replies, and indeed,
and get or oh, but ; as lal nijr woi-tau yt and yet I will do It S. El. 1046.

KiU fiV "^ (n^S- '■*' >'4>' 0^0 <"K^ >» truth also.

ot ^ rarely not, oi |iV ^^^ nevertheless (2707), oi jii]* oiU nor a^rafn (2766),
«H) |i^v and cfrlainls not.

t( ^ifii; lit. tehat Indeed (quid uero), as dXXi t( fij)' ilonTi; but tuhat in truth ii
ynar opinion t P.Tb. 162 b. rf /i^i ; standing alone, has the force of natu-
rally, o/courie. Thus, Xiyouain ^itit ui dXuiXirat, t( ii-^r ; they tpeak of ui as
dead, and why thould they not f A. Ag. 6T2. Often in Plato to indicate
assenL rl |ii|> oG ; (why Indeed not =) of eourte I do.

Vol, lH)

2922. vol (cp, Lat. nae) asaeverative (truly, yea), with the accuBallTe In
oaths where It is usually fallowed by ^ (1590 b). mI ye*, in ansnera, is found
only in Attic

2923. 1^ (cp. Lat. ne) aaseTerative (^tmly, yea), with the accusaUre In oaths,
and only in an afflnnaUTe sense, rlj is found only In Attic See 160fl b.

vOv, vBvf, vvv, virv, vii

2924. nBw noiB, at present often has a causal sense, as rDv it but as the case
stande, a* it it; often to mark reality in contrast lo an assumed case.

2923. rvif (fur + deictic I, 333 g) is stronger than nir: ticra noig, at this
moment ; rarely in a causal sense.

2926. rfv (enclitic ; lyric, tragic, Herodotus, rare and aiMpected in Homer),
a weakened form of tCr, is rarely temporal, usually Inferential, as niw ia used
for then, therefore, riv thus marks the connection of the speaker's thought with
the situation in which, he is placed. It ia commonly used after imperatives,
prohibitive and hortatory subjnnctiTes. Tiius, tiBi^ vir im seat me, then S. O.
C.2I. In Xenophon and Plato vur is written by some editors, where the Mks.
harenJ»(X.C.4. 2.37, tt i. I. 3!l).

2927. *4v (enclitic) is adopted by some scholars in Attic tragedy where a
long syllable is required (S.O.T.844). Others write .a:»(with the /orce of »*»).

2928. vD (enclitic ; Rpic and Cyprian), a still weaker form of rut, and less
etDphatIc than Hi. It is common in questions and appeals; less frequent in

tIi rv i who note T Also after other particles, as cat t6 iit,1i ^i n.

PARTICLES: «gr<W {tm

SttmC

2929. hit, originally a relative ftdverb meaDing hoa, is derived from the
nlative particle fftS (with which Eng. ia is connecUd), to which the Indefiniie
riit hu been added. Horn, jlvrwt from rfeS-wat, asarrt from rfo3-ri (81 I>2).

a. The adverbial meaning of orat Is still seen in its use aa an indeSuiK
relative and as an indirect interrogative ; and by the fact tLat in its place S-rj,
BTfi TpSr^, i( oToii rfbrev are sometimes used. By association with the subjunc-
tive oira>t became a conjunction (cp. ^4 ''"') u^ ^>th or without Ir in flnal
clauses (see 2196, 2201). On the use as a conjunction in object clausea after
verbs at effort and of fear, see 2211, 2226. So in dependent Htatemeala iwtn
pawed from how into fAoI (2578 d).

2930. aiU (|ii|U) IB an adverb and a conjunction, and is to be
broken up into the negative ou (^ij) and Sc meaning and, even, alto, or
but.

ovSi iixifSi) as an Adverb

2991. Adverbial ovSc (liit&i) not even, not . . . eitlier, aiao . . . not,
nor yet (ne . . qitidem). Op. the use of koi even, also in affirmative
sentences ; as o£S' an not even in that case (koI it even in that ca«e).

iW oiSi Toiriit rrcp'/irorTai bntnot eaen of these shall they be diprived X.A.
1. 4. a, tfr' dM' evTo, ^4iier 4r when besides it was not so rosy I. 18. 86 ( = ml oi
also not)- With oUi' tl (Mt) not even if ei belongs with the main clause, while
Si eotn goes with the dependent clause. Thus, ail' ir tl ptO\»im, fiftlut wanifcl
•ftroirra even if they vMed, Ihry could not easily become teirkrd X.C. 7. 6.86
(=»! (I^iiXoiPTo, oit at yfntntra). Similarly with a participle: e£U wnrofMt
tatwt ix^pi' tlni fuii TeSror iiiaKoyw I do not admit thot this tna» is mf eusmf
even though 1 have been ill-used D. 21. 206.

ovJic (iiijii) as a Conjunction

2932. o{&i Om^Sc) as a conjunction (and not, nor) oonnectB two or
more whole clauses.

2933. In Attic prose aHH is tised only to join a negative clause to anotber

clanse lleelf negative ; a&oiiiiiiaf^TU^rTliuaplitiiiSi dXXif rarrtfpli i^itre Aere
teas no hope of assSstanre nnr did any chance of safety appear T. 3. 20.

a. A negative clause is joined to an affirmative clause by lenJ ai iitf). Thus,
imitrHTJ ^iilifiaxlt ■ . . nat ti imfMjSi^BiJjii I TBill abide by the alliance and ItDilt

not violate it T. C. 47. xol ei (tii)) may have an adversative force (but not).

N. — But in poetry aud Ionic prose oiSi may contlnne an affirmative clause ;
as ShMf -yip eili piri' dread indeed and not to be uttered S. Fh. 750.

2934. am ia used by the poets tor but not, where Attic prose write™ have
iXX* adotKalai. Thus, (•«' aXX«i ^i' 'cUr" ^rSax*, ttit waff' 'Hf>p aJU narc.-

Hti] PARTICLES: ovB^, ofirc (/*i)8/, /ifjre) 661

lian then it tcaa pleasing to all the otken, but not to Htra or to Poteidon I1S6,
Jiuwi tiat train ivaPov\lait by my /oil)/ but not by thine S. Ant. 126fi (cp. the
Ktgatiee form ait iiiir tU' iWi rin tMt U not my part, but thine S. El. 1470).
Cp. aw riSt /arluiKitti, dXX' 0^ i/ieO iiaiimirat you probably heard Ihii from
ivartelf and not from me P. Ale. llSc.

2935. aiSi ma; stand In an apodo^ corresponding to apodotia SI (2887).
Cp. S. O. C. 690.

2936. Diii ma; negative a preceding word also ; as al ^Imrrroi r^i oHi i
Jtraa^ptrtt . . . ^ito» the Phoenician thipa had not arrived nor had Tiitaphemet
T. S.9Q. Cp. 2943. In such cases we usuall; find another negative, which goes
wilh the verb ; as irXour iiir atit SlKnur oiitr ir tiirtir Ix" he could sag nothing

KraighyoTvard nor Just D.'i'iA.

oi&c {liij&i} with Other Negatives

2937. oMl , . . oMi couimonly means not enen . . . nor pet (or no, nor),
the Brat nMf being adverbial, tiie second conjunctlTe. aitt . . , o6Sl is not cor-
relative, iilce oI!t( . . . odri, and Itetice never means neither . . . nor. Tiias,
oUi tiKiot tUi vt\iiwTir ipa lO/iJfui Stoii (Iroi,- do I then hold that not even Ae sun
nor yet the moon are godt f P. A. 26 c, r6 yt o6li ipiir yi-yytinrmt oHi ixoiut
lUnrtiffv you do not even understand though you tee, nor yet do you remember
though you hear X. A. ■!. 1. 27. oMt . . . ttSf both copulative (anii not . .
nor yet) tu X. C. 3. 3. 50. oiSi . . . oiS) . . . M ia the negative of cat . . . tal
. . . If in X.A.I. 8.20.

L So to both raenibera of comparative sentences (cp. tal 2886) ; as ia'wtp

oUi ytiapnaO i/rycS «6lir Sipt\ot, ovrut oMi rrpaTineS dp7avrTat aMir t^t\»t as
there t* no good in an idle tiller of the soil, so there is no good in an idle general
X.C. 1.3. 18.

2938. o4Si yif o^ (negative of col 7^^ lol) ; as eiii 7ip ttSt roDro i^tiaaTB
for neither did he deceive me even in this X.C. 7. 2.20. Here the first oM^ nega-
tives the whole senteiice, the second oUi negativee toDto.

2939. oi . . . atXi : aMi not even as weU as nor (2933) ma; resume a pre-
cedhig oi. Thus, Ifipiu yip od STipyaaaa oMi Jnffunt lit. not even the gods do
not love insolence ^. Tr.280, oS nirroit-pii nfLl^ireiS' il laiabmipai Ijr Affirm
Slf xp^"u wdax'" aiT6r he said however that he did not think that, even if
Dexlppus aas a dowinright rascal, he oug/U to sufffr by an act of violence X. A.
H.n. 26, 06 Iti Sii TiHoiiTDv . . . Koipbr d^Vciwi oiSt rSiSilr Tairir Ihrtp . . . wrwirSart
ire mutt not let such an opportunity go by nor suffer the tame as you have
suffered D. 1. 8.

ot firm otU not by any means however. On oi ^)]v oiit see 2768.

29M. oiSi . . . e£ : oHi may be resumed b; oA ; as oiSi yt i ISlf nriipit
sit if yiwoiro Sinavlf xjrurrla nor can the man who is bad in hit private lift
pro^e himaelf good in a public capacity Aee, 3. 78.

2M1. sfS) . . . •«n U tare (P. Charm. 171 b).

I z:-:l,vG00glc

PARTICLES: ovS4, o&rt (/*)j5^ H«)

2942. otrt (|lV) is usually repeated : oOn . . . oSn (p^ . . . pu^'i
neither . . . nor {nee . . . nee), oart . , . <rfr« is the negative of ri
. . . r*', and unites single words or clauses.

otrt %irnr eUrt Tori Irrai neither is nor ever tkall be P. Phae, Ml c, at>r« Xtr-
plro^t 4mr oUrt rXoia tiaii <(i> vtrt ri ^iTi^Siia 1)r Xa/ifiinttr In neither kait

CMrltophiu eome nor were there enough boat* uor teat it potalble any longer to
MCHre provUioM X. A. 6.3. 1.

After a negative cl&uae : ott trtigir oSn reit ffTfiaTiiyeii olht rnli irrfHruhvt

he could not persuade either the general* or the eoldieri T. 4.4.

a. oSn . . . f.1{n is found when each negative is determined hj a difleicDt
construction, as dtuiJirt alh' tl/il /ifrt -/tnl/iiir neither am I nor ntag I 6cooaM
ihamele*s D. a. eS.

b. When offri . . . tSrt Btands between oOti . . . oiS4 the membetn thoa cor-
related are subordinate to tliose eipresged hj oiSi , . . oiii. Cp. A«a. 1. 19.

2943. Soinetimea the first offrc is omitted in poeuy : ricot S' sth-c y^fmi <ti*-
eoMe nor old age llndar, Pyth. 10. 41, ^cAmi ^ii^t' tuorra vnllinglg nor umtOlimglf
S. Ph. 771. Cp. "my five wils nor my flveseiiaeH" (Shakesp.).

2944. For the flrat oVrc the poela sometimeB have ai, as ai rt^rrit oSr' V X""
iiiir not mow nor storm i 506.

2945. oOti . . . tI on the one hand not , . . but, not only not ... but
(cp. neque . . . et). The ri clause often denotes the contrary of that set fonb
in the ohi clause {so far from'). Thus, oBt* Iif»^#i)r rinrort iroart^itat iV9-
Silica Tt to far from ever thinking to deprive them of their pay / teUl giue H tu
them X. A, 7,7.48, &iu>aar . , . /i.^fyrt rpoSiirtir iW'^Xiiui ti/ifiaxoi re $at»tai
theg svmre that they would not betray one anoUter and that they would be altie*
2.2.6. So e<T< . . . oftn . . . rt. t) . . . olhi Is not Used.

a. Sometimes the negative may be added in the ri clause : s(h-( tutirot In
Kartr^Tiire ri re /mrriibr eix iHi\av neither did he »top to consider and the oraele
would not make it plain T. 1. 126.

2946. oGrt . . . n oi S. Ant. 763. ofrn . . . -n . . . oftn E. H. F. 1S4i.

2947. oSn ... U is used when the second clause is opposed to the &nt ;
as oIIt< rXsTd ivrtr ott drorXfuri^ifAi, (i/voivt Si a^o3 oiSi fuii il/iifiit lart ri trt-
rifitia we have no vettelt by tehich we can tail aieay; on the other hand, if mr
ttayhere.we haven't provitiont even for a tingle day X. A. 0.8. 10. Cp. E. Snpp.
223, P. R. 388 e, 389 a.

2948. tftn . . . o£ is rare la prose ; as ofrt n^erit, via l/i^f netlher raim
nor moiB Hdt. 8. »8. Cp. 8. Ant. 249. oOn . . . at . . . o<n A. Pr. 479. •«
. . . oikt Is generally changed to oA . . . ttii hi Attic prose.

2949. oOn . . . oi6i corresponds to the sequence of W ... 8/ In afflnn»-
live clauses. The emphatic oi6t here adds a new negative Idea as aft«r any
other preceding negative; and is most common after o#r« . . . oh-t: mttthrr
. . . nor ... no, «or yet (nor . . . either), <i6l4 la often followed bj an

1M3] PARHCLES: oi»cow, oSkow 668

empbaalEiDg partlcte, aa at, -/i, idir. Tboa, sOr* viXti offrt roXirriS •<!< t' ii^p
snlAer a State nor a eoratitiitlou nor yet an individual P. R. 409 b, nfr* ruJtefa
. . . >iV( Suuur-^pia /j.'iTt tA/iai /nitt irdytri iirfitiila. neither education HOT courts
o/jutciee nor laui$, no nor yet reetraiiU F. Pr. 32T d.

29SO. A subordinate clause with aiSi ma; come between elht . . . elrt.
Thus, otrt fif in i^IXon-d fK itriXtirtr i rariip . . , dv^^qKr oSti , . , xofi-
txV* Itiprvpa-t offr' aS rht ipiBiibt . , , irimiptptt for neither did he $how that
mufathtr left me in debt, nor yet ha» he adduced witneuet, nor did he put into
(he account the aum D. 27. 49.

oiKO^, oVkovv

2931. o^Koh' interrogatlre : not therefore t not then f (nonne, igitttrt

jionne ergo f). Here the stress lies oa the inferential oSv and an

afBimative answer is expected as a matter of course. ovVovf stands

at the beginning of its clause.

oinovr . , . li m SoKawri pou\iittr9iu ; rpU ft S lifulai do yov not then think
thtUlhev lay their plant well f Yes, vrith regard to lehat they $ee X. C. 7. 1. 8.

a. When a iiegatWe answer is expected we have oAcsuv at (P. Phil. 43d).

b. Ditcofir and air stand In parallel questiuns in X. A. 1. 6. 7-6.

c. Some acholais write oCtnvr or oix oBr for oinSr interrogative (and inferen-
tial).

39S2. vttai¥ Inferential : then, well then, there/ore, accordingly (ergo,
igitvr). Inferential otumv was developed, probably in colloquial
speech, from the interrogative use, the speaker anticipating the
amrmatire answer to his question and emphasizing only the infer-
ence. From the negative question all that was left was an expres-
sion of his own opinion on the part of the speaker. ovKovf has
become so completely equivalent to ovv that a negative has to be
added if one is required.

aiKour, &r»r Aj) fij) v9irai, wnairofiai well then, toAen my ttrength foilt, Ithalt

eea»e S. Ant. 91, 4 . . . rei)t ifiirtrSm nXcAovraj r6\tiiar rouir ^^voiui' ; »inBr

n-6x««or lovXc^iT or shall use say that those itho bid ui defend ounel<oe» make
Kort Then U is left for us to be slaves D.8. 59. oitoSe la used even with
imperUlvea ; aa tinoOr . . . luavtai ixirai accordingly let it itURce 1'. Pliae. 274 b.

a. Editors often difter whether, in certain cases, oiliiDi;i> is interrogative or
tnf^rential.

29S3. oSKovr not then, therefore not, so not, at any rate . . . not,
tiirely not (itOTi igitur, non ergo). Here ou is strongly emphasized,
and oh is either confirmative or inferential. oSkovw is usually placed
at the beginning of its clause.

a. la emphatic negative answers ; as eCtw l^iotyt Santi certainly not, in my
opintoH at leaU X. 0. 1. 9.

b. In continuous discourse (P. L. 807 a).

c oKeovi' ... Ye returns a negative answer with qualified acquiescence in n
preceding statement. Thus, rot^nr S^a Ztit irru if^tifripot ; ottavr hr ^jr^^YM

664 PARTICLES: oSv [aw

yt TJfr wtwptaiiirri* it 2ttu tktn totaker than theset Fate at leatt h» turtlf can-
not eimpe A. Pr. 517.

d. In impatient or excited quentions (non t non igiturf). Thus, oAnvr ipta
VM-', cIt' draXXax^tt Irci ; wilt thoH not tpeak and >o depart and be go»et
S. Ant. 244.

29S4. o4k (|i)|) ob Is to be distjiiguinhed from odicoi/f or oOnovr. Thns, trin
«ai rtlpif Tou u^aXfwP, oCu «5» itol Ti)r triXit yt T^t a^ttripit iptr^i dfwvrm tfr^.
«■«(>■ whenever then ^""e foiled in any attempt they did not for fA(t reaaen
think it right to (kprive their city of their valour T. 2. 43 (nil otr 8. Bl).

a. Hdt. has oiK ir (sometimes written ofixui) to emphasize an idea oppoerf
to ifhat goes before (nnn tamen) . Thus, rovra Xtyomt roii K^oTuM^rat oii it
Iwa0or by these wordi they did not however persuade tht men of Croton 3. 13T.

2935. oJ» (Ionic, Lesbic, Doric tSv), a postpositive particle, is either
confirmatory or inferential, otv pointa to something already men-
tioned or known or to the present situation.

2956. Conflnnatoiy si* in fact, at all etenti, in ti-uth beioiigs properly to the
entire clause, but usually, for purposes of euiphasia, attacliea ilself to some other
particle, to a relative pronoun, or at times to other words (P. A. 22 b). 0n7«i>.
see 2830; on iiir atr, 2001; on TocyapoCt, 2087. In some of its combinations
with other particles oBr may be inferential or transitional.

3957. iXK' oS* or &XX' o9v . . . y* (stronger than i' aut) welt, at all erenl>;
■aelt, certainly, for that matter; as iXV oBnoMjpoi 71 ^aitd/itnn aell, at all erenti
theg look like sorry felloxet, that they are X. C. 1. 4. 1 B, iW otr TesaOriw ■>' to*
well, at any rate you knoio this at least S. Ph. 1305. dXX' ow may stand in tbe
apodosis to an hypothetical proposition (P. Ph. 01 b).

2958. yV ^* (.'^^ "'■''■ iV ^*) f"^ '" /t"^' {indeed, in any case') ; u » yip
nvr \fytt% for indeed thou sayest welt S. AiiL 1255, drttacrSt ittiorm • ittWiiykp
out Stts biun iptit (a) dXXa you will profit by listening ; for I am eertatnly going
to tell you tome other things P. A. 30 c

Also to mark a consequence (X. A. 1. B. 11), and in replies, as ot-fV**' ^■
Phae. 277 e, and also when the speaker repeats an important word of bis inter-
locutor, as 4>T|;iJ 7<^ at" P. G- 466 e.

3959. G" oSv but certainly, at all events, anyhnv), he that as it may with or
without iJt in the preceding clause. Here air shows thatan uuquesUouable fact
is to be set forth in iU own clause ; wliile the adversative S4 marks opposition
to what has preceded and implies that the foregoing statement is unoeitaia
and liable to dispute ; 'be that true or not, at any rate what follows ia certainly-
true.' i' «B»isu»ed (a) tostt aside conjecture, surmise, or hearsay ; (b) to resume
the main ailment after long digression, and to cut short further discunion and
come to the point ; (c), with imperatives, to denote assent marked by unwilling-
ness, impatience, or indifference. Thus, (a) tl itkii tii tfiaw niVw, ofa oUa ■
■J/ntira/ui a' oE> tfiat whether I shall do icAaf I'l right (or not), Ida not knotr ;
be that as it may, I will choose you X. A. 1. 3. 5, lol txiytrt Kwy f»>ai

S96S] PARTICLES: ofe, in^ 665

rpXXA %pii/uiTa. rg S' aS* JTparif rtfr* iwUuii KBpat imrBir Ttrripuw n^rQr and
the I* laid to have given Cgrui a larye turn ; at any rate Cyrus then gave the
army four month*' pay 1. t. 12 ; (b) cp. T. 1. 3, 8. 15, S. 81. ReHumptlTe f
oif may also set aside doubtful Btatementa. (c) si V oir X^e, (( ooi t^ Wyy Tt»
ifiawtf viell rpeok on lAen, if thou haal deliyht in peaking S. El. 691, trrai j' alt
trot tiur ^(Xsr howrver, be it at you with S. 0. C. 1206.

ft B' ol* = but if indeed, but if In pninl of fact ; aa d 8' aSv n titrpfwvtTe nO
rpiaSir "Kiyou butifkeahouli deviate at all from hit former Statement S. O.T. B6I.

2960. S)| o{>* certainly then; cp. otw ^. Tbue, rl )4 sSi'; or rl o>r Hi
icfll then prayt a-iSi Si\ ott; hou> then pray f o{ii6f)Ta really then.

3961. ilrt o<r, oftn oSv : In kltemstive clauses vtr (indeed) U ftdded to one
or both claiuies as emphasis maij be desired: tin oSv . . . ((n vshether Indeed
... or, ttTi . . . tin o{* toAetA«r ... or indMif, or ttn o9v . . . itn oSv tcActAer
indeed . . . or indeed. So also In exclusive clauses : otn C|tV) ' - ■ ^^^
(t^ifn) ohi neither . . . itor yet, ofin (|iV) of* ■ . ■ ntn (|i>^) neither indeed

2962. ttr often follows Interrogative pronoans and adverbs (in dialogue) ;
as rd o9v ; who pray f rl oSv, generallj with the aorist, !n impatient qoesUona
aaka why that which is desired hat not been done (2107 c).

2963. oi* afSxed to a relative pronoun has a generalizing force and makee it
Indefinite (^Oe). Such indednlCe rslative pronouns are construed like the
indefinite rli or demonstratiTes ; and do not introduce relative claiuies (unlike
vihotoever, etc., which are both indefinite and relative).

So with adverbs (34Sc), as ii-wroSr in any way, no matter how (— utique
not ^ utcunque). Thus, aiV t-wmanur not even in the tUghtett degree.

a. Simply placed iffler relatives oCr has a strengthening force ; as Aartp bSw
at in fact (often in parentheses), ot6t np oir jaat at in fact.

2964. Jnfeiestial e<« therefore, accordingly (igttur, ergo), usually classed as
% conjunction, signifies that something /oi/uui( from what precedes. Inferential
vSr marks a transition to a new thought and continues a narrative (often after
frcf,jnijii,«r(), resumes an interrupted narration (T.3.42, X.C. 3. 3.9), and in
general atatea a conclusion or inference. It stands alone or in conjnnction with
other particles. Thus, invx'? ^' ''<•' 'i^of'? iriiiilor ^*ui inXtireai. Sii ar
nXv liir rail ipx*""' twitit^rripovt ftrivSat roil fun rur rpdirSri they were of

the opinion that we would be overcome through our lackofleadertandditclpline.
It to imperntive therefore that the leadert roe have now ihould be much more
teatchfnl than those ae had before X. A. 3. 2. 29.

a. The inferential and tranMtlonal use Is derived from the conflnnaUve
meaning, and !b scarcely marked until Herodotus and the Attic poal*. Cp. pit
etr. iwtl bB* in Ilom. is sontetimea used in transitions.

296S. rip (postpositive and enclitic) veri/, just, evmi. Cp. Epic
npt vertf much, and rtpi in composition. In .\ttic prose Wp ia coni-
inon only with lelatives (338 c) aud cunjunctioiis.

666 PARTICLES : irXifv, t4 [*«M

Snnp tht MTV one leho (i.e. jione o^er), oFit rtp jutt luiA, trSa np jmt
«htrt, Avrtp jMet ai, in Che vera may fn uAicA, (BometiojeB not very dlffennt
from iii, to wbicb It is related aa Jbnji to ji), tlnp if reallf. nfnp (Horn, nl
. . . rtp) hmeever tniicA, though, Epic i}' "p jii»t a*.

«. After other words eapeaiallj in Epic and Lyric and in Aeacbylos ; as pitn
ri Siiow JlcuXff rip tt ^ptri tht divine power remaint in the mind though it ht
enMlated A. Ag. 1081, pdxrr', ixri/uii' rtp irnipov Ae fought, {though') aon
f/rienlng for hia comrade P4S9, dif/i rip howbeit late Pind. Nem. 3. 80.

Tr\i\v

2966. rMfv an adverb, is used (a) as a preposition with the geni-
tive (1700) meaning except, save, when that which is excepted is a.
single substantival idea; (b) as a conjunction, aec^rf, except thtU, save
tfiat, unZesd, oniy, but (often almost = iXXa).

l^ittT-tiKtcoit . . . *iivat rX^r MiXfn'v oil tbe Ionia cities had revolted exoipt
atiletus X. A.1. 1. S; eiiili ir^ii rpit /SiurtXA, >-\V 'Opirrat irtxilp^r* no OM
went qff to the king tave that Oroatae made tite attend 1. 0. 29, irX^r tw ^nr
tilBua but there ii one thing and only one (Aol I fear At. Pint. IW. AsubatMi-
tive-equivalenc may follow rXii>, not in the genicive, but in the case leqaired b;
the verb of the aenteoce, as vvr^XSor rdrrn r\^r ol Nioitet all latemJ^ed txeept
the men under Neon X. A. 7. 3. 2.

a, «V)|v ov only not, except (276S) ; irV)|r f^ ezeept, aa oJ^ -y^ iXXv V l^rsm^
atuiur . . . rX4)r ^ npotliy ue loould not listen to any one {else) except JVocK-
cue Ar. Nub. 361 ; t)it|v in except that; irX4|* <t except ff, cp. c[ fii) (itlff «f),
after a negative r\ijw it tti) ; often with the verb omitted, an otitlt alStr . . . wtiiir
d Tit dp' ipnt no one knov>i except perhaps tome bird Ar. Av.601.

b. vX4* may be followed by the infinitive, as rl rm rtrpiKnu rp&yii* vM/r
r(tfx<"<">"i; iBhat hatt thou aeeomplished sate to v>ork mitehitf f A. Bum. lib.

2967. rt and (poBtpositive, aad flDclitio aa -que) is generall; used
with a correlative conj unction.

2966. ri alone sometimea io proae links wliole clausea or sentences whi^
serve to explain, amplify, supplement, or to denote a consequence of, wliat
precedea {and thus, and therefore, and at a rstult). Thus, i t' ix^l^iratmr ■ . .,
iKiXiucir' n^At ^i rev litaou iilaravBai but he was angry atuHthertfore) ordered
him to get out of the may X.A. 1.6. 14. Cp. 2978.

«. This use of ri {ri consequential) in quite common in Herodotna and
Thncydides, rather rare in Xenophon, and infrequent In other proM wiiun.
It occurs also In poetry.

N. — In poetry rt alone (cp. -que) often connects single parallel nonna wid
. pronouns so that the two connected ideas form a. whole ; as tr^rpow -nfiAt n
leeptrt and prerogatives A. Pr. 171. In proae, participles and inflnitlvea are occa-
sionally linked by r^ ; as laeapwripi sitrn rpetifrui rt ^XXsr Jtii^ie^pir^ bei*f

fairer and dressed more becomingly X. 0. 10. 12,

i,vGooglc

»9?«] PARTICLKS: t4 667

2969. Ti (or koI) meaning both may be followed by Myndeton (S. Ant. 296).

2970. Homer often, and HerodoluB BOuietiiueg, adds r/ to rel&tive pronouns
ind conjunctions Introducing Bubordinate cUusea, which are usually postpositive.
So after Sf, Jl<r«, dIoi, wi, Bre, irci, twOa, W>, etc. ThiU, ^f\i|tfcr in Aiii, h t*
Asio-i . . . dxio-irn lAe]/ jeere loved by Zeut, inho rules over the gtrds B 669. This
an translatable ri is probably connective (not indefirilte), and belongs to the
vbole clause. It has tbe effect of showing tbat its clause corresponds In some
way to tbe preceding clause. Sf rt is found in lyric poetry and in tbe lyric
parte of tngedy (rarely in dialogue parts), firrt, atit rt became common,

2971. Tbis connective force is also seen when t( stands in tbe principal
clauae, sometimes both In the principal and in the subordinate clause, e-g. St m
taiit twnrtlBirrai, iiA\a r' ticKoar «4toC wKoeofVtr obtv* lite god*, him e»pecialljf
thtv hear A 218, Sxirji t' (flCo-u, rj t' tlvniii rrixts drfpO* where*oevtr he ruthti,
there the ranks of men give tsojr H 48.

2972. Homer has t4 after tbe coordinating conjunctians caf, SI, vtU, AiiXi, <f ;
aft«T 4, tUr, nip, jAp, and before ipa In quMUons.

2973. rl . . . W nsually serves to connect clauses, leas frequently single
woidit. In mngllsh and often sufBces, but as ... «o is often in place, rt . , ,
ri is more common in poetry than in proa^, but in prose more common than ri
standing alone. Thus, rar^;! drJp^v rt 9tQr rt /atherof men and pods A 644,
ipal Tt yip wa\iiuM 'ArBipuu, rol rt »ur ixSlotit tlriv <| i/ai for the AffgriatU art

enrmiea to me, and they are now more hottlte lo you than to me X.C.4.6.S3,
Ttpl &r tllim Tt tiWivTtt ii>i tlS/nu re nlvx'Tsf knowledge vf uiAicA U tuoit
excellent and ignorance moU disgraceful P. 0. 472 c.

a. Une clause may be negative, tbe other affirmative (T. 3. 22)'; bat w«
nsoally have cSrt Instead of ri ot.

2974. Tt Kol or t) , . . koC often serves to unite complements, both almllan
and oppoeites. tj . . . icol is not used when one clause is subordinate to another.
Tbe two words or clauses thus united may show a contrast, or the second may
be stronger than the first, ri Is commonly separated from laJ by one or more
words, rt . , . ical is weaker than (ol . . . nal, and will not easily bear the
translation boCA . . . and. It Is rare in colloquial Attic. Tbus, Spx*^' f* ■>'
SpX"^" '" "'^' ("^d ba ruled X, A. 1.9.4, niWwTir ri ml Spiertr fairest and
bat -2.1.9, rir' ipxtimalri Sno^tStir to rule and to be a slave A. Vt. 9Zl , plf re
n6x iniir by fnrrx and not xeWingly S. O.C. 935, yviuiAaat . . , iavrir re toX r<M>t
Ir-trwi to exrrciK himself and Ms hone* X. A. 1. 2. T. Clauses disslmllai in form

may be linked by t^ . . . Eal i as iwncpirara Sii ppaxiur rt Koi altri ri ipvriiiara
fte annoered briery and only the guesUoTi* put to him P.Pr. 836a.

2975. r J . . . ca( is often used of actions coincident in time, or of actions
standing in a causal relation to each other ; as iiiUpi rt ax'^^' ^'^ux «' 'h rb
iJnr %iiow tl ipx"^*' day vsasjust breaking and (= toAen) the t^Sletrt came into
IA« WfUre of the camp X. A. 3.8. 1 (temporal parataxis ; cp.21SQ).

2976. Tj . . , (dJ is someUmea used of alternatives (tor dr* . . . rfr*).
Tboa, AdC r< yip HXorrot , . . taX iiiti MXarrot lehethtr God will* or not A. Sept
427. Here kqI . . . xalia more oommon (2877).

668 PARTICLES: r4 [afTI

2977. We find -ri . . . itri . . . W, li . . . Bol . . . ri . . . W . . , (W).
t) . . . T< . . . ml, Ti . . . rt . . . mlI . . . ri, t1 . . . koI . . . »mX . . . tL
Bat in prose t^ before and alter tal in nre.

3978. Wlien rt follows t^ . . . maJ, ri does not point back to Koi, but denotes
an addition to the preceding member (awJ betidei). Thus, rtfxfl re npuUrrcf
«) nut Tofiaiifrrtt 4>dpar n Tofd^uKx both d«s(ro||in{i (Aeir vnll* attd (Htrend^r-
(R? tA«Jr shtpa and besi'dM OMeMlii? trUit4«« on lAenmlvM T. 1, 108. Cp. 3908.

2979. Ksl Tt is Epic ; elaewbera the ml of col . . . rt beloogi to tlie whole
clause (A.Cb.252).

2980. &XX((t Tf Ka( both in other v>ay$ a>id etpeciaUj/, on other ground* and
partleulaHg, or simply erpeciallg. This combination nsually stands before con-
diUonal clauses (or clauses with a uoiiditlonal participle), causal, and temporal
clauses. Thus, X'^"^'' "^l"' tuipalpfiw dXXut rt tal reit/dar mWur liirptrtn
Srruw I think It hard to erou, etpectallj/ tehea the enemy facet u» in full forte
X. A. 5.6.9, itirTiar . . . droffTfjMMTfli" 'Kixrifiiii irri . . . , dXXui rt tkt ir' ix9fi
Tif TouTo avufialrs it U grievona to be deprivi-d of anj/thing, eipeeially iftkt*hap-
ptnt to any one at the hands of a personal enemv IX 18. &. Cp. ri t' 4(XX«
Miii)<ri ml idiphvt KuiE Japnnii't he both honoured me (a other way« attd gave
me ten thovtand darie» X. A. 1.8.3.

2981. T« . . . U is used wiien a writer begins as If be vete going nmpl; to
odd the second member (fipth . . . and), but instead contraitM it with the SraL
11)18 oombination of oopnlatWa and adversative pnrticiea is ort«n rendered its
harsh by the form of the 9^ clause and by other reasons, (a) The SI clanae
contains a koI ; as ifia (Jtrttra, tri, toXXaxo^t uffai^wf) ii koI \ e-ff^ t* TC rf rit

ivuT ncfiiitt roWaxaS Si xal IWaOi, lit. both in the eonttrvotion of epic poetry
but also in many other cases P. R. 394 c, (b) Tbe second clause contains a
formula with <I^ but not with xai ; as fri Si, tI S4, ri ii m^iiXauir, iitri St rst^s.
Thus, rp^ipiy Tt . . . .Of Si {both') formerly . . . but HOW X. H. 7. 1. 24, Cp.
P. L, 604 b, MT a, 967 d. (c) After a conniderable interval occasioned bj the
extension of tlie ri clause, it is natural to resume with ii. So T. 6. 83. 1, X. A.
7.8.11, X.C.2. 1.22, L. 2.17.

2982. Rare combinations are, e.g. :

f[ . . . ^ instead of f . . . if. Thus, 4 wajStt rtapot x4i"' '" yvralm eMer
yovng cfiCIdren and {= or) vsidoteed aomen B2S9. t4. . . {( Is ofUn emended
inX.O.20.12, P.Men.95b.

ii . . . eiN (|»|S0 with Winsteadof alFre (ftifri) ; SB ^■I'1'-8^> I'-I*oI-271e.
Ti is not followed by elh-t iifirt).

2983. Position of -rt. — Ti nsuBlly follows tbs word with which tbe seotenM
or sentence -part to be oonneclad is most concerned. Apart from many irrcgn-
larities there are certain exceptions to this rule which are commonly observed.

a. Ti may come between two words which go closely together, aa between
article (preposition, attributive genitive) and its noun. Thus, ri Tt fiapfimfuii
tai ri 'BXXqniii the barbarian an/l the Greek force X. A. 1.8. 1, d/u rpit n
XavTpii (ol X<i/i(3rac / will go to the bathing plaeee and the meadoie* S. Aj, K*
(for wpit XsuTfHi Tt). But 4 r6)ut rt Kot 4fH& si K^ftw 1A« StaU amd we the lam
P.Cr.SSSu

i,vGooglc

agS7] PARTICLES: nt 669

b. ri ooanectiag tm entire clause atftDds as near as poaalbte to the begin-
ntag, CP.X.A. 1.8.8.

c. ri m^ Uaod afMr a word or expreasion wblcb, chough commoQ to two
membere of a clause. Is placed eilber at tbe beginning (especially after a prepo-
aitioD) or In the second member. Tbua, A t< Itt ^t\ia isl (i M) woKfiua 4>ut
nfil{kir toAot uw mull contider at Moaging to our friends and what to ourent-
miet X. C. G. 2. 21, tr rt rj fftpiwifptf naX if-vxpor^pif in tht huUer and colder
P. Pbil.21b, dvcifft #I\«r irtpt t( f-o^^arvt a man dear to all and moil telte
Ar,VeBp.l277.

d. Tbe freer position of ri is often due to the tact that several words are
tnken as forming a single notion. Ilius, 4 KoXXIimt Si) ToXirris rt nai i cdXXi*
trot iritf lAs veri/ notleM eonHUvtioa and the ttoMMt man P. R. 662 a.

T0(

S9M. Tot (poBtpofiitive and enclitic) in truih, sureb/, dot^tleas, mark
you, be assured, yon (vmai) know, was originally the dative of feeling
(1486) of cnJ.

a. This ToC (Sanskrit te), found in all dialects, is to be distinguished from
Doric Tol ( = aiil) from t/:« (Skt.tvi). roi may tbua occur In tbe same sen-
tence with aot ; aa roiairrd Tel itm . . . \fyu 8. tt. 25.

2983. Tol is often used in statements of a general truth and !n ezpreeslons
of personal canviction (sometimes with a tone of hesitation) ; in remarks of a
confidential nature ; to introduce au eiplauation ; and In general where the
special attention of the penran addreaaed la desired, rof often gives an easy and
familiar tone to a reply. Thus, tSu tdi iiaralar irSpdam ppor^iiidTur 4 yXSat'
dXqWri -flitrrai tar^opoi true U is that of men's vain conceiM their tongue it
the true aecueer A. SepL 4:ie, itl tm i K^^i Uyovt ni^i ii^ptvri for Cebea, you
knoie, i* alvia]/M Inveitigating gome speculation or other P. Vh, flS a.

a. Tol may emphasize particular words, as ifii toi, f/ml roi, ri rot ; aud other
words not pronouns.

29S6. Tol Is frequently used after other particles, as iXXd, ydp, yi. Hi (and
yi TM 34, cp. it) rgi . . . 7(), hrtl beeaHMe, ^4i »i (affrw). On Jfroi, see 2t^ ; on
«Ir«, 2898 ; on M^n-w, 2017.

3907. The inferential conjunctions roiyap, Totyopuvi', rmyaprcx, rot-
rvv contain to^ the locative of the demonstrative to, which case had
the meaning of rif (rZ) therefore, on this account, so lit. by that,
therein. (This ru is chiefly Epic, and stands at tbe beginning of the
verse. Cp. to therefore V 176, S. Ph. 142.)
TMyif (prepodtive ; Ionic and poetic) therefore, wherefore, to then, that ii

surely the reason xehj/ (ofiun to atinuunce a purpose).
TMY«fafh', ToiYdproi (both prepositivu) are more emphatic ttian Teiyip, The

fhiBl syllable of rmyiproi is tbe ret of 2084.
TvCwf (postpositive and poHt-Ilomeric ; -rvr 2027) is transitional (note then, fur-
ther) or Inferential (therefore, affordingly ; li'Ss einplialic than rnyip). toI-
n when a speaker refers to aometlilng present in hia mind, wnen

flTO PARTICLES: Sk, it [*»M

he ooDtlDaM or rcaumes what he haa been saying, and when be paaaea tn a
new aapect of a subjecL It is often found wiili imperatives igKtrn Taimi
P.Cr.eic).

2988. DemonstratiTe fit (also accented uf, as) thrts, to is originallv
aa ablative frpm tlie demons trative stem &■ (from iro-). from which
come the article and ov he in nu m, ^ S* as (1113). For the -c, see
341. Cp. also <S-8t thua.

9o Eol Oi enen to, nmerthdeu, oM' (itiiS^') wt not even thiu, in no tfitt, tfc
sCrui (ufroih-wi) (n tAe lame wag, just so (ablative of i o^^). «i Mpi*t (lit. tAw
o(Aeru(8«, <n (Aat other toav) 9ui't< ofheneue and ut iXi)9^ (liu (Au« tri(f|>) is
very truth also probably belonf; here.

a. In some cases It is ancertaia wbetber &t ie demonstraliTe or relative;
e.g. (in In exclMuatory clauses. Cp. 2068, 3001.

2989. R«UtlTe Af OS, hmo is originally an ablative {in tchich way)
from the relative stem u>-, whence come also oc, i), o. For the s, see
341. Betative Sk haa various uses as an adverb or a conjunotdon, all
of which represent the primitive meaning.

Sekuive it as an Adverb

2990. In coraparalive clanses, often correlated with sSrwf. Thus, vurtt |f,
M t/utt irlvTarSt I teat faithful, asyonkaovi X. A, 3. 3.2, /cAnveTo^'KXXiiHi,
' At ri/iei airoU tlf MxV'^ ouru Tax^Mi Ae ordered the Qreekg (tAtu) to be Mo-
tioned (II ui(M their custom for battle 1. 2. 16. Cp. 3492 S. In Himllea and com-
portsonii, 2461 fl.

2991. in is rarely used for ^ aft^r comparatives ; as /nf ^u rpOK^Son iiarn'
in iiui yXvKi care not for me farther than Iteiith A. Pr. 624. Cp. 1071.

2992. In adTerbial cIhubss ^i le oft«n used parenthetically ; as wf t/ttl tcni
at it leemt to me. Instead of iit Sami, i«t tain the personal conatmction is iifu-n
preferred ; aa dr^Xcuirav, in pir tdTi rXdrraii tHKout, ^iktrliafitrTti tAcy tailed

away out ofiealousy, as it seemed to moHpeople X. A. 1,4.7.

2993. at restrictive for (cp. ut), involving the judgment of the observer.
occurs often in elliptical phrases ; as (Bpoirfiai) lir adSi iSimoi, in Au()<u^r«.
ttrtlr Brasidas u>as, for a LacrdaemoniaH, not a bad speaker either T. 4. 84,
raXtra dnxlirai SKpfiji tin in raiiur ix^PV o" hearing this Xerxes rejoiced as much
At conld be expected eontiderlng his misfortunes Kdt. 8. 101. On in restrictive
with the dative, cp. 1496 a, 1497 ; with the absolute infinitive, 2018.

3994. in is often used to heighten a superlative (1066).

2999. With numerals and words indicating degree in metuis abovt, Ne«r)v.
iWl/ar,fron>; as iwWTii !)[«» dt ir(rraiio0'(ovt having about five hun^td kopUtet
X. A. 1. 2. 3, liif M roU/or the moUpart P. B. 377 b (lit. about over the grtatler)
pan).

}Dc^] PABTICLES: £«, &9 671

2998. wt often tndieatm the thought or the UMrtion of the Bubject of the prin-
cipal verb or of Home other penon prominent in the EenUnce. Here ii% exprenes
» real intenUon or ao avowed plea. So often with partloiplM (8086) ; and alM
with the prepoeiUona tit, twl, wfi6t; as iirtr\nr . . . Ik rQt ZueXfsf «i H rtt
'A^fBf tAeg tailed away from Sicily at though bovjtd for Athtrti T. 6.61.

2997. <k iKovTOf meoDS «ach for hifoielf; as dir^Xewrar i( 'EXXifrrirrav ^
f«vrw (Ariw\timw) cari rAXctt thty tailed auay from the Htileipont each to hiM
MM State T. 1. B9.

2998. uif MTcIanuitorv (3682) may be the relative adverb uit houi, the relative
clause originally being used In explanation' of an exclamation. Exclamatory it
bas also been explained as wt demonstrative (m).

2999. On 4n in wishes, see 181S.

Relative itt as a Conjunction

3000. jkt conjnnctiTe is foaiid in dependent clauses.
Declarative : that, Uke Sri. Cp. 2677 ff., 2611 It.

Filial; that, tti ordcT that ; like [w, but not used In standard Attic prose. Cp.SIfiS.
Object clauses after verbs ol effort: that, like Arui ; cp. 2209. Rarely after

verbs of /eoriny; that. Cp. 2236.
Causal : a», inatmtich at, linee, teeing that, like Sri, irtl, etc. Cp. 2240.
Consecutive : to lAot, like Ovti. Usually with the Infinitive, sometimes with the

indicative. Cp. 2200.
Temporali q/ter, like iwil ; sometimes lehen, whenever. Cp. 238S.

3001. wt Is ofteit found before sentences apparently independent, where it is
Bomeiiiuea explained as a conjunction irith the verb suppressed. Tlius, ui r^l'
inSaa waMt ti iu6iia»iMi {knovi) that of my own accord I \elll not reiinqviih mf
child E, Hec. 400, in IHi ri tun riparm 'ApTtlar tati (do you mean) that yov for~
tooth thall b« lord and matter of Argivet A. Ag. 1633. Some scholars regard
this ut as causal, others regard It as demonstrative, others as comparaUve.

US cu, Hke

300S. tus OB, like (postpositive) in Horn., u ipvtOn As T2, stands
for fOK, which is of uncertain ong:iQ.

.3003. u$ to, a preposition with persons (once iu Horn., p 218) ii
obscure in origin.

SOME GRAMMATICAL AND RHETORICAL FIQURES
aoot. Amicolfitlion (AvaKoXovSov inconsequent), or grammatical inoon-
liitency, is inadvertent or purposed deviation in the structure of a
sentence by which a construction started at the beginning is not fol-
lowed out coDsistentlf Anacoluthon is sometimes real, sometimea

G7i FIGURES [3005

oqI; slight or apparent. Tt is natural to Greek by reason of the
mobility and elasticity of that language ; but in English it conld
not be tolerated to an equal extent because our tongue — a speech
of few inflected foime — is much more rigid than Greek.

3005. Anikcoluthon iB, in general, CBiued either («) by the choice of Bome
[orm of expreaaion more convenient or more effective than thu for wblcb the
sentence was grammatically planned ; at times, too, the disturbhiB mfluence U
the insertion of a brief expresaion of an additional thought not foreaeen at tbe
Start. Or (b) by tbe Intrusion of some explanation requiring a parenthesis ot
each an extent Uiat tbe connection is obscured or tbe continuation of the origi-
nal Btructnre made difficult. In this case the beginning may be repeated, or
what has already t>een said may be summed up in a different grammatical fonn
and eometimes with the addition of a resumptive particle, sucb aa Si), oft well
then, thfn, a» I mu tayitiff (X. A. 1. 8. 18, 3. 1. 20, X. C. 3. S. 9). So with 1^
(T. 8. 29.2).

3006. Anacolatbon ueually produces tbe effect of naturalness and liveliness,
Honetimea of greater cleameBa (as after long parentheses), or of brevity, force.
or concentration.

3007. Anacoluthon is either natural ot artificial. Natural anacoluAon is
aeen in the looae and discursive style of Herodotus ; in the closely packed sen-
tences of Thucydides, who hurries from one thought to another with the least
expenditure of words ; and in the slovenliness of Andocidee. Artificial or rhe-
torical anacoluthon la the result of a deliberate purpose to give to written Isn-
gnsge the vividness, naturalness, and unaSected freedom of the aasy flow of
oonveisation, and is best seen in the dialogues of Plato. Such anacoluthon la
usually graceful and free from obscurity.

3006l There are very many forms of anacoluthon, e^.

a. Many cases are due to the fact that a writer confonus bis construction,
not to the words which he has just used, but to another way in which tbe snle-
oedent thought might have been expressed : the conBtmctJon rpAt ri mut^rtr
(or iri7futH(»iiwi>) according to vhat ixthovglU. Cp. 2148 and X.H.2.2.3, S.O.
T.S63, E. Hec.SrO.

b. Some cases are due to changes in the subject, as T. 1. 18. 2.

c. Many cases occur in connection with the use of a participle (2147, SliS).

d. CoOniinate clauses connected by rj . , . tat, tal . . . nl, ifirt . . . oCre,
4 ... if often show anacoluthon, especially when a finite verb takes the place
of a participle. Cp. 2147 c, andT. 5. fll.4, 6.82.8, 7.47. 1-2.

e. The nominative " in suspense " may stand at the bead of a aentence
instead of another case required by the following construction. This involves a
redundant pronoun. Thus, Hp6^m ti tal M4rur, hrilrip tbrlr b/Urrpn (ttfryirai
. . . ri^-^m-t aliToln Stipo (for Wpi^tn, lal M^iwn . . . W^an itvpo) X. A. 2.
5.41. Cp. " The prince thatfeedx great natures, they will slay him ;" Ben Jonson.

f. The accusative often stands absolntely when at the head of a sentanoe.
Thus, i.\W niir lal Ti/idf 7* . . . , rUr nir la^iti rat yttctriu iKiir, h Ar ^yv^
ifulru alrrir iroiiiirtii', Af j' . . . ^(lifrrai but /urtAennore at rtffardi hamovrt,
(Ao>« Ke will partakt of and bt glad to UuU uAfcA As think* wUl moJte Afn ■

3oti] FIGURES 673

btUer DMM, but othen ha Mil «Ahr F. R. 6B1 e, 'EXXifMi roitt it rp 'Arlf olmCrrai
««/• »M ro^f X^trat (/ l-warrai (for X/yeuirir t2 JfTorrai or W^itoi h-isSai) (U (o

th* Qrukt who dtMll fn Atia there it a» yet no certain fn(el(^«nce mhethJer they
lire to aecotn;>anj( the eipedition X. C. S. 1. 6.

2. A main clause may take the conalraction of a parenthetical clftiiM (T.
4. 93. t). Here belongs the attraction into the relative clause of a verb thai
Bhould have been principal. So after ut tfioiwn, in atiiai, Sn 'M^ewt, etc. Tbus,
tMi ft fii)v, ill oliwi, Ttpi adroO d>a7i[Biifraro> flrat (for ^irrl) \iy*ir this Indeed
iB,at I think, mott neceatary to ttatf abovt it P. Pliil. 20 d. OfUn in Hdt., as
in i' iyii ilficaLva . . . elroi a^Ai 'Uaitfiipirou . . . wdrpwr but aa I have heard he
wat the unele of IdatUhyrmi on thefather't wide 4. TO. A construction may be
mirodnced by trt or ut and tlien paw to the bflnitive, or the InflniUve may
precede and a finite verb follow (2028).

h. After a Bubordinate clause with parenUieseB the maio clause Bometimes
follow! In the form of an independent sentence (P. A. 28 c, cp. 36 a).

i. An infinitive may resume the idea set forth by tbe principal verb ; as roO
ii ttoS rirramt, wf tyi v4^r re Kol iriXaper, ^iXM-s^Drrd /u Stir {^r ktX.

jehereoM when God ordtr» dm, at I think and believe, to pau my life in the pur-
3UU o/tBitdom. etc F.A.SSe. Cp. X.H.T.4.36.

j. Anacolutbon is sometimes due to the desire to maintain dmilarity of form
between contrasted expressions ; as ro^ /lir yip Imnrroiipaui olfui fv'O'* ro^

\oii liir Arofnir TiJi- iwSpiiwMt yiiifrifiUiniiT iyoBUr Swut St! xi'^'^o't •'oXXoEi J* rOr
Trrott ti^vKlniat ijSiuir rdt airSt xp^ droXailnr for I think that the Aorie-C«n-

tauri were at a Ion how to make ate of many conveniences devltedfor men and
how to enjoy many of the pUanuree natural to hories X. C. 4. 3. 19. Here roX-
Xoit Si is used as If it were to be govemed by Tipt^Soi, instead of which bAtuW
iweKaitit ia anhstitnted.

3009. Anadipltaia (dvo&VXdwns doitMing) is tbe rhetorical repeti-
tion of cue or several words. Cp. "The Isles of (rreece, the laleB of
Greece, where burning Sappho loved and sung ; " Byron.

OSJPtti S4, e9i9ai riXit iaruyrlTut, luff itiUp&r /liar U iJaTp r^f 'EXXdlst
irfiprwc/rrai Thebee, THebee, a neighbouring city, in the coune of one day hat
hren extirpated from the midtt of Greece Aea.8. 133.

3010. Anaphora (iraifiofii carrying back) is the repetition, with
emphasis, of the same word or phrase at tbe beginning of several
successive clauses. This figure is also called epanapkora ov epana-
Ippsia. Cp. "Strike as I would Have struck those tyrants! Strike
deep as my curse ! Strike ! and but once : " Byron.

olpriH 7^1^ roXXodt liir rUr roXiruir iti rait w»\iiilom i^Xarar, roXXoAi <I* iSlnitt
(tron-clrarrct iri^m frolirvai, iroXXodi 8' iwirtium Orrai irtiievi taTivntaiLr many
of the eUbseni they drove out to the enemy ,' many thty tlew vnJHttly and left
uttburied; many who were in potietfion of their civic right* thejf deprived of
th*m Ia 12. 21. Cp. D. 18. 48, 75, 121, SIO.

aau. Anaatrophe (iinunpoi^ri return) is the use, at the beginning
of one clause, of the same word that concluded tbe preceding clause.

674 FIGURES [3M1

Also called epanaatrojAe. Cp. " Has he a gust for blood ? Blood
shall fill his cup."

oi lirav KriTiri^ui^a Sirariu Biiiimr li' i^, ifU !' rlwtp /ftX^tn* irii^^r, mM*
9i* ir lypi'l'aTC for mtrely it cannot be that he is proaecuting CteHphon on mgr
account, and yet would not hate indicted me my»elf, if he hnd tkotight Oiat hM
eoitld eonvia me D. 13. 13.

3012. AntUtrophe (iyrurrpo^-^ turning about) is the repetition of
the same word or phrase at the end of successive clauses.

SvTit S* iv Ttfi rpJnifi Xiryifi Tijr ^ij^p alrti SpKow ajrcl, wiiutr tUrtt, S^/uvfmT&t
alrtT Khoeeer in his firtt »peech asks for your vole as a favour, asia tke l>r-
render of your oalh, atki Iht garrender of the taw, aikt the surrender vf tilt
(Utaocratic conatUution Aea. S. 196.

3013. Antitheats (<it?i<9c(T(s oppoaition) is the contrast of ideu ex-
pressed by words which ai-e the opposite of,oi' are closely contrasted
with, eacli other. Cp. "Wit is negative, analytical, destructive;
Humor is creative :" Whipple.

Si' Sr tt xfrttrTUt ^oBXa ri wp^fiiarit T^f wliXiiin ytyan, 3iA rairitr (Kwltm
T&r ah-flv wfiA^iair ii ^Auv airi XPV'''^ yir^firSat ; do yoa expert t/uU tin
affairs of ttate will beaime proiperoui imtrad of bad by tht •ante wteamrti bf
which they have become bad instead of protperout T D. 2. 36.

a. Antithesis Is sometimes extended to a paralleliiim in sense effected (1) ^
the 086 ol two words of opposita meaning in the expression of one id«», (2) bj
the oppoeltlon of ideas which are not speciflcally contrasted In words.

300.4. Aporln {i,irapia dovbt) is an artifice by which a speaker feigna
doubt as to where he shall begin or end or what he shall do or ssy,
etc Cp. "Ttien the steward said within himself, What shall 1
do?" St Luke 16. 3.

dropiS reS rfiJrrou iin)f 0ti I am vncertain what I shall recoil jtnt D. 18l W.
When the doubt Is helween two courses it is often called diaporitiM,

3Q1S. ApostopGaia (iwwnunnjtns becoming silent) is a form of ellipse
by wliich, under the influence of passionate feeling or of modesty, a
speaker comes to an abrupt halt. Examples 2362 d, I>. 18. 3, 22, 195,
S. 0. T. 1289, Ar. Vesp. 1178. Cp. « Massachusetts and her people . . .
hold him, and Itis love . . . and his principles, and his standard of
truth in utter — what shall 1 say ? — anything but respect :" Webster.

3016. Asyndeton (itrvvStrov not bound together) is the absence of
conjunctions in a sei-ies of coordinate words or phrases. See 2165 ff.

a. Here is sometimes placed the omission of the Tflrh after /i4 (>i% t^ yt, ^^
yip, etc.) ; as m*i T^'^ai fr' ("«!»»«) no more delays ! S. Ant. 577, Wt •^x' <f^

WTom Av rrsD ; ti.ii yi.p (tlwi) r^t r<(Xcidi yt, fi:)t' i)uD who would net Aow r«*<la>l
71m? Do not say the State, nor me D. IB. 200. Cp. MS, IbOO.

3017. Br«chylogy(^paxvXoy(a brevity of diction, abbreviated expn*.
lion or conatntction) is a concise form of expression by whi(£ a

3oi«] FIGURES 6T6

element is not repeated or is omitted when its repetition or use
would make the thought or the grHmmatical construction complete.
The suppressed element must be supplied from some corresponding
word in the context, in which case it often appears with some change
of form or construction ; or it must be taken from the connection of
the thought.

a Braehylogg and eitipM cannot always be diatiuguldied sharpt;. In
ellip« tlie Buppreased word is not to be supplied from a correapondiog word In
theoonttiit; and, In general, ellipse is less artlflcial and less dependent on the
momentary and arbitrary will o( the speaker or writer. Compendious Compari-
son (1601), Praegnans Conatractio (3044), and Zeugma (8048) are forms of
bnchylogy.

3018. There are many fonns of brachyii^y ; for example :

a. One verbal form must often he etipplied from anotber ; t.g. a paaafve from
aa actiTS, an jnflnitive from a finit« verb, a participle from an inflnitive. Thus,
Ti}> rfiv rf\a,t Sirovv fuXXor j) rJir iaurut ipar (^S:ffou;iJinif) roAtr tO TOBttge the

Urrltotyof their neighbounlkan to ite their ovin {being ravaged) T, 2. II, raCra

iyii ri oi wtWe/iai . . . , olfioi 61 aiSi JXXo* irSp^ur titfn {rilBtaSal nt) of thU
I am notpenuaded hy yiiu and I do not belteec that any other human being it
either P. A, 26 e, oihr Tdrxon-d lativ otSir atre piWomt (idffx*") imlther mf-
fering, nor being likely (to lujfer), any evil 1.12. 103, iitxiipv'ar SI ji«i ol Aftj-
roTw . ■ ., iratii ksI ittinvi tUar (ifaxupiivarrai) and the Athentani too witk-
dreui when they late that they (llie LocedoemonlanB) had done so T. S. 16.

b. A verb must often be supplied from a coordinate or subordinate clause
either preceding or following. Thus, lytifi* kbI vi ritrS', iyA St si do yov wake
her, a* I (wake) you A. Euin. 140, iar ti a^ix'ip ;•)' l^-fl (n), Po<i\ti<rg Si Sinrtr
rif tfXXoi Mpif ifapergnn shall not kill with hit own hand, bntifiome one thatl
auggett murder to another P.L.87!a; ^IXavi ro/iltavt^ aiicttp &r wbait vtBtr
(»fllfS) regarding aefriendi even thote whom thy hutband (so regardt) E. Med,
1163. A verb is rarely supplied from the subordinate to the main construction.

C. In clauBBB with 8(7, xp^ ^tc.: r« ^aJr^fft iu^nrrtt ott Stl (i/iimw) thatyo*
may seem to auitt Ihoee yoti ought (to ataiit) T. 3. 1.3. When a form of Toyxi'i*
Btands in the subordinate clause ; ir4r\turar in tiatToi Iruxar (irarXiamt)
lAcy tailed ateay at each betl fonld T. 4. 25. In conditional clauses when th«
protanis indicates that the asaertion made in the apodosia holds true of a peisoa
or a thing more than of any other person or thing (ifnp nt kbI SXXot, ttwtp rov,
ttwtp wtiri, <at Tii (ol dXXoi, etc.) ; as vu^^pci S' liar, tfrtp rifi tial i\\if, ri niav
riclorj/i* of advantage to yo», {fit (it of advantage) to any X. C.3. 3.42. Hence
<rr>i (rm, rD«tt) is almost = rlt, etc. (T.T.21.6).

d. Compound verbs (especially thone compounded with prr& and ii) ore often
so uned that the force both of tlie compound and of the simple verb is requisite
to the meaning. Thus, (ot 'A^rivaioi) tuTtymaat Ktpavpalcii {vii^uix'a' m4 ^oi-ion-
trOaii the Athenfani changed their fni'nils and decided not to make an atUautt
with the Coreyrarant T. 1. 44.

e. A compound verb on ilB M'Coiid occurrence often oinil^s the preposition
(rarely «(m verta); as ittprfi^qrai . . . tipyd^iTa I'.Fh. 101 d. £luipldM la

676 FIGUSES [301I

fond of Boch collocationa as iwimvnr Aratwor Ale. 400. Cp. the diSerence in
metrical value of repeated words In Shakespeare, as " These vfolfint deslies
have Ttolent encU."

'S. — la Kol (vfitirrlax" "' •pfp" ^ atrfai I thart and bear alike the gviU
(8. Ant 637) ipipu, though capable ol taking the partitive genitive. Is ii '
bf iumiftrlax't and has the force of biiu^ipw.

f. From a following verb of special meaning a verb of more general ir
■ach as loitir, ylyrmBai, tlnai, must be Bupplled with the phiasea oitir M\K» 4.
aXXo Ti 4, tI t\\o 1j. Eiamples in 040, 2652, 2TTB.

£. A verb of taj/ing or Utinkhig must often be sapplied from a foregoing verb
of exAorting, commanding, announeing, or from an; otber verb that Implies eas-
ing or thinking. Thus, K^itd'^duXoi jthI ' K'ToWiSupat ttXcioutl la Tfuararra turir
rliJlsaaBat, airai Si fyyvStrdai Critobvlue and Apollodorui urgt me lo eat a pen-
altv of thirty minae, and {»ag) that they Ihemeelva are euretiee P. A. 38 b.

h. When two verbs taking the same or diSerent caaas have an object in com-
mon, thai object is expreosed only once, and usually is dependent on the nearer '
verb. See 1034, 1636. I

L A substantive or a verb is often to be supplied from asubstantive or a vert j
related In meaning : nv/iax'iearTai idai (rav/taxlat) hatiing foaght one (sea-fight) I
Ar. Ban. 693, 4 ni' httra <ls AXa aXro . . ., Ztii Si iir wpit SSiia (r^Sq) the then '
tprang into the era, but Zeus (aent) to hte abode A 632.

j. The subject of a sentence is often taken from a preceding object or from
some other preceding noun In an oblique case without a pronoun of reference to
aid the transition. Thus, i^^ffiiirar liir rotti ra\Xai>i ode (fMrnt ri rpaariiuKi.
cat fiptvyoy (ol xoXXol) they frightened ateay moet of the cttiieas, v>ho aere in
ignorance of the plot and began to fly T. 8.44. Cp.943.

k. In general an object is frequently omitted wben it can readily be aupplied
from the context. Thus, tyx"r (jir olrtr) iniXtut he gave order* to pour in (the
wlnt') X.A.4. 3. 13. An unemphatic pronoun in an oblique case is often omitted
when it can be supplied from a preceding noun. Cp. 1214.

1. A dependent noun niuat often be supplied, in a different construction, from
one coordinate clause to another. Thus, Hpioi;! IXa^ov collSarar ro^i ^n/iia^ftw
they received oaths from Pharnabazue and gave him theirs X- H. 1.3. 9. So io
contrasts where one member is to be supplied from the other, as oAc ittim
(inttnir), iW ixelni airtf ipeif ifyaytr he did not bring (her) here, bnt the
brought him E. Or. 742.

m. From a preceding word its opposite must often be supplied, Mpeci»l)y an
afflrmalive after a negative. Thus, d/uX^crai Simp dI x-oXXat (AriMcXovrrai'i
neglecting the very things which most people (care for) P. A. 36 b. This laxity iif
expression is especially frequent in the case of Inffrti, rtt, or rirrn, to he
supplied after ofiSdt (^jj8((t), as fujSdt t^i. irip^oXiit B<i<ipi.<t^, dXX4 prr^ t&wolit S
\iyu HwirtsiTia let no one wonder at the extravagance of my statement, but let
(every one) consider kindly vshat 1 eay D. 18. 109. Cp. " No person held to eer-
vice or labor In one state . . ., escaping into another, sball ... be dischAi^tMl
from aaid service or labor, but shall be delivered up, etc." : U. S. Constitution.

n. The same word though placed only once may stand in two different con.

Strnctions ; as alriia it lol rirSt (r6iur) . . . /ifrt rOr 4XXwr Uipaiut rnt^cra rvr

sow] FIGUKES 677

^Hvrov oInWM* . . . (tniiMrrsr Tdlfei tpStir and I npprovt alto this eiutom that
no one of the other PereCaju shall dn irremrdiable hurl to any one of hit oion
wnmnt* HdL 1. 137. ilere ^riSfm if botb subject and object of Ipttir.

0. An BBaertion ma; be made concerning an action or a thing when 1^
absenee at that action or thing is meant (rw pro rei defectu). Thua, rf r' Jp' iy'
rixi^^f hnitiiuptrai whether then he blarnet ue on occoune of an (unfulfiUed)

tow A 66, ir-j ml npl xf"U'^rur lol Tcpi drifilat Sf^pwrot artvrttowrir on u>Afek
charge m«n run the ritic both of (lou of) money and civil degradatioti I). 29.
16. So Siia/ui poioerlemnett, ^uXod) neglect of the UMteh, luXtnuia tack of
liberal exercise.

3019. CatachrCtla (KaTax/nimt mimise of a word) U the extension of
the meaning of a word beyond ifa proper sphere ; especially a vio-
lent metaphor. In English : " a palatable tone," " to take arms against
a sea of troubles."

Sai/iinot extraordinary, Sav/idiruit deoided. ttrange, capital, iiatximi and
brtp^Ot deddedlg, hvrrtiu expp.Ct, rauiiTaKtir xSJra K. Med. 682. Such Osages

are leca often occasioned by the poverty of the language than by the caprice of
the writer.

3020. Otiatmns (xiair/uK marking with diagonal lines like a X) is
the crosswise arrangement of contrasted pairs to give alternate
stress. By this figure both the extremes and the means are coi-
rplated. Cp. "Sweet is the breath of morn, her rising sweet":
Miltoa

,X,

tr (ra/i' fx«r nJ 'f'^X^r Mi" having

, . one bodt and one toal D, 19. 227.

lWX*» id"

So rainii>roii ci iiaS to^irrtpof t\ r^XuM^rnv Arrof TriKuAtV &* ; are J/OV at ifotH*
age ao mttcA lofser than I <a mln« i P. A. 26 d, tSi ^r Ifiyer wir I* tret ^tytrrit
re iial wfiirroiTat lit doing every deed and vttering every word P. R. 404 e, lov-
\titir ml ipxtaS*^ . . . ipx'" '■■^ Strwiftir to be a slave and be ruled . . . to
rule and be a master P. Ph. 80 a.

3021. Climax (xXipx^ ladder) is an arrangement of clauses in sue-
cession whereby the last important word of one is repeated as the
first important word of the next, each clause in turn surpassing its
pi^ecessor in the importance of the thought Cp. " But we glory
in tribulations also ; knowing that tribulation worketn ^tience . . . ana
experience, hope ; and hope maketh not ashamed " : Romans t. 3-6.

o6s ttror iiir raOrii, aA* lypaifia 3/, aid' lyfiaifia /Ur, tin trpiafkwra Si, aif
irpta^tvao, itlr, aiiK Irttattti OnPaiovt I did not Utter these wordt without propos-
ing amotion; nor did I propote a motion without brcomtng ambassador; nor
did I become ambasiador v)ilhovt convincing the Thtbani D. 18, 179 ; cp, 4. 19.
IlilB flgnre 1h very rare In Greek.

3022. Ellipse (IXXaipii leavivg ovt, defect) is the suppression of a
^rord or of several words of minor importance to the logical ezpres-

678 FIGURES l3m

fiion of the thought, but neressary to the conBtmction. Ellipse gi*e«
brevily, force, and liveliness; it is usually readily to be supplied,
often unconaciotis, and appears espesially in common phrases, ctm-
structlons, and expressions of popular speech (such as i( ivijpt
kimra. to judge o lion from hia daws).

a. Ellipee occura in the case of BubstanttTea ftnd prouoima, nbject, object,
finite verbs, main cl&uaee, and (less ntten) subordinate clMuea. See the Index
under Slltpu.

3033. Eiudlage (tvoAAayiJ interchange) is the substitution of oik
grammatical form for another, as plural for singular (1006-100t< i.
Thus: "They fall successive, and successive rise": Pope.

3034. Enphemlim (eu^/utr/uk lit. apeaking favoitrabltf) is the sub-
stitution of a less direct expression in place of one whose plainer
meauing might be unpleasant or offensive. Thus: "The merchant
prince had stopped payment" (for "became bankrupt").

av/i^pi ataarenee for irixii^ mii/orlune, iriptn otlurviitt = not Med.
^^fin) 'the kindly time' for fii night, ttiirv/un left (lit of good ontcn, whereas
the left waa the unlucky ^e), <r rt aiBm if anything iJtould AtqipcM U> him =
^f he »hould dU.

3035. Hendiadys (tr SA Suoiv one by two) is the ase of two words
connected by a copulative conjunction to express a single com-
plex idea; especially two substantives instead of one substantive
and an adjective or attributive genitive,

xpi^v "oi toXm/mIv by length of tine and ttege = bg a long lUffe D. Ifli US,
iw i\l tttiaffl ri in Iht waves of the tea E. Hel. 220, drrUwr re Kmi ^rftnt s
uirXiir;(^rev oTpsToG armed force S. K1.3fl.

H)' iiit <lpx4' <'t ''^' tSXtiar Kariimtra* Sit tKniStfiiivttrn roiti 'RXXqpat, M U
TtXtVT^ ovror reXXoAt airrSr ^niliTovt hrtltivar, ral T^i /lir Iffirripii irAXn«t Tiit
'IwMt irdaniirat, 4( 4< dir^jcqirat (ol Ji' 4' iroXXdirii iaiit^ar in the beffinniiif
then enttrfd upon the lear vith the avowed object of liberating the Oreet*, of (Ar
end then have hetraj/ed »o many of them, and have eatued the lonianm to rrrt-li
from our •S'tntc, from vihirh they emigrated and thanlu to vihieh Iheg toere o/lru
taved 1.4.122. Cp. S. AJ.O^-OG. Momoiotelenton la moat marked in parowoimtf.

3037. Hypallage (£iraAAayiJ exchangp) is a change in the relation
of words by wliieh a word, instead of agreeing with the case it lof>i-
cally qualifies, is made to agree grammatically with another case.
Hypallage ia almost always confined to poetry.

i^k K^jca »u,atu the tronblts of my tpirit f 197, rttim AttpOw itrmt)m* Uairti
ttrife nf men tor ttrife of kindred men S. Ant. TM. Here the adjective
agrees witb the rest of Uie phrase taken as a compound.

3030] FIGUSES 679

3008. BypertMton ({nr^/Sarof trantposition) is the sepamtioD of
words Daturally belonging together. 8uch diBplacement usually
gives prominence to the hrat of two words thus separated, but some-
times to the second also. In prose hyperbaton is leas common than
in poetry, but even in prose it is frequent, especially when it secures
emphasis on an important idea by placing it at the beginning or
end of a sentence. At times hyperbaton may mark passionate
excitement. Sometimes it was adopted to gain rhythmical effect
Thus: "Such resting found the sole of unblest feet'' : Milton.

ri li atrit, i tpAi StUr, Ti4rar, rl ^^t iptriir iXmi ; but lehnt do j/ov f aunetf,
in Aratien'* name, Jf«no, tag ttrtue it 7 P. Men. 71 d, i3 rpit tt yiHiTur (B40) Ay
thy kiuti (7 tnlrtat) thte V.. Med. S-24, b^' ftbj TBiaDra r^i>t«)i> j, 'EXXit it-
BpAwoB from ont (nan Qretce endured such sufferings D. 18. 158, xparlir roit
inMovfS'^oB'' bfuii /(twfiirert aTpaTtjyait Conquering the gentral* you ifcept wnd-
irm out — inch as they were 18. 146.

«. The dlaplacement 1h often caused bjr the intrusion of a clause of conuast
or explonatlOD. Thus T»i)t rtpl 'ApxHr . . . oi ^^^r tniulraTt tw . . .
trliiup^aaB* you dtd not pottpoae your vote but took vengeance upon ArehUu
and hit etmpany X. H. T. 3. 7.

b. Adveibe sod panicles ma; be displaced. Tbiu, ovrw m Ipiet StiiSi a
pattion to terriblt P. Th. leSc, wiM yi^ rOr rmt trftx"" ^arror for they ran
much fatter than the hortet X. A. 1. 6. 2 ; so tE, lutXa ; on ir see 1764.

c Frepoeitlons oft«n cause the displacement (1063, 2690). On displacement
iD connection with participles «ee 1100, 1107 ; with the negatives, see 2090 fl.

d. Similar or contrasted words are often brougbt into Juxtaposition. Hera a
Dominative precedeg an oblique case. Thus, iwi rwr tiiirripnw (fut voXt^Mt rvft<
nAxur he wage* war on you from the resources of your cdliea D. 4. S4, oi yip rlt
f* ^'s T* ^'li' HimrTa ilifrai for no one thall chaie me by force, he teilling me

unartlling H 197. Note dXXoi dXXo (AXXa0ir, dXXexf, etc.), airit aiVroS.

e, Constenctloii Awi kmmS. — In poetry an attrlbnliTe genitive or an object,
common to two coordinate words. Is ott«n placed with the second onlj, as ^pi^ttr
XXunr'IXlou t' iaiMrasar telling of the capture and overthrow of Jlium A. Ag.
687.

3029. Hypophoni (inmi^a putting under) is the statement of an
objection (together with its refutation) which a speaker supposes to
be made by an opponent or makes himself. Both objection and reply
often take the form of questions (2654. 2785, 2819). Cp. " But I hear
itcoDtinuaJIy runginmy ears . . . ' what will become of the preamble,
if you repeal this tax ? ' " : Burke.

rl ttr, ir Ti» ttroi, TaOra X^ii ^(u» rOr ; tra yrHr' kt\. Why tiun, tome OM

lelll soy, do you led tu this now t In order that you may know, et«. D. 1. 14.

303a Hytteron Proteron {wmpm raortpov later earlier) is an ar-
rangement reversing the natur^ order of time in which events
occur. It is used when an event, later in time, is regarded as more
important than one earlier in time.

680 FIGURES [9031

rpi^ ilSi y4tiiim werebrtd and Bora A261 (ao rpo^tii ad y/rwu X.H.3.S.
10 ; cp. " for I was bred and bom " : ShakespeEire), tt/iari r' iinh^*'* fctMia
cal Xo^offB havingput on fragrant robe» and vnuhed 1 2M.

3031. IiocSlon {uTOKiakov having eqitcU members) is the use of two or
more sequent col& (clauses) coDtaiuiog an equal number of syllables.

ToG /air trlropor irat ^ikoKlvSvrop rit fitor gaTirnfatw^ r^l Si replfi\femw tal

rtpt/iixv"' 'rh* *^i» hroliiatr the life of the one he rendered full of Ml and
peril, the heaatg of the other he made the object of vnlveraat admiration and of
univtrtal contention I. 10. 1G.

3033. Litotes (XlTOTTji plaimiess, simplicity) is understatement so as
to intensify, affirmation expressed by the negative of the contrary.
Cp. 2694. Meiosis (/uiWts lessening) is ordinarily the same as lHoten.
Thus : " One of the few immortal names That were not born to die " :
Halleck.

3033. Metonymy Our<Dt^ftta change of name) is the substitution of
one word for another to which it stands in som&close relation. Thus : |
" We wish that infancy may learn the purpose of its creation from I
maternal lips " : Webster. |

^01 loathed object, iS Kitapfia you scunt/ ffi/fi^x'^ allies, ir Boitrrort in
Boeotia, Biirpor speetatore, »iixi baltl^ld, Irrtt cavalry, 1x66" Jtsh-markft.

3034. Ononutopoeia (ovoiiararoua making of a nam£ or woni) is the
formation of n&mes to express na^tural sounds.

^XiTXiS^ui bleat, ^eit^H batz, ^puxS^wc roar, foii quack, nasnafflfn CacJcU.
(Aicicuf euekoo, Kpdjv eroak, rirl^ cheep, tiittI^* chirp. Sometimes tbe sound
of a whole verse imitates an action ; as a>rit trtira riSarSt (uUtjtr* Xi«
dfaiJi^t doten again to the plain rolled the ehainele** itoae X 598 (ot tbe atoiie of
SisypbuB).

3035. Oxymoron {A^juopov poivtedly oi deverly foolish) is the juxta-
position of words apparently contradictory of each other.

rh/un tm/ioi a laa that la no laV) A. Ag. 1142, ix'P" X^P" » graeeleMs grate
A. Pr. M6, riant drnTTOTdr^ most faithless fnitk And. 1.67, airal ftiyorrat
^ttyouvt they themselves are flying from those w/iojly T. T. 70.

3036. Pvalelpsis (irapaKtiipK passing over) is pretended omission
for rhetorical effect.

rai y ir' 'IWvploot kbI Ilafavai a^oS nal irpit 'AplJ^fSat cal twoi Tit Ar «I«ai
wtpaXtiru irTpa.TilS.t I omit hia expeditions to Jllyria and Paeonia and agninM
Arybbas and many others that one might mention (lit, vshithersoever one might
speak of) T).^AS.

3037. ParectaSsls {vap-^ui; likeness of sound) is the repetition uf
the same sound in words in close or immediate succession. Allitera-
tion is initial rhyme.

iyaian, drnivt, dnXii, d^iXoi E. I. T. 220 (cp. "unwept, nnhoiioiiied, knd
UDsaug"), rtfnt i-diy riror ipfpci toil upon toil brings on\y toil S. Aj.SM, rv^ttbt

1 _ =L,.

Ti t' Ara rtr r* rwr ri t' Jwut' cT Uind art thmt in thy ear*, tkf rvotoii, and
(Ay rj/e* S. O. T. 371, ol eWi . . . ilj iroBarirrtt tlKiir ioCMi IdHurr' it wAo
would not ht ahU to give latitfaetlon even by dying Imiee L. 12.37, truri <r'-
in Iffiair 'EXXiiwr Isoi ktX. / laved thee; as all of the Qreek* know vAo, etc
E. H«d. 4T6, BariTou Sarror 9el wlckedneBS '^elA faster than faU ' P. A. 80 a.

3038. PuisOalt (wapiaaiais almogt equal) 13 approximate equality of
clauses as measured by syllables. Pariaoaia is sometimes regarded
as synoDymous with isucolon.

3039. FaromoiSdi (vapo^LoiimrK ossimUaiioti) is parallelism of sound
Itetween the words of two clauses either approximately or exactly
wjiial in size. This similarity in sound may appear at the begin-
ning, at the end (homoioteleuion), iu the interior, or it may pervade
the whole.

fiaxoiUnvt }Ur Kptlmnit elnu t&v roKefiiur, ^tftptitiUinvr 5t Hrrovt tQw ix^P^
bf fighting to be <ifp«nor to our public enemies, and by voting to be weaker than
(•vr private enemiet I.- 12. 70. ,■,^^-^ li-ft -■ '■■"''

3040. PanmomaslA (rapovoiuuriaj is play upon words.

gi yif rir Tftret dX>,& rir rtror ^ifr^XXoffv for he changed not hit ditpotition
hut hit potitiort Aes.S. 78. Often Jn atymological word-play ; as IIpWiwi Boit
B 758, MAl)TM - ■ - if^V" V. A. 26 a, naurarlav wauiraninu P. S. 185 c, tit
. . . riwoT . . . dtiSfj, tit KlSau to an invleible place, to Hades P.Pb.BOd. Cp.
"Old Qftunt Indeed, and gaunt in being old" : Shakespeare. SomeUmes this
figure dekis with the same word taken in different senses ^homonyms) : i/ia
tip iliteU rt t9» dpx^' irtrrtpodiitSa tal toii 'EXXijo-i^ ipx^ '""'' laxSr fytyrrro
' no loOTier viere tre dy>rived of the firtt place than the first disaster came upon
the Oreekt' 1.4. ua.

3041. Periphraaia (ircpt'^fM<nt drcumlocation} is the use of more
words than are necessary to express an idea.

Bpimiara N»ftou nurslings of the mie = the Egyptians P. L. 953 e, Olilnu
•ipi Oedipus S, 0. T. 40 (jtipa expreBBes reverence or aJfeotion). The subetan-
live on which another subetantive depends often stands for an adjective, as Ii
TifXen^X'^ ~ mighty Telemaeh (cp. 1014J. For variooB other periphrassB, see
the Index.

3042. Pleonaara {rXioiKur/Mt excess), or reduodancy, is the admis-
sion of a word or words which are not necessary to the complete
logical expression of the thought. Such words, though logically
superfluous, enrich the thought by adding greater detiniteness and
precision, picturesqueness, vigour and emphasis; and by expressing
subtle shadings of feeling otherwise impossible. Cp. "All ye inhab-
itants of the world, and dwellers on the earth."

«. Adverbs or adverbial expresBions combined : of time, as TdXir aS, otftt tX

rAXtr, rdXti lari rofrra wrepot, Iwtira tirri raOra, <!ii rfKavt Tit wirra XP^"' '• oi
manner, aa nri rairi inrairvt, iidrtir fXXwt, (It Juvuriii Ihi ni\urra; of infer-

682 FIGUKES [9O0

«M««, u ToiydpTU Sii TaOra, ix ninv . . . Sii roOra ; of cer^jteoHOtt, H 4lXfMt ry
SiTi j and vuiooa other expresBions, as tam rix' ''• ^V t^r*"-

b. Adverb uid adjective combined (ubd&I]; poetieal) ; uin /utr/M jwysXarW
hMfft ke lay t«^ l>i» Itvfft Ungth n 776.

C. Adjective vid verb i ^ N /i^ /laxpcAt rtiru U7avi but not to ipetht at (e«fU
B. Heo.ll7T.

a. AdjectiTe and HibaUmtive In the daUve : r^«f /uydJti /liw ei /vf^Xq n
Ifland not large in tiee Hdt. S,81.

e. Verb with an abstract aubatanUve Id the dative or accuaaUve (1616, IGM):
^>«(XtAf . . . ^4m T(#PirAu to be a (T-ue-bom king X. C. 6. 1. 24,

f. Compound verb or aubstaatlveB with BUbaUmtiTea : oStar imXiSt dZomihi* lo
build a houH well X. M. 4. G, 10, 4 rur reoyrar ritmr waiivrpv^ii the rearing oj
irownp' cAilifren X. 0.7. 21. Here the force of the first member of ths compoond
la qulescenL

g. Compoiind rerb and adverb : rps^/ia^a ir/ibh'Br I wrott Jtrat T. 1. S3,
drsYBTiit i' t/tai txaSir dri roO jcU^i^uTot luiBing diverted your attention owqr
flom thefiavd Aea. 3. 100.

h. Verb and participle' (2147 b) : t( Si, Xtyerm ii^oXJw. si Siap£>Aorm ; <■
tcAot teonli then did m]/ ealnmniator* calumniate me ? P. A. 19 b.

L Amplification by synonymous doublets (especially common In DeiiioaUi»-
nes) : d{iw lol Mo/uu 7 &e|r and heteech D. 18. 6, ipopytt lol ro^i «MM« and
Clear 14. 4.

J. Parallelism of positive and negative : iit Ix" "pl rotfrut, U|o> rptt b/iit nJ
gAc drojcp^a^ui I will tell j/ov and I will not eoaMol my opinion on theie matter*
D. 8. 73, oAc iK\irrtn, irapitt\i,eiwTB it not unbidden bvt invited T.fl. S7.

b, A person and a cliaracterlatlc or quality connected by rat or r^ ; aa isra-
Ulaarrti rtGrar Kal tA ro^av epiaot fearing Mm and hit audacity D.21.90.

1. A relative clause takes up a preceding ezpresaion ; lol f^J)r i^ timi «4nA
lii^itptr in (SxMT* <r\. and tome re^rUd also a prayer he mods, etc (Ui, Aow
heprayed) X. A.l.O. 11.

m. 'Polar' expm^ons may be placed here. Theee are oppodtea placed In
pairs so as to inUnsIfy such ideas as alt, no one, at all timet, eceryioAere, every-
thing poitible. Thus, taHtBait col irirepi^iiu both among the gode and amon;
men P. G. 60S a, aiSit otrt )U-i», atrt lutpir nothing either great or ttnail = abio-
luUly nothing P. A, IS c, ir 7$ '<il SaXdrry on land and sea D. IB. 324, alFri
JgDXaf olh-' iXtitiptt nor bond nor firee T. 2. 78, ^igrd nt iptntra fanda n^a»da
D. 18. 122, For other cases (if pleoDOsm, see the Indei.

3043. Polysyndeton (cp. Asyndeton) is the repetition ot conjuDC-
tiona in a series of coordinate words or phrases.

ital TOffolirurF nil tripar mnulr cal nfirxpblr nil rdXai ml rtutrX tal ftticpSr aaJ
litydhur alrloii ytytniiiinv toAu has shown himself the guilty cause of ao wuatf
Other base and disgraceful acts, both long ago and lately, both small and great
L.12.78. Cp. D. 4.39.

aOM. Pra^nana Constnictto is a form of brachylogy by -which
two expressions or clauses are condensed into one.

Here belong, apart from t6G0 ft., such cases as tit ri pa\ar»ii¥ poi\o,iai I miiit

104>] FIGURES 688

to go to the bath Ar. Ran. 12T0 (up. "be Ttill directly to the lorda": Milton,
Sameon Agon, 1260) and ipaitpbi Ijr ttKaSt rapairtevaf6iitn)t he VIIU evitUtttlf
preparing to go home X. A. 7. 7. 67. In npa-n^XXft ^1 ri JhrXa he ordered thetn
10 get undtrarme X. A. 1.6. 18 the cominiuid wae ^1 rd 6r\a to amu /

30K. Prolipais (TrpdAjj^is taking before) in the case of objective
predicate adjectives or Doung is the anticipation of the result of the
action of a verb. Examples in 1579.

Od the prolepeis of the subject of dependant olauaeB which ia put into IbA
main claoae, see 2182. So in " Conalder the lilies of the field how they grow."
Piolepsifl ia also uaed lo designate the anticipation of an opponent's argumenU
■od objections. One variety 'ib prodiorthBiit or preparstor; apology (P. A. SO a,
D. 18. 100, 25fl).

3046. Symploce (trv/iirXcHc^ inierweaving) is the repetition, in one
or more successive clauses, of the iirst ana last words of the preced-
ing clause.

trl vainbr mXiTi, /rt roit rj^vi laXcit, ^rt TJ)r Si/tioKpaTiar taXtU it ie againtt
younelf iheU you are lufnniontnj/ him, it it againgt the lawt that j/ou are tum-
Monlng hivt, it ia agatTM the democratic eonttUution that gou are eummoniiig
him Aes.8.302.

3M7. Synecdoche (awticSo)^ understanding one thing wUh another)
is the use of the part for the whole, or the whole for the part. The
name of an animal is often used for that which comes from, or is
made from, the animal. Cp, " they sought his blood " ; " Belinda
smiled, and all the world was g&y " : Pope.

S6pv tilip for plank, beam, AXiSiriit fox-skin for /oz, xt\i!irti tortoiae-ehell for
t'lrtoise, wop^ipa pvrple dye for purple-fish, JX/^di ivory for elephant, liMraa
Ivineg for bee.

3046. Zeugma ({cCyfui junction, band) is a form of brachylogy by
which two connected substantives are used jointly with the same
verb (or adjective) though this is strictly appropriate to only one of
them. Such a verb expresses an idea that may be taken in a wider,
as veil as in a narrower, sense, and therefore suggests the verb suit-
able to the other substantive. Cp. " Nor Mars his sword, nor war's
quick fire shall bum The living record of your memory."

o(rr« ^rii* otrt tov itap^^n /SpwiSr ^« thav thalt know tifilhcr voice nor
form of moHal man A. Pr.21, dXX' fl iroaXaiv 4 flaeuo-ia^r irinii .^of nr no,
either give them to the Kinds or in the dFfp-dtifj soil bury Ihem S, El. 4SG,
tS9UfflTertonii^\ai>tr6rT'liiiiT0fthFyai f'U sheep anA drink choice aine M31B.

a. Different from zeugma ia tj/Uepaia {<r6Wii<f'u taking figethrr), by which
the same verb, though governing two ditltrent objects, in Mken both in its literal
and its metaphorical sense ; but do«« not properly change its meaning. Thus,
Xfift^f* TtXeGrrn tb^mi . , , jkaI x^^" paying m-ines and rendering thanks to
than P. Cr.48o.

uogic

APPENDIX; LIST OF VERBS

This Uit la general inclades tbs comnon verbs shoirinK my formal pecDiluJty
of Cense, Tbe forms printed in beftTy-tsced lype belong to gtaiidsnl Attic, that ti,
to tbe iBneaage lued la coididod speech ood ia ordloary prose : utbers sre poacicil.
doubtIa],.ufslectal or lal«. Many regular forma are omitted because they do not
appear iu the classical writers ; though their □on-appeanuice in [be extAnt texts mi;

ArlsUtle, and to Hippacrateg, though many works ascribed to him are of later data.
Tbe determination of tbe forma of Attic proae as disClnguiahed from those at poeir;
is often difficult because of iDaufflclent evidence, and in many cuen certainty is noi
to be attained. The tenses employed in tbe dialogue parts of Aristophanes and other
early writers of Attic comedy are usually to be regarded as eiiatine Id tbe spokfn
language except wben tbe character of the verb In queatiou ia such as to indicate
borrowing from Epic or tragedy. Sometimes a tense attested onljin trsgody tod
In Attic prose of tbe latter part of the fourth century may bare bean ns«d (n the
best Attic prose. The eipressian in proae means in Altic proat.

Apreflied hyphen indicates tliata form used in prose is attested generatly. or only,
In composition ; and that a poetical form occurs only in composition. Klsld concisl-
ency would have led to too great detail; besides, many tenses cited as ezutlDi; onlf
Id composition may have occurred also in the simple form. For the det«ila of nogr
on this and other points the student is referred to Veitch, Oreek Verla, Irregular ann
D^ncHve, and to Kiihner-Blass, GriethUche Orammatik.

The tenses cited are those of the princfpafportj (369). Tenses inferred from tbew
are omitted, but mention Is made of the future perfect, futur« paaalTS, and of the
future middle when it shows a passive sense.

An assumed form Is marked by * or has no accent ; the abbrevlBtlons nor. and

««!■/. denote Itrei aoriit and Jirit ptr/ecl ; of alternative forms Id tt or «v (78), that
I TT is given when the verb In question belongs to the classical spoken UmgDag^-
In tbe citation of Epic forms, futures and aorists with te, and Mver^l other Vigit
peculiarities, are usually not mentioned.

The appended Roioan numerals indicate tbe class li91S29) to wblcli the preecnl
system of each verb belongs; all verbs not so dssiznated belong to thejtrM class
(498-001).

'iiai (ifa-w), &i^ Aarm, infatuate: pres. only in mid. dSrai ; aor. ia^a (Ju-i
or Jotf^s), aira, iaaifiJiy (and iaviuiir OT inradif^r) erred ; oor. pass, ii^tv,
T. a. in d-aoTot, d-sBToi, ir-atot. Cbiefly Epic.

Ay^Um (d^sX-) adorn, Aonour (act. in Com. poets): AyaXA, fyV^i ™^
If&XXoiuii glory in, only pres. and imperf, (III.)

&Y>-|>^^ admire (725) ; aar. ifyiati\v (489 e), rarely ^'ywt&ih]*, t. a. Afovr^i.
Epic fut. d7<fa'(ir)spA>, Epic aor. 47>'(')d^T)r. Horn, has also iyiaiMi admirt
and d^sfo^uii (dYs- for dYocr-) envy, am indignant at or with.

ikyy(k\M (d77«X-) announce: &YYtXa, {iYY<i^>i <iTY'^»' <itT«^l"»> WI*^*-
dYY''^^<ro)'^ii ^YY''''''^- ^ ^°'- P^^' 4vr'^v>' tBxeXj on Ate inscr. (III.)

iYitpM (iytp-) collect : frfif^- Ep\e are aor, mid. (ur^ifytipi/t/itr ; 2 aor. mid. iyt'
IMrra ossfmMed, IjfptTo (hss. lypero), iytpitBai, 4SG a, D. (Kme read with
use. iy^pirSai), iypi/trtot ; plup. S pi. iYtiyfpaTa ; aor. pasB. iy4p9^r. E^ac
by-form liytpieaiuLt. (III.)

i,y'iriu Epic and Ion. = Kyw. Inf. iyltftitnit Epic.

dYvo^H noE to knota : regular, but i^1|voi^re^La^ as pass. (806). Horn. 4y»U*t.

&Y-*^> (.iy- lot* foT-i 7S8) break, in prose generally icariyniu, mrmyrtu Id all
SH

I;,C.00J^[C

iniw>^M>] APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS 686

tenMi: -itm, -Afa (481), 2 pert. -Mym, (443), 3 Mr. pua. -ttyip (481),
-rnKrH. Bpic aoT. 4{a, and 2 aor. pass, ii-ni- and 27i)i' ; Ion. 2 pert. fTVa>
(IV.)

mid. &(»pAi, also — tal. pass. (809). Aor. ^fa suspected in Att., Hon).

dfdfiqx : Horn, bas mixed aor. i^irt, df^^rai, df^tu' (M2 D.).
J)(- or etji' be lated in Epic anr. opt. iSivtuw and perf. <t Jijiirft.
4S« >iti£): 4w|ii<u CB^)> {"^1 'd'H'A*! JB^'i fo^faf. Uocontracted forma in

Epic and Ion. an itISw, itltu and dtfra^uu, 4*c<>-
it' retf, Jleep: Epic aor. iaa, aira.
1<1^' : see alp*.
i^ : Horn, for ><(■ («i{dni).
If/u (dir-, d(-, 724, 741) blow: 3 8. l^iri, S dn. lir*'. 3 pi. dcuri, ini. ditfuHu,

d^m, part, dcfi, imperf. Sb.Sti; mid. prea. iirrai, part, d^/um, Impart, iitTa.

Poetic, chieS; Epic.
klSfafuii {I'lSe- for a'9«r-) resjiec^, /eei thame : atSfavjiAi (488 a), fS««>(u (4S9 o),

jSdir4i)*, a[S«g'W|jo)Mn nre (812), ]jSHrd{iii)v pardon a criminal in proM,

othervlae Tragic. Imper. alitic Horn. (660). Poetic orSiuui.
■I«(ta|iai OKlrage: a[JtloO^^ gKitfApiT|v, fsiv^iu, 'pKtrdir ua« outrairrd. oicffbt

act. plague poetic. Epic dtiicl^d. 612. (III.)
tbfi» praite, uau. comp. w. Art, ropd, etc., in prose i -airiaui (in prose nso.

-<u*<ffa|MU, 488b, 80fl), -^'viffm, -u'wud,, T|Vt](i«i, -^rieifw, -airtoft^pAi,

-juwrJoi, -ri< Arialotle. Epic and Lyric are a/n}iru, jrqra.
ar-n>/uu (die; only pres, and imperf. (n/ftf/iiji-). Epic. {IV.)
alftw (olpc-, ^X-) (dyte, mid. ckooie: alp^ra, 2 aor. tlXov (481), ifpHKa, 4|n|l>«*

(mid. or pasa.), nptfiiv (usn. koi choien), alprfV*l^»i Bipcrdi, ^rfet, iSit.

perf. jpfjo-opAi rare. Hdt. perf. ipalpjfita, ipaipijiiai ; Horn. v. a. An-Ai. (VI.)
■Ip« (544 c) raise: ifi, ^pa (dpa, ipBi|u, opo*, apai, JipXt), ^rka, 4pt'*^

liptq*, ^pd^Ofioi, ipT^oi. Ionic aod poetic itlpu (_iftp-): AtpH, ^tpa, iip-

iyfw, Hom. plap. iupTo (from tepro) for IjtpTo. Fat. dpoOM» and aor, ipifitir

belong to d>)ni^i (ip-') win. (III.)
al^-ivoiuu (alirO-, alirSt-) perceive .' aIa-Miira|iBi, 2 aor. ^v4d)M|v, frti||iai, at-

B*rft6t. The tty-form nfffAifui is doubtful. (IV.)
dtrvu ruaA : see f i-m.
•tex-^n* (oiffxi"-) dlfgrace, mid. /eel MAamed; ato^iinA. H^xW, jrx<«*<f*

/eU (uAained, aCaxvrrfof. On fat. mid. alo^weSpiM and tut. pass. alrnyMf-

ropAii, see 1911. Hom. pert. paaa. part, ^ax"'^''"- (^"0
itw A«ar, wWi a usa, in Att. poeM, S in Epic, Lyric, and In some Att. poets :

imperf. Hom. Iflet, IXar and iior, aor. tv-Sn Hdt. (net. irijuit), v. a. ftr-

dtrrot Hdt. Poetic and Ion. Hom. lias also itCu, of which itiir (msb. dtvr)

may be the 2 aor.
(Uw breotAe out.' imperf. ii'i* Epic,
■lit«X-'{>» (dmxi)-, d«ix-, litaxf-, from i^- redopl.) mJIfc/, grtevt : di:o>:if»«,

didx^' (i'^i^)' ^ i^''- 1<<'X°''' dicdxiM^i am grUived (8 pi. diiix'S'^'")) ^^■

didxvr^' <*26 a, D.), part. dMX't»«"i and diiijx<*i«»t (4^6 b, (2) D.) Cp.

dX^u, ixtiw, ix'"")*'''- Kpic. 612. (III.)

dj-ax-M^"" (*«- ; cp- ««-*»' Pe"*) eharpenea; Epic redopL peri, part., wilb no
preoent in use.

,ooglc

686 APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS [d«^*)«.

ititiiat (dm- for dnr- ; Op. ri dun atre) h«al : {lUffAiiii*, Atarrit. Horn, bu j

fdso d«lw. I

ingJAi (iUti*«- for dinftir-, 468 D. ; cp. iini»it iiKcartd for) negltet: d<4(wa

Epic. Epic and poetic
itnim (d«au-, dnov, *:i) hear ; dKoiin>|uu (806),{iMvira, 2 peri. AjrijuM (GeSa), i

2 plup. ijici|ic^ or dKi|KdT|, iJKatff4T|v (469 e), dKovrM|o-o)uu, Anowrrft, -t4*i. !
dXsXdfu (dXaXaT-) ratse the toar-crp, usu. poetic or late prose : ihaMfetuu (806), j

JiWX.^". (III.)
AXdoiiu isiituier, me in pro«e ; prea. Epic imper. dXdou (his. dXiw, 643], peif.

Epic dXdXirfui as pres. (dXdXiiaa, dXdXiprSai, dXaXif/unf), AOr. Kpic dX^F.
dXardfu (iXarvy-) destroy, plunder .- Epic are dXardfu, dXdrofd. By-fomu

Xardf^, \arirru. (III.)
dX^oftcd (dXIar-) wtth the bf-fonnB dXIdru, dXai)«'icw, nouriih: Epic 2 aor. (OT

Imperf.) fXiani', T. a. Epic ir-a\roi insatiate Poetic. (IV.)
4Xtl4« (1X«^-, dXt^) anoint: AXtlfa, {)X«^ dv-oX^ii^ (477 a), dX^lUfifu,

^ffifil*, Un^i^rviuu, i{-aXii*T^. 2 aor. pass. W*V'< 4X<f^> are iloul>l-

ful.
dX^ and dX^m (dX<E-, dXcC*-, dXti-, dXc-) ward off: fuL dX^ poetic (nre),

i\i(iiiuu Xen., Soph., dXef^irw Horn., i\iHtroiuu Hdt. ; aor. jfXifa Ae«:h..

4X/t^a Epic, 4Xt{d^i)r loD., Xen., iXt^iiai/air (?) Xen., 2 aor. aXaX»r poetic

(&49). By-form dXudSu poetic (490 D.).
0JoiAAi avoid : aor. 4Xed>»r> (48, 007). Cp. dXi^. Poetic.
dX<^ avert: ffXtv^a. Usu. in mid. dXt^wu arold, aor. i)Xndf»|r, snbj. ii-mXi6-r-

KHai (^C-aX£{w»i«i f). Poetic. Other fonns with like meaning are dX«li«,

dXArnw, dXiiff|[d{)ii, dXivxafru.
AXia ^Rd.- dXA (&39), JpUra, dXV^i (dX^Xnr/ut, 480 b). By-fonu dX4«H.
dX^KU ! see rfXw.
dXtfofuu (dXa-, dX0f-) am healed ,- Epic dXS«Ta and ^-aXA^Ofiai. Hlppocr. Ins

aor. -qXMrSqr.
Hdtio eauie to roll (also dXii^^w, dXlw), usu. comp, with If: -i^ivm^ -'ptAw,

^IvSiiiuu. dXiu Is a pres. derived from 4|Xura (= iJXtriaa).
iXrlo-KOfMu (iX' for ^aX-, dXs-, 480) am captured (used as pass, of alpu!) : 4X4-

m|uu, 2 aor. «(Xmv or 1iX»« (dXd, AXoCtj*, UAwu, UsW, 067), UXmo (44:1)

or I^Xwio, dXwrit. Epic 2 aor. snbj. dXiiu. Act. dXlriw la not used, bat see

dmXL»u expend. (V.)
dXiTBl»/uu (dXiT-, dXirav-) (in : Epic are aor. ^Xiror (-A»iir), perf. part. dXtnt-

fMTOi ifnninff. Mostiy Epic. Epic bj-form iXirpalru. (lEI. IV.)
iXXArrit (dXXa7-} change, often comp. w. iri, lid, ^Mrd : dXX&Ew, {iXXaf^ -^-

X>X<^ ^U^viuw, TJXX&x^* (usu. in tragedy) and ipJidiY<l> (both usn. in

comp.), fut. pass. d'T-oXXax^'i'")"^ (*o '" tragedy) and i'r-oXXo.f^iniwiL,

fut. mid. -oXXdfopu, fut. perf. d«-i]XXdto|iBiL, v. a. d^^^XXorrJat. (111.)
■XXoiui (dX-) leap ,' &XoD|Uii, 'f|Xd|H|v. 2 aor. ij\6in)r rare and uncertain in AU~

Epic 2 aor. Ikiro, aXro, dX^nt (086). (III.)
dXvrrdfw am dittreited Ion., dAujcr^u am aiixioit* 1al« Ion.: Epic dXsXicni-

Mat w. reduplicaUon. 512. (III.)
iXictu (dXux-, BSa d) anotd.- dXCfu, 4|Xii{<>. Ilom. has also dXimn({1> and iXt^

ir«dn>. Poetic. (V.)
dX^-dvw (i\t-)jittd, aeguire: Epic2aor. flX^i>. (IT.)

i,vGooglc

faatvrtp.] APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS 687

tfMfT-Ant (iitapT-, atiapTt-') ftr: J^iapHjffojioi (806), 2 aor. Iffiafmv, ^ftApngKa,
iffitniffai,, i\f,afyif)j\v, dr aj»&|>TT)Tot, lvtf-a|wpTT|Tlat' Epic 2 aor. ij/ifipgrow
(for ^, seem;. (IV.)

d|iPX-loic* (dM9X-) nnd &|ipu* mUeany; reg. io coinp. w. H- -4aLfyMc^,
-^(PUko, -^ri^t>|i(u, Oiher fonns ore late. (V.)

A|uipa change, rare in Att. prose : A|m(i|w, ^|uu|(a. tUd- &|u(p«|UUi make nhtn,
rare In proee and comedy : d|u(it>0|Mi, ^|M>i|nI|«i|v. In Ibe meaning antwer
■iltwfiiiair and i/tft^fv B^e poetic.

ifitlpu (d>up-) drprive, only In prea. Poetic. (III.)

iliiptn deprive : 'inepaa, iiiiJp0Tt*. Poetic.

iiir-ix" And rare inw-lax" (.^1^^ + ^X"' 1^ d) pat about, clothe ; Imperf. d^«^
eixor (Hom.d>ir-^X<")i d/^^t". 2 aor. ((fiT-iff):**. Mid. 4|wMxo|iai (il>iT-(ffx<^
fuu and iii^-urKfio,uu) wear: imperf. ^)Lir-iixd|M]v (461), fat. &|i^-1{o|uh,
2 aor. ^|wi4rxd|»]> and i|p*-wxd>ii1*- See )x<* ^^^ '^<ni**-

dfirXoc-ItfcH (dfiT^it-, djixXaie-) err, mtst : 2 aor. iliir\aimr and 1iiiff\aimr (pwt.
dfirXonir and Sa-Xoiciir), ^^'o'^dxij^i, di>-a^irXdinr''D'> Poetic. (V'.)

d^s-rw, A/irrittiit, iitwyvra (Kpic) : bl'C rviit.

4|i4n> (d^uip-) tsnrvi njT; d|iiiva, <i|LOt«l Mid. dfi^wpAk rt^«a(t mj/atlf: dfiwoft-
^ot, ^|lG*&|li]v, v. n. diLundftt. By-form d/iDidAj, 490 D. (IIL)

ifi^u (dfivx-) scratch .- d^fcd, <!f»{a. Pnelic and Ion. (III.)

Aji^t-yfo^ doubf; imperf. ijii^^vdosir (Tiji^i-Yvdow ?), aor. t|ji^-4yi4i)««. 451.

ifi^t^^cvQiu (late d«i«i»n>u) cJoeA« ; d|i^t.A (5-^0 o), t^[-w« (4fi0), iHi^(-M-|iAi.
Mid. fut. &^4ir«|UU, aor, dfi^i-c(rd;ii|r poetic. (IV.)

4p4**'Pt*'<* dUp'ate: the augmented (461) ^ii^rP^jraw, i^f^^ur^^{n^T* (Insor.)
arebettcr than 4/i«i- (yt>B.). Knt. mid. Afi^iurPTrHiroiuu aa paag. (SOB).

A*«I*o|uu (dnir-) refUK, only pres. and Imperf. in prose ; aor. 4>i»d/iqr poeUo.
(III.)

&*-aX-(ovM {A.\; dXo-, 486) and dvOXdtt expend (from in-foX-) : imperf. Ir^Xi-
amv (d*1)XovT, rare), dvlXiira, dWjXvn, dv^Xwa, drfpUtfuu, din)XMi)r, fnt
pan. dtBX«M|v«|iai, dvSXwrfet. Alt itiscr. prove the km. forms dMlXwra,
dMlXMia, irt\u/tai, iri\ti07iw Ui be late. iiaT-j)ri\uea, -j)ri\uiiai, -i)kXiMi|f
»re also late. See dXto-Kopat. ( V . )

Attune (is- for tfaS-, 128, and iit-) usa. Epic and Ion., but the pres. occurs in
Att. poetry : imperf. Horn, probxbly iirSarar and Arjnni (msb, /^rSaror and
4i>9arav), Hdt. Uriarer (some write JdrSamr) ; fut. Hdt. it^rw ; 2 aor. Hdt.
faSov, Horn, (ffolvr {loi if faior from ivfaS^r) and OSov; 2 perf. Horn, fdia
(448). Adj. &r|uvof pl«a««l, in common UBe. Chiefly Epicandlon. (IV.)

Aw-ix» hold vp, poetic and New Ion. : ir-tixor, dr-^{ui and ira-txi'"! in-iax":
A*-^apAi eniiiire .' f|v-iix4|iiv (461 ), d*-d(o)iai and dvo-^^^ro^Loi, 2 aor. tijv-
■0Xdt"|*< dv-<KTdt, -ttot.
Jtr^mti (ind-, Aret-) mounts up p 270, tprang forth A 266. dr- is probably tiie

prep. Cp. -*«)wiS«.
Av-atf'**!" *Uld 4»-o(7K ripfn.- imperf. tv-tif^mr (431), dv-olfa, d^J^t*. 1 perf.
AffTX**! 2 P^rf- 4>-4^ia (rare, 44-'!) have opened, dv-lmuu itand open,
itv-*tfx'^*< (ut. pert, di^^i^fofiai, Av-MRrfei. Cp. 608. otyn/u and ttyu (9.0.)
poetic, Imperf. drfro' Z 188 may be written iritfyar w. aynlzesia. ^'^Y"'
and Urmia in Xen. are probably wrong ; Hom. has vfa (olfa f), and ^ifa
(MM. &{a) from M7W (Leab.) ; HdL dmifa and dryfa (■■■.). (IV.)

688 APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS L^Mfh.

dv-optda set upright has the regular augment (di^phton) ; but J«-a*«pM« hu
double augiuuiit : hr-i\v-Aptow, ht-rpr-AfBim, tw-rpi Aptaum (451).

impoUg) meet, 6eteech often has two augments ; ^vT-fPiXom, iin--<PAXi|v« (461)-

&vnGiK<H am d^endant maj have double augment : ^-<S[k»», ijr'-'SM'*
(461).

dv4» and (rarer) drvro (&81) (ott«n wnttan iriia, in^ai) aeeomplith: ItJiivw,
JJvwra, l^vuica, Gi-^mrfLu (P) Xen., dwrrdt, ilr-iiru(ir)T(ii poetic. Hom. fat.
-aniu. Fuetic forms are dm, Jnv (prea. andlmperf.), and iru^u (4>vro <Z43),
tr-iitiaBiiti Kplc.

Anrya (439 D.) Epic 2 perf. as prea. command (1 pi. iruyiatu, imper. irwzA,
it^-Xfiui, imxtt), 3 plup. Bfl imperf. ilri^co, 3 B. ^ri^ci anil dri^yn. Tu
drifryu, a prea. developed from the perf., many forms ma; be referred,.!*
pres. inlrytt., subj. dtciyw, opt. dniyaifu, imper. dwyi, inf. druv^fwr, pan.
irdrttiit, Imperf. ^kiiyov, fut. dtiifu, aor. ^fmf". Poetic and Ion.

inc-vrt^ meet : dv-anHJo-apAi (806), iti-lfn i|ua, dv-^im|iia, dv-st-nfrda*.

d-vATdo deceive : regiilu', but aa fat. paaa. dvarl^pAi and i(-avaTi|t1^«*|ui
(80»). Cp. 454 a.

dr-aupdu take afsay, foond in the imperf. iniiiiur (with aoriatio force), fni.
da-af/nta-u, aor. part, iroipat (as if from dro^^fu), drou^id/uHt. The root a
protiably fpa, infipur representing Ar-aipor for Ar-tpput (with ? for c bT
ujiHtake), as dvadpai represents dra-^^i. Poetic and Epic.

dv-a^fffiRj (dr-a^, dr-a^-) (j«M(ii«, comp. w. /f .' -arai^i* rare, -crd^vn
rare, 2 aor. -it»-a*o», mid. opt. -aTa^l^iji', Poetic. (V.)

dv-<xB-dM|MU (ix^-, ix^-) am luittd : dv-fx*4n|ut, 2 aor. d«^x*^T^ **-
^X^PX" Simple forms aie IxSv, IxBo/mi. (IV.)

iwi'{f'jtpri noept off : i-ro-ipe-ji, ixo-lpatte. Epic.

dwo-Xaiii enjoy (tlie simple Xa^ is unused) : AvQAai««|iBii (806), A» Ol»»r.

dn-XAavKa (450).
Xv-ra (if-) /(UMn, itindJc, mid. (oucA: d^, it<|ra, iti4uu, 1\iliif, d'rrdt, fit-

("■)
djidii|wn prajr (Epic itpdofuu), often comp. n. ^( or mrd; dpllfft>|iai., i'|iHirdpHT.

-^pB|uu. dparji poetic. Epic act. inf, i^ptmi. Ion. ipiaitai.
ip-np-iuKu (dp-) ;!t, Join trans. : Upaa, 2 aor. lipapor trana. and Intrana. (448 D.),

2 perf. d/H/H incraoe., aor, pass. ^p^r. Ion. and Epic 2 perE. dpinn, plop.

dp^pn and ^piipta. 2 aor. part, mid, Ap^utvt, as adj,, fitting. Poetic. (V.)
Apdrrit (dpsT-) Hrike, comp. in prose n. iri, i(, hil, lard, vir ; -opiEw, ^af^

-npdxBuv. Cp.AdTT<., (HI.)

d^4«vK (dpc- for ipev- ; cp. Ti dpst help) pleaee : dpirv, 4fpw« ; n

appease : dpAroiMu, T|ptrd|ii]v, iyfkr^v (?), dpMrtdt pleating. (V.)
dpij^ni oppreited. Epic perf. mid, of uncertain derivation.

dpWM (dpn- for ipttg- ; op, ri ipiat de/enM) luiul, n^ e ; dpcio^, tymgrn.
dfiidmi and poetic ifiitStm (Ip^i-) fit: dppAov, 'lip|UMr«, l^pfioriiai,, iui^d» ti|i

Aor. suiippoia Find., perf. Opfuca Ariatotie. 616. (III.)
Sf-rviuu (ip-') win: ipoBiuu, 2 aor, )Spi^)j» (inf, d^vAu). ChieHy poetic. Cp^

aTpw. (IV.)
ifim plough : aor. act. ffpnra and aor. pass. 1ip6»iir are, in Attlo, attastMl oolj la

poetry ; perf. mid. ip^^poiuu Epic and Ion,
dfw4t« (dpra-y-) >ef2«, titatcA: df«dv«|wi (806), lc« often ipvirw, ^

uogic

pax«] APPENDIX: UST OF VERBS 689

Ijpv^'u^ ^pvwniAi, 1|pwdtfti|ir, &pnwMiff«|Uu. Put. ^/mtfu Eple, Mt. I^ofa
poetic, aor. paas. ijpirdx9Ti>' Hdt,, y, a. i^n-o^if Hesiod. 518. (III.)
4f«4« (Horn, dprtw) pr^arc: in proae often comp. w. iC or csTd: ^4nt,
IjpiVo^ -^^pT^KO, -4JpTV|ia(, -ifprAiiF. Cp. Epic ifiriru (tk/n-im-): d^iirA*,

ipiti (Apiru) draa water ; Ij^iwa, tw-^fiMi[r, A«^«pvo^^ ; lip^fq v HIppocr. 631.
if%u begin, rule, mid. begin; Vfa, fi|it«, fpX" 'i^i ^V'^ mid., <jp)(**l*> ^

■rrtei, tat, mid. (pfa^i Bomelimse as pass. (BOS), dfix^OM" Aristotle.
AwTfiim-rm (drrpar-) fij^Uen, .fI<uA .' irrpi^it, ^trrpait'a. (IL)
drtrdXXw (drtraX-) rear, Eplo and Lyric : drfrifXii. (III.)
frri* (f (Tirtf ; from fat-fu-tu) ruth, rare In proM : 4{a, ^fo. From Ion, and

poetic ttfaa (Horn. Jtriru) come dt{u, 4i'£a C-'miOi 4tx^'' (with aoL mt

tog), (in-)

miaJiHt and adolru (ofiar-) drji : aiarQ Soph., qiqrs or aurim Hdt., irMi4T|i

uAdrAri' Aristopb., fut. pB«g. a^rf^iro^iai Arlatoph., fut. mid. aAafoOfut ■■ paaa.

Sopb. Mainljr poetic and Ion., rare in Att. proee. (III.)
ai{-AvB and (less often) a4{a (aAf-, sOfr-) maka inereatt, groa: imperf.

ijfitavo* or Ti^fn (^{ai>d|ii)iF or i|^)»)*), a4f^a, i|<£i|av, 1^^"^ 'Hti)l'»S

iftE^tiiv, ai(T)f4i|aa|iai (fut. pOBB. alfto alf^roiiai, 809), a-tiipiot Arittotle.

Cp. Epic and Ion. rUfw (-ofui), imperf. itia: (IV.)
<t«dffs-t> (&16 a) feel, handle (Hdt.) : 4f#«fii. Cp. Ion. and Eplo d^u or l«d»

Aaniilc (mre in Att.) ; Horn, d^r. Ion. ir-ai/^ca, iwitiira. (III.)
A^t*)|u let go .' in the Imperf. li^tigr or 4^ti|T. See 460.
ii^taru (d^irr-) d%> MP .- d^jfw. Poetic, chiefly Epic. (III.)
i^6it dip up .- ifipvaa (-d/iqr). Poetic, chlell; Epic.
IX^BfA* ""I c'^ie''; SB if from •dxffc^tai (dxfc- for d^fcr-; op. ri Ix^x ^'*'

tr«u) come 4xHaofiai, TJxNa4t|r (486 e), fut. puB. at mid. dxlw^Nin|iat

(812).
ix-rif^ (.^X-) on troubled, imperf. Axnrra 3 38. Poetic. (IV.)
tx"/'" (.^X-) am troubled. Epic present.
*au tatiate (cp. tSi/r nURclently, Lat. ao-Mi); iffu, aea, 2 aor. tatlaU mgulf

(Bubj. fu>tt> or ^Sfur, from ^/ur. Int. l/unu). Mid. Aaru (better dtrai),

JtfOfUu, <tvd^i)», arot (i-arat?). Epic.
iufrro- seeriptt.

PaSCIii ;o ; paSuiO]iai (806), |S*(3d Juii ArlatoUe, poSurriot. 619. (UI.)

^f«(^ai-) "Peoi, «««■.■ pdf»,p^(3«in-ii.. Poetic. (III.)

Pa£v> (^-, ^•~, 623 b) go: -Pl^iuu (806), 3 aor. -<^ (661, 682 a, 6ST),
^9^<ta., 2 perf. PtPiri (aabj. -PiPAa-s 704 a), -P^«i^i rare, t^Orp rare,
pwrd«, Sw-Put^. The •Impte verb appears in Att. proae only in the
pres. and perf. act Bpio aor. mid. i^rAixt)' (ram) and ipiia6iair (542 D.).
Causative {make go) are p^icv poetic, f^qra poetic and Ion. ptoee. Cp. alao
^dffiw, ^<^<^, &1;}))M<. 680. (III. IV.)

pdXXa ipa\-,p\Ti-, 128 a, ^XX(-) tArou: poXA to good proae in comp. (paXX^ra
Arietoph. of continued action), 2 aor. ipoXov (-iitiir usu. in comp.), p^i|a«,
pipXi|)uiL (opt. Jia-jSi^Xgfffc, 711 d), ipx^^n*' fut. p»M. pXi|KirB|Mi, fal. pttf.
PtpX.^|wu usu. in comp., 4»-^i|Tfat. Epic forms of the fut. ue fivi-
/SXiffftai ; of the 2 aor. act. fuM-^X^igv (688), ill^p\^i|uwat ; of thp 8 aor

690 APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS Ifi^n

mid. as paw. ^Cl)i^i|a|^ (aubj. ^^t<u, opt. p\ie or p\t7», inf. ffK^ftt, part.

fiX^iam); of the perf. 2 b. p4^\tiai and 1 8. ptpi\riiiai. (III.)
p4«^T<. C3a«-) d(p ; tfirtHm, Ipo+o, p4paHuu, 2 aor. paw. Ipd^K (1 aor. pa«. .

^|»d««tir AriRtoph.), PowTtf. (II.)
faf4im (Papur-) load, annoj/; PoftwA, jPftfi*ti|v. (III.)
fidrm (^a-) ffo ; poetic form of P^vw. iiripafiiiim B 234 eaue eo 70. (V.)
parriim (jSovrai-) carry : jSwrdo-w, ipivTan. Poetic. Late lornu are from

pamay-. (III.)
P'tTT* O1X-) cough. Ion. are pijfu, l^irfa.
P»P&t* (^-) <n(i.te po.-iuu. camp. w. iri, lid, etd. Id proHsi -pt^i^^ (-o|iai) and

-pipA (539 d), -<pipur«, ipiSivB^r AriBtoUe, -fitfarriat. 447 a, &12. (III.)
^iw (^-) step ; part. PifiQr, Epic.
(Slfl.,*u (fiL.) go : part. Jli^i. Epic.
p.-fip^*« (pp^) eat: p^p-re (2 perf. part. 3./SpiipoeUc), pipp-|u», ifi^Mr'

Hdt, fut. perf. pt^piiro^i Horn., Aiwrit Ear. Epic 2 nor. Ippur (OSS). In

Alt otlier tenses than perf. act. and pais, are supplied from Mia. (V.)
Piia Hve (forprea. and im perf. ;&• and Pivnia were preferred): Pi*g»|m (806).

ipimn, rare, 2 aor. Ifilmn (687), PtPIwco, P>P(»rai (with the dat. of a pro-
noun), pu.rd«, fM.
(^iten/uu) usu. &va^pi^KO|uti reaiiirnatc, rtdne intrana.: Ar^iura late AtL,

iDtraiu., 4v-<puwd|iipr reanlirnKf^, 2 aor. Av-ipCav IntranH. (V.)
pX&i^ro (fSXci^-) Aur(, fr^re .' pHi+a, ipXa^, pipXa^o, p^Xaft|M, l^A4«v

and 2 aor. IpXdpiiv, flit mid. ^A^^i (alao as pass., 809), 2 fut. pMS.

ph«Pl)rO)wi, fut. perf. ^fSXd^a/uu Ion. Cp. pxipotuu oin injured T 82. (II.)
fkmrT-6.vm (p\iu>T-, ^Xoirrc) «pruu( : 2 aor. ipXarrar, p«pU0Ti|Ks (iees often

ipUrniKO, 440 a). ^0U<mr<ra Ion. and poetic. (IV.)
pXAnt Me: pU<|n|uu (800), puifm, pXnrfet, -rAi poetic HdL has faL i^-

fi\tf-v. p\iw<inai is rare in pass, sense.
Pklrrw for fiC^)^ir-iw (from ^^r-, cp. /lAi, /iAit-di Aoncy, ISO) loJte fcosry :

VXur^ (IIL)
pW^Ku lor nip)\tnniu from fuX-, fiXu- (130 D.) j^o .* ful. fwXaEftat (806), S aor.

f>4*Xoi>, perf. fi^/i^Xuna. Poetic. (V.)
Pol* tKout: poV«|Mu <S0^)) 1P«V<>> Ion- U« fSdvo/ui, tpuea, ptptifrnt, ip<i-

rAfo. Cp. 69D. 1, 489 g.
Pft-TKW (^, piH-c-, ^n-)/««d; Pdg-it<io-M and paxurfat Aristopb. ^iawafmi.

«U. (V.)
PB«Xo|t«u {Pov\-, po<i\t-) w. augment ipovX- or i^uX- (430) urill, wlfh: po*-

XV«|M», pipoiXi])uu, ipavX^^v, pouXifTAt, tAx ArMoUe. Spic 8 petf. wp»-

pipouXa prefer. Horn, has idso ^iXa;uu.
ppax-: Saor. (OPpnx'i SpoX'" riwounif. Epic.
ppiX. KM .- Ipp4>, p^pp.YIM'. ^^P<xe1»
AiJ{t< stumber, am ifrotMy .' f^pifn. Poetic. 612. (III.)
p^Ba am heavi/ : ppiffa, tPfiXan, pippieu. Mainl; poetic.
Ppox- wwiUow, often w. drd, nard : -ippafi, 2 perf. -ptppoxt, S ur- puB- put

-Abx'Ii- The coromnii verb is icaTa-ppoxSlt* (Aristoph.). Epic.
f^m bite, grind the tetlh : jSpiifu (147 c), Ippu^a, 2 aor. tpp-x"- Cblefly Ion.
MxAo)Mu (ft-Cx-. 480) roar; ptpi«ix' as prea. (poetic), 4i-«PpQxv^<l* PUto.

/^iix^d Soph.

I;.ClK>^Ic

JoiUXX.} APPENDIX: LIST OF VEBBS 691

Pfi-i-8v eat : a perf. opt p»Ppii»ois A SB. Cp. (Jip/xifficu.

Pavfo (fli- for (SiHT-) ilop up, often w. irl, rpi : -fltirm, -^KriL, ^piivrax, <apd-

pimt. HdL boB aw-^irrai. Comic and Ion. (IV.)
7«|ifii ("ytv-, 7(vw-, 486) marrg (of the man) : fut. Ya(iA, lyilh*- Y*Y^1"*-

Hid. If |ife|ttt> (of the woman) : fut. 7a|ioQ|uii, t^pA|»|v, Y*Y^i]fuu, v. a.

^(a|UTbt (Y>|t<T^ w^e), -riot.
7d-rVfWi (yb-) n^ofce : Eplo fat. yariaaoiiai (w. ru ol the prea. Stem). Chiefly

poetic (IV.)
ytyvm (yur-, yurt-^ 2 perf. as praa. thout : part. TryHnii Epic Other ioTxa*

may be referred to yryiira or ytyiiiria ; aa aabj. yrydiru, imper. ^fyiinv, inf.

ytyurifar (Epic) and yryumr, imperf. iytyirti and iyfytain, 1 pi. tytyiirtar,

fat. ytyuHiau, aor. ^ryi^nfira, v. &. ycYuniT^i. Poetic, OccaBionally in praee.

Bf^form 7<^vlcri».
ytlniuu iytr-) am born Epic; aor. iytitiiirir begat (poetic) yields in Hdt,,

Xeti. yttriium, y€imii(ni parent. (III.)
^fAim (TiXa- for 71X00-} laugh: i(Uw^i (806), tYf^iiv^ iv*'^''^* (^^ 6)<

KaTa-TAcumx. 488.
yn-D Kfzeif, Epic 2 aor. S 4TS. Also ^ Jy'*''" ('Y''Y>"I^»)-
yifiia (7170-, 717^, 485) rejoice : yiyrfia. as pres. ; YijAiru and ty^Siiva poetic.
yryA-g-im and lesa com. Yi|p^ (7iipa-) j/row old: yupirafAi, (SOIt), leas often

TTpfe-n. ^pOrs, YtY^pSicB am olij. 2 aor. iy^pi Kpic and Inn., inf. ytiparai

poetic, part. 7.ipdt Horn. (687). (V.)
TvOu (500, 1. a) gpeak oat: yr,ptroiuu (806), tyiiniaa, iyitpiBi)r. PoeUc.
TtYvopxu {ytr-, ytH-. 70*-, 478) brcone, am : -prifv^fax, 2 aor, tY<*^qvi ^ 'pert.

fifovv. am. have been, •pytrr\f«*, ■1tn\Hfra\tM,Ta.Te. ylniiai Doric and New Ion.

(SU). 2aor. 3 s. 7^rTD Epic; aor. pass. ^(n)0i]y Doric, Ion., late Att. comedy ;

2 perf. part y^V^ (other -/u forma w. 7a- for yr- 4T9, 482, 5TS, 704 b).
V^TvA-B-w (7H»-, 7»-) knovi: fiin^ai. (80fl), 2 aor. (y"» (887) p«rce(t)«d,

lY*"Ka, lYHw^iaii (48B c), iywivhfi, rvtw-Mja-apAi, Y*<H~r^ (ymrii poetic),

•«-r^. 1 aor. ir-iyvuta persuaded lldt. Doric, New Ion. yltJnKu (89). (V.)
■yXA^ earte: y^Xh|1)ibi and lyXiiiifLai (440 a). Hdt. has /i>/7Xv^a. Other

forms are late.
ytiur-Tu {yra/ir-) 6end .' 7rfA^«, *7w>il^a, ir-ryri^i^arty. Poetic for iiijiwTB. (II.)
odw bewail: int. 7(iitfuKi Uom., 2 aor. y6oy (70-) Epic. Mid. 7ad<i>iai poetioi

7oi^afuu Hom.
'YH4*' viTite : ■ypA+-. ItP<'+». 7*V(*+». ■y*TP»F'l"'i 2 aor. puss, ^pd^*, 2 ful.

paOB. Ypo^ro^L, fut. perf. pass. Ytrp&ifo^i, Yparrdt, ^Hst. yrypiipiiiia,

lypaniiat, and iypi^erft are late.
Ypit" (7>nO'-) ?run( ; Yp1i{o|ia( (806, 1at« ypi(u) ; lYpvEa, ipntcrit. Mostly in

Att comedy. (III.)

'a- <«acA, learn, no prea. : 2 aor. tSaor learned, redupl. tiSaor langKt, 2 aor. mid.

itStt-faSai (IcidturAit Hu.), 1 perf. itidtina (Su-) have learned, 2 perf. part.

Utaiii having learned, p«r(. mid. ittdvi^t have learned, 2 aor. pass, as In-

truis. iSdii> learned, 2 ful. paaa. as intrana. aaijcojiai shall learn; i-iiirrot.

Cp. Aom. Hia thall find ATiA bSAs-KM. Poetic, mainly Epic.
tu-SdXXw (ioitaX-, JoilaXo-) tiecfc out ; Piud. liaa perf. part. itioiIaXfiJnt, aor.

part. laiSftXtftit, and fat. inf. iatiaXwaiiui'. Epic and Lyric. (III.)

692 APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS [J«t^

t«tfti(^SaXy-)rMd: Sat(a,itiXia,S*SiXyiuu,iSatxSvr- Epic, Lytic, Tragic. (EII.;

ttU-rv/u (Su-) entertain : Bain Epic imperf. and prei. Impcr., Salru, ISaura. Mid.

ialrviuu feast (opt. Stutvra CI 006, cp, 750 D.], iSai^iuti', aor. pass, put

SaureeU, i-Satrot. Poetic, rare in Ion. prose. (IV.)
Aafa/ui divide : perr. 3 pi. jtjafarai a 23 ; aubj. Sd^oi T 316 (for lalir^) from

SaUlMi or ialu ? Cp. iarfoiMi. FoeUc.
lalu (Sa/r-jw) kindle: 2 perl. j^3<)a bum intnna., plup. StUiti. Mid. )al«(ui

bum Intrans. Mainly poetic. (HI.)
S£k-m> (Sax-, Iirn-) &ac .- Sit^)i*i (806), 2 aor. ISwca*, SAi|Y)"^ '8^X*n<'> ^X*V

<rofuu. (IV.)
Sft|(^t« tame, tubdue: iwt. Jaixda-w, 4a/idu, isftw (Horn. 3 b. Sofif and ja^id^, 8pl.

Safiiuvi, 645), aor. /id/ian. Att. proee has onl; G«|ii{a, KaT-aSaiMv^iuiT.

IS»)Ub«n*' Mostly poetic, rare in prose. 512. (III.)
9iiJrrn-t^ (and tati-ni-u ?) (ia/i-, J^ir-) (anw, raMut: perf. mid. SiSti-iuiai,

pasB. 1 aor. iS/iii&tir and (more commonly) 2 aor. JM>iqi', fuu perf. l(S/i4«a>iai.

Poetic. 737. (IV.)

Sap9.<lyu (SapB-, BapSt-) sleep, aau. in comp., espeo. W. nari : 2 aOF. ffioffc*

(Horn. UpaBow), perf. ^Up»ni». (IV.)
(oTAijiai (SaT-, Bare-) dfeide ; adff(ff)ii>uu, &i>4G«v4|ii|v rare In prow (tSat-

(a')dfM|vEpic), J/Ioo'/iai, iiA-ta^Tet. SariairBai in Heaiod should be Sar^nrfat.

Cp. tafs/iai dftifde. Mainly poetic and New Ion.
I^ofiai appear, only imperf. Jt^aro f 242. From a bindred root aor. Sodmtre N 459.
W^ EAoun, JeMw (703) /ear : see d^.
SiSCttojioi /riff Ate n (rare in Att. prose) : Ut&fVl* f<^^- Poetic, mainly Epic, an'

Mlavtiuu, StiUxDiiai, itiitaro/itu ; fuL Stitiieiuu, aor. MnSifd/i^r. UeriTed

fromW8i*(*i-). (III.)
ItlStrra greeted I 224, inl^x"''"") ^ (-ara A 4) are referred byaome to tbe mid.

otSiltniiu. Others read Sigi:- from another root. Cp.ltHtaraaiirTateelcenK*d09G.
leiSlm/iat greet, only pres. and imperf., to be read itifttoiofui (445 D., 527 b).

Epic (V.)
Sf(K-*0>ii and ItM-vi-m (>(.■-) show (418) : Stifyt, ISa(«, SAfixOi Sffoypu.

UtCxBl*! SfkxSl^roH'iu, S<tRTfet. Hdt. baa forms from 3>k-: ~S'f», -lltia

(_-dlir,,), SatyiMi, -tSixf^r. (IV.)

Miia (iffi-, Sint-) build : IJiifia, S4S/a)iuu. Foetic and Ion.

9fytniiai (StpK-, iopi-, ipttf-') tee : 2 aor. tipattw, perf. S/Jo^na as pres. , pass. 1 aor.

iUfrjifin' (in tragedy) aato and 2 aor. Mpdnrr aau, iMrh-itftcrtt. I'oetic.
«PN (3(f", Sofi-) Jlay : EipA, IStipo, GOapiMi, 2 aor. paes. tt&fi|v, Sparit Horn.

Pres. Sil/M (.S'fi-i«) Hdt., Arisloph.
Slx>|w>' receive, aieait: SijoiuiL, iSi{i,|H|v, SAcYiiat, ■ta--«S^ti|>>, Avo-StKrin-

Siaitoi New Ion., Pindaric, and Aeoltc. Fut. perf. as act. SiUfaiMt poeiic.

On Epic iSiytATir, li^, Stx^<"' 3^/"»i, Horn. Sfxiirm (3 pi.), see 634, 688.
Urn bind (307 a) ; U^cra, Krirtk, Sffiaxa {>*Sv" doubtful), StEtpiu, iE»i|v, fui

pais. Ett^rofioi, fut. perf. SfS^o-ofuiL, o-iv-Srroi, dv-vw4-(i|T«t. gTW-Siifct

Arictoph. Hid. in prose only in comp., as 'mp»S^TO|Mu.
Urn (ttf« ; St-, Stt-) need, lack (307 a) : Uifrm, Oivra, Mhyn, SfS^pAs Ut^

#i|v. Epic aor. S^trtu S 100, itiiwr i 640. Mid. 8fe(H» teant, oak (Epic

StiaiMt) : Sm^iuu (Eptc ttvireiiai). Impels, ittttii tueeuary : Rn, S*^rM.

ttfqn (S»T a).

APPENDIX; LIST OF VERBS 698

i^uiH uid Siifta contend : iS'ipira Tbeocr. Mid. tiipiioiiai and ii|pla/iai m act. :
SvlffSfuu Tbeucr,, iitipiviiiair 8 7fl, iStiplrBrii II 756 cont«n<I«d (aa If from
S^rti), ittpt-i^firot 'Iliac. Epic and Lyric.

^ iAall^nd, Epic pros. w. fut. meaning, Cp. ia-.

It- {ift-, tfti-, Sfoi-') fear (477 a): Hmuts, (Acuta as prea,, 2 perf. Bffi« aa prea.
(rare in the slog. ; iDflectlon, TOS). Epic forina : SilSu (from ItSfcia, 446 D.)

M pres., StiaByAi (800), fSSeira (= iSftita-), iilSmta, StiSia (TOS D,). Hom.

bu imperf. Ho' /tared, fied from an aniimed prea. Jtlu.
StuT^ arbitrate (from Sfoira, bnt aogmentad aa l( a comp. w. double angment in

perf., plup., and in compa. ; op, 461) ; SuLi^a, Si^'nio-a (but &«^Gi]{rT|«u),

EiSi^Ti)Ka, (plup. KaT-iSiSi.ii'HtKi|), S<Si^ti)h>W' (plup. i£-i8<GLQ'Ti|Ta) , Si^ri^t<|i>.

Mid.poaa one's life: GwuTf|o-o|Mu, KaT-<Six|n|«^i)v Reeled aTbitration.
6tB»i4« miniiter (from I>iica»() : iStSK4i«w, SiAKOi^TW, StSiVxdi^Ka, bkBK^

tiffoi, KiXKOvtfiny. Forma in Siliii- are wrong, forma in iiit- are Ion. and

lat« (uncertain in clasaicid poetry).
St-tA-o-Kw (for JiSax-a-'w, 97 a) teaeh, mid. eauit to teach, team : StSifat,

4E(Sa{a, StSlkxa, StSltaYiuu, ttiUxV< S^SdfiUH (808), SiSoict^, -rht.

Epic aor. iiiiiamiira {Sttavti-) 447 a. (V.)
StSit-iu (til-, St-) bittd, prea. and impert. Poetic for U*. Xen. has 3iS&vi.
-fii-Spi-vK* (ipo-) run aioaj/, only in comp. w. ivt, i( : -Sf4ae|wt (806), 2 aor.

-JSpSv (-Spa, -Spali|v, -JpS^i late, -Spawu, -M*. M^)i -SApB««- Hdl. bas

-iiipV««, -Jpitffo/uH, -^Jpij* (but-4pot), -iUfiiKe.. (V.)
S(-S«-|u (flu-, Ja-) 0i(ie ,' ■ee416,42t. Put. M<r«, 1 aor.lS«Nra in8.,2aor.tEoT*v

dual, lEnfM* pi. (TfiO), S4Gvm, Effiofiai, lS4ti|v, So$4ro|jAi, Sortt, -rtt. See

747 ff. for prea. in Hom. and Hdt. Fat. StUiivu Epic, 2 aor. Iter, ihvnr (492 a).
il-i^t-liai (from ii-Ji^) Mej; (cp. fiptui) keeps ii throughoat in the prea. (Impeii.

Uiffiii-^r), JL^o^uii, ^Jtivdfiii'. Poetic and Jon. 726 a, 741.
Sljuu cauw to flee, only in Impert. ir-iltv9i» »et on £ 6S4, Mid. Stt/iaiflee, eatue

to flee, aabj. Slunai (accent 424 c, ir. 2), opt jwlfnr' (accent 424 c, n, 2),

int. tUrBai referred by some to tbe middle of Slu. Epic.
luc- only in 2 aor. Uiimr threw. In Pindar and tbe tragic poeta,
Sufida (St^o-, Si^tr-) tAirit; prea. see 304, 641 : U^tm, l&l^nn.
Sla: aee«i-.
Gi^KB jmnve : Wto|Mi (800) and (Ibsb well aapported) liAfyt, ttlafa, Gi8(*x«,

aufx*>l*i BuirrJot. For MtiiiraftiT aee 400 D.
S«k (Soit-, Jo«', 486) «««m, lAfnl: : St{w, !$»{>, SAby^uu, Kar-tt^xV. A-SAkii-

fet. Poetic forma are Jomlrw, rtiitifo-a, JfJiitij^i, <Jori}9T|r. In trimeter

Ariatopb. usea onlj tbe shorter forma,
Sovriu [Soirw; Souwe-) aound heaBilv : Moiw^a, 2 perf. BiSavra fell. Epic aor.

iytodniea. PoeUC.
SpirToiiat (tpay-) teUse : 'jpofiiiifr, SUpayiMi. (III.)
Sp&a do : Spio-n, ffipBra, SA^a, 6ISpB|iai («Mpa?/uu, 480 e, donbtfut), Api-

0+i)v, SpBvr^.
Sp<TO pluck: Aptilia, 2 aor. tSpairor Find., d-apn-Tni Aeacb. Cp. Spir-Tu poetic.
tii«|Mi. am able, can (augment usually /Ef*-, but alao iiiur-, 430): Gm^raiuu,

BtWvqiiAi, Avi^ti|i>, Svrardt, Prea, 2 s. Uvortu, Jtf>v poetic, S^nr Ion.

(MS a, ir. 2), imperf. ttint (JS^mvo late), aor. paaa. UiiwicB^r Epic, New

Ion., Find. («80 g).

694 APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS {tU

ttm enttr, go doten, atak, eav»e to enter (trans, generally in oomp. w. iri or
ntrd (S19): alfloIA-n* (Ion., poetic, rare in X^u.)enUr: -Sfe^ trana., Blw%
trans., 2 aor. IGev Intrana. (p. IW), SISsxa lutrans., -Sttdita tnuiB., ifeipji.
-Mtt\v, -fi«t<|o-0|>ai Arlstopb., -Sirrist. Fnt mid. Sio-o|Mu, aor. mid. -«EBrA|n|T
(Epic also MuffAftiir, 542 D.). Horn. 2 aor. opt. iht and JifCfUF (768 D).

idipeii N 518, aor. paas., tsoa ftuWed (7), posaibly from far- (Mrrti) ; aome-

tloiea referred to iwru or to Iro^im.
UU permit, iet afoiw: ^m, itm (4St), iDlKa (448), ilsjiu, ttOiiv, adrofwi

paaa. (808), tarJof. Epic prea. also eM«, Imperf. la E 517, aor. taaa ; MdL

does not augment.
tyyviu pledge: the forma In iJrrt^ UB better ttian thorn In inyu- or ^77*71^;

see 453 a.
lv«(f • (^>p-> fyip-, iyp-, 80) uaifce, rouM : titpA, Ijvitpa, 2 perf. tYp4Y*P* *^-

706 am awake (for iy^rrfp^t t>it p Is alao redupl.}, Iv^fipiiat, ^yiply. 2 tot.

mid. ^pd)ii)v aiooA-e, lYtprfat, iytprbi Aristotte. Horn. 2 pert. 3 pt. typing

000-1, Imper. iyirfiyap6t (for -yapaBt), inf. iypii-tafiSat or ^pirYipAu (for

-70^ir««). (III.)
fyKNiii^a pralte : t^Km^timt and ^fKM|uivo|uu (SOO), IvMntiibwn, ^

fYKtKW|i(aa^i«, irtKttiuiaSTir Hdt. 612. (HI.)
Dm tat : poetic lor Irtta.
ltB|tai (M- for (TtJ-, cp. gedeo) tit, usu. xoMtopAi (whicb In lass

■aa-(tojiai) : 4Kat^|H]<- (450), ksShBoSiiu (539 b), tlo^i!* rare in [mwe.

itajt-tirtia%. Fut. h^-isaoiiu trans, i 465, aor. iari)iiiw and Wrdfiifr Epic. Act.

aor. Epic iloa (Imper. frirar or crimt, Inf. Iirirai, part. Itrai). See t^. (IIL)
MAa (M*X-, <0«X(-) and Mm wfsA ; imperf . always {jStXoT in Att. ; MJi^ra, or

S<X4^a (rare) ; ijUXiiira (aubj. UAifrm OT BiXl)(ra, opt. WA^jinu^ or Ml^

roifu), 'n6AiiKa. Tlie commoner Att. form is UAm except in the Ismbic

trimeter of tragedy, and in formulas as %r Brbi Bf\^.
mi» (fof TfiB-ieiu, 128) accustom: HlA (680 e), iHm (431), tOuca {US,,

tOwiuu (1046), MUrii\v, Mivrfei, -rit Ariatotle. 612. (HI.)
Iftii (for tfiSai, 123) HTM accustDtned ; pres. part. Itfur being oceuMonud only in

Horn., 2 perf. ((via (443, 663 a) am aeewttomed, 2 plup. tU*n (perf. (■#■,

plnp. <ii«<a Hdt.). See H(Ik
itSov >au .- see li- and ip&v.
iIkA[« (tJnai-) lii^n, cd^^tecturs augments to i*- ratiier tliui to tU- in AtL pnMe

(437): -[[Katof, )tKd<r*, -JMira, JKair|UU (tticur^t ?), igKivti)*, <l»ii«IH>ii^«i.

<U(WT^, iv-tutorrfat. Fut. mid. Hucdovjiat sometimes as acL
■Imv yield .- ilfM, ttfa, W-«HCT4at. On «haftir see 490.
Etna {tit-, alt-, U~ ; for f '•■'•, etc.) rM«m&I«, appear (no prea. in nse) ; t^ wn.

2 perf. biKa as pres. 443, 602 a (impers. kuct it ttenu): febcM, Jiriinnyi,

ioMcivot (poet. iU4nu), 4ouc^, neut. 4U6t fitting (ttetit chiefly poetic ; also

Platonic) ; 2 plup. I^kt) and jsi). tXtt teemed likelg (2 620) may be imperf. ;

some regard it as perf. or plup. For faua, ttita, testii Hdt. baa oin, •Tkh,

olKiii. Forms of the ^-conjugation are Itjcror, •Itirq* Horn., laryi^r Att^

poets, (Tfotfi mainly in Att. poets (7044.). Cp. itrxu.
ilMie or ilWw roll up, pack dote, moatly Epio. «tUsfw> HdL, cw-«X<a«iBt X«n..

iiir-«IXit;w Hdt., dv.«iX^h|v Thuc.

ftifX*} APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS 695

tOJUi roll pies. Mt. uid pass, in Att. (nre). Cp. rxXu.

tlKiu (f«iXv- for '-^Xv-) roll, cover, gather ap: tlKtri, rfXEfiai. Cp. A£h.
Foedc and Ion.

■rXw (A- lor ft\-, op. Bolcer*) roll up, drive togeth^: no pre* act. (tno/uu
Horn.), fXffa and fiXva, JFcX/iu, 2 aor. pass. MXqi and dXqr (8 pi. AXir, Int
dX^roi, iXii^poi, part. dXch). Homeric.

<I|iapTai M fi /(itcd ; see /ulpo/iu.

<t|Ll am : tut. b«|L(u (606). See p. 211.

«I)H po: we p. 212.

(lav* (tt' for frr-,) laid, 8 aor. (<(*«, <I«ohu, <M, thnlc, ilwAv), Epic ftiirar
and ttwtcar. Fint aor. «Im rare in Att. (itraiiu, Imper. itvov, Int. «h-a( HdL,
part. ttxM Hdt. and late Att), l«ira poetic; 1 aor. mid. dr-ciTd/iqr New
Ion. Other tenses are supplied from apt. 629. (VI.)

■(pY« «Aiil in or out, alsu «Ipvrt|u and (rarely) Afrfrim (with »- from «-, cp.
Horn. <(f )/^rw) : ilffo. <tp{a, <tpY|iw, «lpx*^*i <tp«T^ -rfot. Fat. mid.
■Ip{o|uu Is pass, or reflex. (SOS). Tbe distinction that the forms wiUi Uie
■mootb breathing mean thvt out, those vrlth the rough breallilug mean lAiK
tn, is late and not always observed in olaaslcol Att. Horn, has iipyu (In
pres.) and tpya ihtU in or ovt : (pfa, 2 aor. l/rf^Bor and UfyaBtr, ffryiiat and
ftpriitai (Spl. ipx'^"! 4S9D.,plup. fpzora, </pxora), tpX^'- Hom. has iipyrS
K 238. Hdt. oBii. haa Ipyu (in comp.), with some forms from -ifrfti/u and
ifyfiu. Old Att. forms In iprf-, iprf- are doubtful ; Soph, haa -ipitt, Ipfrrti ;
Plato Vpfili.

•^fui ((^, (/p(-) atk : tlp^tiuu Hom. and New Ion. Hom. has also (rarely)
ip*(.f)i*, Bubj. iptle^r (= ifitien»t) A 62 ; and ^f)/(/:)ofiai, Imper. I^m or Jpiu
ASH (860). Att. fut. 4p<^|iai and 2 aor. i^t^^ presuppose a pres. tpaitat,
which is supplied by Ipwr&w.

t(pM (tf- for a«p-, cp. Lat. lero) join: rare except In comp. w. ivi, iid, #tfv,
etc. : aor. -t!pa (Eon. -tpra), pert, -tipxti, pert. mid. Upiuu Epic.

djiH Horn. My (ip-, fiii- for ^c^, ^fxr-, cp. LaL o«r&uni), for which pres. Att.
naes Mjm, ^lii and (eep. in comp.) &'vap«(a ; fut. tpA, aor, supplied by ■twac,
per*, rfpipca (t= ft-fpit^im.), parf. pua. ■[pn^»- <«>'■ P»«"- 'prt'l*. '«*- P""-
^i)(4|wtiM, fut. pert. itp<iv«|Lai, T. a. fitftit, -rfa*. Ion. are JfMfw fut., ttpUrft

cl» Mated : see l{a.

tlrnr(i= ft-fiK-viM, from redupl. fit-') liken {ritotnat) : Imperf. Hom. fl'rmrand
(r^wc; perf, mid. rpoviHiiu art like Eur., plup. Hom. ^Iktb and fticro have
been referred by some to fCiw. Poetic, chiefly Epio. (V.)

OmU: see I0v.

itnXtinHmeatlanauembljf.' augments Jt'*"'''^!'^"!**'^'^"''''^^'*!'*, etc (463 a).

Oaiw (from Aa-»-«, 623 e) drive, march : &A (630 b), Jpiara, -tX^Xww
(w. dri, ^0, a^Xa|iai, ViUer)*, IXar^, /£-i)Xbtd( Horn., Aarit Aristotle. Aor.
mid. JiXaa^i|<- rare. Fut. iU^ra ^ 427, /Xiuri Hom. (M6), JUrw rarely in
lias, of Xen., perf. JX^Xor^ut Ion. and late, plup. fi\ti\duvr (Hom. 3 pi. ^XqXd-
Sart or A^Xfars or AqXMaro}, ^Xdr^ifr Hdc, Aristotle (489 g). /Xdw is
rare and poetic. (IV.)

iMvXo «»im(n*. eoi^We : tkt^ t/^yii^ IX^»TI*' («>'). ^^*iniV. ttnX»^«-

pMl, tiMTRTfct-

1= Coo^^lc

096 APPENDIX: LIST OF TEBBS [AiMj).

l\At{u rait the war-cry, iltout: 4XAi{a Xen. 613. (in.)

AtXffu whirl, turn round: i\i\iia, JXiXIx^'- Poetic. 613. (HI.)

JXtrm (Aw- for ft^nc-) roll (nrel; iDUTTa) ; ■omedmcs wriUan /X-: &!(■,

tOuts (4S1), fflu-nuu (448), 4tX(x.ti|r. H-'^X^*'*!^ Aristotle, •[Xun^t. Epic

aor. mid. Atfd^iir. Epic JXAm-a, AtXIxAfrar ahonld be #cX-. (iXlf-vH is llie

usiul form In Hdt. (HI.)
Dum draw (^Xx- for vAk- ; moat tenses from JXcu- ; Aite l»te), often w. iii,

4, nrd, r6r: -&f», (tXxwra (431), itaB-famw (443), -aOjnoiuu (4ei> c),

-«dutWti)«, -AkvI^ihww, llUitu, vv*-iXkiwi4vi. Fut. iMivt loo. ud

lUe. By-form i\K4m Epic
tKTit (f iXr-) cattle b) A«pe, mid. (also Mrtfuu) Aopt like Ourfti) ; 2 peif. u

pica. IoXta (= frt^tXva), 2 plnp. iiiXm, T, a. d-tXrrM. HiJaly Epic.
tUuroll: AArtfirrHom. (= i-f\v-r»t,r), 48S e. Cp. ttXte.

traipti (trap-') IdU ■' 3 aor. Ijnfaw. 1 aor. ml± impiiatr as act. Poetic. (Til.)
Jraplfw (lav, (potl; ^n^Ifu, 'r^pifs, jcar-^rdpu-^ui, nr-4|npla'^v. PoeUc 612.

cm.)

Ir^Bptia teaylop, lie in ambuft regular : fnL mid. aa paaa. (S08).

i^-4ww and iiriru ^ir + atit-, at-, rv^) tat, («" -' irt-9iHliru and Jrf^H (/rl-*TH ?),

2 aOT. In-mr (ivl-rru, Msroiiu, imper. Irt-aw<t Ot tri-ttt, 2 pi. Irrm lot

it-rrm, inf. in-rrtir and tn-vriiur). Foetlc.
fn)>o#i defect., w. pres. and imperf. meaning: Mil ok, be on, grow on, lit ob-

In comp. w. irl In Hom. Epic. Connected by some w. ir^vofc.
IrfT-ru (^v-it) cAii{« ; 2 aor. trtn-ror and 4r-fr-airar (448 D.). Epic also M<0».

Poetic, chiefly Epic. (II.)
fw-niu (i- for fta-, cp. e«i-elo) cIotft«, prea. act. only in comp., in proae 4^4^

Jr*0>u: &|i^ir« (639 c), ^ii^twa (460), V4(-<«>u (^0 d)- ^P'<: fono):

Imperf. icarii-ffniBr, fut. Iirffw and -Arw, aor. Iviro and -taa, mid. pres. int

h-tlroaBai Hdt., fut. -4rveiM,i, aor. fo(r)4ft9v and ^irti^irr fof '-fwi-o^ti)',

perf . faiuu and iF^iot (part. tliJnt in tn^wly) ■ Cp. 439 D. The simple verb

is poetic, mainly Epic. (IV.)
1*'.«X'^ Aarou bas donble angment (461) : iji'-^Xovr (^iw-iix\avr Arialotle),

4v-oxXfjow, TJv-4ixXi|o«, TJv-^Xigkat.
I^rrif^ iavetOgate : lE«r&o-« (rarely ^nA, 539 d), lEt^nwa, ^eAroKa, lE^rnriiu,

i(nT4(rti|v, ^imv^tn^uu, timrrtoi. 612. (III.)
lauw teem, retemblt : see (Tiii*.

teprit* keep feMtival ; iiipra^t (for 4o«>-, 34). Ion. iprifit.
tw-avpiu and tr-auplfKU (aip-, a^fw-) Cft^ (Epic and Lyric) an both lan :

2 aor. iwaSpor. Mid. irairplampat Ion., poetJc, rare lu Att prcee : frsup^irBfiu,

^rqt^fiqr rare, 2 aor. ^qv^/ifr. (V.)

frtntfoA) : see ^n)n#t.

4viP»iiX(4itpIot ofMifut : regular, bat fnt. mid. as paaa. (808).

IwlvraiMU understand (726) : 2 a. h-bmiru, irlirrf and ^brrir poeUc (4S5 s.
N. 2), -«t1itt»u Hdt. ; BQbj. lirl<rT«pu (accent, 424 c, K. 2), opt. hrwraip^*,
IvbrraM (accent, 424 c, h. 2), imper. trlrra (^firiuri poetic and New Ion. ),
Imperf. 'Ji«voT&f>i]v, itwlmB^ and ^jvlrn (460, 466 h, b. 1), fut. HiM'r^r*-
|iAi, aor. ii«taT^h|>, v. a. hnmpdi, Distiugoish <f-lrr>/iai from t^-trr^Ki.

Ii-u (m-, ?«--) am busy afiout, usa. w. dfifftl, Std, ^f, furd, ri/il (simple only id

;^] APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS 697

put.) : Imperf. -tiroi (Epio also -*ror w. no angm.), tat. -hpu, 3 men. -hwor
for ^(<)Tar (-ffvS, -«Tetfu, -tit&r, -<nr*tr), aoT. pMB. rtpi-i^iejir Hdt. The
act. forms are poetic. Ion. (imperf. and tut. also Xenophontic). Hid. Ivo|i(u
fnllovs : «l«4|U|v (4IJ1), I^^uu, 2 aor. In4)up> (wAiuu, «n>fpni|ir, noO, rwi-
fffw, r«4|u*M). Hom. bas evfia for irroS, For Im-H/ui, foral^i)r, irriaSa,
etc., following an elided vonel in the hbb. of Horn, we probably have, not a
rednpL oor. without augment (hrr- for gt-m-), but wrong readings for rrH-
ptai etc. with the vovrel of the preceding word unellded.

i«pidfti|* boitglU; see rpia- (*16).

f^fui (poetic) deponent pass., prea. In prose supplied by ipim ('/«- tor ipajr-') :
imperf. ^pav {-ipiiiitr poetic) ; aor. ijpdfftiiv fell in love, 48Q a (■tpaa(r)Aiair
poetic), tut. ipaitS'^iiitai poetic, ipotfrdt, iparii poetic.

)pYdIo|iu (ftpy-) teork, augments to 4- and il- (431, 432), rednpl. to il- (44S) :
TipY^^'P', lpYAtf«|UU, iipYaa4|ii|r, dpyoayAi, ^pY^ff4i|v, lpYa«*^v«pAi, 'pY<^-
rriot. In Hdt. witbout augment and reduplication. 612. (III.)

(^w : see AfTfm.

Ipita (from ftpiu = ftpy-tu, 611) work, do (also fpSu) : !>!», fp{a, 2 pert. (opYs
( = ftfopya), 2 [dup. tiipyta (^= iftftprfta.) Epic, M^vm Hdt. Ion. and
poetic ; cp. ^(w. (III.)

Ipf (&• prop .' 4pf wa, ipiiptiffiiai Hdt. (tor Horn. iptiptSnTitt, -are some read <npf-
JBToi, -ara), plup. ^^^P"""') Ap'^'^'i tptlvitai Aristotle, ipttrt/nir Horn.
Hippocr. has -4p«(a, -^w^tai, i^ptivrrat. Hainly poetic.

j/mCku ('pcijr-, 'pK-) t«ar, burtt : fptiia, 2 aor. Hpunt trans, and iutrans., ip^pty/iai.
Poetic and Hew Ion.

tptlru [ipttr-, iptw-') tArou dovin ! ^pfl^u, Ifpti^'a, 2 aOT. ffpivor, 2 pert, -cp^piva
Aa«e fallen Epic (plup. ipiptrrra & 16), ^P^'^^fi 2 tor. pass, ipiriir. Ion.
and poetic.

tpivaa (4p«T-) row .- Jt-4pM(«')a Hom. Late prose has ipivvo and iptrrv. (III.)

/p^u oal Epic ; see apaiMn.

iptSalnt (tpiSat-) contend Epic (III. IV.). Jp^iVcM^ot ■I' 702 (7. 1. ipt^atrBiu)
as if from ipiSio/Mi. By-form iptiiMlru Epic

^plfu (jpii-) rontenJ.' 4piir(0')a, tp^ptv/tai, iptgrh. Poetic. (TIL)

tpofuu fuk : see tipaitai.

tpwm {vrpT-) and ipwifu creep augment to ri- (431): ttpvov, I4-Vt"*> •Ip'vra,
. i^rrit a beatt.

Ippw (ipp; ippt-) go awaii, go (to destruetfon), periih: Jpp^iov, 4ipp<)ra, ita"-

IpvYV-Ava cost /ortA, eruel .' pres. Att., poetic. New Ion., 2 aor. IJpvY**- ^V-
rfpeityo/uu Epio, New Ion. : ipttimuu Hippocr. (808). (IV.)

iptKu hold back: ip6(i», fpufa (also Xen.), 2 aor. ^fptaiKoii (448 D.). Epic,
poetic, New Ion. Hom. has also ipuKdna, tpvtariai.

tpviiai (for ftpi)un) and <rpu>iat (for ifpv/tai) protect Epic : pres. 3 ji. tlpiarai
and (IpAaroi (for ttpurrat), int. i{l)pvrS<u ] imperf. f(Opi>r>>, tlptaro (for
•^m); fat, E(l)pAr(«)o)ui; aor. ((I)pvir((r)dfn|v, pert, fpffro Hesiod. 'i'he
pres. and Imperf. are often taken as fu-tomiB of tpioiiai. By-form ftia-
fuu, g. r.

ip6a (ftpo-, fpi-) drme: augments to tl- (431 Dh fut. fySu Horn. ; aor. i{t)-
piw(<')a Horn. Mid. ip6»iuu iravi to one's ttlf: tpivvvtuu, ((l)pvir((r)((^ii',

698 APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS [^•M>

tlfHiMi and rfpivfuu 489 d (3 pi. ttpterai and <lpdar«), [dnp. *^/iqr (3 ji

tlpioTt), i(C)piveiit Hippocr., ipntrit Soph. £plc and Ion. *if6u la posiic

(esp. Epic) and New Ian. Late tut. ip6t{t')ia.
IpXopAi ^4fx--, f^^-t '^(v0-, i\ve-) go, eome : t^ftmiuu, 2 aor. j|Xtai-, 2 pert

I)i<iXvta. In Att. Ipx"!"^ 's common only in indie. ; Bubj. Epic and Ion,;

opt. (in comp.) Xen. ; imper. Epic ; Inf. Epic, Tragic, Ion., in comp. In Alt

prose rarely ; part, poetic, In comp. In Att. prose. Imperf. iipxiiair ancomp.

is rare. For the above lenses Att. prose luea I«, Im|u, Ifc, Uvu, Uv, §a Nmple

and in comp. (but not triirai lor vwipxBttSai flatter'). FuU: Att. prooe usm

■t|u (774), A^lgapu or 1Kb for iXiiaoiuu (vrhicti is Epic, Ion., Tragic) ; 2 aor.

ffXvtfor poetic ; 2 pert. A^XovSa ot iCX^Xoufti Epic, tX^^ufur, -vrt in Comic and

Tragic fragments 1 2 plnp. AqXMn Epic. (VL)
!«--«(• (for ^S-e^-u^) eat: Iniperf. V^tor, tut. ISo|uu (541, 800), 2 aor. IfsYsn

perf. lUjSeKa, Kar-iSltEw^w, Ktrrit, -t^m. Epic are tSiutat pm., iS'ti'ii

2 perf, part., U^iopai (?) perf. pass, ; ifSifffttr Comic, Hippocr., Aristotlr,

(VI.) laSai Epic nnd poetic, liai Epic, poetic, and Ion.
ir-nda etUtrtain augmenU and reduplicates to d- (431, 44.1).
tvSui thtp, rare in prose, which usually has KBS-fifiat: imperf. lKdJ.viiSa* and

Kal-i|fiSoi' (450), tuL Kae-«l^», v. a. ii»>.<ii8t|Wbi. tlSu is chiefly poetic

and Ion. (Impert. tSior and i/Uoii),
*i(fyn4it do good. The augmented form thip- is to be rejected (462).
•ip-lo-KK ^tip-, tupt-) find: tip^ov, 2 aor. i\ipav or tJpov (imper. tipt, 424 b),

i)lipi]Ka or *tpi|iia, iSpi^uu, iiplh\*, tifttifrvfiiA, liprrt*, -rloi ; lipd/iiir Heaiod.

The augment Ib iji- or t&- (487), (V.)
ti^pulvm (fii^pav-) cheer : ri^pavA, ifd^ipSva. Hid. r^ofM : <i^pMi«4|ML and

(d^pavMiirotiai, i|ft^pdv»nv. The augment Is also ti- (4S7). (ill.)
tlixov^ praji, boait: «G{o|iaL, i)4{d|ii|v, i|3yiuu, a^KTAti -r^af Hippocr., dr-t^crsi

Aesch. The augment is aiso ti- (437).
ixSalpu (Jx'of^) kale: 'x'<V^> 'x'*^"/^ C^DS), 4x^f»< ix^ivrivi. Epic and

poetic. (I11.J
(:t^<' hate, fxSopai ■. only pres. and Imperf. Poetic for Av.<xKi«pAk
K* (Jx-i fore-tx-t audo-x-, ox«-) have, hold: imperf. flxow (431), !{■ or»Ti^»»

(1911), 2 aor. k-xo* for i-><,t)x-o- (crx*, -Tiotn* or -^«|ih <rx<., -Terfi-, »x*»).

bxi"*T **4>~'iO(^)'^ Ikt^, Awnrx«T6j| -^^Dt. Hid, lx.O|iaii Ao^d by, an

near; lfo|Mi (sometimes pass., 806), and irx^jv«]iu (often in comp.), 2 aor.

ia\if,i\v usu. in comp. (•x'^l^o^ incVl'i "ll'^i 'x'''*^ ■nc'f*^) < used it

pass, for ^irxV0i)>'(late). Epic forms are pert, rvr^^"" ('°'' -°*-ox->) B 21S,

plup. pass. tw-6xaTo teere thttt H 340. Poetic is 2 aor, tax'Oar (490 D.).

See A|>'Wx«, i'tx", («urx>4o|iai. By-form Irx<* ''^ ''''<'' (')X'^-
Hw (^-, ^<-) cool:, bofi : i4'4|(ra|Mu (^4«>« Comic), Mn|a«, tfW« (for ff«M),

)<fin^, 4^i?Mai Hippocr., #4^* Hdt. The pres. i^iit is not Att.

•{tiu ((A) live (l^-, ^r-, 39G) : (l^, ti) : imperf, ltit«, tut. ifyrm and tV«f^
For late ti^a, ififna Att. has ipiao, PiptNNa. piMao|i« ia commoner than
(^a-a^«w. iiliw Epic, New Ion., dramatic See 622 b, 041 and D.

tiiT-vQiu (fWT-, (01-, op. Lat. jiipum) yoke : t*<{«. I[n{&, II»rr|LU, ^^•l'
i«re, 2 aor. pass. tltxi\r. (IV.)

Jfm (fc- tor f((r-) baf! CIntraus. in prose) : IJava-Ifa-a, Ittvo, iic-iitap/u Hippocr.

tp«>T.] APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS 699

IAp-i«|u (^, 781) ffird: Hurtty QajMU (Att. inscr.) and ^mo^oi (preferred in

««.)■ (IV,>
tlfi-rxm come to manhood, 4|p&<t am at manAood ; i^p<^, Ifitfro,, «ap-<^Ka.

Epic ifliioffo, etc. (048). (V.)
^pieoiiAi am collected ; see if*'?"-

{|E<iw (4Jlur-) fUMWten : JJESvo, ^iGHriHU, J|U><i|v, *fi<>rriot. (III.)

MpiBoiiai am ralMd : see alp*.

iffuu tU : see 769.

^ (oy .- Bee 702.

iliitt Kink, bow: lltuvt^ iwit^imm X 401 from t/ir^iiiia with r Inserted.

Poetic, moetl; !B!pic.
ifrri^ML from ^rrdnfiai (Ion. IvmOitat from ^vritiuu) am vangufaAed : regular,

but fut. ^THjwfiai and f|rn)Mtro)tat (812).

UXXa (0aX-) bloom, rare in prose : ISaWt made grov) PInd., 2 perf. ri9T{Ka. (as

prea.) Is poetic. By-form AiXWw (490). (HI.)
Hv-Td {Ba4i; 126 g) bunr ' Wf«, Haifa, Tflaft|iai, 2 aor. pasB. M^v, 2 fut pass.

To^a-ofuu, fut. perf. rrfdifvpiat, lairrfef ; 1 anr. pass. iBipS-rir Ion. (rare). (II.)
•avfidtB [eavfL-ai-) teonder, admire: tat. 0a*|>&w|Mi (800), otherwise regular.

612. (III.)
Stiru (Btf) smite : Sti-a, Mint Eplo, 2 aor. tSifor. Poetfo (and in Att. comedy).

(III.)
Um Ki»h : Bee INX«.

tifmwtiu serve, heal : regular, bnt fnt. mid, hpa^tfiroiiu Is nau. pass. (808).
t^fiat toarm myself (In prose only prea. and imperf.), fut. eiprtfuu r 23 (680),

2 aor. pasB. as Intrans. Ifftpi/r (only In the subj. etp4u p 2-1).
Km (etv-, «tf-, 0U-, 60S) rtin ; BtinfMi (800). Other forms supplied by other

verba (Bee Tvi)i»).
til- in efiffai milk, i^ei^iit ai(eJt«d. Epic.
9fir- : see taip-.
A-7-T-^m (fli7-) (oucA: Mfo/ui (808), 2 aor. tSiyi,*, a-«.cTM. Poetic, rare In

prose (Xen.). (IV.)

«Xdu bruise, break : B\iau, leXaaa, rfSXaanat (480 c) Theocr., MXiirlhiv Hlp-

pocr., fXairrii. Iod, and poetic. See ^Xdu.
SMP« (SXi>, eu^, 501) press : HXi^ iMliI^a, teXf^triv, t4B\i,i^i md iextp,,^

ArifitoUe. Fat. midi SMfo^i Horn.
•*|{-nc«, older Mfin,m (0a*-, 0n^, 492, G20 b) die : d.wo-e>*oe|UU (806), 2 aor.

&«^4faMv, T^niKa am dead, 2 perf. TAvdrov (701c), fut. perf. TtOv^o (669a,

1958), tn|T6t. In pToae regularly 6/r9-trivrm In fut. and 2 aor., but always

«4fmo, (V.)
•pirn i»pi.x-, rj»x-) dfcturb : Hpata, ^«f><lxAir Soph. See TopAnw. Mostly

poatio. (III.)
IpaW break, bruise : Cpafiov^ ISpawo, Tffpav|ra> and W6paw|Mu (489 c), Hpaf-

0pi»w^« (Spu^ 126 g and n.) cru«A, uieaktH : rAp*pp«i, Mfi^^r Aristotle, 2 aor.
pan. irpi^r Horn,, Ir-lpvwrot. Spfrroiuu put or afrs. (II } ^ ,

_ 1= C.oo^^lc

TOO APPENDIX: LIST OP VERBS t(W«-

dp^-vKw and ipi-axa (Spa-, 9op-, 492) teap : -SopnSiuu (606 ; W. iw4p) pM^e,
2 Bor. ISopor. Mainly poetic. Bj-fono evprioiuu Hdt. (V.)

Ha (0V-, M-, 600. 1 a) lacrt^ee .- 44ov, KK>ra, tMvno, tMviuu, Mtiiv, evrfa*.

AW and e6ru rvih poetic : in tlie claHsical language only pres. and impeit
Ai^u Hwiod.

fafru (la*-') uarm : [qn, idf^r without augm. Epic and Lyric. (III. )
MXXw (la\-) and liWui lend : -taXSi, lii\a without augm. Epic. Poetic (comp.

with irl In AriBtoph.}. (III.)
bixiu and lixw (for fifaxw) tound, shout ; iax^kwi Uxf"') 2 perf . part. iW-

uxv^ Hom. has both i^x"' ■>"<I ''X*'- ^of '«:^- >" tngedy laxx- is <^°)-

monly written. Poetic, maiot; Epic. 485 d.
I)-, *'i-, oli' (for /tlA-, etc.) In tUov iitto from ^-/riJor 431 (tSa, ISm|U, tS^ iUtr,

\&iii),f\i1.. Aro^i thallknovs (Epic (/JVui), plup. ]{Si) or jS»*;tn«w(TMfi.).

(o-r^. Mid. ttiofiai seem, retetnHe Epic, poetic. New Ion. : tlaiiatr and

itiaiiair, 2 aor. i{jjf(i]r aau Epic, poetic, Hdt., vpa-iSfalai Thuc aO- In

«ISa, 794 S.
tipim naeat: ISpiicu, Upuaa. For the contraction to u instead of ou (li^wa-i, etc)

see 8S8. Epic ISpiiu, lSp<iovra, etc.
I8|4a place (Epic ISpSw) i often comp. w. nrd : -iS|4a-(*, -fSpOra, -tSpSiM, ISpt

|UU, tSf4ti|> (J.ip6f»nr Epic), tSpQTlat.
Ir-^ui (^r>-, cp. Lat. in-Di-luj) itriiK .' usu. In comp., as n^rieiuu beg. The foinui

are like those from the mid. of Ii;^ send (cp. 778). Epic aor. Mrd/t^r and

t{te (for ir(^(t) j-u, cp. tedeo) seat, usu. «ft, mid, rfg^wi fit, classic only in pres. and
imperf. Mainly Ionic and poetic See KolCta, KoSIto^i, the usual fonntin
prose. See also lla|iai, itd,Bi||ia,t sit. By-form Ifdm geat, place. (111.)

fi||u ((TiHTir-^) tetid: f^B■a, ^sa, 2 aor. dro*, etc., dxa, rffuu, tUqv, iMjn)|tai,
frit, Mot (except pres. all forms in comp. in prose). For InflecUon aod syn-
opsis, see 777 ft.

Uriopoi (!(-) come, in prose usu. d,^u(Wa|uu : d^Cfoiuu, 2 aor. A^Mfuj*,
A^-Wh*^- Uncomp. UMiiMfst suitable (rare). The simple forma Iti^im.
Ifyiat, \xiiait are poetic. Connected forms are poetic txa (iuiperf. Icov, w>r.
ZJof) and Iiidtvu, only pres. and impert. (Epic and Tragic). (IV.)

tU-n»-tui( (tXn-) propitiate: lUiro|iai, tXard|iTiv, tXdoOriv (48fi e). Epic aor.
tXarffdfiqi', Epic pres. also IXdo>ui. (V.)

Vv^lH (IXt-, IAo- for ffi-ffXif-, ffi-trXo-) am propitioui ; pres. imper. Rij#i or B«A,
pei^. tXqia. Mid. IXa^i propitiate. Epic.

rxxu ((XXo^O roll : IXa. See tlXiu and iPiu. (Ill or IV.)

Iftifftrui (Iparr-) lash : Inae(t)a Epic. (III.)

intlpw (liap-) and t^ulpe/ui den're .- luapiitiir Epic, Wfi'l* Hdt., l^ie^it. Poetic
and Ion. (HI.)

twTn^iJly: (T25. 726 a): Bee «4tc|uu.

ttifu : Doric for otSa knote : laf% (or tea\i), Tirart, b-Sfwr, firaTc, tram, pait.lirii.

ttfKiii /ijten (= fiit-a-itui) ; see {tvKu.

Irrtiiu (ffTif-, iTTii-) set. place : o-Hirm shall set, trtjira set, caused lo stand.
2 aor. Irrqv stood, 1 perf. lm|Ka Mand ( = tt-vr^Ka), plup. flrHlK^ Jlood
(trr^cn, nre, 444 b], 2 perl feTWrev ttand C*17>, put mid. loraiw* »>«■

nX»««] APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS 701

fat. perf. irH/lf»haU ttand (764 a, 195B), aor. pua. Jirr&h]* mat «et, v. a.
rranSt, -ri»t. For the Inflection see 416, for dialectal forms of preKnt sec
747 D. B. Epic 1 Mr. 3 pi. trrfwar and (aTvrar, 2 aor. S pi. liTur (inf.
ariiiitrai), 2 perf. Inf. J«Tii|tf>' Uid lirrd^iow, part, ^o-raiij and ivrtiit. Itemt.
iiaperf. Uraira, 2 aor, ^ifrxt (495 a). 819.
bxxUva (brxm^) mai« dry or lean ; -trxnrSi (-sDfiai), lir:tHH Aescb. (644 a,
bxntn lorL, also Att. ?), yxrirBilr HippOcr., -iffxarrioi Aristotle. (111.)

hx" (for ^i-4(()x-<i'), kaee, hold: see Ix*.

lat- (taSt-) in Horn. nnSiiv depriving, tanBii^u shall deprive. Not the same

aa ioa-(ic^J«). (uaJi^i)!' wilhdrevi may be from xfT"-
icalalp« {taSap-) purifff : KotofA, li^htpa (and iti^ipa ?), MK&8ap|ui, litaUplifi',

neopTAH Hippocr. (TIL)
KoNtoiuu : see Ite^ioi.
KafaJiEa tleep ; Bee titu.
■[dh|)iu: see TOO.
natHmtH, aU: imperf.b&Ottov (460). fnt. Koe^A (639), aor.iKieuraoricaKira. Mid.

NoBltaiLu i«; hcaSitdftiiv, KofctVoftai (521), UuBvrif.i[r. Hom. bas ImperF.

tiffijfiti or ni^jbi', aor. tafttrt aud xd^a, Kdt. KortXaa.. See I^, Itofiot. (iV.)
(■(•ni^ai excel: perf. Wnw^ioi (K(mf>i^>of Find.). Poetic. (IV.)
•aitm (nai^. «ii~) kill: nii>£, 2 aor. Ixatat, 2 pert, n/iraiu (jura-miratim Xen.).

Poetic (III.)
rabt (for m^w from naf-iu ; tan-, xa/:-, lai-) and iiiit (un contracted, 396)

ftum, often w. ^r, nrd : tain, bcoMm, -WicavKa, K&av|iai, jKai^c, -KavMj-

ro|iai, -mivrti. 2 aor. fjnia Epic, poetlo (part. niJii Epic, iriKt Att.). 2 aor.

pass. tuiTir burned (Intrans.) Epic and Ion. The hbs. show xalu in tragedy,

Thuc, and in Xen. ubu., niw in Aristoph.. Isocr.. Plato. 620. (III.)
KoXiw (i»X<-, kM-) call: koXA (689 a), fadXwa, KJicXitNO, KjKXi||wt am called

(opt. 711 c), iKX^h|v, fuU pass. icXi|»f|ro|uu (ncAoO|mi S. EL 971), fut. perf.

KiKX4)<ra|Mii shall bear the name, icXi]Tit, -rfot. Aeolic pres. riXtiju, Epic

inf. naXit^MKit; fut. atXiit Hom., caUo-u Aristotle, aor. ^niXera'a Hoiii.

Iterative xaXttaKor, miKiaaro. Epic pres. n-KX^-viiai.
«>Xi*-T* (kbXvJJ-) coDer (In proee usu. In comp. w. Art, h, etc) : KoXir^'ai

Jk&Xv<|«, K)ii&Xvfjkfi(u, JK<iX4>^9f)«, KoXwrit, irvy-ta\vTTiBi poetic. (II-)
«it^va (la/i-. tint-) lab'iT, am vie.ary or sick: koiuSiim (BOtS), 2 aor. iKOfiav,

i(fa|iT|Ka, dwD-N^iiWot. Epic 2 aor. subj. also icnil^iu, 2 aor. mid. tKuitiiait,

2 perf. part. «ir(i)jiit. (IV.)

H (najiT-) hfnd: Ki|ii|ra. lKa(«ii)ia. (rfKamuu, M4i^li)v, Na(i«T^ (IL)
^use : regular. For augment, see 463.
•ai/y-t- pant, in Epic 2 perf. part. Hts^ijuji.
ttlir-niu : see cnuSdnOiu.
Mlyju lie : KilnpAi. See 791.
ittlft (tip-, tap-) shear ; KipA,1iMipa.Kfaaftuu,A««-i(a|>T4ot Comic Epic aor. Iit^a

(544 b). aor. pass. itipB^f Pind., 2 aor. paw. itdpv (Hdt.) prob. Att. (III.)
nfw splU : Epic ttliat f 426.

«(u and tfa wish to lie dovin. Epic. Cp. «t|Mu.
tf\aiitt Tuar: nXaJt^ru, tit^Siiva. By-form Hom. mXdfw In pres. part. Epic

and J.jtva.

lOglc

702 APPENDIX: LIST OP VERBS [«}ui* \

MiXrf* command : MXt{d-«, JkAivto, MN&mto, nKAivtfTMU (480 o), linX«i«4^*,

■/Uw(«X-)Ia»<i.' iL^X-ru (636), fnXva. Poetic = Att. MXX*. (III.)
KAa;iu (nX-, wXi-, icX-} command: nXiiw/ioi, ^«Xira'il>iqv, 2aor. jmiiM>tv>' (448 D.,

649 D.). Poetic = Att. KiXtio.
Ktnit («"■-, nrri-, 486) ffood ; atr-^a, Uimiva, mtfrr^^ioi HippOCT., A(e»Ti(#i|r

late Att,, «irY-HpTi;tfiiffo/uii Hdt, tiarit Hom., aor. Inf. xinoL Hom. fur

Ktmtai. Poetic and New Ion.
Mfpdv-vII|iL and ki^ii-i^eii (icpa-, Kpa-) mix : 4k<p<w«, KfopBpu, 4Kpih|i- &nd l«p^

a4i|v (489 g), KpKrfe*. Ion. are fnprfvn ^Mpaara poetic), tiKpniuu, itp^i.

By-larms apiiu and tepalai, and Kipri\)u and nfidu, (IV.)
mpSalva («p3-, Kffitf-, Ktfiiar-) gain : K^pfiavA, jKlpGKva (644 a), «pM^«*it<pSqa.

Hdt. lias fuL KtpHiao^i, aor. i.ipiriH,, and Uipi^n (62S b). (III. IV.)
«Mu (hu0-, KU0-) Aide ; tniiTM, (in>ffa, Epic 2 aor. fituSai' and redupl. 2 tor.

in Bubj, KttiBui, 2 perf . tiKtvea, BA prea. (in Trag. also am hidden, and so nMi

in trag,). Epic by-form jtniSdKii, Poetic.
in)Ju ("l'-, icr)it-, cai-) distress .- iiiJiia-w, ^iijAiira, 2 pert. riaiSa as pres., jofrow.

Poetic. Mid. k^^Soiuu nm concerned ,- ji«aii}iro>uu Horn., tiniStviii.-^r Aeecb.
Kilpdrra (nrpiii-) pToelaim : Ki\fA^n (147 c), iKfipvfa, 4«vin«1^^)xa, mriipo^w,

lin|pdx0i|*, fut. pas«i. ici)pQx)iio'0|taL and (Eur.) joipijfafui (809). (III.)
n-r-K-i™ («X-, tix'-). Epic j((jc<l™. come upon, reacA, .Jlnd : k<xVdm« (806),

2 aor. Ittxot, Kpio ^iixtfird^Tir, cUkIxtoi- Horn, hae 2 aor. pass. Mxv ™

intranH. : cix^ui (ii!m. -rlu), i(ix<ii]r, Kix?*" <^d "tx^imiu, jdxefi and (mid.)

ciX^/vnt. These forms may come from a pres. xlxi^ (^88), but tbef alt

have aoristic force, Potlic. C^V.)
t(S-n)iu: see aKi&dn>C|ik. (IV.)

id-tvum move mygelf. Pres. and imperf. Epic. Att. xltbt. (IV.)
Klp-niiu and Kiprtw Epic: see Hpdviivfu.
"(-XPT-F (XP^-. XP"-) le"^- I)lFl"-a. "*XP^«». "'XMI"*- P^t, xf^- Hdt,

probably also Att. Mid. frorroio; (xfl'^1''-
Aiila (jcXsTT-, <Xa7-, 610) relound, clang : xXdy{u, ti:\ny^ii, S aor. liXcYsr,

2 perf. KjKXaYY> as pros., fat. perf, MicXd-vtopAi na fut sAoJi aertatu (681,

806). Epic 2 perf. KtK\^orm (567 D. 2, 700 D.). By-fonu KXaryitM.

Mainly poetic. (III.)
KXoiw Vieep (for cXsifur from iXa^-|^u; xXau-, rXa^-, itXai>, kXbu-), tAim in pTOM

(not contracted, 520) : i[Xai<|ira or HXsyfira (iiXalicrapu shall ntffer for it),

(■Xavra, Poetic are (\ai«raDfiai (540), tixXaoiiai, titXauaiiat, iXavrh,

■Xauirrii (?). The mbr. have icXafa in Xen. ueu., kUu in Ariatoph, (IIL)
■cUa 6r«ai', in prose W. drd, drd, trt, Kard, rpii, iriir : -Miaaa (486 a), HcfaX*-

o-|iat (480 c), -<KXd(r4i|*, ini-t\aa^aotiai Aristotle.
kX4U ikut (Ulder Alt hXd'*) : kXiIo-m and KXn'o-tt, lidWiva and kXuo-a, &«•-

K^tX^Ko, icA(X«4iai and k^kXupai (K<«X(ia-|j,cu has some support), iKXa(rti)v

and ticXi^vtiiv (480 e), xXorrdt and KXi]irr^, tXitw is Ion.
kX^itth (iXnr-, k\ow-) Steal: kXIi^ (less often kM^O|iu), IxXrfa, k^kIm^o, kI-

■XtfitMi, 2 aor. pass. IkX&«i|*, KXtirrAt, -r^, 1 aor, pass. h\it»fir Ion. and

poetic. (IJ.)
KX]f^ celebrate in toug: kXiJith, fcXp0a (Dor. JitXAIfa from cXdfte). Poetic

512. (m.)

APPENDIX; LIST OF VERBS 708

tAint (cXi-r-) bend, uga. corop. w. card : -kXi*A, bXiM, i/iXua late, wiicXiiiu

(491), 2 aor. pass. -«(X(vi|v, 2 fat. paaa. -aXiv^roiuii, 1 wr. pass, ixMe^r

poetic, iK\lr«i)r Epic, poeUc, An-tKiTdet Artstotle. (ILL)
Ail hear : imperf. liiXuot Is an old 2 aor. from an aaaumed pres. kXi^ ; 2 nor.

Imper., without Lbematic vowel, kXOA and (Epic) WicXvAi ; perf. K^iXuna rare ;

part. Ki^iitraj as adj. fajnout = tXirrii. Poetic
Ktttlo scrotcA, usn. coiup. w. iui : -Kroitf-v Ear., -JKvturo, -nkvoiKa, -nkMuo^wi

(460 c), -«n[ir»i)v, -K<mt4r^ro^ml.
■cvdu (kvA) terape (»«-, k>^) (on pies, contraction Kv^t, ki^, et^i. aee 304, S41)

often comp. ir. jrarti ; xr^vu HIppocr., lKi>i)ra, Httetifvpiai (489 c), HKvt^v^iiy,

Cp. Kvotlh
MiX«(iiw («HX-ai-) Aolloa: xaiXavA, JmoCXZh (644 a), Hn(Xsv/uu (489 h) and

iKViMrf^w Hippocr. (in. lY.)
MfkH- (mtuS-') cart for: xopA, kdiiMra, Kud^Liaa, MKAt^iriiAt (uau. mid.), U»-

|(Cvfi|i-, m|lkv4<tra|l■^ KB|MO-T<ot. (III.)
w6r-Tm (jioT-) eui, UBU. in comp. in proae : tiMfm, keifoi -iciKo^ (3id, ^, rdv,

etc.), K^Kojifuu, 2 aor. pass, -w^v (dri, ripl)' ^ '"^' P^^ -inrHJ7n|WL, (at.

perf. -KMdi^e|iAi, KMrrdt. Horn, baa S perf. part, hudti^i. (IL )
mpir-tv/u (_K(/fit- for (S/Mv-) >a<faC« : fut. mp/u Hom., n^u HdL, aor. Mptsa

poetic, 2 perf. part. (Mupqiit lolfv)"' Epic, perf. mid. miAptaiiai (480 c) Xen.,

nxV^^uu Ion., poetic, aor. paaa. iKopia^rit poetic (480 g) d-cipirrDf and

iL-tipt(ir)TBt imatiate^ both poetic. Ion. and poetic, rare In prose. (IV.}
KoftCraut (nputf-) arm toflA At helmet, arm : act. only prea. and Imperf. Horn.

aor. part imfivtaiium, perf. part. hiojiuPix^kh. Poetic, mostly Epic. (III.)
Btrtit am angry: it&rtca (-d/uiv) and iEerori7iii Epic.
f4^ (.*piT, 'P^y-) cry out : 2 aor. UpaYBv, 2 perf. ■JKpS'y* as pres. (imper.

098, 704 e), fut. perf. as fut. Kuptifatuu ikaU erg out (581, 806). By-form

KpavyAl*. (III.)
tfolma (tpar-) accomplith : tparH, Irpawa, perf. 3 a. and pi. Kixparrai, iKpirfrir,

wptte-^aaiiai, i-tparrot. Epic by-form xpaialrw (tpanlra ?) ; irp'^ra ('x^-

ifM ?), perf. S B. tftpAarrai, plup. Ktupiarro, aor. pass. inpianSn Theocr.,

d-<pdam.f. Poetic. (IIL)
Kp<|ia-|tai {tptiia-) hang, intrana., used aa pass, of Kptjiinatu. Pres. inflected aa

Irrafwi (aubj. Kp<|u>|uii, opt. Kpi|w[|ii|i-, T4U b, 760 b), Kf*^'tfnyM\. Cp.

Kplfimfiu and Kp<)iAwO|u,
KpqiAikvOlu (icfK^ia-, 729) hanff, trans. ; xpi^, ittpt^ar^L, kpi^i.atiiT, Kpatuwr^i.

Mid. introns. see Kp^iiu. Fut. Kpt/iiiiu Comic poets, apciiiai Epic. (IV.)
Kp<(« (,Kptit- or RpiT-) erea:t.- 2 aor. Epic upln (v, 1. Kpl-yr}, 2 perf. icbplY*

Artstoph. (UI.)
rplpi-wiiiu (npifi-nr., icpi/i-n-) ofien miswritten e^m>i)m<i Aanfr, trans., rare in act.

Hid. (pl/uufuu am nupended = spifiaiuu. Poetic. (IV.)
K^vw (Kpi-*-) jvagt: KpivA, licptvo, KJKpua(4»l), K&pi|uu,lKp(»Tpr («>:/>J>#qrEpic,

491), KpiSltw|>aL (KpivoOjMu rarely pass., 800), KfiiTfot, nfKrit poetic. (III.)
Kp«i« beoi : Kpatim, kpava^ -irfKpauKa, -K<Kpov|UU and -KiKpovo-tiM (489 g),

■cpiv.ra (npu^) hide : it^ifm (proae w. iri, lard}, kpv^n, Kfaf«|i|ia>i (proae
w.dTA),kp<^v,Kpinrr6i,j(fivirr/ot poetic. Poetic 2 aor. pan. Jxp^r ia lare

(Soph.), H*pi^a,uu HIppocr. ril.)

704 APPENDIX; LIST OF VEEBS

KrAo|tM aequirt .' kt^vviiu, tKTifrA|iii)F, itAmDiu (442 n.) potteu (oubj. aurrA-
V^h -t> -f|T>'> TOO ; opc< K«KT|f^i|v, -go, -^, 711 ; doubtful are ■vcr^iiip', -fa.
-^); fut. perf. «utr^o^u shall potsta (581) ; Ikt^Ii|* pass. ; cr^iiH, -iW
Aor. mid. 4kti|v^)ii)f uisii. = havt poitessed. Ion. perf. mid. fcrq^iai (442 D.)
and fut. peif. inHiaoiuii ihcUl potiei* (both in Plato).

KTilvu (irir-, jcror-, jcro-i^, 478, 480) liill, in prow ufiu&ll; comp. w. dri, in
poetry w. cardj &wO~Kn[m : imvA, kriivo, 2 perf. d'T^KTO**. loD. fot.
rrtria (rrawiu from etiiIhi). Poetic 2 Oor. (uramv and frrsi (651 D.) ;
eubj. eriaiiit U8i, x ^l^i l"f- ird/icm, put. rrdi ; mid. irriiair vat kiltrd
(087). Epic aor. pass. imiBrir. In AtL proae Avo-tvifcrKs is ganenHy used
as the pass, of Airo-imCm, Bj-fonns dm-KrtlvBp and d«o-KT«ivi» (some-
times written KTitriiiu, -6u, rrtrniiu, -in, TSS). (III.)

KtI^i found: nt(«v, fcruro, ttTiaiuu Pind., krfirfi]*, (u-mTin poetic. Eiric
2 aor. mid. part trliaim (irri-) as pass., founded. 512. (III.)

cTMrto (KTtnr-, JtJ-urf-, 486) (ound ; itriwt^a, 2 aor, (mrwof Horn. (64« D), Poetk.

iBIaJnt (fiij-ap-) honor; iiciStiia Epic. Hom. has also iiiSim and njidi*.
623 h. (IILIV.)

kW» (n-, tve-, 486) am pregnant: Mura. cimceived, xarfiiKa. Fut. nr^v
Hippocr., aor. pass, ir-ttu^etiw Aristotle. Hid. bring forth. Connected
forms are xiv (usu. poetic) ; trvrt impregnated Aesclt. (nwo^nr betttg preg-
nant), caus. ntrxw Impregnate and eonceft>«, KttcnopAii conceftie.

mihlvS* and kkXii^Im, later K«Xf«, roll: bciXlra, M-rtiHUKiXlaiuu (480 c), h^
Xtv4ii|*, lK-KlAta44ro|la^ kiAIvt^. From ixiiuaii (=^ /kuXipSo-b) the pR«.
■uXtu was formed. Connected is Kii>utitoiun.

mt-ri-a (itv-) jfciM: jcfnlffo^iai (?), (nwo. Foetic. «poo--Kw4i* r«niler AonMpf to;
vpor-Kwd^ow, wfor-mAitfr* (rpoir-^jinira poetic). (IV.)

■Ar-ru ((v^-, cp. ti^ia; or irii^ cp. n^') Mtoop: &va-K^a|Mi (806), fcn^*.
■ctei^. If the verb-stem is kD^ the u is long in all forms. (II.)

KVpiu (Kvp-, mpt-, 486) meet, happen is n^lar (poetic and Ion.), gip^ ("v) =
xvpiu is mainly poetic : jrfpirw (680), fKu/xro. (III.)

jwcAw (600, 1. a) lament.' tvniau Aeacb., Kuttatiiai (806) Aristopb., ^iiio^a
poetic.

tmkim hindr.r : regular, but (raj's) fut mtd. uX^niMi as pass. (808) T. 1. 142.

Xa-^-X-&n> (Xax-, ^IxO obtain bv lot: Mto)uu (806), 2 aor. ftaxa*. 3 perf.
ttXifX* (^**^h «(XimMU, tX4)x*1>i liiiK'^' Ion. fut Xdia/uu, Ion. 2 pert
XAoTX" (»•»> poetic). Hom. 2 aor. tWaxor (redupl. XAaj[o» made partaktr').
(IV.)

Xd[iof«H and xdfu/">' (Sp>c and Ion.) = XofiPdlvw.

Xo-iJt^vw (XojS-, Xifj;-) (ajik! : Xt^^niiiai (B06), 2 aor. IXoPo*, iaT|4« (446), A.iip.
|UU, tX^^v, Xi|^<r«|iai, Xijirr^f, -r^of. Fut Xd/i^ofuu (better U^o^x^
Ion., Xafovfwi Doric; 2 aor. Inf. XiXn^o-du Horn. ; perf. ytiA^nxa (Xa^)
Ion. and Doric ; perf. mid. \t\ifntuu poetic, XAa^i/ui Ion. ; aor. pass. rtJ^»n
Ion., JU^^i)* Doric ; t. a. jtara-Xajiwrte Hdt. (IV.)

X&inw *hiae : iA^ifit, IXa^itia, 2 perl. XAoMra poetic,

Xt(-*-«-4Ht (Xae-, \ifi-) eteape the noitee of, lis hid: X^n, 2 aor. IX«B». 2 pert
XAi|fa as pres., t. a. A-Xovret poetio. Mid. in prose nsn. I»i ImWiapai
/orget (\aredniuu poetic, rare Id proee ; XitAiuoi poetic) : t»vX<iK|i«>, * vt

X<.] APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS 705

ir-fXaMiii^F, p«rf. mid. iTi-MXi|r|uu. Horn, hu 2 aor. \f\a9eir eaiued to
forget and \t\aBi)iJii forgot (448 D.). perf. iiiid. XAoff/iai. X<XiS#-o*«i( is
poetic. By-forms axe \iidu, -o^t, cblefly poetic : tKiiaa poetic ; and XiiHrai
eaiiM to forget Epic, poetic. (IV.)

\^«-7-ti (Xb^ or \a^-) lap, lick : prea. late : iK-X&i)io(L(u Aristoph., t{-Aai|ni
Aristoph., XOa^a Aristoph. Fat. Xd^u Horn. (IT.)

Mtni, for Xu-iricu, 626 d (Xoc-, Xon-) fpeak : Xaini<ro;u. (806), 2 aor. fXant
(AdnrffB rare), 2 perf. aa preB. UX^ia Epic = UXaia Tragic (part. XcXJIkuu
Epic), 2 aor. mid. XcXaicj^iir Eplo. Poetic verb. By-fonua tri-Xi/iitu Epic,
Xonifitf Tragic. (V.)

X^ti >ee .' only part. \iur and imperf. Xdc. Epic.

•Uw (XS) uuA (Xa-, Xif-) ; contt, Xgi, Xj, inf. Xfl*. Doric verb. Also
X«fv. Cp. 3S4.

Xiiasoy; X^a, (Xifa, perf. dprpcn (see under (fpw), XA4v|i«, JX^tip', fat. pass.
X*xMiffv|uu, fut. perf. X(X<Eo|iu, X<in4ot, -r^ poetic. Fut. mid. XJ{o|iai aa
pass, is poetic (SOS). Sw-Xtfofuu dieenta: Sw-JU{afAt and 8ia-X(x^ro|iai
(813), SwOWTiuu, SmX^Sh' ('i-tX^^' AristoUe), Sio-Xocrfet.

Mia collect, count, nsu. in comp. w. if or ^fr: -Xiga, -A^o, 2 perf. -ttXax*
(446), -tOuTiMu and -XAcy^w, 2 aor. pass. -«Uyi|» (-aX^tiiv rare in AH.),
Alt perf. -Xcfl^fMi, -XiitWot, Xfirii poetic. 2 aor. mid. iyJy/tti' < 336.

Xffan*(X(ir-, XsiT-, Xirr-, 477 3,) leave, often in comp. w. tiri, nari, irr6, etc :
X<(i)'i^ 2 aor. Ouwov, 2 perf. XAatira have /<fT, Aaii« faded. XtlwoftM mid.
remain, pass, am l^, am inferior : XAu|t|Ui, tXif^i^c, fut. pass. Xii^#^
rB|iAi, fuL perf. XiX)(i|«|uUi, Xti'rrfot' Fut. mid. Xi(i4w|wt is rarely pass.
(809) , 2 aor. mid. i\iri/t.n' <" prose only in comp. (as pass. A 898). By-form
•mfa-XijH&ra. On tlie inflection of the 2 aor. see 384.

Xnrdw (X<TTi>i>-) tAfn: IX^vrOm, XiX^vrMnuu (4B»h), lX«rT4>«i|*. (IIL)

X^a (Xn--, Xar-) peel, usu, comp. w. dvi, tt : -XHm, -At^n, X&amuu (Inscr.),

X<<a Ktone to death, nsu. comp. w. card in prose : -Xtira, -Anm, -<Xtfv4i|v

(489 e), -X«iio«^|Uu.
X«x* Icy t(> *'"' (cP- X^X-«' '><•') : Xifo^iot, fXtfa (JX<{(lf(4' I'sn' (o f^'^i imper.

X/ffo, M8 D.}, 2 aor. athematlc forms (688) rX(icr« twnl to r«>t, imper. M^b

for Xfx-ra, inf. mra-X/x^' '*>r -Xtx'^Ui part. icaTii-X^/umi. Epic.
X^tfa: aeeXaiMiw.
Xi-Xoiafui (Xo- for Xm--, 624 a) ifesfre eagerly only pr». and imperf. ; with

perf. X(Xiq/uii (Xia-). Epic Cp. Xdu. (III.)
Xt^vofiai larel; Xlra>ui (Xir-) mpplfcate .' JXXwd^itiv Epic, 2 aor. AiTifiijr Epic,

rsXi^-XXurToj. Poetic, rare in prose. (III.)
Xix/"'" (ftnil Xixudfu) Iici:; perf. part. XfXix/t^o Heslod, Usually poetic.
Xo^u ( = Xo^ew) teath : Xo^o-aa/iai, ^Xir(a-)7a, -i/iiir. Epic. See Xow
Xo4a uasA loses v before a short vowel and then contracts (808 a) : Xoia, XoWit,

ti»in, XoOiuv, Xofrn, XoOin, tXmi*, Xii<lira|uu (Saiaa late), IXoihto, Xftaii|i(u,

&-Xiivrot. Hom. hasXAu, Xe/u: \oiaaatiai, XoSra {'217, \6taiiii (-aro), Hippocr.

iiioieiiw.
\vtuUiv (Xviwr-) ahuae : uau. XUfUitirotuti as act. : XQ)iavoO|tai, iXD)ti|vd|Li|*, X<Xtf-

|MM>ai (nsu. mid. 480 h), i\vfiit»7ir Tragic. (III.)
X<w ( Xv, X0-) looK. X^a, IXyro., XAima, X&v)uu, 4XMi)i>, XvMjo^iuu, XiXtfrojiu,

T06 APPENDIX: LIST OP VERBS [paba

Xvrit.-rfoi. Inflection p. 114. Oii2aor. mid. Epic 'Ufi^raapaM., aeeSSS.
On peif. opt. XiXOto, see 711 D.

|i«lva (^iiar-, fi^r-) madden, Mt UBU. poetic : l(J.i)*a, iilpiira am mad. Hid.

)La(vopa( rage ; furnC^i H(U., '2 aor. pass. V^n|*. (III.)
fiafo^HU (for )iii(a')-j(iuai, 024 a} desire, atrive : iidvaoiuu, ifui^a^adiitii; iri-iiarrK.

Epic. Connected are Aeol. iiioMai (m^u, opt. )^to, Imper. /lOvo) ftnd

fuu^M, Epic, poetic. (HI)
fa-*4-i.tm (mk^. »ui0(-) f«arn.' tmMjvtituu (80G}, 2 aor. IimBov, |u|idVT)Kft, |wl^ i

T4t, Tfet. Horn. ImsaaoT. r;i/uifti» (429»,D.). (IV.) I

(Ufatva (>iapai>-) cotue to wither: V^pSvo, iiiapAi^r Horn. (III.)
fidp-n/iai (>ii^M.) jtpAt : only in pren. and imperf,, subj. ^pmiuu (740 b),

imper. fui|ina. I'oetic. (IV.)
Iiipw-Tu (fu^n--) teizt : itip\f-u, luapif-a, 2 aor. l^/irof (?) and redupl. itJ/iafm (?)

Epic, 2 perf. /ttiuipra Epic. Poetic. (II.)
|»Ai-rB (^v) Arneod ; |iA(i^ ^fi^ f^H^X"'! I^H^TI^^i ^ ^°f' P'^'*^ VtI' ('f*^'

i^dx^irSoph.). (III.)
|t&X<>|uu (moz-. Mi«xe-).fil'Ai : iMxoBiMt (630 b), ifiaxM^fl'i t"l**X'lH*>- t»X"^

Prea. Horn, tiax^'f^^ (part, iiaxtti/itm and ttaX"^i"'^^t 'nt. Koui. fia);4r<vwi

(-^aiTtiuu ?) and ^j^Joiuk, Hdt fux^'o*"" > i''^' Epic Jfia;ca'(0')iifiqr (V. L

-Tprd^ir''), Hdt. f/uix"''^'")' I ^' ^ Mxl''^* Horn., i-iiix"'"' Aeach.
lUSu and >u8/u> rule (466 d). Epic and )ioetlc. lUiaiuu am concerned a&ovi.
p^M-o-Ka Tnake drunk: t|iMwa-a. juKIo-koijai (ret drunk, lfAiatT\T got drunk

(480 e). (V.)
|uMit dm druTii; .' only prea. and imperf. ; other tensee from the pua, of iuUtv*.
IMly-vOfu (^iT-, f-y-') mix (often written iiiyrviM), also pM'yvia, and lew oom.

Iilryu (626 c) : ^[£t*, I|Uifa, piiLHYfiu, i|ulx^i &*a-|U%'4"l'>* nxv, 8 aoT.

pam. Vtyiiv, luirrii, -riot. The forma with ti are restored on the authority

of inscr. Epic 'i fut. paaa. luy^aoiuu. Epic 2 aor, mid. tiitxTt (f^ucra f),

poetic fut perf. pxiuiioiuu. (IV.)
ItttpQiuu ifup-, for fffUf>-, >u>p-, /lafi-) obtain part in : 2 perf. tiitiapt (442 D.) ha* a

eAore in. Epic <I|WipTW i'( la fated (fiom «'i-irfiap-T(u, 446 a). (III.)
|UUit (w^^i /uXXc-) intend, augmenta w. t, rarely w. ^ (480) : ptix^^ria, IpiX'

Xi|irtt, fidXifrfet.

jiA« (m«^-i *«^«-) care /or, eoBcem poetic ; >mX-^u poetic, tuX^nfui Epic, 2 perf.
^*iirha Epic, iitiii\iiiia.t as pres. poetic (Kplc itiii^§-\tTiu, 130 D.), ^fi(X4«^r
poetic. Impereonal i piXn f ( f> a rare, )uX1r», )|iAt|«, (uiiAiim, puXip^.
Proae 4<ri-|iA»|MU or lm-|uXJo|Mi c<ire for (the latter form ia far more com.
on Att. inner, alter 380 n.c.) : twi-|uX^ro|i«, hvju|iAi|iai, 4v.«|uX4^0i|>,
ln-|uXi)Tfat.

lUfteta (imr-, ttor-, fw-) desire; 2 perf. as pres. ; Blng. iiiiiarai, -urt; oUierwise
/u-forma (706), as lUtiaror (573), iiiiMiut, -art, -datfi, imper. fu^drH, pan.
Iitiiiiii and ittnitit, iitimila, inf. ^^v^tai Hdt. Epic, poetic.

|U|i^pai blame .- )ii|ii)nFiai, (|U|i<|i4|ii^*. J|U|>^0ip' rare In proae, |u)i«t6|.

]/i*» iutt-, ^«-) remain : |U*A, Iiuira, |u|livi|ica (486 c), ftunim, lUvctJos. By-
form nl-iiv-a Epic and poetic.

m^fii)pj{u ponder, deefee; (lr-<^^i}pura Aristopb., iitp/i-lipifa Epic. Poetic.
612. (UI.)

>((>] APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS 707

fi^^fix derrite : n^o/iat, tiairiiair. Foetio.

fiqmiofuu (jiii*-, far-, 486 D.) bleat: pres. and imperf, not used ; Horn. 2 kof.
port, itamir, 2 perf. pan, ^u^iiicdi, fK^isKuEa, 2 plup. i/Uiaiton {567 D. 8).

int^iia (/«jT'-t 486 D., cp. ii^Tif) plan: also fiifruio/iai and (Pind.) larrloiiai;
-l^o^ai, -iffdA/iff, Epic and Lyric.

p4slN* (fuar-) stain; |uav4), l^vo, |U)U(W)uw (489h), 4)uAvhti>, pja*04'°l'*^
d-fiJarroi poetic. (III.)

|u-|ii^'-a-KB and pi-|iiH^KB (f-ro', 626 b) retntnd, mid. rememhtr. Act. ubu. &■«-
or frvo-iuiivu'rv* (the Hiiiiple is poetic except in paas.) : ~)iW|ov, -iftrrfa^ perf.
|U|iviipu = prt'H. (4-12 N.) Temenbrr, i^v1^rtt\v (48fl e) as mid. remembered,
nentiiiN^d, fut. posa. = mid. |im)ff^rofi.ai ihall remember, fut. perf. |M|iv4|av-
|iai s'mlf b«ir in mind (&S1), v. a. irir^nfrriot, i-iita^Toi Tbeocr. (liiinnuu
bae Biibj. p4|j,*Apai (TOO), opt. |uftv^Vi|v (lu^ivfiiiv doubtful, 711 b), itnper.
|ii|ivi)iro (Hdt. lUnno), inf. |Ufivft<rfet, part. )Uft>^|ii*ot. Fut. /inim (-o/ui),
aor. (finr^a (-d>»r>) are poetic. Epic /iKte^uu in Horn, ^^niam, iimi/aiat
(643). (V.)

>i^iiu mnafn : poetic for |Uva.

fito-Y* (for m-{/i)ryi,i, 6'i6 c) mix, pres. and linperf. See |u(y*B|u.

il6[u tuck. Ion. /lu^w, lale tii-iiv{iu. Horn. ^K-^v^fii s^ueezinp oui.

|iit« (tuFV-) grumble: I^ii{a. (ill.)

liBn^oiiai (»ii>K-, ^vc-, ^(o-, 4S€) beI2oui .- tfSwnri^i\v, Epic 2 aor. ^m> (M6 D.),
Epic 2 perf. M^^un as pres.

IiAttb {laiK-') wipe UBU. comp. n. dri : -<|»j^ -f|U|iiYfH|*. (III.)

pimthut the Itpa or eyea (u late, uncertain in Att.) : l|ivra, ft^OKO.

nlv (rar-ioi, 624 a) dieell : Iraria eavaed to dwrll, iraaaiiair took ftp my abode
and earned to dteell, inAa&ift vai trtlle.d or dvjeil. Poetic. (III.)

walu (,waf-iu, 624 h) nrim : nlo* . 222 (r. I. noo). (III.)

rirrm (nj-, ny-, 614 a, 615 b) comprets: Irafa Epic and Ion., Wva^pai .Vrie-
toph. (rirai/iai Hippocr.), Murrdt Aristoph. Mostly Iod. and poetic. (III.)

Mlw ("f-") .rtoio only in prea. Epic. Cp. rida swim.

**dH (vA) ipfn (■«-, nr-1 3^) ' pres. i^, vf|, t-An, inf. vl)*'' purt. vAv, fat. vt/rt,
aor. trtira, aor. pass. Mfinv.

wtuiii» (ki«- for rtittiT' ; cp. ri w7i(at ttrife') chide, tlSU. jcucfu la Horn. : rtixivu,

^Hl«<r(<r)i>. Epic (also Hdt.). (111.)
v((^ (K14V-, n^, 477 ; better form than iif^t) aiiouu, covert with now: imt-

fmi(Fi. PasB. H[^tTai.
Wp« (k^, K|H-) diaCribvte, mid. also (lo to pcMurt: v<|iA, Ivniia, Eia-*t*JrH|i[a,

rioiMt (rw-) go, come, only in pres. and Imperf. 1 vea. in fat. aense. Mainly

poetic. Cp. rtvonai. MI.
vriw nod ; -vfiroiiai w. And or mrd (806), iMvra, Whwko. Hoiii. haa fat, k^u

and JcaTB-H^ro/uu.
v4m (**if-, wf-, f-, originally itkv-, etc.) stirfm, often comp. w. lid, if: vniraSiuu

Xen. (540, 806). -4m«»w. -Wnma, vcno-rfot- Op. nix"'"'-
r^ het^ dp, prea. in comp. and only in Hdt. (Att. lun. has x^) ' ""l^^

«fci)|iat (rintaiMt ? 461* g), nirti Hom. Epic mitai.
rf^ (n^ ttr-, 509a) toatA, in AtL uau. comp. tr. dri, J( ; -vdlwpAi (tf^u poetic).

708 APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS [ifr*^

-4n4w. -Wnfifuu, -trl^fiir Hippoor., i-Mwrai Hom. = A*-*Mrt-nwt«t> Wnw it

late, t^rrofiai Hum. (III.)
rto'D^i go OT will ffo : from n-r(<)ir-jp^44u, cp. fiv-rai r«ttint. Often printed rU-

vaiML (uee. often have rtfra^u). Poetic. (III.)
vobt think, perceive, regular in Att. Mid. *aa9|wt uau. in comp., fuL Sta tai/r*-

ftu (rare) and Sia-YOi)>^rot'Ai (813). Ion. contracts «) to u in (rwro, W*wa,

t«|L(t» (telteii« : vofiiA (5S9 e), M|iw«, iii«4|uim, Mi^iurpAi, f»o|ilrOqv, iiiuil^

rOfiOH voiwrrJot. 612. (III.)
{otra (fa>^) scrEifcA; {a*«, ICnvo, (fafi/uu late Att., f{a«fHH Hippocr. (III.)
£<■ (f(-for{«r-) scrape.- I{w|iai (489 d). Epic are ffcira and y^ra, fcrrit.
Enpal*> (fTjpa*-) dm : £iipaF«, if^pBrn, 4f,paa-|»i (489 h), t^fAA^v. Ion. «f

pT|va, late j{i}p<>wa>' (I^'.)
(«u polith: l^a., Jt^irfiiv (489 c), ffuir/uii Ariatfltle. fiwrii Hdt.

itourapjo travel : regular, but obBerve Motrn- jpqica for uSoiripwta. See 463.
it>«oU<t mojfce a tmy ; regular, but i>SoTiraiiittiwot la Xen. for wSorMq^t^Mt. 45S.
Mt>- am angrg : in Hom. aor. ciiHr(ir)d;iiii>, perf. Mi^Jva-riu as preii. (489 d) .
Sim (6S-, i^-) tmell : otV^ Ali|a-a. Hippocr. df^irw and £{wa, B[dc plnp.

MiiSd aa tmperf., Aeollc 6<iiu. (III.)
0(701 open : atiu, yfa, oixBttt Find. Poetic, as Is also ttytviu. In proM &v-«(fa

and Av-olyi^iu, 9.0. The older form la itlym, found in Hon). Mir. Anii

(UBS. Hiia). Horn, baa also lityrd/iiir (iiti-,- 7).
otSa (ofS-) : aee IS- and 794.

otS^ ncp.ll : ipBTiira, <^&i)K(l Bf-form elSira poetic.

oitertpu {olrrip-, 620. Ill) pity : f m-ipo. olmlpw is a late spelling. (III.)
otjuitii lament : ot|i^EatiAi (806), f |u{a, ol/iuyiuu (?) Eur., tfivix^'' poetic. £13.

('"■)
oItoxo^ and -xocAd Hom. pour tcine ; Imperf. aiwaxiti, yrsxici (^mx^ii. A 3, ia

incorrect for ifoic-), oImxo^"^ olpnxa^at. Epio and Lyric, and In X«i.
oIspAi (a'-, ah-) think : 1 peie. in prose usa. d|Mt : imperf. ■jl|M|i' (rarely y^inp).

ot^miiai, V^*f|*> otirrfet. Epic 6iu, ttu, and otv, iUiiai (GOO. 2. D.), divdn'.

litirAir (489 e). ot|iai. la probably a perfect (634).
^tfw: Mhall bear. Bee ^a.
•IxaiMt (tlx; olx'', olxo-, 4S0) am gone as pert. (1886) ; otx^avftM, itx—*

poetic and Ton. (aome vaa. vx"™)) ■'"P-v'xi'o (?) S2S2. oTxtHnt la protably

due to Att, redupl. Ion. -ofxqf»< 1b doubtful.
bcOXa (<1«X-) run ashore : HiuA^ Cp. jcAXu. (III.) '

iXwt-Ant (6\ure') ilip, alao Gi-aXur4a(nt ! 2 aor. £Xcff fcr Ioq., poetic ; ii-<*Xlr#^a

and (iXfu^ica Hippocr. (4Xur0f-). (IV.)
<\-Xu/u deetroy, ruin, low, for dX-rii-;u (i\-, 6\i-, dXo-) also -aXXAh, in proae

uau. comp. w. drA, also w. B.d or i^ : -tAA (639 b), -M-n, -oXAan Acf

™in«i, 2 parf. -4Xa\a am ra/nerf. Fut. 6\ta(_«)u Eptfe, AX^w rare in pom-

edy, £Ue> Hdt. Mid. fXXv|iAt perith : -oXa{l|la^ 2 aor. -aXdfi^i-, part. ^XifKm

rulnnm (oftX- Epic). By-form *^*Kw Epic, poetic. (IV.)
M-oX«t> (i\e\uy-) thovt, rare In prose: oXeXfi[e|iai (B06), aUXtifa. (IIL)
tta^po|iai (6>j></ivp-'j bexeail: oXo^vpofipAi, «Xo4Cp&]i^i', Afco4*p*i» mode fa-

Jam«>U Thuc. 8. 76. (111.)

^tO^} APPENDIX; LIST OF VERBS 709

V'>^|u ('/^i i/'^t 480) and iftrim rwear : ofi«fi|uu (806) for iiiovoiuu, £|iova,

ifiApAKo, i(^|u)p4u and o^pmriuu (489 g), ■|idh|i' and u^irtiyi, i|uw9f|vo-

liai, &w-<l>OT«t. (IV.)
ifiipy-ruiu (iiiopy-') wipe, iisu. comp. w. if In poeUy ; -t/iipiu, H/upia. l{-o|idpYvw-

|Mt: -oiidpteiMi, -niutpEV^*! -^PX*T'- (^^O
iir(->i)-|u (dnr-, im- ; for Ji4ni-»u, but the redupl. has no regard for the a) bette-
fit I hrtfrm, S/rtfrB^, 2 aor- mid. Mt^iuiv reetived ben^ (opt. 6vaC|ii|*) , <iH|h|i

A> irHTW. 2 aor. mid- iinper. Onrro Horn., w. part, jntfuraf Horn. ; 1 aor. mU

5>o-f4at (4>o-, 725) ituull: pres. and iniperl. like tlioiMi, opt. 8»tr« Hoin. ; drdff-
ro^uu, d>«ff{ff)dAi|i', aor. pU8. snb}. tiT-ererSit Hdt (4S9 e), 6r»T6t Find.
innrrit Horn. Ai-ora P 26 maj be imperf. of a by-form Syaiiai.

bfirm iHvr-) tharptn, in proae vap-«{fet» provokt: '0{«vA, Jt(Bva, -AEii|i|iu,

-{ivenv. (III.)

ir- in fat. fi)iopA(, perf. mid. imioi, aor. paas. A^ttir, wtf^-owrtof. See ipim.

irvlu (&WV-) take to wife (later drdu) : iriau Aristoph. Epic, poetic. (IIL)

ipii {ip»- ioT fopa-) ue: imperf. Upw (484), fut. f ^rofLu BOO (f^i 2 8.), 2 aor.

(IBoi- {IS- tat fi!-), 1 perf. UpKica (443) and WpKica (plup. iiipini), MpS|iw

and i|i|ia>, A^>i|v, i^^'^t^"'? ipSr6i, ■wtf^^€rwT^ot. Aeoiic ^^u, Epic ip^

(043), New lou. Ap^w. Imperf. ipur HdL, fat. fr-i^aucu in Horn. = thaU

look on, iTi-6^i>/iai thail ckooie, aor. mid. fw-wfiiii}r sou Find., ^t-v^d^ir>

cAoM Ftato, 2 perf. frwra poetic, Ion, See fl- and ji--. (VI.)

ipryalnu (Vyor-) (»>■ an^V .- Apydn (644 a) mode angry. Tragic 528 h. (III.)

op7(tw ertraffe : l(-op7>A, Apiytrft, Afr/tv^ax, Apyirhiv, ifriut44irarian, tfr/>ai4»t.

612, 816. (III.)
dp^tt reach Epic, poetJc, ipty-niu Epic (only part iprynii) : ipiiui, Ap4*
rare in proae. hpt^yMx ftretch mj/uif, cUiire: ip^fwi rare in prose, ap^A-
|H|r bat una. ■pfx^' ^ mid., iftin-bt Horn. Perf. ipeyiuu Hippocr., dpii-
prV/iBt (3 pi. 6pupix"<" fl 834, plup. ipapixnTo A 26). By-form dpiYpdo^iai :

t^rviu (^} ra((«, rou(« .' tptit (&3fl), Jf>7a, 2 aor. trans, and Intrans. Sfitpor Epic
(446 D.), 2 perf. Ipapa as mid. Adve roiueif niys«I/, ant rotued. Mid. (^nviai
rife, nuh: fut. dp»Dfuu Horn., 2 aor. iipdiiiit (Epic are ^pro, Imper. ip<n,6pca
(&4aD.)and(pffeu,inf.flpSoi, part. (ip/i#«i), perf. iptipt^iu Horn, Foetic. (IV,)

optTTw (ipux-) 'i'ff' often comp. w. Jtd, itaTi : -a|rf£M, Apvto, -apApuxa, ipApwyitu
(ApvYpot?), Hpix'n'i -vpux^v^HA^ ^ ^■''' P"^- -opuX'^"!'^ ArisUipli.,
opwNTdt. Mid. aor. lipufdiiiiv cau««(f to dig Hdt. (III.)

oa-^pa(*a|iai {iaippa,*-, iv^pt-) »mell : io-^p^npoi, 2 aor. mr^pi6^^v, uff^pdiAfr

late Com. and Hippocr. HdL bu <:iir«p<i*i)r>'. 530. (III. IV.)
&TOTt^ lament: drtrilaivu (BOO), lirirvia. 613. (III.)
oipda make mater: lotpavv, a4p1)av|iu (BOO), i*-w<lpi|a^ li>.«ofipT|in. New Ion.

haa 0^ for Att. ioufi- (u oipi8i]r Hippocr.).
o^Aia wonnd: oirdiru, aCTa-ra, oBrairiiai. Eplc and Tragic. 612. (III.)
o^dn uwund : oKntra, 2 aor. (pi-form) 3 a. oSta 551 D., SS4, 688 (inf. t^rd/um

and oiriiut), 2 aor, mid. oArd/icHt u pass., dr-ofrarM. Epic and Tragic.
h^Mm (d^X-, i)^i\(-) ow« .- i^uX^v^ m4<^^(^ ^ i^r- J14*^<>* '1 wiahea, loouM

lAot/ <*^(Xi|Ka, aor. pate. part. ^■ilXl|6■(l. Horn. usu. has 6^M.u, tbe

Aeolicform. (III.)

710 APPENDIX: LIST OF VEEB8 [i^AX.

4^Xu (^X-619&) inenate: aor. opt. it/tiXXtu Horn. Poetic, malnl; Epic.

(III.)
i^-mt-dva (i^\-, 6^\t-, d^X-uTE-, 630): otoe, am ^rui'tPi 'nor a pcnafff:

i^^t^H, A^i)r(L (rafe and auspected), 2 luir. i^'^ov, £^i|iiel, A^i)|»i-

For 2 nor. d^Xttt, 6^\iit his. often have S^\«v and JI^Xuv, as if from S^Xu,

a late present. (IV. V.)

voItM (toiS-, miY-) iport ; Iraura, -K^inum, -riirairiiat, nirrfat. Att fat

prob. walreiMi (S<MI)' viufoii^uii in Xph. S. 9. 'i Is used bj a Syracuatkti.
««[■ (tbi-. rait-) ttrike : -raltra and vaM^n A ristoph., Ivoivo, t«ip »<«««« ;

for ^afir0i|T Aeech. (489 e), Att. usu. has hrXl^Y'l't as «i«Xi|Y|>u for viTKut.
waXsla mrtstU: hrdXaiffw, JraXalirffqr Eur. (489 e), raXafirw Kpic. Jiw-rdXw-

rrot AMCh.
TdXXu (raX-) thakt, hrandtsh : tuifka, rfraknai. Hom. has '2 aor. rrdui'l.

d^-reraXir and 2 aor. mid. (fJTaXTo. Epic and i>oetic. (III.)
TdD/uu (ra-) acquire, beaime mfialtr = ktAbiioi ; pres. not used : rdf a/u>i, ^ri-

vd^i^i'i rira/iai. Doric verb, used In poetry and In Xen. Distinj^liBh wttf-

fnu, irdffi^tfr from rarAifiaf efU,
vnpK-vdiUa trangj/ri'M tAe low augmenta vop-ivaii- rather than rofi-V'l'- tbotu^b

the latter has support (T. ^. QT. 5), perf. «pa-vi*i)n|ica. See 454.
«<if-«irb fnsuff (a« a drti)iit«n tnon) : Irap-vvaii*, twaip-ifvurii, wtwup <fFy.

tnp-¥>^* (best us. ra;ii^r40i)v D. 22. 6.^). See iM.
•dirx* SJtfei- (»■((«-, worff-, raS-) for ¥(*)[;fl-ff*u (.16 b, 626 d) : «Cir*|UU (M(.^

for rntf-o-ofuu, 2 aor, hrafov, 2 perf. «^>ovta (Horn. rtrofBi or r^n^Af 673,

706 and fern, part Texaftita) ; Doric tAtoo-x". (V. VI.)
vBTdww ttrike : pres. and Imperf. Epic (for which Att tiiu nvr* and vaUS

wardfas Mk-rofa, tt-rnriTKynai Hom. (Att. «4vXifv|iaii)i 'rardx^ff lau

(Att. lirX^v). (III.)
TST^ftot (nr-, Tar<-) eat. (asM .' rirtiiai (7) Aescli., /rSr(«')d(tqi' Horn., plup.

TtTta/iV Horn., a-rrmrrot Mora. Mainly Epic, also New Ion.
w&TTM ("T-, 516 a) tprlnktr : usu. In coinp. w. it, iwl, jrard : v&o-ta, 'ttww.

-fw&ofi]*, voo-rfat. Iloiii. hasonly pres. and imperf. Often in comedy. (HI.)
Tata stop, cauae to tease : wajjcm, (rnvra, Wnnni, WravfjAi, twufitip, «««S^-

av|iai, fut. perf. -rrmimfai (&B1), tiravs~rot, 'nvrrfaf. Mid. ■■<»(i«i

eeaiK : traimfuu, Jiravirdi|»|i>. In Hdt. hxs. have iwitifti* and /radrOi)*.
viIBa (ircif', roifl-, ti0-] ;)er«Maif»' .- nCo-a, hmvo, wivauta, 2 perf. ntwtitu tTHM.

w^muriuu, hnlirttiv, «<urM|crt>)iai, vurrdt, murHot. Mk). n(Bo|iai htH'Ti.

obey : ■nlra^.a/L. 2 aor. Cri^av and irfSiiair poetic ; rcdupl. 2 anr. rtwt^t'

Epic, 448 I>. {-mlBai, -ovu); 2 plup. 1 pi. ^^ir<«^r (6T3) for immOtjuf.

2 perL imiier. rirti^Bi Aesch. Eum. 5I>0 (r^urSi ?). From ritfc- c<>om

Hom. Tifliiffu sAuH ohf y, rrri^riii shall pmufide, iri9i|irai tnatiKg.
wnv&a (rtita-, Tcini-) hnngrt (for contraction In pres. see 394, 041) : ■wi^w. i

lw«CM|<ra, inTa(n)Ka. Inf. pres. rtiriiitrtu Horn.
wtlpn (Ttp-. rap-) pifrce, Epic in pres, : Iwtipa, rtra^iuu, 2 aor. pais. dF-<rd«q*

Hdt, Ion. and poetic. (Ill)
TtKT'i-u (Ttt-, TtKT-t-, 486) comh, »Aear = Epic pre*. rtUtt: lrt(a TTteoir, i

iirtfdp^iir Horn., irixSTi' Arlitoph. For comb Att. usu. baa Kt«*lli% {■'*■:

for thear M(p« i

«I^Xi,ru] APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS 711

rtXilu («Aat near) bring near, approach : rtMaai and Att. rtXH (588), ^rAo^a
(Epic aUo twi^iKraa, and mid. twt\tt«iia)i') , rHr\tiiMu Epic, ArtW^r Epic
{iwXASrir in tragedy) , 3 »or. mid. /rXiJ^^f appToaekeA Epic (888) , t. a. v\agTit.
Poetic and Ion. Kindred are nXdu (rc\a-, t\ii-) poetic, TiXdtfu and rUlSw
dramatic, rlXnifiai and TiXfdu Epic. Proee'rXi|a-i&t*(cP-*Xi)0'Ior). G12. (III.)

rAw and t^Xom' ('(X-, rX-) am (orig. turn, move m^ietf ) : frtKtr and ^iXi/i^f,
2 aor. (*X*, ItXh-o, -rXi^awt. Poetic.

Wiiwa (";"'-, ro^T-) lend .' •Kif.ifm, Iniiifa, 2 perf. «ira|i^ v^mLu, Jr^iL^tipr,
«|i^(yprofuu, 'nfMTTAt, «<|i'rTfot.

wtvalv* (rFTs*-) moite «o/C or ript: frfirava (514 a), i«wr&vtf|v, **ni4t^ra|Lai;
perf. inf. wtwi>«ai Aristotle. (III.)

moptiw or imapcii' sAoui ; see wait-.

riit/Ktrat It i» fated : aee rap-.

■wtpalvmirtpat-, Cp. rtpat end) ncrnmpliih : -npavA. hr^pSvo, ■wtripavfai (469h),
htpAvArlv, i-vipavrat, Sw^np&vrJot. (III. )

v^pSofiu (ircpd-, »p3-, Tsfij') =^ Lat. pfdo : 4»o «apS<jjo|iai, 2 aor. A«^4>«p8«i',
2 perf. TJiropSa.

ripdit (vtpB-, rpaB-) tack, destroy : ripau, (rtpaa, 2 aor. IrpaSar, and trpati/irir
(as paas.) . Int. ripBai for riptf-irSai (S88). tipaB/nai is pSBB. Ill Hom. Po«tic
for proae «apNa.

T^p-rqtu tell, mid. ripra/iat : fut. npdu, aor. /■-epd>(a)a, perf. mid. part, rtripti-
/iJroi. Poetic, mainly Epic, for wAi» or &ireS(So|UU. AUn to rtpiu (cp.
ripir) go over, crois (wtpira, etc.) ; Op. irirpiata. (IV.)

wiraiiaiflg : se« wiroyax.

wtt^-r-i^fx (lera-, ira-, 721)) and wtravvi* (rare) erpanrf, In proM umi. comp. w.
iri. : -vtrA (5.S9), -»»*Tao-a, -v^vro^oi. Fut. iK-rtriau Eur., petl. mid. xnrf-
rotffHu poetic (489 g), aor. pass, rtrd^ffiif Horn, (480 e). B;-forma: poetic
ulrntiu and vvrriu (only prea. and iniperf.). (IV.)

ir<ro|Lat (tit-, itre-, tt-> jIj, in prose usu. comp. w. drd, <J ; •TWja^liai
(Aristopli. also nr^ira^i), 2 aor. -<vTdfH|v. Kindred Ih poetio r/ro^ioi ;
2 aor. (Trqi' (poetic) and Ivrdjiipr, inflected like /r/iui^ir' {trriiiiir la often
changed to twripifv), 087, Poetic forms are rariaiuu and worfc/ioi (T«r4rif-
/uu, tvorfiBiff^ TOTifTbt ) ; rtitrioiw^ is Epic. XTrapiii is late.

■wtrrm ittt-, Ttw; 613 a) cook : tiifit, trtiK 'V^s^tt^cu, lirtf»T)v> mrrii. (III.)

T(Mvut (rcvtf-, rv9-} learn, poetic for *vwB&rofUK.

■wi^rortlew: see ^>^.

•rVpr-i>«|u (riry-i '"T-) fi^^ make faU : ''^K*. *wn{«, 2 perf. «4wiffa <in> Jlxtd,
2 aor. pass. 4«&-p)y intrane., 2 fut. pass. wairV^I^<^ ^P'*' ^ '^r- ^ & '■>^-
4r7iKTa ituck (athematic, TSO D.), tr-<i(ipiiw poetic and Ion., trix^f 'id
wtiftit poetic, ritfriu rare (Ildt., Xen.). rify^t (Plato, Fh. 118 a} pres.
opt. tor TijTfW-i-To (some uss. ttt'^"') l op. 819. (IV.)

Vijliiu leap, often comp. W, itd, rli, li, irl: -«i|64|tO|UU (806), -tir^jfjo, -xtx^ijita.

wloliw (rinv) /(Uten : rlarS), Mara, itara-mrfaoiMt (489 b). Mostly poetic
and Ion. (IV)

a-f X-Fwu, rfX-rofut, riX-rdu, opprodcA .■ see xt\A{ii.

w(-|ir*I^t|-tu (rXi|-, rXa*, 741 ; w. fi inserted) fill. In piose comp. w. ir (T27) ;
J|i^X.^>, l*-JvXi)(ra, Vir^>^lM> 4|i^X<|a-|uu (489 o), ir.4*X4««i)*, l|>-
vXi|ii*'ii">|Mu, tf^Xifrriot. 2 aor. mid. atbematio iw\^iiaiw (poetic) :

712 APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS [«V*PV>

tX^TB knd «\9)Ta Epic, ir-twiLTf'* AriMopb., opt. ipr^XimT AriMoph^ imper.
lltrXiif Aristoph. By-IortOR: vi^rXiro^uu Horn., tXi^Ah am fiiB poetic
(2 pert. rtwKTiSa.) except Id v\^*ra AyopA, nXi^Hm abound, i-X^Wn^iii
AeHcb., vXi|pd<ii
«(-ti>-*pi|-|u (a-fii^, ryn-, w. M insetted) Eiurn. In prose nso. comp. w. ^* (cp
T2T) : 'FFrfpa, -Jvpno-o, -Wrpi||i«, -«Tp<^««i|v (489 e). Hdt. hu ^^i-rten"*^
and iii-rtriaa/uii (as pass.) Or <;i-««/iijiro«ia< (6. 9) . wir/r^iuu Hdt., AriMotk).
Bj-focm i/irrfi^Bu Horn,

Tini-ffiHJ (twi'-) maA< wlte : irlnciia. Poetic. (V.)

vfiw (n-i TD-, ritf-) drinA oft«n comp. «. /{ or Kari : fut.

Hom., 641) and (rarely) noSfuu, 2 aor. Inov 648 a (imper. *»i, 687), 1
'■4w«fiai, -*TtfT]v, -wtiSficra^ai, vardt, nrfat, nrrit poetic. Aec4ie r^w.
529. (IV. VI.)

TMTl-ffw (i!-) i/ine to drink: tiru, Irlira. Poetic and New Ion. Cp. «<*■.
81B. (V.)

wi-^pA-CKoi (_rpa-) tell, pres. rare =z Att. wiAim, A««S(Sa)iu: ■Jrplt*. ■fjf^a*.
l«p^v, fut. perf. vtvfiliiroiiab, «|iBT4t, vHof. In AU. nA^^ A— 8Jr«p«>.
dmS^i)* are used for fut. and aor. (V.)

•f-vra (t(t-, TT-, 36, iru-} /a« for n-r^t^T-a : Mro«|iu (640 c, 806), 8 kor.
l«wov (540 c), vimiKa. Fut. nvAi/uu Ion., 2 aor. frcrof Doric and Aeolk,
3 pert. part, rtmii Soph., rtrrjiiit and rirrfiii Hom.

rlT-fKH and riT-tia Mpread ovt : poetic for «*T&inrB|Li. (IV.)

Tlr-Kiifall: poetic for »*»ti» (IV.)

rXifiii (rXarr-, 610) C(itM« lo tntnder : IrXaTfo. Mid. i-Xi^bfiu WDuter : rU7{*-
fui, ^X^Tx^' tmiiul«rcd, rXa-rirji. Poetic (HI.)

TXitfu : diamatic for ri Xd^tii, i-XTfriAt*.

liKkfrm (rXar-, 616 a) mould, form : hrXoo^ «4vXno-|uu, Mt4«4i|*, vXavWc.
Fut.«l»-»X<iffi.iIon. (III.)

«Xte> ('XtK', rXoi-, rXai-) w«aw, brufd; t*X^ «4vXrniu, l«Xix*^ nit.
2aor. pBM,.«wXi«i|»(*i', <ri)»), 2 pert. (»i-i*»-Xox"Hippocr., probably AtL, and
iv^^4r\Mxa HippocT., fut. paaa. iit'rXixB^iyitai Aeach., rXcrrit Aesoh.

vXi«(TX(i>-, r\tf-, tXu-, 608, 607} Kid (on the contractioD see 897): vXii-
av|wi or TX<wn>«|uu (640, 806), hrXnw«, -rfoXcwa, iWwXnriiu (489 d).
vXtvrrfat. ir\t6vt7ir Is late. Bpic is also rXdM, Ion. and poetic rXiiw:
rXiiiro^uu, IrXwra, 2 aor. frXwr (Epic, 086), rtrXmn, rXjtrh. Atk by^ono
»X^{ta.

vXiyrra (rXify-, rXa^-) ttrike, In prose often comp. w. i(, trl, tari : -«X4(« |
-teXi|£a, S pert. T^XijTa, -^^XiiYiiat, 2 aor. pass. hrXt^v, but in nHop.
aliraya ^cirXdyi]* (_i(, nard), 2 fut pass. irXitv1tro|tai and fa-rXoY^'^l**'' '"*' I
perf. vavX^gopAi, KaTar^Xi|KT^. 2 aor. redupl. {i)rtTXin*' Hom., mid. n-
TX4Y<ro Horn., irtk-ix^r poetic And rare, -ctX^t^p Horn. Thuc. 4. 135 hw
JK-rXih'rtKrAii (irX47ruM<)' In pics., Imperf., tut., and aoT. Mt. Att. nMi
rirra, vaCa for tbe Mimplt verb, but allows the eompouttd* jktX^ttm, ^-
*-XiirTB. In the perf. and pam. the >fnip(e verb la used. (IIL)

irXtfy« (rXvr-) viiuh: tXvvA, fvXDvti, w^Xv|Mu (401), JrXMfr lOD. (prob. ate
Alt), wXvrfef, ^Xurit Ion. Ful. mid. iK-wXin««pu aa paM. (808). (HI.)

rXiiu Mil : aee wUm. ,

wt*i(«-nv-, iHy:-, wn; 603, 607) tr<o(A<, Wow, ofteo conqi. W. d#d, <►, If, Art, #W:

^M APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS 713

■TwgBiptti (640) and -vNia«|iu (606), Itmmw, -mtwrnK*. Epic also mfw.

Pnm Ara-^nia taie breath : 2 aor. imper. d»i-rrve X 2S2. See rvS-.

Vi^T* («-«7-. «nT-) cftoi«, DBU. comp. W, iri : -i*t£n (147 c), -jrvifa, virvI'Ypu,

w*- to be vigoTout \a mind or In body : Epic forms H/i-rnrTo, iit-rrtBiir (v. 1.
-wrip&^w), niwmiMi am viIm, wtrrviUm lelie, plup. wirrvto. Often Kferred

-roNa d««lre, mUi; woe^nt or >oMiro|uu (800), tw6hfn or (rMwa (4B8b).

All other forma ore late.
uaitm labour, in early Greek Tor^o^u : regular, but rovAru and ^Amvs In hh. of

Hippocr. ; Doric tohIu.
rop- (and rpu-) give, allot : 2 aor. Irapar poetic, 2 aor, inf. rtwoptU (in some

KM. riwaptiw) Piad. to shoa, pert. paaa. Tiwparat it it fated, ii rtwpupiwt,

(artra) faU. Poetic.
wpirm (■■))d7-) do ; ■wfifyi, hpsta, 2 perf . -^^pSx* (prob. iate) have done,

wtrpKy* have fared (welt or tli) and also hace done, 'WrpSytuu, lTpl(](,^*>

tut. paas. 'TpSx^'i'^P'^' ^^'~ P^>^' "nvpAfotLak, itpOKWof. Fut. mid. vp^iuti

is rarely pan. (800). lun. rpfysca, wp^iu, etc. (III.)
■mfHirm (rpiir-) soothe: Irp^Cva, firpBv>«i)v. (III.)

rpiru an conKpic.w>ut : vpifu poetic, bnpersonal 'rpini, vp^k, Irp«i|N>
rpm- bug, only 2 aor. mid. lvpi^i|v (p. 1S8). Other tenses from »«4a|iAi.
wfimtaa: Irpim, v^iviuib (480 c), J«ptr9i)F.
T/Bfoffo^i (TpoiK', cp. Tfiolf (r(n) : pree. in timple only in ArchilochOB: fut.

Kora-rpaiifiiM Aristoph. (Ion. cBToxpirfto/ioi). (III.)
wTotmttwnble: vralo-a, hrr>M-a, hnumt, K^rRurrot.
VT^n|Lu (rrop-) tneete .' 2 aor. IvTapsr ; 1 aor. frrapa and 2 aor. pSM, /rripqr

Aristotle. (IV.)
'tHjo-o'ii (»Ti|e-, «TnK-) cower ; I«Ti){a, l«Ti|xa 1 3 aor. part, naTa-TTaiciir Aeeoli.

From rro- Horn, has 2 aoT. dual Kara-wT^ti' (688) and 3 pert part, rnr^iti.

Ion. and poetic also micaa (vtuk-). (HI.)
wrintm (tti»-) pound: IrTiaa Hdl., -npi-twrvriuu Aristoph,, rtpi-tTTlaffiit laW

Att (189 c). Not found in clusic prose. (Ill)

«Ti«-o-H (rTVx-) /old USD. comp. in prose w. iti, rtpl ; -irriim, -^mfa,
•imrfitu, -*rrixBi|v, 2 aor. pass, -nr^qr HippoCT., rruKrit Ion. (HI.)

■ ttm (td-, rTi>-) «pft: KOr-Jsrwa, Kard-mirToi. Hippocr. has rriiircii, ^Ti><rftfr.

«u-v-4-Aw|ia* (riu0-, rvfi-) {«arn, in^lre : viiwviiai (for vtvSroiuu}, TtvmBiuu
A. Prom. 900, 2 aor. ln9d|iT|v, T^nriiu, mvaTfai, dnt-irwrrM Horn. Horn,
has 2 aor. opt. rednpl. rtrfAiira. n£0o/iai la poetic (IV.)

^H* (^o-, ^oF-, 628 h, perhaps for ^aS-Ku) tprinkle : ^arU, fppi'a, tpparnai,

(489 h), ippite^i: Apparently from fiaS- come Epic aor. tpavan. Epic perf.

ippASnTtu and p)up. 4ppiS»To. Perf. Ippamu Aeech. Ion., poetic (III. IV.)
^oiw strtt« .- ^ofira), tppaiaa, ippalcBttit (480 e). FuL mid. as pass. if-ppalrtfSiu

a 866. Poetic, mainly Epic
^4i^T«(Aa*.) i{«cA ; 4«o-ppdiK IppaiK Ippa|i». 2 aor- pass. *wi+V> ^«*. {"■)
^rrw (^17-) (Aroio doun (late pres. for dpdrra) : fvp-^dfa, IppaEo. (III.)
^fM ifpntft 611) do .- ^/{w, fptfa (less often tpptfa), aor. p«M. put. fi*x^l'>

A-fturot. Poetic Cp. ff>«w. (DI.)

714 APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS Ittm

^Im (^nr-, fitf-, ^v, and >iw-) Jhw (on the eontrMtion In Att. aM 807) : |h><tr»pu
BOe (2 fuL pMS. SB act. 1 ^nfuu rare in Att.), tfifit[v (2 aor. ; pa«. aa acL ;
tfpmm Tare In Att.), 4pp^«a, ^tn-ii and ^(iwtAh poetlo. ^nwoifiu Ariatotle.

^ st«m of ■(pqto, itpii^ai, 4pp<|h|*, ^i]Miav|iai, ttp^ooiuu. See apu.

^4(V-*V|U (^ry-i for fPTT-, ^<0'-< ^07-) Areoifc, in prose moatl; in oomp. v. iri, M -.
-fi^i/t^ lpp<lE*> si PC'^' -'pP'YA <f* broiten, 2 aor. paaa. tppiyn*' ^ 'i^^ P*^
•paY^o^lMil -ippirt/iai and -cfiji^x^*' Ion., ^iixrit Horn. (IV.)

^lyiit {fiiy-, ^iT<-, 466) «Atidd«r .' ^y^u, ipftyiifa and ^Irir'Bi ^ P^- liwiv **
prea. CliieSjr poetic.

^fia shlMT. On the contraction in the pros, see 398 : ^yiiw, Ipfityutt,

itwrm (^ir-, ^ir-) and ^i*-'!^^ (4S6 d) throa: ^a, Ippi^ia, 2 perf. ^v^^o.

Soph. (II.)
^o^*HPHp. ^Hr-^d^^^^CSOe), (pf.6^i|«L.
^lofuu (Epic also jtinitai, rare In Att.) for fpuoiiai, defend: fitroimt, ippCrdini',

and pturdiitir O S9,^uTJi. Athematlo forms are lp(p)oTa, 8 pi. ^ro, fiBremu

See ff>ij/uu. Chiefly poetic.
^uwiu »oH ; Kplo perf. part, ^pinru^w. (442 b. D.). Cp. ^wdw am dirty.
fnir-miu (^u-) ilrsnpIAen : iw-jppiva, Ippiiai (imper. \fpmn farnoell, pait.

lpfw|Uvot strong), lppAatt[9 (48S e), tppwroi. (IV.)

veiru (ffo*-) /atsn tipow : rnijw. PoetJc, prob. also iu prose. (III.)

aalpw (a-rip-, vap~) twieep : 2 perf. v^nipa^rfn.' liritpa Soph. (III.)

nXwEta (»Xti77-) iound the trumpet: tviXwv/ifi (also k-&X*ifa ?). (111)

ffoiu (cp. ffa/rot ((t/e) *ci«« : ffaiiffu, iiriura, iaaiUti'- ^pic and poetic (but not

Att.). Epic pres. subj. o-ifit, r6ji, aSuai, which editors change to royt (a^v>.

ffoeti, 7>V>i), rnfi ('^Vi a'ao't 'oif), aa2ri (aittri, ffiwri). Forir^u pres. imp^r.

and 3 s. imperf. editors osa. read rdau (s gaa-t\ but some derive tbe form

from Aeotic ria/u. Cp. v^'ta.
«^TT* (ira7-) pa&t, load : Irafa, vJra'fiiM. (III.)
fdw >ifl.' fvifo-a, aiatiiriiai. New Ion. Here belong perf. fmuuu and StAiria

Att. for Sia-ffo-iw.
rpfv-*i|u (ir|}*- for ir^r-, 628 f. n. 1) «xt(it|ru((A, usu. oomp. w. drl or nrl :

rPW-a, lo-pwtt, Irpiimi Intrans. have gone out, 4irPfa^* (489 c), 2 aor. paaa.

l«'^)|i'intranB.uenIoiit (416, 756b), o-p^|iai,lif^»uuAriBtotle, 819. (IV.)
«4pa revere, uaa. ripopoi : aor. pass, as act. M^***)*' o'n'TJi Aeach.
v<(a ilMke : nirtt, Inuro, o^nuia, riinur)uu (480 c), lntfffti|v, ovivt^
9t6tt (rrfu-, I7U-) ur{Ki drill; on, inid. rush : taatva (643 a. D.) and i-nia, (#wiiai

as pres. iKtalen, ta{ii)i9iir ruthed, "i aor. mid. tr(a)iiaiw rutltfd ((r#M.

IrruTo or r^e, riium, 688), ^I-<r(rvToi Aesch. Mostly poetic, eep. tragic.

Here IwlongB ir-tairii (or iir-iirirova) he ii gone in Xen. Probably from »•*»-

pat (riot, o-oDi motion), or from aioiioi, come dramatic raCfioi (Doric #A»ub\

rg0r9« (Ind, and imper, ), voCrrat, ?«D, aaivBu. For rtCrot (S. Tracb. M5),

often regarded as from a form atSimi, ireCrai may be read,
nifiafw (riffta*-, cp. c^iia tiffn) ihow : ai||ui*A, Ir4|n|va (iviiiiirK Dot good Att

tbongh in MBS. of Xen.), nHjiuwiwi (4St) h), 4^1|^Avtl|v, '

i^liatrot Horn., frt-s-^^rrfci Aristotle. (III.)
r4|«a (vipr-, rar-) MUM to rol ; 2 perf. rinpra am rotUn, 3 aor. ]

vmAt*] Ai'KENUIX: LIST Of VERBS 715

roOed as Intrans., 2 fut. pass. tmTarvart{rtfM,i. a-fypu Amcb., aiainifiat Aris-
totle, airrtbt Aristotle. SIO.

rlfiM am tUeiit: vIt^^w^lcw (806), irfYI"^ ■rtirfY'l'"^ l^>lrtlp||la^ ialytfirir,
rlytfiiiropai. fut. perf. vta-lY^ro^ai, alyipiot poetic

giraiuu (o'tr-) i^ure, very rare in Att. prosa : rin^ofui (?) Hippocr., hltiiaiw
Udt. (UI.)

avtmim afa wUent: vurxifrofax (806), IrLAnpro, ninA«i)ica, 4ru*«4^*, Vtwvi)-

v¥iiM-rm (rm^) dfff, often comp. w. mrd: a-H&itias -favaitia, 2 perf. -intm^ti,

bicaftfiAi, i! aor. pass. -wKd^*. (II.)
naUv-Ajii (ffireda-), rarely rKtSawiv, icotfer, often comp. v. (Iir6, 3ii, card ;

-o-KtSA (J>39 c), -«rKtfav«, 4o-Kffiaa-|iiai (4S9 c), 1o-kc6^>i|v, o-mSao-r^. Fat

tfjKiMffu poetic, By-Iorma: Kpic nSitrFV^ : tKiSaa-ta, iaSi^Srir; Diainlj poetlo

andlon. ffuM-inffuanda'WS-va^i; poetic andlon. xIB-n)^ and cM-rafui. (IV.)
i-cAXu (ffxcX-, (rcXi)-) dry up ; prea. late. Epic aor. Itin)\a (itiebX- ; as if from

a-irdXXu) made dry, 2 aor. intranH. ir-isuXiir (687) Ariatopb., (riXiiita am

dried up Ion. and Doric. (III.)
mitw-ra^Mi (frxn--) vfcw; incJ<f<i|uu, lirKii)rd)ii|v, ta-Kif^iaii (sometlniM pan.),

fut. perf. l0-K<i^ofiab, pasa. ricirrbs. For prcs. and imperf. (Epic, poetic, and

New Ion.) Att. gen. uses ctkovA, tncinvi', e-«Mro4|uu, i<rKovo£]i^v. Aor.

pass, iatiip^i Hippocr. (II.)
o-K^v-nt (o-iEiTir-) prt^, gen. comp. W. fr( in proae : -<rK4ii)n*, -ArKil^a, -irKi||i|UU,

-tru^^^v. By-form iricI/ii'Tu Find., Hippocr. (II.)
BKli-wifiu («n3-r^, ffciI-H-) rtfJ-n/iai gcoUer ,' mainly poetic for rmSAwOtu. (IV.)
nwiHs view : good Att. uses only prea. and imperf. act. and mid., other tenses

are supplied from 9irf*-ra|uu. ffioa^iru, etc., are post-claBBical.
(riAv-ra (»ur.) je«r.' ctkAi^imi (806), VrKmlfo., ivxA^r. (U.)
•fflidu (biiA) «mear (o-/io-, it/h^, 894, ft4 1 ) Ion., Comio : pres, vy-j/t, vf.%, ^^imi,

etc., lir)iTprii, Itiiifsiiaiy Hdt. By-form ff/i^x" chiefly Ion.: (ff/i^fa, 8i-

w/i^xftl' (?) Aristoph., Ki-ff/i^KToi Horn.
voCfuu hatUn : see vciiw.
o-rda {vwa- for (rrtw-) di^no, often w. did, dri, iid, nard: -o^rdw'B (488 a),

ttrmva., A» fa- »■><», Irg—^nu, w aiuliiv, 8w-<nraMj<rO|tBV, drrl-o'raa'Toi

Sopb., im-ewaaTliH HippocT.
«~«ftp* (irrtp-, ffTsp-) 1019 ; o^npA, Iv^anpo, lr«a|l|la^ 2 aor. pan. hr*Api|v,

e-raprit Soph. (EII.)
g ■«<><■■ pour fiTiafion, inrJvGe|iAt make a treaty: KaTa-tmCo-n (for rrtrS-^v

100), Imiva, lv«ur|uu.
o^mvS&tK am eager : a-vouS^m|Mu (806), 4r«o<tera, iv^rafEoKO, lo-woiEoa-iiu.

nrovSoiTTdt, ^rfot. 512. (III.)
ariiu (iiTai'} drop: frrafn, /rVtrraY^uu, /T-tfrdx^fi mucrAf. Ful. ffrdffw late,

wTofeu/iBi Theocr. Ion. and poetic, rare in prose. (III.)
rrtlpu (fTtifi-) trtad, usu. only pres. and imperf. : tar-^^rtal'a, irrtiTrit. Poetic.

From frifit-, or from a by-form mfiiv, comes ivrlffjiiiat Soph.
rrtlx" (irrt<x-i ''^'X') ffa : ir«pi-feT«ifo, 2 aor. Imx"- Foetic, Ion.
o-rAXa (aTt\-, tfraX-) tettd, in prose often comp, w, Ji4 or trl : *riXa poetic,

(rrtJla, -^mXica, IrroXfuu., 2 aor. pass. Jo-rdXi]*, -vroX'l^luu. (III.)
a-Ta*i[H (irTe«i7-) groan, often comp, w. d)rf! -ffriirdju poetic, irrivafa, ffrtm-

716 APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS [v^Vt-

rrit kod -rfat poetic. Bj'fonus : Epio and poetic i-Terd^u, Kpic mtuxIS^i

poetio rrtMixfia, mainly Epic and poetic arfru.
rr^M (ertpy; tropy-) lOM ; T^pff, Intf^ 2 parf. irropya Hdt., »T«p«Tfc«|

ffrtprrit Soph.
STtpiu (uau. &ira-raplK in prose) deprive : rrtpifvu, irrlftip^, -wHpi|Ka, ki4pi|-

|iai, lgTipH6n». Aor. iariptaa F.p[c, 2 aor. pass, irTlpJir poetic. Pns. mid.

&'nMmp<>()|Mu sometimes^ am deprived of; mpt^voftu may be fut. mid. or

pua. (809). Connected forma : rnptvim deprfM {laje in preB. eicapt in mid.)

and «7<po)tu Aoee been deprived of, am viithout w. perf. force, 528, 1887.
vTtv- In STiOroi, a-Tfuirai, ffTtDro (y)l»Tn, pledge one'* Ml/, IAr«(U«n. Po«tic,

mainly Epic.
»Ttt« ("-.7-) prici ,- otIJh, IvTtYfw. I^Tifa Hdt., arxKrit Sopb. (III.)
v-rtfft-riip* (orop-, irnpc-) spread oM, fn prose often w. Kard, a-opd, v4f, Wi

(in prose usu, rrpdnCiii) : vapa-<rTopJl Aristoph., IrrApfro, •utr-evrtpirfv'

Hippocr. (489 e). Fut. uTofiiru in late poetry (irropmriJ Theocr.). (IV.)
rrpt^ (irptip-, trrpo^-, B-rpa*-) (urn, often in comp. )Q pro»e w, dxl, <l»*,

Aid, etc. : -iTTpt^m, Irrpi^a^ ]o~rpaft)uu, io^^fc|v (in prose only rrpafM,

rrpt^to), nan. 2 aor. pass, as Intrans. trrpi^v, ttvorrrpa^tiropaL, rrpt-

'rrif. Prose bns ica-r-iirTpii|rd4»|v. 2 perf. Af-irTpo^n tnaa. is doubtfol

(Comic), aor. pass. ^r/id^Aiv Doric, Ion.
9-rpiv-Mf.i (rrpu-) »pread out : vm-mpirit, Urpuva. Tragic, Hdt., b-iyiin.

sTparit poeUc. Cp. ffTdp*Qp. (IV.)
fTuyiu (aruy-, ariryt-, 485) hale : itrriyv^ {Irrviu Horn, made hat^fUi), 2 W)T.

KaT-ivTvyor Epio (546 D,), dw-reriyTita Kdt, , iartrr^f, fut. mid. arvr^'oiiai

as pass. (808), ffru7ir*i- Inn. and poetic.
ffTu*«X(fu (mipeXiy-) dash : irrv/^Xtfa. Mostly Epic and Hippocr. (III.)

vVplrru (o6pi77-) P'P^, whixtlK : lo^pita. By-form rvpl0i. (IIL)

v^pa (iriip-) dram, in Comp. in prose esp. w. dri, Sid, 4w( : -failp(>> -«4»in«»,

■ir^<rtip^( and -irvpT^Dt Aristotle. (III.)
ff4^XXii (tripaK-) trip up, deceive; r^oXA, Io^Xa, Ir^AXpAt, 2 aor. pais.

r^TTM (ir^T-) s2av. often in comp. w. drj, lard i v^d^ia, lff4>{^ It^kyjmu,
2 aor. pass. -to-^Yi]*, -tr+a^^ffepAi, iripdx^' 'on., poetic, ff^rrii poetic.
By-form ir^dfte (so always in Tnig.). 616. (III.)

^dl* c« open, let go : Avo-axia-m, iax^ira Trag. (Irxtwdiiiiv Comic) , 4axi'*^'
Hippocr. From rx&« comes impert. Irxm Aristopb. 512. (III.)

ffX'ftf': seelx-L

c^[a (au- and am-, c^ »afe), later ff^[a, save; many forms come from saia:
rirrn (from aaiimw) and vaA (Att. Inscr.), b-Mra (from icittan w. receeaire
ace.) and fa'(pffa(Att. inscr.), »^iik» (from "ff-fffduuta) and vfa^pca (F), o^k-
yai. rare (from ■acvdu/ioi) and «4a-(po-jMU (mbs. ff/rwr^uu), IvMijii (from Jnii-
#1)1'), a-an^v<o|iai, o-^wifot (uss. aaarivt). By-fonns : Epio viiw (cp. r A) and
ffuiu (cp. tin), q.v. 612. (III.)

TOY- leiie : 2 aor. part, rtn'riit Hom. Cp. Lat. tango.

Ttt-riu (for Tf-mw, 85 b ; cp. rtln from Ttr-) slretcA, mid. Td-w(ioi (TS*) : Ta«*«

(539 D.) and -rawirui (?), ^dnw(r)a, r<rdnr<r*Hu, (489 c), frar«f Atr; fnL

pan. rarfrra/uu Lyric. Poetic, rare in New Ion. (IV.)

Him] APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS 717

TapArrv (rapax-) dttturb : raftfft, Iriimta, rrrdpBYI'*''i ^^^F^X**I'> TVpACsiiot U

pus. (808). Epic 2 peri, intixns. rfr/HJxa am dittvrbed. Cp. Bpitrra. (III.)
riirru (»■>-) arrange ; Tit«, >ro(o, 2 perf. rfraxo, t^tuyf"! ♦^X*n''i *«*-t"-

X>4«>|la^ luL perf. nrdfoiifti, 2aor. pass. frii'(TI'Ci')Eur.,T(ucT*i, -r4«,(ni.)
ro^ (for 0a^, 126 g; cp. rd^t &n(] ffdii^t) aftontfA; 2 aor. tra^r poetic,

2 peri. T^0irrii am attonithed Epic, Ion., plup. trtBijwta.
Ttyyu tett ; T^fn, <T»y{o, trfyxfyir. Rare in prose.
i«(Hi (rtr-, TO- from Tr-, 86 b) slrcfcA, in prose usu. oomp. w. iri, iwi, Jut,

V{, TBfid, r^, etc.; tm>A, -4mva, -T^TSKa, r4ra|MU, -crtfiiv, -TaWJTOiHW,

•TOTfai, rarit Arlitode. Cp. rartv and nraffw. (III.)
Taqia(po|Hu (rtKitap-') Jttdge, infer: TtN|>a|MiO|ia^ fcw|ii|pi)U)i', TtK|uipi4i Comic,

TtKiuvriai Hlppoor. Poetic rtKiialpu limit, ihota: Mtitvpa. (III.)
tiiMb (Tf\*- for reXtff- ; cp. rb t^Xoi end) ^nltft.' nXA, MXw^ i^rAwo, rrrAtviiat

(46B c), tnXfa4i]v, trt-nXM^ioi. Fut. rcUiru rare In prose, iwe-rtXa^fBiui

AnstoUe. Epic aleo rtXtlw.
tAXh (rtX-, Ta\-) accotnpiith : IrtiXa Pind. &i«-TAXit eatue to rfie, rue.'

dr-JmXa ; tr-WXXo|iai (^tr-riWu poetic) command: ir-mi\ifvnr, tr^rirtA-

|uu ; tri^iXXu ti^in, rise poetic : iw-trti\a ; tr-aya-riWit lUQ. rim, poetic

and Ion. (III.)
Tc^ (in Tit') find .- Epic redupl. 2 aor. frtruor and Thriior.
TJji !■■ (t<^, ra^, T^tq-) cut; tciiA, 2 aor. fniiov, -TtT)LT|Ka (drd, dri), TfT)Li||UU,

tr^L^hlv, fut. peri, ^rarpi^owpai (dirA, /{), T|iii)Tfef. rd^'" Doric and Epic.

T/ftH Epic, 2 aor. frn^i, Doric, Ion., and poetic, rfiit^a/uu AristoUe,

ritirrit poetic, Aristotle. Cp. also tii^ui. (IV.)
rJpn ("(«■-, i-apir-, rpar-) amUK : rl^m, lnpi|ra, Mp^trfv (rare in prose)

amuMd mytelf. Horn. 8 aor, mid. irapriiiift and redupt. Ttrafyriiair, Hom.

aor. pass. irip^&^T and 2 aor. pass. hipTii* (aubj. Tpar^/itr ; km. tb^iJo-

/ur). All aor. forms in Hom. with a hare the older meaning ititiMfj/, taUatt.
r*ptralnt {rtpg-ar-, cp. torreo from torteo) dry : Tipav>^ trans. Epic. (HI. IV.)
ripaoiim become dry. Mainly Epic. 2 aor. pass, tripviir asintrans. became dry.
rrrayiir : see rai^.
rcrlq^Hit Horn. perf. ; see tu-.
T4riiOT : see re^t-.
Tt-Tpof*-* {TtTpan-, and r(/i-, rpq-) bore: MrpB*m and Irpi|ra, T(rpi||iai. Fnt.

aa^FTpArio Hdt., aor. (Ttrpiira Epic By-form Tai>^, g.«. Late presents

Tl-^pil-IU, Ti^pir^. (111. IV.)

Ttixu (_Ttvx-, rux-, TIIJI-) prepare, make (poetic) : r«6(«, (rttifa, 2 aor. riniiew
Horn., 2 aor. mid. rtrvtiii^r Hom. (as if from "TftfjEw), 2 porf. rfrivxa as
pass, in Ttrtvxiii made M 423, riruynai often in Hom. = am (3 pi. Tmixarai
and plup. tTtrtix^To Horn.), fut. peri. Tmiioiiai Hom., aor, pass, irix^'
Horn, (frir^x'^' HippocT.), y, x. rurrii Horn. Hom. r^u^fuu and ^iSj^Ajr
often mean happen, hit (cp. t*ti>xi", frirxe'' fro™ Tvyx*"*)- By-form Ti-rtf-

T)) Aere/ fa,te/ in Horn., often referred (lo ra- (cp. t«(»w, (eneo), is prob. the
Inslrnmental case of the demonstr. stem to-. It was however regarded as a
verb, and the pi. r^t formed by Sophmn.

rfiHm (rqjc-, tu-) melt: rfita, in^ 2 peri, -r^ica am melted, 2 aor. pass, as
intrans. jt&kii* melUd, ryfurit. Aor. pass, ir^x^'i* ■"<>' melted rare.

718 APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS [t«-

TM-, in Hom. 2 perf. TtT(i|(&i (roufilsd, do&l mid. rirfijffdar ore trotibUd, mid.

part. TtTi'^iUfot,
-ri-Sii-iki («7-, e*-) place, put; Mjo-a, Mhikci (inflection T6G), 2 aor. Hnw, etc.

(T6d), -nlli|Ka (762), tA»|mi (bnt nsu. Instead m^la^ TQ7), Mhjr, iitVoH^

lirii, -44m. For inflecUon Bee418. toravnopgla.^B. for dialectaJ fomu 747 9.
TfacTw (for T(-T«-w ; TiK-, T«c-) b«0(!{, bring /ot-cA : Ttfo|iak (806), 2 aor. Inim,

S perf. ThoNo. Fut. T^fw poeLic, Tfico£/uu rue and poetio, aor. pan. trtx^'

poetlo (late),

rlXXu (nX-) pluck .' TtXtS, frXXa, tA-iX/uu, frJXAr>. MosUy poetic, (ni.)
TiMrru nefnir ; often W. iid : nnlfu (-riiaifofiai reflex, or pass.), frJivfa, tctIhit-

luu, iritixf^'- Mostly poeUc. (III.)
Tin* (rfi-, T1-) pail, aspUUe, often comp. w. irA, j{: mid. (poetic) takt paymrM,

avenge: -nWrn, fmo-a, rfniita, -rktua-foi, (489c), -rnlfffipi, &vo-T<ia-Tfei

(Hom. d-riToi unpafij). Tlie spelling witli « 1^ introduced on Uie authority of

inscriptions ; ttie use. bave rtvu, etc. Horn, liaa rlru from 'rlrfu, also t(w.

Poetic and Ion. Connected \a rtl-rviuu (hss. ti-) avenge myielf: rdrofHu,

frnffd/iir* (rarein Att. proae). Cp. tI«. (IV.)
Tt-rairu (rirai^, i.e. roii- redupl.) Ureteh: trirtin Hom. Cp. rtlnt. (III.)
n-Tpd-VKB (rjxd-) wound.' rpAvt (w. wrii in prose), Irpsro, rtrpi^M, trpM^i

Tpiil4ia-0)iai (rpiio-o^i as pass. M 66), rfiwrit Hom. Epic rptioi is rare- (V.)
rita and tIu (red*?) Aoitour; rttu, (tEitb (rps-Tfj-ot S. Ant. 22), rftifiai, d-rrnt.

Mainly Epic. In ttie pres. AtL has I, Hom. t or t. Cp. rCvM.
tXb-, tXii-, toXo- endure; rXifffo^ioi (806), iriXuraa Epic, 2 aor. (rX^r (087),

r^X1^(a nsn. aa pres., 2 perf. (atbematic) r^Xa;ur, etc. (70&), tXttIi.

Poetic, rare in proee, wbich uses toX|),^.
Tidrrui (rfiiry-, ^f^t-) cut ; riutfui, fr^ilfa, 2 aor. St-triuxyay, 2 aor. pass. trfLiy^r.

Poetic for tJ|ivb.
Tsp^u (to/j-, Tope-, 486) pierce ; Topije-w, and (redupl.) TfTOft^vw «««■ in a pietring

lent Aristoph., iripriva., 2 aor. traptr. Cp. nrpaCim Miunly Epic.
TOT- Art, find in tr-irovvt Find.
Tp4va (jpir-, rpar-, Tpar-), turn, mid. Jlee ; Tp^a, h-paitia, mid. (rpn^fAfM)* um.

put (o flight, 2 aor. mid. lTpwrf|iT|v (ui^ed or fled (intrans. or reflex, ; rare);

paw.), 2 perf. T^rpo^ (and -r^rpa^?, rare),T4rpati)Lak, trpi^tififled ormu

turned (rare in Att), 2 aor. pass, krpitwrtv usu, intrans., rptiniot, rptwrin

Aristotle. In Att. tftpvwi^tp was gen. displaced by trpdii]*. t^itb New

Ion., Doric, 2 aor, Irparar Epic and poetic, aor. pass, trpiifidiir Horn., Hdt.

Tphru iias six aorista. Cp. 6M c, 595, 6B6. Hom, bas also rpario and Tpoviu.
TpJt* (jf^t T-pD^, rpaifi-; for 9p(^, etc., 125 g) »uppor(, nouruA: (p^^

Mpci^ 2 perf. WrfM^, Ttfpa(ipAi, Mp^^tifv very rare in Att prose, usu.

2 aor. pass. trpA^y, TpB^ro|uu, Sptvrfat. Fat. mid. SpJi|npAt often pass.

(808). Tpi^Ka Doric, 2 aor. Bpic Irpa^w gTew vp, wa* nouriihed. Cp. S(>5.
rftx- (.-rfx- from ^P<X-< 125 g< <uid apaff) run ; Spa|ia9)>ai (806), 2 aor. KpaiM*,

•6aSpd)i,<)K<ii (miTd, T(|)I, a''>v), lin-6i&p^i||Mii, mpv^finia^. Tpix" I>oric,

dTa-Sfrfto|i«u Aristoph., (Speia rare and poetic, 2 perf. SiSpoiia (ifd, irl)

poetic. Poetic Spa^iu. (VI.)
TpAi (Tp€- for Tp€f- ; cp. Lat. (erreii for tersen) tremble : hpwA {488 a), i-rpt-

arct poetic. Rare In prose.
Tptp. (tp^, Tpi^) ru6 ; rpt'^m, (rpt+o, 2 perf. rtrp^*, T4rpl]ip«s Mt*V. h*

I;.C00J^[C

Hm.] APPENDIX: LIST OP VERBS 719

UBU. 2 HOT. puB. trplpq*, -TpiP^roiiai (^f, sard), fat. perf. t«ii«rpt<)«|MU,
4^pirrot Horn. Fut. mid. Tptifa|iai also ae pass. (808).
rpl{*i (Tpiy-, Tpiy-') equedk, citirp : 'i perf. TtTpiy» aa pree. (put. rerpiyltrti,

TtTpiyvta, Horn.). Ion. and poetic. (Ill-)
TpvxiM exAautt, waste : prea. poet, and rare, asn. comp, w, if : --rpOx^'i -"P^

X^ro, TtTp^ii(tai, trpi/xii^* Hfppocr. Also rpd^u : rpdia (147 o) Uoill. ;

and Tp6a : t^w Aeecb. , T^rpDpAi, ft-r/wrDt poetic and Ion.
TpAya (rpay-, rpay-) gnate : rp^fapAi (800), 3 aor. trpft'T^i'i Sm^T^nMrni"*!

TpHKTdi, taT-irfiii^ Hippocr.
Tu-y-x-4»" (fv^-, rvx-, tux*-) ^Cj happen, obtain : TififofUu (806) , 2 aor. Inxo'i

Tirfx^K^ ^plc al£0 ^i^xwhi 2 perf. rirtvxa. Ion. (the same form as from

Tc^xw). T^v7fuu and irix^^ir (from rtOxw) oft«n have almost the sense of

TiT6xi|iia and Irvxov. (IV.)
T^w^rw (rtnr-, rinrTc-) «trUK ; nnrH)**, ^iwi'ii|'ifoi ; Other t«nW8 mpplied : aor.

(■drofn or I«ua-a, perf. «4rXi)Ya, «^XitYK«> iKir. pass. fcrX^JTiiv. frv^a

Epic, Ion. and Lyric, iriwriiva Aristotle, 2 aor. (rvnf poetic, r^vw"'

poetic and Ion., 2 aor. pass, tr&riit poetic, fut. mid. as pass, rvrriiaaiiai, or

2 fnt pass. Tvri<raiuu, Aristopb. Nub. ISTS. (II.)
t4^ (tv^, ru^, for W^, A>^-, 126 g) raite tmoke, tmoke : rMdiifuu, 2 aor. pass.

■s intrans. ^r-n^>^v, )K^rv^vo|Uu Com.
T«eAtM(atin(.- T<M<ro|Mi(tt06),h<Uwra. 612. (III.)
iyiolMi (Ir/iar-') am in health, recover health ; ^mvA, JiftSva, fryutr^r HippoCf.

(Ill-)
W-t^X'*^!"^ C'X'i ^ by-form of ix- i *X-| 'X<-) promtae : i«o-«xV^)^<^i ^ *^-

W-ivx'f"!*' Jhr«laxt||La>- Ion. and poetic usa. ^■Itx"!'^'' Cp. fx* and Xv%m,

(IV.)
Ha(» (i^>^) ueaM.- ifnv*, 4^va, fi^xwruu (469 h), j^>V. 4^irr4t.

Horn, also i>^w. (III.)
{■rain; io-a, tra Find., Hdt., Aristotle, )^Oo-|uu (189 o), taB^r Hdt., G<rs>ia(

as pass. (808) Hdt.
futlmt (^(Mv-) appear, «Aou> : aor. pass. ii/nUrtyit (w. u for u, 643) iQtpearui.

Epic. (III.)
^n* (^1^) fAoto.- (H^vA, l^ii*a, perf. vJi^y'K (rare in good Att.) have

lAoun, 2 pert. v4^va have appeared. w^ajr^M. (489 h), l^rtqv (rare in

prose) wat »hoien, 2 aor, pass. l^vi|v as intrans, appeared, 2 fut. pass.

4aWim|Uu $hall appear; fut. mid. ^vaBfuu thai! thoa and lAofl appear.

On the trans, and intrans. use see 819 ; tor the inflection of certain tenses see

401 D. Horn, has 2 aor. iter, ^rt^t* appeared, v. a. t^rrot ; and, from

root ^o-: ^ appeared and fut. pert, vc^^rrrai lAaK opTiear, Connected

forms ri-#afia'ic», ttad^v, MirdiVfuii. (III.)
^i-o-KK (0a-) Miv .' only pres. and iinpert. : see ^i)|U. (V.)
^[Go|wi (^«i-T 0iS-) >par« .- ^[iraiiaL, J^ivA|it|v, ^io~T4of. Epic 2 aor, mid.

r&dupL re^iliitrir (448 D.). Epic fut. TE^j^ffSfui (0il(-).
^r-, 0r-, ^o- (for 4if-, 35 h) jfcfll .- 2 aor. Irc^nr luid t^io* (part. uTo-rc^Kf iV

also accented .r/^twf), perf. mid. ir^0a>uu, fut. perf. rt^^rofiot. Epic. Cp

^m Munfer and e»J»w(ftp-) smije.
^Ip* (^f>-, B^, fmi; iurr*- for jr-cMv, 629) bear, carry : ful. tlovt 1 aor. 4|iwv'<*<

720 APPENDIX: LIST OP VERBS [4<^

2 nor. ^vfyKO*, 2 pert. Ivtjroxa, perf. mid. IWjnYfiai (8 s. ^rroi Inacr.), mm.
pass. i|Wx>iiv &1bo intntns., fut. pass. Kar-mx^'^H^ '^^ ol«Wjn|tat, t.».
olordt, ^r4ot. Other Att, forms are : otnf^a* fut. mid. uid pass. (809).
iliivYKd!^!!* 1 aor. mid., ^'yk4|ii|v 2 aor. mid (rare : S. O. C. 470), Poetk
and dial, foraia are : 2 pi. prea. iinper. ^prt (for ^ptrt) Epic, 1 aor. Lnper.
olffc tor elaot Epfc (and Ari«topb.), t aor. Inf. ir-tirat or ir-^v (once in Hdt.),
fut. Inf. otatir Find., oto^»(r(a<) Horn., 1 aor. Ifwtaa, -diof' Bom., Hdt., ^nn
Aeol., Dor., etc., 2 aor. if'CB' tm« in Horn., i>erf. mid. JrfxtYfiat HdL, aor.
p«8S. iJMlxBnf Hdt., V. a. ^Mprit Hom., Eur., dr-iSurrat Hdt. (drmarotf).
(VI.)

^«t7a (^cvT-, *v7-) jfee; ^ii(o)iai 806 (^nta«|UiL, 540, rare in prose), 3 mor.
I^irfov, 2 perf. '>^»y>, ^ucrdt, -T4ot. Hom. has perf. act. part, rt^vfira
aa if from a verb ^fu (cp. ^fa flight), perf. mid. part, rc^u^fi/m,
V. a. ^uir&t. Bj-form ipvy^ira, New Iod. and Att. poetry, in comp. in

^-(lI (^t-> ^(^) >ov> inflected 763 : ^4«v, l+i|ra, ^ot^i, -rfot. Poetical and

dial, forma TBS D, fi.
^d-m («»»-, ^«i-) anticipate: ^t^niMi (B06), I<|Jd««, 2 aor. (fti|« (like

f^Ti)*). Fut, lairu doubtful In Att., 2 aor. mid. part, ^funt Epic. Horn.

tfMfo. = »<fSi>fM. (IV.)
^(pM (,ip0tp-, ip6tp', ipBt^) corrupt: ^pA, t^tofo., I^apim, bat usn. 2 perf.

StrJ^hpa am rufncii (have corrupted In Att. poetry), l^tfH*!, 2 sor. pa«.

J^K^v, 8ta-^(ap^ai>)icu, ^Baprii Aristotle. Fut. Sia-^Btpau N 625, iia-

^Ap^wHdt. (HI.)
^Iw (^0>-) Udstc, perUh, moBtl; poetical and usu. iiilraDB., Epic ^An*

(=*((./-«): ful. *8(ffw poetic (Flom. *«ff6i) trans., aor. f^tfura poetic

(Hom. I^eiva) trans., 2 aor. mid. athematlc itpdliLift perUhed poetic («W»-

IMU, #A*ii]r for ^0i-ifi)T, ^0f(r0w, ^fi-Sai, ^ffuni), (^9i^i poetjc (plap.

3 pi. ^^mBTo), itpalBjit Horn., ^Arii Tragic. The form -petti in Hom. is
asmmed on the basis of ^Wnt and I^Sier, for wtiloh ^BUai, I^Sira (or (afur)
have lieen conjectared. Hom. pSlau, fififfifa are also read ^fcfvu, etc By-
form ^^irVu. (IV.)

4iXJa love : regular (cp. 385) ; fut. mid. ^^ropAi may be pass. (808) . H<»il

bas ^X^funu pres. inf. and /^rxif»|v (^tX-) aor. mid. Aeollc ^Xw"-
#\4w lyruiie (cp. S\iu) : ^Xov^-A, for ^Adv-w, Theocr., J'^Xa(v)<'s, rt^'Xat/uu

(489 c) and ^^Xdv^r Hlppocr. 0\(iu «<U grenlity, tieallow : only pres. and

Imperf., and only !n Comedy.
^Uy* burn, trans, and intrans: Jf-^^ Aristoph., K«T-«4Mxt«t*i A-^Xtrm

Eur. Very rare in prose. By-form ipXtyiBu poetic
^pAy-rt|u (^pay-) and ^ApY««|u /enae, mid, ^piyruiftu ; only in pm. and

imperf. Cp. +p4Tr« (IV.)
4pAt« (^fwl-) t«II, point out, deeJart, mid. eon«fdfr, detKse : ^pi/rm, l^pav*,

W^poKs, v^pocttai rarely mid,, t^pdvfi)!- as mid., ^porrfei. Epic 2 aor.

(J)r^pa!a> 448 1). (part, rt-ppatufm). Hid. fat. 4^(r)ofi<u Epic,

**paB-(ff)(i/iij» poetic and Ion, (III.)
^fi.TTm (ttpa-r-) fence : I^pot* (and l^opfa Att. Inscr.), vf^pofiMi and «4^«pf-

|la^ l^p^x^'i I'^paJrroi. The forma iritli ap for pa are common Mid tm

Old Att. See^'vvCiu. (HI.)

•x(Hi«l APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS 721

fpii-ra H^K-) ghuddtr : K^pitn (UT c),iri^p(K« am in a ikvddtr (paxL wt^fit-

mrrajPlnd.). (III.)
^ptfyv (^puy-, ^fiuy-') roait: l^pnfo (147 c), wJ^pvypiai, ^^kt^, 2 nor. paw.

i^piyiir Hippocr.
^«U.TTit (»vXaiE-) guard: ^&{n i^Ikofo, 2 perF. vi^Xaxa, vi^Xa^iut am

on my guard, l^Xdxhiv, ^vXairrist. t^t, mid. ^U{s|ui also u pua.

in Soph. (808). (III.j
^pv (^p-) mtx, kn«ad: fifaipaa Horn., w^^vpfuu, iipifBiir Aesch., fut perf.

rt^6preiMi Find., r^M-^vpTai Eur. ^pim mix ia regular. (III.)
44b(^i~, ^v-; Horn. #t>v,rare in Att) produce; ^o-a, l^vo, 2 aor. I^vgrcw,

wo* (08T), w4^Ka am by nature, ant (0S3), ^vriv plant. 2 aor. pass, t^irir

late (doabttu) in Att.). 2 perf. Epic forms : witfiari, i,i^i<^<ft Theognli,

n^ir^, ^ft-n^inua; 1 plnp. with thematic vowel twiiiuiiat Heaiod.

X<[{t* (xaS-) ybrM back, usa, x^t'l'^ give way. Pres. act. In prose only dra-x^fu

Sen., x>ia'«'awu, dt^ov-^a Find., Ji-exnird^ilB XeD. See also «iS-. Poetic,

chie%Epio. (IIL>
Xaip> Cx"**-. X'-pf, X""*"-) fjoiee: x<up<F>. «niVT«'> "K^PIf"" Mid nixapiuu

Att. poetry, 2 aor. pasB. Ix'M"!* intmns. rejoiced, xaprd*. Horn, has 2 perf.

act. part. iE<x<Vt<^i 1 EtoC' uid. xi^Mfi ^ aor, mid. ntxafiiait, fut. perf.

HXip^rw and Mxapttrofuu. (HI)
(oX&M Ioo««n .- Ix^""^ tXB'^^i^* (.^^ ^)- ^l'- Xo^^u Hippocr., aor. ^i-

Xofa Find., perl ntx^Xana Hippocr.
XaX«r«(n( (xoXn-Br-) am offended : xaX«ra*A, lxBUv1|M^ lxaXivdvti|*. (III.)
xa-fS-driii (x"S-, x'**-. x"*- for xj'-i 85 b) contafn; x'*""*"* for x«'i'"'">

2 aor. Ixaio', 2 perf. iif;(a>4a as pres. (■/x<"4<> ? cp- v. 1. O 192). Poetic

(mostly Epic) and Inn. (IV.)
X^K* Cxn'-, X""- i X^'Kii for xf"" ' 36 b) jajw ; tf-xameiiat (808), 2 aor.

Ixavov, 2 perf. Kix^*a om agape (098). Ion., Epic, and in Aristoph. (V.)
X^ita CX'*-. xi>8-)i = ^*'- com; xM'a^'lwi (640, 806), r&rety x'b^IMUi 'it"^

2 aor. Ix*^" i^^' ^ P^^- k'x^'^ K^trfuu. (IIL)
%'l— ix*"-' X'f-t X*^) pour ,' on the contraction see 397. In prose nsu. In camp.

{*(, ip, mini, 16,, etc,): fut, x*" (Ml, 1881), aor. Ix<a (648 a), itix"«*>

K^ii|iai,, Ix^Bi]*, xvfl'i'aiiaii X**^*' '"d- X^^^^^ P^*^ ^"^ ^^-i 'x*^T' '^^■

Epic forms : pres, (rarely) x«iw (Aedio x'"!"^). '"'■ X'^ (?) P 222, aor. also

fxoHl (648 a), 1 aor, mid, 'x»^'?' = Att. lx«Vn*i ^ <tor. raid, athematic

^lifi^p as pass.
xXa3- in 2 perf. part. mxXiiliii melling, pi. otxW'"^<"i '"*■ "X^""'- I^d-
X*" ( = X^f w) ft<ap «P ■■ X*'"t 'X"»n. A'lwcix""*' "*X"^I**H *X*«*1*. X«"*^-

iro|iu, xooTdi, Cp, 489 a, o.
XpauriUw (xpaur>«-, xpow/^) ftyJti P™8. late: xP«<'*'^''"i ixpni'rit'v'ih 2 wr.

Ixfiaifner. Horn.
^X/^f^ CXP*K") «™ (x>»-. Xi^) ■ P««- Xpi XPV"'i etc. 395, xp4««|t»>

JXpi)r4|i,i|v, icixp^|>ai Aaw in um (poetic also Aone Mcsitary), IxM^*

(489 e), XPT»** ffoo^' Xfwr*^- HdL has xp*''"'. 8 pi- xp^arrai (from

X^rrrw), BQbJ. xp'uWH, imper. x^". i"'- XP^^ (I""- '"«!'■ X^*"). P*"-

Ximin*'»t. Cp. 641 D. Fut. perf, xtxrifoiuu Theocr.
»XP^ CXP*) «««^ «" "^""^J" Cx>«-. X/^) : P«8- Xpftt. XPfc 894 fsometlmea in

722 APPENDIX: LIST OF VERBS [xrt

Uie mMmlng of Xprfl*«. XPn1»). Xri"". hfiV' ><*Kn'^ "ixji^m Hdt..

jjlp'!'''!* (^^ b). Hid. xp^f^^ (XP^'p^^) Goiutulf an oracle : jf^tttita Ion , |

iT^iiatr HdL Cp. xmt« ^^^ b, t)41 D. Hdt. bu XP*"'-
Xp<t (t f« neceuarv, &v^pi| ii tnfflee» : see 793.
XViKw toant, (ui, AtL chiefly pRB. and impert. : xfii'"- Epic uid Ion. xp¥N

(later x/**Mi X/"i'<"Ji 'xp**""- 612. (lU.)
Xftm (x^- toixp*'-) anoint, ittng : Tijttam, Ixpivo, r^xP^X'^ ('"*<' ic^Xf*'!'*'*]

489 b), ixs^9n' («9 e) Tragic, x/»"rrii Tragic.
XPvt** C^"*^ Xf-^i"') cp- XP*^ comptrafon) colour, ttain: tdjipmrfmi. (4S9c;

(better Klxp^r>u f), 4xP^^* (^XpV'**!*' ^)- Poetic xftttt- 61S. (IlL)
X<*p^ ^inc plate, go : regalar. fut. x"?^" '^^ X<*pV'°I'^ ^^ <^
•^du C+a) ru6 (^a-, ^1^) : pres. iHti +6- etc, 894; dm-^rV^ Hn|r«, pert.

KaT-*4Ti|iai from the by-fonn if^ixm.
if^ blame ; if^fi, Mtta, t'f'tyiHu Hippocr., it^irrit.
4f iBi deceive, mid. lie ; itnir*, Ii^nvo, li|Miir|iu usu. Aace deeefoMi or tKd, l»t

also have been deceived, tifttv^v, 4><uo4f|n)Lai.
+^. C^vx-, ^Hix-) eoo/ : ^E- (1*7 c), I.K«. l*^f^^, *+<X»n'. V'5x9*"'»* (?)

Hippocr., 2 aor. paas. Aw-v^ixnv as iatrans. cooled, •I'ueriot Hippocr.

M>(<&«- for fa$., <Wf-, 4e6a) |iimA: imperf. UBaiir (431), Otrm, km (4S1),
Iwift (443), Uv«i|y, Ar«4^|iai. Put. litfik'' only in Att. poetry, aor. itt
and perf. Sviuu Ion., dr-wtfrit Ion., poetic, dr-urr^t poetic

Mo|iai (fuH- ; op. Lat. ce-num) fiup : imperf. Im^iti)* (431), A»<(re|fi| Uvf
(Loi (443) have bought or Seen 6oucW, iavlfittv vhu bought, irt^6t, -^in-
For iitr7,iriii.iir (late), AtL has hrpiifuiv (p. 138). Imperf. ir^i^i Bdu
dratffiq* Att. in oomp. (dn-f, ^). (VI.)

3,q,z.-3bvGoOgle

ENGLISH INDEX

Ability, adjfl. denoUng, 858. 6, 9 ; rba.
of, w. Int., 2000; adJB.', advs., Euid
BabaU. of, w. Inf., 2001-2007.

AbUCival use of geniliTe, 1289, 1348 b,
18GI, 1362, 1891-1411.

Ablative, functions, bow supplied, 203,
260, 1270 ; uItb. w. force of, 341.

AbsoluM, auperl., 1086 ; and rel. time,
1850 ; inf., 2012 ; gen., 2032 f, 2058,
2070-2075 ; ace, 2069, 207^-2078.

Abstract, nouns, gender, 100 c, 840;
BuO. forming, 840, 6S9. 1, 2, 6, 861.
2, 863 a 2, 3, b 2, 866. 1 ; in com-
pos., 890 ; pi. of, 1000, 1004 | part.
w. article used for, 1026, 2051 ; w.
article, 1181-1136. See Quality,
Action.

Nambeni, 864 e.

Abundance, adjs. denoting, 658. 3.
Accent, general principles, 149-170 ;
see Receaalve accent ; as affected
by contraction, crssis, and elision,
171-174; anastropbe, 175; change
of, in decl., inflec., and compos.,
178-178, 778 b, 791 b, 860 b, 893,
804; on proclit., ISO; enclit., 181-
187 ; of nouna, general rules, ^)&-
209; subste., 163 a, 218, 223, 236, 230,
2fi2, 264 a, e, 271 ; of adj., 28T a,
289 b, 290 c, 202 c, 29S c, 296, 200 b ;
parts., 304, 305 a, 309 a, 425 b,
425 b H., 778 b ; pera. pron., 325 a, f ;
Interrog. pron., 334; vbs., 423-427,
746 c, 750 b, 798 b, 778 b, 791 b ;
dtmln., in lor, 862. 1 ; words in -m
denoting agent, B59. 1 b ; words In
-5 or -II, 659. 2 b ; of compounds, 698-

Accompanybig clTOtUDBttnce, dat. of,

1627.

Accountability, gen. of, 13T5-1S79;
adJB. of, w. gen., 1426.

Aocuaative caae, 261, 260, 264 b ; gen-
eral statement of xuea, 1661-1662 ;
of tbepart, 986, IBOlav.; w. vbe. of
rememberinff, etc, 1867-1869 ; hear-
ing and pereeivinff, 1361-1368 j rul-
ing, 1371 ; t^nration, 1393 ; w.
Sio^HIt, 1398 ; w. Ill, 1400 ; of time,
144T, 1680-1587 ; w. vbe. of 6«niyl(-
ing and injuring, 1462 ; of eontmand-
tng, 1406 ; w. Internal and external
object, 1554, 1566, see Internal ob-
ject and External object ; of content,
1564 a n. 1 ; of result, 1664 a h. 1,
1576, 1679; cognate, 1598-1676,991
b H., 1877, 1378, 1620, 1629, 1744.
1749; of extent, 1680-1587, 1933;
terminal, 1586, 1689 ; w. tr. vbs,
1668, 1659, 1661, 160(^1697; w.
vbe. of nnearing, 1GB6 b, 2804;
after verbal nouns and adjs., 1698;
elliptical, 1699 ; of respect, 1516 a,
1600-1606, 2034 e ; adverbial, 993,
1606^1611 ; two aces. w. one vb.,
1912-1633; two vbe. with a com-
mon obj., 1634, 1636 ; general force
after preps., 1658 ; w. prep,, after vb.
of rest, 1669 b; subj. of inf., 1973,
107*, 1975; origin of oonatr. of
ace. w. inf., 1981; of artic. inf.,
2034; absolute, 2059, 2079-2076;
agent expressed by, w. verbal adj.,
2162 a.

Accusing, vba. of, conatr. with, 1376-
1379, 1386.

Acknowledge, vbs. dgnlfying, w. part.,
2106.

t, Google

724

ENGLISH INDEX

Action, BuS. of, 840, BSQ. S, 861. 1, 866.
2, see Abetr&ct nouns ; time and
Rage of, 1850-1857, 201fl. 2094, 2177.

AcliTe, verbB. 1704.

Voice, 360 ; endingB, 462-464,
486,467,469, 470; function, 1703-
1707 ; tr. and intr. nse, 1708-1709 ;
periph. for, 1710 ; causative, 1711 ;
of Inf. limiting nieau. of adj., 1712 ;
lor mid., 1732; U> reidace pMs. of
tr. vb., 1752.

AddresB, voc. in, 1288 ; oCrai in, 1288 a.

Adjectival, clauses, 2180, 2488-2678 ;
sentences, 2190.

Adjeotive pronouns, sgreemGnt of,
1020 ; dXXdi and Irtpot, 1271-1276.

Adjectives, general rules lor accent,
205-209 ; used substan lively, 282 b,
1021-1020, 1130; decL, 286-290;
declined like parts., 305 b ; of irreg-
ular deci,, 311 ; of one ending, 312 ;
comp., 313-324, 1063-1093; <i«t6$,
328; pronom., 387, 340; numeral,
S47 i verbal, see Verbal adj. ; for-
mation, 867, 868 ; compound, 886-
800, 893-800; pred., see Predicate
adj.; attrib., 012-014, 1019; agr.,
026, 1020, 1080-1039, 1044-1062;
function, 1018; ss preds., for Eng.
adv. or prep., 1042, 1048; pred.
position, 11SB-U71; of place, w.
article, 1172 ; gen. with, 141i2-1486,
1620; dat. witli, 149U.1602, 1629,

2033 ; cognate ace. vrith, 1666; as
cognate ace., 1572, 1573 ; foil, bj
aco. of respect, 1600-1606 ; w. inf.,
2001-2007; w. ace. of artic. Inf..

2034 d, e ; vr. Ocn and inf., 2271 c ;
used substantively, o£ and ^4 witb,
2736. See Componnd adj., Com-

Adjunctive apposition, 082.
Adjuncts, of artic. inf., 3037 ; w. part,

2079-2087.
Admiring, vbs. of, w. gen., 1405.
Adnominsl genitive, 1290-1206.
Advantage or disadvantage, dat. of,

1481-1486.

Adverbial, ezprMdona, 10S9, IllI,
1527 b ; ace., 903, 1606-1611 ;
clauses, 2180-2206, 22K^2487 ; senl.,
2190 ; part, oee CiroumsUniial
participle.

Adverbs, proclit., 170, 180; endiL.
181 b ; comps. and sapeilB. derived
from, 320; origin, 341; of place.
841, 342, 346, 1536; of manner,
341, 343, 346; from preps., &4Sc;
endings, 844; comp., 346, 1063-
1093; correl., 346; of time, 346;
of way, 846 ; numeral, 347 ; of divi-
sion, 364 g; in compnds., 6T0, 881,
806, 807 ; ordinary, and sentence,
1094, 2760; eqoiv. of ordinary,
1096 ; in attrib. position as adjs.,
1096, 1158 e n., 1166; UUng place
of adjs., 1097; as nouns, 1153 e;
gen. w., 1316, 14S7-1443 ; dat. w..
1440, 1409-1602, 1620, 2033 ; preps
developed from, 1688 ; prepa. as,
1630-1643 ; point of view w. advi.
of place, 1661, 1662; w. inf., 2001-
2007 ; w. part., 2079-2087 ; for proL.
2344 ; rei., antec. of, 2606 ; rel., at-
traction, 2626 ; Inverse attraction.

Advising, vbs. of, w. dat., 1464; w.

aor., 1938 ; w. rnf, 2720.
Aeolic, dial., Intr., C, D.
Age, expressed by gen., 1321, 1S26.
Agent, suS. denoting, 839, 860. 1. 10,

860. 1, 861. 18, 863 a 2, S, 7, 10, 11.

18, 14, 16 ; dat. of, 1488-I4»4, 1768.

2119. 2, 2161, 2152; axpreased by

gen. vf. prep., 1491-1494, 1678. 1684.

1 c (2), 1686. 2 d, 1688. 1 c, 1S96. 1 b,
1698. 1 b, 1766 ; by ace. w. prep.,
1686. 2 d ; by dat. w. prep., 1698.

2 b ; in ace, w. verbal adj., 2162 a.
Agreeing, tIm. of, w. ^ij, 2726.
Agreement, the concords, 926 ; of finite

vb.w. subj., 926, 049-972; of vroid
in appos., 026, 076-096 ; of pred.

ENGLISH INDEX

725

adj., 02e, 076, 1020, 1044-1062 ; of
attrib. adj., 026. 1020, lOSO-1039;
apparent violatioDH, 926; of pred.
Bubat., 973-0T5 ; of adj. or part w.
Bubj. of pi. Tb,, of single pera., 1009 ;
accord, to eeose, 1013 ; of parts.,
2146 ; of verbal In -rto, 2151 ; of
rel. pron., 2501, 2602.

Aim at, gen. w. vbs. wgnlfyiDg, 1S49.

Alcmanic construction, 965.

Allosive plural, 1007.

Alpha privative, adjs. oompounded with,
w. gen., 1428 ; part, negatived w.,
2071 a; see a-privUire.

Alphabet, 1-3 ; as numeiab, 347, S4S.

Alternative questions, dir., 2660-2661 ;
ind.. 2676, 2676 e, t.

Amount, denoted by gen., 1326.

Anacolnthon, 8004-S008.

Anadiplosis, 3009.

Anaphora, 2167 c, 2906, 8010.

Anaphoric arUcle, 1120 b, 1142, 1178b;
use of airtO, etc., 1214, 1262.

AnastTophe, 176, 3011.

Anger, vbe. of, w. gen., 1406 ; yi. dat.,
1461 ; w. »r> (i^0< °r P»t-> ^^^ ;
«ffi' £» in expression of, 2682 d.

Animals, grammatical gender of, 10B.

AnnallslJc present, 1884.

Announce, vbs. signifying, w. part.,
2106.

Answers, to Tet and Jfo questions,
2680 i dAXi In, 27S4 &; yipla, 2804,
2806; fi in, 2826; -yiiSr in, 2832;
at in, 2636 ; col Ji} in, 2847 ; S^ra
in, 2861 ; iiiw aSv in, 2901 a. ; iJmi
in, 2916 ; ral /i^f in, 2921 ; ical »ij)r
. . . 7c in, 2921 ; rat in, 2022 ; dAeoD*
In, 2963 a ; yip oir in, 2968.

Antecedent, of rel. clausea, 2503-2644 ;
of rel. prons., 2603 ; def. and indef.,
2606-2608 ; omission of, 250»'2616,
2636 ; attraction of rel. to case of,
2522-262S ; case of rel. w. omitted,
2629-2632 ; incorporation of, 2632,
2.53&'2538 ; attracted to csiie of rel.,
2633-2634: appoa. to, 2539; taken
over into rel. clause, 2640, 2642;

reserved for subsequent main elaose,
2641.

Anlepenult, 139. See Accent.

Anticipation, pres. of, 1679 ; or prolap-
sis, 2182.

Anticipatory subjunctive, 1610, 2707 a.

Antistrophe, in rhetoric, 3012.

AutitbesU, 3013 ; ^w in, 2903-2916,

Aorist tense, 369 ; secondary, 360, 1868 ;
fliBt and sac., 361; one of prin.
pans of vb., 368-370 ; iterative in
■«K%; 496; )( Imperf., 66.3. 1908,
1900; forms in ift, 808; of pass,
form but act. or mid. mean., 604,
811, 812 ; of mid. form but act or
mid. mean., 810 ; of depa., in pass,
mean., 813 ; act. vba. with aor. pass,
in mid. sense, 814-818 ; force, 1861,
1866, 1866, 1S68.

Active, first, Inflec, 382, 383,
666-671, 765 ; accent of inf., 426 a ;
system, 456, 542-646.

Active, second, accent of imper.,
424b,426b; of Inf., 425 a x.; of
part., 426 b ; redup. in, 439, 448,
448 D, 404 b ; system, 456, 646-664 ;
)( first aor., 654 ; inftec, S84, 679-
688, 760-761.

Middle, first, stem, 642-646; in-
flec., 382, 383, 666-671, 766.

Middle, second, accent of Imper.,
424 b, 426 c ; of inf., 426 a, 426 d ;
inflec., 384, 679-688, 766-761.

Passive, first, infiec., 382, 383,
672-678 ; accent, 426 d ; w. and with-
out inserted <-, 469 ; stem, 566-588 ;
in Horn., 1740.

FaMive, second, siem, 600-600;
inflec., 672-678; origin, 1739; in
Horn., 1740.

Indicati ve, in unattainable wishes,
1780; w. ir, past potent., 1764 ; w,
ii, of unreality, 1766-1TS8 ; ez-
pressea mere occurrence of a past
action, 1023 ; ingressive, 1024, 1026 ;
resultative, 1026 ; complexlve, 1927 ;
n. def. nura1>ers, 1926 ; enumerating
and leportinx past events, 1929;

726

ENGLISH INDEX

emtdric, 1980; gnomle, 1031, 2338,
25t)T a 1 in general descriptions,
19Si; iterative, 1700, 1088, 2841;
for fut^ 1981; in similes, lOSC;
for pres., 1936 ; dramatic, 1037 ; w.
Tbe. of swearing, etc., 1938; w.
other vb«., 1989; for perf., 1«0;
tranalated by perf., 1941 ; epistolaT7,
IM2 ; for plup., 1943 ; In subord.
clanses, 1944 ; of rv7X'''™i ^-aoSim,

iMni, 2090 b ; after iii and vb.
of fearing in Hom., 2233 b; after
Aare, 2274 ; in onreal condit., 2306,
2307-2311 ; in apod, of vivid fut.
COndiL, 2326; after wplv, 2434,
3441 a; In similes and compar.,
2481 a ; in subord. clauses in ind.
dlM., 2620, 2628.

Sabjunctive, in prohib., 1800,
1B40, 1B41, 2756 b; H with, in
Horn., to indicate fear, etc., 1802 ;
iwttt n't w., to repress command,
1808; ou «i4 w., of emphatic denial,
1804; n^i Qi It., 1801, 2221, 2226;
delib., 1805 ; force, 1860 ; after
rplt, 2444 a ; force, !a condits., 2
2336 b. See Subjimctlve.

Optative, of fut. realization of
pres. fact, 1828 ; of past possibility,
' 1829 ; of miid BSHertion in past,
1829 ; force, 1S61-1863 ; force. In
condits., 2331, 2386 b. See Optative.

Imperative, in prohibs., 1810;
force, 1664 ; in condit. rel. sent.,
2673 c. See Imperative.

Infinitive, force, 1865-1871 ;after
Tbs. of hoping, etc., 1868, 1909,
2024 ; n. Hart, 2261 ; after wplr,
2463 c. See Infinitive.

Participle, force, 1872-1874; w.
tltd, tx", eic., 1062-1906 ; rare in
aoo. abe., 2076 x n., b n. ; w. rvy-
Xiwa, XaredMi, ^Mw, 2096 b ; as
pred. adj., 2091 ; alter ipiu, i*oiu,
2103, 2110-2112 a h. See Parti-

Aoristic present, 18S8.
Apbaeresis, 46, 76.

Apocope, 75 B.

ApodosiH, defined, 2280 ; dUul in, 2782;
irAp in, 2S01 ; <a in, 2802 ; Si In,
2837; oM in, 2935. S«e Coodi-
tionaJ clauses.

Apodotlc 3^, 2837.

Aporia, 8014.

Aposiopesia, 3015.

Apostropbe, 70.

Appeals, dXXd In, 2784 C ; rd in, 2928.

Appear, vba. slgnl^ing, w. part., 2106.

Appointing, vbs. of, w. pred. gen.,
1306 ; w. two aces., 1613 ; w. inf.,
2009.

Apposition, definition, 016 ; agr. of
word in, 826, 076-982 ; in gen. in
agr. w. implied pers. pron. or *.
adj., 077, 976, 1196 b; partilive,
981-084 ; distrlb., »81 ; adjunctive,
982 ; constr. of whole and part, 086 ;
attrib., 080 ; descriptive, 087 ; ex-
planatory, 988-990 ; to i, 4, T-f in
Hom., 980, 1102; to a sent., 991-
006 ; equiv. of attiib. adj., 1019 ; to
proper name, 1160; w. axxot and
trtpai, 1272 ; nom. to a voc., 1287 ;
inf. as, 1087, 2718; anic. inf. m,
2035 ; drawn into rel. cl., 2539.

Appodtive, defined, 016 ; gen., 1322.

Approaching, vbe. of, w. gen., 1358 ; w.
daL, 1353, 1463.

Article, cra^ of, 68 ; prodit tonos,
179; decl., 332; agr., 1020; origin
and develop., 1090 ; i, 4, tA in Horn.,
1100-1104, 332 a; in tragedy a»d
lyric, 1104; as Tel., 1105; ss demons.
in Att. prose, 1106-1117 ; indef., ri>
as, 1118 a; particular, 1119-1121;
anaphoric, 1120 b, 1142, 1178 b, see
Anaphoric article; deictic, 1120c;
diatrlb., 1120 f ; instead uf unem-
phatic pnesese. pron., 1121 ; generic.
1122-1124; w. pans., 1124, 1151
2062 ; w. numerals, 1125 ; omitted.
1126-1152, 1207 ; w. abstract subeta ,
llIfi-1136; vr. proper names, 1136-
1142, 1207 ; w. two or more nomn^
1148, 1144, 1146 ; w. appos. to peia

ENGLISH INDEX

727

pmo. of tlrat or hc. prrson, 1149;
and pred. noun, lieO-]l&2 ; subsi.-
making power of, 1163; aitrib. po-
■ition, 1164-1167; pred. poflitlon,
11S8-11T1 ; w.aArln, 328, 1163, 1171,
1176, 1204-1217 ; w. i-df, 1163, 1174 ;
w. demons, pron., 116.1, 1171, 1176-

1181, 11S4 ; w. poHRBM. pron., 1163,

1182, lies, 1 196 a; w. gen. of reflex.
pron., 1163, 1184; tr. gea. of pera.
pron., 1171, 1186 ; w. gen. of rel.
pron., 1171 ; n. depot, ^vdi, firxi'i'B'i
1172; w. f^int, 4*uirvt, 1173; w.
SKm, 1176; w, gen. of reclp. pron.,
11S4 ; w. Interrog., IXXoi, n\Ot, dU-
V«t, 1186-1189, 2648; agreeing w.
pen. pron., 1187 ; n, IXXdi and Frc-
p«f, 1271-1276 ; w. olof and ^Midi,
2632 b.

Articular In fln itive , subaL-maklngpower
of article in, 1163 f; use, 2026-2036 ;
nom., 2031 ; gen., 2032, 1822 ; dat.,
8033 ; ace., 2034 ; In appoe., 2036 ;
in eiclain., 2036 ; v. adjoncta, 2037 ;
w. vba. of hirtdtring, etc., 2038, 2744 ;
w. vbs. of /taring, 2238 ; after itlxp^

and lxi». S-^83 C H.; ^i w., 2711,
2712 ; after negatived vbe., 2749.

Asking, Tbs. of, w. two sees,, 1626 ;
in flit,, 1018; w. obj. clauaes, 2210 a,
2218; w. /ii}, 2720.

Aspirates, 16 a, 26, 441.

Aepiratton, 124-127.

Assent, marked by AWi, 2784 b ; by
yip, 2806 ; by yl, 2821 ; by jrfwei,
2U1B; by koI ^r, 21)21; by W ^i}r,
2»21 ; by a' sir, 2059. Cp. 2680.

Asaererations, ace. In, 1606 b, 2894 ; fut
in, 1606 b, c, 2894 ; w. ni, 2726 ; q

Assererative particleH, 2774, 2864, 2894,
2806, 2917, 2920, 2022, 2923.

•• Aasimltated " forms in vbe., 64.3-647.

Assimilation, of vowels, 45; progreMlve
and regrewive, 61 ; of conss., 75 n.

77,

) a, b, 81 E

, lai 1

A88oclatt<«, dat. of, I62S.
Asniroptiona, imper., In, 1839, 2164;

othenriseexpieised, 2164; isl Si^iaj

in, 2847.
Asyndeton, 1033, 2166-2167, 3016.
Attaining, adjs. of, w. gen., 1416.
AUic, dial., Intr. C-E; decl., 163 »,

237-239, 280 ; fat., 310, 638, 689,

645, 660 ; redup., 446, 477 a k., 669.
Attraction, caumng apparent Tiolatitm

of concords, 926 ; In eomp. clauses

w. liif and Hartf, 2465 ; of rel. pron.,

2522-2628 ; of rel. clause, 26.'12 ; In-

Yene, 2533, 2634.
Attributive, advs. as, 1019, 1096, 1153 e

and v., 1156; defined, 1154; posi*

tion, 1164-1167; sdji.and prone, as,

1172-1182, llSl.

Adjective, defined, 912, 1018;

equiv., 1018 ; agr., 1020, 10.W-1039 ;

used mibsuntiyely, 1021-1020.
Apposition, 986.

FarUclple, 1019, 2046-2068. See
. Participles.

Position, 1154, 1166.
Augment, accent cannot preoede, 420 ;

syllaUo and temp., 428-487, 444,

448 D ; double, 4S4, 461 ; omitted.

438, 496 ; poaiUon, in oompound

vbe., 449-464.
Avoiding, vbe. of, use of negs. w„ 2T89-

2744.

Barytone, 157, 168; sl«nu, of third

dec)., ace. sing., 247 ; toc. ^ng., 249 b.
Befit, vbs. meaning, w. daL, 1466.
Beginning, vbe. of, w. gen., 1348 ; w.

part., 2008.
Believing, vba. of, w. inf., 2602 b.
Belonging, gen. of, 1297-1306 ; adja. of,

w. gen., 1414.
Benefiting, vba. of, w. dat., 1401 ; vr.

ace, 1462.
Beseecbiog, vbs. of, w. gen., 1347.
Blaming, vbs. of, w. gen., 1405; «. dat,

1461.
Brachylc«y, 1501, 3017-1018.
Breathings, 9-14, IS, 125 «, 168.

■ oo^lc

ENGLISH INDEX

CaUIng, vl«. of, w. two acos., 1613,
leiG.

Capacity, adjs. of, v. gen., 1418 ; adjs.,
advi., and sabats. of, w. inl, 2001-
2007.

Cardinal numeralB, 347 ; dec)., 261,349,
850; article w., 1125.

Caring for, vba. of, w. gen., 1366-1360;
w. rtpl and gea, 1368; adjs. of, w.
gen., 1420.

Case, agr. {□, of words in appoa, 0-25,
878-896 ; of adja., 825, 1020 ; of pred.
«abst«., 873.

Caae endings, 210, 212, 228.

CaaM, meaninga and forms, 201-203;
of third decL, formation, 241-261 ;
oompoalte, 1278; oaes, 1278-1636;
see NominatlTe, eto.

CatacbreaiB, G018.

Causal clauses, assimilation of mood in,
2186d; after vhe, ot /earing, 2236;
treatment, 2240-2248 ; particles in-
troducing, 2240, 2244-2248, 2770,
2B10 ; denoting fact, 2241 ; ilenoUng
alleged or reported reason, 2242; w.
unreal indie, or potent, opt. w. Ar,
2243; rel. el. as, 2246, 2666. See

Causative, vba., 866. 3 ; act., ITll ; mid.,
1725.

Canae, gen. of, 1373 a, 1406-1408, 2084 ;
adja. of, w. gen., 1436; dat of,
1617-1630, 1757 ; expressed by prep.,
1681. 1, a, 1684. 1 o (3). 1686. 2 b, f,
1687. 1 c, 1688. 1 C, 1081. 1, 1692,
8 c, 1683. 2 b, 1698. 1 b, 2 b ; by ry
or Sii T& w. inf., 2033, 2034 b, 2246 ;
by part., 2060, 2084, 2070, 2084-
2086, 2100.

CauUoD, Tbs. of, w. obj. claoseB, 322CK
3232.

OoaBirig, »b«. of, w. gen. , 1392 ; w. part,
2008.

Change, of vowels, 27-46; of oonsa.,
77-133; of accent, In dwL, toBec.,

and compos., 170-178 ; eopbcmlc, in
perf. and plup. mid., 409; in Tb.-
Stem, 474-196 ; of root-vowel, 8J1 ;
In Htems, when aufl. is added, 834.

Chiasmna, 2915 a, 3020.

Chooaing, vba. of, w. pred. gen., 1305;
w. two acoB., 1613; w. inf. of pur-
pose, 2009.

Chorogr^hic genitive, 1811.

Circumflex accent, 140-174. See Aoceiit

Circumatantial participle, 2046-^018,
2064-2087. See Particlplee.

Cities, namea of, gender, 199 b, 200 a ;
Bometjmea pi., 1005; nae of artide
with, 1189, 1142 c.

Class, of present aleme, fltat or rimple,
498-604, 723-727 ; second or T, 605,
606; third or iota, 607-632; founh
or N, 623-526, 728-743 ; fiftti oi
inceptive, 626-628 ; sixth or mixed,
628-631.

Clauses, principal and subordinate,
2173-2181. See Subordinate clauses,
Causal claiiaes. Result clauses, etc.

Cleansing, vba. of, w. two aces., 1631.

CUmax, «1 Si, w., 2847; 3021.

Close vowels, 4 a, 7. See Vowels.

Clothing, vbs. of, w. two acca., 1628.

Cognate, accusative, the appos. arc
often a, 881 b n. ; w. vhe. of judicial
acUon, 1377, 1878, 1676 ; of aomf
andI.-(n(irf(IoW{rln,ie6S-1668; with
adjs., 1665; may become snbj. of
pass., 1666, 1668, 1574, 1744, 1749;
w. KtltBat, rr^nu, nHfnr, etc., 15% ;
w. no attribute, 1670-1571 ; omitted,
leaving adj. attribnte, 1572 ; adj.,
pron., or pron. adj. treated as neuL
Hubst., 1673-1674; )( dat., 1577;
combined with external obj., 1820,
1629.

Subject, 1666, 1566, 1574, 1744,
1749, 1760.

Words, Intr. B.

Collective words, 4 twwet, 4 dtrvit, 361 ;
numbers, 864 e; snbsts., sing., w.
pi. vb., 860; substs. neat. [J., w.
^ng. vb., 868 ; subela. and adja. , VtM,

ENGLISH INDEX

729

997,1024; nent. part., 996 k; put
referrJDg to, lu&y be pi., 1044.

Comiutlre dative, 1521-1620.

Commaud, exprewed by Srui |i4 with
aor. Bubjv., 1803; by opt., 1830,
1830; bjimper., 1836-1830; byfut.,
1917 : by r( oBr ci, and rf od vr. OOt.,
lose ; by fat. perf., 196T ; inf. in,
2013; aummary of fornu, 21&&;
Inlrod. by iwtl, 2244; dWd in,
3784 c

Commanding, vbe. of, w. gen., 1870 ; n.
dat., 1464 ; w. ace, 1466 ; w. dat. or
ace. and inf., 1466, 1906 x. ; in aor. to
denote a reeolation already formed,
1938 ; w. obj. dansea, 2210 a, 2218 ;
w. ^4, 2720.

Common, dial., see RoinA ; quantity,
146 ; gender, 198.

CompaiatlTe, compounds, 807 (1) b.
Conjunctions, 2TT0.
Degree, decl., 201, 208, 813;
forms, 313-824, 345, 1068 ;
contrast or oompar., 1066
alve, 1067 ; w. gen. or 4, 1060-1070
w. in, 1071, 2901 ; w./uXX» f, 1072
w. prep, phrase, 1073 ; omission of <
after wiJor (tX«»), (XaTj-oi. (>»<">*),
1074 ; 1 retained after r\in (r\tiw),
1074 ; adj. forms in place of adv.
vXAiF, etc., 1074 a; w. 4 and gen.,
1076; w. 4 (KiiTii, ^ uffTi (rarely fl
it), 1079, Z2M ; foil, positive, 1081 ;
standing alone, 1082; denoting ex-
ce«, 1082c; to soften an ezpresuon,
1082 d; tor Engl, pontile, 1083;
ttrengUiened by In, roXX^, etc.,
ftfiXXnf, Irif, Sror, 1084, 1586 ; dat
w., 1618; Bcc. w., 1611, 1686. See
Comparison.

Compare, Tbs. meaning, w. dat., 1466.

Comparison, of adjs., 813-824, 1063-
1008 ; of part., 323 ; of adrs., 346,
1068-1008; compendious, 107fi; w.
noun representing clause, 1077 ; re-
flex., 1078, 1093 ; proporUonal, 1079 ;
double, 1080, 322; gen. of, 1401-
1404; adje. of, w. gen., 1431-1434;

clauses of, 2462-2487. Soe Compara-
tive degree, etc.

Compendious comparison, 1076.

Compensatory lengthening, 37, 36, 00 d,
105, 242, 619, 644.

Complement, of vb., necessary and vol-
untary, 1461-1466 ; dli., 1460-1468 ; _
ind., 1469-1473, 1454. ^

Completed action vr. permanent result,
1862.

Complex sentences, 008 ; development,
2159-2161; syntax, 2178-2688; in
ind. disc., 2597-2613,3617-2621.

Complexive aorist, 1872.4, 1027, 2112 an.

Composite cases, 1279.

Compound, adjectives. In -wi, accent,
163 a; decl., 288-289; in >rot, sc-

alpha priv., gen. w., 1428.

Noons (subflCs. and adjs.), ac-
cent, 178 ; formation, 886-890 ;
mean., 896-899 ; detenninaUve, 896,
697 ; descripUvB determinative, 897
(1); copulative, 897 a ;conip., 807 b;
dependent determinative, 697 (2) ;
prepositional-phrase, 809.
Prepositions, 1649.
Sentences, 003 ; relation to sim-
ple and complex, 2150-2161 ; syntax,
2162-2172 ; in ind. disc., 2697-2600.

Substantives, accent, 236 o, 261 ; •
proper names, heterocliles, 282 a n.
Verbs, accent, 178, 423, 424 b,
426 ; place of aug. and redup., 449-
464; formation, 891, 892; gen. w.,
1882-1387, 1403; aco. w., 1384,
1408; datw., 1644-1660.

Compoands, defined, 827 ; rough breath-
ing In, 12; formation, S6»-S09; ac-
cent, 860 b, 898, 694; flectjonal,
879. See Compound adjectives, etc.

Conative, pree., 1878 ; imperf,, 1806.

Concealing, vba. of, w. two aocs., 1628.

Concentrative aoriat, 1927 a.

Conceasion, expreeeed by opt. In Horn.,
1810 ; by lny)er., 1849, 2164 ; by fut,
1017; by part, 2060, 2066, 2070,
2082, 2083, 23S2, 2733; by clause

780

BNGLISH INDEX

anteo. to <tXU, ST81 ft, 2782 ; by ^ir,
2761 a, 2904; by 7^2831. See Con-
ceaaive clniieeH.

ConcMSLve, clauses, 23fl»-2382, 2706 c ;
conjunce., 2T70, 2H03-29ie.

Concords, tbe, 02!> ; apparent violation
of, S2«i of subj. and pred., M9; of
pred. subsis,, 973-1)75; appoa. w.
noun or pron., 07S-980; of adjs.,
1020 ; of rel. pron., 2601-2602. See
Agreement.

Condemning, vbs. of, oonstr., 1876-1379,
1886.

Condilion, deuoted by port., 2000, 2007,
2070, 2087 a ; by Ami w. inf., 2208 ;
defined, 2280. See Conditional.

Conditional, clauses, mi w., 2286, 2706 o.
See Conditional sentences.
Conjunctions, 2283, 2770.
Relative clanses, assimilation of
mood in, 2185-21BS; tbe neg. w.,
2705 d.

Relative sentences, correspond-
ence between condit., temp., and
local sentences and, 2660, 2561 ;
Biniple pres. aod past, 2662-2563 ;
proa, and past unreal, 25<I4 ; vivid
fnt, 2666; leas vivid fut., 2566;
genera], 2667-2670 ; le9 'isual forms,
2671-267S.
* Sentences, treatment, 2280-2368 ;

classification, 2280-^2290 ; Uble of,
2297 ; simple pres.orpast, 2298-2301 ;
pres. and past unreal, 2302-2:]20 ;
fut, 2821-2334 ; general, 2335-2342,
aee General conditions ; dlBerent
forms of. In same sentence, 2343;
modiflcatioiis of prot., 2.144-2349;
of apod., 2350-2S62 ; prot. and apod,
combined, 2358-2364 ; less usual
combinations of complete prot. and
apod., 2355-2365 ; two ormore prots.
oc apods. in one sentence, 2866-2368.

Conflrmatoiy parllolee, 2774, 2787,
2800, 2803, 2953. 2966.

ConJQgatlon, defined, 190; of u-vbs.,
381-111, 602-624; of ^-vba., 412-
422, 717-743. See Inflection.

Con]aDCtions, accent, when elided, 174;

prodit., 170; co<irdinating, 2I6S;

subordinating, 2770.
ConneclJon, gen. ol, 1380, 1381; adJB.

, 1417.

Consecutive, coiijuncs., 2770 ; iif, 2846;

(dause, see Result clausea.
Considering, vbs.of, w. two aces,, 1613;

w. obj. clause, 2217.
Consonant, decl., of subets., 204, 240-

267 ; of adjs., 291-293 ; cons, and

vowel decl. of adjs., 294-299.

Verbs, defined, 376; conjug., 400-

411, 614-716.
Consonants, divtsloDB, 16-22; pronanc,

26; assimilation, 75 p, 77, 80 b, 81 d.

06, 98, 106 a; changes, 77-133;

doubling of, 78-81 ; w. cons„ 82-108 ;

w. vowdB, 109-117 ; final, 133 ; mov-
able, 134-137, 390.
Constituent parts, dat. of, 1608 c
ConstrucUo pra^nans, 1660, 3044.
Constraetloii according to sense (agroe-

ment), U26 a, 1013, 1014.
Contact of vowels, how avoided, 46.
Content, ace. of, 1664 a k. 1.
Contents, gen. of, 1823, 1324.
Contineuts, names of, use of article w..

Continuance, Imperf. of,

Continued action, 1852.

Contracted, adjectives, decl., 290.
Participles, decl., 310.
Substantives, 327, 2.36, 263, 266,
267, 268, 270, 273, 276.

Verbs, defined, 376 ; conjug., 366-
309; accent, 424 c; theumtic vowel,
460 a, 461 b ; pres, stem. 622, 611-
618 ; inflec, in pre*., 6.1o-067.

Contraction, 46, 48-68, 171, 172.

Contrast, pers.pron,expre«8edin, 1190;
airii in, 1194; preps, fn, 1668;
indicated by dXXit, 2778 ; by irip,
2801 ; by ii, 28S4 ; «( of balanced,
2885, 3886, 2888 ; eipreased in M^r
clauses, 2908-2916; marked by ^i-
roi, 2919; by row, 2024; in clauses
■w.Tt... Si, 2061. See Empbatic

ENGLISH INDEX

731

CoJinUiution, knd anbonllnalJOD, 21&9-

2101 ; tue, 2165-2107 ; in place of

■ubordination, 2168-2172.
Copulft, eiT, 918; omitied, 044, Qib.
CopulaUve, compounds, SOT (1} a; oon-

jonofc, 2163 A, 2884, 2836, 2868.
CorottlB,62.

CoiTGlat[Te, adTS., 840^ prons., 840.
Cost, gen. w. vba. slgnityliig, 13T2.
Countries, names of, gender, 190 b,
Ciasis, uiie, 46, Q2-tt9 ; effect, On accent,

ITS; ufrrh (Horn.), etc., 327 D;

airit, etc., 828 s.; irtpoi, Mrtper,

etc., S37.
Crime, gen. oi, 1376-1379, 18Bfi; ex-

preeaed b^ ace., 1386.
CuMomary action, eipresBed b; imperf.

or aor. indie, w. a>>, 1790 ; by iteta-

tive tonne W. ir in Hdt., 1792

by prea., 1876 ; imperf. of, 1893.

Danger, iinggeaUd by M w. eubjv., 1802
Dative ewe, origin ot uamo, 1400 a ; w
Tliiwfiiiii, Xayx^ni, 1376; w. advi.,
1440; as necessary and voluntary
compleinent, 1450-1466; generai
statement of nsea, 1467-1469; as
dir. compiemeot ot rb., 1460-1468,
1471-1473 ; acL, made nom. in pass.,
146H, 1656 a, 1746, 1748; as iiid.
oompiement of rb., 1469-1473; ol
interest, 1474-1494 ; of possessor,
1476-1430 ; of advantage or diead-
Tantage, 1481-1486; of feeiing (ethi-
cal dat.), 1486; t^ fiav^/iinf irrt,
etc, 1487 ; of agent, 1488^1404. 1758,
2149. 2, 2151, 2162; of reiation,
1495-1498 ; of reference, 1486 ; of the
observer, 1497 ; of port, expressing
lime, 14{I8 ; w. adjs. and advs., 1499-
1602, 1520, 1417, 1421, 1422, 1426,
1430; w. BDbsts., 1499^1602, 1510,
1629; insjTumenIa], 1603-1620; ot
Inatnunent or means, 1607, 1606,
1611, 1767 ; of price, 1608 a, 1372 a ;
w. Tbs. of jaiing, 1608 b, 1360 a;
of material and constituent part«,
1606 o; of standard of judgment,

1612 ; Of manner, 1613-1616, 1627 ;
of measure of difference, leift-ieie ;
of respect, 1616; ot cause, 1517-
1520, 1767 ; comltative, 1621-1520 ;
of association, 1628; of accompani-
ment, 1624, 1767; w. oArb,, 1626;
ol military accompaniment, 1626 ; of
accompanying circumstance, 1627;
of space, 1628 ; loc., 1630-1643 ; ot
place, 1531-1538; of lime, 1125 »,
1447, 1528, 1530-1543; w. vba. of
motion, 1532, 1475, 1486 ; w. com.
poond vba., 1644-1660; geneial fotce,
after prepa., 1658; w. prep., after
vb. of motion, 1650 a ; use, W. prepa.
(see under the various preps.); ot
artlc. Int., 20S3.

Dawea' canon, 2210.

Declarative oonjuncUone, 2770.

Defective, subat., 283 ; compar., of adjs.,
320.

Definite and indel. antec., 2505-2508 ;
article, see Article.

Degree, denoted by gen., 1326 ; by aoo.
and prep., 1687; by adverbial ace,
1600 : degree of difference, see MeaS'
ure of diSarence.

Deictic, article, 1120 c ; suffix, -I, 333 g.

Deities, names of, use of article w.,
1137, 1142 b.

Deliberation, expressed by ISu, xp9'

2630. See Deliberative.

Deliberatlve,fat., 1916, 2639; fut.,iiireL
ciausea, 2640-2550; qoestions, see
QnesUous; subjv., 1806-1808,2630;
subjv., bi rel. clanttes, 2546-2540.

Demanding, vbs. of, w.tno aces., 1628.

Deme-names, ioo.-dat. of, 15-34.

DemonstraUve, adverbs, 346, 2088.

Pronouns, deol., 338; aa rel,,
SS8 D ; rel. used as, 336 b, 1110 ; list,
340; d, 4, T«, as demons., 1000-1117,
832 a; attrib. position of article w.
pOHSeu. gen. of, 1163, 1184 ; position
of article w., 1176-1181; used as
tnibst. or adj., 1238 ; agr., 1230; use
of the variooB, 1340-1261.

732

ENGLISH INDEX

Denial, emphatic, ezprened by ou /ii)
with Bubjv., 1804, 2764, 2755 a ; by
oiifiii w. fut. indie, 1919, 27M, 2766 b.

Denominative, norda, deSned, 628 b,
829 ; Tbs., 372, 886-808, 802 ; subaU.,
suffixes torming, 840, 843-852, 850-
865; adjs., euffiioa forming, 857-866,

DenlAl verbs, 370 n., 406, 408, 409
506. 637, 546, 660, 687.

DeolalB, 16; before dentals, S3; before
fi, 86, 87 ; before r, 08, 241 b ; corre-
apondlngw. labials, 131; suffixes w.
863.

Denying, vbs. of, use of neg. w., 2730-
2744.

Dependent, clansea, see Subordinate
clBuaes ; determinative compounds,
807 (2) ; Btal«inenta, 26T5-2588.

DepoDenta, defined, 356 c ; prtn. parts,
370 ; of -^u vbs., 726 ; w. act. forms,
801 ; act. vbs. w. dep. fut., 801, 806 ;
mid., 368 0, 810, 813 c, 1729, 1730 ;
pass., 368 c, 811, 812 ; n. pass. mean.
813, 1742 a.

Depriving, vbs. of, w. gen., 1394 [ w.
dat., 1483 ; w. tno aces., 1626.

DeacripUon, imperf. of, 1808, 1809.

Descriptive, Etppos., 087 ; detenuin&tJve
compounds, 697 (1).

Deaiderativea, formation, 808.

Desiring, vbs, of, w. gen., 1340; w.
inf., I860, 1991-1990, 2719 ; w. obj.
Clause, 1096, 2210, 2218; other
conatr. w., 1095; w. wij, 2720; w.
o6, 2721 ; adjs. of, w. gen., 1416.

Detecting, vbs. of, w. part., 2113, 2114.

Determinative compounds, 895-807.

Development, of vowels, S6 b, 42 ; ot
cons.. 130.

Diaeresis, 8, 8 d.

Diidects, Intr. C-F.

Diaporesis, 3014.

Differing, vbs. of. w. gen., 1401,

DIgamma, Intr. C, w. 4, 3, 37 d, 1 , 72 n,
122, 123, 132 D, 146 d, 347 d 3;
oDittted ininflec. of nouns and adja.,
267, 270, 274, 278, 207 ; in prons.,
S26 D 4, 326 ; as numer»t, 347, 348 ;

lost, in T\m^ SOT b, 603, 634 b ; ^

fi, suft, S59. 7 ; far, snff., 861. 10;

f«r,suS., 861.21 ; f(tT,sufl.,86SaSl
DiminuUves, inior, neat., 19Tb, lOOd;

Bofflzes forming, 862-866, 858. S, 10,

861. 19, 862, 863 b 16, 864. 2, 3;

mean., 855, 866.
Diphthongs, 6 ; improper, 6 ; geuiiine

and spurious, 6, 26, 64, 69 ; pronnnc,

26 ; contraction, 48, 62-66, 69 ; ayni-

lesis, 60, 61 ; crssls, 62-60 ; ahort-

ened, 148 d ; -«( and -m, 169, 427 ;

stems in, 276; aug., 436-437.
Direct, complement, 1460-1468.

Discourse, defined, 2600; Sn w.,

2690 a.

Exclamatory sentences, S081-

2084.

Interrogative. See InlerragotiTe.
Object, In ace., 019, 1663, 1706 ;

internal and external, 1564 ; otocL,

becomes subj. of pass., 1566, 1743;

of mid. voice, 1716-1722 ; of act. »-

tajoed in pass., 1748.

Reaexive middle, 1717. 171S,lT3a
Reflexives, 1218-1224, 1228 >. 8.
DUadvantage, dat. of, 1481-1486.
Disappearance, ot vowels, 43, 44; of

spirants, 118-123 ; of cons., 120 b.
Disjunctive particlee, 2163 c, 2862, 2866.
Displeasing, vbs. of, w. dat., 1461.
Disputing, vba. of, w. gen., 1400.
Dissimilation, 129.
Distinction, gen. of, 1101-1404; ad)i.

of, w. gen., 1430.
Distraction of vowels, 646,
Distributive, appoe., 081 ; sing., SOS ; pi.,

096, 1004 ; article, 1120 1.
Distributives, place how sn[q)lied, 364 0.
Divided whole, gen. of, 928 b, 964,

1086 a, 1189, 1161 d, 1171, IS06-131II.
Dividing, vbs. of, w, two aces., 1620.
Diviuon, adva. of , 364 g. .
Doric dial., Intr. C, D; conlz. vbs. in,

653 ; fut., 640, 669.
Doubling ot coDsonauts, T8-S1, 420 a,

442 b, 6S4 D h, 644 D ; in pronunc.
146 n.

ENGLISH INDEX

788

Donbtfnl, UMrtlon, expreised b; pna.
aabjv. w. ^4, 1601; negation, ex-
presBedbjpres.aubJT. n.M^B^i 1801.

Doabting, vbs. of, w. At, hi, and redun-
dant neg., 2T43.

Drinking, vbs. of, w. gen., 1366.

Dual, rare, 1Q6, 9eB ; two fomia, 202 ;
dIaL, 214 D, 2.tO D ; third decl., dat.,
260 ; Id adja., 287 b ; in article and
proiiH., 332 b, S33 f, 838 a i first pen.
supplied b; pi., 304 aj eabj., w. vb.
in pi., 964-857 ; yb., w. subj. fn pi.,
962 ; vb., w. two subjs. in sing., 904 ;
Tb., w, pi. part., 1046 ; part, w. pi.
vb., 1046 ; aubj., followed by pL adj.
or part., 1046.

Duty, Imperf. of vba. of, Vi06.

Eating, Tbs. of, w. gen., 1366.

Effecting, vbB, of, w. aoc, 1679.

RBort, TbB. of, w. obj. clauaea, 2207-
2219.

Elision, 46, 47, TO-76 ; Inverse, 76;
effect, on accent, 1T4.

Ellipse, of aug., 488, 496 ; of rednp.,
43S D ; of r In vbs., 491 ; of sut^.,
029-986, 937 ; of vb., 044-948 ; of
sabst., 1027-1029, 1168, 1801, 1802,
1672 ; of adj. w. tui\>tor, 1060 a ; of ar-
ticle, 1126-1162, 1207 ; of pers. pron.,
1 190 ; of possess, or reflex, pron.,1 199,
2 v. ; h, tit w. gen., 1802 ; In phrasee
w. in, 1496 a, 1497, 2008; of name
of deity, in oaths, 1696 c ; of vb.,
leaving elliptical ace., 1609 ; of
preps., 1667-1873, 2460, 2619; of
vb., leaving dr, At Ar, &rrtp it tt,
1766, 2087 a, 2478-2479 ; of a., 1767 ;
of vb. like Bit, tCx'/uLi, leaving inf.
w. sobj. ace, 2013 c, 2014 ; of fir,
2116-3110 ; of part., 2147 k ; of prino.
clause, 2204, 2213 ; of vb, of prot.,
2346, 2340 ; of prot., 2349 ; of vb.
of apod., 2861 ; of apod., 2362 ; in
comp. els., 2464, 2466, 2478-2467;
of demona anteo. to Saif, 2470 ; of
anteo. of rel., 2494 a, 2600-2610 ; in
Irai ^fi'fwi, 24&T b ; of rel., or de-

mons, standing for rel., 2617, S618 ;
of vb. ol rel. cl., 2620 ; of main vb.
before reL cl., 2520 ; case of rel. w.
omitted antec., 2629-2632; in oMeii

font od, 2634 ; I^Xor hi, etc., 2686 ;
[fn t1, dtt tI , Sti rf , 2644 a ; Interrog.
as pred. adj., 2047 ; in dXXo n 4
and dXXo TI, 2062 ; in «i4 (ofx) >ti,
'^ C/iii) i'ui, ("J rl y,, 2703 ; In
a ri ,i)f, &rg> ^yf, 2705 ; In ;ii»r oi,
taar ot, 2766 ; in ai >ij)v dXXd (Tdp,
lilrTOi), 2707; oi^kr i.W <|, 2778 ;
aiiit i\\a If, 2TT8 n ; vrith iXX' oliti,
2780 ; explains some uses of ydp,
2804 ; marked by yi, 282T ; ot ace.
w. ltd, 1606 c, 2894 ; of fi/r, 2906,
2900 ; of », 2911 ; of oDrr. 2943 ; )(
biachylogy, 3017 a ; defined, S022
See Aposiopesis, Brschyiogy,

Elliptical accusative, 1690.

Emotion, vbs. of, w, gen., 1406, 1618;
w.dat, 161T ; w. irl and dat., 1618 ;
w. ace., 1596 ; w. part, 2100,2.)87 j
vr. Sti or ill, 2100, 2248, 2677, 2687 ;
w. tt, 2247 ; w. ace. and inf., 2687
b; ezclam. cl., 208T.

Emotional fnture conditions, 2828.

Emphatic, enclit, 187 a; prona., S26,
IIHO, 1192, 1204, 1200, 1209, 123*-
1237, 2G18 ; -i, 833 g ; poaltloQ of
voe., 1265 ; repetition of a, 1286;
nse of tmesis, 1650 ; repetition of
prep., IDOT, iSTO ; act voice and ro-
Bez. pron. for mid. voice, 1723 a ;
mid. voice w, refiei. pron., 1724;
position of it, 1704 ; repetition ot
dr, 1706; ou f»f, 1919, 2764; subj.
of inf., 1074 ; reflex, pron. w. part,,
2069 b ; parts, cottrdinated, 2147 f ;
verbal adjs., 2160 ; posicion of ap-
poB. to antec. In rel. cl., 2li!iti ; posi-
tion of Du and lOj, 2690 ; repeUUou
ot neg., 2702. See Intensive.

Empiric, aor., 1930 ; pert., 1948.

Emptying, vbs. of, w. gen., 1396.

Enallage, 3028.

Enclitics, the, 181. 181 o, 826, 326 s,
U, 831 i>, 1196 ; accent on pieced-

784

ENGLISH INDEX

ing word, lBS-186 ; sueccMive, IBfi ;
atendofoompouiids, ISO; accent, re-
tained, 1B7; -vi/>, 8Sec; rt, 338 d ;
proiu., 340; advs., 346; Tb. forma,
424 a, TS4.

Endings, and stem, ISl ; case, of
nouM, 210 ; adje. of three, 286, 294 ;
«d^. of two, 288, 2U1, 426 c h. ; adjs.
of one, 312; of oompar., 313-818;
of place, 342 ; of maauer, 343; rari-
ooe, 344 ; of vba., 306, 462-468; of
Inf., part., and verbal adj., 460-473.
See Inflection.

Enduring, Tbs. of, w. part., 2098.

Enjoining, vba. of. In pass., 1748a.

Enjoying, vte. of, w. gen., 1866.

Entreating, Tbs. of, w. obj. el., 2210 a,
2218.

Entreaty, ezpreaaed by imper., 1B36.

Entrueling, vba. of. In pass., 1748 a ; w.
inf, 2009.

Envying, 7bs. of, w. gen., 1406 ; w. dal.,
1461.

Epanalepaia, 3010.

Epanaphora, 3010.

Epanaatropbe, 3011,

Epentbesla, 111.

Epic dialect, Intr. D.

Epistolary tenses, 1004, 1042.

Ethical daUve, 1486.

Eupheuiam, 3024.

Enphony, of Towela, 40-76 ; <^ conas.,
77-182, 409.

Exchange of quantity, see Transfer.

Exchanging, rbs. of, conatr., 1872.

Exclamations, oCroi in, 1248 ; voc. in,
1283, 2682, 2684 ; nom. in, 1288,
2684; gen. In, 1407, 2684; tuf. In,
2016, 2036, S6B3 ; artlc in& hi, 2086 ;
form complete or incomplete sent.,
2168; dependent, 2676. 4; wt in.

Exclamatory

Execrations, 1814 b.

Exhortation, axpreeeed by subjv., 1707,
1798 ; by opL, 1820, 1830 ; by Imper.,
laSfl, 1836 ; by du ir. f uU, 1918 ; by
Srm or 9rM (nf w. fuU, 1920, 2213;

OK iw ^Mwi, 9090 e ; ■

fomiH in, 215fi ; dXU In, S7S4 c
Exhorting, t)m. of, u^e of impert,

18U1; V. obj. cL, 2210 a, 2218 ; n.

^•f, 2720.
Expectation, Implied ir. Im, 2420.
Expecting, vba. of, w. fut., aor., or

pres. inf., 1868, 190B, 2024 ; f>4,

2725.
Experience, adjo. of, it. gen., 1419.
Explanation, gen. of, 1822.
Explanatory appoa. ,988-090 ; ydp, 2808,

2609, 2811 V
Extent, ace. of, 1580-1687, 1633; gen.

of, see Meaaure.
External object, 1664 b, 1666; uses,

1690-1699, 1018-1633.

Fuiing, TtiB. of, w. gen., 1892.
Famtltea, namea of, article w., 1138.
Fear, expressed by fui W. mbJT., 1802 ;

nffi' 1^1 In ezpTBBslons of, 2682 d.
Fearing, vba. of, w, obj. cl., 2207, 2221-

2233 ; other constr., 2284-2239.
Feeling, dat. of, 1486.
FesUvalH, names of, article n., 1 137 ; in

dat. of time, 1541.
Filling, vba. of, w. gen. and ace., 136lt ;

w. dat., 1603 b.
Final, clauses, assimilation of mood in,

2186 c, 2186 c; denote purpiise,

2193; particles Introducing, 2im;

origin, 2194 ; iu appofl. to to^ov f km

or i^t relht, 2196 ; moods in, 2196-

2203, 2206 ; dr in, 2201-2202 ; prin-

dpal cl. omitted, 2204 ; equiv., 2206 ;

connection, w. obj. ct.,2208; reL cL,

2561 ; fii) W., 2706 a.
Conjunctions, 2770.
Consonants, 138.
Finding, vbs. of, w. part., 2113, 2114.
Finite moods, 367.
Fitness, adjs. 3f, 858. 0, 9 ; w. gen.,

1418; vbs. of, w. Inf., 2000; adja.,

advs., and subets. of, w. inf., 2001-

2007.
Forbidding, vbs. at, w. obj. cl., 2210 a,

2218 ; use of negs. w., 2739^741.

ENGLISH INDEX

785

Foretell b; oncle, vbs. signifying, w.
pre*, oraor. Inf., 1870.

Forgetting, vbs. of, gen. if., 1SG6-136B ;
ace. w., 1368 ; w. pan., 2106.

Formation, of tenBe-sysMms, 474-001,
717-748; of woids, 8:f2-S99; of
mbiu^ 888-866] ol adja., 867,
868.

Fractions, 863.

Freqnentattvea, formation, 867.

PriendtineBH, vba. of, v. dat, 1461.

Fulness, adjs., funnatlon, 868. S, 16 ; w.
gen., 1422.

Future condlUonal relalivea, 2{iO&-J666.

Future coiiditionB, 2321-2834.

Fntore perfect tenw, 860, 868 b ; pri-
mary, 360, 1868 ; rednp. Id, of com-
pletAd acUon, 480 ; force. 1861, 1862,
1868, 1066-1068 ; pert, for, I960.
Aotive, 584, 600, 660 a.
PasHive, 869, 680-683; periph.,
601 ; InOeo , 669 a.

Future tense, 860 ; primary, 360, 1868 ;
first and sec., 361; fonnations by
analogy, 616 ; ful. indlc. and aor.
subiv. Identical, 632, 641 a, 067 d;
AtL, 638, 689, 646, 810 ; Bor., 640 1
w.pies.form, 641 ;force, 1861-1868.
Active, system, 466, 632-641 ;
inaec., 868-602, 754.

Middle, inflec, 668-682, 764; w,
act mean., 801, 806, 806, 1728 a,
1729 a, b; w. pass, mean., 802,
807-809, 1716, 1787, 1738; ps^,
1738.

Paaaive, first, 689, 663, 064.
Passive, second, 697, 663, 664.
Indicative, w. 2v, 1T93 ; pres. for,
18T0 ; fut. action, 1010 ; two, some
vbs. w., 1911 ; thaU and wUl, 1912;
wbere English has prea., 191S ; with-
out reference to fut. act, 1913 a ;
Djodest form of statement, 1913 a;
gijomic. 1914 ; for pres., 1916; ddlb.,
see Uelltieratlve future ; jossive,
1917-1921, '2709 a, 2766; aor. for,
1934; fut. perf. for, 1968; periph.,
1969; after Swui (rarely after in.

i^pB, and /lit), 1° purpose cl., 2203 ;
In obi. cl., 2211-2220 ; after Srui and
Svut /i4 ff. no prlnc. cl., 2213, 1920 ;
after fnf w. vbe. at f tar and caution,
2229 ; after Itui fn) w. vbe. of Jaar
and tatition, 2281 ; after i^ ^ and
m ifri, 2279; in pres, condlt of
pret. fntentfoR, 2801 ; in apod, of
vivid fut. condlt., 2323, 2320 ; in prot
of vivid fut. form, 2327 c, 2328 ; f<dl.
prot. and apod, combined, 2363 ; in
apod, of oondlt, of type tl w. opl.,
2360, 2861 ; in temp. cl. referriog to
def. fut. time, 2398 ; In princ. cL to
fut. temp. ol. n, subjv., 2401; in
princ. ct. to fut. temp. cl. w. opt.,
2407 ; delib., in tel. cl., 2&49-.2e61 ;
in final rel. cl., 2564 ; in rel. cl. to ex-
press intended reeult, 2668 ; In rel.
cL denoting what is to be expected
of the eub}., 2669 ; of pres. intention
or necessity, in condit. rel. cl., 2603 ;
in fut. condiL rel. cl., 2666 a; in
main cL of condit. rel. sent., 2666
and b ; w. git /t^, eipresaing emphatic
denial, 2765 b. See Indicative.

Optative, where used, 1862 b,
1863 c ; w. vbs. of ^nrl afl«r trut,
2211-2212 ; w. vbe. of commaaditig,
eta., after Srtn, 2218 ; in ind. disc.,
2287,2331 ; in*.a,cl.,2427N. ; w.vbs.
of/earfn; after (1^, 2229a; w. vbs. of
fearing aFter Srut inf, 2231 ; in reL
cL of purpose, 2664 a. See Optative.

Infinitive, w, ir, 1847; when
atresB is laid on idea of futurity,
1866 d; cbiefiy found In ind. disc.,
1800 c, 18(17 c ; w. vbs. of hoping,
txptetiug, etu., 18U8, 1B99, 2024; w.
vbs. of will and desire, 1869, 1998 ;
W. /lAXu, 1069 ; after Sunt, 2261,
2269. See Infinitive.

Participle, of liquid vlw., decl.,
310 ; w. ir. 1847 ; chiefly voluntative,
1872; in Ind. disc., 1874; denoting
purpose, 2009, 2060, 2066; genent
force, 2044 ; in w., 8086 c. Bee Par-

7S6

ENGLISH INDEX

0«ader, 196-300 ; ot flnt decl. , 21 1 1 of
sec. dec!., 228, 282; of third deel.,
25&i different Id sing, and pi., 281 ;
agr. of adj. iu, 02G, 1020 ; agr. of
pred. Bubst. in, 071 ; peculioritiea In
use, 101.1-1016; agr. of pred. adj.
aod part, in, 1014-1069; agi. of rel.
pton. in, 2601, 2602. See Agree-

QeDeral, condiUona, 220^2207, 2303,
2321, 2S36-2S42, .2369, 2860; cou-
dll. reL cl., 2667-2670.

Truth, praa. of, 1677 ; expressed
by fut., 1614 ; by aor., 1981 ; by
perf., IMS.

Generio article, the, HIS, 1122-1124;
omitted, 1126.

Oanitire cue, general statement of uses,
1280 ; in appos. w. posaeag. proa, or
adj., 9TT, 1)76; after comp., 1069-
1078 ; attrib., position, 1161 ; of
ptons,, w. article, poaition, 1163,
1171, 11S4, 1186; w. subsls. (ad<
nominal gen.), 1290-1206 ; of pones-
BloD or belonging, 1297-1306, 1390,
1411 b ; gen. of possession and dat.
of poBseasor, 1480 ; of origin, 1208 ;
of divided whole (partitJTe), 1300-
1319, 028 b, 984, 1086 a, 1189, 1101 d,
1171; cborograpbic, 1311; as nibj.
of Tb., 1316; of qnality, 1320, 1321;
of explanation (appos. gen.), 1322 ;
of material or contanta, 1823, 1824 ;
of measure, 1S2,'>-1327; fubjecUve
and objective, 1328-1336; of valae,
1330, 1387 ; two. w. one noun, 13SS ;
w. Tbe., general statement of nae,
1339, 1340 ; of act. construction made
nom. of pass., 1340, 1666 a, 1T4G,
1748 ; partitive, w. vbs., 1841-1371 ;
w. vbs. of sharing, 1348 ; w. tIm.
signifying to touch, makt trial
of, 1345, 1340, to beuteh, 1847, to
btffin, 1848, to aim at, daire, 1349,
to reacA, obtain, 1360, 1861, Co mU*,
1852, (o approach and m«et, 1863,
to tmell, 1864, to etkfoy, etc.. 1366,
to remembtr, etc., 18M-I300, to

htar and perceive, 1S61-1S98, to/{I.
be full of, 1360 ; of actual soonf ,
13t>4 ; w. vba. of ntliitg, eommaH4ing,
leading, 1310, 1371 ; of price and
value, 1372-1374, 1879 ; of crime and
accountability, 137fr-1370, 1386 ; i>f
connection, 1360, 1361 ; W. com-
pound rba., 1382-1387; of penuD.
dependent on ace., 1388 ; origiB ul
gen. dependent on vb., 1389 ; abla-
tival, 1301-1411, 1348 b, 1361, 1862;
of separation, 1392-1400 ; of diaUnc-
Uon and of compar., I40I-14O4 ; of
cause, 1406-1409, 1373 a, 2864; of
purpoae, 1408 ; w. vbe. of ditpitH»g.
1400; of Mocce, 1410, 1411 ; w.m)}!..
1412-1436, 1629 ; of relation, 1428 ;
w. advs., 1487-1443; of tioie and
place, 1444-1440, 1543; w. imp. to
expi«fB agent, 1491-1494, 1678, 175.i,
Bee Agent ; general force after pt«p«..
1968 ; w. prep, to expteM ioatraiDent,
1766 ; of artjc. int. 3032 ; abMdat*-.
3032 f, 2068, 2070-2076. See imder
separate prepe.

QentUes, mitl. fomdng, 844, 860. 6.
861. 11, 803 a 2, b 12, 864. 1.

Oeograpbical names, artide w„ 1142 c.

Giving, vbe. of, w. Inf., 2009.

Gnomic, Bor, 1931,2838, 2687 a; foL.
1914 ; perf., 1948.

Going, vbe. of, use of impeif. ol,
1801.

Gradation, quantilatiTe Towel, 17, 473 ;
qualitative vowel, 36, 86 ; in tUtd
decl. of HQtwts., 268, 982; in *b«..
873, 476^84, 622 ; stem. In tec
peri., 678 ; stem. In fu-vbe., 73&-T43 ;
in Ban., 833 e. See Change.

Grlering, vba. of, w. gen., 1406; w.
part, 2100, 2687 ; w. Sri or in, 2100.
2677, 2687.

Haplology, 129 c
Hating, vbe. of, w. gen.. 1406.
Bearing, vbs. of, c«Ma w., 1301-1308.
w. pres. of past and prei. combined.

issea; w. part., 2110-2112, ssee ( :

ENGLISH INDEX

737

W. Srt or in, 2110, 2602 c ; w. iuf.,

2693 0.
Hearing from, vba. of, coDstr. w., 1364,

1411; beuioKof, 1305.
Helping, vba. of, w. dat., 1401.
HendiodjB, S02&.
Heteroclites, 282.

Hiatus, where allowed, 40, 47, 47 d.
Hindering, Tbs. of, coiutr. of lat. w.,

2036 i use of negs. w., 2739.^744,

27u0bH.&nd d.
Hlitorical tenaea, 860, 1863.
HomoioUleulon, 3020.
Hope, implied In fm cl., 2420.
Hoping, vbe. of, w, tut., aor., or pres.

Inf., 1868, 1906, 2024 ; w. nH, 272&,

2720 a.
Hortatory BubjunotiTS, 1797-1790.
HoaUlity, vbs. of, w. dai., 1461.
HypaUage, 3027.
Hyperbaton, 3028.
Hypbaeresis, 44 a.
Ilypophora. 28]9 a v., 3039.
Hysteron ProUron, 8030.

Impatience, expressed by probib., 1841
b ; Bffi' <^i in BzpreaiionB of, 2682 d.

Imperative, 367, 369, 1760 ; persona,
364 ; accent, 424 b, 420 b, c ; endings,
460 ; pres., 631, 761 ; first aor. act.
and mid., 060 ; first and sec. aor.
pus., 070, 126 b, c ; sec. aor. acL
and mid., 084, 759 ; first and sec.
perf. act, 382, 007, 698, 706 ; perf.
mid. and pass., perf. peripb., 699 g,
897, 712-714,

In commands and probibs., 1836-
1844 ; hypothetical, l&W ; in aubord.
Cl., 1842, 1843 ; force of tenses, 1804 ;
fat. perf, w. force of, 1957 ; inf. used
for, 2013 ; after Ovr,, 2276 ; in apod.,
2287 ; in apod, of simple pres. or
paat conditB., 2300 f, 2367, of more
Tlvid tuU condita., 2320 e, 2-367, of
emotional fut. condita., 2328, 2:i57.
of condita. of type tl w. opt., 2369.
2364 ; in rel. cl., 2646 t, 2663 ; In
lad. diac., 2012 ; ^ w., 2709 ; >•) W.,

2843 a

KtU w.,3878; >4r w., 2996 ;
oinSr w., 2962; «' oSr w., 2069;
Tdiwr w., 2087.

ImperaUve optative, 1820.

Imperfect tense, 360; second., 1668,
iterative, 406, 1790, 1891, 2341;
inflec., 627, 631, 036, 047-667, 748.
In unfulfilled obligation, 1774-
1779, 1005, 2313-2317 ; in unattain-
able wlab, 1780 ; w. dr in past potent,
1784; to denote unreality, 1780-
1788 ; w. <r to eipreaa customary or
repealed action, 1790, 1804, 2341 ;
force, 1861-1862, 1866, 1880-1000;
of continuance, 1800-1892 ; of ena-
ternary action, 1803 ; conative, 1895 ;
of resUtance or refusal, 1890, 1897 ;
of deBcriptioD, 1808, 1800 ; incboa-
Uve, 1900 ; for pres., 1901 ; of ttnth
just recognlied, 1002; of topics
preTioualy discussed, 1903; episto-
lary, 1904, 1942 ; »ti, ixp^t, 1006 ;
for plup., 1906 ; in subord. els., 1907 ;
)( aor., 663, 1008, 1900 ; in unreal
condlts., 2304, 2307^2311 ; in unreal
condila. witboot If, 2313-2320, 1006 ;
in apod, to past general condlts.,
2340-2342 ; in ptot. of indie, form
of past general condlts., 2342 ; in
prino. cl. of temp, sentence of indef.
frequency, 2414; in (wt cl., 2422,
2426 ; after rpl,, 2434, 2441 a ; after
Sanp il, Strtfi a* (I, 2478 ; in main
oL of paat general condlt. sent.,
2666 ; in paat genei«l condit rel. cl.,
2660 a; generally retained in Ind.
diao., 2690, 2603, 2620, 2023 b.

Impersonal verbs, tbeir aubj., 005, 032-
036 ; cases with, 1467 ; pass., rire,
1746; forms, from intr., 1761; ace.
absolute w., 2060, 2070-2078. See
Quaai-i mpersonal.

ImpersoDal and peraooal constr., w. inf.,
1982, 1938; of verbal adja., 2U0-
2162.

Impreoationa, dXXd in, 8764 d. See
Oaths.

Inceptive class of pres. sterna, 620-628.

788

ENGLISH INDEX

InchoatiTe, pree. fltems, 626-628; im-
pert., 1900.

Incorporaiion, 2532, 2536-2638.

ladeclineible, nouns, 19t) d, 2B4 ; !(?»,
rarely, 836; aamerala, 347 v 2,
849 g, 340 D, S60; x^, 793.

Indefinite, adverba, 181 b, 346.

And definlu luitece., 2506-2608.
Article, place sometlmeH iiippUed
by Tit, 1118 ft.

Pronouna, 181 b, S34-.^0 ; uaet,
1266-1270 ; in Ind. qaeHtioDH, 26S3-
2674, 389 f.

Independent, nom., 940 ; aubjT., 1705-
181 1.

Indicative mood, 367, 359, 1760; end-
ings, 360 b ; prea. and impart,, 627,
628, 636, 747, 748 ; fut. act. and
mid. and fill, perf., 658, 069, 764 ;
lut. paas., 663, 664, T54 ; flrat aor.
act. and mid., 665, 666, 765 ; first
and sec. aor. pass., 672, 673; sec,
aor. act., 682, 766 ; first and sec.
perf. act. and plap., 689, 690, 702-
706, 762 ; perf. and plup. mid. and
pass., 700, 707. 767.

In simple sent., without ir, 1770-
1783; of unfulfiUed obligation ei-
preaaed by, 1774-1TT9 ; unattainable
wish expresaed by, 1780-1782; in
other than simple sent., 1783; in
simple sent., w. ir, 1784-1TU4. 2349;
anreal, 1786-1789 ; Iterative, 1790-
1792; tenses, tlieir use, 1876-1966,
see Present, etc. ; assimilation to,
2186, 2205 ; In purpose cl. w. Srtn,
etc., 2203 ; In obj. cia. after vbs. of
efort, 2211-2213, 2218, 2-219; s:fter
Tbs. of /faring and caution, 2220,
2229, 2231 , 22:M ; In causal els., 2241-
2243; in result els., w. Shtti (ur),
2261-2269, 2273-2278 ; after ««' .f,
ill ifrt, 2279; in simple pres. or
paat couditfi., 2208-2301 ; In prea. or
past unreal condils., 2S02-2.S20 ; in
fut. condJU., 2323-2.^28 ; in general
condits., 2336-2:142 ; as apod, to prot.
and apod, combined, 2363 ; in apod.

of coadits. of tfpe tl tt. opL, 2359-
2-362 ; In temp. cla. , 2BM-2S98, 2406,
2413, 2417, 242S, 2426 ; w. rplr, 2430-
3442 ; V. rph-epor 4, 2468 ; W. rplr i,
2460 ; ordinary una, in rel. da., 2646 ;
in ordinary rel. cla., 2668 ; in conuc
rel. cla., 2666, 2557 ; In reL cla. to
express Intended raault, 2668 ; in
rel. cla. denoting what la to be ex-
pected of the sutg., 256ft; In aimple
pres. or past condiL reL cla., 2562,
2553 ; In general oondlL nj. cla,
2509^672 ; In ind. disc, 2690-2616,
261T-2621, 2623, 2624, 2620 a; in
dir. questions, 2602 a ; In ind. qoea-
Uons, 2677-2679; in exctam. senL,
2688 ; ei w., 2703-2706 ; *nf and ^4
oS •»., 2762.

Indignation, Inf. in ezclama. of, 201G;
questions expressing. Introduced bj
rfra Cic{Ta), twttra (iriiHTa), M5S;
marked by yip in questions, 2805 a :
by Sol, 2648 ; by ml before intenog.
word, 2872.

Indirect, complement (object), 920,
1464, 1469-1473.

Discourse, tenses of opt. In, 18(12,
1863 ; inf. in, 1866, 1B07, 2016-a»4.
2676,2579.2680,2618, 2617 ; fut inf.
in, after Tbs. of hoping, expeetliig.
etc., 1868, 1999, 2024 ; fut. Inl in.
after vbe. of wUllHff and tletirinf,
1880 ; part, in, 1874, 2092, 20S3, SIOS-
214S, 2576, 2616, 2617 ; conatr. w.
vbs. of saving and thinking, 2016-
2022, 2577. 2679, 2580, 2689, 259S ;
w. vbs. of perceiving, 2018, 2110-
2112,2577,2602; neg. of, 2030, 2608.
2710 ; inf. w. a* in, 2023 ; conAr
w. Tbs. of knowing and abowfaf.
2106-2109, 2577, 2592 ; w, vba. of
^ndfn^, 2113. 2114; omission of fir
in, 2119 ; in w. part. In, 2120-2122 ;
vbs, which take either part, or Inf .
2123-2145, 86B2 ; w. in (rarely «**>)
after vbs. of fearing, 2235 ; A«n cl.
In, 2269, 2270; cla. w. rplr in.
3440, 2448. 2440 ; Introduced by hi.

ENGLISH INDEX

789

in, etc., 2676-2688, 2017, 2018, 2110,
2123, 2614, 2015, 2«1T ; defined, 2&01 ;
implied, 2603, 2622; speaker's awn
words or thoughts ma; be slated in,
26M ; els. in, &re But»t. els., 2506 ;
general principles, 2607-2613 ; simple
Hnt. in, 2597-2600, 2614-^2616; com-
plex sent, in, 2601-2606, 2617-2621 ;
Imper. In, 2012, 2633 ; past tenses in,
2823; inserted statement of fact,
2624 ; opt. w. or without in regu-
larly ret&ined after fri (^i), 2625 ;
opt. w. dv representing subJT. w. it,
2626 ; opt. after primary tense,
S827 ; passing into Inf. from in
(in) oonatr., 262B ; passing from inf.,

2628 aj pandng into part., 2628 b;
indep. opt. in, 2629 ; indep. indie, in,

2629 a; int. following sent, involih
tng Idea of ind. disc., 2630 ; int. in
temp, or rel. cl., 2631 ; mood of dir.
form oaed in same sentence w. mood
of ind., 2082 ; idea of imper., etc., set
fortb in inf., 2683, 2634.

Exclamatory sentences, 2686-
288T.

Interrogstives, 330 f, 340, 34S,
1263, 2668-^2674.

Reflexive mid., lTI»-n22, 1730.

Reflexives, 1225-1220, 11114,1106.

Inference, suggested by potent, opt.,

2300 e ; marked by ipn, 2T00 ; by

Si}, 2840; byS^a, 2861.

Inferential particles, 2163 n, 2774, 2787,

2926, 2062, 2053, 2955.
Intei^or to, vbs. signifying, w. gen.,

1402.
InfinlUve, 367, 350 ; verbal noon, 3G8,
1760; accent, 425 a, 42B d ; endings,
469 ; preB., 632, 632 d, 752 ; fut. act.
and mid., 661 ; fnt. pass., 663, 604;
Brat aor. act. and mid., 670 ; first and

, 677;

:. act,.

686, 760 ; first and sec. perf. act.,
609, 702, 766 ; periph. perf., 600 h ;
pert. mid. and pass., 715.

History, 368. 1 n. 469 k. 2, 870,
1478 a, 1960; subj., In aoo., 036;

omission of snbj. , 937 ; prod. adj. be-
longing to omitted sul^., 1060-1062 ;
i)ti, ci, not iiMvrir, vmvrir, as sabj.,

1223 ; limiting mean, of adj., la act.
where Eng. nsea pass., 1712 ; w. Ar,
184G~1&40, 2023 ; not in ind. disc.,
force of tenses, 1866 ; in ind. disc.,
force of tenses, 1866, 1867, 2019,
2S96 ; w. Tbs. of hoping, expecting,
etc., 1866, 1i)00, 2024 ; ill part vb.,
in part subat., 10Ga-lt»70 ; mean, of
the word, 1066 b ; uses, 1U70 ; neg.
of, 1DT1 ; subj. and pred. noun n.,
1072-1031 ; origin of constr. of ace
w. Inf., 1031 ; pers. and impers.
constr. w,, 1082, 1083, 2017 b ; with-
oat article, 1084-2024 ; a« subj.,
1984, 1985 ; ss pred., 1086 ; aa ap-
pos., 1087; as obj., 19BB-2024; after
vbs. of aill or desire, 1001-1009,
1869 ; after other vbs., 2000 ; after
adjs., advs., and aubats., 2001-2007,
2407 ; w. or without Ovrt or in,
after compar. and 4, 2007 ; of pur-
pose and result, 200B-2011 ; absolute,
2012; in comaiouds, 2013, 2326 e;
in wishes, 2014 ; in eiclams., 2016,
2036, 26S-1 ; in ind. disc., 2016-2023,
2579, 2580, 2f*0, 2692 a; w. vbs.
of knowing, perceiving, etc., 2018 a,
2602 c ; see Articular infinitive ; vbs.
which take either part, or inf., 2128-
2U5, 2,^82 ; w. vlDS. of ftanng, 2288;
in result els., 2261-2272; w. iip' 4
and V ^Tt, 2279 ; w. or without ir,
for apod., 2-'J60 ; w. rpU, 2430-2440,
2463-2457 ; w. rpbripo^ 4, etc., 246B-
2461 ; n. oiSio olot, 2516 ; ordinary
use, in rel. els., 2646 ; in dep. atate-
ments, 26T6. I ; ace. and, after vbe.
of emotinn, 2587 b; in ind. disc,
2n00. 2004, 2811, 2016. 2617, 2628,
2630,2631,2633; ouand (ii)w.,2711-
2727, 1071 ; ^iS and tiii ou w., 2730-
2749 ; summary of conatr. after vbs.
of hindering, 2744 ; SxrTt and negs,
w., 2760 ; after ir\if», 2066 b.
InfleeUon, defined, 100,366; how shown.

740

ENGLISH INDEX

191 ; of TbB,, prellmfnaTj miurka,
S66-3S0 ; of «-Tte„ 3TS, 37», 602-
716; of »u-7bfc, 378, 879, 744-767.
See Conjog&tioD.

iDgreadTe noriat, 1866 b, 1872 o 4, 1924,
1926, 232&.

Injariiig, Tta. of, w. AkL, 1461 ; w. ace.,
1462.

InHTtlon, of r, In pert, and plap. mid.
■nd fint aor. pau. syatem, 489 ; of
r, between root (or alem) and sntt.,
836 i of T, before certain stiffs., 837 ;
of 1), in compounds, after prep., 884 c,

InBtmment of action, snfb. denoting,
642, 860. 3, 863 a T ; denoted by dat.,
1603-1511, 1757; by dat. w. prep.,
1511, 1687. 1 c, 1896. 1 ; by ace.,
- 1600 a; by gen. w. prep., 1684. 1
0 (4), 1688. 1 0, 1766.

lustramenUl case, fnnctions, how sup-
plied, 203, 280, 1279, 1460 i adn. w.
force of, 841.

loatramental daUve, 1324, 1869 a, 13T2
a, 1603-1629, 1648.

Intensive particles, 2774, 2821, 2843;
perf., 1947 ; see sh-Ai.

Intensivee, tonnation, 867.

Interest, dat. of, 1474-1494.

Internal object, defined, 1664 a; or ex-
ternal, w, the Mme vb., 1666; uses,
1603-1689, 1606, 1607, 1610-1627,
2034 e, 2077.

Inteirogatire, adva., 346.

Particles, 2660-2666, 3663-2674,
2860, 2961.

Prononns, decl., 834; lnd.,83»f;
list, S40 ; w. arUcle, 1186, 1187 ; wed
tabet or adj., 1262 ; in dlr. and ind.
qaestions, 1263; tI tor rlra, 1264;
r(i )( W, 1266.

Sentences, see Qneations.

Intnuuitive and tiansitire senses, mix-
ture of, 819.

Intransitive verbs, defined, 920; pred.
adj. w., 917, 1040 a; and tr. vba.,
1663-1662, 1708, 1709.

Inverse, attraction, 2683, 2684 ; elision,
76.

Iota class of present stems, 607-623.

Iota subscript, 6, 65,

Irony, expressed by pres. subjv. w. fi4
and fi4 0^, 1801 ; by potent opt.
w. ir, 1826; by vt w. fnt indie.,
1918; by tl fi4 d,», 2364 v.; ques-
tions expressing, introduced by dra
(jcJtb), fTBTB (ndrdrci), 2663; by
iiX vi, 2781 h ; by apa, 279*, 2796 ;
indicated by 7/, S821 ; by Ji), 2842;
by tflttr, 2849; by S^ou, 2S60.

Irregoiar decieiiBion, of subeta., 281-
286; of adjs., 311 ; compar., of adjs.,
819; vbe. of sixth class, 629, 630;
fu-vbs., 768-799.

Islands, names of, gender, 199 b; use
of article w., 1189, 1142 c.

Isocoion, 8081.

Iterative, iXm., nitboat aog. in Horn. ■
and Hdt., 438 c, d ; imperf ., 496, 1790,
1894, 2341; aor., 496, 1700, 1933,
2341 ; indie, 1790-1792 ; opt., 2»0a.

Judicial action, constr, w. tIm. of, 1376-

1379.
Jussive future, 1917-1921.

Kindred meaning, ace of, 16S7.
Knowing, vba. of, w. gen., 136S; w.

part., 2100-2109, 2692 c; w. Art or

(^, 2577, 2692 c; w. inf., 2602 c
Eoin6,lDtr.F;-ii in Beepers, mid., 628.
Eoppa, tbe letter, 8 ; as numeisl, 348.
Labial Tbs., 376 h., 406, 406, 400 &, 606,

637,646.
Labials, 16 ; before dentals, 82 ; before

fi, 85; w. r, 97, 241 a ; corresponding

w. dentals, 131 ; eafb. w., 862.
Lacking, vbs. of, w. gen., 1300.
Leading, vbe. of, w. e^n., 1370.
Learning, vbe. of, w. pres., 1886 a; w.

part., 2106, 2110-2112; w. »r4 0rin,

2110.
Lengthening, mebical, 28, 28 d, 603 p,

703 D, 768 d; compnds., 20, 887;

compens., 37, 38, 90 n. 100, 106, 242,

260 a, 619, 644; in ccHnpar., 314; in
S74 ■., 476 ft, 484, 487, 488,

ENGLISH INDEX

741

684, 6S4, 637 m, 643, 667; in temp.

ang., 436; in redupl., 446; In 'a»-

similated ' torme, MS, 944.
Letters, the, 1 ; neat., 190 d ; aa nomer-

ata, 847, S4S.
Like, to be, vbs. me&ning, w. dat., 1486.
Limit of motion, expresed by dat,

1631, 1632; by ace. and prep., 163lt,

1689; b;acc, 1688.
LiDguala, ID a. See Dentals.
Liquid verbs, 376, 310, 400-402, 407,

409 d, 617-619. 536, 536, 644, 669,

614-619, 620, 659.
Liquids, 16 a, 18, 19 b ; doubled, 81 d

1, 146 d; between two cones., i de-
veloped from, 4S2 ; aufCa. w., 660.
Litotes, 3082.

Local clauees, 2406 ; conjnncttons, 2770.
Locative case, functions, bow supplied,

20.t, 280, 1279; -V", -iffi, 215, 342 a;

iu -«, 229 b ; irarSiiiul, 229 b ; adVB.

w. force of, 341 ; aa advB., 1535.
Locative dative, 1460, 1680-1548.

Majestj, pluTsl of, 1006.

Making, vbe. of, w. pred. gen. , 1806 ; w.
dat., 1324 ; w. two aces., 1613.

Manner, advs. of, 341, 348, 846; dat.
of, 1513-1616, 1527; expressed b;
ace., 1606; by prep. w. case, 1662.2c,
1684. 1 c (6), 1686. 1 d, 1666. 1 d,
1687. 1 c, 1688. 1 c, 1890. 2 c, 1808.
1 d, 16H8. 1 b ; by part., 2060, 2063.

Material, adja. denoting, 868.4, 12, 801.
11; gen. of, 1323,1324; dat. of, 1508<

Maxims, jiif w. pres. imper. in, 1841 e
tl V. opt. , pres. indie, in apod., 2S60.

Means, suifa. denoting, 842, 603 a 6 ; de-
noted by dat., 1603-1611, 1767 ; by
prep. w. case, 1679, 1881. 2, 1684.
1 c (i), 1686. 1 d, 1887. 1 c, 1688.
1 c, 1696. 1 c ; by part., 2060, 208a

Measure, gen. of, 1326-1327 ; of diflar-
ence, dat. of, 1613-1516; expressed
by ace., 1600.

Meeting, vba.of, w. gen., 1368; w. dat,
1463, 1623.

HeioBis, 3032.

Uetaplastic forms, 382 b.

Metathesis, 128, 492, 649, 669 d, 686 f.

Metonymy, 3033.

Metrical lengthening, 28, 28 d, 603 »,
703 D, 768 a.

MetTonymlcB, 849.

Middle voice, 366 a, 1713, 1714 ; depcn.,
866 c, 810, 813 c, 1729, 1730; end-
inga, 880 a, 465, 466, 468, 470 ; forms,
used w. paas. mean., 802, 807-809,
1716, 1786a, ITST, lTS8;fat.,w.act.
mean., 606, 606, 1728 a, 1729 a, b ;
paasives. 814-818, 1738, 1742 b; uses,
1713-1734; dir. and ind, reflex.,
1717^1722, 1730 ; causaUve, 1726 ; re-
clp, 1726 ; act used for, 1732 ; vbs. w.
difference of meaning between mid.
md act, 1734. See Present, etc.

Missing, vt». of, w. gen., 1862.

Mixed, cloaa, of vb.-etema, 629-681 ; aor.,
542 n.

Modesty, pi. of, 1008.

Momentary aorist, 192T a.

Month, day of, how designated, 360 d ;
1640.

Montlia, names of, gender, 199 a; aofl.
denoting, 861. 20.

Mood BufSxes, 457-461.

Hoods, four, 866, 367, 1760; meanings,
880 ; function, 1769 ; In simple sent,
1769-1840; dep. conalr. of, devel-
oped, 1760 ; aa affected by tenae of
princ. vb.,2176; aasimllation, 2188-
2188, 2206 ; in rel. cl., 2545 ; in ind.
disc., 2697-2636; in dir. questions,
2662; in Ind. questions, 2677-2679 ;
in ezclam. sent, 2886. See Indica-
tive, etc.

Motion, dat. w. Tba. of, 1476; limit of,
see Limit of Motion.

Motive, expressed by dat, 1617; by
ace, 1810 ; by prep, and case, 1679.

Monntains, names of, article w., 1139,
1142 c.

Movable consonants, 78, !34-137, 399.

Multiplication, how ezpresaed, 364 d n.

Multiplicativea, 290 a, 864 b, 1482.

Mutes, see Stops.

742

ENGLISH INDEX

Naming, TbB. of, w. pred. gen., 1306 ;
w. two ace., 1618, 1«15,

Nual Tbs., 876, 400-403, 407, MS d,
617-619.

Nasala, 16 a, 10 ; doubled. 81 d 1, 146 d ;
a developed from, 482 ; soOs. w., 861.

NaiioDB, DameB of, article w,, 1138,
1142 L

NecMsiqr, eipremMl b; verbals la -rfcf ,
473 ; imperf. of vbs, eipreMlog, 1774 ;
expressed by past teuM of ludio. w.
a>, 1784 ; by 5«, xM. 1824 b; Tbs.
of, w. lufia., 2000.

NegaUve, aentenoea, 2888-2768 ;
phTaaea, 3768-2708.

NegaUvefl,w.fii,ie8eb; w. inf., 1071;
In quesUona, 1800; In Ind. dlac.,
2020, a008; of artic inf., 2028; of
part., 2046; in ind. queationa, 2670;
of ind. disc., 2TI0; redundant or
B^mpatbetic, 2730-274 B ; vt. Offri and
inf., 2760; accnmulation of, 2760-
2T62. See oi, f»[, etc

Neglecting, vbs. of, w. gen., 1866.

Nenler gender, abstracta of, 840 ; iieut
pL Bubj. w. sing, (aometimea pi.)
Tb., 058-060; In appos. to aent. or
cl., 004; pi., of aingle Idea, 1003;
adj. or part., used Bubstantively,
1023-1026, 1153 b H. 2; pred. adj. in
neut. Blng., 10)7, 1048; In ueut. pL,
1062. See Gender.

No, how eipreaaed, 2680.

NomlnatiTB caae, aubj. of fin. vb., 027,
038, 039; indep., 940; in place of
oblique case at beginning of sent.,
041 ; in lelters, of the writer's name,
042 ; in appna. w. voc., 1267 ; in ei-
clnma., 1288, 2684 ; w.inf., 1073, 1974,
2014 a ; of artic. inf., 2031.

Non-fulfilment, see Unreal.

"Non-thematic" coujugatloo, 717.

Notation, 346.

Noun, verbal, see Verbal noun.

Noim-aUina, 826 ; in compnda., 870-670.

Nouna, defined, 180; accent, 206-209;
verbal, 868; aoSa., 8uO-e65. See
Predicate adja., nouna, etc.

Number, In nouna, 106; In vbo., SS5,
363; Bgr. of vb. in, 026, 040-072;
agr. of adj. and part In, 926, 1090,
1080-1030, 1044-1062; agr. of pred.
subst. in, 074 ; noa-agr. of appoa. in,
070; expreaaed b; prep., 1681. 3;
agr. of rel. pron. in, 2601, 2602. See
Singular, Daal, Hlural.

Numerals, 847-864 ; in oompnda., 870,
883 ; eqalv. of aubat., 908 ; article w.,
1126, 1174 a N. ; rlt w., 1268 ; w.gen.,
1817 ; in w., 2096.

Oaths, M and •«( In, 1696 fa, e, 2801,
2022; rit in, 1696 b, 2804, 2028; In
indie, w. /.^, 2706 i; in inf . w. »»*,
2716; ii >ii)> in, 2806, 2021. See
Swearing.

Obeying, vba. of, w, dat, 146*.

Object, 010 ; see Direct, Internal, Ex-
ternal ; two Tba. with common, 1634,
1636 ; inf. as, 1988-2024 ; denoted by
part., 2066.

Object clauses, aaaimilation of mood in,
2166 c 1 of ^ort, 2207-2210, 2705 b ;
of caution, 2220 ; of fearing, 2221-
2233.

Objection, expressed by dXXi, S7SG,
2786; by iWi yip, 2810 b; by U,
2836; by xal, 2872.

Objective, genitive, 1828-1336.

ObllgaUon, Imperf. of vbs. of, 1774-
1779, 1006,2313-2317.

Oblique cases, defined, 201 a.

Observer, dat. of the, 1407.

Obtaining, vbs. of, w. gen., 1860.

Occasion, expressed by dat., 1617.

Official peiBona, tjtlei of, omisBiaii of
article w., 1140.

Omission, aee Blllpse.

Onomatopoeia, 8034.

Open, nyllabte, 141 ; vowels, the, 4 a, 7.

Opposition, denoted by part. , 2086, 2070.

Optative mood, 367, 350, 1760 ; final -«i
and -01, long, 160, 427 ; endintn aS6 e.

ENGLISH INDEX

748

oompoimd TbB., UKcnt, 428 t ; pree.,
eS0,eST-640,760itut. acLandmid.,
B60 ; laL pass., 663, 064 ; first aor.
ftct. andmid.,a68; fliBtaadsec. aor.
pan., 675; sec. aor. acC, 683, 766;
flnt and sec. perf. act., 694-666, 702,
704 ; perf. mid. and paw., 710, Til.
Without d*, 1814-1823; of wish,
1814-1819 ; imper., 1820 ; potent., see
Fotential ; w. ir, 1824-1834 ; tooses,
186fi, I661-I803; assimilation to,
2186, 218T, 2206 ; In final cl., 2106-
2300 ; after vbe. of «ffon, 2211, 2212,
2214-2219, of fear and caution,
2220-2232 ; in causal cl., 2242 ; ficrn
with, 2269 b, 2278; in apod., w.prot.
of simpla pres. or past form, 2300
d, e, 2360 ; In unreal condlta., 2311,
2312, 23S6; in fat. condits., 23^2;
2826 d, 2366, 2320-2384 ; iterative,
2S40ai w't.prot.,234S; as apod, to
prot. and apod, combined, 2853,
2S50 ; In temp, cl., 2394, 2390, 2408-
8409, 2414, 2416, 241B-2421, 2424,
^427 ; w. rpiw, 2480-2440, 2448-2452 ;
ordinary uae, in rel. cl., 2546 ; after
oiKlcTirlOTH, eta., 2662 ; Inordinary
rel. cl., 2668 ; In final rel. cl., 2554 c ;
in conaec. ret. cl., 2550, 2567 ; in
oondlt. rel. cL, 2660, 2668-2673 ; in
ind. dlac., 2699-2016, 2617-2021,
2624 c, 2026-2627, 2029, 2032; in
dir. qnestlons, 2602 o ; in Ind. ques-
tions, 2677-2679 ; in ezclam. senL,
2686; Bv w., 2708-2705.

Oracolar preaent, 1882.

Orntio OWqna, see Indirect discouree.

Orfttio Recta, see Direct dbcourse.

Ordinal anmerak, 347,860, 1126 d, 1161,
1209 e.

Origin, gen. of, 1206; expressed by
prep. w. case, 1084. 1 c (1), 1088. 1 0.

Orthotone, 181 d h.

Ozy moron, 8035.

OiTtone, 157, 160. See Accent.

Palatals, 16 ; before dentals, 32 ; before
^, 86 ; w. <r, 97, 241 c ; suflB. w., 804.

Faraleipsis, 3080.

Parataxis, 2108-2172.

Pardoning, vbs. of, n. dat., 1404.

PareoheBls, 8087.

ParisOHlB, 3038.

Paromoioeis, 3039.

Paronomasia, 8040.

Paroiytone, 1S7, 100. Sea Acoent.

Fait, ace of the, 986, 1001 a w.

Partidples, accent, 209, 426 b, 426 d ;
decl., 300-310, 287 b ; compar., 328 ;
Terbal nouns, 866, 1760; endings,
. 470 ; pres., 633, 758 ; fut. act. aud
mid., 062 ; fut. pass., 063, 004 ; first
aor. act. and mid., 071 ; first and

, 678 ; BBC. a

718.

Predicate and attrib., 014, 016,
1166 ; agr., 10:>0, 1044-1062, 2146 ;
dat,, used as dau of relation, 1497,
1408 ; It. ir, 1845-1349, 2140 ; tenses,
1872-1874, 2043, 2044 ; w. ,1^, lx«,
yiyniioi, ^ln>/uu, 1901-1965, 2001 ;
natnre, 203ft-2042; neg., 2046; at-
trib., ciTcmnst, supplement., 2046-
2048;attrlbntiTe,2049-2053; w.arti-
cle, as subet., 2050-2062, 1124, 1163
b, 1186; withont article, as subst.,
3052 a; w. subsL, correap. to verbal
noun w. gen. or to artic. inf., 2068 ;
drcnmatantlal, 2064-2087 ; gen. ab-
solute, 2058, 2070-2076, 2032 f ; ace.
absolute, 2060, 2076-2078 ; expreaa-
ing Ume. 2O60, 2061, 2070 ; manner,
2000,2062 ;raeana, 2000, 20A3 ;cause,
2000, 2064, 2070; purpose, 2000,
2005 ; opposition or concession, 2000,
2006, 2070, 2082, 2063 ; condit., 2060,
2067, 2070; any attendant circum-
stance, 2006, 2070 ; advs with, 2079-
2087 ; Kui, MoiTtp w., 2083, 2382, 2882,
2892 ; lirt w., 2060, 2096 ; general .
statement concern, sapplementarr,
^ j^ loidisc., 2092-

744

ENGLISH INIfX

SlOG, 2113-3116; w. rv7x<<'«', f^"
Mm, ^Mfu, 2006, 1873; of XarMtw
and ^edm (nraljr rvyxira) w. finite
Tb.i 2096 f ; w. tidyu, Sutylyreiuu,
SwTtXa, ti^ru, 2097 ; vt. vba. slg-
nUyiog begin, cease, endure, grmv
weary of, 2008 ; w. Boms vb«, of com-
ing and going, 2000 ; tr. tIib. of emo-
tion, 2100 ; w. Tbs. signifying do well
Of ai, furpoM or be Inferior, 2101 ; w.
riifxiafui, rtXfit l7«t^uii, vilrra irWu,
2102; w. Ttpiapiia (_i^fiii4, tUopiu,
rpaliiioi), to overlook, allovs, 2103;
w.some impers. ezpresa, (akiag d&t,,
2104; w. other tIm., 2106; In Ind.
disc., 2t0e-S146, 2676. 2, 2000, 2604,
9611, 2016, 2617, 2628b ; with tIm.
of knowing and eiunaing, 2106-2109,
2692 c, of perceiving and finding,
2110-2115, 2681, 2682, 2692 c ; omis-
■don of &r, 2116-2119; itw., 2120-
2122 ; vba. which take eitber part
or inf., 2123-2146, 2682 ; remarks on
some uses of, 2147, 2148 ; after vbs.
of /earing, 2237; after Svt; 2276;
for prot., 2314, 2358; for apod.,
2360 ; KoiTM w., 2803 b ; in main
cl. of Mut, contBlning t«mp. cl.,
2411; Oorip it it v., 2480 a; oi
and liii with, 2728-2734 ; depending
on negatived vbe., itii ei «., 2760;
V. iJr, finite vb. w. U, 2904 a ; titf
(f«(8i) w., 2931.

Panioloe, 2163, 2769-3008.

Particnhir, article, the, 1119-1121 ; con-
dits., 2293-2298, 3303, 2321.

Partitive, apposition, 981-984.

Oenitlve, w. nouns, 1300-1319,
W. vbs., 1341-1871; of artlc int.,
2082 c.

Parti of speech, 180,

Paflslve, forms those of mid. except in
aor. and fut, 856 b, 360 a; dep.,
360 o, 811, 812; first, system, 368,
466, 68fr<6S0 ; sec., system, 368, 466,
&00-&98 ; aor. and fuU mid. some-
times nsed with mean, of, 802, 807-
eOO, 1737, 1738 ; mid. pass., 814-

818, 1733, 1742 b ; forms, w. reflex,
force, 1733 ; uses, 1735-1768; origin,
1736 a.

Past or present, conditional relative
sent, simple, 2662, 2663; unreal,
2664 ; genera], 2608, 2509.

Conditions, simple, 2298-3S01:
unreal, 2302-2320; general, 2337-
2342.

Past potential, 1784, 178G.

Patronymics, snlTs. forming, 816-818,
861. 11, 19, 863 b 1, 4, 10, 12, IS, IS.

Penalty, gen. of, 1386 ; ace. of, ISSS.

Penult, 139.

Perceiving, vbs. of, use of bt and pred.
adj.atter, 1041 ; casasw., 1361-1368:
part vr., 2110-2112, 2681, 2682. 2502
o; w. 9t. or (i>i, 2110, 2145, 2677.
2681, 2682, 2692 c ; vr. inf., 2iS2 c

Perception, adjs, of, vr. gen., 1421.

Perfect tense, 369 ; pi-imaiy, 300, 1858:
flr8tandsec.,36I,664; aprinc. pan.,
308-370; redupl.. 439.

Active, first, 382, 383, 689-700.
762-760; system, 466, 56.>-560:
change of < to a In, 479 ; periph.
forms, 699.

Active, second, 384, 689-700.
702-706, 762-760; systtm, 466, 661-
673 ; change of i to a in, 478 ; chan)ie
of 2 to If (S) in, 464 ', mean., MS ;
aspitated, 609-671.

Middle and passive, of oona. vba,
382, 383, 403-411, 706-716, 76T ; ac-
cent of inf. and part, 426 a, 48£b;
mid. system, 465, 674-681 ; vr. and
without inserted r, 489; periph.
foims, 699, 707-714 ; pass., dau «f
agent w., 1488, 1489 ; pass., w. dat,
used Instead of perf. act, 1741.

Force, 1861, 1862, 1946 ; pica.
for, 1886; aor. lor, 1940; epistolary,
1942; w. pras. mean., 1S40; 'inten-
sive,' 1947 ; empiric, 1948 ; of dated
past action, 1049; tor fat part.
1960 ; in subord. oL, 1961 ; In l^)ad.
of vivid fut form, 2320 ; in oondii.
rel. sent., 2673 c. See Indicative.

ENGLISH INDEX

746

SatrjimcUTe, IBeO.
OptatlTe, 1661-1868, 2881.
ImperatlTe, 1S40 d., 1864.
Infinitive, 1849, 1806.18137; w.
rj>J>, 2463 c.

Purlloiple, 1872-1874, 1961,2844.

FerlpbnsU, 3041; poweea. gen. w. neat,
article, 1209 ; ezpreeaionB equlv. to
tr. vb. w.wx.,16S6;v.ylyro/tiu»ad
■abet, 1710, 1764 ; w. rotia^at and
nUu,, 1722 ; w. iti and xpi, 1807 ; w
tint and pKB. put., 1867, 1961, 1962
fnt. (w. fiAXu), 1969 ; w. (^X^f
1960 1 w. Ixt> and part., 1963 ; w
yiyniuu and part., 1964 ; w. 0ain;ui
and part., 1966.

Peiipbraatic fonns, peif. and plap.
mid. and pa«., 406, 408, 690, 707-
710, 714 ; fuL perf . pass., 688, 601,
669 a ; fat. perf. act, 684, 800, 669 a,
1956 b; perl and plap. act., 609,
690-701.

PeriBpomenon, 167, 160. See Accent.

PermiBaion, expressed b; opt. in Horn.,
1810; byiinper.,1839; brfut.,1017.

Peraon concerned, boS. denoting, 843,
860. 1, 861. IS, 663 a 2, 663 b 12,
866. 1, 11.

Person, In vbs., 866,864; agr. of vKiu,
026, 049-972 ; Bubj. pron. of flist or
Bee, wtken omitted and wben ax-
pressed, 920, 930, 1190, 1101 ; nom.
Bub]. of third, omllUd, 931 ; third,
of writer or speaker, 942 ; Ttt or rSi
w. wc., 1016 ; sec. used of imaginary
penon, 1017, 1193 ; in directions to
traTellers, 1017 a; agr. of rel. pron.
In, 2601, 2602; in ind. disc., 2601 a,
2608, 2606 ; in ind. qoestlonB, 2677.

Personal and impeiB. constr., ir. inf.,
1082, 1088; of verbal adJB., 2149-
2162.

Personal endings, of Tb., 366, 462-468.

Feiwmal pronoana, encUt., 181 a, 161 o,
187 H. 1, 3, 826, 1196 ; dec!., 326, 326 ;
substitaUe for, of third person :
ittlm SS6 d, li04 ; M«. utroi, 1104,
airtt in oblique cases 82o d, S26 b,

1204, 1212, i, 4, ri, 1060, 1100, i
(Ji), 4 (4)1 1113, 1104, 1196; gen.
of, in pred. position, 1171, 1188,
1186, 1106 a ; w. article, 1187 ; when
omitted and when expresBad, 1190,
1191 ; tiiefotmaJ^C, etc., wtien used,
1102 ; of imaginary person, 1108.

Peraona, names of, article w., 1136,
1142 a ; as Instram., 1607 b.

Peisuaded,be,Tbs.Bignifylngw,;n[,2726.

Peisaading, vba. of, n. tvo aoca., 1628.

Pindaric construction, 961.

Pity, oTm' wi in expreasions of, 2682 d.

Pitying, Tbs. of, w. gen., 1406.

Place, adTs. of, 341, 842, 846, 1440;
names, anif., 844, 861, 860. 3, 861. 20,
863 a 16, 21, 24, article w., 1136 ; adja.
of, aae w. article, 1172 ; gen. of, 1396,
1448, 1449 ; adjs. of, w. gen., 1426 ;
dat. of, 1631-1638. See Locative.

Planning, vbs. of, w. obj. cl., 2217.

Plants, gender, 190 b, 200 a.

Pleasing, vbs. of, w. dat., 1461.

Pieonaam, fidXXar w. eompar., 1084 ;
fidXurra, etc, w, Bup., 1000 ; of prep.,
1386, 1640, 1660, 1664 ; of internal
Ob]., 1664, 1664, 1670, 1671, 1620 ; of
mid. voice w. reflex, pron., 1724,
1727 ; of <», 1766 ; of Inf., 1616, 2011
a and v.; In iniir ttrai, etc., 2012 c ;
w. part, and vb., 2147 b ; of vb. ol
saying, 2634 ; rednndant neg., 2730-
2749, 2763 ; at fii), 2764r-2T58 ; in ez-
prGsatona connected by dXU, 2767 a;
in 6tTi oi., 2760 ; In accumulated
negB., 2760-2762 ; defined and illus-
trated, 8042.
Plaperteot tense, S60, 806 b ; secondary,
S60, 1866 ; first and sec., 361 ; aug-
mented, 428, 420, 444; redap., 430,
444.

Active, first andBec,S82-8S4, 467,
701, 762 a; first, stem, 666-660;
BBC., Stem, 661-673 ; periph. forms,
600.

Middle and passive, 382, 888, 408-
411, 468, 707 ; stem, 674-684; peri-
phrastic forms, 600, 707.

746

ENGUBH INDEX

Force, 1861, 1863, 1868, 1962;
linperf. for, 1900 ; lor. for, IMS
fmmediate occinrence, 196S ;
mibord. els., 1061 ; In unreal (
dils., aSoe, 2S0T, 2310 ; In led. diac.,
2600, 2003, 2620, 2123 b.

Plural : Bnt pen., used for dual, 364 a ;
vb., w. Bing. BubJ., 960-063 ; vb.
dnal subj., 961-067 ; lubj., w. vb. In
sing., 068-861 ; Bub]., w. Tb. Id dual.
962 ; vb., w. two sabjs. In sing., 961,
966, 067, 071 ; dtotrib., 908, 1001 ;
peculiarities in use, 1000-1012; of
majesty, 1006; allusiTe, 1007; of
modeslj, 1008; ablfting w. sing.,
1012; part, w.slng.coUectivenoun,
1014 ; pan., w.dnal vb., 1046 ; prod.
adj. OF part, w. doal aubj., 1046;
pied, adj., w, two or more subeta.,
1063. See Agteement.

Polyiyndeton, 3043.

PoeHion.syllablelOQg by, 144,146,314 a,
Of arUcle, attrib., 1164-1167;
pred., 1168-1171 ; w. gen. of pron.,
1163, 1171, 1184, 1186; w. worda
wbich vary their mean., 1172-1176,
1204-1217; w. demons, pron., 1176-
1181 ; w. poMesL pron., 1182, 1183,
1196 a; w. interrog., dXXsi, wa\6t,
6\l-roi, 1186^1189 i w.gen. of divided
whole, 1307.

Poettlve degree, uses, 1063-1066. See
Comparison.

Poeseesion, gen. of, 1207-1306, 1800,
1411 b ; gen. of, )( datot poaaeasor,
1480 ; gen. w. adja. of, 1414.

Foasessive, compounds, 806, 898.

Pronouns, decL, S30 ; place, taken
by article, 1121 ; w. and without
article, 1182, 1183, 1106 a ; position
of article w., 1168, II82, 1106 a;
UBBs, 1 196-1208 ; w. force of objective
gen. of pers. pron., 1107 ; i^ Brat
and sec, persons, reflex, and non-
reflex., 1198-1200.

FoMBBsor, dat. of the, 117S-14SO.

Poaeibility, expressed by imperf. indlc.
1774-1779, 1005, 2313-2317 ; by

pMt tense of Indto. w. b, 1T84 ; by
opt., 1824-1884 ; by dr w. Inf. after
fiirn, 2270.

PoitpoaitiTe, prep., 1666; partlcln,
2772.

Potential optative, with tr, 1834-1834,
2349 ; in causal cL, 224S ; in apod,
of simple pree. or past condlU.,
2300 e, 2366: tn apod, of unreal owi-
dils., 2312, 2366; in apod, of more
Tirid fut oondite, 232K d, 2S66;
in apod, of emoUonal fut. oonditB.,
2838, 2866 ; in apod, of leea vivid
fat. condita., 2329^384, 2860; in
proL and apod, combined, 2363,
2866 1 In prin. d. to fut. temp. d. w.
BubJT., 2103 ; in fut. temp. cL w.
opt., 2106 ; In (»i cl., 3131 ; in oon-
see. reL cL, 3666; in condJL ml
sent., 3671, 2673.

Potential optative, without Ir, 1831,
1822; after ti* tmr Srru, etc.,
2562.

Potential, past, 1781, 1786.

Praegnaus Constructio, 1669, 8014.

Pralalng, vba. of, w. gen., 1106.

Predloat«, 902 ; a vb., 909 ; exp«uakm,
024 ; omission of vb., 014-018 ; aubj.
and, concord of, 026, 919-972.

Accusative, and external oh].,
.1613-1618.

Adjectives, 010 b, 1018; twlonc-
Ing to omitted aobj. of InL, STS, 1060-
1062 ; w. what vbs. used, 1040 ; w.
vbo. of am/ing, thinUnff, peTC«t^%g,
■Aowf HIT, 1041 ; where Eng.nBe«adT..
1042, 1043; agr., 976, 1044-1069;
position, 1168-1171; eqaiv. of cL.
1160; attracted into voc, 138);
put. as, 2001, 916.

Nouns, 910, Oil, 913-916 ; agr-,
918 d, 039, 976, 2626; and arUcle.
11 50-1162 ; in agr. w. dat., 1608 ; pro-
leptio, 1679; w. Inf., 1073-1081;
Inf. as, 1080.

Fartlclples, 911, 016 ; agr., 1H4-
1069 ; belonging to omitted si^j. of
inf., 1061, 1002.

ENGLISH INDEX

.747

Podtlon, of adjs., 1168-11T1 ; ot
powoai. gen. of pen. and rel. prons.
and of gen. of divided whole, 1171,
use a, b, IJQO ; of woida varying
in mean, accord, to position of arti-
cle, 11T2.-1176, 1204-]20e, 328 c ; of
pOMess. pron., 1100 a.

Sabatantires, deSned, filOa ; agr.,
07S-0T6 ; belon|^ng to omitted aubj.
of Inf., It7e, 1060, 1062 ; equivalent
of cl., 1109.

Predictions, neg. oS fii( in, 2T54, 2766.

PreflxeB, inaeparable, 670, 885, SOS a.

Prepodtional, oompounda In -roi, ac-
cent, 425 c H. ; expreraiona, 1029,
2.^44.

PrepoeiCional-pbraaa oompounda, 600.

PrepoBtltoUB, acecnt, irben elided, 174 ;
anaatropbe in, 176; proclits., 170,
180; oomp.andsaperl. derived from,
820 ; aug, and redup. in vbe, com-
ponnded it., 440-454 ; in compoundB,
870, S81, 800, leoe ; orif:in, and de-
velopmentof,891, 1036-1638, 164ea;
as advB. (prep.-adnL), 891, 1036 a,
1688-1043; constr. w. vbs. com-
poanded w., 1382-1887 ; function,
1637; three usm, 1030-1640; im-
proper, 1647 , 1040 a, 1690-1702 ; oom-
pounded, to complete action of verbal
ides, 1648, 1080; compound, 1040;
tmeris, 1060-1053; prefixed, re-
peated, 1054; connecting nooua,
without vb., 1057 ; mean, of gen.
dab, and ace., w., 1668 ; vbe. of mo
tlon w. dat. and, 1650 a ; vbs. of rest
w. SCO. and, 1659 b ; streas laid on
starting-^jnt or goal, 1060; posi-
tion, 1003-1065; variation, 1006;
repetition and omission, 1667-1673,
2519 ; of different mean. w. tbe same
noon, 1660 ; w. case, as sub}, or obj.
or prot., 1674, 02B a; use, in Att.
prose, 1676 ; ordlnarf diflerenoeB in
mean., 1676 ; parallel, 1677 ; use of
thedittereut, 1681-1908. See Agent,
Means.

Propoaltlve particiea, 2TT2.

Prescription, exprened hj imper.,
18.^6.

I'resent or paat, condit relative sent.,
simple, 2662, 260S ;. unreal, 2604;
general, 2667^2670.

Conditions, simple, 2208-2301;
unreal, 2S02-.2320; general, 2387-
2342.

Present system of verbs, 455, 406-531,
722-743.

Present tense, S69; primary, 300, 1868 ;
one of princ parts, 368-870 ; infleo.
382,027-067,747-768; rednpL, 414*,
439, 44T, 404, 504, 628 o, 726, 727.

IndicaUve, force, 1861-1868 ;
aorlstic, 1853; oses, 1875-1888; of
customary action, 1876 ; of general
truth, 1877; conative, 1878; fotfnt.
(of anticipation), 1879; oracular,
1882 ; historical, 1838 ; annalistlc,
18B1 ; of past and pres, combined,
1886 ; forperf., 1880 ; eipreasing en-
during result, 18ST ; in subord. c1.,
1888 ; impert. for, 1001 ; fat. for,
1915; aor. for, 1936; In apod, of vivid
fut. form, 2326 ; in apod, of general
condits., 2337, 2342 ; in prot. of indie
form of general condits., 2342 ; in
apod, when prot. has tl with opt.,
2360; in princ cl., when temp, d,
has opt. without Ar, 2407 ; in temp.
sent, of indef. frequency, 2410 ; in
temp. cl. w. dr, 2413; in (wi els.,
2422, 2425 ; In Tpir cl., 2441 a ; in
similes and comparisons, 2431 a,
2482; in condit. rel. sent, 2502,
2567, 2669, 2573 a, b.

Subjunctive, w. ^if, of doubtful
assertion. 1801 ; to indicate fear,
warning, or duiger, 1802; w. oi
fuf, of emphatic denial, 1304 ; dellb.,
1805; in proliib,, 1840, 1811; gen-
eral force, 1860 ; In more vivid fut.
condits., 2325 ; in general oondlt&,
2330 ; in t«mp. cl., 2400, 2401 ; in
fut cl., 2423 b, 2420 b ; In t^ cL,
2444 a ; In similes and oompwIioBS.

2461 a

= L,.

748

ENGLISH INDEX

Optadve, general toioe, 1861-
186S ; in less vivid f ut. condlts., 2831 ;
in general condits., 2S86 ; in fvt cl.,
2424, 24^7 k.; in ind. disc., 2611 b.
ImperatiTe, in prohib., 1840,
1841 ; general force, 1S64.

InflnlUTe, In nnfolfllled obliga-
tion, 1778 ; in unattalnatde wish,
ITSl; w. dr, 18461 general force,
1865-1870 ; witb Y\m. of hoping, etc.,
1868. 1990, 2024 ; w. f>AX», 1969 ; w.
Tbs. of uiU and dwfre, 1908 ; w.
Orri, 2261 ; In unreal condits., 3814 ;
after wpir, 2453 c.

Participle, w. »r, 1846] general
fotoe, 1ST2-1674 ; V. tl/d, 1961 ; as
pied, adj., 2091 ; w.rvyxi''', Xo^Mm,
0Mw, 2096 ; w. vbs. slgnifflng to
tvpport, endure, 2098 a ; w. ipdu,
iiaiu, 3112 a n. ; niistitated for
prot., representing iinperf., 2S44.

Price, gen. of, 1372-1874 ; dot., 1G08 a.

Primarr, tenses, 360, ISSS; endings,
468, 465, 466 ; stems, 82G ; sofb., 829 ;
BuOa., of BUbstB., 8S9-«42, 869-86G ;
ButEs., of adjH., 867-866.

FiimlUve, vba., defined, 872; words,
828 a ; substa., snib. forming, 880-
842, 869-866 ; adja., 867-«66.

Principal parts, 869, 370, 887.

Principal tenses, 860.

ProditiDS, the, 179, ISO, 188 e.

ProdiortboeiB, 3046.

ProgresBiTB tenses, 1857.

ProbibitioDB, expressed by gnbJT., 1800,
1B40-1844, 2766 bi b;Imper., 1885,
1840-1844, 2709; bj fi^ w. fut.,
1018 k; hj et iitf w. 2d pera. ilng.,
1010; bjr fat., 1010, 2754, 2Ta6a; by
9irwt or Srait fi)} w. fut., 1920; by
fi4 w. inf., 2018 d, 2716.

Prohibitive subjimctlve, 1800, 2707,
2766 b.

ProicpdB, 2182, 8046.

Prol^io predicate uoniia, 1670.

Promising, vba, of, w. fut, aor., or pres.
int, 1868, 1900, 2024 ; w. ^, 2726,
2728 a.

Pronominal adjectives, S3T, S40.

Pronouns, decl., .325-340 ; unemilndc
omitted, 920, 1121, HOP. 2 k.; f<^
trasted, generally expressed, iOJ;
i, 4. ri as rel., 1099, 1106 ; «, i rt
as demons., 1099-1104, IIO6-II1:;
use of article w., 1163, 1171, U7S.
1176-1189; pera., 1100-1196; pos-
sess., 1196-1203 ; pron. a^ii, iSU-
1217; refloi., 1218-1-2.'J2 ; derooie..
1238-1261 1 InteiTog., 1262-1264; io-
def., 126S-12T0; UXm and fri^
1271-1276; recip., 1277, 1278; ■.
gen., 1S17 ; as cognate ace., I6TS.
See PeiBonal pronoana, etc

Pronunciation, 23-26 ; of vowels, S4 ; d
diphs., 26 ; of ccna., 26.

Proparoiytone, 167, 160. See Accent.

Proper names, acoent, 178 a, 261 ; in-fi.
232, 363, 264, 282 a, R.; in -b.
w. Dor. gen., 226; use, pi. 10^';
w.article, 1138-1142, 1100 jomisaan
of Mticie w., 1207. I

Properispomenon, ]67. See Accent j

Prophecies, prea. in fat. aeoae in.
1882.

Proportionals, 354 0.

Proposal, eipresHed t^ boiC mH^^

. 1797 ; by rl atw >0 or r( •«, ItX;
dXXd In, 2784 c.

Propriety, expreflBed by Impnl. IdAc,
17T4-1T79, 1906, 2S13-2817 ; tropt.,
1824-1834.

ProtaalB, deOnad, 2280.

ProteBlationa, expressed by opt., 1814 b ;
In Indic w. /t^, 2706 i; in iol «. n,
2716 ; I) iiir, etc, in, 2896l

Prothetic vowels, 41.

Prove, vbs. signifying, w. parU, HO0.

Proviso, expressed by Om w. Inf., iX6 ;
by i^.' V and ii^' ^n, 227B.

Punctoalion, marks of, 188.

Pure verba, defined, 376.

ParpoM, gen. of, 1408; int td, tOOB-
2010, 2717 ; sxprtMod try gen. ci
ardc inf., 20S2 e ; by put^ 2000.
2066 ; cL, Me Final cUoaee ; mMbodi
of e^rtesinK, S206 ; temp^ c daa.4-

ENGLISH INDEX

Qnalitf, moBt words denoting, fern.,
190 q; snlli, denoting, 840; adji.
denoting, 8S8. 7 ; gen. o^, 1S20, 1821.
See Abstract noons.

Qnantity, transfer, 34, 238 c, 434 ; of syl-
lables, 142-146 ; varlntion. In third
decl., aubets., 254 ; variation. In vb.-
stein, 374, 475. See Variation, Gra-
dation, Lengthening, etc.

(uasl-impeisonal verbs, 088, 1984, 1086 ;
take gen. absolute rather than aco.
abeoltttfl, 2072 b.

juestioos, direct, inlem^. prons. and
>dn. in, 1203 ; indie In, 1770 ; deUb.
■abJT. in, 180&-1808; W tMu; tI
ftruiiai; 1811; potent, opt. w't Ar
in, 1621 a, w. a* in, 1831 ; ri3t d>,
tIj d* In, 1882; imper. in, 1888,
1842 a; pres. for fuL in, 1870 a;
delib. fut in, 1016, 2639; Alt. w. oi
Interrog. In, to ezpieas nrgencj, cut.,
1918 iWoIroaaDdWavlu, 1930; TM
(jC)otiiiK\m; 1960 d ; rl /latiir ; rl rn-
AiriTfrxur; 2064 a,b;slmple, 2167;
after iwtl, 2344 ; after Atti, 2276 ;
how expressed, 2686, 2637 ; Yes and
JtTo questions (sentence-qnestlona),
S638, ansneis to, 2880 ; pron.-qaes-
tions (word-qnestlons), 20)8; de-
Ub,, 2830; rhetorical, 2640; not
introd. by intern^, particles, 2641-
2S49 ; introd. by interrog. particles,
3050-2656 ; altematlTe, 2666-2661 ;
moods in, 2603 ; negs. in, 1809, 2703 ;
aXXd in, 2784 e, 2786 ; ipa in, 2708,
2794 ; Arip in, 2801 ; yip in, 2804,
2806, 2806 a ; » in, 2886 ; 34 in,
2843 a; ial in, 2848; Uprw in,
2860 ; C^n in, 2861 ; i) nf In, 2806 ;
Kal in, 2872 ; ,t(, alone in, 2898 ;
lUrrot in, 2918; ri in, 2928; ainw
in, 2963 d ; ttt in, 2962.

Indirect, introdooCory words,
1263. 2668-2674; as^mUation In,
2ised; after Tba. of /eortiv. 3284;

sabet. cl., 2676. 3 ; have oonstr. of
ind. disa, 2606; alternative, 2676;
neg. in, 2676; moods in, 2877-
2079.

Raining, vba. of, w. dat. or aco., IGOTc.

Reaching, vbs. of, w. gen., 1360.

Receiving, vbs. of, w. tlie giver in dat.,
1481 ; w. inf., 2009.

Becessive accent, 169, 162 d, Intr. C,
H. l;incompoa.,178,898;lnvoc.238,
261, 262, 204 a, 202 a; in compnd.
adJB. in iri, 203 Q ; in adjs. in -ur,
208 c ; of vbs., 428-127, 773 b, 791 b ;
In some fero. ad^s. osed as sabeU.,
SlOd.

Reciprocal, middle, 1726.

Pronoun, decl., 881 ; gen., in «t-
trib. position, 1184 ; oae, 1377, 1278.
Reflexive, 1331, 1232.
Belation^ bow expressed In
Greek, 1277, 1278, 1726, 1727.

Redimdanc;, see Pleonasm.

Redundant negaUve, 2739-2740, 2758.

Reduplication, f lost in, 122 ; of initial
^, tf, X, 126 a ; in fu-vbs., 414 i., 728,
727 ; accent In, 428 ; bow formed,
489-445 ; in pros., 480, 414 a, 447,
494, 604, 626 c, 723, 726, 727 ; inperf.
and plup. act., 489, 444, 666, 661,
672 ; in pelf, and plup. mid. aikd pass.
and fut. pert, pass., 439, 441, 674 ;
in sec. aor., 430, 448, 494, 540 ; Alt.,
444 a, 440, 477 a »., 666 ; podliou,
in eompnd, vbs., 449-464; snbsta.
formed by, 836.

Reference, dot. of, 1496.

ReflexlTe, comparison, 1078, 1008.

Pronouns, decl., 320 ; ot, etc., ss
ind., 326 d, 187 x. 1 ; attrib. position
of aiUcle w. possess, gen. of, 1163,
118S, 1184 ; possess, pron. someUmea
reflex., 1108-1203 ; omitted, 1100. 2
R. ; dir., 1218-1224, 1228 x. 3 ; pers.
prone, in reflex, sense, 1222-1224 ;
ind., 1226-1229, 1104, 1106 ; of third
pers. for that of sec or tltlrd pers.,
1230; redp., 1231, 1332; a«Th em-

760

ENGLISH IimEX

ph»Ua or leflei. w. other prooa.,
12S3-12S7 ; w. act voice, Inalend of
mid., 1723 ; w. mid., 1724, IT27.

Kefiual, imperf. at, 1896, 1H07.

Befnaing, vbs. of, use of neg. w., 2739-
2744.

Regarding, Tbs. of, w. prad. gen.,
130e.

Bejoicing, vbe. of, ti. put., 2100, 2687 ;
w. »r< or in, 2100, 2&7T, 2687.

RelatioQ, ftdjs. denoting, 868. 6 ; gen.
of, 1429 ; dat. of, 14S&-t4n8.

RelatJODship, n&mM of, BufBzea form-
ing, 84&-850; Kitide omltCed w.,
1140.

ReUUve, advB., 340 ; anlec. of, def. or
indef., 2606 ; attncUon in, 2628.
And absolnte time, 1S60.
Clansea, aa nom. pred. of fallow,
sentence, 965 ; coireBpond to attrlb.
adJB., 1186, 24S8j how Introduced,
2469, 2498, 2490 ; sometimes aqulT.
to codrdinale cL, 2400 ; position, 2492 ;
w. h, 2493 ; S, ai to what, 2494 ;
tvwtp, it yt, 249S 1 JkTTii, 2496 ; gin,
Seat, 2407; vb. of, omitted, 2620;
tiBiultion from, to indep- cl., 2621 ;
attraction of whole, 2532; inverse
attraction, 2533-25.^5 ; incorpora-
tion, 2536-2638 ; appos., drawn into,
2630; snbeL, usiiallf w. article,
drawn JDto, 2640 ; antee. reserved
for main cl., which followi rel. cl.,
2641 ; attrib. ad), or gen. in sent. w.
Tel. cl., when placed, 2542 ; trans-
ference of sup. to, 2542 a ; parti-
cipial or enbord. cl. depending on
foil, miun cl., joined to preceding cl.,
264S ; main cl. fused w., 2644 ; use
of moods in, 2645-2662 ; delib. subjT.
In, 2646-2540 ; deUl). fuL In, 2540,
2660 ; ordinary, 2663 ; of purpose
(final rel. cl.}, 2564, 2706 1 ; of caose,
2566; of result (consec. rel. cl.),
2666, 2705 h ; condit., see Condl-
tioual relative clauses and sentences.
Fronoans, 338-340 ; used In ez-
clan), sense and as ind. inlerrog.,

330 f, 3668 ; «, 1,, rj a« nl., 1000,

1105 ;aademona., 1110, 338b; pnd.

poritlon of article w. poascM. gen,

of, 1171 ; prep. omit, or repeat, w.,

1671 ; resolv«d into conjunc mod

pron., 2401 ; eonconj, 2G01, 860! ;

antec, 2603 ; def. and indef., 3606-

2508 ; omiadoD of antec., 3509-3616 ;

not repeated, 2617, 2618 ; prep. w..

omitted, 2610; attraction, 2622-

2628 ; caae, w. omitted antec., 2539-

2632. See b, etc
Releasing, vba. of, w. gen., 1803.
Remembering, vbs, of, w. gen., 1366-

1366 i w. ace., 1368 ; ad)a. of, w. gen.,

1420 ; vbs. of, w. part., 2106.
Reminding, vba, of, w. gen. , 1366-1868 ;

w. two aeea., 1350, 1628.
Removing, vbe. of, w. gen., 1S9S.
Repeated action, expreased by pre*.

indie, 1876 ; by ImperL or aor. w.

Sr, 1700, 1701 ; by lUmtin formi

w. lrinHdt.,1792.
Request, expressed bj bort. nl^.,

1707 ; by potent, opt. w. <r, ISM;

by Imp., 1836.
Resistance, imperf. of, 1806, 1807.
Respect, dat. of, 1616 ; ace. of, 1616 a.,

1600-1606, 2034 e.
Restraining, vbs. of, w. gen., 1393.
Restrictive particles, 2821, 2830.
Result, of action, mfta. denoting, 841 ;

aoo. of, 1564 a h. 1, 1678, 1670 ; int.

of, 2011, 2717.
Result clauses, 2240-3278; w. Arrt,

after vbs. of /taring, 2280; neg.,

2260; rel., 2666, 2706 h.
ResultatlTC aorist, 1026.
Rhetorical questions, see Queatioiis.
Rhotacism, 132 d.
Rivers, names of, gender, lOB a, 300 ft ;

use of article w., IISO.
Root-detennlnaUve*, 832.
Root4tems, 19S, 823.
Roots, lBI~ie3, 371, 880, 881.
RoUng, vbe, of, w. gen,, 1870, 1408 ; w.

000., 1371 ; adjs. of. w. gen., \4as ;

Tbi.of,w.d«t., 1637, 1688.

ENGLISH INDEX

Sunpl (Smi), S, 846.

SaUaU oneself, vbo. munfng, w, part.,

2100 b.
Saying, rba. of, foU. tj itnu and pred.
•d}., 1011 ; w. aoc. Inf. Rfarring to
fut., 1671 ; prea, of past and prea.
combined In, 18SG a; aor. of, uaed
of leaolntiOD, I6S8 ; pets, and Im-
peia. oonatmction w. paaa. of, 19S2 a ;
command, w. ace. or dat. and Inf.,
leOT ; in abaolute Inf., SOIS a, b ; inf.
aa obj. of, 2016-2022, 2670, 2602 a ;
int aa aab]. of paaa. of, 2016 a, 2021 ;
w.ltriotin, 2017, 26T7, 2679, 2692a ;
w. artic Inf., 203* g ; rarely w. part.,
2106 a ; w. part, and ^i, 2121 ; foil.
b; dii. or ind. dlac., 2680 ; repeated,
In dialogue, etc, 2680 a; w. lu and
inf., 2722 ; w. /i4 and Inf., 2T28.
Seaa, namea of, uae of articla w.,

1139.
Secondary, tenaea, 860, 1&68 ; endings,
464-406 ; Btema, 826 ; sofEa., 620 ;
Bufb., of SDbats., 643-862, 860-866 ;
suits., of adJB., 667-8&6.
Seeing, vba. of, w. part., 211&-2112; w.

&Ti or il>i, 2110.
Selling, vbB. of, w. gen., 1872.
Semirowels, 16 c, 20, 48, 100-117,

148 D 1.
Sending, vba, of, oae of imperf, of, 1801 ;

w. part, and w. inf., 2000.
Senteniw, adra., 1004 b, 2760 ;qiiwtiona,

2686.
Sentence, defined, 000 ; complete and
incomplete, 001-005 ; simple, com-
poond, and complex, 008, 2160-
2161 ; appoB. to, 001-006 ; see Com-
plex, compound, drnpLe sentence.
Separation, gen. of, 1801-1400 ; vba. of,
w. MC., 1303 ; adjs. of, w. gen. , 1427.
Serving, Tba. of, w. dat., 1464.
.sharing, rba. of, w. gen. , 1843 ; adJs. of,

w. gen., 1416.
Shortening of long vowels, SO, 40.
Showing, Tba. of, foil, by fir and pred.
tAi; 1041 1 w. gen., 1808; «. two
aocs., 16131 w. part^ 2100^100,

26S2c; w. Sri or &t, 26T7, 2602 c,
W. Inf., 2602 0.

Shrines, oamM of, w. article, 1187.

Sibllanta, 17.

Sigmatic aoHat ayatem, 642-646.

Sltailarity, adjs. denoting, 866. 16,

Similes, aor. In, 1836 ; ut, wt tl, etc.,
in, 2481-2467.

Slntide sentence, defined, 003 ; syntax
of the, 906 B. ; expansion of the,
922-024 ; summary of the forma ot,
2163-2166 ; in ind. disc., 2697-2600,
2614-2616.
Words, 827.

Singular, subj., w. vb. In pi., 060-063 ;
Tb., w. subj. in pi., 06R-e«l ; subjs.,
two or more, 068-072; collectlva,
006, 907 ; distrlb., 006 ; ahifting w.
pi., 1012. See AKreement.

Size, exact, expressed by gen., 1321,
1326.

Smelling, vba. of, w. gen., 1364.

Snowing, vba, of, w. dat. or aoc, 1607 0.

Sonant consonantB, 16 a.

Sonant liquid or nasal, 36 C.

Source, gen. of, 1364, 1410, 1411 ; ex-
pressed by prep. w. caae, 1664. 1 o
(11, 1692. 1 b.

Space, denoted by gen., 1326 ; dat. of,
1628 ; ace. of extent of, 1680, 1681.

Specification, ace of, see Keapect,

Spirant, 16 b, 17, 26, 116-123.

SpiritDB aaper, ienia, see Breathings.

Spurious diphthongs, 6, 26, 37 c, 61 a,
64,60.

Stage of an action, 1860-1867.

Standard Attic, Intr. B, n. 1.

Standard of judgment, dat. of, 1612 ; ex-
pressed by prep, and acc., 1606.
8 c.

Statt-mpntH, summary of forms in, 2168 ;
dependent, 2 676-2368.

Stems, and roots, 101-198 ; variation
of formation of, in third decl., 263,
278 ; subet«. w. two, 282 ; of vba.,
867-380 ; of vba., changes In, 474-
406 ; bow formed, 824 ; primary and
secondary, 6:!6; changee 3i, when

ENGLISH INDEX

sufi. is added, 884. See Qnd&tion,
Vuiation.

Stop vwim, 637, 645, 660, 621, 622, 623.

Stope, howsoanded, 16 b, 16; dlvistons,
16 ; doubled, 81 d 2 ; before aUipfl,
82-84 { before ft, 86-«7 ; bafore r,
8S-90 ; aspiration, 134-127 ; before
liquids, eftect on qnaotjty, 146, 146 h.
See Labials, etc.

fitrlWag, Tbs.of, w. gen., 1340; w.ob}.
oL, 2210.

Subject, defined, 902 ; a subet. or equlv.,
007, 908 ; expanded, 923 ; of finite
Tb., 927, 938, 039; nom., replaoed,
028; nom., omitted, 920-937; of
inf., 930, 1972-1981; aco., omitted,
987; ose of nom. aa, 038-943; and
pRd., concord, 036, 040-072; sing.,
w. Tb. in pi., 050-963 ; dual, w. Tb.
in pi., 954-067 ; pi., w. vb. in sing.,
068-961 ; pi., w. Tb. in dual, 062 ;
two or mors, 96$-072 ; inf. aa, 1984,
1086, 2016 a, 2021 ; of dependent cL,
made obj. of vb. of princ. cl., 2160.

SubjectiTe genitiTe, 132S-13S6.

SubjancliTe mood, 357, %39, 1730; end-
ings, 360 c, 433, 465, 633 ; mean-
ing, 380 ; of compnd. Tbs., accent,
426 f ; tbematic Towel, 457, 458 ; and
fat, identical, 582, 541 a, 667 n j prea.,
629, T40 ; first aoT. act. and mid.,
667 ; first and sec. aor. paaa., 874;
■ec. aor. act. and mid., 682, 757 ;
flist and sec. perf. act., 691-698, 702,
768 ; perf. mid. and paae., 70S, 709.
With dr, 1768, 1813 ; in rimple
sent., without if, 1705-1811 ; hort.,
1797-1709 ; prohib., 1800, 1840-1844,
2766 b ; of donbttul assertion, 1801 ;
of fear, warning, danger, 1802 ; of
emphatic denial, 1804, 2766 ; dellb.,
1805-1808 ; anUclpatory (Homeric),
1810, 2707 a; tenaea, 1859, 1860;
assfmllatlon to, 3188; in final cL,
2106-2109, 2301 ; after Tbs. of tiffort,
2214-221B;' of fear and caution,
2220-2233; after Ovrt, 2276 ; In
apod, of rimple pre*, or past ooo-

ditB., 2300 c, 2357; in fnt. omdiu^ |
2322-^24; in apod, of more Tirid i
fut. condita., 2326 c, 2K7, 2S5T ; in |
apod, of emotional ful. condiu., |
2328, 2357 ; In apod, of leas Tirid
fut, condlu., 2334 c ; in general con-
diu., 2336, 2337 ; In apod, oi con-
diu. of type il w. opt., 2360, 2353;
in temp, cl., 2394, 2309, 2401-2403,
2407 a, 2409-2412, 2418-2421, 2423,
2426; w. wplr, 2430-2432, 2443-
3447 ; w. rp6T,p„, f, 2468 ; w. xplr «.
2460 ; ordinary use in rel. cL, 2545;
deUb., In lel. cL, 2646-2&40 ; in onU-
nary reL cl., 2563 ; in final rel. cl.
in Hom., 3564 c ; in viTid fuL con-
dlt. rel. cl., 2606 ; in general condit.
rel. cl., 2567, 2570 a, 26T1 ; in ind.
diac, 2690-2613, 2618-2«21i in dii.
questions, 2662 b ; in Ind. qaesL,
2677-2679; W w., 2706-2706; ^
and ii^i it witb, 2751.

Subordinate clauses, assimilaUon (d '
mood in, 21S3-21SS; 1-Intimt. SlBf. :
2190.

Subordination, and co&rdination, 215^
2161 ; coordination In place of, 21SS-
8172.

Subscript, iota, 6, 66.

Substantival clanaea, 2180, 2207-2333,
2674-2667 ; aenunces, 2100.

SabetantiveB, rules for aocent, S05-
208; formation, 838-866, S60, 86.^:
compnd., S86-800 ; pred., 010, Oil.
915, 973-076; daL w., 14«»-150i,
1510, 1529 ; prepa. oompdunded w..
1656 ; w. inf., 2001-3007 ; oi and ^
w., 2786. See Nouna.

SufSzes, added to roota to fonn stem)
and words, 193, 824~82B; tenM.
465; mood, 467-461 ; primary awl
secondary, 820 ; definition and fucc-
tlon. 838 ; origin, 833 a-d; giadu»»
in, 833 e ; denoting agency. 830,
850. 1, 10, 800. 1, 861. 18, 888 a 1 S.
7, 10, 11, 18, 14, 16 ; forming nanc*
of actions and abetraci subsia.. 3M*-
850.3,6,661. 1, 11, 863 a S, l>, I*.

ENGLISH INDEX

b 8, 86fi. 1, 3, T ; denoting result of
ftctioa, 81L, inatnunent or meuu,
842, aao. 3, 868 a T, 8, 12, 16, person
concerned, B43, 869. 8, 801. 13, 863
a 2 ; forming gentiles or place names,
8M, 659. 5, 10, 861. lI,e6Sa3,bia,
861. 1; patronyuica, eta., 846-850,
861. 11, IG, 32, 23, 863 b I, 10, 12,
13, IB 1 denoting pUce, 861, 860. 3,
831. 20, 863 a 8, 12, 16, 21 ; forming
diminutives, 862-8M, BSO. fi, 861. If),
863 b 15, 16, 664. 1, 2, 8, 12; adjec-
tival, S6T, 866 ; denoting folnesB, 858.
8, 16, 863 b IS, material, S56. 4, 12,
fltDBH, ablUtj, relation, 858. 6, S,
qoaUty, 856. 7 ; noun, 659-606.

Snperioritj, compnd. vbs. denoting, ir.
gen., 1403.

SnperlaUve d^ree, 287, SlS-324, 345 ;
nses, 1085-10U3; Btrengthened bj
0T(, etc, 1086, 29(t4 ; tr. gen., 1434 ;
dat. w., 1513 a; use in camp, cl.,
2469-2473 ; obi attracted w. , 2532 a ;
transference to reL cl., 2542 a.

SuppUmentary participle, 2046-2048,
3088-2146.

Sard consonants, 15 b.

SorpaBdng, vbo. of, w. gea, 1403.

Surprise, inf., in excUuns. of, 2016 ; ez-
pnosed hjrl /latiin, rtraSiiw, 2064 a ;
bjr particles w. part., 2082 ; qnestlons
exprearing, w. tlm, etc., 2653 ; ex-
pressed by dXU in questions, 2784 e,
2786 ; by Apa, 2796 ; by ydp in qoes-
tious, 2805 a ; by i) yip, 2866 ; by 4
a4, 2866 ; by nU before interrog.
word, 2673.

Swearing, vlx. of, w. aco., 1600; w. >id,
1696 b, c, 2804 ; w. fnt., aor., and
pres. inf., 1668, 1990, 2024 ; in aor.
to denote resolution, 1036 ; w, fi4,
2725, 2726 a. See Oatbs.

Syllables, 138-141 ; quantity, 142-148.

Syllepsis, 3046 a.

SympAthetic negative, 2789-2740, 2769 b.

Sytnploce, 8046.

Braoopo, 44 b, 120 0, 476 a, 408, 540.

SyHMidoche, 8047.

zcsis, 60, 61.

Synopses of verbs, 382, 336-393, 410-
423.

Syntax, defined, BOO; of simple sent.,
006-930 ; of oomponnd sent., 2162-
2172 ; of complex sent., 217S-3687.

Systems, tense, see Teuao.syit«ins.

Taking, vbs. of, w. Inf., 2000.

Tasting, Tbs. of, w. gen., 1356 ; adjs. of,
r. gen., 1416.

Teaching, vbs. of, w. two aces., 1628.

Temporal clauses, BHsimilation of mood
in, 2186 b, 3166 b, 2167, 2168; am,
2363-2461 ; words and expresdons
introducing, 2388-2365; def. and
Indef., 2390-2394 ; referring to def.
pres. or past time, 2395-2307 ; to
fut., 2308-2408; in generic sent.,
2400-2417 ; denoting purpose, 2413-
2421 ; summary of constra. of Iwt,
etc., 2422-3429 ; w. rplr, 2430-2467 ;
\r. rpirtpor H, etc., 2458-3461.
Partlctea, 2770, 2845.

Tense-stems, 36T-379.

Tense-suffixes, 456.

Tense-systems, 368; formation, 474-
801, 71T-743.

Tenses, number, 856, 850 ; primary and
secondary, 360, 1658 ; and tense-sys-
tems, 868 ; and moods, meaning,
860 i OSes, 1650-1066 ; time and stage
of action expressed by, 1650-1868 ;
of subjv., 1860; of opt., 1661-1863;
of Ituper., 1664 ; of inf. not in Ind.
disc, 1865; of inf. in ind. disc,
1666, 186T, 2019; of part, not in
Ind. disc, 1872, 2043, 2112air.; ti
part. w. XaiMn*, 0Mw, riryx^'v,
1673 ; of part In ind. disc, 1674,
2106 ; of indie, 1875-1005 ; e[dslo-
lary, 1942 ; peripb., 1969-1966 ; in
Ind. disc, 2697-2S36; in Ind. ques-
tions, 3677-3679; in ezdam. sent.,
2666.

Terminal accnsative, 1588, 1589.

Testifying, vbs. of, w. /i4, 2726.

Tbemallc, conjugation, 009.

754

ENGLISH INDEX

Vowel, defined, STT ; In w-vbs.,

376 a, 466, 467, fl02 ; not In w-Tbe.,

370, 412; pt«B. ti. and wttbout, 4IHI,

608, 604; of sec. aort in first aor.,

In Horn., 642 d ; lacUng in sec. aor.

of u-vbs. in Horn., 647 o ; lacking in

sec aor. of f«-TbB., 660 ; tn perf.

mid., in Horn., 674 d; in inflec,

626-787, 778.
Theme, 371. See Ver1>«temB.
Tbinking, tIm. of, foU. bjr clru w. pred.

adj., 1041 ; w. pt«d. gen., 1306; w.

aor. int. referring lo fut., 1871 ; pen.

oonstr. w. faaa. Of, 1083 a; intf as

obl- of, 2018-2022 ; inf. oa snbj.

of paSB. of, 2016 a, 2021 ; w. arUc.

inf., 2084 g ; rarely w. part. Id Ind.

diflC., 2106 a ; w. part and ut, 2121 ;

foil, bj' inf., an, Jit, 26S0, 2602 b ;

foil, by dir. or ind. disc., 268S; w.

ai and inf., 3722; w, it^ and inf.,

2723.
Threat, expressed hj voc., 1284; hy

first pers. sing, of saliJT., 1798; by

■J w. fut. indlc, 232B; by Mr w.

subJT., 2328 a; by q lOfw, 2866,

Time, advB. of, 340; gen., dat, and
ace. of, distinction, 1447, 1M3; gen.
of, 1444-1447, 1326 ; expreflsed by
dat. of part., 1498 ; daL of, 1680-
1643, 1447, 1628 ; expressed by gen.
and prep., 1683, 1086. 1 b ; by «* n.
dat, 1642 ; acu. of extent of, 1680,
1682-1686, 1447 ; expressed by ace.
and prep., 1683, 1687; ace. of, where
dat. is in place, 16B8 ; expresed by
adv.acc., 1611; by part, 2060, 2061,
2070.

Of an action, expreosed by tenses,
1860-1867.

Tmeris, 1660-1653.

Touching, vba. of, w. gen., 1846-1847 ;
ad)s.of,w. gen., 1416.

Towns, see Cities.

Transfer, of quantity, 84, 338 c, 434 ;
of aspiration, 126.

Transition, marked by dpo, 2T8B; t^
trip, 2801; by yip, 2806; by iXU
yip, 2610 c ; by 14, 2836 ; by H,,
2846; by ni* Bi), 2000; by ^r <#r,
2001 c ; by lUrrei, 201B ; by HAi ^ifr
( . . . -r*), 2921 ; by rat ,iiw, 2021 ;
ij Kai Hiir . . . yt, 2921 ; by olr,
2066, 2064 ; by rolrvr, 2087.

Transitife and Intransitive senses, mix-
ture of. In same vb.. 810.

Transitive verbs, defined, 020 ; amd bitr.,
020, 1653-1602, 1708, 1700; pred.
adj. with, 1040 b ; w. aoc, 1690-1697,
1706.

TranapoeitJon, 128. See Hetatheris.

Trees, names of, gender, 109 b.

Trust, put, tfbs, signifying w. ^■i, 2TSB.

Trusting, vbs. of, w. dat, 146*.

Trying, vb* of, w. obj. d., 2217.

UlUma, 139.

Unolotblng, vfas. of, w. two aces., 1628,

Unlike, to be, The. meaning, w. dat,
1466.

Unreal, indlc, 1786-1789; in causal
clause, 2348 ; In apod, of dmple
prea. or past condit , 2300 b, 2358 ;
In unreid condit, 2302-2320, 2358;
In prot and apod., 2353; in con-
junction w. tt and the opt., 2S66;
after rplr, 2443 ; condit nd. cl., 3504.

Urgency, expressed by ou w. fut, 1018.

Value, gen. of, 1336, 1337, 1379-1374,
1370 ; adJB. of, w. gen., 1434.

Variable voweL See Thematic vowH.

Variation, of stem formation, in third
c)ecl.,26S, 278; of quantity. In third
decl., 264 ; in vb.-stem, 476-^06, S73,
374, see Gradation, Change, Quan-
tity, etc ; of preps., 1806.

Van, 3 ; see Dlgamma.

Vengeance, vbs. of, w. gen. and acc,
1376, 1406-1409.

Verb^tems, 307, 371-376, 826 ;
in, 474-406 ; and pres. stei

ENGLISH INDEX

755

5S1, 72S-74S : and fat. sUms, 632-
Ml ; and tint aor. steins, 542-646 :
and sec. aor. etesaa, 640-664 ; and
sec perf. stems, 664, 661-673 ; and
first perf. stems, 666-660 ; and perf.
mid. stems, 674-684 ; and flrat aor.
pass, stems, 585-669 ; and sec. aor.
pass, stems, 590-6^ ; tn compounds,
870, 880-882.
Verbal, adjectives, In-rii, comp., 323 a ;
meaning, 358. 2, 472 ; accent, 426 c ;
bow formed, 471; in pi., 1003 a,
10621 <igr-. 1059; dat. v., 1488j w.
ace., 1508.

In ^^1, meaning, 368. 2, 473,
214S) ; accent, 426 c ; hair formed,
471 ; in pi., 1003 &, 1052 ; dat. w.,
1488, 2148. 2, 2151, 2163 ; canstr. of,
peiB. and imperB., 2149-2152.

Nouns, defined, 355, 358; w. ace,
1598; use, 1B66-2152. See Infinitive,
Participles, Verbal adjectives.
Verba, Inflec., preliminaiy remarks, 365-
380 ; stems, 367-380 ; primitive, 372 ;
denora., 372, 866-868, 892 ; conjug,,
381-422, 602-624, 717-743 ; accent,
423-427 ; ai^. and rediipl., 428-454 ;
tense-suffs., thematic vonel, and
mood-suSs., 455-461 ; pers. endings,
462-468 ; endings of inf., part., and
verbal adj.. 469-473; fonnalion of
tense-systems, 474-601 ; in -aai, -cu,
-«<d, 49)), 522 ; in ~iai, -uh, 600, 500 D,
601, 522 ; in -»t«, 606, 606 ; in -^,
609^12; in ttu (Ion. and later
Att. -rru) , 513-510 ; liquid and nasal
stems, 517-522; of M class, 623-
£26 ; in iroci, 526-528 ; indec. of »-
vbs., 626-716 ; inflec. of >u-vb9., 744-
767 ; irregular (u-vbs., 708-799 ; pe-
culiarities in use of voice-forms,
etc., 800-813; mixture of tr. and
intr. senses, 819-821 ; compound, see
Compound verbs ; impeni., see Im-
personal verbs ; tr. and intr., see
TransitivB verbs, Intransitive verbs ;
concord, 925, 949-972, 2501b; omis-
ilon, 944-846, 2520 ; gen. w., 1389-

1411 ; BTntaz, 1708-2162. See Voic«B,
Modds, Tenses, etc
Vocative case, 201, 202, 204, 223, 226,'
' 2£@, 248, 249, 261'; uses, 1283-1288,

2682.2684.

Voice-forms, peculiarities In use, 80&-
818.

Voiced consonants, IS a.

Voiceless consonanta, 15 b.

Voices, throe, 366, 356 ; uses, 1708-1768.
See Active, ete.

Vowel, declensions, of sabMe., 204,
211-239; of adjs., 266-280; oont.
and vowel decl. of adjs., 394-299.

Stems, w. «- in perf. and plsp.
mid. and pass. , 404, 407, 409 e and K.
Snffliea, 860.

Verbs, defined, 376 ; conjug., 382-
389, 404, 407, 409 e and n. ; fat.,
634 ; flrat aor., 543 ; first perf., 55T,
558 ; lenses, 606 ; not contracted,
stems, eOT-610 ; contracted, slfims,
611-613.

Vowels, Uie, 4 ; quantity, 4 ; prononc,
24; vowel change, 27-46; compens.
length., see Compensatory lengthen-
ing ; sbortening, 39, 40, 146 i>. ;
addition, 41 ; development, 42 ; dis-
appearance, 43, 41; assimilation, 45;
euphony, 46-76 ; contact, 46 ; con<
traction, 48-59; absorption, 66;
synlzesis, 60, 61 ; orasis, 62-69 ;
elision, 70-76 ; apocope, 76 D ;
apbaereais, 76; consi. w., 109-117;
thematic, see Thematic vowel. See
Change, Gradation.

Want, adis. of, w. gen., 1420.

Wanting, vbs. of, w. gen., 1398.

Warning, expressed by voc., 1284 ; by
first pers. sing, of subjv., 1798 ; by
/fi w. Independent sabjv. in Horn.,
1802 ; by Du w. fut, 1918 ; by Artn
or Srut lii, w. fut. indlc, 2213 ; con-
dit. w. (/ w. fut. indie, 2828, w. M>

Way, advB. of, S46.

, constr. OL, ^^. ,1

766

ENGU8H INDEX

Whole, gva. of, bm Dlylded whde.

Will, TbB. of, w. inf., 1869, 1991-1999,
2719; other constn. w., 1996; w.
obj. oL, 2318 ; v. ^i}, 2720 ; w. ei,
2721. SeeDeriring.

Wloda, aaiaea of, gender, lOOa; nm
of article with, 1139.

Wish, unatt^n&ble, expreBsed by Indio.
w. Mt (poeL Mt) or ,1 yip, 1780 ;
bj fi^Xor w. Inf., 1781 ; by iPouUnr,r
and inf., IT82 ; by ipeiiUnv i',
1780 ; opt. ot, 1814-1819 ; expressed
by pmi\olni,r ir, 1827, by *& <(>, rlt
Ir w. poUDt opL, 1832 ; int. In,
9014; aomnury of forma, 2150; in

cL Introd. b^ trtl, 2244 ; ^4 in, 3704,
2715; expreaaed by vb. of taging
or MnUnf w. /ii), 2723 ; A\\A in,
2784 d ; Y^p in, 2807 ; SQra In, S851.

WlBblng, vbB. of, in fuL, 1913.

Wondering, vba. of, w. gen., 1406 ; w.
,1, 2247 ; w. fc. or in, 2677, 3687 ;
w. put.. 2687.

Yet, how expreaaed, 2680.
Yet and No qneadona, aee Questions.
Yielding, verba of, with dat., l'4Sa.
Tod, 20.

3,q,z.-3bvGoOgle

GKEEK INDEX

Eludid In the Llit oT TviM m, tn (»ti«nl, not dUd

A, pronimc., 24; qoanU^, 4, 170;
lengtbeiu to a after t, t, p, 217, 218,
484, elsewhere, 28 d., 30 K, 37, H,

476 b, £44 ; lengthenB to ir. 27, 217,
4Sfi, 446, 4S4, 4S7 ; a:t'o, 86, 478,
479, 488 a; a : fi (q) : », 86, 410,

477 c 1 from sonut liq. or nas. , 86 b,
482, 673, 840. 2, 886. 1 a ; prefixed,
41; idv. sad., 344; added to rerb-
Bteni,486; acendof fint putof opda.,
873 c.

a, nom. ting. 1 dec!., 216.

d- or dv, prlT., 886. 1 ; w. gen., 1428.

d-ord-, copal., 886.4.

a, tor q after t, i, ^, 31, 286 a, 484;

flDbM.-aIemB in, 204, 211 ft. ; replace

s-atems in cpds., 873 b.
«:>:>, 86.
« (Dor., Aeol.) for q, 30, 32, 86 d, 738 a,

214 D 1, IntTod. c, H. 1.
K, gen. aing. (Dor., AeoL) 1 decl., 214 c

6, 226,
K, from w < a^(, 38.
S, auS., S6B. 1, 869. 2, 869. 3.
f, 6, proDunc., 25; in aug., 436.
oa, Sa, nq,, Kf , for <u, a«, sg, 843.

346.

dyYAJut, pert., plup. mid., 407 ; aoj. in
Hdt., MB d ; pers. ooostr. w. paaa.,
1962 a ; w. part, or Inf., 8106, 2144.

dY<(pM, red., 446 ; dWjMrtei, 426 a n.

i.l\yU, no ang. in Hdt., 438 d ; d-ytr^
fifHi, 667.

d'yv«<«, fat. mld.aapan., SOB; w. part.,
2106.

&Y*«|u, an«., 481, 434 ; {dup., 444

dToiNiw, aag. In Hdt., 438 d.
3421..

&7«yw, 483 a, 489 e, f ; RubJT.,opt.,749
b, 760b; pres.,726i paM. dep.,812;
'W. ace. and gen., 1406 ; w. «(, 2247.
'Ay«|iJ|lw*, too., 261.
diBvMTfe, w. iwl and dat., 1618; w.

pait., 2100; w. <J, 2247.
^^a/Hm, w. Art, 2248 ; w. part, 2100.

813 b

irdat., 1440.

dYXot*. 170O.

d-Y*, 9»>c-,'*^; Mperf,,1940a; mix.
aor., 642 o ; pert, 446 b, 671 ; f ut.
Inf. bi Horn., 661 i>; aug. Id Hdt,
43Sd; w. gen., 1846; intr., 170fla;
irftiuu. 7unu'ica, 1721 ; fut. mid. u
paaa., 809; ^71, i-itrt, w. nibjv. or
imper.. 1010, 1797 a, b, 1836 ; AT»r,
loUA, 2068 a ; cpds. of, 887.

dfAv, decl., 269.

dYwItaiwi, 1726; wfch pfiRg. mean.,
608,813 a; w. rr^Jior, 1670.

oS, suft., 840 b, 6, 846, 863 b, 8.

ate, sufl., 845.

dGiX^, Toc., 233; adj. w. case, 1417.

dlt«i, 44 a.

dSucte, intr., 1700 c ; as perf., 1887 ;
fut.mld. aapan.,808; w. ace., 1691;
V. tit, wp6t, 1692 ; w. put., 2101.

dSiKot, decl., 289.

•Slo, BufE., 863 b, 11.

dMvoTAt, <U^nra for -rav, 1003a, 1062;
w. fat. Inf., 1866 d.

M to aa, 643.

GREEK INDEX

iOMm, no ang. in Hdt, 438 d.
^C, from aitl, 88.
i<u(It», fut., 639 D.
luatd^ifvat, form, 2071 a.
U«.>, see JU>r.
itrdt, from aJn-Ai, 88.

-at«, vbe. in, 866. e ; fat. of, 680 d.

AilUv, decl., 270 c.

kil^h 724, 741 ; Horn, forms, 762 d.

4^, 259 D, 283.

•AMti»a^ 1006 \ -a^t, 26, 10^ 842. 1688,

ijOtv, 342; -i|iri, 343, 153G ; 'Afqn,

-aid, 227 ; 'A^qralii, 227 D.

Mpo[^•, w. i/f, 1666 b.

6.»p6ot, not contr., 290 e ; comp., 816.

Al0|U«, w. obj. cl., 2224 a.

'A*<H, 282 a i 'A.06U,, 238 d.

at, pronuDC, 25 ; In ctmIb of koI, 68 ;

elided, 74; when short or long for

accent, 169, 218, 427, 162 n 2 ; aug.

to n, 486; no aug. in Hdt., 438 d.
-ai, pen. end. for -aat, 465 a.
-cu, inf. end., 469 b.
at, for ({, 2282 a ; of «, w. sabjr. after

DISH, etc., in Horn., 2673.
AUt, voc,, 249 a and n.
atS^S 488 a, 4S9 c ; w. ace., 1696 a;

w. int. or part., 2100, 2126; paaa.

dep., 812, 802 o.
'AtSrit, 6 d; it (fh) 'Attio, 1802 ;

'MSiirSi, 342 D.
atUf, decL,266andn.
atFit, 8 D.

att*, accent, 1B6 ; w. opt., 1816.
alMjIp, defecL, 283.
AUI<4, dec!., 266.
-ouv, dual, 214 D 7.
-oip, for -ow, 666.
-«ir, dual, 212.
ai*B, snS. 843 b 6, 661. 18.
alvJM, 488 b.

al*liTT<i)ui L, dep. as paas., 813.
-a*f%, tense-saS., 523 i.
aIvit)Mu, fonu, 784.
-tunt, Tba. In, 618, 866. 7.
at£, dect., 266.
-otot, adj. end., 854 t, 866. 2 a.

alpim, 629 ; 2 aor., 431 ; perf., 486 ; mid.,
IT34. 1 ; n. gen. and ace., IS76 ; w.
two acc8., 1813 ; pass., 1742.

■Mpt, vbe. in, 618.

i[pa, aor., 644 c; w. two acoa., 1679;
iiitr., 1709 a.

-otf, Aeol. ace. p!., 214 d 10.

■oif, -owm, Aeol. part, eod., 306 n,

810 n, en n.

■ott, -Mr\, -fn, dat. pi., 214 d 9, 816 a.
■ow, -at, -ouv, opt. end., 461 a.
>tn, 113.
atrMvD|u*, mid. dep., 1729 ; pres. aa

perf., 1886 a ; 2 aor. ingress., 1926 a ;

w. aco. or gen., 1361, 1367, 2112 a;

w. part, or inf., 1363, 8110-2112,

2144; w. »r< (<^t), 2110-2112, 2146.
hwi, dat. pi., sea nut.
lovw, w. ace., 1568 a.
atirxpif, oomp., 818; aUxftr, w. A

8247.
.hrx^voiiiu, mid. paaa., 816; w. ace..

1695 a ; w. dat., 1696 b ; w. fr ( and

dat., 1518; w. part, or inf., 8100, 2126 :

w. obj. cl., 2234 a; w. (i, 2247 ; fat.

mid. and pass., 1911; gv^^rf^, u

mid., 816.
alftpot, -alrarot, 816 a.
atWa, w. two acca., 1618 ; n npi rtm,

163D; w. f»i, 3780.
alriio)iav, mid. dep., 810, 1739; w.poM.

mean., 818 ; w. gen., 1376.
olnot, w. gen., 1426.
Sk, snfT., 864. 4.
■aKi(t), adTB. <n, 344.
AkoXovUm, w. dat., 1624.
dKdXntof, w. gen. or dat., 1417.
dKovrft", «. gen-, 1360.
&Ko4w, twMes w. r iaasrud, 48Be. f;

2 perf., 446 b, 662 a ; mid. fnt., 804.

1728 a; w. gen. or aoc., 1861-1866.

1411, 1466; w. dat., 1306; pre*, a*

perf., 1866 ; w. <E (mrSt) ■• paw..

1698, 1762 ; w. part, or inf., 2110-

2112,2144; w. fr< (<^}, 8110-9113;

w. 6ti. 2396 A, note.
&Kfodo|>«. fuL and aor., 487 a ; w.fN..

1361, 1364, 1411.

_ I; C00g[c

GREEK INDEX

&itp«t, poaiUon w. an., 11T8,

into, deol., SOG b; gsn. aba., 3071,
2071 », au7 b.

VmSi, AXAv, S43 D.

AXt«*dt, coiiip.,818.

IX«>4afi, 268 c.

Ufiotuu, M fat.. Ml a; aor., 543 n.

dXte, short vow. in tenses, 486 a ; tenses
w. r Inserted, 4R9 b, f.

AXVjfcM, -*Ift, 219. 2 b, 220 1 rf dXifSiff
in trulA, 1627 b.

AXi|Mrt, decL, 202; comp.. 818; aXi)«n,
292 a.

4Xi|ei>4i, 884 d, 86B. 12.

AXuit, decl., 276.

Ums, w. gea., 14S9 o.

*X(n•|w^ aog., 481, 434 ; stem, 526;
tut., 48e ; see. aor., 662 a, 687 ; as
pass, of alptui, 1876, 1762 ; preo. as
perf., 1867 ; w. part., 2118, 2114.

UXi, 2776-2766, 2664 ; iW i, 2664,
278S; ilXM (icaE), after oix 5ri, etc.,
276S, 2764; ai iiiir (/i/n-oi) dXU,
27S7, 2921 ; dUl yip, 2780, 2816^
2610; dXXA ^r, 2002; dXXi /iJ* i-i,
3000; dXAd fiirroi, 2766, 2916 a;
dXXA fMtr, 2786, 2021; dXX' oSr, 2057.

UXAmt, ptM., 614; perf., 671; w.
gea., 1372.

UXax^'. -'n. -^ 842.

&MUEa^76I>.

UX^Km, 81 D 1.

AXXttXow, deal., 381 ; nae, 1277.

UXoti*, -oa^ .«n, 842.

UXatot, w. gen. or dat., 1430.

UXafiu, mid. dep., 1720; aXra, Od,
666 ; IXerni, 882 t>.

UXot, decl., 386; use, 12T1-127B; dUot
T« Kof, 1273, cp. 2080 ; dXXai d\X«,
etc., 1274; dXXo ti (4), 2652; dXXg,
1627 c.

&X3tAtfKmi, w. gen. or dat., 1430.

Afw, improper prep., 1701; w. part.,
2081 ; iita . . . tat, 2876.

drkspriw, w. part., 2101.

&|tfroTOt, LppOTM, ISO D.

326 D 4.

CO., 1591 a.

i^ulwr, KpuTM, 319 ; mean., 319 >.

djuXUo^uu, pass, dep., 612.

&]J4U, l!|t|IM, &wu(ir), 106 D, 184 D,
826 D 1, 8.

d|in||ioWi*, <r. gen., 1867.

djidt (HDmetimes printed iiiii), 380 d I.

A)Ldiw, d^n;uu, mean, and constr.,
137H. 1471, 1607, 1734.2.

&|i4(, ^^It, 136 D, 176 a, N. t ; tue,
1676-1677, 1681.

i^4UvTB|u, perf. with pree. mean., 1040.

Ali^iX^, w. redundant m4, 2740.

ip^unpt, 1040 a.

d^t^PitW^ w. redundant /«t, 2740.

&|i4dn|Mi, 349 e, 002 a, 1171, 1170.

diu^V^'' -*w -«> ^^-

£|i^, decl., 349 e; with pi. snhj., vb.
in pL or dual, 062a; w. dual aud pi.,
009; in pred. postUon, 1171, 1179.

fo, force, 1762, 1766 b ; poaitdon, 1764 ,
repeated, 1766; without Tb., 1706;
tit tl, 1760 b; omitied, 17C7 ; de-
pendent sabJT. w., 1766; w. indie,
past potent., 1TS4; w. iodic., denot-
ing onreallty, 1786-1789 ; w. iterative
indie, 1790-1702, 1601, 1033, 2341 ;
w. fut. Indie, 1703 ; w. anticipatory
subjv., M Horn., 1610, 2407 a; «.
anbjv., in Horn., in independent sent.,
1813; w. potanL opt., 1622, 1B24-
1SS4, 2406; w. inf. and part., 1646-
1649, 20-23, S146, 2270; in final
clauses, 2201, 2202; in obj. clauses,
2216, 2216, 2232; w. brn, 2270.
2277, 2278 ; apod, without, in unreal
condit., 2313-2320; in apod, of less
Tivid fut. cnndit., 2320; w. temp.
parUelea, 2800 ; w wpl,, 2444-2447,
2462 ; In indir. disc., 2000, 2603, 2607,
2609, 2611.

ir, the form, 2283; see Ur.

-&.V, in gen. pi., 214 n 8.

&* ((or dj^, prep.), in Horn., 76 o.

&*«, for irinTtfii, 72 D, 175 b B.

&i^ prep'., 354' a, 1676, 1077. 1682.
Awfytyfi ■•■■», two botb. , 820.

uogic

GKEGE INDEX

AvBYKatot, pen. oonstr. w., 1982 a.

AvAyki), w. ace. or dat. and Inf., 1985 b.

&*aCvo(tas lolloped by fi^, 27:2ft.

&*a|U|i*i(rK« rtfd rimi, 1680.

Arirra, w. gen., 1370; w. loc. dat.,
1637, 16SS.

&**■, 1<»6 a, 1700 J w. redond. »«, 2768.

dWx<•|w^ "- part, or Inf., 2098, 2127.

iriiP, 1.S0, 262 D ; M appos., flSa b.

tkttpmw^, £81 ; SB appoB., 086 b.

d*lm||u, tr. and Intr. tensea, 810 n.

-ovrtfu, fnt of tIm. In, 530c.

-9,v%-, tense-auff., G23 b, c

Ai«(7t«|u, faC mid. M pan., 808.

Ai-ri, 175 a n. 1, 1073, 1676, 1677, 1688.

Arrlo, dvrlBv, Improper prep., 1700.

6.rim, 488 a, 600. 1 b and 1 D, 480 e, [ ;
bit.,63ei>; dinjffai, ^ufcUv, £062 a.

kfiAt, peis. coDEtructlon more common
n., 1982 a ; ii,6r T,n w. inf., 1424.

Afite, w. »«i, 2692 a ; w. /i4, 2720.

iir, 76 n.

dmiYopitu, V. part., 2008; n. redun-
dant ;i4, 2740.

SvSf , see vol.

Annria, 454 a. 609.

d«^Ki>, redup., 620c.

&vnpi, accent of fnt. , 428 e.

&«fa, IMS a.

Aw^K, form Arlffx"''''! ^^ '; and

d'^o/wi, w. redundant m4i 2740.
Awwrftt, ang., 464a; w. obj. clause,

2224 a ; w. rednndant ni, 2740.
A«4, rare w. dXl^et and w. numei-ala,

1817 a ; cpda. of, w. gen., 1384 ; use,

1676, 1677-1070, 1684, 1T56 ; mean.

in cpda,, 1080.
AwoEISafu, mean, of act and mid.,

1734. 3.
iwot*lfa-int, as pass, of drorrtlM*, 1762.
A«mci|in*, V. pan. or inf., 2144.
d««Kpi*o|iai, pass, dep., 612 b, 813.
d*D)iai4t, 480 f ; mid. fuL, 806.
d-woXifwa, w. part, 2008.
dir4XXG|u, tr. and intr. teowB, 819.
*wnXcifi«nttt, paaa. dep., 812 b, 813 d.
iiwwwft, 1640 a.
AmpJi'i *M a ; Irop/ofuu, Bt2 o.

AnrPfwVtu, tr. and Intr. Udmb, 819.
AwavTtpfa tikI Tiioi (raiit ri), at tiA

T>, 1630 1 w. redundant p.^, 2740.
4»B^(Tf<t, naed as paaa. of irtktm, 1T6!.
d«d]^ In flee., 703 a.
iirrm, meaning of act. and mM., 17S4. 4.
d«4, prep., 88 D, 1676a, 1684.
V 2787.
tpa, 2787-2790 ; yip ipa, 2820 ; f A^a,

2830.
£f^ Interrog. particle, 2660, 2071 ; ip

at, ipaii^, 2661.
jtpa, conflrma^TO particle, S800.
dpapfrxa, redap., 626 c ; see. aor., 088 ;

tr. andiatr.,820, 891.
df^iw, 4B8a, 480e.
dfit*, deol., 286. 1.
'Aintt, ded.,2B6. 2.
df^, 886. 6.
Apurnt, 810, 319 a.
dpicJa, 4B8a,480f.
Lfvlof»i, paaa. dep., 812 ; w. rednndant

^4, 2740.
df^, 4B8a.
Sppq*, decl., 201 a.

dpi-, dfrtrm 488 a, 480 f, eOD. 1 b, »1.
-•PX°fi compounds of, accent, 8M k.
df^a, fatmld. w. paaa. mean., 806; w.

gen., 1370; w.dat., 1637, 1688; ^t-

fiu, w. gen., 1301 ; meaning of act.

and mid., 1734. 6 ; ingreaa. aor., 19S& ;

t^o/uu w. part, or Inf., 2096, S1S8.
■it, numeTKl words in, 864 e.
-St, for -&f, Id ace. pi., IS! d 2.
-B«, words In, w. -d In gen., 226: w.

Toc. In -a, 226 ; parta. in, decL, 806.
-dn, -*n, 3d pen. ending, 468 d and d.
.Ba% (iini), in A stems, loc, 341.
driuvof, comp., 316 b ; pred. nse, IM3.
iovo, .184 D.
fnnt, w. aoc., 1668 a.
&«Tv,decl., 2e8andn8; Accent, 971.
-aru, -ara, pera. endings, 486 f and d.
drdf, 2801.
Sn (dn Hi), w, part., 2066 ; (miMinii

of fir after, 2117.
tnf, improper prep., 1700.
Im, 880 ; drm, not encUt., 181 b, 884 a

GREEK INDEX

761

•V, pronnuc 36; ang., 4S5 (ep. 487) ;
rteiDS in, ST 5.

«(, 2803 ; S' at, 2639.

aMtt, 2802.

strip. 2801.

««T(,2802.

a4r(«>, modifyliiK part in tenie, 2081.

atr^, obliqne cases uaed as peis. pron.
in Atk prow, 326 d. 328 b, IITI, 1201.
1 a, 1202. 1 a, 1204, 1212 ; decl., 827 ;
meanings, 828, 1204; crada, aftrif,
etc., 828 c It. ; B^i, etc., inlrodiic.
followiDg snbst., 900; tame, attrib.
poaltioD, 1188, 1178, 1204, 1210 ; ulf,
pKd. position, 1171, 1178, 1176, 1204,
1200 b; In Horn., 1206, 1211, 1238;
emphatic (tetf), 120e-120&; uuem-
phatio s^oO, etc., not at beglmiing
of sentence, 1213, 1217, 1328 a; em-
phaUc or leflex. w. other prons., 1288-
1287 ; dat «. d >Ari(, 1600; airtU
i'tpdti, etc., 1626.

i^oipfe^ T.fd riKii (riri) rt), or rir(
rt, 1630 ; w. redundant nii, 2741.

44611U, ang., 460 ; w. redund. ni, 2741.

d^uivWw, w. perf. sense. 1886.

tx*o|uu, 488 b, 480 e, 812, 1911 ; w. tC,
2247; w. part., 2100.

iXfi., n o, 1700, 2388.

-mm, Tbs. in, pree. part., 810; conjug. of
pres. and iroperl., 886 ; pros, system,
400, 623 ; inflec., 636-667 ; in dialects,
643-663; denominatives, 866. 1; fre-
quentatiTee and Intensives, 867 ; de-
sideratlves, 868.

■4mv, ■*¥, in gen., 214 d 8, 287 tt.

B, bel dental stop, 83 ; bef . fi, 86 ; bet.
r, 88 ; dereloped between /i and p
(or X), 130.

PalM, 488 c, 480 b, f ; sac aor., 651,
682 a, 682 i>, 683 a, 684 a, 687 ; perf.
SubJT., 603; MC. perf., 704 a and d;
mid. fut., 806; tr. and intr. tenses,
810 ; perf. w. pree. mean., 1M6.

p4XX«, 621, 682 o, 688, 711 d.

Pa«iA««i, 276, 2T'i, 278; w. and with-
out article, 1140.

PA-rt-r, P&iwT«t, 319 ; mean., 810 •.

Pi&{d|uu, dep. w. pass, mean., 818; w.
ace., 1601 a ; as pass. , 1742.

^uim, BST 1 fuL mid. w. act, mean., 806.

pX4«T«, w. aoc., 1462, 1691 a.

Poia,469g; mid.fnt.,806; ir.f>4,2730.

Poi|M-, w. dat., 1692.

Bo^p&t, form, 117 ; decL, 227.

PaiXaiiu, aog., 480 ; ^tfXii, 628 ; paaa.
dep., 812 ; i^v\6iuiii {ir), ezpreaatng
wish, 1782, 1T80; ^tfXii, ^dXnrte be-
fore delib. subJT., 1S06 ; pov^aliiitt it,
eipreeungwish, 1827; w.fuL inf., 1869.

po«*, decl., 276.

pperds, 130 n.

psv^ fat, 46S c ; w. <r, 489 d, t.

r, nasal, 16 a, 19 a, 22, 81, 84, 02; be-
fore dental stop, 82 ; before it, 86 ;
for |9, dial., 132 d; eufflzes w., 864.

YdXo, decl., 286. 8.

'YoiUn, mean, of act and mid., 1784. 6.

lif, 2803-2820 ; oi yip i\\i, 2767,2786 ;
dXXi ydp, 2786, 2816^i810 ; )( T<>0>,
2833 ; «j) yip, 2840 ; 9 yip, 2666 ; yV
tt,, 2068.

ft, 181 d, 2821-2839 ; /iii rl yt, 3763 e ;
iWi . . . 7(. 2786 ; iX.M y4 tm (tM
yt), 2786 ; yi /i/r, 2002 ; icol M' ■ ■ .
7*, 2021.

ytyila, w. part., 3100.

Yi(«o|iai, tr. and Intr. tenses, 830.

-yuM, -YMH, compounds in, 888 e.

Y(Ua, 468 a. 489 e, f ; yXiiu, 641 tt,
648 w.; mid. fat, 806 ; diamat. aor.,
1087.

yAw, decl., 367 1>, 286.4.

fit, in Hdt, 227 d ; omitted, 1027 b, 1303.

-7(, deictic suft., 333 g.

'V('V*a|Mu, 673, T(H b ; copulative, 017 a ;
periph. w., 1710, 1764, 1904 ; as pass.
of rftrif, 1762 ; pree. as perf., 1887;
part, as pred. adj. w., 2001.

Yi7nknM, 489 c. 681-687, 806 ; of past
and pres. combined, 1886a; perf. as
pres., 1046; w. part or Inf., 3106,
2120.

yW|iu, 80.

6&E£K INDEX

YM(|uhlinpUad,lDZ7 b,'
and At^jifiif^, '~"

ipait, deol., 27G; in Horn., 8750 2,
Ypa^i^*, ir. Tbfl. of judloial action, 1S7T,

1576.
ypi^,act )(niid., 1734.

TLmypa^^ir, 1670; pOBS., 1742.
fw^dacl., 2»6. C.

A, bef. denial sUip, 8:1 ; bef. /i, 86 ; de-
veloped, between t and />, 1.10 ; for p,
di&l., 13'^ u ; BuffixeH w., 883 b.

SaC, 2848.

Sk1*0^ 480 e.

S^fnnv, decl., 286. T.

S«ptf«, GOO. 1 a ; w. ace., 15964.

Si^n||u, tut, to/ilu, 639 D; SinAi,
747 D 4.

Sa.Hlt«, acd. )( mid., 1734. 8.

iofMnt, fut. mid. w. act. mean., 806,

GoSn, 2845.

SI, 2056, 2S34-2B39 ; ^l . . . H, 2891 ;
M' ■ . . U, 2U03-291S ; oEIti . . . H,
2947 ; !' «B», 2969; ri . . . Si, 2981.

5<6u^ 70S.

-E<, enclic, 161 d, 180, 342 and a, 1669.

Sa-S[(N)-o-ini|tmi, welcome, 620 c d.

Sri, contr., 397 a, 651a; qiiui-impera.,
933 b, 1966 ;w. gen, of quanUt;, 1399;
w. dat. of peis. and ^n. of tbing,
1400, 1407 ; w. ace. of pers. and gen.
of thing, 1400 ; w. ace. of Ihing, 1400 ;
«.i. of prea. or past time, 1774-1779,
1906, 23ia-231& ; it*i ir, 2315 ; w.
ace. and inf., 1986b; neg. w.,2T14b.

UOm, lOSn; w. ace,, 1698 a; WSooca,

w. redund. jhS, 3741,
S((k¥«|u, 308, 418.422, 671,733,744-767 ;

w. part, or inf., 2106, 2130.
StCvM, decl. and uBe, 336, 1180.
Sti*dv, n. it, 2247.
SMpov, decl., 285. 6.
ttflnpoi, mean, , 813 b.
BIm, decl., 286. 6.
Mpi], 2iea.

itfn^ai, 812 ; form ttpnmw, 138 D.
ivfit, i, t^Smfil&.ISI,
SMnpoCot, pred. use of, 1042 a.
8lxo|wi and SfaoiMu, 127 and d ; BtHi-

IMi, 660 D ; mid. dep. , 613 c ; dramat.

aor., 19ST.

Iw and S4a|L», contr., S97 a ; S^sfui,

pMB. dep., 812 ; l^r, copula omitted

W., 944 b ; t4<a, iadc. w. gen., 1307 ;

Miymi, oonstr. w., 1398 ; l^fioi, w. tut.

fall, 1869; itw, pers. constr., 1083;

S^r, aoc. ab8.,20T6j.. See M.
Gte, bind, 397 a. b, 488 c.
Bf|, Hfnn, w. indef . pron., 839 e ; 3840-

2847; 06 Si, eitiroti; SS51 f; AXU

H, 2786 ; tip Si, 2820 ; y^ H '■»,

2820; N94,3839; m1j4,2847; ^ H,

2896; (ol 14 »(, 3890; M^'^it. 38D9,

2000 ; Si) nCr, 8000.

titv, 2840.

(X^ Am, w. BT. or part. , I^Ur i»T. w.

Sri, 1962 H. ; S^Xti tlpt, W. pMt., 2107 ;

S. liiii Ati, 2684 ; S^\»r tri (^SnSorin),

withOQtTb., 3686.
ti|Ua, S86, 387, 302, BOO; w. part. Of

inf., 2100, 2131.
-Si|ir, adra. in, 844.
S^ov, 2660.

&4t«, 2861 ; sir t^o, 2000.
-El, deictic sntE., 333 g.
tti, no anastrophe, 176 a h. 1 ; fn epdi.,

1646, 1680; um, 1676, 1676, 16T8,

1679, 1686, 1766.
SwYifvortu, «. part., 2007 ; At omitWd

w., 2119.
hiiyt, tntr., 1709 s; W. part., 3097.
SidSoxM, w. geo. or daL, 1417.
Uatfim, w. two aocs., 1626.
S«A«njMi, w. adv., in peripb., 14S8.
SuXt^ofM, paaa. dep., 812,
EiaXi(», w. part,, 2008.
Sta#,fr*>, w. part., 2097.
StaMfafisi, pan. dep., S12; w. inl.,

1869, 1002 a ; w. M. S72S a.
SiaTpd, 1640 a.
SianX4>, w. part, 2007 ; A* omitted w.,

2119.
Sid^eot, w, gen., 1480 ; w. dat., 1430.

GREEK INDEX

EiBiirxa, 90, 808 ; w. ace., 1679.

-EtE|>^ic«, «8T ; fat. mid., 606.

8(S^u. 307, 416,421,488c, 726, 744-797.

SUk, 1649 a.

SiN&t*). iiKdlttrM riW r<»<, 1376 ; S.icd-
fcir SCnrv, «iKii{t(r«iu Slia,r tifI, 1676,
1734. 9.

S(Ku»t, pera. conatmction w., 1982 a;
w. ivTl om., 944 c ; Sltatow 4* w. and
w't 4r and inf., 1774, 1774 a.

Sin), rmplifd, 1027 b ; Slmtr w. »b§. of
judicial action, 1377, 1378 ; i^Xur.d™
SJii^r, 1678 i niaia *ijti,», 1576 ; rim
(rlroficiO ''"^'i 1734. 16 ; Sl»i>' ioSnl,
BB paaa. uf (tiiuoOr, 1762 ; Slirp, 1627b ;
Slinit, improper prep., 1700. See Bt-
i[d{*>, Euiicii.

Stfil. 364d.

Su, sufr.,B63bS.

AwvAria, defect., 288.

Sul«tp. 2240.

SiiWi, 2240, 257S.

SLTTit, dovhlf, 364 d.

S(x>, and SixS^ 364 o, 1097 b, 1700.

Gi<|i^, 304, 641 D.

GiAko, iiiiiui eardrav, 1874 ; itdinw 7pa-

*^i.:

1676.

I, Ssui, in Horn., 349 d.

SoK^. / leem, pers. constr., 1983 ; / be-

litve. 1983 a ; JskiS >cai, 1467 a, 1992 c ;

&)«i w. inf., 198S a, 1986; ioKtt ^

Tin i\e€ir, rare for laKtt rlt fui ^X-

tfci>, 1983 a ; Sojcu, ioicFi »u)i, / AaE«

amindto, w, prea. or aor. inf., 1098;

ei SorO, 2692 a ; w. m4. 27^,
S«Ki|idtu, with part, or inf., 2132.
Sd|Mt, omitteil after certain prepe., 1302.
-Sov, adva. In, 344.
Upu, decl.. 2R6. 10.
GpaT^f, -EfEpTDi, 128 D.
Sp^, 489 b, e, f, 641 ; w. ace, 1691 a.
Sp4<rcit, gender of, 232 d.
S«va|Mi, 466 c, 489 g, 812 ; pres. subjT.

and opt., 424 0, B. 3, 749 b; w,

euperL, 1086 a; w. fuL inf., 1869.
Swoirtt, personal constr. w., 1982 a ;

w. itrt om., 944 c ; w. inf., 2001 ;

ace. aba., 2076 o.

Ho, 349; w.

pi..

MS d, 962 a; with

dnal and pi

999

&»--, cpds., 103 a.

105. 886. 3

898 c;

aog of vbs.

cpd.

w., 462.

BiKTXfpca™, w. ace

, 1596 ft; w. dat.,

1696 b.

Urn, ner, 418

6820

, 686 D. 687

7681);

quantity of

,600

1 a and t D

tr.aDd

intr. tensee.

819.

Sftpo-, decl., 281.

E, sign, 2 a ; name, 1 b ; pronune., 24 ;
iuterch. w. r,, 27, 86, 37 » 2, 89,
278, 486, 446, 684, 643, 738 b, 887 ;
iengtbene to «, 96, 100, 102, 644 ; bjII.
aug., 429, 431, 444; them. tow. in
indie, 466, In Hom. aubJT., 467 d;
expelled In weak sl«ms, S6, 44 b, 262,
476 a, bef. tow., 44 a, from -A«,
.V», 660 a ; prefixed, 41 ; added to
Tb.-Btem, 486, in forming cpd«., 882 ;
€:>, 229 b; «:»:a,S6, 483a,BSlb;
e:<r:». 36, 831 a ; i:a:u, 48S b;
dial, for a, ir. B, (, «, 33 d.

I, peiB. pron., 181 a, 187 n. 1.

-*>, for .,,y, 214 D 6.

«a, from 1^, 34.

tiv, ^», iv, 1768 a, 2283, 3247, 2323,
2836, 2337; if haply, 3364; tir »(,
■al id,, 2369-2381 ; iir 06, 2696. 2698 ;
iii ipa, 2796, 2797 ; fir re (ffr Ti, ir

rO.i

I. 1218-

tdo, 431, 488 d ; mid. fut. as pass., 808 ;
oiK Mm, 2692 a.

Irrvdo, aiig.,463a; frru2>ui fii), 2726.

irtit, comp. of, 845 b ; for adj. , 1097 b ;
w. gen. or dat., 1439, 1440. 1700 j
improper prep,, 1700,

trtlf», 446, 649, 698, 705, 819.

VoUa Tirl and tI rm, 1471.

l-fA, iyiH<-), 134 D, 826 D 1 ; encllL
forms, 181 a ; luni and t/iaO, etc.. 187 e
H. 2, 826 a, 1102 ; decl., 825 ; lywyt,
etc., 325 b ; imaginary peraon, 1198.

HA*, w. Int., 1869, 1902 a.

764

GREEK INDEX

H«r, 181 i>, 835 D 1.

Wt-, aug., 431.

■L, dlphth., 6 ; gvnnlne mi spnrioiu, 6,
26 ; proDniio., 2G ; for t In Tenie,
26 d; »;«:<, 86, 4TT, 566 b, 604,
576, 586 o, 788, SSI a; by oom-
peuB. leDgtb. for t, ST ; in ang., 436,
487 ; insteKl of redup. , 445 ; loses i,
48, 270 b.

((, procIiL, ITQ I w.opt.,toezpreuwl«h,
1816; SMrrip (&•} cl, 2087 k, 247S-
8480 ; in rf (rt), 2087 b, 2347, 248U
S4&6 ; ta CU18. cl., 2248, 2247 ; condit.,
3282, 2288, 2U28, S32U, 2886, 2339,
2340 ; ,1 yip, 1760, 1781, 1616, 1616 ;
(i ^■^ tl Si /i4, tl iiii Sid CiO> "■ ^b.
omitted, 2346 ; tt S' 471, 2846 ; d and
opt. «. Ar, 2363 ; ^ haply, 2364 ; el
ml, nl <rf, 286tl, 3374-2381 ) la Ind.
quest., 2671 ; if «, w. aabjv. w. Tbs.
of knoainff, etc.. Id Horn., 2673; *l
... 4 (tfTt), 2676 ; ,1 Dii, 2690, aSSS-
2701 ; tl IfH, 2796, 2797 ; r\i,w tl,
2900 a.

-n aod -n, tnflectiDnal endings, 628.

-n, mItb. in, 344.

-KM., subflts. In, 219, 2 a and b.

.«« and -MS, in opt, 461 a, 008 and d.

itSov, 72 D, 424 b, 431, 529; w. part,
2112 a; w. (i, 2354 b.

-«(i||uv and -4Cp4v, in opt. , 675 a.

ill* {atei) or at y'tp, ^. indio., 1760,
17«1 ; w. opt., 1815, 1816.

ibtdln, aug., 4S7 ; rl nn, 1409.

tbcit, copula omitted w. , 944 b ; aor. inf.
preferred w., 1868 b; tlnit icri, w.
fi^, 2728 ; tlKii fr, 1774, 1»06, 231-1.

«(|U, enclit. forma, 181 c, 181 n, 424 a ;
accent (m, nhen used, 187 b ; forms,
708-772, op. 463, 464, 406, T47 o 1
fut. mid. w. act. mean., 800 ; copolt
tire, 917 n ; forms, often omitted, 944,
2110-2119; elm redundant w. pred.
noun, 1016 ; w. part, forming peripti.,
1961, 1003 ; w. pan. as pred. adj.,
S091 ; 4* w. adj*. and Terbals of un-
InlflUed obllgUioD, 1714; gen. ir.,
1308, ISM ; dat w., 1476 ; «r ace. aba..

S076 c ; itir •!», 2012 c ; turt, quau-
impers., 1966; tmw Srrit, tWlr •!,
2513 ; fvTtw aw, etc., 2614 ; Imw st,
etc., 2615; aU larir tt, etc., 3661,
2552, 2667. See IfM-n.

il|u, forms, 773-770, cp. 408 d d, 747 d 1.
2; 4t, 404cd; mean., 774, 1880; Uk
w. hoTt subjv., 1797 a; w. imper.,
18S6.

ilv, •Irf, 1687.

-iiM (Aeo!. -ffw), vbs. in, 619.

<!•, 326 u 1.

QOm.-tuiO, suit., 643. 6.
, S4« f, 868. 2.

•Iwtp, 2248, 2379.

•I*ov, ilri accent, 4S4 b ; tlrt/itrmi and
tlriiitr. In Hom., 680 d ; aac aw.,
640 ; tlr4 of more than one penon,
1010; iv)nnnaful,w.iaf.,19S2c,ieB7,
3017 ; Boy, w. »rt or in, 2017 ; Joy,
w. inf., 2017 K. ; i,t (Int) ttwtl,,
3013 a, b.

ripY"< cciuu- of iDf' w., 2744 ; ««), 3740.

■fpiKa, 446, 520. 8.

.«p« (Aeolle tppu), vbs. In, 619.

(h(A), 179, 160 b; use, 364 b. 16:6,
1086 i fit rgero d^c^«at, etc., 1836 ;
elt Ire (m), (f< S (u), i> I, A oC, 33SS

<h, decl., 849 ; di dr4f>, lOSB.

■Ml, adjs. in, 290 ; pans, in, 807.

(trat ((ffu), improper prep., 1700.

ttra, 2083, 2668.

rin, accent, 1S6 ; ttrt .. . ttrt, 8816.

2862-3866 ; n. d^, 2790, 3866 ; rfr<

oB>, 8961.
-«ut, Ybs. In, 060 b.
U, 82 c V. 2, 183 a, 186. See If.
ki«, 1007 b, 1700.
lKatf-r««, 837; w. pi. verb, 961; in

appM. to pi. sub]., 062 ; w. and w't

art., 1171, 1179; inlmrra,, 2097.
kdnpot, 337, 952, 1171, 1179.
botripitttr. Improper prep., 1700,
kit, 341, 346 ; ittlBtr, 846.
kriMi, 826 d, 333 ; use, 1388-1861, 000.

1171, 1176-1178, 1201. 1 b, 1202. lb;

for repeat. reL, 2617.

GR££K INDEX

765

Jic]Li(ir«, with aoc., 1601.

JHoinot, pred. om, 1048.

InivTB, u paM., 1763.

tKri%, 1700 1 <crAf o«, 8768.

Ui», 306 b; comp., 828; pred. nae,

1043; Jidc (Thu, S012 o; ft part.,

2071, 2117 b.
•U, snB., 880. 1.
iMlTr>v. i\inrm¥, 810, 819 b ; w. or

w't jf, 1074. *'

iXmitm, 488 a, 480 f, g; tr. and Intr.,

1700 a.
OiYX". pert- >»I<1., 407 ; w. part., 2100.
Out*), 431, 468 a.
JXXiCn, w. put., 2008.
'EUi)*, aa adj., 086 a; 'EXXqnuir, W.

art., 008, 1024.
tX*{t«, 886. 6; w.dU., 1517; w. Inf.,

1868 a, 2580; w. it, 8680; w. fti},

2720.
tt.ir(t, decl., 267.
t|iaim«, decl., 820 ; nae, 1100. 8 a,

1200. 2d, 1218.-1237.
V*iv, 826 D 1 ; iniStr ah-^i, 320 s.
Jfula, l|iio, l|Jot, I|US, J|U««, 825 d,
tfUm, 488 a, 480 f 1 mid. fat., 806.

326 D 4.

«, constr., 1640.

^uA povXoiUvf Irri, conBtmotlon, 14S7.
t|utt, decl., 330 ; use, 880 a, 1182, 11S3,

1106-1100, 1203.
J|u>et, 826 D 4.

])i«<Lpoi, decl., 280 a; w. gen., 1410.
1|i«C-*Xt||u, 727 ; iitrlr^ifit, 761 t>.
j|i7rtirpt|p, 727.
i^mSiv, 841 ; w. ^ii), 2740.
Ifiirpoe^v, improper prep., 1700.
h. In cpda., ei'06, 101 a, 440 a, 727;

proclit., 170, 180 b; h relt, bef. a

auperl., 10S9 ; iwea, 1611, 1642, 1876.

1670, 1667; n.dat. of place and time,

1534, 1638, 1641, 1642; cpda. of, w.

dac, 1644-1660 ; ip St, 1641 ; w. dat.

ioT ill TT. acc., 1660.
tv, inf. and., 480 a, 469 d.
•*r, for -iTira*, 600 a », 678 a.

1* (nom. -^r), tall., 801. 16.

.(Mu, Inf. end., 480 k. 1, 469 d, 685,
600, 760.

Jvavrlov, Impropar prep., 1700.

|pavn4o|la^paaa.dep.,8t2; w.fiif,a74a

J*a.vr(at, oppoMtte, with gen., 1426.

ipaii)i([a|wi, paas. dep., 812 a.

iyMfi, 202 d.

fMK(^ tvtxnr {ilrtta, drnitt), enclit.
prona. after, 167 e v. 2 ; pcrtposltiTe,
1666 a, ITOO ; motive ezpreaaed by,
1670.

IvipSi, Improper prep., 1700.

Ma, 842 b, 848, 346 a, 2408 ; instead
of rel. pTon.,2400.

4*M8<,846.

t*ea«Ta, in Hdt., 128 d, 846 d 1.

I**fv, 346, 348 a, 3498.

4*«*St, 346.

Mtftnr, fn Hdt., 126 d, 846 d 1.

Ml)|Ua|uu, paaa. dep., 812, 818 d ; w.
gen., 1867 ; w. ob). d., 2224 a.

M, tor fw, 176 b, 1887.

Ih, for^H^ri, Ihi^i, 176 b and m.

Inatm, w. part., 2106 ; w ob]. o1.,
2224 a; ^rn^ofuii, 612.

InQpu, 105 a, 460 d, 628 f n. 1.

ju, lut. of aome vba. In, 680 o ;

im, 780.

>, prea. In, 510 n.

l»xXia, ang., 451 ; w. dat, 1461.

fvoxot, with gen. or dat., 1425.
nom. ■«i),aafl.,868. 8.

l*»fita, 846, 2060. '

' Ita, 846.

Ivrii, improper pnp., 1700.

Irrplm^M, give heed to, w. gen., 1367.

IE, tn cpda., 104 ; bef. TOW., 138 ; pro-
clitic, 170 ; accented, 180b ; bef. aug.,
449 b; w. luperL, etc., 1817 a ; om,
1676, 1677-1670, 1668, 1756. See k.

I(im, quaai-tmpen., 1986.

1£V, w- and w't tf, 1771, 2813. 8816.

ie<it, 841 ; w. gen. or dat., 1487, 144a

4f *, 2076 «.

I{a, Improper prep., 1700.

fa. Id, iDl, 161 n. 325 n 1, HOB.

to, toil to tv, 50 D 2, 466 b d. ,

.ooglc

G&EEK IND£X

«o, BuS., 858. 4 ; Btema tn, 2S5.

fcuca, 444 b, 573, e»S, 696, TM d and d ;

pers, ooiutr. w. inf., 1988; w. port.,

2089 c ; w. part, or inf., 2106, 2I8S.
1rp>Y>, in Horn., 661 d.
Ut, in Horn., 330 d 1 and 2.
be, la6t, 326 c 4.
hroiWo, 4K0 i ; mid. fut., 806 1 dramat.

aor., 1937.
twt*. 1T68 a, 2390 a.
IwavopUw, aug., 161.
tm^rinpait in Horn., S20 d.
imi, w. aor. for plup., 1943 ; in causal

d., 2240 ; in temp, cl., 2SSi b; w. force

of although, 2244, 2380; and irei

wpStow (rdxurra), 2S83 B ; trtl oBr,

2964 a.
twtAir, 1768 a, 2890 a.
{viiS^,iF.aor.forpIiip.,]M3; in causal

cl., 2240 ; in temp, d., 2333 b ; iraSii

TdxnTT-a, 2388 B.
Jini|u, accent of fut., 426 e.
iniTa, n. part., 2080, 2082; xiriiTa,

2S63.
Wain, in temp, cl., 2363 b h. 1.
4iHiiiiiat, w. gen. or dat., 1421.

Mjv, 1768 0, 2399 a.

♦irl, 1676-1077, 1689, 360 d ; Tlw. cpd.

with, w. gen., 13B4, w. dat., 1644-

1560.
JwipovXtis, fut. mid. aspasa., 808.
tnBDiUM, w. gi:n., 1849.
ImXavt&vaiuu, w. gen. or ace., 1368 ;

w. part, or inf., 2106, 2134.
hrJuhro, w. ace.. 1607 ; w. part.. 2008.
f«t|ka«|u», 812 ; n. gen., 1866 ; w. obj.

cl.. 2210-2212.
htutfitU, w. ace., 1606.
twlirn^Mv, 460, 812 ; w. part or inf.,

2106,2139; w. ^j}, 27M7, 2730.
knrtiKku, pasB. constr. of, 1748.
twxTimt, paaa. constr. of, 1 748.
Iwvrti&iot, in peT8. eonatr.. 1982 a.
twwtfAit Tirl and rl nn, 1471.
hn-rpfnt, pass. coDStr. of, 1748; w.

part, or inf., 1992 c, 2144.
l*>iH^(t>, -o|Mt, 1784. 10.
liro|Hu, w. gen. or dat., 1417.

hnt, 4« (rot dwitv, 201S a.
(wpiA|ii|v, 424 c H. S, 146 b.
ifim, 488 a, 489 e, f .
Ipt^yvit, 106 D.
JpiteM, 446 p, BSO.
l|H-,886.6.
'Bp|i<tt, decl., 227.
-ipp«, pres. in, 619 d.
1 L — comp., 816 b.

tpi»m, followed b7 ftit, 2741.

JptH*, 488 b, 489 d, f, 600. 1 d.

lpXi>|MiL, fi^Bif accent, 424 b ; sec. pv(.,
460 e, 665, 706 ; relation to li/u, 774,
18B0 ; Hs fuL., 1881 ; aa pert., 18M;
w. dat., I486 ; w. part., 20M.

Ip«t, decl., 267 D, 286. 11.

h (tit), seeilf.

n (nom. -ot), saff., 840 a 8, 841. 1.
866. 9 ; {nom. -iSt, ^i), sntt.. 868. 5,
866. 9, 834 d ; «- sterna, 263-906. 302.

4<r«lw,466a, 600.2; fat. I'Sofuu, 641 ; w.
gen., 1366 a.

-Mr4av, -notmv, 466 a.

■Mnpot, -««TaTOt, 316.

IrxBTo*. 820 a, 1172.

inpof. craais of, 69; w. and wt ait..

337 ; and dXXoi, 1271, 1271 a, 1272.
fv, 6, pronunc, 26 ; tu : «v : i>, 8S, 477 b,

666, 6T6, 686 e, 831 a; ang., 4»:

subat.-Btems in, 276; for » dial.,

69 D 2, 466 fa, D ; loaea u, 48, 210 b.

278, 603.
rf, eomp., 346 ; aug. of vb*. begin, w.,

462; w. fx" l"t^-i 1^1' 1709 b; w.

wfiiTTu intr., 1700 b ; w. th^ (V*t«)

and ace., 1691 a, b, w. parL, 2101 ;

tB iiiotti (*d<rx«) aa paaa. of a X/>«

(rWu), 1603, 1762.
tS, tb, 181 1>, 826 D ], 3, 1196.
to (nom. -ttft), BOfT., BBS a 6, 8*8 a I,

844.1.
tSoSt, 123 n.
t«SaC)Mv, decl., 308.
(M«w. deal.. 801 a. SOS.

.oog[c

OKEEK INDEX

MK., 1601 a.

titii, t*M, ISa a, 1700, 2081 ; ritit
. . . »f, 2169.

(Mo^feiiu, 612; w. ace., 1696 a; V.
obj. cl., 2210 b, 2224 a; w. inf.,
2210 b 1 V. radund. ^4, 2740.

•«X»T'-> V- M>c., 1691 b.

(iptmta, tipi, mxent, 424 b ; ang., 4S7 ;
«. part or Inf., 2113, 2114, 2136.

■V>*>i 214 D 4. - '

tit, KubBts. In, decl., 276-278.

tin, 2240 a ; 2883 a, m. 8, 24«3 a.

■SxapM, dec)., 291 a.

•ixoiuu, 813 d ; Bug., 486,437; w. dat.
and Bcc., 1471.

-turn, Tbe. Id., 866. 4; mean, of mid.,
1728 b.

IMt*. w- gen. or dat, 1437. 1440.

J^)iu, w. fut. Inf , 1869.

J^opda, w. part., 2103.

t^' 1^, I4>' 4'"' Introducing proviso, 2279.

{X«, (onn t<rx"t *^ b, 460 e, 649.
687, IngresB., 1926 a; iex^fV ^
paaa., 802 d, 1735 b ; Ifoiuu as pan.,
b08 ; two futB. of, meaning, 1011 ; «.
adv. and gen., 1441 ; w. adv. In
peripb., 1438; intr., IT09 b; forms
peripb. w. aor. part., 609 b, lOUS ;
w. aubst. equiv. to pats, rb., 176.1 ;
w. inf., 2000a; w. rednnd. /»), 2740;
f xu". continually, 2062 a, uttA, 20e8a ;
rl *xi", 2064 b ; afii r^u. coDBtr. of,
2M0, 3668 d ; dlst from mid., 1TS4.
11; fxBM<u 1*- gen., 1301.

-tf, TbH. in, decl. of pres. part, 810;
conjog. of pres. and imperf., 886,
307 ; pres. syHUtm of, 49t), 622 ; In-
fleo. of, 686-667; in Horn,, 660; In
Hdt., 661 ; in Doric, 664 ; in Aeolic,
066 ; denom., 866. 2.
am, from ifo, 84, 214 d 6 b and 8, 238 c,
278, 641

•i gen-i

3 a, 214 D 6.

',444 b

4>v, gcD., SO D. 214 D 8, 287 d.
Iwf , w. aor. for plup., 1043 ; fn temporal
cl., 2383, of pnrpoM, 2418-2421 ; anm-
mary of constrs . 2422-2420.

la*, decl., 28B d, 266 s>.
Innfl, 68 u, 829 d.

p, SM Digamma.

Z 21, 116; proDunc. of, 16a, 26.

[<i-, 866. 6 ; cp. 1686.

-If, expressing motion toward, S42.

[i«7t0(u, 624 a, 733, 742, 746 d, 762 v.

Ztit, decl., 286. 12 ; omitted, 034 a.

Ifa, 488 a, 489 f.

It)Ua, w. gen., 1406.

ti|)udi>, fut. mid. as pass., 809.

-!•>, vb& in, 608-612.

;^I'A, 489 b, d, f ; stem, 731.

IM, I-6t, 289 D.

H, sign, 2 a, 14 ; pronnno., 24; Intet-
cbanged w. •, 27, w. a, 27; for orig.

S, SO, Intr. C, s. 4 ; in nouns, for
AtL a, after t, i, p, 30 i> 2; inter-
changed w. u and I or a, 36, 738 a, b,
831 ; length, from t, 87 d 2 ; in nom.
of S-atema, in Ion., 214 d 2 ; as aug.,
433, 436. See a, b.
/(, UnBe-SQCt.,466. 9.

fl, (1) comp. (Chan), 2863, 972; aft«r
comp., 1060-1076, 1080 ; 4 nard after
comp., 1070 ; 4 (JIot*, iit) W. Inf.,
1OT0, 2007 ; 4 rph, 2467 ; rpbrtpor
{■wfArBff, Tplr) If, 2468-2460 ; dXX' 4,
2T77-27T9; 4iEa(,2g62; TX4r4, li0> 6a.
(2) disjiinc. (either, or): ir&Ttpor (ri-
Ttpa) . ... 4, 2666 ; 4 alone, 2667, 2866,
071; 4(4*) .. .4 (40- 2061, 2676 e;
4 ... 4, 2852 a, 2856 ; .fr. . . . 4, 4 . , .
rfT«, 2864 ; 4 . . . T^, T* , . . 4, 2982.

;;. or, 2661,2676 6.

It, interrog., 2660, 2866 ; dXV 4, 2786 ;
asaeveratlve, 2864; 4 (94, tal, rav),
2806 ; 4 /m, 2800 ; 4 ydp, 2B06 b,
2866; 4 fi4r, 2866, 2921 ; 4 ^r, 2902.

n, dlphlh., 6 ; pronanc, 26.

i|, vihere, 346 o 2.

i, Tel. adv., which viay, at, 346, 2408;
to Btrengthen super!., 1086; introduc.
clausea of comp., 2463 ; used instead
of rel. pron., 2490.

-g and -ii, inflectloiud endlnga, 628.

GREEK INDEX

^B13; w. dkt, 1871,1687,1688;

w. fL^, 2788.
itH 8667.
ijSi, accent, 164 ft.

ffiH, w. put , 2080; »■•,... «(, 2878.
^|uu, 812, rarely w. gen., 1366; w.

ace. of penun, 1696 b; w.dat, 1696b;

n. part., SlOO ; dramatlo aor., 1987.
J|&tf>>*>, 48^ b, 618 c.
J|U^, decl.,297.
V. ^. 2861.

-i^Koot, compounds In, w. gen., U21.
IJKa, w. adv. and geo., 1441 ; pres. fur

pert., 1B86.
1|X(iMt, correl., 340 ; attracted, 2632.
ItpAL, 720 A n., 724, 789.
^|iaf , dec]., 268 c.
4||u(«v, 1||J«*, V'Mi 826 d 1, 2.
•i)p4Mu, inf. ending, 6S7.
)||Upa, implied. 1027 b.
fininpot, decl., 330 ; force of ending,

318b; w. and witbout article, 1182,

1183, 1106a; equi?. to gen. of pars.

pron., 1198; reflex, and non-reflex.,

1200, 12a^ ; inttrtpet afrSr, 1200. 2 b,

1203 b and h.
if^l, tof, 792.
f||u-, 886. 2.

^jLtnt. In ftacUonn, S6S ; poaitlon, 1173.

Vot, 340 D 2. 2383 x g. 8.

'Qpiv, ^fuv, ^|M«, 826 f.

iffAp {iftUr, ai/iOr) «iT4*, 1234.

<i*, tbe form, 2283. See tf*.

-i|>, Inf. ending, 400 o, 032 n, 661 d,
680 D, 609 D ; aor. ending, 802, 803.

4|vUa, 346, 2S8-'} A.

w, i|a, becoming cu, ta, 84.

U««p, introduc. clauaae of comp., 2463.

•Ifi, in nom. pL of words In -cfit, 277 b.

•i|t, proper names la, decl., 208.^6&,
282 a K. ; componnd nouns in, 888 c

-<|t, -«t, compound adjs. In, 888 b, 803 b.

{(ti . . . 1|t<,w. Bubjv.inHom., 2862a.

f rot. 2868.

^rr^lMu, dep., 812 ; w. dat, gen,, or
vrA and gen,, 1402, 1493 a ; of endur-
ing result, IH87 ; w. part,, 2101.

mn-, Vv**>Oomp., 819; inaaiL,31Bft
and b ; frrar w. podtiTB, SS4 ,
i|v, dlphth., 5, 6 D, 26 ; prononc., 26.
4i*n, In clauseA of c«mp. (£pie), 940S a.
^i (Epic), w. local claoMS, 9498.

6, pronnnc., 16 b, 16, 26; befora denial
Stop, 88 ; before il, 86 ; cbanged to r
inredup., 126 a; for r, diaL, 1S3 n;
addition of, in pres. stem, 490 ; aol-
flxes w., 868 c.

tavdrott, w. (plru, r^iiv, etc, 1874.

Mm, 126 g and »., G04.

Ufplm, w. aCG., 1696 a; v. dat.,
1596 b.

a««^>, 806 ; w. (1, 2247 ; w. »r<, 8248 ;
w. irl, 2248 ; w. put. or Inl, S144.
268T b i followed bj depend. qocoUon,
258Tb.

■•l, 134 D, 842 b ; in ,t3, (oTh) , 186 ; -tn,
342.

Mw)uu, mid. dep., 81S c.

MUtt, •flMn, before delib. sufajT., 1806.

•Vw. <lecl., 286. 18, 860 d 8.

-•■V, for -tfito-nr, 686 a n, 673 a.

fcptmia, 808 ; w. ace, IGOl a.

Ma, 397, 608, 007, 806,

h|X4», 469 b.

Mjv, enclit., 161 d.

■*t\r, aor. pass, ending, 469 a, 80S, SD4.

•b US, 114.

-Ii, ending denoting place uJUre, S4S.

•4i, In imper., 126 b, 466. 1 a and ■>.

a^rv''"') B^3 c, 806.

IX^, 486 a. 469 c.

IXtp^ 601, 6T0, 671, 696.

hivtm and (Winoi 838 b, 698, 690,
704 c ; TtBwtiit, decl., 300 a ; Tttri^ti,
060 a ; -trfatu, fuL mid. w. act. mean.,
806 ; expresaing enduring remit, 188T
a; perf. w. pres. mean., IMS; fnt.
perf. w. tut. mean., 1068.

•paiM, t«nses v. Inserted c, 489 c

•fnivte, w. aco., 1606 a.

!(>({, decl., S66.

apt*T*, 126 g and m.

Spy'""- fu^ ^^- V- *^ mean.. 808.

fvv&nip, deoL, 968 and n.

GREEK INDEX

M«, McrfitM, 488 0, 600. 1 a and 1 ■> ;

act. )( mid., 17S4. 12.
«4m, rtMh OK, £00. 1 D.
•<Mnt*, w. ace., IS&l b.

I, prononc. 24 ; quaQtiCf , 4, 500 ; Bub-
■cript, 5, 25 ; aemlvowel, 20, 100-1 IT ;
com. belaie, 106-117; intercliaiiged
w. r, 27, 87, 601; for «, dial., 33 d;
1 : » : «, see <i ; elided, 70-7.1 ; subat.-
■tems In, 208-274 ; claw of Tbe., 507 S.

-^ ending denoting place inhere, 842.

-^, -n|-, sufl. of opt,, 30:1, 469, 480,
4601..

I, ramatns unchanged in aiig., 43S.

-I, deictic auft., S.'JS g.

-M, aaS., 840 b 1, 2, 813 b 1, 644. 8,
868. 2, 860. e.

Uaiioi, mid dep , 818 a,

•MM, vbH. In, B68.

CE^ 2807.

Otof, fi. gen. or dat., 1414.

ISpA*, 8U8, 641.

ISptf*, eOO. 1 a, 680 e D.

Upir, omitted after certain preps., 1802.

-•it, Tbe. in, fut., 580 e ; denom., 806. 6.

tn^i, aug,, 481, 460, 726 a, 777-782.

lic*4o|iAi, etc.. w. ace., 1688.

tXda-KO|uu, 488 a, 489 fl.

DiMt, decl., 289.

Im, 2193, 2200 ; ral. adv., 2498 ; Ipci rl,
2644 a 1 inexclBm.,2d86.

■unm, pras. In, 610 d.

-ii>%-, tenB»«ifl., 623 h.

-Im (AeoL -irw), vt)s. In, 619.

-Mc, dimiDuUTea In, neat., 107 b.

-MI, ->«, gentilea in, 844. 8.

-wt. Indicating descent, 846 f.

-tfw (Aeol. tppti), Tba. In, 519.

-w, gen. of nonos in, accent, 103 a.

•M-M^ TbB. in, 626-528.

4mpo(, -wraivt, 817.

U^iu, Itfrdi, decl., 306; Arriit, decl.,
800 a ; eonjng. , 410, 417 ; op. 431, 690,
788-740, 744-707 ; tr. and intr. tenses,
eif) ; Ivrqiro, pert. w. pres. mean.,
1946.

iTor and -Hirvv, etc., in opt., 461 b.

txMi, 254 a, 206, 273, 273.

•ut, -M>, Tba. in, 600, 600 d, 601, 622.

-tW, -WTOt, SI 8.

E, bef . dental stop, 82 ; bef . /i, 95 ; bef.
rough breathing, 124 and d ; lor t,
r, dial., 1S2 d, Intr. C, h. 4 ; buSzm
w., 864.

KaNmp, w. claaaea of oomp., 2463.

Kde^iuu, 460, 790.

Ka>lt"i 4^1 ^1 ; extension of cognate
ace. with, 1560 ; w. part, or int. , 2144.

KaSIa-n||iL, KOTurT^ffai fxw,702; W.paK,
or Inf., 2144.

KQ,l, in craals. 68 ; ml raCra, 947, 2083 ;
strength, superl., 1001 ; after adjs. and
advB. of Ukenesa, 1601 a ; paracacUc,
2160; oonjunc, 2866-2880; adv.,
2S81-2891; lol «1 (MO , coucess., 2369,
2372-2374 ; dXXi tal, 2763, 2764 ; xai
yip, 2813-2815; >al H, 2847; iil Si,
tat, 2S90 ; q rat, 2S<16 ; ta.t . . . ^wriu,
2880, 2916 a ; icat . . . retrv,, 2680 ;
nl . . . 9/, 2691 ; lal />^r. 2IM)2 ; m''-
. . . »f, 2913 ; KuL ^i,; 2921 ; Kal p.1f
. . . 71, 2921 1 Ht ^^r .ol, 2921 ; ri
nai, ri . . . tat, etc., 2974-2978 ; tal
T>, 2979 ; IXXut rf lal, 2960.

■aCmp, w. part,, 2083, 2382, 2692;
omission of Hr after, 2117.

Kaipdt, copula omitted with, 944 b.

«t(T0i, 166, 2803.

•laUt ((dw), 896, 489 f, 620, 548 a ».

Kcucipfop^B, w. acc., 1691 b.

Ktutdf, comp., 319.

icBNovpYiH, w. ace., 1601 a.

icaicdo, w. ace., 1501 a.

■aiiA), m^td, w. ace., 1591 a ; X^u, w.
ace., 15B1 b; rirx"' ^ pan- of
Kaicat rsiAd, 1503, 1762 ; inia, aS
pass, of caicaf X^u, 1593. 1762.

mJM,, 488 b, 639 a, 560 d, 711 c, 1618,
1946.

■taXit, comp., 310 ; laMi tiyaBii, 1034 a.

KoXOt, »(^u, w. ace., 1691 a ; \4-,w, w.
Bcc., 1591 b ; iniu, as pass, of raXfit
}Jy-, 1762 ; »•/», ir. part., 2101.

Ki|iM», 806 1 w. part., 2098.

.oog[c

770

GREEK INDEX

x\.,28B. li; w. gw.,1298.
», w. part., 2098.
« (Kp&nrrot), 128 d.

KdT, TG D.

rari, S64 a, 1615, ie7&-ie7T, 1690 ; 4
xari, 1079; cpds. of, w. gen., 1884 ;
cpdi. ot, w. gen. and aco., 1386; in
cpds., denoting completion ol action,
1648, 1680.

K«TSY*YvAnc», w. gen. and ace., 1386 ;
w. tedandaot fii), 2734.

KsmSucAta, w. gen. and ace, ISSb.

■oTOKpivM, w. gen. and aoc., 1386.

KaroX^iiPiH), ir. part., 2118, 2114.

■aTPfuUB, w. gen., 1367.

K«TaW|u>, w. tno aces., 1620.

Karamicpt, improper prep., 1700.

MvravX^mt, tr. and intr., 810 ; hto-
tX^tto/ioi, w. aec,, 1595 a.

■MTa^il^ltoftai^ w. gen. and ace., 1386.

icdm^ replacing paaa. ot cardyu, 17G2.

■canfyoplM, w. gen. and aco., 1886,

icar^Koot, w. gen. or dat, 1421.

Kftfios 718, 724, 791 ; cognate ace. w.,
1669 ; for peif. paes. of rWinu, 1762.

K(tM», see imtfot.

itdUiB, 489 o; nee of Imperf , 1891!
constT. w., 146E, 1992 a, 1996 h. ; ct
•n\ttu, 2692 a ; w. fi4. 2720.

W(0. 134 D, 181 D, 1763. Seek*.
V, 489 1, g, 729,
I, 268, 268 D ; implied, I02T b.
i Ki)Safuu, w. gen., 1S6T.

., iMtvn.

E, quantity of v, 147 c, !i64 b.
m», 613, 809.

Kfclia.

Kii4eMf«t, aor., withoat it. In apod, ot

unfulfilled prot,, 2319.
KtvM*«f Im, w. obj. clanw, 2224 a.
MX<M>,6B8, 767 D 1,806.
>X4a,667D2, 700 d, 806.
tikim (lUlu)' 36, 896, 489 c f, 620,

621, 80U ; w. acc., 1696 a ; iXolvr, to

HXtfB, Unset w. Inserted r, 409 b, a.

KXf*>, 491. 686 e D, 696.

Aim, w. gen., 1361, 1366,' m puK d

X^H, 1762.
KrAm, 394, 489 c, 041 i>.
■CO, snB., 868. 6, 804, 1.
Koiiidit, mid. pan., 816.
KM««t, V. dat, 1414 ; w. g«n., 1414.
KoXit<*f ^- gen. and ace., 1376.

K4f1|, 31. 1.

xtfpvt, decl., 247 n, SGO D 2.

tapirrm, 616.

Kim, 840 D.

H&n, 340 D 1.

K«T(|>ot, 340 n.

No«pot, 37 D 1.

■cparfa, w. geo., 1870; w. loC, 1171;

pre& as perf., 1B87 ; w. part., SlOl.
-■p&TiK, nnmea in, ace. of, 204 b. {

KpilM, -264 D 8 ; pi., 1000. \

nptltrut, ■ptlovai', 78, 819. 1 and a. j

Kpt*a, w. gen., 1876 ; fut. mid, u pMi.,

809 ; xp. Hi, 2724. |

KpiwTi*, w. tira aces., 1028. i

Kp4fa,w. gen., 1443, 1700. I

KT^o^tu, pert., 442 ir., 709, Til, ai prtc,

1946; aoi. as perf., 1941 ; phip. M

imperf., 1962 a ; hit. pert., 1968.
KVfim, w. partL., 2096.
Kiwr, dec]., 286; cnmp., 321.
■C-X4-, «. int., 1993 ; neg. w., 3740.

A, changing to p, 129 ; XX, 77, 96, 110,

81] b, 81 D ; snlBzes w., 800.
XacH, decL, 286. 16. \

X»YX^», w. ace., 1360; w. gen., 1360^ {

1376 1 rejdactng tbe paaa. of xX^flm,

1752. I

XaY^ 288 0, d, and D.
UOpf, improper prep., 1443, 1700. I

X<4ip<lvw, 4S4 b, 698; v. aubsL eqniT.

to pasB. verb, 1763; Xapdr, viU,

2068 a.
XuMra, 603, 606 ; mid. v. gen.. 1368,

«. ace., 1366, 1697 ; part, fr., 1873,

2090 i \^A*. teereet, 2062 a ; In part.

w. finite Tb., 2096 t ; XbrMw «ri foi

XuMm hi, 2684.

ioog[c

GREEK INDEX

771

coDBtr. v., 1982 a, 2017 b; Mntntand,

w. Inf., 18fl», 1982 c, 1W7, 2017 b;

slate, w. Inf. or fri or ut, 2017;

eofnnuind, w. fii), ST20 ; (oy, neg. w,

2722, 2723.
kttwm, 819 ; XiItomoi w. part., 2101.
Xtifm, w. put, 2098.
\4fim, 602 a, M9 s.
X^ 110.

■XX>, vbB. in, 617.
X^II«|iat, w. Srt, 2580.

ncc., 1091 b; Xtilvpov^uu

\ovKir and t«S XdivoO, 1444.

Xoim, contr., SD6 a, 034.

X<r, 103.

XOfialMiiAi, 489 h, 813 a; n. ace. and

w. dat., 1691 a.
XOvfa|uu, a mid. pan., 815 ; w.^rf and

dat., 1618; w. part., 2100.
XDnrtXit. w. dat, 1482, 16P2.
Xtm, decl. of part, S05, ROe, 309 ; oon-

jug., 882, S83 ; ii. 874 n., 488 c, 600.

1 a ; sec. aor., 688 ; UXWo, 711 d.
Imptotiat, dep. w. pass. mean. , 813 ; w.

ace and w. dat, 1691 a.
XV*>v, X^oYM, S19.

M, 19 ; atop* bef., 85-87 ; filial, changed
tot, 133 c; sufflzea w., 801.

fiL, 1698 b, c, 2894, 2020.

IMKpit, comp., 319; iiaicpii, 1001.

jMm, comp., 346.

pAXtpro, 823, 1068, 1090.

|i£XXav, 823, 1060 a, 1068, 1084 ; nXK-
Xgr 4, 1066, 1072, 1080 a; (ai) li. 4,

w. redundant

', 462 D

|ii>, ^ ,4', 2866, 2020.

|MitM*ig, prM. of paat and preg. com-
bined, 1886 a; rl latB^t; S0S4 a;
with part, or Inf., 2130.

pofTvpfa, fut. mtd. aa pass., 600; n.
Sti and in, 2680 a ; w. ^4, 2726.

Iid^m. decl., 286. IT.

liotfTlY^, fat mid. as paw., 808.

fkar (nom. im), BofL, 841. 2, 861. 2.

fifnt, 614, 671, 606.

|i&X*l>»< 488 b, 480 t ; fat, B89 b; rip

Tin (fMTi Tim), 1623 b M. 1.
(YM, decl., 311; comp., 819; uiya

itipotir, 1618.
Iifgiwrav, used with a super!., 1090.

' ■*, dual endiug, 466 c.
|u«wrK*>, 488 a, 489 e, f, 627 a.
^(ynQfu, 624 a; fu-y^trtirAu, 697 o;

tiuero, 788 u.
^(*v, 310 aitd b ; luutr ir't 4, 1074.
liASi, decl., 208.
|lA<^ 1368, 1360, 1467.
iUXXb, aug., 480; inf. w., 1960; wOt

«0 lUUku and tJ ei /lAXw, 1069 d;

ffuXXar, oaa, I960, 2318.

IL^lPXoN*, 130 D.

pipava, lU/miar, 673, 706.

pjv (nom. -fotv), BuS., 881. 3.

.|uv, Inf. end., 469 d, 677 n, 762 d,

Intr. C,v. 2.
|U*, 2896-2916, 8030 ; 4 fij* in H(hu.,

2866.
fM*w, inf. end., 469 i>, 677 d, 763 n.
-fuMt, part, end., 470 o, 861. 4.
pinw, 2017-2919; o«;^>tn dXXi,2T67;

dXU /i/rrot, 2780; (oJ . . . tiitrai,

2880 ; Dtf fi^rroi oHi, 2080.
lufilt. Implied, 1027 b.
-|uf, for -^r, 482 D, Intr. C, v. S.
|ura(npot. luvalraToi, 816 a. •

lUrsTOt, p^vtrarst, in Horn., S20 D.
funiiippdl, form, 130.
-pw4a, for -iitfa, 1 pi- end., 466 d.
|Urot, poBlUon, 1172.
(utA, 10T6-1677, 1601.
(utaSMHt |w«, W. redund. fU), 2741.
rwraiiOs iioL, 1367, 1487, 2100.
limjiJXoiuu, 812, 2100.
Iimati, 1700 ; w. part., 2081.
pirtrrl tiW timh, 1467.
'ptrpitt, compounds in, 224 a.
fue, 181 D, 825 D 1, 2.
|UxpS not elkled, 72 c ; and m^^i, ISS

D ; w. gen., 1700 ; w. aor. for plop.,

1943; aDd*<«xp«<>>.w. temp. d., 3888.
y.1\. 2688 ff., 3708.

(1) In indep. claiUM . dlr. qoaat.

772

GREBE INDEX

1809, 3061 ; with indie, in doubtful
•Meitloiis, 1772, 1801 ; in unutain.
wiBbes, 1780, 1761 ; w. fubfe., 2706 ;
hort., 1797, 1798; prohib., 1800,
1803 ; to Indicate fear (Horn.), 1802 ;
delib., 1806 ; v. opt. In wlahea,
1814 D. ; w. intper., 1636-1841, 2709.

(2) In dep. dauaea, 2708 i ptupoae,
2108 a., 2706 a; obj. ol. w. vbo. ot
effort, 2209 B., 2706 b ; w. Tba. of
caaiion, 2220, and ol tear, 2221 S.
result w. int., 2261 ff., 2T69 a; pro-
Tlao, 2279 ; oondltlun, 2286, 2T0& e ;
ConceBSiou, 2871 ; temporal, 2392,
S397, 2401, 2409; reL w. indef. an-
tec., 2606, 2706 d, e, of purpose,
2664, 2706 f, of cause, 2666 b, ot re-
mit, 2656, of condlt., 2600 ; in oatbB,
2T06 1; In indir. quan., 3376; In
tndlr. disc, (finite moods), 2710.

(3) With Inf. not in Indir. disc.,
I9T1, 1991, 2013, 2014, 2028, 2713 11.,
2769; In Indir. disc., 2722; with
put., 2046, ^007, 2726 ff. ; w. mbsts.
and adjs., 2736; redundant, after
negative vba., w. Inf., 2739-2749.

(4) Apparent ezchaugew.at, 3737;
accumnl. of ncg., 2760.

(6) Phnwes ^j) fri (Irm), 3768;

S Ti (&r«>>) n-t, 3786, /iif rf 71, 3768 e.
• (6) |i4| ot, w. Indie In doubtful

aaaerUons, 1773 ; w. subjv. in doubtful

negations, 1801, 2761a; in purpose

d.. 3198 a; in obj. d., 22Sa b, 3221,

2226, 2761 b ; w. inf. after neg. vbs.,

2742, 2744-2T40, 2769 d; w. part.

after neg. vba., 2760 ; w. Arut, 1921 ;

in quMtiona, 2561 d, 2762. See hnn,

•*M
|iT|U, 2163 A., 2666 ; w. part., 2083 b.

8eeg«i
pi|6t(t, 387, 349 b; ^fiSim, 1002 ; ^^Hw,

1609 ; w. comp., 1614 ; mean. X ei-

Stli, 2T36.
|ii|«fn, form, 137 b, 3688 b.
|UJv, 2020-3931 ; aft fi^r dXXd, 2767 ; ot

lOir aiSi, 2768; dUd M'. 3766; 4

ft4'. 3806, 3981.

)i<|n|p, dec!., 282 and d.
liTirbra, 214 i> 4.

p>i|Xa>^|Mu, dep. w. pass, mean.,

813 d.
|u, suft., 861. 6.
|u>verbs, 379, 412-432, 717-767 ; Irngo-

lar, 768-709.
-^, Tb. end., 463 a and d.
puUnt, 48911.
piMpdf, comp., 310; luicpoB, almoit,

1399.
f'y^y — , dep. w. paas. mean., 813.
|u(i*lfirM, redup., 443 F. ; 489 e, 636b,

681 ; tuiir^meat, 662 ; mid. piM.,

816 ; perf. with gen. and ace, 1368,

w. pres. mean., 1946, w. part, or inf.,

2106, 2138, w. 8t(, 2396 * n.
)t(*, 161 D, 826 D 1,3, 336 D 3.
]ur (nom. -iui), aufl., 861. 6.
PvMh, and luvStO/uu, 1734. 18.
)>*£, 227.

)i*do|uu, 641 D, 644.
|in||witi«, w. gen. and occ., 1867.
|m, |M«, soS., 861. T.
|io (nom. -/lit'), Bufl., 840 a S, 8(8.8,

861. 1.
|io(, elision In, in Epic, 72 n.
|iotpa,ded., 218; implied, 1027 b.
|iov (nom. ~iMf, -M"), waB., 866. 10,

861. 8.
|MvB, aulf., 861. 9.
p^vov, ofi ii6nir . . . d\Xi nl, 3704;

fiinmi!, 3768.
|Ld»t, 337, 11T3.
ym, >|w«, etc., 187 « n. 3, 32S t,

1192.
|i4pLot, 10,000, fiDplai, couiUlem, 362.
jifiM, 468 b, 500. 1 a.
(lA*, 3661 ; ^iidv oi, 2061 b ; itur th,

fiSr Mli, 3661 o.
-fMv, cpd. adJB. In, 888 d.
fM¥ (nom. -par), niiB., 861. 10.

N, 10 1 movable, 73, 134 and d
309 ; cons, bet., 86-80 ; bet
91-06; for X, diaL, 133 n; v
w., 881.

ISi.

GREEK INDEX

V, cUm of pna. tmoB, 62S-62fi.
-*», -ni, ttata-mH., 414 o, 628 g.
.*«, inf. ending, 460 o, 409 d, 677, 752

and D ; elioton In, in Epio, 72 d.
nt, 1G06 b, 2894, 2922.
nti*, Unsea «. Inaerted v, 489 f.
f&mt, 614 &, 61& b.
met, 276 ; imidied, 1097 b.
1^, 3H, 489 f.
*S, beton r, lOO.
MuiLi, 488 D ; mnkf, 660 b.
v^, w. two Mca., 1826.
.n%-, teii9»«ifL, 628 d.
W»K*'i iiBsd In fuL senae, 1881.
rfef, uncontracted, 290 e.
wim, h«ap up, 489 f, g.
r4», VUrim, 608, 640, 807, 806.
M^, decl., 288 ; forme, 2S8 c.
v^. In UBeTerationB, 1596 Yi, 28S4,

2028.
vq., 886. 6.

-niiu, Tbs. in, 7S0 a, 737.
re, before r, 100.
vbtio, conatr. v. pMO., 1402, 1493 •;

tiiiu yriiiair, etc., 1676; M perf.,

1887; w. part., 8101.
vtv, eoclit., 181 D, 326 D 4 ; me, 326 e.
-*%-, tense-euS., 628 a.
re^Hm, w. dat., 1609; w. acc., 1613j

w. part, or inf., 2144 ; w. Inf., 2680 ;

w. 11)1,2580; e6 ■<p/lf^d,2602 aj w. ^i),

2723.
-v«t. -v'i, gentiles In, 844. 3.
vir^, iiiipniperprep., 1700.
-vsvi, comp. of adj8. in, 816.
IT, before a, 100 ; sutT., 863 a 23.
■m, in 3 pi., in 1>or., 46Z i>, 468 d.
-vrav, imper. ending, 4(16. S d.
-rrs, imper. ending, 466. 8 a.
-vrarav, imper. ending, 406. 8 h,
-ni (-rvu), tense-Slifl., 623 f.

.rtp,-(14 B,41Bi sec. aor.(r<rg,»),4l6,
IW, 7.')ti a; dubjv., 467 a, 710; opt.,
400 c, 71i>; vb.-stemB in -a, -c, -u,
728-731 ; tenne*, 7;t6 ; n and rl,
742. 743 ; -i^u, T4U a ; mid. subjv.,
749 a.

*«l4d, in Hom., 214 o 3.

, («*f, (4*, *«*, F«, 1S4 A, 181 s.

E, 21.

tabw, 489 b.

e^, 397 b, 4SS a, 480 d, f.

{t|pa(ni, 480 b.

{W, Intr. E, H. 2. See rir.

pvAt, 1696.

{<«, 489 c, 500. I a and 1 1>.

0, 2 a ; pronunc, 24; inUichanged
w. «, 27, 86, 738 c ; for ■ dial., 33 d ;
lnt«rclianged w. t and a, SO ; length,
to ov, 37 ; length, to w, 87 D 2 ; be-
comes 01 in aug., 436; Bubat.-stema
in, 228 ff. ; added to vb.-steme, 486.

i, 4|, Ti, i, 4, at, al, proclit., 170; AS
rel., 180 d v., 1106 ; decl., 332 and d ;
use in Horn., 338 d 1, 1100-1106;
In lyric poetry and tragedy, 1104,
1106 ; at demons, in Att. prose, 1106-
1117 ; Bs peiB. pron. (nl At, etc.),
1113; as article In Att., 1118-1125,
■ee ArtiUe ; Ti irl nn, 1060 a.

8, 6 Tt, in Horn., 2240 a, 2678.

Ui, 333, 340 ; pred. position, 1171, 1176,
1177; w't art., 1178; ose, 1238-
1261 ; )( otToi, 1241 ; Kt iaiwo,, 1260.

iU, T6 a, 338 g, 1240.

i86t, 231, 232 c; implied, 1037 b.

»«it, decl., 243 D.

iS«««-«fUU, 480 d, f.

-V^., them, vow., 456, 465 », 466, 467 n.

-•;•, vba. in, 860. 6 b.

Shr, 340, 2408, 2400.

SSi, poetic for aE, 346 d 2, 2498.

M««*tM^ 2240 a, 2678.

M, pronunc, 26 ; for s in Terse, 28 s ;
« : « 1 ., 36, see 1 ; elided, 74 ; y in
aug., 435; final, urn. short in Att.,
160 and a, 220 a, 427 ; adTB. in, 220 b,
341 ; HUma in, 279.

-u, loc. dat., 1634, 1686.

01, enclit., 161 a ; when notenclit., I87e
n. 1 ; indir. reflex, in Att. prose, SS6 d,
1228 b ; dir. or tndir. Tefles. In Hom.
and Hdt, 1196.

774

GREEK INDEX

•I, ftdT., 846, 2498, 8499, tOS5.

•la, olov ialor Hi), w. part., 2066 ; cp.
2117.

•tSv, 794-799 ; mean., 796, 1940 ; mid.
(ut., 806 ; Imper. oWS' S, 1842 a ; w.
put. or Inf., 2106, 21S9 ; w. d, 2364 b ;
W. On, 2S96 ^ H., 2588 ; ali* Sri, w't
vb.,2686; w./i4Bndiiit,2T27; w. fii)
and part., 2730 ; Mi vt i, d, 2668.

OCttvam. decl.,2S6. 18.

-•uv, in dual, 230 u 2, 2G0 D I.

obMSi («I<di4<), .112, 1589.

etmtot, w. gen. ordat., 1414.

oMm, fm. mid. w. paaa. mean., 808.

aIkCb, omitted alter certain preps.,
1S02.

ot«>«iv, olmSi, 342

aCigt, 169, 229 b, 841, 842, 1636.

abnf|M, 619; W. geo., 1406; w. tl,
2247 b, cp. 2248.

olpas w. eliman, 74 ; sTjh' ^, 2682 d.

-ou, -CM, .M, ■«, in gen., 230 D 1.

•Io|uu and ol/u., 398 b, 628, 634, 802 D,
813 ; between prep, and noun, 1663 a ;
w. inf., 2580 ; w. in (Sn). 2580 ; o6k
ott^i, 2692 a i w. Hi, 2723, 2726 ; Afo-
luii, 600. 2 D.

aIet,cUt -norolirrf, 186 a; 840, 1986;
w. superL, 1087 ; w. Inf., 2003, 2497,
2618 ; antec., 2603 ; attract, to antec,
26S2 ; In ezclam., 2682, 2085.

ow, Id ace., 230 d 4 ; part ending in
A«)l.,806i>, 810D, 6S3i>.

oh, decl., 274 ; in Horn., 274 d.

-«wa, Aeol. part, ending, 306 n, 033 d.

-«wl(v), dnt., 2.30 D ;<, 234 ; loc., 3i\.

alxat<«^ »^ perf., 1886 ; v.: part., 9090.

iXm, 489 e.

ixW*, w. obj. cUuae, 2224 a.

(i)Kotoi, (A)Kdiroi, (A)K«np<it, 340 d.

iKlytt, comp., 319 ; w.aiid wiihout arti-
cle, 1189 ; 6Uyoi rarely w. dri and ff,
131T a ; iXlyov, altaoKt, 1399 ; iXlyar
MidiXiyif, w. comp., 1514, 1686.

AXt|u, 90, 488 a, 539 b, 733 ; tr. and
intr. tenaea, 819 ; BXXu^uu, ezpreasing
endnring result, 1887 a.

9Xot, in attrib. and pred. poaiiion, 1175.

e^tVit*, 4SS a, 489 g, 626 b, 7S3, 146 d,
761 T>. ; hii. mid. w. act. mean., SOt;
w. aoc., 1696 and a; w. lnL,lS68f;
w. Mif, 2726.

ifuS«n>, -in, 842.

ifukoyiit, fat. mid. w. ptyn. mean., 80B ;
w. dat., 1623 b; pen. coostr. mare
common w. paaa, 1982 a; w. pa[t.or
inf., 2106, 2144 ; w. j«f, 2728.

&|io«, 342, 1701.

ifm. w. part., 2082 ; dXX' Jfun, 2786.

iMiSC^t, 808 ; case w., 1471.

iMipot, decl., 286. 19.

iviniiu. 720, 424 c M. 2, 760 b ; Ari,iv,
7d6c; w. soo.,1691a.

J*o|ia, gen. W., 13^ a ; Bubat. in ^ipca.
to, 1478 ; by name, 1601 b, 1134 ; i,i-
turn, 1616; Iroiitt koMu rod, 1620;

fo>|L«, 489 e, 726.

•om, bi ace., 230 d 4.

■M, in gen. s|ng., 230 n 1.

00 to oar, uw; mi to oy ; «u to oh, 661

twji, 346, 1086 a, 2463, 2498.

iwi\v(KtL, 340, 2388 i..

twvrttv, improper prep., 1700.

iwitn, iwitt., ««M, 249&

(nioi, t*6<r«t, 340, 1087.

iw*iw, 1768 a, 2899 a.
<&n, 840, 2240, <^ irirc, 2481, 2486;
introdac. temp. clansM, 2883 a.

S-nv, 346, 2240 a, 2498.
itot, 340 D.

iww&n, 346 D 1, 2883 o k.
nrvt, 340 D I, 2929.
n>i, 346 ; w. super!., 1088 ; w. fiU.
indie, in ezborlatioos and proliib.,
1920, 2213, with desire to aran sooia-
tbing, 1921, in purpose ci., 2208, ia
obj. d., 2211^213, 2218 ; w. ni6>«. or
opt., 2196 ft., 2214-2217 ; w. subjv. «.
idea at command, 1803 ; in purpow
cl., 2193 ft.; Inobj. cL,2200fI.,22SO,
2228, 2230, 2281; Imp twm, 2616,
2661-2552 ; 8r<«t and Stm t^x"^
In temp, cl., 2883 ; In comp. cL, 2403 ;
introduc. depend, itstement, 2678;
in fndir. queet., 2668 e; aux (f*^)
Sruf, 2783 ; orl^all; reL adT., 2929.

GREEK INDEX

776

ifi^, 481, 4S1, 466 A D, 63», ess ; fnt,
806 i w. put., 2I0S, 2110-2112 ; w. «ri
(in), 2110-2112 ; w. obj. ol., 2210 b,
i3a4 a; ft. Hi and inf., 2210 b.

ip^lXitftu, 81G ; w, g«n., 1105 ; w. dat,,
1«61 ; w. part, 2100.

Ap|i&a, -ttepu, a mid. paOB., S16, 816 a.

<p*(t, dncl., 286. 20.

fpvO^i, 686, 674 D, 733, 736 d, 746 d,
751 u ; tr. aud intr. tenaes, 820, 821.

Spot, w. proper oame, 1130, 1142 o.

it, rel. proD., decl., 338; demons, in
Horn., 338 b ; V. -r<p, 333 c; w. -r«,
338 d i and correl. , 340 ; introduc. rel.
olanse, 2498 ; instead of &rrif (or dim),
2488 b ; S, at to what, 2404 ; Of yt,
2495, 2665, 2826; aniec, 2608; and
Srrit, w. det. and indel. antec , 2606.
SeeftiU.

8i, 4, Jv, poBsen. pron., decl., 830;
in Horn., 330 D 2, 1201. 1 c, 1301. 2 b,
1230 a ; «i a^BO, 1201. 2 c, 1203 b.

~Qt, for .ouf, in ace. pi., 162 d 2, 2j^ o 4.

-«f , -i|, •«*, oompouDd words in, 88S a.

-Of, oompoanda In, accent, 804.

iirijat, introduc. temp. clauBSa, 2383 a.

■o<r4aT, in the imper., 466 a.

{■r«t, 840 ; Srif, Argv, w. corop., 1084;
HtrfiDgth. saperl., 1086, 1087, 1091 ;
&»>, w. ln(., 2003, 2497 ; Irf, fao», in
comp. cl.,248e-24T3 ; lea tr^, 2497 b ;
attracted to case of antec., 2532 ;
preceded b; ad],, 2536; introduc.
ezclam. sent., 2082, 2686 ; Iror (Sira)
H^i, 2766 ; Srof o^, 2766.

6<mp, 1601 a, 2496, 2608 k.

6vn, decl., 286. 21.

loYif, o^iMt, etc., accent, 186; decl.,
3S9 ; and correl., 340 ; in indir. ques-
tions, 1268; introduc. rel. oiausee,
2496; and 9f, uae, w. def. and indef.
antec., 2606 ; firrtr Arrtt (bO, 2406,
2618, 2662, 2667 ; hTit Si) attracted

to 0

D of a

itU i

i, 2634, 2667 ; Sartt yt, i
&a^p«Ut«|Mi, w. gen., 1861.
JTa>, 1768 a, 2390 a.
fn, and correl., 346 ; w. aor. (or plnp.,

1048 ; I, B Tt, bteaute, in Horn.,
2240 a; giving reason for preced-
ing question, 2244 ; introduo. temp,
clauses, 2363 a ; tin (lr«, 2481-2486 ;
tlua, in Horn., 2678 a; w. lUiiwtmai,
etc., 2688.

hy not elided, 72 b; strength, sapeil,
1086 ; w. aor, for p!up., 1948 ; w. vbi.
of taving, 2017, 2692 a; w. Tbs. of
iMnking (very rare), 2018 ; w. vh*
of perctjtUon. 2110, 2146, 2592 c;
w. otlier vbB., 2123; causal, w. vbs.
of fearing, 2286 ; w. causal clauses,
2240 ; introduc. dependent stote-
menta, 2677-2588 ; use compared w.
' that of in, 2679 ; introduc. dir. quo-
tation, 2690 a ; indie, and opt. after,
in Indir. diac., 2614, 2015; Sri rl,
2644 a; />4 (o^) 5r., 2703 ; t ti f(4,
2766 ; r\j)r frt, 2966 a.

&m (Homeric), 2678.

ov, genuine and epoilous, 6, 26, 64 ;
pronunc. , 26 ; for « In verse, 28 d ;
ni : Du : u, see ni ; by compens. length.
for 4, 87 ; stems In, 276 ; never aug-
mented, 437.

ol {oiK, aix, 138 a, 187, vixi, sfx'< 127 D,
137 a, 2638 b ; proclit , 170, of, ISO a,
904 b), 2688 a. ; in statements, 2708 ;
w. jussive fat. as question, 1917, 1018 ;
w. anticip. subjv., 1810 ; in rel. cl.,
2606; causal cl., 2240, 2247, 2666;
result d., 2261, 2260, 2260, 2666,
2567; condit., 2696-2701; interrog.,
2661 and f., 2676; adberescent,
2691 ft. ; «. inf. not In indir. disc.,
2714, 2721; in indir. disc., 2711 a,
2722, 27e9c; w. part., 2046, 2729,
2782-2734 ; vr. substs. and adjs.,
2786 ; apparent exchange w. /i4,
2788; reduDd., 2768; oi ^, 1606 b,
2804 ; aix Btuh (Sti), 2768 ; d» fidnr
. . . dXXi not, 2764 ; iiiior (Simr) oi,
2700 ; oi ii>,r (y^P, /i^rru) dXXd, 2767,
2786, 2921 ; oi ^Jtr oili, 2768, 2921 ;
oi ydp, 2806 b ; od liirroi, 2016 a ; ot
^rra, eiSi, 2989 ; oi . . . ttti, 2989 ;
oiSi . . . o6, 2940 i oi . .. affrf, 2944,

776

GBEEK INDEX

2M8 ; oOtc . . . »i, 2M8 ; rX^' 'A, 2T6S.
•* |i^ w. ful. Indic. or gnbjv. in pro-
hlb., 1800 c H., 1919, 27Ba ; w. subiv.
or fut. indie, in strong denial, 1804,
1910, 2754, 2765 ; where eaob aep. baa
iU own vb., 275T. See alao ofe Im*
d, «tc., under tlftl, ajid p^ij oi.

«{, etc., pron., 181 a ; nben notencUt.,
187 e If. 1; decl., 325; indir. reflex.,
S25d, 1228, 1229; in d ial. , 825 D ; oC,
*, pe«. pron., 1104, IIBB.

-ov, geD. dng.,-22g, 230 1>; at place
where, 342.

ofSot, decl. in Bom., 264 d S.

ntU, w. part., 2083 b, 2931 ; eif (^^)
•/ («»), in neg. concessive cl., 2S81 ;
em yif i>iS4, 2T6I a, 2814 a, 2088;
ti iiJit aiSi, 27ee; iW oiH, dU'
titi M*' S4, 3786; etat lip, 2814,
2815 ; oiii w-i', "i A* itii, 2021 ; u
adv., 2931] as conjnnc, 2982-2086;
oHi . . . Bit4, 29ST ;««... tUi,
2030 ; ei fUrrci eMf, 2039; e6Si . . .
s«, 2940 ; atSt . . . ctrt, 2941 ; atrt
. . . afi!/, 2049 ; etrt . . . oiSi . . .
ethi, 2060 ; ri . . . eiH, 2083.

•4B<lt, 8.1T ; decl., 349 b ; 4 ni i) o«-
jifi, 1270; ofJir iiaiw6r, 1312; oM^r
W. comp., 1614, 1568; oMtii ean,
o«, 2634 ; and nvSilt, meaning, 2786 ;
neut., of persons, 2730; oiSir d\X' #,
2778; eiSit IXXo if, dX\« eM«r if,
2778 a.

oixl (dilxOi 127 v, 187 a. See oi.

oOkow and aimir, 180 a, 2061-2068;
eimOr expecting answer ye*, 2661,
2061 ; a£«ov>'inferential,2962; oKnur,
2963.

oCv, added to pron. or adv., 880 e, 346 c,
2063; dXV oBy (ii), 2786; 7^/1 oBr,
3820 ; tUw Bfr, 2800, 2901 ; tix oBr,
2964 ; conflriraton', 2065-2968 ; dXX'
opt, dXX' oir . . . 7t, 206T ; yip i^r
(and ml yitp oS>)> ^958; a* oBr, 2833,
2060 ; tt i* air, 2969 ; Jj] oBi', 2060 ;
bBf I^tb, 2060; (trc oUr, ofri O0r,

2001 ; aftet intetrog. pnnu. andadm.,

2062 ; Inferential, 2904 ; ^<1 sfr in

Horn., 20M a.
oSmko, 1700, 2240 a, 2678.
irit, accent, 262 a; decl., 2SS. 22.
-ovi, from -on, 380 i> 4 ; paita. in, decl.

of, 807.
otn, accent, 186; sffr< . . . ofrt, 970,

2042 ; tiSi . . . offrt, 2M1 ; affn . . .

fiiK*, 3043 & ; oBrt . . .Tt, 2M6, SHO ;

iCTt . . . Bi, 2047 ; oh-i ... erf, 3M8 ;

oi . . . olht, 2948; otrt . . . *m,

3049 ; o()t( . . . aiSi . . . otfrc, S960 ;

bBt-ioII.', 2061.
oflnt, accent, 164 a.
oJTot, decl., 888 and d; and conel.,

840; lai nil>rs, 047, 2083; reEr*,
atri roOn, Introdnc. follow. BabsL,
900; w. art., 1171, 1176, 1177; w't
art, 1178; raOraii, rt&rirw, fa attrih.
podtlaa, laOl. 1 b, 1202. 1 b; ne,
1238 11. ; for repeated rel., 2617; In
addrera, 1288 a.
rrort, 833 g, 1240.
oBvo, a&tx, 186, S24, 846, 124S, IMS;
w. part., 3060, 3084.

' }tlXm, filO a ; stems, 631 ; A^Xw In

wishefl, 1781, 1818; ^4 w. A^cXar,

2704 a.
b^&Xa for d^tfXw in Horn., SIS n.

264 a, 266. 8 c.
i^Xuncdm, 1378, 167S.
fi^pa, 2108 a, 3383, 2418 a.
-«Xoi, cpds., 878 ; accent of, BM it.
-oM, vbs. la, decl. of pres. p«rt., 810;

conjug. of pres. and Imperf., 886;

pres. stem of, 639 ; loflec. of, 6S&-6e7 ;

in Horn., 663 a; In Rdt., 663 b; in

Doric, 666; la Aeolic, 666.
-OH, TbB. In, denombiative, 860. &
iw for so, u>, oov, 943 ; for 00, ow, «G3 ;
foru., 648; for oot, 662.

n, bef . dental stop, 83 ; bef. ^ SS ;
bef. rough breathing, 134 and d ; for
r, dial., 183 D ; anffizea w., B62.

wuSa^Y'*! ^"-^ "^''l- ■" PM*^ 80S.

GREEK INDEX

77T

muMa, mStim rifd nn or i-<pA tft,

*pit, 1670, 1680.
«AXa^ loc., S4I, 1586.
«aXai4t, comp., 816.
vAXiv, In compoundEi, before a, 101 1.
vwtiiiut, loc., £29 ^ 841, 1686.
waiTax"**' "rarraxB^ irvm\irA, 342.

>, 76 D.

842.

'vdfa, f or rctfiwri, riptiffi, rd/xi^, 1T6I).

«^, OM, 1073, 1496, 1S76, 1676, 1678,
1662, 1765 ; dat. w.Tba. compounded
w., 1644-1660; ace. w. vbs. com-
poimded w., 1646.

«mf>r«vit"J">^ V- P*^ o^ lo'-i 2144.

'wApM, 1700 ; w. ln& Id Horn., 2461.

v<wit<nit"H«>, 464 R, 813 d.

««( (I»ai, ri^ri,), in cpde., 101 b,

874 ; decl., 200; pron. adj., 937 ; w.

2d pera. of imper., 1016 ; rdn-a, ri

rirra w. BuperL, 1091 i poaltlon, 1163,

1171, 1174.
■wiux"^ ^^ t) (1) »> ^Q (1< 629, 567 1>2 ;

678, 608, 696, 705, 806 i rdirxo c> as

pua. Of tn/v a, 1693, 1752 ; W wit-

Up, 2064 k.
-«At«p, componnd adja. in, 888 d.
««««, 489 b; act. )( mid., 1784.' 14;

v. part, or Inf., 2098, 3140; ntvtuu

w. part., 2008 ; w.iedimdaDtiiit,2741.
«S&,1691.
«(■>, 489 D, 678, 602 a, 549 d, 706,

815, 810; rdfcfioi w. geo., 1866;

act. )( mid., 1784. 16 ; perf. w. pros.

meauing, 1946 ; urge, ti. inf., 1992 1>. ;

eonttnce, generally w. it, rarely w.

ace. and Inf., 1902 v. ; rlrticiuu, w.

fi4, 2726.
vtiHU, 394, 641 D, 657.
v<ip4M|>u, a paaa. deponent, 812 c; w.

part or Inf., 1002 a, 2102, 3144.
vAm, improper prep., 1700.
vOaiMu, 649 D, 766 C d.
«4|i», 669 n, 671; use of imperf.,

1801.

v4p, endlt., ISl d, 186, SS8 o ; w. part.,
2088 a ; Att. uae, 2065.

iti(A, w^*, improper prepe,, 1700.

■wif»m, sec aor., 640 d, 688.

«ipl, when elided, 72 c ; after its case,
ITS a, 1665 ; in compos., 449 b ; wtfi
tsXXdS Ti^fiai, etc., 1373 ; ose, 1675-
10T7, 1608 ; gen. w. vba. compounded
w., 140S ; dat. w.Tbs.oompounded w.,
1544-1560 ; ace. w. vb«. compounded
v., 1646.

vapiYlYiviwii, w. port,, 2101.

wifiiopda, w. part, or inf., 2103, S141 ;
fir omitted w., 2110.

<TT&n«|u, 36 H. 2, 480 e, f, g, 720.

s^Toiiw, sec. aor. 687, T56 o i>.

wi, 181 b, 846 ; irfl, 346.

T^Y>^|ii, 524 a, 696, 733, 736 d, 760 n ;
tr. and intr. tensM, 810.

^fayt, gender, 256. 2 c ; decl., 26B, 270

i>. 1;

I, 271.

w(fMrXi)|iv, 489 e, 726, 727, 741.

vC^viniiu, 489 e, f, 726, 727.

■Kttm, 629, 488 b; (tm», 629 ; ir»i, 466.
1 a, b, 687 ; fat. rlitfiat, 600. 2 d, 641,
606, 1881 ; tr. and intr. tenses, 819 ;
w, gen. and w. ace, 1366 a.

noTttv, followed by ^if, 2728.

Mrvfifu, 86 V. 2, 737.

-vXorwt, 864 c, 1432.

vlutrrov, nsed witb inperl., 1000.

vXtCa, 503 D, 650 b.

vXfav (n), Ti vMo*, for >i£X\<»>, 1068 ;
r\ht (rX«i.) w. case. 1074.

wUm, SOT, 480 d, f, 603, 607, 806.

wk1[r, improper prep., 1700, 2066 ; adv.,
1700, 2060 ; w. redund. o6, 2753 ; eon-
junc, 2066 i rX4> ov, rX^r <|, rX^r Srt,
TXJ)r tt, 2066 a ; tr. inf., 2066 b.

vX^pf)*, w. gen. or dat., 1422.

vXijo-Cov, 1437, 1440, 1700.

«X4jm, 514, 593 a, 695, 819, 174a

.^U>W, 200 a, 854 b, 1432.

^4», 401.

•mU, 508 0,660 b.

«W-, 897, 480 f, 608 , 607, 006.

nvte, decl., 286. 23.

«d*<*, 846 ; -wittr yip, 2806 b.

.oog[c

778

GREEK IKDEX

mMv, enoUL, 181 b, 3U.
*a»tm, 488 b, 803 ; w. aco., 1340.
vMi, 848 D 2 ; nfl:, encUU, 181 b.
«1, encIlL, IBl b, 346 ; wot, S4a.
■miim, 885, 390; perf. eubjv., 093, and

opt., 896 ; peiiph. w., 1722 ; w. part.

and lof., 2116 ; t. cS (iraX<:^) w. ace.

1691 a, tr. part, 2101 ; irir tt r.

1663 ; rirra w. w, part., 2102.
waiit, 840 1 valat, 340, 1186, 2648.
«oXi|iia, Cut. mid. w. pate, mean,, 808

lOy T,n (^ri TifDl), lS23b H. 1.

*oXiopicW, fut. mid. as pass., 609.

«4Xi«, 268, 270 c, 2T1 ; added to proper
name, 1139, 1142 c.

woXET<io)iai, dep. w. pass, mean., 813 d.

«oX4t, decl., 311; conip., 319 and c;
tdW^, reM, rtpi reM W. saperl.,
1091 ; w. and w'l art-, 1169 ; xoW or
nXXv w. comp., 1614, 1686 ; «aXXol
nt dXXst, 2879 a.

mvto. 4SS b ; perf. subJT., 89S.

mpt«<>|iu, 816, 1881.

-woplpi, compounds ot, accent, 694 tr.

vdppn, comp., 346 a; prep., 1700.

Wint, ■mrit, 340.

w6r{l0TroTi), 76 B.

«oTajidt,w. a proper name, 1130, 1142 e.

«oH, 1T4 a, 181 b, 346 c ; ■win, 181 b,34a.

««r<po« (*6Tifia) ... 4, 2666-2660, 2676.

vdTtpM, mnpd«, 840.

■wvtL, 1896.

««, «o4, 181 b, 346 ; otf Tvv i 00 rl
TWi »i Ji) ¥011 ; 2661 f; fi/i >4 rou,
2820 ; Y<lp rsv, 2820 ; ^ rou, 2866.

wait, 266. 2 b, 811 d.

«pBv|iaT(i«jum 812 a, 8I3 d.

*p^, decl., 811c.

«pim, 614, 671, 809, 619; w. adra.,
1709 b.

vp^i, qnaai-impen., 1986,

vpwpnrr^, decl., 286. 24.

«plv. Improper prep., 1700 ; w. aor. for
plnp., 104S; temp, conjuuc., 2883 o ;
imptTing poipoae, 2418 a; w. indie,
2430-2443; w. anbjv., 2480-2441,
3448-2447 ; w. opt., 2430-2441, 2448^
S4fi2 ; w. Inf., 2430-2441, 2463-2467 ; i

4 rplr, 2467 ; rpl, if, 2400 ; after nt^
w. redundant oi, 2763.
wpta, 480 c, 600. 2.

<pd, s Doi eUded, 72 o ; cpda. of, 449 b,

8B4 b; use, 1078, 1675, 1877, 1604;

gen. w. verbs compounded w., 1S81,

1408.

•pB>B)iio|wi, a paaa. dep., 812-

vfKrfiiiu, accent of forms, 426 f, 746 c;

rp^liai w. part., 2103.
vpoopd*, w. gen., 1367.
«pdt, nae, 1073, 1676-1678, 1696, 176G ;
AJll w. vba. compounded w., 1&44-
1660.
vpoo^ntia, followed by ftif, 2726.
vpmrSoKla trrl, w. obj. clause, 2224 a.
«poa-^Mi, w. dat of pen. and gen. of

thing, 1467 ; quoBi-impeiB., 1086.
Wftrttv, 2440 ; rp6retr if, 2469.
wportnvtm, w. acc, 1591 b.
rfMra-niYX^™) ^- <'^t ^^^ *•
rpivw. Improper prep., 1700.
rpdnpov, 1042 v. ; rp^rtpof f, 2S83 c,

2458 ; wptripor . . . rptw, 2440.
rpinpot, 320, 349 c, 1042 b.
rpOTt, 1006.

«po^aoito)iai, a mid. dep., 81S 0.
wp&T<n, 820, 319 c, 1042 b.

for T, 131.
TToCit, tenses w. inserted r, 489 L
wHfTvm, 671, 688 ; w. ace., 16S6 ft.
«i4X(|u>i, TiAn, 131.

ov, torm of pres., 514 a.
, 488 a, 600. 1 a and 1 D.
. verbs in, 506, 600.
TwU*e|Mi, Aeor, Uam Qf, w. gea.,
1361 ; become aware of, Uam, w. aec.
and part., 1363, 2112 b, 2144 ; kear
from, w. gen., 1364, 1411 ; htar abomi,
w. gen., 1366 ; of past and prca. com-
bined, 1866 a ; w. Art or Jn, 3110-
2112, 2146; w. Inf., 2144; «. gm.
and part., 2111, 2112 a, 8144.
tp, decl., 264 b, 266. 26 ; cp. 266. 1 d.
4, enclit., 161 b.
At, enclit., 181 b, 846.
wOt, 346; rOi >« /uAXw; 1068 d; v«t
yif, I 2806 b, 2S0S a.

"l'-'^

GREEK INDEX

P, Initial, IS, IS : p^, see pp ; for •r, dial.,
132 D : Bubat.-Bteii]S In, 25S-202 ; ini-
tial, doubled alter aug., 429 a, after
rediip., 442 b ; sufSxea w., 800.

^ 72 D, 181 D, 2T8T ; $ P<l, 2800.

^^Biot, comp., 319.

^(■t ^4>tkT, V. part, 2100.

M-. 611.

^, 105 a, 603, 594, 607, 600.

^ff^t, 624 a, 594, 733, 742, 819,

^(Yta, 308, f141.

pp, 13, 80 ; and pv, 79, Intr. E, ir. 2.

P«-, 70, 102.

^|MU, 600. 1 a and 1 d ; w. redundani
fi4, 2741.

^nB|u,489e, 731.

£, two fontis (v, i), 1 a ; pronnnc., 26 ;
cons, bef., 97-102; bef. cons., 103-
108 ; disappears, 118-121, 123 ; for r,
B, dial., 132 n ; movable, 186, 136 d ;
SQbat.-aleinB in, 263 fl.; Hufflzea w.,
866 1 Inserted in pert, and Qist aor.
pass, system, 480 ; between root (or
stem) and snfl., 836; qids. of words
Iwgin. w., 878.

-o-m, 2d pers. ending, 466 a.

<rPin«|u, 416, 489 c, 628 f h. 1, 668,
7.'M, 736, 766 a, 769, Hl» ; •pg*'. 760.

-rSa, Aeol. for -J^, 508 d.

-M, denoting place ahither, 842.

(riavToS, 329, 1100. 2 a, 1200. 2 d, 1218-
1237.

riStv, o^Io, rfa, rM, r<4, m, 826 D.

o^(a, 429 a D, 480 c.

^<r<w, Tbs. in, 868.

cr.«., 426 b (2) o, 442 b d, 477 b >

543 a

>, 688.

(. inserted s, 480 h.
-aiax, inf. ending, 469 d ; cp. 72 n.
-<r«t, -aim, -v^av, -ffS**, -o^ai, 408.
-rlov, tor-<r^rlndual,inHom.,466{
-«-•>, Hre«y, 466. 3 n.
-<r«««^*, 466. 3.
-in, in dat pi., 260; denoting place

mhrrt, 342; 2d pen. end., 463 b.
irtTot, A, ti, vfTo, 281.
itkAXo, 087.

■»%, ItenUve imperfa. and aon. in,

196.
■tnwti [-hiiai), w. obj. clause, 2210 b,

2224a; w. m4 and inf., 2210 b.
no, vbs. in, 628-628.
n, 2 pen. ending, 466 b, 406. 2 a.
-wofiOi, -ifroyai, -^tfrtifMt, 1788.
rit, decl., 330; w. and w't art., 1182,

1183, 1196 a; use, 1106-1199, 1203.
ir«^, 488a,489c.
inr, and rr, 78, 112, 114, Inlr. E, x. 2 ;

as in Hom., 81 d 3, In fut., 631 b i>,

in aor., 614 d, 646 d.
-^n. in dat. pi., 260 a 2.
-«v>, vbs. ill, 613-616.
■rriSuv, pi., 281 ; Mcdw friSior, 1676.
rrirf, perf., 670 ; w. part., 2100.
o~r<pa|iu, of enduiing result, 1887.
vt4p*«|u, 480 e, I.
vTpBT^i, implied, 1027 a.
<rrpt^m, 125 g H., 686 b and a, 696, 816.
oi, ml, elision in. In Epic, 72 d ; en-

cllt., 181 a and d; decl, 826; of

imaginary pers., 1193.
uim«tf|*. w. dat., 1417.
rrfyvfutrKM, w. part, and dat., 2108.
«vyx*P<*i followed by nH, 2726.
nXMY>, wltb <(t, 1660 b.
.««lLdt, compounds of, accent, 804 h.
imiipslMi, 1082 a, 1086.
niiPoiJuia, w. ni, 2720.
(r4|i«St, see *£«.
miuHpti, w. dat., 1462, 1692.
(r<», In cpda., bet. a, 101 a

1676, 1677, 1670, 1696 ; dat. w. vbs.

compoundedw., 1644-1660; In cpds.,

denoting completion of action, 1016,

1880 ; m)r tt tu4u, 1663.
rwtriiu, w, gen., 1361 ; w. ace., 1301

dramat. aor., 1037.
o-ivotSo, w. part, and dat, 2108.
o-^M. Indir. reflex, in Att ptCM, 1228 b

ir^f for, 326 1.

<r^,i

e and n I, 326 d 4.

«4«, <r^4ai, <r+f>t, 826 D I, 2.
«4iE(, as indlr. reflex., 1228 b and x
«4«C»v, 326 n 1, 1.

I;,C.00J^[C

780

GREEK INDEX

•^fnpat, 8S0, 1903. 2 d, 1208 b k.

r^trtfot n.ir»v, I20S.8b, 1208 bUld

94te*, 826 D 1, 2; 1202. I c 1203 a.

r^, for adT«f, -sTi, In Hdt., S26 d 2.

9-+((r), 134 D ; rdpTBly sing,, 825 b.

r^l«a(v), enclit. , 325 d 1 ; as indir, re-
flex, in AU.proee, 826 d, 1228b, 1220;
In Hdt., 820 D 2, 11»6,

o^it, in Horn., S30 n 1.

v^I, r^lv, 325 D 1.

r^-DfKn, In Horn., 330 d 1.

ir^*, BB indir. reflex, in Att. proee,
1228 b ; Bs dir. reflex., 1202. 2 e,
1208 b ; input avrOt, leflez., 1202.
2 o, 1203 b.

rx<8dv, improper prep., 1700.

irxlWi^^'i 630 e.

aVt>. ^9 1>, f, 50S a, 818 ; <r. ^i), 2741.

«^, deol., 280 c, 2S0 n.

T, bel. denial atop, 88; bef. /i, 86;

change to v, IIG, Tntr. C, n. 1, 4 ; bel.

rough breathing, 124 and d ; for t,

dial., 132 D ; inserted, bef. soff., 887 ;

Bofflies w., 863.
r-, clasB of preB. HLems, 606.
■MiEt, decl., 298.
ra.ri; 460 0, 500. 1 i>, 641 a.
^roTot, auperl. ending, 313.
Ta«Tn, 346.
fi^iifr^ ir. in, irtl, iriiS^, Iwut,

2383.
Taijiftiv or tdrrtt*, from tfax'»'> 126 f.
'TsX^i comparison of, 310.
T^ pron., eacllt., 181 d, 325 d 4.
W, particle, enclit., 181 d; added to

rel., 33S d, 2970; At n, <:>t rf n,

2087 b, 2481-2485 ; ^r.. .n, 2013 ;

dt^t . . . r^, 2M5, 2046 ; lues, 2067-

2983.
T*, advB. in, 344.
nt*, 826 D 1.
nXifa, 660 b.
rAlm, 391, 400 e nnd h.,.4S8 a, 469 C,

530 a and n.
Tif.vm, w. two accB., 1626.
Tfe, Tfei, neO, noSf, nfi, «<S|, 325 l> 4.
■ndi, in Uom., 3.% n 1.

-t4M, verbal adja. in, 425 c, 471, 473 ;

in Tioi, 983 b; CopuU Oiiilt(«cl w.

-riot, 044 b ; dat. of agent w. , 148S.
-npot, comp. end., 818.
~ n, aor. psBB., in Horn., 686 b d ;

■ipro/iai, w. part., 2100.
niXm, 602 a, 003.
t4x>^, implied, 1027 b,
ri, fiU, 846.

' , 605, 816 ; tr. and Intr., 810.
T^lXi, improper prep., 1700.
i-i]Xii(teGi, 333 d, 340.
T^Xuid»Tat, 383 e, 840, 1180, 1160 a.
.n|ir, rarely tor -ror tn 2 dnal, 404 d.
Ti]v[iia, n|nic&Gi, Ti|*i«ah«, 346.
-"IP, -Ti|t, cpd. nouns In, 868 c
■ntptu, fut. mid., 808 ; vr. ob]. cL, 2210 b ;

w. ^4 and Inf., 2210 b.
Ti, 113, 114.

-n, 3d pera. ending, 463 o.
Ti, -cm. Bdra. In, 344.
-n, -ti. In Imper., 126 b, 076.
rHi|p*, form n^iiartt, 28 o ; d«d. of

part., 307 ; oonjug., 416 ; aoal;^ of

forma, 744-767 ; ritttiuu, 767 ; w, part.

or inf., 2144.
vbra, prea. aa perf., 1887 a.
■K|ii(>, decl. of pres. part., 310 ; Inllec.,

386 ; fut. mid. w. paM. mean., 80B ;

Tlfiiu (ri^ids^I) TiPi SawiroVf and

Tiiiio/ittl Ttrai, 1374.
rlptit, iW^t, 299 n.
Tifuiplo, uaes of act. and mid., 13T6,

1472, 1501 a, 1734. 17.
t(v, -rfvl). 826 D 4.
rln, 488 c, 480 c, 623 1 n. 2 ; rfw Stx^,

)(Tfn)w>t Biin,r, 1734. 18.
t1«, accent, 164, 334 ; decL, 334 ; w. art.,

1186, 2648; Gubat. and adj., 1202-

1266; tI w. comp., 1614, 1680; ji

oi /lAXw i 1969 d ; rl naSiir i rf raSit ;

2004 a ; rl fxi» j 2064 b ; IM tI, VI tI.

Sti T-I, 2644 a ; tI Tiif ; 2606 b 1 r i fi4r ;

Ti f(4* oii 2921.
Til, accent, 164, 174 a, 334 ; enclit., 181

b ; decl , 334 ; w. irfrrifwt. etc., 839 d ;

w. sec. pers. of imper., 1016 ; position,

m>b, 1206 ; use, 1260-1270 ; w. comp..

,= Cooi^k

GBE£K INDEX

1614, IfiM; oBtItovi S«61f; f

yt, 2768 e.
tJlo-, 661, 0132 D, aST, 705, 806; (rXq>

w.pwL or inf., 1!I27.
To(,TaC, 332 0,388 Dl.
TOl, in cnuis, flS ; ellaion, 72 1>; enclit.,

161 d, 1486, 2884-2087 ; iWi yi ret

(ml 7f), 2780 ; yip roi, 2820 ; rtiyif,

etc., 2087.
rol = nl, 326 D 1, 2, op. 1486.
ToifopAfi*! rM^i^i, 2US7.
n(nr, 2880, 2087.
Tdlof, 340 ; w. inf., 2008.
TOi^Si, 383 d, 840, 1160, 1246, 1240,
TMO»TOt, 33S e, 340, 1180, 1246, 1240.
raX)ida, w. part, or Inf., 1»02 a, 2127.
-TOl, verbid &djB. in, 426 c and »., 471,

472, 1486.
T«nt, 340; w. inf. in Horn., 200S.
■wvrWU, 883 d, 340, 1160, 1245, 1240.
T»7«»rot, 888e, 340, 1180, 1245, 124»;

rwiHtri|i, tovoStvii, cone). tO Irfi, flo'si',

2468-2478.
Tdvvvi, 840 D.
T*n, w. part., 2080 ; ii, rtri, 2840.

T»Ti, TOT* *.ir . . . TOT* 8*, 848 b.

t»vr(, derivation, 75 a.

TpfM, 664 c, 671, 688 b, 596, 506.

■rfi^, 126 g, 606, 806 ; n. ace., 1670.

T|rfx>, 126 g, 629, 806.

TfiH, 486 a; vr. ace., 1606 a.

Tp(p«, 501, 570, 671, 606, 808.

^li^ft, decL, 2S4.

T|»rr6«, treble, 864 d.

Tplxa and rpixM, 354 d.

Tptx^t, for ifnx"*, 126 f .

Tp^, aoceiit of dual, 262 a.

-TTv (Ion. and Later Att. -raw), vba.

in. 613-616.
T«, (Auu, (Aee, 161 t>, 326 d 4.
T^fYX*»•^ '■ gen., 1860; imiyxiK' w.

dat., 1350; w. subat., equlv. to paex.

Tb., 1753; parL «., 1873, 2090; in

pan. TT. finite vb., 2006 t ; ILr omitted

with, 2110.
T^n]. 326 T> 1, 4.
Tvpav*^, w. gen,, 1870.

T^ M«re/oH, 2067.

Y, pronunc, 24, 24 d ; qnantitT, 4,

600 ; semiTOwel, 20 ; not elided, 73 e ;

inteniliaiiged w. v, 27, 37, SOI ; ii for,

28 n; dial, for s, o, 38 D; v :«i : m,

Me iv ; sub«t.-item« In, 268 ; in aug.,

436.
ipptta, fuL mid. aa pan., 609; w. aoc,

(ft Tin, or tfi, T.H, 1591 a, 160S.
tSap, decl., 263 b, 265. 26.
kh 600. 1 a, 084 a.
■t{>, Tbs. In, 660. 6 b.
w, dlphttk., G ; pronuDC, 25.
u(«i, 286. 27 and D ; omiU«d, 1801.
ifiioc, 326 D 1, 2.
i^lmv, jpia*, 325 n 1, 2, 4.
ifit, Vlv, ifM, 326 f, 325 d 4.
dlUnpof, 818 b, 330, 1182, 1163, 1108,

1107; reflex, and non-reflex., 1200,

T203.
if^T^oi alrA*, 1200. 2 b, 1203 b and H.
fi)L|ui, etc., 10 D, 106 D, 1S4 B, 326 D

1,8.
ifi%. In Horn., SSO o I.
4|Mv, {|u*, «|ia«, 825 f, 326 d 4.
•«inNt, pros, lik, 619 D.
-vi>9j-, tenae-snil., 523 e.
•«Mt (Aeol. -vrna), Tbs. in, 618 c, 610,

666.6.
W C4t4), 76 D.
iywaJL, iwft-, 1696.
^■BUpiot, pred. lue, 1042 a.
WoKotw, w, gen., 1406.
(karot, 320 a.
frntp, 1697.
«««(. 1649 a.
i^ opds. of, w. gen., 1364, 1408;

cpda. of, w. ace., 1364; lue, 1676,

1077, 1607.
frnppoCMt, tKTjiatt, V. aco., 1403.
»npp4XXa, lurpoM, w. aco., 1403.
VWpMpot, WJpTOToi, 820.
6n«f«i«i, w. gen. or daL, 14S5.
frv^iMOt, V- gen. or dat., 1421.

GREEK INDEX

Wwx«4o|M»i, w. inf., 1868 a; w. fi4,

2726.
Wi. use, 1461-1494, ISll, 1076, 1678,

1678, 167D, ISie, 1765 ; opda. of, w.

daL, 1514-1660; cpda. of, w. aoc.,

1646.
^■•Xa|iP&*>, w. inf., 2560; w. in,

2580.
W«|Uhi, w. pHl. or inf., 2127.
4w«wrtia, n. obj. clause, 2224 a.
-Cpa (Aeol. -u/ipu), vbs. in, 619.
it, gender of, 255. 2 c.
-9t, puts, in, decl., :i08.
-vf, gen. of QouDS in, accent, 163 a.
-it, numeral words in, S64 e.
Cirnpov f[. 2459.

CimpOf, vo-rarot, 3S0 ; frrrdrioi, 320 i>.
i^tm, 489 h.
i^^iai, followed by Mdundant /ii),

2741.
««, 600. 1 D, 984 a ; fut. mid. u paaa.,

4, proDune., 26; bef. deatAl stop, 82
bof . li, 85 ; bet. r, 88 ; changed to i
In rednp., 125 a ; foe 0, dial., 182 a
aoiBzefl w., 662.

4«(*^ form j^i^iir, 125 g h. ; re^rBai,
125 g V. ; re^irBw, 713; tenses with
Inserted r, 489 h ; aors. pass.
696 ; a mid. pass., 814, 817 ; tr. and
iatr., 810 ; personal constr. w., 19"~
w. part., 2106; palfv/mf w, part.
Inf., 1065, 2106, 2143; fir omitted
v., 2119.

^&Xa^, decL., 256.

^artfit Im, w. ^i or part., ^ttpir
iari-w. «ri, 1962 n., 2107.

^&ot, decl., 268 d.

4&ra>, 787 ; b6 tpiaxa, 2692 a.

^(Soiiw, 602 a; Tc^tiVtroi, 680 d.

4V«, aoiB., 448, 644 d ; ^^e, 684 ; fat.
mid. as pais., 600 ; ^pc, of more than
one poisoD, 1010; w. hort. subjv.,
nOTa, b, w. Imper., 1886; p4pvr.

hattily, 2062 a ; ^ipat, vith, 2068 a -
fMpw xo^nriSi, ^fffwi, w. part , 21U0.
^ym, fut. mid. as act., 606 ; be pnnt-
cufed, equivalent to a pass., 1878,
17S2 ; fiee from, w. ace., 1697 ; ^ttyu
ifnrr {fpa^-^r), 16Tii ; pree. for pert.,
1867 ; w. redimdaut ;»(, 2740.

^|il, form ^dSi, 125 g n. ; esclitk
forms, 161 c, 424 a, 784; ^i, 4e3b;
^^Bn, 463 b (2) n ; inOec. of, 788-
766; mean, ot tenses, 767-786; nt
•fiiuu, T87, 2691, 2692 a; 1^ betw.
Toc. and attrib., 1285; w. inf. (5ti,
ill), 2017 a ; ^ul fi4, 2723.
Mra, 374 N., 486 b, 469 t ; sec aor..
662 a, 682 D, 687 ; fat. mid. as act.,
806; w. ace., 1697 ; part, w., 1873.
2096 ; in part. w. finite vb., 3062 a,
2006[; as forenunerotrpir, 2440a;
b6k f^eqr ... ml, 2876.
hlpa, tr. and intr., 810.

^(*>, 488 a, 688; Hom. ^n, 768 o.

-^ -fi*, 1.34 o ; cases in, 260.

^nXlo, form ^(Xi|^, ^fXcio-i, 463 d ; #IX^.
Aeolic tmper., 466 a n; ^xit^Hni.
667 ; tnu mid. as pass., 608.

^Olm, comparison ot, 316, 319.

^iX«Tl|iio|iak, a pass, deponent, 812.

^b, 325 u 4.

^T^a, 500. 1 a.

^^, decl., 258.

^ suffli, 882. 3.

^P<H, form -wt^^ff^Bt, 713 ; aor. pan.
as Olid., 616; ^c^imi w. ace., 1595
a ; ^^Vi^i and ^|3it«4irofuu, 1911 ;
4,o^Bnai, w. redund. m4, 2741.
Divlf, quantity of t, 264 b

., 463 c

Hof

int.,

657.
f pdyniiii, 695, 733.
^pdja, form Tc^tpaWwi, 400 b D, 489

I) ; iri^ppkSt, 540 D ; command, w.

inf., 1902 c, 1097, 2017 ; aop, w.

3t< or ^, 2017.
^pa<r(, 2S0 D.
^TTM, 514 a.
4piap, decl., 263 b, 268 0.
^v, gender of, 266. 1 c

.oogic

3,q,z.-3bvGoogle